Skip to main content

Full text of "Manetho, with an English translation by W.G. Waddell"

See other formats


ROBARTS 














‘ > arte ὮΝ 
" tite ee ἔῃ 





Digitized by the Internet Archive 
in 2008 with funding from 
Andrew W. Mellon Foundation 


https://archive.org/details/manethowithengli0Omaneuoft 








; ς 
; = Ὶ 
\ Ό 


THE LOEB CLASSICAL LIBRARY 


FOUNDED BY JAMES LOEB, LL.D, 


EDITED BY 
+T. E. PAGE, c.H., Lrrr.D. 
FE. CAPPS, PH.D., LL.D. ΤΥ. H. Ὁ. ROUSE, tirv.p. 
ἘΣ A. POST, τη. E. H. WARMINGTON, 
M.A., F.R.HIST.SOC. 
MANETHC 


PTOLEMY, TETRABIBLOS 





MANETHO 
WITH AN ENGLISH TRANSLATION BY 
W. G. WADDELL 


PROFESSOR OF CLASSICS IN FUAD EI. AWAL UNIVERSITY, 
CalkO, EGYPT 













CAMBRIDGE, MASSACHUSETTS 


HARVARD UNIVERSITY PRESS 


LONDON 


WILLIAM HEINEMANN LTD. 


MCMLXIV 








First PRINTED . 1940 
REPRINTED . 1948, 1956, 1964 


FA 
4rhy 
Meh, 
/740 





Printed in Great Britain at The University Press, Aberdeen 


CONTENTS 


PAGE 
INTRODUCTION . - Ξ Β Ξ - . val 
The Life of Manetho: Traditions and Con- 
jectures . Ξ : 5 - 5 ΕΙΣ 
Manetho’s Works . Ξ ᾿ Ξ : EXE; 
The History of Egypt . : - . SVs 
Possible Sources of the Alyumriaxa ὅ see 
Other Works attributed to Manetho . . XXvi 
The Book of Séthis : ᾿ 5 . . XXVii 
BIBLIOGRAPHY . : é : - = ΣΧ 
List oF ABBREVIATED TITLES . e - χχχὶ 
Epiror’s Note. 3 - - - - Xxxii 
Tue History oF E@ypPT . 5 - - 1-187 
THe SacrED Boor . ; : ᾿ ὃ . 188 
An EpiroME or PuHysicat DoctrrINEs 3 3196 
On FESTIVALS . 3 ᾿ 4 : Ἀ 108 
On ANCIENT RITUAL AND RELIGION . 5 . 198 
On THE MAKING oF KyYPHI : - : «202 
(Criticisms oF HERODOTUS] - ξ . . 204 
APPENDIX I., PSEUDO-MANETHO . 4 . 208 
a II., ERATOSTHENES (?) . . ab 
» ". ΠῚ, THe Oxtp CHRONICLE . = . 226 
»  1V., THe Boox or S6ruis . - . 234 
Map or Eeyert . ' 5 ᾿ - : ~ 1250 
IntustTRATIONS: Puates I-IV . - . facing 250 


INDEX 5 . ; . Fs 2 A 201 
Vv 


Hermes Trismegistus speaks : 

O Aegypte, Aegypte, religionum tuarum solae 
supererunt fabulae, eaeque incredibiles posteris tuis ; 
solaque supererunt verba lapidibus incisa, tua pia 
facta narrantibus. [Ὁ Egypt, Egypt, of thy re- 
ligious rites nought will survive but idle tales which 
thy children’s children will not believe ; nought will 
survive but words graven upon stones that tell of 
thy piety.”’] 

The Latin Asclepius III. 25, in W. Scott, Her- 
metica, i. 1924, p. 342. 


* * * * * * * 


“Never has there arisen a more complicated 
problem than that of Manetho.”’ 


—Boecku, Manetho und die Hundssternperiode, 
1845, p. 10. 


INTRODUCTION 


Amonc the Egyptians who wrote in Greek, Manetho 
the priest holds a unique place because of his com- 
paratively early date (the third century B.c.) and 
the interest of his subject-matter—the history and 
religion of Ancient Egypt. His works in their 
original form would possess the highest importance 
and value for us now, if only we could recover them ; 
but until the fortunate discovery of a papyrus, 
which will transmit the authentic Manetho, we 
can know his writings only from fragmentary and 
often distorted quotations preserved chiefly by 
Josephus and by the Christian chronographers, 
Africanus and Eusebius, with isolated passages in 
Plutarch, Theophilus, Aelian, Porphyrius, Diogenes 
Laertius, Theodoretus, Lydus, Malalas, the Scholia to 
Plato, and the Etymologicum Magnum. 

Like Béréssos, who is of slightly earlier date, 
Manetho testifies to the growth of an international 


1F, Bilabel (in P. Baden 4. 1924, No. 59: see also 
Die Kleine Historiker, Fragm. 11) published a papyrus 
of the fifth century after Christ containing a list of Persian 
kings with the years of their reigns (see further Fr. 70, 
note 1), and holds it to be, not part of the original Epitome, 
but a version made from it before the time of Africanus. 
It certainly proves that Egyptians were interested in 
Greek versions of the Kings’ Lists, and much more so, 
presumably, in the unabridged Manetho. See Fr. 2 for 
Panodérus and Annianus, who were monks in Egypt 
about the date of this papyrus. Cf. also P. Hibeh, i. 27, 
the Calendar of Sais, translated into Greek in the reign 
of Ptolemy Sdter, 1.6. early in the lifetime of Manetho. 


Vil 


MANETHO 


spirit in the Alexandrine age: each of these 
‘“‘ barbarians ” wrote in Greek an account of his 
native country; and it stirs the imagination to 
think of their endeavour to bridge the gulf and 
instruct all Greek-speaking people (that is to say 
the whole civilized world of their time) in the history 
of Egypt and Chaldaea. But these two writers 
stand alone :! the Greeks indeed wrote from time to 
time of the wonders of Egypt (works no longer 
extant), but it was long before an Egyptian successor 
of Manetho appeared—Ptolemy of Mendés,* prob- 
ably under Augustus. 

The writings of Manetho, however, continued to 


1cf. ΝΥΝ. ΝΥ. Tarn on Ptolemy II. in the Journal of 
Egyptian Archaeology, 1928, xiv. p. 254: (Activity at 
Alexandria had no effect at all on Egyptians) ‘‘ Ptolemy 
Séter had thought for a moment that Egyptians might 
participate in the intellectual activities of Alexandria: 
. . . but, though Manetho dedicated his work to Ptolemy 
II., in this reign all interest in native Egypt was dropped, 
and a little later Alexandria appears as merely an object 
of hatred to many Egyptians. (Its destruction is pro- 
phesied in the Potter’s Oracle.)’’ (See p. 123 n. 1.) 

The complete isolation of Manetho and Béréssos is the 
chief argument of Ernest Havet against the authenticity 
of these writers (Mémoire sur les écrits qui portent les 
noms de Bérose et de Manéthon, Paris, 1873). He regards 
the double tradition as curious and extraordinary— 
there is no other name to set beside these two Oriental 
priests; and he suspects the symmetry of the tradition 
—each wrote three books for a king. Cf. Croiset, His- 
toire de la Lattérature Grecque, v. p. 99; Abridged History 
of Greek Literature, English translation, p. 429 (Manetho’s 
works were probably written by a Hellenized Oriental 
at the end of the second century B.c.); and F. A. Wright, 
Later Greek Literature, p. 60. 

5. See p. x. 


Vili 


INTRODUCTION 


be read with interest ; and his Egyptian History was 
used for special purposes, e.g. by the Jews when they 
engaged in polemic against Egyptians in order to 
prove their extreme antiquity. (See further pp. 
xvi ff.) Manetho’s religious writings are known to 
us mainly through references in Plutarch’s treatise 
On Isis and Osiris. 


The Life of Manetho: Traditions and Conjectures. 


Our knowledge of Manetho is for the most part 
meagre and uncertain; but three statements of 
great probability may be made. They concern his 
native place, his priesthood at Héliopolis, and his 
activity in the introduction of the cult of Serapis. 

The name Manetho (MaveOos, often written 
Mavé$wv) has been explained as meaning “ Truth 
of Théth ”, and a certain priest under Dynasty XIX. 
is described as “ First Priest of the Truth of Thoth ”.1 
According to Dr. Cerny? ‘‘ Manetho” is from the 
Coptic UANGeTO “ groom” (UANE “ herdsman”, 
and ero “ horse’); but the word does not seem to 
occur elsewhere as a proper name. In regard to the 
date of Manetho, Syncellus in one passage * gives us 
the information that he lived later than Béréssos : 
elsewhere * he puts Manetho as “ almost contempor- 
ary with Béréssos, or a little later”. Bérdssos, who 

1W. Spiegelberg, Orient. Literaturz. xxxi. 1928, col. 
145 ff., xxxil. 1929, col. 321 f. Older explanations of the 
name Manetho were ‘Gift of Théth,’’ ‘‘ Beloved of 
Théth,” and “ Beloved of Neith”’. 

*Tn the centenary volume of the Vatican Museum: I owe 


this reference to the kindness of Dr. Alan H. Gardiner. 
8 Manetho, Fr. 3. 4 Syncellus, p. 26. 


MANETHO 


was priest of Marduk at Babylon, lived under, and 
wrote for, Antiochus I. whose reign lasted from 285 
to 261 B.c.; and Béréssos dedicated his Xaddaixa 
to this king after he became sole monarch in 281 B.c. 
The works of Manetho and Béréssos may be in- 
terpreted as an expression of the rivalry of the two 
kings, Ptolemy and Antiochus, each seeking to pro- 
claim the great antiquity of his land. 

Under the name of Manetho, Suidas seems to 
distinguish two writers: (1) Manetho of Mendés in 
Egypt, a chief priest who wrote on the making of 
kyphi (i.e. Fr. 87): (2) Manetho of Diospolis or 
Sebennytus. (Works): A Treatise on Physical 
Doctrines (i.e. Fr. 82, 83). Apotelesmatica (or 
Astrological Influences), in hexameter verses, and 
other astrological works. (See p. xiv, note 3.) No- 
where else is Manetho connected with Mendés; but 
as Mendés was distant only about 17 miles from 
Sebennytus across the Damietta arm of the Nile, 
the attribution is not impossible. Miiller suspects 
confusion with Ptolemy of Mendés, an Egyptian 
priest (probably in the time of Augustus), who, like 
Manetho, wrote a work on Egyptian Chronology in 
three books. In the second note of Suidas Diospolis 
may be identified, not with Diospolis Magna (the 
famous Thebes) nor with Diospolis Parva, but with 
Diospolis Inferior, in the Delta (now Tell el-Balamin), 
the capital of the Diospolite or 17th nome! to the 
north of the Sebennyte nome and contiguous with 


1The Greek word νομός means a division of Egypt, called 
in Ancient Egyptian sp.t,—a district corresponding roughly 
to a county in England. Pliny (Hist. Nat. 5, 9) refers to 
nomes as praefecturae oppidorum. 


x 


INTRODUCTION 


it. Diospolis Inferior lay near Damietta, some 30 
miles from Sebennytus. (See Strabo, 17. 1, 19, 
and Baedeker, Egypt and the Siidan, 8th ed. (1929), 
p. 185.) We may therefore accept the usual descrip- 
tion of Manetho (Fr. 3, 77, 80: Syncellus, 72, 16), 
and hold that he was a native of Sebennytus (now 
Samannid)! in the Delta, on the west bank of the 
Damietta branch of the Nile. Manetho was a priest, 
and doubtless held office at one time in the temple 
at Sebennytus; but in the letter (App. I.) which he 
is said to have written to Ptolemy II. Philadelphus, 
he describes himself as “ high-priest and scribe of 
the sacred shrines of Egypt, born at Sebennytus and 
dwelling at Héliopolis”. Although the letter, as 
we have it, is not genuine in all its details, this 
description may have been borrowed from a good 
source; and while his precise rank asa priest remains 
in doubt, it is reasonable to believe that Manetho 
rose to be high-priest in the temple at Héliopolis.? 
This eminent position agrees with the important 
part he played in the introduction of the cult of 
Serapis. As a Heliopolitan priest, Manetho (to 
quote from Laqueur, Pauly-Wissowa-Kroll, R.-E. 
xiv. 1, 1061) “ was, without doubt, acquainted with 

1See Baedeker ὃ, p. 185. Sebennytus was the seat 
of Dynasty XXX., and therefore a place of great impor- 
tance shortly before the time of Manetho. In Ancient 
Egyptian, Sebennytus is Tjeb-niter, “‘ city of the sacred 
ealf’’?: it is tempting to connect with Sebennytus the 
worship of the Golden Calf in 0.7’. Exodus xxxii., 1 Kings 
xii. 28 ff. (P. E. Newberry). 

2 See Strabo, 17. 1, 29 for the “large houses in which 
the priests had lived’’. According to Herodotus (ii. 3, 1), 
“the Heliopolitans are said to be the most learned of the 
Egyptians’’. 

xi 


MANETHO 


the sacred tree in the great Hall of Héliopolis,—the 
tree on which the goddess Seshat, the Lady of Letters, 
the Mistress of the Library, wrote down with her 
own hand the names and deeds of the rulers.1 He 
did nothing more than communicate to the Greek 
world what the goddess had noted down.” But he 
did so with a full sense of the superiority which 
relied on the sacred records of the Egyptians in 
opposition to Herodotus whom he was contradict- 
ing” (Fr. 43, § 73: Fr. 88). His native town, 
Sebennytus, was visited as a place of learning by 
Solon when Ethémén was a priest in residence 
there (see Proclus in Plat. Tim. i. 101, 22, Diehl) ; 
and the Greek culture of the place must have been 
a formative influence upon Manetho at an early age. 

In the introduction of the statue of Serapis to 
Alexandria as described by Plutarch (Manetho, 
Fr. 80), Manetho the Egyptian was associated with 
the Greek Timotheus as a priestly adviser of King 
Ptolemy Séter. It is natural to suppose that the 
cult of Serapis itself, which was a conflation of 


1See Erman-Ranke, Agypten, 1923, pp. 396 f.; or 
Erman, Die Religion der Agypter, 1934, pp. 56 f.; or 
the original drawing in Lepsius, Denkmdler, iii. 169. This 
illustration shows the goddess, along with Thdéth and 
Atam, making inscriptions upon the leaves (or fruit) of 
the venerable tree. 

2 Τὸ may be added that the Egyptians are surpassed by 
no nation in their strong and ever-present desire to leave 
upon stone or papyrus permanent records of their history, 
their motive being to glorify the ruling king. Cf. 
Herodotus, ii. 77, 1 (of the Egyptians who live in the culti- 
vated country), ‘‘ the most diligent of all men in preserving 
the memory of the past, and far better skilled in chronicles 
than any others whom I have questioned’”’. 


xu 


INTRODUCTION 


Egyptian and Greek ideas intended to be acceptable 
to both nationalities, had already been organized ! 
with the help of the two priests, and the magnificent 
temple in Rhakétis, the Egyptian quarter in the 
west of Alexandria, had doubtless been built. The 
date is not certain: according to Jerome (Fothering- 
ham, p. 211, Helm, p. 129) “ Sarapis entered Alex- 
andria ’’ in 286 B.c., while the Armenian Version of 
the Chronicle of Eusebius says that in 278 B.c. 
“ἢ Sarapis came to Alexandria, and became resident 
there *” (Karst, 200). Perhaps the two statements 
refer to different stages in the development of the 
cult: if the former describes the entry of the statue 
by Bryaxis, the latter may possibly refer to the 
final establishment of the whole theology. As a 
proof that the work of Manetho in building up 
the cult of Serapis must not be belittled, it may 
suffice to refer to the inscription of the name Mavé@wy 
on the base of a marble bust found in the ruins of 
the Temple of Serapis at Carthage (Corpus Inscr. 
Lat. viii. 1007). The name is so uncommon that the 
probability is that the bust which originally stood 
on this base represented the Egyptian Manetho, and 
was erected in his honour because of his effective 
contribution to the organization of the cult of 


1 The earliest date for Serapis is given by Macrobius, Sat. 
i. 20, 16, a questioning of Serapis by Nicocreon of Cyprus, 
c. 311-310 B.c. For Dittenberger, O.G.I.S. 16 (an inscrip- 
tion from Halicarnassus on the founding of a temple to 
Serapis-Isis under (the satrap) Ptolemy Sdéter), the date 
is uncertain, probably c. 308-306 sB.c. Already in 
Menander’s drama, ᾿Εγχειρίδιον (before 291 B.c. when 
τ" died), Serapis is a “‘ holy god” (Ρ. Oxy. XV. 
1803). 


xiii 


MANETHO 


Serapis.!. Hence it is not impossible also that the 
following reference in a papyrus of 24] B.c. may be 
to Manetho of Sebennytus. It occurs in a document 
containing correspondence about a Temple Seal 
(P. Hibeh, i. 72, vv. 6, 7, γράφειν Μανεθῶ). The 
person named was evidently a well-known man in 
priestly circles: he was probably our Manetho, the 
writer on Egyptian history and religion, if he lived 
to a considerable age.” 


Manetho’s Works. 


Eight works * have been attributed to Manetho: 
(1) Αὐἰγυπτιακά, or The History of Egypt, (2) The Book 
of Sothis, (3) The Sacred Book, (4) An Epitome of 
Physical Doctrines, (5) On Festivals, (6) On Ancient 
Ritual and Religion, (7) On the Making of Kyphi 
[a kind of incense], (8) Criticisms of Herodotus. 


Of these, (2) The Book of Séthis (App. IV. and 


1Cf. Lafaye, Histoire du Culte des Divinités d’ Alexandrie 
(1884), p. 16 n. 1: ‘“‘ At all events, there is no doubt 
that the adepts of the Alexandrine cult had great venera- 
tion for Manetho, and considered him in some measure 
as their patriarch ”’. 

2 Bouché-Leclereq (Histoire des Lagides, iv. p. 269 n. 4) 
holds a different opinion: “‘ the reference is not necessarily 
to the celebrated Manetho, whose very existence is prob- 
lematical ”’. 

8 A work wrongly attributed in antiquity (e.g. by Suidas, 
see p. x) to Manetho of Sebennytus is “AzoreAcopatixd, in 
6 books, an astrological poem in hexameters on the 
influence of the stars. See W. Kroll (1}.- Εἰ. s.v. Manethon 
(2)), who with Kochly recognizes in the 6 books 4 sections 
of different dates from about A.D. 120 to the fourth century 
after Christ. Books I. and V. open with dedications to 
King Ptolemy: cf. Pseudo-Manetho, Appendix I. 


X1V 


INTRODUCTION 


pp. xxvii. ff.) is certainly not by Manetho; and there 
is no reason to believe that (8) Criticisms of Herodotus 
formed a separate work, although we know from 
Josephus, C. Apion. i. 73 (Fr. 42), that Manetho did 
convict Herodotus of error. Six titles remain, but 
it has long been thought that some of these are 
“ ghost ’’ titles. Fruin (Manetho, p. lxxvii) supposed 
that Manetho wrote only two works—one on Egyp- 
tian history, the other on Egyptian mythology and 
antiquities. Susemihl (Alex. Lit.-Gesch. i. 609, 
n. 431) and W. Otto (Priester und Tempel in 
Hellenistischen Agypten, ii. 215, n. 4) modified this 
extreme view : they recognized three distinct works 
of Manetho (The History of Egypt, The Sacred Book, 
and An Epitome of Physical Doctrines), and assumed 
that the titles On Festivals, On Ancient Ritual and 
Religion, and On the Making of Kyphi referred to 
passages in The Sacred Book. In the paucity of our 
data, no definite judgement seems possible as to 
whether Manetho wrote six works or only three ; 
but in support of the former theory we may refer to 


Eusebius (Man. Fr. 76). 


The History of Egypt. 


The Egyptian History ' of Manetho is preserved in 
extracts of two kinds. (1) Excerpts from the 
original work are preserved by Josephus, along 
with other passages which can only be pseudo- 


ΤῸ: Notes about Egypt. There are two variants of the 
Greek title : Alyumriaxa (Josephus in Fr. 42), and Αἰγυπτιακὰ 
ὑπομνήματα (Aegyptiaca monumenta, Eus. in Fr. 1), with 
a possible third form Αἰγυπτίων ὑπομνήματα (Aegyptiorum 
monumenta, Eus., p. 359). 

XV 


MANETHO 


Manethonian. The Jews of the three centuries 
following the time of Manetho were naturally 
keenly interested in his History because of the 
connexion of their ancestors with Egypt—Abraham, 
Joseph, and Moses the leader of the Exodus; and 
they sought to base their theories of the origin and 
antiquity of the Jews securely upon the authentic 
traditions of Egypt. In Manetho indeed they found 
an unwelcome statement of the descent of the Jews 
from lepers; but they were able to identify their 
ancestors with the Hyksés, and the Exodus with 
the expulsion of these invaders. The efforts of 
Jewish apologists account for much re-handling, 
enlargement, and corruption of Manetho’s text, and 
the result may be seen in the treatise of Josephus, 
Contra Apionem, i. 

(2) An Epitome of Manetho’s history had been 
made at an early date,—not by Manetho himself, 
there is reason to believe,—in the form of Lists of 
Dynasties with short notes on outstanding kings or 
important events. The remains of this Epitome are 
preserved by Christian chronographers, especially by 
Africanus and Eusebius. Their aim was to compare 
the chronologies of the Oriental nations with the 
Bible, and for this purpose the Epitome gave an 
ideal conspectus of the whole History, omitting, as 
it does, narratives such as the account of the Hyksés 
preserved by Josephus. Of the two chronographers, 
the founder of Christian chronography, Sextus 
Julius Africanus, whose Chronicle! came down to 


1 For a later miscellaneous work, the Κεστοί, see P. Oxy. 
iii. 412 (between A.D. 225 and 265); and Jules Africain, 
Fragments des Cestes, ed. J.-R. Vieillefond, Paris, 1932. 


Xvi 


INTRODUCTION 


A.D. 217 or A.D. 221, transmits the Epitome in a 
more accurate form; while Eusebius, whose work 
extends to A.D. 326, is responsible for unwarranted 
alterations of the original text of Manetho. About 
A.D. 800 George the Monk, who is known as Syncellus 
from his religious office (as “* attendant ” of Tarasius, 
Patriarch of Constantinople), made use of Manetho’s 
work in various forms in his ’HxAoy7) Xpovoypadias, 
a history of the world from Adam to Diocletian. 
Syncellus sought to prove that the incarnation took 
place in Anno Mundi 5500; and in his survey of the 
thirty-one Egyptian dynasties which reigned from 
the Flood to Darius, he relied on the authoritative 
work of Manetho as transmitted by Africanus and 
Eusebius, and as handed down in a corrupt form in 
the Old Chronicle (App. III.) and the Book of Sothis 
(App. IV.) which had been used by the chronographer 
Panodérus (c. A.D. 400). 

Even from the above brief statement of the trans- 
mission of Manetho’s text, it will be seen that many 
problems are involved, and that it is extremely 
difficult to reach certainty in regard to what is 
authentic Manetho and what is spurious or corrupt. 
The problems are discussed in detail by Richard 
Laqueur in his valuable and exhaustive article in 
Pauly-Wissowa-Kroll, R.-E. s.v. Manethon ; and it 
may be sufficient here to quote his summary of the 
results of his researches in regard to Manetho (1) in 
Josephus, and (2) in the Christian Chronographers. 

(1) Manetho in Josephus, Contra Apionem, i. (see 
Fr. 42, 50, 54.) 


““ (a) Extracts from the genuine Manetho appear 
in §§ 75-82, 84-90, 94-102a, 232-249, 251. Of these 


XVii 


MANETHO 
passages, §§ 75-82, 94-102a, 237-249 are quoted 


verbatim, the others are given in Indirect Speech. 

“ (δὴ) A rationalistic critique of the genuine 
Manetho was written by a Hellenist, and was used 
by Josephus for his work. The remains of this 
critique appear in §§ 254-261, 267-269, 271-274, 276- 
277. Perhaps §§ 1025-103 is connected with these. 

“ (ὁ) The authoritative work of Manetho was 
further exploited by Jews and Egyptians in their 
mutual polemic, in the course of which additions to 
Manetho’s works were made: these additions were 
partly favourable to the Jews (§§ 83, 91), partly 
hostile to the Jews (§ 250). These passages, like 
those mentioned in (0), were collected before the 
time of Josephus into a single treatise, so that one 
could no longer clearly recognize what had belonged 
to Manetho and what was based upon additions. 

“ (4) Josephus originally knew only the genuine 
Manetho (cf. (a)), and used him throughout as a 
witness against the aggressors of Judaism. In this 
it was of importance for Josephus to show that the 
Hyks6és had come to Egypt from abroad, that their 
expulsion took place long before the beginning of 
Greek history, and that they, in their expedition to 
aid the Lepers, remained untainted by them. 

“ (6) After Josephus had completed this elabora- 
tion, he came later to know the material mentioned 
in (0) and (c): so far as it was favourable to the 
Jews or helpful in interpretation, it led only to short 
expansions of the older presentation; so far, how- 
ever, as it was hostile to the Jews, Josephus found 
himself induced to make a radical change in his 
attitude towards Manetho. He attacked Manetho 


XVili 


INTRODUCTION 


sharply for his alleged statement (§ 250), and at the 

same time used the polemic mentioned in (b) in 

order to overthrow Manetho’s authority in general. 
“(f) From the facts adduced it follows that 

Manetho’s work was already before the time of 

Josephus the object of numerous literary analyses.” ἢ 
Cf. the following summary. 


(2) Manetho in the Christian Chronographers. 


“ (α) Not long after the appearance of Manetho’s 
work, an Epitome was made, giving excerpts from 
the Dynasty-Lists and increasing these from 30 to 
31. The possibility that other additions were made 
is not excluded. 

“ (0) The Epitome was remodelled by a Hellenistic 
Jew in such a way that the Jewish chronology 
became compatible with that of Manetho. 

“ (ὁ) A descendant of version (a) is extant in 
Julius Africanus: a descendant of version (b), in 
Eusebius.” 

The Chronicle of Africanus in five books is lost 
except for what is preserved in the extracts made 
by Eusebius, and the many fragments contained in 
the works of Syncellus and Cedrenus, and in the 
Paschale Chronicon. For Eusebius we have several 
lines of transmission. The Greek text of Eusebius 
has come down to us in part, as quoted by Syn- 
cellus ; but the whole work is known through (1) the 
Armenian Version, which was composed in y./A.D.” 


1A further study of the transmission of Manetho in 
Josephus is made by A. Momigliano, ‘“‘ Intorno al Contro 
Apione,”’ in Rivista di Filologia, 59 (1931), pp. 485-503. 

2The Armenian MS. G (Codex Hierosolymitanus) 
printed by Aucher (1818) is dated by him between a.p. 


XLX 


MANETHO 


from a revision of the first Greek text,! and is, of 
course, quite independent of Syncellus ; and (2) the 
Latin Version made by Jerome towards the end of 
the fourth century. 


Possible Sources of the Αἰγυπτιακά. 


An Egyptian high priest, learned in Greek litera- 
ture, had an unrivalled opportunity, in early 
Ptolemaic times, of writing an excellent and accurate 
history of Egypt. He had open access to records of 
all kinds—papyri? in the temple archives (annals, 
sacred books containing liturgies and poems), hiero- 
glyphic tablets, wall sculptures, and innumerable 
inscriptions. These records no one but an Egyptian 
priest could consult and read; and only a scholar 
who had assimilated the works of Greek historians 
could make a judicious and scientific use of the 
abundant material. It is hardly to be expected, 


1065 and 1306. Karst quotes readings from this and two 
other Armenian MSS., but the variations are compara- 
tively unimportant. 

1See A. Puech, Hist. de la Litt. grecque chrétienne, iii. 

ἘΠῚ. 
᾿ 2 Herodotus (ii. 100: ef. 142) mentions a papyrus roll 
(βύβλος) containing a list of 331 kings. Diodorus (i. 44, 4) 
tells of ‘‘ records (avaypadai) handed down in the sacred 
books ”’ (ἐν ταῖς ἱεραῖς βίβλοις), giving each king’s stature, 
character, and deeds, as well as the length of his reign. 

3 Cf. the Annals of the Reign of Tuthmésis ITI. (Breasted, 
Ancient Records, ii. §§ 391-540): this important historical 
document of 223 lines is inscribed on the walls of a cor- 
ridor in the Temple of Amon at Karnak, and “ demon- 
strates the injustice of the criticism that the Egyptians 
were incapable of giving a clear and succinct account of 
a military campaign ”’. 


xx 


INTRODUCTION 


however, that Manetho’s History should possess more 
worth than that of his sources ; and the material at 
his disposal included a certain proportion of un- 
historical traditions and popular legends. 

There is no possibility of identifying the particular 
records from which Manetho compiled his History : 
the following are the kinds of monuments which he 
may have consulted and from which we derive a 
means of controlling his statements. 

(1) The Royal List of Abydos, on the wall of a 
corridor of the Temple of Sethés I. at Abydos, gives 
in chronological order a series of seventy-six kings 
from Ménés to Sethés I. Dynasties XIII. to XVII. 
are lacking. A mutilated duplicate of this list was 
found in the Temple of Ramessés II. at Abydos 
(now in the British Museum: see Guide, p. 245): 
it arranges the kings in three rows, while the more 
complete list has them in two rows. 

(2) The Royal List of Karnak (now in the Louvre) 
has a list of kings, originally sixty-one, from Ménés 
down to Tuthmdsis III., Dynasty XVIII., with 
many names belonging to the Second Intermediate 
Period (Dynasties XIII.-XVII.). 

The Royal Lists of Abydos and Karnak give the 
tradition of Upper Egypt. 

(3) The Royal List of Sakkara (found in a tomb at » 
Sakkara, and now in the Cairo Museum) preserves the 
cartouches of forty-seven (originally fifty-eight) kings 
previous to, and including, Ramessés II. It begins 
with Miebis, the sixth king of Dynasty I.; and like 


1The popular tales introduced kings as their heroes, 
without regard to chronological order: see G. Maspero, 
Bibliotheque Egyptologique, vol. vii. (1898), pp. 419 ff. 


xxi 


MANETHO 


the Royal List of Abydos, it omits Dynasties XIII.- 
XVII. Like (4) the Turin Papyrus, the Royal List of 
Sakkdra gives the tradition of Lower Egypt. 

(4) More important than any of the preceding is 
the Turin Papyrus, written in hieratic on the verso 
of the papyrus, with accounts of the time of 
Ramessés II. on the recto (which gives the approximate 
date, c. 1200 B.c.). In its original state the papyrus 
must have been an artistically beautiful exemplar, 
as the script is an exceptionally fine one. It contains 
the names of kings in order, over 300 when complete, 
with the length of each reign in years, months, and 
days; and as the definitive edition of the papyrus 
has not yet been issued, further study is expected to 
yield additional results.' The papyrus begins, like 
Manetho, with the dynasties of gods, followed by 
mortal kings also in dynasties. The change of 
dynasty is noted, and the sum of the reigns is given : 
also, as in Manetho, several dynasties are added 
together, e.g. “Sum of the Kings from Ménés to 
[Unas]”” at the end of Dynasty V. The arrange- 
ment in the papyrus is very similar to that in the 
Epitome of Manetho. 

(5) The Palermo Stone? takes us back to a much 
greater antiquity: it dates from the Fifth Dynasty, 
c. 2600 B.c., and therefore contains Old Egyptian 
annals of the kings. The Stone or Stele was origin- 


1See Sir J. G. Wilkinson, Fragments of the Hieratic 
Papyrus at Turin, London, 1851: E. Meyer, Aeg. Chron. 
pp. 105 ff., and Die Altere Chronologie Babyloniens, As- 
syriens, und Agyptens, revised by Stier (1931), pp. 55 ff. 

2 Plate II. See H. Schafer, Abhandl. Akad. Berl. 1902: 
Breasted, Ancient Records, i. §§ 76-167: Sethe, Urkunden 
des Alten Reichs, pp. 235-249; and cf. Petrie, The Making 
of Egypt, 1939, pp. 98 f. 


xxii 


INTRODUCTION 


ally a large slab! of black diorite, about 7 feet long 
and over 2 feet high; but only a fragment of the 
middle of the slab is preserved in the Museum of 
Palermo, while smaller pieces of this, or of a similar 
monument, have been identified in the Cairo Museum 
and in University College, London. Although the 
text is unfortunately fragmentary, this early docu- 
ment is clearly seen to be more closely related to 
the genuine Manetho than are the Kings’ Lists of 
later date (1, 2, 3, 4 above). In a space marked off 
on each side by a year-sign and therefore denoting 
one year, notable events are given in an upper 
section of the space and records of the Nile-levels in 
a lower. A change of reign is denoted by a vertical 
line prolonging the year-sign above, on each side of 
which a certain number of months and days is 
recorded—on one side those belonging to the de- 
ceased king, and on the other to his successor. In 
the earliest Dynasties the years were not numbered, 
but were named after some important event or 
events, e.g. ““the year of the smiting of the "Inw,” 
“the year of the sixth time of numbering”. 
Religious and military events were particularly 
common, just as they are in Manetho. A year-name 
of King Snefru (Dynasty IV.) states that he 
conquered the Nehesi, and captured 7000 prisoners 
and 200,000 head of cattle: cf. Manetho, Fr. 7, on 
the foreign expedition of Ménés. So, too, under 


More plausibly, according to Petrie (The Making of 
Egypt, 1939, p. 98), the text of the annals was divided 
among six slabs each 16 inches wide, both sides being 
equally visible. 

* Borchardt, in Die Annalen (1917), quoted in Ancient 
Egypt, 1920, p. 124, says, “‘Manetho had really good 
sources, and his copyists have not altogether spoiled him ’’. 


xxi 


MANETHO 


Shepseskaf, the last king of Dynasty IV., the 
building of a pyramid is recorded, and under 
Dynasties I., 1V., and VI. Manetho makes mention 
of pyramid-building. It is especially noteworthy 
that the first line of the Palermo Stone gives a list 
of kings before Ménés: cf. the Turin Papyrus, as 
quoted on Fr. 1. (For the Cairo fragments see 
Sethe, op. cit.) 


* * * * * * * 


In regard to Manetho’s relation to his Greek 
predecessors in the field of Egyptian history, we 
know that he criticized Herodotus, not, as far as 
we can tell, in a separate work, but merely in 
passages of his History. In none of the extant 
fragments does Manetho mention by name Hecataeus 
of Abdera, but it is interesting to speculate upon 
Manetho’s relation to this Greek historian. The 
floruit of Hecataeus fell in the time of Alexander and 
Ptolemy son of Lagus (Gutschmid gives 320 B.c. as 
an approximate estimate) ; and it is very doubtful 
whether he lived to see the reign of Philadelphus, 
who came to the throne in 285 B.c. (Jacoby in 
R.-E. vii. 2, 2750). His Aegyptiaca was “a philo- 
sophical romance,” describing “ an ethnographical 
Utopia”: it was no history of Egypt, but a work 
with a philosophical tendency. Manetho and 
Hecataeus are quoted together, e.g. by Plutarch, 
Isis and Osiris, chap. 9, perhaps from an inter- 
mediary writer who used the works of both Manetho 
and Hecataeus. If we assume that Hecataeus wrote 
his “‘ romance” before Manetho composed his 
History, perhaps one of the purposes of Manetho 
was to correct the errors of his predecessor. No 


XXIV 


INTRODUCTION 


criticism of Hecataeus, however, has been attributed 
to Manetho; and it is natural that similarities are 
found in their accounts (cf. p. 131, n. 2). Be that 
as it may, Hecataeus enjoyed greater popularity 
among the Greeks than Manetho: they preferred 
his “‘ romance ” to Manetho’s more reliable annals. 
Yet Manetho’s Aegyptiaca has no claim to be 
regarded as a critical history: its value lies in the 
dynastic skeletons which serve as a framework for 
the evidence of the monuments, and it has provided 
in its essentials the accepted scheme of Egyptian 
chronology. But there were many errors in 
Manetho’s work from the very beginning: all are 
not due to the perversions of scribes and revisers. 
Many of the lengths of reigns have been found 
impossible: in some cases the names and the 
sequence of kings as given by Manetho have proved 
untenable in the light of monumental evidence. 
If one may depend upon the extracts preserved in 
Josephus, Manetho’s work was not an authentic 
history of Egypt, exact in its details, as the Chaldaica 
of Béréssos was, at least for later times. Manetho 
introduced into an already corrupted series of 
dynastic lists a number of popular traditions written 


1Cf. H. R. Hall, Cambridge Ancient History, i. p. 260: 
“So far as we are able to check Manetho from the con- 
temporary monuments, his division into dynasties is 
entirely justified. His authorities evidently were good. 
But unhappily his work has come down to us only in copies 
of copies; and, although the framework of the dynasties 
remains, most of his royal names, originally Graecized, 
have been so mutilated by non-Egyptian scribes, who 
did not understand their form, as often to be unrecog- 
nizable, and the regnal years given by him have been so 
corrupted as to be of little value unless confirmed by the 
Turin Papyrus or the monuments.” 


Χχν 


MANETHO 


in the characteristic Egyptian style. No genuine 
historical sense had been developed among the 
Egyptians, although Manetho’s work does illustrate 
the influence of Greek culture upon an Egyptian 
priest. He wrote to correct the errors of Greek 
historians, especially of Herodotus (see Fr. 88); but 
from the paucity of information about certain 
periods, it seems clear that in ancient times, as for 
us at the present day, there were obscure eras 
in Egyptian history.'. Before the Saite Dynasty 
(XXVI.) there were three outstanding periods—in 
Dynasties IV.-VI., XI.-XII., and XVIII.-XX., or 
roughly the Old Kingdom, the Middle Kingdom, and 
the New Kingdom (sometimes called the Empire) ; 
and these are the periods upon which the light falls 
in all histories. 

The significance of Manetho’s writings is that for 
the first time an Egyptian was seeking to instruct 
foreigners in the history and religion of his native 
land. 


Other Works attributed to Manetho. 


To judge by the frequency of quotation, the re- 
ligious treatises of Manetho were much more popular 
in Greek circles than the History of Egypt was; yet 
the fragments surviving from these works (Fr. 76-88) 
are so meagre that no distinct impression of their 


nature can be gained. The Sacred Book (Fr. 76-81) 


1Cf. H. R. Hall, Ancient History of the Near East ὃ, 
Ρ. 14: “In fact, Manetho did what he could: where 
the oative annals were good and complete, his abstract 
is good: where they were broken and incomplete, his 
record is incomplete also and confused... .”’ 


ΧΧΥῚ 


INTRODUCTION 


was doubtless a valuable exposition of the details 
of Egyptian religion, as well as of the mythological 
elements of Egyptian theology. It testifies to the 
importance of the part played by Manetho in support 
of Ptolemy Séter’s vigorous policy of religious 
syncretism. It seems probable that the Sacred Book 
was Manetho’s main contribution in aid of this 
policy: it may have been the result of a definite 
commission by the king, in order to spread a know- 
ledge of Egyptian religion among the Greeks. That 
an Egyptian priest should seek to instruct the 
Greek-speaking world of his time in the history of 
Egypt and in the religious beliefs of the Egyptians, 
including festivals, ancient rites and piety in general, 
and the preparation of kyphi, is not at all surprising ; 
but it seems strange that Manetho should feel called 
upon, in the third century B.C., to compose an 
Epitome of Physical Doctrines (Fr. 82, 83) with the 
apparent object of familiarizing the Greeks with 
Egyptian science. One may conjecture that his 
special purpose was to give instruction to students 
of his own. 


The Book of Séthis (Appendix IV.). 


The Book of Séthis! or The Sothic Cycle is trans- 
mitted through Syncellus alone. In the opinion of 
Syncellus, this Séthis-Book was dedicated by Manetho 


1Sé6this is the Greek form of Sopdet, the Egyptian 
name for the Dog-star, Sirius, the heliacal rising of which 
was noted at an early date: on the great importance of 
the Séthie period in Egyptian chronology, see Breasted, 
Ancient Records, i. §§ 40 ff., and H. R. Hall, Encyclopaedia 
Britannica“, s.v. Chronology. Cf. infra, Appendix IIT., 
p. 226, and Appendix IV., p. 234. 


XXVli 


MANETHO 


to Ptolemy Philadelphus (see App. I.). The king 
wished to learn the future of the universe, and 
Manetho accordingly sent to him “ sacred books ” 
based upon inscriptions which had been written 
down by Thoth, the first Hermés, in hieratic script, 
had been interpreted after the Flood by Agatho- 
daemon, son of the second Hermés and father of 
Tat, and had been deposited in the sanctuaries of the 
temples of Egypt. The letter which purports to have 
accompanied the “ sacred books ”’ is undoubtedly a 
forgery ; but the Sdthis-Book is significant for the 
textual transmission of Manetho. According to the 
LXX the Flood took place in Anno Mundi 2242 
(see Frags. 2,6: App. III., p. 232). This date must 
close the prehistoric period in Egypt and in Chaldea : 
the 11,985 years of the Egyptian gods are therefore 
regarded as months and reduced to 969 years. 
Similarly, the 858 years of the demigods are treated 
as quarter-years or periods of three months, thus 
becoming 214} years: total, 969 + 2144 = 11834 
years (Fr. 2). In Chaldean prehistory, by fixing 
the saros at 3600 days, 120 saroi become 1183 years 
63 months. Accordingly, the beginning of Egyptian 
and Babylonian history is placed at 2242 — 1184, or 
1058 Anno Mundi: in that year (or in 1000, Fr. 2) 
falls the coming of the Egregori, who finally by their 
sins brought on the Flood. The Book of Sothis 
begins with the reign of Mestraim, Anno Mundi 2776 
(App. IV., p. 234: App. III., p. 232), i.e. 534 years 
after the Flood, and continues to the year 4986, 
which gives 2210 years of Egyptian rule—almost the 
same number as Manetho has in either Book I. or 
Book II. of his History of Egypt. 


XXVi1 


BIBLIOGRAPHY 


Greek text of Manetho in 

1. C. Miller, Fragmenta Historicorum Graecorum, ii. 
(1848), pp. 512-616. 

2. Manethonis Sebennytae Reliquiae, R. Fruin, 1847. 
Greek text of the Hpitome in 

3. G. F. Unger, Chronologie des Manetho, Berlin, 1867. 


Greek text of Kings’ Lists summarized in parallel columns: 
4. R. Lepsius, Konigsbuch der alten Agypter, Berlin, 1858. 


Greek text of religious writings in 
5. Fontes Historiae Religionis Aegyptiacae, Th. Hopfner, 
1922-25. 


Accounts of Manetho and his work. 


1. Richard Laqueur in Pauly-Wissowa-Kroll, R.-E. 
xiv. 1 (1928), s.v. Manethon (1). 

2. F. Susemihl, Alex. Lit.-Geschichte, i., 1891, pp. 608-616. 

3. W. Otto, Priester und Tempel im hellenist. Aegypten 
(1908), ii. pp. 215 f., 228 f. 


Subsidiary Works. 
Josephus 
ed. Niese, Vol. v., 1889. 
ed. Thackeray (L.C.L., Vol. i., 1926). 
ed. Reinach and Blum (Budé, 1930). 
Arnaldo Momigliano, Rivista di Filologia, 59 (1931), pp. 
485-508. 
Syncellus or George the Monk, in Corpus Scriptorum 
Historicorum Byzantinorum, W. Dindorf, 1829. 
Heinrich Gelzer, Sextus Julius Africanus, 1880-89. 
Eusebius, Praeparatio Hvangelica, E. H. Gifford, 1903. 
Eusebii chronicorum lib. I., A. Schéne, 1875. 
Eusebius, Chronica (in Armenian Version) : 
(a) Latin translation by Zohrab-Mai, 1818 (in Miiller’s 
ΤΉ Ὁ. 11.) 


ΧΧΙΧ 


BIBLIOGRAPHY 


(6) Latin translation by Aucher, 1818 (partly quoted 
in R. Lepsius, Kdnigsbuch—see above). 

(c) Latin translation by H. Petermann, in Sch6éne (above). 

(4) German translation by Josef Karst in Eusebius, 
Werke V. Die Chronik, 1911. 

Ed. Meyer, Aegyptische Chronologie, 1904 (Nachtrage, 
1907: Neue Nachtrage, 1907). French translation by 
Alexandre Moret, 1912. 

Ed. Meyer, Geschichte des Altertums ὅ, I. ii., 11. i., ii. 

James H. Breasted, Ancient Records, 1906. 

T. E. Peet, H. R. Hall, J. H. Breasted, in the Cambridge 
Ancient History, Vols. i.-vi. 

A. von Gutschmid, Kleine Schriften, iv., 1893. 

For further works and articles relating to Manetho, see 

the article by Laqueur, Pauly-Wissowa-Kroll, R.-# 


MSS. 


SYNCELLUS 


A = 1711 of Paris (dated A.p. 1021), used by Scaliger 
and Goar, the first two editors. Editions: Paris, 
1652; Venice, 1729. 

B = 1764 of Paris—a much better MS. than A. 

G signifies readings of Goar. 
m signifies conjectures and notes in the margin of 
Goar’s edition. 


EvseEsius, Chronica (Armenian Version) 
G = Codex Hierosolymitanus (see Intro., p. xix n. 2). 
JOSEPHUS, Contra Apionem, i. 
L = Codex Laurentianus plut. Ixix. 22 of eleventh 
century. 
Hafniensis, No. 1570, at Copenhagen, fifteenth century. 
Bigotianus, known from readings transmitted by 
Emericus Bigotius. 
Quotations by Eusebius (A.D. 264-340), sometimes best 
preserved in the Armenian version. 
Lat. = Latin version made by order of Cassiodorus, 
the minister of Theodoriec, c. A.p. 540. 
Editio princeps of Greek text (Basel, 1544). 


xxx 


LIST OF ABBREVIATED TITLES USED IN 
REFERENCE 
Ann. Serv. Antiq. = Annales du Service des Antiquités de 
V Egypte, Le Caire, 1900- 


Baedeker ὃ = Egypt and the Siiddn, by Karl Baedeker 
(English translation, 8th edition, 1929). 


Karst = Joseph Karst’s German translation Die Chronik, 
in Husebius, Werke, v., 1911. 


P. Baden = F. Bilabel, Griechische Papyri (Veréffentlich- 
ungen aus den badischen Papyrus-Sammlungen), 
Heidelberg, 1923-24. 


P. Hibeh = Grenfell and Hunt, The Hibeh Papyri, 1., 
1906. 


P. Mich. Zen. = C. C. Edgar, Zenon Papyri in the Uni- 
versity of Michigan Collection, 1931. 


P. Oxy. = Grenfell, Hunt, and Bell, The Oxyrhynchus 
Papyri, 1898-1927. 


Petermann = H. Petermann’s Latin translation in Schéne 
(below). 


Schéne = Husebii Chronicorum lib. I., A. Schone, 1875. 


Syncellus = Syncellus or George the Monk, in Corpus Scrip- 
torum Historicorum Byzantinorum, W. Dindorf, 1829. 


XXXi 


NOTE 


THE editor wishes to acknowledge with gratitude 
the valuable help ungrudgingly given to him in all 
Egyptological matters by Professor Perey E. 
Newberry (Liverpool and Cairo) and by Professor 
Battiscombe Gunn (Oxford); but neither of these 
Egyptologists must be held responsible for the final 
form in which their contributions appear, except 
where their names or initials are appended. Thanks 
are also due to Professor D. 5. Margoliouth (Oxford), 
who very kindly revised the Latin translation of the 
Armenian Version of Eusebius, Chronica, by com- 
paring it with the original Armenian as given in 
Aucher’s edition: the footnotes show how much the 
text here printed has benefited from his revision. 

In a work which brings before the mind’s eye a 
long series of Kings of Egypt, the editor would have 
liked to refer interested readers to some book con- 
taining a collection of portraits of these kings; but 
it seems that, in spite of the convenience and 
interest which such a book would possess, no com- 
plete series of royal portraits bas yet been published.! 
For a certain number of portrait-sketches (25 in all), 
skilfully created from existing mummies and ancient 
representations, see Winifred Brunton, Kings and 
Queens of Ancient Egypt (1924), and Great Ones of 
Ancient Egypt (1929). 


1 For portraits of some kings, see Petrie, The Making of 
Egypt, 1939, passim. 


XXXil 


THE AEGYPTIACA OF MANETHO: 
MANETHO’S HISTORY OF EGYPT 


ATT NIL TAKA 
ΤΟΜΟΣ ΠΡΩ͂ΤΟΣ 


Fr. 1. Ευβεβιῦβ, Chronica I. (Armenian Version), 
p- 93 (Mai). 


Ex Aegyptiacis Manethonis monumentis, qui in 
tres libros historiam suam tribuit,—de diis et de 


heroibus, de manibus et de mortalibus regibus qui 
Aegypto praefuerunt usque ad regem Persarum 
Darium. 

1. Primus homo (deus) Aegyptiis Vulcanus! est, 
qui etiam ignis repertor apud eos celebratur. Ex 
eo Sol; [postea Sésis?;] deinde Saturnus; tum 


1Cf. Joannes Lydus, De Mensibus, iv. 86 (Wiinsch). 
On Maius, after speaking of Hephaestus, Lydus adds: 
κατὰ δὲ ἱστορίαν Μανέθων Αἰγυπτιακῶν ὑπομνημάτων ἐν τόμῳ 
τρίτῳ φησίν, ὅτι πρῶτος ἀνθρώπων ἔ παρ᾽ Αἰγυπτίοις ἐβασίλευσεν 
ἽΗφαιστος ὁ καὶ εὑρέτης τοῦ πυρὸς αὐτοῖς γενόμενος" ἐξ οὗ Ἥλιος, 
οὗ Κρόνος, μεθ᾽ ὃν “Ooupis, ἔπειτα Τυφών, ἀδελφὸς ᾿Οσίρεως. 
From this passage we see that Lydus gives the sequence 
‘“Héphaestus, Hélios (the Sun), Cronos, Osiris, Typhén,” 
omitting Sésis as Eusebius does. After this passage in 
Lydus comes Fr. 84 ᾿Ιστέον δὲ... 

2 From Joannes Antiochenus(Malalas), Chron., 24(Migne, 
Patrologia, Vol. 97). 

* Bracketed by Hopfner, Fontes Historiae Religionis, 
Bonn, 1922-3, p. 65. 


2 


THE AEGYPTIACA OF MANETHO: 
MANETHO’S HISTORY OF EGYPT 


BOOK I. 


Fr. 1 (from the Armenian Version of Eusebius, 
Chronica). Dynasties oF Gops, Demicops, 
AND SPIRITS OF THE DEAD. 


From the Egyptian History of Manetho, who com- 
posed his account in three books. These deal with 
the Gods, the Demigods, the Spirits of the Dead, 
and the mortal kings who ruled Egypt down to 
Darius, king of the Persians. 

1. The first man (or god) in Egypt is Hephaestus,} 
who is also renowned among the Egyptians as the 
discoverer of fire. His son, Helios (the Sun), was 
succeeded by Sdsis: then follow, in turn, Cronos, 


1The Pre-dynastic Period begins with a group of gods, 
“consisting of the Great Ennead of Heliopolis in the 
form in which it was worshipped at Memphis’”’ (T. E. 
Peet, Cambridge Ancient History, i. p. 250). After summar- 
izing §§ 1-3 Peet adds: ‘“ From the historical point of 
view there is little to be made of this’’. See Meyer, 
Geschichte des Altertums δ, I. ii. p. 102 ἢ. for the Egyptian 
traditions of the Pre-dynastic Period. In the Turin 
Papyrus the Gods are given in the same order: (Ptah), 
Ré, (Shu), Geb, Osiris, Séth (200 years), Horus (300 years), 
Thoth (3126 years), Ma‘at, Har, ... Total.... See 

Meyer, Aeg. Chron. p. 116, and ef. Fr. ὃ. 
3 


Fr. 1 MANETHO 


Osiris; exin Osiridis frater Typhon; ad extremum 
Orus, QOsiridis et Isidis filius. Hi primi inter 
Aegyptios rerum potiti sunt. Deinceps continuata 
successione delapsa est regia auctoritas usque ad 
Bydin (Bitem) per annorum tredecim milia ac non- 
gentos. Lunarem tamen annum intelligo, videlicet 
xxx diebus constantem: quem enim nunc mensem 
dicimus, Aegyptii olim anni nomine indigitabant. 

2. Post deos regnarunt heroes annis MCCLY: rur- 
susque alii reges dominati sunt annis MDCCCXVII: 
tum alii triginta reges Memphitae annis MDCCXC: 
deinde alii Thinitae decem reges annis CCCL. 

3. Secuta est manium heroumque dominatio annis 
MMMMMDCCCXIII. 

4, Summa temporis in mille et myriadem! con- 
surgit annorum, qui tamen lunares, nempe menstrul, 


1Miuller: mille myriadas Mai. 





1The name Bydis (or Bites) seems to be the Egyptian 
bity “‘king’’ (from bit ‘‘ bee”’), the title of the kings of 
Lower Egypt: see the Palermo Stone, and cf. Herodotus, 
iv. 155, ‘“‘ the Libyans call their king ‘ Battos’”’ (P. E. 
Newberry). Bitys appears in late times as a translator 
or interpreter of Hermetical writings: see Iamblich. 
De Mysteriis, viii. 5 (= Scott, Hermetica, iv. p. 34) where 
the prophet Bitys is said to have translated [for King 
Ammén] a book (The Way to Higher Things, 1.e. a treatise 
on the theurgic or supernatural means of attaining to 
union with the Demiurgus) which he found inscribed in 
hieroglyphs in a shrine at Sais in Egypt. Cf. the pseudo- 
Manetho, App. I 

2Therg is no evidence that the Egyptian year was 
ever equal to a month: there were short years (each of 
360 days) and long years (see Fr. 49). 

See Hacerpta Latina Barbari (Fr. 4) for the beginning 
of this dynasty: “ First, Anubis ...”’. 


4 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 1 


Osiris, Typhon, brother of Osiris, and lastly Orus, 
son of Osiris and Isis. These were the first to 
hold sway in Egypt. Thereafter, the kingship 
passed from one to another in unbroken succession 
down to Bydis (Bites) } through 13,900 years. The 
year I take, however, to be a lunar one, consisting, 
that is, of 30 days: what we now call a month the 
Egyptians used formerly to style a year.” 

2. After the Gods, Demigods reigned for 1255 
years,® and again another line of kings held sway 
for 1817 years: then came thirty more kings of 
Memphis,’ reigning for 1790 years ; and then again 
ten kings of This, reigning for 350 years. 

3. There followed the rule of Spirits of the Dead 
and Demigods,° for 5813 years. 

4. The total [of the last five groups] amounts to 
11,000 years,® these however being lunar periods, or 


[1 


*Corroborated by the Turin Papyrus, Col. ii.: “οὗ 
Memphis ’’. 

5 “* Demigods *’ should be in apposition to “ Spirits of 
the Dead ”’ (véxves ἡμίθεοι), as in Excerpta Latina Barbari 
(Fr. 4) and Africanus (Fr. 6. 1). These are perhaps the 
Shemsu Hor, the Followers or Worshippers of Horus, of 
the Turin Papyrus: see H. R. Hall, Cambridge Ancient 
History, i. p. 265. Before King Ménés (Fr. 6), the king 
of Upper Egypt who imposed his sway upon the fertile 
Delta and founded the First Dynasty,—the Shemsu Hor, 
the men of the Falcon Clan whose original home was in 
the West Delta, had formed an earlier united kingdom 
by conquering Upper Egypt: see V. Gordon Childe, 
New Light on the Most Ancient East, 1934, p. 8, based 
upon Breasted, Bull. Instit. Frang. Arch. Or. xxx. (Cairo, 
1930), pp. 710 ff., and Schafer’s criticism, Orient. Liter- 
aturz. 1932, p. 704. 

5 The exact total of the items given is 11,025 years. 
So also 24,900 infra is a round number for 24,925. 


9 


Fr. 1 MANETHO 


sunt. Sed revera dominatio, quam narrant Aegyptii, 
deorum, heroum, et manium tenuisse putatur lun- 
arium annorum omnino viginti quattuor milia et 
nongentos,! ex quibus fiunt solares anni MMCCVI. 

5. Atque haec si cum Hebraeorum chronologia 
conferre volueris, in eandem plane sententiam con- 
spirare videbis. Namque Aegyptus ab Hebraeis 
Mestraimus appellatur: Mestraimus autem <haud 2) 
multo post diluvium tempore exstitit. Quippe ex 
Chamo, Noachi filio, post diluvium ortusest Aegyptus 
sive Mestraimus, qui primus ad Aegypti incolatum 
profectus est, qua tempestate gentes hac illac spargi 
coeperunt. Erat autem summa_ temporis ab 
Adamo ad diluvium secundum Hebraeos annorum 
MMCCXLII. 

6. Ceterum* quum Aegyptii praerogativa antiqui- 
tatis quadam seriem ante diluvium tenere se iactent 
Deorum, Heroum, et Manium annorum plus viginti 
milia regnantium, plane aequum est ut hi anni in 


1 Aucher’s version runs: duae myriades quatuor millia 
et DCCCC. 

2haud: conj. approved by Karst. 

3 Petermann’s version of the first sentence of this sec- 
tion runs as follows: Itaque placet (licet) Egiptiis, priscis 
(primis) temporibus quae praecesserunt diluvium, se iactare 
ob antiquitatem. Deos quosdam fuisse dicunt suos, semi- 
deosque et manes. In menses redactis annis apud Hebraeos 
enarratis, lunarium annorum myriades duas et amplius 
etiam computant (computarunt), ita ut tot fere menses 
fiant, quot anni apud Hebraeos comprehenduntur ; scilicet 
(id est) a protoplasto homine usque ad Mezrajim tempora 
nostra computando (‘‘ And so, for the early times which 
preceded the Flood, the Egyptians may well boast of their 
antiquity. They say that certain Gods were theirs, as well 
as Demigods and Spirits of the Dead. Having reduced to 


6 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 1 


months. But, in truth, the whole rule of which the 
Egyptians tell—the rule of Gods, Demigods, and 
Spirits of the Dead—is reckoned to have comprised 
in all 24,900 lunar years, which make 2206! solar 
years. 

5. Now, if you care to compare these figures with 
Hebrew chronology, you will find that they are in 
perfect harmony. Egypt is called Mestraim ? by 
the Hebrews; and Mestraim lived {ποῖ long after 
the Flood. For after the Flood, Cham (or Ham), 
son of Noah, begat Aegyptus or Mestraim, who 
was the first to set out to establish himself in 
Egypt, at the time when the tribes began to dis- 
perse this way and that. Now the whole time 
from Adam to the Flood was, according to the 
Hebrews, 2242 years. 

6. But, since the Egyptians claim by a sort of 
prerogative of antiquity that they have, before the 
Flood, a line of Gods, Demigods, and Spirits of the 
Dead, who reigned for more than 20,000 years, it 
clearly follows that these years should be reckoned 


1Boeckh, Manetho und die Hundssternperiode, p. 85, 
corrects this to 2046. 

2 Mestraim: the Mizraim of 0.7’. Genesis x. 6: Arabic 
Misrun, Cuneiform Musri, Misri (Egypt). Mizraim is 
a dual name-form, perhaps to be explained in reference to 
the two great native divisions of Egypt, Upper and Lower. 


months the years recorded by the Hebrews, they reckon 
20,000 lunar years and even more than that number, so 
that it comes to practically as many months as the years 
of Hebrew chronology, i.e. reckoning our times * from the 
creation of man to Mezraim.’’) 

* Karst emends this to ‘ Biblical times’’. 


Fr. 1 MANETHO 


menses tot convertantur quot ab Hebraeis memo- 
rantur anni: nempe ut qui menses continentur in 
memoratis apud Hebraeos annis, ii totidem intelli- 
gantur Aegyptiorum lunares anni, pro ea temporum 
summa, quae a primo condito homine ad Mestrai- 
mum usque colligitur. Sane Mestraimus generis 
Aegyptiaci auctor fuit, ab eoque prima Aegyptiorum 
dynastia manare credenda est. 

7. Quodsi temporum copia adhuc exuberet, re- 
putandum est plures fortasse Aegyptiorum reges 
una eademque aetate exstitisse; namque et Thini- 
tas regnavisse aiunt et Memphitas et Saitas et 
Aethiopes eodemque tempore alios.1 Videntur 
praeterea alii quoque alibi imperium tenuisse: 
atque hae dynastiae suo quaeque in nomo® semet 
continuisse: ita ut haud singuli reges successivam 
potestatem acceperint, sed alius alio loco eadem 
aetate regnaverit. Atque hinc contigit, ut tantus 
numerus annorum confieret. Nos vero, his omissis, 
persequamur singillatim Aegyptiorum chronologiam. 


(Continued in Fr. 7(5).) 


1Petermann renders: ac interim (iuxta eosdem) alios 
quoque, ‘‘and others too, besides these’’. 

2The Armenian version here confuses νόμος “ law’’ and 
νομός ‘“‘nome’’: the Latin translation corrects this blunder. 


1 For the contemporaneous existence of a number of 
petty kingdoms in Egypt, see the Piankhi stele, Breasted, 
Ancient Records, iv. §§ 830, 878, and the passage from 
Artapanus, Concerning the Jews, quoted on p. 73 n. 3. 
T. Nicklin (in his Studies in Egyptian Chronology, 1928-29, 


8 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 1 


as the same number of months as the years 
recorded by the Hebrews: that is, that all the 
months contained in the Hebrew record of years, 
should be reckoned as so many lunar years of the 
Egyptian calculation, in accordance with the total 
length of time reckoned from the creation of man 
in the beginning down to Mestraim. Mestraim was 
indeed the founder of the Egyptian race; and from 
him the first Egyptian dynasty must be held to 
spring. 

7. But if the number of years is still in excess, it 
must be supposed that perhaps several Egyptian 
kings ruled at one and the same time ; for they say 
that the rulers were kings of This, of Memphis, of 
Sais, of Ethiopia, and of other places at the same 
time. It seems, moreover, that different kings held 
sway in different regions, and that each dynasty was 
confined to its own nome: thus it was not a succession 
of kings occupying the throne one after the other, but 
several kings reigning at the same time in different 
regions.| Hence arose the great total number of 
years. But let us leave this question and take up 
in detail the chronology of Egyptian history. 


(Continued in Fr. 7(5).) 


p- 39) says: ‘‘ The Manethonian Dynasties are not lists 
of rulers over all Egypt, but lists partly of more or less 
independent princes, partly of princely lines from which 
later sprang rulers over all Egypt. (Cf. the Scottish 
Stuarts, or the Electors of Hanover.) Some were mere 
Mayors of the Palace or princelets maintaining a pre- 
carious independence, or even more subordinate Governors 
of nomes, from whom, however, descended subsequent 
monarchs. (Cf. the Heptarchy in England.) ”’ 


9 


Fr. 2 MANETHO 


Fr. 2. Syncellus, p. 73. 


1. Mera δὲ ταῦτα καὶ περὶ ἐθνῶν Αἰγυπτιακῶν 
« a an 
πέντε ἐν τριάκοντα δυναστείαις ἱστορεῖ τῶν λεγο- 
> a ~ 
μένων παρ᾽ αὐτοῖς θεῶν Kat ἡμιθέων καὶ νεκύων Kal 
~ ‘ 
θνητῶν, dv καὶ Εὐσέβιος ὁ Παμφίλου μνησθεὶς ἐν 
τοῖς Χρονικοῖς αὐτοῦ φησὶν οὕτως" 
“e > 4, A ~ \ e / \ A 
2. “ Αἰγύπτιοι δὲ θεῶν καὶ ἡμιθέων καὶ παρὰ 
4, / \ ~ α΄. / \ 
τούτοις νεκύων καὶ θνητῶν ἑτέρων βασιλέων πολλὴν 
καὶ φλύαρον συνείρουσι μυθολογίαν: οἱ γὰρ παρ᾽ 
a ” 
αὐτοῖς παλαιότατοι σεληναίους ἔφασκον εἶναι τοὺς } 
~ / ~ « 
ἐνιαυτοὺς ἐξ ἡμερῶν τριάκοντα συνεστῶτας, ot δὲ 
σ > / 
μετὰ τούτους ἡμίθεοι ὥρους ἐκάλουν τοὺς ἐνιαυτοὺς 
3) 
τοὺς 5 τριμηνιαίους. 
~ e / a 
3. Kai ταῦτα μὲν 6 Εὐσέβιος μεμφόμενος αὐτοῖς 
- , > / Ψ « ε ’ 
τῆς φλυαρίας εὐλόγως συνέγραψεν, ὃν 6 Πανό- 
~ « 2 /, 
Swpos od καλῶς, ws οἶμαι, ἐν τούτῳ μέμφεται, 
,ὔ A ~ 
λέγων ὅτι ἠπόρησε διαλύσασθαι τὴν ἔννοιαν τῶν 
Δ A / ~ 
συγγραφέων, ἣν αὐτὸς καινότερόν τι δοκῶν κατορ- 
θοῦν λέγει" 
Nar A ~ a? σ “- 
4, ““᾿Επειδὴ ἀπὸ τῆς τοῦ ᾿Αδὰμ πλάσεως ἕως 3 τοῦ 
τῇ De ’ ” ~ θ λ “- ~ β΄ ΜΝ 
νώχ, ἤτοι τοῦ καθολικοῦ κοσμικοῦ ασπβ' ἔτους, 
οὔτε μηνὸς οὔτε ἐνιαυτοῦ ἀριθμὸς ἡμερῶν ἐγνωρί- 
> ~ ~ 
ζετο, of δὲ ἐγρήγοροι, κατελθόντες ἐπὶ τοῦ καθολικοῦ 


1MSS. εἶναι τοὺς τ΄ μηνιαίους τοὺς ἐνιαυτοὺς : τ΄ μηνιαίους 
τοὺς 560]. Scaliger. 

2MSS. τοὺς ψ' τριμηνιαίους : ψ΄ delet m. 

8 ἕως add. m. 


10 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 2 


Fr. 2 (from Syncellus). 


Thereafter! Manetho tells also of five Egyptian 
tribes which formed thirty dynasties, comprising 
those whom they call Gods, Demigods, Spirits of the 
Dead, and mortal men. Of these Eusebius, “‘ son ” 
of Pamphilus, gives the following account in his 
Chronica : “ Concerning Gods, Demigods, Spirits of 
the Dead, and mortal kings, the Egyptians have a 
long series of foolish myths. The most ancient 
Egyptian kings, indeed, alleged that their years 
were lunar years consisting of thirty days, whereas 
the Demigods who succeeded them gave the name 
héroi to years which were three months long.” So 
Eusebius wrote with good reason, criticizing the 
Egyptians for their foolish talk ; and in my opinion 
Panodérus 3 is wrong in finding fault with Eusebius 
here, on the ground that Eusebius failed to explain 
the meaning of the historians, while Panodérus 
thinks he himself succeeds by a somewhat novel 
method, as follows: 

“From the creation of Adam, indeed, down to 
Enoch, i.e. to the general cosmic year 1282, the 
number of days was known in neither month nor 
year; but the Egregori (or ‘ Watchers ’),? who had 


1 This passage follows after Appendix I., p. 210. 

? Panodérus (fi. c. 395-408 a.p.) and his contemporary 
Annianus were Egyptian monks who wrote on Chronology 
with the purpose of harmonizing Chaldean and Egyptian 
systems with that of the Jews. Panodérus used (and per- 
haps composed) the Book of Séthis (App. IV.). 

3 ᾿Εγρήγοροι, “ἡ Watchers, Angels ’’—in Enoch, 179, of the 
angels who fell in love with the daughters of men. The 
Greek word ’Eyp7yopo: is a mispronunciation of the Aramaic 
word used in Enoch, 179. 


11 


FR. 2 MANETHO 


κοσμικοῦ χιλιοστοῦ ἔτους, συναναστραφέντες τοῖς ἀν- 
/ 50. " > \ \ / ~ 4 
θρώποις ἐδίδαξαν αὐτοὺς τοὺς κύκλους τῶν δύο φωσ- 
τήρων δωδεκαζῳδίους εἶναι ἐκ μοιρῶν τριακοσίων 
«7 ¢€ Nata 4 > \ / 
ἑξήκοντα, ot δὲ ἀποβλέψαντες εἰς τὸν περιγειότερον, 
μικρότερον καὶ εὐδηλότερον τριακονθήμερον σελη- 
νιακὸν κύκλον ἐθέσπισαν εἰς ἐνιαυτὸν ἀριθμεῖσθαι, 
διὰ τὸ καὶ τὸν τοῦ ἡλίου κύκλον ἐν τοῖς αὐτοῖς 
/ L ~ > > / / 
δώδεκα ζῳδίοις πληροῦσθαι ἐν ἰσαρίθμοις μοίραις 
, “ ͵ \ , A 3 > a 
τξ΄. ὅθεν συνέβη τὰς βασιλείας τῶν παρ᾽ αὐτοῖς 
βασιλευσάντων θεῶν γενεῶν ἕξ, ἐν δυναστείαις 
Ef > 1 λ a θ / 4 λ 
ἕξ͵ κατ᾽ ἔτη ἐν σεληνιακοῖς τριακονθημέροις κύκλοις 
παρ᾽ αὐτοῖς ἀριθμεῖσθαι: ἃ καὶ συνῆξαν σελήνια a’ 
αν ἢ ὅλ \ ξθ' 5 ~ δὲ θ ΄ 
,απνπε΄ ἔτη, ἡλιακὰ D ταῦτα δὲ συναριθμούμενα 
A A ~ 7 / [2 A ν 
τοῖς πρὸ τῆς τούτων βασιλείας ἡλιακοῖς ανη΄ ἔτεσι 
/ « / τινας 439 « , A \ 
συνάγουσιν ὁμάδα ἐτῶν βκζ΄. ὁμοίως δὲ κατὰ 
τὰς δύο δυναστείας τῶν ἐννέα ἡμιθέων τῶν 
μηδέποτε γεγονότων ὡς γεγονότων ἔτη σιδ' καὶ 
ἥμισυ σπουδάζει συνιστᾶν ἀπὸ τῶν wry’ ale Aa 
ἦτοι τρόπων, ὡς γίνεσθαί φησι, σὺν MEO’, αρπγ΄' 8 
καὶ ἥμισυ ἔτη, καὶ συναπτόμενα τοῖς ἀπὸ Adap 
μέχρι τῆς τῶν θεῶν βασιλείας ανη΄ ἔτεσι συνάγειν 
ἔτη βσομβ’ ἕως τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ. , 
\ ~ \ ¢ ~ 
5. Kat ταῦτα μὲν ὁ Ilavddwpos tas κατὰ θεοῦ 
καὶ τῶν θεοπνεύστων γραφῶν Αἰγυπτιακὰς συγ- 
γραφὰς συμφωνεῖν αὐταῖς ἀγωνίζεται δεικνύναι, 
/ \ Ed / A ἰὃ ἣ σ 9. .& ~ 
μεμφόμενος τὸν Εὐσέβιον, μὴ εἰδὼς ὅτι καθ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ 
καὶ τῆς ἀληθείας ἀποδέδεικται ταῦτα αὐτοῦ τὰ 
1MSS. ἔτη alone: κατ᾽ ἔτη τη. 
3ωνή ὥρων or ὅρων m.: ὠνιώων MSS.: ἐνιαυσίων ὡρῶν 


Scealiger. 
3 apy’ m.: ,apvy’ MSS. 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 2 


descended to earth in the general cosmic year 1000, 
held converse with men, and taught them that the 
orbits of the two luminaries, being marked by the 
twelve signs of the Zodiac, are composed of 360 
parts. Observing the moon’s orbit which is nearer 
the earth, smaller, and more conspicuous, as it has 
a period of thirty days, men decided that it should 
be reckoned as a year, since the orbit of the sun also 
was filled by the same twelve signs of the Zodiac with 
an equal number of parts, 360. So it came to pass 
that the reigns of the Gods who ruled among them 
for six generations in six dynasties were reckoned in 
years each consisting of a lunar cycle of thirty days. 
The total in lunar years is 11,985, or 969 solar years. 
By adding these to the 1058 ' solar years of the period 
before their reign, they reach the sum total of 2027 
years.” Similarly, in the two dynasties of nine 
Demigods,—these being regarded as real, although 
they never existed,—Panodo6rus strives to make up 
2144 years out of 858 horoi (periods of three months) 
or tropot, so that with the 969 years they make, he 
says, 1183}, and these, when added to the 1058 
years from the time of Adam to the reign of the Gods, 
complete a total of 2242 years down to the Flood. 
Thus Panodérus exerts himself to show that the 
Egyptian writings against God and against our 
divinely inspired Scriptures are really in agreement 
with them. In this he criticizes Eusebius, not under- 
standing that these arguments of his, which are in- 
capable of proof or of reasoning, have been proved 


1 See Intro. p. xxx. 


13 


Fr. 2,3 MANETHO 


> ΄, ’ \ > /, ” » 

ἀναπόδεικτά τε καὶ ἀσυλλόγιστα, εἴ γε... οὔτε 
Βαβυλὼν ἢ Χαλδαϊκὴ πρὸ τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ οὔτε 
ς Μ A ~ Ut > 4 > 
ἡ Αἴγυπτος πρὸ τοῦ Μεστρὲμ ἐβασιλεύθη, οἶμαι ὃ 


ὅτι οὐδ᾽ φκίσθη. .. 


Fr. 8. Syncellus, p. 32. 
Περὶ τῆς τῶν Αἰγυπτίων ἀρχαιολογίας. 


Μανεθῶ ὁ Σεβεννύτης ἀρχιερεὺς τῶν ἐν Αἰγύπτῳ 
μιαρῶν ἱερῶν μετὰ Βήρωσσον γενόμενος ἐπὶ {|τολε- 
μαίου τοῦ Φιλαδέλφου γράφει τῷ αὐτῷ Πτολεμαίῳ, 
ψευδηγορῶν καὶ αὐτὸς ὡς ὁ Βήρωσσος͵ περὶ δυν- 
αστειῶν ς΄", ἤτοι θεῶν τῶν μηδέποτε γεγονότων ς΄ ,1 
οἵ, φησὶ, διαγεγόνασιν ἐπὶ ἔτη a’ jamme’. ὧν 
πρῶτος, φησὶ, θεὸς “Hfasoros ἔτη ,6 ἐβασίλευσε. 
ταῦτα τὰ θ ἔτη πάλιν τινὲς τῶν καθ᾽ ἡμᾶς ἱστορικῶν 
ἀντὶ μηνῶν σεληνιακῶν λογισάμενοι καὶ μερίσαντες 
τὸ τῶν ἡμερῶν πλῆθος τῶν αὐτῶν 9θ σεληνίων παρὰ 
τὰς τριακοσίας ἑξήκοντα πέντε ἡμέρας τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ 
συνῆξαν ἔτη Wl’ οδ΄, ξένον τι δοκοῦντες κατωρ- 
θωκέναι, γελοίων δὲ μᾶλλον εἰπεῖν ἄξιον τὸ ψεῦδος 


τῇ ἀληθείᾳ συμβιβάζοντες. 


Πρώτη δυναστεία Αἰγυπτίων. 


a’ ἐβασίλευσεν ἤφαιστος ἔτη ψκζ' vd’ 8 
΄ Ἥλιος ᾿Ηφαίστου, ἔτη π' ς΄. 

γ΄ ᾿Αγαθοδαίμων, ἔτη vs’ ui’. 

1MS. A ζ΄. 


?MS. A has πρώτη δυναστεία after Ἥφαιστος. 
> Miller: MSS. ψκδ' 4d’ (7243). 


14 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 2, 3 


against himself and against truth, since indeed . . . 
neither Babylon nor Chaldea was ruled by kings 
before the Flood, nor was Egypt before Mestrem, 
and in my opinion it was not even inhabited before 
that time.... 


Fr. 3 (from Syncellus). 


On the Antiquity of Egypt. 


Manetho of Sebennytus, chief priest of the accursed 
temples of Egypt, who lived later than Béréssos in 
the time of Ptolemy Philadelphus, writes to this 
Ptolemy, with the same utterance of lies as Béréssos, 
concerning six dynasties or six gods who never 
existed: these, he says, reigned for 11,985 years. 
The first of them, the god Héphaestus, was king for 
9000 years. Now some of our historians, reckoning 
these 9000 years as so many lunar months, and 
dividing the number of days in these 9000 lunar 
months by the 365 days in a year, find a total of 
727% years. They imagine that they have attained 
a striking result, but one must rather say that it is 
a ludicrous falsehood which they have tried to pit 
against Truth. 


The First Dynasty of Egypt. 


1. Héphaestus reigned for 727? years. 

2. Hélios (the Sun), son of Héphaestus, for 801 
years. 

3. Agathodaemén, for 56 τ; years. 


15 


Fr. 3, 4 MANETHO 


δ΄ Kpovos, ἔτη μίυ. 
ε΄ “Ootpis καὶ "Tous, ἔτη re’ 
΄ Τ7Τύφων, ἔτη κθ΄. 


ζ΄ *Qpos ἡμίθεος, ἔτη κε΄. 

Ἄρης ἡμιθεος, ἔτη Ky’. 

θ΄ Ανουβις ἡμίθεος, ἔτη ul. 

ιἐὁ ἩΗρακλῆς ἡμίθεος, ἐ ἔτη ue’. 
Ἀπόλλων ἡμίθεος, ἔ ἔτη κε΄. 

ιβ' "Aupwv ἡμίθεος, ἔτη λ΄. 

ιγ΄ Τιθοῆς ἡμίθεος, ἔτη KC’. 

ιδ΄ δΣῶσος ἡμίθεος, ἔτη AP’. 

ιε΄ Ζεὺς ἡμίθεος, ἔτη κ΄. 


Fr. 4. Excerpta Latina Barbari (Schéne, p. 215). 


Egyptiorum regnum invenimus vetustissimum 
omnium regnorum; cuius initium sub Manethono! 
dicitur memoramus scribere. Primum? deorum qui 
ab ipsis scribuntur faciam regna sic: 


Ifestum [i.e. Hephaestum] dicunt quidam deum 
regnare in Aegypto annos sexcentos LX XX: post 
hune Solem Iphesti annos LXXVII: post istum 


1 ὑπὸ Μανέθωνος Scaliger. 

2¥Frick (Chronica Minora, i., (1893, p. 286) restores the 
original Greek as follows: πρῶτον θεῶν τῶν παρ᾽ αὐτοῖς 
γραφομένων ποιήσω βασιλείας οὕτως. α΄ Ἥφαιστόν φασί τινες 
θεὸν βασιλεῦσαι ἐν Αἰγύπτῳ ἔτη χπ'. 





1 Total, 969 years. 
2 Total, 214 years. Total for Gods and Demigods, 


1183 years. See Fr. 2. 
16 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) FR. 3, 4 


4, Cronos, for 401 years. 
5. Osiris and Isis, for 35 years, 
6. Typhén, for 29 years." 


Demigods : 


7. Orus, for 25 years. 

8. Arés, for 23 years. 

9. Anubis, for 17 years. 
10. Héraclés, for 15 years. 
11. Apollé, for 25 years. 
12. Ammén, for 30 years. 
13. Tithoés,* for 27 years. 
14. Sdésus, for 32 years. 
15. Zeus, for 20 years.” 


Fr. 43 ( from Excerpta Latina Barbari). 


In the kingdom of Egypt we have the oldest of 
all kingdoms, and we are minded to record its begin- 
ning, as it is given by Manetho. First, I shall put 
down as follows the reigns of the Gods, as recorded 
by the Egyptians. Some say that the god Ηδ- 
phaestus reigned in Egypt for 680 years: after him, 
Sol [Hélios, the Sun], son of Héphaestus, for 77 


%This extract made by an anonymous and ignorant 
scribe depends chiefly upon Africanus. See Weill, La 
fin du moyen empire égyptien, pp. 640, 642 f., 655 f. 
Gelzer and Bauer have inferred that the Greek account 
translated by Barbarus was either the work of the 
Egyptian monk Annianus (see Fr. 2, p. 11 n. 2) or at 
least a source derived from him (Laqueur, &.-H. xiv. 1, 
1081). 

* For the divinity Tithoés in two inscriptions of Coptos, 
see O. Guéraud in Ann. Serv. Antig., 35 (1935), pp. 5 f. 


\ 17 


Fr. 4 MANETHO 


Sosinosirim! annos CCCXX: post hune Oron 
ptoliarchum annos XXVIII: post hunc Tyfona 
annos XLYV.? Colliguntur deorum regna anni mille 
DL. 

Deinceps Mitheorum ὃ regna sic: 

Prota* Anube S[amusim, qui etiam Aegyptiorum 
scripturas conposuit] annos LX XXIII. 

[Post hunc Apiona grammaticus qui secundum 
Inachum interpraetatur annos LXVII quem sub 
Argios initio regnaverunt.| 


1Corrected by the first hand from Sisinosirim: Sosin, 
Osirim Sealiger. Barbarus probably intended: post istum 
Sosin, post hune Osirim. Cf. Cedren., i. p. 36, 2: καὶ per’ 
αὐτὸν Σῶσις, εἶτα "Οσιρις. 

2 After XLV the digit I or II seems to have been erased. 

3 Frick restores: ἱξξῆς ᾿Ημιθέων βασιλεῖαι οὕτως: a’ πρῶτα 
"Ανουβις ἔτη πγ΄. β΄ μετὰ τοῦτον "Αμουσίν (φασί τινες βασιλεῦ- 
σαι, ὃν ᾿Απίων ὁ γραμματικὸς ὁ καὶ τὰς Αἰγυπτίων γραφὰς συνθεὶς 
κατὰ Ἴναχον ἑρμηνεύει τὸν ἐπ᾽ ᾿Αργείων ἀρχῆς βασιλεύσαντα ἔτη 
ἐζ΄. 

“μετὰ ταῦτα τοὺς Νεκύων βασιλέας ἡ ἡρμήνευσεν ᾿Ημιθέους καλῶν 
καὶ αὐτούς δ ὰπ τὸ κρατίστους καλῶν ἔ ετη, ρ΄. 

4 πρῶτα. Along with the reign of the demigod Anubis, 
Barbarus has preserved a note by Africanus referring to 
Amésis: see Fr. 52. This note was, for some reason, trans- 
ferred from its original place between Potestas XVI. and 
XVII. See Unger, Manetho, pp. 163f. This mangled 
sentence, as interpreted by Unger, Gelzer, and Frick, 
attests the value of the tradition preserved by Barbarus. 


1 The actual total of the items given is 1150 years. 
* The translation follows the restored Greek original : 
see note 3 on the text. 


18 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 4 


years: next, Sosinosiris [Sésis and Osiris], for 320 
years: then Orus the Ruler, for 28 years; and 
after him, Typhon, for 45 years. Total for the 
reigns of the Gods, 1550 years.! 

Next come the reigns of the Demigods, as follows: 
first, Anubes? for 83 years; then after him, Amusis, 
some say, was king. About him, Apion the gram- 
marian,® who composed a history of Egypt, explained 
that he lived in the time of Inachus * who was king 
at the founding of Argos . . . for 67 years.® 


8 Apién the grammarian, born in Upper Egypt, lived 
at Rome in the time of Tiberius, Gaius, and Claudius: 
Tiberius called him by the nickname of ‘“ cymbalum 
mundi’’. As leader of the anti-Jewish movement, Apién 
was later attacked by Josephus in his Contra Apionem. 

The quotation from Apién appears to derive in part 
from the History of Ptolemy of Mendés: see Tatian, 
Or. adversus Graecos, § 38, in Migne, Patrologia Graeca, 
vi. 880-882, and in Miiller, F.H.G. iv. p. 485 (quoted in 
F.H.G. ii. p. 533). (Ptolemy of Mendés dated the 
Exodus to the reign of Amésis, who was contemporary 
with Inachus. Apiénin the fourth volume of his Aegyptiaca 
(in five volumes) stated that Auaris was destroyed by 
Amésis.) Much matter must have been common to the 
works of Ptolemy of Mendés and Apién: cf. Africanus 
in Eusebius, Praepar. Evang. x. 10, ‘‘ Apién says that in 
the time of Inachus Moses led out the Jews’’. Cf. Fr. 
52, 1, 53,9: 

4 The founder of the First Dynasty of kings of Argos, 
Inachus is said to have died twenty generations before 
the Fall of Troy, 1.6. circa 1850 B.c. Aegyptus and Danaus 
were fifth in descent from Inachus: cf. Fr. 50, § 102. 

5 This appears to be the length of the reign of Amésis, 
not of Inachus. Cf. Fr. 52, 1, where Africanus as recorded 
by Syncellus omits the number of years. 


19 


Fr. 4 MANETHO 


I. Post hec! Ecyniorum ? reges interpraetavit, 
Imitheus ? vocans et ipsos? . . . annos duo 
milia C, fortissimos vocans. 

II. Mineus et pronepotes ipsius VII regnaverunt 
annos CCLIII.! 
III. Bochus et aliorum octo annos CCCII. 
IV. Necherocheus et aliorum VII annos CCXIV. 
V. Similiter aliorum XVII annos CCLXXVIL 
VI. Similiter aliorum XXI annos CCLVIII. 
VII. Othoi et aliorum VII annos CCIII. 
VIII. Similiter et aliorum XIV annos CXL. 
IX. Similiter et aliorum XX annos CCCCIX. 
X. Similiter et aliorum VII annos CCIYV. 


Hec ὃ finis de primo tomo Manethoni habens tem- 
pora annorum duo milia C. 


XI. Potestas Diopolitanorum annos LX. 
XII. Potestas Bubastanorum annos CLIII. 


1¥or haec. 

2'These words are perversions of Νεκύων and ᾿Ημιθέους 
respectively : see p. 18 n. 3. 

3 Tn the lacuna here, there would be an account of the 
mortal kings to whom the number 2100 (2300) belongs. 

4 Cf. Fr. 6, Dynasty I. 5 For haec. 


1The totals given by Barbarus are generally those of 
Africanus. Barbarus omits Manetho’s Dynasty VII. ; 
and Potestas X. is explained by Gelzer (Sextus Julius 
Africanus, p. 199) as being Manetho’s X. + XI. + 
Ammenemes (16 years) = 244 years. Total, 2300. 

2 The actual total of the items given is 2260 years. 

3 Potestas XI. is Manetho’s Dynasty XII. Barbarus 
therefore gives Dynasties XII.-XVIII.: the totals (cor- 
rected by Meyer, Aeg. Chron. 99, n. 2) are—XII. 160, 
XIII. 453, XIV. 184, XV. 284, XVI. 518, XVII. 151, 


20 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 4 


I. Thereafter he [Manetho] gave an account of the 
kings who were Spirits of the Dead, calling them also 
Demigods, . . . who reigned for 2100 years: he 
called them “ very brave ” (Heroes). 

II. Mineus and seven of his descendants reigned 
for 253 years.} 

III. Bochus and eight other kings reigned for 302 

years. 

IV. Necherocheus and seven other kings for 214 

years. 
V. Similarly seventeen other kings for 277 years. 

VI. Similarly twenty-one other kings for 258 years. 

VII. Othoi and seven other kings for 203 years. 
VIII. Similarly fourteen other kings for 140 years. 

IX. Similarly twenty other kings for 409 years. 

X. Similarly seven other kings for 204 years. 


Here ends the First Book of Manetho, which 
contains a period of 2100 years.” 


XI.3 A dynasty of kings of Diospolis, for 60 years. 
XII. A dynasty of kings of Bubastus, for 153 
years. 


XVIII. 262 (+ XIX. 209). Sum total for Book II. 
2221 years: οἵ. Fr. 55 Africanus, 56 Eus. (Arm.), 2121 
years. 

The names of Potestates XII.-XVII., or Dynasties 
XIII.-XVIII., come from some other source than 
Manetho: the Tanites of Potestas XIII. or Dynasty XIV. 
appear to correspond with the Hyksés, just as in the 
Book of Séthis (App. IV.); while others may be local 
dynasties of the Hyksés age. The kings of Hermupolis 
(Potestas XVII.) apparently denote the kings of the 
Eighteenth Dynasty, whose names indicate the cult of the 
Moon-deities "Ioh and Théth of Hermupolis (Meyer, 
Gesch.® I. ii. p. 326). 


21 


Fr. 4, 5 MANETHO 


XIII. Potestas Tanitorum annos CLXXXIV. 
XIV. Potestas Sebennitorum annos CCX XIV. 
XV. Potestas Memfitorum annos CCCXVIII. 
XVI. Potestas [liopolitorum annos CCX XI. 

XVII. Potestas Ermupolitorum annos CCLX. 


Usque ad septimam decimam potestatem secun- 
dum scribitur tomum,! ut docet numerum habentem 
annos mille quingentos XX. MHaec sunt potestates 
Aegyptiorum. 


Fr. 5. Matatas, Chronographia, p. 25 (ΜΙΟΝΕ, 
Patrologia Graeca, Vol. 97). 


Ταῦτα δὲ τὰ παλαιὰ καὶ ἀρχαῖα βασίλεια τῶν 
Αἰγυπτίων Μανέθων συνεγράψατο" ἐν οἷς συγ- 
γράμμασιν αὐτοῦ ἐμφέρεται ἄλλως λέγεσθαι τὰς 
ἐπωνυμίας τῶν πέντε πλανητῶν ἀστέρων. Τὸν 
γὰρ λεγόμενον Κρόνον ἀστέρα ἐκάλουν τὸν λάμ- 

\ \ A ‘ / ‘ \ mM 
ποντα, Tov δὲ 4ιὸς τὸν φαέθοντα, τὸν δὲ “Apeos 
τὸν πυρώδη, τὸν δὲ ‘Adpoditns τὸν κάλλιστον, 
τὸν δὲ “Ἑρμοῦ τὸν στίλβοντα: ἅτινα μετὰ ταῦτα 
Σωτάτης ὁ σοφώτατος ἡρμήνευσε. Cf. id., p. 59: 
Αἰγυπτίων δὲ ἐβασίλευσε πρῶτος βασιλεὺς τῆς 

“ “- Ul ca ~ A ε ΑἹ Ἁ 
φυλῆς τοῦ Χάμ, υἱοῦ Νῶε, Φαραὼ ὁ καὶ Ναραχὼ 


1MS. totum. Frick restores the original Greek as 
fo.lows: μέχρι τῆς ιζ΄ δυναστείας ὁ δεύτερος γράφεται τόμος, ὡς 
δηλοῖ ὁ ἀριθμός, ἔχων ἔτη καφκ΄. 


1 The actual total of the items given is 1420 years. 
* 4407 codd. 


22 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 4,5 


XIII. A dynasty of kings of Tanis, for 184 years. 
XIV. A dynasty of kings of Sebennytus, for 224 
years. 
XV. A dynasty of kings of Memphis, for 318 
years. 
XVI. A dynasty of kings of Héliopolis, for 221 
years. 
XVII. A dynasty of kings of Hermupolis, for 260 


years. 


The Second Book continues the record down to the 
Seventeenth Dynasty, and comprises 1520 years.' 
These are the Egyptian dynasties. 


Fr. 5 (from the Chronicle of Malalas). 


[After recording the reigns of Héphaestus (1680 
days), Hélios (4477 * days), Sésis, Osiris, Horus, and 
Thulis, Malalas adds :] 

These ancient reigns of early Egyptian kings are 
recorded by Manetho, and in his writings it is stated 
that the names of the five planets are given in other 
forms : Cronos [Saturn] they used to call the shining 
star; Zeus [Jupiter], the radiant star [Phaethon]; 
Arés [Mars], the fiery star; Aphrodité [Venus], the 
fairest; Hermés [Mercury], the glittering star. 
These names were later explained by the wise 
Sétatés [? Sdtadés or Palaephatus *]. 

The first king of Egypt belonged to the tribe of 
Cham [Ham], Noah’s son; he was Pharadh, who 
was also called Naracho. 


3 Palaephatus of Egypt, or Athens, wrote on Egyptian 
theology and mythology, c. 200 B.c.,—more than seven 
centuries earlier than Malalas himself (c. 4.0. 491-578). 


23 


Fr. 5, 6 MANETHO 


καλούμενος. Τὰ οὖν πρὸ τούτου παλαιὰ βασίλεια 
Αἰγυπτίων ἐξέθετο Μανέθων ὃ σοφώτατος, ὡς 
προείρηται. 


Fr. 6. Syncellus, p. 99. 


᾿Επειδὴ δὲ τῶν ἀπὸ Meorpain Αἰγυπτιακῶν 
δυναστειῶν ' of χρόνοι ἕως Νεκταναβῶ χρειώδεις 
τυγχάνουσιν ἐν πολλοῖς τοῖς περὶ τὰς χρονικὰς 
καταγινομένοις ζητήσεις, αὐταὶ δὲ παρὰ Μανεθῶ 
ληφθεῖσαι τοῖς ἐκκλησιαστικοῖς ἱστορικοῖς δια- 
πεφωνημένως κατά τε τὰς αὐτῶν προσηγορίας καὶ 
τὴν ποσότητα τῶν χρόνων τῆς βασιλείας ἐκδέδον- 
ται, ἐπὶ τίνος τε αὐτῶν ᾿Ιωσὴφ ἡγεμόνευσε τῆς 
Αἰγύπτου καὶ μετ᾽ αὐτὸν 6 θεόπτης Μωῦσῆς τῆς 
mS A >? ? /, / «ε / > 
τοῦ ᾿Ισραὴλ ἐξ Αἰγύπτου πορείας ἡγήσατο, avay- 
καῖον ἡγησάμην δύο τῶν ἐπισημοτάτων ἐκδόσεις 
> / ‘ 4 > / / 
ἐκλέξασθαι καὶ ταύτας ἀλλήλαις παραθέσθαι, 
"4 ~ , \ ~ > > A Ed / 
φρικανοῦ τέ φημι καὶ τοῦ μετ᾽ αὐτὸν Εὐσεβίου 
~ , ͵ ¢ Ἃ \ > / 
τοῦ [Παμφίλου καλουμένου, ws av τὴν ἐγγίζουσαν 
τῇ γραφικῇ ἀληθείᾳ δόξαν ὀρθῶς ἐπιβάλλων τις 3 
καταμάθοι, τοῦτο πρό γε πάντων εἰδὼς ἀκριβῶς, 
ὅτι Ἀφρικανὸς μὲν εἴκοσιν ἔτη προστίθησιν ἐν τοῖς 
ἀπὸ ‘Addap ἕως τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ χρόνοις, καὶ ἀντὶ 
Popp’ ‘Bote ἔτη βούλεται εἶναι, ὅπερ οὐ δοκεῖ 
καλῶς € ἔχειν. Εὐσέβιος. δὲ Popp’ ὑγιῶς ἔθετο καὶ 
ὁμοφώνως τῇ γραφῇ. ἐν δὲ τοῖς ἀπὸ τοῦ κατα- 
~ > / , ΄σ ~ 3 Ἁ 
κλυσμοῦ ἀμφότεροι διήμαρτον ἕως τοῦ Ἀβραὰμ 


1 δυναστειῶν Bunsen: ἐτῶν MSS. 2 τις add. m. 


24 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) _ FR. 5,6 


Now, the ancient reigns in Egypt before King 
Naraché were set forth by the wise Manetho, as has 
already been mentioned. 


Fr. 6 (from Syncellus), 


Since a knowledge of the periods of the Egyptian 
dynasties from Mestraim! down to Nectanabé ? is 
on many occasions needful to those who occupy 
themselves with chronological investigations, and 
since the dynasties taken from Manetho’s History 
are set forth by ecclesiastical historians with dis- 
crepancies in respect both to the names of the kings 
and the length of their reigns, and also as to who 
was king when Joseph was governor of Egypt, and 
in whose reign thereafter Moses,—he who saw God,— 
led the Hebrews in their exodus from Egypt, I have 
judged it necessary to select two of the most famous 
recensions and to set them side by side—I mean the 
accounts of Africanus and of the later Eusebius, the 
so-called “ son ” of Pamphilus,—so that with proper 
application one may apprehend the opinion which 
approaches nearest to Scriptural truth. It must, 
above all, be strictly understood that Africanus 
increases by 20 years the period from Adam to the 
Flood, and instead of 2242 years he makes it out to 
be 2262 years, which appears to be incorrect. On 
the other hand, Eusebius keeps to the sound reckon- 
ing of 2242 years in agreement with Scripture. In 
regard to the period from the Flood down to 
Abraham and Moses, both have gone astray by 130 


1See p. 7 n. 2. 
* Nectanab6é or Nectanebus, the last king of Dynasty 


25 


Fr. 6 MANETHO 


καὶ Mwiicéws ἔτεσι pd’ τοῦ δευτέρου [Καϊνᾶν υἱοῦ 
"A 10 ‘ ~ ~ ~ , A ~ θ 4, 
ppakad καὶ γενεᾷ μιᾷ, TH ιγ΄, mapa τῷ θείῳ 
εὐαγγελιστῇ Λουκᾷ, ἀπὸ ᾿Αδὰμ κειμένῃ. ἀλλ᾽ ὁ 
\ "4 ‘ > - > ‘ "Ada 5 - 
μὲν Ἀφρικανὸς ἐν τοῖς ἀπὸ ‘Adau προστεθεῖσιν 
αὐτῷ καὶ ἐπὶ τὸν κατακλυσμὸν ἔτεσιν Kk’ προαφήρ- 
παξε ταῦτα, καὶ ἐν τοῖς τοῦ Καϊνᾶν καὶ τῶν μετέ- 
’ ’ / A \ σ > 3 
meta pe μόνα λείπεται. διὸ καὶ ἕως ᾿Αβραὰμ, 
πρώτου ἔτους γσβ'΄ ἔτη ἐστοιχείωσεν. ὁ δὲ 
Εὐσέβιος ὁλοκλήρως τὰ pr’ ὑφελών, γρπδ' ἕως 
’ὔ ” > ‘ 55 
πρώτου ἔτους ᾿Αβραὰμ ἐξέδωκε. 


KATA A®PIKANON. 
Περὶ τῶν [pera τὸν κατακλυσμὸν 
Αἰγύπτου δυναστειῶν, ὡς ὁ Ἀφρικανός. 
a’ Μετὰ νέκυας τοὺς ἡμιθέους πρώτη βασιλεία 3 
καταριθμεῖται βασιλέων ὀκτώ, ὧν πρῶτος 


1 Bracketed by Miiller. 2 δυναστεία Boeckh. 
1 Arphaxad, son of Shem: O.7. Genesis x. 22. “ Ar- 


haxad”’ is probably a Mesopotamian name (W. F. 
Albright, The Archaeology of Palestine and the Bible 3, 
1932-3, p. 139). 

2Ν.Τ. Luke iii. 36. 

3 Eusebius reckoned 2242 years from Adam to the 
Flood, and 942 years from the Flood to Abraham. 

4 Dynasties I. and II., the Thinites: c. 3200-c. 2780 B.c. 

Note.—The dates which have been adopted throughout 
this book are those of Eduard Meyer, except where another 
authority is specified. Meyer’s revised dates (as in 
Die Altere Chronologie . . ., 1931) may conveniently be 
found in G. Steindorff’s chapter on Ancient History in 
Baedeker®, pp. ci. ff. In the Cambridge Ancient History, 
vol. i., H. R. Hall gives for the dynasties a series of dates 


26 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) FR. 6 


years belonging to the second Cainan, son of 
Arphaxad,' even one generation, the thirteenth, from 
Adam, as it is recorded by the divine evangelist 
Luke.? But Africanus, in the 20 years which he 
added between Adam and the Flood, anticipated 
this ; and in the period of Cainan and his successors, 
only 110 years remain. Hence, down to the first 
year of Abraham he reckoned 3202 years; but 
Eusebius, completely omitting those 130 years, gave 
3184 years * as far as Abraham’s first year. 


Dynasty I. 
AccorDING To AFRICANUS. 


Here is the account which Africanus gives of the 
dynasties of Egypt [after the Flood]. 


1. In succession to the spirits of the Dead, the 
Demigods,—the first royal house * numbers 
eight kings, the first of whom Ménés* of 


which differ from those of Breasted and the German 
School: he assigns earlier dates to the first twelve 
dynasties, e.g. Dynasty I. c. 3500 B.c. A. Scharff, on the 
other hand, dates the beginning of Dynasty I. c. 3000 B.c. 
(Journ. of Eg. Arch. xiv., 1928, pp. 275 f.). 

Dynasty I. For the identifications of Manetho’s 
kings with monumental and other evidence, see Meyer, 
Geschichte des Altertums δ, I. ii. p. 140: he identifies (1) 
Ménés, (2) Atoti I., II., III., (5) Usaphais, (6) Miebis. 

(3) Kenkenés and (5) Usaphais are two names of the 
same king : see Newberry and Wainwright, “King Udymu 
(Den) and the Palermo Stone” in Ancient Egypt, 1914, 

. 148 ff. 
i On Ménés (c. 3200 B.c.) see P. E. Newberry in Winifred 
Brunton’s Great Ones of Ancient Egypt, 1929: Min in Hero- 
dotus, ii. 4. 
27 


FR. 6 MANETHO 


Μήνης Owirns ἐβασίλευσεν ἔτη Ep’: 
ὑπὸ ἱπποποτάμου διαρπαγεὶς διεφθάρη. 
β΄ Ἄθωθις υἱός, ἔτη νζ΄’, ὃ τὰ ἐν Μέμφει βασί- 
λεια οἰκοδομήσας" οὗ φέρονται βίβλοι ἀνα- 
τομικαί, ἰατρὸς γὰρ ἢ ἦν. 
y’ Κενκένης υἱός, ἔτη λα΄. 
δ΄ Οὐενέφης υἱός, ἔτη κγ΄ ἐφ᾽ οὗ λιμὸς κα- 
τέσχε τὴν Αἴγυπτον μέγας. οὗτος τὰς 
περὶ Κωχώμην ἤγειρε πυραμίδας. 
ε Οὐσαφαῖδος υἱός, ἔτη ere 
ς΄ Μιεβιδὸς vids, ἔτη xs’. 
ζ΄ Σεμέμψης υἱός, ἔτη wy’: ἐφ᾽ οὗ φθορὰ 
μεγίστη κατέσχε τὴν Αἴγυπτον. 
η΄ Βιηνεχὴς υἱός, ἔτη Ks’. 
Ὁμοῦ, ἔτη avy’. 
Τὰ τῆς πρώτης δυναστείας οὕτω πως καὶ Εὐσέ- 
βιος ὡς 6 Ἀφρικανὸς ἐξέθετο. 





1This (Anc. Egyptian Theny), near Girga, about 310 
miles S. of Cairo (Baedeker®, p. 231), the capital of the 
nome of This, and the seat of the First and Second Dyn- 
asties. The cemetery of the First Dynasty kings was 
near Abydos: see Petrie, Royal Tombs, i. and ii., and 
Baedeker 8, p. 260. 

2 For a representation of a king fighting with a hippo- 
potamus, see a seal-impression in Petrie, Royal Tombs, 
II. vii. 6; and for a hippopotamus-hunt, see a year-name 
of Udymu, Schafer, Palermo Stone, p. 20, No. 8. 

With the whole story, cf. the miraculous deliverance 
of Ménas by a crocodile in Diodorus Siculus, i. 89. 

3 Building of palace at Memphis—by Min or Ménés, 
Herodotus, ii. 99, Josephus, Ant. viil. 6, 2, 155; by his 
son Athéthis, says Manetho; by Uchoreus, Diod. i. 50. 


28 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 6 


This! reigned for 62 years. He was carried 
off by a hippopotamus? and perished. 

2. Athdéthis, his son, for 57 years. He built the 
palace at Memphis;* and his anatomical 
works 4 are extant, for he was a physician. 

3. Kenkenés, his son, for 31 years. 

4. Uenephés, his son, for 23 years. In his reign a 
great famine seized Egypt. He erected the 
pyramids near Kéchémé.* 

5. Usaphaidos,® his son, for 20 years. 

6. Miebidos,® his son, for 26 years. 

7. Semempsés, his son, for 18 years. In his reign 
a very great calamity befell Egypt. 

8. Biénechés, his son, for 26 years. 


Total, 253 years.’ 


Eusebius also sets out the details of the First 
Dynasty in much the same way as Africanus. 


4For the later study of anatomy (including, perhaps, 
the practice of vivisection) by kings of Ptolemaic Egypt, 
see G. Lumbroso, Glossario, s.v. ᾿Ανατομική. 

5 Kéch6mé has been identified with Sakkara, and ex- 
cavations carried out there in the Archaic Cemetery from 
1935 by W. B. Emery (assisted by Zaki Saad) have gone 
far to confirm Manetho. Several tombs which date from 
the First Dynasty were discovered at Sakkara in 1937 and 
1938. One of these, the tomb of Nebetka under the 5th 
king of Dynasty I., was found to contain in its interior 
a stepped-pyramid construction of brickwork: during the 
building the form of the tomb was altered to a palace- 
facade mastaba. 

‘These forms are really the genitives of the names 
Usaphais and Miebis. 

7 The actual total of the items given is 263 years. 


29 


Fr. 7 MANETHO 


Fr. 7 (a). Syncellus, p. 102. KATA EYZEBION. 


7 ‘ ~ ‘ A A ‘ 1 
ept τῶν [μετὰ τὸν κατακλυσμὸν] 

> , ~ e > , 
Αἰγυπτίων δυναστειῶν, ὡς Εὐσέβιος. 

Μετὰ νέκυας καὶ τοὺς ἡμιθέους πρώτην δυνα- 
στείαν καταριθμοῦσι βασιλέων ὀκτώ ὧν γέγονε 

’ὔ’ Δ / > ~ « / > 4? Φ 
Μήνης, ὃς διασήμως αὐτῶν ἡγήσατο. ἀφ᾽ οὗ 
τοὺς ἐξ ἑκάστου γένους βασιλεύσαντας ἀναγρά- 
ψομεν ὧν " ἡ διαδοχὴ τοῦτον ἔχει τὸν τρόπον᾽ 


‘ M ’ὔ Θ / \ ε , > / ‘ 
a’ Μήνης Θινίτης καὶ οὗ τούτου ἀπόγονοι [ιζ΄, 
ἐν ἄλλῳ δὲ] 8 ζ7, ὃν Ἡρόδοτος Μῆνα 
> / > / μ᾿ , Α͂Ό, 
ὠνόμασεν, ἐβασίλευσεν ἔτεσιν ξ΄. οὗτος 
ὑπερόριον στρατείαν ἐποιήσατο καὶ ἔνδοξος 
Θ ε A 4 ὃ ΝΡ / « / θ 
ἐκρίθη, ὑπὸ" δὲ ἱπποποτάμου ἡρπάσθη. 
’ Ἄθωθις ὃ τούτου υἱὸς ἦρξεν ἔτεσιν Kl’, καὶ 
71P 
> 
τὰ ἐν Μέμφει βασίλεια ῴὠκοδόμησεν, ἰατρι- 
4 > / A / > Ἁ 
κήν τε ἐξήσκησε καὶ βίβλους ἀνατομικὰς 
συνέγραψε. 

γ΄ Κενκένης 6 τούτου vids, ἔτη AQ’. 

5’ Οὐενέφης, ἔτη μβ΄. ἐφ᾽ οὗ λιμὸς κατέσχε 
τὴν χώραν, ὃς καὶ τὰς πυραμίδας τὰς περὶ 
Κωχώμην ἤγειρε. 

ε΄ Οὐσαφάϊς," ἔτη x’. 

ς΄ Νιεβάϊς," ἔτη xs’. 


1 Bracketed by Miller. 2 Vulgo ἀναγραψαμένων. 
* Bracketed by Gelzer. 4 ἵσπου A, ἵππου B. 
5 Οὐσαφαής A. 5 Νιεβαής A. 


30 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 7 


Fr. 7 (a) (from Syncellus). AccoRDING To EvusEsivs.! 


Here is the account which Eusebius gives of the 
Egyptian dynasties [after the Flood]. 

In succession to the Spirits of the Dead and the 
Demigods, the Egyptians reckon the First Dynasty 
to consist of eight kings. Among these was Ménés, 
whose rule in Egypt was illustrious. I shall record 
the rulers of each race from the time of Ménés ; their 
succession is as follows : 


1. Ménés of This, with his [17, or in another 
copy] 7 descendants,—the king called Mén by 
Herodotus,—reigned for 60 years. He made 
a foreign expedition and won renown, but 
was carried off by a hippopotamus. 

2. Athdthis, his son, ruled for 27 years. He built 
the palace at Memphis ; he practised medicine 
and wrote anatomical books. 

3. Kenkenés, his son, for 39 years. 

4. Uenephés, for 42 years. In his reign famine 
seized the land. He built the pyramids near 
Kéchéme. 

5. Usaphais, for 20 years. 

6. Niebais, for 26 years. 


1 The version (transmitted to us by Syncellus) which 
Eusebius gives of the Epitome of Manetho shows con- 
siderable differences from Africanus, both in the names 
of kings and in the length of their reigns. Peet (Egypt 
and the Old Testament, pp. 25 f.) says: ‘‘ The astonishing 
variations between their figures are an eloquent testimony 
to what may happen to numbers in a few centuries through 
textual corruption.’”’ Petrie (History of Egypt, i. p. viii) 
compares the corruptions in such late Greek chronicles 
as those of the Ptolemies (c.v./A.D.). 


31 


Fr. 7 MANETHO 


i Σεμ ἔμψη om ἔτη (η΄ " ἐφ᾽ οὗ πολλὰ παράσημα 
ἐγένετο καὶ μεγίστη φθορά. 

η΄ Οὐβιένθης, ἔτη κε΄. 

Οἱ πάντες ἐβασίλευσαν ἔτη σνβ'. 


(0) Eusesius, Chronica I. (Armenian Version), 
pp- 94 sqq. 


Post manes atque heroas primam dynastiam 
numerant VIII regum, quorum primus fuit Menes,} 
gloria regni administrandi praepollens: a quo exorsi 
singulas regnantium familias diligenter scribemus, 
quarum successiva series ita contexitur : 


Menes Thinites eiusque posteri septem (quem 
Herodotus Mina nuncupavit). Hic annis 
XXX regnavit. Idem et extra regionis 
suae fines cum exercitu progressus est, et 
gloria rerum gestarum inclaruit. Ab hippo- 
potamo genio? raptus est. 

Athothis, huius filius, regno potitus est annis 
XXVIII. Is regia sibi palatia Memphi con- 
struxit, et medicam item artem coluit, quin 
et libros de ratione secandorum oe 
scripsit. 

Cencenes eius filius, annis XX XIX. 

Vavenephis, annis XLII, cuius aetate fames 
regionem corripuit. Is pyramidas prope Cho 
oppidum ὃ excitavit. 

1 Corr. edd.: MSS. Memes. 

2 Miiller conjectures the Greek original to have been: 

ὑπὸ δαίμονος δὲ ἱπποποτάμουι But the Armenian text, liter- 


ally translated, is: ‘‘ by a horse-shaped river-monster’”’ 
(Karst, Margoliouth). 


32 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 7 


7. Semempsés, for 18 years. In his reign there 
were many portents and a very great calamity. 
8. Ubienthés, for 26 years. 


The total of all reigns, 252 years.} 


(b) ARMENIAN VERSION OF EUSEBIUS. 


In succession to the Spirits of the Dead and the 
Demigods, the Egyptians reckon the First Dynasty 
to consist of eight kings. The first of these was 
Ménés, who won high renown in the government of 
his kingdom. Beginning with him, I shall carefully 
record the royal families one by one : their succession 
in detail is as follows : 


Ménés of This (whom Herodotus named Min) and 
his seven descendants. He reigned for 30 
years, and advanced with his army beyond 
the frontiers of his realm, winning renown by 
his exploits. He was carried off by a hippo- 
potamus god (3). 

Athothis, his son, held the throne for 27 years. He 
built for himself a royal palace at Memphis, 
and also practised the art of medicine, writing 
books on the method of anatomy. 

Cencenes, his son, for 39 years. 

Vavenephis, for 42 years. In his time famine 
seized the land. He reared pyramids near 
the town of Cho. 


1 The actual total of the items given is 258 years. 
2 See note 2 on the text. 


3 Apparently = X@ κώμην, tor Κωχώμην. 


Fr. 7, 8 MANETHO 


Usaphais, annis XX. 

Niebais, annis X X VI. 

Mempses, annis XVIII. Sub hoc multa prodigia 
itemque maxima lues acciderunt. 


Vibenthis,! annis X XVI. 


Summa dominationis annorum CCLII. 


Fr. 8. Syncellus, p. 101. KATA A®PIKANON. 


Δευτέρα δυναστεία Θινιτῶν βασιλέων 
> / - ~ / ” , 27? a / 
ἐννέα, ὧν πρῶτος Βοηθός, ἔτη An’: ἐφ᾽ οὗ χάσμα 

\ / > / \ > fA / 
κατὰ Βούβαστον ἐγένετο καὶ ἀπώλοντο πολλοί. 

B’ Καιέχως, ἔτη AO’: ἐφ᾽ οὗ οἱ βόες “Ams ἐν 

Μέμφει καὶ Μνεῦις ἐν ᾿“Ηλιουπόλει καὶ ὁ 
Μενδήσιος τράγος ἐνομίσθησαν εἶναι θεοί. 


1One MS. (6) has Vibethis. 





1 Karst gives 270 years as the total transmitted in the 
Armenian version. The total of the items as given above 
is 228 years. 

* Dynasty II.—to c. 2780 B.c. For identifications with 
the Monuments, etc., see Meyer, Geschichte δ, I. ii. p. 146: 
he identifies (1) Boéthos, (2) Kaiech6és or Kechéus, (3) 
Binéthris, (4) Tlas, (5) Sethenés, (7) Nephercherés, 
(8) Sesdédchris. For (1) to (δ), see G. A. Reisner, The 
Development of the Egyptian Tomb, 1936, p. 123. 

3 Bubastus or Bubastis (Baedeker 8, p. 181), near Zagazig 
in the Delta: Anc. Egyptian Per-Baste, the Pi-beseth of 


34 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) FR. 7,8 


Usaphais, for 20 years. 

Niebais, for 26 years. 

Mempses, for 18 years. In his reign many portents 
and a great pestilence occurred. 

Vibenthis, for 26 years. 


Total for the dynasty, 252 years.! 


Dynasty II. 


Fr. 8 ( from Syncellus). AccorpiNc To AFRICANUS. 


The Second Dynasty” consists of nine kings of 
This. The first was Boéthos, for 38 years. In his 
reign a chasm opened at Bubastus,? and many 


perished. 


2. Kaiechés, for 39 years. In his reign the bulls,* 
Apis at Memphis and Mnevis at Heliopolis, 
and the Mendesian goat were worshipped as 


gods. 


Ezekiel xxx. 17. See also Herodotus, ii. 60, 1371. The 
kings of Dynasty XXII. resided at Bubastis. 

Earthquakes have always been rare in Egypt (Euseb., 
Chron. Graec. p. 42, 1. 25; Pliny, H.N. i. 82); but 
Bubastis is situated in an unstable region: see H. G. 
Lyons in Cairo Scientific Journal, i. (1907), p. 182. It 
stands on an earthquake line, which runs to Crete. A 
deep boring made at Bubastis failed to reach rock. 

* The worship of Apis is earlier even than Dynasty II. : 
see Palermo Stone, Schafer, p. 21, No. 12 (in reign of 
Udymu). For Apis, see Herodotus, ii. 153, and Diod. 
Sic. i. 84, 85 (where all three animals are mentioned). 
The goat was a cult animal in very early times: ¢f. 
Herodotus, ii. 46. 


35 


Fr. 8, 9 MANETHO 


γ΄ BivwOpis, ἔτη μζ΄. ἐφ᾽ οὗ ἐκρίθη τὰς 
γυναῖκας βασιλείας γέρας ἔχειν. 
ὃ λᾶς, Ἐπ if’. 
ε΄ Σεθένης, ἔτη pa’. 
ς΄ Χαίρης, én i’. 
ζ΄ Νεφερχέρης, ἔτη κε" ἐφ᾽ οὗ μυθεύεται 
τὸν Νεῖλον μέλιτι κεκραμένον ἡμέρας ἕν- 
δεκα ῥυῆναι. 
‘ ‘ ” , a σ΄ > - ͵ 
η΄ Σέσωχρις, ἔτη μη΄, ὃς ὕψος εἶχε πηχῶν ε΄, 
παλαιστῶν ' γ΄. 
θ΄ Χενερής, ἔτη λ΄. 
Ὁμοῦ, ἔτη τβ΄. 
« ~ 4 \ 4 , 4 A 
od πρώ 
Ομοῦ πρώτης καὶ δευτέρας δυναστείας [μετὰ τὸν 
κατακλυσμὸν) ἔτη φνε΄ κατὰ τὴν δευτέραν ἔκδοσιν 
᾿Αφρικανοῦ. 


Fr. 9. Syncellus, p. 103. KATA ΕὙΣΕΒΙΟΝ. 


Δευτέρα δυναστεία βασιλέων ἐννέα. 

Πρῶτος Βῶχος, ἐφ᾽ οὗ χάσμα κατὰ Βούβαστον 
ἐγένετο, καὶ πολλοὶ ἀπώλοντο. 

Μεθ᾿ ὃν δεύτερος Καιχῶος,2 ὅτε καὶ 6 “Ams καὶ 
ὁ Μνεῦις, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὁ Μενδήσιος τράγος θεοὶ 
ἐνομίσθησαν. 


1 Boeckh, Bunsen: MSS. πλάτος. 
2 Miller: MSS. μεθ᾽ ὃν καὶ δεύτερος XGos. 


36 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) FR. 8, 9 


3. Binéthris, for 47 years. In his reign it was 
decided that women ! might hold the kingly 
office. 

4. Tlas, for 17 years. 

5. Sethenés, for 41 years. 

6. Chairés, for 17 years. 

7. Nephercherés, for 25 years. In his reign, the 
story goes, the Nile flowed blended with 
honey for 11 days. 

8. Seséchris, for 48 years: his stature was 5 cubits, 
3 palms.” 

9. Chenerés, for 30 years. 


Total, 302 years. 


Total for the First and Second Dynasties [after the 
Flood], 555 years, according to the second edition of 
Africanus. 


Fr. 9 ( from Syncellus). Accorpinc To EvseBIvs. 


The Second Dynasty consisted of nine kings. 
First came Bochos, in whose reign a chasm opened 
at Bubastus, and many perished. 

He was succeeded by Kaichéos (or Chéos), in 
whose time Apis and Mnevis and also the Mendesian 
goat were worshipped as gods. 


1 No queens’ names are recorded in the Royal Lists 
of Abydos and Karnak. Herodotus (ii. 100) records 
one queen: Diod. Sic. i. 44 (from Hecataeus) reckons 
the number of Egyptian queens as five. 

* The stature of each king is said to be noted in the 
records mentioned by Diodorus Siculus, i. 44, 4. Cf. 
infra, Fr. 35, No. 3, App. II. No. 6 (p. 216). 


37 


Fr. 9, 10 MANETHO 


γ΄ Βίοφις, ἐφ᾽ οὗ ἐκρίθη καὶ τὰς γυναῖκας 
βασιλείας γέρας ἔχειν. καὶ μετὰ τούτους 
ἄλλοι τρεῖς, ἐφ’ ὧν οὐδὲν παράσημον 
ἐγένετο. 

ζ΄ ᾿Επὶ δὲ τοῦ ἑβδόμου μυθεύεται τὸν Νεῖλον 
μέλιτι κεκραμένον ἡμέραις ἕνδεκα ῥυῆναι. 

η΄ Μεθ᾿ ὃν “Σέσωχρις -, ἔτη» μη΄, ὃς λέγεται 
γεγονέναι ὕψος ἔχων πηχῶν ε΄, παλαιστῶν 
γ' τὸ μέγεθος. 

θ' ᾿Επὶ δὲ τοῦ & οὐδὲν ἀξιομνημόνευτον ὑπῆρχεν. 
Οἱ καὶ ἐβασίλευσαν ἔτεσι σηζ' 


Ὅ ~ / \ ὃ ͵ ,ὔ Μ ΤΣ 
μοῦ πρώτης καὶ δευτέρας δυναστείας ἔτη Py 
κατὰ τὴν ἔκδοσιν Εὐσεβίου. 


Fr. 10. Ευβεβιῦβ, Chronica I. (Armenian Version), 
p- 96. 


Secunda dynastia regum IX. 

Primus Bochus: sub eo specus ingens Bubasti 
subsedit multosque mortales hausit. 

Post eum Cechous, quo tempore! Apis et Mnevis 
atque Mendesius hircus dii esse putabantur. 

Deinde Biophis, sub quo lege statutum est, ut 
feminae quoque regiam dignitatem obtinerent. 

Tum alii tres, quorum aetate nullum insigne 
facinus patratum est. 

Sub septimo mythici aiunt flumen Nilum moelle 
simul et aqua fluxisse undecim diebus. 


1 Miller: MS. idemque. 
38 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 9, 10 


3. Biophis, in whose reign it was decided that 
women also might hold the kingly office. In 
the reigns of the three succeeding kings, no 
notable event occurred. 

7. In the seventh reign, as the story goes, the Nile 
flowed blended with honey for 11 days. 

8. Next, Seséchris was king for 48 years: the 
greatness of his stature is said to have been 
5 cubits 3 palms. 

9. In the ninth reign there happened no event 
worthy of mention. These kings ruled for 
297 years. 


Total for the First and Second Dynasties, 549 years, 
according to the recension of Eusebius. 


Fr. 10. ARMENIAN VERSION OF EUSEBIUS. 


The Second Dynasty consisted of nine kings. 

First came Béchus, in whose reign a huge hole 
opened at Bubastus, and swallowed up many 
persons. 

He was succeeded by Cechous, in whose time 
Apis and Mnevis and the Mendesian goat were 
worshipped as gods. 

Next came Biophis, in whose reign it was decreed 
by law that women also might hold the royal office. 

In the reigns of the three succeeding kings, no 
notable event occurred. 

Under the seventh king fabulists tell how the 
river Nile flowed with honey as well as water for 
11 days. 


39 


ΕΒ. 10,11] MANETHO 


Postea Sesochris annis XLVIII, quem aiunt quin- 
que cubitos altum, tres vero palmos latum fuisse. 

Sub nono tandem nihil memoria dignum actum 
est. 

Hi regnaverunt annis CCXCVII. 


Fr. 11. Syncellus, p. 104. A@PIKANOY. 


Τρίτη δυναστεία Μεμφιτῶν βασιλέων 
> / an / 27> 4 
ἐννέα, av a’ Νεχερώφης, ἔτη Kn’: ἐφ᾽ οὗ 
Wiguesta ἀπέστησαν Αἰγυπτίων, καὶ τῆς σελήνης παρὰ 

λόγον αὐξηθείσης διὰ δέος ἑαυτοὺς παρέδοσαν. 
B’ Τόσορθρος, ἔτη KO’, «ἐφ᾽ οὗ ᾿Ϊμούθης 3» 

“Ὁ 3 \ \ ας 9 > , 

οὗτος Ἀσκληπιὸς «παρὰ τοῖς 5) Αἰγυπτίοις 


1 Νεχορόφης Α. 3 Conj. Sethe. 





1 For this absurd perversion of the Greek words, see 
p- 36 n. 1: πλάτος was added, perhaps as a corruption 
of παλαιστῶν, and replaced μέγεθος in the Greek version of 
Eusebius. 

2 The Old Kingdom, Dynasties III.-V.: c. 2780-c. 2420 B.c. 

Dynasty 1Π1., c. 2780-c.27208.c. For identifications with 
monumental and other evidence, see Meyer, Geschichte ὃ, 
I. ii. p. 174: he identifies (2) Tosorthos (Zoser I.—‘‘ the 
Holy ’’), and holds that (1) Necheréphés is one name 
of Kha‘sekhemui, (6) Tosertasis may be Zoser II. Atoti, 
and (9) Kerpherés may be Neferkeré‘ IT. 

8 Zoser was not the first builder with hewn stone: his 
predecessor, Kha‘sekhemui, used squared blocks of lime- 
stone for building purposes; see Petrie, Royal Tombs, 
ii. p. 13. Granite blocks had already formed the floor 
of the tomb of Udymu (Dynasty I.). 

Two tombs of Zoser are known: (1) a mastaba at Bét 
Khallaf near This (Baedeker 8, p. 231), see J. Garstang, 
Mahasna and Bét Khalléf; and (2) the famous Step 


40 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 10, 11 


Next, Sesochris ruled for 48 years: he is said to 
have been 5 cubits high and 3 palms broad.! 

Finally, under the ninth king no memorable event 
occurred. 


These kings reigned for 297 years. 


Dynasty III. 


Fr. 11 (from Syncellus). Tue Account or AFrt- 
CANUS. 


The Third Dynasty ? comprised nine kings of 
Memphis. 


1. Necheréphés, for 28 years. In his reign the 
Libyans revolted against Egypt, and when 
the moon waxed beyond reckoning, they 
surrendered in terror. 

2. Tosorthros,? for 29 years. <In his reign lived 
Imuthés,4> who because of his medical skill 
has the reputation of Asclepios among the 


Pyramid at Sakkara, which was the work o. the great 
architect Imhotep (Baedeker 8, p. 156 f.). 

‘If the emendation in the text be not accepted, the 
statement would surely be too inaccurate to be attributed 
to Manetho. The Egyptian Asclepios was Imouth or 
Imhotep of Memphis, physician and architect to King 
Zoser, afterwards deified: on Philae (now for the most 
part submerged) Ptolemy II. Philadelphus built a little 
temple to Imhotep. See Sethe, Untersuchungen, ii. 4 
(1902): J. B. Hurry, Imhotep (Oxford, 1926). 

One of the Oxyrhynchus Papyri, edited by Grenfell 
and Hunt, P. Oxy. XI. 1381, of i./a.p., has for its subject 
the eulogy of Imuthés-Asclepius: the fragment pre- 
served is part of the prelude. See G. Manteuffel, De 
Opusculis Graecis Aegypti e papyris, ostracis, lapidibusque 
collectis, 1930, No. 3. 

41 


Fr. 11, 12 MANETHO 


κατὰ τὴν ἰατρικὴν νενόμισται, καὶ τὴν διὰ 
ξεστῶν λίθων οἰκοδομίαν εὕρατο - ἀλλὰ καὶ 
γραφῆς ἐπεμελήθη. 

y’ Tvpets} erm @. 

8 Μέσωχρις, ἔτη ιζ΄. 

ε΄ Σ᾿ ὠῦφις, ἔτη ws’. 

ς΄ Τοσέρτασις, ἔτη fh’. 

ζ΄ Ἄχης, ἔτη pp’. 

Σήφουρις, «ἔτη» λ΄, 

θ’ Κερφέρης, ἔτη xs’. 


, 


3 


Ὅ “ Ν δ' 
μοῦ, ἔτη avd’. 
¢ A ~ ~ ~ be ‘ 
Ομοῦ τῶν τριῶν δυναστειῶν κατὰ ᾿Αφρικανὸν 


ἔτη PEO’. 


Fr. 12 (a). Syncellus, p. 106. KATA ΕὙΣΕΒΙΟΝ. 


Τρίτη δυναστεία Μεμφιτῶν βασιλέων 

ὀκτώ, 

a’ Νεχέρωχις, ἐφ᾽ οὗ Λίβυες ἀπέστησαν Αἰγυπ- 
τίων, καὶ τῆς σελήνης παρὰ λόγον αὐξη- 
θείσης διὰ δέος ἑαυτοὺς παρέδοσαν. 

B’ Μεθ᾿ ὃν Σέσορθος. .., ὃς Ἀσκληπιὸς παρὰ 
Αἰγυπτίοις ἐκλήθη διὰ τὴν ἰατρικήν. οὗτος 

\ \ \ ~ / > A 4 
καὶ τὴν διὰ ξεστῶν λίθων οἰκοδομὴν εὕρατο, 
ἀλλὰ καὶ γραφῆς" ἐπεμελήθη. 

Οἱ δὲ λοιποὶ ἕξ οὐδὲν ἀξιομνημόνευτον ἔπραξαν. 

Οἱ καὶ ἐβασίλευσαν ἔτεσιν phn’. 

« ~ ~ ~ ~ A A Ed ΄ 

Ομοῦ τῶν τριῶν δυναστειῶν κατὰ τὸν Εὐσέβιον 
” ‘ 
ἔτη ψμζ΄. 
42 


1 Τύρις A. 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 11, 12 


Egyptians, and who was the inventor of the 
art of building with hewn stone. He also 
devoted attention to writing. 
. Tyreis (or Tyris), for 7 years. 
. Mesdchris, for 17 years. 
Séyphis, for 16 years. 
. Tosertasis, for 19 years. 
. Achés, for 42 years. 
. Séphuris, for 30 years. 
- Kerpherés, for 26 years. 
Total, 214 years. 
Total for the first three dynasties, according to 
Africanus, 769 years. 


SRAANS w 


Fr. 12 (a). (from Syncellus), AccoRDING TO 
KUSEBIUs. 


The Third Dynasty consisted of eight kings of 
Memphis : 

1. Necheréchis, in whose reign the Libyans re- 
volted against Egypt, and when the moon 
waxed beyond reckoning, they surrendered 
in terror. 

2. He was succeeded by Sesorthos . . .: he was 
styled Asclepios in Egypt because of his 
medical skill. He was also the inventor of 
the art of building with hewn stone, and 
devoted attention to writing as well. 

The remaining six kings achieved nothing worthy 

of mention. These eight kings reigned for 198 years. 

Total for the first three dynasties, according to 

Eusebius, 747 years. 


43 


Fr. 12, 14 MANETHO 


(b) Eusresrus, Chronica I. (Armenian Version), 
Ρ. 96. 


Tertia dynastia Memphitarum regum VIII. 

Necherochis, sub quo Libyes ab Aegyptiis defec- 
erunt: mox intempestive! crescente luna territi ad 
obsequium reversi sunt. 

Deinde Sosorthus . . ., qui ob medicam artem 
Aesculapius ab Aegyptiis vocitatus est. Is etiam 
sectis lapidibus aedificiorum struendorum auctor 
fuit: libris praeterea scribendis curam impendit. 

Sex reliqui nihil commemorandum gesserunt. 


Regnatum est annis CXCVII. 


Fr. 14. Syncellus, p. 105. KATA A@®PIKANON. 


Τετάρτη δυναστεία Μεμφιτῶν avy- 
γενείας ἑτέρας βασιλεῖς η΄. 


1intempestive, Margoliouth; importune, Aucher; 
immaniter, Mai. 





1 Dynasty IV., c. 2720-c. 2560 B.c. For identifications 
with monumental and other evidence, see Meyer, Ge- 
schichte δ, I. ii. p. 181: he identifies (1) Séris (Snofru), (2) 
Suphis I. (Cheops, Khufu), then after Dedefré‘ (not men- 
tioned by Manetho), (3) Suphis II. (Chephren), (4) Men- 
cherés (Mycerinus), and finally (an uncertain identification). 
(7) Sebercherés (Shepseskaf). For (3) Chephren and 


44 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 12, 14 


(b) ARMENIAN VERSION OF EUSEBIUs. 


The Third Dynasty consisted of eight kings of 
Memphis : 

Necherochis, in whose reign the Libyans revolted 
against Egypt: later when the moon waxed un- 
seasonably, they were terrified and returned to 
their allegiance. 

Next came Sosorthus...: he was_ styled 
Aesculapius by the Egyptians because of his medical 
skill. He was also the inventor of building with 
hewn stone ; and in addition he devoted care to the 
writing of books. 

The six remaining kings did nothing worthy of 
mention. The reigns of the whole dynasty amount 
to 197 years. 


Dynasty IV. 


Fr. 14 ( from Syncellus). Accorpinc ΤῸ AFRICANUS. 


The Fourth Dynasty! comprised eight kings of 
Memphis, belonging to a different line : 


(4) Mycerinus, Diodorus i. 64 gives the good variants 
(3) Chabryés and (4) Mencherinus. On the Chronology of 
Dynasty IV. see Reisner, Mycerinus (cf. infra, note 2), 
pp. 243 ff. Reisner reads the name Dedefré in the form 
Radedef, and identifies it with Ratoisés. 

The Greek tales of the oppression of Egypt by Cheops 
and Chephren, etc., are believed to be the inventions of 
dragomans. Cf. Herodotus, ii. 124 (contempt for the 
gods), 129 (Mycerinus), with How and Wells’s notes. 
Africanus has, moreover, acquired as a treasure the 
“sacred book’’ of Cheops. 


45 


Fr. 14 MANETHO 


a’ Σῶρις, ἔτη κθ΄. 

β' Σοῦφις, ἔτη Ey'- ὃς τὴν μεγίστην ἤγειρε 
πυραμίδα͵ ἣν φησιν ᾿Ηρόδοτος" ὑπὸ Χέοπος 
γεγονέναι. οὗτος δὲ καὶ ὑπερόπτης εἰς 
θεοὺς ἐγένετο καὶ τὴν ἱερὰν συνέγραψε 
βίβλον, ἣν ὡς μέγα χρῆμα ἐν Αἰγύπτῳ 
γενόμενος ἐκτησάμην. 

γ΄ Σοῦφις, ἔτη Es". 

& Μενχέρης, ἔτη &y’. 

ε΄ ‘Patoions, ἔτη ke’. 

ς΄ Βίχερις, ἔτη Kp’. 

ζ΄ Σεβερχέρης, ἔτη ζ΄. 

η΄ Θαμφθίς, ἔτη θ΄. 

“Ὁμοῦ, ἔτη aol’? 

ὋὉμοῦ τῶν 8’ δυναστειῶν τῶν [μετὰ τὸν κατα- 


κλυσμὸν] ἔτη αμς΄ κατ᾽ ‘Adpixavov. 


1Hdt. ii. 124. 200’ A. 





10QOn the Pyramids of Giza, see Baedeker °, pp. 133 ff. ; 
Noel F. Wheeler, ‘‘ Pyramids and their Purpose,” 
Antiquity, 1935, pp. 5-21, 161-189, 292-304; and for 
the fourth king of Dynasty IV. see G. A. Reisner, 
Mycerinus: The Temples of the Third Pyramid at Giza, 
1931. Notwithstanding their colossal dimensions and 
marvellous construction, the Pyramids have not escaped 
detraction: Frontinus (De Aquis, i. 16) contrasts “ the 


46 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 14 


1. Séris, for 29 years. 

2. Suphis [I.], for 63 years. He reared the Great 
Pyramid,’ which Herodotus says was built 
by Cheops. Suphis conceived a contempt 
for the gods: he also composed the Sacred 
Book, which I acquired in my visit to Egypt ” 
because of its high renown. 

. Suphis [11.]. for 66 years. 

. Mencherés, for 63 years. 

. Ratoisés, for 25 years. 

. Bicheris, for 22 years. 

. Sebercherés, for 7 years. 


. Thamphthis, for 9 years. 


OANA NS ὦ» 


Total, 277 years.® 
Total for the first four dynasties [after the Flood], 
1046 years according to Africanus. 


idle pyramids’ with “the indispensable structures”’ of 
the several aqueducts at Rome; and Pliny (H.N. 36, 8, 
§ 75) finds in the pyramids “ an idle and foolish ostenta- 
tion of royal wealth’”’. But the pyramids have, at any 
rate, preserved the names of their builders, especially 
Cheops, to all future ages, although, as Sir Thomas Browne 
characteristically wrote (Urn-Burial, Chap. 5): “ To : 

be but pyramidally extant is a fallacy of duration”’ . 
‘“Who can but pity the founder of the Pyramids 2? 
The modern Egyptologist says: “The Great Pyramid 
is the earliest and most impressive witness . .. to the 
final emergence of organized society from prehistoric 
chaos and local conflict’? (J. H. Breasted, History of 
Egypt, p. 119). 

2 Africanus went from Palestine to Alexandria, attracted 
by the renown of the philosopher Heraclas, Bishop of 
Alexandria: see Eusebius, Hist. Eccl. vi. 31, 2. 

2 The MS. A gives as total 274: the items add to 284. 


47 


Fr. 15, 16 MANETHO 


Fr. 15. Syneellus, p. 106. KATA EYZEBION. 


Τετάρτη δυναστεία βασιλέων if’ Μεμφιτῶν ovy- 
γενείας ἑτέρας βασιλείας. 

*Qv τρίτος Σοῦφις, ὃ τὴν μεγίστην πυραμίδα 
> / Ὁ Ἥ, / « \ Xe e 
ἐγείρας, ἥν φησιν ᾿Ηρόδοτος ὑπὸ Χέοπος γεγονέναι, 
ὃς καὶ ὑπερόπτης εἰς θεοὺς γέγονεν, ὡς μετανοή- 

1] A \ « A / / a e 

σαντα αὐτὸν τὴν ἱερὰν συγγράψαι βίβλον, ἣν ws 
μέγα χρῆμα Αἰγύπτιοι περιέπουσι. τῶν δὲ λοιπῶν 

δὲ 3 / > / a ἢ > , 
οὐδὲν ἀξιομνημόνευτον ἀνεγράφη. ot καὶ ἐβασί- 
λευσαν ἔτεσιν υμη΄. 

Ὁμοῦ τῶν δ' δυναστειῶν [μετὰ τὸν κατακλυσμὸν] 
«αρῆε΄ κατὰ Εὐσέβιον. 


Fr. 16. Eusrsius, Chronica I. (Armenian Version), 
p., 91s 


Quarta dynastia Memphitarum regum XVII ex 
alia regia familia, quorum tertius, Suphis, maximae 
pyramidis auctor, quam quidem Herodotus a Cheope 
structam ait: qui in deos ipsos superbiebat ; tum 
facti poenitens sacrum librum! conscribebat, quem 
Aegyptii instar magni thesauri habere se putant. 
De reliquis regibus nihil memorabile litteris man- 


datum est. Regnatum est annis CCCCXLVIII. 


llibros Sacrarii (Aucher), “the sanctuary books,” 
“books for the shrine.”’ 


48 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 15, 16 


Fr. 15 (from Syncellus). AccorpInc To Eusebius. 


Tne Fourth Dynasty comprised seventeen kings 
of Memphis belonging to a different royal line. 

Of these the third was Suphis, the builder of the 
Great Pyramid, which Herodotus says was built 
by Cheops. Suphis conceived a contempt for the 
gods, but repenting of this, he composed the Sacred 
Book, which the Egyptians hold in high esteem. 

Of the remaining kings no achievement worthy of 
mention has been recorded. 

This dynasty reigned for 448 years. 

Total for the first four dynasties [after the Flood], 
1195 years according to Eusebius. 


Fr. 16. ARMENIAN VERSION OF EUSEBIUS. 


The Fourth Dynasty consisted of seventeen kings 
of Memphis belonging to a different royal line. The 
third of these kings, Suphis, was the builder of the 
Great Pyramid, which Herodotus declares to have 
been built by Cheops. Suphis behaved arrogantly 
towards the gods themselves: then, in penitence, 
he composed the Sacred Book in which the Egyptians 
believe they possess a great treasure. Of the re- 
maining kings nothing worthy of mention is recorded 
in history. The reigns of the whole dynasty amount 
to 448 years. 


49 


Fr. 18, 19 MANETHO 


Fr. 18. Syncellus, p. 107. KATA A®PIKANON. 


Πέμπτη δυναστεία βασιλέων η΄ ἐξ ᾽Ελε- 
φαντίνης. 


a Sacks ae ἔτη κη΄. 
Σεφρής, ἔτη ιγ΄. 
Νεφερχέρης, ἔτη κ΄. 

Σισίρης, ἔτη Le 

Χέρης, ἔτη κ΄. 

‘Paboupns, ἔτη po’. 

Μενχέρης, ἔτη 0’. 

Τανχέρης, ἔτη μδ΄. 
"Ovvos, ἔτη Ay’. 


~ ις ὩΣ oes 


" 


= wv 


μοῦ, ἔ ἔτη oun. “γίνονται σὺν τοῖς προτεταγ- 
μένοις αμς΄ ἔτεσι τῶν τεσσάρων δυναστειῶν ἔτη 
204d’. 


Fr. 19 (4). Syncellus, p. 109. KATA EYSEBION. 


Πέμπτη δυναστεία βασιλέων τριάκοντα 
ἑνὸς ἐξ ᾿Ελεφαντίνης. ὧν πρῶτος ᾿᾽Οθόης. 
οὗτος ὑπὸ τῶν δορυφόρων ἀνῃρέθη. 


1 Τατχέρης corr. Lepsius. 2”OBvos A. 





1 Dynasty V.c. 2560-c. 2420 B.c. For identifications with 
monumental and other evidence, see Meyer, Geschichte®, 
I. ii. p. 203: his list runs (1) Userkaf, (2) Sahuré‘, (3) 
Nefererkeré' Kakai, (4) Nefrefré‘ or Shepseskeré‘, (δ) 
Kha‘neferré‘, (6) Neweserré‘ Ini, (7) Menkeuhor (Akeuhor), 
(8) Dedkeré‘ Asosi, (9) Unas. 


50 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 18, 19 


Dynasty V. 
Fr. 18 ( from Syncellus). Accorptnc To AFRICANUS. 


The Fifth Dynasty 1 was composed of eight kings 
of Elephantine : 


. Usercherés, for 28 years. 

. Sephrés, for 13 years. 

. Nephercherés, for 20 years. 

. Sisirés, for 7 years. 

Cherés, for 20 years. 

Rathurés, for 44 years. 

. Mencherés, for 9 years. 

. Tancherés (? Tatcherés), for 44 years. 
. Onnus, for 33 years. 


Total, 248 years.” 


Along with the aforementioned 1046 years of the 
first four dynasties, this amounts to 1294 years. 


Fr. 19 (a) (from Syncellus), AccorDING TO 
EUsSEBIUs. 


The Fifth Dynasty consisted of thirty-one kings of 
Elephantine. Of these the first was Othoés,? who 
was murdered by his bodyguard. 


2 The items total 218 years; but if the reign of Othoés, 
the first king of Dynasty VI. is added, the total will then 
be 248 years. 

In the chronology of Eusebius, Dynasty V. is sup- 
pressed: the kings whom he mentions belong to 
Dynasty VI. 


51 


Fr. 19, 20 MANETHO 


€ ΄ > 
O δὲ 5’ Diws, ἑξαέτης ἀρξάμενος, ἐβασίλευσε 
μέχρις ἐτῶν ἕκατόν. γίνονται οὖν σὺν τοῖς προ- 
/ ~ ~ 
τεταγμένοις αρῆε΄ ἔτεσι τῶν τεσσάρων δυναστειῶν 


(ἔτη) jaohe’ : 


(Ὁ) Eusresrus, Chronica I. (Armenian Version), 
Hooke 


Quinta dynastia regum XXXI Elephantinorum, 
quorum primus Othius, qui a satellitibus suis occisus 
est. Quartus Phiops, qui regiam dignitatem a sexto 
aetatis anno ad centesimum usque tenuit. 


Fr. 20. Syncellus, p. 108. KATA A®PIKANON. 


"Extn δυναστεία βασιλέων ἕξ Μεμφιτῶν. 
a’ ᾽Οθόης,; ἔτη λ΄’, ὅς ὑπὸ τῶν δορυφόρων 
ἀνῃρέθη. 
, / 7 , 
B’ Φιός, ἔτη vy’. 
γ' Μεθουσοῦφις, ἔτη ζ΄. 
ι ᾿Οθώης A. 





1 Karst translates the Armenian as referring to the 
sixtieth year—‘“‘ began to rule at the age of 60”; but 
Aucher’s Armenian text has the equivalent of sexennis, 
“six years old ’’ (Margoliouth). 


52 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 19, 20 


The fourth king, Phidps, succeeding when six 
years old, reigned until his hundredth year. Thus, 
along with the aforementioned 1195 years of the first 
four dynasties, this amounts to 1295 years. 


(b) ARMENIAN VERSION OF EUSEBIUS. 


The Fifth Dynasty consisted of thirty-one kings of 
Elephantine. Of these the first was Othius, who was 
killed by his attendants. The fourth king was Phidps, 
who held the royal office from his sixth ' right down 
to his hundredth year. 


Dynasty VI. 
Fr. 20 ( from Syncellus). AccorpINcG To AFRICANUS. 


The Sixth Dynasty * consisted of six kings of 
Memphis : 
1, Othoés, for 30 years: he was murdered by his 
bodyguard. 
2. Phius, for 53 years. 
3. Methusuphis, for 7 years. 


2 Dynasties VI.-VIII., the last Memphites, c. 2420- 
c. 2240 B.c. Dynasty VI. Meyer (Geschichte *, I. ii. p. 236) 
identifies as follows: (1) Othoés (Teti or Atoti), then 
after Userkeré‘, (2) Phius (Pepi I.), (3) Methusuphis 
(Merenré‘ I.), (4) Phidps (Pepi II.), (5) Menthesuphis 
(Merenré‘ II.), (6) Nitécris. Sethe (Sesostris, p. 3) draws 
attention to the intentional differentiation of the same 
family-name—Phius for Pepi I., Phidps for Pepi II.: 
so also (3) Methusuphis and (5) Menthesuphis, and ¢f. 
infra on Psametik in Dynasty XXVI. Are these varia- 
tions due to Manetho or to his source ? 

53 


Fr. 20, 21 MANETHO 


δ΄ Φίωψ, ἑξαέτης ἀρξάμενος βασιλεύειν, διε- 
γένετο μέχρι ἐτῶν ρ΄. 

ε΄ Μενθεσοῦφις, ἔτος ἕν. 

s’ Νίτω κρις, γεννικωτάτη καὶ εὐμορφοτάτη 
τῶν κατ᾽ αὐτὴν γενομένη, ξανθὴ τὴν χροιάν, 
ἣ τὴν τρίτην ἤγειρε πυραμίδα, ἐβασίλευσεν 
ἔτη ι 

“Ὁμοῦ, ἔτη τὸ γίνονται σὺν τοῖς προτεταγ- 

μένοις ασηδ' τῶν ε΄ δυναστειῶν ἔτη ,av4C’. 


Fr. 21 (a). Syncellus, p. 109. KATA ΕὙΣΈΒΙΟΝ. 


"Extn δυναστεία. 
A / > / ~ > Ε] A 
Γυνὴ Νίτωκρις ἐβασίλευσε, τῶν κατ᾽ αὐτὴν 
᾽ὔ \ A 
γεννικωτάτη καὶ εὐμορφοτάτη, ξανθή τε τὴν χροιὰν 
\ , 
ὑπάρξασα, ἣ καὶ λέγεται τὴν τρίτην πυραμίδα 
ὠκοδομηκέναι. 


1The remarkable descriptions of social disorganization 
and anarchy, addressed to an aged king in the Leiden 
Papyrus of Ipuwer and known as The Admonitions of an 
Egyptian Sage, are, according to Erman, to be associated 
with the end of this reign : see A. Erman, ‘“‘ Die Mahnworte 
eines agyptischen Propheten’”’ in Sitz. der preuss. Akad. 
der Wissenschaften, xlii., 1919, p. 813. 

2 Nitécris is doubtless the Neit-okre(t) of the Turin 
Papyrus: the name means “ Neith is Excellent’”’ (cf. 
App. 11. Eratosthenes, No. 22, ᾿Αθηνᾶ νικηφόρος), and was 
a favourite name under the Saite Dynasty (Dyn. XXVI.), 
which was devoted to the worship of Neith. See 
Herodotus, ii. 100, 134, Diod. Sic. I. 64. 14 (if Rhodépis 
is to be identified with Nitdécris), Strabo 17, 1. 33 (a 
Cinderella-like story), Pliny, N.H. 36. 12. 78, and G. A 
Wainwright, Sky-Religion, pp. 41 ff. 

A queen’s reign ending the Dynasty is followed by a 
period of confusion, just as after Dyn. XII. when Queen 


54 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 20, 21 


4, Phiéps, who began to reign at the age of six, 
and continued until his hundredth year.} 

5. Menthesuphis, for 1 year. 

6. Nitdcris,” the noblest and loveliest of the women 
of her time, of fair complexion, the builder of 
the third pyramid, reigned for 12 years. 

Total, 203 years. Along with the aforementioned 
1294 years of the first five dynasties, this 
amounts to 1497 years. 


Fr. 21 (a) (from Syncellus). AccorDING TO 
EUSEBIUS. 


The Sixth Dynasty. 

There was a queen Nitécris, the noblest and 
loveliest of the women of her time; she had a fair 
complexion, and is said to have built the third 
pyramid. 


Scemiophris (Sebeknofruré‘) closes the line: ef. perhaps, 
in Dyn. IV., Thamphthis, of whom nothing is known. 

In 1932 Professor Selim Hassan discovered at Giza the 
tomb of Queen Khentkawes, a tomb of monumental 
dimensions, the so-called fourth or “ false’’ pyramid. 
Khentkawes was the daughter of Mycerinus; and, dis- 
regarding the chronological difficulty, H. Junker, in 
Mitteilungen des Deutschen Instituts fiir Agyptische Alter- 
tumskunde in Kairo, iii. 2 (1932), pp. 144-149, put forward 
the theory that the name Nitécris is derived from 
Khentkawes, and that Manetho refers here to the so-called 
fourth pyramid, which merits the description (Fr. 21(b)),— 
*‘ with the aspect of a mountain’’. See further B. van de 
Walle in L’ Antiquité Classique, 3 (1934), pp. 303-312. 

’ The correct total is 197 years: the reign of Phiéps is 
reckoned at 100, instead of 94 years (the Turin Papyrus 
gives 90 + ὦ years). 

55 


Fr. 21, 23, 24 MANETHO 


a \ > La 1 Μ , z Β » ’ 
Οἱ καὶ ἐβασίλευσαν ἔτη τρία ἐν ἄλλῳ oy. 
~ ~ 

Γίνονται σὺν τοῖς προτεταγμένοις ασῆε΄ τῶν 

πέντε δυναστειῶν ἔτη ,avhn’ 
/ ¢ / > / > ~ , 

ΖΣημειωτέον ὁπόσον Πύσέβιος ᾿ἀφρικανοῦ λείπεται 
ἀκριβείας ἐν τε τῇ τῶν βασιλέων ποσότητι καὶ ταῖς 
τῶν ὀνομάτων ὑφαιρέσεσι καὶ τοῖς χρόνοις, σχεδὸν 

Ve? ~ > - / / 

τὰ Adpixavod αὐταῖς λέξεσι γράφων. 


(b) Eusresrus, Chronica I. (Armenian Version), 
poi. 


Sexta dynastia. Femina quaedam Nitocris reg- 
navit, omnium aetatis suae virorum fortissima et 
mulierum formosissima, flava rubris genis. Ab hac 
tertia pyramis excitata dicitur, speciem collis prae 
se ferens. 

Ab his quoque regnatum est annis CCIII. 


Fr. 23. Syncellus, p. 108. KATA A@®PIKANON, 


“Εβδόμη δυναστεία Μεμφιτῶν βασιλέων ο’, 
οἵ ἐβασίλευσαν ἡμέρας ο΄. 


Fr. 24 (a). Syncellus, p. 109. ΚΑΤΑ ΕὙΣΕΒΙΟΝ. 


“Εβδόμη δυναστεία Μεμφιτῶν βασιλέων 
πέντε, ot ἐβασίλευσαν ἡμέρας οε΄. 


1 ἣ καὶ ἐβασίλευσεν Mm. 


56 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 21, 23, 24 


These rulers (or this ruler) reigned for three 
years: in another copy, 203 years. Along with the 
aforementioned 1295 years of the first five dynasties, 
this amounts to 1498 years. 

(Syncellus adds) : It must be noted how much less 
accurate Eusebius is than Africanus in the number 
of kings he gives, in the omission of names, and in 
dates, although he practically repeats the account 
of Africanus in the same words. 


(b) ARMENIAN VERSION OF EUSEBIUs. 


The Sixth Dynasty. There was a queen Nitécris, 
braver than all the men of her time, the most beauti- 
ful of all the women, fair-skinned with red cheeks. 
By her, it is said, the third pyramid was reared, with 
the aspect of a mountain. 

The united reigns of all the kings amount to 203 
years. 


Dynasty VII. 
Fr. 23 (from Syncellus). Accorpinc To AFRICANUs. 


The Seventh Dynasty ! consisted of seventy kings 
of Memphis, who reigned for 70 days. 


Fr. 24 (a) (from Syncellus). AccoRDING TO 
EUSEBIUS. 


The Seventh Dynasty consisted of five kings of 
Memphis, who reigned for 75 days. 

1 Dynasty VII.—a mere interregnum, or perod of 
confusion until one king gained supreme power. 


57 


Fr. 24, 25, 26 MANETHO 


(b) Εὐβεβιῦβ, Chronica I. (Armenian Version), 
Be. Jie 


Septima dynastia Memphitarum regum V, qui 
annis LX XV dominati sunt. 


Fr. 25. Syncellus, p. 108. KATA AGPIKANON. 


Ογδόη δυναστεία Μεμφιτῶν βασιλέων 
KC’, οἱ ἐβασίλευσαν ἔτη pus’. γίνονται σὺν 
τοῖς προτεταγμένοις ἔτη αχλθ’ τῶν ὀκτὼ δυνασ- 
τειῶν. 


Fr. 26 (a). Syncellus, p. 110. KATA ΕὙΣΕΒΙΟΝ. 
᾿Ογδόη δυναστεία Mepditadv βασιλέων 


Ly a > ΄ Μ ε ΄ Ψ 
πέντε, ot ἐβασίλευσαν ἔτη ἕκατόν. γίνονται 
A / ” / ~ > ‘ 
σὺν τοῖς προτεταγμένοις ἔτη αφηη τῶν ὀκτὼ 
δυναστειῶν. 


(b) Eusresrus, Chronica I. (Armenian Version), 
Bo. 


Octava dynastia Memphitarum regum V,! quorum 
dominatio annos centum occupavit. 


1V Aucher: aliter Mai. 


1 Dynasty VIII., according to Barbarus (Fr. 4) fourteen 
kings for 140 years: according to Meyer, probably eighteen 
kings who reigned for 146 years. 

[Footnote continued on opposite page. 
58 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) FR. 24, 25, 26 


(b) ARMENIAN VERSION OF EUSEBIUs. 


The Seventh Dynasty consisted of five kings of 
Memphis, who held sway for 75 years. 


Dynasty VIII. 


Fr. 25 (from Syncellus). AccorDING TO AFRICANUS. 


The Eighth Dynasty’ consisted of twenty-seven 
kings of Memphis, who reigned for 146 years. Along 
with the aforementioned reigns, this amounts to 1639 
years for the first eight dynasties. 


Fr. 26 (a) (from Syncellus), AccoRDING TO 
EUSEBIUS. 


The Eighth Dynasty consisted of five kings of 
Memphis, who reigned for 100 years. Along with 
the aforementioned reigns, this amounts to 1598 
years for the first eight dynasties. 


(b) ARMENIAN VERSION OF EUSEBIUs. 


The Eighth Dynasty consisted of five? kings of 
Memphis, whose rule lasted for 100 years. 


“The Turin Papyrus closes the first great period of 
Egyptian history at the end of what appears to be 
Manetho’s VIIIth Dynasty (the last Memphites)’”’: it 
reckons 955 years from Dynasty I. to Dynasties VII. 
and VIII. (H. R. Hall in C.A.H. i. pp. 298, 170). See 
A. Scharff in J. Hg. Arch. xiv., 1928, p. 275. 

2So Aucher, Petermann, and Karst. 


59 


Fr. 27, 28 MANETHO 


Fr. 27. Syncellus, p. 110. KATA A®PIKANON. 


€ ~ 
Ἐνάτη δυναστεία ὋἩρακλεοπολιτῶν 

, , Θιυ , ” , - 
βασιλέων 18’, ot ἐβασίλευσαν ἔτη υθ'. ὧν 
ὁ πρῶτος AxOons, δεινότατος τῶν πρὸ αὐτοῦ 
γενόμενος, τοῖς ἐν πάσῃ «Αἰγύπτῳ κακὰ εἰργάσατο, 
ὕστερον δὲ μανίᾳ περιέπεσε καὶ ὑπὸ κροκοδείλου 


διεφθάρη. 


Fr. 28 (a). Syncellus, p. 111. KATA ΕΥΣΕΒΙΟΝ. 


νάτη δυναστεία «(Ηρακλεοπολιτῶν 
βασιλέων τεσσάρων, ot ἐβασίλευσαν ἔτη 
ἑκατόν: ὧν πρῶτος Αχθώης, δεινότατος τῶν 
πρὸ αὐτοῦ γενόμενος, τοῖς ἐν πάσῃ Αἰγύπτῳ κακὰ 
εἰργάσατο, ὕστερον δὲ μανίᾳ περιέπεσε καὶ ὑπὸ 


κροκοδείλου διεφθάρη. 


(0) Eusresius, Chronica I. (Armenian Version), 
Pa Bl z 


Nona dynastia Heracleopolitarum regum IV, annis 
C. Horum primus Ochthéis saevissimus regum fuit 


1"Ay8os A vulgo. 





1 Dynasties IX. and X. c. 2240-c. 2100 B.c.—two series 
of nineteen kings, both from Héracleopolis (Baedeker °, p. 
218), near the modern village of Ahnasia (Ancient Egyptian 
Hat-nen-nesut), 77 miles S. of Cairo, c. 9 miles S. of the 
entrance to the Fayaim. 

The Turin Papyrus gives eighteen kings for Dynasties 
IX. and X. as opposed to Manetho’s thirty-eight. 

[ Footnole continued on opposite page. 


60 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 27, 28 


Dynasty IX. 
Fr. 27 (from Syncellus). ACCORDING TO AFRICANUS. 


The Ninth Dynasty ! consisted of nineteen kings of 
Héracleopolis, who reigned for 409 years. The first 
of these, King Achthoés,? behaving more cruelly 
than his predecessors, wrought woes for the people 
of all Egypt, but afterwards he was smitten with 
madness, and was killed by a crocodile.® 


Fr. 28 (a) (from Syneellus). AccoRDING TO 
EUSEBIUS. 


The Ninth Dynasty consisted of four kings of 
Héracleopolis, who reigned for 100 years. The first 
of these, King Achthéés, behaving more cruelly 
than his predecessors, wrought woes for the people 
of all Egypt, but afterwards he was smitten with 
madness, and was killed by a crocodile. 


(b) ARMENIAN VERSION OF EUSEBIUS. 


The Ninth Dynasty consisted of four kings of 
Heracleopolis, reigning for 100 years. The first of 
these, King Ochthéis,t was more cruel than all his 


Manetho’s account of Dynasty IX. is best preserved by 
Africanus. Barbarus has almost the same figures—twenty 
kings for 409 years. 

*Achthoés: in the Turin Papyrus Akhtéi (Meyer, 
Geschichte 5, I. ii. p. 247—three kings of thisname). Meyer 
conjectures that the “‘ cruelty ’’ of Achthoés may be violent 
or forcible oppression of the feudal nobility. 

3 Cf. p. 28 n. 3. 

* Okhthovis (Petermann’s translation), -ov- representing 
the long o. 


ol 


Fr. 28, 29, 30,31 MANETHO 


qui sibi praecesserant, universamque Aegyptum diris 
calamitatibus affecit. Idem denique vesania cor- 
reptus est et a crocodilo peremptus. 


Fr. 29. Syncellus, p. 110. KATA A@®PIKANON. 


Δεκάτη δυναστεία ‘HpakXeotoArtav Ba- 
, , a 9 ͵ ” ͵ 
σιλέων 16’, ot ἐβασίλευσαν ἔτη ρπε΄. 


Fr. 830 (a). Syncellus, p. 112. ΚΑΤΑ ΕὙΣΕΒΙΟΝ. 


Δεκάτη δυναστεία ᾿ Πρακλεοπολιτῶν βασιλέων 
ιθ΄, οἱ ἐβασίλευσαν ἔτη ρπε΄. 


(0) Ετυβεβιῦβ, Chronica I. (Armenian Version), 
p90 


Decima dynastia Heracleopolitarum regum XIX, 
annis CLXXXYV. 


Fr. 31. Syncellus, p. 110. ΚΑΤΑ A@PIKANON. 


‘Evéexdtn δυναστεία ΖΔιοσπολιτῶν βα- 
σιλέων ις΄, οἵ ἐβασίλευσαν ἔτη μγ΄. μεθ᾽ ods 
Appevéuns, ἔτη ws”. 

Μέχρι τοῦδε τὸν πρῶτον τόμον καταγήοχε 
Μαοωνεθῶ. 

ὋὉμοῦ βασιλεῖς php’, ἔτη βτ', ἡμέραι ο΄. 


1The Middle Kingdom, Dynasties XI.-XITII.: ο. 2100- 
ec. 1700 B.c. 
(Footnote continued on opposite page. 
62 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 28, 29, 30, 31 


predecessors, and visited the whole of Egypt with 
dire disasters. Finally, he was seized with madness, 
and devoured by a crocodile. 


Dynasty X. 
Fr. 29 ( from Syncellus). AccORDING TO AFRICANUS. 


The Tenth Dynasty consisted of nineteen kings of 
Héracleopolis, who reigned for 185 years. 


Fr. 30 (a) (from Syncellus). AccoRDING TO 
EvusEBIUs. 


The Tenth Dynasty consisted of nineteen kings of 
Héracleopolis, who reigned for 185 years. 


(b) ARMENIAN VERSION OF EUSEBIUS. 


The Tenth Dynasty consisted of nineteen kings of 
Heracleopolis, who reigned for 185 years. 


Dynasty XI. 
Fr. 31 ( from Syncellus). ACCORDING TO AFRICANUS, 


The Eleventh Dynasty ! consisted of sixteen kings 
of Diospolis [or Thebes], who reigned for 43 years. In 
succession to these, Ammenemés 2 ruled for 16 years. 

Here ends the First Book of Manetho. 

Total for the reigns of 192 kings, 2300 years 70 days. 


Dynasty XI. (c. 2100—c. 2000 B.c.) with its seat at Thebes: 
sixteen kings of Thebes ruling for only 43 years (Manetho) : 
Turin Papyrus gives six kings with more than 160 years. 

? Ammenemés is Amenemhét I.: see pp. 66f., nn. 1, 2. 


63 


Fr. 32 MANETHO 


Fr. 32 (a). Syncellus, p. 112. KATA EYSEBION. 


‘Evdexatn δυναστεία Διοσπολιτῶν βασιλέων 

, ο» ΄ ” , > “a > / 
is’, of ἐβασίλευσαν ἔτη μγ΄. μεθ᾽ ots “Apperve- 
NS, ἔτη ie 

Μέχρι τοῦδε τὸν πρῶτον τόμον καταγήοχεν ὁ 
ἜΘΗ μοῦ βασιλεῖς pbb’, ἔτη βτ', ἡμέραι 
οθ΄. 


(0) Eusesrus, Chronica I. (Armenian Version), 
Pin 91 
Undecima dynastia Diospolitarum regum XVI, 


annis XLIII. Post hos Ammenemes annis XVI. 


Hactenus primum librum Manetho produxit. 
Sunt autem reges CXCII, anni MMCCC, 


64 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 32 


Fr. 32 (a) (from Syncellus). AccorRDING TO 
EUSEBIUsS. 


The Eleventh Dynasty consisted of sixteen kings 
of Diospolis [or Thebes], who reigned for 43 years. In 
succession to these, Ammenemés ruled for 16 years. 

Here ends the First Book of Manetho. 

Total for the reigns of 192 kings, 2300 years 79 days. 


(b) ARMENIAN VERSION OF EUSEBIUS. 


The Eleventh Dynasty consisted of sixteen kings 
of Diospolis [or Thebes], who reigned for 43 years. In 
succession to these, Ammenemes ruled for 16 years. 

Here ends the First Book of Manetho. 

Total for the reigns of 192 kings, 2300 years. 


Fr. 34 MANETHO 


ΤΟΜΟΣ AEYTEPOS. 
Fr. 34. Syncellus, p. 110. KATA A@®PIKANON. 


Δευτέρου τόμου Mave d. 
Δωδεκάτη δυναστεία Διοσπολιτῶν βασι- 
λέων ἑπτά. 

a’ Σεσόγχοσις,, Appavépov υἱός, ἔτη pss 

β΄ Ἡμμανέμης, ἔτη An’, ὃς ὑπὸ τῶν ἰδίων 
εὐνούχων ἀνῃρέθη. 

γ΄ Σέσωστρις," ἔτη μη΄, ὃς ἅπασαν ἐχειρώ- 
σατο τὴν Aciav ἐν ἐνιαυτοῖς ἐννέα, καὶ 
τῆς Εὐρώπης τὰ μέχρι Θρᾷκης, πανταχόσε 


1 γεσονγόσις (for Σεσόγχοσις) B: Σεσόγχωρις τα. 
2A: Σέσοστρις B 


1 Dynasty XII. c. 2000-1790 3B.c. (Meyer, Geschichte 5, 
I. ii. p. 270). Including Ammenemés whom Manetho 
places between Dynasty XI. and Dynasty XII., there are 
eight rulersin Dynasty XII.—(1) Ammenemés (Amenemhét 
I.), (2) Sesonchésis (Senwosret or Sesdéstris I.), (3) Am- 
manemés (Amenemhét II.), (4) Seséstris II. (omitted by 
Manetho), (5) Sesdstris (Senwosret III.), (6) Manetho’s 
Lamarés and Amerés (Amenemhét III., Nema‘tré‘), 
(7) Ammenemés (Amenemhét IV.), (8) Scemiophris 
(Queen Sebeknofruré‘). For (5), the great Sesdstris 
(1887-1850 B.c.) of Herodotus, ii. 102, Diod. Sic. I. 53 ff., 
see Sethe, Unters. zur Gesch. . . . Aeg. ii. 1, and Meyer, Ge- 
schichte δ, I. ii. p. 268. The name of Amenemhét bespeaks 
his Theban origin: he removed the capital further north 
to Dahshir, a more central position—‘‘ Controller of the 
Two Lands,” as its Egyptian name means. Thus the 
kings of Dynasty XII. are kings who came from Thebes, 
but ruled at Dahshur. 

66 


[Footnote continued on opposite page. 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 34 


BOOK II. 
Dynasty XII. 


Fr. 34 ( from Syncellus). AccoRDING TO AFRICANUS. 


From the Second Book of Manetho. 
The Twelfth Dynasty! consisted of seven kings 
of Diospolis. 


1. Sesonchosis, son of Ammanemés, for 46 years. 

2. Ammanemés, for 38 years: he was murdered 
by his own eunuchs.? 

3. Seséstris, for 48 years: in nine years he sub- 
dued the whole of Asia, and Europe as far as 
Thrace, everywhere erecting memorials of 


In Dynasty XII. the conquests of Dynasty VI. in the 
south were extended; and Seséstris III. was the first 
Egyptian king to conquer Syria. Among works of peace 
the great irrigation schemes in the Faytim perpetuated 
the name of Amenemhét III. in ‘‘ Lake Moeris’’. (See 
G. Caton-Thompson and E. W. Gardner, The Desert 
Fayiim, 1934.) Manetho mentions his building of the 
Labyrinth: it is significant that after the reign of 
Seséstris III. and his wide foreign conquests, his son 
should have built the Labyrinth. Vases of the Kamares 
type from Crete have been found at Kahin, not far from 
the Labyrinth. 

2See A. de Buck (Mélanges Maspero, vol. i., 1935, 
pp. 847-52) for a new interpretation of the purpose of 
The Instruction of Amenemmes : in this political pamphlet 
the dead king speaks from the tomb in support of his son 
Sesostris, now holding the throne in spite of strong opposi- 
tion, and violently denounces the ungrateful ruffians who 
murdered him. It seems probable that Manetho’s note here 
refers to the death of Ammenemés I. (Battiscombe Gunn). 


67 


Fr. 34, 35 MANETHO 


μνημόσυνα ἐγείρας τῆς τῶν ἐθνῶν σχέσεως, 
ἐπὶ μὲν τοῖς γενναίοις ἀνδρῶν, ἐπὶ δὲ τοῖς 
ἀγεννέσι γυναικῶν μόρια ταῖς στήλαις ἐγ- 
χαράσσων, ὡς 5 ὑπὸ Αἰγυπτίων μετὰ "Ὄσιριν 
πρῶτον νομισθῆναι. 

δ΄ Aaya 8 ἔτῃ η΄, ὃς τὸν ἐν Apowor: 

ΧΟΡ)» “τ (δι Ρ Τῇ 

λαβύρινθον ἑαυτῷ τάφον κατεσκεύασε. 

ε Apepis,* ἔτη η΄ 

ς΄ Ἀμμενέμης," ἔτη η΄. 

ζ' Σκεμίοφρις, ἀδελφή, ἔτη 8’. 


“Ὁμοῦ, ἔτη ρξ΄. 


Fr. 35. Syncellus, p. 112. ΚΑΤΑ ΕὙΣΕΒΙΟΝ. 


Δευτέρου τόμου Mave d. 

Δωδεκάτη δυναστεία Διοσπολιτῶν Ba- 
σιλέων ἑπτά. ὧν ὁ πρῶτος δΣεσόγχοσις," 
Apupeveuov υἱός, ἔτη ps’. 


1 κατασχέσεως τη. 2m.: ὃς MSS. 
8 “αμάρης Meyer. “᾿Αμμερής A. 
5° Auevéuns B. 6 Β : Leadyywpis A. 


'See Agyptische Inschriften aus den Museen zu Berlin, 
i. p. 257, for a stele at Semneh with an inscription in which 
the great Seséstris pours contempt upon his enemies, the 
Nubians. 

* For the sexual symbols represented upon pillars, see 
Hat. ii. 102, 106, Diod. Sic. I. 55. 8: cf. the representation 
of mutilated captives on one of the walls of the Ramesseum, 
Diod. Sic. 1. 48. 2. It has been suggested that Herodotus, 
who saw the pillars of Sesostris in Palestine, may possiby 
have mistaken an Assyrian for an Egyptian relief. 


68 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 34, 35 


his conquest of the tribes.' Upon stelae 
[pillars] he engraved for a valiant race the 
secret parts of a man, for an ignoble race those 
of a woman.” Accordingly he was esteemed 
by the Egyptians as the next in rank to Osiris. 

4, Lacharés (Lamarés),° for 8 years: he built the 
Labyrinth 5 in the Arsinoite nome as his own 
tomb. 

5. Amerés, for 8 years. 

6. Ammenemés, for 8 years. 

7. Scemiophris, his sister, for 4 years. 


Total, 160 years. 


Fr. 35 (from Syncellus), AccorDiInc To EvsEBtvs. 


From the Second Book of Manetho. 

The Twelfth Dynasty consisted of seven kings of 
Diospolis. The first of these, Sesonchosis, son of 
Ammenemés. reigned for 46 years. 


3’ For other names of Amenemhét III., see note on 
Marés, App. II., No. 35, p. 224. 

4The Labyrinth is correctly attributed by Manetho to 
Amenemhét III., who built it as his mortuary temple 
(contrast Herodotus, ji. 148, who assigns this monument 
to the Dodecarchy). The Fayaim was a place of great 
importance during this dynasty, from Amenemhét I. 
onwards. 

The description of the nome as “ Arsinoite’’ has often 
been suspected as a later interpo.ation ; but if ‘ Arsinoite ἢ 
was used by Manetho himself, it gives as a date in his life 
the year 256 B.c. when Ptolemy Philadelphus commem- 
orated Queen Arsinoe (d. 270 B.c.) in the new name of 
the nome. (Cf. Intro. p. xvi for a possible reference to 
Manetho, the historian of Egypt, in 24] B.c.) 


69 


Fr. 35, 36 MANETHO 


βι μμανέμης, ἔτη An’, Os ὑπὸ τῶν ἰδίων 
εὐνούχων ἀνῃρέθη. 

γ' Σέσωστρις," ἔτη μη΄, ὃς λέγεται γεγονέναι 
πηχῶν δ', παλαιστῶν γ΄, δακτύλων β΄. ὃς 
πᾶσαν ἐχειρώσατο τὴν ᾿Ασίαν ἐν ἐνιαυτοῖς 
ἐννέα, καὶ τῆς Εὐρώπης τὰ μέχρι Θράκης, 
πανταχόσε μνημόσυνα ἐγείρας τῆς τῶν 
ἐθνῶν κατασχέσεως, ἐπὶ μὲν τοῖς γενναίοις 
ἀνδρῶν, ἐπὶ δὲ τοῖς ἀγεννέσι γυναικῶν 
μόρια ταῖς στήλαις ἐγχαράσσων, ws? καὶ 
ὑπὸ τῶν Αἰγυπτίων «πρῶτον» 38 μετὰ 
"Ὄσιριν νομισθῆναι. 


Mc? ὃν Adpapts, ἔτη η΄, ὃς τὸν ἐν Apoevotrn 4 
~ 4 
λαβύρινθον ἑαυτῷ τάφον κατεσκεύασεν. 
« \ Z / Yee ἢ ” , a ΄ 
Οἱ δὲ τούτου διάδοχοι ἐπὶ ἔτη pf’, ot πάντες 
ἐβασίλευσαν ἔτεσι σμέ. 


Fr. 36. Eusrsrus, Chronica I. (Armenian Version), 
Ρ. 98. 


E Manethonis secundo libro. 

Duodecima dynastia Diospolitarum regum VII, 
quorum primus Sesonchosis Ammenemis filius annis 
XLVI. 

Ammenemes annis XX XVIII, qui a suis eunuchis 
interemptus est. 

Sesostris annis XLVIII, cuius mensura fertur 
cubitorum quattuor, palmarumque trium cum digitis 


ΤΑ; Σέσοστρις B. 2m: ὃς MSS. δ Τὴ, 
70 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 35, 36 


2. Ammanemés, for 38 years: he was murdered 

by his own eunuchs. 

3. Seséstris, for 48 years: he is said to have 
been 4 cubits 3 palms 2 fingers’ breadths in 
stature. In nine years he subdued the whole 
of Asia, and Europe as far as Thrace, every- 
where erecting memorials of his conquest of the 
tribes. Upon stelae [pillars] he engraved for a 
valiant race the secret parts of a man, for an 
ignoble race those of a woman. Accordingly 
he was esteemed by the Egyptians as the next 
in rank to Osiris. 


Next to him Lamaris reigned for 8 years: he 
built the Labyrinth in the Arsinoite nome as his own 
tomb. 

His successors ruled for 42 years, and the reigns 
of the whole dynasty amounted to 245 years.1 


Fr. 36. ARMENIAN VERSION OF EUSEBIUS. 


From the Second Book of Manetho. 

The Twelfth Dynasty consisted of seven kings of 
Diospolis. The first of these, Sesonchosis, son of 
Ammenemés, reigned for 46 years. 

2. Ammenemés, for 38 years: he was murdered 

by his own eunuchs. 

3. Seséstris, for 48 years: he is said to have 

been 4 cubits 3 palms 2 fingers’ breadth in 


1 The items given add to 182 years. 





4This variant spelling with -e- for -.- appears to be 

a mere scribal error due to confusion with words beginning 
ἀρσεν-. 

1 


FR. 37, 38, 39 MANETHO 


duobus. Is universam Asiam annorum novem spa- 
tio sibi subdidit, itemque Europae partem usque ad 
Thraciam. Idem et suae in singulas gentes domina- 
tionis monumenta ubique constituit; apud gentes 
quidem strenuas virilia, apud vero imbelles feminea 
pudenda ignominiae causa columnis insculpens. 
Quare is ab Aegyptiis proximos post Osirin honores 
tulit. 

Secutus est Lampares, annis VIII. Hic in 
Arsinoite labyrinthum cavernosum sibi tumulum 
fecit. 

Regnaverunt successores eius annis XLII. 

Summa universae dominationis annorum CCXLYV. 


Fr. 38. Syncellus, p. 113. KATA A®PIKANON. 


Τρισκαιδεκάτη δυναστεία Διοσπολιτῶν βασιλέων 


ξ'͵, ot ἐβασίλευσαν ἔτη υνγ' .ὦ 


Fr. 39 (a). ϑγποοίϊιιβ, p. 114. KATA ΕὙΣΕΒΙΟΝ. 


Τρισκαιδεκάτη δυναστεία Διοσπολιτῶν βασιλέων 
ξ΄, ot ἐβασίλευσαν ἔτη υνγ΄. 
1B: pd’ A 





ςς >? 


1 The Armenian has a word here for “ sufferings ’’ or 
“torments ἢ ᾿ (Margoliouth) : Karst expresses the general 
meaning as—‘‘ he engraved their oppression through (or, 
by means of) . 

3 Karst translates this word by “‘das héhlenwendelgang- 
formige’’. 

8 Dynasty XITI., 1790-c. 1700 B.c. In the Turin Pa- 
pyrus there is a corresponding group of sixty kings: see 
the list in Meyer, Geschichte δ, I. ii. pp. 308 f., one of them 


72 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 37, 38, 39 


stature. In nine years he subdued the whole 
of Asia, and Europe as far as Thrace. Every- 
where he set up memorials of his subjugation of 
each tribe: among valiant races he engraved 
upon pillars a man’s secret parts, among un- 
warlike races a woman’s, as a sign of disgrace. 
Wherefore he was honoured by the Egyptians 
next to Osiris. 


His successor, Lampares, reigned for 8 years: in 
the Arsinoite nome he built the many-chambered ? 
Labyrinth as his tomb. 

The succeeding kings ruled for 42 years. 

Total for the whole dynasty, 245 years. 


Dynasty XIII. 
Fr. 38 (from Syncellus). AccorDING To AFRICANUS. 


The Thirteenth Dynasty * consisted of sixty kings 
of Diospolis, who reigned for 453 years. 


Fr. 39 (a) (from Syncellus). AccOoRDING TO 
EUSEBIUS. 


The Thirteenth Dynasty consisted of sixty kings 
of Diospolis, who reigned for 453 years. 


being a name ending in -mes, perhaps Dedumes, the king 
Τουτίμαιος of Fr. 42. The twenty-fifth king in the Turin 
Papyrus, Col. VII., Kha‘neferr6é‘ Sebekhotp IV., is prob- 
ably the King Chenephrés of whom Artapanus (i./B.c.) 
says that he was ‘“‘ king of the regions above Memphis 
(for there were at that time many kings in Egypt)’”’ in 
the lifetime of Moses (Artapanus, Concerning the Jews, 
quoted by Euseb., Praepar. Evang. ix. 27: see also 
Clement of Alexandria, Strom. i. 23, 154). 

73 


Fr. 39, 41 MANETHO 


(b) Eusrsrus, Chronica I. (Armenian Version), 
ps299:; 


Tertia decima dynastia Diospolitarum regum LX, 
qui regnarunt annis CCCCLIII. 


Fr. 41 (a). Syncellus, p. 113. KATA AG®PIKANON. 


Τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάτη δυναστεία Zoit av βασιλέων 
os’, ot ἐβασίλευσαν ἔτη ρπδ' 3 


(b) Syncellus, p. 114. ΚΑΤΑ ΕὙΣΕΒΙΟΝ. 


Τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάτη δυναστεία Zoit Ov βασιλέων 
/ a > / ” , > ΝΜ , 
os’, ot ἐβασίλευσαν ἔτη ρπδ'. ἐν ἄλλῳ υπδ'. 


(c) Ευβεβιῦβ, Chronica I. (Armenian Version), 
p. 99. 


Quarta decima dynastia Xoitarum* regum 


LXXVI, qui regnarunt annis CCCCLXXXIV. 


1Bony: a lacuna in A. 
* Aucher: Khsojitarum (Petermann’s translation). 


1 Dynasties XIV.-XVII., the Hykséds Age: c. 1700- 
1580 B.c. 

Dynasty XIV. Nothing is known of the kings of 
Dynasty XIV., whose seat was at Xois (Sakha) in 
the West Delta—an island and town in the Sebennytic 
nome (Strabo, 17. 1. 19). They were not rulers of Upper 
Egypt, but probably of the West Delta only. At this 
period there was, it is probable, another contemporary 
dynasty in Upper Egypt (Dynasty XVII. of Manetho). 

In the Turin Papyrus there is a long series of rulers’ 
names corresponding to this dynasty; but the number 


74 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 39, 41 


(b) ARMENIAN VERSION OF EUSEBIUS. 


The Thirteenth Dynasty consisted of sixty kings 
of Diospolis, who reigned for 453 years. 


Dynasty XIV. 


Fr. 41 (a) (from Syncellus). AccorRDING TO 
AFRICANUS. 


The Fourteenth Dynasty ! consisted of seventy-six 
kings of Xois, who reigned for 184 years. 


(b) Accorpinc To EvsEsivs. 


The Fourteenth Dynasty consisted of seventy- 
six kings of Xois, who reigned for 184 years,—in 
another copy, 484 years. 


(c) ARMENIAN VERSION OF EUSEBIUS. 


The Fourteenth Dynasty consisted of seventy-six 
kings of Xois, who reigned for 484 years. 


given by Manetho (76) was not approximated in the Papyrus 
which shows between twenty and thirty names of kings. 
Not one of these names is preserved on the Monuments, 
nor on the Karnak Tablet. The kings of Dynasty XIV., 
and even the last kings of Dynasty XIII., reigned sim- 
ultaneously with the Hyksés kings: cf. the double series 
of kings in Dynasty XVII. In the Royal Lists of Abydos 
and Sakkaéra the rulers of Dynasties XIII.-XVII. are 
altogether omitted. The Royal List of Karnak gives 
a selection of about thirty-five names of Dynasties XIII.- 
XVII., omitting Dynasty XIV. and the Hyksds. 


79 


Fr. 42 MANETHO 


Fr. 42. Josrpnus, Contra Apionem, I. 14, δὲ 73-92.1 


73 “Apéoua δὴ πρῶτον ἀπὸ τῶν παρ᾽ Αἰγυπτίοις 
γραμμάτων. αὐτὰ μὲν οὖν οὐχ οἷόν τε παρα- 
τίθεσθαι τἀκείνων, Μανεθὼς 5 δ᾽ ἦν τὸ γένος Αἰ- 
γύπτιος, ἀνὴρ τῆς ᾿Ελληνικῆς μετεσχηκὼς παιδείας, 
ὡς δῆλός ἐστιν " γέγραφεν γὰρ ᾿Ελλάδι φωνῇ τὴν 
πάτριον ἱστορίαν ἐκ δέλτων 3 ἱερῶν, ὥς φησιν 

' For §§ 73-75, 82-90, see Eusebius, Praepar. Hvang. x. 18: 
for §§73-105, see Eusebius, Chron. i. pp. 151-8, Schéne 
(Arm.). 

2? Eus.: Μανέθων L, Lat. (same variation elsewhere). 


3 δέλτων Gutschmid (sacris libris Lat.: sacris monumentis 
Eus. Arm.., cf. ὃ 226): ze τῶν L. 





1 The invasion of the Hyksdés took place at some time 
in Dynasty XIII.: hence the succeeding anarchy in a 
period of foreign domination. The later Egyptians looked 
back upon it as the Jews did upon the Babylonian 
captivity, or the English upon the Danish terror. The 
keen desire of the Egyptians to forget about the Hyksdés 
usurpation accounts in part for our ignorance of what 
actually happened: “it is with apparent unwillingness 
that they chronicle any events connected with it ’’ (Peet, 
Egypt and the Old Testament, p. 69). In Egyptian texts 
the ‘‘infamous’”’ (Hyksés) were denoted as ‘Amu,—a 
title also given to the Hittites and their allies by Ramessés 
II. in the poem of the Battle of Kadesh (ed. Kuentz, § 97). 
Perhaps they were combined with Hittites who in 1925 
B.c. brought the kingdom of Babel to an end. It is 
certain that with the Hyksés numerous Semites came into 
Egypt: some of the Hyksés kings have Semitic names. 
For the presence of an important Hurrian element among 
the Hyksés, see E. A. Speiser, ‘‘ Ethnic Movements,” 
in Ann. of Amer. Sch. of Or. Res. xiii. (1932), p. 51. The 


76 


AEGYPTIACA Fr. 42 


Tue Hyksos Ace, c. 1700-c. 1580 B.c.} 


Fr. 42 (from Josephus, Contra Apionem, i. 14, 
73-92). 


[Josephus is citing the records of neighbouring 
nations in proof of the antiquity of the Jews.| 

I will begin with Egyptian documents. These I 
cannot indeed set before you in their ancient form ; 
but in Manetho we have a native Egyptian who was 
manifestly imbued with Greek culture. He wrote 
in Greek the history of his nation, translated, as he 
himself tells us, from sacred tablets ;* and on many 


Hyksés brought with them from Asia their tribal god, 
which was assimilated by the Egyptians to Séth, the god 
of foreign parts, of the desert, and of the enemy. 

In the first half of the second millennium B.c. the Hyksés 
ruled a great kingdom in Palestine and Syria (Meyer, 
Geschichte *, i. ὃ 304); and when their power was broken 
down by the arrival of hostile tribes, King Amésis took 
advantage of their plight to drive the Hyksés out of Egypt 
(A. Jirku, “ Aufstieg und Untergang der Hyksés,”’ in 
Journ. of the Palestine Orient. Soc. xii., 1932, p. 60). 

A dim tradition of Hyksés-rule is possibly preserved in 
Herodotus, ii. 128. Perhaps “ the shepherd Philitis”’ in 
that passage is connected with “ Philistines,”’ a tribe which 
may have formed part of these invaders. There is 
confusion between two periods of oppression of the common 
people,—under the pyramid-builders and under the 
Hyksés. For a translation of the Egyptian records which 
illustrate the Hyksés period, see Battiscombe Gunn and 
Alan H. Gardiner, J. Eg. Arch. v., 1918, pp. 36-56, “ The 
Expulsion of the Hyksés’’. 

* The word “ tablets”’ is a probable emendation, since 
Manetho would naturally base his History upon temple- 
archives on stone as well as on papyrus: cf. the Palermo 
Stone, the Turin Papyrus, etc. (Intro. pp. xxiii ff.). 


77 


Fr. 42 MANETHO 


« 
αὐτός, μεταφράσας, 6s! καὶ πολλὰ τὸν ᾿ Πρόδοτον 
> ~ ~ 
ἐλέγχει τῶν Αἰγυπτιακῶν ὑπ᾽ ἀγνοίας ἐψευσμένον. 
ia \ / ¢ \ > ~ / ~ 
7400T0s δὴ τοίνυν ὁ Μανεθὼς ἐν τῇ δευτέρᾳ τῶν 
Αἰγυπτιακῶν ταῦτα περὶ ἡμῶν γράφει: παραθή- 
σομαι δὲ τὴν λέξιν αὐτοῦ καθάπερ αὐτὸν ἐκεῖνον 
παραγαγὼν μάρτυρα" 
75 “Τουτίμαιος.Σ ἐπὶ τούτου οὐκ οἶδ᾽ ὅπως ὁ 8 θεὸς 
ἀντέπνευσεν, καὶ παραδόξως ἐκ τῶν πρὸς ἀνατολὴν 
~ A 
μερῶν ἄνθρωποι τὸ γένος ἄσημοι. καταθαρρήσαντες 
ἐπὶ τὴν χώραν ἐστράτευσαν καὶ ῥᾳδίως ἀμαχητὶ 
76 ταύτην κατὰ κράτος εἷλον, καὶ τοὺς ἡγεμονεύσαν- 
τας ἐν αὐτῇ χειρωσάμενοι τὸ λοιπὸν τάς τε πόλεις 
~ ~ ~ [1 
ὠμῶς ἐνέπρησαν καὶ τὰ τῶν θεῶν ἱερὰ κατέσ- 
καψαν, πᾶσι δὲ τοῖς ἐπιχωρίοις ἐχθρότατά πως 
ἐχρήσαντο, τοὺς μὲν σφάζοντες, τῶν δὲ καὶ τὰ 
Ἰ τέκνα καὶ γυναῖκας εἰς δουλείαν ἄγοντες. πέρας 
A \ / a > ᾽ ~ > ia e cA 
δὲ καὶ βασιλέα eva ἐξ αὐτῶν ἐποίησαν, ᾧ ὄνομα 
1 ὃς Eus.: om. L. 
2Gutschmid: τοῦ Τίμαιος ὄνομα L, Eus. (ὄνομα probably a 
gloss: ἄνεμος Gutschmid). 


36 Eus. (perhaps a survival of Ancient Egyptian usage): 
om. L: Meyer conj. θεός τις. 


1 Cf. Manetho, Fr. 88. 

2This account of the Hyksés invasion is obviously 
derived from popular Egyptian tales, the characteristics 
of which are deeply imprinted upon it. Meyer (Geschichte 5, 
I. ii. p. 313) quotes from papyri and inscriptions passages 
of similar style and content, e.g. Pap. Sallier I. describing 
the war with the Hyksés, and mentioning “ Lord Apépi 
in Auaris,”’ and an inscription of Queen Hatshepsut from 
the Speos Artemidos, referring to the occupation of 


78 


AEGYPTIACA Fr. 42 


points of Egyptian history he convicts Herodotus 1 
of having erred through ignorance. In the second 
book of his History of Egypt, this writer Manetho 
speaks of us as follows. I shall quote his own words, 
just as if I had brought forward the man himself as a 
witness : * 

“Tutimaeus.? In his reign, for what cause I 
know not, a blast of God smote us; and un- 
expectedly, from the regions of the East, invaders 
of obscure race marched in confidence of victory 
against our land. By main force they easily seized 
it without striking a blow ; * and having overpowered 
the rulers of the land, they then burned our cities 
ruthlessly, razed to the ground the temples of the 
gods, and treated all the natives with a cruel hos- 
tility, massacring some and leading into slavery the 
wives and children of others. Finally, they ap- 
pointed as king one of their number whose name was 


Auaris. See Breasted, Ancient Records, i. ὃ 24, ii. §§ 296 ff. 
Meyer adds that he would not be surprised if Manetho’s 
description reappeared word for word one day in a hieratic 
papyrus. Cf. ὃ 75 ὁ θεός : ὃ 76 the crimes of the Hyksés 
(Fr. 54, § 249, those of the Solymites and their polluted 
allies): § 77 the upper and lower lands: §§ 78, 237 re- 
ligious tradition to explain the name of Auaris and its 
dedication to Typhén: § 99 hollow phrases about military 
expeditions of Sethés: § 237 the form of the phrase ὡς 
χρόνος ἱκανὸς διῆλθεν, and many other passages. See also 
Weill, La fin du moyen empire égyptien, pp. 76 ff. 

8 See Fr. 38, n. 3. 

‘The success of the Hyksés may have been due to 
superior archery and to the use of horse-drawn chariots, 
previously unknown in Egypt (Maspero, Hist. Ane. ii. 
p- 51; Petrie, Hyksos and Israelite Cities, p. 70; H. R. 
Hall, ἄπο. Hist. of Near East 8, p. 213), as well as to superior 
weapons of bronze (H. R. Hall, C.A.H. i. p. 291 n., 312 f.). 


19 


Fr. 42 MANETHO 


ἣν Σάλιτις. Kat οὗτος ev τῇ Μέμφιδι κατεγίνετο, 
΄, ~ 
τήν τε ἄνω Kal κάτω χώραν δασμολογῶν καὶ 
φρουρὰν ἐν τοῖς ἐπιτηδειοτάτοις καταλείπων 5 
τόποις. μάλιστα δὲ καὶ τὰ πρὸς ἀνατολὴν ἠσφα- 
ud > a 
λίσατο μέρη, προορώμενος, Acoupiwy ποτὲ μεῖζον 
/ a ~ 
18 ἰσχυόντων, ἐσομένην ἐπιθυμίᾳ 8 τῆς αὐτοῦ βασι- 
λ / ” ὃ «ς A δὲ > ~ ~ he 4 
elas ἔφοδον. εὑρὼν δὲ ev νομῷ τῷ Laity 
/ ? 
πόλιν ἐπικαιροτάτην, κειμένην μὲν πρὸς ἀνατολὴν 
τοῦ Βουβαστίτου ποταμοῦ, καλουμένην δ᾽ ἀπό 
τινος ἀρχαίας θεολογίας Αὔαριν, ταύτην ἔκτισέν 


1 Silitis Kus. Arm.: Σαΐτης Fr. 43, 48, 49. 
2 Hd. pr.: καταλιπὼν L. 3’ Bekker: ἐπιθυμίαν L. 
4Conj. Σεθροΐτῃ Manetho, Fr. 43, 48, 49. 


The name may be Semitic (¢f. Hebr. shallij), but it 
has not been found on the monuments. Possibly it is 
not strictly a proper name, but rather a title like “* prince,”’ 
‘*oeneral’’: “‘sultan ’’ comes from the same root. 

2 Cf. § 90. Manetho regards as historically true the 
Greek tales of the great Assyrian Hmpire of Ninus and 
Semiramis. The period referred to here is much earlier 
than the time when Assyria began to harass the Mediter- 
ranean regions. 

3 Tf ‘“‘ Saite’’ is correct here, it has nothing to do with 
the famous Sais, but is probably used for “‘ Tanite”’: 
cf. Herodotus, ii. 17, Strabo, 17, 1, 20 (P. Montet in Revue 
Biblique, xxxix. 1930). The Sethroite nome (Fr. 48, 45, 
49) is in the extreme Εἰ. of the Delta, adjoining the Tanite 
nome, For Sethroé see H. Junker, Zeit. f. dg. Sprache 75. 
1939, p. 78. 

4For Bubastis see Fr. 8 n. 2. The Bubastite branch is 
the farthest E., the next being the Tanitic. 

5 Auaris, in Ancient Egyptian Hetwa‘ret, “town of the 
desert strip,’ but this meaning does not explain the 
“religious tradition ’’. (The older interpretations, “‘ house 
of the flight,’’ “‘ house of the leg,’’ were attached to the 
Seth-Typhén legend: ef. n. 3 infra.) Tanis was a strong- 


80 


AEGYPTIACA Fr. 42 


Salitis.1 He had his seat at Memphis, levying 
tribute from Upper and Lower Egypt, and always 
leaving garrisons behind in the most advantageous 
positions. Above all, he fortified the district to the 
east, foreseeing that the Assyrians,” as they grew 
stronger, would one day covet and attack his kingdom. 

“Τὴ the Saite [Sethroite] nome* he found a city 
very favourably situated on the east of the Bubastite 
branch 4 of the Nile, and called Auaris® after an 


hold of the Hyksés: in O.7. Numbers xiii. 22, “ Now 
Hebron (in S. Palestine) was built seven years before Zoan 
in Egypt,’’ Zoan is Tanis (Dja‘net), and the statement 
probably refers to the Hyksés age. Sethe cautiously 
said, ‘‘ Seth is the god of the Hyksés cities, Tanis and 
Auaris’’. But in Revue Biblique, xxxix., 1930, pp. 5-28, 
Pierre Montet, the excavator of Tanis, brought forward 
reasons to identify Auaris and Pi-Ra‘messes with Tanis ; 
and Alan H. Gardiner (J. Hg. Arch. xix., 1933, pp. 122- 
128) gave further evidence for this view (p. 126): “San 
el-Hagar marks the site of the city successively called 
Auaris, Pi-Ra‘messe, and Tanis’’. Im spite of the criti- 
cism of Raymond Weill (J. Hg. Arch. xxi., 1935, pp. 10-25), 
who cited a hieroglyphic document (found in the temple 
of Ptah in Memphis) in which Auaris and “ the field (or 
land) of Tanis’’ are separate, Pierre Montet (Syria, xvii., 
1936, pp. 200-202) maintains the identity of Auaris, 
Pi-Ra‘messes, and Tanis. [So does H. Junker, Zeit. f. dg. 
Sprache 75. 1939, pp. 63-84.] 

Meanwhile, a new identification of Pi-Ra‘messés had 
been suggested: by excavation M. Hamza (Annales du 
Service des Antiquités de Egypte, xxx. 1930, p. 65) found 
evidence tending to identify Pi-Ra‘messés with the palace 
of Ramessés II. at Tell el-Yahudiya, near Kantir, ὁ. 25 
kilometres south of Tanis; and William C. Hayes (Glazed 
Tiles from a Palace of Ramessés II. at Kantir : The Metro- 
politan Museum of Art Papers, No. 3, 1937) supports this 
theory that Kantir was the Delta residence of the Rames- 
side kings of Egypt, pointing out that there is a practically 

(Footnote continued on page 81 


Fr. 42 MANETHO 


τε Kal τοῖς τείχεσιν ὀχυρωτάτην ἐποίησεν͵ ἐν- 
΄ > ~ \ “ Θ ~ > ” ‘ 
οικίσας αὐτῇ Kal πλῆθος ὁπλιτῶν εἰς εἴκοσι Kal 
79 τέσσαρας μυριάδας ἀνδρῶν προφυλακήν. ἔνθα δὲ 
κατὰ θέρειαν ἤρχετο, τὰ μὲν σιτομετρῶν καὶ 
΄ / A A \ - > 
μισθοφορίαν παρεχόμενος, τὰ δὲ Kal ταῖς ἐξοπ- 
λισίαις πρὸς φόβον τῶν ἔξωθεν ἐπιμελῶς γυμνάζων. 
ΝΜ > > , ” \ ΄ >? 4 
ἄρξας δ᾽ ἐννεακαίδεκα ἔτη, τὸν βίον ἐτελεύτησε. 
A ~ \ -“ > , ,ὔ ‘ 
80 μετὰ τοῦτον δὲ ἕτερος ἐβασίλευσεν τέσσαρα καὶ 
4, ” Xr / B 4 2 θ᾽ a 
τεσσαράκοντα ἔτη καλούμενος Βνών,Σ pel ὃν 
ἄλλος ᾿Απαχνὰν ὃ ἕξ καὶ τριάκοντα ἕτη καὶ μῆνας 
ἕπτά, ἕπειτα δὲ καὶ Ἄπωφις ᾿ ἕν καὶ ἑξήκοντα καὶ 
Ἶ A 5 / A ~ ν 3. δ᾽ ~ δὲ 
81 ᾿Ιαννὰς 5 πεντήκοντα καὶ μῆνα ἕνα, ἐπὶ πᾶσι δὲ 
\ cA 6 > a \ / \ ~ ὃ , 
καὶ "Acais ® ἐννέα καὶ τεσσαράκοντα καὶ μῆνας δύο. 
\ ΑΌ. A a > > A > / ~ 
καὶ οὗτοι μὲν ἕξ ev αὐτοῖς ἐγενήθησαν πρῶτοι 
ἄρχοντες, ποθοῦντες 7 ἀεὶ καὶ μᾶλλον τῆς Αἰγύπτου 
82 ἐξᾶραι τὴν ῥίζαν. ἐκαλεῖτο δὲ τὸ σύμπαν αὐτῶν ® 
1 Hic autem Lat.: ἐνθάδε L. 
2 Manetho, Fr. 43, 48, 49: Βηών L. 
3 Apakhnan Eus.: Παχνὰν Fr. 43: Apachnas Lat. 
4 Aphosis Eus. Arm.: “Adofis MSS., Fr. 43: “Adwdus Fr. 49. 
δ Ιανίας ed. pr.: Samnas Lat.: Anan Eus. Arm.: ’Avvas 
or Avvay Gutschmid. 
6 Ases Lat.: Aseth Eus. (Gutschmid and Meyer hold 
‘AonO to be the form used by Josephus). 
7 Ed. pr.: πορθοῦντες L. i 
8 πολεμοῦντες ἀεὶ Kai ποθοῦντες μᾶλλον MSS. Big. and Hafn. 


in Hudson. 
9 σύμπαν αὐτῶν Eus., omne genus eorum Lat.: om. ἴω. 


82 


AEGYPTIACA Fr. 42 


ancient religious tradition.! This place he rebuilt 
and fortified with massive walls, planting there a 
garrison of as many as 240,000 heavy-armed men to 
guard his frontier. Here he would come in summer- 
time, partly to serve out rations and pay his troops, 
partly to train them carefully in manceuvres and so 
strike terror into foreign tribes. After reigning for 
19 years, Salitis died; and a second king, named 
Bnon,? succeeded and reigned for 44 years. Next 
to him came Apachnan, who ruled for 36 years and 
7 months ;° then Apéphis for 61, and Iannas for 50 
years and 1 month; then finally Assis for 49 years 
and 2 months. These six kings, their first rulers, 
were ever more and more eager to extirpate the 
Egyptian stock. Their race as a whole was called 


unbroken series of royal Ramesside monuments which 
cover a period of almost 200 years. 

In 1906 Petrie discovered at Kantir a vast fortified 
encampment of Hyksés date and a Hyksés cemetery: see 
Petrie, Hyksés and Israelite Cities, pp. 3-16 (the earthwork 
ramparts of the camp were intended to protect an army 
of chariots). 

1 See Fr. 54, ὃ 237, for its connexion with Seth-Typhon, 
to whom the tribal god of the Hyksés was assimilated. 

2 Of these Hyks6s names Bnén and Apachnan are un- 
explained. Apdpi (the name of several kings—at least 
three), and perhaps Aséth (Assis), seem to be pure Egyptian: 
Iannas is presumed to be Khian, whose cartouche turned 
up surprisingly and significantly on the lid of an alabastron 
in the Palace of Minos at Knossos in Crete, as well as on 
a basalt lion from Baghdad. On Khian, see Griffith in 
Proc. of Soc. of Bibl. Arch. xix. (1897), pp. 294 f., 297. 

8JIn his History (and for short reigns in the Epitome, 
see e.g. Dynasty X XVII.) Manetho reckoned by months 
as well as by years, like the Turin Papyrus and the Palermo 
Stone: see Intro. pp. xxiv f. 


83 


Fr. 42 MANETHO 


ἔθνος ‘Yxouws,) τοῦτο δέ ἐστιν βασιλεῖς ποιμένες - 
A ‘A “ > <= A ~ ul / 
τὸ yap UK καθ᾽ ἱερὰν γλῶσσαν βασιλέα onpaiver, 
τὸ δὲ σὼς ποιμήν ἐστι καὶ ποιμένες κατὰ τὴν 
κοινὴν διάλεκτον, καὶ οὕτω συντιθέμενον γίνεται 
« > 
Yrows. τινὲς δὲ λέγουσιν αὐτοὺς “ApaBas εἶναι. 
> ~ 

83 [ἐν 5 δ᾽ ἄλλῳ ἀντιγράφῳ od βασιλεῖς σημαίνεσθαι 

A ~ a a / > A x , > 
διὰ τῆς τοῦ BK προσηγορίας, ἀλλὰ τοὐναντίον aiy- 
μαλώτους δηλοῦσθαι ποιμένας “3 τὸ γὰρ ὕκ πάλιν 
Αἰγυπτιστὶ καὶ τὸ ak δασυνόμενον αἰχμαλώτους 
ε ~ 4 4 \ ~ αλλ θ 4, /, 
ῥητῶς μηνύειν. καὶ τοῦτο μᾶλλον πιθανώτερόν 

~ « 
μοι φαίνεται καὶ παλαιᾶς ἱστορίας ἐχόμενον. 
4 Ἁ ΄ ,ὔ 
84 Τούτους τοὺς προκατωνομασμένους βασιλέας, 
‘ 5 A ~ TT / Xr ,ὔ Α A 
[καὶ] ® τοὺς τῶν ΠΙἼοιμένων καλουμένων καὶ τοὺς 
ἐξ αὐτῶν γενομένους, κρατῆσαι τῆς Αἰγύπτου 

1 “Υκουσσώς Eus. (Hikkusin Eus. Arm.): so also infra. 

2 The bracketed clause (already in Eus.) is apparently an 
ancient gloss, derived from ὃ 91: cf. the similar marginal 
annotations to §§ 92, 98. 

3 ποιμένας Eus.: οὐ ποιμένας L. 


4 μηνύειν Holwerda: μηνύει L. 
δ᾽ Bracketed by Thackeray, Reinach. 





1 Hyksdés, “‘ rulers of foreign lands’’ (Erman-Grapow, 
Worterbuch, iii. p. 171, 29). Another form of the name, 
Hykussés, is preserved by Eusebius, but it is uncertain 
whether the medial -u- is really authentic—the Egyptian 
plural (Meyer). Hyk = ruler of a pastoral people, a 
sheikh. 

‘“The Hyksés, like the foreign Kassite Dynasty in 
Babylonia, adopted the higher culture of the conquered 


84 


AEGYPTIACA Fr. 42 


Hyksés,! that is ‘ king-shepherds’: for hyk in the 
sacred language means ‘king,’ and 505 in common 
speech is ‘shepherd’ or ‘ shepherds’:? hence the 
compound word ‘ Hyksés’. Some say that they 
were Arabs.” ? In another copy‘? the expression 
hyk, it is said, does not mean “kings”: on the 
contrary, the compound refers to “ captive- 
shepherds”. In Egyptian hyk, in fact, and hak 
when aspirated expressly denote “captives”’.6 This 
explanation seems to me the more convincing and 
more in keeping with ancient history. 

These kings whom I have enumerated above, and 
their descendants, ruling over the so-called Shepherds, 
dominated Egypt, according to Manetho, for 511 


country’ (J. Garstang, The Heritage of Solomon, 1934, 
. 62). 

Ps This is correct: for the Egyptian word 3’sw, 

** Bedouins,’’ which in Coptic became shés, ‘* a herdsman,”’ 

see Erman-Grapow, Worterbuch, iv. p. 412, 10 (B.G.). 

3 In a papyrus (11. 111. A.D.) quoted by Wilcken in Archiv 
fiir Pap. iii. (1906), pp. 188 ff. (Chrestomathie, I. ii. p. 322) 
ἄμμος ὑκσιωτική is mentioned—aloe [or cement (Preisigke)] 
from the land of the Hyksiétae, apparently in Arabia. 
This gives some support to the statement in the text. 

4 Josephus, in revising this treatise just as he revised 
his Antiquities, appears to have used a second version of 
Manetho’s Aegyptiaca. Did Josephus ever have before 
him Manetho’s original work ? Laqueur thinks it more 
probable that Josephus consulted revisions of Manetho 
made from the philo- or the anti-Semitic point of view: 
see Intro. p. xx. Since the third century B.c. an exten- 
sive literature on the origin of the Jews had arisen. 

5 This appears to be a Jewish explanation (§ 91), to 
harmonize with the story of Joseph. 

6 The reference here is to the Egyptian word h’k, “ booty,” 
δ prisoners of war’ (Erman-Grapow, Worterbuch, iii. p. 33) 


(B.G.). 
85 


Fr. 42 MANETHO 


ga φησὶν ἔτη πρὸς τοῖς πεντακοσίοις ἕνδεκα. μετὰ 
ταῦτα δὲ τῶν ἐκ τῆς Θηβαΐδος καὶ τῆς ἄλλης 
Αἰγύπτου βασιλέων γενέσθαι φησὶν ἐπὶ τοὺς 
Ποιμένας ἐπανάστασιν, καὶ πόλεμον! συρραγῆναι 
΄ ἢ , ὅν ἃ \ ᾽ ΗΡ 
86 μέγαν καὶ πολυχρόνιον. ἐπὶ δὲ βασιλέως, ᾧ 
ὄνομα εἶναι Μισφραγμούθωσις" ἡττημένους 8 φησὶ 
τοὺς Ποιμένας * ἐκ μὲν τῆς ἄλλης Αἰγύπτου πάσης 
> 
ἐκπεσεῖν, κατακλεισθῆναι δ᾽ εἰς τόπον ἀρουρῶν 
ἔχοντα μυρίων τὴν περίμετρον Αὔαριν ὃ ὄνομα τῷ 
δητόπῳ. τοῦτόν φησιν ὁ Μανεθὼς ἅπαντα τείχει 
τε μεγάλῳ καὶ ἰσχυρῷ περιβαλεῖν τοὺς Π]οιμένας, 
ὅπως τήν τε κτῆσιν ἅπασαν ἔχωσιν ἐν ὀχυρῷ 
‘ \ , A ec ~ \ A “ 
88 καὶ τὴν λείαν τὴν ἑαυτῶν. τὸν δὲ Μισφραγμου- 
θώσεως υἱὸν Θούμμωσιν ® ἐπιχειρῆσαι μὲν αὐτοὺς 
διὰ πολιορκίας ἑλεῖν κατὰ κράτος, ὀκτὼ καὶ 
τεσσαράκοντα μυριάσι στρατοῦ προσεδρεύσαντα 
τοῖς τείχεσιν: ἐπεὶ δὲ τῆς πολιορκίας ἴ ἀπέγνω, 
14 αὐτοῖς L, Lat.: om. Eus. 
2 Eus.: ‘Adtodpaypovdwois 1, (Lat.): so also infra. 
3 Conj. Cobet: ἡττωμένους L. 
44 ἐξ αὐτοῦ L: om. Eus.: ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ ed. pr. 
5 Avapw 1, (Lat.): Avapis Eus. 


δ Θούμμωσιν L: Θμούθωσιν Eus. 
7L: τὴν πολιορκίαν Eus. 


1This number of years, much too high for the length 
of the Hyksés sway in Egypt, may perhaps refer to the 
whole period of their rule in Palestine and Syria: see 
A. Jirku, in Journ. of the Palestine Orient. Soc. xii., 1932, 

. 5] τι. 4. 

᾿ 2 Misphragmuthésis, 7.e. Menkheperré* (Tuthmésis III.) 
and his son Thummiésis, 7.e. Tuthmdsis IV., are here said 
to have driven out the Hyksés. In Fr. 50, ὃ 94, Tethmésis 
is named as the conqueror. In point of historical fact the 


86 


AEGYPTIACA Fr. 42 


years. Thereafter, he says, there came a revolt of 
the kings of the Thebaid and the rest of Egypt 
against the Shepherds, and a fierce and prolonged 
war broke out between them. By a king whose 
name was Misphragmuthosis,” the Shepherds, he 
says, were defeated, driven out of all the rest of 
Egypt, and confined in a region measuring within 
its circumference 10,000 ariirae,? by name Auaris. 
According to Manetho, the Shepherds enclosed this 
whole area with a high, strong wall, in order to safe- 
guard all their possessions and spoils. Thummiésis, 
the son of Misphragmuthdésis (he continues), at- 
tempted by siege to force them to surrender, blockad- 
ing the fortress with an army of 480,000 men. 
Finally, giving up the siege in despair, he concluded 


victorious king was Amésis, and he took Auaris by main 
force: the genuine Manetho must surely have given this 
name which is preserved by Africanus and Eusebius, as 
also by Apién in Tatian, adv. Graecos, §38. See p. 101 
n. 2, and cf. Meyer, Aeg. Chron. pp. 73 f. 

Weill, La fin du moyen empire égyptien, p. 95, explains 
the error by assuming that the exploit of the capture of 
Auaris was usurped by Tuthmésis IV., as it was usurped 
earlier by Hatshepsut and later by Ramessés III. 

Breasted (C.A.H. ii. p. 83) holds that, since with the 
catastrophic fall of Kadesh on the Orontes before the 
arms of Tuthmdsis III. the last vestige of the Hyksés 
power disappeared, the tradition of late Greek days made 
Tuthmésis IIT. the conqueror of the Hyksés. He points 
out that the name Misphragmuthésis is to be identified 
with the two cartouche-names of Tuthmésis III.: it is a 
corruption of “‘Menkheperré‘ Tuthmésis”’. 

? Lit. “‘ with a circumference of 10,000 arirae’’. The 
text (which cannot be attributed as it stands to Manetho 
-τὴν περίμετρον must be a later addition) implies a wrong 
use of ardra as a measure of length; it is, in reality, a 
measure of area, about half an acre. 

87 


Fr. 42 MANETHO 


’ὔ / ΄ Ἁ Μ > ’ 
ποιήσασθαι συμβάσεις, ἵνα τὴν Αἴγυπτον ἐκλιπόντες 
a 4 4 > “-“ 3 / \ 
ὅποι βούλονται πάντες ἀβλαβεῖς ἀπέλθωσι. τοὺς 
80δὲ ἐπὶ ταῖς ὁμολογίαις πανοικησίᾳ μετὰ τῶν 
κτήσεων οὐκ ἐλάττους μυριάδων ὄντας εἴκοσι καὶ 
τεσσάρων ἀπὸ τῆς Αἰγύπτου τὴν ἔρημον εἰς Συρίαν 
διοδοιπορῆσαι. φοβουμένους δὲ τὴν ᾿Ασσυρίων 
90 δυναστείαν, τότε γὰρ ἐκείνους τῆς ᾿Ασίας κρατεῖν, 
ἐν τῇ νῦν ᾿Ιουδαίᾳ καλουμένῃ πόλιν οἰκοδομησα- 
μένους τοσαύταις μυριάσιν ἀνθρώπων ἀρκέσουσαν, 
“εροσόλυμα ταύτην ὀνομάσαι. 
9 “Ev ἄλλῃ δέ τινι βίβλῳ τῶν Αἰγυπτιακῶν 
M 0 \ ~ / \ 1 ” A 
ανεθὼς τοῦτό φησι «τὸ» ἔθνος, τοὺς καλου- 
μένους ΠΠοιμένας, αἰχμαλώτους ἐν ταῖς ἱεραῖς 
᾽ ~ / / / > ~ ‘ 
αὐτῶν βίβλοις γεγράφθαι, λέγων ὀρθῶς: καὶ 
γὰρ τοῖς ἀνωτάτω προγόνοις ἡμῶν τὸ ποιμαίνειν 
πάτριον ἦν, καὶ νομαδικὸν ἔχοντες τὸν βίον οὕτως 
> ~ / >’ / / / > 
92 ἐκαλοῦντο []οιμένες. αἰχμάλωτοί te πάλιν οὐκ 
> ’, e i ~ > / > / > id 
ἀλόγως ὑπὸ τῶν Αἰγυπτίων aveypadnoar, ἐπειδή- 
περ ὃ πρόγονος ἡμῶν ᾿Ιώσηπος 5 ἑαυτὸν ἔφη πρὸς 
τὸν βασιλέα τῶν Αἰγυπτίων αἰχμάλωτον εἶναι, 


1 Bekker: om. L. 

51, (in margin): ἐν ἑτέρῳ ἀντιγράφῳ εὑρέθη οὕτως" κατήχθη 
πραθεὶς παρὰ τῶν ἀδελφῶν εἰς Αἴγυπτον πρὸς τὸν βασιλέα τῆς 
Αἰγύπτου, καὶ πάλιν ὕστερον τοὺς αὑτοῦ ἀδελφοὺς μετεπέμψατο 
τοῦ βασιλέως ἐπιτρέψαντος. 


1240,000—the number of the garrison mentioned in 
§ 78, where they aro described as “ hoplites ”’. 

2 On the origin of “‘ Jeru-Salem,’’ see A. Jirku in Zettschr. 
d. Deutsch. Morgenl. Gesellschaft, 90 (1936), pp. « 10 κα f.: 
the first part, Jeru-, is non-Semitic (cf. Ο.1΄. Hzek. xvi. 2, 
45: 2 Sam. xxiv. 16, and the names Jeru-ba‘al, Jeru-’el ; 


88 


AEGYPTIACA Fr. 42 


a treaty by which they should all depart from Egypt 
and go unmolested where they pleased. On these 
terms the Shepherds, with their possessions and 
households complete, no fewer than 240,000 persons,1 
left Egypt and journeyed over the desert into Syria. 
There, dreading the power of the Assyrians who were 
at that time masters of Asia, they built in the land 
now called Judaea a city large enough to hold all 
those thousands of people, and gave it the name of 
Jerusalem.? 

In another book 3 of his History of Egypt Manetho 
says that this race of so-called Shepherds is, in the 
sacred books of Egypt, described as “‘ captives ” ; 
and his statement is correct. With our remotest 
ancestors, indeed, it was a hereditary custom to 
feed sheep; and as they lived a nomadic life, they 
were called Shepherds. On the other hand, in the 
Egyptian records they were not unreasonably styled 
Captives, since our ancestor Joseph told the king of 
Egypt® that he was a captive, and later, with the 


also, Jaru-wataS in an inscr. of Boghazk6i); the second 
part, Salem, is a Canaanitish divine name, found in the 
texts of Ras esh-Shamra. The name of the city occurs 
in the El-Amarna Letters in the form ‘ Urusalimmu,”’ 
the oldest literary mention of Jerusalem. 

3 Cf. ὃ 83 for the same information, there attributed to 
“another copy ”’. 

4 Cf. O.T. Genesis xlvi. 32-34, xlvii. 3. 

5 In the Biblical narrative Joseph told the chief butler 
or cup-bearer (Genesis xl. 15). The margin of the Floren- 
tine MS. has a note on this passage: “‘In another copy 
(i.e. of the treatise Against Apion) the following reading 
was found—‘he was sold by his brethren and brought 
down into Egypt to the king of Egypt; and later, again, 


> 99 


with the king’s consent, summoned his brethren to Egypt’. 


89 


Fr. 42, 43 MANETHO 


‘ ‘ > ᾿ > A ΝΜ ΄ 
καὶ τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς εἰς τὴν Αἴγυπτον ὕστερον 
/ ~ / > / > A 
μετεπέμψατο, τοῦ βασιλέως ἐπιτρέψαντος. ἀλλὰ 
περὶ μὲν τούτων ἐν ἄλλοις ποιήσομαι τὴν ἐξέτασιν 
ἀκριβεστέραν. 


Fr. 48. Syncellus, p. 113. ΚΑΤΑ ΑΦΡΙΚΑΝΟΝ. 


Πεντεκαιδεκάτη δυναστεία []οιμένων. ἦσαν 
δὲ Φοίνικες ξένοι βασιλεῖς ς΄, ot καὶ Μέμφιν 
- « ἌΡ = ΕἸ - , ” 
εἷλον, of Kal ἐν τῷ Σεθροΐτῃ νομῷ πόλιν ἔκτισαν, 
ἀφ᾽ ἧς ὁρμώμενοι Αἰγυπτίους ἐχειρώσαντο. 
~ sh > / Μ , > > 
v πρῶτος Σαΐτης ἐβασίλευσεν ἔτη ιθ΄, ad 
οὗ καὶ ὁ Σαΐτης νομός." 
Β' Βνῶν, ἔτη μδ΄. 
γ΄ Παχνάν, ἔτη ξα΄. 
δ΄ Σταάν, ἔτη ν΄. 
ε΄ Ἄρχλης, ἔτη pl’. 
, » ” ’ 
ς΄ “Adwdus,? ἔτη Ea’. 
μοῦ, ἔτη ond’. 
1 Τὴ B the words οἱ καὶ ἐν τῷ Σεθροΐτῃ νομῷ .. . ἐχειρώσαντο 


come after ὁ Latrns νομός. 
2m.: “Adofis MSS. 





1 The reference seems to be to Fr. 54, § 227 ff., but ἐν 
ἄλλοις usually refers to a separate work. 

* Africanus gives a less correct list than Josephus (cf. 
the transposition of Apéphis to the end): there is further 
corruption in Eusebius (Fr. 48) and the Book of S6this 
(App. IV.). 

3 This statement of the Phoenician origin of the Hyksés 
kings has generally been discredited until recently: now 
the Ras esh-Shamra tablets, which imply a pantheon 
strikingly similar to that of the Hyksés, have shown that 
the Hyksés were closely related to the Phoenicians. 


90 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 42, 43 


king’s consent, summoned his brethren to Egypt. 
But I shall investigate this subject more fully in 
another place.! 


Dynasty XV. 
Fr. 43 (from Syncellus). ACCORDING TO AFRICANUS.? 


The Fifteenth Dynasty consisted of Shepherd Kings. 
There were six foreign kings from Phoenicia,* who 
seized Memphis: in the Sethroite nome they founded 
a town, from which as a base they subdued Egypt. 

The first of these kings, Saités, reigned for 19 
years: the Saite nome ὅ is called after him. 

2. Bnén, for 44 years. 

3. Pachnan [Apachnan], for 61 years. 

4, Staan,° for 50 years. 

5. Archlés,® for 49 years. 

6. Aphéphis,’ (Aphobis), for 61 years. 

Total, 284 years. 


‘See p. 80 n. 3. The Saite nome proper, as opposed 
to this “ Tanite’’? nome, is mentioned in Egyptian texts 
of the Old Kingdom. For the famous Sais, the seat of 
Dynasty XXVI. (now Sa El-Hagar, see Baedeker,® p. 36 
—N.W. of Tanta on the right bank of the Rosetta branch), 
the centre of the cult of Neith, “‘the metropolis of the 
lower country ”’ (Strabo, 17. 1, 18), ef. Herodotus, ii. 62 ; 
Diod. i. 28, 4 (for its relation to Athens). 

5 For Iannas (in Josephus), the Khian of the Monuments, 
see p. 83 n. 2. 

® Archlés here, and in Eusebius (I’r. 48), corresponds 
with Assis (or Aseth) in Josephus (Fr. 42, § 80); but the 
change in the form of the name is extraordinary. 

* The Jength of reign (61 years, as in Josephus) leads one 
to believe that Africanus has transposed Apdphis from 
the 4th place to the 6th; but in point of fact the last 
Hyksés king whom we know by name was called Apepi. 


91 


Fr. 44, 45, 46 MANETHO 


Fr. 44 (a). Synecellus, p. 114. KATA EYZEBION. 


Πεντεκαιδεκάτη δυναστεία AtvoomoAuta@v βα- 


σιλέων, ot ἐβασίλευσαν ἔτη ov’. 


(0) υβεβιῦβ, Chronica I. (Armenian Version), 
P90. 


Quinta decima dynastia Diospolitarum regum, qui 
regnarunt annis CCL. 


Fr. 45. Syncellus, p. 114. KATA A®PIKANON 


“Εκκαιδεκάτη δυναστεία [Ποιμένες ἄλλοι βασιλεῖς 
Ἴ μ 


Ap’: ἐβασίλευσαν ἔτη dun’. 


Fr. 46 (a). Syncellus, p. 114. KATA ΕὙΣΕΒΙΟΝ. 


“Εκκαιδεκάτη δυναστεία Θηβαῖοι βασιλεῖς €’,' οἵ 
1.3 / ” , 
καὶ ἐβασίλευσαν ἔτη pi’. 


(0) Ευβεβιῦβ, Chronica I. (Armenian Version), 
ΒΡ Ὁ" 


Sexta decima dynastia Thebaeorum regum V, qui 
regnarunt annis CXC, 


ιη΄ Boeckh. 
92 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 44, 45, 46 


Fr. 44 (a) (from Syncellus). AccorDING TO 
EUsEBIUs. 


The Fifteenth Dynasty consisted of kings of 
Diospolis, who reigned for 250 years. 


(b) ARMENIAN VERSION OF EUSEBIUS. 


The Fifteenth Dynasty consisted of kings of 
Diospolis, who reigned for 250 years. 


Dynasty XVI. 


Fr. 45 (from Syncellus). AccorDING TO AFRICANUS. 


The Sixteenth Dynasty were Shepherd Kings again, 
32 in number: they reigned for 518 years. 


Fr. 46 (a) (from Syncellus), AccoRDING TO 
EUSEBIUS. 


The Sixteenth Dynasty were kings of Thebes, 5 
in number: they reigned for 190 years. 


(b) ARMENIAN VERSION OF EUSEBIUS. 


The Sixteenth Dynasty were kings of Thebes, 5 
in number: they reigned for 190 years. 


1 Barbarus gives 318 years (p. 23, XV.) ; Meyer conjec- 
tures that the true number is 418 (Aeg. Chron. p. 99). 
Contrast Fr. 42, § 84 (511 years). 


93 


Fr. 47, 48 MANETHO 


Fr. 47. Syncellus, p. 114. KATA A®PIKANON. 


‘Entaxaidexatyn δυναστεία [Ποιμένες ἄλλοι βα- 
7 μ 
σιλεῖς py’ καὶ Θηβαῖοι ἢ" Διοσπολῖται μγ΄. 

ὋὉμοῦ οἱ Ποιμένες καὶ οἱ Θηβαῖοι ἐβασίλευσαν 
ἔτη ρνα΄. 


Fr. 48 (a). Syncellus, p. 114. ΚΑΤΑ ΕὙΣΕΒΙΟΝ. 


“Επτακαιδεκάτη δυναστεία []οιμένες ἦσαν ἀδελ- 
φοὶ 5 Φοίνικες ξένοι βασιλεῖς, ot καὶ Μέμφιν εἷλον. 
ὯΩν πρῶτος Σαἵτης ἐβασίλευσεν ἔτη ιθ΄, ad’ 
e \ ¢ sh \ > ΄, « A > ~ 
οὗ καὶ 6 Σαΐτης νομὸς ἐκλήθη, ot καὶ ἐν τῷ 
Σεθροΐτῃ νομῷ πόλιν ἔκτισαν, ἀφ᾽ ἧς ὁρμώμενοι 


Αἰγυπτίους ἐχειρώσαντο. 


1 Miiller. 
2 A lapsus calami for δὲ (Meyer): Africanus (Fr. 43) pre- 
serves the true text: ἦσαν δὲ Φοίνικες . . 





1See H. E. Winlock, ‘‘Tombs of the Seventeenth 
Dynasty at Thebes,” in J. Hg. Arch. x. pp. 217 ff. 

2 Barbarus gives 221 years (p. 23, XVI.). According to 
Manetho the total length of the foreign usurpation prob- 
ably was 929 years (260 in Josephus + 518 + 161). 
Josephus (Fr. 42, § 84) gives 511 years. These statements, 
even if based on actual traditions, have no weight as 
compared with the certain data of the Monuments. The 
almost complete lack of buildings of the Hyksés time and 
the close connexion of the Thebans of Dynasty XVII. 


94 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 47, 48 


Dynasty XVII 
Fr. 47 (from Syncellus). AccorpiINc TO AFRICANUS. 


The Seventeenth Dynasty |! were Shepherd Kings 
again, 43 in number, and kings of Thebes or Dios- 
polis, 43 in number. 

Total of the reigns of the Shepherd Kings and the 
Theban kings, 151 years.” 


Fr. 48 (a) (from Syncellus). AccoRDING TO 
EUSEBIUS. 


The Seventeenth Dynasty were Shepherds and 
brothers : they were foreign kings from Phoenicia, 
who seized Memphis. 

The first of these kings, Saités, reigned for 19 
years: the Saite nome‘ is called after him. These 
kings founded in the Sethroite nome a town, from 
which as a base they subdued Egypt. 


with those of Dynasty XIII. tend to show that the 
Hyksés rule in the Nile Valley lasted for about a hundred 
and twenty years, c. 1700-1580 B.c. Under one of the 
Theban kings, Ta‘o, who bore the epithet ‘“‘ The Brave,”’ 
war with the Hyksés broke out c. 1590 B.c. ; Kamose, the 
last king of Dynasty XVII., continued the war of in- 
dependence, and Amésis (of Dynasty XVIII.) finally 
expelled the usurpers. 

* This must be a mistake of transcription: see note 2 on 
the text. 

“See Fr. 42, ὃ 78, n. 3, Fr. 43, n. 4. 


95 


Fr. 48 MANETHO 


B’ Βνῶν, ἔτη μ΄. 

γ'" Ἄφωφις, ἔτη ιδ'. 

Μεθ’ ὃν Ἄρχλης, ἔτη λ΄. 

“Ὁμοῦ, ἔτη py’. 

Κατὰ τούτους Αἰγυπτίων βασιλεὺς ᾿Ιωσὴφ δείκ- 
νυται. 


(0) Ευβεβιῦβ, Chronica I. (Armenian Version), 
Ρ. 99 sq. 


Septima decima dynastia Pastorum, qui fratres 
erant Phoenices exterique reges, et Memphin occu- 
parunt. 

Ex his primus Saites imperavit annis XIX, a quo 
Saitarum quoque nomos nomen traxit. Eidem in 
Sethroite nomo urbem condiderunt, unde incursione 
facta Aegyptios perdomuerunt. 


Secundus Bnon, annis XL. 
Deinde Archles, annis XXX. 
Aphophis, annis XIV. 


Summa annorum CIII. 
Horum aetate regnavisse in Aegypto Josephus 
videtur. 


1Om. A. 


1See p. 95 ἢ. 3. 2See p. 80 n. 3. 


96 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 48 


2. Bnoén, for 40 years. 
3. Aphophis, for 14 years. 


After him Archlés reigned for 30 years. 
Total, 103 years. 


It was in their time that Joseph was appointed 


king of Egypt. 


(b) ARMENIAN VERSION OF EUSEBIUS. 


The Seventeenth Dynasty consisted of Shepherds, 
who were brothers! from Phoenicia and foreign 
kings: they seized Memphis. The first of these 
kings, Saites, reigned for 19 years: from him, too, the 
Saite nome? derived its name. These kings founded 
in the Sethroite nome a town from which they made 
a raid and subdued Egypt. 


The second king was Bnon, tor 40 years. 
Next, Archles, for 30 years. 
Aphophis, for 14 years. 

Total, 103 years. 


It was in their time that Joseph appears to have 
ruled in Egypt.® 


The Armenian text of this sentence is rather difficult, 
but Professor Margoliouth, pointing out that the Armenian 
present infinitive is used here for the perfect, approves 
of this rendering. Karst translates the Armenian in the 
following sense: “It is under these kings that Joseph 
arises, to rule over Egypt’”’. 


Fr. 49 MANETHO 


Fr. 49. Scholia in Platonis Timaeum, 21 E 
(Hermann). 


Σαϊτικός - ἐκ τῶν Μανεθὼ Αἰγυπτιακῶν. ‘En- 
τακαιδεκάτη δυναστεία [Ποιμένες - ἦσαν ἀδελφοὶ" 
Φοίνικες ξένοι βασιλεῖς, ot καὶ Μέμφιν εἷλον. 

ὯΩν πρῶτος Σαΐτης ἐβασίλευσεν ἔτη ιθ΄, ἀφ᾽ οὗ 
δι 6 Po \ > / a tn ~ “᾿ 
καὶ 6 Σαΐτης νομὸς ἐκλήθη - ot καὶ ἐν τῷ Σεθρωΐτῃ 
~ / ” > ae c 4 > / 
νομῷ πόλιν ἔκτισαν, ἀφ᾽ ἧς ὁρμώμενοι Αἰγυπτίους 

ἐχειρώσαντο. 

Δεύτερος τούτων Βνῶν, ἔτη μ'. 

Τρίτος Apxans, ἔτη λ΄. 

Τέταρτος Ἄφω φις, ἔτη 0d’. 

Ὅ “ ’ 

μοῦ, py’. 

Ὃ δὲ Σαΐτης προσέθηκε τῷ μηνὶ ὥρας ιβ’, ὡς 
εἶναι ἡμερῶν λ΄, καὶ τῷ ἐνιαυτῷ ἡμέρας ς᾽, καὶ 
γέγονεν ἡμερῶν τξέ. 


1 δὲ conj.: of. Fr. 48 (a). 


98 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 49 


Fr. 49 (from the Scholia to Plato). 


Saitic, of Sais. From the Aegyptiaca of Manetho. 
The Seventeenth Dynasty consisted of Shepherds: 
they were brothers! from Phoenicia, foreign kings, 
wboseized Memphis. The first of these kings, Saités, 
reigned for 19 years: the Saite nome” is called after 
him. These kings founded in the Sethréite nome a 
town, from which as a base they subdued Egypt. 

The second of these kings, Bnén, reigned for 40 
years; the third, Archaés, for 30 years; and the 
fourth, Aphéphis, for 14 years. Total, 103 years. 

Saités added 12 hours to the month, to make its 
length 30 days; and he added 6 days to the year, 
which thus comprised 365 days.° 


1See p. 95 n. 3. 2 See p. 80 n. 3. 

8 The addition of 5 days (not 6, as above) to the short 
year of 360 days was made long before the Hyksés age: 
it goes back to at least the Pyramid Age, and probably 
earlier. The introduction of the calendar, making an 
artificial reconciliation of the lunar and solar years, perhaps 
as early as 4236 B.C., is believed to give the earliest fixed 
date in human history: see V. Gordon Childe, New Light 
on the Most Ancient East, 1934, pp. 5 f. 


99 


Fr. 50 MANETHO 


Fr. 50. Josepnus, Contra Apionem, I, 15, 16, 
§§ 93-105.1 


(Continued from Fr. 42.) 


Ni A δὲ ~ > / ΄ / 

93 υνὶ δὲ τῆς ἀρχαιότητος ταύτης παρατίθεμαι 
τοὺς Αἰγυπτίους μάρτυρας. πάλιν οὖν τὰ τοῦ 
Μανεθῶ 3 πῶς ἔχει πρὸς τὴν τῶν χρόνων τάξιν 

94 ὑπογράψω. φησὶ δὲ οὕτως - “wera τὸ ἐξελθεῖν ἐξ 
Αἰγύπτου τὸν λαὸν τῶν ΠἼὨοιμένων εἰς Ιεροσόλυμα, 
ὁ ἐκβαλὼν αὐτοὺς ἐξ Αἰγύπτου βασιλεὺς Τέθμωσις 
ἐβασίλευσεν μετὰ ταῦτα ἔτη εἰκοσιπέντε καὶ 
μῆνας τέσσαρας καὶ ἐτελεύτησεν, καὶ παρέλαβεν 

Ἁ 3 \ « > ~ εν / ” / 
ν ἀρχὴν ὃ αὐτοῦ υἱὸς Χέβρων ἔτη Sexarpia. 
95 μεθ᾽ ὃν ᾿Ἀμένωφις εἴκοσι καὶ μῆνας ἕπτά. τοῦ 
δὲ ἀδελφὴ ‘Apecois® εἰκοσιὲν καὶ μῆνας ἐννέα. 
~ δὲ My ὃ bd \ ~ >? / ~ 
ths δὲ Μήφρης δώδεκα καὶ μῆνας ἐννέα. τοῦ 
δὲ Μηφραμούθωσις εἰκοσιπέντε καὶ μῆνας δέκα. 
lo δὲ Θ ~ 4 > / \ ~ > 7 ~ δ᾽ 
θότου 0€ ὥὕμωσις“ evvea καὶ μῆνας OKTW. τοῦ 
Apevwdis τριάκοντα καὶ μῆνας δέκα. τοῦ δὲ 


1§§ 94-105 are quoted by Theophilus, Ad Autolycum, ITI, 
20f. §§ 103, 104 are quoted by Eusebius, Praepar. Evang., 
Χ, 13. 

2 Niese: ΪΜανέθωνος L. 

8 Naber: ᾿Αμενσὶς Fr. 52: ᾿Αμεσσὴς L. 

4 Τυθμώσης Manetho, Fr. 51: Τούθμωσις Fr. 52, 53. 


1The New Kingdom: Dynasties XVIII.-XX.: 6. 1580- 
ὁ. 1100 B.c. 

Dynasty XVIII. c. 1580-1310 B.c. 

For identifications with the monumental evidence which 
is firmly established, see Meyer, Geschichte*, ii. 1, p. 78: 
the names and order of the first nine kings are: (1) Amésis 


100 


AEGYPTIACA Fr. 50 


Dynasties, XVIII} XIX. 


Fr. 50 (from Josephus, Contra Apionem, i. 15, 
16, §§ 93-105)—(continued from Fr. 42). 


For the present I am citing the Egyptians as wit- 
nesses to this antiquity of ours. I shall therefore 
resume my quotations from Manetho’s works in their 
reference to chronology. His account is as follows: 
** After the departure of the tribe of Shepherds from 
Egypt to Jerusalem, Tethmésis,” the king who drove 
them out of Egypt, reigned for 25 years 4 months 
until his death, when he was succeeded by his 
son Chebrén, who ruled for 13 years. After him 
Amen6phis reigned for 20 years 7 months ; then his 
sister Amessis for 2] years 9 months; then her son 
Méphrés for 12 years 9 months; then his son Méphra- 
muthésis for 25 years 10 months; then his son 
Thmésis for 9 years 8 months ; then his son Amenéphis 


(Chebr6én is unexplained), (2) Amendphis I., (3) Tuthmésis 
I., (4) Tuthmésis IT., (5) Hatshepsut (apparently Manetho’s 
Amessis or Amensis: the same length of reign, 21 years), 
(6) Tuthmdsis III. (corresponding to Méphrés, i.e. 
Menkheperré* or Meshperé‘, and Misphragmuthésis, 7.e. 
Menkheperré‘ Thutmose), (7) Amendéphis 11., (8) Tuthmésis 
IV. (the order of these two being reversed by Manetho), 
(9) Amenéphis III. (Hérus, the same length of reign, 
36 years). 

The remaining kings of the dynasty are: Amendéphis IV. 
(Akhnaten, see p. 123 n. 1), Semenkhkaré‘ (ἢ Acenchérés), 
Tat‘ankhamon (ἢ Chebrés), Ay (ἢ Acherrés): see C.A.H. 
ii. p. 702. On rulers Nos. 3, 4, 5 and 6, see Wm. F. 
Edgerton, The Thutmosid Succession, 1933. 

For Dynasty XIX. see p. 148 n. 1. 

2 Tethmésis = Amdsis: see note on Misphragmuthésis, 
Fr. 42, § 86. For the scarab of Amosis see Plate 1, 3. 


101 


Fr. 50 MANETHO 


0) \ ‘ ~ [4 “ δὲ 
ρος τριακονταὲξ καὶ μῆνας πέντε. τοῦ δὲ 
θυγάτηρ ᾿ἀκεγχερὴς δώδεκα καὶ μῆνα ἕνα. τῆς 
971 δὲ ‘Pddwris ἀδελφὸς ἐννέα. τοῦ δὲ ‘Axeyynpns 
δώδεκα καὶ μῆνας πέντε. τοῦ δὲ ᾿Ακεγχήρης 
ἕτερος δώδεκα καὶ μῆνας τρεῖς. τοῦ δὲ “Appais 
τέσσαρα καὶ μῆνα ἕνα. τοῦ δὲ 'Ραμέσσης ἕν 
καὶ μῆνας τέσσαρας. τοῦ δὲ Ἁρμέσσης Μιαμοῦν 

« A \ “ 4 ~ \ > / 
ἑξηκονταὲξ καὶ μῆνας δύο. τοῦ δὲ ᾿Αμένωφις 
΄ A ~ σ -“ A / ε \ 
98 δεκαεννέα καὶ μῆνας ἕξ. τοῦ δὲ Σέθως ὁ Kai 
‘Papéoons,! ἱππικὴν καὶ ναυτικὴν ἔχων δύναμιν, 

A ἣν > A σ - > , “ > 4, 
τὸν μὲν ἀδελφὸν “Appaiv ἐπίτροπον τῆς Αἰγύπτου 
κατέστησεν, καὶ πᾶσαν μὲν αὐτῷ τὴν ἄλλην βα- 

\ / > / /, A > / 
σιλικὴν περιέθηκεν ἐξουσίαν, μόνον δὲ ἐνετείλατο 
διάδημα μὴ φορεῖν μηδὲ τὴν βασιλίδα μητέρα τε 

~ / > ~ > ἐς A sa ~ Ν» 
99 τῶν τέκνων ἀδικεῖν, ἀπέχεσθαι δὲ καὶ τῶν ἄλλων 
~ / > ‘ A 3, ἃ tA \ 
βασιλικῶν παλλακίδων. αὐτὸς δὲ ἐπὶ Κύπρον καὶ 
Φοινίκην καὶ πάλιν ᾿Ασσυρίους τε καὶ Μήδους 


1 18. : Ζέθωσις καὶ ἱΡαμέσσης L. 

2L (in margin): εὑρέθη ἐν ἑτέρῳ ἀντιγράφῳ οὕτως" μεθ᾽ ὃν 
Σέθωσις καὶ ἹΡαμέσσης δύο ἀδελφοί: ὁ μὲν ναυτικὴν ἔχων δύναμιν 
τοὺς κατὰ θάλατταν | ἀπαντῶντας καὶ διαχειρωμένους f (διαπειρω- 
μένους Naber) ἐπολιόρκει" μετ᾽ οὐ πολὺ δὲ καὶ τὸν ἱῬαμέσσην 
ἀνελών, “Appaiv ἄλλον αὑτοῦ ἀδελφὸν ἐπίτροπον τῆς Αἰγύπτου 
καταστῆσαι (for κατέστησε). 


1 Howard Carter (Tutankhamen, iii. p. 3) points out that 
monuments of Amenéphis III. are dated to his 37th year, 
perhaps even to his 40th year; and he explains that 
Manetho has given the length of his reign as sole ruler. 
More commonly, the high figures assigned to the reigns of 
kings may be explained by the assumption that over- 
lapping co-regencies have been included. 

2 Miamtin = Mey-amiun, “‘ beloved of Amin”, 


102 


AEGYPTIACA Fr. 50 


for 30 years 10 months;? then his son Orus for 36 years 
5 months; then his daughter Acenchérés for 12 years 
1 month; then her brother Rathétis for 9 years; 
then his son Acenchérés for 12 years 5 months, his 
son Acenchérés II. for 12 years 3 months, his son 
Harmais for 4 years 1 month, his son Ramessés for 
1 year 4 months, his son Harmessés Miamin? for 
66 years 2 months, his son Amenéphis for 19 years 
6 months, and his son Sethés, also called Ramessés,? 
whose power lay in his cavalry and his fleet. This 
king appointed his brother Harmais viceroy of Egypt, 
and invested him with all the royal prerogatives, 
except that he charged him not to wear a diadem, 
nor to wrong the queen, the mother of his children, 
and to refrain likewise from the royal concubines. 
He then set out on an expedition against Cyprus and 
Phoenicia and later against the Assyrians and the 


?The margin of the Florentine MS. has a note here: 
“The following reading was found in another copy: 
* After him Sethdsis and Ramessés, two brothers. The 
former, with a strong fleet, blockaded his murderous (?) 
adversaries by sea. Not long after, he slow Ramessés and 
appointed another of his brothers, Harmais, as viceroy of 
Egypt.’”’ This is intended as a correction of the text of 
Josephus, but it contains the error of the Florentine MS. 
in the reading Σέθωσις καὶ ἹΡαμέσσης. Sethdsis is the 
Sesostris of Herodotus, ii. 102, where his naval expedition 
in the “‘ Red Sea ”’ is described. 

Meyer, Aeg. Chron. p. 91, considers the words ‘“‘ also 
called Ramesses’ an addition to Manetho. See ὃ 245. 

W. Struve (see p. 148 n. 1) would here emend Sethés 
into Sesés, which was a name of Ramesés II.: according 
to the monuments he reigned for 67 years (cf. Fr. 55, 2), 
and his triumphant Asiatic campaigns were told by 
Hecataeus of Abdera (Osymandyas in Diodorus Siculus, 
i. 47 ff.). 


103 


Fr. 50 MANETHO 


στρατεύσας, ἅπαντας τοὺς μὲν δόρατι, τοὺς δὲ 
3 \ / a ~ ~ ΄ e ‘ 
ἀμαχητὶ φόβῳ δὲ τῆς πολλῆς δυνάμεως ὑποχειρίους 
ἔλαβε, καὶ μέγα φρονήσας ἐπὶ ταῖς εὐπραγίαις ἔτι 
καὶ θαρσαλεώτερον ἐπεπορεύετο τὰς πρὸς ἀνατολὰς 
100 πόλεις τε καὶ χώρας καταστρεφόμενος. χρόνου 
ε ~ / σ “ ε \ > 
τε ἱκανοῦ γεγονότος, “Appais 6 καταλειφθεὶς ἐν 
Αἰγύπτῳ πάντα τάμπαλιν οἷς ἁδελφὸς ' παρήνει 
μὴ ποιεῖν ἀδεῶς ἔπραττεν" καὶ γὰρ τὴν βασιλίδα 
/ ” \ aA Μ / > ~ 
βιαίως ἔσχεν καὶ ταῖς ἄλλαις παλλακίσιν ἀφειδῶς 
διετέλει χρώμενος, πειθόμενος δὲ 3 ὑπὸ τῶν φίλων 
101 διάδημα ἐφόρει καὶ eles τῷ ἀδελφῷ. ὁ δὲ 
τεταγμένος ἐπὶ τῶν ἱερέων ὃ τῆς Αἰγύπτου γράψας 
/, 
βιβλίον ἔπεμψε τῷ Σεθώσει, δηλῶν αὐτῷ πάντα 
Avie 3 “ ¢ > A 39 ““κῖο oe 
Kal ὅτι ἀντῆρεν ὁ ἀδελφὸς αὐτῷ Ἃρμαϊς. παρα- 
χρῆμα οὖν ὑπέστρεψεν εἰς Π,Ἂηλούσιον καὶ ἐκράτησεν 
“ 7 / ε \ , >? / > \ ~ 
102 τῆς ἰδίας βασιλείας. ἡ δὲ χώρα ἐκλήθη ἀπὸ τοῦ 
αὐτοῦ ὀνόματος Αἴγυπτος λέγεται γὰρ ὅτι 6 
μὲν Σέθως ἐκαλεῖτο Αἴγυπτος, Ἅρμαϊς δὲ 6 ἀδελφὸς 
αὐτοῦ Aavads.”’ 
1 ἁδελφὸς Gutschmid: ἀδελφὸς L. ὅτε conj. Niese. 
3 ἱερέων L (perhaps an Ancient Egyptian formula): ἱερῶν 
Hudson (sacra Lat., fana Eus.)—with this ef. Revenue Laws 


of Ptolemy Philadelphus, 519 (258 B.C.) of ἐπὶ τῶν ἱερῶν τεταγ- 
μένοι 4 λέγεται Gutschmid: λέγει L (dicit Lat.). 





1A frequent title from the Old Kingdom onwards is 

‘overseer of the priests of Upper and Lower Egypt,” 
tease applied to the high priest of Amin. The emenda- 
tion ἱερῶν (for ἱερέων) is supported by a reference in a 
papyrus of about the time of Manetho. 

*See Fr. 54, § 274, n. 1 (pp. 140-141). 

3 With the return of Sethdésis to a country in revolt, ef. 
Herodotus, ii. 107 (return of Sesostris and the perilous 


104 


AEGYPTIACA Fr. 50 


Medes; and he subjugated them all, some by the 
sword, others without a blow and merely by the 
menace of his mighty host. In the pride of his con- 
quests, he continued his advance with still greater 
boldness, and subdued the cities and lands of the 
East. When a considerable time had elapsed, 
Harmais who had been left behind in Egypt, reck- 
lessly contravened all his brother’s injunctions. He 
outraged the queen and proceeded to make free with 
the concubines; then, following the advice of his 
friends, he began to wear a diadem and rose in tevolt 
against his brother. The warden of the priests of 
Egypt | then wrote a letter which he sent to Sethdsis, 
revealing all the details, including the revolt of his 
brother Harmais. Sethésis forthwith returned to 
Pélusium ? and took possession of his kingdom ὃ; and 
the land was named Aegyptus after him. It is said 
that Sethés was called Aegyptus, and his brother 
Harmais, Danaus.” 4 


banquet), Diod. Sic. i. 57, 6-8. The tale appears to be 
a piece of folklore (Maspero, Journ. des Savants, 1901, 
pp- 599, 665 ff.). See Wainwright, Sky-Religion, p. 48. 

4Danaus: cf. ὃ 231. See Meyer, Aeg. Chron. p. 75, for 
the theory that the identification of Sethés and Harmais 
with Aegyptus and Danaus is due, not to Manetho, but to 
a Jewish commentator or interpolator. 

The tradition is that Danaus, a king of Egypt, was 
expelled by his brother and fled to Argos with his fifty 
daughters, and there “the sons of Aegyptus’’ were slain 
by “the daughters of Danaus.” The legend appears to 
have existed in Egypt as well as in Greece: see Diod. Sic. 
i, 28. 2, 97. 2. For attempts to explain the story in terms 
of Aegean pre-history, see J. L. Myres, Who Were the 
Greeks ? (1930), pp. 323 ff.; M. P. Nilsson, The Mycenaean 
Origin of Greek Mythology (1932), p. 64. 


105 


103 


104 


105 


Fr. 50, 51 MANETHO 


~ al ? > ~ 
Ταῦτα μὲν ὁ Μανεθώς. δῆλον δ᾽ ἐστὶν ἐκ τῶν 
ta ~ 
εἰρημένων ἐτῶν, τοῦ χρόνου συλλογισθέντος, ὅτι 
of καλούμενοι []οιμένες, ἡμέτεροι δὲ πρόγονοι, 
τρισὶ καὶ ἐνενήκοντα καὶ τριακοσίοις πρόσθεν ἔτεσιν 
~ A 
ex τῆς Αἰγύπτου ἀπαλλαγέντες THY χώραν ταύτην 
> , ἍἋ \ > ΕΣ 5 / 7 
ἐπῴκησαν ἢ Δαναὸν eis Ἄργος ἀφικέσθαι " καίτοι 
A > a ? 
τοῦτον ἀρχαιότατον ᾿Αργεῖοι νομίζουσι. δύο τοίνυν 
a / ~ 
ὁ Μανεθὼς ἡμῖν τὰ μέγιστα μεμαρτύρηκεν ἐκ τῶν 
~ «ε 
παρ᾽ Αἰγυπτίοις γραμμάτων, πρῶτον μὲν τὴν ἑτέ- 
»Μ > ” ” A A > - 
ρωθεν ἄφιξιν εἰς Αἴγυπτον, ἔπειτα δὲ τὴν ἐκεῖθεν 
ἀπαλλαγὴν οὕτως ἀρχαίαν τοῖς χρόνοις, ὡς ἐγγύς 
a A > ~ 
που προτερεῖν" αὐτὴν τῶν ᾿ΪΙλιακῶν ἔτεσι χιλίοις. 
€ \ δ Fy We, 4 > > ~ > > , 
ὑπὲρ ὧν δ᾽ 6 Μανεθὼς οὐκ ἐκ τῶν παρ᾽ Αἰγυπτίοις 
αὶ 3 3 3 « st \ « λό » ~ 
ypappdatwr,® ἀλλ᾽, ὡς αὐτὸς ὡμολόγηκεν, ἐκ τῶν 
ἀδεσπότως μυθολογουμένων προστέθεικεν, ὕστερον 
> / A) ’ 3 AY ‘ > / 
ἐξελέγξω κατὰ μέρος ἀποδεικνὺς τὴν ἀπίθανον 
αὐτοῦ ψευδολογίαν. 


Fr. 51. ΤΗΒΟΡΗΠΙΒ, Ad Autolycum, III, 20 (Otto). 


ὋὉ δὲ Μωσῆς odnyjnoas* rods "Iovdaious, ὡς 
ἔφθημεν εἰρηκέναι, ἐκβεβλημένους ἀπὸ γῆς Αἰγύπτου 


1 δὲ Eus.: om. L, Lat. 

2 που προτερεῖν Eus., Lat.: τοῦ πρότερον L. 

3 γραμμάτων ed. pr. (litteris Lat., libris Eus.): πραγμάτων L. 
48. ἦν : ὡδήγησε Boeckh. 





1 This total is reckoned from Tethmésis (Amésis) to the 
end of the reign of Sethésis, the latter being taken as 60 
years (cf. ὃ 231, where Sethés is said to have reigned for 
59 years after driving out Hermaeus). 


106 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 50, 51 


Such is Manetho’s account; and, if the time is 
reckoned according to the years mentioned, it is clear 
that the so-called Shepherds, our ancestors, quitted 
Egypt and settled in our land 393 years! before the 
coming of Danaus to Argos. Yet the Argives regard 
Danaus as belonging to a remote antiquity.” Thus 
Manetho has given us evidence from Egyptian records 
upon two very important points: first, upon our 
coming to Egypt from elsewhere ; and secondly, upon 
our departure from Egypt at a date so remote that it 
preceded the Trojan war® by wellnigh a thousand 
years.4 As for the additions which Manetho has 
made, not from the Egyptian records, but, as he has 
himself admitted, from anonymous legendary tales,° 
I shall later refute them in detail, and show the im- 
probability of his lying stories. 


Fr. 51 5 (from Theophilus, Ad Autolyc. iii. 19). 


Moses was the leader of the Jews, as I have already 
said, when they had been expelled from Egypt by 


2 The mythical King Inachus was held to be still more 
ancient: cf. Fr. 4, 1 (p. 19 n. 4). 

8 The traditional date of the Trojan war is 1192-1183 
B.C. 

4 This appears to be about four times too high a figure: 
250 years would be a nearer estimate. 

5 Cf. Fr. 54, §§ 229, 287, for Manetho’s use of popular 
traditions. 

®This list of Dynasties XVIII., XIX. is obviously 
derived wholly from Josephus, any variations from the 
text of Josephus being merely corruptions. Theophilus, 
Bishop of Antioch, wrote his apologia for the Christian 
faith (three books addressed to a friend Autolycus) in the 
second half of ii. A.D. 


107 


Fr. 51 MANETHO 


e \ , \ e ” / σ 
ὑπὸ βασιλέως Φαραὼ οὗ τοὔνομα Τέθμωσις, ὅς, 

/ \ \ >? \ ~ ve / ” 
φασίν, μετὰ τὴν ἐκβολὴν τοῦ λαοῦ ἐβασίλευσεν ἔτη 

” / \ ~ , « « / 4 
εἴκοσι πέντε Kal μῆνας δ΄, ws ὑφήρηται Mavabads. 


2. 
3. 


4. 


108 


Kai peta τοῦτον Χεβρῶν, ἔτη ιγ΄. 

Μετὰ δὲ τοῦτον Ἀμένωφις, ἔτη kK’, μῆνας 
es 
ἕπτά. 

Μετὰ δὲ τοῦτον ἡ ἀδελφὴ αὐτοῦ Ἀ μέσση, 
ἔτη Ka’, μῆνα a’ 


. Μετὰ δὲ ταύτην Μήφρης, ἔτη ιβ’, μῆνας 0’. 
. Μετὰ δὲ τοῦτον Μηφραμμούθωσις, ἔτη 


a) a , 
κ΄," μῆνας ι΄. 


. Καὶ μετὰ τοῦτον Τυθμώσης, ἔτη θ', μῆνας 


. Kai μετὰ τοῦτον Ἀμένωφις,3 ἔτη λ', μῆνας 


, 
C. 


. Mera δὲ τοῦτον *"Qpos, ἔτη das,’ μῆνας ε΄. 
. Τούτου δὲ θυγάτηρ, «ἈΑἈκεγχερής», ἔτη 


ι{81, μῆνας α' 


. Μετὰ δὲ ταύτην “Ῥαθῶτις, ἔτη θ'». 
. «Μετὰ δὲ τοῦτον ΑΙ κεγχήρης, ἔτη of’, μῆνας 


E>. 


. «Μετὰ δὲ τοῦτον Ak> εἰ[γ]χ[ή]ρης, ἔτη of’, 


μῆνας γ'. 


. Τοῦ δὲ Appais, ἔτη 8’, μῆνα a’. 
. Καὶ μετὰ τοῦτον Ραμέσσης ἐνιαυτὸν, μῆνας 


δ 


. Καὶ μετὰ τοῦτον Ῥαμέσσης Μιαμμού, 


ἔτη €s’° καὶ μῆνας β'. 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 51 


King Pharaéh whose name was Tethmésis. After 
the expulsion of the people, this king, it is said, 
reigned for 25 years 4 months, according to Manetho’s 
reckoning. 


2. 
3. 
4, 


After him, Chebrén ruled for 13 years. 

After him, Amendphis, for 20 years 7 months. 

After him, his sister Amessé, for 2] years 1 
month [9 months in Josephus]. 


. After her, Méphrés, for 12 years 9 months. 
. After him, Méphrammuthésis, for 20 years [25 


years in Josephus] 10 months. 


. After him, Tuthmésés, for 9 years 8 months. 

. After him, Amendphis, for 30 years 10 months, 
. After him, Orus, for 36 years 5 months. 

. Next, his daughter [Acenchérés] reigned for 12 


years 1 month. 


. After her, [Rathétis, for 9 years. 
. After him, Acenchérés, for 12 years 5 months. 
. After him, Aclenchérés [II.], for 12 years 3 


months. 


. His son Harmais, for 4 years 1 month. 
. After him, Ramessés for 1 year and 4 months. 
. After him, Ramessés Miammi(n), for 66 years 


2 months. 


1q’ t.e, ἕνα, in error for ἐννέα, Josephus, Fr. 50, ὃ 95 
(Miller). 
2¥or xe’, as in Josephus, Fr. 50, § 95. 
8 Aapevodis Otto. 
4 Restored from J osephus (Boeckh): MSS. θυγάτηρ ἔ ἔτη ι΄, 
μῆνας γ΄. μετὰ δὲ ταύτην Μερχερής, € ἔτη ιβ΄, μῆνας γ΄. 
5 μετὰ δὲ τοῦτον Μέσσης Μιαμμού, ἔτη [ξ]ς΄ Otto. 


109 


Fr. 51, 52 MANETHO 


17. Kai μετὰ τοῦτον Ἀμένωφις, ἔτη v6’, μῆνας 
ς΄. 
Τοῦ δὲ Σέθως, ὃς" καὶ “Payéoons, ἔτη ι', dv? 
φασιν ἐσχηκέναι πολλὴν δύναμιν ἱππικῆς καὶ 
παράταξιν ναυτικῆς. 


Fr. 52. Syncellus, pp. 115, 130, 133. 
KATA A®PIKANON. 


᾿Οκτωκαιδεκάτη δυναστεία Διοσπολιτῶν 
βασιλέων ts’. 

*Qv πρῶτος Ἀμώς, ἐφ᾽ οὗ Μωῦσῆς ἐξῆλθεν ἐξ 
Αἰγύπτου, ὡς ἡμεῖς ἀποδεικνύομεν, ὡς δὲ ἡ παροῦσα 
ψῆφος ἀναγκάζει, ἐπὶ τούτου τὸν Μωῦσέα συμβαίνει 
νέον ἔτι εἶναι. 


Δεύτερος κατὰ ᾿Αφρικανὸν κατὰ τὴν ιη΄ δυναστείαν 
> / 7 Ν ΄ 
ἐβασίλευσε Χεβρώς, ἔτη ιγ΄. 

Τρίτος, Auevwo Ais, ἔτη κδ' 3 

Τέταρτος, Awevais,® ἔτη Kp’. 


1 τοῦ δὲ Θοῖσσος Otto. 

2 οὕς Otto, adding after ναυτικῆς the words κατὰ τοὺς ἰδίους 
χρόνους. 

3 κα΄ τη. 4 τετάρτη Miller. δ᾽ Auepais A. 


1See p. 100 n. 1. 

2See p. 101 n. 2. On the basis of new evidence scholars 
now tend to conclude that the Exodus took place c. 1445 
B.c. (see e.g. J. W. Jack, The Date of the Exodus, 1925): 
Jericho fell c. 1400 B.c. (J. Garstang, The Heritage of 
Solomon, 1934, p. 281). 

8.7.6. Africanus. 


110 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 51, 52 


17. After him, Amenéphis, for 19 years 6 months. 

18. Then, his son Sethés, also called Ramessés, 
for 10 years. He is said to have possessed 
a large force of cavalry and an organized 
fleet. 


Dynasty XVIII. 


Fr. 52 (from Syncellus). AccORDING TO AFRICANUS. 


The Eighteenth Dynasty ! consisted of 16 kings of 
Diospolis. 

The first of these was Amés, in whose reign 
Moses went forth from Egypt,” as I* here declare ; 
but, according to the convincing evidence of the 
present calculation’ it follows that in this reign 
Moses was still young. 

The second king of the Eighteenth Dynasty, ac- 
cording to Africanus, was Chebrés, who reigned for 
13 years. 

The third king, Amenéphthis,° reigned for 24 (21) 

ears. 
; The fourth king (queen), Amensis(Amersis), reigned 
for 22 years. 


“ T.e. by Syncellus. 

5 This Greek transcription of ‘“* Amenhotpe,”’ retaining 
both the labial and the dental, is the fullest form 
of the name, ‘“ Amenédthés’’ showing assimilation : 
“Amend6phis,’”” which is regularly used to represent 
““Amenhotpe,”’ actually comes from another name, 
*“Amen(em)dpe’’ (B.G.). The month Phamenéth 
(February-March) is named from the “feast of 
Amendthés ’’. 


111 


Fr. 52 MANETHO 


Iléuntos, Μίσαφρις, ἔτη vy’. 

“Exros, Μισφραγμούθωσις, ἔτη Ks’, ἐφ οὗ ὃ 

ἐπὶ Δευκαλίωνος κατακλυσμός. 

Ὁμοῦ ἐπὶ Apdcews τοῦ καὶ Μισφραγμουθώσεως 
ἀρχῆς κατὰ Adpixavov γίνονται ἔτη ξθ΄. Τοῦ γὰρ 
Αμὼς οὐδ᾽ ὅλως εἶπεν ἔτη. 

ζ΄ Τούθμωσις, ἔτη θ΄. 
n Ἀμενῶφις, ἔτη λα΄ Οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ Μέμ- 
νων εἶναι νομιζόμενος καὶ φθεγγόμενος λίθος. 
GY *Qpos, ἔτη λζ΄. 
(« ἈἈχερρῆς, ἔτη λβ΄. 
ια΄ ῬΡαθῶς, ἔτη ἕξ. 
iB’ Χεβρής, ἔτη ιβ΄. 
ιγ΄ Axeppijs, ἔτη ιβ΄. 
ιδ΄ Appecis,| ἔτη ε΄. 
ιε΄ Ῥαμεσσῆς, ἔτος a’ 
is’ Αμενωφάθ," ἔτη ιθ 
ὋὉμοῦ, ἔτη o€y’. 


1B: "Apeons A. *B: ᾿Αμενώφ G. 





‘This note about Memnén in both Africanus and Euse- 
bius should be transferred to the ninth king of the dynasty, 
Orus or Amendéphis III. 

[Footnote continued on opposite page. 


112 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) FR. 52 


The fifth, Misaphris, for 13 years. 

The sixth, Misphragmuthdésis, for 26 years: in his 
reign the flood of Deucalion’s time occurred. 

Total, according to Africanus, down to the reign of 
Amésis, also called Misphragmuthdsis, 69 years. Of 
the length of the reign of Amés he said nothing at all. 

7. Tuthmésis, for 9 years. 
8. Amendphis, for3l years. Thisis the king who 
was reputed to be Memnon and a speaking 
, Statue.! 
9. Orus, for 37 years. 

10. Acherrés,” for 32 years. 

11. Rathés, for 6 years. 

12. Chebrés, for 12 years. 

13. Acherrés, for 12 years. 

14. Armesis, for 5 years. 

15. Ramessés, for 1 year. 

16. Amendphath (Amendph), for 19 years. 


Total, 263 years. 


The reference is to the two monolithic colossi of 
Amendphis III. (Baedeker 8, pp. 345 f.): see Pausanias, 
i. 42 (the Thebans say it was a statue not of Memnén, but 
of Phamenéph, who dwelt in those parts) with J. G. 
Frazer’s note (vol. ii. pp. 530 f.), and Tacitus, Ann. ii. 61. 
Amenéphis III. (Memnén) is correctly named in Greek 
Amenéth and Phamenéth by the poetess Balbilla (time of 
Hadrian): see Werner Peek in Mitt. des Deutsch. Inst. 
fiir dg. Alt. in Kairo, v. 1 (1934), pp. 96, 99; Sammelbuch, 
8211, 8213. 

2 For possible identifications of Nos. 10, 12, and 13 see 
p- 101 n.1. Nos. 14, 15, and 16 should be transferred to 
Dynasty XIX.: see p. 148 n. 1. Armesis (Armais) is 
probably Haremhab: Ramessés, vizier of Haremhab and 
afterwards Ramessés I., was probably of Heliopolitan 
origin (P. E. Newberry). 


113 


Fr. 53 MANETHO 


Fr. 53 (a). Syncellus, pp. 116, 129, 133, 135. 
KATA EYZEBION. 


᾿Οκτωκαιδεκάτη δυναστεία Διοσπολιτῶν 
βασιλέων ιδ'. 

ὯΩν πρῶτος, Ἄμωσις, ἔτη κε΄. 

β' Χεβρὼ ν δεύτερος, ἔτη ty’. 
γ΄ Appevddrs, ἔτη xa’. 
’ Μίφρης, ἔτη ιβ΄. 
ε΄ Μισφραγμούθωσις, ἔτη ks’. 

Ὁμοῦ an’ Δμώσεως τοῦ πρώτου τῆς προκειμένης 
un’ δυναστείας ἕως Μισφραγμουθώσεως ἀρχῆς κατὰ 
Εὐσέβιον ἔτη γίνονται oa’, βασιλεῖς πέντε ἀντὶ τῶν 
ἕξ: τὸν γὰρ τέταρτον Ἡμένσην παραδραμών, οὗ ὃ 
Adpixavos καὶ οἱ λοιποὶ μέμνηνται, ἔτη KB’ αὐτοῦ 
ἐκολόβωσεν. 

ς΄ Τούθμωσις, ἔτη &. 
ζ΄ ἈἈμένωφις, ἔτη λα΄. Οὗτός ἐστιν ὃ Μέμνων 
εἶναι νομιζόμενος καὶ φθεγγόμενος λίθος. 
*Qpos, ἔτη As’ (ἐν ἄλλῳ Xn’). 
θ΄ ᾿Αχενχέρσης, «ἔτη ιβ'.. 
«Ἄθωρις, ἔτη λθ' 1». 
«Κενχέρη-», ἔτη ws’ 3 


, 


Kara τοῦτον Μωῦσῆς τῆς ἐξ Αἰγύπτου πορείας 
τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων ἡγήσατο. (Syncellus adds: όνος 
Εὐσέβιος ἐπὶ τούτου λέγει τὴν τοῦ ᾿Ισραὴλ διὰ 
Μμωὺῦσέως ἔξοδον, μηδενὸς αὐτῷ λόγου μαρτυροῦντος, 
ἀλλὰ καὶ πάντων ἐναντιουμένων τῶν πρὸ αὐτοῦ, ὡς 
μαρτυρεῖ.) 

114 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 53 


Fr. 53 (a) (from Syncellus), ACCORDING TO 
EUSEBIUS. 


The Eighteenth Dynasty consisted of fourteen 
kings of Diospolis. 

The first of these, Amésis, reigned for 25 years, 

2. The second, Chebroén, for 13 years. 

3. Ammend6phis, for 21 years. 

4. Miphrés, for 12 years. 

5. Misphragmuthésis, for 26 years. 

Total from Amésis, the first king of this Eighteenth 
Dynasty, down to the reign of Misphragmuthosis 
amounts, according to Eusebius, to 71 years; and 
there are five kings, not six. For he omitted the 
fourth king, Amensés, mentioned by Africanus and 
the others, and thus cut off the 22 years of his reign. 

6. Tuthmésis, for 9 years. 

7. Amenéphis, for 31 years. This is the king 

who was reputed to be Memné6n and a speak- 
_ ing statue.! 

8. Orus, for 36 years (in another copy, 38 years). 

9. Achenchersés [for 12 years]. 

[Ath6ris, for 39 years (? 9).] 

[Cencherés] for 16 years. 

About this time Moses led the Jews in their march 
out of Egypt. (Syncellus adds: Eusebius alone 
places in this reign the exodus of Israel under Moses, 
although no argument supports him, but all his pre- 
decessors hold a contrary view, as he testifies.) 


1See p. 113 n. 1. 


16’ Miler. 
2B omits “Adwpis and Κενχέρης, reading θ΄ ᾿Αχενχέρσης, 
ἔτη ις΄. 
115 


Fr. 53 MANETHO 


ι Ayeppis, ἔτη η΄. 

wa’ Χερρῆς, ἔτη ιε΄. 

iB’ ᾿Αρμαὶῖς 6 καὶ Δαναὸς, ἔτη ε', μεθ᾽ ἃ ἐκ τῆς 

Αἰγύπτου ἐκπεσὼν καὶ φεύγων τὸν ἀδελφὸν 
Αἴγυπτον εἰς τὴν ᾿Ελλάδα ἀφικνεῖται, κρα- 
τήσας τε τοῦ Ἄργους βασιλεύει τῶν "Ap- 
γείων. 

ty’ Ῥαμεσσῆς!" 6 καὶ Αἴγυπτος, ἔτη ξη΄. 

ιδ΄ ᾿Ἀμμένωφις, ἔτη μ΄. 

“Ὁμοῦ, ἔτη τμη΄. 

Προσέθηκεν ὑπὲρ τὸν ᾿Αφρικανὸν ἔτη me’ Εὐ- 
σέβιος κατὰ τὴν ιη΄ δυναστείαν. (Syncellus, p. 116: 
Εὐσέβιος δύο βασιλεῖς περιέκρυψεν, ἔτη δὲ προσ- 
ἔθηκε πε΄, Tun’ παραθεὶς ἀντὶ o€y’ τῶν παρ᾽ Ἄφρι- 
κανῷ.) 


(0) Eusesius, Chronica I. (Armenian Version), 
p- 99 


Octava decima dynastia Diospolitarum regum 
XIV, quorum primus 

Amoses, annis X XV. 

Chebron, annis XIII. 

Amophis, annis X XI. 

Memphres, annis XII. 

Mispharmuthosis, annis X XVI. 

Tuthmosis, annis IX. 

Amenophis, annis XX XI. Hic est qui Memnon 

putabatur, petra loquens. 


Orus, annis X XVIII. 


1 Dindorf: ᾿Αμεσσὴς B. 
116 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 53 


10. Acherrés, for 8 years. 

11. Cherrés, for 15 years. 

12. Armais, also called Danaus, for 5 years: there- 
after, he was banished from Egypt and, 
fleeing from his brother Aegyptus, he arrived 
in Greece, and, seizing Argos, he ruled over 
the Argives. 

13. Ramessés, also called Aegyptus, for 68 years. 

14. Ammendphis, for 40 years. 

Total, 348 years. 

Eusebius assigns 85 years more than Africanus to 
the Eighteenth Dynasty. (Syncellus elsewhere says : 
Eusebius leaves out two kings, but adds 85 years, 
setting down 348 years instead of the 263 years of the 
reckoning of Africanus.) 


(b) ARMENIAN VERSION OF EUSEBIUS. 


The Eighteenth Dynasty consisted of fourteen 
kings of Diospolis. The first of these, Amoses, 
reigned for 25 years. 

. Chebron, for 13 years. 

. Amophis, for 21 years. 

. Memphres, for 12 years. 

. Mispharmuthosis, for 26 years. 

. Tuthmosis, for 9 years. 

. Amenophis, for 31 years. This is the king 
who was reputed to be Memnon, a speaking 
stone. 

8. Orus, for 28 years. 


AID oS Ww bo 


117 


Fr. 53, 54 MANETHO 


Achencheres! ...., annis XVI. Huius aetate 
Moses ducem se praebuit Hebraeis ab Aegypto 
excedentibus. 

Acherres, annis VIII. 

Cherres, annis XV. 

Armais, qui et Danaus, annis V; quibus peractis, 
Aegyptiorum regione pulsus Aegyptumque 
fratrem suum fugiens, evasit in Graeciam, 
Argisque captis, imperavit Argivis. 

Ramesses, qui et Aegyptus, annis LX VIII. 

Amenophis, annis XL. 


Summa dominationis CCCXLVIII. 


Fr. 54. Josepnus, Contra Apionem, I, 26-31, 
§§ 227-287. 


227 [ἘΦ ἑνὸς δὲ πρώτου στήσω τὸν λόγον, ᾧ καὶ 
μάρτυρι μικρὸν ἔμπροσθεν τῆς ἀρχαιότητος ἐχρη- 
228 σάμην. ὁ γὰρ Μανεθὼς οὗτος, ὁ τὴν Αἰγυπτιακὴν 
ἱστορίαν ἐκ τῶν ἱερῶν γραμμάτων μεθερμηνεύειν 
ὑπεσχημένος, προειπὼν τοὺς ἡμετέρους προγόνους 
πολλαῖς μυριάσιν ἐπὶ τὴν Αἴγυπτον ἐλθόντας 
κρατῆσαι τῶν ἐνοικούντων, εἶτ᾽ αὐτὸς ὁμολογῶν 
χρόνῳ πάλιν ὕστερον ἐκπεσόντας τὴν νῦν “lov- 
δαίαν κατασχεῖν καὶ κτίσαντας “Ιεροσόλυμα τὸν 
νεὼν κατασκευάσασθαι, μέχρι μὲν τούτων ἠκολού- 
229 θησε ταῖς ἀναγραφαῖς. ἔπειτα δὲ δοὺς ἐξουσίαν 


1 A lacuna here, as in the Greek version. 


1 According to O.T. 1 Kings vi. 1, the building of 
Solomon’s Temple was begun 480 years after the Exodus: 


118 


AEGYPTIACA Fr. 53, 54 


9. Achencheres ..., for 16 years. In his time 
Moses became leader of the Hebrews in their 
exodus from Egypt. 

10. Acherres, for 8 years. 

11. Cherres, for 15 years. 

12. Armais, also called Danaus, for 5 years: at the 
end of this time he was banished from the 
land of Egypt. Fleeing from his brother 
Aegyptus, he escaped to Greece, and after 
capturing Argos, he held sway over the 
Argives. 

13. Ramesses, also called Aegyptus, for 68 years. 

14. Amenophis, for 40 years. 


Total for the dynasty, 348 years. 


Fr. 54(from Josephus, Contra Apionem, I. 26-31, 
§§ 227-287). 


(Josephus discusses the calumnies of the Egyptians 
against the Jews, whom they hate.) 

The first writer upon whom I shall dwell is one 
whom I used a little earlier as a witness to our anti- 
quity. I refer to Manetho. This writer, who had 
undertaken to translate the history of Egypt from 
the sacred books, began by stating that our ancestors 
came against Egypt with many tens of thousands and 
gained the mastery over the inhabitants; and then 
he himself admitted that at a later date again they 
were driven out of the country, occupied what is now 
Judaea, founded Jerusalem, and built the temple. 
Up to this point he followed the chronicles : there- 


if the Exodus is dated c. 1445 B.c. (see p. 110 n. 2), the 
Temple was founded c. 965 B.o. 
119 


Fr, 54 MANETHO 


« ~ A ~ / / A , " 
αὑτῷ διὰ τοῦ φάναι γράψειν τὰ μυθευόμενα καὶ 
λεγόμενα περὶ τῶν “lovdaiwy λόγους ἀπιθάνους 

/ > - / € A ~ 
παρενέβαλεν, ἀναμῖξαι βουλόμενος ἡμῖν πλῆθος 
Αἰγυπτίων λεπρῶν καὶ ἐπὶ ἄλλοις ἀρρωστήμασιν, 
ὥς φησι, φυγεῖν ἐκ τῆς Αἰγύπτου καταγνωσθέντων. 

230 “ἱμένωφιν γὰρ βασιλέα προθείς, ψευδὲς ὄνομα, 
καὶ διὰ τοῦτο χρόνον αὐτοῦ τῆς βασιλείας ὁρίσαι 

\ / / : ἌΝΩ ~ ΝΜ / 
μὴ τολμήσας, καίτοι ye ἐπὶ τῶν ἄλλων βασιλέων 
ἀκριβῶς τὰ ἔτη προστιθείς, τούτῳ προσάπτει 
τινὰς μυθολογίας, ἐπιλαθόμενος σχεδὸν ὅτι πεν- 
τακοσίοις ἔτεσι καὶ δεκαοκτὼ πρότερον ἱστόρηκε 

/ ἣ ~ / ” aa «4 / 
γενέσθαι τὴν τῶν [Π]οιμένων ἔξοδον εἰς “Ιεροσόλυμα. 
231 Τέθμωσις γὰρ ἦν βασιλεὺς ὅτε ἐξήεσαν, ἀπὸ δὲ 
τούτου τῶν μεταξὺ" βασιλέων κατ᾽ αὐτόν ἐστι 
τριακόσια ἐνενηκοντατρία ἔτη μέχρι τῶν δύο 
ἀδελφῶν Σέθω καὶ “Eppaiov, ὧν τὸν μὲν Σέθων 
Αἴγυπτον, τὸν δὲ Ἕρμαιον Δαναὸν μετονομα- 
σθῆναί φησιν, ὃν ἐκβαλὼν ὁ Σέθως ἐβασίλευσεν 
ἔτη νθ΄ καὶ μετ᾽ αὐτὸν ὁ πρεσβύτερος τῶν υἱῶν 

> ae / / 4 aay / Μ 

292 auTou Papibys Es’. τοσούτοις οὖν πρότερον ετεσιν 
ἀπελθεῖν ἐξ Αἰγύπτου τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν ὧμο- 

7 > \ > 4 > / > / 
λογηκώς, εἶτα τὸν Auevwdw εἰσποιήσας ἐμβόλιμον 
βασιλέα, φησὶν τοῦτον ἐπιθυμῆσαι θεῶν γενέσθαι 

, σ μὰ e ~ ‘ > ~ 
θεατήν, ὥσπερ “Qp cis τῶν πρὸ αὐτοῦ βεβασιλευ- 

1 προθείς Cobet: προσθείς 1,. 


τούτου τῶν μεταξὺ conj. Niese (et ab hoc tempore regum 
qui postea fuerunt Lat.): τούτων μεταξὺ τῶν L. 





1 Cf. “‘ the botch (or boil) of Egypt ’”’ (perhaps elephan- 
tiasis), Deuteronomy xxvili. 27. 


120 


AEGYPTIACA Fr. 54 


after, by offering to record the legends and current 
talk about the Jews, he took the liberty of inter- 
polating improbable tales in his desire to confuse 
with us a crowd of Egyptians, who for leprosy 
and other maladies! had been condemned, he says, 
to banishment from Egypt. After citing a king 
Amenophis, a fictitious person,—for which reason he 
did not venture to define the length of his reign, 
although in the case of the other kings he adds 
their years precisely,—Manetho attaches to him cer- 
tain legends, having doubtless forgotten that ac- 
cording to his own chronicle the exodus of the 
Shepherds to Jerusalem took place 518 years? 
earlier. For Tethmésis was king when they set out ; 
and, according to Manetho, the intervening reigns 
thereafter occupied 393 years down to the two 
brothers Sethés and Hermaeus, the former of whom, 
he says, took the new name of Aegyptus, the latter 
that of Danaus. Sethés drove out Hermaeus and 
reigned for 59 years; then Rampsés, the elder of his 
sons, for 66 years. Thus, after admitting that so 
many years had elapsed since our forefathers left 
Egypt, Manetho now interpolates this intruding 
Amendphis. This king, he states, conceived a desire 
to behold the gods, as Οἵ one of his predecessors on 


2 This number seems to be obtained by adding 393 + 
59 + 66: in that case the reign of Sethdésis is counted 
twice, (1) as 60, (2) as 59 years (ef. Fr. 50, § 103). 

3 Or, or Hérus, is the ninth king in Manetho’s list of 
Dynasty XVIII. (Frs. 51, 52), in reality Amendéphis III. 
Reinach points out that Herodotus (ii. 42) tells the same 
story of the Egyptian Heracles, and conjectures that there 
is perhaps confusion with the god Horus. 


12] 


Fr. 54 MANETHO 


κότων, ἀνενεγκεῖν δὲ τὴν ἐπιθυμίαν ὁμωνύμῳ 
μὲν αὐτῷ ᾿Αμενώφει, πατρὸς δὲ Παάπιος ' ὄντι, 
233 θείας δὲ δοκοῦντι μετεσχηκέναι φύσεως κατά τε 
σοφίαν καὶ πρόγνωσιν τῶν ἐσομένων. εἰπεῖν οὖν 
αὐτῷ τοῦτον τὸν ὁμώνυμον ὅτι δυνήσεται θεοὺς 
ἰδεῖν, εἰ καθαρὰν ἀπό τε λεπρῶν καὶ τῶν ἄλλων 
μιαρῶν ἀνθρώπων τὴν χώραν ἅπασαν ποιήσειεν. 
234 ἡσθέντα δὲ τὸν βασιλέα πάντας τοὺς τὰ σώματα 
λελωβημένους ἐκ τῆς Αἰγύπτου συναγαγεῖν - γενέ- 
235 σθαι δὲ τὸ πλῆθος" μυριάδας ὀκτώ" καὶ τούτους 


1 Hd. pr. (cf. ὃ 243): Πάπιος 1, 
2 Conj. Niese (after Lat.) : τοῦ πλήθους L. 





1¥or this Amendphis, a historical personage, later 
deified (cf. the deification of Imhotep, Fr. 11), Amenhotpe, 
son of Hapu, and minister of Amendphis IIT., see ἃ. 
Maspero, New Light on Ancient Egypt (1909), pp. 189-195: 
Sethe, in Aegyptiaca (Ebers, Festschrift), 1897, pp. 107-116: 
Breasted, Anc. Rec. ii. §§ 911 ff.; Warren R. Dawson, 
The Bridle of Pegasus, 1930, pp. 49-79. In 1934-35 
excavations by the French Institute, Cairo, revealed 
all that remains of the splendour of the funerary temple 
of Amenhotpe, son of Hapu, among a series of such temples 
to the N. of Medinet Habu: see Robichon and Varille, 
Le Temple du Scribe Royal Amenhotep, Fils de Hapou, i. 
Cairo, 1936. An inscription of iii. B.c. (and therefore 
contemporary with Manetho), headed ‘Ayevwrou ὑποθῆκαι, 
“Precepts of Amendétes or Amendéphis,’’ was published 
by Wilcken in Aegyptiaca, 1897, pp. 142 ff. It is in- 
scribed upon a limestone ostracon of Deir el-Bahri; and 
the first three injunctions run: “ Practise wisdom along 
with justice,’ “‘ Revere both the gods and your parents,” 


122 


AEGYPTIACA Fr. 54 


the throne, had done; and he communicated his 
desire to his namesake Amendéphis,' Paapis’ son, who, 
in virtue of his wisdom and knowledge of the future, 
was reputed to be a partaker in the divine nature. 
This namesake, then, replied that he would be able 
to see the gods if he cleansed the whole land of lepers 
and other polluted persons. The king was delighted, 
and assembled ? all those in Egypt whose bodies were 
wasted by disease: they numbered 80,000 persons. 


“Take counsel at leisure, but accomplish speedily whatever 
you do” 

An ostracon, found at Deir el-Bahri, and giving the 
draft of an inscription concerning the deified Amendphis, 
was published by A. Bataille, Etudes de Papyrologie, IV. 
(1938), pp. 125-131: it celebrates the cure of a certain 
Polyaratos. See O. Guéraud in Bull. Inst. Fr.d’ Arch. Or., 
xxvii. (1927), pp. 121 ff., P. Jouguet, “1,65 Grands Dieux 
de la Pierre Sainte a Thébes,”’ Mélanges Glotz, 11. pp. 
493-500. 

For the historical interpretation of this whole passage, 
§§ 232-251, see Meyer, Geschichte?, 11. 1, pp. 421 ff. King 
Amené6phis is at one time Merneptah, son of Rameses II. ; 
at another time, Amendphis IV. (Akhnaten), some 200 
years earlier. The doings of the polluted, the persecution 
of the gods, and the slaughter of the holy animals, clearly 
portray the fury of Akhnaten and his followers against 
Egyptian religion. For a popular Egyptian parallel to 
§§ 232 ff., see the Potter’s Oracle, one of the Rainer Papyri 
(iii. A.D.) edited by Wilcken in Hermes, xl. 1905, pp. 544 ff. 
and by G. Manteuffel, De Opusculis Graecis Acgypti e 
papyris, ostracis, lapidibusyue collectis, 1930, No. 7; and 
cf. the prophecy of the lamb, Manetho, Fr. 64. 

For a theory about the identity of the polluted (they 
are the troops of Sethés I., sent to Tanis by his father 
Ramessés I. during the ascendancy of Haremhab), see 
P. Montet, ‘‘ La Stéle de l’An 400 Retrouvée,’”’ in Kémi, 
lii. 1935, pp. 191-215. 

2 In an incredibly short time (§ 257). 


123 


Fr. 54 MANETHO 


>? ~ A > A , 
εἰς τὰς λιθοτομίας τὰς ἐν τῷ πρὸς ἀνατολὴν μέρει 
~ / > a ? / Ld > / ‘ 
τοῦ Νείλου ἐμβαλεῖν αὐτόν, ὅπως ἐργάζοιντο καὶ 
~ LAA Ae / 4 / 1 / 
τῶν ἄλλων Αἰγυπτίων elev κεχωρισμένοι.: εἶναι δέ 
a ~ « 
τινας ἐν αὐτοῖς καὶ τῶν λογίων ἱερέων φησὶ λέπρᾳ 
/ 2 Α δὲ "4 / > -“ ‘ 
236 συνεσχημεένους. TOV ὃε AMEevwWwpLW ἐκεῖνον, TOV 
σοφὸν καὶ μαντικὸν ἄνδρα, ὑποδεῖσαι ὃ πρὸς αὑτόν 
\ ‘ /, / ~ ~ > / 
τε καὶ τὸν βασιλέα χόλον τῶν θεῶν, εἰ βιασθέντες 
A , 
ὀφθήσονται καὶ προσθέμενον εἰπεῖν ὅτι συμμαχή- 
σουσί τινες τοῖς μιαροῖς καὶ τῆς Αἰγύπτου κρα- 
/ ὍΣ , A ~ 
τήσουσιν em ἔτη Sexatpia, μὴ τολμῆσαι μὲν 
αὐτὸν εἰπεῖν ταῦτα τῷ βασιλεῖ, γραφὴν δὲ κατα- 
λιπόντα περὶ πάντων ἑαυτὸν ἀνελεῖν, ἐν ἀθυμίᾳ 
237 δὲ εἶναι τὸν βασιλέαβ. κἄπειτα κατὰ λέξιν οὕτως 
γέγραφεν ' “᾿τῶν δ᾽ ἐν ταῖς λατομίαις ὡς χρόνος 
e \ ὃ ηλθ ἣ / > 0 \ « 
ἱκανὸς διῆλθεν ταλαιπωρούντων, ἀξιωθεὶς ὁ βασι- 
λεὺς ἵνα πρὸς " κατάλυσιν αὐτοῖς καὶ σκέπην ἀπο- 
΄ a / 
μερίσῃ τὴν τότε τῶν []οιμένων ἐρημωθεῖσαν πόλιν 
\ 
Avapw συνεχώρησεν: ἔστι δ᾽ ἡ πόλις κατὰ τὴν 
238 θεολογίαν ἄνωθεν Τυφώνιος. οἱ δὲ εἰς ταύτην 
~ / 
εἰσελθόντες καὶ τὸν τόπον τοῦτον εἰς ὃ ἀπόστασιν 
~ ~ « ~ 
ἔχοντες, ἡγεμόνα αὐτῶν twa τῶν ᾿Ηλιοπολιτῶν 
e , 0 / a D\ / 8 ? Ἢ A 
ἱερέων ᾿Οσάρσηφον λεγόμενον 8 ἐστήσαντο καὶ 


1 εἶεν κεχωρισμένοι cOnj. Holwerda: οὗ ἐγκεχωρισμένοι L. 

2 συνεσχημένους conj. Niese: συνεχομένους Dindorf: συγ- 
κεχυμένους L. 

3 ὑποδεῖσαι Dindorf: ὑποδεῖσθαι L. 

4 δ᾽ & Bekker: δὲ L. 5 πρὸς bracketed by Niese. 

6 εἰς bracketed as apparently spurious by Niese: <opyy- 
τήριον > ets ἀπ. Holwerda. 

7L: ᾽Οσάρσιφον conj. Hudson. 

8 Transp. Niese (a more natural place for the participle) : 
λεγόμενόν Twa... Oo. L. 


124 


AEGYPTIACA Fr. 54 


These he cast into the stone-quarries ! to the east of 
the Nile, there to work segregated from the rest of the 
Egyptians. Among them, Manetho adds, there were 
some of the learned priests, who had been attacked by 
leprosy. Then this wise seer Amendphis was filled 
with dread of divine wrath against himself and the 
king if the outrage done to these persons should be 
discovered ; and he added a prediction that certain 
allies would join the polluted people and would take 
possession of Egypt for 13 years. Not venturing to 
make this prophecy himself to the king, he left a 
full account of it in writing, and then took his own 
life. The king was filled with despondency. Then 
Manetho continues as follows (I quote his account 
verbatim) : ““ When the men in the stone-quarries had 
suffered bardships for a considerable time, they 
begged the king to assign to them as a dwelling-place 
and a refuge the deserted city of the Shepherds, 
Auaris, and he consented. According to religious 
tradition * this city was from earliest times dedi- 
cated to Typhén. Occupying this city and using the 
region as a base for revolt, they appointed as their 
leader one of the priests of Héliopolis called Osarséph,® 


1 The quarries of Tura were known to Herodotus (ii. 8, 
124) as the source of building-stone for the Pyramids. 

On forced labour in quarries in Ptolemaic times, 
Reinach refers to Bouché-Leclereq, Histoire des Lagides, 
ii. 241; iv. 193, 337 f. 

2 Cf. Fr. 42, ὃ 78. 

8 Osarséph, the leader of the movement, is later (§ 250) 
identified with Moses. The name Osarséph is a possible 
Egyptian name: cf. Ranke, Personennamen I. p. 85, 
No. 3 wsir-sp’. Wilcken (Chrestomathie, i. 1, p. 106) 
derives the name from a holy animal Séph; but the Jews 
would naturally see in it a form of the name Joseph. 

125 


Fr. 54 MANETHO 


τούτῳ πειθαρχήσοντες ἐν πᾶσιν ὡρκωμότησαν. 
2396 δὲ πρῶτον μὲν αὐτοῖς νόμον ἔθετο μήτε προσ- 
κυνεῖν θεοὺς μήτε τῶν μάλιστα ἐν Αἰγύπτῳ 
~ / 
θεμιστευομένων ἱερῶν ζῴων ἀπέχεσθαι μηδενός, 
πάντα δὲ θύειν καὶ ἀναλοῦν, συνάπτεσθαι δὲ 
240 μηδενὶ πλὴν τῶν συνομωμοσμένων.Σ τοιαῦτα δὲ 
νομοθετήσας καὶ πλεῖστα ἄλλα μάλιστα τοῖς 
Αἰγυπτίοις ἐθισμοῖς ἐναντιούμενα ἐκέλευσεν πολυ- 
χειρίᾳ τὰ τῆς πόλεως ἐπισκευάζειν τείχη καὶ πρὸς 
> 

πόλεμον ἑτοίμους γίνεσθαι τὸν πρὸς ‘Auéevwdw τὸν 
im > A ͵ / > ε ~ 
241 βασιλέαβ. αὐτὸς δέ, προσλαβόμενος μεθ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ 
καὶ τῶν ἄλλων ἱερέων καὶ συμμεμιαμμένων τινὰς 8 
ἔπεμψε πρέσβεις πρὸς τοὺς ὑπὸ Τεθμώσεως 

> ’ὔ 4 > 4 A / 
ἀπελασθέντας ΠΙοιμένας εἰς πόλιν τὴν καλουμένην 

oT 5A \ ‘ bd € A \ A » 
ἐεροσόλυμα, καὶ τὰ καθ᾽ ἑαυτὸν καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους 
᾽ 

τοὺς συνατιμασθέντας δηλώσας ἠξίου συνεπιστρα- 
/ e Q ‘ put) ” > / 4 A 
242 τευειν Ομο υμαδὸν €1T Αἴγυπτον. ἐπάξειν μεν 
οὖν αὐτοὺς ἐπηγγείλατο πρῶτον μὲν εἰς Αὔαριν τὴν 
προγονικὴν αὐτῶν πατρίδα καὶ τὰ ἐπιτήδεια τοῖς 

» / > δ, ς / A σ 
ὄχλοις παρέξειν ἀφθόνως, ὑπερμαχήσεσθαι δὲ ὅτε 
δέοι καὶ ῥᾳδίως ὑποχείριον αὐτοῖς τὴν χώραν ποιή- 

- / 
243 σειν. οἱ δὲ ὑπερχαρεῖς γενόμενοι πάντες προθύμως 
“ ‘ 

εἰς κ΄ μυριάδας ἀνδρῶν συνεξώρμησαν καὶ μετ᾽ 


1 Ed. pr.: -ἥσαντες L. 2 Niese: συνωμοσμένων L. 
8 τινὰς add. Reinach (quosdam Lat.). 
4 ἐπανάξειν conj. Cobet. 





1“ Does the author know that the Decalogue begins 
with an admonition to have no other god but Jehovah ? 
Or does he recall Greek lists of duties (Xen., Mem. iv. 4, 


126 


AEGYPTIACA Fr. 54 


and took an oath of obedience to him in everything. 
First of all, he made it a law ! that they should neither 
worship the gods nor refrain from any of the animals 3 
prescribed as especially sacred in Egypt, but should 
sacrifice and consume all alike, and that they should 
have intercourse with none save those of their own 
confederacy. After framing a great number of laws 
like these, completely opposed to Egyptian custom, 
he ordered them with their multitude of hands, to 
repair the walls of the city and make ready for war 
against King Amendéphis. Then, acting in concert 
with certain other priests and polluted persons like 
himself, he sent an embassy to the Shepherds who 
had been expelled by Tethmisis,’ in the city called 
Jerusalem ; and, setting forth the circumstances of 
himself and his companions in distress, he begged 
them to unite wholeheartedly in an attack upon 
Egypt. He offered to conduct them first to their 
ancestral home at Auaris, to provide their hosts with 
lavish supplies, to fight on their behalf whenever need 
arose, and to bring Egypt without difficulty under 
their sway. Overjoyed at the proposal, all the 
Shepherds, to the number of 200,000, eagerly set out, 


19; Carmen Aureum, v. 1; ef. Dieterich, Nekyia, pp. 146 
f.) which inculeate reverence for the gods as the first 
precept ?”’ (Reinach). Add Isocrates, Ad Demonicum, 
§§ 13, 16, and the Precepts of Sansnés (ii./iii. A.D.), as 
inscribed in Nubia, C.I.G. iii. 5041 (Wilcken, Chrestomathie, 
I. ii. p. 147, No. 116)—the first precept is ‘‘ Revere the 
divinity ”’. 

2 Cf. Tac., Hist. v. 4: the Jews under Moses sacrificed 
the ram as if to insult Ammén, and the bull, because the 
Egyptians worship Apis. Cf. 0.7’. Leviticus xvi. 3. 

8 Tethmésis for Amésis, as in Fr. 50 (ὃ 94). 


127 


Fr. 54 MANETHO 


οὐ πολὺ ἧκον εἰς Avapw. ᾿Αμένωφις δ᾽ 6 τῶν 
Αἰγυπτίων βασιλεὺς ὡς ἐπύθετο τὰ κατὰ τὴν 
ἐνείνων ἔφοδον, οὐ μετρίως συνεχύθη, τῆς παρὰ 
᾿Αμενώφεως τοῦ []αάπιος μνησθεὶς προδηλώσεως. 
344 καὶ πρότερον συναγαγὼν πλῆθος Αἰγυπτίων καὶ 
βουλευσάμενος μετὰ τῶν ἐν τούτοις ἡγεμόνων, τά 
τε ἱερὰ ζῷα τὰ [πρῶτα] μάλιστα ἐν τοῖς ἱεροῖς 
τιμώμενα ὡς ἑαυτὸν 5 μετεπέμψατο, καὶ τοῖς κατὰ 
μέρος ἱερεῦσι παρήγγελλεν ὡς ἀσφαλέστατα τῶν 
245 θεῶν συγκρύψαι τὰ ξόανα. τὸν δὲ υἱὸν Σέθων, 
τὸν καὶ ἹΡαμέσσην ἀπὸ “Ραψηοῦς τοῦ πατρὸς 
ὠνομασμένον, πενταέτη ὄντα ἐξέθετο πρὸς τὸν 
ἑαυτοῦ φίλον. αὐτὸς δὲ διαβὰς «σὺν» τοῖς 
ἄλλοις Αἰγυπτίοις, οὖσιν εἰς τριάκοντα μυριάδας 
ἀνδρῶν μαχιμωτάτων, καὶ τοῖς πολεμίοις ἀπ- 
240 αντήσας ἡ οὐ συνέβαλεν, ἀλλὰ “μὴ δεῖν ὃ θεομαχεῖν 
νομίσας παλινδρομήσας ἧ ἧκεν εἰς Meuou, ἀναλαβών 
τε τόν τε Ὦπιν καὶ τὰ ἄλλα τὰ ἐκεῖσε μεταπεμ- 
φθέντα ἱερὰ ζῷα, εὐθὺς εἰς Αἰθιοπίαν σὺν ἅπαντι τῷ 
στόλῳ καὶ πλήθει τῶν Αἰγυπτίων ἀνήχθη - χάριτι 
γὰρ ἦν αὐτῷ ὑποχείριος ὁ τῶν Αἰθιόπων βασιλεύς. 
247 dst ὑποδεξάμενος καὶ τοὺς ὄχλους πάντας ὑπολαβὼν 
οἷς ἔσχεν ἡ χώρα τῶν πρὸς ἀνθρωπίνην τροφὴν 
ἐπιτηδείων, καὶ πόλεις καὶ κώμας πρὸς τὴν τῶν 


1Qm. Lat.: bracketed by Bekker. 

2 Cobet: ws ye αὐτὸν L. 

8 Conj. Niese (ewm aliis Lat.). 

“Cobet (occurrens Lat.): ἀπαντήσασιν L. 
5 Herwerden (cf. ὃ 263): μέλλειν L. 

® Niese (after Lat.): ὅθεν L. 


128 


AEGYPTIACA Fr. 54 


and before long arrived at Auaris. When Amendphis, 
king of Egypt, learned of their invasion, he was sorely 
troubled, for he recalled the prediction of Amenéphis, 
son of Paapis. First, he gathered a multitude of 
Egyptians ; and having taken counsel with the lead- 
ing men among them, he summoned to his presence 
the sacred animals which were held in greatest rever- 
ence in the temples, and gave instructions to each 
group of priests to conceal the images of the gods as 
securely as possible. As for his five-year-old son 
Sethés, also called Ramessés after his grandfather 
Rapsés,! he sent him safely away to his friend.? 
He then crossed the Nile with as many as 300,000 of 
the bravest warriors of Egypt, and met the enemy. 
But, instead of joining battle, he decided that he 
must not fight against the gods, and made a hasty 
retreat to Memphis. There he took into his charge 
Apis and the other sacred animals which he had 
summoned to that place ; and forthwith he set off for 
Ethiopia * with his whole army and the host of 
Egyptians. The Ethiopian king, who, in gratitude 
for a service, had become his subject, welcomed him, 
maintained the whole multitude with such products 
of the country as were fit for human consumption, 


1 Rapsés: doubtless an error for Rampsés. There is 
confusion here: the grandfather is Ramessés II. See 
Meyer (Aeg. Chron. p. 91), who considers the words 
“‘Sethés also called’ an interpolation (cf. ὃ 98), intended 
to identify a Sethéds son of Amenéphis and a Ramessés 
son of Amendphis. 

2 A curious indefiniteness: the reference may be to the 
king of Ethiopia, mentioned in the next section. 

* The truth is that Ethiopia (Nubia, Cush) was at that 
time a province of the kingdom of the Pharaohs. 


F 129 


Fr. 54 MANETHO 


πεπρωμένων τρισκαίδεκα ἐτῶν ἀπὸ τῆς ἀρχῆς 
αὐτοῦ! ἔκπτωσιν αὐτάρκεις, οὐχ ἧττον δὲ καὶ 
/ ᾽ A ‘ \ > / 
στρατόπεδον Αἰθιοπικὸν πρὸς φυλακὴν ἐπέταξε 
“- ~ > ~ 
τοῖς παρ᾽ ‘Auevwidews τοῦ βασιλέως ἐπὶ τῶν 
C12 1k ~ A? 7 ‘ A A \ \ Aié 
248 ὁρίων τῆς Αἰγύπτου. Kal Ta μὲν κατὰ τὴν AlBto- 
πίαν τοιαῦτα: οἱ δὲ ΖΣολυμῖται κατελθόντες σὺν 
a a ~ / ‘ 
τοῖς μιαροῖς τῶν Αἰγυπτίων οὕτως ἀνοσίως Kat 
~ A σ A 
«ὠμῶς 3" τοῖς ἀνθρώποις προσηνέχθησαν, ὥστε τὴν 
“ \ 
τῶν προειρημένων «Ποιμένων» κράτησιν χρυσὸν 
a 7 
φαίνεσθαι τοῖς τότε τὰ τούτων ἀσεβήματα θεω- 
ra 
249 μένοις " Kal yap ov μόνον πόλεις Kal κώμας ἐνέ- 
mpnoav, οὐδὲ ἱεροσυλοῦντες οὐδὲ λυμαινόμενοι 
ξόανα θεῶν ἠρκοῦντο, ἀλλὰ καὶ τοῖς ἀδύτοις 4 
~ ¢ ~ 
ὀπτανίοις τῶν σεβαστευομένων ἱερῶν ζῴων χρώ- 
μενοι διετέλουν, καὶ θύτας καὶ σφαγεῖς τούτων 
ἱερεῖς καὶ προφήτας ἠνάγκαζον γίνεσθαι καὶ γυμ- 
200 vods ἐξέβαλλον. λέγεται δὲ ὅτι «ὁ» τὴν πολιτείαν 
- A 
Kal τοὺς νόμους αὐτοῖς καταβαλόμενος ἱερεύς, TO 
,ὔ “HX λί » ὌὋ A 6 > ‘A ~ > 
γένος ιοπολίτης, ὄνομα ᾿Οσαρσὴφ" ἀπὸ τοῦ ἐν 
“HA 5A. ~ ὌὋ /, e / > ~ 
ιουπόλει θεοῦ *Ocipews, ws μετέβη εἰς τοῦτο 
7) 
τὸ γένος, μετετέθη τοὔνομα καὶ προσηγορεύθη 
27 Μωυσῆς. 
251 A μὲν οὖν Αἰγύπτιοι φέρουσι περὶ τῶν ᾿]ου- 
δαίων ταῦτ᾽ ἐστὶ καὶ ἕτερα πλείονα, ἃ παρίημι 
1 - εἰς τὴν L (repeating πρὸς τὴν above): a verb (e.g. 
παρέσχεν) seems to have dropped out. 
2 Add. Reinach. 3 Add. Reinach. 


4Bekker: αὐτοῖς L. δ Cobet: om. L. 
6 Cf. ὃ 238: ’Ocapaid edd. 





1 According to Meyer (Aeg. Chron. p. 77), this section 
with its identification of Osarséph and Moses is due to an 


130 


AEGYPTIACA Fr. 54 


assigned to them cities and villages sufficient for the 
destined period of 13 years’ banishment from his 
realm, and especially stationed an Ethiopian army 
on the frontiers of Egypt to guard King Amendéphis 
and his followers. Such was the situation in 
Ethiopia. Meanwhile, the Solymites [or dwellers in 
Jerusalem] made a descent along with the polluted 
Egyptians, and treated the people so impiously and 
savagely that the domination of the Shepherds 
seemed like a golden age to those who witnessed the 
present enormities. For not only did they set towns 
and villages on fire, pillaging the temples and muti- 
lating images of the gods without restraint, but they 
also made a practice of using the sanctuaries as 
kitchens to roast the sacred animals which the people 
worshipped: and they would compel the priests and 
prophets to sacrifice and butcher the beasts, after- 
wards casting the men forth naked. It is said that 
the priest who framed their constitution and their 
laws was a native of Héliopolis, named Osarséph 
after the god Osiris, worshipped at Héliopolis ; 
but when he joined this people, he changed his 
name and was called Moses.” ἢ 

Such, then, are the Egyptian stories about the 
Jews,” together with many other tales which I pass 


anti-Semitic commentator on Manetho. It is interesting 
that Osiris should be thus identified with the mysterious 
god of the Jews, whose name must not be uttered. 

* Cf. Hecataeus of Abdera (in Diodorus Siculus, xl. 3): 
the Jews are foreigners expelled from Egypt because of a 
plague. See Meyer, Geschichte®, ii. 1, p. 424. Hecataeus 
lived for some time at the court of Ptolemy I. (323-285 B.c.), 
and used Egyptian sources for his Aegyptiaca. Cf. Intro. 
pp. xxvif. 


131 


Fr. 54 MANETHO 


A 4, σ΄ 
συντομίας ἕνεκα. λέγει δὲ ὁ Μανεθὼς πάλιν ὅτι 
μετὰ ταῦτα ἐπῆλθεν 6 ᾿Δμένωφις ἀπὸ Αἰθιοπίας 

\ LX ὃ / Ai oe e\ 3 “ “Ῥά 
μετὰ μεγάλης δυνάμεως καὶ 6 υἱὸς αὐτοῦ ᾿Ράμψης, 
‘ ᾿ A ” 7, \ / « Ψ 
καὶ αὐτὸς ἔχων δύναμιν, καὶ συμβαλόντες οἱ δύο 
a a a > 
τοῖς ΠΠ]οιμέσι καὶ τοῖς μιαροῖς ἐνίκησαν αὐτοὺς καὶ 
Ἁ 3 / 997 > Α ΝΜ ~ 
πολλοὺς ἀποκτείναντες ἐδίωξαν αὐτοὺς ἄχρι τῶν 
252 ὁρίων τῆς Συρίας. ταῦτα μὲν καὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα 
A , σ A - Α / 
Μανεθὼς συνέγραψεν. ὅτι δὲ ληρεῖ καὶ ψεύδεται 
περιφανῶς ἐπιδείξω, προδιαστειλάμενος ἐκεῖνο, τῶν 
- A LAA 1 A θ / 7 ὃ ὃ 
ὕστερον πρὸς ἄλλους" λεχθησομένων ἕνεκα. δέδωκε 
ΤᾺ »-ἃ > ~ 
yap οὗτος ἡμῖν Kal ὡμολόγηκεν ἐξ ἀρχῆς τὸ" μὴ 
A ΄ > ͵ 3 > > \ Μ 
εἶναι τὸ γένος Αἰγυπτίους, ἀλλ᾽ αὐτοὺς ἔξωθεν 
> , ~ “-“ > 4 \ / > 
ἐπελθόντας κρατῆσαι τῆς Αἰγύπτου καὶ πάλιν ἐξ 
Φ' ἐγας 3 A i > > > ‘ ct a 
253 αὐτῆς ἀπελθεῖν. ὅτι δ᾽ οὐκ ἀνεμίχθησαν ἡμῖν 
© ~ ΄ «ε 
ὕστερον τῶν Αἰγυπτίων οἱ τὰ σώματα λελωβη- 
μένοι, καὶ ὅτι ἐκ τούτων οὐκ ἦν Μωυσῆς ὁ τὸν 
‘ > 4 > A “- > ΄ a 
λαὸν ἀγαγών, ἀλλὰ πολλαῖς ἐγεγόνει γενεαῖς 
πρότερον, ταῦτα πειράσομαι διὰ τῶν ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ 
? 
89 λεγομένων ἐλέγχειν. 
, \ A Juste (7 “- ’ « 
954 Llpwrnv δὴ τὴν αἰτίαν τοῦ πλάσματος ὕὑπο- 
, / « Α 4 , 
τίθεται καταγέλαστον. ὁ βασιλεὺς γάρ, φησίν, 
> / ? 0 ΄ὔ A 6. A is -“ / 
Apevwdis ἐπεθύμησε τοὺς θεοὺς ἰδεῖν. ποίους ; 
εἰ μὲν τοὺς παρ᾽ αὐτοῖς νενομοθετημένους, τὸν 
βοῦν καὶ τράγον καὶ κροκοδείλους καὶ κυνοκεφά- 
255 λους, ἑώρα. τοὺς οὐρανίους δὲ πῶς ἐδύνατο ; καὶ 
Ἁ , 4 ᾿, \ > / -“ A / 
dua τί ταύτην ἔσχε τὴν ἐπιθυμίαν ; ὅτι νὴ Mia 
1 Niese: ἀλλήλους 1, (alterna gratia Lat.). 
2 Conj. Niese: τε L. 


132 


AEGYPTIACA Fr. 54 


by for brevity’s sake. Manetho adds, however, that, 
at a later date, Amenéphis advanced from Ethiopia 
with a large army, his son Rampsés also leading a 
force, and that the two together joined battle with 
the Shepherds and their polluted allies, and defeated 
them. killing many and pursuing the others to the 
frontiers of Syria. This then, with other tales of a 
like nature, is Manetho’s account. Before I give 
proof that his words are manifest lies and nonsense, 
I shall mention one particular point, which bears 
upon my later refutation of other writers. Manetho 
has made one concession to us. He has admitted 
that our race was not Egyptian in origin, but came 
into Egypt from elsewhere, took possession of the 
land, and afterwards left it. But that we were not, 
at a later time, mixed up with disease-ravaged 
Egyptians, and that, so far from being one of these, 
Moses, the leader of our people, lived many genera- 
tions earlier, I shall endeavour to prove from 
Manetho’s own statements. 

To begin with, the reason which he suggests for 
his fiction is ridiculous. ‘“‘ King Amendphis,” he 
says, “‘ conceived a desire to see the gods.” Gods 
indeed! If he means the gods established by their 
ordinances,—bull, goat, crocodiles, and dog-faced 
baboons,—he had them before his eyes; and as 
for the gods of heaven, how could he see them ? 
And why did he conceive this eager desire ? 
Because, by Zeus,! before his time another king 


1A strange expression which seems to belong to an 
anti-Semitic polemic. In Josephus, c. Apion. li. 263 (a 
passage about Socrates), νὴ dia has been restored to the 

text by Niese’s conjecture, 
133 


Fr. 54 MANETHO 


‘ / > ~ ‘ Μ ε , 
καὶ πρότερος αὐτοῦ βασιλεὺς ἄλλος ἑωράκει. 
παρ᾽ ἐκείνου τοίνυν ἐπέπυστο ποταποί τινές εἰσι 
καὶ τίνα πρόπον αὐτοὺς εἶδεν, ὥστε καινῆς αὐτῷ 

4 , 
256 τέχνης οὐκ ἔδει. ἀλλὰ σοφὸς ἦν ὁ μάντις, δι᾿ οὗ 

~ 7 ε A e / A 
τοῦτο κατορθώσειν ὁ βασιλεὺς ὑπελάμβανε. Kat 

~ ~ ~ > 
πῶς οὐ προέγνω τὸ ἀδύνατον αὐτοῦ τῆς ἐπιθυμίας ; 

> \ > 7 / A \ / t ὃ A A 
οὐ yap ἀπέβη. τίνα δὲ καὶ λόγον εἶχε διὰ τοὺς 

Ἅ ~ > ~ 
ἠκρωτηριασμένους ἢ λεπρῶντας ἀφανεῖς εἶναι 
τοὺς θεούς ; ὀργίζονται γὰρ ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀσεβήμασιν, 
257 οὐκ ἐπὶ τοῖς ἐλαττώμασι τῶν σωμάτων. ὀκτὼ 
δὲ μυριάδας τῶν λεπρῶν καὶ κακῶς διακειμένων 
πῶς οἷόν τε μιᾷ σχεδὸν ἡμέρᾳ συλλεγῆναι; πῶς 
δὲ παρήκουσεν τοῦ μάντεως 6 βασιλεύς ; ὁ μὲν 
γὰρ αὐτὸν ἐκέλευσεν ἐξορίσαι τῆς Αἰγύπτου τοὺς 
΄ ε > 3 A > \ ,ὔ 
λελωβημένους, 6 δ᾽ αὐτοὺς εἰς τὰς λιθοτομίας 
+ le! σ ~ > Z , > > 
ἐνέβαλεν, ὥσπερ τῶν ἐργασομένων Sedpevos, ἀλλ 
A A 4 
258 οὐχὶ καθᾶραι τὴν χώραν προαιρούμενος. φησὶ 
δὲ τὸν μὲν μάντιν αὑτὸν ἀνελεῖν τὴν ὀργὴν τῶν 

~ A 
θεῶν προορώμενον καὶ τὰ συμβησόμενα περὶ τὴν 
Αἴγυπτον, τῷ δὲ βασιλεῖ γεγραμμένην τὴν πρόρ- 

259 pynow | καταλιπεῖν. εἶτα πῶς οὐκ ἐξ ἀρχῆς ὁ 
μάντις τὸν αὑτοῦ θάνατον προηπίστατο; πῶς δὲ 
οὐκ εὐθὺς ἀντεῖπεν τῷ βασιλεῖ βουλομένῳ τοὺς 

\ > A - > » ς ‘ ~ A > 
θεοὺς ἰδεῖν ; πῶς δ᾽ εὔλογος 6 φόβος τῶν μὴ παρ 

͵, ~ n ͵ - 
αὐτὸν συμβησομένων κακῶν; ἢ τί χεῖρον ἔδει 
παθεῖν οὗ δρᾶν ἑαυτὸν ἔσπευδεν ; 
260 Τὸ δὲ δὴ πάντων εὐηθέστατον ἴδωμεν. πυθό- 


1 Ed. pr.: πρόσρησιν L. 
2 Herwerden (quam quod se ipse perimere festinabat Lat.): 
οὐδ᾽ av L. 


134 


AEGYPTIACA Fr. 54 


had seen them! From this predecessor, then, he 
had learned their nature and the manner in which 
he had seen them, and in consequence he had no need 
of a new system. Moreover, the prophet by whose 
aid the king expected to succeed in his endeavour, 
was asage. How, then, did he fail to foresee the im- 
possibility of realizing this desire ? It did, in fact, 
come to naught. And what reason had he for as- 
cribing the invisibility of the gods to the presence of 
cripples or lepers ? Divine wrath is due to impious 
deeds, not to physical deformities. Next, how 
could 80,000 lepers and invalids be gathered to- 
gether in practically a single day ? And why did 
the king turn a deaf ear to the prophet? The pro- 
phet had bidden him expel the cripples from Egypt, 
but the king cast them into stone-quarries, as if he 
needed labourers, not as if his purpose was to purge 
the land. Manetho says, moreover, that the pro- 
phet took his own life, because he foresaw the anger 
of the gods and the fate in store for Egypt, but left 
in writing his prediction to the king. Then how 
was it that the prophet had not from the first fore- 
knowledge of his own death? Why did he not 
forthwith oppose the king’s desire to see the gods ? 
Was it reasonable to be afraid of misfortunes which 
were not to happen in his time ? Or what worse 
fate could have been his than that which he hastened 
to inflict upon himself ? 

But let us now examine! the most ridiculous part 


1The passage §§ 260-266 repeats unnecessarily the 
substance of §§ 237-250: possibly these are extracts from 
two treatises utilizing the same material. 


135 


Fr. 54 MANETHO 


μενος yap ταῦτα Kai περὶ τῶν μελλόντων φοβηθείς, 
\ λ δὴ / > / t ᾽ ~ / 1 

τοὺς λελωβημένους ἐκείνους, dv αὐτῷ καθαρίσαι 

προείρητο τὴν Αἴγυπτον, οὐδὲ τότε τῆς χώρας 

> / > A - 

ἐξήλασεν, ἀλλὰ δεηθεῖσιν αὐτοῖς ἔδωκε πόλιν, ὥς 

A / > A ~ 

φησι, τὴν πάλαι μὲν οἰκηθεῖσαν ὑπὸ τῶν Ποιμένων, 

0 ,ἷ A a 

261 Avapw δὲ καλουμένην. εἰς ἣν ἀθροισθέντας αὐτοὺς 
ἡγεμόνα φησὶν ἐξελέσθαι τῶν ἐξ ᾿Ηλιουπόλεως 

/ e ~ “- 
πάλαι γεγονότων ἱερέων, καὶ τοῦτον αὐτοῖς εἰσ- 
/ a ~ 
ἡγήσασθαι μήτε θεοὺς προσκυνεῖν μήτε τῶν ev? 
Αἰγύπτῳ θρησκευομένων ζῴων ἀπέχεσθαι, πάντα 
A / \ / / \ \ 
δὲ θύειν καὶ κατεσθίειν, συνάπτεσθαι δὲ μηδενὶ 
πλὴν τῶν συνομωμοσμένων,2 ὅρκοις τε τὸ πλῆθος 
ἐνδησάμενον, ἦ μὴν τούτοις ἐμμενεῖν τοῖς νόμοις, 
μὴ / \ Avi \ A / 
καὶ τειχίσαντα τὴν Avapw πρὸς τὸν βασιλέα 

6 iy > A \ θ “ ” 

262 πόλεμον ἐξενεγκεῖν. καὶ προστίθησιν ὅτι ἔπεμψεν 
εἰς “Ιεροσόλυμα παρακαλῶν ἐκείνους αὐτοῖς συμ- 
μαχεῖν καὶ δώσειν αὐτοῖς τὴν Avapw ὑπισχνού- 

A a > ~ « 
μενος, εἶναι γὰρ αὐτὴν τοῖς ἐκ τῶν “]εροσολύμων 
3 / / > 9.9, « / > \ 
ἀφιξομένοις προγονικήν, ἀφ᾽ ἧς ὁρμωμένους αὐτοὺς 

263 πᾶσαν τὴν Αἴγυπτον καθέξειν. εἶτα τοὺς μὲν 
> a Μ ~ / / ‘ / 
ἐπελθεῖν εἴκοσι στρατοῦ μυριάσι λέγει, τὸν βασιλέα 
δὲ ~ Ai / mA / > »7 - 

ἐ τῶν Αἰγυπτίων ‘Apuévwdw οὐκ οἰόμενον δεῖν 
θεομαχεῖν εἰς τὴν Αἰθιοπίαν εὐθὺς ἀποδρᾶναι, τὸν 
δὲ Anw καί τινα τῶν ἄλλων ἱερῶν ζῴων παρα- 

͵ὔ - « ~ / / 
τεθεικέναι τοῖς ἱερεῦσι διαφυλάττεσθαι κελεύσαντα. 

> ΠΕ , ? , , , 

264 εἶτα τοὺς “]εροσολυμίτας ἐπελθόντας τάς τε πόλεις 

ς / \ \ ¢€ 
ἀνιστάναι Kal τὰ ἱερὰ κατακαίειν Kal τοὺς ἱερέας 3 


136 


AEGYPTIACA Fr. 54 


of the whole story. Although he had learned these 
facts, and had conceived a dread of the future, the 
king did not, even then, expel from his land those 
cripples of whose taint he had previously been bidden 
to purge Egypt, but instead, at their request, he 
gave them as their city (Manetho says) the former 
habitation of the Shepherds, Auaris, as it was called. 
Here, he adds, they assembled, and selected as their 
leader a man who had formerly been a priest in 
Heliopolis. This man (according to Manetho) in- 
structed them not to worship the gods nor to refrain 
from the animals revered in Egypt, but to sacrifice 
and devour them all, and to have intercourse with 
none save those of their own confederacy. Then 
having bound his followers by oath to abide strictly 
by these laws, he fortified Auaris and waged war 
against the king. This leader, Manetho adds, sent 
to Jerusalem, inviting the people to join in alliance 
with him, and promising to give them Auaris, which, 
he reminded them, was the ancestral home of those 
who would come from Jerusalem, and would serve as 
a base for their conquest of the whole of Egypt. 
Then, continues Manetho, they advanced with an 
army of 200,000 men; and Amendphis, king of 
Egypt, thinking he ought not to fight against the 
gods, fled straightway into Ethiopia after enjoining 
that Apis and some of the other sacred animals should 
be entrusted to the custody of the priests. There- 
after, the men from Jerusalem came on, made deso- 
late the cities, burned down the temples, massacred 


1Cobet: καθαρεῦσαι L. 2Conj. Niese: ἐπ᾽ L. 
8. Niese: συνωμοσμένων L. “Bekker: ἱππέας L, Lat. 


137 


Fr. 54 MANETHO 


> / a ~ > ,ὔ 
ἀποσφάττειν, ὅλως τε μηδεμιᾶς ἀπέχεσθαι παρα- 
, \ > / «ες \ \ / ‘ 
265 voutas μηδὲ ὠμότητος. ὁ δὲ τὴν πολιτείαν Kai 
τοὺς νόμους αὐτοῖς καταβαλόμενος ' ἱερεύς, φησίν, 
ἦν τὸ γένος ᾿Ἡλιοπολίτης, ὄνομα δ᾽ ᾿Οσαρσὴφ 5 
> ‘ a > € / a? / , 
ἀπὸ τοῦ ev ᾿Ηλιουπόλει θεοῦ ’Ooipews, μεταθέμενος 
260 δὲ Μωυσῆν αὑτὸν προσηγόρευσε. τρισκαιδεκάτῳ 
> ~ ~ 
δέ φησιν ἔτει τὸν ‘Auéevwdw,—toaobrov yap αὐτῷ 
~ > 
χρόνον εἶναι τῆς ἐκπτώσεως πεπρωμένον, --- ἐξ 
Αἰθιοπίας ἐπελθόντα μετὰ πολλῆς στρατιᾶς καὶ 
συμβαλόντα τοῖς [Ποιμέσι καὶ τοῖς μιαροῖς νικῆσαί 
τε τῇ μάχῃ καὶ κτεῖναι πολλοὺς ἐπιδιώξαντα 
29 μέχρι τῶν τῆς Συρίας ὅρων. 
267 Ἂν τούτοις πάλιν οὐ συνίησιν ἀπιθάνως ψευ- 
€ \ > ~ ~ 
δόμενος. of yap λεπροὶ καὶ TO μετ᾽ αὐτῶν πλῆθος, 
εἰ καὶ πρότερον ὠργίζοντο τῷ βασιλεῖ καὶ τοῖς 
τὰ περὶ αὐτοὺς πεποιηκόσι κατὰ [τε] ὃ τὴν τοῦ 
’, Ld 3 > ao ~ ~ 
μάντεως προαγόρευσιν, ἀλλ᾽ ὅτε τῶν λιθοτομιῶν 
eA \ / > ’ ~ \ 7 w 
ἐξῆλθον καὶ πόλιν παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ καὶ χώραν ἔλαβον, 
πάντως ὁ ἂν γεγόνεισαν πρᾳότεροι πρὸς αὐτόν. 
> A Ἁ 5 3 - > , 907 \ n > -~ 6 
208 εἰ δὲ 57° κἀκεῖνον ἐμίσουν, ἰδίᾳ μὲν av αὐτῷ 
A 
ἐπεβούλευον, οὐκ ἂν δὲ πρὸς ἅπαντας ἤραντο 
“ μι 
πόλεμον, δῆλον ὅτι πλείστας ἔχοντες συγγενείας 
“- A » a 
269 τοσοῦτοί ye TO πλῆθος ὄντες. ὅμως δὲ Kal τοῖς 
ἀνθρώποις πολεμεῖν διεγνωκότες, οὐκ ἂν εἰς τοὺς 
αὐτῶν θεοὺς πολεμεῖν ἐτόλμησαν οὐδ᾽ ὑὕπεναν- 
τιωτάτους ἔθεντο νόμους τοῖς πατρίοις αὐτῶν καὶ 
a « »“» ~ ~ 
270 οἷς ἐνετράφησαν. δεῖ δὲ ἡμᾶς τῷ Μανεθῷ 1 χάριν 
1 Hd. pr.: καταβαλλόμενος L. 
2°Ocapaid ed. pr.: ᾿Αρσὴφ L. 


3Om. Lat., Bekker. 4 Ed. pr.: πάντες L, Lat. 
5 εἰ δ᾽ ἔτι conj. Niese ( porro st adhuc Lat.). 


138 


AEGYPTIACA Fr. 54 


the priests, and, in short, committed every possible 
kind of lawlessness and savagery. The priest who 
framed their constitution and their laws was, ac- 
cording to Manetho, a native of Héliopolis, Osarséph 
by name, after Osiris the god worshipped in Hélio- 
polis: but he changed his name and called himself 
Moses. Thirteen years later—this being the des- 
tined period of his exile—Amendphis, according to 
Manetho, advanced from Ethiopia with a large army, 
and joining battle with the Shepherds and the pol- 
luted people, he defeated them, killing many, after 
pursuing them to the frontiers of Syria. 

Here again Manetho fails to realize the improba- 
bility of his lying tale. Even if the lepers and their 
accompanying horde were previously angry with the 
king and the others who had treated them thus in 
obedience to the seer’s prediction, certainly when 
they had left the stone-quarries and received from 
him a city and land, they would have grown more 
kindly disposed to him. If indeed they still hated 
him, they would have plotted against him personally, 
instead of declaring war against the whole people ; 
for obviously so large a company must have had 
numerous relatives in Egypt. Notwithstanding, 
once they had resolved to make war on the Egyptians, 
they would never have ventured to direct their war- 
fare against their gods, nor would they have framed 
laws completely opposed to the ancestral code under 
which they had been brought up. We must, how- 
ever, be grateful to Manetho for stating that the 


δ ἂν αὐτῷ ed. pr.: ἄνω (-- ἀνθρώπῳ) ἴω: ἂν (alone) conj. 
Niese: ἄν ἀνθρώπῳ Reinach. 
7 Niese: Mavédwu L. 


139 


Fr. 54 MANETHO 


ἔχειν, ὅτι ταύτης τῆς παρανομίας οὐχὶ τοὺς ἐξ 
“Ιεροσολύμων ἐλθόντας ἀρχηγοὺς γενέσθαι φησίν, 
ἀλλ᾽ αὐτοὺς ἐκείνους ὄντας Αἰγυπτίους καὶ τού- 
των μάλιστα τοὺς ἱερέας ἐπινοῆσαί τε ταῦτα καὶ 
ὁρκωμοτῆσαι τὸ πλῆθος. 

21 "Ἐκεῖνο μέντοι πῶς οὐκ ἄλογον, τῶν μὲν οἰκείων 
αὐτοῖς καὶ τῶν φίλων συναποστῆναι ' οὐδένα μηδὲ 
τοῦ πολέμου τὸν κίνδυνον συνάρασθαι, πέμψαι δὲ 
τοὺς μιαροὺς εἰς “Ιεροσόλυμα καὶ τὴν παρ᾽ ἐκείνων 

272 ἐπάγεσθαι συμμαχίαν; ποίας αὐτοῖς φιλίας ἢ 
τίνος αὐτοῖς οἰκειότητος προὑὐπηργμένης ; τοὐ- 
ναντίον γὰρ ἦσαν πολέμιοι καὶ τοῖς ἔθεσι3 πλεῖστον 
διέφερον. ὁ δέ φησιν εὐθὺς ὑπακοῦσαι τοῖς ὑπ- 
ισχνουμένοις ὅτι τὴν Αἴγυπτον καθέξουσιν, ὥσπερ 
αὐτῶν οὐ σφόδρα τῆς χώρας ἐμπείρως ἐχόντων, 

213 ἧς βιασθέντες ἐκπεπτώκασιν. εἰ μὲν οὖν ἀπόρως 
ἢ κακῶς ἔπραττον, ἴσως ἂν καὶ παρεβάλλοντο, 
πόλιν δὲ κατοικοῦντες εὐδαίμονα καὶ χώραν 
πολλὴν κρείττω τῆς Αἰγύπτου καρπούμενοι, διὰ 
τί ποτ᾽ ἂν ἐχθροῖς μὲν πάλαι τὰ δὲ σώματα λε- 
λωβημένοις, οὗς μηδὲ τῶν οἰκείων οὐδεὶς ὑπέμενε, 
τούτοις ἔμελλον παρακινδυνεύσειν βοηθοῦντες ; οὐ 
γὰρ δή γε τὸν γενησόμενον προήδεσαν δρασμὸν 

214 τοῦ βασιλέως τοὐναντίον γὰρ αὐτὸς εἴρηκεν ws 


1 Bekker (consensit Lat.): συναποστῆσαι L. 
2? Hudson (moribus Lat.): ἤθεσι L. 





Τὴ ὃ 245 we are told that Amendéphis himself led his 
host in this useless march, and that his son was only 
5 years old. Only here is Pélusium mentioned as the 
destination of the march. 


140 


| Footnote continued on opposite page. 


AEGYPTIACA Fr. 54 


authors of this lawlessness were not the newcomers 
from Jerusalem, but that company of people who 
were themselves Egyptians, and that it was, above 
all, their priests who devised the scheme and bound 
the multitude by oath. 

Moreover, how absurd it is to imagine that, while 
none of their relatives and friends joined in the revolt 
and shared in the perils of war, these polluted persons 
sent to Jerusalem and gained allies there! What 
alliance, what connexion had previously existed be- 
tween them? Why, on the contrary, they were 
enemies, and differed widely in customs. Yet 
Manetho says that they lent a ready ear to the 
promise that they would occupy Egypt, just as if 
they were not thoroughly acquainted with the 
country from which they had been forcibly expelled ! 
Now, if they had been in straitened or unhappy cir- 
cumstances, they would perhaps have taken the risk ; 
but dwelling, as they did, in a prosperous city and 
enjoying the fruits of an ample country, superior to 
Egypt, why ever should they be likely to hazard 
their lives by succouring their former foes, those 
maimed cripples, whom none even of their own 
kinsfolk could endure ? For of course they did not 
foresee that the king would take flight. On the con- 
trary, Manetho has himself stated that the son! of 


Pélusium, ‘‘ the celebrated eastern seaport and key to 
Egypt” (Baedeker®, pp. 197, f.), the famous frontier 
fortress, in Ancient Egyptian Snw. A scarab of the late 
Twelfth Dynasty or early Thirteenth, published by 
Newberry in J. Eg. Arch. xviii. (1932), p. 141, shows the 
place-name written within the fortress-sign. The name 
Pélusium is from πηλός “‘ mud’’: cf. Strabo, 17. 1, 21, 
for the muddy pools or marshes around Pélusium. 


14] 


FR. 54 MANETHO 


ὁ παῖς τοῦ ᾿Δμενώφιος τριάκοντα μυριάδας ἔχων 
εἰς τὸ Πηλούσιον ὑπηντίαζεν. καὶ τοῦτο μὲν 
ἤδεισαν πάντως οἱ παραγινόμενοι, τὴν δὲ μετά- 
> ~ \ \ A / > / wv 
νοιαν αὐτοῦ καὶ THY φυγὴν πόθεν εἰκάζειν ἔμελλον; 
ΝΜ 1 / / ~ Ae 4 AAG 
275 ἔπειτα κρατήσαντάς φησι τῆς Αἰγύπτου πολλὰ 
καὶ δεινὰ δρᾶν τοὺς ἐκ τῶν “]εροσολύμων ἐπι- 
στρατεύσαντας, καὶ περὶ τούτων ὀνειδίζει καθάπερ 
᾽, > a 
οὐ πολεμίους αὐτοὺς * ἐπαγαγὼν ἢ δέον τοῖς ἔξωθεν 
ἐπικληθεῖσιν ἐγκαλεῖν, ὁπότε ταῦτα πρὸ τῆς 
ἐκείνων ἀφίξεως ἔπραττον καὶ πράξειν ὠμωμό- 
ς \ ͵ > 4 > \ \ / 
276 κεσαν ot τὸ γένος Αἰγύπτιοι. ἀλλὰ καὶ χρόνοις 
2 > / > A Sed / A 
ὕστερον Apévwdis ἐπελθὼν ἐνίκησε μάχῃ Kal 
κτείνων τοὺς πολεμίους μέχρι τῆς Συρίας ἤλα- 
σεν - οὕτω γὰρ παντάπασίν ἐστιν ἡ Αἴγυπτος τοῖς 
« θ ὃ ~ ? “ > LA / 3 ε 
277 οποῦθενοηποτοῦν ἐπιοῦσιν εὐάλωτος. καίτοι“ οἱ 
τότε πολέμῳ κρατοῦντες αὐτήν, ζῆν πυνθανόμενοι 
A 3 / a A τὰ ~ > , > A 
tov Apevwduv, οὔτε τὰς ἐκ τῆς Αἰθιοπίας ἐμβολὰς 
ὠχύρωσαν, πολλὴν εἰς τοῦτο παρασκευὴν ἔχοντες, 
οὔτε τὴν ἄλλην ἡτοίμασαν δύναμιν. ὁ δὲ καὶ μέχρι 
τῆς Συρίας ἀναιρῶν, φησίν, αὐτοὺς ἠκολούθησε 
‘\ ~ ΄ ~ > ΄ ~ - > cs 
διὰ τῆς ψάμμου τῆς ἀνύδρου, δῆλον ὅτι οὐ ῥάδιον 
80 οὐδὲ ἀμαχεὶ στρατοπέδῳ διελθεῖν. 
\ Ἢ > \ Ἢ ” > ~ > 
918 Κατὰ μὲν οὖν tov Μανεθὼν οὔτε ἐκ τῆς Ai- 
γύπτου τὸ γένος ἡμῶν ἐστιν οὔτε τῶν ἐκεῖθέν 
τινες ἀνεμίχθησαν - τῶν γὰρ λεπρῶν καὶ νοσούντων 
πολλοὺς μὲν εἰκὸς ἐν ταῖς λιθοτομίαις ἀποθανεῖν 
πολὺν χρόνον ἐκεῖ γενομένους καὶ κακοπαθοῦντας, 
πολλοὺς δ᾽ ἐν ταῖς μετὰ ταῦτα μάχαις, πλείστους 
δ᾽ ἐν τῇ τελευταίᾳ καὶ τῇ φυγῇ. 
1 Hudson: εἶτα Niese: deinde Lat.: τὰ σιτία L. 


142 


a ξξςς μας τπξΠ πτπΠΠτ ποι στ 


AEGYPTIACA Fr. 54 


Amenéphis marched with 300,000 men to confront 
them at Pélusium. This was certainly known to 
those already present ; but how could they possibly 
guess that he would change his mind and flee ? 
Manetho next says that, after conquering Egypt, the 
invaders from Jerusalem committed many heinous 
crimes ; and for these he reproaches them, just as if 
he had not brought them in as enemies, or as if he 
was bound to accuse allies from abroad of actions 
which before their arrival native Egyptians were 
performing and had sworn to perform. But, years 
later, Amendéphis returned to the attack, conquered 
the enemy in battle, and drove them, with slaughter, 
right to Syria. So perfectly easy a prey is Egypt to 
invaders, no matter whence they come! And yet 
those who at that time conquered the land, on 
learning that Amenéphis was alive, neither fortified 
the passes between it and Ethiopia, although their 
resources were amply sufficient, nor did they keep 
the rest of their forces in readiness ! Amendphis, ac- 
cording to Manetho, pursued them with carnage over 
the sandy desert right to Syria. But obviously it is 
no easy matter for an army to cross the desert even 
without fighting. 

Thus, according to Manetho, our race is not of 
Egyptian origin, nor did it receive any admixture of 
Egyptians. For, naturally, many of the lepers and 
invalids died in the stone-quarries during their long 
term of hardship, many others in the subsequent 
battles, and most of all in the final engagement and 
the rout. 





* Reinach: αὐτοῖς L. §Conj. Thackeray: καὶ L. 


143 


Fr. 54 MANETHO 


31 


, A > A ? Cal \ 4 
o79 4)οιπόν μοι πρὸς αὐτὸν εἰπεῖν περὶ Μωυσέως 


lo A A ΝΜ A \ > 4 
τοῦτον δὲ τὸν ἄνδρα θαυμαστὸν μὲν Αἰγύπτιοι 
καὶ θεῖον νομίζουσι, βούλονται δὲ προσποιεῖν αὗ- 

a « 
τοῖς μετὰ βλασφημίας ἀπιθάνου, λέγοντες ᾿Ηλιο- 

~ a ε 
πολίτην εἶναι τῶν ἐκεῖθεν ἱερέων ἕνα διὰ τὴν 
/ / / > > a 
280X€mpav συνεξεληλασμένον. δείκνυται δ᾽ ἐν ταῖς 
ἀναγραφαῖς ὀκτωκαίδεκα σὺν τοῖς πεντακοσίοις 
πρότερον ἔτεσι γεγονὼς καὶ τοὺς ἡμετέρους 
ἐξαγαγὼν ἐκ τῆς Αἰγύπτου πατέρας εἰς τὴν 

’ A ~ > / ς > ¢ ~ Lud > ᾿] \ 

281 χώραν τὴν νῦν οἰκουμένην ὑφ᾽ ἡμῶν. ὅτι δ᾽ οὐδὲ 
συμφορᾷ τινι τοιαύτῃ περὶ τὸ σῶμα κεχρημένος 
ἦν, ἐκ τῶν λεγομένων ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ δῆλός ἐστι" τοῖς 

~ > / / / > / πὶ 
γὰρ λεπρῶσιν ἀπείρηκε μήτε μένειν ἐν πόλει μήτ 
ἐν κώμῃ κατοικεῖν, ἀλλὰ μόνους περιπατεῖν κατ- 
εσχισμένους τὰ ἱμάτια, καὶ τὸν ἁψάμενον αὐτῶν 

282 ἢ ὁμωρόφιον γενόμενον οὐ καθαρὸν ἡγεῖται. καὶ 
μὴν κἂν θεραπευθῇ τὸ νόσημα καὶ τὴν αὑτοῦ 
φύσιν ἀπολάβῃ, προείρηκέν τινας ἁγνείας, καθαρ- 

Aa / 
μοὺς πηγαίων ὑδάτων λουτροῖς καὶ ξυρήσεις 
πάσης τῆς τριχός, πολλάς τε κελεύει καὶ παν- 
> a 
τοίας ἐπιτελέσαντα θυσίας τότε παρελθεῖν εἰς τὴν 

283 ἱερὰν πόλιν. καίτοι " τοὐναντίον εἰκὸς ἣν προνοίᾳ 
τινὶ καὶ φιλανθρωπίᾳ χρήσασθαι τὸν ἐν τῇ συμ- 
φορᾷ ταύτῃ γεγονότα πρὸς τοὺς ὁμοίως * αὐτῷ 
δυστυχήσαντας. οὐ μόνον δὲ περὶ τῶν λεπρῶν 

“ > Ψ' 3 3 0" a \ A 4, 
οὕτως ἐνομοθέτησεν, ἀλλ᾽ οὐδὲ τοῖς καὶ τὸ βραχύ- 

A CG ~ 
τατόν TL τοῦ σώματος ἠκρωτηριασμένοις ἱερᾶσθαι 
4 > > > \ 4 ε / 
284 συγκεχώρηκεν, ἀλλ᾽ εἰ Kal μεταξύ τις ἱερώμενος 
14 καὶ Lat., Reinach. 2 Hd. pr.: καὶ L. 
3 Hd. pr.: ὁμοίους L, Lat. 
144 


AEGYPTIACA Fr. 54 


It remains for me to reply to Manetho’s statements 
about Moses. The Egyptians regard him as a won- 
derful, even a divine being, but wish to claim him as 
their own by an incredible calumny, alleging that he 
belonged to Héliopolis and was dismissed from his 
priesthood there owing to leprosy. The records, 
however, show that he lived 518 years } earlier, and 
led our forefathers up out of Egypt to the land which 
we inhabit at the present time. And that he suffered 
from no such physical affliction is clear from his own 
words. He has, in fact, forbidden lepers 2 either to 
stay in a town or to make their abode in a village ; 
they must go about in solitude, with their garments 
rent. Anyone who touches them or lives under the 
same roof with them he considers unclean. More- 
over, even if the malady is cured and the leper re- 
sumes normal health, Moses has prescribed certain 
rites of purification—to cleanse himself in a bath of 
spring-water and to shave off all his hair,—and en- 
joins the performance of a number of different sacri- 
fices before entrance into the holy city. Yet it would 
have been natural, on the contrary, for a victim of 
this scourge to show some consideration and kindly 
feeling for those who shared the same misfortune. It 
was not only about lepers that he framed such laws : 
those who had even the slightest mutilation of the 
body were disqualified for the priesthood ;* and if 
a priest in the course of his ministry met with an 


1518 years. See ἢ. on § 230. 

3 ἘῸΓ the laws of leprosy, here summarized, see 0.7’. 
Leviticus xiii. (especially 45 f.) and xiv. 

3 Cf. Leviticus xxi. 17-23 (exclusion from the priesthood 
of anyone “ that hath a blemish ’’). 


145 


Fr. 54 MANETHO 


τοιαύτῃ χρήσαιτο συμφορᾷ, τὴν τιμὴν αὐτὸν 
286 ἀφείλετο. πῶς οὖν εἰκὸς ἐκεῖνον ταῦτα νομο- 
θετεῖν ἀνοήτως «ἢ τοὺς» ἀπὸ τοιούτων συμ- 
φορῶν συνειλεγμένους προσέσθαι 3 καθ᾽ ἑαυτῶν εἰς 
280 ὄνειδός τε καὶ βλάβην νόμους συντιθεμένους ; ἀλλὰ 
μὴν καὶ τοὔνομα λίαν ἀπιθάνως μετατέθεικεν " 
Ὄ. A 4 4 , > aA a ~ \ s 
σαρσὴφ yap, φησίν, ἐκαλεῖτο. τοῦτο μὲν οὖν 
» A / > > / \ > > \ 
εἰς τὴν μετάθεσιν οὐκ ἐναρμόζει, τὸ δ᾽ ἀληθὲς 
» λ - \ > a 7 θέ M ~ 5 
ὄνομα δηλοῖ τὸν ἐκ τοῦ ὕδατος σωθέντα [Mwojr]- 
τὸ γὰρ ὕδωρ οἱ Αἰγύπτιοι wai καλοῦσιν. 
εἶ ~ s 4 / {ὃ δ 6 σ 
287 Kav@s οὖν γεγονέναι νομίζω KatadndAov® ὅτι 
Μανεθώς, ἕως μὲν ἠκολούθει ταῖς ἀρχαίαις ἀνα- 
γραφαῖς, οὐ πολὺ τῆς ἀληθείας διημάρτανεν, ἐπὶ 
δὲ τοὺς ἀδεσπότους μύθους τραπόμενος ἢ συνέθη- 
κεν αὐτοὺς ἀπιθάνως ἤ τισι τῶν πρὸς ἀπέχθειαν 
εἰρηκότων ἐπίστευσεν. 


1 ἢ ᾽κεῖνον Niese. 2. Add. Niese. 

8 Niese: προέσθαι L. 4 Ed. pr.: ᾿Οαρσὴφ L. 
5 Bracketed as a gloss (Niese). 

® Bekker: καὶ δῆλον δ᾽ 1, (δ᾽ om. ed. pr.). 


1 The same etymology (with the necessary addition that 
ὑσῆς means “‘ saved ᾽᾽) recurs in Josephus, Antig. ii. 228: 
cf. Philo, De Vita Moysis, i. 4, § 17. There is a word in 
Ancient Egyptian, mw, meaning “ water,’’ but the con- 
nexion with the name Moses is hypothetical. Similar 
forms appear as personal names in Pharaonic times, e.g. 


146 


AEGYPTIACA Fr. 54 


accident of this nature, he was deprived of his office. 
How improbable, then, that Moses should be so 
foolish as to frame these laws, or that men brought 
together by such misfortunes should approve of legis- 
lation against themselves, to their own shame and 
injury! But, further, the name, too, has been trans- 
formed in an extremely improbable way. According 
to Manetho, Moses was called Osarséph. These 
names, however, are not interchangeable: the true 
name means “one saved out of the water,” for 
water is called ““ mo-y ” by the Egyptians. 

It is now, therefore, sufficiently obvious, I think, 
that, so long as Manetho followed the ancient records, 
he did not stray far from the truth; but when he 
turned to unauthorized legends, he either combined 
them in an improbable form or else gave credence to 
certain prejudiced informants. 


Ms.i from the Old Kingdom, Ms (very common) from the 
New Kingdom. In Ezodus ii. 10 “ Moses’”’ is ‘‘ drawn 
out’ (Hebr. mashah) of the water—a derivation “ hardly 
meant to be taken seriously ’’ (T. H. Robinson, in Oesterley 
and Robinson, History of Israel, I. p. 81). 

See further Alan H. Gardiner, “‘ The Egyptian Origin 
of some English Personal Names,’’ in Journ. of Amer. 
Orient. Soc. 56 (1936), pp. 192-4. Gardiner points out 
(p. 195, n. 28) that ὑσῆς (mentioned above) is clearly 
a perversion of aouns [or ἑσιῆς, = Egyptian hsy, “ praised,” 
1,539], the Greek equivalent of the Coptic hasie, ‘‘ favoured’’; 
but an Egyptian became “favoured ’’ by the fact of being 
drowned, not by being saved from drowning. 


147 


Fr. 55 MANETHO 


Fr. 55. Syncellus, p. 134. KATA A®PIKANON. 


᾿Εννεακαιδεκάτη δυναστεία βασιλέων ζ΄ ' Ζιοσ- 
πολιτῶν. 

a’ Σέθως, ἔτη να΄. 

B’ Ραψάκης, ἔτη ξα΄ .3 

γ Ἀμμενέφθης, ἔτη κ΄. 

ὃ' Ῥαμεσσῆς, é ἔτη Ee 

Ἡμμενεμνῆς, ἔ ἔτη ε΄. 

Θούωρις, ὁ παρ᾽ Ὁμήρῳ καλούμενος Πό- 
λυβος, ᾿ἀλκάνδρας ἀνήρ, ἐφ᾽ 054 τὸ ἤϊλιον 
ἑάλω, ἔτη ζ΄. 

Ὁμοῦ, ἔτη of’. 


1MSS.: s’ Miller, who explains the error as due to 
someone who thought that ᾿Αλκάνδρας ἀνήρ denoted a 
seventh king. 

2 és’ Miller. 3 Odyssey, iv. 126. 

4m.: ζ΄ ᾿Αλκάνδρος ἀνήρ, ἐφ᾽ οὗ MSS. 


1 Dynasty XIX.: c. 1310-1200 B.c. The lists given by 
Africanus and Eusebius for Dynasty XIX. are in very bad 
confusion. Armais (Haremhab) should begin the line, 
which Meyer gives as follows :— 

Haremhab: Ramessés 1. : Sethés I.: Ramessés II. 
(the Louis Quatorze of Egyptian history: 67 years, see 
Breasted, Anc. Rec. iv. §471; C.A.H. ii. pp. 139 ff.): 
le SABIE Sac Amenmesés: Merneptah II. Siptah: Sethés 
11. : Ramessés Siptah : <Arsu the Syrian>. 

W. Struve (Die Ara ἀπὸ Μενόφρεως und die XIX. Dynastie 
Manethos, in Zeitschr. fiir ag. Sprache, Bd. 63 (1928), pp. 
45-50) gives a revised sequence with additional identifica- 
tions: (1) Harmais (Haremhab), (2) Ramessés I., (3) 
Amen6éphath (Seti I. Merneptah), (4) Sesés (Struve’s 
emendation for Sethés), also called Ramessés Miamoun 


148 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 55 
Dynasty XIX. 
Fr. 55 (from Syncellus). ACCORDING TO AFRICANUS. 


The Nineteenth Dynasty ! consisted of seven (six) 
kings of Diospolis. 

1, Sethés, for 51 years. 

2. Rapsacés, for 61 (66) years. 

3. Ammenephthés, for 20 years. 

4, Ramessés, for 60 years. 

5. Ammenemnés, for 5 years. 

6. Thuéris, who in Homer is called Polybus, 
husband of Alcandra, and in whose time 
Troy was taken,’ reigned for 7 years. 


Total, 209 years. 


(Ramessés II. Seso), (5) Amenephthés (Merneptah), (6) 
[Amenophthés or Menophthés, emended from the form 
Menophrés in Theon of Alexandria], (Seti II. Merneptah), 
(7) Ramessés III. Siptah, (8) Ammenemes (Amenmeses), 
(9) Thuéris or Thuésris, also called Siphthas. Cf. Petrie, 
History of Egypt, iii. pp. 120 ff. Struve points also to a 
new Séthis date, 1318 B.c., in the reign of Seti I. (according 
to Petrie’s chronology, 1326-1300 B.c.). 

? The Fall of Troy was traditionally dated 1183 B.o.: 
cf. p. 107 n. 3. 

In Homer, Odyssey, iv. 126, a golden distaff and a silver 
work-basket with wheels beneath and golden rims,— 
treasures in the palace of Menelaus at Sparta,—are de- 
scribed as gifts to Helen from ‘‘ Aleandré, the wife of 
Polybus who dwelt in Egyptian Thebes where the amplest 
store of wealth is laid up in men’s houses’’; while to 
Menelaus himself Polybus had given two silver baths, 
two tripods, and ten talentsof gold. See W.H. Ὁ. Rouse, 
The Story of Odysseus, 1937, p. 56: ‘‘ Polybos was a great 
nobleman in the Egyptian Thebes, with a palace full of 
treasures”’, 

149 


Fr. 55, 56 MANETHO 


᾿Επὶ τὸ αὐτὸ δευτέρου τόμου Μανεθῶ βασιλεῖς 
Ls’, ἔτη βρκα΄. 


Fr. 56 (a). Syncellus, p. 136. KATA ΕὙΣΕΒΙΟΝ 


᾿Εννεακαιδεκάτη δυναστεία βασιλέων ε΄ Διοσ- 
πολιτῶν. 
a’ Σέθως, ἔτη νε΄. 
β' Ραμψής, ἔτη és". 
γ΄ Appevedbis, ἔτη p’. 
ὃ΄ Appevéuns, ἔτη ks’. 
ε΄ Θούωρις, ὁ παρ᾽ ‘Ounpw καλούμενος Πό- 
λυβος, ᾿ἀλκάνδρας ἀνήρ, ἐφ᾽ οὗ τὸ ἤΐλιον 
ἑάλω, ἔτη ζ΄. 
“Ὁμοῦ, ἔτη ρηδ΄. 
᾿Επὶ τὸ αὐτὸ B’ τόμου Μανεθῶ βασιλέων 48’ 
ἔτη καρκα΄." 


(0) Eusresrus, Chronica I. (Armenian Version), 
p- 102. 


Nona decima dynastia Diospolitarum regum Y. 
Sethos, annis LV. 

Rampses, annis LXVI. 

Amenephthis, annis VIII. 

Ammenemes, annis XX VI. 


1 Boxa’ corr. Miller. 


150 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 55, 56 


Sum total in the Second Book of Manetho, ninety- 
six kings, for 2121 years.+ 


Fr. 56 (a) (from Syncellus). AccoRDING TO 
EUSEBIUS. 


The Nineteenth Dynasty consisted of five kings of 

Diospolis. 

. Sethés, for 55 years. 

. Rampsés, for 66 years. 

. Ammenephthis, for 40 years. 

. Ammenemés, for 26 years. 

. Thuéris, who in Homer is called Polybus, 
husband of Alcandra, and in whose reign 
Troy was taken, reigned for 7 years. 

Total, 194 years. 
Sum total in the Second Book of Manetho, for 
ninety-two kings, 1121 (2121) years. 


PWN 


(b) ARMENIAN VERSION OF EUSEBIUS. 


The Nineteenth Dynasty consisted of five kings of 
Diospolis. 

1. Sethos, for 55 years. 

2. Rampses, for 66 years. 

3. Amenephthis, for 8 years. 

4, Ammenemes, for 26 years. 


1 For the corrected total of Book IT., see Fr. 4, n. 4 (246 
or 289 kings for 2221 years). The wide difference between 
the number of kings (96 or 92 as compared with 246 or 
289) is puzzling: Meyer conjectures that about 150 or 193 
of the larger numbers were ephemeral or co-regents. 


151 


Fr. 56, 57 MANETHO 


Thuoris, ab Homero dictus Polybus, vir strenuus 
et fortissimus,! cuius aetate Ilium captum 
est, annis VII. 


Summa annorum CLXXXXIV. 
Manethonis libro secundo conflatur summa 


LXXXXII regum, annorum MMCXXI. 


ΤΟΜΟΣ TPITOS 


Fr. 57 (a). Syncellus, p. 137. 
KATA A®PIKANON. 


Tpitov τόμου Μιανεθῶ. 

Εἰκοστὴ δυναστεία βασιλέων Διοσπολιτῶν ιβ΄, οἵ 
> , ” , 
ἐβασίλευσαν ἔτη pre’. 


(0) Syncellus, p. 139. KATA ΕὙΣΕΒΙΟΝ. 


Τρίτου τόμου Μανεθῶ. 
Εἰκοστὴ δυναστεία βασιλέων Διοσπολιτῶν ιβ’, 
ot ἐβασίλευσαν ἔτη pon’. 


1.1.6. ἀνὴρ ᾿Αλκάνδρας Miller. 





1 Dynasty XX. c. 1200-1090 B.c. 
Setnakht : Ramessés III. c. 1200-1168: Ramessés IV.- 
ΧΙ. c. 1168-1090. Manetho’s 12 kings probably included 


152 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) FR. 56, 57 


5. Thuoris, by Homer called the active and 
gallant Polybus, in whose time Troy was 
taken, reigned for 7 years. 

Total, 194 years. 

In the Second Book of Manetho there is a total of 

ninety-two kings, reigning for 2121 years. 


BOOK III. 


Dynasty XX. 


Fr. 57 (a) (from Syncellus). AccorpdiNG TO 
AFRICANUS. 


From the Third Book of Manetho. 
The Twentieth Dynasty | consisted of twelve kings 
of Diospolis, who reigned for 135 years. 


(b) AccorpiInc To EvsEBIvs. 


From the Third Book of Manetho. 
The Twentieth Dynasty consisted of twelve kings 
of Diospolis, who reigned for 178 years. 


Ramessés XII. and Herihor. The Great Papyrus Harris 

(time of Ramessés III.) describes the anarchy between 

Dynasties XIX. and XX.: see Breasted, Anc. Rec. iv. 
398. 

; A revised list of Dynasty XX. is given by Newberry in 

Elliot Smith and Warren Dawson, Egyptian Mummies, 

1924: see also T. E. Peet in J. of Hg. Arch. xiv. (1928), 


pp. 52 1. 
153 


Fr. 57, 58 MANETHO 


(c) Eusesrus, Chronica I. (Armenian Version), 
p-. 103. 


FE, Manethonis tertio libro. 
Vicesima dynastia Diospolitanorum regum XII, 
qui imperaverunt annis CLXXII. 


Fr. 58. Syncellus, p. 137. KATA A®PIKANON. 


Πρώτη Kai εἰκοστὴ δυναστεία βασιλέων Τανιτῶν 
Cie 
a’ Σμενδῆς, ἔτη Ks". 
B’ Ψουσέννης,, ἔτη ps’. 
γ΄ Νεφερχερής," ἔτη δ΄. 
δ΄ Ἡμενωφθίς, ἔτη θ'. 
ε' Οσοχώρ, ἔτη τ. 
ς΄ Ψιναχῆς, ἔτη θ΄. 
ζ΄ Ψουσέννης," ἔτη ιδ'. 
Ὁμοῦ, ἔτη pr’. 


1 Ψουσένης A. * Νεφελχερής MSS. 8 Σουσέννης A. 





1 Dynasty XXI., resident at Tanis, c. 1090-c. 950 B.c. 
(a dark period in Egyptian history). For identifications 
with monumental and other evidencesee Meyer, Geschichte 2, 
ii. 2, p. 20n. This Tanite Dynasty overlapped with the 
Theban Dynasty XX.: see the Report of Wenamon, 
Breasted, Anc. Rec. iv. §§ 557-591; C.A.H. ii. pp. 192 ff. 


154 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) FR. 57, 58 


(c) ARMENIAN VERSION OF EUSEBIUS. 


From the Third Book of Manetho. 
The Twentieth Dynasty consisted of twelve kings 
of Diospolis, who reigned for 172 years. 


Dynasty XXI. 


Fr. 58 (from Syncellus). AccoRDING TO AFRICANUS. 


The Twenty-first Dynasty ! consisted of seven kings 
of Tanis. 


. Smendés,? for 26 years. 
. Psusen(n)és [I.],° for 46 years. 
. Nephercherés (Nephelcherés), for 4 years, 
. Amendéphthis, for 9 years. 
. Osochér, for 6 years. 
. Psinachés, for 9 years. 
. Psusennés [II.] (Susennés), for 14 years. 


Total, 130 years. 


ADAMS WNP 


For Smendés or Nesbenebded, a loca! noble of Tanis, 
who seized the whole Delta and made himself king of 
Lower Egypt, see C.A.H. ii. p. 191; iii. pp. 253 £. 

3In Egyptian, Psusennés is Psukhe‘mné, “the star 
appearing in Thebes”’. In 1939-40 tombs of certain kings 
of Dynasties XXI. and XXII. were excavated by P. 
Montet at Tanis, the most valuable being the intact tomb 
of Psusennés I., with its rich funerary equipment: in 
several chambers sarcophagi, vases of many kinds, and 
jewels were found, including the funerary outfit of Amen6é- 
phthis (Amon-em-apt, son of Psusennés I.) and the silver 
sarcophagus of a certain Sesonchésis (not the first king of 
Dynasty XXII.), (Ann. Serv. Antiq., tt. xxxix. f., 1939-40). 

‘ Actual total of items, 114 years. Eusebius is prob- 
ably correct with 41 years for 2nd king and 35 years for 
7th (Meyer). 

155 


Fr. 59 MANETHO 


Fr. 59 (a). Syncellus, p. 139. KATA EYZEBION. 


Εἰκοστὴ πρώτη δυναστεία βασιλέων Τανιτῶν 

ἕπταά. 
a’ Σμένδις, ἔτη xs’. 

' Ψουσέννης, ἔτη μα΄. 
γ΄ Νεφερχερής, ἔτη δ΄. 
δ΄ Ἀμενωφθίς, ἔτη θ'. 
ε΄ ᾽Οσοχώρ, ἔτη ς΄. 
ς΄ Ψιναχῆς, ἔτη θ΄. 

ζ΄ Ψουσέννης, ἔτη λε΄. 


Ὁμοῦ, ἔτη pd’. 


(0) Εὐβεβιῦβ, Chronica I. (Armenian Version), 
p. 103. 


Vicesima prima dynastia Tanitarum regum VII. 


Smendis, annis XX VI. 
Psusennes, annis ΧΙ]. 
Nephercheres, annis IV. 
Amenophthis, annis IX. 
Osochor, annis VI. 
Psinnaches, annis IX. 
Psusennes, annis XX XV. 


Summa annorum est CXXX. 


156 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 59 


Fr. 59 (a) (from Syncellus). AccoRDING TO 
EUsEBIUs. 


The Twenty-first Dynasty consisted of seven kings 
of Tanis. 


ANP Ο 9 κα 


. Smendis, for 26 years. 
. Psusennés, for 41 years. 


Nephercherés, for 4 years. 


. Amendphthis, for 9 years. 
. Osochér, for 6 years. 

. Psinachés, for 9 years. 

. Psusennés, for 35 years. 


Total, 130 years. 


(b) ARMENIAN VERSION OF EUSEBIUS. 


The Twenty-first Dynasty consisted οἱ seven kings 
of Tanis. 


τ 


AID ὦ bo 


Smendis, for 26 years. 

. Psusennés, for 41 years. 

. Nephercherés, for 4 years. 
. Amendphthis, for 9 years. 
. Osochér, for 6 years. 


. Psinnaches, for 9 years. 
. Psusennes, for 35 years, 


Total, 130 years. 


157 


Fr. 60, 61 MANETHO 


Fr. 60. Syncellus, p. 137. KATA A@PIKANON 


Εἰκοστὴ δευτέρα δυναστεία Βουβαστιτῶν βα- 
σιλέων θ'. 


a’ Σέσωγχις,; ἔτη κα΄. 
B’ ᾿Οσορθών," ἔτη ιε΄. 
γ΄ δ΄ ε΄ Ἄλλοι τρεῖς, ἔτη xe’ ὃ 
Τακέλωθις, ἔτη ιγ΄. 
n θ’ "άλλοι τρεῖς, ἔτη μβ΄. 


Si 


ζ 
Ὁμοῦ, ἔτη pk’. 


, 
, 


Fr. 61 (4). Syncellus, p. 139. ΚΑΤΑ ΕὙΣΕΒΙΟΝ. 
Εἰκοστὴ δευτέρα δυναστεία Βουβαστιτῶν βα- 
σιλέων τριῶν. 
α΄ Leawyxwats,’ ἔτη κα΄. 
B’ ᾿Οσορθών, ἔτη ιε΄. 
γ΄ Τακέλωθις, ἔτη ιγ΄. 
Ὁμοῦ, ἔτη pO’. 


1B: Σέσογχις A. 2B: Ὀσωρθών A, 
ὃ κθ΄ Boeckh. 4 Σεσόγχωσις Α. 


1 Dynasty XXII. ο. 950-c. 730 B.c., kings of Libyan origin 
resident at Bubastis. For identifications with the monu- 
mental and other evidence see Meyer, Geschichte *, ii. 2, 


158 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 60, 61 


Dynasty XXII. 


Fr. 60 (from Syncellus). AccorDING TO AFRICANUS, 


The Twenty-second Dynasty! consisted of nine 
kings of Bubastus. 


1. Sesénchis, for 21 years. 

2. Osorthén,? for 15 years. 

3, 4, 5. Three other kings, for 25 [29] years. 
6. Takeléthis, for 13 years. 

7, 8, 9. Three other kings, for 42 years. 


Total, 120 years.® 


Fr. 61 (a) (from Syncellus). Accorpinc To Evsestvs. 


The Twenty-second Dynasty consisted of three 
kings of Bubastus. 


1. Sesénchésis, for 21 years. 
2. Osorth6n, for 15 years. 
3. Takeléthis, for 13 years. 


Total, 49 years. 


p.58. The first king, Sesonchésis (Shishak, 0.7. 1 Kings xiv. 
25, 2 Chron. xii.) overthrew the Tanites c. 940 B.c. About 
930 B.c. he captured Jerusalem and plundered the Temple 
of Solomon: see Peet, Hgypt and the Old Testament, 1922, 
pp. 158 ff. Albright (The Archaeology of Palestine and the 
Bible 3, 1932-3, p. 199), dates the conquest of Judah by 
Shishak between 924 and 917 B.c. 

2The name Osorthén is another form of Osorché 
(Dynasty XXIII. No. 2—Africanus), the Egyptian 
Osorkon. 

3 Actual total of items, 116 years. 


159 


Fr. 61, 62 MANETHO 


(Ὁ) Eusrsius, Chronica I. (Armenian Version), 
p- 103. 


Vicesima secunda dynastia Bubastitarum regum 


III. 
Sesonchosis, annis X XI. 
Osorthon, annis XV. 
Tacelothis, annis XIII. 


Summa annorum XLIX. 


Fr. 62. Syncellus, p. 138. KATA A®PIKANON. 


Τρίτη καὶ εἰκοστὴ δυναστεία Τανιτῶν βασιλέων 
ὃ" 

a’ Πετουβάτης, ἔτη μ', ἐφ᾽ οὗ ᾿Ολυμπιὰς 
ἤχθη πρώτη. : , 

B’ ᾽᾿Οσορχώ, ἔτη 7, ὃν Ἡρακλέα Αἰγύπτιοι 
καλοῦσι. 

y Ψαμμοῦς, ἔτη (. 

ὃ' Ζήτ, ἔτη Aa’ I 

“Ὁμοῦ, ἔτη πθ΄. 

1 λδ΄ Β. 


1 Osorthés (Aucher, Karst). 

* Dynasty XXIII., resident at Tanis: the records of 
these kings (dated by Breasted 745-718 B.c.) are much 
confused. The name Petubatés (see Fr. 63 for the usual 
Grecized form Petubastis) represents the Egyptian 
Pedibaste. For King Osorcho (Osorkon III.) see the 
stele of Piankhi, king of Ethiopia, whose vassal Osorkon 
became (Breasted, Anc. Rec. iv. §§ 807, 811, 872, 878). 
Psammis has not been identified. 


160 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 61, 62 


(b) ARMENIAN VERSION OF EUSEBIUS. 


The Twenty-second Dynasty consisted of three 
kings of Bubastus. 

1. Sesénchésis, for 21 years. 

2. Osorthén,! for 15 years. 

3. Taceléthis, for 13 years. 


Total, 49 years. 


Dynasty XXIII. 
Fr. 62 ( from Syncellus). ACCORDING TO AFRICANUS. 


The Twenty-third Dynasty? consisted of four 
kings of Tanis. 


1. Petubatés, for 40 years: in his reign the 
Olympic festival * was first celebrated. 

2. Osorché, for 8 years: the Egyptians call him 
Héraclés.* 

3. Psammais, for 10 years. 

4. Zét,4 for 31 years (34). 


Total, 89 years. 


3 The date of the first Olympic festival was convention- 
ally fixed at 776-775 8.6. 

*See G. A. Wainwright, Sky-Religion, pp. 351. 

4The fact that the name Zét, occurring in Africanus 
alone, is wrapped in obscurity, has led Flinders Petrie to 
suggest (“The Mysterious Zét”’ in Ancient Egypt, 1914, 
p. 32) that the three Greek letters are a contraction for 
ζητεῖται or other word connected with ζητέω, meaning “‘ A 
question (remains),’’ or “ Query, about 31 years”: for 
31 years at this time no single ruler seemed to be pre- 
dominant, and further search was needed to settle who 
should be entered as the king of Egypt. “* Zét.’’ is found 
in wall-inseriptions at Pompeii: see Diehl, Pompeianische 
Wandinschriften, No. 682. The next inscription, No. 683, 
gives “ Zétéma’”’ in full: a riddle follows. 


ret 161 


Fr. 63 MANETHO 


Fr. 63 (a). Syncellus, p. 140. KATA EYZEBION. 


Εἰκοστὴ τρίτη δυναστεία Τανιτῶν βασιλέων 
τριῶν. 
a’ Πετουβάστις, ἔτη κε΄. 
B’ ᾽᾿Οσορθών, ἔτη θ', ὃν “Ηρακλέα Αἰγύπτιοι 
ἐκάλεσαν. 
, Ww “- ” ’ 
y Pappods, ene’. 
Ὁμοῦ, ἔτη μδ΄. 


(0) Eusrsrus, Chronica I. (Armenian Version), 
p. 103. 


Vicesima tertia dynastia Tanitarum regum III. 


Petubastis, annis X XV. 

Deinde Osorthon, quem Aegyptii Herculem nun- 
cupaverunt, annis [X.} 

Psammus,” annis X. 


Summa annorum XLIV. 


lannis IX. (Aucher). 
2? Phramus (Petermann): Psamus (Aucher, Karsv, 


162 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 63 


Fr. 63 (a) (from Syncellus). AccORDING TO 
EUSEBIUS. 


The Twenty-third Dynasty consisted of three kings 
of Tanis. 
1. Petubastis,! for 25 years. 
2. Osorthén, for 9 years: the Egyptians called 
him Héraclés. 
3. Psammis, for 10 years. 
Total, 44 years. 


(b) ARMENIAN VERSION OF EUSEBIUS. 


The Twenty-third Dynasty consisted of three kings 
of Tanis. 


1. Petubastis, for 25 years. 

2. Osorthon, whom the Egyptians named Her- 
cules: for 9 years. 

3. Psammus, for 10 years. 


Total, 44 years. 


1 For a demotic romance of the time of Petubastis in 
one of the Rainer Papyri, see Krall in Vienna Oriental 
Journal, xvii. (1903), 1: it is also found in papyri of 
Paris and Strassburg. Parallels may be drawn between 
this romance and Manetho ; cf. Spiegelberg, Der Sagenkreis 
des Konigs Petubastis (Leipzig, 1910), pp. 8 f. 


163 


Fr. 64, 65 MANETHO 


Fr. 64.  Syncellus, p. 138. KATA A@®PIKANON. 


Τετάρτη καὶ εἰκοστὴ δυναστεία. 
Βόχχωρις Σαΐτης, ἔτη ς΄, ἐφ᾽ οὗ ἀρνίον ἐφ- 
΄ Μ , 

θέγξατο . .. ἔτη DY’. 


Fr. 65 (a). Syncellus, p. 140. ΚΑΤΑ ΕὙΣΕΒΙΟΝ. 


Εἰκοστὴ τετάρτη δυναστεία. 
Βόχχωρις Σαΐτης, ἔτη pd’, ἐφ᾽ οὗ ἀρνίον 
ἐφθέγξατο. ‘Opod, ἔτη pd’. 





1 Dynasty XXIV., ο. 720-c. 715 B.o. Before Bocchoris, 
his father Tefnachte of Sais (Tnephachthus in Diodorus 
Siculus, i. 45, 2) became the most powerful among the 
chiefs of the Delta (c. 730-720 B.c.). 

For King Bocchoris see Alexandre Moret, De Bocchori 
Rege, 1903. Cf. Diodorus Siculus, i. 65, 79, 1 (law of 
contract : Bocchoris legislated for commerce), and 94, 5. 
See Breasted, Anc. Rec. iv. § 884: the only extant monu- 
ments of King Bocchoris are a few Serapeum stelae and a 
wall inscription, which record the burial of an Apis in the 
sixth year of his reign. 

* See especially the demotic story (8 B.c.) οἱ the pro- 
phetic lamb, quoted by Krall in Festgaben fiir Biidinger, 
pp. 3-11 (Innsbruck, 1898): the lamb prophesied the con- 
quest and enslavement of Egypt by Assyria, and the 
removal of her gods to Nineveh. Cf. Aelian, De Nat. 
Anim. xii. 3,and Manetho, Fr. 54, §§ 232 ff. A reference to 
Manetho’s description of the oracular lamb is preserved in 
Pseudo-Plutarch, De proverbiis Alexandrinorum (Crusius, 
1887), No. 21, τὸ ἀρνίον σοι λελάληκεν. Αἰγύπτιοι τοῦτο 
ἀνέγραψαν ὡς ἀνθρωπείᾳ φωνῇ λαλῆσαν (or, as in Suidas, ἐν 
Αἰγύπτῳ, ὥς φασιν, ἀνθρωπείᾳ φωνῇ ἐλάλησεν). εὑρέθη δὲ ἔχον 


164 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 64, 65 


Dynasty XXIV. 
Fr. 64 (from Syncellus). ACCORDING TO AFRICANUS. 


The Twenty-fourth Dynasty.! 
Bochchéris of Sais, for 6 years: in his reign a 
lamb ? spoke? . . . 990 years. 


Fr. 65 (a) (from Syncellus). AccoRDING TO 
EUSEBIUS. 


The Twenty-fourth Dynasty. 


Bochchoris of Sais, for 44 years: in his reign a 
lamb spoke. Total, 44 years.4 


βασίλειον δράκοντα ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ mrepwrov, (Suidas 
adds, ἔχοντα μῆκος πήχεων δ΄), καὶ τῶν βασιλέων τινὶ λελάληκε 
τὰ μέλλοντα. (‘The lamb has spoken to you. Egyptians 
have recorded a lamb speaking with a human voice 
for, in Egypt, they say, a lamb spoke with a human 
voice]. It was found to have upon its head a royal 
winged serpent [4 cubits in length]; and it foretold the 
future to one of the kings.’?) See Meyer, Hin newes 
Bruchstiick Manethos iiber das Lamm des Bokchoris in 
Zeitschr. fiir Agypt. Sprache, xlvi. (1910), pp. 135 f.: he 
points out the Egyptian character of the description—the 
royal uraeus, four cubits long, with ostrich feathers on both 
sides. Cf. Weill, La fin du moyen empire égyptien, pp. 
116, 622. 

3 Here some essential words have been omitted from the 
text. 

4 Contrast the “6. years’’ assigned to Bocchoris by 
Africanus (Fr. 64): it is suspicious that Eusebius should 
give 44 years for each of Dynasties XXIII., XXIV., and 
XXYV. 

165 


Fr. 65, 66, 67 MANETHO 


(0) Evusrsius, Chronica I. (Armenian Version), 
p- 104. 
Vicesima quarta dynastia. 


Bocchoris Saites, annis XLIV, sub quo agnus 
locutus est. 


Fr. 66. Syncellus, p. 138. KATA A@®PIKANON. 


Πέμπτη καὶ εἰκοστὴ δυναστεία Αἰθιόπων Ba- 
σιλέων τριῶν. 
α' Σαβάκων, ὃς αἰχμάλωτον Βόχχωριν ἑλὼν 
ἔκαυσε ζῶντα, καὶ ἐβασίλευσεν ἔτη η΄. 
B’ Σεβιχὼς υἱός, ἔτη ιδ΄, 
γ' Τάρκος, ἔτη ιη΄. 
“Ὁμοῦ, ἔτη μ΄’. 


Fr. 67 (a). Syncellus, p. 140. ΚΑΤΑ ΕὙΣΕΒΙΟΝ. 
Εἰκοστὴ πέμπτη δυναστεία Αἰθιόπων βασιλέων 
τριῶν. 
α' Σαβάκων, ὃς αἰχμάλωτον Βόχχωριν ἑλὼν 
ἔκαυσε ζῶντα, καὶ ἐβασίλευσεν ἔτη ιβ΄. 
B’ Σεβιχὼς υἱός, ern up’. 
γ΄ Tapakdés, ἔτη κ΄. 


“Ὁμοῦ, ἔτη μδ΄. 





1Dynasty XXV. (Ethiopian), c. 715-663 B.c.: the 
three kings are Shabaka, Shabataka, and Taharka. 

2 Cf. Herodotus, ii. 137 (Sabacés). 

Shabaka had a great reputation for mildness and kind 
rule: Petrie (Religious Life, 1924, pp. 193 f.) explains that 


166 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) FR. 65, 66, 67 


(b) ARMENIAN VERSION OF EUSEBIUS. 


The Twenty-fourth Dynasty. 
Bocchoris of Sais, for 44 years: in his reign a lamb 
spoke. 


Dynasty XXV. 
Fr. 66 (from Syncellus). AccoRDING To AFRICANUS. 


The Twenty-fifth Dynasty! consisted of three 
Ethiopian kings. 
1. Sabacén,? who, taking Bochchéris captive, 
burned him alive, and reigned for 8 years. 
2. Sebichés, his son, for 14 years. 
3. Tarcus, for 18 years. 


Total, 40 years. 


Fr. 67 (a) (from Syncellus), AccoRDING TO 
EvUsEBIUS. 


The Twenty-fifth Dynasty consisted of three 
Ethiopian kings. 
1. Sabacén, who, taking Bochchéris captive, 
burned him alive, and reigned for 12 years. 
2. Sebichés. his son, for 12 years. 
3. Taracus, for 20 years. 


Total, 44 years. 


Bochchoris was treated like a mock king in the ancient 
festival, the burning ceremonially destroying his kingly 
character. See Wainwright, Sky-Religion, pp. 38 ff. 

*Taharka: in O.T. 2 Kings xix. 9, Tirhakah, King of 
Ethiopia. See Peet, Egypt and the Old Testament, 1922, 
pp. 176 ff. 


167 


Fr. 67, 68 MANETHO 


(0) Eusresius, Chronica I. (Armenian Version), 
Ρ. 104. 


Vicesima quinta dynastia Aethiopum regum III. 

Sabacon, qui captum Bocchorim vivum combussit, 
regnavitque annis XII. 

Sebichos eius filius, annis XII. 

Saracus,! annis XX. 


Summa annorum XLIV. 


Fr. 68. Syncellus, p. 141. KATA A@PIKANON. 


ἽὝἝκτη καὶ εἰκοστὴ δυναστεία Σαϊτῶν βασιλέων 
ἐννέα. 
a’ Στεφινάτης, ἔτη ζ΄. 
B’ Νεχεψώς, ἔτη ς΄. 
/ ” / 
γ΄ Νεχαώ, ἔτη η΄. 
δ΄ Ψαμμήτιχος, ἔτη νδ΄. 
ε΄ Νεχαὼ δεύτερος, ἔτη ς΄. οὗτος εἷλε τὴν 
« / ‘ 3 / ‘ / 
]ερουσαλήμ, καὶ “Iwdyal τὸν βασιλέα 
αἰχμάλωτον εἰς Αἴγυπτον ἀπήγαγε. 
, / ν ” a 
ς΄ Ψάμμουθις ἕτερος, ἔτη ἕξ. 


1Taracus, Aucher, m.: Tarakos, Karst. 





1 Dynasty XXVI., 663-525 B.c. 

Sais (see p. 91 n. 4), now grown in power, with foreign 
aid asserts independence, and rules over Egypt. Hero- 
dotus, ii. 151 ff., supports the version of Africanus 
but differs in (5) Necés 16 years (Ch. 159), and (7) Apries 
25 years (Ch. 161) (22 years in Diod. Sic. i. 68). Eusebius 
(Fr. 69) has preserved the Ethiopian Ammeris (2.e. 
Tanutamin) at the beginning of Dynasty XXVI.: so in 
the Book of Sothis (App. IV.), No. 78, Amaés, 38 years. 


168 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) FR. 67, 68 


(b) ARMENIAN VERSION OF EUSEBIUS. 


The Twenty-fifth Dynasty consisted of three 
Ethiopian kings. 
1. Sabacon, who, taking Bocchoris captive, 
burned him alive, and reigned for 12 years. 
2. Sebichos, his son, for 12 years. 
3. Saracus (Taracus), for 20 years. 


Total, 44 years. 


Dynasty XXVI. 
Fr. 68 (from Syncellus). ACCORDING TO AFRICANUS. 


The Twenty-sixth Dynasty! consisted οἱ nine 
kings of Sais. 


. Stephinatés, for 7 years. 

. Nechepsés, for 6 years. 

. Nechaé, for 8 years. 

. Psammétichus,” for 54 years. 

Nechaé 5 the Second, for 6 years: he took 
Jerusalem, and led King Iéachaz captive 
into Egypt. 

6. Psammuthis the Second, for 6 years. 


OP whe 


2 Psammétichus I. (Psametik) = Psammétk, “ man, or 
vendor, of mixed wine,” ef. Herodotus, ii. 151 (Griffith in 
Catalogue of Demotic Papyri in the Rylands Library, iii. 
pp. 44, 201). See Diod. Sic. i. 66, 67. 

’Nechaé is an old name, an Egyptian plural form, 
“belonging to the kas”’ or bulls (Apis and Mnevis), 
O.T. 2 Chron. xxxvi. 2-4. Battle of Megiddo, 609 B.c.: 
defeat and death of King Josiah by Necho (2 Kings xxiii. 
29, xxiv. 1, xxv. 26). Johoahaz, son of Josiah, was led 
captive into Egypt. For these events, see Peet, Egypt and 
the Old Testament, 1922, p. 181 ff. 


169 


Fr. 68, 69 MANETHO 


ζ Οὔαφρις, ἔτη ιθ΄, & προσέφυγον ἁλούσης 
ὑπὸ Ἀσσυρίων ᾿]ερουσαλὴμ οἱ τῶν Ιουδαίων 
ὑπόλοιποι. 

η΄ Ἄμωσις, ἔτη pd’. 

θ΄ Ψαμμεχερίτης, μῆνας ς΄. 

Ὁμοῦ, ἔτη pv’ καὶ μῆνας ς΄. 


Fr. 69 (a). Syncellus, p. 143. KATA EYZEBION. 


"Extn καὶ εἰκοστὴ δυναστεία Σαϊτῶν βασιλέων θ'. 

a’ Apupéprs Αἰθίοψ, ἔτη ιβ΄. 

B’ Στεφινάθις, ἔτη ζ΄. 

γ΄ Νεχεψῴώς, ἔτη ς΄. 

δ΄ Νεχαώ, ἔτη η΄. 

Ψαμμήτιχος, ἔτη pe’ 

ς΄ Νεχαὼ δεύτερος, ἔτη ς΄. οὗτος εἷλε τὴν 
“Ιερουσαλήμ, καὶ ᾿Ιωάχαζ τὸν βασιλέα 
αἰχμάλωτον εἰς Αἴγυπτον ἀπήγαγε. 

C’ Ψάμμουθις ἕτερος, ὁ καὶ Ψαμμήτιχος, ἔτη 
ὅδε 


1 48’ Miller. 





1 Uaphris or Apries, in Egyptian Wahibpré‘, the Hophra 
of the 0.7. Capture of Jerusalem by Nebuchadnezzar, 
king of Babylon, 587 B.c. See Peet, op. cit. pp. 1865 ff. 


170 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) FR. 68, 69 


1. Uaphris,! for 19 years: the remnant of the 
Jews fled to him, when Jerusalem was 
captured by the Assyrians. 

8. Amésis,” for 44 years. 

9. Psammecherités,* for 6 months. 


Total, 150 years 6 months. 


Fr. 69 (a) (from Syncellus). AccoRDING TO 
EUSEBIUS. 


The Twenty-sixth Dynasty consisted of nine kings 
of Sais. 


1. Ammeris the Ethiopian, for 12 years. 

2. Stephinathis, for 7 years. 

3. Nechepsos, for 6 years. 

4. Necha6, for 8 years. 

5. Psammétichus, for 45 [44] years. 

6. Nechaé the Second, for 6 years: he took 
Jerusalem, and led King Iéachaz captive 
into Egypt. 

7. Psammuthis the Second, also called Psam- 
métichus, for 17 years. 


2 Amésis should be Amasis (Ia‘hmase), the general of 
Uaphris or Apries: Amasis was first made co-regent with 
Apries (569 B.c.), then two years later, after a battle, he 
became sole monarch. 

On the character of Amasis, “‘ the darling of the people 
and of popular legend,”’ see the demotic papyrus translated 
by Spiegelberg, The Credibility of Herodotus’ Account of 
Egypt (trans. Blackman), pp. 29 f. 

8 Psammétichus III., defeated by Cambysés the Persian, 
525 B.c. The three Psametiks are differentiated as 
Psammétichus, Psammuthis, and Psammecherités (cf. 
ir, 20; n. 1). 


171 


Fr. 69 MANETHO 


η΄ Ovadpts, ἔτη κε΄, & προσέφυγον ἁλούσης 
« \ > / ~ «ς \ « ~ 
ὑπὸ Ἀσσυρίων τῆς ‘lIepovoadAnp ot τῶν 
᾿Ιουδαίων ὑπόλοιποι. 


θ΄ Ἄμωσις, ἔτη pp’. 
“Ὁμοῦ, ἔτη ρέγ΄. 


(0) Eusrsrus, Chronica I. (Armenian Version), 
p- 104 


Vicesima sexta dynastia Saitarum regum IX. 


Ameres Aethiops, annis XVIII. 

Stephinathes, annis VII. 

Nechepsos, annis VI. 

Nechao, annis VIII. 

Psametichus, annis XLIV. 

Nechao alter, annis VI. Ab hoc Hierosolyma 
capta sunt, Iochasusque rex in Aegyptum 
captivus abductus. 

Psamuthes alter, qui et Psammetichus, annis 
XVII. 

Uaphres, annis X XV, ad quem reliquiae Iudae- 
orum, Hierosolymis in Assyriorum potestatem 
redactis, confugerunt. 


Amosis, annis XLII. 


Summa annorum CLXVII. 


172 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 69 


8. Uaphris, for 25 years: the remnant of the 
Jews fled to him, when Jerusalem was 
captured by the Assyrians. 

9. Amésis, for 42 years. 


Total, 163 years.! 


(b) ARMENIAN VERSION OF EUSEBIUS. 


The Twenty-sixth Dynasty consisted of nine kings 
of Sais. 


. Ameres the Ethiopian, for 18 years, 

. Stephinathes, for 7 years. 

. Nechepsos, for 6 years. 

. Nechao, for 8 years. 

. Psametichus, for 44 years. 

. Nechao the Second, for 6 years: he took 
Jerusalem, and led King loachaz captive 
into Egypt. 

7. Psamuthes the Second, also called Psam- 

metichus, for 17 years. 

8. Uaphres, for 25 years: the remnant of the 
Jews took refuge with him, when Jerusalem 
was subjugated by the Assyrians. 

9. Amosis, for 42 years. 


Total, 167 years. 


A Me καὶ 


1 Tf 44 years are assigned to (5) Psammétichus, the actual 
total is 167, as in the Armenian Version. 


173 


Fr. 70 MANETHO 


Fr. 70. Syncellus, p. 141. KATA A®PIKANON. 


“Εβδόμη καὶ εἰκοστὴ δυναστεία Περσῶν βασιλέων 
, 
ἢ . 


‘ 


Q 


Καμβύσης ἔτει ε΄ τῆς ἑαυτοῦ βασιλείας 
Περσῶν ἐβασίλευσεν Αἰγύπτου ἔτη ς΄. 

B’ Δαρεῖος Ὑστάσπου, ἔτη ds’. 

γ΄ Ξέρξης 6 μέγας, ἔτη κα΄. 

δ΄ Ἀρτάβανος, μῆνας ζ΄. 

᾿Αρταξέρξης, ἔτη μα΄. 

Ξέρξης, μῆνας δύο. 

ζ' Σογδιανός, μῆνας ζ΄. 

η΄ Δαρεῖος Ξέρξου, ἔτη 6’. 

“Ὁμοῦ, ἔτη pkd’, μῆνες δ΄. 


1 Persian Domination, 525-332 B.c. 

Dynasty XXVII., 525-404 B.c. After conquering 
Egypt, Cambysés reigned three years, 525/4-523/2 B.c. 
See Cambridge Ancient History, vi. pp. 137 ff. 

An interesting papyrus fragment (P. Baden 4 No. 59: 
v. | A.D.—see the facsimile in Plate III) contains this 
Dynasty in a form which differs in some respects from 
the versions given by Africanus and Eusebius. Like 
Eusebius the papyrus inserts the Magi, and calls Artaxerxés 
“the Long-handed’’ and his successor Xerxés “ the 
Second ’’: asin Africanus, Darius is “ son of Hysta[spés] ”’ 
and Xerxés is “the Great’’. To Cambysés the papyrus 


174 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 70 


Dynasty XXVII. 


Fr. 70 (from Syncellus). ACCORDING TO AFRICANUS. 


The Twenty-seventh Dynasty! consisted of eight 
Persian kings. 


1. Cambysés in the fifth year of his kingship over 
the Persians became king of Egypt, and 
ruled for 6 years. 

Darius, son of Hystaspés, for 36 years, 

. Xerxés the Great, for 21 years, 

Artabanus,? for 7 months. 

. Artaxerxés,® for 4] years. 

. Xerxés,4 for 2 months. 

. Sogdianus, for 7 months. 

. Darius, son of Xerxés, for 19 years. 


Total, 124 years 4 months. 


gives 6} years: to the Magi, 7} months. The conquest 
of Egypt is assigned to the fourth year of Cambysés’ 
reign, and it was in that year that the campaign began. 
Artaxerxés is described as “‘ the son”’ (i.e. of Xerxés); 
while Darius II. is correctly named “‘ the Illegitimate’’. 
See Bilabel’s note on the papyrus (l.c.). 

? Artabanus, vizier, and murderer of XerxésI., 465 B.o. 

8 Artaxerxés L., ts Long-hand”’ (‘‘ whether from a 
physical peculiarity or political capacity is uncertain,” 
C.A.H. vi. p. 2), 465-424 B.c. 

4 Xerxés II. was murdered by his half-brother Sogdianus, 
who was in turn defeated and put to death in 423 B.o. 
by another half-brother Ochus (Darius II., nicknamed 
Nothos, “the Illegitimate,’), not ‘“‘son of Xerxés’’. 
Darius 11. died in 404 B.o. 


175 


Fr. 71 MANETHO 


Fr. 71 (a). Syncellus, p. 143. KATA EYZEBION. 
Εἰκοστὴ ἑβδόμη δυναστεία Π]ερσῶν βασιλέων η΄. 


α' Καμβύσης ἔτει πέμπτῳ τῆς αὐτοῦ βα- 
σιλείας ἐβασίλευσεν Αἰγύπτου ἔτη γ΄. 

Μάγοι, μῆνας ζ΄. 

Δαρεῖος͵ ἔτη As’. 

Ξέρξης ὁ Δαρείου, ἔτη xa’. 

Ἀρταξέρξης ὁ μακρόχειρ, ἔτη μ΄. 

Ξέρξης ὁ δεύτερος, μῆνας β΄. 

Σογδιανός, μῆνας ζ΄. 

Δαρεῖος ὁ Ξέρξου, ἔτη ιθ΄. 


8S) 


ZS Το NO 


Ομοῦ, ἔτη px’ καὶ μῆνες δ΄. 


(0) Εὐβεβιῦβ, Chronica I. (Armenian Version), 
Ρ. 105. 


Vicesima septima dynastia Persarum regum VIII. 


Cambyses, qui regni sui quinto' anno Aegyptiorum 
potitus est, annis III. 

Magi, mensibus septem. 

Darius, annis XX XVI. 

Xerxes Darii, annis X XI. 

Artaxerxes, annis XL. 

Xerxes alter, mensibus II. 

Sogdianus, mensibus VII. 

Darius Xerxis, annis XIX. 


Summa annorum CXX, mensiumque IV. 


1Aucher: XV. MSS. 
176 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 71 


Fr. 71 (a) (from Syncellus). AccORDING TO 
EUSEBIUS. 


The Twenty-seventh Dynasty consisted of eight 
Persian kings. 
1. Cambysés in the fifth year of his kingship 
became king of Egypt, and ruled for 3 years. 
. Magi, for 7 months. 
. Darius, for 36 years. 
. Xerxés, son of Darius, for 21 years. 
Artaxerxés of the long hand, for 40 years. 
. Xerxés the Second, for 2 months. 
. Sogdianus, for 7 months. 
. Darius, son of Xerxés, for 19 years. 


Total, 120 years 4 months. 


OADM wh 


(b) ARMENIAN VERSION OF EUSEBIUS. 


The Twenty-seventh Dynasty consisted of eight 
Persian kings. 

1. Cambyses in the fifth! year of his kingship 
became king of Egypt, and ruled for 3 
years. 

. Magi, for 7 months. 

. Darius, for 36 years. 

. Xerxes, son of Darius, for 21 years. 
. Artaxerxés, for 40 years. 

. Xerxés the Second, for 2 months. 

. Sogdianus, for 7 months. 

. Darius, son of Xerxes, for 19 years. 


Total, 120 years 4 months. 


CAD WS Ww lO 


1The Armenian text has “‘ 15th’, 
177 


Fr. 72, 73 MANETHO 


Fr. 72 (a). Syncellus, p. 142. KATA A®PIKANON. 
Εἰκοστὴ ὀγδόη δυναστεία. ᾿Ἀμύρτεος Σαΐτης, 
ἔτη «ς΄. 
(b) Syncellus, p. 144. KATA ΕὙΣΕΒΙΟΝ. 
Εἰκοστὴ ὀγδόη δυναστεία. Apuptaios Σαΐτης, 
ἔτη τ: 
(c) Eusesius, Chronica I. (Armenian Version), 
p. 105. 


Vicesima octava dynastia. Amyrtes Saites, 
annis! YI. 


Fr. 73 (a). Syncellus, p. 142. ΚΑΤΑ A®PIKANON. 

᾿Ενάτη καὶ εἰκοστὴ Suvacteia. Μενδήσιοι 
βασιλεῖς δ΄. 

a’ Νεφερίτης, ἔτη ς΄. 

B’ Ἄχωρις, ἔτη ιγ΄. 

γ΄ Ψάμμουθις, ἔτος a’, 

δ' Νεφερίτης, μῆνας 8. 

“Ὁμοῦ, ἔτη κ΄, μῆνες δ΄. 

1 Aucher, m.: mensibus MSS., according to Miiller. 





1Dynasty XXVIII.-XXX., Egyptian kings: 404-341 
B.c.—a brief period of independence. 

Dynasty XXVIII., Amyrtaeus of Sais, 404-399 8.σ. : 
no Egyptian king of this name is known on the monuments. 
See Werner Schur in Klio, xx. 1926, pp. 273 ff. 


178 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 72, 73 


Dynasty XXVIII. 


Fr. 72 (a) (from Syncellus). AccorDING TO 
AFRICANUS. 


The Twenty-eighth Dynasty.! Amyrteos of Sais, 
for 6 years. 


(b) AccorpInc To EvsEBivs. 


The Twenty-eighth Dynasty. Amyrtaeus of Sais, 
for 6 years. 


(c) ARMENIAN VERSION OF EUSEBIUS. 


The Twenty-eighth Dynasty. Amyrtes of Sais, 
for 6 years.? 


Dynasty XXIX. 


Fr. 73 (a) (from Syncellus). ACCORDING TO 
AFRICANUS. 


The Twenty-ninth Dynasty:* tour kings of 
Mendés. 

1. Nepherités, for 6 years. 

2. Achéris, for 13 years. 

3. Psammuthis, for 1 year. 

4. Nepherités [II.], for 4 months. 


Total, 20 years 4 months. 


26 years (Aucher, Karst): 6 months (Miller). The 
Armenian words for ‘‘ month ’”’ and “ year’”’ are so similar 
that corruption is likely (Margoliouth). 

’ Dynasty XXIX., resident at Mendés in E. Delta 
(Baedeker ὅ, p. 183), 398-381 B.c. On the sequence of 
these rulers see H. R. Hall in C.A.H. vi. p. 145 and n. 


179 


Fr. 73 MANETHO 


(b) Syncellus. p. 144. KATA EYSEBION. 


Εἰκοστὴ ἐνάτη δυναστεία. Μενδήσιοι Ba- 
σιλεῖς δ΄. 

a’ Νεφερίτης, ἔτη ς΄. 

β’ Ἄχωρις, ἔτη ιγ΄. 

γ΄ Ψάμμουθις, ἔτος a’. 

δ΄ Νεφερίτης, μῆνας 0’. 


’ 


ε΄ Μοῦθις, ἔτος a’. 


μοῦ, ἔτη κα’ καὶ μῆνες δ΄. 


(6) Eusresrus, Chronica I. (Armenian Version), 
p- 106. 


Vicesima nona dynastia Mendesiorum regum 
quattuor. 


Nepherites, annis VI. 
Achoris, annis XIII. 
Psamuthes, anno I. 
Muthes, anno I. 
Nepherites mensibus IV. 


Summa annorum XXI, mensiumque IV. 


180 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 73 


(b) Accorpine To EvusEBIUs. 


The Twenty-ninth Dynasty: four kings! of 
Mendés. 


1. Nepherités, for 6 years. 

2. Achéris, for 13 years. 

3. Psammuthis, for 1 year. 

4. Nepherités [II.], for 4 months. 
5. Muthis, for 1 year. 


Total, 21 years 4 months. 


(c) ARMENIAN VERSION OF EUSEBIUS. 


The Twenty-ninth Dynasty consisted of four kings 
of Mendes. 


1. Nepherites, for 6 years. 

2. Achoris, for 13 years. 

3. Psamuthes, for 1 year. 

4, Muthes, for 1 year. 

5. Nepherites [II.], for 4 months. 


Total, 21 years and 4 months. 


1 Muthis or Muthés was a usurper, hence the number of 
kings is given as four. He is unknown to the Monuments. 
Aucher suggests that the name Muthis may be merely a 
repetition, curtailed, of the name Psammuthis. 


181 


Fr. 74 MANETHO 


Fr. 74 (a). Syncellus, p. 144. KATA A@PIKANON. 


Τριακοστὴ δυναστεία Σεβεννυτῶν βασιλέων 
τριῶν. 

α΄ Νεκτανέβης, ἔτη ιη΄. 

B’ Teds, ἔτη β΄. 

γ΄ Νεκτανεβός, ἔτη ιη΄. 


μοῦ, ἔτη λη΄. 


(b) Syncellus, p. 115 ΚΑΤΑ ΕὙΣΕΒΙ͂ΟΝ. 


Τριακοστὴ δυναστεία Σ᾽ εβεννυτῶν βασιλέων 
τριῶν. 

a’ Νεκτανέβης, ἔτη (΄. 

B’ Teas, ἔτη β΄. 

y’ Νεκτανεβός, ἔτη η΄. 


“Ὁμοῦ, ἔτη x’. 





1 Dynasty XXX., resident at Sebennytus (see Intro. 
p- xiii), 380-343 B.c.: Nectanebés I. (Nekhtenébef), 380-363, 
Teds or Tachés (Zedhér), 362-361, Nectanebus II. (Nekht- 
horehbe), 360-343. See E. Meyer, Zur Geschichte der 30. 
Dynastie in Zeitschrift fiir Agyptische Sprache, Bd. 67, 
pp. 68-70. 

It is certain that Manetho knew only 30 dynasties and 
ended with the conquest of Egypt by Ochus: see Unger, 


182 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 74 


Dynasty XXX. 


Fr. 74 (a) (from Syncellus). ACCORDING TO 
AFRICANUS. 


The Thirtieth Dynasty ' consisted of three kings 
of Sebennytus. 


1. Nectanebés, for 18 years. 
2. Teds, for 2 years. 
3. Nectanebus,? for 18 years. 


Total, 38 years. 


(b) AccorpDING To EvsEBtus. 


The Thirtieth Dynasty consisted of three kings of 
Sebennytus. 


1. Nectanebés, for 10 years, 
2. Teds, for 2 years. 
3. Nectanebus, for 8 years. 


Total, 20 years. 


Chronol. des Manetho, pp. 334 f. Under Olymp. 107 (i.e. 
352-348 3B.c.) Jerome (Chronicle, p. 203 Fotheringham, 
p- 121 Helm) notes: Ochus Aegyptum tenuit, Nectanebo in 
Aethiopiam pulso, in quo Aegyptiorum regnum destructum 
est. Huc usque Manethos. (‘‘ Ochus possessed Egypt, 
when he had driven Nectanebé into Ethiopia: thereby 
the kingship of the Egyptians was destroyed. So far 
Manetho [or, Here ends the History of Manetho]’’). 

For the later renown of this king as magician in 
popular legend, see the Dream of Nectonabés, in Wilcken, 
Urkunden der Ptolemaerzeit, i. pp. 369 ff. 


183 


Fr. 74, 7 MANETHO 


(c) Eusrsrus, Chronica I. (Armenian Version), 
p- 106. 


Tricesima dynastia Sebennytarum regum III. 
Nectanebis, annis X. 

Teos, annis II. 

Nectanebus, annis VIII. 


Summa annorum XX. 


Fr. 75 (a). Syncellus, p. 145. KATA A®PIKANON. 


Πρώτη Kat τριακοστὴ δυναστεία “Περσῶν Ba- 
σιλέων τριῶν. 
a’ Ὦυγχος" εἰκοστῷ ἔτει τῆς ἑαυτοῦ βασιλείας 
Περσῶν ἐβασίλευσεν Αἰγύπτου ἔτη β΄ .3 
β' ᾿Δρσῆς, ἔτη γ'. 
γ΄ Δαρεῖος, ἔτη δ΄. 


Ὃ "3 
μοῦ, ἔτη τρίτου τόμου ,av’. 


Μέχρι τῶνδε Μανεθῶ. 


1 Syncellus (p. 486) thus describes the scope of Manetho’s 
History, wrongly putting λα΄ for λ΄ : ἕως “Qyov καὶ Νεκτανεβὼ 
ὁ Μανεθῶ τὰς λα΄ δυναστείας eae περιέγραψε. 

2 This f’ (instead of 957) is probably due to confusion 
with the β΄ at the beginning of the next line (Aucher). 

3 wv’ Boeckh, Unger. 





1 Dynasty XXXI. is not due to Manetho, but was added 
later to preserve the continuity,—perhaps with the use of 
material furnished by Manetho himself. No total is given 
by Africanus and Eusebius,—a further proof that the whole 
Dynasty is additional. In another passage (p. 486) 
Syncellus states: ‘‘ Manetho wrote an account of the 31 


184 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) Fr. 74, 75 


(c) ARMENIAN VERSION OF EUSEBIUS. 


The Thirtieth Dynasty consisted of 3 kings of 
Sebennytus. 


1. Nectanebis, for 10 years. 
2. Teos, for 2 years. 
3. Nectanebus, for 8 years. 


Total, 20 years. 


Dynasty XXXI. 


Fr. 75 (a) (from Syncellus). AccorpINce TO 
AFRICANUS. 


The Thirty-first Dynasty! consisted of three 
Persian kings. 


1. Ochus in the twentieth year 2 of his kingship 
over the Persians became king of Egypt, 
and ruled for 2 years. 

2. Arsés, for 3 years. 

3. Darius, for 4 years. 


Total of years in Book III., 1050 years? [850]. 
Here ends the History of Manetho. 


(an error for 30) Dynasties of Egypt down to the time of 
Ochus and Nectanebé ” : although mistaken about the 
number of the Dynasties, Syncellus is jn the main correct. 

? The 20th year of the kingship of Ochus was 343 B.c. : 
the phrase is parallel to that used in Fr. 70, 1, and appears 
therefore to be Manetho’s expression. 

3 The totals given by Africanus in Book ITI. are 135, 130, 
120, 89, 6, 40, 150+, 124+, 6, 20+, 38, 1.6. 858+ years. 
To reduce to 850, assign 116 years to Dynasty SRL, 
(as the items add), and 120 to Dynasty XXVII. (Meyer). 


185 


Fr. 75 MANETHO 


(b) Syncellus, p. 146. KATA EYZEBION. 


Τριακοστὴ πρώτη δυναστεία Ilepadyv βασιλέων 
τριῶν. 

α΄ Ὦχος εἰκοστῷ ἔτει τῆς αὑτοῦ Περσῶν βα- 
σιλείας κρατεῖ τῆς Αἰγύπτου ἔτη ς΄. 

B’ Me? ὃν Δ ρσῆς "ὥχου, ἔτη δ΄. 

γ΄ Μεθ’ ὃν Δαρεῖος, ἔτη ἕξ: ὃν ᾿Αλέξανδρος 6 
Μακεδὼν καθεῖλε. 

Ταῦτα τοῦ τρίτου «τόμου» Mavebd. 

Μέχρι τῶνδε Μανεθῶ. 


(c) Εὐβεβιῦβ, Chronica I. (Armenian Version), 
Pp. 101. 


Tricesima prima dynastia Persarum. 


Ochus vicesimo iam anno Persis imperitans 
Aegyptum occupavit tenuitque annis VI. 

Postea Arses Ochi, annis IV. 

Tum Darius, annis VI, quem Macedo Alexander 
interfecit. Atque haec e Manethonis tertio! 
libro 


' Aucher, m.: secundo MSS., according to Miiller. 





1 Third Book (Aucher, Karst): Second Book (Miiller). 
The Armenian words for “‘second’’ and ‘“ third”’ have 
similar forms; hence the corruption (Margoliouth). 


186 


AEGYPTIACA (EPITOME) _ FR. 75 


(b) AccorpInc To EvsEBIvs. 


The Thirty-first Dynasty consisted of three Persian 

kings. 

1. Ochus in the twentieth year of his kingship 
over the Persians conquered Egypt, and 
ruled for 6 years. 

2. His successor was Arsés, son of Ochus, who 
reigned for 4 years. 

3. Next, Darius reigned for 6 years: he was put 
to death by Alexander of Macedon. 


These are the contents of the Third Book of 
Manetho. 
Here ends the History of Manetho. 


(c) ARMENIAN VERSION OF EUSEBIUS. 


The Thirty-first Dynasty consisted of Persian 

kings. 

1. Ochus in the twentieth year of his kingship 
over the Persians seized Egypt and held it 
for 6 years. 

2. His successor was Arsés, son of Ochus, who 
reigned for 4 years. 

3. Next, Darius reigned for 6 years: he was put 
to death by Alexander of Macedon. 


These are the contents of the Third Book! of 
Manetho. 


187 


FRO, 17,118 MANETHO 


H IEPA BIBAOS | 


Fr 76. Euvsrsrus, Praeparatio Evangelica, 
II Prooem., p. 44 C (Gifford). 


Πᾶσαν μὲν οὖν τὴν Αἰγυπτιακὴν ἱστορίαν εἰς 
πλάτος τῇ “Ἑλλήνων μετείληφε φωνῇ ἰδίως τε τὰ 
περὶ τῆς κατ᾽ αὐτοὺς θεολογίας Μανεθὼς ὁ 
Αἰγύπτιος, ἔν τε ἣ ἔγραψεν ἱΙερᾷ βίβλῳ καὶ 


ἐν ἑτέροις αὐτοῦ συγγράμμασι. 


Cf. Theodoretus, Curatio, II, p. 61 (Rader): 


Μανεθὼς δὲ τὰ περὶ ἤΪσιδος καὶ ᾿Οσίριδος καὶ 
Ἄπιδος καὶ Σαράπιδος καὶ τῶν ἄλλων θεῶν τῶν 
Αἰγυπτίων ἐμυθολόγησε. 


Fr. 77. Puiutarcu, De Is. et Osir., 9. 


Ἔτι δὲ τῶν πολλῶν νομιζόντων ἴδιον παρ᾽ 
Αἰγυπτίοις ὄνομα τοῦ Διὸς εἶναι τὸν Ἀμοῦν (ὃ 
παράγοντες ἡμεῖς Ἄμμωνα λέγομεν), Μανεθὼς 
μὲν ὁ Σεβεννύτης τὸ κεκρυμμένον οἴεται καὶ τὴν 
κρύψιν ὑπὸ ταύτης δηλοῦσθαι τῆς φωνῆς... 


Fr. 78. Piurarcu, De Is. οἱ Osir., 49. 


BéBwva δὲ τινὲς μὲν ἕνα τῶν τοῦ Τυφῶνος 
« ,ὕ / / A > > \ 
ἑταίρων γεγονέναι λέγουσιν, Μανεθὼς δ᾽ αὐτὸν 


1Manetho’s interpretation is from imn, ‘“ hidden, 
secret’: see Sethe, Abhandl. Berl. Akad., 1929, p. 78, 
§ 153. Herodotus, ii. 42, 3, tells a story which is probably 
related to this meaning of Amin. 


188 


THE SACRED BOOK FR. 76, 77, 78 


THE SACRED BOOK. 


Fr. 76 (from EvsEBIUs). 


Now the whole history of Egypt and especially 
the details of Egyptian religion are expounded at 
length in Greek by Manetho the Egyptian, both in 
his Sacred Book and in other writings of his. 


(From THEODORETUS.) 


Manetho rehearsed the stories of Isis, Osiris, Apis, 
Serapis, and the other gods of Egypt. 


Fr. 77 (from Piutarcn, Is. and Osir., ch. 9). 


Further, the general belief is that the name Amin,! 
which we transform into Ammon, is an Egyptian 
proper noun, the title of Zeus?; but Manetho of 
Sebennytus is of opinion that this name has a mean- 
ing—* that which is concealed ” and ** concealment.” 


Fr. 78 (from Piutarcn, Is. and Osir., ch. 49). 


Some say that Bebén ? was one of the comrades of 


Typhon; but Manetho states that Typhén himself 


* The title Zeus Ammén was already known to Pindar in 
the first half of the fifth century B.c. (Pythians, iv. 16, 
Fr. 36; see Pausanias, ix. 16, 1). 

* The name “‘ Bebén,”’ given to Typhén, does not mean 
“ prevention,’’ but is the Egyptian b)by, an epithet of Séth. 
In Greek, besides the form BéBwv, BaBus was used (Hel- 
lanicus in Athenaeus, xv. 25, p. 680a). Typh6n, an un- 
popular deity, came into favour in Dynasty XIX., two 
kings of which were Sethés I. and II. 


189 


Fr. 78, 79 MANETHO 


tov Τυφῶνα καὶ Βέβωνα καλεῖσθαι: σημαίνει δὲ 
τοὔνομα κάθεξιν ἢ κώλυσιν, ὡς τοῖς πράγμασιν 
ὁδῷ βαδίζουσι καὶ πρὸς ὃ χρὴ φερομένοις ἐν- 
ισταμένης τῆς τοῦ Τυφῶνος δυνάμεως. 


Fr. 19. Pxiutarcnu, De Is. οἱ Osir., 62. 


“1 By \ ΄ \ \ > 4 ‘ ‘ 
ouxe δὲ τούτοις Kal τὰ Αἰγύπτια. τὴν μὲν 
‘ ay f / ~ ~ > ~ > / ~ 
yap “low πολλάκις τῷ τῆς ᾿Αθηνᾶς ὀνόματι καλοῦσι 
φράζοντι τοιοῦτον λόγον “ἦλθον ἀπ᾽ ἐμαυτῆς, 
- > A > / ~ / ¢ \ 
ὅπερ ἐστὶν αὐτοκινήτου φορᾶς SyAwtiKdv: ὁ δὲ 
Τυφών, ὥσπερ εἴρηται, Σὴθ καὶ Βέβων καὶ Σμὺ 
ὀνομάζεται, βίαιόν τινα καὶ κωλυτικὴν ἐπίσχεσιν 
«ἡ Tw >! ὑπεναντίωσιν ἢ ἀναστροφὴν ἐμφαίνειν 
βουλομένων τῶν ὀνομάτων. ἔτι τὴν σιδηρῖτιν 

/ > / ν ~ \ A / 
λίθον, ὀστέον “Qpov, Τυφῶνος δὲ τὸν σίδηρον, 
ε ε a / ~ σ A ε 
ὡς ἱστορεῖ Μανεθώς, καλοῦσι. ὥσπερ γὰρ ὃ 
σίδηρος πολλάκις μὲν ἑλκομένῳ καὶ ἑπομένῳ πρὸς 
A δ᾽ Ld ti > / > > ‘ 

τὴν λίθον ὅμοιός ἐστι, πολλάκις δ᾽ ἀποστρέφεται 
καὶ ἀποκρούεται πρὸς τοὐναντίον, οὕτως ἡ σωτήριος 


1 (ἢ τιν Pohlenz. 





1 Explanation is difficult. The name of the goddess 
Neith with whom Athena is often identified has been 
interpreted ‘“‘ that which is, »r exists’’ (Mallet, Le Culte 
de Neit a Sais, p. 189). As a genuine etymology of the 
name, this is impossible; but it may be that in the late 
period a connexion was imagined between Nt, “ Neith,”’ 
and nt(t), ‘‘ that which is’’ (B.G.). It is suggestive that 
the Coptic word meaning “‘come’”’ is na (A. Rusch, 
Pauly-Wissowa-Kroll, R.-H#. xvi. 2 (1935), col. 2190). 


190 


THE SACRED BOOK _ FR. 78,79 


was also called Bebén. The name means “ check- 
ing’ or “prevention,” and implies that, when 
actions are proceeding in due course and tending to 
their required end, the power of Typhén obstructs 
them. 


Fr. 79 (from Piutarca, Is. and Osir., ch. 62). 


The usage of the Egyptians is also similar. They 
often call Isis by the name of Athena, which expresses 
some such meaning as “ I came from Myself,””! and is 
indicative of self-originated movement. But Typhén, 
as I have already mentioned, is called Séth, Beb6n, 
and Smy,” these names implying a certain violent 
and obstructive force, or a certain opposition or over- 
throw. Further, as Manetho records, they call the 
loadstone “ the bone of Horus,” but iron “ the bone 
of Typhén.”* Just as iron is often like to be at- 
tracted and led after the stone, but often again turns 
away and is repelled in the opposite direction. so the 


*Smy is not a name of Typhén, but may mean “ con- 
federate’’ in Egyptian (from sm), to unite). In religious 
texts the phrase Séth and his sm)yt, i.e. “* Séth and his con- 
federates,’’ often occurs. See Kees on Séth in Pauly- 
Wissowa-Kroll, R.-#. ii. A. 2 (1923), cols. 1896 ff. 

3 Interesting confirmation of the correctness of Plutarch 
and Manetho is given by G. A. Wainwright in his article 
“Tron in Egypt” (J. Hg. Arch. xviii. 1932, p. 14). He 
compares Pyramid Tezts, ὃ 14, ‘the bi) which came forth 
out of Setesh,” and refers to Petrie’s discovery at Kaw (an 
important centre of Séth worship) of great quantities of 
gigantic bones, collected in piles: they were chiefly of 
hippopotami,—mineralized, heavy, black bones, of metallic 
lustre and appearance. It is clear that they were con- 
sidered sacred to Séth, as they were wrapped in linen and 
were found here and there in tombs at Kaw. 


191 


Fr. 79, 80 MANETHO 


καὶ ἀγαθὴ καὶ λόγον ἔχουσα τοῦ κόσμου κίνησις 
ἐπιστρέφεταί τε καὶ προσάγεται καὶ μαλακωτέραν 
ποιεῖ, πείθουσα τὴν σκληρὰν ἐκείνην καὶ τυφώνειον, 
εἶτ᾽ αὖθις ἀνασχεθεῖσα εἰς ἑαυτὴν ἀνέστρεψε καὶ 
κατέδυσεν εἰς τὴν ἀπορίαν. 


Fr. 80. ΡηῦΤΑΒΟΗ, De Is. οἱ Osir., 28. 


Πτολεμαῖος δὲ ὁ Σωτὴρ ὄναρ εἶδε τὸν ev Σινώπῃ 
τοῦ ΠΙλούτωνος κολοσσόν, οὐκ ἐπιστάμενος οὐδὲ 
ἑωρακὼς πρότερον οἷος «ἦν» τὴν μορφήν, κελεύοντα 
κομίσαι τὴν ταχίστην αὐτὸν εἰς Ἀλεξάνδρειαν. 
ἀγνοοῦντι δ᾽ αὐτῷ καὶ ἀποροῦντι, ποῦ καθίδρυται, 


1 The story of the transport of the colossus of Serapis to 
Alexandria is told with variants by Tacitus, Hist. iv. 83, 
84, Clement of Alexandria, Protrep. iv. p. 37, Stahlin, and 
Cyrillus in Jul. p. 13, Spanh.: cf. also Plutarch, De 
sollert. anim. 36, Eustathius on Dionys. Perieg. 254 
(Miller, Geogr. gr. min. ii. p. 262). Both Tacitus and 
Plutarch agree in assigning the introduction of the statue 
to Ptolemy I.: Clement and Cyril attribute it to Ptolemy 
II. See Parthey, Uber Is. und Osir. pp. 213 ff. Tacitus 
gives (from Lysimachus) the more circumstantial account, 
adding the name of the King of Pontus, Seydrothemis ; 
but Plutarch mentions other names (e.g. Manetho) which 
Tacitus omits. The new cult of Serapis was intended to 
unite the Greek ruling class and their Egyptian subjects. 
(See Intro. p. xiv.) Georg Lippold (Festschrift Paul Arndt, 
1925, p. 126) holds the sculptor of the statue to be the 
famous Bryaxis of Athens, c. 350 B.c. ; and thus the image 
was worshipped at Sinépe for about 70 years before it was 
taken to Alexandria. The most trustworthy copy of the 
statue is that in the Museum at Alexandria: see Athen. 
Mitt. xxxi. (1906), Plates VI, VII (A. W. Lawrence in 


192 


THE SACRED BOOK _ FR. 79, 80 


salutary, good, and rational movement of the world 
at one time attracts, conciliates, and by persuasion 
mollifies that harsh Typhonian power; then again, 
when the latter has recovered itself, it overthrows 
the other and reduces it to helplessness. 


Fr. 80 (from Piurarcn, Is. and Osir., ch. 28). 


Ptolemy Sétér dreamed that he saw the colossal 
statue! of Pluto at Sindpé,? although he did not 
know what manner of shape it had, having never 
previously seen it; and that it bade him convey it 
with all possible speed to Alexandria. The king was 
at a loss and did not know where the statue stood ; 
but as he was describing the vision to his friends, 


J. Hg. Arch. xi. (1925), p. 182). Only the Greek statue by 
Bryaxis was brought from Sinépe: the cult was organized 
in Egypt itself, and Serapis became the paramount deity 
of Alexandria with a magnificent temple in Rhakétis. 
If there were forty-two temples of Serapis in Egypt 
(Aristides, viii. 56, 1, p. 96 Dind.)—this number being 
one for each nome, the majority have left no trace: 
Parthey (op. cit. pp. 216 f.) identifies eleven. 

See Wilamowitz, Hell. Dichtung, i. p. 154, Wilcken, 
Urkunden der Ptolemderzeit, Intro. pp.77 ff. (a full discussion 
of the origin of the cult of Serapis). Cf. also Rostovtzeff in 
C.A.H. vii. pp. 145 f. 

For the dream as a vehicle of religious propaganda, ¢f. 
P. Cairo Zenon 34 (258-257 B.c.: see Deissmann, Light 
from the Ancient East, pp. 152 ff.), and Inscr. Gr. xi. 4, 1299 
(c. 200 B.C.). 

Τὴ the districts by the Black Sea, a great god of the 
underworld was worshipped ; and this deity, as Rostovtzeff 
holds, must be set in close connexion with the Alexandrine 
Serapis. See Julius Kaerst, Geschichte des Hellenismus?, ii. 
(1926), pp. 246 f., and cf. the late Roman coins of Sindépe 
with the Serapis-type (Plate IV, No. 3). 


H 193 


Fr. 80, 81 MANETHO 


καὶ διηγουμένῳ τοῖς φίλοις τὴν ὄψιν, εὑρέθη πολυ- 
πλανὴς ἄνθρωπος, ὄνομα Σωσίβιος, ἐν Σινώπῃ 
φάμενος ἑωρακέναι τοιοῦτον κολοσσόν, οἷον ὁ 
βασιλεὺς ἰδεῖν ἔδοξεν. ἔπεμψεν οὖν Σωτέλη καὶ 
Διονύσιον, ot χρόνῳ πολλῷ καὶ μόλις, οὐκ ἄνευ 
μέντοι θείας προνοίας, ἤγαγον ἐκκλέψαντες. ἐπεὶ 
δὲ κομισθεὶς ὥφθη, συμβαλόντες οἱ περὶ Τιμόθεον 
τὸν ἐξηγητὴν καὶ Μανέθωνα τὸν Σεβεννύτην ΠΙλού- 
τωνος ὃν ἄγαλμα, τῷ Κερβέρῳ τεκμαιρόμενοι καὶ 
τῷ δράκοντι, πείθουσι τὸν ΠΙ]τολεμαῖον, ὡς ἑτέρου 
θεῶν οὐδενὸς ἀλλὰ Σαράπιδός ἐστιν. οὐ γὰρ ἐκεῖ- 
θεν οὕτως ὀνομαζόμενος ἧκεν, ἀλλ᾽ εἰς ᾿ἐλεξάνδρειαν 
κομισθεὶς τὸ παρ᾽ Αἰγυπτίοις ὄνομα τοῦ Πλούτωνος 
ἐκτήσατο τὸν Σάραπιν. 


Fr. 8]. Αξιμαν, De Natura Animalium, X, 16 
(Hercher). 


Ἀκούω δὲ καὶ Μανέθωνα τὸν Αἰγύπτιον, σοφίας 
? ΝΜ ? / ” > - σ΄ / 
ἐς ἄκρον ἐληλακότα ἄνδρα, εἰπεῖν ὅτι γάλακτος 
ὑείου ὁ γευσάμενος ἀλφῶν ὑποπίμπλαται καὶ λέ- 
πρας " μισοῦσι δὲ ἄρα οἱ Ὡσιανοὶ πάντες τάδε τὰ 

,ὔ , \ > / A e \ iz , 
πάθη. πεπιστεύκασι δὲ Αἰγύπτιοι τὴν ὗν καὶ ἡλίῳ 
καὶ σελήνῃ ἐχθίστην εἶναι - ὅταν οὖν πανηγυρίζωσι 
τῇ σελήνῃ, θύουσιν αὐτῇ ἅπαξ τοῦ ἔτους ὗς, ἄλλοτε 
δὲ οὔτε ἐκείνῃ οὔτε ἄλλῳ τῳ τῶν θεῶν τόδε τὸ 
ζῷον ἐθέλουσι θύειν. 





1 Timotheus (of Eleusis), the Eumolpid, is believed to 
have introduced the Eleusinian Mysteries into Eleusis, 
the suburb of Alexandria. 


194 


THE SACRED BOOK _ Fr. 80, 81 


there came forward a far-travelled man, by name 
Sésibius, who declared that at Sindpe he had seen 
just such a colossus as the king had dreamt he saw. 
He therefore despatched Sételés and Dionysius, who 
after a long time and with difficulty, though not un- 
aided by divine providence, stole away the statue. 
When it was brought to Egypt and exhibited there, 
Timotheus! the exégétés (expounder or interpreter), 
Manetho? of Sebennytus, and their colleagues, 
judging by the Cerberus and the serpent, came to the 
conclusion that it was a statue of Pluto; and they 
convinced Ptolemy that it represented no other god 
than Serapis. For it had not come bearing this 
name from its distant home, but after being conveyed 
to Alexandria, it acquired the Egyptian name for 
Pluto, namely Serapis. 


Fr. 81 (from AELIAN). 


I am told also that Manetho the Egyptian, who 
attained the acme of wisdom, declared that one who 
tastes sow’s milk is infected with leprosy or scall. 
All Asiatics, indeed, loathe these diseases. The 
Egyptians hold that the sow is abhorred by both 
Sun and Moon; so, when they celebrate the annual 
festival in honour of the Moon, they sacrifice swine 3 
to the goddess, whereas at any other time they refuse 
to sacrifice this animal to the Moon or to any other 
deity. 

* Manetho’s connexion with the Serapis cult is vouched 
for by a bust in the Serapeum at Carthage, Corpus Inscr. 
Lat. viii. 1007 : see Intro. p. xv. 


* Cf. Herodotus, ii. 47, and see Newberry in J. Kg. 
Arch. xiv. p. 213. 


195 


Fr. 82, 83 MANETHO 


EUITOMH TON ΦΥΣΙΚΩΝ 


Fr. 82. Diocenes LAertius, Prooem, ὃ 10 
(Hicks, L.C.L.). 


Θεοὺς δ᾽ εἶναι ἥλιον καὶ σελήνην" Tov μὲν Οσιριν, 

\ Ὄ ἦν / A / ΕἸ \ / 

τὴν δ᾽ Ἶσιν καλουμένην. αἰνίττεσθαί τε αὐτοὺς διά 

τε κανθάρου καὶ δράκοντος καὶ ἱέρακος καὶ ἄλλων, 
σ \ >? a ~ ~ > a 
ws φησι Μανεθὼς ἐν τῇ τῶν Φυσικῶν ᾿Επιτομῇ. 


Fr. 83. Eusresius, Praepar. Evang., 111, 2, 
p. 87 d (Gifford). 


\ > / \ \ » A @ \ A 
Τὴν Ἶϊσίν φασι καὶ τὸν Ὄσιριν τὸν ἥλιον καὶ τὴν 
σελήνην εἶναι, καὶ Δία μὲν τὸ διὰ πάντων χωροῦν 
- Ὁ i \ A \ \ ~ / 
πνεῦμα, Πῴφαιστον δὲ τὸ πῦρ, τὴν δὲ γῆν Δήμητραν 
ἐπονομάσαι" ᾿Ὠκεανόν τε τὸ ὑγρὸν ὀνομάζεσθαι παρ᾽ 
Αἰγυπτίοις καὶ τὸν παρ᾽ αὐτοῖς ποταμὸν Νεῖλον, ᾧ 
καὶ τὰς τῶν θεῶν ἀναθεῖναι γενέσεις " τὸν δὲ ἀέρα 
φασὶν αὐτοὺς προσαγορεύειν ᾿ἀθηνᾶν. τούτους δὲ 
A / / \ > / / \ ιν. ᾽ὔ 
τοὺς πέντε θεούς, τὸν ἀέρα λέγω καὶ τὸ “YOwp τό 
~ \ a ~ \ a 
te Ilip καὶ τὴν [ἣν καὶ τὸ Πνεῦμα, τὴν πᾶσαν 
> / >? "4 Μ Μ > \ 
οἰκουμένην ἐπιπορεύεσθαι, ἄλλοτε ἄλλως εἰς μορφὰς 
καὶ ἰδέας ἀνθρώπων τε καὶ παντοίων ζῴων σχημα- 
τιζομένους - καὶ τούτων ὁμωνύμους παρ᾽ αὐτοῖς 
> , , AY > ,, a 
Αἰγυπτίοις γεγονέναι θνητοὺς ἀνθρώπους, “Ηλιον 


1The Ancient Egyptian name Πα pi is applied both to the 
River Nile and to the god of the Nile. Cf. Diod. Sic. i. 
12, 6 (the same phrase, with zpos ᾧ for ᾧ, and ὑπάρξαι for 
ἀναθεῖναι : τὰς γενέσεις --[ἢ same plural in Diod. Sic. i. 9, 6, 


196 


AN EPITOME OF PHYSICAL DOCTRINES 


AN EPITOME OF PHYSICAL DOCTRINES. 


Fr. 82 (from DiocenEes LAERTIUS). 


The Egyptians hold the Sun and the Moon to be 
gods, the former being named Osiris, the latter Isis. 
They refer darkly to them under the symbols of 
beetle, serpent, hawk, and other creatures, as 
Manetho says in his Epitome of Physical Doctrines. 


Fr. 83 (from EvsEstus). 


The Egyptians say that Isis and Osiris are the 
Moon and the Sun ; that Zeus is the name which they 
gave to the all-pervading spirit, Hephaestus to fire, 
and Demeter to earth. Among the Egyptians the 
moist element is named Ocean and their own River 
Nile ; and to him they ascribed the origin of the 
Gods.! To Air, again, they give, it is said, the name 
of Athena. Now these five deities—I mean Air, 
Water, Fire, Earth, and Spirit,—traverse the whole 
world, transforming themselves at different times into 
different shapes and semblances of men and creatures 
of all kinds. In Egypt itself there have also been 
born mortal men of the same names as these deities : 


θεῶν γενέσεις ὑπάρξαι). See also Plutarch, Js. et Osir. 66, 

377 C. The name Νεῖλος appears first in Hesiod, 
Theogony 338, which may be dated to the eighth century 
B.C: 

In a Hymn to the Nile, engraved upon the rocks at Gebel 
Silsileh in Upper Egypt by command of Ramessés II., the 
river is described as “‘the living and beautiful Nile, ... 
father of all the gods’ (Wiedemann, Religion of the Ancient 
Egyptians, pp. 146 f.). 


197 


Fr. 83, 84, 85 MANETHO 


καὶ Κρόνον καὶ ‘Péav, ἔτι δὲ Δία καὶ “Hpav καὶ 
Ἥφαιστον καὶ ‘Eoriav ἐπονομασθέντας. ἄφει 
μ γρ 
A \ \ δὴ ΄ 4, A e ’ 
δὲ καὶ τὰ περὶ τούτων πλατύτερον μὲν ὁ Μανεθώς, 
ἐπιτετμημένως δὲ ὁ Διόδωρος. 


Cf. Theodoretus, Curatio, III, p. 80 (Rader). 


ΠΈΡΙ EOPTON 


Fr. 84. Joannes Lypus, De Mensibus, IV, 87 
(Wiinsch). 


> i ‘ ¢ e / >? ~ ‘ ¢ ~ 

Ἰστέον δέ, ws ὁ Μανέθων ἐν τῷ περὶ ἑορτῶν 
λέγει τὴν ἡλιακὴν ἔκλειψιν πονηρὰν ἐπίρροιαν ἀν- 

bor > , ’ Ἁ \ ‘ ‘ 
θρώποις ἐπιφέρειν περί τε τὴν κεφαλὴν καὶ τὸν 
στόμαχον. 


ΠΕΡῚ APXAISMOY KAI EYSEBEIAS 


Fr. 85. Porpuyrius, De Abstinentia, II, 55 
(Nauck). 


Κατέλυσε δὲ καὶ ἐν ᾿Ηλίου πόλει τῆς Αἰγύπτου 
τὸν τῆς ἀνθρωποκτονίας νόμον Ἄμωσις, ὡς μαρ- 


1 Εἰλειθυίας πόλει conj. Fruin. 


1 Τῇ the reference is not to a separate treatise, but to a 
passage in the Sacred Book, translate: ‘in his account of 
festivals”. 

2 On human sacrifice in Egypt, see Meyer, Geschichte 5, 
I. ii. pp. 98 f. Herodotus, ii. 45, denies that men were 
sacrificed in Egypt in his time; but Seleucus, under 


198 


ON ANCIENT RITUAL AND RELIGION 


they were called Hélios, Cronos, Rhea, as well as 
Zeus, Héra, Héphaestus, and Hestia. Manetho 
writes on this subject at considerable length, while 
Diodorus gives a concise account. . . . 


ON FESTIVALS. 
Fr. 84 (from Joannes Lypwus). 


It must be understood that Manetho in his book 
On Festivals! states that a solar eclipse exerts a 
baneful influence upon men in their head and 
stomach. 


ON ANCIENT RITUAL AND RELIGION. 
Fr. 85 (from PorpHyRivs). 


The rite of human sacrifice 5 at Héliopolis (Eilei- 
thyiaspolis) 3 in Egypt was suppressed by Amésis,* 


Tiberius, wrote an account of human sacrifice in Egypt 
(Athen. iv. p. 172d), and there is evidence for the sacrifice 
of captives in Dynasties XVIII. and XIX. See Diod. 
Sic. i. 88, 5, and cf. Frazer, Golden Bough, ii. pp. 254 ff. 

Some writers have suggested that the contracted human 
figure (the tekenw), wrapped in a skin and drawn on a 
sledge, who is a regular feature of funeral processions in 
the New Kingdom, may have been a remnant of human 
sacrifice. This, however, is very doubtful: cf. N. de G. 
Davies, Five Theban Tombs, pp. 9, 14. See further 
G. A. Wainwright, Sky-Religion, pp. 33 f. 

>See Fr. 86. The mention of Héra (see infra) makes 
it very probable that “ἢ Eileithyiaspolis’’ is the correct 
reading here. 

4 AmoOsis, c. 1570 B.c. 


199 


Fr. 85, 86 MANETHO 


- A > ~ δ᾽ “9 “ ~ A > / 

tupet Μανεθὼς ἐν τῷ περὶ ἀρχαϊσμοῦ καὶ εὐσεβείας. 
> , \ a ‘ > δ᾽ / ε 
ἐθύοντο δὲ τῇ Ἥρᾳ, καὶ ἐδοκιμάζοντο καθάπερ ot 
ζητούμενοι καθαροὶ μόσχοι καὶ συσφραγιζόμενοι" 
ἐθύοντο δὲ τῆς ἡμέρας τρεῖς, ἀνθ᾽ ὧν κηρίνους 
> / εν 4 ” >? / 

ἐκέλευσεν ὁ ᾿Ἄμωσις τοὺς ἴσους ἐπιτίθεσθαι. 


See also Eusebius, Praepar. Evang., ΤΥ, 16. p. 155d 
(Gifford) : Theodoretus, Curatio, VII, p. 192 (Rader). 


Fr. 86. Puutarcu, De Is. et Osir., 73. 


Πολλῶν δὲ λεγόντων εἰς ταῦτα τὰ ζῷα τὴν 
Τυφῶνος. αὐτοῦ διῃρῆσθαι" ψυχήν, αἰνίττεσθαι 
δόξειεν ἂν ὁ μῦθος, ὅτι πᾶσα φύσις ἄλογος καὶ 
θηριώδης τῆς τοῦ κακοῦ δαίμονος γέγονε μοίρας, 
κἀκεῖνον ἐκμειλισσόμενοι καὶ παρηγοροῦντες περι- 
έπουσι ταῦτα καὶ θεραπεύουσιν: ἂν δὲ πολὺς ἐμ- 
πίπτῃ καὶ χαλεπὸς αὐχμὸς ἐπάγων ὑπερβαλλόντως 
ἢ νόσους ὀλεθρίους ἢ συμφορὰς ἄλλας παραλόγους 
καὶ ἀλλοκότους, ἔνια τῶν τιμωμένων οἱ ἱερεῖς 
ἀπάγοντες ὑπὸ σκότῳ μετὰ σιωπῆς καὶ ἡσυχίας 

'Wyttenbach: διάρασθαι MSS. 


lor“... . in discussing ancient ritual and religion. 

? Drought is said to be a particular manifestation of 
Typhén; see Plutarch, Is. et Osir., 45, 51 fim. In re- 
ference to Egypt, drought naturally means, not absence of 
rain, but insufficient inundation. 

3 For this striking trait in Egyptian religion see Erman- 
Ranke, Agypten, 1923, p. 184 n. 2, with the reference to 
Lacau, Recueil de travaux, 26 (1904), p. 72 (sarcophagi of 
Dynasty XII.); and cf. Alan H. Gardiner, Hieratic 
Papyri in the British Museum, iii. (1935), No. V. C (a spell 
of c. 1200 B.c. in which the reciter threatens the gods that 
he will cut off the head of a cow taken from the forecourt 


200 


ON ANCIENT RITUAL AND RELIGION 


as Manetho testifies in his book On Ancient Ritual and 
Religion.1 Men were sacrificed to Héra: they were 
examined, like the pure calves which are sought out 
and marked with a seal. Three men used to be 
sacrificed each day; but in their stead Amésis 
ordered that the same number of waxen images 


should be offered. 


Fr. 86 (from Piutarcn#, Is. and Osir., ch. 73). 


Now many say that the soul of Typhén himself is 
diffused among these animals ; and this fable would 
seem to hint that every irrational and bestial nature 
is partaker of the evil spirit, and that, while seeking 
to conciliate and appease him, men tend and worship 
these animals. Should a long and severe drought ? 
occur, bringing with it an excess of deadly diseases 
or other strange and unaccountable calamities, the 
priests lead off some of the sacred animals quietly and 
in silence under cover of darkness, threatening them 
at first and trying to frighten 3 them; but, should 


of the temple of Hathor, and will cause the sky to split in 
the middle), No. VIII. B (the Book of Banishing an Enemy, 
also dated c. 1200 B.c., containing threats to tear out the 
soul and annihilate the corpse of Osiris, and set fire to 
every tomb of his), and The Attitude of the Ancient 
Egyptians to Death and the Dead, 1935, pp. 12, 16 f., 39, 
note 17. 

Threats to the gods also appear later in the Greek papyri : 
see L.C.L., Select Papyri, i. (Hunt and Edgar), pp. 309, 345, 
Th. Hopfner, Griechisch-Agyptischer Offenbarungszauber 
(= Stud. zur Pal. und Pap., Wessely, xxiii. 1924), §§ 187, 210 
et al., and cf. Porphyrius, Epistula ad Anebonem, 27, who 
remarks that this is peculiarly Egyptian. See Wilcken, 
Chrestomathie, i. 1, pp. 124 f. (“perhaps a remnant of 
ancient fetishism ᾽᾽). 


201 


Fr. 86, 87 MANETHO 


> ~ ‘ , A ~ a“ > > ΄ 
ἀπειλοῦσι καὶ δεδίττονται τὸ πρῶτον, ἂν δ᾽ ἐπιμένῃ, 
καθιερεύουσι καὶ σφάττουσιν͵ ὡς δή τινα κολασμὸν 
ὄντα τοῦ δαίμονος τοῦτον ἢ καθαρμὸν ἄλλως μέγαν 
Ὧν» ἢ / \ A > > / / ~ 

ἐπὶ μεγίστοις " Kat yap ev Εἰλειθυίας πόλει ζῶντας 

, 
ἀνθρώπους κατεπίμπρασαν, ὡς Μανεθὼς ἱστόρηκε, 
Τυφωνείους καλοῦντες, καὶ τὴν τέφραν αὐτῶν λικ- 
~ b] , ‘ /, > ‘ ~ A 
μῶντες ἠφάνιζον καὶ διέσπειρον. ἀλλὰ τοῦτο μὲν 
ἐδρᾶτο φανερῶς καὶ καθ᾽ ἕνα καιρὸν ἐν ταῖς κυνάσιν 
e ~ 
ἡμέραις " al δὲ τῶν τιμωμένων ζῴων καθιερεύσεις 
ἀπόρρητοι καὶ χρόνοις ἀτάκτοις πρὸς τὰ συμπίπ- 
τοντα γινόμεναι, τοὺς πολλοὺς λανθάνουσι, πλὴν 
¢ "4 1 i Tie Rn. ὖν 3 
ὅταν «Ἄπιδος '> ταφὰς EXWOL, και τῶν ἄλλων ἀνα- 
, 
δεικνύντες ἔνια πάντων παρόντων συνεμβάλλωσιν, 
’ ~ ~ > A 
οἰόμενοι τοῦ Τυφῶνος ἀντιλυπεῖν καὶ κολούειν τὸ 


ἡδόμενον. 


ΠΕΡῚ KATASKEYHS ΚΥΦΙΩΝ 
Fr. 87. ῬΙΌΤΑΒΟΗ, De Is. et Osir., 80. 


~ a A ~ 
To δὲ κῦφι μῖγμα μὲν ἑκκαίδεκα μερῶν συν- 
, 
τιθεμένων ἐστί, μέλιτος καὶ οἴνου καὶ σταφίδος καὶ 


1 <"Amdos> add. Xylander. 


1E] Kab on the right bank of the Nile, 53 miles 5. of 
Luxor (Baedeker ὃ, p. 365 ff.), the seat of Nekhebyt, the 
goddess of childbirth, and in prehistoric times the capital 
of the southern kingdom. 

2Kyphi (Anc. Egyptian k)pt, from kp, to burn) is 
mentioned in the Ebers Papyrus (Wreszinski, 98, 12 f.), 
where ten ingredients (without honey and wine) are given, 


202 


ON THE MAKING OF KYPHI Fr. 86, 87 


the visitation continue, they consecrate the animals 
and slaughter them, intending thus to inflict a kind 
of chastisement upon the spirit, or at least to offer 
a great atonement for heinous offences. Moreover, 
in Eileithyiaspolis,’ as Manetho has related, they used 
to burn men alive, calling them “ Typhén’s fol- 
lowers”’; and their ashes they would winnow and 
scatter broadcast until they were seen no more. 
But this was done openly and at a set time, namely 
in the dog-days ; whereas the consecrations of sacred 
animals are secret ceremonies, taking place at ir- 
regular intervals as occasion demands. unknown to 
the common people except when the priests cele- 
brate a funeral of Apis, and, displaying some of the 
animals, cast them together into the tomb in the 
presence of all, deeming that thus they are vexing 
Typhé6n in return and curtailing his delight. 


ON THE MAKING OF KYPHI. 
Fr. 87 (from Priurarcn, Is. and Osir., ch. 80). 


Kyphi? is a mixture of sixteen ingredients—honey, 
wine, raisins, cyperus [? galingale], resin, myrrh, 


Recipes of a similar nature have been found at Edfu (two) 
and at Philae (one): they were inscribed in hieroglyphs 
on temple-walls. Kyphi had a double use—as incense and 
as medicine. See further Ganszyniec in Pauly-Wissowa- 
Kroll, R.-E. (1924). Parthey (Isis und Osiris, pp. 277 ff.) 
describes the results of experiments with the recipes of 
Plutarch, of Galen (also sixteen ingredients), and of Dios- 
corides (ten ingredients) : he gives first place to the kyphi 
prepared according to the prescription of Dioscorides. 


203 


Fr. 87, 88 MANETHO 


/ e , \ 4 ‘ > ,ὔ 
κυπέρου, ῥητίνης τε καὶ σμύρνης καὶ ἀσπαλάθου 
\ / ” \ ’ ‘ > 4 A 
καὶ σεσέλεως, ἔτι δὲ σχίνου τε Kal ἀσφάλτου καὶ 
, 
θρύου καὶ λαπάθου, πρὸς δὲ τούτοις ἀρκευθίδων 
ἀμφοῖν (ὧν τὴν μὲν μείζονα, τὴν δ᾽ ἐλάττονα 
καλοῦσι) καὶ καρδαμώμου καὶ καλάμου. 


[TA ΠΡῸΣ HPOAOTON] 


Fr. 88.1 Etymologicum Magnum (Gaisford), s.v. 
Δεοντοκόμος. 


Τὸ δὲ λέων παρὰ τὸ Adw, τὸ θεωρῶ ὀξυδερ- 
, A A / σ / > ~ 
κέστατον yap τὸ θηρίον, ὥς φησι Μανέθων ev τῷ 
πρὸς ᾿Ηρόδοτον, ὅτι οὐδέποτε καθεύδει ὁ λέων, 


τοῦτο δὲ ἀπίθανον. .. 


1 ΟἹ. also Fr. from Choeroboscus, Orthogr., in Cramer, 
Anecd. Graeca Ox., ii. 235, 32 (= Htym. genuinum): ... ana 
τούτου Tod λάω γέγονε λέων ὀξυδερκέστατον γὰρ τὸ θηρίον" φασὶ 

‘ o > , uA « , “- A ΄ 
γὰρ ὅτι οὐδέποτε καθεύδει ὁ λέων. τοῦτο δὲ ἀπίθανον... See 
Aelian, De Nat. Anim., v. 39: Αἰγυπτίους ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ κομπάζειν 
φασὶ λέγοντας ὅτι κρείττων ὕπνου λέων ἐστὶν ἀγρυπνῶν ἀεί. 


1 Aspalathus = Calycotome villosa. 

2Cardamom = Elettaria cardamomum. See L.C.L., 
Theophrastus, ix. 7, 3 (Hort). 

3 Manetho’s note may refer to such passages in Herodotus 


as il. 65 ff. and ii. 108. 
(Footnote continued on opposite page. 


204 


{CRITICISMS OF HERODOTUS] Fr. 87, 88 


aspalathus,! seselis [hartwort]; mastic, bitumen, 
thryon [a kind of reed or rush], dock [monk’s rhu- 
barb], as well as of both junipers (arceuthids—one 
called the greater, the other the less), cardamom,” 
and reed [orris-root, or root of sweet flag]. 


[CRITICISMS OF HERODOTUS] 


Fr. 88% (from the Etymologicum Magnum). 


The word λέων (“lion”) comes from Adw, “1 
49 


see’: the animal has indeed the keenest of sight, 
as Manetho says in his Criticism of Herodotus that 
the lion never sleeps. But this is hard to believe. 


Choeroboscus, in his work On Orthography (iv./v. A.D.), 
gives the derivation of λέων according to Orus or Hérus 
in almost the same words as those quoted above from the 
Etymologicum Magnum; but he omits the clause ‘‘as 
Manetho says in his Criticism of Herodotus’’ (Cramer, 
Anecdota Graeca e codd. manuscriptis bibliothecarum 
Oxoniensium, ii. p. 235, Il. 32 ff. = Htymologicum 
Genuinum). 

Cf. Aelian, On the Nature of Animals, v. 39: ‘the 
Egyptians, they say, boast about this, adding that the 
lion is superior to sleep, being always awake.’’ Aelian 
quotes from Apion (see p. 19 n. 3), who may well have 
taken his statement from Manetho. 

4 By a curious coincidence, in Egyptian also the words 
for “ lion”’ (m)i) and ‘‘ to see’ (m))) are very similar, and 
the word for “lion”’ is sometimes written as though it 
came from the verb “to see’’. Manetho possibly had 
this fact in mind when he stated that the lion never sleeps 
(Battiscombe Gunn), 


205 


Fr. 88 MANETHO 
Eustathius on Homer, Iliad, XI, 480: 


(Τινὲς λέγουσιν) ὅτι ἐκ τοῦ Adw, τὸ βλέπω, 
4 σ ε ͵ a A ε , A A 
γίνεται ὥσπερ ὁ λέων, οὕτω καὶ ὁ Ais, κατὰ TOV 
\ τ ε > a \ - σ 
γραμματικὸν “Qpov, ὡς ὀξυδερκῆς, καὶ ὅτι, ὥς 
φησι Μανέθων ἐν τοῖς πρὸς ᾿Ηρόδοτον, οὐ καθεύδει 
« , a > 4 
ὁ λέων ὅπερ ἀπίθανον. .. 


206 


[CRITICISMS OF HERODOTUS] Fr. 88 


(From EvsTaTHIUs.) 


(Some say) that from Adw, “1 see,” comes not only 
λέων, but also Ais (a lion), according to Orus the 
grammarian,’ because of its keen sight; and they 
add, as Manetho states in his Criticisms of Herodotus, 
that the lion never sleeps. This is hard to believe. 


1 Orus or Horus (v. A.D.) was, according to Suidas, an 
Alexandrian grammarian who taught at Constantinople: 
none of his numerous works is extant. 


207 


APPENDIX I 
PsEUDO—MANETHO 


Syncellus, p. 72. 


Πρόκειται δὲ λοιπὸν καὶ περὶ τῆς τῶν Αἰγυπτίων 
δυναστείας μικρὰ διαλαβεῖν ἐκ τῶν Mavebd τοῦ 
Σεβεννύτου, ὃς ἐπὶ ΠΙτολεμαίου τοῦ Φιλαδέλφου 

4 ἀρχιερεὺς τῶν ἐν Αἰγύπτῳ εἰδωλείων χρηματίσας 
ἐκ τῶν ἐν τῇ Σηριαδικῇ γῇ κειμένων στηλῶν ἱερᾷ, 
φησι, διαλέκτῳ καὶ ἱερογραφικοῖς γράμμασι κε- 
χαρακτηρισμένων ὑπὸ Θὼθ τοῦ πρώτου Ἑρμοῦ, καὶ 
ἑρμηνευθεισῶν μετὰ τὸν κατακλυσμὸν [ἐκ τῆς ἱερᾶς 
διαλέκτου εἰς τὴν “Ελληνίδα φωνὴν) : γράμμασιν 
ἱερογλυφικοῖς͵ καὶ ἀποτεθέντων " ἐν βίβλοις ὑ ὑπὸ τοῦ 
Ayabodaipovos, υἱοῦ τοῦ δευτέρου “Ἑρμοῦ, πατρὸς 

126€ τοῦ Τάτ, ἐν τοῖς ἀδύτοις τῶν ἱερῶν Αἰγύπτου, 
προσεφώνησε τῷ αὐτῷ DiraddAdw βασιλεῖ δευτέρῳ 
Πτολεμαίῳ ἐν τῇ Βίβλῳ τῆς Σώθεος γράφων 
ἐπὶ λέξεως οὕτως" 


1 The words bracketed are probably a later interpolation, 
2 ἀποτεθεισῶν conj. Scaliger, Miiller. 


1 Sériadic land, z.e. Egypt, cf. Josephus, Ant. i. 71. In 
an inscription the home of Isis is Σειριὰς γῆ, and Isis herself 
is Νειλῶτις or Lecpias, the Nile is Σείριος : see Reitzenstein, 
Poimandres, p. 183. 

2 For the god Thoth inscribing records, see p. xiv ἢ. 1. 


208 


APPENDIX I. 
PsEuUDO—MANETHO. 
(From SyNCELLUS). 


It remains now to make brief extracts concerning 
the dynasties of Egypt from the works of Manetho 
of Sebennytus. In the time of Ptolemy Philadelphus 
he was styled high-priest of the pagan temples of 
Egypt, and wrote from inscriptions in the Sériadic 
land,' traced, he says, in sacred language and holy 
characters by Thoth,” the first Hermés, and trans- 
lated after the Flood ... in hieroglyphic char- 
acters. When the work had been arranged in 
books by Agathodaemé6n, son of the second Hermés ὃ 
and father of Tat, in the temple-shrines of Egypt, 
Manetho dedicated it to the above King Ptolemy 
II. Philadelphus in his Book of Sothis, using the 
following words : 


3 The second Hermés is Hermés Trismegistus, the teacher. 

For a discussion of the whole passage, see W. Scott, 
Hermetica, iii. pp. 492 f. He pointed out manifest breaches 
of continuity after χρηματίσας (end of 1.4) and after 
Αἰγύπτου (end of 1.12). If the intervening 8 lines are cut 
out (ἐκ τῶν... Αἰγύπτου), the sentence runs smoothly ; 
and Scott suggested that these 8 lines originally stood in 
Manetho’s letter after ἃ ἔμαθον. Even with this insertion 
there still remains a gap before ἱερὰ βιβλία, but apart from 
that lacuna, the whole becomes intelligible. 


209 


App. | PSEUDO-MANETHO 


᾿Επιστολὴ Μανεθῶ τοῦ Σεβεννύτου πρὸς 


Ἐπ το τὸν Φιλάδελφον. 


“ Βασιλεῖ μεγάλῳ Πτολεμαίῳ Φιλαδέλφῳ σε- 
βαστῷ Μανεθῶ “ἀρχιερεὺς καὶ γραμματεὺς τῶν 
κατ᾽ Αἴγυπτον ἱερῶν ἀδύτων, γένει Σεβεννύτης 
ὑπάρχων ᾿Ηλιουπολίτης, τῷ δεσπότῃ μου Π΄τολε- 
μαίῳ χαίρειν. 

“Huds δεῖ λογίζεσθαι, μέγιστε βασιλεῦ, περὶ 
πάντων ὧν ἐὰν βούλῃ ἡμᾶς ἐξετάσαι πραγμάτων. 
ἐπιζητοῦντι οὖν. σοι περὶ τῶν μελλόντων τῷ κόσμῳ 
γίγνεσθαι, καθὼς ἐκέλευσάς μοι, παραφανήσεταί 
σοι ἃ ἔμαθον ἱερὰ βιβλία γραφέντα ὑπὸ τοῦ προ- 
πάτορος, τρισμεγίστου “Ἑρμοῦ. ἔρρωσό μοι, δέ- 
σποτά μου βασιλεῦ. 

Ταῦτα περὶ τῆς ἑρμηνείας τῶν ὑπὸ τοῦ δευτέρου 
Ἑρμοῦ γραφέντων βιβλίων λέγει. μετὰ δὲ 
ταῦτα καὶ περὶ ἐθνῶν Αἰγυπτιακῶν πέντε ἐν 
τριάκοντα δυναστείαις ἱστορεῖ 2 . .. 


'‘ οὖν add. Boeckh. 
*For the continuation of this, see Fr. 2, p. 10. 





1 Augustus, a title of the Roman emperor, was not used 
in Ptolemaic times. 

? For a curious juxtaposition of Manetho and Hermés 
Trismegistus, see Wellmann in Hermes, xxxv. p. 367. 


210 


PSEUDO-MANETHO App. I 


Letter of Manetho of Sebennytus to Ptolemy 
Philadelphus. 


“To the great King Ptolemy Philadelphus 
Augustus.! Greeting to my lord Ptolemy from 
Manetho, high-priest and scribe of the sacred shrines 
of Egypt, born at Sebennytus and dwelling at 
Héliopolis. It is my duty, almighty king, to reflect 
upon all such matters as you may desire me to 
investigate. So, as you are making researches con- 
cerning the future of the universe,in obedience to your 
command I shall place before you the Sacred Books 
which I have studied, written by your forefather, 
Hermés Trismegistus.? Farewell, I pray, my lord 
King.” 

Such is his account of the translation of the books 
written by the second Hermés. Thereafter Manetho 
tells also of five Egyptian tribes which formed 
thirty dynasties . . . 


(Fr. 2, p. 11, follows directly after this.) 


A MS. ot Celsus gives a list of medical writers, Egyptian 
or Greek and Latin: they include (col. 1, ll. 9-13) Hermés 
Trismegistus, Manetho (MS. emmanetos), Nechepsé, 
Cleopatra regina. Here Manetho is followed by Nechepsé, 
to whom, along with Petosiris (perhaps another name of 
Necheps6), works on astrology were attributed in the 
Second Century B.c.: see W. Kroll and M. Pieper in 
&.-H. xvi. 2 (1935), s.v. Necheps6. 


Se 211 


APPENDIX II 
ERATOSTHENES (?) 


Fr. 7 (a). Syncellus, p. 171. 


Θηβαίων βασιλεῖς. 

᾿Απολλόδωρος χρονικὸς ἄλλην Αἰγυπτίων τῶν 
Θηβαίων λεγομένων βασιλείαν ἀνεγράψατο βα- 
σιλέων λη΄, ἐτῶν 20S. TLS ἤρξατο μὲν τῷ 
‘Bm’ ἔτει τοῦ κόσμου, ἔληξε δὲ εἰς τὸ γμε εξ 
ἔτος τοῦ κόσμου, ὧν τὴν γνῶσιν, φησὶν, ὁ 
᾿Ερατοσθένης λαβὼν Αἰγυπτιακοῖς ὑπομνήμασι 

ρ νὴ γυ μνήμ 

\ 2 τὴ A / \ a ¢ 
Kal ὀνόμασι κατὰ πρόσταξιν βασιλικὴν τῇ ᾿Ελ- 
λάδι φωνῇ παρέφρασεν οὕτως " 

/ / ~ \ , ” ~ 

Θηβαίων βασιλέων τῶν μετὰ ,apKd’ ἔτη τῆς 

διασπορᾶς An’ βασιλειῶν, 


1 γΖιος m. 


1This list of kings was said to have been taken by 
Apollodorus (ii. B.c.) from Eratosthenes of Cyrene (iii. 
B.c.) whom Apollodorus often followed as an authority ; 
but according to Jacoby (Apollodors Chronik, pp. 399 ff., 
Fr. 117—Pseudo-Apollodorus) the list of ‘ Theban”’ 
kings owes nothing either to Apollodorus or to Eratos- 
thenes, but is the work of one who sought to recommend 
his compilation under two distinguished names. The list, 


212 


APPENDIX II. 
ERATOSTHENES (?) (From Syneellus). 
Fr. 7 (a). 

Kings of Thebes.! 


Apollodorus, the chronographer, recorded another 
dynasty of Egyptian kings,—the Thebans, as they 
are called,—thirty-eight kings ruling for 1076 years. 
This dynasty began in Anno Mundi 2900, and came 
to an end in Anno Mundi 3045 [3976]. The know- 
ledge of these kings, he says, Eratosthenes took from 
Egyptian records and lists, and at the king’s com- 
mand he translated them into the Greek language, 
as follows: 

Of the Theban kings in thirty-eight dynasties ruling 
1124 years after the Dispersion, 


containing thirty-eight kings, who ruled for 1076 years, is 
of Theban origin, derived from a Royal List such as that 
of Karnak : the explanations of the names are interesting, 
and the variations in Nos. 11 and 15 may be due to the 
priests themselves. Historically the list is of no great 
worth : several of the names are not proper names, but 
Throne-names, such as are found in the Royal Lists and 
the Turin Papyrus (Meyer, Aeg. Chron. pp. 99 ff.). 

Kings 1-5 correspond to Dynasty I., 13-17 to Dynasty 
IV., 18-22 to Dynasty VI. 


213 


App. II PSEUDO-MANETHO 


a’ <mp@tos>! ἐβασίλευσε Μήνης Θηβαῖος, ὃ 
ἑρμηνεύεται αἰώνιος 5: ἐβασίλευσεν ἔτη EB’. 
τοῦ δὲ κόσμου ἦν ἔτος Bm’. 

β΄ Θηβαίων δεύτερος ἐβασίλευσεν Abwéns, 
υἱὸς Μήνεως, € ἔτη νθ΄. οὗτος ἑρμηνεύεται 
“Ἑρμογένης. ἔτος τοῦ κόσμου βπιξβ'. 

γ΄ Θηβαίων Αἰγυπτίων τρίτος ἐβασίλευσεν 
AddOns ὁμώνυμος, ἔτη λβ΄. τοῦ δὲ 
κόσμου ἦν ἔτος γκα΄. 


Syncellus, p. 180. 


wy Θηβαίων ἐβασίλευσε δ΄ Μιαβαῆς," υἱὸς 
Adwbews, ἔτη ιθ΄. οὗτος ἑρμηνεύεται 
φιλόταυρος τοῦ δὲ κόσμου ἦν ἔτος 

, 


ν΄. 
Θηβαίων ἐβασίλευσε ε΄ Πεμῴφῶς," υἱὸς 
᾿Αθώθους, 6 ἐστιν ᾿Ηρακλείδης, ἔτη ιη΄. 


a \ , S550 
TOU δὲ κοσμοῦ ἢν ετος yop . 


Fr. 13. Syncellus, p. 180. 


ς΄ Θηβαίων Αἰγυπτίων ἐβασίλευσεν ς΄ Μομ- 
χειρὶ Μεμφίτης, ἔτη οθ΄. οὗτος ἐρ- 


1 πρῶτος add. Goar. 
ἃ τλΊβαιος conj. Meyer: θηνίτης B: Θηβινίτης Θηβαῖος Din- 
orf. 
3 αἰώνιος corr. Jablonski: διώνιος B, Διόνιος A. 
4 Διαβιῆς B. 
δ φιλόταυρος Bunsen: φιλέτεοος codd.: φιλέταιρος Sealiger. 
6 Σεμψῶς Bunsen. 


214 


ERATOSTHENES (ἢ) App. II 


1. The first was Ménés of Thebes, whose name, 
being interpreted, means “ everlasting ”’.1 
He reigned for 62 years. Anno mundi 2900. 

2. The second king of Thebes was Athdéthés, son 
of Ménés, for 59 years. His name, being 
interpreted, means “Born of Hermés”’.? 
Anno mundi 2962. 

3. The third king of Thebes in Egypt was 
Athéthés II., for 32 years. Anno mundi 
3021. 

4. The fourth king of Thebes was Miabaés, son 
of Athéthis, for 19 years. His name, being 
interpreted, means “ Bull-lover”.? Anno 
mundi 3053. 

5. The fifth king of Thebes was Pemphés 
(? Sempsés, Semempsés), son of Athdéthis. 
His name is “ descendant of Héraclés,”” and 
he reigned for 18 years. Anno mundi 3072. 


Fr. 13. 


6. The sixth king of Thebes in Egypt was 
Momcheiri of Memphis, reigning for 79 
years. His name, being interpreted, means 


1The Egyptian form of the name Ménés may quite 
well be interpreted as ‘‘the abiding one,’’ from mn, 
““to endure ’’. 

*This etymology obviously assumes the presence of 
the divine name Théth in the name Athdéthés. 

3 The first element of the name Miabaés is clearly some 
form of the verb mr, “ὁ to love’’, 


215 


App. II PSEUDO-MANETHO 


μηνεύεται nynoavdpos!: περισσομελής, 
[τοιγὰρ ἄμαχος]. τοῦ δὲ κόσμου ἦν γη΄. 
ζ΄ Θηβαίων Αἰγυπτίων ἐβασίλευσεν C’ Σ τοῖχος, 
υἱὸς αὐτοῦ- ὅ ἐστιν Ἄρης ἀναίσθητος, ἔτη 

, ~ δ / 2 ΝΜ 7, 

ς΄. τοῦ δὲ κόσμου ἦν ἔτος γρξθ'. 

n Θηβαίων Αἰγυπτίων ἐβασίλευσεν Gees To- 
σορμίης, ὅ ἐστιν αἰτησιπαντός ὃ ἔτη. λ΄. 
τοῦ δὲ κόσμου ἣν ἔτος γροε΄. 

8 Θηβαίων Αἰγυπτίων ἐβασίλευσεν θ΄ Μάρης, 

e\ > ~ Ld > € / » ’ 
υἱὸς αὐτοῦ, ὅ ἐστιν ᾿Ηλιόδωρος, ἔτη Ks’. 
τοῦ δὲ κόσμου ἦν ἔτος γσε΄. 


Syncellus, p. 190. 


ι Θηβαίων Αἰγυπτίων ' ἐβασίλευσεν Avwi- 
φίς, ὅ ἐστιν ἐπίκωμος, ἔτη κ΄. τοῦ δὲ 
κόσμου ἦν ἔτος YAS 

Lo, Θηβαίων Αἰγυπτίων ta’ ἐβασίλευσε Σίριος, 
ὅ ἐστιν υἱὸς κόρης, ὡς δὲ ἕτεροι ἀβάσκαν- 
τος, ἔτη ιη΄. τοῦ δὲ κόσμου ἦν ἔτος γσνα΄. 

ιβ΄’ Θηβαίων Αἰγυπτίων. ιβ΄ ἐβασίλευσε. Χνοῦβος 

ἢ Γνεῦρος, ὅ ἔστι Χρυσὸς ἢ Xpvoaods 


!Conj. Bunsen: τῆς ἀνδρὸς codd.: ἔτης ἀνδρὸς Gutschmid. 
2 A gloss, which the codd. have before Mopyecpi. 

3 ἐτησιπαντός A: ἔτης παντος Gutschmid. 

4B: ἐπίκομος A. 





1 With this interpretation of the name Marés (which 
may correctly explain the second element as Ré, “the 
Sun ”’), of. ἥλιος εὐφεγγής, “δι brilliant Sun,” in Hymn IV., 


216 


ERATOSTHENES (?) App. II 


“leader of men”. He had _ exceeding 
large limbs (and was therefore irresistible). 
Anno mundi 3090. 

7. The seventh king of Thebes in Egypt was his 
son, Stoichos. The name means “ unfeeling 
Arés”. He reigned for 6 years. Anno 
mundi 3169. 

8. The eighth king of Thebes in Egypt was 
Gosormiés, whose name means “ all-demand- 
ing”. He reigned for 30 years. Anno 
mundi 3175. 

9. The ninth king of Thebes in Egypt was his 
son, Marés, whose name means “ gift of the 
Sun”’.! He reigned for 26 years. Anno 
mundi 3205. 


10. The tenth king of Thebes in Egypt was 
Andéyphis, whose name means “ revelling ”’.? 
He reigned for 20 years. Anno mundi 
3231. 

11, The eleventh king of Thebes in Egypt was 
Sirius, whose name means “ son of the iris of 
the eye,” 5 or, as others say, “ unharmed by 
the evil eye”. He reigned for 18 years. 
Anno mundi 3251. 


12. The twelfth king of Thebes in Egypt was 


Chnubos or Gneuros, which means “ gold ” 4 


line 32, A. Vogliano, Madinet Madi, Primo Rapporto (1936): 
see note on No. 35 infra, p. 224. 

2 Possibly this explanation is based upon the Egyptian 
word undéf, “ to rejoice ’’ (B.G.). 

3In Egyptian si-iri means “‘ son of the eye”’. 

4 Nib is Egyptian for “ gold”’. 


217 


App. II PSEUDO-MANETHO 


ιγ΄ 


ιδ΄ 


’ 
ve 


is” 


ιθ’ 


υἱός, ἔτη κβ΄. τοῦ δὲ κόσμου ἦν ἔτος 
,»γσξθ'. 

Θηβαίων Αἰγυπτίων uy’ ἐβασίλευσε ‘Pav- 
wots, ὅ ἐστιν ἀρχικράτωρ, ἔτη ιγ΄. τοῦ 
δὲ κόσμου ἦν ἔτος yore J 

Θηβαίων Αἰγυπτίων ιδ' ἐβασίλευσε Βιὕρης, 
ἔτη ι΄. τοῦ δὲ κόσμου ἣν ἔτος γτδ'. 


Fr. 17. Syncellus, p. 190. 


Θηβαίων Αἰγυπτίων ιε΄ ἐβασίλευσε Σ addus, 
κωμαστής͵ κατὰ δὲ ἐνίους Αἰωνατι τῆς, 
ἔτη κθ΄. τοῦ δὲ κόσμου ἦν ἔτος γτι 


Syncellus, p. 195. 
Θηβαίων is ᾿ ἐβασίλευσε a adpus B’, ἔτη Kl’. 


τοῦ δὲ κόσμου ἦν ἔτος γτμγ΄. 


΄ Θηβαίων rf’ ἐβασίλευσε Mo σχερ qs, ἡ ἡλιό- 


δοτος, ἔτη λα΄. τοῦ δὲ κόσμου ἦν ἔτος 
“γτο΄. 


΄ Θηβαίων un’ ἐβασίλευσε Μοσθῆς," ἔτη λγ΄. 


τοῦ δὲ κόσμου ἦν ἔτος γυα΄. 
Θηβαίων ιθ’ ἐβασίλευσε Παμμῆς, apxoedys,* 
ἔτη λε΄. τοῦ δὲ κόσμου ἦν ἔτος γυλδ' 


‘Corr. Bunsen: Χνοῦβος Γνευρός, 6 ἐστι Χρύσης Χρύσου υἱός 


codd. 


2 Μεγχερῆς conj. Bunsen. 
3 Μεγχερῆς β΄ conj. Bunsen. 
4Conj. Gutschmid: ἀρχονδής codd. 


218 


ERATOSTHENES (ἢ) App. II 


or “golden son” (or his son). He reigned 
for 22 years. Anno mundi 3269. 

13. The thirteenth king of Thebes in Egypt was 
Rayésis, which means “the arch-master- 
[1.1 He reigned for 13 years Anno 
mundi 3291. 

14. The fourteenth king of Thebes in Egypt was 
Biyrés, who reigned for 10 years. Anno 
mundi 3304. 


Εν. 11. 
15. The fifteenth king of Thebes in Egypt was 


Sadéphis, “ reveller,”’ or, according to some, 
““ money-getter, trafficker”’. He reigned for 
29 years. Anno mundi 3314. 

16. The sixteenth king of Thebes was Sadéphis II , 
who reigned for 27 years. Anno mundi 
3343. 

17. The seventeenth king of Thebes was Moscherés 
(? Mencherés), “gift of the Sun,” who 
reigned for 31 years. Anno mundi 3370. 

18. The eighteenth king of Thebes was Mosthés 
(? Mencherés II.), who reigned for 33 years. 
Anno mundi 3401. 

19. The nineteenth king of Thebes was Pammés, 
“ leader-like,”” who reigned for 35 years. 
Anno mundi 3434. 


1 Possibly, according to this explanation, Ra- (or Rha-) 
is the Egyptian hry, ‘‘ master,” and the rest of the name 
*wdse(r), “᾿ powerful’’ (B.G.). 


219 


App. II PSEUDO-MANETHO 
Fr. 22. Syncellus, p. 195. 


Kk’ Θηβαίων x’ ἐβασίλευσεν Andmmous, μέγι- 
στος. οὗτος, ὥς φασι, παρὰ ὥραν μίαν 
ἐβασίλευσεν ἔτη ρ΄. τοῦ δὲ κόσμου ἦν 
ἔτος γυξθ'. 

ka’ Θηβαίων κα’ ἐβασίλευσεν ᾿Εχεσκοσοκά- 
ρας, ἔτος α΄. τοῦ δὲ κόσμου ἦν ἔτος 
bee! 

Kp’ Θηβαίων Kp’ ἐβασίλευσε Νίτωκρις, γυνὴ 
ἀντὶ ἀνδρός, ὅ ἐστιν Abnva νικηφόρος, 
ἔτη s’. τοῦ δὲ κόσμου ἦν ἔτος γῴφο΄. 


Fr. 33. Syncellus, p. 196. 


Ky’ Θηβαίων xy’ ἐβασίλευσε Μυρταῖος" Ap- 
μωνόδοτος, ἔτη κβ΄. τοῦ δὲ κόσμου ἦν 
ἔτος ,ypos’ .3 


Syncellus, p. 204. 


KS’ Θηβαίων κδ΄ ἐβασίλευσεν Οὐωσιμάρης," 
κραταιός ἐστινδ ἥλιος, ἔτη ιβ΄. τοῦ δὲ 
κόσμου ἢν ἔτος γῴφπη΄. 

Θηβαίων κε’ ἐβασίλευσε Σεθίνιλος, 6 
ἐστιν αὐξήσας τὸ πάτριον κράτος, ἔτη η΄. 
τοῦ δὲ κόσμου ἣν ἔτος γχι΄. 

1B: ἐχεσκὸς ὁκάρας A 3 Conj. ᾿Αμυρταῖος. 

δγη.: bon’ codd. 4“ Jablonski: Θυωσιμάρης B. 


5 Bunsen: 6 ἐστιν codd. 
8B: Θίέριλλος A: Θίνιλλος Dindort. 


220 


ERATOSTHENES (?) App. II 


Fr, 22. 


20. The twentieth king of Thebes was Apappis 
(Pepi), “the very great’. He, they say, 
ruled for 100 years all but one hour. Anno 
mundi 3469. 

21. The twenty-first king of Thebes was 
Echeskosokaras, for 1 year. Anno mundi 
3569. 

22. The twenty-second ruler of Thebes was 
Nitécris,? a queen, not a king. Her name 
means “‘ Athéna the victorious,’ and she 
reigned for 6 years. Anno mundi 3570. 


Fr??33: 


23. The twenty-third king of Thebes was Myrtaeus 
(Amyrtaeus), “ gift of Ammén,”* for 22 
years. Anno mundi 3576. 

24. The twenty-fourth king of Thebes was 
Udsimarés, “‘ Mighty is the Sun,”’4 for 12 
years. Anno mundi 3598. 

25. The twenty-fifth king of Thebes was 
Sethinilus (Thirillus), which means ‘‘ having 
increased his ancestral power,” for 8 years. 


Anno mundi 3610. 


' Apappas is the Phidéps of Fr. 20. 4, with a curious mis- 
understanding of his reign of 94 years. 

2 See p. 54n. 2,and Wainwright, Sky-Religion, pp. 41, 45. 

3 This interpretation is based upon the common Egyptian 
name Amenerdais, ‘‘ Amin has given him ᾿᾿. 

‘The Egyptian Wése-mi-Ré means ‘‘ Mighty like the 
Sun ’”’: Udésimarés may however be intended for the first 
half of the praenomen of Ramessés II., Wese-mé-Ré, but 
this means “ Ré is mighty in justice ”’ (B.G.). 


221 


Arp. II PSEUDO-MANETHO 


Ks’ Θηβαίων Ks’ ἐβασίλευσε Σεμφρουκράτης, 
ὅ ἐστιν Ἡρακλῆς “ρποκράτης, ἔτη ιη΄. 
τοῦ δὲ κόσμου ἦν ἔτος γχιη΄. 

κζ' Θηβαίων κζ΄ ἐβασίλευσε Χουθήρ, ταῦρος 
τύραννος, ἔτη ζ΄. τοῦ δὲ κόσμου ἦν ἔτος 
,γχλε΄. 

κη΄ Θηβαίων κη΄ ἐβασίλευσε Mevprs,' φίλος 


/ 2 Μ , ~ δὲ ΄ ΗΝ Μ 
κόρης, ἔτη ιβ΄. τοῦ δὲ κόσμου ἦν ἔτος 
, 


IXY, 

KO’ Θηβαίων x6’ ἐβασίλευσε Χωμαεφθάρ κόσ- 
μος φιλήφαιστος, ἔ ἔτη ια΄. τοῦ δὲ κόσμου 
ἦν ἔτος γχνε΄. 

rN’ Θηβαίων λ’ ἐβασίλευσε Σοικούνιος * ὀχοτύραν- 
5 ” , ~ A / Ss ΝΜ , 
vos,® ἔτη ξ΄. τοῦ δὲ κόσμου ἣν ἔτος γχξε". 


Syncellus, p. 233. 


da’ Θηβαίων λα’ ἐβασίλευσε Πετεαθυρῆς, ἔτη 
ις΄. τοῦ δὲ κόσμου ἦν ἔτος γψκς΄. 


Fr. 37. 


AB’ Θηβαίων AB’ ἐβασίλευσε <Lrappeveuns a’,® 
ἔτη Ks’. τοῦ δὲ κόσμου ἦν ἔτος γῴμβ'. 


1Conj. Μιειρής. ?Gutschmid: φιλόσκορος codd. 
3 Τωμαεφθά Bunsen. 4 Σοικοῦνις Bunsen. 

5 ὡς Ὦχος τύραννος Bunsen: Σοῦχος τύραννος Gutschmid. 

5° Aupevéeuns Bunsen. A lacuna here in codd. 


1 The first syllable of the name Chuthér may represent 
the Egyptian ko, “‘ bull”’ 
2 In Egyptian, “‘ loving the eye’ is mai-iri. 


222 


26. 


27. 


28. 


29. 


30. 


31. 


ERATOSTHENES (?) App. Π 


The twenty-sixth king of Thebes was 
Semphrucratés, which means “ Heraclés 
Harpocratés.”’ for 18 years. Anno mundi 
3618. 

The twenty-seventh king of Thebes was 
Chuthér, “ bull-lord,”! for 7 years. Anno 
mundi 3636. 

The twenty-eighth king of Thebes was Meurés 
(Mieirés), “loving the iris of the eye,” ? 
for 12 years. Anno mundi 3643. 

The twenty-ninth king of Thebes was Ché- 
maephtha (Témaephtha), “ world, loving 
Héphaestus,”® for 11 years. Anno mundi 
3655. 

The thirtieth king of Thebes was Soicunius 
(or Soicunis), + hochotyrannos, +4 (or 
Soicuniosochus the lord), for 60 years. 
Anno mundi 3666. 

The thirty-first king of Thebes was Pete- 
athyrés,° for 16 years. Anno mundi 3726. 


Fr. 37. 


32. The thirty-second king of Thebes’ was 


<Stammenemés I. (Ammenemés 1.), for 26 
years. Anno mundi 3742. 


%As to the latter part of the name, “loving 
Héphaestus”’ is in Egyptian mai-Piah: the emended 
T6- represents the Egyptian t0, “‘ world’”’ (B.G.). 

‘Bunsen emends this vox nihili to mean “a tyrant 
like Ochus’’?: Gutschmid, to mean ‘ Suchus the lord ”’. 
The latter description may refer to one of the Sebekhotpes. 

5 Peteathyrés, a well-formed name Pede-hathor, which 
does not occur as a king’s name. 


223 


App. II PSEUDO-MANETHO 


λγ΄ Θηβαίων Ay’ ἐβασίλευσε Σταμμενέμης P’, 
ἔτη κγ΄. τοῦ δὲ κόσμου ἣν ἔτος γψξη΄. 

λδ' Θηβαίων λδ' ce Σι στο σιχερμῆ cS 
᾿Ηρακλῆς κραταιός,' ἔτη νε΄. τοῦ δὲ κόσμου 
ἣν ἔτος γψῆα΄. 

de’ Θηβαίων de’ ἐβασίλευσε Μάρης, ἔτη μγ΄. 


τοῦ δὲ κόσμου ἦν ἔτος γωμς΄. 


Fr. 40. 
As’ Θηβαίων λε΄ ἐβασίλευσε Σιφθὰς" ὁ καὶ 


Ἑρμῆς, υἱὸς “Ηφαίστου, ἔτη ε΄. τοῦ δὲ 
κόσμου ἦν ἔτος γωπθ'. 


Syncellus, p. 278. 
AC’ Θηβαίων λζ΄ ἐβασίλευσε Φρουορῶ 3 ἤτοι 


Νεῖλος, ἔτη ε΄. τοῦ δὲ κόσμου ἦν ἔτος 
yd’ ὃ 
λη΄ Θηβαίων λη΄ ἐβασίλευσε ‘Apovbapraios, ἔτη 
Ey’. τοῦ δὲ κόσμου ἦν ἔτος γπιγ΄. 
1 Σεσόρτωσις, ᾿Ερμῆς ἢ ᾿Ηρακλῆς κραταιός conj. Bunsen. 


2 Bunsen: Σιφόας codd. 8 Φουορῶ Bunsen. 
4’ corr. Miller. 5 yw’ codd. 





1 Besides Marés and derived forms (Marrés, Aelian, 
De Nat. Anim. vi. 7; Marros and Mendés, Diod. Sie. i. 
61, 1; Imandés, Strabo, 17. 1. 37, 42), there are two types 
of variants on the name of Amenemhét III.—(1) Lamarés 
(Fr. 34), Lamaris (Fr. 35), Labarés, Labaris; and (2) 
Pramarrés, Premanrés (Pr- = Pharaoh): cf. Poremanrés, 
P. Mich. Zen. 84, lines 18, 21, Porramanrés in A. Vogliano, 
Madinet Madi, Primo Rapporto (1936), Hymn IV., line 
34, where the first two syllables must be eliminated if 


224 


ERATOSTHENES (ἢ App. IT 


33. The thirty-third king of Thebes was> Stam- 
menemés IT. (Ammenemés II.), for 23 years. 
Anno mundi 3768. 

34, The thirty-fourth king of Thebes was Sis- 
tosichermés, “* valiant Héraclés ”’ (Sistosis or 
Sesortésis, “‘ valiant Hermés or Héraclés’’), 
for 55 years. Anno mundi 3791. 

35. The thirty-fifth king of Thebes was Marés,' for 
43 years. Anno mundi 3846. 


Fr. 40. 


36. The thirty-sixth king of Thebes was Siphthas,? 
also called Hermés, “son of Héphaestus.” 
for 5 years. Anno mundi 3889. 

37. The thirty-seventh king of Thebes was 
Phruoré * (Phuoré) or “the Nile,” for 5 
(?19) years. Anno mundi 3894. 

38. The thirty-eighth king of Thebes was Amu- 
thartaeus, for 63 years. Anno mundi 3913. 


[Syncellus then adds (p. 279) in much the same 
phrase as that quoted at the beginning of Appendix 
II.: “These names Eratosthenes took from the 
sacred scribes at Diospolis and translated from 
Egyptian into the Greek language.”’] 


the pentameteristoscan. [See noteonp.50. The temple 
at the vestibule of which the Hymn was inscribed is 
dated 95 B.c.] 

2 Siphthas is King Siptah (“son of Ptah’’), probably 
Thuéris (Thuédsris), of Dynasty XIX. 

’The Egyptian name for the River Nile is p-yeor-o. 
For comparisons of the King of Egypt with the River 
Nile, see Grapow, Die Bildlichen Ausdruckedes Aegyptischen, 
p- 62. 


I 225 


APPENDIX III 


To ΠΑΛΑΙῸΝ XPONIKON. 


Syncellus, p. 95. 


Φέρεται yap map’ Αἰγυπτίοις παλαιόν τι ypovo- 
γραφεῖον, ἐξ οὗ καὶ τὸν Μανεθῶ πεπλανῆσθαι νομίζω, 
περιέχον λ΄ δυναστειῶν ἐν γενεαῖς πάλιν pry’ χρόνον 
ἄπειρον [καὶ οὐ τὸν αὐτὸν τοῦ! Μανεθῶ)] ἐν μυριάσι 
τρισὶ καὶ ςφκε΄, πρῶτον μὲν τῶν ‘Aepitav,” δεύτερον 
δὲ τῶν Μεστραίων, τρίτον δὲ Αἰγυπτίων, οὕτω πως 
ἐπὶ λέξεως ἔχον. 


Θεῶν βασιλεία κατὰ τὸ Παλα:ιὸν Χρονικόν. 


‘Hd 4 / > μὲ ὃ A A A A 
αἴστου χρόνος οὐκ ἔστι διὰ TO νυκτὸς καὶ 
ἡμέρας αὐτὸν φαίνειν. 


1Hopfner: τὸν A: ὃν Boeckh, Bunsen. 
3 Αὐριτῶν codd. 





1The Old Chronicle is dated by Gutschmid to the end 
of the second century after Christ. Gelzer would refer its 
statements to another source than Manetho, perhaps 
Ptolemy of Mendés; while Meyer regards it as the work of 
Panodérus, c. A.D. 400 (cf. Fr. 2). 

2By the name Manetho Syncellus refers, as always, to 
the Book of Séthis (App. IV.). 

3 The actual total of years from the items given, if 6 years 
be assigned to Dynasty XXVIIL., is 36,347, 7.e. 178 years 


226 


APPENDIX III. 
THE OLD CHRONICLE. 


(From Syncellus). 


Now, among the Egyptians there is current an old 
chronography,! by which indeed. I believe, Manetho 2 
has been led into error. 

In 30 dynasties with 113 generations, it comprises 
an immense period of time [not the same as Manetho 
gives] in 36,525 years,* dealing first with the Aeritae,* 
next with the Mestraei, and thirdly with the 
Egyptians. Its contents are somewhat as follows :— 


Dynasties of the Gods according to the Old Chronicle. 


Héphaestus has no period assigned, because he 
shines night and day. Hélios [the Sun], son of 


less than the total given in the text. The number of 
generations, 113, is obtained by counting 1 for Dynasty 
XXVIII. and 7 for XXIX. This vast world-period of 
36,525 years is 25 times the Séthic period of 1461 calendar 
years (or 1460 Séthic years): see infra, and for the Séthic 
period, Intro. pp. xxix f. 

4 Aeritae and Mestraei are really the same as the third 
race, the Egyptians, the three names apparently referring 
to Egypt at three different dates. Aeria is an old name 
of Egypt (Euseb., Chron. in Syncellus, p. 293, Armenian 
Version (Schéne, p. 30), Aegyptus quae prius Aeria dice- 
batur... ). Mestraei (Josephus, Antig. 1. 6. 2)—from 
Mestraim (p. 7 n. 2). 


227 


App. III PSEUDO-MANETHO 


Ἥλιος ‘Hdaiorov ἐβασίλευσεν ἐτῶν μυριάδας 
τρεῖς. 

Ἔπειτα Κρόνος, φησί, καὶ οἱ λοιποὶ πάντες 
θεοὶ δώδεκα ἐβασίλευσαν ἔτη ,γπνπδ΄. 

Ὁ} 7}. 

Ἔπειτα ἡμίθεοι βασιλεῖς ὀκτὼ ἔτη σιζ'. 

Καὶ μετ᾽ αὐτοὺς γενεαὶ ιε΄ Κυνικοῦ κύκλου 
ἀνεγράφησαν ἐν ἔτεσιν υμγ΄. 

Εἶτα Τανιτῶν ts’ δυναστεία, γενεῶν η΄, ἐτῶν 
ph’. 

Πρὸς οἷς ιζ΄ δυναστεία Μεμῴφιτῶν, γενεῶν 8’, 
ἐτῶν ργ΄. 

Μεθ᾿ ods τη’ δυναστεία Μεμφιτῶν, γενεῶν ιδ', 
ἐτῶν τμη΄. 

"Ἔπειτα ιθ΄ δυναστεία Διοσπολιτῶν, γενεῶν 
ε΄, ἐτῶν ρηδ΄. 

Εἶτα x’ δυναστεία Διοσπολιτῶν, γενεῶν η΄, 
ἐτῶν σκη΄. 

"Ἔπειτα xa’ δυναστεία Τανιτῶν, γενεῶν ς", 
ἐτῶν ρκα΄. 

Εἶτα κβ΄ δυναστεία Τανιτῶν, γενεῶν γ΄, ἐτῶν 

, 

μη΄. 

"Ἔπειτα κγ΄ δυναστεία Διοσπολιτῶν, γενεῶν 
β΄, ἐτῶν ιθ΄. 

Εἶτα κδ΄ δυναστεία Σαϊτῶν, γενεῶν γ΄, ἐτῶν 
po’. 

Πρὸς ots κε’ δυναστεία Αἰθιόπων, γενεῶν y’, 
ἐτῶν μδ΄. 

Μεθ᾿ ods xs’ δυναστεία Μεμῴφιτῶν, γενεῶν ζ΄, 
ἐτῶν pot’. 

228 








THE OLD CHRONICLE Αρρ. III 


Héphaestus, ruled for 30,000 years. Then Cronos 
(it says) and the remaining gods, 12 in number, 
reigned altogether for 3984 years. Next, the eight 
demi-gods were kings for 217 years; and after them 
15 generations of the Séthic Cycle are recorded with 
443 years.} 


Then follow : 

The Sixteenth Dynasty of Kings of Tanis, in 
8 generations, for 190 years. 

The Seventeenth Dynasty of Kings of Memphis, in 
4 generations, for 103 years. 

The Eighteenth Dynasty of Kings of Memphis, in 
14 generations, for 348 years. 

The Nineteenth Dynasty of Kings of Diospolis, in 
5 generations, for 194 years. 

The Twentieth Dynasty of Kings of Diospolis, in 
8 generations, for 228 years. 

The Twenty-first Dynasty of Kings of Tanis, in 
6 generations, for 12] years. 

The Twenty-second Dynasty of Kings of Tanis, in 
3 generations, for 48 years. 

The Twenty-third Dynasty of Kings of Diospolis, 
in 2 generations, for 19 years. 

The Twenty-fourth Dynasty of Kings of Sais, in 
3 generations, for 44 years. 

The Twenty-fifth Dynasty of Ethiopian Kings, in 
3 generations, for 44 years. 

The Twenty-sixth Dynasty of Kings of Memphis, 
in 7 generations, for 177 years. 


1 This total comes, not from the Book of Séthis which 
gives 395 for the first 15, but from Eratosthenes (App. II.). 
A smaller total than Manetho’s 3357 years was desired in 
order to shorten the duration of the historical age of Egypt. 


229 


App. III PSEUDO-MANETHO 


Ki \ > > A , ὃ , ] π᾿ ~ ~ 
αἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοὺς κζ΄ δυναστεία ερσῶν, γενεῶν 
͵’ὔ ~ 
ε΄, ἐτῶν ρκδ΄. 
. . . se . s . 


Ἔπειτα x0’ δυναστεία Τανιτῶν γενεῶν «ζ΄» 


ἐτῶν λθ'. 

Καὶ ἐπὶ πάσαις A’ δυναστεία Τανίτου ἑνός, ἔτη 
ιη΄ 

Τὰ πάντα ὁμοῦ τῶν A’ δυναστειῶν ἔτη My’ 
καὶ «φκε΄. 


Ταῦτα ἀναλυόμενα, εἴτουν μεριζόμενα, παρὰ τὰ 
ΚΕ ” Γ᾿ \ > > , 
javéa’ ἔτη εἴκοσι πεντάκις, τὴν παρ Αἰγυπτίοις καὶ 
νσ > ~ ~ 
Ἕλλησιν ἀποκατάστασιν τοῦ ζῳδιακοῦ μυθολογου- 
μένην δηλοῖ, τοῦτ᾽ ἔστι τὴν ἀπὸ τοῦ αὐτοῦ σημείου 
ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ σημεῖον, ὅ ἐστι πρῶτον λεπτὸν τῆς 
πρώτης μοίρας τοῦ ἰσημερινοῦ ζῳδίου, κριοῦ λεγο- 
ἔνου πα αὐτοῖς, ὥσπερ καὶ ἐν τοῖς Γ ενικοῖς 
μ 
τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ καὶ ἐν Κυραννίσι βί ίβλοις εἴρηται. 
Ἐντεῦθεν δὲ οἶμαι καὶ Πτολεμαῖον τὸν Κλαύδιον 
τοὺς προχείρους κανόνας τῆς ἀστρονομίας διὰ Ke’ 
ἐτηρίδων ψηφίζεσθαι θεσπίσαι. .. 
> ~ [Pas ) ‘ 59 uA ~ 4 
Ἐντεῦθεν δέ ἐστι καὶ τὸ ἀσύμφωνον τῶν τοιούτων 
ἐκδόσεων πρός τε τὰς θείας ἡμῶν γραφὰς καὶ πρὸς 
ἄλληλα ἐπιγνῶναι, ὅτι αὕτη μὲν ἡ παλαιοτέρα νομι- 
/ > / re, / A »” 
ζομένη Αἰγυπτίων συγγραφὴ ᾿ Ηφαίστου μὲν ἄπειρον 
εἰσάγει χρόνον, τῶν δὲ λοιπῶν KO’ δυναστειῶν ἔτη 
/ = / / ~ *Hi ,ὔ dA A 
τρισμύρια. SPKE » καίτοι τοῦ “ἢ φαίστου πολλοῖς 
ἔτεσι μετὰ τὸν κατακλυσμὸν καὶ τὴν πυργοποιῖΐαν 


1 Scaliger: codd. μετὰ τὰς κζ΄ δυναστείας, omit. γενεῶν. 


230 


THE OLD CHRONICLE App. Ill 


The Twenty-seventh Dynasty of Persian Kings, in 
5 generations, for 124 years. 

[The Twenty-eighth Dynasty is here omitted— 

one king of Sais reigning for 6 years.] 

Then comes the Twenty-ninth Dynasty of Kings 
of Tanis in <7> generations for 39 years ; and finally 
the Thirtieth Dynasty consists of one King of Tanis 
for 18 years. The sum total of all the 30 Dynasties 
comprises 36,525 years. 

If this total is broken up, or divided, 25 times into 
periods of 1461 years, it reveals the periodic return 
of the Zodiac which is commonly referred to in 
Egyptian and Greek books, that is, its revolution 
from one point back to that same point again, 
namely, the first minute of the first degree of the 
equinoctial sign of the Zodiac, the Ram as it is 
called by them, according to the account given in 
The General Discourses of Hermés and in the 
Cyranides. 

Hence it was, I suppose, that Claudius Ptolemaeus ! 
announced that the ready astronomical tables should 
be calculated in periods of 25 years .. . 

Hence, too, the lack of harmony between such 
systems and our Holy Scriptures, as well as between 
one system and another, may be explained by the 
fact that this Egyptian record, which is held to 
be of great antiquity, assigns an immense period 
to Héphaestus, and to the remaining 29 ? Dynasties 
36,525 years, although Héphaestus ruled over Egypt 

1Claudius Ptolemaeus, the famous mathematician, 
astronomer, and geographer, c. A.D. 100-178: for his Ready 
Tables see p. 5 in the other section of this volume. 


2 An obviously incorrect summary of the enumeration 
of Dynasties given above. 
231 


App. ΠῚ PSEUDO-MANETHO 


τῆς Αἰγύπτου βασιλεύσαντος, ὡς δειχθήσεται ἐν τῷ 
δέοντι τόπῳ. 
> , > / ~ 
Ὃ δὲ παρ᾽ Αἰγυπτίοις ἐπισημότατος Mavebd 
~ ~ , ~ 
περὶ τῶν αὐτῶν λ΄ δυναστειῶν γράψας, ἐκ τούτων 
δηλαδὴ λαβὼν τὰς ἀφορμάς, κατὰ πολὺ διαφωνεῖ 
περὶ τοὺς χρόνους πρὸς ταῦτα, καθὼς ἔστι καὶ ἐκ 
τῶν προειρημένων ἡμῖν ἀνωτέρω μαθεῖν καὶ ἐκ τῶν 
ἑξῆς λεχθησομένων. τῶν γὰρ ἐν τοῖς τρισὶ τόμοις 
A , 
pry’ γενεῶν ἐν δυναστείαις A’ ἀναγεγραμμένων, 
αὐτῷ" ὁ χρόνος τὰ πάντα συνῆξεν ἔτη γῴφνε΄, 
5 / ~ om ~ / \ / 
ἀρξάμενα τῷ ,abms’ ἔτει τοῦ κόσμου Kal λήξαντα 
> \ / 2 A ” ” \ ~ "Ar 4 ὃ 
εἰς τὸ ερμζ΄ ? κοσμικὸν ἔτος, ἤτοι πρὸ τῆς AAcEdvd- 
ρου τοῦ Μακεδόνος κοσμοκρατορίας ἔτη ποῦ ιε΄. 
Ἔκ τούτων οὖν ἀφελών τις τὰ πρὸ τοῦ κατα- 
κλυσμοῦ χνς΄ πρὸς ἀναπλήρωσιν τῶν Bopp ἐξ 
Adam ἕως τοῦ “κατακλυσμοῦ͵ ὡς ψευδῆ καὶ ἀνύ- 
παρκτα, καὶ τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ ἕως τῆς 
πυργοποιΐας καὶ συγχύσεως τῶν γλωσσῶν. Kal 
~ ~ > ~ , - ~ A > A 
διασπορᾶς τῶν ἐθνῶν φλδ΄, ἕξει σαφῶς τὴν ἀρχὴν 
τῆς Αἰγυπτιακῆς βασιλείας ἐκ τοῦ πρώτου βα- 
σιλεύσαντος τῆς Αἰγύπτου Μεστραΐμ, τοῦ καὶ 
Μήνεος λεγομένου παρὰ τῷ Mavebd, ἀπὸ τοῦ 
μβψος" ἔτους τοῦ ἐξ ᾿δὰμ ἕως Νεκταναβῶ τοῦ 
ἐσχάτου βασιλέως Αἰγύπτου, ὡς εἶναι τὰ πάντα 
> \ a. a - > ~ ~ ” 
ἀπὸ Μεστραΐῖμ ἕως tod αὐτοῦ Νεκταναβῶ ἔτη 
, Δ ” θ e με, > ‘ 
,Brée’, ἃ καὶ ἔφθασεν, ὡς προείρηται, εἰς TO κοσ- 
A / 3 » ‘ ~ “AX / ὃ “- / 
μικὸν ερμζ' ὃ ἔτος πρὸ τῆς Ἀλεξάνδρου τοῦ κτίστου 
ἀρχῆς ἔτεσι ιε΄ ἐγγύς. 


' Boeckh: αὐτῶν codd., probably corrupt. 


232 


THE OLD CHRONICLE App. III 


many years after the Flood and the Building of the 
Tower, as will be shown in the appropriate place. 

The illustrious Egyptian Manetho, writing of 
these same 30 Dynasties, and obviously taking this 
as his starting-point, is widely divergent thereafter 
in the dates he gives, as one may learn both from 
what I have already said above, and from the re- 
marks that will follow immediately. For in his 
three books, 113 generations are recorded in 30 
Dynasties, and the time which he assigns amounts 
in all to 3555 years, beginning with Anno mundi 
1586 and ending with 5147 [5141], or some 15 years 
before the-conquest of the world by Alexander of 
Macedon. 

If therefore one subtracts from this total the 656 
years before the Flood in order to make up [with 
1586] the 2242 years from Adam to the Flood,— 
these 656 years being regarded as falsely assigned or 
non-existent,—and the 534 years from the Flood to 
the Building of the Tower, the Confusion of Tongues, 
and the Dispersion of the Peoples, one will clearly 
find the rise of the kingdom of Egypt under the first 
Egyptian king, Mestraim, who is by Manetho called 
Ménés, which began in the year 2776, the year of 
Adam, and continued down to Nectanabé, the last 
king of Egypt. Thus the sum total from Mestraim 
down to this Nectanabé is 2365 years, which takes 
us, as has already been stated, to Anno mundi 5147 
[5141], approximately 15 years before the rule of 
Alexander the Founder. 


21. ερμα΄. 3 ερμα΄, marginal note in Goar. 


233 


APPENDIX IV. 
‘H ΒΙΒΛΟΣ ΤῊΣ ΣΏΘΕΩΣ Ἢ Ὁ Kynikos KYKAOS, 
Syncellus, p. 170. 


Αἰγύπτου τῆς πάλαι Meorpaias βασιλέων 
ἔτη. 


- 


Meorpaip ὃ καὶ Μήνης, ἔτη re’. 
Κουρώδης, ἔτη Ey’. 

Ἀρίσταρχος, ἔτη Xd’. 

Σπάνιος, ἔτη As’. 

καὶ ς΄, βασιλέων δυοῖν ἀνεπιγράφων ἔτη of’. 
᾿Ωσιροπίς,, ἔτη Ky’. 

Σεσόγχωσις, ἔτη pb’. 

ἈΜμενέμης, ἔτη KO’. 


BI YY WEA 


~ 


Syncellus, p. 179. 


ι΄ Ἄμασις, ἔτη β'. 

ια΄ ᾿ἀκεσέφθρης, ἔτη ty’. 
iB’ ᾿ἀγχορεύς, ἔτη θ'. 
ιγ΄ Appriogs, ἔτη δ'. 


1Cod. Β : ὁ Σάραπις Goar, Dindorf. 


1The Book of Séthis which Syncellus believed to be the 
genuine Manetho, but which in its original form was based 
upon Eusebius and Josephus, is dated by Gutschmid to the 


234 


APPENDIX IV. 
Tue Boox or Soruis! or Tue SOruHic CyYc.e. 


(From Syncellus.) 
The years of the kings of Egypt, called Mestraea of 


old. 


1. Mestraim, also called Ménés, 35 years. 
2. Kourédés, 63 years. 
3. Aristarchus, 34 years. 
4. Spanius, 36 years. 
5 and 6. Two kings, unrecorded, 72 years. 
7. Osiropis, 23 years. 
8. Sesonchésis, 49 years. 
9. Amenemés, 29 years. 
10. Amasis, 2 years. 
11. Acesephthrés, 13. 
12. Anchoreus, 9 years. 
13. Armiysés, 4 years. 


third century after Christ. It is not possible to divide 
the kings of this ‘* Cycle ’’ into dynasties, for their sequence 
is unchronological: e.g. 18-24 belong to Dynasties XIX. 
and XX., 26-29, 32 to the Hyksés period, 33-48 to Dynasty 
XVIII., 49, 58 to Dynasty XIX., 50, 51 to Dynasty 
XXVI., 59-61 to Dynasty I., 63-67 to Dynasty XXI., 
68-70 to Dynasty XXIII., 74 to Dynasty XXIV., 75-77 
to Dynasty XXV., and 79-86 to Dynasty XXVI. 

The Book of Séthis includes names taken from another 
source than Manetho, 


235 


App. IV PSEUDO-MANETHO 


ὃ Xapots, érn ip" 
ιε΄ Μιαμούς, ἔτη ιδ΄. 
is’ Ἡμεσῆσις, ἔτη ξε΄. 
ιζ΄ Οὔσης, ἔτη v’. 

un’ ‘Papeons, ἔτη κθ΄. 


Syncellus, p. 189, 


ιθ' Ῥαμεσομενής" ἔτη ιε΄. 
K Οὐσιμάρη," ἔτη Aa’. 

κα΄ Ῥαμεσσήσεως, ἔτη κγ΄. 
KB’ Ῥαμεσσαμένω, ἔτη ιθ'. 

Οὗτος πρῶτος Φαραὼ ἐν τῇ θείᾳ γραφῇ 
μνημονεύεται. ἐπὶ τούτου ὁ πατριάρχης 
᾿Αβραὰμ κατῆλθεν εἰς Αἴγυπτον. 

ky’ Ῥαμεσσῆ ᾿Ιουβασσῆ, ἔτη AO’. 


Syncellus, p. 193. 


κδ΄ Ῥαμεσσῆ Οὐάφρου, ἔτη x6’. 
κε΄ Κόγχαρις, ἔτη ε΄. 
Τούτῳ τῷ ε΄ ἔτει τοῦ Ke’ βασιλεύ- 
σαντος Koyydpews τῆς Αἰγύπτου ἐπὶ τῆς 


'B: ῬΡαμεσσομενής A. ΞΒ : Οὐσιμάρης A. 


1 ΤῊ 6 name Chamois is probably the Greek form of the 
name Khamuas: for Khamuas, the principal son of 
Ramessés II., see Griffith, Stories of the High Priests, 
De 2D. 2 


236 


THE BOOK OF SOTHIS App. IV 


14. Chamois,! 12 years. 

15. Miamias, 14 years. 

16. Amesésis, 65 years. 

17. Usés, 50 years. 

18. Ramesés, 29 years. 

19. Rames(s)omenés, 15 years. 
20. Usimaré(s),” 31 years. 

21. Ramessésedés,° 23 years. 
22. Ramessamené, 19 years. 

He is the first Pharaoh mentioned in 
the Holy Scriptures. In his reign the 
patriarch Abraham went down _ into 
Egypt.’ 

23. Ramessé Iubassé, 39 years. 
24. Ramessé, son of Uaphrés,°* 29 years. 
25. Concharis, 5 years. 

In this 5th year of Concharis, the 25th 

king of Egypt, during the Sixteenth 


2 The name Usimaré(s) is the first part of the praenomen 
of Ramessés II.: see p. 221 n. 4. 

Τὸ is tempting to see in this name the Egyptian 
Ramesese-o, “᾿ Ramessés the Great,’’ although this term, 
so commonly used in modern times, is not found in 
Egyptian records (B.G.). 

4On Abraham’s descent into Egypt, see Peet, Egypt and 
the Old Testament, 1922, pp. 47 ff. (Abraham went down into 
Egypt in the First Intermediate Period, during Dynasties 
VII.-X., and left Egypt before 2081 B.c.) Sir L. Woolley, 
on the other hand, is satisfied with the traditional date of 
the birth of Abraham at Ur, c. 2000 B.c.; but he believes 
that the patriarch was not a single man, but a composite 
character (Abram, Abraham)—see Abraham: Recent 
Discoveries and Hebrew Origins, 1936. 

δ This description “βοὴ of Uaphrés”’ is a remarkable 
anachronism: a king of Dynasty XIX. or XX. is said to 
be the son of a king of Dynasty XXVI. 


> 


237 


App. IV PSEUDO-MANETHO 


Ks’ 


238 


ts’ δυναστείας τοῦ Κυνικοῦ λεγο- 
/ ΄ A ~ ~ > A 
μένου κύκλου παρὰ τῷ Mavebd, ἀπὸ 
“-- , / ‘ > ~ 
τοῦ πρώτου βασιλέως καὶ οἰκιστοῦ Μεσ- 
τραΐμ τῆς Αἰγύπτου, πληροῦνται ἔτη ψ', 
βασιλέων κε΄, τοῦτ᾽ ἔστιν ἀπὸ τοῦ καθολι- 
κοῦ κοσμικοῦ ,Bibos’ ἔτους, καθ᾽ ὃν χρόνον 
ἡ διασπορὰ γέγονεν, ἐν τῷ Ad’ ἔτει τῆς 
ἡγεμονίας ᾿Αρφαξαδ, ε' δὲ ἔτει τοῦ Φαλέκ. 
καὶ διεδέξαντο Τανῖται βασιλεῖς δ', 
« A > / > 4 poe | ~ , 
ot καὶ ἐβασίλευσαν Αἰγύπτου ἐπὶ τῆς ιζ 
δυναστείας ἔτη avd',! ὡς ἑξῆς ἐστοιχείωται. 


Syncellus, p. 195. 


Σιλίτης, ἔτη ιθ΄, πρῶτος τῶν ς΄ τῆς ιζ' 


δυναστείας παρὰ Mavebd. 


Syncellus, p. 204. 


Βαίων, ἔτη μδ΄. 
Ἀπαχνάς, ἔτη ds’. 
Ἄφωφις, ἔτη ξα΄. 


Τοῦτον λέγουσί τινες πρῶτον κληθῆναι 
Φαραώ, καὶ τῷ τετάρτῳ ἔτει τῆς βασιλείας 
αὐτοῦ τὸν ᾿Ιωσὴφ ἐλθεῖν εἰς Αἴγυπτον δοῦ- 
λον. οὗτος κατέστησε τὸν ᾿Ιωσὴφ κύριον 
Αἰγύπτου καὶ πάσης τῆς βασιλείας αὐτοῦ 
τῷ iC’ ἔτει τῆς ἀρχῆς αὐτοῦ, ἡνίκα καὶ τὴν 
τῶν ὀνείρων διασάφησιν ἔμαθε παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ, 
καὶ τῆς θείας συνέσεως αὐτοῦ διὰ πείρας 


1 gv’ corr. Miller. 


THE BOOK OF SOTHIS App. IV 


Dynasty of the Séthic Cycle as it is called 
in Manetho, the total of years from the 
first king and founder of Egypt, Mestraim, 
is 700 belonging to 25 kings, i.e. from the 
general cosmic year 2776, in which the 
Dispersion took place in the 34th year of 
the rule of Arphaxad ! and the Sth year 
of Phalec.? Next in the succession were 
4 kings of Tanis, who ruled Egypt in the 
Seventeenth Dynasty for 254 [259] years, 
according to the following computation. 


26. Silités (the first of the 6 kings of the Seven- 


teenth Dynasty in Manetho), 19 years. 


27. Baién, 44 years. 
28. Apachnas, 36 years. 
29. Aphéphis, 61 years. 


Some say that this king was at first 
called Pharaoh, and that in the 4th year 
of his kingship Joseph came as a slave into 
Egypt.* He appointed Joseph lord of 
Egypt and all his kingdom in the 17th 
year of his rule, having learned from him 
the interpretation of the dreams and 
having thus proved his divine wisdom. 


1 Arphaxad, son of Shem: 0.7. Genesis x. 22. See p. 26 


2 Phalec or Peleg (= division): “for in his days was the 
earth divided ”’ (Genesis x. 25). Cf. the name of the town 
Phaliga on the Euphrates,—not that the patriarch Peleg 
is to be connected directly with this town (W. F. Albright, 
The Archaeology of Palestine and the Bible *, 1932-3, p. 210). 

3 For the Sojourn in Egypt during the Hyksés period, 
see Peet, Egypt and the Old Testament, pp. 73 ff.; Albright, 
The Archaeology of Palestine and the Bible*, pp. 143 f.; 
Garstang, The Heritage of Solomon, 1934, p. 147. 


239 


App. IV PSEUDO-MANETHO 


γέγονεν. ἡ δὲ θεία γραφὴ καὶ τὸν ἐπὶ 
τοῦ “ABpaap βασιλέα Αἰγύπτου Φαραὼ 
καλεῖ. 


Syncellus, p. 232. 
N’ Σέθως, ery ν΄ 
, / ” , \ ia th A \ 
Aa’ Κήρτως, ἔτη κθ΄, κατὰ ᾿Ιώσηππον, κατὰ δὲ 
τὸν Μανεθῶ, ἔτη pd’. 
λβ΄ Aan), ἔτη x’. 

Οὗτος προσέθηκε τῶν ἐνιαυτῶν τὰς ε΄ 
ἐπαγομένας, καὶ ἐπὶ αὐτοῦ, ὥς φασιν, 
ἐχρημάτισεν τξε΄ ἡμερῶν ὁ Αἰγυπτιακὸς 
ἐνιαυτός, τξ΄ μόνον ἡμερῶν πρὸ τούτου 
μετρούμενος. ἐπὶ αὐτοῦ 6 μόσχος θεο- 

\ > ? / 
ποιηθεὶς “Amis ἐκλήθη. 
λγ΄ Ἄμωσις 6 καὶ Τέθμωσις, ἔτη Ks’. 


Syncellus, p. 278. 
AS’ Χεβρών, ἔτη ιγ΄. 
Ae’ Apepudis,! ἔτη ιε΄. 
As’ ἈἈμενσῆς, ἔτη ια΄. 
AC’ Μισφραγμούθωσις, ἔτη ts". 
An’ Μισφρής, ἔτη κγ΄. 
λθ’ Τούθμωσις, ἔτη AO’. 


Syncellus, p. 286. 
bw’ Ἀμενῶφθις, ἔτη Ad’. 
Οὗτος ὁ Apevddbis ἐστιν ὁ Μέμνων 
εἶναι νομιζόμενος καὶ φθεγγόμενος λίθος " 
240 


30. 
31. 


32. 


33. 
34. 
35. 
36. 
37. 
38. 
39. 
40. 


THE BOOK OF SOTHIS App. IV 


The Holy Scriptures, however, give the 
name of Pharaoh also to the king of Egypt 
in the time of Abraham. 
Sethés, 50 years. 
Cértés, according to Josephus, 29 years; 
according to Manetho, 44 years. 
Aséth, 20 years. 

This king added the 5 intercalary days 
to the year:! in his reign, they say, the 
Egyptian year became a year of 365 days, 
being previously reckoned as 360 days 
only. In his time the bull-calf was deified 
and called Apis. 

Amésis, also called Tethmésis, 26 years. 
Chebrén, 13 years. 

Amemphis, 15 years. 

Amensés, 1] years 

Misphragmuthdsis, 16 years. 

Misphrés, 23 years. 

Tuthmdsis, 39 years. 

Amen6phthis, 34 years. 

This is the king who was reputed to be 
Memnoén and a speaking statue. Many 


1 See p. 99 n. 3. 


1B: "᾿Αμεμφής A. 


24] 


App. IV 


pe’ 
ps’ 


PSEUDO-MANETHO 


ὃν λίθον χρόνοις ὕστερον Καμβύσης ὁ 


Περσῶν τέμνει, νομίζων εἶναι γοητείαν ἐν 


αὐτῷ, ὡς Πολύαινος ὁ ᾿Αθηναῖος ἱστορεῖ. 
Αἰθίοπες ἀπὸ ᾿Ινδοῦ ποταμοῦ ἀναστάντες 
πρὸς τῇ Αἰγύπτῳ ᾧκησαν. 


a’ Ὦρος, ἔτη μη΄. 

, Axevxepys, ἔτη Ke’. 
Aéwpis, ἔτη κθ΄. 

΄ Χενχερής, ἔτη κε΄. 


scaring ct Ρ. 293. 


Axeppys, ἔτη η΄ ἢ καὶ λ΄. 
Αρμαῖος, ὁ καὶ Δαναός, ἔτη θ'. 


"4 A 
ρμαῖος, 6 καὶ Aavads, φεύγων τὸν 
ἀδελφὸν ἹΡαμεσσῆν τὸν καὶ Αἴγυπτον" 
ἐκπίπτει τῆς κατ᾽ Αἴγυπτον βασιλείας 
αὐτοῦ, εἰς ᾿Ελλάδα τε ἀφικνεῖται. ‘Pa- 
~ \ e 19 A > ~ ἰς A ΝΜ 

μεσσῆς δὲ, ὁ ἀδελφὸς αὐτοῦ, ὁ καὶ Αἴγυπ- 
τος καλούμενος, ἐβασίλευσεν Αἰγύπτου ἔτη 
En’, μετονομάσας τὴν χώραν Αἴγυπτον τῷ 
ἰδίῳ ὀνόματι, ἥτις πρότερον Μεστραία, 
παρ᾽ Ἕλλησι δὲ Aepia ἐλέγετο. Δαναὸς 
δὲ, 6 καὶ Αρμαῖος, κρατήσας τοῦ Ἄργους 

Ἄν» > \ PK / τ p ή ΡΥ 
καὶ ἐκβαλὼν Σθένελον τὸν Κροτωποῦ ‘Ap- 
γείων ἐβασίλευσε. καὶ οἱ ἀπόγονοι αὐτοῦ 

> DEA oh 4, : οὖ > 
μετ᾽ αὐτὸν Δαναΐδαι καλούμενοι ἐπ᾿ Εὐ- 
ρυσθέα τὸν Σθενέλου τοῦ Περσέως. μεθ᾽ 
ovs ot Πελοπίδαι ἀπὸ [1]έλοπος παρα- 
λαβόντες τὴν ἀρχὴν, ὧν πρῶτος ᾿Ατρεύς. 


1 Αἰγύπτιον codd.: Αἴγυπτον Scaliger: καὶ add. Miller. 


242 


41. 
42. 
43. 
44, 
45. 
46. 


THE BOOK OF SOTHIS App. IV 


years later Cambysés, the Persian king, 
cut this statue in two, deeming that there 
was sorcery in it, as Polyaenus of Athens? 
relates. 

The Ethiopians, removing from the 
River Indus, settled near Egypt. 

Orus, 48 years. 

Achencherés, 25 years. 

Athoris, 29 years. 

Chencherés, 26 years. 

Acherrés, 8 or 30 years. 

Armaeus, also called Danaus, 9 years. 

This king, fleeing from his brother 
Ramessés, also called Aegyptus, was 
driven from his kingdom of Egypt and 
came to Greece. Ramessés, his brother, 
whose other name was Aegyptus, ruled 
Egypt for 68 years, changing the name of 
his country to Egypt after his own name. 
Its previous name was Mestraea, and 
among the Greeks Aeria. Now Danaus 
or Armaeus took possession of Argos and, 
driving out Sthenelus the son of Crotépus, 
ruled over the Argives. His descendants 
thereafter were called Danaidae down to 
Eurystheus son of Sthenelus, the son of 
Perseus. Next to these, after Pelops the 
Pelopidae succeeded to the kingdom: 
the first of these was Atreus. 


1 Polyaenus of Athens (? of Sardis or of Macedonia), a 
writer of history, lived in the time of Gaius (Caligula). 


243 


App. IV PSEUDO-MANETHO 


Syncellus, p. 302. 


pl’ Ῥαμεσσῆς, 6 καὶ Αἴγυπτος, ἔτη ξη΄. 
μη΄ ᾿Αμένωφις, ἔτη η΄. 

pO’ Θούωρις, ἔτη ιζ'. 

v’ Νεχεψώς, ἔτη ιθ'. 

va’ Ψαμμουθίς, ἔτη ιγ΄. 

vp’ —, ἔτη δ΄. 

vy’ Κήρτως, ἔτη κ΄ 

vd’ 'Ῥάμψις, ἔτη με΄. 

ve’ Αμενσής, ὁ καὶ ᾿Δμμενέμης, ἔτη xs’. 


Syncellus, p. 319. 


vs’ ᾿Οχυράς, ἔτη ιδ΄. 
νζ΄ ᾿Αμενδής, ἔτη κζ΄. 
νη΄ Θούωρις, ἔτη ν΄. 

Οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ παρ᾽ ‘Oujpw Πόλυβος, 
᾿Αλκάνδρας ἀνήρ, ἐν ᾿Οδυσσείᾳ φερόμενος, 
παρ᾽ ᾧ φησι τὸν Μενέλαον σὺν τῇ ᾿λένῃ 
μετὰ τὴν ἅλωσιν Τροίας κατῆχθαι πλανώ- 
μενον. 

νθ' Ἄθωθις, 6 καὶ Φουσανός, ἐφ᾽ οὗ σεισμοὶ 
κατὰ τὴν Αἴγυπτον ἐγένοντο, μηδέπω γε- 
γονότες ἐν αὐτῇ πρὸ τούτου, ἔτη κη΄. 
ξ΄ Κενκένης, ἔτη λθ΄. 
fa’ Οὐέννεφις, ἔτη pp’? 
' Corr. Goar: us’ codd. 2 λβ΄ cod. B. 
244 


59. 


60. 
61. 


THE BOOK ΟΕ ΒΟΤΗΙΒ App. IV 


. Ramessés, also called Aegyptus, 68 years. 
. Amendéphis, 8 years. 

. Thuéris, 17 years. 

. Nechepsés,! 19 years. 

. Psammuthis, 13 years. 

. —, 4 years. 

. Cértés,? 20 years. 

. Rampsis, 45 years. 

. Amensés, also called Ammenemés, 26 years. 
. Ochyras, 14 years. 

. Amendés, 27 years. 

. Thudris, 50 years. 


This is the Polybus of Homer, who ap- 
pears in the Odyssey as husband of Al- 
candra: the poet tells how Menelaus and 
Helen dwelt with him in their wanderings 
after the capture of Troy. 

Athéthis, also called Phusanus,* 28 years. 

In his reign earthquakes occurred in 
Egypt, although previously unknown 
there. 


Cencenés, 39 years. 
Uennephis, 42 years. 


1See p. 211 n. 2. Nechepsds appears again as 
Nechepsus, No. 80. 

2 53-58 may be the 6 kings of Dynasty XIX., some of 
them repeated. 53 Cért6és may be Sethés: 54 Rampsis 
= 47 Ramessés: 55 Amensés = Amenmesés: while 
Thuéris appears as 58 and 49. 

8 With Phusanus ¢f. Psusennés of Dynasty XX1. 


245 


App. IV PSEUDO-MANETHO 


Syncellus, p. 332. 


&p’ Σουσακείμ, ἔτη Ad’. 

Σουσακεὶμ Λίβυας καὶ Αἰθίοπας Kat 
Τρωγλοδύτας παρέλαβε πρὸ τῆς ‘Iepov- 
σαλήμ. 

ἔἕγ΄ Ψούενος, ἔτη κε΄. 

£8’ Αμμενῶφις, ἔτη 6. 

fe’ Νεφεχέρης, ἔτη ς΄. 

és’ Σαΐτης, ἔτη ιε΄. 

ξζ' Ψινάχης, ἔτη θ΄. 

En’ Πετουβάστης, ἔτη pd’. 
£0’ ᾿Οσώρθων, ἔτη θ'. 

o Wdappos, ery vw’. 

oa’ Koyxapts, ἔτη Ka’. 


Syncellus, p. 347. 


of’ ᾿Οσόρθων, ἔτη ιε΄. 
oy’ Τακαλῶφις, ἔτη ιγ΄. 
08’ Βόκχωρις, ἔτη μδ΄. 
Βόκχωρις Αἰγυπτίοις ἐνομοθέτει, ἐφ᾽ οὗ 
λόγος ἀρνίον φθέγξασθαι. 
οε΄ Σαβάκων Αἰθίοψ, ἔτη ιβ΄. 
Οὗτος, τὸν Βόκχωριν αἰχμάλωτον λαβών, 
ζῶντα ἔκαυσεν. 
os’ Σεβήχων, ἔτη of’. 
246 


THE BOOK OF SOTHIS' App. IV 


62. Susakeim,! 34 years. 
This king brought up Libyans, Ethio- 
pians, and Tréglodytes * before Jerusalem. 
63. Psuenus, 25 years. 
64. Ammen6phis, 9 years. 
65. Nephecherés, 6 years. 
66. Saités, 15 years. 
67. Psinachés, 9 years. 
68. Petubastés, 44 years, 
69. Osérthén, 9 years. 
70. Psammus, 10 years. 
71. Concharis, 21 years. 
72. Osdrth6n, 15 years. 
73. Tacaléphis, 13 years. 
74. Bocchoris, 44 years. 
This king made laws for the Egyptians: 
in his time report has it that alamb spoke.? 
75. Sabacén, an Ethiopian, 12 years. 
This king, taking Bocchéris captive, 
burned him alive. 


76. Sebéch6n, 12 years. 


1 Susakeim, apparently, is Shoshenk, or Sesonchésis, the 
first king of Dynasty XXII. (Fr. 60, 1): Josephus, Antiq., 
viii. § 210, has Susakos. 

2In O.T. 2 Chron. xii. 3 it is said that Shishak brought 
up, along with the Ethiopians, the Lubims (Libyans) 
and the Sukkiims : in the LXX the last are the Tréglodytes, 
i.e. the “ Cave-dwellers ’’ along the west shore of the Red 
Sea (see Strabo, xvi. 4. 17). G. W. Murray, Sons of 
Ishmael, 1935, p. 18, suspects that the Ethiopians were 
negro troops or perhaps Beja nomads (7.e. Bedouin). “‘ At 
any rate Shishak, like the great Mohammed Ali after him, 
realized the importance of Bedouin auxiliaries on a desert 
campaign.”’ 

5 See p. 164 n, 2. *See p. 166 η. 2. 


247 


Arp. IV PSEUDO-MANETHO 


Syncellus, p. 360. 
of’ Ταράκης, ἔτη κ΄. 
on’ ᾿Δμαῆς, ἔτη λη΄. 
of’ Στεφινάθης, ἔτη κζ΄. 
nm’ Νεχεψός, ἔτη ιγ΄. 


Syncellus, p. 396. 
πα’ Nexaw, ἔτη η΄. 
np’ Ψαμμήτιχος, ἔτη ιδ΄. 
πγ΄ Νεχαὼ β' Φαραώ, ἔτη θ'. 
πδ' Ψαμουθὴς ἕτερος, ὁ καὶ Ψαμμήτιχος, 
ἔτη ιζ΄. 
me’ Οὔαφρις,, ἔτη Ad’. 
ns’ Ἄμωσις," ἔτη ν΄. 


1 Οὐαφρής codd. Ξ"Αμασις codd. 


248 


85. 
86. 


THE BOOK OF SOTHIS' App. IV 


. Taracés, 20 years. 

. Amaés,! 38 years. 

. Stephinathés, 27 years. 

. Nechepsus, 13 years. 

. Nechaé, 8 years. 

. Psammétichus, 14 years. 

. Nechaé II. (Pharaoh), 9 years. 

. Psamuthés the Second, also called Psamméti- 


chus, 17 years. 
Uaphris, 34 years. 
Amésis, 50 years. 


1Amaés corresponds to Ammeris or Ameres_ the 
Ethiopian, Fr. 69, 1, 7.e. Tanutamtin, Dynasty XXVI. 


249 








7, 
Bi Me ‘ 
πὰ = aM 


“ 











Eileithyiaspolis 
Apallonogpo ὶ 














Edward Stanford 1", 





PLATE 1 





PLATE II 





THE PALERMO STONE. 


Old Egyptian Annals of the Kings. Dimensions of 
fragment: c. 174 inches high by 10 inches wide. 


PEALE ELE 


| | ΠῚ My ih 
: ' FAD ij τὰ iW Wie ἢ - 
| WH | 
rhactnere hee | : ΠΟΙ ΠῚ Ἢ 


“3 fi yet lene 






FACSIMILE OF P. Bapen 4. 59, 


Papyrus of an Epitome of Manetho, v./A.D. 


PLATE IV 





INDEX TO MANETHO. 


Abraham, 25, 27, 237, 241. 
Acenchérés I. (King), 103, 109, 


Ammanemés, 67, 71. 
Ammenemés, 63, 65, 69, 71; (1.), 


catia vl ah A 


Peete S%ial 4191 odd οὐ, tinge δὴ ἀ69, 151. 
Achen τὴν ἐς slood) nee 550 AP opphe. 
Achés, δῷ Ln seer curs ‘0 


Achéris, ag 181. 
Achthoés, 61. 
er ao 7, 11, 13, 25, 27 oe 


ee 
ΣῊΝ Li dA Spt. OM 1884 
Aeria, 243. 

Acritae, 227: ’ 

escu us, le 

Area drlwizseids iy 489 
senile, soldat) ὁ 


Air, 197,1 

Alcandra, ΤΌΝΟΝ 

Alcandin, hgh ? 

Alexandria, 193, 195. 

Amaes, 249. 

Amasis, 235. 

Amemphis, 241. 

Amendés, 245. 

Amenemés, 235. 

Amendph, Amenéphath, 113. 

Amendphis [., 101, 109, 115, 
? 245, 2247; 1. 101, 109; 
Iil., 103, 109, 113, 115, 4179 
AV, *103, 111, 113, 117, 119, 121) 
123° n. i. 127, 129, 131, 133, 137, 
139, 143. 

—. son of Hapu, 123, 125, 


Amendphthis, 111, 155, 157, 241. 
A (is), 111, 115, 241, 245. 
Amerés, 69, 1 

Amersis, Pad 

Amesésis, 237. 

Amessé, 109. 

Amessis, 101, 


BOI DssTONT 
ΟΣ TH 9484 


ΜΈΣ, ἐπ 08 }Η to 
mésis (Amosés, Amusis), 19, 113, 


id's ddiw a Yo far 2s 241, 


OF, iqs194 


33 8. 
ΝΣ ORR Tee pro, 221. 


Anchoreus, 235. 


ieee uit 


Reaches ΚΝ 


93, HOdo lb 1474189, 908, 


Pac TH 

Apollodorus, 213. 

pores (Aphobis, Aphdéphis), 83 
91, 97, 99, 239. 

Arabs, 85. 

Archaés, 99. 

Archlés, 91, 97. 

Arés, 17, 23, 217. 

Argives, 107, 117, 119, 243. 

Argos, 19, 107, 117, 119, 243. 

tarchus, 235. 

Armaeus, 243. 

Armais, 117, 119. 

Armesis, 115. 

Armlysés, 235. 

Arphaxad, 27, 239. 

Arsés, 185, 187. 

Arsinoite nome, 69, 71, 73. 

Artabanus, 175. 

Artaxerxés, 175, 177. 


251 


PLATE IV 





Serapis seated, with Cerberus at his Hes (ibid., 
No. 872). 


(3) Serapis reclining, an eagle in his right hand, 
a sceptre in his left (Babelon et Rejpach, 
Recueil général des monnaies grecques, es 





INDEX TO MANETHO. 


Abraham, 25, 27, 237, 241. 

Acenchérés g 
119; II. (King), 103, 109. 

Acenchérés (Queen), 103, 109. 

Acesephthrés, 235. 

Achencherés, 243. 

Achenchersés, 115. 

Acherrés, 113, 117, 119, 243. 

Achés, 43. 

Achéris, 179, 181. 

Achthoés, 61. 

Adam, 7, 11, 13, 25, 27, 233. 

‘Aeguptiaca, 99. 

ee aie Cie Lip 12.110. 191 

4 

Aeria, 243. 

Aeritae, 227. 

Aesculapius, 45. 


Africanus, 25, 27, 29, 37, 43, 47, 57, 


111, 113, 115, 117. 
Agathodaemdn, 15, 209. 
Air, 197. 
Alcandra, 149, 151, 245. 
Alexander the Great, 187, 233. 
Alexandria, 193, 195. 
Amaes, 249. 
Amasis, 235. 
Amemphis, 241. 
Amendeés, 245. 
Amenemés, 235. 
Amenéph, Amenéphath, 113. 


Amendphis I., 101, 109, 115, 
2245, 2247; II., 101, 100; 
ἘΠῚ... 103, 109, 113, 115, 117; 
TV., 103, 111, 113, 117, 119, 121, 
123 n. 1, 127, 129, 131, 133, 137, 


139, 143. 


Amendphis, son of Hapu, 123, 125, 


129. 
Amendphthis, 111, 155, 157, 241. 
Amenses (-is), 111, 115, 241, 245. 
Amerés, 69, 173. 
Amersis, 111. 
Amesésis, 237. 
Amessé, 109. 
Amessis, 101, 


I. (King), 103, 109, 


Ammanemeés, 67, 71. 

Ammenemés, 63, 65, 69, 71; (I.), 
223; (I1.), 225, 245. 

Ammenem(n)és, 149, 151. 

Am(m)enephthés(-is), 149, 151. 

Ammenéphis: see Amendphis. 

Ammeris, 171. 

Ammon, 17, 189, 221. 

Amophis, 117. 

Amés, 111, 113. 

Amésis (Amosés, Amusis), 19, 113, 
ass 117, 171, 173, 199, 201, 241, 

49. 

Amfin, 189. 

Amuthartaeus, 225. 

Amyrtaeus (-teos, -tes), 179, 221. 

Anchoreus, 235. 

Annianus, 11 ἢ. 2, 17 n. 8. 

Andy phis, 217. 

Anubis (-es), 17, 19. 

Apachnan (-as), 83, 239. 

Apappis, 221. 

pages 23. 

Api6n, 1 

seer came "37, 39, 129, 137, 189, 203, 


on, 97, 99, 239. 
Arabs, 85 
Archaés, 99. 
Archlés, 91, 97. 
Arés, 17, 23, 217. 
Argives, 107, 117, 119, 243. 
Argos, 19, 107, 117, 119, 243. 
Aristarchus, 235. 
Armaeus, 243. 
Armais, 117, 119. 
Armesis, 115. 
Armiysés, 235. 
Arphaxad, 27, 239. 
Arsés, 185, 187. 
Arsinoite nome, 69, 71, 73. 
Artabanus, 175. 
Artaxerxés, 175, 177. 


251 


INDEX 


Asclepios, 41, 43. 

Aséth, 241. 

Asia, 67, 71, 73, 89. 

Asiaties, 195. 

Assis, 83. 

Assyrians, 81, 89, 103, 171, 173. 
Athena, 191, 197, 221. 

Athens, 243. 

Athoris, 115, 243. 

Athdéthes 1., 215; 11., 215. 
Athéthis, 29, 31, 33, 215, 245. 
Atreus, 243.:- 

Auaris. 81, 87, 125, 127, 129, 137 


Babylon, 15. 

Baion, 239. 

Bebon, 189, 191. 

BérOssos, 15. 

Bicheris, 47. 

Biénechés, 29. 

Bin6éthris, 37. 

Biophis, 39. 

Bites, 5. 

Biyrés, 219. 

Bnon, 83, 91, 97. 

Bocchoris, Bochchdris, 
169, 247: 

Béchos (-us), 21, 37. 39. 

Boéthos, 35. 


Bubastis (-us), 21, 35, 37, 39, 159, 


161. 
Bubastite eee 81: 
Bydis, 5 


Cainan, 27. 


Calendar, xxviii., 99 n. 3, 233, 241. 


Cambysés, 175, 177, 245. 
Cechous, 39 (see Kaiechds). 
Cencenés, 33 (see Kenkenés), 245. 
Cenchereés, 115. 

Cerberus, 195. 

Cert6s, 241, 245. 

Chairés, 37. 

Chaidea, 15. 

Cham (Ham), 7, 23. 

Chamois, 237. 

Chebrés, 113. 

Chebrén, 101, 109, 115, 117, 241 
Chebrés, 111. 

Chencherés, 243. 

Chenerés, 37. 

Cheops, 47, 49. 

Cherés, 51. 

Cherrés, 117, 119. 


252 


165, 167. 


Chnubos, 217. 

Cho, 33 (see Kéch6mé). 
Chomaephtha, 223. 
Chéos, 37 (see Kaichéos). 
Chuthér, 223. 

Concharis, 237, 247. 


‘ Cronos, 3, 17, 23, 199, 229. 


Croté6pus, 243. 
Cyprus, 103. 


Danaidae, 2438. 

PAS 105, 107, 117, 119, 121, 
243. 
Darius) J., 175, Uwe 1|, 27o. alia. 

Darius, 3, 185, 187. 

Demeter. 197. 

Deucalion, 113. 

Diodorus, 199. 

Dionysius, 195. 

Diospolis (or Thebes}, 21, 63, 65, 
67, 69, ὙΠ 73, (an Goa S ΝΗΙ. 
115,; 117, 249), Ε151; 1 kon, 

25, 229. 
Dispersion, 213, 233, 239. 


Earth, 197. 


. Earthquakes, 35 ἢ. 3. 


Echeskosokaras, 221, 

Egregori, 11. 

Egypt, Θ; δ. 7. 15, 17. 10 ΘΕ, 
27, 29, 41, 48, 45, 47, 61, 63, 85, 
87, 89, 91, 95, 97, 101, 103, 105, 
107, Aas 115, 117, 119, 1204938; 
95: 127, 129, 133, 135, 137: 139, 
141, 143, 145, 169, 171, 173: 175, 
177, 185, 187, 189, 195, 197, 199, 
209, 211, 215, 217; 219; 231, 233, 
235, 237, 239, "241," 5.45. 260; 
Lower, 81; Upper, 81 

Egyptians, 121, 125, 129, 133, 139, 
141, 143, 145, 147, 161, 163, 191, 
195, 197, 227, 247. 

Hileithyiaspolis, 199, 203. 

Elephantine, 51, 53. 

Enoch, 11. 

Eratosthenes, 243, 220: 

Ethiopia, 9, 129, 131, 133, 137, 139, 
143. 

Ethiopian, 167, 169, 171, 173, 229, 
243, 247. 

Europe. 67, 71, 73. 

Eurystheus, 243. 

Eusebius, 11, 13, 25, 27, 29, 31, 39, 
43, 49, 57, 115, 117. 


INDEX 


Exodus, 19 n. 3, 107, 110 n. 2, 
115, 119. 


Fire, 197. 
Flood, 7, 13, 15, 25, 27; 31, 37, 47, 
49, 113, 209, 233. 


Gneuros, 217. 
Gosormiés, 217. ξ 
ἄγρθορ, 117, 119, 243. 
Greeks, 243. 


Ham, 7, 23. 

Harmais, 103, 105, 109. 

Harmess¢s Miamian, 103 

Harpocratés, 223. 

Hebrews, 119. 

Hecataeus of Abdera, xxiv., 131 
n. 2. 

Helen, 245. 

Héliopolis, 23, 35, 125, 131, 139, 
145, 199, 211. 

Hélios, 3, 15, 17, 23, 199, 227. 

Héphaestus, 3, 15, 17, 23, 197, 
199, 223, 227, 229, 231. 

Héra, 199, 201. 

Héracleopolis, 61, 63. 

Héraclés, Hercules, 17, 161, 163, 
215, 223, 2252 

Hermaeus, 121. 

Hermés, 23, 209, 215, 225. 

Hermés (Trismegistus), 209, 211. 

Hermupolis, 23. 

Herodotus, 31, 33, 47, 49, 79, 205, 
207. 

Hestia, 199. 

Homer, 149, 151, 153, 245. 

Horus, 23, 191. 

Hyks6s, 85. 

Hystaspés, 175. 


Tannas, 83. 

Imuthes, 41. 

Inachus, 19. 

Indus, River, 243. 
Iéachaz, 169, 171, 173. 
Isis, 5, 17, 189, 191, 197. 
Israel, 115. 


Jerusalem 88 n. 2, 89, 101, 119 
121, 127, 137, 141, 143, 169, 171, 
173, 247. 

Jews, 77, 107, 115. 121, 131, 171. 


173. 
Joseph. 26, 89, 97, 239 


Josephus, 77, 241. 
Judaea, 89, 119. 
Jupiter, 23. 


Kaiechés, Kaichéos, 35, 37. 
Kenkenés, 29, 31. 
Kerpherés, 43. 

Khian, 83 n. 2. 

Kings, co-existing, 8 n.1. 
Kéchémé, 29, 31. 
Kourédés, 235. 

Kyphi, 203. 


Labyrinth, 69, 71, 73. 

Lachares, Lamares (-is), Lampares, 
69, 71, 73. 

Lamb, prophetic, 164 n. 2. 

Libyans, 41, 43, 45, 247. 

Luke, 27. 


Macedon, 187. 

Magi, 177. 

Malalas, 23. 

Manetho, $,44, 25, ἘΠ: 21; 23,25, 
63, 65, 67, 69, 71, 77, 79, 85, 87, 
89) 99, 101, 107, 109, 119, 125, 
133, 135, 137, 139, 141, 143, 145, 
147, 151, 153, 155, 185, 187, 189, 
195, 197, 199, 201, 203, 205, 207, 
209, 211, 227, 233, 239, 241. 

Marés, 217, 225. 

Mars, 23. 

Medes, 105. 

Memnon, 113, 115, 117, 241. 

Memphis, 5, 9, 23, 29, 31, 33, 35, 
41, 43, 45, 49, 53, 57, 59, 81, 91, 
95, 97, 129, 215, 229. 

Memphreés, 117. 

Mempses, 35. 

Mencherés L., 1]., 47, 51, 219. 

Mendés, Mendesian, 35, 37. 39, 
179, 181. 

Menelaus, 245. 

Menes, Mén, Min, Mineus, 21, 29, 
31, 33, 215, 233, 235. 

Menthesuphis, 55. 

Méphram(m)uthdsis, 101, 109. 

Méphrés, 101, 109. 

Mercury, 23. 

Mes6chris, 43. 

Mestraea, 235, 243. 

Mestraei, 227. 

Mestraim, Mestrem, Mizraim, 7, 9, 
15, 25, 233, 235, 239. 

Methusuphis, 53. 


253 


INDEX 


Meurés, 223. 

Miabaés, 215. 

Miamifs, 237. 

Miebis, 29. 

Mieirés, 223. 

Min, Mineus: see Menes. 

Miphrés, 115. 

Misaphris, 113. 

Mispharmuthosis, 117. ἢ 

MEP eemnine’, 87, 118, 115, 

4 

Misphrés, 241. 

Mnevis, 35, 37, 39. 

Momcheiri, 215. 

Moon, 195, 197. 

Moscherés, 219. 

Moses, 25, 107, 111, 115, 119, 131, 
133, 139, 145, 147. 

Mosthés, 219. 

Muthes (-is), 181. 

Myrtaeus, 221. 


Narachéd, 23, 25. 

Nechao I., 169, 171, 173, 249; ΠΙ., 
169, 171, 173, 249. 

Nechepsds, 169, 171, 173, 245. 

Nechepsus, 249. 

Necherocheus, 21. 

Necheréchis, 43, 45. 

Necheréphés, 41. 

Nectanabé, 25, 233. 

Nectanebés (-is), 183, 185. 

Nectanebus, 183, 185. 

Nephecherés, 247. 

Nephelcherés, Nephercherés, 37, 


bl, 155) 157, 
Nepherités 1 701815 {ΠῚ 
179, 181. 


Niebais, 31, 35. 


Nile, 37, 39, 81, 125, 129, 197, 225. 


Nitécris, 55, 57, 221. 
Noah, 7, 23. 


Ocean, 197. 
Ochth6is, 61. 


dchus, 185, 187. 

Ochyras, 245. 

Odyssey, 2.45. 

Olympic festival, 161. 

Onnus, 51. 

Or, Orus, 5, 17, 19, 103, 109, 113, 
, 115, 117, 121, 243. 

Orus the grammarian, 207. 
Osarséph, 125, 131, 139, 147. 


254 


Osiris, 5, 17, 19, 23, 69, 71, 73, 181, 
139, 189, 197. 

dsiropis, 235. 

Osochér, 155, 157. 

Osorchéd, 161. 

Osorth6n, 159, 161, 163, 247. 

Osérthén, 247. 

Othius, 53. 

Othoés, 51, 68. 

Othoi, 21. 


Paapis, 123, 129. 

Pachnan, 91. 

Palaephatus, 23. 

Pammeés, 219. 

Pamphilus, 11, 25. 

Panodérus, 11, 18, 

Pelopidae, 243. 

Pelops, 243. 

Pelusium, 105, 140 n., 143. 

Pemphés, 215. 

Pepi, 221. 

Perseus, 243. 

Persian Kings, 175, 177, 185, 187, 
231, 243 


Persians, 3, 175, 185, 187. 

Peteathyrés, 223. 

Petubastés (-is), 163, 247. 

Petubatés, 161. 

Phaeth6n, 23. 

Phalec, 239. 

Pharaoh, 23, 109, 237, 239, 241, 249. 

Phidps, 53, 55. 

Phius, 53. 

Phoenicia, 91, 95, 97, 99, 103. 

Phruoré (Phuord), 225. 

Phusanus, 245. 

Pluto, 193, 195. 

Polyaenus, 243 

Polybus, 149, +61, 158, 245. 

Potter’s oracle, viii. n. ΕΝ 128 n. 1. 

Psammecherités, 171. 

Psam(m)étichus I., 169, 171, 173, 
249; IT., 169, 171, 173, 249: ΠΙ., 
171. 

Psammus, 247. 

Psammiis, 161, 163. 

Psammuthis, Psamuthés, 169, 173, 
179, 181, 245, 249. 

Psin(n)achés, 155, 157, 247. 

Psuenus, 247. 

age en I., 155, 157; IT., 155, 


Peoleiaeual Claudius, 231. 


INDEX 


Ptolemy of Mendes, vili., x., 19 
n. 3, 226 n. 1. 

Ptolemy Philadelphus, 15, 209, 211. 

Ptolemy Sétér, 193, 195. 

Pyramid, the Great, 47, 49. 


Queens, 37 ἢ. 1, 54 ἢ. 2, 


Ram, 231. 

Ramessamend, 237. 

Ramessé, 237. 

Ramessé Iubassé, 237. 

Rames(s)és, 103, 109, 113, 117, 119, 
237, 243 (= Aegyptus), 245. 

Ramessés IT., 103, 149. 

Ramessés Miammfi(n), 109. 

Ramessése6s, 237. 

Rames(s)omenés, 237 

Rampsés (-is), 121, 133, 161, 245. 

Rapsacés, 149. 

Rapsés, 129. 

Rathés, 113. 

Rathdtis, 103, 109. 

Rathurés, 61. 

Ratoisés, 47. 

Rayésis, 219. 

Rhea, 199. 


Sabacén, 167, 169, 247. 

Sacrifice, human, 198 n. 2. 

Sais, 9, 91 n. 4, 99, 165, 167, 168 
n. 1, 169, 171, 173, 179, 229, 231. 

Saite nome, 81, 91, 95, 97, 99. 

Saités, 91, 95, 97, 99, 247. 

Saitic, 99. 

Salitis, 81, 83. 

Sadphis I., 219, 

Saracus, 169. 

Saturn(us), 2, 23. 

Scemiophris, 69. 

Scripture, Holy Scriptures, 13, 25, 
231, 237, 241. 

Sebéchon, 247. 

Sebennytus, xi. n. 1, 15, 23, 183, 
185, 189, 195, 209, 211. 

Sebercherés, 47. 

Sebichés, 167, 169. 

Semempsés, 29, 33, 215. 

Semphrucratés, 223. 


II., 219. 


Serapis, 189, 195. 
Sériadic, 209. 
Sesdchris, 87, 39, 41. 


Ses6nchis, 159. 

ne 67, 69, 71, 159, 161, 

Sesorthos, Sosorthus, 43, 45. 

Sesortésis, 225. 

Seséstris, 67, 71. 

Séth, 191. 

Sethenés, 37. 

Sethinilus, 221. 

Sethds (Ramessés), 103, 105, 111, 
121, 129, 149, 151, 241. 

Sethésis, 105. 

Sethroite nome, 80 n. 3, 81, 91, 
95, 97, 99. 

Shepherds, Shepherd Kings, 85, 87, 
89, 91, 93, 95, 97, 99, 101, 107, 
121, 125, 127, 131, 133, 137, 139. 

Silités, 239. 

Sindpé, 193, 195. 

Siphthas, 225. 

Sirius, 217. 

Sisirés, 51. 

Sistosichermés, 225. 

Sistosis, 225. 

Smendés (-is), 155, 157. 

Smy, 191. 

Sogdianus, 175, 177. 

Soicuniosochus, 223. 

paras (-ius), 223. 

Sol, 2, 

ἌΡ Δα 131. 

Séris, 47. 

Sésibius, 195. 

Sosinosiris, 19. 

Sésis, 3" ae, 23. 

Sésus, 

Ἐὰν Ἢ G Sétadés), 23. 

Sotelés, 195. 

Sothic Cycle, xxvii. f., 229, 235, 239. 

Sothis, xxvii n., 235. 

Séy phis, 43. 

Spanius, 235. 

Spirit, 197. 

Staan, 91. 

Stammenemés I., 223; II., 225. 

Stephinatés (-thés, -this), 169, 171, 
173, 249. 

Sthenelus, 243. 

Stoichos, 217. 

Pau, ὃ, 15, 17, 195, 197, 217, 221, 


Suphis I., 47, 49; II., 47. 
Susakeim, 247. 

Susennés, 155. 

Syria, 89, 133, 139 143. 


255 


INDEX 


Tacaléphis, 247. 

Tacelothis, Takeléthis, 159, 161. 

Tancheres, 51. 

Tanis, 23, 155 157. 161, 163, 229 
231, 239. 

Tanite nome, 80 η. 3. 

Taracés, 249. 

Taracus, Tarcus, 167, 169. 

Tat, 209. 


Temple (Solomon’s), 118 n., 119, 


159 n. 1. 
Tethmodsis, 101, 109 121, 127, 241 
Teds, 183, 185. 
Thamphthis, 47. 
Thebaid, 87. 
Thebans, 213. 


Thebes, 93, 95, 215, 217, 219, 221, 


223, 225: see Diospolis. 
Thirillus, 221. 
This, 5, 9, 29, 31, 33, 35. 
Thmésis, 101. 
Thdéth, 209. 
Thrace, 67, 71, 73. 
Threats to the gods, 200 n. 3. 
Thulis, 23. 
Thummésis, 87. 
Thudris, 149, 151, 153, 245. 
Timotheus, 195. 
Tithoés, 17. 
Tlas, 37. 
Témaephtha, 223. 
Tongues, Confusion of, 233, 
Tosertasis, 43. 
Tosorthros, 41. 
Tower (of Babel), 233. 


256 


Tréglodytes, 247. 

Trojan war, 107. 

Troy, 149, 151, 153, 245. 

Cuthmdses (-is). 109 113. 115. 117 
241 

Tutimaeus, 79. 

Typhon, 5, 17, 19, 125, 189, 191, 
201, 203. 

Typhonian, 193. 

Tyreis, Tyris, 43. 


Uaphrés (-is), 171, 173, 237, 249, 
Ubienthés, 33. 

Uenephés, 29, 31. 

Uennephis, 245. 

Udsimarés, 221. 

Usaphais, 29, 31, 35. 

Usercherés, 51. 

Usés, 237. 

Usimare(s), 237. 


Vavenephis (see Uenephés), 33. 
Venus, 23. 

Vibenthis, 35. 

Vuleanus, 2. 


Water, 197. 


Xerxes 1. (the Great), 175, 177, 
11... 275, 11 
Χοῖβ, 75. 


Zét, 161 
Zeus, a7 23, 133, 189, 197, 199. 
Zodiac, 13, 531, 


PTOLEMY 


TETRABIBLOS 


EDITED AND TRANSLATED INTO 
ENGLISH BY 


F. EK. ROBBINS, Pa.D. 


UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN 


CAMBRIDGE, MASSACHUSETTS 


HARVARD UNIVERSITY PRESS 


LONDON 


WILLIAM HEINEMANN LTD. 


MCMLXIV 





First PRINTED . 1940 
REPRINTED . 1948, 1956, 1964 


Printed in Great Britain at The University Press, Aberdeen 


. 


SODIRMPO be 


_— 
δ 


CONTENTS 


INTRODUCTION . 3 3 A 5 z 

THe LUMINARIES AND PLANETS ᾿ ᾿ 5 

Tur SIGNS OF THE ZODIAC 3 : ἡ 3 
BOOK I 

INTRODUCTION a - 


THat KNOWLEDGE BY ASTRONOMICAL Mrans 15 
ATTAINABLE, AND How FAr Ἷ Ξ A 
THAT IT IS ALSO BENEFICIAL . : 
Or THE POWER OF THE PLANETS 2 Ξ 
Or BENEFICENT AND MALEFICENT PLANETS 3 
Or MASCULINE AND FEMININE PLANETS . 
Or DiuRNAL AND NocTURNAL PLANETS . , 
Or THE POWER OF THE ASPECTS TO THE SUN : 
OF THE POWER OF THE FIXED STARS i Ξ 
Or THE EFFECT OF THE SEASONS AND OF THE 
Four ANGLES . . Ὶ ‘ 
Or SoLstTITIAL, EQurNoctiat, SOLID, AND 
BICORPOREAL SIGNS . ἰ 3 Ἶ ’ 
Or MASCULINE AND FEMININE SIGNS : 3 
Or THE ASPECTS OF THE SIGNS : A é 
Or COMMANDING AND OBEYING SIGNS ‘ ᾿ 
Or SIGNS WHICH BEHOLD EACH OTHER AND 
Signs oF Equat PowER . Ἴ ἢ ἐ 
Or DissunctT SIGNS 2 F 
Or THE HOUSES OF THE SEVERAL PLANETS " 


ΟΕ THE TRIANGLES 5 3 4 5 2 
Or EXALTATIONS . : z ς : : 
Or THE DISPOSITION OF TERMS Ξ 5 5 
ACCORDING TO THE CHALDAEANS Σ - ᾿ 


Or PLACES AND DEGREES : ζ ; 3 
Or Facrs, CHARIOTS, AND THE LIKE i - 
Or APPLICATIONS AND SEPARATIONS AND THE 

OTHER POWERS 5 3 3 ‘ ᾿ 


BOOK II 
INTRODUCTION Ε ξ 
Or THE CHARACTERISTICS OF THE INHABITANTS 
OF THE GENERAL CLIMES . : 
OF THE FAMILIARITIES BETWEEN CounTRIES AND 
THE TRIPLICITIES AND STARS 4 5 


— 


iv 


FS SENS oF 


. Or MonstERS ἔ 

. Or CHILDREN THAT ARE NOT REARED 
. Or Leneta or LIFE 

. Or Bopity Form ΑΝῸ TEMPERAMENT 
. Or Bopity INJuRIES AND DISEASES 


GOS τ δ pili COL 


CONTENTS 


. METHOD oF MAKING PARTICULAR PREDICTIONS . 


Or THE EXAMINATION OF THE COUNTRIES 
AFFECTED : δ 
Or THE TIME OF THE PREDICTED EvENTs . 


. Or THE CLASS OF THOSE AFFECTED 
. OF THE QUALITY OF THE PREDICTED Event 


Or THE CoLOURS OF ECLIPSES, COMETS, AND 
THE LIKE. 


. CONCERNING THE New Moon OF THE ; YEAR 
. Or THE NATURE OF THE SIGNS, PART BY PART, 


AND THEIR EFFECT UPON THE WEATHER 


. OF THE INVESTIGATION OF WEATHER IN DETAIL 
. OF THE SIGNIFICANCE OF ATMOSPHERIC SIGNS . 


BOOK III 


. INTRODUCTION 


OF THE DEGREE OF THE Horoscoric Pont 
THE SUBDIVISION OF THE SCIENCE OF NATIVITIES 


Or PARENTS : ΐ 5 ἕ 
Or BRoTHERS AND SISTERS : A 
Or MALES AND FEMALES. - : 
Or TwInNs. ε τ Ρ a 


eo. @ δὲ «@ © ὧν oe οἱ δὲ © @ 


. OF THE QUALITY OF THE SOUL. ° 

. Or DISEASES OF THE SOUL : Fi 
BOOK IV 

. INTRODUCTION 5 


Or MATERIAL FORTUNE . 5 
Or THE FoRTUNE OF DIGNITY 
OF THE QUALITY OF ACTION . 
Or MarRIAGE Ἐ ἃ 
Or CHILDREN 5 Ε 
Or FRIENDS AND ENEMIES 5 


Or ForEIGN TRAVEL 
Or THE Quauity or DEATH 
Or THE DIVISION oF TIMES 


INDEX . A τ : =) 


eabpeeeews ws, e 
5 


PAGE 
160 


162 
164 
168 
176 


190 
194 


200 
206 
212 


220 
228 
234 
240 
250 
254 
256 
260 
264 
270 
306 
316 
332 
362 


372 
372 
376 
380 
392 
408 
412 
422 
426 
436 


461 


INTRODUCTION 
1B 


From his own day well into the Renaissance Claudius 
Ptolemy’s name was well-nigh pre-eminent in astro- 
nomy, geography, and astrology alike. ‘“* The divine 
Ptolemy,” he is called by Hephaestion of Thebes,} 
and the expression shows that the reverence accorded 
him fell little short of idolatry. In such circum- 
stances it is surprising that all we know of Ptolemy’s 
personal history must be pieced together from 
passages in his own works, two scholia in ancient 
manuscripts, and brief notices to be found in later 
writers, some of them Arabian.2 The result, when 
the reliable is summed up and the false or fanciful 
subtracted, is meagre indeed. We can probably rely 
upon the reports that he was born at Ptolemais in 
Egypt 8 and lived to the age of 78 ; * he tells us that 
his astronomical observations were made on the 


1 In Catalogus Codicum Astrologicorum Graecorum (here- 
after cited as CCAG), viii. 2, p. 81, 2. 

2The sources are collected and discussed by Εἰ, Boll, 
*“Studien tuber Claudius Ptolemaus,’? Jahrb. f. Cl. Ph., 
Supplementbd. xxi. 1894, pp. 53-66 (hereafter cited as 
Boll, Studien). 

3 Theodore of Melité is the authority; Boll, op. cit., 
pp. 54-55. An eleventh-century work of Abulwafa (ibid., 
pp. 58-62) gave rise to the belief that he was born at 
Pelusium, so that, e.g., he is called [IjAovarevs in the title 
of the first edition of the T'etrabiblos. 

4 This comes from Abulwafa. 


PTOLEMY 


parallel of Alexandria, which convinces Boll that 
Alexandria was his home, although there is another 
tradition ' that for 40 years he observed at Canopus, 
which was about 15 miles east of Alexandria, and it 
is known that he erected votive stelae in the temple 
at Canopus inscribed with the fundamental principles 
of his doctrines.2, Combining the various traditions 
with the fact that the earliest of his observations 
recorded in the Almagest was made in 127 and the 
latest in 151, we may conclude, further, that his 
life fell approximately in the years 100-178,° covering 
the first three-quarters of the second century of our 
era and the reigns of Trajan, Hadrian, Antoninus 
Pius, and Marcus Aurelius. 

A detailed and not too flattering description of 
Ptolemy’s personal appearance and habits goes back, 
again, to the Arabic tradition, and has been repeated 
in some of the modern editions of Ptolemy’s works, 


1 Preserved by Olympiodorus (fourth century), In Plat. 
Phaed., p. 47, 16 (Finckh). 

2 Boll, Studien, p. 66. Heiberg gives the text in his 
edition of the Opera astronomica minora of Ptolemy 
(Leipzig, 1907), pp. 149 ff. 

3'This is Boll’s conclusion (op. cit., p. 64), accepted by 
Christ, Griechische Litteraturgeschichte, 6th ed., 1924, ii. 2, 
p. 896. Boll, zb¢d., pp. 63, 65, cites the passages of the 
Almagest which refer to the dated observations. He points 
out that a very slight change in the text of Almagest, x. 1, 
would make the date of the latest observation 141 instead 
of 15], but though this would, perhaps, agree better with 
some of the traditions, there is no real reason for altering 
the figure. 

4 #.q. in the preface of the Latin version of the Almagest 
published at Venice in 1515; and the preface of the 
translation of the Tetrabiblos by Whalley (see below, 
p. ΧΙ). 

vi 


INTRODUCTION 


but on examination it proves to be nothing but the 
stock characterization of the philosopher given by 
the Greek physiognomists.! There is, in fact, no 
more to be learned about Ptolemy from external 
sources, and his own works contain little that is 
biographical. We learn from them, however, that 
he took, in general, an Aristotelian position philo- 
sophically, though his predilection for mathematics 
led him to regard that division of science with far 
greater reverence than the more biologically minded 
Aristotle.2, One of his minor works and chapters 
in the longer ones are philosophical and testify to 
his knowledge of and interest in the subject. Though 
he was himself amply capable of original thought, 
he was acquainted with the work and writings of 
his predecessors, of Menelaus in mathematics, of 
Hipparchus in astronomy, of Marinus of Tyre in 
geography, of Didymus in music, and of Posidonius 
in astrological ethnology and the arguments whereby 
astrology was defended. He drew freely and openly 
from them, and had the gift of systematizing the 
materials with which he dealt, a characteristic which 
is especially evident in the Tetrabiblos. 

The works, genuine and false, ascribed to Ptolemy 
are: (1) the Almagest or Syntaxis Mathematica, 
in 13 books, the great treatise on astronomy ; 
(2) Φάσεις ἀπλανῶν ἀστέρων Kai συναγωγὴ ἐπισημα- 
σιῶν (** On the Apparitions of the Fixed Stars and 
a Collection of Prognostics”’); (3) “Ὑποθέσεις τῶν 
πλανωμένων (“On the Planetary Hypothesis ”’) ; 
(4) Κανὼν βασιλειῶν (** Table of Reigns ”’), a chrono- 

! Boll, Studien, pp. 58-62. 
2 Op. cit., pp. 66-111, 131-163. 


PTOLEMY 


logical table of reigns; (5) “Appovxdr βιβλία y’ 
(‘On Music,” in three books) ; (6) the Tetrabiblos, of 
which later; (7) [epi ἀναλήμματος. De Analemmate, 
the description of a sphere on a plane (extant only 
in translation); (8) Planisphaerium, “‘ The Plani- 
sphere ”’; (9) the Optics, in 5 books (its genuineness 
has been doubted); (10) the Kapzés or Centiloquium, 
a collection of astrological aphorisms (generally 
thought to be spurious); (11) the Geography; 
(12) the Πρόχειροι κανόνες or “‘ Ready (astronomical) 
Tables”; (13) Προχείρων κανόνων διάταξις καὶ 
ψηφοφορία. ““Scheme and Manipulation of the 
Ready Tables”; (14) Περὶ κριτηρίου καὶ ἡγεμο- 
νικοῦ, a short treatise dealing with the theory of 
knowledge and the soul. Of these, the Almagest, 
since it is mentioned in the Geography, the Ὑποθέσεις, 
and the Tetrabiblos, and since it contains no reference 
to observations after the year 151, was certainly not 
the latest. The three books mentioned, and possibly 
others, belong to the last third of the author’s life. 


Π. 


The treatise with which we are especially con- 
cerned is now, and usually has been, called the 
Tetrabiblos or Quadripartitum, but more accurately 
it should be ᾳαωθηματικὴ τετράβιβλος σύνταξις, 
** Mathematical Treatise in Four Books,” which 
is the title found in some of the MSS.) and is 
likely to have been that used by Ptolemy himself. 
Many of the MSS.. however, use the title Ta πρὸς 

'E.g. N (see below). Τ7Τετράβιβλος alone is used by P 
and ἃ. 

vill 


INTRODUCTION 


Σύρον aroteAcopatixa,' “ The Prognostics addressed 
to Syrus,” in which certain of them substitute the 
similar but less common word συμπερασματικά for 
ἀποτελεσματικά.Σ The book is a systematic treatise 
on astrology, but it should be remembered that in 
Ptolemy’s time the two words: ἀστρολογία and 
ἀστρονομία meant much the same thing, “ astro- 
nomy,” and that he called what we mean by 
“ astrology ᾿᾿ τὸ δι᾿ ἀστρονομίας προγνωστικόν.3 ““ prog- 
nostication through astronomy,” which indeed it was, 
in his estimation. 

In antiquity and the middle ages no one thought it 
inconsistent with Ptolemy’s reputation as a scientific 
astronomer that he should also have written upon 
astrology, and consequently the Tetrabiblos passed 
without question as genuine.’ More lately, however, 
this wedding of astrology to astronomy has come to 
seem incongruous and for that reason the authenticity 
of the work has been challenged by certain scholars.° 
In this brief introduction the question, of course, 
cannot be argued fully. There are, however, two 
reasons for dismissing any doubts concerning the 
authorship of the book. The first is that by the 
second century of our era the triumph of astrology 

1#.g. VMDE. Syrus is otherwise unknown. The 
Anonymous who comments on the Tetrabiblos says that 
some considered it a fictitious name, others that Syrus 
was a physician skilled in astrology. Several other works 
of Ptolemy—notably the Almagest—are dedicated to him. 

2 Hig. A. 3 Tetrabiblos, i. ad init. 

4 Boll, Studien, pp. 127-131. 

5 Chiefly Hultsch. Cf. Boll’s remarks in his paper 
* Zur Ueberlieferungsgeschichte der griechischen Astrologie 


und Astronomie,”’ Sitzungsber.d. Miinch. Ak., phil.-hist. Cl., 
1899, pp. 77 ff. 


ix 


PTOLEMY 


was complete.! With few exceptions every one, 
from emperor to the lowliest slave, believed in it, 
and having weathered the criticism of the New 
Academy, astrology was defended by the powerful 
Stoic sect. Its position was strengthened by the 
prevalence of stellar and solar religion throughout 
the world, and it even captured the sciences, such 
as medicine, botany, mineralogy, chemistry, and 
ethnography. Furthermore, this continued to be 
the situation, in general, well into the Renaissance. 
Regiomontanus, Copernicus, Tycho Brahe, Galileo, 
Kepler, and Leibnitz all either practised astrology 
themselves or countenanced its practice. There is 
really no basis, therefore, for thinking it incongruous 
that Ptolemy should have believed in astrology or 
written upon it. The second reason for accepting 
him as the author of the Tetrabiblos is, as Boll? has 
sufficiently demonstrated, that the book, in its general 
philosophic views, its language, and its astronomy, 
is entirely in accord with the Ptolemaic works whose 
genuineness has never been questioned. These 
arguments are too lengthy to be repeated here. 


Π|Ι. 


Though the Tetrabiblos enjoyed almost the au- 
thority of a Bible among the astrological writers of 
a thousand years or more, its Greek text has been 


See, for example, Chapters II-III of Boll-Bezold, 
Sternglaube und Sterndeutung (ed. 3, revised by W. Gundel). 
Leipzig: B. G. Teubner, 1926. F.Cumont, Astrology and 
Religion among the Greeks and Romans. New York: 
Putnam, 1912. 

2 Studien, pp. 111-181. 


x 


INTRODUCTION 


printed only three times, and not at all since the 
sixteenth century. The editions are as follows: 

(1) The first edition, edited by Joachim 
Camerarius, was printed by Froben at Nirnberg 
in 1535 in quarto. Besides the text, it contains 
Camerarius’ Latin translation of Bks. I-II and of 
parts of Bks. [fI-IV, and his notes on Bks. I-II, the 
Greek text of the Kapzos, and a Latin translation 
by J. Pontanus. 

(2) The second edition, also by Camerarius, was 
printed by Joannes Oporinus in octavo at Basel in 
1553.1 This contains the Greek text of the Tetra- 
biblos, a Latin translation by Philip Melanchthon, 
and the Καρπός in both Greek and Latin. In the 
preparation of the first edition Camerarius had 
relied upon the Niirnberg codex (N in the list on 
p- Xvii), in which his marks to guide the printer are 
still to be seen. He claims for his second edition 
to have corrected many mistakes in the text, and he 
has indeed managed to do away with many errors 
and misprints which are to be found in the first 
edition; but apparently, too, he made use of one 
or more additional MSS., probably of the general 
type of A in our list below, from which he introduced 
nearly a hundred readings at variance with N, and 


1 Κλαυδίου Πτολεμαίου Π]ηλουσιέως τετράβιβλος σύνταξις πρὸς 
Σύρον ἀδελφόν. Τοῦ αὐτοῦ Καρπός, πρὸς τὸν αὐτὸν Σύρον. 
Claudii Ptolemaet Pelusiensis libri quatuor, compositt Syro 
fratri. Hiusdem Fructus librorum suorum, sive Centum 
dicta, ad eundem Syrum. Innumeris quibus hucusque 
scatebant mendis, purgati. Basileae, per loannem Opori- 
num. This is the title page of the Greek text. Tho 
portion containing the translations has a separate title 
page. 

xl 


PTOLEMY 


in some seventy-five other instances he altered the 
text by outright emendation. In spite of the at- 
tempted improvement the second edition retains 
some forty misprints or mistakes, half of them newly 
introduced ; its punctuation is most illogical, and it 
is far from reproducing what seems to be the best 
tradition of the manuscripts. 

(3) Fr. Junctinus included the Greek text of the 
Tetrabiblos in his Speculum astrologiae, the second 
edition of which, in two folio volumes, was issued at 
Leyden in 1581. Junctinus made no attempt to 
improve the text as already published. 

Professor Franz Boll, whose studies of Ptolemy 
have been cited many times already, had begun 
work upon a new edition of the Tetrabiblos prior 
to his lamented death, July 3, 1924. His pupil, 
Fraulein Emilie Boer, however, continued Boll’s task, 
and the appearance of their completed text has 
been awaited since 1926.1 I regret very much that 
my own work on the present text and translation 
could not have profited from the results of the 
textual studies of these two scholars. 

Translations of the Tetrabiblos have been more 
numerous than texts. The oldest of them is the 
Arabian version, by Ishaq ben Hunein, made in the 
ninth century. Thence in turn Plato Tiburtinus, in 
1138, and Aegidius de Thebaldis, in the middle of 
the thirteenth century, made Latin translations, 


1T am told that the work was completed in this year. 
It has been announced as Vol. III, Fase. 1, of Ptolemaei 
opera omnia in the well-known Bibliotheca Classica, pub- 
lished by B. G. Teubner, Leipzig. The year of publication 
is unknown to the writer as this is written. 


ΧΙ 


INTRODUCTION 


which were the chief means whereby Western 
Europe knew the Tetrabiblos up to the time of the 
first edition of the Greek text. Printed editions of 
these translations—the first dated 1484—appeared,' 
and they were also circulated in manuscript form. 
More important are the Latin translations made 
directly from the Greek, beginning with that of 
Camerarius himself, which was printed both with 
his text, as noted above, and by itself.2 The trans- 
lation by Antonius Gogava, first issued at Louvain 
in 1543, was several times reprinted at other places, 
for instance, at Padua in 1658, and was the version 
used by Cardanus to accompany his commentary. 
Philip Melanchthon’s translation made its appear- 
ance in 1553, as we have seen; this, too, was issued 
separately later. An English translation by John 
Whalley was published in 1701 and in a second 
edition in 1786,4 which, as Ashmand says, “‘ was not, 
in any one instance, purified from the blunders and 
obseurities which disgraced its predecessor.” In 


1On the early Latin versions see Thorndike, History of 
Magicand Experimental Science (New York, 1923), I, p. 110. 
MSS. of the Arabic version exist at the Escurial and in 
the Laurentian Library at Florence. 

2 Printed by Joannes Petreius, Nirnberg, 1535, with 
Camerarius’ notes. 

3 H.g. a rudely printed duodecimo from the press of the 
heirs of Petrus Thomasius, Perusia, 1646, is in the writer’s 
own library. 

4 The Quadripartite ; or, Four Books Concerning the In- 
fluences of the Stars ... by Claudius Ptolemy. ... By 
John Whalley, Professor of Physic and Astrology, and 
Others. The Second Edition, Revised, Corrected, and 
Improved. London: Printed for the Editors, and sold 
by M. Sibley . . . and E. Sibley . . . 1786. 


xiii 


PTOLEMY 


truth, Ptolemy is not easy to translate accurately, 
and though Whalley’s version is worse than the 
others, all show a certain willingness to disguise 
the difficulties with smooth-sounding but non-com- 
mittal phrases.+ 

The importance and popularity of the Tetrabiblos 
is shown by the number of commentaries upon it 
which have been made. In antiquity, as we deduce 
from expressions used in writings still extant, a con- 
siderable number existed; the name of one com- 
mentator, Pancharios, survives, but none of his 
work except a few quotations.’ Three such treatises 
which did survive, however, were edited by Hierony- 
mus Wolf and published with Latin translations in 
folio at Basel in 1559. These are (1) an anonymous 
commentary on the Tetrabiblos, attributed by some, 
as Wolf says, to Proclus ; (2) an introduction to the 
Tetrabiblos, to which the name of Porphyry is at- 
tached, though its authorship is by no means certain ; 
(3) the scholia of Demophilus. These have not been 
republished, but are to be found in a number of 
manuscripts. Of greater importance for the study 
of the Tetrabiblos is the Paraphrase attributed to 
Proclus, but which, of course, may not have been 
his at all. Since it follows the Tetrabiblos very 


German translations also exist ; e.g. by J. W. Pfaff in 
his Astrologisches Taschenbuch, 1822-23 (mentioned by 
Christ, Gr. Litteraturgeschichte), and one by M. E. Winkel, 
Linseverlag, 1923, which is based on the Latin of Melanch- 
thon (v. W. Gundel in Jahresb. %. die Fortschritte d. Kl. Alt. 
241, 1934, p. 74). 

* Boll, Studien, p. 127. 

3 £.g. ap. CCAG, viii. 2, p. 67, 18 ff.; ¢f. Kroll, Philologus, 
Ivii (1897), p. 123. 

ΧΙν 


INTRODUCTION 


closely, and since, as it happens, one manuscript of 
the Paraphrase is older than any of those of the 
Tetrabiblos, this document must be taken into con- 
sideration by any editor of the latter work. The 
first and only edition of the Paraphrase, with a pre- 
face by Melanchthon, appeared at Basel in 1554,} 
and the standard Latin version, from which at least 
two English translations have been made,” is that 
of Leo Allatius (Elzevir, Leyden, 1635). Besides 
the Paraphrase and the ancient commentaries, the 
elaborate commentary by Hieronymus Cardanus, 
published in the sixteenth century, should also be 
mentioned.? τ 


There are in European libraries at least thirty-five 
manuscripts containing all or a large part of the 
Tetrabiblos, besides a considerable number which 
contain partial texts or astrological miscellanies in 
which Ptolemy is cited along with other writers. 
Parts of the Tetrabiblos, too, are quoted by other 


1 Πρόκλου τοῦ διαδόχου τῶν ἀσαφῶς εἰρημένων ΠΠτολεμαίῳ, 
καὶ δυσπαρακολουθήτως ἐν τῷ αὐτοῦ τετραβίβλῳ, ἐπὶ τὸ 
σαφέστερον καὶ δυσπαρακολούθητον [sic] μεταχείρησις. Procli 
paraphrasis in quatuor Ptolemaeit libros de Siderum 
effectionibus. Cum _ praefatione Philippi Melanthonis. 
Basileae, apud Joannem Oporinum [1554]. 

2J.M. Ashmand, Ptolemy’s Tetrabiblos or Quadripartite, 
etc. London: Davis and Dickson, 1822. James Wilson, 
The Tetrabiblos or Quadripartite of Ptolemy, etc. London: 
W. Hughes |1828). Charpulier, Les Discourses, eic., 150, 
n. 2, cites a Ptolemy’s Tetrabiblos, by J. M. Ashmand, 
London, 1917. 

% Editions were published at Basel in 1554 and 1579, at 
Leyden in 1555, and in the fifth volume of Cardanus’ 
works (Leyden: Huguetan and Revaud, 1663). 


xV 


PTOLEMY 


authors, like Hephaestion of Thebes. Finally, there 
are a few manuscripts with Latin or Arabic trans- 
lations. In spite of this volume of material, how- 
ever, the earliest text of the Tetrabiblos itself is only 
of the thirteenth century. There is but one full 
manuscript even of this degree of antiquity, and 
only two or three from the fourteenth century ; most 
of them are from the fifteenth and sixteenth. In 
view of this fact it is fortunate that we have one 
(but only one) manuscript of the Paraphrase which 
antedates all of these, having been written in the 
tenth century. 

In preparing the present text of the Tetrabiblos I 
have been obliged to work entirely with photographs 
and photostats. However, by a fortunate circum- 
stance, I was able to secure a collection of these 
which had been brought together by a German 
scholar unknown to me and which apparently in- 
cludes the most important manuscripts.1 Those 
manuscripts, therefore, which have been collated 
and used, and the symbols which I have used to 
refer to them, are as follows : 5 

V: Vaticanus gr. 1038, 5. XIII. Contains a num- 
ber of the works of Euclid, Hypsicles, and Hero, and 
an almost complete collection of the writings of 
Ptolemy, with the Tetrabiblos on ff. 352-384yv.; the 
ending, after p. 207, 19 (Cam.?), does not appear. 
Heiberg (Deutsche Litieraturzeitung, 1900, p. 417) 


1The purchase of this collection was made possible by 
the Faculty Research Fund of the University of Michigan. 
It was accompanied by an anonymous description of the 
MSS. of the Tetrabiblos, to which I am indebted for infor- 
mation about many MSS. which I could not personally 
inspect. 

2 Of F and H only a few sample pages have been available. 


Xvi 


INTRODUCTION 


believes that it was largely copied from Vat. gr. 
1594, S. IX, which contains other Ptolemaic texts in 
a relatively pure form but does not, now at least, 
include the Tetrabiblos. A distinctive feature of this 
manuscript is the large number of small lacune 
left by the scribe when he could not read _ his 
archetype or found it defective. In this Boll sees 
an indication of faithfulness and reliability. Cf. 
I. Boll, “‘ Zur Ueberlieferungsgeschichte der grie- 
chischen Astrologie und Astronomie,”’ Sitzungsberichte 
d. K. B. Akad. d. Wiss. zu Munchen, phil.-hist. Cl., 
1899, pp. 77 ff.; CCAG, v. 1, no. 9. 

D: Parisinus gr. 2509, S. XV. Contains the 
Tetrabiblos on ff. 14-81v., followed by the Kapzos. 
Cf. Omont, Inv. ii. 274; CCAG, viii. 3, no. 82. 
A copy of V, but the lacune were filled in from 
another source. 

P: Parisinus gr. 2425, S. XV. Contains the 
Teirabiblos on ff. 8-63v. The most immediately 
striking feature of this manuscript is its constant 
mis-spelling of words due to the confusion of au and 
€, εἰ, ἡ: and t,o and w, for example: that is, the 
confusions typical of late Greek. They may indicate 
that the manuscript (or an ancestor) was copied 
from dictation. P also has an ending which differs 
from the final sentences of the Camerarius editions 
and most other manuscripts. 

L: Oxon. Laud, gr. 50,5. XVI. A copy of P, 
of no independent value. Paris. Suppl. gr. 597 is 
another copy of P. 

N: Norimbergensis Cent. V, app. 8, S. XVI. 
This is the basis of Camerarius’ text. It contains 
the Tetrabiblos (to p. 187, 6 Cam. only) on ff. 1-59v. 
Cf. CCAG, vii. no. 42. 


xvii 


PTOLEMY 


A: Vaticanus gr. 208, S. XIV exeuntis. This 
manuscript uses the term συμπερασματικά in the 
title instead of ἀποτελεσματικά. Ἐ and H below are 
related to A. Mercati and De’ Cavalieri, Codices 
Vaticani graeci, i (Rome, 1923); CCAG, v. 1, no. 6. 

E: Monacensis gr. 419, 5. XIV. In this manu- 
script book and chapter headings are missing, and 
the ending is omitted (from p. 212, 7 Cam.). It 
is closely related to M (below), but in the latter 
the missing parts have been supplied in a second 
hand. 

F: Venetus Mare. 323, S. XV. Contains the 
Tetrabiblos on ff. 403-461. Zanetti, Bibliotheca, p. 146; 
Morelli, Bibliotheca, p. 195 ; CCAG, ii. no. 4. 

G: Vindobonensis philos. gr. 115, 5. XIII. Con- 
tains a portion of Book II of the Tetrabiblos in 
ff. 7-lov. Cf. Boll, Sitzungsb. Munch. Ak. 1899, i. 
Ρ. 84. 

H: Venetus Marc. 324, S. XIV-XV. The Tetra- 
biblos is on ff. 156r.-189v. Zanetti, p. 149; Morelli, 
p- 207; CCAG, ii. no. 5. 

M: Venetus Mare. 314, S. XIV ineuntis. Con- 
tains the Tetrabiblos on ff. 1-7T6v. See on E, above. 
Zanetti, p. 146; Morelli, p. 195: CCAG, ii. no. 3. 

Besides the manuscripts of the Tetrabiblos itself 
the oldest manuscript of the Paraphrase has been 
utilized: Vaticanus gr. 1453, 5. X, containing this 
text on ff. 1-219. Thisis cited as Proc. Camerarius’ 
two editions of the Tetrabiblos are cited respectively 
as Cam.! and Cam.*, or simply Cam., if they agree. 


A puzzling problem connected with the manu- 
scripts of the Tetrabiblos concerns their ending. In 
one group the conclusion is entirely missing, and has 


XVull 


INTRODUCTION 


either been left so! or an ending supplied which is 
identical with that of Proclus’ Paraphrase;* in the 
other an ending appears which is considerably 
longer than the former, but which is precisely the 
same in its general content, and is to be found in 
the Arabic version of the Tetrabiblos.2 One thing is 
certain: the first of these endings is spurious. Of 
course it does not follow that the other is genuine ; 
if it is not, however, the original ending of the book 
must have been lost so early that it is missing in 

all the manuscripts. This is a situation that not 
infrequently occurred in ancient times, especially 
when a book was from the first existent in the form 
of a codex, not a roll; yet I am not ready to concede 
it in this instance, for these reasons: (a) the ending 
shown in P could readily, from its language, have 


1V breaks off at p. 207, 19 Cam.?, E at p. 212, 7 (the 
beginning of the concluding passage). WN also in its present 
state lacks the conclusion (from p. 187, 6 Cam.?), but this 
may have been lost at the time the first edition was made, 
and since Camerarius probably made some use of at least 
one other MS. we cannot be sure whether N originally had 
the conclusion or, if so, if it was of the type which 
Camerarius actually printed (1.6. the one taken from the 
Paraphrase). Ν in general resembles P and one would 
have expected it to have the same conclusion as P. On 
the other hand, if it did, one would have expected 
Camerarius to reproduce it, for it is unlikely that he 
would have departed from his preferred MS. in so important 
a particular. 

2MAD. D, after the point at which V ends, is written 
in a different ink ; the conclusion of M (p. 212, 7 ff. Cam.) 
is in a different hand. 

3 P and its copies alone have this ending. My colleague, 
Professor William H. Worrell, has examined the conclusion 
of the Arabic version as it appears in Cod. Laur. Orient. 
352, ff. 234v.-235r. It is close to, but perhaps not identical 
with, the ending of P. 


xix 


PTOLEMY 


been written by Ptolemy himself ;1 (6) the ending 
taken from the Paraphrase is obviously a summary 
of that found in P, and I cannot conceive how any- 
one (¢xcept perhaps Ptolemy) could have reversed 
the process and evolved the tortuous, crabbed 
Greek of the latter from the comparatively simple 
language of the former. Thus the ending found in 
P has the better claim to originality, and if it was 
not written by Ptolemy in the first place it is ex- 
tremely difficult to explain how it came to be written 
at all in the form in which we find it. Since the 
question, however, is admittedly complicated, and 
not all the extant manuscripts could be studied in 
preparing this edition, both endings have been in- 
cluded in the text and translation. 

In constructing the text which follows, my under- 
lying purpose has been to abide by the best manu- 
script tradition; very few emendations have been 


1 Τῦ echoes many words and thoughts found in p. 106, 
25-108, 10 Cam.?, which need not be separately enumerated ; 
not, however, in a manner which would indicate that it is 
a forgery based on the passage, for Ptolemy elsewhere 
repeats phrases in much the same way, especially when 
he wishes to point out that he is carrying out a pre- 
determined scheme. Note, however, in addition, that 
ἁρμόζειν and ἐφαρμόζειν are favourite words of Ptolemy, 
and cef., for example, pp. 17. 1-2, 117. 6, 120. 9 Cam.? and 
p- 1. 21 (with Boll, Studien, p. 171); ef. with διοδευομένου 
the similar forms of ἐφοδεύω and ἐφοδικῶς, pp. 103. 13, 
18; 106. 26; 202. 16 Cam.?; and Boll, op. cit., p. 179; and 
with διὰ τὴν... πρόθεσιν, cf. p. 202. 18, ὥσπερ ἐν ἀρχῇ 
προεθέμεθα. In fact practically every word of the passage 
except the doubtful χρηματείαις is to be paralleled in the 
Tetrabiblos, usually many times; to arrange them in so 
exact an approximation to Ptolemy’s usual style would 
demand a forger of superhuman ingenuity. 


xX 


INTRODUCTION 


attempted, and I think no great amount of emenda- 
tion is necessary. My collations have been made 
against Camerarius’ second edition, because thus 
far this has been the standard text and it was 
most convenient; I have not, however, allowed 
Camerarius’ choice of readings to influence me 
unduly, for his text, in the first place, was not based 
upon the oldest and best manuscripts and it is, 
besides, full of his emendations. It was quite 
evident that this edition of the Tetrabiblos should 
be built up anew, independently of Camerarius’ 
work. Without making the exhaustive studies of 
the relationships of the manuscripts which should 
eventually be carried out, I have proceeded on the 
assumption that V and P best preserve the original 
text, representing somewhat different strains. With 
V and its copy D, the oldest text of Proclus’ Para- 
phrase is evidently in close alliance, and among the 
Tetrabiblos manuscripts MAEFHG are inclined in 
general to follow the lead of V, ME and AFH being 
related between themselves, as has already been 
stated. N apparently belongs rather to the P 
family, if there is such, but it is far from presenting 
a pure text ; its peculiarities are, in my opinion, the 
result of attempts to edit or improve. The later 
manuscripts, however, all show aberration to a 
greater or less extent, and VPLD Proc. are frequently 
to be found arrayed against MNAE (I leave FGH 
out of consideration because only a few pages of 
each of them have come into the reckoning). In 
such cases I have seldom hesitated to follow VPLD, 
and in general, too, I agree with Boll that V is the 
best single guide that we have. 

I am conscious that in many passages this 


xxi 


PTOLEMY 


translation falls short of the intended goal, a version 
which, in spite of the technical, unfamiliar subject, 
could readily be understood by itself or at least with 
the help of a few notes. Ptolemy, however, was a 
difficult author even for the ancients ; the existence 
of the Paraphrase and the frequent flounderings of 
the anonymous commentator testify to this. He 
displays a certain enthusiasm for his subject, but 
beyond this it would be impossible to commend his 
literary style or even the clearness of his exposition. 
He is fond of long, involved sentences and has a 
number of mannerisms, among them a fondness for 
the infinitive with the article and an almost Teutonic 
habit of piling up long strings of modifiers between 
article and substantive, which often results in 
sequences of two or even three articles. It would, 
under the circumstances, be almost impossible to 
make him crystal clear, but I trust there are not 
too many Heraclitean passages. 

Annotation of the Tetrabiblos could be carried to 
great lengths by collecting comparable passages 
from other astrological writers. The comments 
attached to this translation, however, are intended 
only to help the reader over difficulties and have 
been kept at minimum length. 

Many friends have assisted, in one way or another, 
with this work. Some I cannot thank as I would 
like to do; but I must express appreciation to Pro- 
fessor W. Carl Rufus for criticizing the astronomy of 
my translation; to Dr. William Warner Bishop, 
Librarian of the University of Michigan, for procuring 
much-needed books and the photostatic reproduc- 
tions of the manuscripts ; and to Franz Cumont for 
ever helpful interest and suggestions. 


xxii 


THE LUMINARIES AND PLANETS 


Symbols. 
Sun © Saturn h Venus 9 
Moon ( Jupiter 2/ Mercury $ 
Mars ¢ 
Classifications. 

Effect (i. 5). Gender (i. 6). Sect (i. 7). 
Beneficent 71 9( Masculine Ὁ ἢ 3 ζ Diurnal © ἢ 
Maleficent ἢ g Feminine ( 9 Nocturnal ( 9 g 
Common 9 Common %§ Common 9% 


THE SIGNS OF THE ZODIAC 
Symbols and Order. 


Aries Ὁ Cancer 95 Libra = Capricornus )% 
Taurus & Leo $2 Scorpio [ἢ Aquarius 922 


Gemini II Virgo NY Sagittarius f Pisces } 


The order Aries to Pisces is that “οἵ the following 


signs,” or direct; from Pisces to Aries that “ of the leading 
signs,’’ or reverse. 


Xxili 


THE SIGNS OF THE ZODIAC, CONTINUED 


Classifications. 
felt 
Equinoctial == 
Solstitial σα y4 
Solid & QMsa 
Bicorporeal ILNY f} 
1,12 
Masculine and diurnal Ὁ Π ( fe 
Feminine and nocturnal 8 SONY V4 4 
Commanding and obeying (i. 14) 6%; Tez; σσγᾷ; Qt; 
Wai 
Beholding each other (i. 15) ΠΩ; SM; T=; HM; «ef 


THE TRIANGLES (i. 18). 


Signs. Governors. 
ΠΝ eee Toye 
Ty Se ΟΠ ~Pi(2), Cin.) 
III. ΝΕ. .) Dees (ee) 
IV. S.W. . SMX  ¢, P(A), C(n.) 


d., day; n., night. 


HOUSES, EXALTATIONS, DEPRESSIONS (i. 17, 19). 


Planet. Solar house. Lunar house. Exaltation. Depression. 


© ie. Some —: = 
CRP Aes σδ ὅ ΠῚ. 
h V4 ᾿Ξ ΞΞ 7 
ἡ 7 # ore a) 
3 M τ γ᾽ σσ 
φ a fe} + NY 
ὕ ny ΤΠ ny M; 


πχὶν 


PTOLEMY 


TETRABIBLOS 


Cam.? 


p. 1 


Κλαυδίου Πτολεμαίου μαθηματικῆς 
τετραβίβλου συντάξεως 


BIBAION A’. 


<a. ΠΠροοίμιον» 


~ A > 
Τῶν τὸ δι᾿ ἀστρονομίας προγνωστικὸν τέλος 
/ a , ~ 

nmapackevalovtwy,! ὦ Σύρε, δύο τῶν μεγίστων καὶ 

/ ~ 
κυριωτάτων ὑπαρχόντων, ἑνὸς μὲν TOD πρώτου καὶ 

/ > 
τάξει καὶ δυνάμει, καθ᾽ ὃ τοὺς γινομένους ἑκάστοτε 
~ / 
σχηματισμοὺς τῶν κινήσεων ἡλίου Kal σελήνης καὶ 
υ \ / ~ 
ἀστέρων" πρὸς ἀλλήλους τε Kal THY γῆν κατα- 
/ / A > «A \ ~ ~ 
λαμβανόμεθα δευτέρου δὲ καθ᾽ ὃ διὰ τῆς φυσικῆς 
τῶν σχηματισμῶν αὐτῶν ἰδιοτροπίας τὰς ἀποτελου- 
μένας μεταβολὰς τῶν ἐμπεριεχομένων ἐπισκεπτό- 
~ 3 \ 
μεθα: τὸ μὲν πρῶτον ἰδίαν ἔχον Kat δι᾿ ἑαυτὴν 
\ \ ~ ~ 
αἱρετὴν θεωρίαν, Kav μὴ TO ἐκ τῆς ἐπιζεύξεως Tod 
δευτέρου τέλος συμπεραίνηται, κατ᾽ ἰδίαν σύνταξιν 
ὡς μάλιστα ἐνῆν ἀποδεικτικῶς σοι ὃ περιώδευται. 
~ \ 

περὶ δὲ τοῦ δευτέρου Kai μὴ ὡσαύτως αὐτοτέλους 
ἡμεῖς ἐν τῷ παρόντι ποιησόμεθα λόγον κατὰ τὸν 

c / / / \ «ς ΝΜ 
ἁρμόζοντα φιλοσοφίᾳ τρόπον καὶ ὡς ἄν τις φιλα- 

~ ye. \ 

λήθει μάλιστα χρώμενος σκοπῷ μήτε τὴν κατά- 
ληψιν αὐτοῦ παραβάλλοι τῇ τοῦ πρώτου καὶ ἀεὶ 
« v ” / \ > - 5 \ 
ὡσαύτως ἔχοντος βεβαιότητι, TO ἐν πολλοῖς ἀσθενὲς 


1 κατασκευαζόντων P. 
2 τῶν ἀστέρων NCam.; τῶν om. VPMADE. 


3 σοι] ἐν τῇ συντάξει P. 


THE QUADRIPARTITE MATHEMATICAL 
TREATISE, OR “ TETRABIBLOS,’” OF 
CLAUDIUS PTOLEMY. 


BOOK I, 
1. Introduction. 


Or the means of prediction through astronomy, O 
Syrus, two are the most important and valid. One, 
which is first! both in order and in effectiveness, is 
that whereby we apprehend the aspects of the move- 
ments of sun, moon, and stars in relation to each 
other and to the earth, as they occur from time to 
time ; the second is that in which by means of the 
natural character of these aspects themselves we 
investigate the changes which they bring about in 
that which they surround. The first of these, 
which has its own science, desirable in itself even 
though it does not attain the result given by its 
combination with the second, has been expounded 
to you as best we could in its own treatise * by the 
method of demonstration. We shall now give an 
account of the second and less self-sufficient method 
in a properly philosophical way, so that one whose 
aim is the truth might never compare its perceptions 
with the sureness of the first, unvarying science, for 
he ascribes to it the weakness and unpredictability 


' Astronomy proper. 
2 The Almagest. 


PTOLEMY 


\ ~ “- 
2 καὶ δυσεικαστον τῆς ὑλικῆς ποιότητος προσποιού- 
ἊΝ. A A 
μενος, μήτε πρὸς τὴν κατὰ TO ἐνδεχόμενον ἐπί- 
iy ~ ~ 
σκεψιν ἀποκνοίη, τῶν τε πλείστων Kai ὁλοσχερῶν 
συμπτωμάτων ἐναργῶς οὕτω τὴν ἀπὸ τοῦ περι- 
έχοντος αἰτίαν ἐμφανιζόντων. ἐπεὶ δὲ πᾶν μὲν τὸ 
/ \ A a ΕἸ / ” 
δυσέφικτον παρὰ τοῖς πολλοῖς εὐδιάβλητον ἔχει 
4 258 \ ~ / 4 / 
φύσιν, ἐπὶ δὲ τῶν προκειμένων δύο καταλήψεων 
ς A A ΄, 1 ὃ λ \ ΧΩ ” > 
ai μὲν τῆς προτέρας διαβολαὶ τυφλῶν ἂν εἶεν 
~ « A ~ 
παντελῶς, αἱ δὲ τῆς δευτέρας εὐπροφασίστους 
” A > 4 Bd ‘ \ ee ϑ' ἢ tA 
ἔχουσι Tas ἀφορμάς (ἢ yap τὸ ἐπ᾽ ἐνίων δυσθεώ- 
3 λ / Xr , ὃ / 2 / Ἃ 
ρητον ἀκαταληψίας τελείας δόξαν 5 παρέσχεν, ἢ 
τὸ τῶν γνωσθέντων δυσφύλακτον καὶ τὸ τέλος ὡς 
ἄχρηστον διέσυρε), πειρασόμεθα διὰ βραχέων πρὸ 
“Ἢ / «ες “- 
τῆς κατὰ μέρος ὑφηγήσεως τὸ μέτρον ἑκατέρου τοῦ 
τε δυνατοῦ καὶ τοῦ χρησίμου τῆς τοιαύτης προ- 
> ΄ “- ~ 
γνώσεως ἐπισκέψασθαι: Kal πρῶτον τοῦ δυνατοῦ. 


«β.» Ὅτι καταληπτικὴ ἡ δι ἀστρο- 
νομίας γνῶσις, καὶ μέχρι τίνος 
Ὅτι μὲν τοίνυν διαδίδοται καὶ διικνεῖταί τις 

δύ 3 \ ~ > ὃ \ LUO 4, 

ὕύναμις ἀπὸ τῆς αἰθερώδους καὶ ἀιδίου φύσεως 


1 τάξει καὶ δυνάμει post προτέρας add. NCam. 
2 δόξαν om. NCam. 





1 Ptolemy is contrasting, after the manner of Aristotle, 
the unchangeability of the heavenly bodies and their 
regular motions, which can be known and predicted by 
astronomy, with the constant and unpredictable changes 
of material objects in the sublunary region. 

2On the arguments against astrology, see Bouché- 
Leclereq, pp. 570 ff. The Academic school, led by 


4 


TETRABIBLOS I. 1-2 


of material qualities found in individual things,! nor 
yet refrain from such investigation as is within the 
bounds of possibility, when it is so evident that most 
events of a general nature draw their causes from 
the enveloping heavens. But since everything that 
is hard to attain is easily assailed 5 by the generality 
of men, and in the case of the two before-mentioned 
disciplines the allegations against the first could be 
made only by the blind, while there are specious 
grounds for those levelled at the second—for its 
difficulty in parts has made them think it completely 
incomprehensible, or the difficulty of escaping what 
is known ® has disparaged even its object as useless— 
we shall try to examine briefly the measure of both 
the possibility and the usefulness of such prognos- 
tication before offering detailed instruction on the 
subject. First as to its possibility. 


2. That Knowledge by Astronomical Means is 
Attainable, and How Far. 


A very few considerations would make it apparent 
to all that a certain power emanating from the 
eternal ethereal substance 4 is dispersed through and 


Carneades, initiated the most serious attack against it in 
antiquity. The answers given by Ptolemy in the two 
chapters following are, as Boll (Studien, pp. 131 ff.) shows, 
largely derived from the Stoic Posidonius, who defended 
divination. 

3 Proclus paraphrases, “‘ the difficulty of retaining in the 
memory what has been learned,’ but the reference is 
clearly to the subject discussed in 1. 3. 

4The ether, or fifth element, contrasted with the usual 
four; this is an Aristotelian (Peripatetic) doctrine. 


5 


PTOLEMY 


ἐπὶ πᾶσαν τὴν περιγείαν καὶ δι᾿ ὅλων μεταβλητήν, 
τῶν ὑπὸ τὴν σελήνην πρώτων στοιχείων πυρὸς καὶ 
ἀέρος περιεχομένων μὲν καὶ τρεπομένων ὑπὸ τῶν 
κατὰ τὸν αἰθέρα κινήσεων, περιεχόντων δὲ καὶ 
συντρεπόντων τὰ λοιπὰ πάντα, γῆν καὶ ὕδωρ καὶ τὰ 
ἐν αὐτοῖς φυτὰ καὶ ζῷα, πᾶσιν ἂν ἐναργέστατον | 
8 καὶ δι᾿ ὀλίγων φανείη. ὃ τε γὰρ ἥλιος διατίθησί 
πως ἀεὶ μετὰ τοῦ περιέχοντος πάντα τὰ περὶ τὴν 
γῆν. οὐ μόνον διὰ τῶν κατὰ τὰς ἐτησίους ὥρας 
μεταβολῶν πρὸς γονὰς ζῴων καὶ φυτῶν καρπο- 
φορίας καὶ ῥύσεις ὑδάτων καὶ σωμάτων μετατροπὰς 
ἀλλὰ καὶ διὰ τῶν καθ᾽ ἑκάστην ἡμέραν περιόδων, 
θερμαίνων τε καὶ ὑγραίνων καὶ ξηραίνων καὶ 
ψύχων τεταγμένως τε καὶ ἀκολούθως τοῖς πρὸς 
τὸν κατὰ κορυφὴν ἡμῶν γινομένοις ὁμοιοτρόποις 
σχηματισμοῖς. ἥ τε σελήνη πλείστην," ὡς περιγειο- 
τάτη, διαδίδωσιν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν ὃ τὴν ἀπόρροιαν, συμ- 
παθούντων αὐτῇ καὶ συντρεπομένων τῶν πλείστων καὶ 
ἀψύχων καὶ ἐμψύχων, καὶ ποταμῶν μὲν συναυξόντων 
καὶ συμμειούντων τοῖς φωσὶν αὐτῆς τὰ ῥεύματα, 
θαλαττῶν δὲ συντρεπουσῶν ταῖς ἀνατολαῖς καὶ ταῖς 
δύσεσι τὰς ἰδίας ὁρμάς, φυτῶν δὲ καὶ ζῴων ἢ ὅλων 
ἢ κατά τινα μέρη συμπληρουμένων τε αὐτῇ καὶ συμ- 
μειουμένων. αἵ τε τῶν ἀστέρων τῶν τε ἀπλανῶν 
καὶ τῶν πλανωμένων πάροδοι πλείστας ποιοῦσι 
ἐπισημασίας τοῦ περιέχοντος καυματώδεις καὶ πνευ- 
ματώδεις 4 καὶ νιφετώδεις, ὑφ᾽ ὧν καὶ τὰ ἐπὶ τῆς 
' ἐνεργέστατον MAECam. δπλείστην om. NCam. 


3 ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν VMADE, ὑπὸ τὴν γῆν Ρ, πρὸς τῇ γῇ NCam. 
4 καὶ πνευματώδεις Om. NCam. 


TETRABIBLOS I. 2 


permeates the whole region about the earth, which 
throughout is subject to change, since, of the primary 
sublunar elements, fire and air are encompassed and 
changed by the motions in the ether, and in turn 
encompass and change all else, earth and water and 
the plants and animals therein. For the sun,! 





affecting everything on the earth, 1 not only by the 
changes that accompany the seasons of the year to 
bring about the generation of animals, the —pro- 
ductiveness of plants, the flowing of waters, and the 
changes of bodies, but also by its daily revolutions 
furnishing heat, moisture, dryness, and cold in 
regular order and in correspondence with its posi- 
tions relative to the zenith. The moon, too, as the 
heavenly body nearest the earth, bestows her effluence? 
most abundantly upon mundane things, for most ef 
them, animate or inanimate, are sympathetic to her 
and change in company with her ; the rivers increase 
and diminish their streams with her light, the seas turn 
their own tides with her rising and setting, and plants 
and animals in whole or in some part wax and wane 
with her. Moreover, the passages of the fixed stars 
and the planets through the sky often signify hot, 
windy, and snowy conditions of the air, and mundane 


1 Boll, Studien, pp. 133 ff., enumerates parallels to this 
passage concerning the sun and the moon in Cicero, Philo 
Judaeus, Cleomedes, and Manilius, and ascribes their 
likeness to the influence of Posidonius. 

* This word, ἀπόρροια, has another meaning, “ separation,” 
as a technical term of astrology ; see c. 24 below and my 
note on P. Mich. 149, col. iii, 33. 


7 


PTOLEMY 


γῆς οἰκείως διατίθεται. ἤδη δὲ καὶ of πρὸς ἀλλή- 
λους αὐτῶν σχηματισμοί, συνερχομένων πως ' καὶ 
συγκιρναμένων τῶν διαδόσεων, πλείστας καὶ ποικίλας 
μεταβολὰς ἀπεργάζονται, κατακρατούσης μὲν τῆς 
τοῦ ἡλίου δυνάμεως πρὸς τὸ καθ᾽ ὅλου τῆς ποιότητος 
τεταγμένον, συνεργούντων δὲ ἢ ἀποσυνεργούντων 
4 κατά τι τῶν λοιπῶν, καὶ τῆς μὲν σελήνης ἐκφανέ- 
στερον καὶ συνεχέστερον ὡς ἐν ταῖς συνόδοις καὶ 
διχοτόμοις καὶ πανσελήνοις, τῶν δὲ ἀστέρων περιοδι- 
κώτερον καὶ ἀσημότερον ὡς ἐν ταῖς φάσεσι καὶ 
κρύψεσι καὶ προσνεύσεσιν. ὅτι δὲ τούτων οὕτω 
θεωρουμένων οὐ μόνον τὰ ἤδη συγκραθέντα δια- 
τίθεσθαί πως ὑπὸ τῆς τούτων κινήσεως ἀναγκαῖον 
ἀλλὰ καὶ τῶν σπερμάτων τὰς ἀρχὰς καὶ τὰς πληρο- 
φορήσεις διαπλάττεσθαι καὶ διαμορφοῦσθαι πρὸς 
τὴν οἰκείαν τοῦ τότε περιέχοντος ποιότητα, πᾶσιν 
ἂν δόξειεν ἀκόλουθον εἶναι. οἱ γοῦν παρατηρητικώ- 
τεροι τῶν γεωργῶν καὶ τῶν νομέων ἀπὸ τῶν κατὰ 
τὰς ὀχείας καὶ τὰς τῶν σπερμάτων καταθέσεις συμ- 
βαινόντων πνευμάτων στοχάζονται τῆς ποιότητος 
τῶν ἀποβησομένων, καὶ ὅλως τὰ μὲν ὁλοσχερέστερα 
καὶ διὰ τῶν ἐπιφανεστέρων συσχηματισμῶν ἡλίου 
καὶ σελήνης καὶ ἀστέρων ἐπισημαινόμενα καὶ παρὰ 
τοῖς μὴ φυσικῶς, μόνον δὲ παρατηρητικῶς σκεπτο- 
μένοις, ὡς ἐπὶ πᾶν προγινωσκόμενα θεωροῦμεν, τὰ 
μὲν ἐκ μείζονός τε δυνάμεως καὶ ἁπλουστέρας 


1 πως] τε NCam. 





1 Positions relative to one another in the heavens. For 
the names of the aspects recognized by Ptolemy cf. the 
note on i. 13 (pp. 72-73). 


ὃ 


TETRABIBLOS I. 2 


things are affected accordingly. Then, too, their 
aspects | to one another, by the meeting and mingling 
of their dispensations, bring about many compli- 
cated changes. For though the sun’s power prevails 
in the general ordering of quality, the other heavenly 
bodies aid or oppose it in particular details, the 
moon more obviously and continuously, as for ex- 
ample when it is new, at quarter, or full, and the 
stars at greater intervals and more obscurely, as 
in their appearances, occultations, and approaches.” 
If these matters be so regarded, all would judge it 
to follow that not only must things already com- 
pounded be affected in some way by the motion of 
these heavenly bodies, but likewise the germination 
and fruition of the seed must be moulded and con- 
formed to the quality proper to the heavens at the 
time. The more observant farmers and herdsmen, 
indeed, conjecture, from the winds prevailing at the 
time of impregnation and of the sowing of the seed, 
the quality of what will result; and in general we see 
that the more important consequences signified by 
the more obvious configurations of sun, moon, and 
stars are usually known beforehand, even by those 
who inquire, not by scientific means, but only by 
observation. Those which are consequent upon 
greater forces and simpler natural orders, such as 


2 By “‘stars”’ (ἀστέρων) in this passage Ptolemy means 
primarily the planets rather than the fixed stars. Their 
“appearances”? and “‘occultations’’ are their heliacal 
risings and settings (ς΄. Bouché-Leclereq, p. 111, n. 3). 
πρόσνευσις is used to mean both “inclination ’”’ and, as here, 
the “approach”’ of one heavenly body to another. 

85 Cicero, de divinatione, i. 112: Multa medici, multa 
gubernatores, agricolae etiam multa praesentiunt. 


ie 9 


PTOLEMY 


τάξεως καὶ παρὰ τοῖς πάνυ ἰδιώταις, μᾶλλον δὲ Kal 
παρ᾽ ἐνίοις τῶν ἀλόγων ζῴων, ὡς τῶν ὡρῶν καὶ τῶν 
πνευμάτων τὰς ἐτησίους διαφοράς - τούτων γὰρ ὡς 
ἐπὶ πᾶν ὁ ἥλιος αἴτιος " τὰ δὲ ἡ ἧττον οὕτως ἔχοντα 
παρὰ τοῖς ἤδη κατὰ τὸ ἀναγκαῖον ταῖς παρατηρή- 
5 σεσιν ἐνειθισμένοις, ὦ ὡς τοῖς ναυτιλλομένοις τὰς κατὰ 
μέρος τῶν χειμώνων καὶ τῶν πνευμάτων ἐπιση- 
μασίας, ὅσαι γίνονται κατὰ τὸ περιοδικώτερον ὑπὸ 
τῶν τῆς σελήνης ἢ καὶ τῶν ἀπλανῶν ἀστέρων πρὸς 
τὸν ἥλιον συσχηματισμῶν. παρὰ μέντοι τὸ μήτε 
αὐτῶν τούτων τοὺς χρόνους καὶ τοὺς τόπους ὑπὸ 
ἀπειρίας ἀκριβῶς δύνασθαι κατανοεῖν, μήτε τὰς τῶν 
πλανωμένων ἀστέρων περιόδους, πλεῖστον καὶ αὐτὰς 
συμβαλλομένας, τὸ πολλάκις αὐτοῖς ! σφάλλεσθαι συμ- 
Baiver. τί δὴ οὖν κωλύει τὸν ἠκριβωκότα μὲν τὰς 
πάντων τῶν ἀστέρων καὶ ἡλίου καὶ σελήνης κινήσεις, 
ὅπως αὐτὸν μηδενὸς τῶν σχηματισμῶν μήτε ὁ τόπος 
μήτε ὁ χρόνος λανθάνοι, διειληφότα δὲ ἐκ τῆς ἔτι 
ἄνωθεν συνεχοῦς ἱστορίας ὡς ἐπὶ πᾶν αὐτῶν τὰς 
φύσεις," κἂν μὴ τὰς κατ᾽ αὐτὸ τὸ ὑποκείμενον ἀλλὰ 
τάς γε δυνάμει ποιητικάς,3 οἷον ὡς τὴν τοῦ ἡλίου ὅτι 
θερμαίνει καὶ τὴν τῆς σελήνης ὅτι ὑγραίνει καὶ ἐπὶ 
τῶν λοιπῶν ὁμοίως, ἱκανὸν δὲ πρὸς ταῦτα τοιαῦτα 
ὄντα φυσικῶς ἅμα καὶ εὐστόχως ἐκ τῆς συγκράσεως * 
πάντων τὸ ἴδιον τῆς ποιότητος διαλαβεῖν, ὡς δύνα- 
σθαι μὲν ἐφ᾽ ἑκάστου τῶν διδομένων καιρῶν ἐκ 
1 αὐτοῖς VPMNDE; αὐτοὺς ACam. 


Ξὡς. -. φύσεις post διειληφότα δὲ NCam.; αὐτῶν PMAE, 
αὐτὰ VDNCam.; τὰς φύσεις MAEProc., φύσει VDNCam., 


φήση P. 
10 


TETRABIBLOS I. 2 


the annual variations of the seasons and the winds, 
are comprehended by very ignorant men, nay even 
by some dumb animals; for the sun is in general re- 
sponsible for these phenomena. Things that are not 
of so general a nature, however, are comprehended 
by those who have by necessity become used to 
making observations, as, for instance, sailors know 
the special signs of storms and winds that arise 
periodically by reason of the aspects of the moon 
and fixed stars tothe sun. Yet because they cannot 
in their ignorance accurately know the times and 
places of these phenomena, nor the periodic move- 
ments of the planets, which contribute importantly 
to the effect, it happens that they oftenerr. If, then, 
a man knows accurately the movements of all the 
stars, the sun, and the moon, so that neither the place 
nor the time of any of their configurations escapes 
his notice, and if he has distinguished in general] their 
natures as the result of previous continued study,even 
though he may discern, not their essential, but only 
their potentially effective qualities, such as the sun’s 
heating and the moon’s moistening, and so on with 
the rest; and if he is capable of determining in view 
of all these data, both scientifically and by successful 
conjecture, the distinctive mark of quality resulting 
from the combination of all the factors, what is to 
prevent him from being able to tell on each given 
occasion the characteristics of the air from the rela- 





ὅποιητικάς VPMNDECam.! ; ποιότητας ACam.? 
ὁ συγκρίσεως PCam. 


"1 


PTOLEMY 


τῆς τότε τῶν φαινομένων σχέσεως τὰς τοῦ περι- 
ἔχοντος ἰδιοτροπίας εἰπεῖν, οἷον ὅτι θερμότερον ἢ 
ὑγρότερον ἔσται, δύνασθαι δὲ καὶ καθ᾽ ἕνα ἕκαστον 
~ > ~ 
τῶν ἀνθρώπων τήν te καθ᾽ ὅλου ποιότητα τῆς 
"ἰδιοσυγκρασίας ἀπὸ τοῦ κατὰ τὴν σύστασιν περι- 
- ~ A 
έχοντος συνιδεῖν, οἷον ὅτι TO μὲν σῶμα τοιόσδε, τὴν 
\ 
δὲ ψυχὴν τοιόσδε, Kal τὰ κατὰ καιροὺς συμπτώματα 
Ἁ “- \ A / ͵ ~ ~ / 
διὰ τοῦ τὸ μὲν τοιόνδε περιέχον τῇ τοιᾷδε συγκράσει 
σύμμετρον ἢ καὶ πρόσφορον γίνεσθαι πρὸς εὐεξίαν, 
τὸ δὲ τοιόνδε ἀσύμμετρον καὶ πρόσφορον πρὸς 
κάκωσιν ; ἀλλὰ γὰρ τὸ μὲν δυνατὸν τῆς τοιαύτης 
καταλήψεως διὰ τούτων καὶ τῶν ὁμοίων ἔστι 
συνιδεῖν. 
“Oi δὲ 5 ͵ὔ ‘ > / δέ 
τι δὲ εὐπροφασίστως μέν, οὐ προσηκόντως δέ, 
\ ‘ A > / ” \ 4 n 
τὴν πρὸς TO ἀδύνατον ἔσχε διαβολὴν οὕτως ἂν 
/ ~ A 
κατανοήσαιμεν. πρῶτον μὲν yap τὰ πταίσματα 
~ ΝΜ 
τῶν μὴ ἀκριβούντων τὸ ἔργον, πολλὰ ὄντα, ὡς ἐν 
μεγάλῃ καὶ πολυμερεῖ θεωρίᾳ, καὶ τοῖς ἀληθευο- 
μένοις τὴν τούτου ἐκ τύχης παρέσχε δόξαν, οὐκ 
ὀρθῶς. τὸ γὰρ τοιοῦτον οὐ τῆς ἐπιστήμης, ἀλλὰ 
τῶν μεταχειριζομένων ἐστὶν ἀδυναμία" ἔπειτα καὶ 
«ς “- ~ ͵ σ ε / / ~ 
οἱ πλεῖστοι τοῦ πορίζειν ἕνεκεν ἑτέραν τέχνην τῷ 
ταύτης ὀνόματι καταξιοπιστευόμενοι' τοὺς μὲν 
> , > ~ \ , “- s 
ἰδιώτας ἐξαπατῶσι, πολλὰ προλέγειν δοκοῦντες Kal 
τῶν μηδεμίαν φύσιν ἐχόντων προγινώσκεσθαι, τοῖς 


1 καταξιοπιστευόμενοι VPMADE; διὰ τὴν ἀξιοπιστίαν Proc. ; 
καὶ ἀξίᾳ προστησάμενοι καὶ πιστευόμενοι NCam. 





1 The first part of the pseudo-Lucianic Περὶ ἀστρολογίης 
closely parallels this passage, as Boll, Studien, pp. 151-153, 
shows. 


12 


TETRABIBLOS I. 2 


tions of the phenomena at the time, for instance, that 
it will be warmer or wetter ? Why can he not, too, 
with respect to an individual man, perceive the 
general quality of his temperament from the ambient 
at the time of his birth, as for instance that he is such 
and suchin body and such and such insoul, and predict 
occasional events, by use of the fact that such and 
such an ambient is attuned to such and such a tem- 
perament and is favourable to prosperity, while 
another is not so attuned and conduces to injury ? 
Enough, however; for the possibility of such know- 
ledge can be understood from these and similar 
arguments. 

The following considerations might lead us to 
observe that criticism of the science on the score 
of impossibility has been specious but undeserved. 
In the first place, the mistakes! of those who are 
not accurately instructed in its practice, and they 
are many, as one would expect in an important and 
many-sided art, have brought about the belief that 
even its true predictions depend upon chance, which 
is incorrect. For a thing like this is an impotence, 
not of the science, but of those who practise it. 
Secondly, most, for the sake of gain, claim credence 
for another art in the name of this,” and deceive the 
vulgar, because they are reputed to foretell many 
things, even those that cannot naturally be known 

2 Cardanus (p. 104) gives a number of examples, among 
them the geomantici, those who make elaborate predictions 
from the mere fact that a man was born on a certain day 
of the week, of the moon, or of the month, those who pre- 
dict by reckoning the numerical equivalents of the letters 
in a man’s name (arithmologists), and so on. Cf. also 


Plato’s remarks about unworthy pretenders to philosophy, 
Republic, 495C ff. 
13 


PTOLEMY 


δὲ ζητητικωτέροις διὰ τούτου παρέσχον ἀφορμὴν ἐν 
tow! καὶ τῶν φύσιν ἐχόντων προλέγεσθαι 5" κατα- 
΄, » \ ~ / > A ‘ 
γινώσκειν. οὐδὲ τοῦτο δεόντως - οὐδὲ yap φιλο- 
σοφίαν ἀναιρετέον, ἐπεί τινες τῶν προσποιουμένων 
A > 
αὐτὴν πονηροὶ καταφαίνονται. ἀλλ᾽ ὅμως ἐναργές 
ἐστιν ὅτι κἂν διερευνητικῶς τις ὡς ἔνι μάλιστα 
‘ - / , 
Kal γνησίως τοῖς μαθήμασι προσέρχηται, πολλάκις 
> ~ 
πταίειν αὐτὸν ἐνδέχεται, du οὐδὲν μὲν τῶν εἰρη- 
τ᾿ ~ 
μένων, δὲ αὐτὴν δὲ τὴν τοῦ πράγματος φύσιν καὶ 
τὴν πρὸς τὸ μέγεθος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας ἀσθένειαν. 
καθ᾽ ὅλου γὰρ πρὸς τῷ τὴν περὶ τὸ ποιὸν τῆς ὕλης 
θεωριαν πᾶσαν εἰκαστικὴν εἶναι καὶ οὐ διαβεβαιω- 
\ ~ 
τικήν, Kal μάλιστα THY ἐκ πολλῶν ἀνομοίων συγ- 
κιρναμένην, ἔτι καὶ τοῖς παλαιοῖς τῶν πλανωμένων 
- ee > A «ς 
συσχηματισμοῖς, ἀφ᾽ ὧν ἐφαρμόζομεν τοῖς ὡσαύτως 
~ ~ ~ t Laer 
ἔχουσι τῶν νῦν Tas ὑπὸ τῶν προγενεστέρων ἐπ 
ἐκείνων παρατετηρημένας προτελέσεις," παρόμοιοι 
μὲν * δύνανται γίνεσθαι μᾶλλον ἢ ἧττον καὶ οὗτοι 
ὃ Ἁ ~ "ὃ > LAA δὲ ὃ ~ 
la μακρῶν περιόδων, ἀπαράλλακτοι δὲ οὐδαμῶς, 
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ A 
Ths πάντων ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ μετὰ τῆς γῆς κατὰ 
> / 
TO ἀκριβὲς συναποκαταστάσεως, εἰ μή τις KEVO- 
ιἴσῳ VPD: ἐκάστῳ MNAECam. 
ὃ προλέγεσθαι VMADEProc. ; πως λέγεσθαι (post φύσιν) P: 
προγινώσκεσθαι NCam. 
3 μὴ καθάπαξ τοὺς αὐτοὺς συμβεβηκέναι τοῖς νῦν add. NCam. ; 


om. VPMADE Proc. 
4 yap add. codd.; om. Proc. 


1On rascals in philosophy cf. Plato, Republic 487D, and 
the discussion which follows. 

2? By various ancient authors it was claimed that the 
Chaldaean observations extended over periods of from 
470,000 to 720,000 years; Boll-Bezold-Gundel, pp. 25, 99. 


14 


TETRABIBLOS I. 2 


beforehand, while to the more thoughtful they have 
thereby given occasion to pass equally unfavourable 
judgement upon the natural subjects of prophecy. 
Nor is this deservedly done; it is the same with 
philosophy—we need not abolish it because there 
are evident rascals among those that pretend to it.! 
Nevertheless it is clear that even though one ap- 
proach astrology in the most inquiring and legitimate 
spirit possible, he may frequently err, not for any 
of the reasons stated, but because of the very nature 
of the thing and his own weakness in comparison 
with the magnitude of his profession. For in general, 
besides the fact that every science that deals with 
the quality of its subject-matter is conjectural and 
not to be absolutely affirmed, particularly one which 
is composed of many unlike elements, it is further- 
more true that the ancient configurations of the 
planets,” upon the basis of which we attach to similar 
aspects of our own day the effects observed by the 
ancients in theirs, can be more or less similar to the 
modern aspects, and that, too, at long intervals, but 
not identical, since the exact return of all the heavenly 
bodies and the earth to the same positions,’ unless one 


3 “ The Stoics say that the planets, returning to the same 
point of longitude and latitude which each occupied when 
first the universe arose, at fixed periods of time bring about 
a conflagration and destruction of things, and that the 
universe again reverts anew to the same condition, and 
that as the stars again move in the same way everything 
that took place in the former period is exactly reproduced. 
Socrates, they say, and Plato will again exist, and every 
single man, with the same friends and countrymen ; the 
same things will happen to them, they will meet with 
the same fortune, and deal with the same things,”’ etc. 
(Nemesius, De natura hominis, 38, p. 309, Matthaei). 


15 


PTOLEMY 


dofoin περὶ τὴν τῶν ἀκαταλήπτων κατάληψιν καὶ 
γνῶσιν." ἢ μηδ᾽ ὅλως ἢ 5 μὴ κατά γε τὸν αἰσθητὸν 
ἀνθρώπῳ χρόνον ἀπαρτιζομένης, ὡς διὰ τοῦτο τὰς 
προρρήσεις 3 ἀνομοίων ὄντων τῶν ὑποκειμένων 
παραδειγμάτων ἐνίοτε διαμαρτάνεσθαι. περὶ μὲν 
οὖν τὴν ἐπίσκεψιν τῶν κατὰ τὸ περιέχον γινομένων 
συμπτωμάτων, τοῦτ᾽ ἂν εἴη μόνον τὸ δυσχερές, 
μηδεμιᾶς ἐνταῦθα συμπαραλαμβανομένης αἰτίας τῇ 
κινήσει τῶν οὐρανίων. περὶ δὲ τὰς γενεθλιο- 
8λογικάς,, καὶ ὅλως τὰς κατ᾽ ἰδίαν τῆς ἑκάστου 
συγκρίσεως," οὐ μικρὰ οὐδὲ τὰ τυχόντα ἔστιν ἰδεῖν 
συναίτια καὶ αὐτὰ γινόμενα. τῆς τῶν συνισταμένων 
ἰδιοτροπίας. αἵ τε γὰρ τῶν σπερμάτων διαφοραὶ 
πλεῖστον δύνανται πρὸς τὸ τοῦ γένους ἴδιον, ἐπει- 
δήπερ τοῦ περιέχοντος καὶ τοῦ ὁρίζοντος ὑποκειμένου 
τοῦ αὐτοῦ κατακρατεῖ τῶν σπερμάτων ἕκαστον εἰς 
τὴν καθ᾽ ὅλου τοῦ οἰκείου μορφώματος διατύπωσιν, 
οἷον ἀνθρώπου καὶ ἵππου καὶ τῶν ἄλλων οἵ τε 
τόποι τῆς γενέσεως οὐ μικρὰς ποιοῦνται τὰς περὶ 
τὰ συνιστάμενα παραλλαγάς. καὶ τῶν σπερμάτων 
γὰρ κατὰ γένος ὑποκειμένων τῶν αὐτῶν, οἷον 
ἀνθρωπίνων, καὶ τῆς τοῦ περιέχοντος καταστάσεως 
τῆς αὐτῆς, παρὰ τὸ τῶν χωρῶν διάφορον πολὺ καὶ 
τοῖς σώμασι καὶ ταῖς ψυχαῖς οἱ γενόμενοι διήνεγκαν. 
πρὸς δὲ τούτοις αἵ τε τροφαὶ καὶ τὰ ἔθη, πάντων 
τῶν προκειμένων ἀδιαφόρων ὑποτιθεμένων, συμβάλ- 
λονταί τι πρὸς τὰς κατὰ μέρος τῶν βίων διαγωγάς. 
1 καὶ γνῶσιν om. Cam. 
27) cae 7) VMADE 5 κεῦ 5...) et NCam,. jim segs ΥΩ Ἐν. 


8 προρρήσεις libri (mpw- P) Proc.Cam.! (* notatum) ; 
παρατηρήσεις Cam.” 


16 


TETRABIBLOS I. 2 


holds vain opinions of his ability to comprehend and 
know the incomprehensible, either takes place not at 
all or at least not in the period of time that falls 
within the experience of man; so that for this reason 
predictions sometimes fail, because of the disparity of 
the examples on which they are based. As to the in- 
vestigation of atmospheric phenomena, this would be 
the only difficulty, since no other cause besides the 
movement of the heavenly bodies is taken into con- 
sideration. But in an inquiry concerning nativities 
and individual temperaments in general, one can see 
that there are circumstances of no small importance 
and of no trifling character, which join to cause the 
special qualities of those who are born. For differ- 
ences of seed exert a very great influence on the 
special traits of the genus, since, if the ambient 
and the horizon are the same, each seed prevails to 
express in general its own form, for example, man, 
horse, and so forth; and the places of birth bring 
about no small variation in what is produced. For 
if the seed is generically the same, human for example, 
and the condition of the ambient the same, those who 
are born differ much, both in body and soul, with the 
difference of countries. In addition to this, all the 
aforesaid conditions being equal, rearing and customs 
contribute to influence the particular way in which a 


1 The first three chapters of Book ii dea] with astrological 
ethnology, and in iv. 10 Ptolemy points out that in all 
nativities such general considerations as nationality and 
age take precedence over more particular details. 





4 γενεθλιολογικάς VD, cf. Proc. ; γενεθλιολογίας cett. Cam. 
5 συγκρίσεως VP (-Kpn-) MDECam.'; συγκράσεως Cam.” 


i7 


PTOLEMY 


ὧν ἕκαστον ἐὰν μὴ συνδιαλαμβάνηται ταῖς ἀπὸ τοῦ 
περιέχοντος αἰτίαις, εἰ καὶ ὅτι μάλιστα τὴν πλείστην 
ἔχει τοῦτο δύναμιν (τῷ τὸ μὲν περιέχον κἀκείνοις 
αὐτοῖς εἰς τὸ τοιοῖσδε εἶναι συναίτιον γίνεσθαι, 
τούτῳ δ᾽ ἐκεῖνα μηδαμῶς), πολλὴν ἀπορίαν δύνανται 
΄ ~ > \ ~ / > ‘ > \ / 

παρέχειν τοῖς ἐπὶ τῶν τοιούτων οἰομένοις ἀπὸ μόνης 

9779S τῶν μετεώρων κινήσεως͵ πάντα, καὶ τὰ μὴ 
τέλεον ἐπ᾽ αὐτῇ, δύνασθαι διαγινώσκειν. 

Τούτων δὲ οὕτως ἐχόντων, προσῆκον ἂν εἴη μήτε, 
ἐπειδὴ διαμαρτάνεσθαϊ ποτε τὴν τοιαύτην πρόγνωσιν 
ἐνδέχεται, καὶ τὸ πᾶν αὐτῆς ἀναιρεῖν, ὥσπερ οὐδὲ 
τὴν κυβερνητικὴν διὰ τὸ πολλάκις πταίειν ἀπο- 
δοκιμάζομεν ἀλλ᾽ ὡς ἐν μεγάλοις, οὕτω καὶ θείοις 
ἐπαγγέλμασιν, ἀσπάζεσθαι καὶ ἀγαπητὸν ἡγεῖσθαι 
τὸ δυνατόν͵ μήτ᾽ αὖ πάλιν πάντα 5 ἡμῖν ἀνθρωπίνως 
καὶ ἐστοχασμένως αἰτεῖν παρ᾽ αὐτῆς, ἀλλὰ συμῴφιλο- 
καλεῖν, καὶ ἐν οἷς οὐκ ἦν ἐπ᾽ αὐτῇ τὸ πᾶν ἐφοδιάζειν." . 
Kal ὥσπερ τοῖς ἰατροῖς͵ ὅταν ἐπιζητῶσί. τινα, καὶ περὶ 
αὐτῆς τῆς νόσου καὶ περὶ τῆς τοῦ κάμνοντος ἰδιο- 
τροπίας οὐ μεμψόμεθα λέγουσιν," οὕτω καὶ ἐνταῦθα 
τὰ γένη καὶ τὰς χώρας καὶ τὰς τροφάς, ἢ καί τινα 
τῶν ἤδη συμβεβηκότων, μὴ ἀγανακτεῖν ὑποτιθε- 
μένοις. 

1 τὴν κυβερνητικὴν VPMDEProc. ; κυβερνητικοὺς NACam. 


2 πάντα] μὴ πάντα VPD. 
8 λέγουσιν NCam., λέγοντες VPMADE. 


18 


TETRABIBLOS I. 2 


life is lived. Unless each one of these things is ex- 
amined together with the causes that are derived 
from the ambient, although this latter be conceded 
to exercise the greatest influence (for the ambient 
is one of the causes for these things being what they 
are, while they in turn have no influence upon it), 
they can cause much difficulty for those who believe 
that in such cases everything can be understood, even 
things not wholly within its jurisdiction, from the 
motion of the heavenly bodies alone. 

Since this is the case, it would not be fitting to 
dismiss all prognostication of this character because 
it can sometimes be mistaken, for we do not dis- 
credit the art of the pilot for its many errors; but 
as when the claims are great, so also when they are 
divine, we should welcome what is possible and 
think it enough. Nor, further, should we gropingly 
and in human fashion demand everything of the art, 
but rather join in the appreciation of its beauty, 
even in instances wherein it could not provide the 
full answer; and as we do not find fault with the 
physicians, when they examine a person, for speak- 
ing both about the sickness itself and about the 
patient’s idiosyncrasy, so too in this case we should 
not object to astrologers using as a basis for calcula- 
tion nationality, country, and rearing, or any other 
already existing accidental qualities. 


19 


PTOLEMY 


<y> Ὅτι καὶ ὠφέλιμος 


Τίνα μὲν οὖν τρόπον δυνατὸν γίνεται τὸ δι᾽ 
ἀστρονομίας προγνωστικόν, καὶ ὅτι μέχρι μόνον 
ἂν φθάνοι τῶν τε κατ᾽ αὐτὸ τὸ περιέχον συμπτω- 
μάτων καὶ τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς τοιαύτης αἰτίας τοῖς 
ἀνθρώποις παρακολουθούντων, ταῦτα δ᾽ ἂν εἴη 
περί τε τὰς ἐξ ἀρχῆς ἐπιτηδειότητας τῶν δυνάμεων 
καὶ πράξεων σώματος καὶ ψυχῆς καὶ τὰ κατὰ 

Ι0Οκαιροὺς αὐτῶν πάθη, πολυχρονιότητάς τε καὶ 
ὀλιγοχρονιότητας, ἔτι δὲ καὶ ὅσα τῶν ἔξωθεν 
κυρίαν τε καὶ φυσικὴν ἔχει πρὸς τὰ πρῶτα συμ- 
πλοκήν, ὡς πρὸς τὸ σῶμα μὲν ἡ κτῆσις καὶ ἡ 
συμβίωσις, πρὸς δὲ τὴν ψυχὴν ἥ τε τιμὴ καὶ τὸ 
ἀξίωμα, καὶ τὰς τούτων κατὰ καιροὺς τύχας, 
σχεδὸν ὡς ἐν κεφαλαίοις ' γέγονεν ἡμῖν δῆλον. 
λοιπὸν δ᾽ ἂν εἴη τῶν προκειμένων τὴν κατὰ τὸ 
χρήσιμον ἐπίσκεψιν διὰ βραχέων ποιήσασθαι, πρό- 
τερον διαλαβοῦσι τίνα τρόπον, καὶ πρὸς τί τέλος 
ἀφορῶντες τὴν αὐτοῦ τοῦ χρησίμου δύναμιν ἐκδεξό- 
μεθα. εἰ μὲν γὰρ πρὸς τὰ τῆς ψυχῆς ἀγαθά, τί 
ἂν εἴη συμφορώτερον 5 πρὸς εὐπραγίαν καὶ χαρὰν 
καὶ ὅλως εὐαρέστησιν τῆς τοιαύτης προγνώσεως, 
καθ᾽ ἣν τῶν τε ἀνθρωπίνων καὶ τῶν θείων γινόμεθα 
συνορατικοί; εἰ δὲ πρὸς τὰ τοῦ σώματος, πάντων 
ἂν μᾶλλον ἡ τοιαύτη κατάληψις ἐπιγινώσκοι τὸ 
οἰκεῖόν τε καὶ πρόσφορον τῇ καθ᾽ ἑκάστην σύγκρασιν 
ἐπιτηδειότητι" εἰ δὲ μὴ πρὸς πλοῦτον ἢ δόξαν ἢ 

1 κεφαλαίοις libri, -ῳ Cam. 


ὃ συμφορώτερον VD, συμφερότερον PL, σπουδαιότερον MAE 
Cam. ; post προγνώσεως MAE. 


20 


TETRABIBLOS I. 3 


3. That it is also Beneficial. 


In somewhat summary fashion it has been shown 
how prognostication by astronomical means is pos- 
sible, and that it can go no further than what happens 
in the ambient and the consequences to man from 
such causes—that is, it concerns the original endow- 
ments of faculties and activities of soul and body, their 
occasional diseases, their endurance for a long or a 
short time, and, besides, all external circumstances 
that have a directive and natural connection with 
the original gifts of nature, such as property and 
marriage in the case of the body and honour and 
dignities in that of the soul, and finally what befalls 
them from time to time.’ The remaining part of our 
project would be to inquire briefly as to its useful- 
ness,” first distinguishing how and with what end in 
view we shall take the meaning of the word useful- 
ness. For if we look to the goods of the soul, what’ 
could be more conducive to well-being, pleasure, 
and in general satisfaction than this kind of forecast, 
by which we gain full view of things human and 
divine? And if we look to bodily goods, such know- 
ledge, better than anything else, would perceive what 
is fitting and expedient for the capabilities of each 
temperament. But if it does not aid in the acquisi- 
tion of riches, fame, and the like, we shall be able 


1 Note that in this sentence Ptolemy refers to several of 
the subjects of chapters in Books iii and iv. 

2 According to Cicero, De divinatione, ii. 105, Dicaearchus 
wrote a book to prove that divination was useless; 
Plutarch took the other side, in an essay of which only 
fragments are preserved. 


21 


PTOLEMY 


~ - / /, 
τὰ τοιαῦτα συνεργεῖ, προχωρήσει καὶ περὶ πάσης 
φιλοσοφίας τὸ αὐτὸ τοῦτο φάσκειν: οὐδενὸς γὰρ 
~ ¢€ lol 
τῶν τοιούτων ἐστίν, ὅσον ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτῇ, περιποιητική. 
3 > ” ὦ 2 / \ a > n Ε / 
ἀλλ᾽ οὔτ᾽ ἐκείνης διὰ τοῦτ᾽ av οὔτε ταύτης KaTa- 
ινώσκοιμεν δικαίως, ἀφέμενοι τοῦ πρὸς τὰ μείζω 
A / 
συμφέροντος. 
σ , nN > 4 ΄- a“ ς Διὶ 
Odws δ᾽ ἂν ἐξετάζουσι φανεῖεν ἂν οἱ τὸ ἄχρηστον 
11τῆς καταλήψεως ἐπιμεμφόμενοι πρὸς οὐδὲν τῶν 
κυριωτάτων ἀφορῶντες, ἀλλὰ πρὸς αὐτὸ τοῦτο 
~ > / ¢ / 
μόνον, OTL τῶν πάντη πάντως ἐσομένων ἡ πρό- 
/ ~ ~ 
γνωσις περιττή, Kal τοῦτο δὲ ἁπλῶς πάνυ, καὶ οὐκ 
> ~ \ \ tal “- 
εὖ διειλημμένως. πρῶτον μὲν γὰρ δεῖ σκοπεῖν, 
an / \ 
ὅτι Kal ἐπὶ τῶν ἐξ ἀνάγκης ἀποβησομένων TO μὲν 
ἀπροσδόκητον τούς τε θορύβους ἐκστατικοὺς καὶ 
τὰς χαρὰς ἐξοιστικὰς μάλιστα πέφυκε ποιεῖν - τὸ δὲ 
προγινώσκειν ἐθίζει καὶ ῥυθμίζει τὴν ψυχὴν τῇ 
μελέτῃ τῶν ἀπόντων ὡς παρόντων, καὶ παρα- 
σκευάζει μετ᾽ εἰρήνης καὶ εὐσταθείας ἕκαστα τῶν 
> / > / mv 9 ἂν > ΄“ 
ἐπερχομένων ἀποδέχεσθαι. ἔπειθ᾽ ὅτι μηδ᾽ οὕτως 
¢ \ - ~ 
ἕκαστα χρὴ νομίζειν τοῖς ἀνθρώποις ἀπὸ τῆς ἄνωθεν 
“- a > > ~ > 
αἰτίας παρακολουθεῖν, ὥσπερ ἐξ ἀρχῆς ἀπό τινος 
ἀλύτου καὶ θείου προστάγματος καθ᾽ ἕνα ἕκαστον 
> 
νενομοθετημένα καὶ ἐξ ἀνάγκης ἀποβησόμενα, μηδε- 
a uv ς ~ baat! > / , > 9 
μιᾶς ἄλλης ἁπλῶς αἰτίας ἀντιπράξαι δυναμένης, ἀλλ 
ὡς μὲν τῆς τῶν οὐρανίων κινήσεως καθ᾽ εἱμαρμένην 
> ~ 
θείαν Kat ἀμετάπτωτον ἐξ αἰῶνος ἀποτελουμένης, 
lol ~ > 
τῆς δὲ τῶν ἐπιγείων ! ἀλλοιώσεως καθ᾽ εἱμαρμένην 
φυσικὴν καὶ μεταπτώτην τὰς πρώτας αἰτίας ἄνωθεν 
λαμβανούσης κατὰ συμβεβηκὸς καὶ κατ᾽ ἐπακολού- 
θησιν " καὶ ὡς τῶν μὲν διὰ καθολικοτέρας περιστά- 


22 


TETRABIBLOS I. 3 


to say the same of all philosophy, for it does not 
provide any of these things as far as its own powers 
are concerned. We should not, however, for that 
reason be justified in condemning either philosophy 
or this art, disregarding its greater advantages. 

To a general examination it would appear that 
those who find fault with the uselessness of prog- 
nostication have no regard for the most important 
matters, but only for this—that foreknowledge of 
events that will happen in any case is superfluous ; 
this, too, quite unreservedly and without due dis- 
crimination. For, in the first place, we should 
consider that even with events that will necessarily 
take place their unexpectedness is very apt to cause 
excessive panic and delirious joy, while foreknow- 
ledge accustoms and calms the soul by experience 
of distant events as though they were present, and 
prepares it to greet with calm and steadiness what- 
ever comes. A second reason is that we should not 
believe that separate events attend mankind as the 
result of the heavenly cause as if they had been 
originally ordained for each person by some irre- 
vocable divine command and destined to take place 
by necessity without the possibility of any other 
cause whatever interfering. Rather is it true that 
the movement of the heavenly bodies, to be sure, 
is eternally performed in accordance with divine, 
unchangeable destiny, while the change of earthly 
things is subject to a natural and mutable fate, and 
in drawing its first causes from above it is governed 
by chance and natural sequence. Moreover, some 
things happen to mankind through more general 


1 περιγείων PMECam. 
23 


PTOLEMY 


A > ΄“- 
σεις τοῖς ἀνθρώποις συμβαινόντων, οὐχὶ δὲ ἐκ τῆς 
12 ἰδίας ἑκάστου ' φυσικῆς ἐπιτηδειότητος, ὡς ὅταν 

A 4 ~ 
κατὰ μεγάλας καὶ δυσφυλάκτους τοῦ περιέχοντος 
A > - μὴ ~ 
τροπὰς ἐκ πυρώσεων ἢ λοιμῶν ἢ κατακλυσμῶν 
‘ ~ vA ~ 
κατὰ πλήθη διαφθαρῶσιν, ὑποπιπτούσης ἀεὶ τῆς 

, ~ / > , ~ 

βραχυτέρας αἰτίας τῇ μείζονι καὶ ἰσχυρωτέρᾳ, τῶν 
\ \ ‘ 
δὲ κατὰ τὴν ἑνὸς ἑκάστου φυσικὴν ἰδιοσυγκρασίαν 
διὰ μικρὰς καὶ τὰς τυχούσας τοῦ περιέχοντος ἀντι- 
,ὔ / A a / A 
παθείας. τούτων yap οὕτω διαληφθέντων, φανερὸν 
ὅτι καὶ καθ᾽ ὅλου καὶ κατὰ μέρος, ὅσων μὲν συμπτω- 
/ ~ \ a 
μάτων TO πρῶτον αἴτιον " ἄμαχόν τέ ἐστι καὶ μεῖζον 
~ ~ 4 
παντὸς τοῦ ἀντιπράττοντος, ταῦτα καὶ πάντη πάν- 
A ΝΜ 
τως ἀποβαίνειν ἀνάγκη: ὅσα δὲ μὴ οὕτως ἔχει, 
~ > / 
τούτων τὰ μὲν ἐπιτυγχάνοντα τῶν ἀντιπαθησόντων 3 
‘A , 
εὐανάτρεπτα γίνεται, τὰ δὲ μὴ εὐπορήσοντα ἃ Kat 
- A > ΝΜ 
αὐτὰ ταῖς πρώταις φύσεσιν ἀκολουθεῖ, δι᾿ ἄγνοιαν 
\ ~ > > ‘ 
μέντοι καὶ οὐκέτι διὰ τὴν τῆς ἰσχύος ἀνάγκην. TO 
> A 3 Μ ” \ \ > A ra 
αὐτὸ δ᾽ av tis ἴδοι συμβεβηκὸς καὶ ἐπὶ πάντων 
~ ~ > > 4, νὴ A 
ἁπλῶς τῶν φυσικὰς ἐχόντων Tas ἀρχάς. καὶ yap 
~ ΝΜ > / 
καὶ λίθων καὶ φυτῶν καὶ ζῴων, ἔτι δὲ τραυμάτων 
~ \ > > / 
καὶ παθῶν Kal νοσημάτων, τὰ μὲν ἐξ ἀνάγκης τι 
a nn > / 
ποιεῖν πέφυκε, τὰ δ᾽ εἰ μηδὲν τῶν ἐναντίων ἀντι- 
~ a > 
πράξει. οὕτως οὖν χρὴ νομίζειν Kal τὰ τοῖς ἀνθρώ- 
\ Α a 
ποις συμβησόμενα προλέγειν τοὺς φυσικοὺς τῇ 
1 ἐκ τῆς ἰδίας ἑκάστου VMADE;; ἰδίας om. PL; ἀπὸ ἑκάστης 
φυσικῆς ἰδίας Cam.” 
26 post αἴτιον add. Cam., om. libri. 


8 ἀντιπαθησόντων VADCam., -σάντων PME. 
4 εὐπορήσοντα VADCam., -σαντα PME. 





1Cf. ii. 1, ‘‘ the particular always falls under the 
general.” Ptolemy distinguishes carefully between uni- 


24 





TETRABIBLOS I. 3 


circumstances and not as the result of an individual’s 
own natural propensities—for example, when men 
perish in multitudes by conflagration or pestilence 
or cataclysms, through monstrous and inescapable 
changes in the ambient, for the lesser cause always 
yields to the greater! and stronger; other occur- 
rences, however, accord with the individual’s own 
natural temperament through minor and fortuitous 
antipathies of the ambient. For if these distinc- 
tions are thus made, it is clear that both in general 
and in particular whatever events depend upon a 
first cause, which is irresistible and more powerful 
than anything that opposes it, must by all means 
take place ; on the contrary, of events that are not 
of this character, those which are provided with 
resistant forces are easily averted, while those that 
are not follow the primary natural causes, to be 
sure, but this is due to ignorance and not to the 
necessity of almighty power. One might observe this 
same thing happening in all events whatsoever that 
have natural causes. For even of stones, plants, and 
animals, and also of wounds, mishaps, and sicknesses, 
some are of such a nature as to act of necessity, 
others only if no opposing thing interferes. One 
should therefore believe that physical philosophers 
predict what is to befall men with foreknowledge of 


versal (καθολική) and particular or genethlialogical 
(γενεθλιαλογική) astrology. The former deals with astro- 
logical influences which affect all mankind or whole 
countries and races of men, and is treated in Books i-ii; 
the latter concerns the nativities of individuals, and is the 
subject of Books iii-iv. 


25 


PTOLEMY 


τοιαύτῃ προγνώσει, καὶ μὴ κατὰ κενὰς δόξας προσ- 
ἐρχομένους, ὡς τῶν μὲν διὰ τὸ πολλὰ καὶ μεγάλα 
13 τὰ ποιητικὰ τυγχάνειν, ἀφυλάκτων ὄντων, τῶν δὲ 
διὰ τοὐναντίον μετατροπὰς ἐπιδεχομένων. καθάπερ 
καὶ τῶν ἰατρῶν ὅσοι δυνατοὶ σημειοῦσθαι τὰ παθή- 
ματα προγινώσκουσι τά τε πάντως ἀνελόντα, καὶ 
τὰ χωροῦντα Σ βοήθειαν. ἐπὶ δὲ τῶν μεταπεσεῖν 
δυναμένων, οὕτως ἀκουστέον τοῦ γενεθλιαλόγου, 
φέρ᾽ εἰπεῖν, ὅτι τῇ τοιᾷδε συγκράσει κατὰ τὴν 
τοιάνδε τοῦ περιέχοντος ἰδιοτροπίαν τραπεισῶν ἐπὶ 
τὸ πλέον ἢ ἔλαττον τῶν ὑποκειμένων συμμετριῶν, 
τὸ τοιόνδε 8 παρακολουθήσει πάθος - ὡς καὶ τοῦ μὲν 
ἰατροῦ, ὅτι τόδε τὸ ἕλκος νομὴν ἢ σῆψιν ἐμποιεῖ, 
τοῦ δὲ μεταλλικοῦ, λόγου ἕνεκεν, ὅτι τὸν σίδηρον ἡ ἡ 
λίθος ἡ μαγνῆτις ἕλκει. ὥσπερ γὰρ τούτων ἑἕκάτε- 
ρον, ἐαθὲν μὲν δι᾿’ ἀγνωσίαν τῶν ἀντιπαθησόντων, 
πάντη πάντως παρακολουθήσει τῇ τῆς πρώτης 
φύσεως δυνάμει, οὔτε δὲ τὸ ἕλκος τὴν νομὴν ἢ τὴν 
σῆψιν κατεργάσεται τῆς ἀντικειμένης θεραπείας 
τυχόν, οὔτε τὸν σίδηρον ἡ μαγνῆτις ἑλκύσει παρα- 
τριβέντος αὐτῇ σκορόδου. καὶ αὐτὰ δὲ ταῦτα τὰ 
κωλύοντα φυσικῶς καὶ καθ᾽ εἱμαρμένην ἀντεπάθη- 
σεν οὕτω καὶ ἐπ᾽ ἐκείνων, ἀγνοούμενα μὲν τὰ 
συμβησόμενα τοῖς ἀνθρώποις, ἢ ἐγνωσμένα μέν, μὴ 
τυχόντα δὲ τῶν ἀντιπαθούντων, πάντη πάντως 
ἀκολουθήσει τῷ τῆς πρώτης φύσεως εἱρμῷ. προ- 
γνωσθέντα δὲ καὶ εὐπορήσαντα τῶν θεραπευόντων 
1 ἀναιροῦνται Cam.?, ἀναιροῦντα Cam.” 

Ξχωροῦντα VMADE; cf. τὰ θεραπείαν ἐπιδεχόμενα Proc. ; 


χωρηγοῦντα Cam.', Cam.? (χορ-), P (χωρι-). 
3 ἄν post τοιόνδε add. PMECam. 


26 








TETRABIBLOS TI. 3 


this character and do not approach their task under 
false impressions ; for certain things, because their 
effective causes are numerous and powerful, are 
inevitable, but others for the opposite reason may 
be averted. Similarly those physicians who can re- 
cognize ailments know beforehand those which are 
always fatal and those which admit of aid. In the 
case of events that may be modified we must give 
heed to the astrologer, when, for example, he says 
that to such and such a temperament, with such and 
such a character of the ambient, if the fundamental 
proportions increase or decrease, such and such an 
affection will result. Similarly we must believe the 
physician, when he says that this sore will spread or 
cause putrefaction, and the miner, for instance, that 
the lodestone attracts iron: just as each of these, if left 
to itself through ignorance of the opposing forces, will 
inevitably develop as its original nature compels, but 
neither will the sore cause spreading or putrefaction 
if it receives preventive treatment, nor will the lode- 
stone attract the iron if it is rubbed with garlic; and 
these very deterrent measures also have their resist- 
ing power naturally and by fate; so also in the other 
cases, if future happenings to men are not known, or 
if they are known and the remedies are not applied, 
they will by all means follow the course of primary 
nature; but if they are recognized ahead of time 
and remedies are provided, again quite in accord 


1 A current belief; cf. Thorndike, History of Magic and 
Experimental Science, I, p. 213, for an instance of its 
occurrence in Plutarch. 


27 


14 


PTOLEMY 


φυσικῶς πάλιν καθ᾽ εἱμαρμένην, ἢ ἀγένητα ' τέλεον, 
ἢ μετριώτερα καθίσταται. ὅλως δὲ τῆς τοιαύτης 
δυνάμεως τῆς αὐτῆς οὔσης ἐπί τε τῶν ὁλοσχερῶς 
θεωρουμένων καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν κατὰ μέρος, θαυμάσειεν 
ἄν τις διὰ τίνα δή ποτε αἰτίαν ἐπὶ μὲν THY? καθ᾽ 
ὅλου πιστεύουσι πάντες καὶ τῷ δυνατῷ τῆς προγνώ- 
σεως καὶ τῷ πρὸς τὸ φυλάττεσθαι χρησίμῳ (τάς τε 
γὰρ ὥρας καὶ τὰς τῶν ἀπλανῶν ἐπισημασίας καὶ 
τοὺς τῆς σελήνης σχηματισμοὺς οἱ πλεῖστοι προγινώ- 
σκειν ὁμολογοῦσι, καὶ πολλὴν πρόνοιαν ποιοῦνται 
τῆς φυλακῆς αὐτῶν, πεφροντικότες ἀεὶ πρὸς μὲν τὸ 
θέρος τῶν ψύχειν δυναμένων, πρὸς δὲ τὸν χειμῶνα 
τῶν θερμαινόντων, καὶ ὅλως προπαρασκευάζοντες 
αὑτῶν τὰς φύσεις ἐπὶ τὸ εὔκρατον - καὶ ἔτι πρὸς μὲν 
τὸ ἀσφαλὲς τῶν τε ὡρῶν καὶ τῶν ἀναγωγῶν παρα- 
φυλάττοντες τὰς τῶν ἀπλανῶν ἀστέρων ἐπισημασίας, 
πρὸς δὲ τὰς ἀρχὰς τῶν ὀχειῶν καὶ φυτειῶν τοὺς 
κατὰ πλήρωσιν τῶν φωτῶν τῆς σελήνης σχηματισ- 
μούς, καὶ οὐδεὶς οὐδαμῆ τῶν τοιούτων κατέγνωκεν 
οὔὐθ᾽ ὡς ἀδυνάτων, οὔθ᾽ ὡς ἀχρήστων), ἐπὶ δὲ τῶν κατὰ 
μέρος καὶ ἐκ τῆς τῶν λοιπῶν συγκράσεως ἰδιωμά- 
των, οἷον μᾶλλον καὶ ἧττον, χειμώνων ἢ καὶ 
καυμάτων, καὶ τῆς Kal? ἕκαστον ἰδιοσυγκρασίας, 
οὔτε τὸ προγινώσκειν ἔτι δυνατὸν ἡγοῦνταί τινες 
οὔτε τὰ πολλὰ ἐγχωρεῖν φυλάξασθαι - καίτοι προ- 
δήλου τυγχάνοντος, ὅτι πρὸς τὰ καθ᾽ ὅλου καύματα 


1 ἀγένητα VADE, ἀγέννητα PMCam. 
3 τῶν libri, τοῖς Cam. 





1Hesiod’s Works and Days, 383 ff. (ed. Flach), well il- 
lustrates how such stars and constellations as the Pleiades, 


28 


TETRABIBLOS I. 3 


with nature and fate, they either do not occur at all 
or are rendered less severe. And in general, since 
such power is the same whether applied to things 
regarded universally or particularly, one would 
wonder why all believe in the efficacy of prediction 
in universal matters, and in its usefulness for 
guarding one’s interests (for most people admit that 
they have foreknowledge of the seasons, of the 
significance of the constellations, and of the phases 
of the moon, and take great forethought for safe- 
guarding themselves, always contriving cooling 
agents against summer and the means of warmth 
against winter, and in general preparing their own 
natures with moderation as a goal; furthermore, to 
ensure the safety of the seasons and of their sailings 
they watch the significance of the fixed stars, and, 
for the beginning of breeding and sowing, the aspects 
of the moon’s light at its full,! and no one ever 
condemns such practices either as impossible or 
useless); but, on the other hand, as regards par- 
ticular matters and those depending upon the 
mixture of the other qualities—such as predictions 
of more or less, of cold or of heat, and of the in- 
dividual temperament—some people believe neither 
that foreknowledge is still possible nor that pre- 
cautions can be taken in most instances. And yet, 
since it is obvious that, if we happen to have 
cooled ourselves against heat in general, we shall 


Orion, Hyades, Sirius, and Arcturus, and the solstices 
were observed in ordinary rural life in such connections as 
those mentioned by Ptolemy; also in navigation (618 ff.). 
The favourable and unfavourable days of the month (i.e. 
of the moon) are enumerated in lines 769 ff. 


29 


PTOLEMY 


el τύχοιμεν προκαταψύξαντες ἑαυτοὺς ἧττον καυσού- 
μεθα, δύναται τὸ ὅμοιον ἐνεργεῖν καὶ πρὸς τὰ ἰδίως 
τήνδε τὴν σύγκρασιν εἰς ἀμετρίαν avéavta! τοῦ 
θερμοῦ. ἀλλὰ γὰρ αἴτιον τῆς τοιαύτης ἁμαρτίας 
τό τε δύσκολον καὶ ἄηθες τῆς τῶν κατὰ μέρος 
προγνώσεως, ὅπερ καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν ἄλλων σχεδὸν 
ἁπάντων ἀπιστίαν ἐμποιεῖ. καὶ τὸ μὴ συναπτο- 
μένης ὡς ἐπὶ πᾶν τῆς ἀντιπαθούσης δυνάμεως τῇ 
προγνωστικῇ, διὰ τὸ σπάνιον τῆς οὕτω τελείας 
διαθέσεως, καὶ περὶ τὰς πρώτας φύσεις ἀνεμποδί- 
στως ἀποτελουμένης, δόξαν ὡς περὶ ἀτρέπτων καὶ 
ἀφυλάκτων παρέσχε καὶ πάντων ἁπλῶς τῶν ἀπο- 
βησομένων 

“Ὥσπερ δέ, οἶμαι, καὶ ἐπ᾽ αὐτοῦ τοῦ προγνωστικοῦ, 
καὶ εἰ μὴ διὰ παντὸς ἦν ἄπταιστον, τό γε δυνατὸν 
αὐτοῦ μεγίστης ἄξιον σπουδῆς κατεφαίνετο, τὸν 
αὐτὸν τρόπον καὶ ἐπὶ τοῦ φυλακτικοῦ, καὶ εἰ μὴ 
πάντων ἐστὶ θεραπευτικόν, ἀλλὰ τό γ᾽ ἐπ᾽ ἐνίων, 
κἂν ὀλίγα κἂν μικρὰ ἣ, ἀγαπᾶν καὶ ἀσπάζεσθαι καὶ 
κέρδος οὐ τὸ τυχὸν ἡγεῖσθαι προσήκει. 

Τούτοις δέ, ὡς ἔοικε, συνεγνωκότες οὕτως ἔχουσι, 
καὶ οἱ μάλιστα τὴν τοιαύτην δύναμιν τῆς τέχνης 
προαγαγόντες Αἰγύπτιοι συνῆψαν πανταχῆ τῷ δι᾽ 
10 ἀστρονομίας προγνωστικῷ τὴν ἰατρικήν. οὐ γὰρ 
1 αὔξαντα PL, -οντα VMADECam. 

2 καὶ εἰ μὴ MAE, κἂν μὴ VDCam., καὶ ἢ μὴ P, καὶ εἰ μὲν L. 





1 Ptolemy’s language is highly condensed and obscure ; 
the translation gives the probable meaning. Proclus’ 
Paraphraxe, pp. 31-32, thus renders the passage: ‘‘ But 
the reason for such an assumption is the difficulty of 
prognostication in particular cases, the accurate and truth- 


30 





TETRABIBLOS I. 3 


suffer less from it, similar measures can prove effec- 
tive against particular forces which increase this 
particular temperament to a disproportionate amount 
of heat. For the cause of this error is the difficulty 
and unfamiliarity of particular prognostication, a 
reason which in most other situations as well brings 
about disbelief. And since for the most part the 
resisting faculty is not coupled with the prognostic, 
because so perfect a disposition is rare, and since the 
force of nature takes its course without hindrance 
when the primary natures are concerned, an opinion 
has been produced that absolutely all future events 
are inevitable and unescapable.! 

But, I think, just as with prognostication, even if 
it be not entirely infallible, at least its possibilities 
have appeared worthy of the highest regard, so too 
in the case of defensive practice, even though it does 
not furnish a remedy for everything, its authority 
in some instances at least, however few or un- 
important, should be welcomed and prized. and 
regarded as profitable in no ordinary sense. 

Recognizing, apparently, that these things are so, 
those who have most advanced this faculty of the 
art, the Egyptians, have entirely united medicine 
with astronomical prediction. For they would 


ful handling of these matters, and the tact that, because a 
person is rarely found who has so perfect a disposition that 
none of the remedies escapes him, the taculty which 
generally resists the force which, unhindered, is effective 
through the primary natures, is not coupled with the 
prognostication, and, not being so coupled, creates the 
opinion concerning al! future events without exception 
that they are inevitable and that it is impossible to ward 
them off.” 2 See Bouché-Leclercq, pp. 517-520. 


31 


PTOLEMY 


ἄν ποτε ἀποτροπιασμούς τινας καὶ φυλακτήρια καὶ 
θεραπείας συνίσταντο πρὸς τὰς ἐκ τοῦ περιέχοντος 
ἐπιούσας ἢ παρούσας περιστάσεις καθολικάς τε καὶ 
μερικάς, εἴ τις αὐτοῖς ἀκινησίας καὶ ἀμετατρεψίας 
τῶν ἐσομένων ὑπῆρχε δόξα. νῦν δὲ καὶ τὸ κατὰ 
τὰς ἐφεξῆς φύσεις ἀντιπράξαι δυνάμενον ἐν δευτέρᾳ 
χώρᾳ τοῦ καθ᾽ εἱμαρμένην λόγου" τιθέμενοι, συν- 
ἔζευξαν τῇ τῆς προγνώσεως δυνάμει τὴν κατὰ τὸ 
χρήσιμον καὶ ὠφέλιμον διὰ τῶν καλουμένων παρ᾽ 
αὐτοῖς ἰατρομαθηματικῶν συντάξεων," ὅπως διὰ 
μὲν ἀστρονομίας τάς τε τῶν ὑποκειμένων συγ- 
κράσεων ποιότητας 38 εἰδέναι συμβαίνῃ, καὶ τὰ διὰ 
τὸ περιέχον ἐσόμενα συμπτώματα, καὶ τὰς ἰδίας 
αὐτῶν αἰτίας (ὡς ἄνευ τῆς τούτων γνώσεως, καὶ 
τῶν βοηθημάτων κατὰ τὸ πλεῖστον διαπίπτειν 
ὀφειλόντων, ἅτε μὴ πᾶσι σώμασιν ἢ πάθεσι τῶν 
αὐτῶν συμμέτρων ὄντων), διὰ δὲ τῆς ἰατρικῆς 
ἀπὸ τῶν ἑκάστοις οἰκείως συμπαθούντων ἢ ἀντι- 
παθούντων, τάς τε τῶν μελλόντων παθῶν προφυ- 
λακὰς καὶ τὰς τῶν ἐνεστώτων θεραπείας ἀδια- 
πτώτους, ὡς ἔνι μάλιστα, ποιούμενοι διατελῶσιν." 
᾿Αλλὰ ταῦτα μὲν μέχρι τοσούτων ἡμῖν κατὰ τὸ 
κεφαλαιῶδες προτετυπώσθω. ποιησόμεθα δὲ ἤδη 
τὸν λόγον κατὰ τὸν εἰσαγωγικὸν τρόπον, ἀρξάμενοι 
περὶ τῆς ἑκάστου τῶν οὐρανίων περὶ αὐτὸ τὸ 
17 ποιητικὸν ἰδιοτροπίας, ἀκολούθως ταῖς ὑπὸ τῶν 


1 λόγου VMADE, λόγον PL, om. Cam. 

2 Post συντάξεων add. eases Cam. ; in libris deest. 
8 ποιότητας libri, ἰδιότητας Cam. 

4 διατελοῦσι Cam. 


32 


TETRABIBLOS I. 3 


never have devised certain means of averting or 
warding off or remedying the universal and parti- 
cular conditions that come or are present by reason 
of the ambient, if they had had any idea that the 
future cannot be moved and changed. But as it 
is, they place the faculty of resisting by orderly 
natural means in second rank to the decrees of fate, 
and have yoked to the possibility of prognostica- 
tion its useful and beneficial faculty, through what 
they call their iatromathematical systems (medical 
astrology), in order that by means of astronomy they 
may succeed in learning the qualities of the under- 
lying temperatures, the events that will occur in the 
future because of the ambient, and their special 
causes, on the ground that without this knowledge 
any measures of aid ought for the most part to fail, 
because the same ones are not fitted for all bodies 
or diseases;1 and, on the other hand, by means 
of medicine, through their knowledge of what is 
properly sympathetic or antipathetic in each case, 
they proceed, as far as possible, to take precautionary 
measures against impending illness and to prescribe 
infallible treatment for existing disease. 

Let this be, to this point, our summarily stated 
preliminary sketch. We shall now conduct our dis- 
cussion after the manner of an introduction,” begin- 
ning with the character of each of the heavenly 


1 Perhaps “‘affections,’’ the more general sense of the 
word πάθος. 

2 “* Introductions” (eicaywyai), or systematic elemen- 
tary treatises, are a common literary form in antiquity. 
Nicomachus’ Introduction to Arithmetic (εἰσαγωγὴ ἀριθμητική) 
is a good example. The “ art’ (τέχνη) was a similar form 
of treatise, and might deal with any art or science. 


33 


PTOLEMY 


~ A ‘ 
παλαιῶν κατὰ τὸν φυσικὸν τρόπον ἐφηρμοσμέναις 
fe ‘ / = ~ 
παρατηρήσεσι. Kal πρώταις ' ταῖς τῶν πλανω. 
/ 3 4 / « 
μένων ἀστέρων δυνάμεσι ἡλίου τε καὶ σελήνης 


6.> Περὶ τῆς τῶν πλανωμένων 
ἀστέρων" δυνάμεως 


‘O HA iX \ ‘ Μ ~ 
ἥλιος κατείληπται TO ποιητικὸν ἔχων τῆς 
΄ ~ > 

οὐσίας ev τῷ θερμαίνειν, καὶ ἠρέμα Enpaivew. 

ταῦτα δὲ μάλιστα τῶν ἄλλων ἡμῖν εὐαισθητότερα 

γίνεται διά τε τὸ μέγεθος αὐτοῦ καὶ τὸ τῶν κατὰ 

~ > 

Tas ὥρας μεταβολῶν ἐναργές, ἐπειδήπερ Gow ἂν 

μᾶλλον ἐγγίζῃ τοῦ κατὰ κορυφὴν ἡμῶν τόπου, 

~ ¢ ~ “ 4 « A / A 

μᾶλλον ἡμᾶς οὕτω διατίθησιν. ἡ δὲ σελήνη τὸ 

μὲν πλέον ἔχει τῆς δυνάμεως ἐν τῷ ὑγραίνειν, διὰ 

δ “- ~ 

τὴν περιγειότητα δηλονότι καὶ THY τῶν ὑγρῶν 

ἀναθυμίασιν. καὶ διατίθησιν οὕτως ἄντικρυς τὰ 

\ / A 
σώματα πεπαίνουσα Kal διασήπουσα τὰ πλεῖστα, 
\ ~ 

κεκοινώνηκε δὲ ἠρέμα καὶ τοῦ θερμαίνειν διὰ τοὺς 
ἀπὸ τοῦ ἡλίου φωτισμούς. 

« A “ / > \ ‘ ,ὔ » “ la 

O δὲ τοῦ Κρόνου ἀστὴρ τὸ πλέον ἔχει τῆς ποιό- 

~ ~ > / 
τητος ἐν TH ψύχειν καὶ τῷ ἠρέμα ξηραίνειν, διὰ τὸ 
| πρώταις VD, πρώτης MAE, πρὸ τῆς Ῥ, πρὸς τῆς L, πρῶτον 
Proc., πρώτως Cam. 


2 πλανωμένων ἀστέρων VADEProc., om. ἀστέρων M, πλα- 
νητῶν PLCam. 3 τῷ. . . τόπῳ MAECam. 


1In this chapter and elsewhere Ptolemy makes use of 
the four Aristotelian principles, hot, cold, wet, dry (e.g. 
De generatione et corruptione, ii. 2, 3). Cf. Boll-Bezold- 
Gundel, p. 50. 

2Tt was a doctrine as old as Thales that the moisture 
arising from the earth nourished the heavenly bodies ; α΄. 


34 


TETRABIBLOS I. 3-4 


bodies with respect to its active power, in agreement 
with the physical observations attached to them by 
the ancients, and in the first place the powers of 
the planets, sun, and moon. 


4. Of the Power of the Planets. 


The active power of the sun’s essential nature is 
found to be heating and, to a certain degree, drying.! 
This is made more easily perceptible in the case of 
the sun than any other heavenly body by its size 
and by the obviousness of its seasonal changes, for 
the closer it approaches to the zenith the more it 
affects us in this way. Most of the moon’s power 
consists of humidifying, clearly because it is close 
to the earth and because of the moist exhalations ? 
therefrom. Its action therefore is precisely this, to 
soften and cause putrefaction in bodies for the most 
part, but it shares moderately also in heating power 
because of the light which it receives from the sun. 

It is Saturn’s * quality chiefly to cool and, mode- 
rately, to dry, probably because he is furthest 


Diels, Doxographi Graeci (Berlin, 1879), p. 276; J. Burnet, 
Early Greek Philosophy (London, 1920), p. 49. 


3 Ptolemy ordinarily says “ the (star) of Saturn,” * the 
(star) of Jupiter,’’ etc. (ὁ τοῦ Κρόνου, ὁ τοῦ Διός), and less 
often merely ‘‘ Saturn,” “ Jupiter,’’ and the like, a form 


of speech which tends to identify the planet and the 
divinity whose name it bears. On the other hand, he does 
not use the older Greek names such as ®waddpos, Φαίνων, 
etc. (though Πυροείς occurs for “Apys in one of the MSS.). 
See F. Cumont, “ Antiochus d’Athénes et Porphyre,” 
Annuaire de l’Inst. de Philologie et d’ Histoire Orientale, ii. 
139, and ‘‘ Les noms de planétes et d’astrolatrie chez les 
grecs,” L’ Antiquité Classique, iv. 1, pp. 5-43;  Boll- 
Bezold-Gundel, p. 48. 

35 


PTOLEMY 


λ a Cy ” > ͵ὔ 1 Ὁ“ ~ ~ « ͵ 
πλεῖστον, ὡς ἔοικεν, ἀπέχειν } ἅμα τῆς τε τοῦ ἡλίου 
\ ~ ~ ‘ \ ~ ~ 
θερμασίας καὶ τῆς τῶν περὶ τὴν γῆν ὑγρῶν avabv- 
/ 
μιάσεως. συνίστανται δὲ δυνάμεις ἐπί τε τούτου 
\ ~ ~ \ ~ ~ 
καὶ τῶν λοιπῶν, καὶ διὰ τῆς τῶν πρὸς τὸν ἥλιον 
καὶ τὴν σελήνην σχηματισμῶν παρατηρήσεως, ἐπει- 
18 δήπερ οἱ μὲν οὕτως, οἱ δὲ οὕτω τὴν τοῦ περιέχοντος 
κατάστασιν ἐπὶ τὸ μᾶλλον ἢ ἧττον συντρέποντες 
φαίνονται. 
€ “- » , ~ 
O δὲ τοῦ Ἄρεως ὃ ξηραίνειν μάλιστα καὶ καυσοῦν 
ν ͵ὔ ~ lol 7 5 , 
ἔχει φύσιν, TH τε πυρώδει τοῦ χρώματος οἰκείως 
\ a uf ‘ ν > 4 « / > ~ 
Kal τῇ πρὸς τὸν ἥλιον ἐγγύτητι, ὑποκειμένης αὐτῷ 
τῆς ἡλιακῆς σφαίρας. 
« \ “- A ” μ᾿ ‘ ‘ “- 
Ο δὲ τοῦ Διὸς εὔκρατον ἔχει τὸ ποιητικὸν τῆς 
/ \ ond / ~ ~ 
δυνάμεως, μεταξὺ γινομένης THs κινήσεως αὐτοῦ τοῦ 
‘ A ~ ~ ‘ ‘ 
τε κατὰ τὸν Κρόνον ψυκτικοῦ καὶ τοῦ κατὰ τὸν "Apny 
fol ov \ e Ul 
καυστικοῦ. θερμαίνει Te yap ἅμα καὶ vypatver, 
lol s / ‘ ~ 
καὶ διὰ τὸ μᾶλλον εἶναι θερμαντικός, ὑπὸ τῶν 
~ ΄ / 
ὑποκειμένων σφαιρῶν, γονίμων πνευμάτων γίνεται 
ποιητικός. 
\ ¢ ~ . ͵ 2. ~ " ᾽ ~ ? 
Kai ὁ τῆς Αφροδίτης δὲ τῶν μὲν αὐτῶν ἐστι 
> ἣν 2: / 
κατὰ TO εὔκρατον ποιητικός," ἀλλὰ κατὰ TO ἐναντίον. 
\ \ A 
θερμαίνει μὲν yap ἠρέμα διὰ τὴν ἐγγύτητα THY πρὸς 
td ΄ ε / 
τὸν ἥλιον - μάλιστα δὲ ὑγραίνει καθάπερ ἡ σελήνη 
\ > A \ A / ~ > ͵ ~ ’ὔ 
καὶ αὐτὸς διὰ τὸ μέγεθος τῶν ἰδίων φωτῶν, νοσφιζό- 
Ἁ > \ ~ ΄ \ ~ ~ > 
μενος THY ἀπὸ τῶν περιεχόντων THY γῆν ὑγρῶν ava- 
θυμίασιν. 
᾿ ἀπέχεν VMADE, om. PLCam.; ἀφεστάναι add. post 
ἀναθυμιάσεως Cam. 
ὃ Πυροέντος ME. Ordinem restauravi quam praebent 


VPLADProc.; in MECam. ordo est ὁ δὲ τοῦ Διὸς. .. 
ποιητικός. ὁ δὲ τοῦ Apews . . σφαίρας. 


360 


TETRABIBLOS TI. 4 


removed! both from the sun’s heat and the moist 
exhalations about the earth. Both in Saturn’s case 
and in that of the other planets there are powers, too, 
which arise through the observation of their aspects 
to the sun and the moon, for some of them appear 
to modify conditions in the ambient in one way, some 
in another, by increase or by decrease. 

The nature of Mars is chiefly to dry and to burn, 
in conformity with his fiery colour and by reason 
of his nearness to the sun, for the sun’s sphere lies 
just below him. 

Jupiter has a temperate active force because his 
movement takes place between the cooling influence 
of Saturn and the burning power of Mars. He both 
heats and humidifies; and because his heating 
power is the greater by reason of the underlying 
spheres, he produces fertilizing winds. 

Venus has the same powers and tempered nature 
as Jupiter, but acts in the opposite way; for she 
warms moderately because of her nearness to the 
sun, but chiefly humidifies, like the moon, because 
of the amount of her own light and because she 
appropriates the exhalations from the moist atmo- 
sphere surrounding the earth. 


1 The order of the heavenly bodies followed by Ptolemy 
is Saturn, Jupiter, Mars, Sun, Venus, Mercury, Moon ; ¢f. 
Bouché-Leclereq, pp. 107-108. 





ὃ ποιητικός... evavtiov VPLMADE (καὶ κατὰ ME); ef. 
Proc.; τῷ Ζηνὶ κατὰ μέντοι τὸ ἀντικείμενον ποιητικός Cam. 


(om. τῷ Ζηνὶ ed. pr.). 
37 


PTOLEMY 


Ὃ δὲ τοῦ “Ἑρμοῦ ὡς ἐπὶ πᾶν ἐξ ἴσου ποτὲ μὲν 
ξηραντικὸς καταλαμβάνεται καὶ τῶν ὑγρῶν ἀναπω- 
τικός, διὰ τὸ μηδέποτε πολὺ τῆς τοῦ ἡλίου θερ- 
μασίας κατὰ μῆκος ἀφίστασθαι, ποτὲ δ᾽ αὖ ὑγραν- 
τικός, διὰ τὸ τῇ περιγειοτάτῃ σφαίρᾳ τῆς σελήνης 
ἐπικεῖσθαι, ταχείας δὲ ποιεῖσθαι τὰς ἐν ἀμφοτέροις 3 

19 μεταβολάς, πνευματούμενος ὥσπερ ὑπὸ τῆς περὶ 
αὐτὸν τὸν ἥλιον ὀξυκινησίας. 


«ε.) Περὶ ἀγαθοποιῶν καὶ κακοποιῶν 8 


Τούτων οὕτως ἐχόντων, ἐπειδὴ τῶν τεττάρων 
χυμάτων δύο μέν ἐστι τὰ γόνιμα καὶ ποιητικά, τό 
τε τοῦ θερμοῦ καὶ τὸ τοῦ ὑγροῦ - διὰ τούτων γὰρ 
πάντα συγκρίνεται καὶ αὔξεται - δύο δὲ τὰ φθαρτικὰ 
καὶ παθητικά, τό τε τοῦ ξηροῦ καὶ τὸ τοῦ ψυχροῦ, 
δι᾿ ὧν πάντα πάλιν διακρίνεται καὶ φθίνει, τοὺς 
μὲν δύο τῶν πλανητῶν, τόν τε τοῦ Atos καὶ τὸν τῆς 
᾿Αφροδίτης, καὶ ἔτι τὴν σελήνην, ὡς ἀγαθοποιοὺς οἱ 
παλαιοὶ παρειλήφασι, διὰ τὸ εὔκρατον καὶ τὸ πλέον 
ἔχειν ἔν τε τῷ θερμῷ καὶ τῷ ὑγρῷ, τὸν δὲ τοῦ 
Κρόνου καὶ τὸν τοῦ "Apews® τῆς ἐναντίας φύσεως 
ποιητικούς, τὸν μὲν τῆς ἄγαν ψύξεως ἕνεκεν, τὸν 
δὲ τῆς ἄγαν ξηρότητος" τὸν δὲ ἥλιον καὶ τὸν τοῦ 
“Ἑρμοῦ διὰ τὸ κοινὸν τῶν φύσεων ὡς ἀμφότερα 
δυναμένους, καὶ μᾶλλον συντρεπομένους, οἷς ἂν τῶν 


ἄλλων προσγένωνται.5 
1 ἀναπαυτικός PL. 
2 ἐν ἀμφοτέροις VMADE, ἀμῴοτερ Ῥ, ἀμφοτέρας L, ἐπ᾿ ἀμφό- 
τερα Proc. Cam. 
3 Titulum capitis om. Cam., habent VPLMADE. 


38 





TETRABIBLOS I. 4-5 


Mercury in general is found at certain times alike 
to be drying and absorptive of moisture, because he 
never is far removed in longitude from the heat of 
the sun; and again humidifying, because he is next 
above the sphere of the moon, which is closest to the 
earth ; and to change quickly from one to the other, 
inspired as it were by the speed of his motion in the 
neighbourhood of the sun itself. 


5. Of Beneficent and Maleficent Planets. 


Since the foregoing is the case, because two of the 
four humours are fertile and active, the hot and the 
moist (for all things are brought together and in- 
creased by them), and two are destructive and 
passive, the dry and the cold, through which all 
things, again, are separated and destroyed, the 
ancients accepted two of the planets, Jupiter and 
Venus, together with the moon, as beneficent because 
of their tempered nature and because they abound 
in the hot and the moist, and Saturn and Mars as 
producing effects of the opposite nature, one because 
of his excessive cold and the other for his excessive 
dryness; the sun and Mercury, however, they 
thought to have both powers, because they have 
a common nature, and to join their influences with 
those of the other planets, with whichever of them 
they are associated. 





4“ φθίνει VMADE, διαφθείρεται LCam., διαφθείρη Ῥ, φθείρεται 
Proc. 

5 Post Ἄρεως add. κακοποιούς, was MAECam., om. VPLD. 

ὃ προογένωνται VMADE, παραγίγνωνται P, παραγίνονται 1, 
Cam.; add. ὡς μέσους Cam.*, μέσους Cam. 


39 


PTOLEMY 


<s.> Περὶ ἀρρενικῶν καὶ θηλυκῶν 
ἀστέρων 


Πάλιν ἐπειδὴ τὰ πρῶτα γένη τῶν φύσεών ἐστι 
δύο, τό τε ἀρρενικὸν καὶ τὸ θῆλυ, τῶν δὲ προκειμέ- 
νων δυνάμεων ἡ τῆς ὑγρᾶς οὐσίας μάλιστα θηλυκὴ 
τυγχάνει (πλέον γὰρ ἐγγίνεται καθ᾽ ὅλου τοῦτο 
τὸ μέρος πᾶσι τοῖς θήλεσι, τὰ δ᾽ ἄλλα μᾶλλον τοῖς 
20 dppeav), εἰκότως τὴν μὲν σελήνην καὶ τὸν τῆς 
᾿Αφροδίτης ἀστέρα θηλυκοὺς ἡμῖν παραδεδώκασι 
διὰ τὸ πλέον ἔ ἔχειν. ἐν τῷ ὑγρῷ, τὸν δὲ ἥλιον καὶ τὸν 
τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ τὸν τοῦ Διὸς καὶ τὸν τοῦ "Αρεως 
ἀρρενικούς, τὸν δὲ τοῦ ᾿Ερμοῦ κοινὸν ἀμφοτέρων 
τῶν γενῶν, καθ᾽ ὃ ἐξ ἴσου τῆς τε ξηρᾶς καὶ τῆς 
ὑγρᾶς οὐσίας ἐστὶ ποιητικός. ἀρρενοῦσθαι δέ φασι 
τοὺς ἀστέρας καὶ θηλύνεσθαι παρά τε τοὺς πρὸς 
τὸν ἥλιον σχηματισμούς - ἑῴους μὲν γὰρ ὄντας καὶ 
προηγουμένους ἀρρενοῦσθαι, ἑσπερίους δὲ καὶ ἕπο- 
μένους θηλύνεσθαι. καὶ ἔτι παρὰ τοὺς πρὸς τὸν 
ὁρίζοντα - ἐν μὲν γὰρ τοῖς ἀπὸ ἀνατολῆς μέχρι 
μεσουρανήσεως, ἢ καὶ ἀπὸ δύσεως μέχρι τῆς ὑπὸ γῆν 
ἀντιμεσουρανήσεως ! σχηματισμοῖς, ὡς ἀπηλιωτι- 
κοὺς ἀρρενοῦσθαι ἐν δὲ τοῖς λοιποῖς δυσὶ τεταρτη- 
μορίοις ὡς λιβυκοὺς 2 θηλύνεσθαι. 


1 μέχρι πάλιν τοῦ ἀντικειμένου μεσουρανήματος Cam.; om. PL. 
5 δυτικοὺς Cam. 





τον matutine ; that is, stars which are above the earth 
when the sun rises, as evening, or vespertine, stars set after 
the sun. Cardanus (p. 127) says that whatever planet is 


40 


TETRABIBLOS I. 6 


6. Of Masculine and Feminine Planets. 


Again, since there are two primary kinds of natures, 
male and female, and of the forces already mentioned 
that of the moist is especially feminine—for as a 
general thing this element is present to a greater 
degree in all females, and the others rather in males— 
with good reason the view has been handed down to 
us that the moon and Venus are feminine, because 
they share more largely in the moist, and that the sun, 
Saturn, Jupiter, and Mars are masculine, and Mer- 
cury common to both genders, inasmuch as he 
produces the dry and the moist alike. They say 
too that the stars become masculine or feminine 
according to their aspects to the sun, for when they 
are morning stars! and precede the sun they be- 
come masculine, and feminine when they are evening 
stars and follow the sun. Furthermore this happens 
also according to their positions with respect to the 
horizon; for when they are in positions from the 
orient to mid-heaven,” or again from the occident 
to lower mid-heaven, they become masculine be- 
cause they are eastern, but in the other two quad- 
rants, as western stars, they become feminine. 


less than 6 signs removed from the sun in the order of the 
signs is feminine and occidental ; any that is more than 
6 signs distant, masculine and oriental. 

2 Cardanus (l.c.) remarks that some do not accept this 
statement but count all stars from the inferior to the 
superior mid-heaven (4th to the 10th house) masculine 
and from the superior to the inferior mid-heaven (10th 
to the 4th house) feminine. Planets may also become 
masculine or feminine in consequence of occupying a 
masculine or feminine sign ; see Bouché-Leclereq, p. 103. 


M 41 


21 


PTOLEMY 


«ζΣ Theron ἡμερινῶν καὶ νυκτερινῶν 


¢ ‘ Sh od \ ~ ͵ ‘ ΄ ‘A 
Opoiws δὲ ἐπειδὴ τῶν ποιούντων τὸν χρόνον τὰ 
> . ~ 
ἐκφανέστατα διαστήματα δύο ταῦτα τυγχάνει TO TE 
“ eb] ~ ~ 
τῆς ἡμέρας ἠρρενωμένον μᾶλλον διὰ τὸ ἐν αὐτῇ 
θερμὸν καὶ δραστικὸν καὶ τὸ τῆς νυκτὸς τεθηλυσ- 
͵ “ \ \ > > \ fos \ > 
μένον μᾶλλον διὰ τὸ κατ᾽ αὐτὴν δίὔγρον καὶ ava- 
παυστικόν, νυκτερινοὺς μὲν ἀκολούθως παραδεδώ- 
, (ἃ \ A “ 3 / 
κασι THY τε σελήνην Kal Tov THs ᾿Αφροδίτης, 
ε A δὲ / ὅλ δ \ ~ A / > / 
ἡμερινοὺς δὲ τόν τε ἥλιον καὶ τὸν Tod Ads, ἐπί- 
~ « “- 
κοινον δὲ κατὰ ταὐτὰ τὸν τοῦ “Βρμοῦ καὶ ἐν 
“ ΄ ¢ > ~ ΜΙ 
μὲν τῷ EW) σχήματι ἡμερινόν, ἐν δὲ τῷ ἑσπερίῳ 
/ / \ ε / ~ ι ͵7 
νυκτερινόν. προσένειμαν δὲ ἑκατέρᾳ τῶν αἱρέσεων 
\ \ / \ “ ~ > ἐφ > Μ 
καὶ τοὺς δύο τοὺς τῆς φθαρτικῆς οὐσίας, οὐκ ἔτι 
/ \ \ > \ ~ 4 > ἢ > ‘\ 
μέντοι κατὰ τὰς αὐτὰς τῆς φύσεως αἰτίας, ἀλλὰ 
κατὰ τὰς ἐναντίας. τοῖς μὲν γὰρ τῆς ἀγαθῆς 
a ~ \ 
κράσεως οἰκειούμενα τὰ ὅμοια μεῖζον αὐτῶν TO 
3 / a a \ a \ > / 
ὠφέλιμον ποιεῖ, τοῖς δὲ φθαρτικοῖς τὰ ἀνοίκεια 
A ~ 
μιγνύμενα παραλύει τὸ πολὺ! τῆς κακώσεως 
᾽ ~ ” \ A ~ / 4 wv 
αὐτῶν. ἔνθεν τὸν μὲν τοῦ Κρόνου ψυκτικὸν ὄντα 
“ “ ~ € / > / ἢ \ AW 
τῷ θερμῷ τῆς ἡμέρας ἀπένειμαν, Tov δὲ τοῦ “Apews 
“ ~ a / 4 ε / 
ξηρὸν ὄντα τῷ ὑγρῷ τῆς νυκτός - οὕτω yap ἐκά- 
~ “ τ \ 
Tepos ὑπὸ τῆς κράσεως " τῆς συμμετρίας τυχὼν 
a ~ la , 
οἰκεῖος γίνεται τῆς TO εὔκρατον παρασχούσης 
αἱρέσεως. 


᾿ι᾿ πολὺ VMADEFProc., κακὸν PL, σφοδρὸν Cam. 


2 ἐναντίας κράσεως Cam.; ἐναντίας om, libri. 


42 





TETRABIBLOS I. 7 


7. Of Diurnal and Nocturnal! Planets. 


Similarly, since of the two most obvious intervals 
of those which make up time, the day is more mas- 
culine because of its heat and active force, and night 
more feminine because of its moisture and its gift of 
rest, the tradition has consequently been handed down 
that the moon and Venus are nocturnal, the sun 
and Jupiter diurnal, and Mercury common as before, 
diurnal when it is a morning star and nocturnal as 
an evening star. They also assigned to each of the 
sects the two destructive stars, not however in this 
instance on the principle of similar natures,” but of 
just the opposite ; for when stars of the same kind 
are joined with those of the good temperament their 
beneficial influence is increased, but if dissimilar 
stars are associated with the destructive ones the 
greatest part of their injurious power is broken. Thus 
they assigned Saturn, which is cold, to the warmth 
of day, and Mars, which is dry, to the moisture of 
night, for in this way each of them attains good 
proportion through admixture and becomes a proper 
member of its sect, which provides moderation. 

1These are the sects (αἵρεσις, conditio, secta) of the 
sun and moon respectively ; cf. Vettius Valens, ii. 1, iii. 5; 
Rhetorius, ap. CCAG, i. 146. 

*T.e. that “birds of a feather flock together,’’ in 
various forms a proverbial expression in Greek; e.g. 


Odyssey, 17. 218, ὡς αἰεὶ τὸν ὁμοῖον aye θεὸς ὡς τὸν 
ὁμοῖον ; Plato, Republic, 329 A, Phaedrus, 240 C, etc. 


43 


PTOLEMY 


«ἢ. Περὶ τῆς δυνάμεως τῶν πρὸς 
τὸν ἥλιον σχηματισμῶν 


"Hd hs \ A \ A \ ὅλ 
ῃ μέντοι καὶ παρὰ τοὺς πρὸς τὸν ἥλιον συσχη- 
ματισμοὺς ἣ τε σελήνη καὶ οἱ τρεῖς τῶν πλανω- 
/ 1 \ ~ \ - 4 2, A 
péevav τὸ μᾶλλον καὶ ἧττον λαμβάνουσιν ev ταῖς 
οἰκείαις ἑαυτῶν δυνάμεσιν. ἥ τε γὰρ σελήνη κατὰ 
μὲν τὴν ἀπὸ ἀνατολῆς μέχρι τῆς πρώτης διχοτόμου 
αὔξησιν ὑγρότητός ἐστι μᾶλλον ποιητική" κατὰ 
δὲ τὴν ἀπὸ πρώτης διχοτόμου μέχρι πανσελήνου, 
θερμότητος - κατὰ δὲ τὴν ἀπὸ πανσελήνου μέχρι 
22 δευτέρας διχοτόμου ξηρότητος: κατὰ δὲ τὴν ἀπὸ 
δευτέρας διχοτόμου 2 μέχρι κρύψεως * ψυχρότητος. 
ν \ ta / > A A lol 
ot te πλανώμενοι Kal ἑῷοι μόνον ἀπὸ μὲν τῆς 
ἀνατολῆς μέχρι τοῦ πρώτου στηριγμοῦ μᾶλλόν 
εἰσιν ὑγραντικοί, ἀπὸ δὲ τοῦ πρώτου στηριγμοῦ 
μέχρι τῆς ἀκρονύκτου μᾶλλον θερμαντικοί, ἀπὸ δὲ 
τῆς ἀκρονύκτου μέχρι τοῦ δευτέρου στηριγμοῦ 
μᾶλλον ξηραντικοί, ἀπὸ δὲ τοῦ δευτέρου στηριγμοῦ 
/ / a / ~ A ΄ ‘ 
μέχρι δύσεως μᾶλλον ψυκτικοί: δῆλον δὲ ὅτι Kat 
ἀλλήλοις συγκιρνάμενοι παμπληθεῖς διαφορὰς ποιο- 
τήτων εἰς τὸ περιέχον ἡμᾶς ἀπεργάζονται, κατα- 
κρατούσης μὲν ὡς ἐπὶ πᾶν τῆς ἰδίας ἑκάστου 
δυνάμεως, τρεπομένης δὲ κατὰ τὸ ποσὸν ὑπὸ τῆς 
τῶν σχηματιζομένων." 
1Post πλανωμένων add. 6 τε τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ ὁ τοῦ Διὸς καὶ ὁ 
τοῦ ἄρεως AFCam., om. VPLMDE. 
2 μείωσιν post διχοτόμου add. Cam.? 
8 κρύψεως VMDEProc.Cam.; τρήψεως P, τρέψεως L; 


συνόδου AFH et Cam.? in marg. 
4 ἐναντιώσεως post σχηματιζομένων add. Cam., om. libri. 


44 





TETRABIBLOS I. 8 


8. Of the Power of the Aspects to the Sun. 


Now, mark you, likewise, according to their 
aspects to the sun, the moon and three of the 
planets! experience increase and decrease in their 
own powers. For inits waxing from new moon to first 
quarter the moon is more productive of moisture ; 
in its passage from first quarter to full, of heat: 
from full to last quarter, of dryness, and from last 
quarter to occultation,’ of cold. The planets, in 
oriental aspects only, are more productive of mois- 
ture from rising to their first station,® of heat from 
first station to evening rising, of dryness from evening 
rising to the second station, of cold from second 
station to setting; and it is clear that when they 
are associated with one another they produce very 
many variations of quality in our ambient, the proper 
force of each one for the most part persisting, but 
being changed in quantity by the force of the stars 
that share the configuration. 


‘Saturn, Jupiter, and Mars; a gloss to this effect has 
been incorporated into the text of certain MSS. and of 
Camerarius’ editions (see the critical note). 

2 J.e. new moon. 

3 By “rising’’ heliacal rising is meant. The stations 
are the points in the motion of the planets at which they 
appear to stand still before beginning retrograde movement. 
Ptolemy explained these irregularities of movement by the 
theory of epicycles. Cf. Bouché-Leclercq, pp. 111-123. 


45 


PTOLEMY 


<.> Περὶ τῆς τῶν ἀπλανῶν 
ἀστέρων δυνάμεως 


« ~ ~ ~ 
Εξῆς δὲ ὄντος Kat tas τῶν ἀπλανῶν φύσεις κατὰ 
τὸ ἰδίως αὐτῶν ποιητικὸν ἐπιδραμεῖν, ἐκθησόμεθα 
v A ee fo ~ 
Kal Tas ἐπ᾽ αὐτῶν τετηρημένας ἰδιοτροπίας κατὰ 
τὸ ὅμοιον ταῖς τῶν πλανωμένων φύσεσι τὸν ἐμ- 
φανισμὸν ποιούμενοι" καὶ πρῶτον τῶν περὶ αὐτὸν 
τὸν διὰ μέσων κύκλον ἰ ἐχόντων τὰς μορφώσεις. 
~ ~ f « ~ ~ A 
Τοῦ Κριοῦ τοίνυν οἱ μὲν ev τῇ κεφαλῇ τὸ 
\ “ od ~ 
ποιητικὸν ὅμοιον ἔχουσι κεκραμένον TH τε τοῦ 
“ \ ~ ~ / / € \ > ~ 
Apews καὶ τῇ τοῦ Κρόνου δυνάμει - οἱ δὲ ἐν τῷ 
~ ~ « ~ \ > ~ ~ 
στόματι τῇ τε τοῦ “Ἑρμοῦ καὶ ἠρέμα τῇ τοῦ 
, « δὲ > ~ >? / δὶ ~ ~ A 
Κρόνου - ot δὲ ἐν τῷ ὀπισθίῳ ποδὶ τῇ τοῦ “Apews, 
¢€ Ay"): ΑἹ ~ > ~ ~ ~ 5 4 / 
οἱ δὲ ἐπὶ τῆς οὐρᾶς TH τῆς ᾿Αφροδίτης. 
~ \ > ~ Te / > ΄ 2 « \ 2 A ~ 
Τῶν δὲ ἐν τῷ Ταύρῳ ἀστέρων 2 ot μὲν ἐπὶ τῆς 
“ " ~ ~ ~ > 
ἀποτομῆς ὁμοίαν ἔχουσι κρᾶσιν τῷ τε τῆς “Adpo- 
/ \ 3 / ~ “- / ε > > ~ 
δίτης, καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου οἱ δ᾽ ἐν τῇ 
Πλειάδι τῇ τε τῆς σελήνης καὶ τῷ τοῦ Ζιός - τῶν 
A > ~ lod « \ κ᾿ « ~ ‘Vad 3 ‘ 
δὲ ev TH κεφαλῇ ὁ μὲν λαμπρὸς ὁ τῆς “Yados* Kat 
ὑπόκιρρος,, καλούμενος δὲ “αμπαδίας, τῷ τοῦ 
v ¢ \ \5 ~ ~ K / hry / 
Apews: of δὲ λοιποὶ τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ ἠρέμα 
~ ae ~ «ς oF 3. ΝΜ - ‘ “ ~ 
τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ. οἱ δ᾽ ἐν ἄκροις τοῖς κέρασι TH τοῦ 
Apews. 
181d μέσων κύκλον] Cworaxov NCam. 
27Qv . . . ἀστέρων] τοῦ δὲ Ταύρου NCam. 
8 ὃ τῆς γάδος VDProc., τῆς ‘Yados PLMAEFH, τῶν ᾿γάδων 
NCam. 
4 ἀπόκιρρος NCam. 
δ οἱ δὲ λοιποὶ... TH τοῦ “Apews] haec post t. 21, “Apews 


VPLMADEProc., om. NFHCam.!; post |. 16, rod dios Cam.?; 
post λοιποὶ add. ἐκεῖ ὄντες Cam.*, om. libri. 


46 


TETRABIBLOS I. 9 


9. Of the Power of the Fixed Stars. 


As it is next in order to recount the natures of the 
fixed stars with reference to their special powers, 
we shall set forth their observed characters in an 
exposition like that of the natures of the planets, and 
in the first place those of the ones that occupy the 
figures in the zodiac? itself. 

The stars in the head of Aries, then, have an effect 
like the power of Mars and Saturn, mingled ; those 
in the mouth like Mercury’s power and moderately 
like Saturn’s ; those in the hind foot like that of 
Mars, and those in the tail like that of Venus. 

Of those in Taurus,” the stars along the line where 
it is cut off have a temperature like that of Venus 
and in a measure like that of Saturn; those in the 
Pleiades, like those of the moon and Jupiter; of 
the stars in the head, the one of the Hyades that is 
bright and somewhat reddish, called the Torch,’ has 
a temperature like that of Mars; the others, like 
that of Saturn and moderately \ike that of Mercury ; 
those in the tips of the horns, like that of Mars. 


1Strictly, ‘‘around the ecliptic itself.” Properly, the 
zodiac is 6 ζωδιακὸς κύκλος, and the ecliptic, the path of 
the sun through its middle, is ὁ διὰ μέσων (sc. τῶν ζῳδίων) 
κύκλος OF ὁ διὰ μέσου (80. τοῦ ζωδιακοῦ) κύκλος, “the circle 
through the midst of the signs”’ or ‘through the middle 
of the zodiac.” 

2 Taurus was represented as the head and fore parts only 
of a charging bull. 

3 Aldebaran. 


47 


PTOLEMY 


Τῶν δὲ ἐν τοῖς Διδύμοις ἀστέρων οἱ μὲν ἐπὶ 
τῶν ποδῶν τῆς ὁμοίας κεκοινωνήκασι ποιότητος 
~ am ¢ ~ ‘ ’ / ~ ~ > , 
τῷ τε τοῦ ‘Eppod καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τῆς “Adpodirns - 
οἱ δὲ περὶ τοὺς μηροὺς λαμπροὶ τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου" 
~ \ > A ~ / ~ c A > 
τῶν δὲ ἐν ταῖς κεφαλαῖς δύο λαμπρῶν ὁ μὲν ἐν 
τῇ προηγουμένῃ τῷ τοῦ “Ἑρμοῦ, καλεῖται δὲ καὶ 
> / ε δὲ > ~ ¢ / ~ ~ Mw 
Απόλλωνος - ὁ δὲ ἐν TH ἑπομένῃ τῷ τοῦ “Apews, 
- \ Vit: / 
καλεῖται δὲ Kat “Πρακλέους. 
~ \ > ~ / > ΄ « \ a2 48 ~ 
Τῶν δὲ ἐν τῷ Καρκίνῳ ἀστέρων ot μὲν ἐπὶ τῶν 
~ ~ ~ Α 
ὀφθαλμῶν δύο τῆς αὐτῆς ἐνεργείας εἰσὶ ποιητικοὶ 
τῷ τε τοῦ ᾿ Ἑρμοῦ καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ "ἄρεως - ot δὲ 
ἐν ταῖς χηλαῖς τῷ τε τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ τῷ τοῦ ᾿ Ἑρμοῦ. 
ς \ > ~ / \ id 
ἡ δὲ ἐν τῷ στήθει νεφελοειδὴς συστροφή, Kadov- 
μένη δὲ Φάτνη, τῷ τε τοῦ "Apews καὶ τῇ σελήνῃ" 
«ς \ < / > ~ / / \ wm 
ot δὲ ἑκατέρωθεν αὐτῆς δύο, καλούμενοι δὲ “Ovor, 
τῷ τοῦ “Apews καὶ τῷ ἡλίῳ. 
~ \ \ \ / « ᾿ ae κ᾿ “Ἢ “- 

Τῶν δὲ περὶ τὸν Λέοντα οἱ μὲν ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς 
δύο τὸ ὅμοιον ποιοῦσι τῷ τε τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ ἠρέμα 
τῷ τοῦ "Apews, οἱ δὲ ἐν τῷ τραχήλῳ τρεῖς τῷ τοῦ 

/ \ > ‘ ~ ἀπῇ ¢ ~ ¢ \ εξ ~ 
24 Κρόνου καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ “Eppotd: ὁ δὲ ἐπὶ τῆς 
, v. τς \ , ~ 
καρδίας λαμπρός͵ καλούμενος δὲ Βασιλίσκος, τῷ 
~ Mu \ ~ ~ / ¢ \ > ~ 7 See 
τοῦ “Apews καὶ τῷ τοῦ Atos: ot δὲ ἐν τῇ ὀσφύϊ 
καὶ ὁ ἐπὶ τῆς οὐρᾶς λαμπρὸς τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ τῷ 
τῆς ᾿Αφροδίτης- οἱ δὲ ἐν τοῖς μηροῖς τῷ τε τῆς 
3 / Vek , ~ ~ Ψ Fi “- 
Adpoditns καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ “Eppod. 

Τῶν δὲ κατὰ τὴν Ilapbévov οἱ μὲν ἐν τῇ κεφαλῇ 
καὶ ὁ ἐπ᾽ ἄκρας τῆς νοτίου πτέρυγος ὅμοιον ἔχουσι 
τὸ ποιητικὸν τῷ τε τοῦ “Eppod καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ 
Ἄρεως. of δὲ λοιποὶ τῆς πτέρυγος λαμπροὶ καὶ οἱ 
48 


TETRABIBLOS I. 9 


Of the stars in Gemini, those in the feet share the 
same quality as Mercury and, to a less degree, as 
Venus ; the bright stars in the thighs, the same as 
Saturn; of the two bright stars in the heads,! the 
one in the head in advance the same as Mercury ; 
it is also called the star of Apollo; the one in the 
head that follows, the same as Mars ; it is also called 
the star of Hercules. 

Of the stars in Cancer, the two in the eyes produce 
the same effect as Mercury, and, to a less degree, as 
Mars ; those in the claws, the same as Saturn and 
Mercury ; the cloud-like cluster in the breast, called 
the Manger,” the same as Mars and the moon; and 
the two on either side of it, which are called Asses,? 
the same as Mars and the sun. 

Of those in Leo, the two in the head act in the same 
way as Saturn and, to a less degree, as Mars; the 
three in the throat, the same as Saturn and, to a 
less degree, as Mercury; the bright star upon the 
heart, called Regulus, the same as Mars and Jupiter ; 
those in the hip and the bright star in the tail,* the 
same as Saturn and Venus ; and those in the thighs, 
the same as Venus and, to a less degree, Mercury. 

Of the stars in Virgo,® those in the head and the 
one upon the tip of the southern wing have an effect 
like that of Mercury and, in less degree, of Mars ; 
the other bright stars of the wing and those on the 


1 These are Castor (‘in advance ’’) and Pollux. 

2 Praesepe ; more popularly, Beehive. 

3. Asinus Borealis and Asinus Australis. 

4 B Leonis. 

5 Virgo was represented as a winged woman bearing in 
her left hand a stem of wheat, the head of which was 
marked by the bright star Spica. 


49 


PTOLEMY 


~ ~ ¢ ~ 
κατὰ τὰ περιζώματα TH τε τοῦ “Eppod καὶ ἠρέμα 
~ ~ > / «ες \ > ~ / , 
τῷ τῆς Adpodityns: 6 δὲ ἐν τῇ βορείᾳ πτέρυγι 
λαμπρός, καλούμενος δὲ [Π]Ἰροτρυγητήρ, τῷ τοῦ 
΄“-“ ~ € ~ 
Κρόνου καὶ τῷ τοῦ ‘Eppot: ὁ δὲ καλούμενος 
~ ~ ’ \ > , ~ ~ 
Στάχυς τῷ τῆς “Ἀφροδίτης καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ 
¢€ - ~ 
Ἄρεως. of δὲ ἐν ἄκροις τοῖς ποσὶ Kal τῷ σύρματι:ϊ 
~ ar 'C: ~ \ > ~ “- 
τῷ τοῦ “Ἑρμοῦ καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ "Apews. 
Τῶν δὲ Χηλῶ Ty iov® of μὲν ἐν a 
ὧν δὲ Χηλῶν τοῦ Σ᾽ κορπίου ὃ οἱ μὲν ἐν ἄκραις 
αὐταῖς ὡσαύτως διατιθέασι τῷ τε τοῦ Διὸς καὶ τῷ 
ae “- « > ~ ~ 
τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ - οἱ δὲ ἐν μέσαις τῷ τε τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ 
ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ “Apews. 
~ > ~ ~ ͵΄ ~ 
Τῶν δὲ ἐν TH σώματι τοῦ Σ'κορπίου ot μὲν ἐν TO 
μετώπῳ λαμπροὶ τὸ αὐτὸ ποιοῦσι τῷ τε τοῦ "Apews 
~ ~ ¢ ~ 
Kal ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ Kpdvov: ot δὲ ἐν TH σώματι 
- 7 \ 
τρεῖς, ὧν ὁ μέσος ὑπόκιρρος Kat λαμπρότερος, 
a > ΄ ~ aM ‘ 3 ~ 
καλεῖται δὲ ‘Avrdpyns, τῷ τοῦ "Apews καὶ ἠρέμα TO 
aA ͵ ἜΘ a , - τ , 
τοῦ Διός - οἱ δὲ ἐν τοῖς σφονδύλοις τῷ τε τοῦ Κρόνου 
A / ~ ~ > / € Vert) \ ~ L4 
καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τῆς Adpodityns οἱ δὲ ἐπὶ τοῦ κέντρου 
A A A A my ἡ c 
25T@ τε τοῦ ᾿Ερμοῦ καὶ τῷ τοῦ "Apews: ἡ δὲ λεγο- 
Ἄ \ \ ~ “- "A \ ~ 
μένη νεφελοειδὴς συστροφὴ τῷ τοῦ “Apews καὶ TH 
la 
σελήνῃ. 
~ A ‘ ‘ , c \ > ‘ ~ > A ~ 
Τῶν δὲ περὶ τὸν Τοξότην οἱ μὲν ἐπὶ τῆς ἀκίδος τοῦ 
βέλους ὅμοιον ἔχουσι τὸ ποιητικὸν τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως 
\ ~ / ¢ \ \ \ ͵ \ A A 
Kal TH σελήνῃ - οἱ δὲ περὶ τὸ τόξον καὶ THY λαβὴν 
τῆς χειρὸς τῷ τε τοῦ Διὸς καὶ τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως. ἡ 
1Post σύρματι add. τοῦ ματίου NProc.Cam.; om. 
VPMADEFH. 
Στοῦ Ἑρμοῦ VPADEFHProc., τοῦ ᾿Αφροδίτης MNCam. 


8 Σκορπίου VPDProc., Ζυγοῦ NCam., om. LN (lac. 6 litt.) 
AEFH. 


50 


TETRABIBLOS I. 9 


girdles like that of Mercury and, in a measure, of 
Venus ; the bright star in the northern wing, called 
Vindemiator, like those of Saturn and Mercury ; the 
so-called Spica, like that of Venus and, in a less 
degree, that of Mars; those in the tips of the feet 
and the train! like that of Mercury and, in a less 
degree, Mars. 


Of those in the Claws of the Scorpion,? the ones 
at their very extremities exercise the same influence 
as do Jupiter and Mercury; those in the middle 
parts the same as do Saturn and, to a less degree, 


Mars. 


Of the stars in the body of Scorpio, the bright 
stars on the forehead act in the same way as does 
Mars and in some degree as does Saturn; the three 
in the body, the middle one of which is tawny and 
rather bright and is called Antares, the same as 
Mars and, in some degree, Jupiter; those in the 
joints, the same as Saturn and, in some degree, 
Venus ; those in the sting, the same as Mercury and 
Mars ; and the so-called cloud-like cluster, the same 
as Mars and the moon. 


Of the stars in Sagittarius,® those in the point of 
his arrow have an effect like that of Mars and the 
moon ; those in the bow and the grip of his hand, like 
that of Jupiter and Mars ; the cluster in his forehead, 


1“ Of the garment’”’ is added in the Nuremberg MS., by 
Proclus, and in the printed editions; see the critical note. 

2 «Claws of the Scorpion’”’ was the earlier name of Libra 
(Ζυγός) ; the latter came into general use in the first century 
before Christ. Ptolemy uses both names. 

8 Represented as a centaur preparing to shoot an arrow ; 
a mantle flies above and behind his shoulders. 


51 


PTOLEMY 


> ~ ~ ‘ ~ 
δὲ ἐν TH προσώπῳ συστροφὴ τῷ τε ἡλίῳ καὶ TO 
τοῦ ἄρεως. ot δὲ ἐν ταῖς ἐφαπτίσι! καὶ τῷ νώτῳ 
τῷ τοῦ Διὸς καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ “ρμοῦ - οἱ δὲ ἐν 
τοῖς ποσὶ τῷ τοῦ Διὸς καὶ τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου: τὸ δὲ 
Pe 4 ~ ~ a ~ 
ἐπὶ τῆς οὐρᾶς τετράπλευρον τῷ τῆς ‘Adpodirns Kat 
ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου. 
~ A A \ > / > / c \ >’ αὐ 
Τῶν δὲ κατὰ τὸν Αἰγόκερων ἀστέρων ot μὲν ἐπὶ 
~ ’ὔ e / > ~ ~ ~ » / 
τῶν κεράτων ὡσαύτως ἐνεργοῦσι τῷ τῆς Agpodirns 
Kal ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως. οἱ δὲ ἐν τῷ στόματι TO 
- 0 \ > / ~ ~ > ‘ δ A 
τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης - οἱ δὲ 
ἐν τοῖς ποσὶ καὶ τῇ κοιλίᾳ τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως καὶ τῷ 
ae ~ ¢ \ > \ ~ > ~ ~ ~ / 
τοῦ “Ἑρμοῦ: οἱ δὲ ἐπὶ τῆς οὐρᾶς τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου 
καὶ τῷ τοῦ Διός. 
~ \ A A e ΄ ς \ > - » 
Τῶν δὲ περὶ τὸν “Ydpoydov οἱ μὲν ἐν τοῖς ὥμοις 
ὁμοίως διατιθέασι τῷ τε τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ τῷ τοῦ 
“Ἑρμοῦ, σὺν τοῖς ἐν τῇ ἀριστερᾷ χειρὶ καὶ τῷ 
ἱματίῳ ot δὲ ἐπὶ τῶν μηρῶν μᾶλλον μὲν τῷ τοῦ 
« ~ Ke \ ~ ~ / ς ΒΝ ma es 
Ἑρμοῦ, ἧττον δὲ τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου « ot δὲ ev τῇ ῥύσει 
~ LA ~ ~ /, \ > ,ὔ - ~ 
τοῦ ὕδατος τῷ τε τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ 
Διός. 
Τῶν δὲ περὶ τοὺς ᾿Ιχθῦς οἱ μὲν ἐν τῇ κεφαλῇ τοῦ 
lol ~ ae ~ 
νοτιωτέρου ἰχθύος τὸ αὐτὸ ποιοῦσι TH τοῦ “Ἑρμοῦ 
καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου: οἱ δὲ ἐν τῷ σώματι 
~ ~ ~ ~ Ἑ - « αὶ ~ 
τῷ τοῦ Atos καὶ τῷ τοῦ “Eppobd- οἱ de ἐπὶ τῆς 
~ ~ ~ ~ ‘ 
2600pas καὶ τοῦ νοτίου λίνου τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ 
~ ~ ~ ~ \ ~ 
ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ “Ἑρμοῦ: οἱ δὲ ἐν TH σώματι Kal TH 
> / - ~ / > 4 ~ ~ A \ 2 A > / 
ἀκάνθῃ τοῦ βορείου ἰχθύος τῷ τοῦ Διὸς 5 καὶ ἠρέμα 
1 ἐφαπτίσι VMADEFHProc. ; ἐφαπτρίσι Cam.*; πτέρηξιν Ῥ, 


πτέρυξι LNCam.? 
2 dios VMADFHProc., “Apews PLNCam., “Ἑρμοῦ E. 


52 


TETRABIBLOS I. 9 


like that of the sun and Mars; those in the cloak and 
his back, like that of Jupiter and, to a less degree, of 
Mercury ; those in his feet, like that of Jupiter and 
Saturn; the quadrangle upon the tail, like that of 
Venus and, to a less degree, of Saturn. 

Of the stars in Capricorn,' those in the horns act 
in the same way as Venus and, in some degree, as 
Mars ; those in the mouth, as Saturn and, in some 
degree, as Venus; those in the feet and the belly, as 
Mars and Mercury ; and those in the tail, as Saturn 
and Jupiter. 

Of the stars in Aquarius, those in the shoulders 
exert an influence like that of Saturn and Mercury, 
together with those in the left arm and the cloak ; 
those in the thighs, like that of Mercury in a greater 
degree and like that of Saturn in a lesser degree ; 
those in the stream of water, like that of Saturn and, 
in some degree, like that of Jupiter. 

Of the stars in Pisces,? those in the head of the 
southern Fish act in the same way as Mercury and 
somewhat as does Saturn; those in the body, as do 
Jupiter and Mercury; those in the tail and the 
southern cord, as do Saturn and, in some degree, 
Mercury ; those in the body and backbone of the 
northern Fish, as do Jupiter and, in some degree, 


1 Represented as a monster with a goat’s head and fore 
feet and a fish’s tail. 

2The southern Fish (not to be confused with the extra- 
zodiacal constellation Piscis Australis, mentioned later) 
is toward Aquarius; the two fishes are represented as 
being joined by a cord from tail to tail. 


53 


27 


PTOLEMY 


τῷ τῆς Adpodirns: οἱ δὲ ἐν τῷ βορείῳ τοῦ λίνου 
~ lol / \ ~ “- ~ 
τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ τῷ τοῦ Atos: ὁ δὲ ἐπὶ τοῦ 
/ \ ~ a MW ‘ > / ~ 
συνδέσμου λαμπρὸς τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ 
τοῦ “Ἑρμοῦ. 
~ Ay. a ΄ “ lol ’ 
Τῶν δὲ ἐν ταῖς βορειοτέραις τοῦ ζωδιακοῦ μορφώ- 
σεσιν οἱ μὲν περὶ τὴν μικρὰν Ἄρκτον λαμπροὶ τὴν 
ὁμοίαν ἔχουσι ποιότητα τῷ τε τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ 
ἠρέμα τῷ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης - οἱ δὲ περὶ τὴν μεγάλην 
Ἄρκτον τῷ τοῦ "Apews- ἡ δὲ ὑπὸ τὴν οὐρὰν 
αὐτῆς τοῦ ΠΙλοκάμου συστροφὴ τῇ σελήνῃ καὶ τῷ 
~ 3 / « \ > ~ / ᾿ ra 
τῆς “Adpoditns: οἱ δὲ ἐν τῷ δράκοντι λαμπροὶ 
τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως καὶ τῷ τοῦ Διός" 
Η \ “ / Sm ~ / ο \ ~ “ 
οἱ δὲ τοῦ Κήφεως τῷ τε τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ τῷ τοῦ 
Διός - οἱ δὲ περὶ τὸν Βοώτην τῷ τοῦ “Ἑρμοῦ καὶ 
~ ~ / «ς Ν ‘ \ « / ~ 
τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου ὁ δὲ λαμπρὸς καὶ ὑπόκιρρος τῷ 
τοῦ Atos καὶ Ἄρεως, ὁ καὶ ᾿Μρκτοῦρος καλούμενος * 
οἱ δὲ ἐν τῷ βορείῳ Στεφάνῳ τῷ τε τῆς ᾿Αφροδίτης 
καὶ τῷ τοῦ “Ἑρμοῦ: οἱ δὲ κατὰ τὸν ἐν γόνασι τῷ 
τοῦ “Ἑρμοῦ: οἱ δὲ ἐν τῇ Δύρᾳ τῷ τῆς ᾿Αφροδίτης 
\ ~ ae lol ‘ crs aw \ Cy 4 
καὶ τῷ τοῦ “Eppod: καὶ ot ἐν τῇ "Ορνιθι δὲ woav- 
τως" οἱ δὲ κατὰ τὴν Κασσιέπειαν τῷ τε τοῦ 
/ \ ~ ΄“ > / «ς \ \ A 
Κρόνου καὶ τῷ τῆς "Adpoditns: ot δὲ κατὰ τὸν 
Περσέα τῷ τοῦ Atos καὶ τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου ἡ δὲ ἐν 
τῇ λαβῇ τῆς μαχαίρας συστροφὴ τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως 
\ an mae ~ ¢ sweet) a ¢ / A 
καὶ τῷ τοῦ “Ἑρμοῦ: of δὲ ἐν τῷ ᾿Ηνιόχῳ λαμπροὶ 
τῷ τοῦ "Apews καὶ τῷ τοῦ “Ἑρμοῦ: οἱ δὲ κατὰ 
τὸν ᾿Οφιοῦχον τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τῆς 
> {4 « \ \ A »» > ~ ~ ~ 
᾿Αφροδίτης - ot δὲ περὶ τὸν ὄφιν αὐτοῦ τῷ τε τοῦ 
Κρόνου καὶ τῷ τοῦ "Apews: οἱ δὲ κατὰ τὸν 
- ~ ΄Ά οἱ \ > / ~ ~ 
᾿Οϊστὸν τῷ τε τοῦ Ἄρεως καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τῆς 


54 


TETRABIBLOS I. 9 


Venus ; those in the northern part of the cord, as 
do Saturn and Jupiter; and the bright star on the 
bond, as do Mars and, in some degree. Mercury. 

Of the stars in the configurations north of the 
zodiac, the bright stars in Ursa Minor have a similar 
quality to that of Saturn and, to a less degree, to 
that of Venus; those in Ursa Major, to that of Mars ; 
and the cluster of the Coma Berenices beneath the 
Bear’s tail, to that of the moon and Venus; the 
bright stars in Draco, to that of Saturn, Mars, and 
Jupiter; those of Cepheus, to that of Saturn and 
Jupiter: those in Boétes, to that of Mercury and 
Saturn; the bright, tawny star, to that of Jupiter 
and Mars, the star called Arcturus; the star in 
Corona Septentrionalis, to that of Venus and 
Mercury; those in Geniculator,! to that of Mercury; 
those in Lyra,” to that of Venus and Mercury; and 
likewise those in Cygnus. The stars in Cassiopeia 
have the effect of Saturn and Venus; those in Per- 
seus, of Jupiter and Saturn; the cluster in the hilt 
of the sword, of Mars and Mercury; the bright 
stars in Auriga,® of Mars and Mercury; those in 
Ophiuchus, of Saturn and, to some degree, of 
Venus ; those in his serpent, of Saturn and Mars ; 
those in Sagitta, of Mars and. to some degree, of 


1 J.e. Hercules. 
2 The bright star Vega is in Lyra. 
3 Capella is the brightest in this constellation. 


55 


PTOLEMY 


Adpodirns: οἱ δὲ περὶ τὸν ἀετὸν τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως 
\ ~ ~ / € \ > ~ “- ~ ~ 
καὶ τῷ τοῦ Διός: οἱ δὲ ἐν τῷ 4ελῴϊνι τῷ τοῦ 

/ \ ~ am ς A \ ‘ σ᾽ 
Κρόνου καὶ τῷ τοῦ “Apews: οἱ δὲ κατὰ τὸν Ἵππον 
λαμπροὶ τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως καὶ τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ. οἱ δὲ 
ἐν τῇ ᾿Ανδρομέδῃ τῷ τῆς ᾿Αφροδίτης- οἱ δὲ τοῦ 
Tprydvov! τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ. 

Τῶν δὲ ἐν τοῖς νοτιωτέροις τοῦ ζωδιακοῦ μορφώ- 
μασιν ὁ μὲν ἐν τῷ στόματι τοῦ νοτίου ᾿ΪΙχθύος 
λαμπρὸς ὁμοίαν ἔχει τὴν ἐνέργειαν τῷ τε τῆς 
"A / \ “-“ ~ 1B ~ « \ \ ‘ 

φροδίτης καὶ τῷ τοῦ “Ἑρμοῦ: οἱ δὲ περὶ τὸ 

~ ~ ~ / ~ \ \ A > ΄ ε 
Κῆτος τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου + τῶν δὲ περὶ τὸν “Qpiwva ot 
μὲν ἐπὶ τῶν ὥμων τῷ τε τοῦ ᾿ἄρεως καὶ τῷ τοῦ 
ΚΕ ~ c δὲ Ἃ \ λ \ ~ ~ 4 \ \ 

μοῦ, of δὲ λοιποὶ λαμπροὶ τῷ τε τοῦ Διὸς Kat 
τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου: τῶν δὲ ἐν τῷ ΠἝοοταμῷ ὁ μὲν 
” \ «ε \ ΄ ~ / ς \ a 
ἔσχατος καὶ ὁ λαμπρὸς τῷ τοῦ Ards, οἱ δὲ λοιποὶ 
τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου: οἱ δὲ ἐν τῷ Aaya τῷ τε τοῦ 
K / \ 2 ~ ~ ἽΕΙ ~ ~ ὃ A ‘ \ Kv 

ρόνου καὶ 5 τῷ τοῦ “Eppot: τῶν δὲ περὶ τὸν Kiva, 
ς \ Μ ~ ~ 74 / < AG? \ ~ ΄ 
οἱ μὲν ἄλλοι τῷ τῆς Adpodizns, ὁ δὲ ἐπὶ τοῦ στόματος 
λαμπρὸς τῷ τοῦ Διὸς καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ “Apews ; ὁ 
δὲ ἐν τῷ ΠΙροκυνὶ λαμπρὸς τῷ τε τοῦ ᾿ρμοῦ καὶ 
> / ~ ~ "A ed «ς δὲ A \ “ὃ 
ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως οἱ δὲ κατὰ τὸν “Υδρον 
λαμπροὶ τῷ τε τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ τῷ τῆς ‘Adpodirns " 
ς \ > fi ~ “ an A > / ‘ 
οἱ δὲ ἐν τῷ Κρατῆρι τῷ τε τῆς ᾿Αφροδίτης καὶ 
ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ “Ερμοῦ : οἱ δὲ περὶ τὸν Κόρακα τῷ 
aw \ ΄σ ~ ped « iol *A lol 
τοῦ “Apews καὶ τῷ τοῦ Kpdvov~ ot δὲ τῆς Ἀργοῦς 
λαμπροὶ τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ τῷ τοῦ Aids τῶν δὲ 
περὶ τὸν Κένταυρον οἱ μὲν ἐν τῷ ἀνθρωπείῳ σώματι 
ὃτ' 
1 τοῦ Τριγώνου VMADEFHProc., τοῦ Δέλτῳ Ῥ, του L, ἐν 


τῷ Δέλτα NCam. 
3 τῷ τε τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ om. Cam. 


50 


TETRABIBLOS I. 9 


Venus; those in Aquila) of Mars and Jupiter; 
those in Delphinus, of Saturn and Mars ; the bright 
stars in the Horse,” of Mars and Mercury ; those in 
Andromeda, of Venus; those in Triangulum, of 
Mercury. 

Of the stars in the formations south of the zodiac 
the bright star in the mouth of Piscis Australis 3 
has an influence similar to that of Venus and 
Mercury ; those in Cetus, similar to that of Saturn ; 
of those in Orion,’ the stars on his shoulders similar 
to that of Mars and Mercury, and the other bright 
stars similar to that of Jupiter and Saturn; of the 
stars in Eridanus the last bright one ὅ has an in- 
fluence like that of Jupiter and the others like that 
of Saturn; the star in Lepus, like that of Saturn 
and Mercury; of those in Canis, the others like 
that of Venus, and the bright star in the mouth,® 
like that of Jupiter and, to a less degree, of Mars ; 
the bright star Procyon, like that of Mercury and, 
in a less degree, that of Mars; the bright stars in 
Hydra,’ like that of Saturn and Venus; those in 
Crater, like that of Venus and, in a less degree, of 
Mercury ; those in Corvus, like that of Mars and 
Saturn; the bright stars of Argo,’ like that of 
Saturn and Jupiter ; of those in Centaurus, the ones 

1 Altair is in this group. 

2 Pegasus. 

3 The bright star is Fomalhaut. 

* Rigel and Betelgeuse are the brightest stars here. 
§ The “last bright star ’’ in Eridanus is Achernar. 
6 Sirius, which is in Canis. 

7 The brightest star is Alphard. 

§ These are Canopus and Var. 


57 


PTOLEMY 


τῷ τε τῆς 'Adpoditns καὶ τῷ τοῦ “Ερμοῦ, οἱ δὲ ἐν 
τῷ ἵππῳ λαμπροὶ τῷ τε τῆς Αφροδίτης καὶ τῷ τοῦ 
Aids: οἱ δὲ περὶ τὸ Θηρίον λαμπροὶ τῷ τε τοῦ 
΄ \ 5 Ὁ A ~ Mu ες ΜΙΝ ~ 
Κρόνου καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως οἱ δὲ ἐν τῷ 
Θυμιατηρίῳ τῷ τε τῆς Adpoditns καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ 
~ ἽὝἝ; ane 1 « ὃ A > ~ ͵ pt / λ 6 
28 τοῦ “Eppot:} of δὲ ἐν τῷ νοτίῳ Στεφάνῳ λαμπροὶ 
τῷ τε τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ τῷ τοῦ “Eppod.? 
Ai μὲν οὖν τῶν ἀστέρων καθ᾽ ἑαυτὰς δυνάμεις 
τοιαύτης ἔτυχον ὑπὸ τῶν παλαιοτέρων παρατηρή- 
σεως. 


«1.) Περὶ τῆς τῶν ὡρῶν καὶ & γωνιῶν 
δυνάμεως 


Καὶ τῶν ὡρῶν δὲ τῶν τοῦ ἔτους δ΄ οὐσῶν, ἔαρος 
τε καὶ θέρους καὶ μετοπώρου καὶ χειμῶνος, τὸ μὲν 
ἔαρ ἔχει τὸ μᾶλλον ἐν τῷ ὑγρῷ διὰ τὴν κατὰ τὸ 
παρῳχημένον ψύχος, ἀρχομένης δὲ τῆς θερμασίας, 
διάχυσιν +3 τὸ δὲ θέρος τὸ πλέον ἐν τῷ θερμῷ διὰ 
τὴν τοῦ ἡλίου πρὸς τὸν κατὰ κορυφὴν ἡμῶν τόπον * 
ἐγγύτητα - τὸ δὲ μετόπωρον τὸ μᾶλλον ἐν τῷ ξηρῷ, 
διὰ τὴν κατὰ τὸ παρῳχημένον καῦμα τῶν ὑγρῶν 
ἀνάπωτιν " 6 δὲ χειμὼν τὸ πλέον ἐν τῷ ψυχρῷ διὰ 
τὸ τὸν ἥλιον πλεῖστον ἀφίστασθαι τοῦ κατὰ κορυφὴν 
ἡμῶν τόπου. διόπερ, καὶ τοῦ ζωδιακοῦ μηδεμιᾶς 
οὔσης φύσει ἀρχῆς ὡς κύκλου, τὸ ἀπὸ τῆς ἐαρινῆς 
ἰσημερίας ἀρχόμενον δωδεκατημόριον, τὸ τοῦ Κριοῦ, 


1 Ἑρμοῦ VPLMADEFHProe., Κρόνου NCam. 
2Titulum capitis post “Ἑρμοῦ posuerunt PLMNEFH. 


538 


TETRABIBLOS I. 9-10 


in the human body, like that of Venus and Mercury, 
and the bright stars in the equine body like that of 
Venus and Jupiter; the bright stars in Lupus, like 
that of Saturn and, in less degree, of Mars; those 
in Ara, like that of Venus and, to a lesser degree, of 
Mercury ; and the bright stars in Corona Australis. 
like that of Saturn and Mercury. 

Such, then, are the observations of the effects of 
the stars themselves as made by our predecessors. 


10. Of the Effect of the Seasons and of the Four Angles. 


Of the four seasons of the year, spring, summer, 
autumn, and winter, spring exceeds in moisture on 
account of its diffusion after the cold has passed and 
warmth is setting in; the summer, in heat, because 
of the nearness of the sun to the zenith; autumn 
more in dryness, because of the sucking up of the 
moisture during the hot season just past ; and winter 
exceeds in cold, because the sun is farthest away 
from the zenith. For this reason, although there 
is no natural beginning of the zodiac, since it is a 
circle, they assume that the sign which begins with 


POUL TMB. veld τς διάχυσιν] τῆς κατὰ τὸ παρ. ψ. συστάσεως, 
ἀρχ. δὲ τῆς θ. διαχεῖσθαι NCam, 
ὁ τόπον om, NCam., 


59 


PTOLEMY 


\ ~ “ 5 \ ς ‘0 2 Δ 
καὶ τῶν ὅλων ἀρχὴν ὑποτίθενται, καθάπερ ἐμψύχου 
, ~ ~ \ «ς \ ~ mM ς A 
ζῴου τοῦ ζωδιακοῦ τὴν ὑγρὰν τοῦ ἔαρος ὑπερβολὴν 
προκαταρκτικὴν ποιούμενοι, καὶ ἐφεξῆς τὰς λοιπὰς 

90 ὥρας διὰ τὸ καὶ πάντων ζῴων τὰς μὲν πρώτας 
ἡλικίας τὸ πλέον ἔχειν τῆς ὑγρᾶς οὐσίας, παρα- 
πλησίως τῷ ἔαρι ἁπαλὰς οὔσας καὶ ἔτι τρυφεράς " 
τὰς δὲ δευτέρας τὰς μέχρι τῆς ἀκμαιότητος ' τὸ 
πλέον ἔχειν ἐν τῷ θερμῷ " παραπλησίως τῷ θέρει - 

\ \ / ead > ~ \ 3 ~ / 
τὰς δὲ Tpitas καὶ ἤδη ἐν παρακμῇ καὶ ἀρχῇ φθίσεως 
‘ ᾽ὔ ” \ r) νὰ ” > ~ ~ 
τὸ πλέον ἤδη Kal αὐτὰς ἔχειν ἐν TH ξηρῷ παρα- 
πλησίως τῷ μετοπώρῳ " τὰς δὲ ἐσχάτας καὶ πρὸς 
τῇ διαλύσει τὸ πλέον ἔχειν ἐν τῷ ψυχρῷ καθάπερ 
καὶ ὁ χειμών. 

“Ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ τῶν δ΄ τοῦ ὁρίζοντος τόπων καὶ 
γωνιῶν, ἀφ᾽ ὧν καὶ οἱ καθ᾽ ὅλα μέρη πνέοντες 
ἄνεμοι τὰς ἀρχὰς ἔχουσι, 6 μὲν πρὸς τὰς ἀνατολὰς 
αὐτός τε τὸ πλέον ἔχει ἐν τῷ ξηρῷ διὰ τὸ κατ᾽ 

“ 4 ~ 
αὐτὸν γινομένου τοῦ ἡλίου τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς νυκτὸς 
ὑγρανθέντα τότε πρῶτον ἄρχεσθαι ξηραίνεσθαι * οἵ 
τε ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ πνέοντες ἄνεμοι, οὗς κοινότερον 


1 ἀκμαιότητος VMADEFP, ἀκμαιοτάτης PLNCam. 

2 θερμῷ VMADEF, θερμαίνειν PLNCam. 

3 Hic inser. titulum Περὶ τῆς τῶν τεττάρων γωνιῶν δυνάμεως 
VADFProc. 


1Cf. Almagest, iii. 1 (p. 192, 19-22), where Ptolemy 
defines the year as the return of the sun to the points fixed 
by the equinoxes and solstices. The sign of Aries, defined 
as the 30° beginning with the vernal equinox, is, of course, 
very different from the sign considered as the actual con- 
stellation. This gave rise to an argument against astro- 
logy, first expressed by Origen. Cf. Boll-Bezold-Gundel, 


60 


TETRABIBLOS I. 10 


the vernal equinox, that of Aries,! is the starting- 
point of them all, making the excessive moisture of 
the spring the first part of the zodiac as though it 
were a living creature, and taking next in order 
the remaining seasons, because in all creatures the 
earliest ages,” like the spring, have a larger share 
of moisture and are tender and still delicate. The 
second age, up to the prime of life, exceeds in heat, 
like summer; the third, which is now past the prime 
and on the verge of decline, has an excess of dry- 
ness, like autumn; and the last, which approaches 
dissolution, exceeds in its coldness, like winter. 
Similarly, too, of the four regions and angles of 
the horizon, from which originate the winds from 
the cardinal points,* the eastern one likewise excels 
in dryness because, when the sun is in that region, 
whatever has been moistened by the night then first 
begins to be dried; and the winds which blow from 


pp. 131-132; Bouché-Leclereq, p. 129, ἢ. 1; Ashmand, 
Ptolemy’s Tetrabiblos, p. 32, n. 

2 Ptolemy here enumerates four ages of man, as do also 
many Pythagorizing arithmologists, when they praise the 
number 4, as, for example, Theologoumena Arithmetica, 
p- 20 Ast, Diogenes Laertius, viii. 1. 10, Martianus Capella, 
vii. 734, etc. Ptolemy later (iv. 10) speaks of seven ages, 
assigning one to each planet; the arithmologists have 
also a series of seven ages which they cite in praise of the 
number 7; e.g. Philo, De mundi opificio 36. There are 
also lists in which the ages are merely made up of hebdo- 
madic groups of years. 

3 Proclus’ paraphase for οἱ καθ᾽ ὅλα μέρη πνέοντες ἄνεμοι 18 
οἱ καθολικοὶ ἄνεμοι, which is closer than the Latin trans- 
lations, totas illas partes occwpantes venti (Gogava), 
and venti, qui totas illas partes occupant (Melanchthon). 
Ptolemy means the winds from the cardinal points and 
around them. 


61 


PTOLEMY 


ἀπηλιώτας καλοῦμεν, 1 ἀνικμοί τέ εἰσι καὶ ξηραν- 
τικοί. ὁ δὲ πρὸς μεσημβριαν τόπος αὐτός τέ ἐστι 
θερμότατος δια TE TO πυρῶδες τῶν τοῦ ἡλίου 
μεσουρανήσεων καὶ διὰ τὸ ταύτας κατὰ τὴν τῆς 
ἡμετέρας οἰκουμένης ἔγκλισιν πρὸς μεσημβρίαν 
μᾶλλον ἀποκλίνειν: οἵ τε ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ πνέοντες 
ἄνεμοι, οὗς κοινῶς νότους καλοῦμεν, θερμοί τέ εἰσι 
καὶ μανωτικοί. ὁ δὲ πρὸς ταῖς δυσμαῖς τόπος 
αὐτός τέ ἐστιν ὑγρὸς διὰ τὸ κατ᾽ αὐτὸν γινομένου 
80τοῦ ἡλίου τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς ἡμέρας ἀναποθέντα τότε 
πρῶτον ἄρχεσθαι διυγραίνεσθαι - οἵ τε ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ 
φερόμενοι ἄνεμοι, οὗς κοινότερον ζεφύρους καλοῦ- 
μεν, νεαροί τέ εἰσι καὶ ὑγραντικοί. ὁ δὲ πρὸς ταῖς 
ἄρκτοις τόπος αὐτός τέ ἐστι ψυχρότατος διὰ τὸ 
κατὰ τὴν τῆς ἡμετέρας οἰκουμένης ἔγκλισιν τὰς 
τῆς θερμότητος αἰτίας τῶν τοῦ ἡλίου μεσουρανή- 
σεων πλέον αὐτοῦ διεστάναι, ὥσπερ 2 ἀντιμεσου- 
ρανοῦντος" οἵ τε am’ αὐτοῦ πνέοντες ἄνεμοι, οἱ 
καλούμενοι κοινῶς βορέαι, ψυχροί τε ὑπάρχουσι 

ν , 
καὶ πυκνωτικοί. 

Χρησίμη δὲ καὶ ἡ τούτων διάληψις πρὸς τὸ τὰς 
συγκράσεις πάντα τρόπον ἑκάστοτε δύνασθαι ὃ 
διακρίνειν. εὐκατανόητον γὰρ διότι καὶ παρὰ τὰς 
τοιαύτας καταστάσεις ἤτοι τῶν ὡρῶν ἢ τῶν ἡλικιῶν 
ἢ τῶν γωνιῶν τρέπεταί πως τὸ ποιητικὸν τῆς τῶν 
ἀστέρων δυνάμεως, καὶ ἐν μὲν ταῖς οἰκείαις κατα- 
στάσεσιν ἀκρατοτέραν τε ἔχουσι τὴν ποιότητα καὶ 

τὴν ἐνέργειαν ἰσχυροτέραν, οἷον ἐν ταῖς θερμαῖς οἱ 


1 καλοῦσιν NCam. 
2 Post ὥσπερ add. τοῦ ἠλίου NCam., om. alii. 


62 


TETRABIBLOS I. 10 


it, which we call in general Apeliotes,’ are without 
moisture and drying in effect. The region to the 
south is hottest because of the fiery heat of the sun’s 
passages through mid-heaven and because these 
passages, on account of the inclination of our in- 
habited world, diverge more to the south; and 
the winds which blow thence and are called by 
the general name Notus are hot and rarefying. 
The region to the west is itself moist, because when 
the sun is therein the things dried out during the 
day then first begin to become moistened ; likewise 
the winds which blow from this part, which we call 
by the general name Zephyrus, are fresh and moist. 
The region to the north is the coldest, because 
through our inhabited world’s inclination it is too far 
removed from the causes of heat arising from the 
sun’s culmination, as it is also when the sun is at its 
lower culmination ; and the winds which blow thence, 
which are called by the general name Boreas, are 
cold and condensing in effect. 

The knowledge of these facts is useful to enable 
one to form a complete judgement of temperatures in 
individual instances. For it is easily recognizable 
that, together with such conditions as these, of 
seasons, ages, or angles, there is a corresponding 
variation in the potency of the stars’ faculties, and 
that in the conditions akin to them their quality is 
purer and their effectiveness stronger, those that are 
heating by nature, for instance, in heat, and those that 

1 This is the usual Attic form; the alternative, ἀφηλιώτης, 


shows more clearly its derivation from ἥλιος, “the wind 
that blows from the sun.” 


3 δύνασθαι om. NCam. 


63 


31 


PTOLEMY 


θερμαντικοὶ τὴν φύσιν͵ καὶ ἐν ταῖς ὑγραῖς οἱ bypav- 
τικοί, ἐν δὲ ταῖς ἐναντίαις κεκραμένην καὶ ἀσθενεσ- 
τέραν - ὡς ἐν ταῖς ψυχραῖς of θερμαντικοὶ καὶ ἐν 
ταῖς ξηραῖς οἱ ὑγραντικοὶ καὶ ἐν ταῖς ἄλλαις δὲ 
ὡσαύτως κατὰ τὸ ἀνάλογον τῇ διὰ τῆς μίξεως 
συγκιρναμένῃ ποιότητι. 


<a \ ~ ‘ 2 -“ 
«α.) Περὶ τροπικῶν καὶ ἰσημερινῶν 
καὶ στερεῶν! καὶ δισώμων ζῳδίων 


Τούτων δὲ οὕτω προεκτεθέντων ἀκόλουθον ἂν εἴη 
συνάψαι καὶ τὰς αὐτῶν τῶν τοῦ ζωδιακοῦ δωδεκατη- 
μορίων παραδεδομένας φυσικὰς ἰδιοτροπίας. at 
μὲν γὰρ ὁλοσχερέστεραι καθ᾽ ἕκαστον αὐτῶν 
κράσεις ἀνάλογον ἔχουσι ταῖς κατ᾽ αὐτὰ γινομέναις 
ὥραις, συνίστανται δέ τινες αὐτῶν ἰδιότητες ἀπό τε 
τῆς πρὸς τὸν ἥλιον καὶ τὴν σελήνην καὶ τοὺς 
ἀστέρας οἰκειώσεως, ws ἐν τοῖς ἐφεξῆς διελευσό- 
μεθα, προτάξαντες τὰς κατὰ τὸ ἀμιγὲς αὐτῶν 
μόνων τῶν δωδεκατημορίων καθ᾽ αὑτά τε καὶ πρὸς 
ἄλληλα θεωρουμένας δυνάμεις. 

Πρῶται μὲν τοίνυν εἰσὶ διαφοραὶ τῶν καλουμένων 
τροπικῶν καὶ ἰσημερινῶν καὶ στερεῶν καὶ δισώμων. 


1 καὶ στερεῶν om. MNECam. Titulum post |. 19 δυνάμεις 
ponunt VDProc. 


> 


1 κράσεις, ‘‘ mixtures’; astrologically used to designate 
the resultant qualities derived from the mingling of various 
influences. Cf. The Life and Opinions of Tristram Shandy, 
Bk. I, Chapter 11, ‘“‘ who . . . seemed not to have had 
one single drop of Danish blood in his whole crasis.”’ 


64 


TETRABIBLOS 1. 10-11 


are moistening in the moist, while under opposite 
conditions their power is adulterated and weaker. 
Thus the heating stars in the cold periods and the 
moistening stars in the dry periods are weaker, and 
similarly in the other cases, according to the quality 
produced by the mixture. 


11. Of Solstitial, Equinoctial, Solid, and Bicorporeal 
Signs. 


After the explanation of these matters the next 
subject to be added would be the natural characters 
of the zodiacal signs themselves, as they have been 
handed down by tradition. For although their more 
general temperaments! are each analogous to the 
seasons that take place in them,” certain peculiar 
qualities of theirs arise from their kinship ὃ to the 
sun, moon, and planets, as we shall relate in what 
follows, putting first the unmingled powers of the 
signs themselves alone, regarded both absolutely and 
relatively to one another. 

The first distinctions, then, are of the so-called 
solstitial, equinoctial, solid, and bicorporeal signs.4 


2 That is, when the sun is in these signs. 

3 οἰκείωσις, also translated ‘‘ familiarity,” is a common 
astrological term denoting the various relationships of 
affinity derived from the positions of signs or planets with 
reference to the universe or to each other, as, for example, 
through the aspects (ce. 13). 

‘All but Virgo are represented as bicorporeal in fact. 
Ptolemy, as a learned writer, pays less attention to the 
fanciful and mythological classification of the signs into 
terrestrial, aquatic, four-footed, ete. (although he refers 
to them in i. 12), and gives greater prominence to the 
astronomical classification. 


65 


PTOLEMY 


δύο μὲν γάρ ἐστι τροπικά, TO TE πρῶτον ἀπὸ τῆς 
θερινῆς τροπῆς X’ μοῖρον, τὸ τοῦ Καρκίνου - καὶ τὸ 
πρῶτον ἀπὸ τῆς χειμερινῆς τροπῆς, τὸ κατὰ τὸν 
Αἰγόκερων. ταῦτα δὲ ἀπὸ τοῦ συμβεβηκότος 
εἴληφε τὴν ὀνομασίαν. τρέπεται γὰρ ἐν ταῖς ἀρχαῖς 
αὐτῶν γινόμενος ὁ ἥλιος, ἐπιστρέφων εἰς τὰ ἐναντία 
τὴν κατὰ πλάτος πάροδον, καὶ κατὰ μὲν τὸν Καρκί- 
νον θέρος ποιῶν, κατὰ δὲ τὸν Αἰγόκερων χειμῶνα. 
δύο δὲ καλεῖται ἰσημερινά, τό τε ἀπὸ τῆς ἐαρινῆς 
ἰσημερίας πρῶτον δωδεκατημόριον, τὸ τοῦ Κριοῦ, 
καὶ τὸ ἀπὸ τῆς μετοπωρινῆς τὸ τῶν Χηλῶν, 
82 ὠνόμασται δὲ καὶ ταῦτα πάλιν ἀπὸ τοῦ συμβεβη- 
κότος, ἐπειδὴ κατὰ τὰς ἀρχὰς αὐτῶν γινόμενος ὁ 
ἥλιος ἴσας ποιεῖ πανταχῆ τὰς νύκτας ταῖς ἡμέραις. 
Τῶν δὲ λοιπῶν ὀκτὼ δωδεκατημορίων τέτταρα 
μὲν καλεῖται στερεά, τέτταρα δὲ δίσωμα. καὶ 
στερεὰ μέν ἐστι τὰ ἑπόμενα τοῖς τε τροπικοῖς 
καὶ τοῖς ἰσημερινοῖς, Ταῦρος, Λέων, Σκορπίος, 
“Ὑδροχόος, ἐπειδὴ τῶν ἐν ἐκείνοις ἀρχομένων ὡρῶν 
αἵ τε ὑγρότητες καὶ θερμότητες καὶ ξηρότητες καὶ 
ψυχρότητες, ἐν τούτοις γινομένου τοῦ ἡλίου,. μᾶλλον 
καὶ στερεώτερον ἡμῶν καθικνοῦνται, οὐ τῶν κατα- 
στημάτων φύσει γινομένων τότε ἀκρατοτέρων, ἀλλ᾽ 
ἡμῶν ἐγκεχρονικότων αὐτοῖς ἤδη καὶ διὰ τοῦτο τῆς 
ἰσχύος 2 εὐαισθητότερον ἀντιλαμβανομένων. 
Δίσωμα δέ ἐστι τὰ τοῖς στερεοῖς ἑπόμενα, Aidv- 
μοι, Παρθένος, Τοξότης, ᾿Ιχθῦς, διὰ τὸ μεταξύ τε 
1Post ἡλίου add. καὶ ἐπιτεταγμέναι Cam., ἐπιτεταγμέναι N ; 


om. alii. 
2 Post ἰσχύος add. αὐτῶν NADECam. 


66 


TETRABIBLOS I. 11 


For there are two solstitial signs, the first interval 
of 30° from the summer solstice, the sign of Cancer, 
and the first from the winter solstice, Capricorn ; 
and they have received their name! from what takes 
place in them. For the sun turns when he is at 
the beginning of these signs and reverses his lati- 
tudinal progress, causing summer in Cancer and 
winter in Capricorn. Two signs are called equinoc- 
tial, the one which is first from the spring equinox, 
Aries, and the one which begins with the autumnal 
equinox, Libra; and they too again are named from 
what happens there, because when the sun is at the 
beginning of these signs he makes the nights exactly 
equal to the days. 

Of the remaining eight signs four are called solid 
and four bicorporeal. The solid signs, Taurus, Leo, 
Scorpio, and Aquarius, are those which follow the 
solstitial and equinoctial signs; and they are so 
called because when the sun is in them the moisture, 
heat, dryness, and cold of the seasons that begin 
in the preceding signs touch us more firmly, not that 
the weather is naturally any more intemperate at that 
time, but that we are by then inured to them and 
for that reason are more sensible of their power. 

The bicorporeal signs, Gemini, Virgo, Sagittarius, 
and Pisces, are those which follow the solid signs, 


1].e. tpomxov, “having to do with turning (tpo77).” 
Astronomers to-day usually call them “ solstitial”’ in- 
stead of “ tropical,”’ since “tropic ’’ generally refers to 
the terrestrial circles, the Tropic of Cancer and the Tropic 
of Capricorn. 


67 


PTOLEMY 


εἶναι τῶν στερεῶν καὶ τῶν τροπικῶν Kal ἰσημε- 
ρινῶν, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκοινωνηκέναι κατὰ τὰ τέλη καὶ 
τὰς ἀρχὰς τῆς τῶν δύο καταστημάτων φυσικῆς 
ἰδιοτροπίας. 


«β.. Περὶ ἀρρενικῶν καὶ θηλυκῶν 
ζῳδίων 


’ὔ \ ¢ ΄ «Δ \ ~ ΄ 

Πάλιν δὲ ὡσαύτως ἕξ μὲν τῶν δωδεκατημορίων 
ἀπένειμαν τῇ φύσει τῇ ἀρρενικῇ καὶ ἡμερινῇ, τὰ δὲ 
ἴσα τῇ θηλυκῇ καὶ νυκτερινῇ. καὶ ἡ μὲν τάξις 

᾽ a > / cm αὶ A A ~ ἘΠῚ Ψ A 

33 αὐτοῖς ἐδόθη παρ᾽ ἕν διὰ τὸ συνεζεῦχθαι Kai ἐγγὺς 
ἀεὶ τυγχάνειν τήν τε ἡμέραν τῇ νυκτὶ καὶ τὸ θῆλυ 
τῷ ἄρρενι. τῆς δὲ ἀρχῆς ἀπὸ τοῦ Κριοῦ & ἃς 
εἴπομεν αἰτίας λαμβανομένης, ὡσαύτως δὲ καὶ τοῦ 
ἄρρενος ἄρχοντος καὶ πρωτεύοντος, ἐπειδὴ καὶ τὸ 
ποιητικὸν ἀεὶ τοῦ παθητικοῦ πρῶτόν ἐστι τῇ δυνά- 
μει, τὸ μὲν τοῦ Κριοῦ δωδεκατημόριον καὶ ἔτι τὸ 

~ ~ > \ wy \ ε / \ σ 
τῶν Χηλῶν ἀρρενικὰ ἔδοξε καὶ ἡμερινά, καὶ ἅμα 
ἐπειδήπερ ὁ ἰσημερινὸς κύκλος δι᾿ αὐτῶν γραφό- 
μενος τὴν πρώτην καὶ ἰσχυροτάτην τῶν ὅλων φορὰν 
> λ -“ \ δὲ > ~ > ~ > λ 50 1 ~ 3 
ἀποτελεῖ - τὰ δὲ ἐφεξῆς αὐτῶν ἀκολούθως 1 τῇ παρ 
ἕν, ὡς ἔφαμεν, τάξει. 

“Χρῶνται δέ τινες τῇ τάξει τῶν ἀρρενικῶν καὶ 
θηλυκῶν 5 καὶ ἀπὸ τοῦ ἀνατέλλοντος δωδεκατη- 
μορίου, ὃ δὴ καλοῦσιν ὡρόσκοπον, τὴν ἀρχὴν τοῦ 
ἄρρενος ὃ ποιούμενοι. ὥσπερ γὰρ καὶ τὴν τῶν 

1 ἀκολούθως VMDEProc., ἀκόλουθα PLNACam., 


2 καὶ θηλυκῶν om. NCam. 
8 τοῦ ἄρρενος om. NCam. 


68 


TETRABIBLOS I. 11-12 


and are so called because they are between the solid 
and the solstitial and equinoctial signs and share, as 
it were, at end and beginning, the natural properties 
of the two states of weather. 


12. Of Masculine and Feminine Signs. 


Again, in the same way they assigned six of the 
signs to the masculine and diurnal nature’ and an 
equal number to the feminine and nocturnal. An 
alternating order was assigned to them because day 
is always yoked to night and close to it, and female 
to male. Now as Aries is taken as the starting-point 
for the reasons we have mentioned, and as the male 
likewise rules and holds first place, since also the 
active is always superior to the passive in power, 
the signs of Aries and Libra were thought to be 
masculine and diurnal, an additional reason being 
that the equinoctial circle which is drawn through 
them completes the primary and most powerful 
movement of the whole universe.” The signs in 
succession after them correspond, as we said, in 
alternating order. 

Some, however, employ an order of masculine and 
feminine signs whereby the masculine begins with 
the sign that is rising, called the horoscope.* For 
just as some begin the solstitial signs with the moon’s 


1The signs of the zodiac, as well as the planets, are 
divided between the two sects (cf. i. 7). 

2 T.e. the general revolution of the heavens, carrying the 
fixed stars and the other heavenly bodies (according to the 
Ptolemaic and other ancient systems). 

ὅ Obviously, in a system like this, a given sign would 
not always belong to the same sect. 


69 


PTOLEMY 


τροπικῶν ἀρχὴν ἀπὸ τοῦ σεληνιακοῦ Cwdiov! ap- 
βάνουσιν ἔνιοι διὰ τὸ ταύτην τάχιον τῶν ἄλλων 
τρέπεσθαι, οὕτω καὶ τὴν τῶν ἀρρενικῶν ἀπὸ τοῦ 
ὡροσκοποῦντος διὰ τὸ ἀπηλιωτικώτερον,Σ καὶ οἵ 
μὲν ὁμοίως παρ᾽ ἕν πάλιν τῇ τάξει χρώμενοι, οἱ δὲ 
καθ᾽ ὅλα τεταρτημόρια διαιροῦντες καὶ ἑῷα μὲν 
ἡγούμενοι ἃ καὶ ἀρρενικὰ τό τε ἀπὸ τοῦ ὡροσκόπου 
μέχρι τοῦ μεσουρανοῦντος καὶ τὸ κατ᾽ ἀντίθεσιν 
ἀπὸ τοῦ δύνοντος μέχρι τοῦ ὑπὸ γῆν μεσουρανοῦν- 

84 τος, ἑσπέρια δὲ καὶ θηλυκὰ τὰ λοιπὰ δύο τεταρ- 
τημόρια. καὶ ἄλλας δέ τινας τοῖς δωδεκατημορίοις 
προσηγορίας ἐφήρμοσαν ἀπὸ τῶν περὶ αὐτὰ μορφώ- 
σεων : λέγω δὲ οἷον τετράποδα καὶ χερσαῖα καὶ 
ἡγεμονικὰ καὶ πολύσπορα καὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα" 
ἃς ὃ αὐτόθεν τό τε αἴτιον καὶ τὸ ἐμῴφανισς 
τικὸν ἐχούσας περιττὸν ἡγούμεθα καταριθμεῖν, τῆς 
ἐκ τῶν τοιούτων διατυπώσεων ποιότητος ἐν αἷς ἂν 
τῶν προτελέσεων χρησίμη φαίνηται δυναμένης ἦ 
προεκτίθεσθαι. 


1 ζῳδίου VPLADE, κύκλου MNCam. 

276 ἀπηλιωτικώτερον VD (ἀφηλ-) Proc.; τὴν ἀπηλιώτην alii 
Cam. 

3 ἡγούμενοι VMADE, om. PLNCam. 

4 ὑπὸ γῆν μεσουρανοῦντος VMADEProc., ἀντιμεσουρανοῦντος 
PLNCam. 

5 ἃς VDME, om. PL, ὡς NACam.; καλέσαντες post 
τοιαῦτα inser. PLMNCam., om. VDAE. 

ὁ τό τε αἴτιον om. Cam.?. 

7 δυναμένης VD, δυναμης P, δύναμις LMNAECam. προεκ- 
τίθεσθαι VMDEAProc., πρωεκτεθηῦ P, προεκτίθης L, προεκτε- 
θείσης NCam. 


70 


TETRABIBLOS I. 12 


sign because the moon changes direction more swiftly 
than the rest, so they begin the masculine signs with 
the horoscope because it is further to the east, some 
as before making use of the alternate order of signs, 
and others dividing by entire quadrants, and de- 
signating as matutinal and masculine signs those of 
the quadrant from the horoscope to mid-heaven and 
those of the opposite quadrant from the occident 
to the lower mid-heaven, and as evening and feminine 
the other two quadrants. They have also attached 
other descriptions ! to the signs, derived from their 
shapes; I refer, for example, to “ four-footed,” 
“ terrestrial,” “‘ commanding,” “ fecund,” and similar 
appellations. These, since their reason and their 
significance are directly derived, we think it super- 
fluous to enumerate, since the quality resulting from 
such conformations can be explained in connec- 
tion with those predictions wherein it is obviously 


useful. 


‘For this type of classification, cf. Bouché-Leclereq, 
pp. 149-152. Vettius Valens, pp. 5 ff. (Kroll), attaches many 
epithets to the signs; cf. also Antiochus, ap. CCAG, viii. 
112; Rhetorius, ap. CCAG, i. 164 ff. Some of them figure 
in il. 7, below. 


71 


PTOLEMY 


<y.> Περὶ τῶν συσχηματιζομένων 
δωδεκατημορίων 


Οἰκειοῦται δὲ ἀλλήλοις τῶν μερῶν τοῦ ζωδιακοῦ 
πρῶτον τὰ συσχηματιζόμενα. ταῦτα δ᾽ ἐστὶν ὅσα 
διάμετρον ἔχει στάσιν, περιέχοντα δύο ὀρθὰς γωνίας 
καὶ ἕξ τῶν δωδεκατημορίων καὶ μοίρας ρπ' " καὶ 
ὅσα τρίγωνον ἔχει στάσιν, περιέχοντα μίαν ὀρθὴν 
γωνίαν καὶ τρίτον καὶ δ΄ δωδεκατημόρια καὶ μοίρας 
pk’* καὶ ὅσα τετραγωνίζειν λέγεται, περιέχοντα 

, > Ai ee , \ , ve 
μίαν ὀρθὴν καὶ γ΄ δωδεκατημόρια Kal μοίρας ? 
καὶ ἔτι ὅσα ἑξάγωνον ποιεῖται στάσιν, περιέχοντα 
δίμοιρον μιᾶς ὀρθῆς καὶ β΄ δωδεκατημόρια καὶ 

/ / 
μοίρας ζ΄. 

> Δ A 8: 49 - ΄ ~ ΄ 
Av ἣν δὲ αἰτίαν αὗται μόναι τῶν διαστάσεων 
/ > iy ”“ / ~ \ \ 
παρελήφθησαν ἐκ τούτων av μάθοιμεν. τῆς μὲν yap 
A δὴ / > / > \ ¢ / ‘ 
κατὰ τὸ διάμετρον αὐτόθεν ἐστὶν 6 λόγος φανερὸς 
ἐπειδήπερ ἐπὶ μιᾶς εὐθείας ποιεῖται τὰς συναν- 
30 τήσεις. λαμβανομένων δὲ τῶν δύο μεγίστων καὶ 
διὰ συμφωνίας μορίων τε καὶ ἐπιμορίων, μορίων 
μὲν πρὸς τὴν τῶν β΄ ὀρθῶν διάμετρον τοῦ τε 
ἡμίσους καὶ τοῦ τρίτου, τὸ μὲν εἰς δύο τὴν τοῦ 





1 Οἵ. the note on οἰκείωσις (i. 11). οἰκειοῦσθαι is the corre- 
sponding verb. 

2 The aspects are geometrical relationships between the 
heavenly bodies. Ptolemy recognizes here only four— 
opposition, trine, quartile, and sextile—as having signifi- 
cance, and does not class ‘“‘ conjunction’’ as an aspect, 
although it is treated as such throughout the T'etrabiblos. 


72 


TETRABIBLOS I. 13 


13. Of the Aspects of the Signs. 


Of the parts of the zodiac those first are familiar ἢ 
one to another which are in aspect.” These are the 
ones which are in opposition, enclosing two right 
angles, six signs, and 180 degrees ;_ those which are in 
trine, enclosing one and one-third right angles, four 
signs, and 120 degrees ; those which are said to be in 
quartile, enclosing one right angle, three signs, and 
90 degrees, and finally those that occupy the sextile 
position, enclosing two-thirds of a right angle, two 
signs, and 60 degrees. 

We may learn from the following why only these 
intervals have been taken into consideration. The 
explanation of opposition is immediately obvious, 
because it causes the signs to meet on one straight 
line. But if we take the two fractions and the two 
superparticulars * most important in music, and if 
the fractions one-half and one-third be applied to 


Kepler is said to have invented several others, based on 
other aliquot parts of 360°, the semiquadrate, quintile, 
sesquiquadrate, biquintile, etc. (cf. Ashmand, pp. 40-41, 
nn.); these have been employed by modern astrologers, 
but the Ptolemaic doctrines of this and the 16th chapter 
are inconsistent with their use. The intervals between 
bodies in aspect in the four ways here mentioned can be 
measured in whole signs. 

3 Nicomachus of Gerasa, Introduction to Arithmetic, i. 19, 
defines the superparticular as “a number that contains 
within itself the whole of the number compared with it, 
and some one factor of it besides.’’ The ‘ two super- 
particulars most important to music ”’ are the first two in 


the series, the sesquialter (ἢ) and the sesquitertian (3), 


which correspond to the diapente and diatessaron respec- 
tively (cf. Nicormmachus, op. cit., ii. 26). 


N 73 


PTOLEMY 


τετραγώνου πεποίηκε, TO δὲ εἰς τρία THY τοῦ 
ἑξαγώνου καὶ τὴν τοῦ τριγώνου 1] ἐπιμορίων δὲ 
πρὸς τὸ τῆς μιᾶς ὀρθῆς τετράγωνον μεταξὺ λαμ- 

ανομένου τοῦ τε ἡμιολίου καὶ τοῦ ἐπιτρίτου, τὸ 
μὲν ἡμιόλιον ἐποίησε τὴν τοῦ τετραγώνου πρὸς 
τὴν τοῦ ἑξαγώνου, τὸ δὲ ἐπίτριτον τὴν τοῦ 
τριγώνου πρὸς τὴν τοῦ τετραγώνου. τούτων 
μέντοι τῶν σχηματισμῶν οἱ μὲν τρίγωνοι καὶ 
ἑξάγωνοι σύμφωνοι καλοῦνται διὰ τὸ ἐξ ὁμογενῶν 
συγκεῖσθαι δωδεκατημορίων ἢ ἐκ πάντων θηλυκῶν 
ἢ ἀρρενικῶν - ἀσύμφωνοι δὲ οἱ τετράγωνοι καὶ ot 
κατὰ διάμετρον διότι κατὰ ἀντίθεσιν τῶν ὁμογενῶν 
τὴν σύστασιν λαμβάνουσιν. 


«κι.» Περὶ προσταττόντων καὶ 
ἀκουόντων 


Ὡσαύτως δὲ προστάττοντα καὶ ἀκούοντα λέ- 
γεται τμήματα τὰ κατ᾽ ἴσην διάστασιν ἀπὸ τοῦ 
αὐτοῦ, ἢ καὶ ὁποτέρου, τῶν ἰσημερινῶν σημείων 
ἐσχηματισμένα διὰ τὸ ἐν τοῖς ἴσοις χρόνοις ava- 
φέρεσθαι καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν ἴσων εἶναι παραλλήλων. 


1 κα. τὴν τοῦ τριγώνου libri omnes Proc. ; καὶ τ. τ. τετραγώνου 


Cam.!; om. Cam.? 


' That is, $ of 180° = 90° (quartile) and 4 of 180° = 60° 
(sextile). All the MSS. and Proclus add here “ and trine,”’ 
which perhaps we should, with Camerarius (ed. 2), discard. 
The trine, however, could be regarded as } of 360° or as 
twice the sextile. 


*That is, the sesquialter = 5 = ae and the sesqui- 
120° 


905" 


tore 


tertian = ξ — 


74 


TETRABIBLOS I. 13-14 


opposition, composed of two right angles, the half 
makes the quartile and the third the sextile and 
trine.! Of the superparticulars, if the sesquialter and 
sesquitertian be applied to the quartile interval of 
one right angle, which lies between them, the ses- 
quialter makes the ratio of the quartile to the 
sextile and the sesquitertian that of trine to quartile.” 
Of these aspects trine and sextile are called har- 
monious because they are composed of signs of the 
same kind, either entirely of feminine or entirely of 
masculine signs; while quartile and opposition are 
disharmonious because they are composed of signs 


of opposite kinds. 


14. Of Commanding and Obeying Signs. 


° 


Similarly the names “ commanding ” and “ obey- 
ing” * are applied to the divisions of the zodiac 
which are disposed at an equal distance from the 
same equinoctial sign, whichever it may be, because 
they ascend 4 in equal periods of time and are on 
equal parallels. Of these the ones in the summer 


3 Cf. Bouché-Leclercq, pp. 159-164, on this and the 
following chapter. The pairs which “‘ command” and 
“obey” (the “commanding ”’ sign first) are: Taurus- 
Pisces, Gemini-Aquarius, Cancer-Capricorn, Leo-Sagit- 
tarius, Virgo-Scorpio. Aries and Libra are left out of the 
scheme, being the equinoctial signs from which the start is 
made; so Manilius, ii. 485, 501. The original notion 
seems to have been that these signs ‘‘ heard ’’ (ἀκούειν) 
each other, and the idea of “‘ obeying”’ (ὑπακούειν) was 
a pseudo-scientific elaboration. 

‘Cf. the note on ili. 10 (pp. 286 ff.) for the ascension 
of the signs. 


75 


PTOLEMY 


τούτων δὲ Ta μὲν ἐν τῷ θερινῷ ἡμικυκλίῳ προσ- 
τάττοντα καλεῖται, τὰ δ᾽ ἐν τῷ χειμερινῷ 
ὑπακούοντα, διὰ τὸ κατ᾽ ἐκεῖνο μὲν γινόμενον τὸν 
ἥλιον μείζονα ποιεῖν τῆς νυκτὸς τὴν ἡμέραν, κατὰ 
τοῦτο δὲ ἐλάττω. 


86 «.) Περὶ βλεπόντων καὶ ἰσοδυνα- 
μούντων 


Πάλιν δὲ ἰσοδυναμεῖν φασιν ἀλλήλοις μέρη τὰ τοῦ 
αὐτοῦ καὶ ὁποτέρου τῶν τροπικῶν σημείων τὸ ἴσον 
ἀφεστῶτα, διὰ τὸ καθ᾽ ἑκάτερον αὐτῶν τοῦ ἡλίου 
γινομένου τάς τε ἡμέρας ταῖς ἡμέραις καὶ τὰς 
νύκτας ταῖς νυξὶ καὶ τὰ διαστήματα τῶν οἰκείων 
ὡρῶν ἰσοχρόνως | ἀποτελεῖσθαι. ταῦτα δὲ καὶ βλέ- 
mew ἄλληλα λέγεται διά τε τὰ προειρημένα καὶ 
ἐπειδήπερ ἑκάτερον αὐτῶν ἔκ τε τῶν αὐτῶν μερῶν 
τοῦ ὁρίζοντος ἀνατέλλει καὶ εἰς τὰ αὐτὰ καταδύνει. 


«ἰς.. Περὶ ἀσυνδέτων 


> / \ Nie f a ΄ 
᾿Ασύνδετα δὲ καὶ ἀπηλλοτριωμένα καλεῖται τμή- 
“ ΄ / ¢ ~ ” \ ” 
ματα ὅσα μηδένα λόγον ἁπλῶς ἔχει πρὸς ἄλληλα 
τῶν προκατειλεγμένων οἰκειώσεων. ταῦτα δέ 
ἐστιν ἃ μήτε τῶν προστάττοντων ἢ ἀκουόντων 
τυγχάνει μήτε τῶν βλεπόντων ἢ ἰσοδυναμούντων, 
ἔτι καὶ τῶν ἐκκειμένων τεττάρων σχηματισμῶν, 


1 ἰσοχρόνως VMAB, -ων P, -ος D, -α Proc., -α NLCam. 





1 Τὴ the summer hemisphere are the signs Aries, Taurus, 
Gemini, Cancer, Leo, and Virgo ; Libra, Scorpio, Sagittarius, 


76 


TETRABIBLOS I. 14-16 


hemisphere ' are called ““ commanding ” and those in 
the winter hemisphere “ obedient,” because the sun 
makes the day longer than the night when he is in 
the summer hemisphere, and shorter in the winter. 


15. Of Signs which Behold each other and Signs of 
Equal Power. 


Again they say that the parts which are equally 
removed from the same tropical sign, whichever it 
may be, are of equal power,” because when the sun 
comes into either of them the days are equal to the 
days, the nights to the nights, and the lengths of 
their own hours * are the same. These also are said 
to “behold” one another both for the reasons stated 
and because each of the pair rises from the same 
part of the horizon and sets in the same part. 


16. Of Disjunct Signs. 


* Disjunct ” and “ alien” are the names applied 
to those divisions of the zodiac which have none 
whatever of the aforesaid familiarities with one 
another. These are the ones which belong neither 
to the class of commanding or obeying, beholding 
or of equal power, and furthermore they are found 


Capricorn, Aquarius, and Pisces are in the winter hemi- 
sphere ; see the diagram in Bouché-Leclereq, p. 161. 

2 These pairs are Gemini-Leo, Taurus-Virgo, Aries-Libra, 
Pisces-Scorpio, and Aquarius-Sagittarius; Cancer and 
Capricorn are left without mates (a¢vya). 

3 Their own hours ”’ are “ ordinary’ or “ civil’ hours 
(kaipixat ὧραι; cf. p. 286, n. 3), which are always one- 
uwelfth of the day (sunrise to sunset) or night (sunset to 
sunrise). Of course, they are equal if the days and nights 
are equal. 

τ 


PTOLEMY 


τοῦ τε διαμέτρου Kal τοῦ τριγώνου καὶ τοῦ τετρα- 
σις Jf 
γώνου καὶ τοῦ ἑξαγώνου κατὰ τὸ παντελὲς ἀμέτοχα 
(3 
καταλαμβανόμενα, καὶ ἤτοι δι’ ἑνὸς ἢ διὰ πέντε 
7 
γινόμενα δωδεκατημορίων, ἐπειδήπερ τὰ μὲν Ov 
(aA 5 ͵ σ 3 / \ / ᾽ AT 
ἑνὸς ἀπέστραπται ὥσπερ ἀλλήλων καὶ δύο αὐτὰ ὄντα 
ἑνὸς περιέχει γωνίαν, τὰ δὲ διὰ πέντε εἰς ἄνισα 
an \ Ld / ~ ΝΜ ~ 
37 διαιρεῖ τὸν ὅλον κύκλον, τῶν ἄλλων σχηματισμῶν 
εἰς ἴσα τὴν τῆς περιμέτρου διαίρεσιν ποιουμένων. 


«ιζ.), Περὶ οἴκων ἑκάστου ἀστέρος 


Συνοικειοῦνται δὲ καὶ οἱ πλάνητες τοῖς τοῦ 
ζωδιακοῦ μέρεσι κατά τε τοὺς καλουμένους οἴκους 
καὶ τρίγωνα καὶ ὑψώματα καὶ ὅρια καὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα. 
καὶ τὸ μὲν τῶν οἴκων τοιαύτην ἔχει φύσιν. ἐπειδὴ 
γὰρ τῶν ιβ΄ ζῳδίων τὰ βορειότατα καὶ συνεγγίζοντα 
μᾶλλον τῶν ἄλλων τοῦ κατὰ κορυφὴν ἡμῶν τόπου, 
θερμασίας τε καὶ ἀλέας διὰ τοῦτο περιποιητικὰ 
τυγχάνοντα, τό τε τοῦ [Καρκίνου ἐστὶ καὶ τὸ τοῦ 
Λέοντος, τὰ δύο ταῦτα τοῖς μεγίστοις καὶ κυριωτά- 
τοις, τουτέστι τοῖς φωσίν, ἀπένειμαν οἴκους, τὸ 
μὲν τοῦ Λέοντος ἀρρενικὸν ὃν τῷ ἡλίῳ, τὸ δὲ τοῦ 
Καρκίνου θηλυκὸν τῇ σελήνῃ. καὶ ἀκολούθως τὸ 
μὲν ἀπὸ τοῦ Adovtos μέχρις Αἰγόκερω ἡμικύκλιον 
ἡλιακὸν ὑπέθεντο, τὸ δὲ ἀπὸ ‘Ydpoydou μέχρι 
Καρκίνου σεληνιακόν, ὅπως ἐν ἑκατέρῳ τῶν ἡμικυ- 
κλίων ἕν ζῴδιον καθ᾽ ἕκαστον τῶν πέντεΞ ἀστέρων 
οἰκείως ἀπονεμηθῇ, τὸ μὲν πρὸς ἥλιον, τὸ δὲ πρὸς 

1Titulum sic habent VADEProc.; om. ἑκάστου ἀστέρος 
alii Cam. * πέντε om. PLNCam. 


78 


TETRABIBLOS I. 16-17 


to be entirely without share in the four aforesaid 
aspects, opposition, trine, quartile, and sextile, and 
are either one or five signs apart; for those which 
are one sign apart are as it were averted from one 
another and, though they are two, bound the angle 
of one, and those that are five signs apart divide 
the whole circle into unequal parts, while the other 
aspects make an equal division of the perimeter. 


17. Of the Houses of the Several Planets. 


The planets also have familiarity with the parts 
of the zodiac, through what are called their houses, 
triangles, exaltations, terms,' and the like. The sys- 
tem of houses is of the following nature. Since of 
the twelve signs the most northern, which are closer 
than the others to our zenith and therefore most 
productive of heat andof warmth are Cancer and Leo, 
they assigned these to the greatest and most power- 
ful heavenly bodies, that is, to the luminaries, as 
houses, Leo, which is masculine, to the sun and 
Cancer, feminine, to the moon. In keeping with 
this they assumed the semicircle from Leo to 
Capricorn to be solar and that from Aquarius to 
Cancer to be lunar, so that in each of the semi- 
circles one sign might be assigned to each of the 
five planets as its own, one bearing aspect to the 


1 ὅρια, termini, literally ‘‘ boundaries’; see c. 20. The 
triangles or triplicities are treated in ο. 18 and the exalta- 
tions in c. 19. 


79 


PTOLEMY 


, > , > 4 a ~ 
σελήνην ἐσχηματισμένον, ἀκολούθως ταῖς τῶν 
/ ~ Aa ~ 
κινήσεων αὐτῶν σφαίραις καὶ ταῖς τῶν φύσεων 
> / ~ \ Ν “- / ~ 
ἰδιοτροπίαις. τῷ μὲν yap τοῦ Κρόνου ψυκτικῷ 
~ ” \ / > ~ ~ 
μᾶλλον ὄντι τὴν φύσιν κατ᾽ ἐναντιότητα τοῦ θερμοῦ 
καὶ τὴν ἀνωτάτω καὶ μακρὰν τῶν φωτῶν ἔχοντι 
/ > / ‘ / ΓΑ ~ / 
ζώνην ἐδόθη τὰ διάμετρα ζῴδια τοῦ τε Καρκίνου 
88 καὶ τοῦ Λέοντος, 6 τε Αἰγόκερως καὶ Ὑδροχόος, 
μετὰ τοῦ καὶ ταῦτα τὰ δωδεκατημόρια ψυχρὰ καὶ 
χειμερινὰ τυγχάνειν, καὶ ἔτι τὸν κατὰ διάμετρον 
συσχηματισμὸν ἀσύμφωνον πρὸς ἀγαθοποιίαν εἶναι. 
- ~ \ ~ 
τῷ δὲ τοῦ Διὸς ὄντι εὐκράτῳ καὶ ὑπὸ THY TOD 
/ “ 25 50 A. 39 / ὃ / ~ 
Κρόνου σφαῖραν ἐδόθη τὰ ἐχόμενα δύο τῶν προκει- 
μένων πνευματικὰ ὄντα καὶ γόνιμα, ὃ τε Τοξότης 
\ Ct) ~ A \ A Ἁ ~ / 
καὶ οἱ ᾿Ιχθῦς, κατὰ τριγωνικὴν πρὸς τὰ φῶτα διά- 
στασιν, ἥτις ἐστὶ συμφώνου καὶ ἀγαθοποιοῦ σχημα- 
τισμοῦ. ἐφεξῆς δὲ τῷ τοῦ “Apews ξηραντικῷ 
c ε 
~ A \ ΄ \ « \ \ ~ \ Μ 
μᾶλλον ὄντι τὴν φύσιν καὶ ὑπὸ τὴν τοῦ Atos ἔχοντι 
A an \ ? re 7 > , >? 40 
τὴν σφαῖραν τὰ ἐχόμενα πάλιν ἐκείνων ἐδόθη 
“ 
δωδεκατημόρια τὴν ὁμοίαν ἔχοντα φύσιν, O τε 
, \ φ / > 4 ~ ~ ‘ 
Σκορπίος καὶ ὁ Kpios, ἀκολούθως τῇ φθαρτικῇ Kat 
ἀσυμφώνῳ"' ποιότητι, τὴν τετράγωνον πρὸς τὰ φῶτα 
~ / ol \ aA > ΄ > 
ποιοῦντα διάστασιν. τῷ δὲ τῆς “Adpoditns εὐ- 
~ >? / 
κράτῳ τε ὄντι Kal ὑπὸ τὸν τοῦ "Apews τὰ ἐχόμενα 
\ 
ἐδόθη δύο ζῴδια γονιμώτατα ὄντα, αἵ τε Χηλαὶ Kat 
~ ~ ~ / 
ὁ Ταῦρος, τηροῦντα τὴν συμφωνίαν τῆς ἑξαγώνου 


1 ἀσυμφώνῳ VPLMADE, ἀκολούθως N, om. Cam. (locum * 
notans). 


80 


TETRABIBLOS I. 17 


sun and the other to the moon, consistently with the 
spheres of their motion ! and the peculiarities of their 
natures.” For to Saturn, in whose nature cold pre- 
vails, as opposed to heat, and which occupies the 
orbit highest and farthest from the luminaries, 
were assigned the signs opposite Cancer and Leo, 
namely Capricorn and Aquarius,’ with the additional 
reason that these signs are cold and wintry, and 
further that their diametrical aspect is not con- 
sistent with beneficence. To Jupiter, which is 
moderate and below Saturn’s sphere, were assigned 
the two signs next to the foregoing, windy and 
fecund, Sagittarius and Pisces, in triangular aspect * 
to the luminaries, which is a harmonious and bene- 
ficent configuration. Next, to Mars, which is dry 
in nature and occupies a sphere under that of 
Jupiter, there were assigned again the two signs, 
contiguous to the former, Scorpio and Aries, having 
a similar nature, and, agreeably to Mars’ destructive 
and inharmonious quality, in quartile aspect ὃ to the 
luminaries. To Venus, which is temperate and be- 
neath Mars, were given the next two signs, which 
are extremely fertile, Libra and Taurus. These 


1 That is, they are in the order of their distance from the 
centre of the universe, the earth. 

2 CfaCw as 

3 Capricorn opposes Cancer and Aquarius Leo. 

4 Sagittarius is triangular to Leo, the sun’s house, and 
Pisces to Cancer. Cf. c. 13 on the “‘ harmonious ”’ nature 
of the trine and sextile, in contrast with quartile and op- 
position, 

5 Aries is quartile to the moon’s house, Cancer, and 
Scorpio to the sun’s house, Leo. They are, however, also 
triangular to these houses, Aries to Leo and Scorpio to 
Cancer. 


81 


PTOLEMY 


διαστάσεως, Kal ἐπειδήπερ οὐ πλέον δύο δωδεκα- 
τημορίων 6 ἀστὴρ οὗτος ἐφ᾽ ἑκάτερον τὸ πλεῖστον 
3 ΄ ~ i? ͵7 TPN / \ ~ mre ~ 
ἀφίσταται τοῦ ἡλίου: ἐπὶ τέλει δὲ TH τοῦ “Eppod 
μηδέποτε πλέον ἑνὸς δωδεκατημορίου τὴν ἀπὸ τοῦ 
ὁλί eet RG / ὃ / / ως Φ \ \ 
ἡλίου ἐφ᾽ ἑκάτερα διάστασιν ποιουμένῳ Kal ὑπὸ μὲν 
τοὺς ἄλλους ὄντι. σύνεγγυς δὲ μᾶλλόν πως ἀμφοτέ- 
ρων τῶν φωτῶν, τὰ λοιπὰ καὶ συνεχῆ τοῖς ἐκείνων 
οἴκοις ἐδόθη δύο δωδεκατημόρια τό τε τῶν 4ιδύ- 
μων καὶ τὸ τῆς Παρθένου. 
«ἢ.) Περὶ τριγώνων 

Ἢ δὲ πρὸς τὰ τρίγωνα συνοικείωσις τοιαύτη τις 
οὖσα τυγχάνει. ἐπειδὴ γὰρ τὸ τρίγωνον καὶ 
ἰσόπλευρον σχῆμα συμφωνότατόν ἐστιν ἑαυτῷ καὶ 
ὁ ζωδιακὸς ὑπὸ τριῶν κύκλων ὁρίζεται, τοῦ τε 
ἰσημερινοῦ καὶ τῶν δύο τροπικῶν, διαιρεῖται δὲ τὰ 

/ > ~ ΄ > , > / λ δ΄ 1 \ \ 
ιβ΄ αὐτοῦ μέρη εἰς τρίγωνα ἰσόπλευρα 6’, τὸ μὲν 


5 ἐστι διά τε τοῦ Κριοῦ καὶ τοῦ Λέοντος 


πρῶτον, ὅ 
\ ~ / > ~ > ~ / 
καὶ tod Τοξότου, ἐκ τριῶν ἀρρενικῶν ζῳδίων 
συγκείμενον, καὶ οἴκους ἔχον ἡλίου τε καὶ Ἄρεως 

\ / > / ~ ¢€ / \ \ \ \ - 
καὶ Διός͵ ἐδόθη τῷ ἡλίῳ καὶ Au παρὰ τὴν αἵρεσιν 
€ A / \ 
τὴν ἡλιακὴν ὄντος ἃ τοῦ “Apews. λαμβάνει δὲ 
~ ¢ A ς 
αὐτοῦ τὴν πρώτην οἰκοδεσποτίαν ἡμέρας μὲν ὁ 

Ld \ \ « ~ / \ ἮΝ AF \ K; i 
ἥλιος, νυκτὸς δὲ 6 τοῦ Atos, καὶ ἔστιν ὁ μὲν Kptos 
μᾶλλον πρὸς τῷ ἰσημερινῷ, 6 δὲ Aéwv μᾶλλον 
'‘ dv post δ΄ add NCam. 


26 VAD; om. cett. Cam. 
8 ὄντος libri Cam.!; ὑπάρχοντος Proc. ; ἐξωσθέντος Cam.? 


82 


TETRABIBLOS I. 17-18 


preserve the harmony of the sextile aspect ;' another 
reason is that this planet at most is never more than 
two signs removed from the sun in either direction. 
Finally, there were given to Mercury, which never 
is farther removed from the sun than one sign in 
either direction and is beneath the others and closer 
in a way to both of the luminaries, the remaining 
signs, Gemini and Virgo, which are next to the 
houses of the luminaries. 


18. Of the Triangles. 


The familiarity by triangles is as follows. Inas- 
much as the triangular and equilateral form is most 
harmonious with itself,? the zodiac also is bounded 
by three circles, the equinoctial and the two tropies, 
and its twelve parts are divided into four equilateral 
triangles. The first of these, which passes through 
Aries, Leo, and Sagittarius, is composed of three 
masculine signs and includes the houses of the sun, 
of Mars, and of Jupiter. This triangle was assigned 
to the sun and Jupiter, since Mars is not of the solar 
sect.” The sun assumes first governance of it by 
day and Jupiter by night. Also, Aries is close to 
the equinoctial circle, Leo to the summer solstice and 


1 Taurus is sextile to Cancer and Libra to Leo. 

2 This statement savours of Neo-Pythagoreanism; cf., for 
example, the demonstration by Nicomachus (Introduction 
to Arithmetic, li. 7. 4) of the proposition that the triangle 
is the most elementary plane figure, which is also Platonic 
doctrine (T’imaeus 53C ff.); note likewise the much re- 
peated statement that the number 3 is the first plane sur- 
face ; Theon of Smyrna, p. 46, 14 (ed. Hiller), Macrobius, 
Somnium Scipionis, i. 6. 22, ete. 

3 See c. 7. 


83 


PTOLEMY 


\ ~ Ae ~ « δὲ ΤᾺ ξό A ~ ~ 
πρὸς τῷ θερινῷ, ὁ δὲ Τοξότης πρὸς τῷ χειμερινῷ. 
/ \ \ / \ ~ \ , 
γίνεται δὲ καὶ προηγουμένως μὲν τοῦτο τὸ τρίγωνον 
βόρειον, διὰ τὴν τοῦ Atos συνοικοδεσποτίαν, ἐπει- 
δήπερ οὗτος γόνιμός τέ ἐστι καὶ πνευματώδης 
,ὔ cal a“ 
οἰκείως τοῖς ἀπὸ τῶν ἄρκτων ἀνέμοις. διὰ δὲ 
τὸν τοῦ Ἄρεως οἶκον λαμβάνει μῖξιν τοῦ λιβὸς 
\ ~ 
καὶ συνίσταται! βορρολιβυκόν, ἐπειδήπερ ὁ τοῦ 
Ἄρεως τοιούτων ἐστὶ πνευμάτων ποιητικός, διά 
\ ~ / ~ ~ 
τε τὴν τῆς σελήνης αἵρεσιν Kal τὸ τῶν δυσμῶν 
τεθηλυσμένον. 
’ 4 , ΄ > i} ~ 
To τε δεύτερον τρίγωνον, 6 ἐστι διά τε TOD 
4 \ , A 5 / / 
Ταύρου καὶ [Π]αρθένου καὶ Αἰγόκερω, συγκείμενον 
> ~ ~ > / > / / 
ἐκ τριῶν θηλυκῶν, ἀκολούθως ἐδόθη σελήνῃ τε 
Ns δί > ὃ /, 3 a2 ‘ A 
καὶ Adpoditn, οἰκοδεσποτούσης αὐτοῦ 5 νυκτὸς μὲν 
~ AnH ¢€ / δὲ ~ ~ "A δί 
407THS σελήνης, ἡμέρας δὲ τοῦ τῆς ᾿Αφροδίτης. 
Ud “ “ ~ 
καὶ ἔστιν ὁ μὲν Ταῦρος πρὸς τῷ θερινῷ κύκλῳ 
~ ¢ \ / \ ~ ? ~ e A 
μᾶλλον, ἡ δὲ Παρθένος πρὸς τῷ ἰσημερινῷ, ὁ δὲ 
Αἰγόκερως πρὸς τῷ χειμερινῷ. γίνεται δὲ καὶ 
τοῦτο τὸ τρίγωνον προηγουμένως μὲν νότιον διὰ 
Ἁ “ ϑ. / > , >? / ε 
τὴν τῆς ‘Adpoditns οἰκοδεσποτίαν, ἐπειδήπερ ὁ 
A - ~ \ A 
ἀστὴρ οὗτος τῶν ὁμοίων ἐστὶ πνευμάτων διὰ TO 
“ / 
θερμὸν καὶ ἔνικμον τῆς δυνάμεως ποιητικός. 
\ \ a > lA \ δ \ ~ 
προσλαβὼν δὲ μῖξιν ἀπηλιώτου διὰ τὸ τὸν τοῦ 
Κρόνου οἶκον ἐν αὐτῷ τυγχάνειν τὸν Αἰγόκερων 
συνίσταται καὶ αὐτὸ νοταπηλιωτικὸν κατ᾽ ἀντίθεσιν 
τοῦ πρώτου, ἐπειδήπερ καὶ ὁ τοῦ Κρόνου τοιούτων 
Α 
ἐστὶ πνευμάτων ποιητικὸς οἰκειούμενος καὶ αὐτὸς 
A a \ σ 
ταῖς ἀνατολαῖς διὰ τὴν πρὸς τὸν ἥλιον αἵρεσιν. 
1 συνίσταται) γίνεται VDProc. 
2 αὐτοῦ PLMA, αὐτῶν VDNECam. 
84 


TETRABIBLOS I. 18 


Sagittarius to the winter solstice. This triangle is 
preéminently northern because of Jupiter’s share in 
its government, since Jupiter is fecund and windy,! 
similarly to the winds from the north. However, 
because of the house of Mars it suffers an admixture 
of the south-west wind? and is constituted Borro- 
libycon, because Mars causes such winds and also 
because of the sect of the moon and the feminine 
quality of the occident.* 

The second triangle, which is the one drawn 
through Taurus, Virgo, and Capricorn, is composed 
of three feminine signs, and consequently was as- 
signed to the moon and Venus; the moon governs 
it by night and Venus by day. Taurus lies toward 
the summer tropic, Virgo toward the equinox, and 
Capricorn toward the winter tropic. This. triangle 
is made preéminently southern because of the 
dominance of Venus, since this star through the 
heat and moisture of its power produces similar 
winds ; but as it receives an admixture of Apeliotes 
because the house of Saturn, Capricornus, is included 
within it, it is constituted Notapeliotes 4 in contrast 
to the first triangle, since Saturn produces winds of 
this kind and is related to the east through sharing 
in the sect of the sun. 


1 Of. c. 4. 2 Africus, Lips. 
3In c. 10 the west is characterized as moist, which is 
regarded as a feminine quality (cf. ο. 6). 


47.6.6. south-east. 


PTOLEMY 


Τὸ δὲ , / a > 1 ‘ / 
ὁ δὲ τρίτον τρίγωνον 6 ἐστι! τὸ διά τε 
΄ \ ~ \ « ΄ > ~ 
Διδύμων καὶ Χηλῶν καὶ “Ydpoxdov, ἐκ τριῶν 
ἀρρενικῶν ζῳδίων συγκείμενον, καὶ πρὸς μὲν τὸν 
τοῦ Ἄρεως μηδένα λόγον ἔχον, πρὸς δὲ τὸν τοῦ 
Κρόνου καὶ τὸν τοῦ “Ἑρμοῦ διὰ τοὺς οἴκους, 
τούτοις ἀπενεμήθη," πάλιν οἰκοδεσποτοῦντος ἡμέρας 
“ Q ~ 
μὲν τοῦ Κρόνου διὰ τὴν αἵρεσιν, νυκτὸς δὲ τοῦ 
«ς ~ \ uv \ \ ~ / 
Eppotd. καὶ ἔστι τὸ μὲν τῶν Διδύμων δωδε- 
κατημόριον πρὸς τῷ θερινῷ, τὸ δὲ τῶν Χηλῶν πρὸς 
~ > ~ \ \ ~ € / \ ~ 
τῷ ἰσημερινῷ, τὸ δὲ τοῦ Ὑδροχόου πρὸς τῷ 
“ / Ὁ ~ ‘ 
χειμερινῷ. συνίσταται δὲ καὶ τοῦτο TO τρίγωνον 
προηγουμένως μὲν ἀπηλιωτικὸν διὰ τὸν τοῦ Κρόνου - 
κατὰ δὲ τὴν μῖξιν βορραπηλιωτικὸν διὰ τὴν τοῦ 
Διὸς αἵρεσιν τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου πρὸς τὸ τὸν ἡμερινὸν 
λόγον συνοικειοῦσθαι. 
\ \ ΄ , Ψ' Ὁ / ,ὔ 
41 To δὲ τέταρτον τρίγωνον, 6 ἐστι διά τε Καρκίνου 
καὶ Σικορπίου καὶ ᾿Ιχθύων, κατελείφθη μὲν ὃ λοιπῷ 
ὄντι τῷ τοῦ "Apews καὶ λόγον ἔχοντι πρὸς αὐτὸ διὰ 
τὸν οἶκον τὸν Σκορπίον᾽ συνοικοδεσποτοῦσι δὲ 
αὐτῷ διά τε τὴν αἵρεσιν καὶ τὸ θηλυκὸν τῶν 
/ ~ 
ζῳδίων νυκτὸς μὲν ἡ σελήνη, ἡμέρας δὲ ὁ τῆς 
3 / \ ” ¢ \ Ki / A ~ 
Adpoditns, καὶ ἔστιν ὃ μὲν Kapkivos πρὸς τῷ 
θερινῷ κύκλῳ, ὁ δὲ Σ'κορπίος πρὸς τῷ χειμερινῷ 
μᾶλλον, οἱ δὲ ἰχθῦς πρὸς τῷ ἰσημερινῷ. καὶ τοῦτο 
δὲ τὸ τρίγωνον συνίσταται προηγουμένως μὲν 
λιβυκὸν διὰ τὴν τοῦ Ἄἄρεως καὶ τῆς σελήνης 
> / ἈΝ - A \ A \ 
οἰκοδεσποτίαν, κατὰ μῖξιν δὲ νοτολιβυκὸν διὰ τὴν 
τῆς Αφροδίτης οἰκοδεσποτίαν. 
1 τρίτον δὲ τρίγωνόν ἐστι PLNCam. 
2 ἀπενεμήθη VPMADE, om. L, ἀπονεμηθέν NCam. 
86 


TETRABIBLOS I. 18 


The third triangle is the one drawn through 
Gemini, Libra, and Aquarius, composed of three 
masculine signs, and having no relation to Mars 
but rather to Saturn and Mercury because of their 
houses. It was assigned in turn to these, with Saturn 
governing during the day on account of his sect and 
Mercury by night. The sign of Gemini lies toward 
the summer tropic, Libra toward the equinox, and 
Aquarius toward the winter tropic. This triangle 
also is primarily of eastern constitution, because of 
Saturn, but by admixture north-eastern, because the 
sect of Jupiter has familiarity with Saturn, inasmuch 
as it is diurnal. 

The fourth triangle, which is the one drawn through 
Cancer, Scorpio, and Pisces, was left to the only re- 
maining planet, Mars, which is related to it through 
his house, Scorpio ; and along with him, on account 
of the sect and the femininity of the signs, the moon 
by night and Venus by day are co-rulers. Cancer 
is near the summer circle, Scorpio lies close to the 
winter one, and Pisces to the equinox. This triangle 
is constituted preéminently western, because it is 
dominated by Mars and the moon; but by ad- 
mixture it becomes south-western through the domi- 
nation of Venus. 


3 μὲν VD, om. PL, μόνῳ MNAECam. 


87 


PTOLEMY 


«ιθ.. Περὶ ὑψωμάτων 


\ \ / ~ ΄ e 7 
Ta δὲ καλούμενα τῶν πλανωμένων ὑψώματα 
λόγον ἔχει τοιόνδε. ἐπειδὴ γὰρ ὁ ἥλιος ἐν μὲν τῷ 
Κριῷ γενόμενος τὴν εἰς τὸ ὑψηλὸν καὶ βόρειον 
ἡμικύκλιον μετάβασιν ποιεῖται, ἐν δὲ ταῖς Χηλαῖς 
τὴν εἰς τὸ ταπεινὸν καὶ νότιον, εἰκότως ' τὸν μὲν 
᾿ ες a > , ὧν ὃς > a 
Κριὸν ws ὕψωμα ἀνατεθήκασιν αὐτῷ καθ᾽ ὃν 
ἄρχεται καὶ τὸ τῆς ἡμέρας μέγεθος καὶ τὸ τῆς 
͵ὔ ΕῚ fol \ ” A \ \ 
φύσεως αὐτοῦ θερμαντικὸν αὔξεσθαι, τὰς δὲ Χηλὰς 
ὡς ταπείνωμα διὰ τὰ ἐναντία. 
Ὃ δὲ τοῦ Kpovov πάλιν ἵνα πρὸς τὸν ἥλιον διά- 
μετρον στάσιν ἔχῃ, ὥσπερ καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν οἴκων, τὸν 
A A > ͵ e Ld Μ ‘ A 
μὲν Ζυγὸν ἀντικειμένως ws ὕψωμα ἔλαβε, τὸν δὲ 
Κριὸν ὡς ταπείνωμα. ὅπου γὰρ τὸ θερμὸν αὔξεται, 
μειοῦται ἐκεῖ τὸ ψυχρόν, καὶ ὅπου ἐκεῖνο μειοῦται, 
\ \ ” 2 , >? \ 3 ? ~ ¢ 7 
42 τὸ ψυχρὸν αὔξεται. πάλιν ἐπειδὴ ἐν τῷ ὑψώ- 
ματι τοῦ ἡλίου ἐν τῷ Κριῷ συνοδεύουσα ἡ σελήνη 
πρώτην ποιεῖται φάσιν καὶ ἀρχὴν τῆς τοῦ φωτὸς 
αὐξήσεως καὶ ὡσπερεὶ ὑψώσεως ἐν τῷ τοῦ ἰδίου 
τριγώνου πρώτῳ ζῳδίῳ τῷ Ταύρῳ, τοῦτο μὲν 
ΕῚ ~ Ὁ“ > / ‘ \ / \ ~ 
αὐτῆς ὕψωμα ἐκλήθη, τὸ δὲ διάμετρον τὸ τοῦ 
Skoptiov ταπείνωμα. 
‘ ~ \ c ‘ ~ \ ~ ’ \ 
Μετὰ ταῦτα δὲ ὁ μὲν τοῦ Atos τῶν βορείων Kat 
τῶν γονίμων πνευμάτων ἀποτελεστικὸς ὧν ἐν 
Καρκίνῳ μάλιστα βορειότατος γινόμενος αὔξεται 


1 εἰκότως VMADE, οἰκείως (οἰκίως) PLNCam. 

Ξ καὶ ὅπου αὔξεται NMAECam. (αὐξάνει NECam.); 
k. ὅπου τὸ ψυχρὸν αὔξεται, ἐκεῖ ἐκμειοῦται τὸ θερμόν VD; 
k. ὅπου ἐκείνω μειοῦτε, τὸ θερμὸν αὔξεται Ῥ. 


88 


TETRABIBLOS I. 19 


19. Of Exaltations. 


The so-called exaltations ! of the planets have the 
following explanation. Since the sun, when he is 
in Aries, is making his transition to the northern 
and higher semicircle, and in Libra is passing into 
the southern and lower one, they have fittingly 
assigned Aries to him as his exaltation, since there 
the length of the day and the heating power of his 
nature begin to increase, and Libra as his depression 
for the opposite reasons. 

Saturn again, in order to have a position oppo- 
site to the sun, as also in the matter of their houses,” 
took, contrariwise, Libra as his exaltation and Aries 
as his depression. For where heat increases there 
cold diminishes, and where the former diminishes 
cold on the contrary increases. And since the moon, 
coming to conjunction in the exaltation of the sun, 
in Aries, shows her first phase and begins to increase 
her light and, as it were, her height, in the first sign 
of her own triangle, Taurus, this was called her 
exaltation, and the diametrically opposite sign, 
Scorpio, her depression. 

Then Jupiter, which produces the fecund north 
winds, reaches farthest north in Cancer and brings 


1 These have nothing to do with aphelion or perihelion ; 
the planets are exalted or depressed in power in these 
positions: Boll-Bezold-Gundel, p. 59; Bouché-Leclereq 
pp. 192-199. 

ΞΟ. e. 17; the houses of Saturn are the signs in 
opposition to the houses of the sun and moon. 





3 πάλιν ἐπειδὴ VADE; πάλιν ἐπὶ δεῖ P; πάλιν. ἐπεὶ δὲ libri 
alii Cam. 


89 


PTOLEMY 


tA \ Ἂ - \ ἰὃ ‘ ὃ ΄ Σ 50 ~ 
πάλιν καὶ πληροῖ τὴν ἰδίαν δύναμιν - ὅθεν τοῦτο 
μὲν τὸ δωδεκατημόριον ὕψωμα πεποιήκασιν αὐτοῦ, 
τὸν δὲ Αἰγόκερων ταπείνωμα. 

Ὃ δὲ τοῦ Ἄρεως φύσει καυσώδης ὧν καὶ μᾶλλον 
ἐν Αἰγόκερῳ διὰ τὸ νοτιώτατον γίνεσθαι καυστικώ- 
τερος γινόμενος, καὶ αὐτὸς μὲν εἰκότως ἔλαβεν 
“ > > 0 ~ ~ A ‘ ‘ > / 
ὕψωμα κατ᾽ ἀντίθεσιν τῷ τοῦ Atos tov Αἰγόκερων, 
ταπείνωμα δὲ τὸν Καρκίνον. 

Tih 1A ς \ 1 ~ *4 ὃ / ε A Ἅ , 

άλιν ὁ μὲν ' τῆς Adpoditns ὑγραντικὸς ὧν φύσει 
καὶ μᾶλλον ἐν τοῖς ᾿ΪΙχθύσι, ἐν οἷς ἡ τοῦ ὑγροῦ ἔαρος 
ἀρχὴ προσημαίνεται, καὶ αὐτὸς αὐξάνων τὴν οἰκείαν 
δύναμιν, τὸ μὲν ὕψωμα ἔσχεν ἐν τοῖς ᾿ΪΙχθύσι, τὸ δὲ 
ταπείνωμα ἐν τῇ Παρθένῳ. 

Ὃ δὲ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ τὸ ἐναντίον μᾶλλον " ὑπόξηρος 
ὧν εἰκότως καὶ κατὰ τὸ ἀντικείμενον ἐν μὲν τῇ 
Παρθένῳ͵ καθ᾽ ἣν τὸ ξηρὸν μετόπωρον προση- 
μαίνεται." καὶ αὐτὸς ὥσπερ ὑψοῦται͵ κατὰ δὲ τοὺς 
᾿Ιχθῦς ταπεινοῦται. 


43 «κ.. Περὶ ὁρίων διαθέσεως 


Περὶ δὲ τῶν ὁρίων δισσοὶ μάλιστα φέρονται 
τρόποι, καὶ ὁ μέν ἐστιν Αἰγυπτιακός, ὁ πρὸς τὰς 
τῶν οἴκων ws ἐπὶ πᾶν κυρίας " ὁ δὲ Χαλδαϊκός, o 
πρὸς τὰς τῶν τριγώνων οἰκοδεσποτίας. ὁ μὲν οὖν 
Αἰγυπτιακὸς ὁ τῶν κοινῶς φερομένων ὁρίων οὐ πάνυ 
τοι σῴζει τὴν ἀκολουθίαν οὔτε τῆς τάξεως οὔτε τῆς 
καθ᾽ ἕκαστον ποσότητος. πρῶτον μὲν yap ἐπὶ τῆς 

' πάλιν ὁ μὲν PLME; πάλιν ὁ VAD; πάλιν. ὁ μέντοι NCam. 

ξμᾶλλον VP (μᾶλον) AD, πάλιν MNECam., πάλιν ἢ μᾶλλον 1,. 
90 


TETRABIBLOS I. 19-20 


his own power to fullness ; they therefore made this 
sign his exaltation and Capricorn his depression. 

Mars, which by nature is fiery and becomes all 
the more so in Capricorn because in it he is farthest 
south, naturally received Capricorn as his exaltation, 
in contrast to Jupiter, and Cancer as his depression. 

Venus, however, as she is moist by nature and 
increases her own proper power all the more in 
Pisces, where the beginning of the moist spring is 
indicated, has her exaltation in Pisces and her 
depression in Virgo. 

Mercury, on the contrary, since he is drier, by 
contrast naturally is exalted, as it were, in Virgo, 
in which the dry autumn is signified, and is depressed 
in Pisces. 


20. Of the Disposition of Terms. 


With regard to the terms two systems are most 
in circulation ; the first is the Egyptian,’ which is 
chiefly based on the government of the houses, and 
the second the Chaldaean, resting upon the govern- 
ment of the triplicities. Now the Egyptian system 
of the commonly accepted terms does not at all 
preserve the consistency either of order or of in- 
dividual quantity. For in the first place, in the 


1 Probably the system of the mythical Nechepso and 
Petosiris ; it is the system of Dorotheus of Sidon, Firmicus 
Maternus, and Paulus Alexandrinus. Cf. Bouché-Leclereq, 
pp- 206-210, who discusses Ptolemy’s criticism of the 
Egyptian termini. 





3 προσημαίνεται NCam.; ampoonpaive VLMADE; προση- 

on P ony poonp on 
μένη P. 

*Sic VADEProc. ; Π. τῶν ὁρίων NCam. ; I]. ὁρίων PLM. 


91 


PTOLEMY 


τάξεως πὴ μὲν τοῖς τῶν οἴκων κυρίοις τὰ πρωτεῖα 
δεδώκασιν, πὴ δὲ τοῖς τῶν τριγώνων ἐνίοτε δὲ 
καὶ τοῖς τῶν ὑψωμάτων. ἐπεὶ παραδείγματος 
, 5 ~ ‘ ~ 
everev,! εἴ γε" Tots οἴκοις ἠκολουθήκασι, διὰ Ti τῷ 
τοῦ Κρόνου εἰ τύχοι πρώτῳ δεδώκασιν ἐν Ζυγῷ 
καὶ οὐ τῷ τῆς Αφροδίτης, καὶ διὰ τί ἐν Κριῷ τῷ 
τοῦ Διὶ καὶ οὐ τῷ τοῦ "Apews ; εἴτε τοῖς τριγώνοις͵ 
διὰ τί τῷ τοῦ “Ἑρμοῦ δεδώκασιν ἐν Αἰγόκερῳ καὶ 
.« DA Pg 
> a a ae? , ” \ A ε ΄, \ 
οὐ τῷ τῆς ᾿Αφροδίτης ; εἴτε καὶ τοῖς ὑψώμασι, διὰ 
τί τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως ἐν Καρκίνῳ καὶ οὐ τῷ τοῦ Avos ; 
t t + ’ 
” a δὴ a 4 ” 
εἴτε τοῖς Ta πλεῖστα τούτων ἔχουσι, διὰ τί ἐν 
« ~ ~ « ~ ΄ 
YSpoxyow τῷ τοῦ ‘Eppod δεδώκασι, τρίγωνον 
ἔχοντι μόνον, καὶ οὐχὶ τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου : τούτου 
γὰρ καὶ οἶκός ἐστι καὶ τρίγωνον. ἢ διὰ τί ὅλως ὃ 
ἐν Αἰγόκερῳ τῷ τοῦ “Ἑρμοῦ πρώτῳ " δεδώκασι 
/ / 3 Ww 4 A A 4 ἐς ͵ 
δένα λόγον ἔχοντι πρὸς τὸ ζῴδιον οἰκοδεσποτίας ; 
ι > 
9: »Νἡ “ λ ~ ὃ ΄ 5 \ > \ > x / 6 
Kal ἐπὶ τῆς λοιπῆς διατάξεως ὃ τὴν αὐτὴν ἀναλογίαν 
ἄν τις εὕροι. 
¢ A ͵΄ 
Δεύτερον δὲ καὶ ἡ ποσότης τῶν ὁριων οὐδεμίαν 
ἀκολουθίαν ἔχουσα φαίνεται. ὁ γὰρ καθ᾽ ἕνα 
ἕκαστον ἀστέρα ἐπισυναγόμενος ἐκ πάντων ἀριθ- 
ἡἁ4μός, πρὸς ὅν φασιν αὐτῶν τὰ χρονικὰ ἐπιμερί- 
ζεσθαι, οὐδένα οἰκεῖον οὐδὲ εὐαπόδεκτον ἔχει λόγον. 


1 ἐπεὶ παραδείγματος ἕνεκεν VD; ἐπὶ παρ. δὲ ἕν. PL, ἐπὶ παρ. 
μ ρ ap 


τοῦ (τό E) ye ἕν. ME, παραδείγματος δὲ ἕνεκεν NCam. 
2 εἴ ye ME, εἴτε VD, εἴπερ yap A, ὅτε PLNCam. 
3 ὅλως VMNDE, ὅλο P, ὅλου L, ὅλος ACam. 
4 πρώτῳ VMADE, -ov PLNCam. 
δ διατάξεως P (-Ea-) L, δὲ τάξεως alii Cam. 
ὁ ἀναλογίαν libri, ἀνακολουθίαν Cam. 


92 


TETRABIBLOS I. 20 


matter of order, they have sometimes assigned the 
first place to the lords of the houses and again to 
those of the triplicities, and sometimes also to the 
lords of the exaltations. For example, if it is true 
that they have followed the houses, why have they 
assigned precedence to Saturn, say, in Libra,! and not 
to Venus, and why to Jupiter in Aries and not to Mars? 
And if they follow the triplicities, why have they 
given Mercury, and not Venus,” first place in Capri- 
corn? Or if it be exaltations, why give Mars, and 
not Jupiter, precedence in Cancer*; and if they 
have regard for the planets that have the greatest 
number of these qualifications, why have they given 
first place in Aquarius to Mercury, who has only his 
triplicity there, and not to Saturn, for it is both the 
house and the triplicity of Saturn? Or why have 
they given Mercury first place in Capricorn at all, 
since he has no relation of government to the sign ? 
One would find the same kind of thing in the rest 
of the system. 

Secondly, the number of the terms manifestly has 
no consistency ; for the number derived for each 
planet from the addition of its terms in all the signs, 
in accordance with which they say the planets 
assign years of life,4 furnishes no suitable or ac- 
ceptable argument. But even if we rely upon the 


1 Libra is the solar house of Venus ; Saturn’s houses are 
Capricorn and Aquarius. Similarly Mars is at home in 
Aries, Jupiter’s houses being Pisces and Sagittarius. 

2 Of. c. 18; Venus and the moon govern the second 
triangle. 3 Of. c. 19; Mars’ exaltation is in Capricorn. 

4For the doctrine that the sum of the terms of each 
planet determines the life-time of those born under its in- 
fluence, cf. Bouché-Leclercq, p. 408. 


93 


PTOLEMY 


ἐὰν δὲ Kal τούτῳ τῷ κατὰ τὴν ἐπισυναγωγὴν ἀριθμῷ 
πιστεύσωμεν, ὡς ἄντικρυς ὑπ᾽ Αἰγυπτίων ὁμολο- 
γουμένῳ, πολλαχῶς μὲν καὶ ἄλλως τῆς κατὰ τὸ 
ζῴδιον ποσότητος ἐναλλασσομένης, ὁ αὐτὸς ἀριθμὸς 
ἂν συναγόμενος εὑρεθείη. καὶ ὃ πιθανολογεῖν δὲ 
καὶ σοφίζεσθαί τινες ἐπιχειροῦσι περὶ αὐτῶν, ὅτι 
κατὰ παντὸς κλίματος ἀναφορικὸν λόγον οἱ καθ᾽ 
ἕκαστον ἀστέρα συσχηματιζόμενοί πως χρόνοι 
τὴν αὐτὴν ἐπισυνάγουσι ποσότητα, ψεῦδός ' ἐστι. 
πρῶτον μὲν γὰρ ἀκολουθοῦσι 3 τῇ κοινῇ πραγ- 
ματείᾳ καὶ τῇ πρὸς ὁμαλὰς ὑπεροχὰς τῶν ἀνα- 
φορῶν συνισταμένῃ, μὴ κατὰ μικρὸν ἐγγὺς οὔσῃ 
τῆς ἀληθείας. καθ᾽ ἣν ἐπὶ τοῦ διὰ τῆς κάτω 
χώρας τῆς Αἰγύπτου παραλλήλου τὸ μὲν τῆς 
Παρθένου καὶ τῶν Χηλῶν δωδεκατημόριον ἐν λη΄ 
χρόνοις ἑκάτερον καὶ ἔτι τρίτῳ θέλουσιν ἀνα- 
φέρεσθαι, τὸ δὲ τοῦ Λέοντος καὶ τοῦ Σκορπίου 
ἑκάτερον ἐν λε΄, δεικνυμένου διὰ τῶν γραμμῶν ὅτι 
ταῦτα μὲν ἐν πλείοσι τῶν λε΄ χρόνων ἀναφέρεται, 
τὸ δὲ τῆς Πᾳαρθένου καὶ τὸ τῶν Χηλῶν ἐν ἐλάττοσιν * 
ἔπειτα καὶ οἱ τοῦτο ἐπιχειρήσαντες κατασκευάζειν 
οὐκέτι φαίνονται κατηκολουθηκότες οὐδ᾽ οὕτω 
τῇ παρὰ τοῖς πλείστοις φερομένῃ ποσότητι τῶν 
ὁρίων, κατὰ ὃ πολλὰ διηναγκασμένοι καταψεύσα- 
4 σθαι: καί που καὶ μορίοις μορίων ἐχρήσαντο, 
τοῦ σῶσαι τὸ προκείμενον αὐτοῖς ἕνεκεν, οὐδ᾽ 
avtois,! ὡς ἔφαμεν, ἀληθοῦς ἐχομένοις ὃ σκοποῦ. 
1 ψεῦδος VMADEProc., ψευδές PLNCam. 


Σ ἠκολουθήκασι NCam. 
8 κατὰ PL, καὶ τὰ VMDE, καίτοι NACam. 


94 


TETRABIBLOS I. 20 


number derived from this summation, in accordance 
with the downright claim of the Egyptians, the sum 
would be found the same, even though the amounts, 
sign by sign, be frequently changed in various ways. 
And as for the specious and sophistic assertion ὦ 
about them that some attempt to make, namely that 
the times assigned to each single planet by the 
schedule of ascensions in all the climes add up 
to this same sum, it is false. For, in the first place, 
they follow the common method, based upon evenly 
progressing increases in the ascensions, which is not 
even close to the truth. By this scheme they would 
have each of the signs Virgo and Libra, on the 
parallel which passes through lower Egypt, ascend 
in 381 times,” and Leo and Scorpio each in 35, 
although it is shown by the tables 3 that these latter 
ascend in more than 35 times and Virgo and 
Libra in less. Furthermore, those who have en- 
deavoured to establish this theory even so do not 
seem to follow the usually accepted number of 
terms, and are compelled to make many false state- 
ments, and they have even made use of fractional 
parts of fractions in the effort to save their hypothesis, 
which, as we said, is itself not a true one. 


1This perhaps means that the sum of the times of 
ascension of the two signs assigned as houses to each planet 
gave, according to the theory of these unnamed astrologers, 
the number of years of life which they assigned to those 
born under them ; cf. Bouché-Leclereq, p. 209. 

2A “time” is the period taken by one degree of the 
equator to rise above the horizon. 

3 In Almagest, ii. 8. 





4 αὐτοῖς VMDE, αὐτῆς APL, αὐτό NCam. 
5 ἐχομένοις VDE, -ης Μ, -ov NACam., ἔχομεν L, ἔχωμεν P. 


95 


PTOLEMY 


A ‘ / A aA - 4 A 
Ta μέντοι φερόμενα παρὰ τοῖς πολλοῖς διὰ τὴν 
τῆς ἐπάνωθεν παραδόσεως ἀξιοπιστίαν τοῦτον ὑπό- 
κειται τὸν τρόπον. 


σ > ? , 2 
ὅρια kat Αἰγυπτίους 


Κριοῦ Ταύρου Διδύμων 
1 Sa ζ΄ φ n η΄ 8 Ss σ΄ 
2 ς΄ ιβ΄ % ς΄ ιδ' y ς΄ ιβ΄ 
ῃ η΄ "τῷ y η΄ Kp’ 9 εἶ γῆς 
ὅς ΕΠ, ΚΕ h ἘΠΕ Kes 3 COD 
h e’ λ' é γ΄ Ne h oa ne 

Καρκίνου Λέοντος Παρθένου 
4 ie ζέ Ύ ς΄ oe 8 ζω ζ΄ 
φ Se ts g ΤΥ ἢ φ ΚΣ ule 
Et Sa be Gar ee, uw δ΄ xa’ 
γ { Ks’ ¥ ς΄ ἐδ) 3 Zz κη΄ 
h δ΄ λ' 4 Se V4 h β΄ Χχ' 

Ζυγοῦ Σκορπίου Τοξότου 
πε ir sr” 9 Vicia &% y ιβ ιβ’ 
Sins ΕΠ δ: φ Ot atta, 2 ἜΤ τ 
1 ἀξ κα, San ued 8 δ΄ κα΄ 
φ ζ΄ Ky u Go ΚΟ, h ee 
Cit Sais a ete sal le, τι δ΄ ΤΕλΓ 

Αἰγόκερω γδροχόου Ιχθύων 
διώμηζήορᾳ ot Bhi pboemis abe = of oY 
»" Sadar tO CLES een revs 2 EY OY 
φ η΄ κβ΄ 9) [44 κ΄ 8 y 10’ 
h OnKSH 4 εἰ.}.... KES 4 Cami 
4 δ' v h ε΄ >‘ h β΄ ἊΣ 


1Post hance lineam add. VMPLADProc. haec aut 
similia: συνάγεται δὲ ἑκάστου αὐτῶν ὁ ἀριθμὸς οὕτως - Κρόνου 
μὲν μοῖραι νζ΄, Διὸς 06’, "Apews ἐς", ᾿Αφροδίτης πβ΄, ᾿ΕἙρμοῦ ος" 
γίνονται τξ΄. 


96 


TETRABIBLOS I. 20 


However, the terms most generally accepted on 
the authority of ancient tradition are given in the 
following fashion :— 


Terms according to the Egyptians. 


Aries 46 26 38 35 h5 
Taurus 28 36 7X8 h5 apa 
Gemini 36 16 25 37 h6 
Cancer 37 26 36 U7 h4 
Leo 26 25 h7 36 46 
Virgo 37 210 γ4 ΚΙ "»2 
Libra 56 38 17 ον 42 
Scorpio 47 φ4 38 2 h6 
Sagittarius 1712 95 34 h5 o4 
Capricornus ᾧ 7 Y7 28 "4 4 
Aquarius 5.7 26 Y7 35 bb 
Pisces 212 y4 33 49 h2 


1The Greek tables on p. 96 show also, within each sign, 
the cumulative totals up to 30°; these have been omitted 
in the translation. Cf. p. 107, n. 1, and for the symbols 
Ρ. XXv. 


*Tabulas codicis Vat. gr. 1453 (Procli Paraphrasin 
continentis) secutus sum, cum illis quae ab Camerario im- 
pressae sunt congruentes solis lineis 26 et 28 (sub Alyoxepw) 
exceptis ubi Cam. ? ζ΄ et ¢ ε΄ offert. Tabulae in PLMNAD 
inventae sunt; om. VE. 


97 


PTOLEMY 


«xa.» Κατὰ Χαλδαίους 


Ὃ δὲ Χαλδαϊκὸς τρόπος ἁπλῆν μέν τινα ἔχει καὶ 
μᾶλλον πιθανήν, οὐχ οὕτω δὲ αὐταρκῆ πρός Te? 
τὰς τῶν τριγώνων δεσποτίας ἀκολουθίαν 3 καὶ τὴν 
τῆς ποσότητος τάξιν, ὥστε μέντοι καὶ χωρὶς ava- 

αφῆ ὃ mn θ « δέ x 4 > r ~ > - 
γραφῆς δύνασθαι ῥαδίως twat ἐπιβαλεῖν αὐταῖς. 
ἐν μὲν γὰρ τῷ πρώτῳ τριγώνῳ Κριῷ καὶ Λέοντι 

40 καὶ Τοξότῃ τὴν αὐτὴν ἔχοντι παρ᾽ αὐτοῖς κατὰ 
ζῴδιον διαίρεσιν, πρῶτος μὲν λαμβάνει ὁ τοῦ 
’ὔ / iy ~ / 52} tea ¢ ~ 
τριγώνου κύριος, ὁ τοῦ Atos, εἶθ᾽ ἑξῆς 6 τοῦ 
ἐφεξῆς τριγώνου, λέγω δὴ τὸν τῆς ᾿Αφροδίτης, 
> ~ δὲ ε ~ ΄ 5 “ ~ / bay 
ἐφεξῆς δὲ ὁ τῶν διδύμων," 6 τε τοῦ Kpovov καὶ 6 
τοῦ “Ερμοῦ - τελευταῖος δὲ 6 τοῦ λοιποῦ τριγώνου 
κύριος, ὃ τοῦ "Apews. ἐν δὲ τῷ δευτέρῳ τριγώνῳ 
ΤΠ ΄ὔ \ TT θέ \ A? / vA \ 
avpw καὶ IlapPévw καὶ Αἰγόκερῳ πάλιν τὴν 
αὐτὴν κατὰ ζῴδιον ἔχοντι διαίρεσιν ὁ μὲν τῆς 
Adpoditns πρῶτος, εἶθ᾽ 6 τοῦ Κρόνου, πάλιν καὶ 
6 τοῦ “Ἑρμοῦ, μετὰ ταῦτα δὲ ὁ τοῦ “Apews, 


1 τήν τε post αὐταρκῆ add. PNCam., τῆς re L, om. VMDE, 
τὴν ἀκολουθίαν A. 

2 zpos τε VMADE, τε om. PLNCam. 

3 τὴν ἀκολουθίαν VMDE. 

4 τινὰ VMADE (post δύνασθαι ME): om. PLNCam. 

56 τῶν Διδύμων VPLDProc., οἱ τ. 4. ME, ὁ τοῦ τρίτου 
NCam. 





1This method, as Bouché-Leclercq remarks (p. 210), is 
less ‘“‘optimistic’’ than the Egyptian or the Ptolemaic 
method, because it assigned to the maleficent planets a 
larger number of terms and more first places in the various 
signs. 

2The Paraphrase of Proclus, by connecting the ὥστε 


98 


TETRABIBLOS I. 21 


21. According to the Chaldaeans. 


The Chaldaean method! involves ἃ sequence, 
simple, to be sure, and more plausible, though not 
so self-sufficient with respect to the government of 
the triangles and the disposition of quantity, so 
that, nevertheless, one could easily understand 
them even without a diagram.” For in the first 
triplicity, Aries, Leo, and Sagittarius, which has with 
them the same division by signs as with the Egyp- 
tians, the lord of the triplicity, Jupiter,’ is the first 
to receive terms, then the lord of the next triangle, 
Venus, next the lord of the triangle of Gemini, 
Saturn, and Mercury, and finally the lord of the 
remaining triplicity, Mars. In the second triplicity, 
Taurus, Virgo, and Capricorn, which again has the 
same division by signs, Venus is first, then Saturn, 
and again Mercury, after these Mars, and finally 


clause solely with the expression οὐχ οὕτω δὲ αὐταρκὴ K.T.A., 
interprets this sentence to mean that because of the lack 
of self-sufficiency mentioned one cannot readily understand 
the Chaldaean system without a diagram. Against this 
view two considerations are to be urged: (1) the Chaldaean 
system actually is simplicity itself compared with those of 
the Egyptians and of Ptolemy; (2) the adversative μέντοι 
‘nevertheless,’ “‘in spite of all this’’) and the intrusive 
καί have no meaning in Proclus’ interpretation of the 
passage. The wore clause is really dependent upon all that 
precedes, not merely a portion of it. The anonymous 
commentator (p. 41, ed. Wolf) ayrees with the present 
interpretation. What Ptolemy misses in the Chaldaean 
system is the elaborate accompaniment of justifying 
reasons, dear to his heart even in a pseudo-science. 

3 The sun is the diurnal ruler of this triplicity (see c. 18), 
but no terms are assigned to the luminaries. Similarly the 
moon is disregarded in the second and fourth triangles. 


99 


PTOLEMY 


τελευταῖος δὲ ὁ τοῦ Aids σχεδὸν δὲ Kal ἐπὶ τῶν 
λοιπῶν δύο τριγώνων ἡ τάξις ἥδε συνορᾶται. τῶν 
μέντοι τοῦ αὐτοῦ τριγώνου δύο κυρίων, λέγω δὲ 
τοῦ τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ τοῦ τοῦ “Ἑρμοῦ, τὸ πρωτεῖον 
τῆς κατὰ τὸ οἰκεῖον τάξεως ἡμέρας μὲν ὁ τοῦ 
Kpovov λαμβάνει, νυκτὸς δὲ ὁ τοῦ “Ἑρμοῦ. καὶ ἡ 
καθ᾽ ἕκαστον δὲ ποσότης ἁπλῆ τις οὖσα τυγχάνει. 
ἵνα γὰρ καθ᾽ ὑπόβασιν τῆς τῶν πρωτείων τάξεως 
καὶ ἡ ποσότης τῶν ἑκάστου ὁρίων μιᾷ μοίρᾳ 
λείπηται τῆς προτεταγμένης, τῷ μὲν πρώτῳ 
πάντοτε διδόασι μοίρας η΄, τῷ δὲ δευτέρῳ ζ΄, τῷ 
δὲ τρίτῳ ς΄, τῷ δὲ τετάρτῳ ε΄, τῷ δὲ τελευταίῳ 
δ΄, συμπληρουμένων οὕτω τῶν κατὰ τὸ ζῴδιον 2’ 
μοιρῶν. συνάγονται δὲ καὶ ἐκ τούτων τοῦ μὲν 
Κρόνου μοῖραι ἡμέρας μὲν οη΄, νυκτὸς δὲ ἕς"- 
τοῦ δὲ Διὸς of’: τοῦ δὲ “Apews E80’: τῆς δὲ 
Adpodiztns οε΄. τοῦ δὲ “Ἑρμοῦ ἡμέρας μὲν Es’, 
νυκτὸς δὲ οη΄. γίνονται μοῖραι TE’. 
Τούτων μὲν οὖν τῶν ὁρίων ἀξιοπιστότερα, ὡς 
41 ἔφαμεν, τυγχάνει ' τὰ κατὰ τὸν Αἰγυπτιακὸν τρόπον 
καὶ διὰ τὸ τὴν συναγωγὴν αὐτῶν παρὰ τοῖς Αἰγυπ- 
τίοις συγγραφεῦσιν ὡς χρησίμην ἀναγραφῆς 
ἠξιῶσθαι καὶ διὰ τὸ συμφωνεῖν αὐτοῖς ὡς ἐπὶ πᾶν 
τὰς μοίρας τῶν ὁρίων ταῖς κατατεταγμέναις ὑπ᾽ 
αὐτῶν παραδειγματικαῖς γενέσεσιν. αὐτῶν μέντοι 
τούτων τῶν συγγραφέων μηδαμῆ τὴν σύνταξιν 
αὐτῶν μηδὲ τὸν ἀριθμὸν ἐμφανισάντων, ὕποπτον ἂν 
lois ἔφαμεν τυγχάνει VPLNAD, φαμεν τυγχάνειν ME, om. 
Cam. 


100 


TETRABIBLOS I. 21 


Jupiter. This arrangement in general is observed 
also in the remaining two triplicities.1 Of the two 
lords of the same triplicity, however, Saturn and 
Mercury, by day” Saturn takes the first place in the 
order of ownership, by night Mercury. The number 
assigned to each is alsoasimple matter. For in order 
that the number of terms of each planet may be less 
by one degree than the preceding, to correspond with 
the descending order in which first place is assigned, 
they always assign 8° to the first, 7° to the second, 6° 
to the third, 5° to the fourth, and 4° to the last; thus 
the 30° of asignis madeup. The sum of the number 
of degrees thus assigned to Saturn is 78 by day and 
66 by night, to Jupiter 72, to Mars 69, to Venus 75, 
to Mercury 66 by day and 78 by night; the total is 
360 degrees. 

Now of these terms those which are constituted 
by the Egyptian method are, as we said, more worthy 
of credence, both because in the form in which they 
have been collected by the Egyptian writers they 
have for their utility been deemed worthy of record. 
and because for the most part the degrees of these 
terms are consistent with the nativities which have 
been recorded by them as examples. As these very 
writers, however, nowhere explain their arrangement 
or their number, their failure to agree in an account 


1.1.6. the order of the planets is always the same, but the 
leader (or pair of leaders, in the case of Saturn and Mercury) 
in one triangle is shifted to the last position when one comes 
to the next triangle. Hence, since the number of terms 
in each sign are also always 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, the Chaldaean 
system makes the assignment of terms exactly the same in 
the corresponding signs of each triangle. 

31.6. in a diurnal nativity. 


101 


PTOLEMY 


εἰκότως καὶ εὐδιάβλητον αὐτῶν γένοιτο τὸ περὶ THY 
τάξιν ἀνομόλογον. ἤδη μέντοι περιτετυχήκαμεν 
ἡμεῖς ἀντιγράφῳ παλαιῷ καὶ τὰ πολλὰ 5 διεφθαρ- 
μένῳ, περιέχοντι φυσικὸν καὶ σύμφωνον λόγον τῆς 
τάξεως καὶ τῆς ποσότητος αὐτῶν μετὰ τοῦ τάς τε 
τῶν προειρημένων ὃ γενέσεων μοιρογραφίας καὶ τὸν 
τῶν συναγωγῶν ἀριθμὸν σύμφωνον εὑρίσκεσθαι τῇ 
τῶν παλαιῶν ἀναγραφῇ. τὸ δὲ κατὰ λέξιν τοῦ 
βιβλίου πάνυ μακρὸν ἦν καὶ μετὰ περιττῆς ἀποδεί- 
ἕξεως, ἀδιάγνωστον 4 δὲ διὰ τὸ διεφθάρθαι," καὶ μόλις 
αὐτὴν τὴν τοῦ καθ᾽ ὅλου προαίρεσιν δυνάμενον 
ἡμῖν ὑποτυπῶσαι * καὶ ταῦτα συνεφοδιαζούσης καὶ 
τῆς αὐτῶν τῶν ὁρίων ἀναγραφῆς μᾶλλόν πως διὰ 
τὸ πρὸς τῷ τέλει τοῦ βιβλίου κατατετάχθαι δια- 
σεσωσμένης. ἔχει γοῦν ὁ τύπος τῆς ὅλης αὐτῶν 
48 ἐπιβολῆς τὸν τρόπον τοῦτον" ἐπὶ μὲν γὰρ τῆς 
τάξεως τῆς καθ᾽ ἕκαστον δωδεκατημόριον παρα- 
λαμβάνεται τά τε ὑψώματα καὶ τὰ τρίγωνα καὶ οἵ 
οἶκοι. καθ᾽ ὅλου μὲν γὰρ 6 μὲν β΄ τούτων ἔχων 
ἀστὴρ οἰκοδεσποτίας ὃ ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ ζῳδίῳ προ- 
τάττεται, κἂν κακοποιὸς ἢ: ὅπου δὲ τοῦτο οὐ 
συμβαίνει οἱ μὲν κακοποιοὶ πάντοτε ἔσχατοι 
τάττονται, πρῶτοι δὲ οἱ τοῦ ὑψώματος κύριοι, 
εἶτα οἱ τοῦ τριγώνου, εἶτα οἱ τοῦ οἴκου ἀκολούθως 


ι ἀνομόλογον VPLD, ἀνομολόγητον MAE, ἀνωμολόγητον Ν 
Cam. 

2 καὶ τὰ πολλὰ VMLAD, κατὰ πολλὰ PNECam. 

3 προειρημένων ME ; προγενομένων PLNCam. (πρω- Ρ, -γιν- 
L); om. A; τῶν γενέσεων προειρημένας μοιρ. VD. Li. 6-140m. 


Proc. 
4 ἀδιάγνωστον MAE, ἀδιάσωστον alii Cam. 


102 


TETRABIBLOS 1. 21 


of the system might well become an object of sus- 
picion and a subject for criticism. Recently, how- 
ever, we have come upon an ancient manuscript, 
much damaged, which contains a natural and con- 
sistent explanation of their order and number, and at 
the same time the degrees reported in the aforesaid 
nativities and the numbers given in the summations 
were found to agree with the tabulation of the 
ancients. The book was very lengthy in expression 
and excessive in demonstration, and its damaged state 
made it hard to read, so that I could barely gain 
an idea of its general purport; that too, in spite of 
the help offered by the tabulations of the terms, 
better preserved because they were placed at the end 
of the book.! At any rate the general scheme 
of assignment of the terms is as follows. For their 
arrangement within each sign, the exaltations, tri- 
plicities, and houses are taken into consideration. 
For, generally speaking, the star that has two ruler- 
ships of this sort in the same sign is placed first, even 
though it may be maleficent. But wherever this 
condition does not exist, the maleficent planets are 
always put last, and the lords of the exaltation first, 
the lords of the triplicity next, and then those of the 


4Ptolemy’s ancient manuscript, therefore, if it really 
existed, was probably in the form of a roll, for there the 
last pages would be protected. ‘The first and last pages of 
a codex would be liable to damage, since they would be 
outermost. 


ὃ διὰ τὸ διεφθάρθαι VMADE, καὶ διεφθάρθαι PL, καὶ διεφθαρ- 
μένον NCam. 
ὁ οἰκοδεσποτ(ε)ίας VMADEProc. ; om. alii. 


103 


PTOLEMY 


τῇ ἐφεξῆς τάξει τῶν ζῳδίων, πάλιν δὲ ἐφεξῆς οἱ 
ἀνὰ δύο ἔχοντες οἰκοδεσποτίας προταττόμενοι τοῦ 
a a , 
μίαν ἔχοντος ἐν TH αὐτῷ Cwdiw. ὁ μέντοι Kap- 
’ὔ A ες vA 4 wy «ε ’ὔ ‘A , 
κίνος καὶ ὁ Λέων οἶκοι ὄντες ἡλίου καὶ σελήνης, 
- > -“- 
ἐπεὶ οὐ δίδοται τοῖς φωσὶ ὅρια, ἀπονέμονται τοῖς 
~ > ~ ~ 
κακοποιοῖς διὰ τὸ ἐν TH τάξει πλεονεκτεῖσθαι, ὃ 
A Κι / ~ ~ "A e ὃ \ A ὔ ~ ~ 
μὲν Kapkivos τῷ τοῦ “Apews, ὁ δὲ Aéwv τῷ τοῦ 
/ > τ \ « 4 5 - « ε td 4 
Κρόνου, ἐν ois καὶ ἡ τάξις αὐτοῖς ἡ οἱκεία φυλάτ- 
~ / ~ ,ὔ 
τεται. ἐπὶ δὲ τῆς ποσότητος τῶν ὁρίων, ws μὲν 
μηδενὸς εὑρισκομένου κατὰ δύο τρόπους κυρίου 
” > > ~ ~ ,ὔ an“ 1 3 A > ~ 4 
ἤτοι ἐν αὐτῷ τῷ ζῳδίῳ ἢ καὶ ἐν τοῖς ἐφεξῆς μέχρι 
τεταρτημορίου, τοῖς μὲν ἀγαθοποιοῖς, τουτέστι τῷ 
~ A A A ~ nn "Ad OL ξ / δί- 
τε τοῦ Διὸς καὶ τῷ τῆς ροδίτης ἑκάστῳ, δί 
δονται μοῖραι ζ΄, τοῖς δὲ κακοποιοῖς, τουτέστι τῷ 
~ ~ ~ « 4 - ’ὔ 
τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως ἑκάστῳ μοῖραι εἴ, 
- ~ ~ ΕΣ - te 
τῷ δὲ τοῦ “Ἑρμοῦ ἐπικοίνῳ ὄντι μοῖραι ς΄, εἰς 
,ὔ ~ rw 1 > ‘A ὃ δὲ 90. , . ame ὃ v4 
συμπλήρωσιν τῶν λ΄. ἐπεὶ δὲ ἔχουσί τινες ἀεὶ δύο 
- / > 
λόγους, 6 yap τῆς ‘Adpodityns μόνος γίνεται οἶκο- 
49 δεσπότης τοῦ κατὰ τὸν Ταῦρον τριγώνου τῆς 
\ , 
σελήνης εἰς τὰ ὅρια μὴ παραλαμβανομένης, προσ- 
~ > 
δίδοται μὲν ἑκάστῳ τῶν οὕτως ἐχόντων ἄν TE ἐν 
“ ~ ~ ~ ,ὔ 
αὐτῷ τῷ ζῳδίῳ ἂν τε ἐν τοῖς ἐφεξῆς μέχρι τεταρ- 
a Ψ 
τημορίου μοῖρα μία, οἷς καὶ παρέκειντο στιγμαί. 
“- ~ ~ > A 
ἀφαιροῦνται δὲ at προστιθέμεναι τῆς διπλῆς ἀπὸ 
~ ~ ~ > ‘\ A A a3 > ‘ 
τῶν λοιπῶν καὶ μοναχῶν, ws ἐπὶ τὸ πολὺ δὲ ἀπὸ 
~ ~ A ~ ~ A A 
τοῦ τοῦ Κρόνου, εἶτα καὶ τοῦ τοῦ vos, διὰ τὸ 
1 Post λ' add. glossa in marg. codicis N et Cam.? εἴ ye μὴ 
ἔχουσί τινες δύο λόγους ; om. libri omnes et Proclus. 


104 


TETRABIBLOS I. 21 


house, following the order of the signs.1 And again 
in order, those that have two lordships each are pre- 
ferred to the one which has but one in the same 
sign. Since terms are not allotted to the luminaries, 
however, Cancer and Leo, the houses of the sun and 
moon, are assigned to the maleficent planets because 
they were deprived of their share in the order, Cancer 
to Mars and Leo to Saturn ;? in these the order ap- 
propriate to them is preserved. As for the number 
of the terms, when no star is found with two pre- 
rogatives, either in the sign itself or in those which 
follow it within the quadrant, there are assigned to 
each of the beneficent planets, that is, to Jupiter and 
Venus, 7°; to the maleficent, Saturn and Mars, 5° 
each ; and to Mercury, which is common, 6°; so that 
the totalis 30°. But since some always have two pre- 
rogatives—for Venus alone becomes the ruler of the 
triplicity of Taurus, since the moon does not par- 
ticipate in the terms—there is given to each one of 
those in such condition, whether it be in the same 
sign or in the following signs within the quadrant, 
one extra degree; these were marked with dots.® 
But the degrees added for double prerogatives are 
taken away from the others, which have but one, 
and, generally speaking, from Saturn and Jupiter 


1.7.6. in the order Aries, Taurus, Gemini, etc., which the 
Greeks called “the order of the following signs’? and 
regarded as proceeding to the left. 

* According to the anonymous commentator (p. 42, ed. 
Wolf), this is because Mars belongs to the nocturnal sect 
and Saturn to the diurnal, the leaders of which are, re- 
spectively, the moon and the sun. 

* In Ptolemy’s ancient manuscript ; so says the anony- 
mous commentator (p. 44, ed. Wolf). 


o 105 


PTOLEMY 


, > ~ ~ / ” \ \ ς 
βραδύτερον αὐτῶν τῆς κινήσεως. ἔστι δὲ καὶ ἡ 
τούτων τῶν ὁρίων ἔκθεσις τοιαύτη. 


1 Κριοῦ Ταύρου Διδύμων 
y x ἘΠ φ η΄ η΄ % rs iy 
ie a: % EAT te BL VIM ga OORK 
8 ζ Ka’ γ ζί κβ΄ φ { κ΄ 
See ein ΚΘΗ by Bie kor 6 Sean Kst 
h δ΄ λ΄ on. Se λ' h δ΄ λ' 

Καρκίνου Λέοντος Παρθένου 

yh Sain S ΟΜ ΡΟ ας 
ΣΡ Saas ᾧ nA As Be Mets ial 
3 @ κ΄ h a ιθ΄ ΩΓ ε΄ ιη΄ 
g Gi κξζί g κε΄ h SKS’ 
Dd iy, 2 cA δ é λ' ΓΙ Ὰ λ' 

Ζυγοῦ Σκορπίου Τοξότου 
bey Suet ves Sodd S50 nts), ΟΠ τα ier 
φ ε΄ ια΄ φ ζ΄ 1, (γ΄ 2 ΦΑΡΑ cy 
% ra ted 4 7 Ka’ ῷ e ιθ΄ 
NG) Ane 8 SM ede h ewe. 
SUBISS λ' h, ety λ' 8 εἰ ΡΨ 

Αἰγόκερω γΥδροχόου ᾿Ιχθύων 
eS ἘΠ hiyeiss 5: ? 7’ 
3 ς΄ ιβ' ᾧ τ op’ 2 ζ΄ ιδ΄ 
uy (ke ιθ΄ φ η΄ κ΄ 3 Ξ΄ κ΄ 
ΠΣ ΙΝ κεῖ OT 5 Sieh lace é ε΄ κεΐ 
4 ἘΠ λ' 3 ε΄ λ΄ b «ε΄ λ΄ 


1Tabulas quae in cod. Vat. gr. 1453 (Procli Para- 
phrasin continentis) inventae sunt sequor. Hae cum illis 
quae ab Camerario impressae sunt congruunt solis ll. 4-5 
sub Αἰγόκερω exceptis ubi ordo Camerarii est: ε΄, ἢ ς΄. 
Proclus autem non nullas notitias duplices habet, viz.: 
1. 4 sub Ταύρου, Ὁ β΄ aut δ΄; 1. 2 sub Καρκίνου ᾧ aut x, 


106 


TETRABIBLOS I. 21 


because of their slower motion. The tabulation ! of 
these terms is as follows :— 


Terms according to Ptolemy. 


Aries 146 28 37 ὅ ὃ h4 
Taurus 28 37 47 h2 $6 
Gemini 37 16 97 46 h4 
Cancer 36 Y7 37 97 53 
Leo γη0 57 h6 26 $5 
Virgo 37 26 Y5 h6 36 
Libra h6 φῦ 35 γ8 46 
Scorpio 46 97 ὃ 36 3 


Sagittarius Y8 26 35 h6 $5 
Capricornus 9 6 36 ΠῚ h6 4 ὃ 
Aquarius h6 36 28 γ ὃ 88 
Pisces 28 u6 36 a5 45) hb 


1 The Greek tables contain, under each sign, (1) the name 
of the planet, (2) the number of its terms in this sign, and 
(3) the cumulative totals of terms, up to the 30° of the sign. 
The third detail has been omitted in the English tables. 
The anonymous commentator (pp. 44—47, ed. Wolf) demon- 
strates in detail how the assignment of terms is made. 


1. 3 y% aut 3; 1. 3 sub Μέοντος ἢ aut 2; 1. 3 sub Ζυγοῦ 
¥ aut γ, «aut 7’, 1. 4 Ἢ aut ¥, η΄ aut ε΄; 1. 2 sub Lkopmiov 
9 aut 4, 2’ aut 7’, 1. 3 % aut 2, 7’ aut ¢’; 1. 4 sub 
Alyoxepw h aut 4,1. ὃ 3 aut hk; 1. 4 sub ᾿Ιχθύων 4 εἴ 
aut ¢’, 1. 5, kh ε' aut δ΄. 


107 


PTOLEMY 


«κβ.)» Περὶ τόπων καὶ μοιρῶνϊ 


Διεῖλον δέ τινες καὶ εἰς ἔτι τούτων λεπτομερέ- 
στερα τμήματα" τῆς οἰκοδεσποτίας, τόπους καὶ 
μοίρας ὀνομάσαντες, καὶ τόπον μὲν ὑποτιθέμενοι 
τὸ τοῦ δωδεκατημορίου δωδεκατημόριον, τουτέστι 

δ0 μοίρας β΄ ἥμισυ," καὶ διδόντες αὐτῶν τὴν κυρίαν 
τοῖς ἐφεξῆς ζῳδίοις. ἄλλοι δὲ καὶ κατ᾽ ἄλλας τινὰς 
ἀλόγους τάξεις, μοῖραν δὲ ἑκάστην πάλιν ἀπ᾽ 
ἀρχῆς ἑκάστῳ 5 διδόντες τῶν ἀστέρων ἀκολούθως 
τῇ τάξει τῶν Χαλδαϊκῶν ὁρίων. ταῦτα μὲν οὖν 
πιθανὸν καὶ οὐ φυσικὸν ἀλλὰ κενόδοξον ἔχοντα 
λόγον παρήσομεν. ἐκεῖνο δὲ ἐπιστάσεως ἀξιον 
τυγχάνον οὐ παραλείψομεν, ὅτι καὶ τὰς τῶν δωδε- 
κατημορίων ἀρχὰς ἀπὸ τῶν ἰσημερινῶν καὶ τῶν 
τροπικῶν σημείων εὔλογόν ἐστι ποιεῖσθαι, καὶ 
τῶν συγγραφέων τοῦτό πως ἐμφανισάντων, καὶ 
μάλιστα διότι τὰς φύσεις καὶ τὰς δυνάμεις καὶ τὰς 
συνοικειώσεις αὐτῶν ὁρῶμεν ἐκ τῶν προαποδε- 
δειγμένων ἀπὸ τῶν τροπικῶν καὶ ἰσημερινῶν ἀρχῶν 


1Post tabulas add. VMDProc. haec aut similia: γίνεται 
δὲ καὶ τούτων ἐκ τῆς ἐπισυνθέσεως Κρόνου μοῖραι νζ΄, Διὸς 08’, 
"Apews Es’, ᾿Αφροδίτης πβ΄, “Eppot os’: γίνονται τξ΄. Titulum 
habent VPLMADEProc.; om. NCam. 

5 τὰ τμήματα PLNCam. 

3 ἀρχόμενοι ἀπὸ τοῦ δωδεκατημορίου καθ᾽ ὅ ἐστιν ὃ ἀστὴρ add. 
NCam.; om. VPLMDEProc.; ἀρχόμενοι ἀπὸ τοῦ {{{|| καὶ 
διδόντες Α. 4 ἑκάστην VMADE, τῳ PLNCam. 

δ ἑκάστῳ VPLMADE, -ov NCam. 





1 After the tables and before this chapter-heading some 
of the MSS. have: “There result from the addition of 


108 


TETRABIBLOS I. 22 


22. Of Places and Degrees.} 


Some have made even finer divisions of rulership 
than these, using the terms “ places ” and “ degrees.” 
Defining “ place ” as the twelfth part of a sign, or 
24°, they 2 assign the domination over them to the 
signs in order. Others follow other illogical orders ; 
and again they assign each “ degree”’ from the 
beginning to each of the planets of each sign in 
accordance with the Chaldaean order of terms. 
These matters, as they have only plausible and not 
natural, but, rather, unfounded, arguments in their 
favour, we shall omit. The following, however, 
upon which it is worth while to dwell, we shall not 
pass by, namely, that it is reasonable to reckon the 
beginnings of the signs also from the equinoxes and 
solstices,* partly because the writers make this quite 
clear, and particularly because from our previous 
demonstrations we observe that their natures, powers, 
and familiarities take their cause from the solstitial 


these, of Saturn, 57°; of Jupiter, 79°; of Mars, 66°; of 
Venus, 82°; of Mercury, 76°; the total is 360°.” 

2 One MS. and the printed editions insert here, “‘ begin 
with the sign in which the star is and”’ ; cf. the critical note. 

3 That is, Ptolemy’s zodiac, made up of 12 divisions of 
30° each, measured on the ecliptic from one of the solstices 
or equinoxes, is entirely different from the zodiac made up 
of signs determined by the actual constellations. Because 
of the precession of the equinoxes the two by no means 
coincide ; and because the powers of the signs are derived 
from their relations to the solstitial and equinoctial points, 
says Ptolemy, the former definition of the zodiac is pre- 
ferable. Cf.cc. 10-11, and the distinction between solstitial, 
equinoctial, solid, and bicorporeal signs, as an example of 
what he means. 


109 


5 


— 


PTOLEMY 


καὶ οὐκ am ἄλλου τινὸς ἐχούσας ' τὴν αἰτίαν. 
ἄλλων μὲν γὰρ ἀρχῶν ὑποτιθεμένων ἢ μηκέτι 
συγχρῆσθαι ταῖς φύσεσιν αὐτῶν εἰς τὰς προτελέ- 
σεις ἀναγκασθησόμεθα ἢ συγχρώμενοι διαπίπτειν, 
παραβάντων καὶ ἀπαλλοτριωθέντων" τῶν τὰς 
δυνάμεις αὐτοῖς ἐμπεριποιησάντων τοῦ ζωδιακοῦ 
διαστημάτων. 


«κγ.) Περὶ προσώπων καὶ λαμπηνῶν 
\ ~ 
καὶ τῶν τοιούτων 


ς s ~ ~ 

Ai μὲν οὖν συνοικειώσεις τῶν ἀστέρων Kal τῶν 

δωδεκατημορίων σχεδὸν ἂν εἶεν τοσαῦται. λέγονται 

δὲ καὶ ἰδιοπρόσωποι μὲν ὅταν ἕκαστος αὐτῶν 
\ > \ / \ σ Ἃ \ / 

τὸν αὐτὸν διασώζῃ πρὸς ἥλιον ἢ καὶ σελήνην 

σχηματισμὸν ὅνπερ καὶ ὁ οἶκος αὐτοῦ πρὸς τοὺς 
᾽ ͵ ” e “ ς mle / , 

ἐκείνων οἴκους - οἷον ὅταν ὁ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης λόγου 

/ ~ ~ / 

ἕνεκεν é€dywvov ποιῇ πρὸς τὰ φῶτα διάστασιν, 
> \ \ “ \ ε / ” ‘ / 

ἀλλὰ πρὸς ἥλιον μὲν ἑσπέριος wy, πρὸς σελήνην 

δὲ ἑῶος, ἀκολούθως τοῖς ἐξ ἀρχῆς οἴκοις + λαμπή- 

> a 
vais δὲ ἐν ἰδίαις εἶναι καὶ θρόνοις καὶ τοῖς τοιούτοις 
ὅταν κατὰ δύο ἢ καὶ πλείους τῶν προεκτεθειμένων 
' ἔχοντας NCam. 


2 ἀπαλλοτριωθέντων VPLD. ἀλλοτριωθέντων MNAECam. 
(aAAw- Cam.). 


1 Just as, with the precession of the equinoxes, the fictive 
sign Aries is now almost entirely in Pisces. 

2 The scholiast on Ptolemy says that, in addition to the 
conditions laid down by Ptolemy, a planet, to be in proper 
face, must also be in its own house and must be in the 
necessary aspect with both the luminaries (not with one of 
them, as Ptolemy says). 


110 


TETRABIBLOS I. 22-23 


and equinoctial starting-places, and from no other 
source. For if other starting-places are assumed. we 
shall either be compelled no longer to use the natures 
of the signs for prognostications or, if we use them, to 
be in error, since the spaces of the zodiac which 
implant their powers in the planets would then pass 
over to others ! and become alienated. 


23. Of Faces, Chariots. and the Like. 


Such, then, are the natural affinities of the stars 
and the signs of the zodiac. The planets are said 
to be in their “ proper face”? when an individual 
planet keeps to the sun or moon the same aspect 
which its house has to their houses ; as, for example, 
when Venus is in sextile to the luminaries, provided 
that she is occidental] to the sun and oriental to the 
moon, in accordance with the original arrangement 
of their houses.? They are said to be in their own 
“chariots ” and “ thrones” 4 and the like when they 


3 Venus’ solar house, Libra, is sextile dexter (1.6. toward 
the west) to Leo, the sun’s house, and her lunar house, 
Taurus, is sextile sinister (7.e. toward the east) to the moon’s 
house, Cancer. 

‘Ptolemy pays little attention to the thrones and 
chariots, which were apparently, as Bouché-Leclercq 
(p. 244) asserts, not to his taste as a scientific astrologer. 
In the Michigan astrological roll (P. Mich. 149, col. 3A, 
22-34) the “‘ thrones’ are identified with the (astrological) 
exaltations and the depressions of the planets are called 
their “‘ prisons ᾿᾿ (φυλακαί) ; upon the thrones the planets 
have “royal power,” in their prisons they ‘‘ are abased 
and oppose their own powers.’ Sarapion (CCAG. viii. 
4, p. 228, 25, and p. 231, 13) and Balbillus (cbid., p. 237, 
8) use the word ἰδιοθρονεῖν. 


11 


52 


PTOLEMY 


τρόπων συνοικειούμενοι τυγχάνωσι τοῖς τόποις ἐν 
οἷς καταλαμβάνονται, τότε! μάλιστα τῆς δυνάμεως 
αὐτῶν αὐξανομένης πρὸς ἐνέργειαν διὰ τὸ ὅμοιον 
καὶ συμπρακτικὸν τῆς τῶν περιεχόντων δωδεκα- 
τημορίων ὁμοφυοῦς οἰκειότητος. 2 Χαίρειν δέ φασιν 
αὐτοὺς ὅταν κἂν μὴ πρὸς αὐτοὺς ἢ ἡ συνοικείωσις 
τῶν περιεχόντων ζῳδίων ἀλλὰ μέντοι πρὸς τοὺς τῶν 
αὐτῶν αἱρέσεων, ἐκ μακροῦ μᾶλλον οὕτω γινομένης 
τῆς συμπαθείας. κοινωνοῦσι δὲ ὅμως καὶ κατὰ τὸν 
αὐτὸν τρόπον τῆς ὁμοιότητος " “ὥσπερ ὅταν ἐν τοῖς 
ἠλλοτριωμένοις καὶ τῆς ἐναντίας αἱρέσεως τόποις 
καταλαμβάνωνται, πολὺ παραλύεται τὸ τῆς οἰκείας 
αὐτῶν δυνάμεως, ἄλλην τινὰ φύσιν μικτὴν ἀποτε- 
λούσης τῆς κατὰ τὸ ἀνόμοιον τῶν περιεχόντων 
ζῳδίων κράσεως. 


«κδ.». Περὶ συναφειῶν καὶ ἀπορροιῶν 
καὶ τῶν ἄλλων δυνάμεων 


\ > “ \ 4 A / a 

Kai καθ᾽ ὅλου δὲ συνάπτειν μὲν λέγονται τοῖς 

« ς ’ὔ > is \ « 
᾽ 

ἑπομένοις οἱ προηγούμενοι, ἀπερρυηκέναι δὲ οἱ 

ἑπόμενοι τῶν προηγουμένων, ἐφ᾽ ὅσον ἂν μὴ μακρὸν 

7) τὸ μεταξὺ αὐτῶν διάστημα. παραλαμβάνεται δὲ 


1 τότε yap ΜΝ AECam. ; yap om. VPLD. 
2 ἰδιοθρονεῖν Kat Δ ΕΣ λέγονται add. MNAECam.; om. 
VPLD. 


1 Vettius Valens uses this word several times in a broader 
sense than that of this definition. 

2.7.6. are more occidental. 

3 συνάπτειν, applicare (noun συναφή, applicatio) is used 
of planets which are on or are closely approaching the same 
meridian. κόλλησις is a similar term. ‘‘ Separation,’ 


112 


TETRABIBLOS I. 23-24 


happen to have familiarity in two or more of the afore- 
said ways with the places in which they are found ; for 
then their power is most increased in effectiveness 
by the similarity and co-operation of the kindred 
property of the signs which contain them. They say 
they “ rejoice 1 when, even though the containing 
signs have no familiarity with the stars themselves, 
nevertheless they have it with the stars of the same 
sect ; in this case the sympathy arises less directly. 
They share, however, in the similarity in the same 
way ; just as, on the contrary, when they are found 
in alien regions belonging to the opposite sect, a 
great part of their proper power is paralysed, because 
the temperament which arises from the dissimilarity 
of the signs produces a different and adulterated 
nature. 


24. Of Applications and Separations and the Other 


Powers. 


In general those which precede? are said to 
“apply ” * to those which follow, and those that 
follow to “be separated” from those that precede, 
when the interval between them is not great. Such 


ἀπόρροια, defluxio, on the contrary, refers to the movement 
apart of two bodies after “‘ application.’’ ἀπόρροια is also 
used by astrologers to designate the ‘‘ emanations ’”’ of the 
heavenly bodies which affect the earth and its inhabitants, 
as for example in Vettius Valens, p. 160, 6-7; 249, 3; 
270, 24 ff.; 330, 19 ff. 

4 Ashmand says this is generally understood to mean, 
when the heavenly bodies are within each other’s orbs 
(Saturn 10°, Jupiter 12°, Mars 7° 30’, sun 17°, Venus 8°, 
Mercury 7° 30’, moon 12° 30’). The anonymous com- 
mentator mentions 15° as the maximum distance (p. ὅδ], 
ed, Wolf). 


Ξ 113 


PTOLEMY 


TO τοιοῦτον ἐάν TE σωματικῶς ἐάν TE καὶ κατά τινα 
τῶν παραδεδομένων σχηματισμῶν συμβαίνῃ, πλὴν 
ὅτι γε πρὸς μὲν τὰς 60 αὐτῶν τῶν σωμάτων 
συναφὰς καὶ ἀπορροίας καὶ τὰ πλάτη παρατηρεῖν 
αὐτῶν χρήσιμον εἰς τὸ μόνας τὰς ἐπὶ τὰ αὐτὰ μέρη 
τοῦ διὰ μέσων εὑρισκομένας παρόδους παραδέχεσ- 
θαι. πρὸς δὲ τὰς διὰ τῶν συσχηματισμῶν | περιττόν 
ἐστι τὸ τοιοῦτον, πασῶν ἀεὶ τῶν ἀκτίνων ἐπὶ ταὐτά, 
τουτέστιν ἐπὶ τὸ κέντρον τῆς γῆς, φερομένων καὶ 
ὁμοίως πανταχόθεν συμβαλλουσῶν. 

Ἔκ δὴ τούτων ἁπάντων εὐσύνοπτον ὅτι τὸ μὲν 
ποιὸν ἑκάστου τῶν ἀστέρων ἐπισκεπτέον ἔκ τε τῆς 
ἰδίας αὐτῶν φυσικῆς ἰδιοτροπίας καὶ ἔτι τῆς τῶν 
περιεχόντων δωδεκατημορίων, ἢ καὶ τῆς τῶν πρός 
τε τὸν ἥλιον καὶ τὰς γωνίας σχηματισμῶν κατὰ 
τὸν ἐκτεθειμένον ἡμῖν περὶ πάντων τούτων τρόπον " 
τὴν δὲ δύναμιν πρῶτον μὲν ἐκ τοῦ ἤτοι ἀνατολικοὺς 
αὐτοὺς εἶναι καὶ προσθετικοὺς ταῖς ἰδίαις κινήσεσι, 


1 τὰς διὰ τῶν συσχηματισμῶν) τὸν γινόμενον σχηματισμὸν 


NCam. 


1 That is, when the planets themselves come to the same 
meridian, as opposed to the conjunction of one planet with 
the ray projected by another from the sextile, quartile, or 
trine aspect. 

? The ecliptic bisects the zodiac longitudinally. Planets, 

o “apply ’”’ in the “‘ bodily”? sense, must both be to the 
north, or the south, of it; that is, in the same latitude. 
Cf. the anonymous commentator (pp. 50-51, ed. Wolf). 

3 See the note on iii. 10 concerning the projection of rays 

(ἀκτινοβολία). To judge from the remarks of the anonymous 


114 


TETRABIBLOS I. 24 


a relation is taken to exist whether it happens by 
bodily conjunction ! or through one of the traditional 
aspects, except that with respect to the bodily ap- 
plications and separations of the heavenly bodies 
it is of use also to observe their latitudes, in order 
that only those passages may be accepted which are 
found to be on the same side of the ecliptic.2_ In 
the case of applications and separations by aspect, 
however, such a practice is superfluous, because all 
rays always fall and similarly converge from every 
direction upon the same point, that is, the centre of 
the earth.* 

From all this, then, it is easy to see that the quality 
of each of the stars must be examined with reference 
both to its own natural character and that also of the 
signs that include it, or likewise from the character of 
its aspects to the sun and the angles, in the manner 
which we have explained. Their power must be de- 
termined, in the first place, from the fact that they 
are either oriental and adding to their proper motion # 


commentator, the thought is that, while the rays of planets 
closely approaching each other but in different latitudes 
would miss each other, the rays of those in aspect in any 
case mingle at their common meeting-place, the centre of 
the earth. 

4 The theory of epicycles assigns to each planet at least 
one epicycle, on which it moves from west to east, while 
the centre of the epicycle likewise moves from west to east 
on the orbit, or deferent. Thus when the planet is in the 
outer semicircle of its epicycle (away from the earth) both 
motions will be in the same direction and the planet will 
be “ adding to its motion ’’ ; conversely on the inner semi- 
circle (toward the earth) the motion on the epicycle is in 
the opposite direction to that on the deferent and the 
apparent speed of the planet is diminished. 


115 


PTOLEMY 


΄ 4 ᾽ὔ ,ὔ > > / Ἅ 4 ‘ 
τότε yap μάλιστά εἰσιν ἰσχυροί: ἢ δυτικοὺς καὶ 
3 4 A 
ἀφαιρετικούς, τότε yap ἀσθενεστέραν ἔχουσι τὴν 
> uj >? ~ 
ἐνέργειαν * ἔπειτα Kal ἐκ τοῦ πως ἔχειν πρὸς TOV 
Ὁ A Ἃ > 
ὁρίζοντα, μεσουρανοῦντες μὲν yap ἢ ἐπιφερόμενοι 
τῷ μεσουρανήματι μάλιστά εἰσι δυναμικοί- δεύ- 
\@ rye] > ~ mee ψΨι > bal > 
τερον δὲ ὅταν ἐπ᾽ αὐτοῦ τοῦ ὁρίζοντος ὦσιν ἢ ἐπ- 
,ὕ \ ~ hid ? \ - 5 ~ 
αναφέρωνται, Kai μᾶλλον ὅταν ἐπὶ τοῦ ἀνατολικοῦ, 
e Cweet2 « \ ~ ~ Ἃ a” 
ἧττον δὲ ὅταν ὑπὸ γῆν μεσουρανῶσιν ἢ ἄλλως συ- 
/ A > / / A Ls \ 
σχηματίζωνται τῷ ἀνατέλλοντι τόπῳ * μὴ οὕτω δὲ 
, > 4 ~ 
ἔχοντες ἀδύναμοι παντελῶς τυγχάνουσιν. 


BIBAION Β' 
<a.> Προοίμιον 


Τὰ μὲν δὴ κυριώτερα τῶν πινακικῶς προεκτεθει- 
μένων νῦν εἰς τὴν τῶν κατὰ μέρος προρρήσεων 
ἐπίσκεψιν ὡς ἐν κεφαλαίοις μέχρι τοσούτων ἡμῖν 
ἐφοδευέσθω, συνάψωμεν δὲ ἤδη κατὰ τὸ ἑξῆς τῆς 
ἀκολουθίας τὰς καθ᾽ ἕκαστα τῶν εἰς τὸ δυνατὸν τῆς 
τοιαύτης προρρήσεως ἐμπιπτόντων πραγματείας, 
ἐχόμενοι πανταχῆ τῆς κατὰ τὸν φυσικὸν τρόπον 
ὑφηγήσεως. 

Εἰς δύο τοίνυν τὰ μέγιστα καὶ κυριώτατα μέρη 
διαιρουμένου τοῦ δι᾿ ἀστρονομίας προγνωστικοῦ, 
καὶ πρώτου μὲν ὄντος καὶ γενικωτέρου τοῦ καθ᾽ 


116 


TETRABIBLOS 1. 24—II. 1 


—for then they are most powerful—or occidental and 
diminishing in speed, for then their energy is weaker. 
Second, it is to be determined from their position 
relative to the horizon ; for they are most powerful 
when they are in mid-heaven or approaching it, 
and second when they are exactly on the horizon 
or in the succedent place ;! their power is greater 
when they are in the orient, and less when they cul- 
minate beneath the earth or are in some other aspect 
to the orient ; if they bear no aspect 5 at all to the 
orient they are entirely powerless. 


BOOK II. 
1. Introduction. 


Let it be considered that thus far we have furnished 
in brief the most important details of the tabular 
exposition needful for the inquiry into particular 
prognostications. Let us now addin proper sequence 
the procedures for dealing in detail with those matters 
which lie within the limits of possibility of this kind 
of prognostication, holding everywhere to the natural 
method of exposition. 

Since, then, prognostication by astronomical means 
is divided into two great and principal parts, and 
since the first and more universal is that which 


‘That is, the space of 30° (‘* place,”’ or ‘ house ᾽᾽) im- 
mediately following, or rising next after, the horoscopic 
sign (cf. ili. 10, p. 273). This place is called the ἐπαναφορά of 
the horoscope. 

* That is, if they are disjunct (cf. ο. 16). 


117 


PTOLEMY 


540Aa ἔθνη Kal χώρας Kai πόλεις λαμβανομένου, 6 


σι 


Jt 


καλεῖται καθολικόν, δευτέρου δὲ Kal εἰδικωτέρου 
τοῦ καθ᾽ ἕνα ἕκαστον τῶν ἀνθρώπων͵ ὃ καὶ αὐτὸ 
καλεῖται γενεθλιαλογικόν, προσήκειν ἡγούμεθα περὶ 
τοῦ καθολικοῦ πρῶτον ποιήσασθαι τὸν λόγον, ἐπει- 
δήπερ ταῦτα μὲν κατὰ μείζους καὶ ἰσχυροτέρας 
αἰτίας τρέπεσθαι πέφυκε μᾶλλον τῶν μερικῶς ἀπο- 
τελουμένων. ὑποπιπτουσῶν δὲ ἀεὶ τῶν ἀσθενεστέ- 
ρων φύσεων ταῖς δυνατωτέραις καὶ τῶν κατὰ μέρος 
ταῖς καθ᾽ ὅλου, παντάπασιν ἀναγκαῖον ἂν εἴη τοῖς 
προαιρουμένοις περὶ ἑνὸς ἑκάστου σκοπεῖν πολὺ πρό- 
τερον περὶ τῶν ὁλοσχερεστέρων περιειληφέναι. 

Καὶ αὐτῆς δὲ τῆς καθολικῆς ἐπισκέψεως τὸ μὲν 
πάλιν κατὰ χώρας ὅλας λαμβάνεται, τὸ δὲ κατὰ 
πόλεις. καὶ ἔτι τὸ μὲν κατὰ μείζους καὶ περι- 
οδικωτέρας περιστάσεις, οἷον πολέμων ἢ λιμῶν ἢ 
λοιμῶν ἢ σεισμῶν ἢ κατακλυσμῶν καὶ τῶν 
τοιούτων * τὸ δὲ κατὰ ἐλάττους καὶ καιρικωτέρας," 
οἷαί εἰσιν al τῶν ἐτησίων ὡρῶν καὶ κατὰ τὸ 
μᾶλλον καὶ ἧττον ἀλλοιώσεις, περί τε ἀνέσεις ἢ 
ἐπιτάσεις χειμώνων καὶ καυμάτων καὶ πνευμάτων 
εὐφορίας τε καὶ ἀφορίας καὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα. προ- 
ἡγεῖται δὲ καὶ τούτων εἰκότως ἑκατέρου τό τεῦ 
κατὰ χώρας ὅλας καὶ τὸ κατὰ μείζους περι- 
στάσεις διὰ τὴν αὐτὴν αἰτίαν τῇ προειρημένῃ " 

1 τὸ δὲ κατὰ χώρας καὶ κατὰ πόλεις NCam.Proc.; κατὰ χώρας 
καὶ om. libri alii. 

27) λιμῶν ἢ λοιμῶν VMD; καὶ λοιμ. καὶ Ay. Proc. ; ἢ λοιμ. 
ἢ λιμ. A; ἢ λοιμ. ἢ λοιμ. E, 7 λοιμῶν PLNCam. 


8 καιρικωτέρας VAD, καιριωτέρας MEX, cf. Proc. ; μικροτέρας 
PLNCam. 


118 





TETRABIBLOS II. 1 


relates to whole races, countries, and cities, which 
is called general, and the second and more specific 
is that which relates to individual men, which is 
ealled genethlialogical, we believe it fitting to treat 
first of the general division, because such matters 
are naturally swayed by greater and more power- 
ful causes than are particular events. And since 
weaker natures always yield to the stronger, and 
the particular always falls under the general,! it 
would by all means be necessary for those who 
purpose an inquiry about a single individual long 
before to have comprehended the more general 
considerations. 

Of the general inquiry itself, a part, again, is 
found to concern whole countries, and a part to 
concern cities;* and further, a part deals with the 
greater and more periodic conditions, such as wars, 
famines, pestilences, earthquakes, deluges, and the 
like; and another with the lesser and more oc- 
casional, as for example the changes in temperature ® 
in the seasons of the year, and the variations of the 
intensity of storms, heat, and winds, or of good 
and bad crops, and so on. But in each of these 
cases, as is reasonable, procedure by entire countries 
and by more important conditions is preferred, for the 
same reason as before. And since in the examination 

1 Of. i. 3. 

?Or, as the variant reading has it, “‘to concern both 


countries and cities.’’ See the er. n. 
3 Literally, “‘ variations of more and less.”’ 





47 εὐφορίας PLMNAECam, ἢ om. VD. 
5 σκοπεῖν ἢ τὸ λαμβάνεσθαι add. post τό re Cam.*, om. libri 
Carm.} 


119 


PTOLEMY 


πρὸς δὲ τὴν τούτων ἐπίσκεψιν μάλιστα παρα- 
λαμβανομένων δύο τούτων, τῆς τε τῶν δωδεκατη- 
μορίων τοῦ ζωδιακοῦ καὶ ἔτι τῆς τῶν ἀστέρων 
πρὸς ἕκαστα τῶν κλιμάτων συνοικειώσεως καὶ τῶν 
ἐν τοῖς οἰκείοις μέρεσι κατὰ καιροὺς γινομένων 
ἐπισημασιῶν, κατὰ μὲν τὰς συζυγίας ἡλίου καὶ 
σελήνης τῶν ἐκλειπτικῶν, κατὰ δὲ τὰς τῶν πλανω- 
μένων παρόδους τῶν περὶ τὰς ἀνατολὰς καὶ τοὺς 
στηριγμούς, προεκθησόμεθα τὸν τῶν εἰρημένων 
συμπαθειῶν φυσικὸν λόγον, ἅμα παριστάντες ἐξ 
ἐπιδρομῆς ' καὶ τὰς καθ᾽ ὅλα ἔθνη θεωρουμένας ὡς 
ἐπὶ πᾶν σωματικάς τε καὶ ἠθικὰς ἰδιοτροπίας, οὐκ 
ἀλλοτρίας τυγχανούσας τῆς τῶν συνοικειουμένων 
ἀστέρων τε καὶ δωδεκατημορίων φυσικῆς περιστά- 
σεως. 


<B.>» ITepi tv cal ora KrAipata? 
ἰδιωμάτων 


Τῶν τοίνυν ἐθνικῶν ἰδιωμάτων τὰ μὲν καθ᾽ 
ὅλους παραλλήλους καὶ γωνίας ὅλας διαιρεῖσθαι 
/ « A ~ \ \ \ / ~ / 
συμβέβηκε ὑπὸ τῆς πρὸς τὸν διὰ μέσων τῶν ζῳδίων 
κύκλον καὶ τὸν ἥλιον αὐτῶν σχέσεως. τῆς γὰρ 
καθ᾽ ἡμᾶς οἰκουμένης ἐν ἑνὶ τῶν βορείων τεταρ- 
τημορίων οὔσης, οἱ μὲν ὑπὸ τοὺς νοτιωτέρους 
/ / \ Ἁ > \ ~ > ~ 
παραλλήλους, λέγω δὲ τοὺς ἀπὸ τοῦ ἰσημερινοῦ 
1 ἐπιδρομῆς VPLNDE, ὑποδρομῆς MA, περιδρομῆς Cam. 
2 κλίματα VPLMADProce., ἔθνη NCam.; tit. om. E. 
120 


TETRABIBLOS II. 1-2 


of these questions these two things particularly 
are taken into consideration, the familiarity of the 
signs of the zodiac and also of the stars with the 
several climes,’ and the significances of heavenly 
bodies in their own proper regions 2 at a given time, 
manifested through the ecliptical conjunctions of 
the sun and moon and the transits 3 of the planets 
at rising and at their stationary periods, we shall 
first explain the natural reason for the aforesaid 
sympathies, and at the same time briefly survey the 
bodily and ethical peculiarities generally observed 
to belong to whole nations, which are not alien to 
the natural character of the stars and signs that are 
familiar to them. 


2. Of the Characteristics of the Inhabitants of the 
General Climes. 


The demarcation of national characteristics 5. is 
established in part by entire parallels and angles,° 
through their position relative to the ecliptic and 
the sun. For while the region which we inhabit is in 
one of the northern quarters, the people who live 
under the more southern parallels, that is, those 


1 Latitudes, or general regions determined by latitude. 

2 Such as houses (i. 17) or terms (i. 20-21). 

5 πάροδοι ; the passage of a heavenly body through the 
zodiac. 

4 In the astrological ethnography which follows Ptolemy 
probably depends upon the Stoic Posidonius. Boll, 
Studien, pp. 181-238, enumerates many details in which, 
for this reason, Ptolemy here diverges from views expressed 
in the Geography. 

5“ Parallels’’ relate to latitude, 7.e. position north or 
south; “angles’’ to position east or west. 


121 


PTOLEMY 


μέχρι τοῦ θερινοῦ τροπικοῦ, κατὰ κορυφὴν Aap- 
56 βανόντες τὸν ἥλιον καὶ διακαιόμενοι, μέλανες τὰ 
σώματα καὶ τὰς τρίχας οὖλοί τε καὶ δασεῖς καὶ 
τὰς μορφὰς συνεσπασμένοι καὶ τὰ μεγέθη συν- 
τετηγμένοι καὶ τὰς φύσεις θερμοὶ καὶ τοῖς ἤθεσιν 
ὡς ἐπὶ πᾶν ἄγριοι τυγχάνουσι διὰ τὴν ὑπὸ καύματος 
συνέχειαν τῶν οἰκήσεων, οὗς δὴ καλοῦμεν κοινῶς } 
Αἰθίοπας. καὶ οὐ μόνον αὐτοὺς ὁρῶμεν οὕτως 
ἔχοντας ἀλλὰ καὶ τὸ περιέχον αὐτοὺς τοῦ ἀέρος 
κατάστημα καὶ τὰ ἄλλα ζῷα καὶ τὰ φυτὰ παρ᾽ 
αὐτοῖς ἐμφανίζοντα τὴν διαπύρωσιν.5 

Οἱ δὲ ὑπὸ τοὺς βορειοτέρους παραλλήλους, λέγω 
δὲ τοὺς ὑπὸ τὰς ἄρκτους τὸν κατὰ κορυφὴν ἔχοντες 
τόπον, πολὺ τοῦ ζωδιακοῦ καὶ τῆς τοῦ ἡλίου θερ- 
μότητος ἀφεστῶτες, κατεψυγμένοι μέν εἰσι διὰ 
τοῦτο, δαψιλεστέρας δὲ μεταλαμβάνοντες τῆς 
ὑγρᾶς οὐσίας, θρεπτικωτάτης οὔσης καὶ ὑπὸ μηδενὸς 
ἀναπινομένης "θερμοῦ, λευκοί τε τὰ χρώματά εἰσι 
καὶ τετανοὶ τὰς τρίχας τά τε σώματα μεγάλοι καὶ 
εὐτραφεῖς τοῖς μεγέθεσι καὶ ὑπόψυχροι τὰς φύσεις, 
ἄγριοι δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ τοῖς ἤθεσι διὰ τὴν ὑπὸ τοῦ 
κρύους συνέχειαν τῶν οἰκήσεων. ἀκολουθεῖ δὲ 
τούτοις καὶ ὁ τοῦ περιέχοντος αὐτοὺς ἀέρος χειμὼν 
καὶ τῶν φυτῶν τὰ μεγέθη καὶ τὸ δυσήμερον τῶν 
ζῴων. καλοῦμεν δὲ καὶ τούτους ὡς ἐπὶ πᾶν Σκύθας. 

Oi δὲ μεταξὺ τοῦ θερινοῦ τροπικοῦ καὶ τῶν 
ἄρκτων, μήτε κατὰ κορυφὴν γινομένου παρ᾽ αὐτοῖς 

1 κοιῶς VMADEProc., om. alii Cam. 


2 διαπύρωσιν VDP(-mp-)L(-mov-), τὸ διάπυρον Proc., διάθεσιν 
MNAECam. 


122 


TETRABIBLOS II. 2 


from the equator to the summer tropic, since they 
have the sun over their heads and are burned by it, 
have black skins and thick, woolly hair, are con- 
tracted in form and shrunken in stature, are sanguine 
of nature, and in habits are for the most part savage 
because their homes are continually oppressed by 
heat ; we call them by the general name Ethiopians. 
Not only do we see them in this condition, but we 
likewise observe that their climate and the animals 
and plants of their region plainly give evidence of 
this baking by the sun. 

Those who live under the more northern parallels, 
those, I mean, who have the Bears over their heads, 
since they are far removed from the zodiac and the 
heat of the sun, are therefore cooled; but because 
they have a richer share of moisture, which is most 
nourishing and is not there exhausted by heat, 
they are white in complexion, straight-haired, tall and 
well-nourished, and somewhat cold by nature; these 
too are savage in their habits because their dwelling- 
places are continually cold. The wintry character 
of their climate, the size of their plants, and the 
wildness of their animals are in accord with these 
qualities. We call these men, too, by a general 
name, Scythians. 

The inhabitants of the region between the summer 
tropic and the Bears, however, since the sun is 


3 ἀφεστῶτες VD, -τα A, διεστηκότες NLCam., διεστηκῶτες P, 
-κότα ME; οἷ. ἀπέχει Proc. 
4 δαψιλεστέρας VMDE, -pws LNACam., δαψηλέσταιρος. 
123 


PTOLEMY 


δ] τοῦ ἡλίου μήτε πολὺ κατὰ Tas μεσημβρινὰς παρ- 
ὅδους ἀφισταμένου, τῆς τε τῶν ἀέρων εὐκρασίας 
μετειλήφασι, καὶ αὐτῆς μὲν διαφερούσης ἀλλ᾽ οὐ 
σφόδρα μεγάλην τὴν παραλλαγὴν τῶν καυμάτων 
πρὸς τὰ ψύχη λαμβανούσης. ἔνθεν τοῖς χρώμασι 
μέσοι καὶ τοῖς μεγέθεσι μέτριοι καὶ ταῖς φύσεσιν 
εὔκρατοι καὶ ταῖς οἰκήσεσι συνεχεῖς καὶ τοῖς ἤθεσιν 
ἥμεροι τυγχάνουσι. τούτων δὲ οὗ πρὸς νότον ὡς 
ἐπὶ πᾶν ἀγχινούστεροι καὶ εὐμήχανοι μᾶλλον καὶ 
περὶ τὴν τῶν θείων ἱστορίαν ἱκανώτεροι διὰ τὸ 
συνεγγίζειν αὐτῶν τὸν κατὰ κορυφὴν τόπον τοῦ 
ζωδιακοῦ καὶ τῶν περὶ αὐτὸν πλανωμένων ἀστέρων," 
οἷς οἰκείως καὶ αὐτοὶ τὰς ψυχικὰς κινήσεις εὐεπη- 
βόλους 2 τε ἔχουσι καὶ διερευνητικὰς καὶ τῶν ἰδίως 
καλουμένων μαθημάτων περιοδευτικάς. καὶ τούτων 
δὲ πάλιν οἱ μὲν πρὸς ἕω μᾶλλόν εἰσιν ἠρρενωμένοι καὶ 
εὔτονοι τὰς ψυχὰς ὃ καὶ πάντα ἐκφαίνοντες, ἐπειδὴ 
τὰς ἀνατολὰς av τις εἰκότως τῆς ἡλιακῆς φύσεως 
ὑπολάβοι" καὶ τὸ μέρος ἐκεῖνο ἡμερινόν τε καὶ 
ἀρρενικὸν καὶ δεξιόν, καθ᾽ ὃ κἀν τοῖς ζῴοις ὁρῶμεν 
τὰ δεξιὰ μέρη μᾶλλον ἐπιτηδειότητα ἔχοντα πρὸς 
ἰσχὺν καὶ εὐτονίαν. οἱ δὲ πρὸς ἑσπέραν τεθηλυσ- 
μένοι μᾶλλόν εἰσι καὶ τὰς ψυχὰς ἁπαλώτεροι καὶ 
τὰ πολλὰ κρύπτοντες, ἐπειδὴ πάλιν τοῦτο τὸ μέρος 

δδ σεληνιακὸν τυγχάνει, πάντοτε τῆς σελήνης τὰς 

17 ζωδιακῷ καὶ τοῖς πλανωμένοις περὶ αὐτὸν ἀστράσιν NCam, 
2 εὐεπιβούλους VPLD. 


ὃ ταῖς ψυχαῖς PLNCam. 
4 διὰ τοῦτο post ὑπολάβοι add. NACam. 


124 


TETRABIBLOS II. 2 


neither directly over their heads nor far distant at 
its noon-day transits, share in the equable tem- 
perature of the air, which varies, to be sure, but has 
no violent changes from heat to cold. They are 
therefore medium in colouring, of moderate stature, 
in nature equable, live close together, and are 
civilized in their habits. The southernmost of them! 
are in general more shrewd and inventive, and better 
versed in the knowledge of things divine because 
their zenith is close to the zodiac and to the planets 
revolving about it. Through this affinity the men 
themselves are characterized by an activity of the soul 
which is sagacious, investigative, and fitted for pursu- 
ing the sciences specifically called mathematical. Of 
them, again, the eastern group are more masculine, 
vigorous of soul, and frank in all things,” because one 
would reasonably assume that the orient partakes 
of the nature of the sun.? This region therefore 
is diurnal, masculine, and right-handed, even as 
we observe that among the animals too their 
right-hand parts are better fitted for strength and 
vigour. Those to the west are more feminine, 
softer of soul, and secretive, because this region, 
again, is lunar, for it is always in the west that the 


'The anonymous commentator (p. ὅθ, ed. Wolf) says 
that he means the Egyptians and the Chaldaeans, and is 
referring to the fact that they discovered astrology. 

This phrase (πάντα ἐκφαίνοντες) is contrasted with ra 
πολλὰ κρύπτοντες, below. The anonymous commentator 
says that some understood it to refer to the freedom of 
speech of the eastern group; others, to their gift of 
felicitous expression. 

80. i. 6; not only the sun, but also the oriental 
quadrant, is masculine. 


125 


PTOLEMY 
/ > r \ \ 1 3 \ "ὃ , > ‘ 
πρώτας ἐπιτολὰς Kal! ἀπὸ συνόδου φαντασίας ἀπὸ 
A ~ a 
λιβὸς ποιουμένης. διὰ δὴ τοῦτο νυκτερινὸν δοκεῖ 
/ \ 2 \ o) ae, > / ~ 
κλίμα θηλυκὸν 5 καὶ εὐώνυμον ἀντικειμένως τῷ 
ἀνατολικῷ. 
Μ , \ > ε i) ΄ ~ Ὁ 
δὴ δέ τινες καὶ ἐν ἑκάστοις τούτοις τῶν ὅλων 
μερῶν 8 ἰδιότροποι περιστάσεις ἠθῶν καὶ νομίμων 
φυσικῶς ἐξηκολούθησαν. ὥσπερ γὰρ ἐπὶ τῶν τοῦ 
/ A “- 
περιέχοντος καταστημάτων καὶ ἐν τοῖς 4 ὡς ἐπὶ πᾶν 
aA ” a Ἅ ΄ὔ 
κατειλεγμένοις θερμοῖς ἢ ψυχροῖς ἢ εὐκράτοις καὶ 
/ ~ ~ 
κατὰ μέρος ἰδιάζουσι τόποι καὶ χῶραί τινες ἐν τῷ 
“΄“" Ἃ Ἐν » A 0 /, 4é n” “ a 
μᾶλλον ἢ ἧττον ἤτοι διὰ θέσεως τάξιν ἢ ὕψος ἢ 
ταπεινότητα ἢ διὰ παράθεσιν : ἔτι δὲ ὡς ἱππικοί 
τινες μᾶλλον διὰ τὸ τῆς χώρας πεδινόν, καὶ ναυτικοὶ 
~ \ 
διὰ τὴν τῆς θαλάττης ἐγγύτητα, καὶ ἥμεροι διὰ τὴν 
τῆς χώρας εὐθηνίαν, οὕτω καὶ ἐκ τῆς πρὸς τοὺς 
ἀστέρας κατὰ τὰ δωδεκατημόρια φυσικῆς τῶν κατὰ 
μέρος κλιμάτων ὃ συνοικειώσεως ἰδιοτρόπους ἄν τις 
τ 3 lol 
εὕροι φύσεις Tap ἑκάστοις, καὶ αὐτὰς δὲ ὡς ἐπὶ πᾶν 
οὐχ ὡς καὶ καθ᾽ ἕνα ἕκαστον πάντως ἐνυπαρχούσας. 
A > re ie) 
ἀναγκαῖον οὖν ἐφ᾽ ὧν ἂν εἴη χρήσιμον πρὸς τὰς 
A / b ,ὔ Ἃ ὃ ~ 9) AO ~ 6 
κατὰ μέρος ἐπισκέψεις κεφαλαιωδῶς ἐπελθεῖν. 


1 καὶ om. NAECam. 

2 κλίμα θηλυκὸν om. Cam. 

ὃ ὅλων μερῶν VMADHE, δώδεκα μερῶν PL, δωδεκατημορίων 
NCam. 

4 τοῖς VD, αὐτοῖς PMNAECam., om. L. 

5 κλιμάτων VLMADE, λημμάτων PNCam. 

ὃ Post ἐπελθεῖν capitis titulum habent VMADProc. 


126 


TETRABIBLOS II. 2 


moon emerges and makes its appearance after con- 
junction. For this reason it appears to be a nocturnal 
clime, feminine, and, in contrast with the orient, left- 
handed. 

And now in each of these general regions certain 
special conditions of character and customs! natur- 
ally ensue. For as likewise, in the case of the 
climate, even within the regions that in general are 
reckoned as hot, cold, or temperate, certain localities 
and countries have special peculiarities of excess or 
deficiency by reason of their situation, height, low- 
ness, or adjacency ; and again, as some peoples are 
more inclined to horsemanship because theirs is a 
plain country, or to seamanship because they live 
close to the sea, or to civilization because of the 
richness of their soil, so also would one discover special 
traits in each arising from the natural familiarity 
of their particular climes with the stars in the signs 
of the zodiac. These traits, too, would be found 
generally present, but not in every individual. We 
must, then, deal with the subject summarily, in so far 
as it might be of use for the purpose of particular 
investigations. 


11... variations from the norma! or general char- 
acteristics of the whole region. 


PTOLEMY 


iF \ ~ ~ ~ ‘ \ [4 
<y.> Περὶ ΤῊ" τῶν χώρων TPOS TA TPt- 
/ 
ywva καὶ τοὺς ἀστέρας συνοικειώσεως 


Τεττάρων δὴ τριγωνικῶν σχημάτων ἐν τῷ 
59 ζωδιακῷ θεωρουμένων, ὡς δέδεικται διὰ τῶν ἔμ- 
[2 - [2 ‘ Ν \ ‘ \ / 
προσθεν ἡμῖν, ὅτι TO μὲν κατὰ Κριὸν καὶ Λέοντα 
\ f /, 7 > \ > 
καὶ Τοξότην βορρολυβυκόν τέ ἐστι καὶ οἰκοδεσπο- 
τεῖται μὲν προηγουμένως ὑπὸ τοῦ τοῦ Διὸς διὰ 
τὸ βόρειον, συνοικοδεσποτεῖται δὲ καὶ ὑπὸ τοῦ 
Ἄρεως διὰ τὸ λιβυκόν: τὸ δὲ κατὰ τὸν Ταῦρον 
\ ‘\ , \ \ > , 
καὶ τὴν Παρθένον καὶ τὸν Αἰγόκερων νοταπηλι- 
ωὠτικόν τέ ἐστι καὶ οἰκοδεσποτεῖται πάλιν προ- 
’ὔ \ ΙΘ. ‘ ~ ~ > / ‘A A / 
ηγουμένως μὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ τῆς ᾿Αφροδίτης διὰ TO νότιον, 
συνοικοδεσποτεῖται δὲ ὑπὸ τοῦ Κρόνου διὰ τὸ 
5 / ‘ A ‘A \ / \ ἡ 
ἀπηλιωτικόν " τὸ δὲ κατὰ τοὺς Διδύμους καὶ τὰς 
\ ‘ 4 “VS ,ὔ λ ’, ᾽ὔ 
Χηλὰς καὶ τὸν ροχόον βορραπηλιωτικόν τέ 
ἐστι καὶ οἰκοδεσποτεῖται προηγουμένως μὲν ὑπὸ 
τοῦ Κρόνου διὰ τὸ ἀπηλιωτικόν, συνοικοδεσποτεῖται 
\ ε \ ~ A ‘A ‘ ’ A \ ‘A εὖ 
δὲ ὑπὸ τοῦ Διὸς διὰ τὸ βόρειον τὸ δὲ κατὰ τὸν 
Καρκίνον καὶ τὸν Σκορπίον καὶ τοὺς ἰχθῦς νοτο- 
λιβυκόν τέ ἐστι καὶ οἰκοδεσποτεῖται προηγουμένως 
μὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ τοῦ "Apews διὰ τὸ λιβυκόν, συνοικο- 
- \ ¢ ‘ ~ ~ > /, A ‘ 
δεσποτεῖται δὲ ὑπὸ τοῦ τῆς Adpoditns διὰ τὸ 
νότιον--- 
4 A a > ; , ~ 
Τούτων δὲ οὕτως ἐχόντων διαιρουμένης τε τῆς 
καθ᾽ ἡμᾶς οἰκουμένης εἰς τέτταρα τεταρτημόρια, 
τοῖς τριγώνοις ἰσάριθμα, κατὰ μὲν πλάτος ὑπό τε 
~ > « ~ / > | ~ € / 
τῆς Kal? ἡμᾶς θαλάττης ἀπὸ τοῦ ᾿Ηρακλείου 
~ a? ~ - ~ 
πορθμοῦ μέχρι τοῦ ᾿Ϊσσικοῦ κόλπου Kai τῆς ἐφεξῆς 
128 


TETRABIBLOS II. 3 


3. Of the Familiarities between Countries and the 
Triplicities and Stars. 


Now of the four triangular formations recognized 
in the zodiac, as we have shown above,! the one which 
consists of Aries, Leo, and Sagittarius is north- 
western, and is chiefly dominated by Jupiter on 
account of the north wind, but Mars joins in its 
government because of the south-west wind. That 
which is made up of Taurus, Virgo, and Capricornus 
is south-eastern, and again is governed primarily 
by Venus on account of the south wind, but con- 
jointly by Saturn because of the east wind. The 
one consisting of Gemini, Libra, and Aquarius is 
north-eastern and is governed primarily by Saturn 
because of the east wind, and conjointly by Jupiter 
because of the north wind. The triangle of Cancer, 
Scorpio, and Pisces is south-western and is governed 
primarily, because of the west wind, by Mars, who is 
joined by Venus as co-ruler on account of the south 
wind. 

As this is so, and since our inhabited world is 
divided into four quarters,” equal in number to the 
triangles, and is divided latitudinally by our sea 
from the Straits of Hercules * to the Gulf of Issus 
and the mountainous ridge adjacent on the east,' 

1 Of. i. 18. 

2Cardanus, p. 181, diagrammatically figures the ‘“ in- 
habited world’”’ as a trapezium, narrower at the top 
(north) than the bottom, and bounded by arcs; this is 
divided into quadrants by north-south and east-west lines. 
The ‘‘ parts closer to the centre’ are then marked off by 
lines joining the ends of the two latter, dividing each quad- 


rant and producing 4 right-angled triangles at the centre. 
3 Straits of Gibraltar. 4 Probably the Taurus range. 


129 


PTOLEMY 


A > r \ > ~ eZ 1 4ι. 4.9 Lal / 
πρὸς ἀνατολὰς ὀρεινῆς ῥάχεως, ὑφ᾽ ὧν χωρίζεται 
τό τε νότιον καὶ τὸ βόρειον αὐτῆς μέρος, κατὰ δὲ 
μῆκος ὑπὸ τοῦ Αραβικοῦ κόλπου, διὰ καὶ τοῦ 

> ~ 
60 Aliyaiov πελάγους καὶ Πόντου καὶ τῆς Μαιώτιδος 
, ΝΣ 
λίμνης, ὑφ᾽ ὧν χωρίζεται τό τε ἀπηλιωτικὸν καὶ 
τὸ λιβυκὸν μέρος, γίνεται τεταρτημόρια τέτταρα, 
σύμφωνα τῇ θέσει τῶν τριγώνων. ἕν μὲν πρὸς 
βορρολίβα 3 τῆς ὅλης οἰκουμένης κείμενον, τὸ κατὰ 
\ / a“ A ~ > / ~ 
τὴν Κελτογαλατίαν, 6 δὴ κοινῶς Εὐρώπην καλοῦμεν - 
τούτῳ δὲ ἀντικείμενον καὶ πρὸς τὸν νοταπηλιώτην 
‘ A \ wit. He} / “a \ ~ / 
TO κατὰ τὴν EWaV Αἱ ιοπιαν, O δὴ Τῆς μεγάλης 
“A U / / Ἃ - \ / \ \ 
σίας νότιον μέρος av καλοῖτο - καὶ πάλιν τὸ μὲν 
πρὸς βορραπηλιώτην τῆς ὅλης οἰκουμένης τὸ κατὰ 
τὴν Σκυθίαν, ὃ δὴ καὶ αὐτὸ βόρειον μέρος τῆς με- 
γάλης ᾿Ασίας γίνεται: τὸ δὲ ἀντικείμενον τούτῳ 
καὶ πρὸς λιβόνοτον ἄνεμον τὸ κατὰ τὴν ἑσπερίαν 
> / “a ΝΜ ~ Λ ~ 
Αἰθιοπίαν, ὃ δὴ κοινῶς Λιβύην καλοῦμεν. 

ΠΙάλιν δὲ καὶ ἑκάστου τῶν προκειμένων τεταρτη- 
μορίων τὰ μὲν πρὸς τὸ μέσον μᾶλλον ἐσχηματισ- 
μένα τῆς ὅλης οἰκουμένης τὴν ἐναντίαν λαμβάνει 
θέσιν 3 πρὸς αὐτὸτὸ περιέχον τεταρτημορίον, ὥσπερ 4 
ἐκεῖνο πρὸς ὅλην τὴν οἰκουμένην, τοῦ τε κατὰ τὴν 
Εὐρώπην πρὸς βορρολίβα κειμένου τῆς ὅλης οἰκου- 
μένης τὰ περὶ τὸ μέσον αὐτοῦ καὶ ἀντιγώνια πρὸς 
νοταπηλιώτην τοῦ αὐτοῦ τεταρτημορίου τὴν θέσιν 
ἔχοντα φαίνεται. καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν ἄλλων ὁμοίως, ὡς 

1 ῥάχεως VMADE, ῥαχείας NCam., ῥαχαίας PL. 

2 Boppav καὶ λίβα NMECam. 

3 θέσιν VMADE, φύσιν PNCam., om. L. 

4 ὥσπερ VD, ἤπερ NCam., ἥνπερ PLMAE. ΟἿ. Proc.: ἐναν- 


τίως κεῖται πρὸς . . . . καθ᾽ ὥσπερ ἐκεῖνο. . . κεῖται κτλ. 


130 


TETRABIBLOS II. 3 


and by these its southern and northern portions are 
separated, and in longitude by the Arabian Gulf, the 
Aegean Sea, the Pontus,’ and the Lake Maeotis, 
whereby the eastern and western portions are 
separated, there arise four quarters, and these agree 
in position with the triangles. The first quarter lies 
in the north-west of the whole inhabited world ; it 
embraces Celtic Gaul? and we give it the general 
name Europe. Opposite this is the south-eastern 
quarter ; this includes eastern Ethiopia,® which would 
be called the southern part of Greater Asia. Again, 
the north-eastern quarter of the whole inhabited 
world is that which contains Scythia, which like- 
wise is the northern part of Greater Asia; and the 
quarter opposite this and toward the south-west 
wind, the quarter of western Ethiopia, is that which 
we call by the general term Libya. 

Again, of each of the aforesaid quarters the 
parts which are placed closer to the centre of the 
inhabited world are placed in a contrary fashion 
with respect to the surrounding quarters, just as are 
the latter in comparison with the whole world ; 
and since the European quarter lies in the north- 
west of the whole world, the parts about the centre, 
which are allied to the opposite angle, obviously are 
situated in the south-east part of the quarter. The 


1 The Pontus Euxinus, or Black Sea. The Lake Maeotis 
is the Sea of Azov. 

2 As opposed to Galatia in Asia Minor. 

3 The designation of India as “ Eastern Ethopia’’ is 
at variance with Ptolemy’s Geography, and a mark of the 
influence of Posidonius (Boll, Studien, pp. 211-212). The 
distinetion of two Ethiopias rests on the well-known 
Homeric passage, Odyssey, i. 22-24. 


131 


PTOLEMY 


ἐκ τούτων ἕκαστον τῶν τεταρτημορίων δυσὶ τοῖς 
ἀντικειμένοις τριγώνοις συνοικειοῦσθαι: τῶν μὲν 
ἄλλων μερῶν πρὸς τὴν καθ᾽ ὅλου πρόσνευσιν ἐφ- 
αρμοζομένων, τῶν δὲ περὶ τὸ μέσον πρὸς τὴν κατ᾽ 
αὐτὸ τὸ μέρος ἀντικειμένην συμπαραλαμβανομένων 
πρὸς τὴν οἰκείωσιν, καὶ τῶν ἐν τοῖς οἰκείοις 
τριγώνοις τὴν nin eee ἐχόντων ἀστέρων, ἐπὶ 
μὲν τῶν ἄλλων οἰκήσεων πάλιν αὐτῶν μόνων,' ἐπὶ 
δὲ τῶν περὶ τὸ μέσον τῆς οἰκουμένης κἀκείνων καὶ 
ἔτι τοῦ τοῦ “μοῦ διὰ τὸ μέσον καὶ κοινὸν αὐτὸν 
ὑπάρχειν τῶν αἱρέσεων. 

Ἔκ δὴ τῆς 5 τοιαύτης διατάξεως τὰ μὲν ἄλλα μέρη 
τοῦ πρώτου τῶν τεταρτημορίων, λέγω δὲ τοῦ κατὰ 
τὴν Εὐρώπην, πρὸς βορρολίβα κείμενα τῆς ὅλης 3 
οἰκουμένης, συνοικειοῦται μὲν τῷ βορρολιβυκῷ τρι- 
γώνῳ τῷ κατὰ τὸν Κριὸν καὶ A€ovta καὶ Τοξότην, 
οἰκοδεσποτεῖται δὲ εἰκότως ὑπὸ τῶν κυρίων τοῦ 
τριγώνου Διὸς καὶ Ἄρεως ἑσπερίων. ἔστι δὲ ταῦτα 
καθ᾽ ὅλα ἔθνη λαμβανόμενα Βρεττανία, Γαλατία, 
Γερμανία, Βασταρνία, ᾿Ιταλία, Γαλλία, ᾿Απουλία, 

1 μόνων VPLNE, -ov MADCam. 


2 ἐκ δὴ τῆς κτλ. VPLMADE;; cf. Proc.; ἐν δὲ τῇ κτλ. NCam. 
8 ὅλης VMADEProce. ; om. PLNCam. 


1Cardanus (p. 182) gives four reasons why Mercury 
governs these central portions; that he may have some 
dominion in the world; because the inhabitants of the 
central regions are more given to the arts and sciences, 
of which Mercury is the patron ; because they are addicted 
to commerce, likewise in Mercury’s field; and because 
Mercury’s nature lies midway between those of the other 
four planets. 

2 That Jupiter and Mars must be in the occidental 


132 


TETRABIBLOS II. 3 


same holds of the other quarters, so that each of 
them is related to two oppositely situated triangles ; 
for while the other parts are in harmony with the 
general inclination of the quarter, the portions at 
the centre [of the world] share in familiarity with 
the opposite inclination, and, again, of the stars that 
govern in their own triangles, in all the other 
domiciles they alone govern, but in the parts about 
the centre of the world likewise the other group, and 
Mercury besides,! because he is mid-way between 
and common to the two sects. 

Under this arrangement, the remainder of the 
first quarter, by which I mean the European quarter, 
situated in the north-west of the inhabited world, 
is in familiarity with the north-western triangle, 
Aries, Leo, and Sagittarius, and is governed, as one 
would expect, by the lords of the triangle, Jupiter 
and Mars, occidental.2 In terms of whole nations 
these parts consist of Britain, (Transalpine) Gaul, 
Germany, Bastarnia,’ Italy, (Cisalpine) Gaul, Apulia, 


position is an additional requirement which does not ap- 
pear in the original statement of the government of the 
triangles. Cardanus, p. 182, points out that in Ptolemy’s 
scheme Jupiter governs the whole north, Venus the south, 
Saturn the east, and Mars the west, but in the first quad- 
rant Mars and Jupiter dominate non simpliciter, sed occt- 
dentales, in the second, Saturn and Venus, not absolutely, 
but in oriental aspects, and so on. This, he says, is to 
display the variety of the customs of the nations, for a 
planet in oriental aspect is so different from the same planet 
occidental that practically it is two planets instead of one. 
8 The south-western part of Russia and southern Poland. 
Boll, op. cit., p. 197, n. 2, points out that Hephaestion, 
who follows Ptolemy closely, and Proclus do not mention 
Bastarnia, and that the name may not have been in 

Ptolemy’s original text. 
133 


PTOLEMY 


Σικελία, Tuppnvia, Κελτική, ‘Iomavia. εἰκότως 
δὲ τοῖς προκειμένοις ἔθνεσιν ὡς ἐπὶ πᾶν συνέπεσε, 
διά τε τὸ ἀρχικὸν τοῦ τριγώνου καὶ τοὺς συνοικο- 
δεσποτήσαντας ἀστέρας, ἀνυποτάκτοις 5 τε εἶναι καὶ 
φιλελευθέροις καὶ φιλόπλοις καὶ φιλοπόνοις καὶ 
πολεμικωτάτοις καὶ ἡγεμονικοῖς καὶ καθαροῖς καὶ 
μεγαλοψύχοις - διὰ μέντοι τὸν ἑσπέριον σχηματισ- 
μὸν Atos καὶ Ἄρεως, καὶ ἔτι διὰ τὸ τοῦ προκειμένου 
S2Tprywvov τὰ μὲν ἐμπρόσθια ἠρρενῶσθαι, τὰ δὲ 
ὀπίσθια τεθηλύσθαι, πρὸς μὲν τὰς γυναῖκας ἀζήλοις 
αὐτοῖς εἶναι συνέπεσε ἃ καὶ καταφρονητικοῖς τῶν 
ἀφροδισίων, πρὸς δὲ τὴν τῶν ἀρρένων συνουσίαν 
κατακορεστέροις τε καὶ μᾶλλον ζηλοτύποις " αὐτοῖς 
δὲ τοῖς διατιθεμένοις μήτε αἰσχρὸν ἡγεῖσθαι τὸ 
γινόμενον μήτε ὡς ἀληθῶς ἀνάνδροις διὰ τοῦτο καὶ 
μαλακοῖς ἀποβαίνειν, ἕνεκεν τοῦ μὴ παθητικῶς 
διατίθεσθαι, συντηρεῖν δὲ τὰς ψυχὰς ἐπάνδρους καὶ 
κοινωνικὰς καὶ πιστὰς καὶ φιλοικείους καὶ εὐεργε- 
τικάς. καὶ τούτων δὲ αὐτῶν τῶν χωρῶν Βρεττανία 
μὲν καὶ Γαλατία καὶ Γερμανία καὶ Βασταρνία 
μᾶλλον τῷ Kpid συνοικειοῦνται καὶ τῷ τοῦ 
Ἄρεως. ὅθεν ὡς ἐπὶ πᾶν οἱ ἐν αὐταῖς ἀγριώτεροι 
καὶ αὐθαδέστεροι καὶ θηριώδεις τυγχάνουσιν. 
᾿Ιταλία δὲ καὶ ᾿Απουλία, Γαλλία καὶ Σικελία τῷ 
Λέοντι καὶ τῷ ἡλίῳ διόπερ ἡγεμονικοὶ μᾶλλον 
1 συνέπεσε VADE, συνέπεται alii Cam. 


2 ἀνυποτάκτοις κτλ. VMADE, -ovs PLN Cam. 
8 συνέπεσε(ν) VADE, συνέπεται PLN, om. MCam. 





1 Tuscany. 
2 Probably western Spain (Boll, op. cit., p. 205). 


134 


TETRABIBLOS II. 3 


Sicily, Tyrrhenia,! Celtica,2 and Spain. As one 
might expect, it is the general characteristic of 
these nations, by reason of the predominance 
of the triangle and the stars which join in its 
government, to be independent, liberty-loving, fond 
of arms, industrious, very warlike, with qualities of 
leadership, cleanly, and magnanimous. However, 
because of the occidental aspect of Jupiter and 
Mars, and furthermore because the first parts of the 
aforesaid triangle are masculine and the latter parts 
feminine,® they are without passion for women‘ and 
look down upon the pleasures of love, but are better 
satisfied with and more desirous of association with 
men. And they do not regard the act as a disgrace to 
the paramour, nor indeed do they actually become 
effeminate and soft thereby, because their disposition 
is not perverted, but they retain in their souls man- 
liness, helpfulness, good faith, love of kinsmen, and 
benevolence. Of these same countries Britain, 
(Transalpine) Gaul, Germany, and Bastarnia are in 
closer familiarity with Aries and Mars. Therefore for 
the most part their inhabitants are fiercer, more head- 
strong, and bestial. But Italy, Apulia, (Cisalpine) 
Gaul, and Sicily have their familiarity with Leo and the 


Γαλατία is used to designate Gaul proper, between the 
Rhine and the Pyrenees, and Γαλλία for northern Italy. 

§ All the signs of this triangle are masculine ; ef. i. 17. 
Perhaps Ptolemy merely means that when Aries is rising 
Sagittarius will be occidental and therefore feminine ; 
so Ashmand. 

‘This preference of the northern barbarians is charged 
against them by Aristotle and following him by Posidonius, 
Diodorus, Strabo, Athenaeus, Sextus Empiricus and others ; 
ef. the instances collected by Bouché-Leclercq, p. 340, n. 2, 
and the discussion in Boll, Studien, pp. 207-208. 

135 


PTOLEMY 


οὗτοι καὶ evepyeTiKol καὶ κοινώνικοι. Tuppnvia 
\ \ \ wes / ~ / \ ~ 
δὲ καὶ Κελτικὴ καὶ “Ισπανία τῷ Τοξότῃ καὶ τῷ 
τοῦ Ais: ὅθεν τὸ φιλελεύθερον ' αὐτοῖς 5 καὶ τὸ 
ς ~ \ / A \ 2? P A 
ἁπλοῦν και τὸ φιλοκάθαρον. τὰ δὲ ἐν τούτῳ μὲν 
ὄντα τῷ τεταρτημορίῳ, περὶ δὲ τὸ μέσον ἐσχη- 
ματισμένα τῆς οἰκουμένης, Θρᾷκη τε καὶ Μακεδονία 
καὶ ᾿Ϊλλυρία καὶ ᾿Ελλὰς καὶ ᾿Αχαία καὶ Κρήτη, ἔτι 
ΑἹ a / \ A / ~ ~ > / 
δὲ αἵ τε Κυκλάδες καὶ τὰ παράλια τῆς μικρᾶς ᾿Ασίας 
καὶ Κύπρου ὃ πρὸς νοταπηλιώτην κείμενα τοῦ ὅλου 
63 τεταρτημορίου, προσλαμβάνει τὴν συνοικείωσιν τοῦ 
νοταπηλιωτικοῦ τριγώνου, τοῦ κατὰ τὸν Ταῦρον 
\ \ / \ A > / ” A 
καὶ τὴν Π]αρθένον καὶ τὸν Αἰγόκερων, ἔτι δὲ συν- 
οικοδεσπότας τόν τε τῆς ᾿Αφροδίτης καὶ τὸν τοῦ 
Κρόνου καὶ τὸν τοῦ ᾿ Ἑρμοῦ - ὅθεν οἱ κατοικοῦντες 
ρ 
τὰς χώρας συγκατεσχηματισμένοι μᾶλλον ἀπ- 
ἔβησαν καὶ κεκραμένοι τοῖς τε σώμασι καὶ ταῖς 
ψυχαῖς - ἡγεμονικοὶ μὲν καὶ αὐτοὶ τυγχάνοντες καὶ 
γενναῖοι καὶ ἀνυπότακτοι διὰ τὸν τοῦ Ἄρεως, 
΄ \ \ > / ‘ A 
φιλελεύθεροι δὲ Kal αὐτόνομοι Kat δημοκρατικοὶ 
\ θ \ ὃ A \ ~ A / λό 5 de 
Kal νομοθετικοὶ διὰ τὸν τοῦ Aids, φιλόμουσοι ὃ δὲ 
καὶ φιλομαθεῖς καὶ φιλαγωνισταὶ καὶ καθάριοι ταῖς 
/ 6 \ ‘ ~ > 7, \ A 
διαίταις ὃ διὰ τὸν τῆς ᾿Αφροδίτης, κοινωνικοὶ δὲ 
καὶ φιλόξενοι καὶ φιλοδίκαιοι καὶ φιλογράμματοι 
καὶ ἐν λόγοις πρακτικώτατοι διὰ τὸν τοῦ “Ἑρμοῦ, 
μυστηρίων δὲ μάλιστα συντελεστικοὶ διὰ τὸν τῆς 
3 δί ς / / LA δὲ A 
Adpoditns ἑσπέριον σχηματισμόν. πάλιν δὲ κατὰ 
μέρος καὶ τούτων οἱ μὲν περὶ τὰς Κυκλάδας καὶ τὰ 


170 φιλελεύθερον. . . ἁπλοῦν καὶ om. Cam. 
2 αὐτοῖς VD, -ῶν PLMNAE. 
ὃ Κύπρου VDProc. ; Κύπρον al..Cam. 


136 


TETRABIBLOS II. 3 


sun; wherefore these peoples are more masterful, 
benevolent, andco-operative. Tyrrhenia, Celtica, and 
Spain are subject to Sagittarius and Jupiter, whence 
their independence, simplicity, and love of cleanliness. 
The parts of this quarter which are situated about 
the centre of the inhabited world, Thrace, Macedonia, 
Illyria, Hellas, Achaia, Crete, and likewise the 
Cyclades, and the coastal regions of Asia Minor and 
Cyprus, which are in the south-east portion of the 
whole quarter, have in addition familiarity with the 
south-east triangle, Taurus, Virgo, and Capricornus, 
and its co-rulers Venus, Saturn, and Mercury. As 
a result the inhabitants of those countries are 
brought into conformity with these planets and 
both in body and soul are of a more mingled 
constitution. They too have qualities of leadership 
and are noble and independent, because of Mars ; 
they are liberty-loving and self-governing, demo- 
cratic and framers of law, through Jupiter ; lovers of 
music and of learning, fond of contests and clean 
livers, through Venus ; social, friendly to strangers, 
justice-loving, fond of letters, and very effective 
in eloquence, through Mercury ; and they are par- 
ticularly addicted to the performance of mysteries, 
because of Venus’s occidental aspect. And again, 
part by part, those of this group who live in the 


' Hellas is northern Greece and Achaia the Peloponnesus. 





4 ἐκείνας post χώρας add. MNAECam. 
5 φιλόμουσοι. . . φιλομαθεῖς post “Apews ins. NCam. 
8 καθάριοι ταῖς διαίταις VMADE, καθ. τὰς διαγωγὰς Proc. ; 
φιλοκάθαροι ταῖς καρδίαις PLNCam. 
137 


P 


PTOLEMY 


tA ~ - “A / i Kod 1 ~ 

παράλια τῆς μικρᾶς Ασίας καὶ Κύπρου! τῷ τε 
Ταύρῳ καὶ τῷ τῆς ᾿Αφροδίτης μᾶλλον συνοικειοῦν- 
ται" ὅθεν ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πολὺ τρυφηταί τέ εἰσι καὶ 
καθάριοι καὶ τοῦ σώματος ἐπιμέλειαν ποιούμενοι. 

μῇ \ \ \ « ἣν \ ‘3 > / \ \ 
of δὲ περὶ τὴν ᾿Ελλάδα καὶ τὴν “Ayatay καὶ τὴν 
, ~ / \ ~ τὰ ~ ‘ 
Κρήτην τῇ τε Llapbévw καὶ τῷ τοῦ “Eppod, διὸ 
~ \ / \ ~ \ aN 
μᾶλλον λογικοὶ τυγχάνουσι καὶ φιλομαθεῖς καὶ τὰ 
τῆς ψυχῆς ἀσκοῦντες πρὸ τοῦ σώματος. οἱ δὲ περὶ 
τὴν Μακεδονίαν καὶ Θράκην καὶ ᾿Ϊλλυρίδα τῷ τε 

ν ree Ls \ A A 7 \ , 

64 Αἰγόκερῳ καὶ τῷ τοῦ Kpovov: διὸ φιλοκτήματοι 
μέν, οὐχ ἥμεροι δὲ οὕτως, οὐδὲ κοινωνικοὶ τοῖς 
νόμοις. 

~ \ , , “- ‘ ‘ 
Τοῦ δὲ δευτέρου τεταρτημορίου τοῦ κατὰ TO 
, , Ξ , > , \ NO ey : 
νότιον μέρος τῆς μεγάλης ᾿Ασίας τὰ μὲν ἄλλα μέρη 
\ / > /, > / / 
τὰ περιέχοντα ᾿Ϊνδικήν, "Apravynv, Γεδρωσίαν, Ilap- 
θίαν, Μηδίαν, [Π]ερσίδα, Βαβυλωνίαν, εσοποτα- 
μίαν, ᾿Ασσυρίαν, καὶ τὴν θέσιν ἔχοντα πρὸς νοταπ- 
ηλιώτην τῆς ὅλης οἰκουμένης, εἰκότως καὶ αὐτὰ 
συνοικειοῦται μὲν τῷ νοταπηλιωτικῷ τριγώνῳ τοῦ 
Ταύρου καὶ Π]αρθένου καὶ Αἰγόκερω, οἰκοδεσπο- 
lod ὃ δι. \ 2 ~ ~ "A δί \ ~ K; / 
τοῦνται δὲ ὑπὸ " τοῦ τῆς ᾿Αφροδίτης καὶ τοῦ Κρόνου 
ἐπὶ ἑῴων σχηματισμῶν " διόπερ καὶ τὰς φύσεις τῶν 
ἐν αὐτοῖς ἀκολούθως ἄν τις εὕροι τοῖς ὑπὸ τῶν 
οὕτως οἰκοδεσποτησάντων ἀποτελουμένας - σέβουσί 
\ \ \ ~ > / Μ > / 
Te yap τὸν μὲν τῆς “Adpodityns “Iow ὀνομάζοντες, 
“ , 
τὸν δὲ τοῦ Κρόνου Μίθραν ἥλιον. καὶ προθεσπί- 
~ > 
Covow οἱ πολλοὶ τὰ μέλλοντα - καθιεροῦνταΐ Te παρ 


1 Κύπρου VPLDProce. ; Κύπρον al. Cam. 
2 οἰκοδεσποτοῦνται δὲ ὑπὸ κτλ. PLMNAECam. (οἰκοδεσποτεῖ- 
ται MAL, -οὔντα L) ; συνοικειοῦται δὲ τῷ τῆς ᾿Αφρ. VD, ef. Proc. 


138 


TETRABIBLOS ΤΙ. 3 


Cyclades and on the shores of Asia Minor and Cyprus 
are more closely familiar to Taurus and Venus. For 
this reason they are, on the whole, luxurious, clean, and 
attentive to their bodies. The inhabitants of Hellas, 
Achaia, and Crete, however, have a familiarity with 
Virgo and Mercury, and are therefore better at reason- 
ing, and fond of learning, and they exercise the soul in 
preference to the body. The Macedonians, Thracians, 
and Illyrians have familiarity with Capricorn and 
Saturn, so that, though they are acquisitive, they are 
not so mild of nature, nor social in their institutions. 

Of the second quarter, which embraces the southern 
part of Greater Asia, the other parts, including India, 
Ariana, Gedrosia,! Parthia, Media, Persia, Babylonia, 
Mesopotamia, and Assyria, which are situated in the 
south-east of the whole inhabited world, are, as we 
might presume, familiar to the south-eastern triangle, 
Taurus, Virgo, and Capricorn, and are governed by 
Venus and Saturn in oriental aspects. Therefore 
one would find that the natures of their inhabitants 
conform with the temperaments governed by such 
rulers ; for they revere the star of Venus under the 
name of Isis,2 and that of Saturn as Mithras Helios. 
Most of them, too, divine future events; and among 


1 Gedrosia is modern Baluchistan, and Ariana lay north 
of it, between Parthia and the Indus. 

2 For this region it would have been more accurate to 
identify Venus with Astarte or Istar. It was, of course, 
the original home of the worship of Mithras. 


3 Μίθραν ἥλιον VPLMDE, Μιθρανήλιον Proc., om. ἥλιον A, 
Μίθραν δὲ τὸν ἥλιον NCam. 


139 


PTOLEMY 


αὐτοῖς τὰ γεννητικὰ μόρια διὰ TOV τῶν προκειμένων 
> 
ἀστέρων συσχηματισμὸν σπερματικὸν ὄντα φύσει. 
ἔτι δὲ θερμοὶ καὶ ὀχευτικοὶ καὶ καταφερεῖς πρὸς 
τὰ ἀφροδίσια τυγχάνουσιν: ὀρχηστικοί τε καὶ 
\ ᾿ / \ A ‘ ~ > ’ 
πηδηταὶ καὶ φιλόκοσμοι μὲν διὰ τὸν τῆς ᾿Αφροδίτης, 
ἁβροδίαιτοι! δὲ διὰ τὸν τοῦ Κρόνου. ἀναφανδὸν 
δὲ ποιοῦνται καὶ οὐ κρύβδην τὰς πρὸς τὰς γυναῖκας 
,ὔ ‘ A ca ~ ~ Ἁ \ 
συνουσίας διὰ TO ἑῷον τοῦ σχηματισμοῦ, Tas δὲ 
\ \ »Μ / ~ 
65 πρὸς τοὺς ἄρρενας ὑπερεχθραίνουσι. διὰ ταῦτα 
δὲ καὶ τοῖς πλείστοις αὐτῶν συνέπεσεν ἐκ τῶν 
μητέρων τεκνοῦν," καὶ τὰς προσκυνήσεις τῷ στήθει 
- Ὁ; ~ 
ποιεῖσθαι διὰ Tas ἑῴας ἀνατολὰς Kal TO τῆς καρδίας 
ἡγεμονικὸν οἰκείως ἔχον πρὸς τὴν ἡλιακὴν δύναμιν. 
Ὄπ δὲ € > \ ~ \ LAA \ 3 ‘ A \ 
εἰσὶ δὲ ws ἐπὶ πᾶν καὶ τἄλλα μὲν 5 τὰ περὶ Tas 
στολὰς καὶ κόσμους ὁ καὶ ὅλως τὰς σωματικὰς 
σχέσεις τρυφεροὶ καὶ τεθηλυσμένοι διὰ τὸν τῆς 
> δί \ δὲ ‘ \ A / 
Adpodi7yns, τὰς δὲ ψυχὰς Kal τὰς προαιρέσεις 
a A 
μεγαλόφρονες καὶ γενναῖοι καὶ πολεμικοὶ διὰ τὸ 
οἰκείως ἔχειν τὸν τοῦ Κρόνου πρὸς τὸ τῶν ἀνατολῶν 
~ ~ 7, ‘ 
σχῆμα. κατὰ μέρος δὲ πάλιν τῷ μὲν Ταύρῳ καὶ 
~ ~ > / ~ ~ σ 
τῷ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης μᾶλλον συνοικειοῦται ἥ τε 
Παρθία καὶ ἡ Μηδία καὶ ἡ Περσίς -5 ὅθεν οἱ ἐνταῦθα 
στολαῖς τε ἀνθίναις ὃ χρῶνται κατακαλυπτόντες 
¢ A o \ ~ / \ ν + Jems 
ἑαυτοὺς ὅλους πλὴν τοῦ στήθους, Kai ὅλως εἰσὶν 
« , \ 7 ~ \ / \ ~ 
ἁβροδίαιτοι καὶ καθάριοι. τῇ δὲ Παρθένῳ καὶ τῷ 
ay ~ \ \ \ ~ \ 
τοῦ “Ἑρμοῦ τὰ περὶ τὴν Βαβυλῶνα καὶ Μεσοπο- 
ταμίαν καὶ ᾿Ασσυρίαν - διὸ καὶ παρὰ τοῖς ἐνταῦθα 


‘ ἁβροδίαιτοι MNAECam. Anon. (ed. Wolf, p. 61); ἁπλοδί- 
aro. VLPD; ἁπλῶς... διάγοντες Proc. 
2 τεκνοῦν VMADE, τέκνα PLNCam., τεκνοποιοῦσι Proc. 


140 


TETRABIBLOS II. 3 


them there exists the practice of consecrating the 
genital organs because of the aspect of the afore- 
said stars, which is by nature generative. Further, 
they are ardent, concupiscent, and inclined to the 
pleasures of love; through the influence of Venus 
they are dancers and leapers and fond of adornment, 
and through that of Saturn luxurious livers. They 
carry out their relations with women! openly and 
not in secret, because of the planets’ oriental aspect, 
but hold in detestation such relations with males. 
For these reasons most of them beget children by 
their own mothers, and they do obeisance to the 
breast, by reason of the morning rising of the planets 
and on account of the primacy of the heart, which is 
akin to the sun’s power. As for the rest, they are 
generally luxurious and effeminate in dress, in adorn- 
ment, and in all habits relating to the body, because 
of Venus. In their souls and by their predilection 
they are magnanimous, noble, and warlike, be- 
cause of the familiarity of Saturn oriental. Part 
by part, again, Parthia, Media, and Persia are more 
closely familiar to Taurus and Venus; hence their 
inhabitants use embroidered clothing, which covers 
their entire body except the breast, and they are as 
a general thing luxurious and clean. Babylonia, 
Mesopotamia, and Assyria are familiar to Virgo and 


1 Here again see the citations collected by Bouché- 
Leclereq, p. 341, n. 2, of the charges of sexual immorality 
and incest made in antiquity against these peoples. 


3 τἄλλα μὲν VD, τὰ μὲν ἄλλα PLMAER, om. NCom. 

4 καὶ κόσμους VMAI) (κόσμος) E, κατά τε τοὺς κόσμους 
NCam., ἀνατολλὰς καὶ κόσμους P, ἀνατολικὰς καὶ κόσκου L. 

5 Περσική NCam. δ ἀνθηραῖς NCam. 


141 


PTOLEMY 


τὸ μαθηματικὸν Kal παρατηρητικὸν τῶν mévre} 
ἀστέρων ἐξαίρετον συνέπεσε τῷ δὲ Alyoxepw 
καὶ τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου τὰ περὶ τὴν ᾿Ϊνδικὴν καὶ 
3 \ \ / o \ \ “- 
᾿Αριανὴν καὶ Iedpwotav, ὅθεν καὶ τὸ τῶν νεμο- 
μένων" τὰς χώρας ἄμορφον καὶ ἀκάθαρτον καὶ 
θηριῶδες. τὰ δὲ λοιπὰ τοῦ τεταρτημορίου μέρη 
\ / > ~ 
περὶ TO μέσον ἐσχηματισμένα τῆς ὅλης οἰκουμένης 
᾿Ιδουμαία, KoiAn Συρία, ᾿Ιουδαία, Φοινίκη, Xardai- 
> / > 
66 κή, ᾿Ορχηνία, ‘Apapia Εὐδαίμων, τὴν θέσιν ἔχοντα 
/ ~ 
πρὸς βορρολίβα τοῦ ὅλου τεταρτημορίου προσλαμ- 
βάνει πάλιν τὴν συνοικείωσιν τοῦ βορρολιβυκοῦ 
/ ~ / / » \ 
τριγώνου, Κριοῦ, A€ovros, Τοξότου, ἔτι δὲ συνοικο- 
δεσπότας τόν τε τοῦ Atos καὶ τὸν τοῦ "Apews καὶ 
ΝΜ \ a ¢ ~ \ -“ - ~ Mv 
ἔτι τὸν τοῦ “Ἑρμοῦ - διὸ μᾶλλον οὗτοι τῶν ἄλλων 
ἐμπορικώτεροι καὶ συναλλακτικώτεροι, Tavoupyo- 
τεροι δὲ καὶ δειλοκαταφρόνητοι καὶ ἐπιβουλευτικοὶ 
καὶ δουλόψυχοι καὶ ὅλως ἀλλοπρόσαλλοι διὰ τὸν 
τῶν προκειμένων ἀστέρων συσχηματισμόν. καὶ 
7 \ , « \ \ \ , / 
τούτων δὲ πάλιν οἱ μὲν περὶ τὴν Κοίλην Συρίαν 
Ἐν / Δ. 3 / ~ ~ \ ~ 
καὶ ᾿Ιδουμαίαν καὶ ᾿ΪΙουδαίαν τῷ τε Kpi@ καὶ τῷ 
τοῦ "Apews μᾶλλον συνοικειοῦνται " διόπερ ὡς ἐπὶ 
πᾶν θρασεῖς τέ εἰσι καὶ ἄθεοι καὶ ἐπιβουλευτικοί. 
Φοίνικες δὲ καὶ Χαλδαῖοι καὶ ᾿᾽Ορχήνιοι τῷ “έοντι 


1 πέντε VProc., om. alii Cam. 

2 συνέπεσε VMADE, συνέπεται NCam., συνέπεστι P, συνε- 
τίεται L. 

8 τὸ τῶν νεμομένων κτλ.] of νεμόμενοι... . ἄμορφοι κτλ. 


NCam. 





i [dumaea is the region around the south end of the Dead 
Sea; Coelé Syria, north of Palestine and between Lebanon 
and Anti-Libanus ; Judaea, between the Dead Sea and the 


142 


TETRABIBLOS II. 3 


Mercury, and so the study of mathematics and the 
observation of the five planets are special traits of 
these peoples. India, Ariana, and Gedrosia have 
familiarity with Capricorn and Saturn; therefore 
the inhabitants of these countries are ugly, unclean, 
and bestial. The remaining parts of the quarter, 
situated about the centre of the inhabited world, 
Idumaea, Coelé Syria, Judaea, Phoenicia, Chaldaea, 
Orchinia, and Arabia Felix,! which are situated 
toward the north-west of the whole quarter, have ad- 
ditional familiarity with the north-western triangle, 
Aries, Leo, and Sagittarius, and, furthermore, have as 
co-rulers Jupiter, Mars, and Mercury. Therefore these 
peoples are, in comparison with the others, more 
gifted in trade and exchange; they are more un- 
scrupulous, despicable cowards, treacherous, servile, 
and in general fickle, on account of the aspect 
of the stars mentioned. Of these, again, the in- 
habitants of Coelé Syria, Idumaea, and Judaea are 
more closely familiar to Aries and Mars, and there- 
fore these peoples are in general bold, godless,” and 
scheming. The Phoenicians, Chaldaeans, and Orchi- 
nians have familiarity with Leo and the sun, so that 


coast ; Phoenicia the coastal strip north of Judaea and 
Samaria; Chaldaea, south-west of the Euphrates and 
north of the Arabian peninsula; what is meant by 
Orchinia is somewhat doubtful; and Arabia Felix is the 
south-western coastal region of the Arabian peninsula. In 
the Geography, v. 20, Chaldaea is treated merely as a part 
of Babylonia, not an entirely separate country, as here 
(cf. Boll, Studien, p. 205). 

2 The Jews, because of their monotheism and disregard 
of all pagan gods, were generally branded as atheists by 
their neighbours. 


143 


PTOLEMY 


Kal τῷ ἡλίῳ, διόπερ ἁπλούστεροι καὶ φιλάνθρωποι 

καὶ φιλαστρόλογοι καὶ μάλιστα πάντων σέβοντες 
‘ “ « \ \ \ > ‘ \ > 7 

τὸν ἥλιον. ot δὲ κατὰ τὴν ApaPiav τὴν Εὐδαίμονα 

τῷ ἸΤοξότη καὶ τῷ τοῦ Atos: ὅθεν ἀκολούθως τῇ 

Ἷ Η / : / ” ,ὔ Ξ τῇ 

προσηγορίᾳ τό τε τῆς χώρας εὔφορον συνέπεσε καὶ 

τὸ τῶν ἀρωμάτων πλῆθος καὶ τὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων 

εὐάρμοστον πρός τε διαγωγὰς ἐλεύθερον καὶ συναλ- 

λαγὰς καὶ πραγματείας. 

Τοῦ δὲ τρίτου τεταρτημορίου τοῦ κατὰ τὸ βόρειον 

͵ ~ iA Al / A \ ἄλλ /, A 

μέρος τῆς μεγάλης ᾿Ασίας τὰ μὲν α μέρη τὰ 

€ 3 / 
περιέχοντα τὴν Ὑρκανίαν, ‘Appeviav, Ματιανήν, 
/ 

67 Βακτριανήν, Kaornpiav,' Σηρικήν, Σαυροματικήν, 
> / ὃ ἐφ \ \ \ λ ’ὔ 

Οξειανήν, Σουγδιανήν, καὶ τὰ πρὸς βορραπηλιώτην 

~ / ~ ΄- 

κείμενα τῆς ὅλης οἰκουμένης συνοικειοῦνται μὲν τῷ 
~ 4 ~ 

βορραπηλιωτικῷ τριγώνῳ, Διδύμων καὶ Ζυγοῦ καὶ 

ΕῚ A \ > / ε / ~ 

“Ὑδροχόου, οἰκοδεσποτεῖται δὲ εἰκότως ὑπό τε τοῦ 

~ > ~ 
Κρόνου καὶ τοῦ Διὸς ἐπὶ σχημάτων ἀνατολικῶν. 
/ 

διόπερ of ταύτας ἔχοντες Tas χώρας σέβουσι μὲν 

/ ‘ Κ ,ὔ 2 Xr ’ὔ ὃ La > ‘ Xr 4 

Δία καὶ Kpovov,? πλουσιώτατοι δέ εἰσι Kat πολύ- 

, \ 

Xpvaot, περί τε Tas διαίτας καθάριοι καὶ εὐδιάγωγοι, 
A \ ” / 

σοφοί τε ἐπὶ Ta θεῖα καὶ μάγοι καὶ τὰ ἤθη δίκαιοι 

’ ‘ - 
καὶ ἐλεύθεροι καὶ τὰς ψυχὰς μεγάλοι καὶ γενναῖοι, 
" 

μισοπόνηροί τε καὶ φιλόστοργοι καὶ ὑπεραποθνή- 

σκοντες ἑτοίμως τῶν οἰκειοτάτων ἕνεκεν τοῦ καλοῦ 

/ / ‘ 

καὶ ὁσίου, πρός τε τὰς ἀφροδισίους χρήσεις σεμνοὶ 

1 Κασπειρίαν VD, -ηρίαν NMAE, -ιρίαν Proc., -ἰαν Cam., 


om. PL. 
2 ἥλιον VMADEProc., Κρόνον PLNCam. 





1 Astrology indeed began in the ancient Babylonian and 
Assyrian kingdoms. 


144 


TETRABIBLOS II. 3 


they are simpler, kindly, addicted to astrology,! and 
beyond all men worshippers of the sun. The in- 
habitants of Arabia Felix are familiar to Sagittarius 
and Jupiter; this accounts for the fertility of the 
country, in accordance with its name, and its multi- 
tudes of spices, and the grace of its inhabitants and 
their free spirit in daily life, in exchange, and in 
business. 

Of the third quarter, which includes the northern 
part of Greater Asia, the other parts, embracing 
Hyrcania, Armenia, Matiana, Bactriana, Casperia, 
Serica, Sauromatica, Oxiana, Sogdiana, and the 
regions in the north-east of the inhabited world,? 
are in familiarity with the north-eastern triangle, 
Gemini, Libra, and Aquarius, and are, as might be 
expected, governed by Saturn and Jupiter in oriental 
aspect. Therefore the inhabitants of these lands wor- 
ship Jupiter and Saturn, have much riches and gold, 
and are cleanly and seemly in their living, learned 
and adepts in matters of religion, just and liberal 
in manners, lofty and noble in soul, haters of evil, 
and affectionate, and ready to die for their friends 
in a fair and holy cause. They are dignified and 


2 Of these Armenia lies south of the Caucasus between 
the Black Sea and the Caspian; Matiana and Hyrcania 
are around the south end of the Caspian, the former to the 
east and the latter to the west; Bactriana, Oxiana, and 
Sogdiana are still further east, around the upper courses 
of the Oxus; by Casperia is probably meant the region 
around the northern part of the Caspian Sea; Serica is 
China, or its western portion, and Sauromatica (called 
Sarmatia by the Romans) is the general name for Russia, 
here used of its Asiatic part. In the Geography, vi. 12, 
Ptolemy treats Oxiana as but one part of Sogdiana (Boll, 
Studien, p. 205). 


145 


PTOLEMY 


\ / \ ‘ ᾿ >? ~ a 
καὶ καθάριοι καὶ περὶ tas ἐσθῆτας πολυτελεῖς, 
χαριστικοί τε καὶ μεγαλόφρονες, ἅπερ ὡς ἐπὶ πᾶν 
6 τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ 6 τοῦ Διὸς ἀνατολικῶν συσχη- 
ματισμὸς ἀπεργάζεται. καὶ τούτων δὲ πάλιν τῶν 
30 ~ δ) \ \ \ «ς ,ὔ ἌΡ- Ψ \ 
ἐθνῶν τὰ μὲν περὶ τὴν “Ὑρκανίαν καὶ ‘Appeviav καὶ 
Ματιανὴν μᾶλλον συνοικειοῦται τοῖς τε Διδύμοις 

\ ~ ma ¢ ~ / 2) / ~ 
Kal τῷ τοῦ ᾿Ερμοῦ : διόπερ εὐκινητότερα μᾶλλον 
καὶ ὑποπόνηρα. τὰ δὲ περὶ τὴν Βακτριανὴν 

\ \ ~ ~ ~ 

καὶ Κασπηρίαν καὶ Σηρικὴν τῷ τε Ζυγῷ καὶ τῷ 

~ ¢ \ 4 
τῆς Adpoditns: ὅθεν οἱ κατέχοντες τὰς χώρας 
πλουσιώτατοι καὶ φιλόμουσοι καὶ μᾶλλον aBpo- 
δίαιτοι. τὰ δὲ περὶ τὴν Σαυροματικὴν καὶ τὴν 
᾿Οἕξειανὴν καὶ Σουγδιανὴν τῷ τε “YSpoxow καὶ τῷ 
ay (sie earalel nate pone ΤΩ 
~ / A \ ~ Δ, ΩΝ, a > / 

68 τοῦ Kpovov - διὸ καὶ ταῦτα τὰ ἔθνη μᾶλλον ἀνήμερα 
καὶ αὐστηρὰ καὶ θηριώδη. τὰ δὲ λοιπὰ τούτου 
τοῦ τεταρτημορίου καὶ περὶ τὸ μέσον κείμενα τῆς 

/ / 
ὅλης οἰκουμένης, Βιθυνία, Φρυγία, ΚΚολχική, Συρία, 
/ / / / 
Κομμαγηνή, Καππαδοκία, Avdia, Λυκία," Κιλικία, 
,ὔ \ / ” \ / > ~ 
Παμφυλία, τὴν θέσιν ἔχοντα πρὸς λιβόνοτον αὐτοῦ 
τοῦ τεταρτημορίου, προσλαμβάνει τὴν συνοικείωσιν 
τοῦ νοτολιβυκοῦ τεταρτημορίου Καρκίνου καὶ 
Σκορπίου καὶ ᾿Ιχθύων, καὶ συνοικοδεσπότας τόν τε 

““»Ὑ» ἘΝ \ “-“ > , \ \ ~ 
τοῦ "Apews καὶ ἔτι τὸν τῆς “Adpodityns καὶ τὸν τοῦ 
“Ἑρμοῦ: διόπερ οἱ περὶ τὰς χώρας ταύτας σέβουσι 
μὲν ὡς ἐπὶ πᾶν τὴν ‘Adpoditny ὡς μητέρα θεῶν, 
ποικίλοις καὶ ἐγχωρίοις ὀνόμασι προσαγορεύοντες, 

\ A aM ε ” an Μ ,ὔ 
καὶ τὸν τοῦ "Apews ὡς Ἄδωνιν ἢ ἄλλως πως πάλιν 

~ > 
ὀνομάζοντες * Kal μυστήριά τινα μετὰ θρηνῶν ἀπο- 

1 ἀνατολικῶν συσχηματισμὸς ἀπεργάζεται VD, -ὁς -ὁς -εται 
MAE, -ὁν -ov -εται PL, κατὰ -ὁν -ὁν -ονται NCam. 


146 





TETRABIBLOS II. 3 


pure in their sexual relations, lavish in dress, gracious 
and magnanimous; these things in general are 
brought about by Saturn and Jupiter in eastern 
aspects. Of these nations, again, Hyrcania, Ar- 
menia, and Matiana are more closely familiar to 
Gemini and Mercury ; they are accordingly more easily 
stirred and inclined to rascality. Bactriana, Casperia, 
and Serica are akin to Libra and Venus, so that their 
peoples are rich and followers of the Muses, and more 
luxurious. The regions of Sauromatica, Oxiana, and 
Sogdiana are in familiarity with Aquarius and Saturn ; 
these nations therefore are more ungentle, stern, 
and bestial. The remaining parts of this quarter, 
which lie close to the centre of the inhabited world, 
Bithynia, Phrygia, Colchica, Syria, Commagené, 
Cappadocia, Lydia, Lycia, Cilicia, and Pamphylia,! 
since they are situated in the south-west of the 
quarter, have in addition familiarity with the south- 
western quarter, Cancer, Scorpio, and Pisces, and 
their co-rulers are Mars, Venus, and Mercury ; there- 
fore those who live in these countries generally 
worship Venus as the mother of the gods, calling her 
by various local names, and Mars as Adonis,” to 
whom again they give other names, and they cele- 
brate in their honour certain mysteries accompanied 


1 These are all parts of Asia Minor. 

2 Ptolemy identifies Venus and Mars, who are coupled in 
Greek mythology, with the female and male divinities of 
this region worshipped under various names as the Mother 
of the Gods, Magna Mater, ete., and Attis, Adonis, ete. 


2 Λυκία VD Proc., om. alii Cam. 


147 


PTOLEMY 


,ὔ > - ‘ / > \ / 
διδόντες αὐτοῖς. περίκακοι δέ εἰσι καὶ δουλόψυχοι 
καὶ πονικοὶ καὶ πονηροὶ καὶ ἐν μισθοφόροις στρατεί- 
aus καὶ ἁρπαγαῖς καὶ αἰχμαλωσίαις γινόμενοι, κατα- 
δουλούμενοί τε αὑτοὺς καὶ πολεμικαῖς ἀπωλείαις 
περιπίπτοντες. διά τε τὸν τοῦ "Apews καὶ τὸν τῆς 
> / A > s , σ » 
Adpoditns κατὰ ἀνατολικὴν συναρμογήν, ὅτι ἐν 

lol ~ > ~ ~ 

μὲν τῷ τῆς "Adpoditns τριγωνικῷ Cwdiw τῷ 

~ ~ ~ ὦ 

Αἰγόκερῳ ὁ τοῦ "Apews, ἐν δὲ τῷ τοῦ “Apews 
~ , A > , « “-“ > , 

τριγωνικῷ ζῳδίῳ τοῖς ᾿Ιχθύσι ὁ τῆς ᾿Αφροδίτης 
~ ~ A / ~ 

ὑψοῦται, διὰ τοῦτο τὰς γυναῖκας συνέβη πᾶσαν 
» ‘ \ Μ > ,ὔ , 

εὔνοιαν πρὸς τοὺς ἀνδρας ἐνδείκνυσθαι, φιλοστόρ- 

yous τε οὔσας καὶ οἰκουροὺς καὶ ἐργατικὰς καὶ 

69 ὑπηρετικὰς καὶ ὅλως πονικὰς καὶ ὑποτεταγμένας. 

/ \ / ¢€ \ ‘ \ , \ 
τούτων δὲ πάλιν οἱ μὲν περὶ τὴν Βιθυνίαν καὶ 
Φρυγίαν καὶ Κολχικὴν συνοικειοῦνται μᾶλλον τῷ 
τε Καρκίνῳ καὶ τῇ σελήνῃ - διόπερ οἱ μὲν ἄνδρες 
ὡς ἐπὶ πᾶν εἰσιν εὐλαβεῖς καὶ ὑποτακτικοί, τῶν δὲ 

~ - ~ > 
γυναικῶν αἱ πλεῖσται διὰ τὸ τῆς σελήνης avaTo- 
λικὸν καὶ ἠρρενωμένον! σχῆμα ἔπανδροι καὶ 
> A \ \ δ « 3 ’, 
ἀρχικαὶ καὶ πολεμικαὶ καθάπερ αἱ ᾿Αμαζόνες, 
φεύγουσαι 5 μὲν τὰς τῶν ἀνδρῶν συνουσίας, φιλόπλοι 
δὲ οὖσαι καὶ ἀρρενοποιοῦσαι τὰ θηλυκὰ πάντα 8 
~ ~ ~ ~ ΄ 
ἀπὸ βρέφους, ἀποκοπῇ τῶν δεξιῶν μαστῶν χάριν 
τῶν στρατιωτικῶν χρειῶν καὶ ἀπογυμνοῦσαι ταῦτα 
‘ / \ 5 ‘\ 4 6 wi > “ὃ 7 
τὰ μέρη κατὰ τὰς παρατάξεις δ πρὸς ἐπίδειξιν 
a > 4, ~ / « \ ‘ A δ 
τοῦ ἀθηλύντου τῆς φύσεως. οἱ δὲ περὶ τὴν Συρίαν 
- , 
καὶ Κομμαγηνὴν καὶ Καππαδοκίαν τῷ τε Σ'κορπίῳ 
1 ἠρ(ρ)ενωμένον PLME, -ων N, ἠρρωμένον alii Cam., 


ἀρσενικὸν Proc. 2 φεύγουσι(ν) PLMA. 
374 θηλυκὰ πάντα VD, τὸ θῆλυ (aut θύλη) PLNCam., τὸ 


148 


TETRABIBLOS II. 3 


by lamentations. They are exceedingly depraved 
servile, laborious, rascally, are to be found in mer- 
cenary expeditions, looting and taking captives, en- 
slaving their own peoples, and engaging in destructive 
wars. And because of the junction of Mars and Venus 
in the Orient, since Mars is exalted in Capricorn, 
a sign of Venus’s triangle, and Venus in Pisces, a sign 
of Mars’s triangle, it comes about that their women 
display entire goodwill to their husbands ; they are 
affectionate, home-keepers, diligent, helpful, and in 
every respect laborious and obedient. Of these 
peoples, again, those who live in Bithynia, Phrygia, 
and Colchica are more closely familiar to Cancer and 
the moon; therefore the men are in general cau- 
tious and obedient, and most of the women, through 
the influence of the moon’s oriental and masculine 
aspect, are virile,’ commanding, and warlike, like 
the Amazons, who shun commerce with men, love 
arms, and from infaney make masculine all their 
female characteristics, by cutting off their right 
breasts for the sake of military needs and baring 
these parts in the line of battle, in order to display 
the absence of femininity in their natures. The 
people of Syria, Commagené, and Cappadocia are 


' Cf. the myth of Medea, the Colchian princess. 


θῆλυ πᾶν ME, τοῦ θήλεος παντὸς A; cf. τῶν θηλυκῶν βρεφῶν 
Proc. 

4 χρειῶν VP (xpn-) LMAEProc., χρήσεων NDCam. 

δ kara VMADE, διὰ PLNCam. 

6 παρατάξεις VMADE, -ης P, -ews L, πράξεις NCam.; ἐν ταῖς 
maparafeow Proc, 

7 πρὸς ἐπίδειξιν VD, εἰς ἐ. MAE, ὡς ἐπιδείξην P, ὡς ἐπίδειξιν 
L, ὡς ἐπιδείκνυσθαι NCam. 


149 


PTOLEMY 


‘ ~ aw / ‘ > > a 
Kal τῷ τοῦ "Apews διόπερ πολὺ παρ᾽ αὐτοῖς συν- 
ἔπεσε τὸ θρασὺ καὶ πονηρὸν καὶ ἐπιβουλευτικὸν καὶ 
> / ¢€ \ ‘ \ / ‘ ,ὔ ‘ 
ἐπίπονον. ot δὲ περὶ τὴν Λυδίαν καὶ Κιλικίαν Kat 
/ ~ . / A ~ ~ / 
Παμφυλίαν τοῖς te ᾿Ιχθύσι καὶ τῷ τοῦ Διός: 
ὅθεν οὗτοι μᾶλλον πολυκτήμονές τε καὶ ἐμπορικοὶ 
καὶ κοινωνικοὶ καὶ ἐλεύθεροι καὶ πιστοὶ περὶ τὰς 
συναλλαγάς. 
Tod δὲ λοιποῦ τεταρτημορίου τοῦ κατὰ τὴν 
~ A\ 4 l A / ‘ \ LAA \ 
κοινῶς καλουμένην ' Λιβύην, Ta μὲν ἄλλα τὰ περι- 
έχοντα Νουμηδίαν," ΚΚαρχηδονίαν, Adpixjv, Φαζα- 
νίαν, Νασαμονῖτιν, [ ἀραμαντικήν, Μαυριτανίαν, 
᾽ὔ, - " ‘ \ / Μ 
70 Γαιτουλίαν, Μεταγωνῖτιν, καὶ τὰ τὴν θέσιν ἔχοντα 
πρὸς λιβόνοτον τῆς ὅλης οἰκουμένης, συνοικειοῦται 
μὲν τῷ νοτολιβυκῷ τριγώνῳ Καρκίνου καὶ Lkop- 
, NAS 4 > A \ > / « ,ὔ 
πίου καὶ ᾿Ιχθύων, οἰκοδεσποτεῖται δὲ εἰκότως ὑπό 
aM \ ~ ~ > / pean / 
te τοῦ Ἄρεως καὶ τοῦ τῆς ‘Adpoditns ἐπὶ σχήματος 
ἑσπερίου - διόπερ συνέπεσε τοῖς πλείστοις αὐτῶν 
~ ~ ~ ‘4 
ἕνεκεν τῆς εἰρημένης τῶν ἀστέρων συναρμογῆς ὑπὸ 
- 3 ~ 
ἀνδρὸς Kal γυναικός," δυοῖν ὁμομητρίων ἀδελφῶν, 
βασιλεύεσθαι, τοῦ μὲν ἀνδρὸς τῶν ἀνδρῶν ἄρχοντος, 
τῆς δὲ γυναικὸς τῶν γυναικῶν, συντηρουμένης τῆς 
/ ~ \ / > / τὴ 
τοιαύτης διαδοχῆς. θερμοὶ δέ εἰσι σφόδρα καὶ 
A ~ ~ e 
Katadepeis πρὸς τὰς τῶν γυναικῶν συνουσίας, ws 
1 καλουμένην om. NCam. 2 Νουμιδίαν ACam. 


3 Φυζανίαν NCam. 
4 Post γυναικός add. 7 PLNCam., om. VMADEProc. 





1 Here used of the continent in general; Africa is the 
Roman province. 


150 





TETRABIBLOS II. 3 


familiar to Scorpio and Mars; therefore much bold- 
ness, knavery, treachery, and laboriousness are found 
among them. The people of Lydia, Cilicia, and 
Pamphylia have familiarity with Pisces and Jupiter ; 
these accordingly are more wealthy, commercial, 
social, free, and trustworthy in their compacts. 

Of the remaining quarter, which includes what is 
called by the common name Libya,! the other parts, 
including Numidia, Carthage, Africa, Phazania, Nasa- 
monitis, Garamantica, Mauritania, Gaetulia, Meta- 
gonitis,” and the regions situated in the south-west 
of the inhabited world, are related by familiarity to 
the south-western triangle, Cancer, Scorpio, and 
Pisces, and are accordingly ruled by Mars aud Venus 
in occidental aspect. For this reason it befalls most 
of the inhabitants, because of the aforesaid junction 
of these planets, to be governed by a man and wife 
who are own brother and sister,® the man ruling the 
men and the woman the women; and a succession of 
this sort is maintained. ‘They are extremely ardent 
and disposed to commerce with women, so that even 


* Along the Mediterranean coast, eastward from the 
Straits of Gibraltar, the regions are, first, Mauritania (of 
which Metagonitis is the portion east from the Straits), 
then Numidia, Africa (the Roman province, which in- 
cludes Carthage), Tripolitana, Cyrenaica, Marmarica, and 
Egypt. The other nations mentioned are further inland 
and south of these, Gaetulia in the west, Garamantica 
and Phazania south of Tripoli, and Nasamonitis near 
Cyrenaica and Marmarica. 

3 Marriage between those of the same blood was a 
common practice in Hellenistic Egypt, including the royal 
family of the Ptolemies. Cf. Curmont, L’ Byypte des 
Astrologues (Brussels, 1937), pp. 177-179. 


151 


vi 


_ 


PTOLEMY 


‘ ‘ / ὃ > « ~ a θ 1 \ λ 
καὶ τοὺς γάμους δι᾽ ἁρπαγῶν ποιεῖσθαι 1 καὶ πολ- 
λαχῆ ταῖς γαμουμέναις τοὺς βασιλέας πρώτους 2 
συνέρχεσθαι, παρ᾽ ἐνίοις δὲ καὶ κοινὰς εἶναι τὰς 
γυναῖκας πάντων. ὠφιλοκαλλωπισταὶ δὲ τυγχά- 
νουσι καὶ κόσμους γυναικείους περιζώννυνται διὰ 
τὸν τῆς Αφροδίτης, ἔπανδροι μέντοι ταῖς ψυχαῖς 

‘ 

Kal ὑποπόνηροι καὶ μαγευτικοί, νοθευταὶ δὲ Kal 
7 \ ε / μὰ A ~ MW 

παράβολοι καὶ ῥιψοκίνδυνοι διὰ τὸν τοῦ “Apews. 

’ὔ ‘ / ¢ \ \ \ / ‘ 
τούτων δὲ πάλιν ot μὲν περὶ τὴν Νουμηδίαν Kat 
Κ' δόνα καὶ “A ὴ ῦ GAA 

apxndova* καὶ ᾿Αφρικὴν συνοικειοῦνται μᾶλλον 
τῷ τε Καρκίνῳ καὶ τῇ σελήνῃ - διόπερ οὗτοι κοινω- 

/ 
νικοί TE καὶ ἐμπορικοὶ τυγχάνουσι Kal ἐν εὐθηνίᾳ 
πάσῃ διατελοῦντες, of δὲ περὶ τὴν Μεταγωνῖτιν 

\ / \ / ~ / 
καὶ Μαυριτανίαν καὶ Γαιτουλίαν τῷ τε Σ'κορπίῳ 
καὶ τῷ τοῦ “Apews - ὅθεν οὗτοι θηριωδέστεροί τέ 
εἰσι καὶ μαχιμώτατοι: καὶ κρεοφάγοι καὶ σφόδρα ® 

~ ~ A 
ῥιψοκίνδυνοι καὶ καταφρονητικοὶ τοῦ ζῆν, ὡς μηδὲ 
> / > ,ὔ « \ ‘ \ / ‘ 
ἀλλήλων ἀπέχεσθαι. οἱ δὲ περὶ τὴν Φαζανίαν Kat 

a a / 
Νασαμωνῖτιν καὶ Γαραμαντικὴν τοῖς τε ᾿Ϊχθύσι 

\ ~ ~ / / > 4, / \ «ς -“ 
καὶ τῷ τοῦ Aids: διόπερ ἐλεύθεροί τε καὶ ἁπλοῖ 

A » / 
τοῖς ἤθεσι καὶ φιλεργοὶ καὶ εὐγνώμονες καθάριοί 
τε καὶ ἀνυπότακτοί εἰσιν ὡς ἐπὶ πᾶν καὶ τὸν τοῦ 
A \ ec "A 7 θ ΄ \ ὃ \ r A ~ 

wos ws "Aupwva? θρησκεύοντες. τὰ δὲ λοιπὰ τοῦ 

> 
τεταρτημορίου μέρη Kal πρὸς TO μέσον ἐσχηματισ- 
~ o ’ὔ ( 
μένα τῆς ὅλης οἰκουμένης, Κυρηναϊκή, Μαρμαρικὴ, 

1 ποιεῖσθαι] γίνεσθαι VAD. 

2 πρώτους VMDE, cf. Proc. ; πρῶτα PLNACam. 

8 τυγχάνουσι(ν) VMADE, ὑπάρχουσι(ν) PLNCam. 

4 Καρχηδόνα VDProc., Καρχηδονίαν P (-8w-) LMNAECam. 


5 σφόδρα VMADEProc., om. PLNCam. 
5 καὶ (post ἐπὶ πᾶν) VMADE, διὰ NCam., om. PL. 


152 


TETRABIBLOS ITI. 3 


their marriages are brought about by violent abduc- 
tion, and frequently their kings enjoy the jus primae 
noctis with the brides, and among some of them the 
women are common to all the men. They are fond 
of beautifying themselves and gird themselves with 
feminine adornments, through the influence of Venus ; 
through that of Mars, however, they are virile of 
spirit, rascally, magicians, impostors, deceivers, and 
reckless. Of these people, again, the inhabitants of 
Numidia, Carthage, and Africa are more closely 
familiar to Cancer and the moon. They therefore 
are social, commercial, and live in great abund- 
ance. Those who inhabit Metagonitis, Mauritania, 
and Gaetulia are familiar to Scorpio and Mars ; 
they are accordingly fiercer and very warlike, 
meat-eaters, very reckless, and contemptuous of life 
to such an extent as not even to spare one another. 
Those who live in Phazania, Nasamonitis, and Gara- 
mantica are familiar to Pisces and Jupiter; hence 
they are free and simple in their characters, willing 
to work, intelligent, cleanly, and independent, as a 
general rule, and they are worshippers of Jupiter as 
Ammon. The remaining parts of the quarter, which 
are situated near the centre of the inhabited world, 
Cyrenaica, Marmarica, Egypt, Thebais,! the Oasis, 

1 Upper Egypt. By ‘“‘Egypt’’ he doubtless means 
Lower Egypt. Cyrenaica and Marmarica are to the west. 
Troglodytica lies along the west coast of the Red Sea and 
Azania about where is now French Somaliland. By 
Arabia he may mean Arabia Petraea, the Sinai Peninsula 
and vicinity. Parts of Troglodytica, too, were sometimes 


called Arabia. The Greater and Lesser Oases lie west of 
the Thebais. 


7 ὡς Ἄμμωνα VMADE; cf. Proc.; τῷ “Aupou PNCam. ; 
τῷ σάμωνα L. 
153 


PTOLEMY 


Αἴγυπτος, Θηβαΐς, Θασις, Τρωγλοδυτική, ‘ApaBia, 
Alavia, μέση Αἰθιοπία, πρὸς βορραπηλιώτην τε- 
τραμμένα τοῦ ὅλου τεταρτημορίου, προσλαμβάνει 
τὴν συνοικείωσιν τοῦ Ξορραπηλιωτικοῦ τριγώνου 
Διδύμων, Ζυγοῦ, καὶ ᾿Ὑδροχόου, καὶ συνοικοδεσ- 
πότας διὰ τοῦτο τόν τε τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ τὸν τοῦ 
Διὸς καὶ ἔτι τὸν τοῦ “Ἑρμοῦ - ὅθεν οἱ κατὰ ταύτας 
τὰς χώρας κεκοινωνηκότες σχεδὸν τῆς τῶν πέντε" 
πλανήτων οἰκοδεσποτίας ἑσπερίου φιλόθεοι μὲν 
γεγόνασι καὶ δεισιδαίμονες καὶ θεοπρόσπλοκοι 5 

φιλόθρηνοι καὶ τοὺς ἀποθνήσκοντας τῇ γῆ 
κρύπτοντες καὶ ἀφανίζοντες διὰ τὸ ἑσπέριον σχῆμα, 
παντοίοις δὲ νομίμοις καὶ ἔθεσι καὶ θεῶν παντοίων 
θρησκείαις χρώμενοι, καὶ ἐν μὲν ταῖς ὑποταγαῖς 
ταπεινοὶ καὶ δειλοὶ 8 καὶ μικρολόγοι καὶ ὑπομονητι- 
12 κοί, ἐν δὲ ταῖς ἡγεμονίαις εὔψυχοι καὶ μεγαλό- 
φρονες, πολυγύναιοι δὲ καὶ πολύανδροι καὶ κατα- 
φερεῖς καὶ ταῖς ἀδελφαῖς συναρμοζόμενοι, καὶ πολύ- 
σποροι μὲν οἱ ἄνδρες, εὐσύλληπτοι δὲ αἱ γυναῖκες 
ἀκολούθως τῷ τῆς χώρας yoviuw.4 πολλοὶ δὲ καὶ 
τῶν ἀρρένων σαθροὶ καὶ τεθηλυσμένοι ταῖς ψυχαῖς, 
ἔνιοι δὲ καὶ τῶν γεννητικῶν μορίων καταφρονοῦντες 
διὰ τὸν τῶν κακοποιῶν μετὰ τοῦ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης 
ἑσπερίου σχηματισμόν. καὶ τούτων δὲ οἱ μὲν 
περὶ Κυρηναϊκὴν καὶ Μαρμαρικὴν καὶ μάλιστα οἵ 
περὶ τὴν κάτω χώραν τῆς Αἰγύπτου μᾶλλον συνοι- 
κειοῦνται τοῖς τε Διδύμοις καὶ τῷ τοῦ “Epos: 


1 πέντε libri Proc., μὲν Cam. 


3 θεοπρόσπλοκοι VPLD ; προσπλεκόμενοι πρὸς θεούς Proc. ; 
θεοπρόσπολοι MNAKCam. 


154 


TETRABIBLOS IT. 3 


Troglodytica, Arabia, Azania, and Middle Ethiopia, 
which face the north-east of the whole quarter, 
have an additional familiarity with the north- 
eastern triangle Gemini, Libra, and Aquarius, and 
therefore have as co-rulers Saturn and Jupiter and, 
furthermore, Mercury. Accordingly those who live in 
these countries, because they all in common, as it 
were, are subject to the occidental rulership of the five 
planets, are worshippers of the gods, superstitious, 
given to religious ceremony and fond of lamentation ; 
they bury their dead in the earth, putting them out 
of sight, on account of the occidental aspect of the 
planets; and they practice all kinds of usages, cus- 
toms, and rites in the service of all manner of gods. 
Under command they are humble, timid, penurious, 
and long-suffering, in leadership courageous and 
magnanimous ; but they are polygamous and poly- 
androus and lecherous, marrying even their own 
sisters, and the men are potent in begetting, the 
women in conceiving, even as their land is fertile. 
Furthermore, many of the males are unsound and 
effeminate of soul, and some even hold in contempt 
the organs of generation, through the influence of the 
aspect of the maleficent planets in combination with 
Venus occidental. Of these peoples the inhabitants of 
Cyrenaica and Marmarica, and particularly of Lower 
Egypt, are more closely familiar to Gemini and 
Mercury ; on this account they are thoughtful and 


3 δειλοὶ VMADEProce. ; δεινοὶ LNCam., δηνοὶ P. : 
4 γονίμῳ VDMAEN (mg., γεννήματι) Cam.t; yor) P, 
γωνίσματι L; "γεννήματι Cam.? 
δ ἑσπερίου VD; cf. Proc. γινόμενον ἐκ τῶν κακοποιῶν μετὰ 
τοῦ δυτικοῦ τῆς (’Ad.) ; ἑσπέριον libri alii Cam. 
155 


PTOLEMY 


διόπερ οὗτοι διανοητικοί τε καὶ συνετοὶ καὶ εὐεπή- 
βολοι τυγχάνουσι περὶ πάντα καὶ μάλιστα περὶ τὴν 
τῶν σοφῶν τε καὶ θείων εὕρεσιν - payevtiKoi! τε 
καὶ κρυφίων μυστηρίων ἐπιτελεστικοὶ καὶ ὅλως 
« \ \ ‘ ’ὔ Ὁ A ‘ ‘\ oh! 
ἱκανοὶ περὶ Ta μαθήματα. οἱ δὲ περὶ τὴν Θηβαΐδα 
καὶ "Oaow καὶ Τρωγλοδυτικὴν τῷ τε Ζυγῷ καὶ τῷ 
~ ΕῚ , oe A > A ’ὔ Ἷ vA > 
τῆς ᾿Αφροδίτης, ὅθεν καὶ αὐτοὶ θερμότεροί τέ εἰσι 
τὰς φύσεις καὶ κεκινημένοι καὶ ἐν εὐφορίαις ἔχοντες 
\ / Θ A ‘ ‘A > / » / 
τὰς διαγωγάς ’ ot δὲ περὶ τὴν “ApaPiay καὶ ᾿Αζανίαν 
καὶ μέσην Αἰθιοπίαν τῷ ὋὙδροχόῳ καὶ τῷ τοῦ 
Κρόνου," διὸ καὶ οὗτοι κρεοφάγοι τε καὶ ἰχθυο- 
/ \ ,ὔ > / Μ A ἊΨ ἊΨ 
φάγοι καὶ νομάδες εἰσίν, ἄγριον καὶ θηριώδη βίον 
ζῶντες. 
Ai μὲν οὖν συνοικειώσεις τῶν τε ἀστέρων καὶ τῶν 
73 δωδεκατημορίων πρὸς τὰ κατὰ μέρος ἔθνη καὶ τὰ 
ὡς ἐπὶ πᾶν αὐτῶν ἰδιώματα κατὰ τὸ κεφαλαιῶδες 
τοῦτον ἡμῖν ὑποτετυπώσθωσαν τὸν τρόπον. ἐκ- 
θησόμεθα δὲ καὶ διὰ τὸ τῆς χρήσεως εὐεπήβολον ἐφ᾽ 
~ ,ὔ 
ἑκάστου τῶν δωδεκατημορίων κατὰ ψιλὴν παρά- 
θεσιν ἕκαστα τῶν συνοικειουμένων ἐθνῶν ἀκολού- 
θως τοῖς προκατειλεγμένοις περὶ αὐτῶν τὸν τρόπον 
τοῦτον. 
Κριός3. Βρεττανία, Γαλατία, Γερμανία, Βασ- 
/ \ A / , / ,ὔ 
ταρνία : περὶ τὸ μέσον Κοίλη Συρία IlaAaorivn, 
᾿Ιδουμαία, lovdaia. 
Ταῦρος - Παρθία, Μηδία, Περσίς - περὶ τὸ μέσον 
Κυκλάδες νῆσοι, Κύπρος, παράλια τῆς μικρᾶς 
Aotas. 


1 μαγευτικοί VPLMADEProc., μαγικοί NCam., 
2 Κρόνου VPLNDProc.Cam.', Διός AECam.? 


156 


TETRABIBLOS II. 3 


intelligent and facile in all things, especially in the 
search for wisdom and religion; they are magicians 
and performers of secret mysteries and in general 
skilled in mathematics.! Those who live in Thebais, 
the Oasis, and Troglodytica are familiar to Libra and 
Venus ; hence they are more ardent and lively of 
nature and live in plenty. The people of Arabia, 
Azania, and Middle Ethiopia are familiar to Aquarius 
and Saturn.” for which reason they are flesh-eaters, 
fish-eaters, and nomads, living a rough, bestial life. 
Let this be our brief exposition of the familiarities 
of the planets and the signs of the zodiac with the 
various nations, and of the general characteristics 
of the latter. We shall also set forth, for ready use, 
a list of the several nations which are in familiarity, 
merely noted against each of the signs, in accordance 
with what has just been said about them, thus :— 


Aries: Britain, Gaul, Germania, Bastarnia; in 
the centre, Coelé Syria, Palestine, Idumaea, Judaea. 

Taurus: Parthia, Media, Persia; in the centre, 
the Cyclades, Cyprus, the coastal region of Asia 
Minor. 


1“ Mathematics ’’ (literally, “the studies’’) here means 
astrology; cf. the title of Sextus Empiricus’ book Πρὸς 
μαθηματικούς, “ Against the Astrologers.”’ 

?Some MSS. and Camerarius’ second edition have 
“ Jupiter’’ in place of *‘ Saturn.”’ 


3 Haec omiserunt omnino usque ad ἐκκειμένων δὲ τούτων 
PLNCam.! ; VMADEProc. res in columnis disponunt sig- 
norum nominibus in capite additis, verbis etiam περὶ τὸ μέσον 
(quae om. Cam.?) in propriis locis insertis. 


157 


PTOLEMY 


Aidvpor + “Ὑρκανία, Ἀρμενία, Marvavy: περὶ τὸ 
/ ~ 
μέσον Kupnvaixy,' Μαρμαρική, ἡ κάτω χώρα τῆς 
Αἰγύπτου. 
Καρκίνος. Νουμηδία, Καρχηδονία, ᾿Αφρική : 
\ 
περὶ τὸ μέσον Βιθυνία, Φρυγία, Κολχική. 
Λέων - ᾿Ιταλία, Γαλλία, Σικελία, ᾿4πουλία περὶ 
/ 
τὸ μέσον Φοινίκη, Xaddaia, ᾿Ορχηνία. 
Παρθένος - Μεσοποταμία, Βαβυλωνία, ‘Accupia - 
\ \ / € / > / / 
περὶ τὸ μέσον ᾿Ελλάς, Ayaia, Κρήτη. 
Ζυγός - Βακτριανή, Κασπηρία, Σηρική περὶ 
/ ᾿ 
τὸ μέσον Θηβαΐς, "Oacis, Τρωγλοδυτική. 
μ of (Bie ὯΙ 
/ A 
Skoptios: Meraywviris, Mavpiravia, Ta- 
yA 2 ρ ἢ 
, \ ‘ / / , 
τουλία - περὶ τὸ μέσον Συρία, Koupayynvyn, Kar- 
παδοκία 
Τοξότης - Τυρρηνία, Κελτική, “Ϊσπανία epi 
τὸ μέσον “ApaBia ἡ εὐδαίμων. 
14 ΑἸἰγόκερως - ᾿Ινδική, ᾿Αριανή, Γεδρωσία : περὶ 
τὸ μέσον Θράκη, Μακεδονία, ᾽Ϊλλυρίς. 
“Ὑδροχόος - Σαυροματική, ᾿Οξειανή, Σουγδιανή " 
\ A / oA / Al ἐφ / Até / 
περὶ τὸ μέσον Apafia, 'Alavia, μέση Αἰθιοπία. 
᾿Ιχθῦς - Φαζανία, Νασαμωνῖτις, Γαραμαντική - 
περὶ τὸ μέσον Λυδία, Κιλικία, Παμφυλία." 
᾿Εκκειμένων δὲ τούτων εὔλογον κἀκεῖνα τούτῳ 
τῷ μέρει προσθεῖναι, διότι καὶ τῶν ἀπλανῶν 
ἀστέρων ἕκαστος συνοικειοῦται ταῖς χώραις ὅσαις 
καὶ τὰ τοῦ ζωδιακοῦ μέρη, μεθ᾽ ὧν ἔχουσιν ot 
ἀπλανεῖς τὰς προσνεύσεις ἐπὶ τοῦ διὰ τῶν πόλων 


! Κυρηναϊκή libri, om. Cam. 
5 γίνονται χῶραι οβ΄ post haec add. VMProc. 


158 


TETRABIBLOS II. 3 


Gemini: Hyrcania, Armenia, Matiana; in the 
centre, Cyrenaica, Marmarica, Lower Egypt. 

Cancer: Numidia, Carthage, Africa; in the 
centre, Bithynia, Phrygia, Colchica. 

Leo: Italy, Cisalpine Gaul, Sicily, Apulia; in the 
centre, Phoenicia, Chaldaea, Orchenia. 

Virgo: Mesopotamia, Babylonia, Assyria ; in the 
centre, Hellas, Achaia, Crete. 

Libra: Bactriana, Casperia, Serica ; in the centre, 
Thebais, Oasis, Troglodytica. 

Scorpio: Metagonitis, Mauritania, Gaetulia; in 
the centre, Syria, Commagené, Cappadocia. 

Sagittarius: Tyrrhenia, Celtica, Spain; in the 
centre, Arabia Felix. 

Capricorn : India, Ariana, Gedrosia ; in the centre, 
Thrace, Macedonia, Illyria. 

Aquarius: Sauromatica, Oxiana, Sogdiana; in 
the centre, Arabia, Azania, Middle Ethiopia. 

Pisces: Phazania, Nasamonitis, Garamantica ; 
in the centre, Lydia, Cilicia, Pamphylia.! 

Now that the subject at hand has been set forth, 
it is reasonable to attach to this section this further 
consideration—that each of the fixed stars has 
familiarity with the countries with which the parts 
of the zodiac, which have the same inclinations as 
the fixed stars? upon the circle drawn through its 


1“* Total, 72 countries,’’ is found in some MSS. and 
Proclus. There are actually 73 in the list as given here, 
but there is a certain amount of confusion in the MSS. 

2 These are the so-called παρανατέλλοντα, stars which rise 
and set at the same time as the degrees or sections of the 
ecliptic, but to the north or south of them. See Boll- 
Bezold-Gundel, pp. 55, 141 ff. 


159 


PTOLEMY 


1 / ΄ λ / , 
γραφομένου κύκλου, φαίνεται ποιούμενα 


τὴν συμπάθειαν, καὶ ὅτι ἐπὶ τῶν μητροπόλεων 
ἐκεῖνοι μάλιστα συμπαθοῦσιν οἱ τόποι τοῦ ζωδιακοῦ 
καθ᾽ ὧν " ἐν ταῖς καταρχαῖς τῶν κτίσεων αὐτῶν ὡς 
ἐπὶ γενέσεως 3 6 τε ἥλιος καὶ ἡ σελήνη παρ- 
οδεύοντες ἐτύγχανον καὶ τῶν κέντρων μάλιστα τὸ 
ὡροσκοποῦν: ἐφ᾽ ὧν δ᾽ οἱ χρόνοι τῶν κτίσεων οὐχ 
εὑρίσκονται, καθ᾽ ὧν ἐν ταῖς" τῶν κατὰ καιρὸν 
ἀρχόντων ἢ βασιλευόντων γενέσεσιν ἐκπίπτει τὸ 
μεσουράνημα. 


αὐτοῦ 


.> ἜἜφοδος εἰς τὰς κατὰ μέρος 
προτελέσεις 


4h Pi “ / 6 5» 7 an 
OUTWY οὕτως προεπεσκεμμένων ὃ ἀκόλουθον av 
ww ‘ ‘ ~ ͵ » ,ὔ 
εἴη λοιπὸν τὰς τῶν προτελέσεων ἐφόδους κεφα- 
- \ ~ ~ 
λαιώδως ἐπελθεῖν, καὶ πρῶτον τῶν καθ᾽ ὅλας περι- 
/ ~ Ἅ 5X r ,ὔ 7 » 
τὸ στάσεις χωρῶν ἢ πόλεων λαμβανομένων. ἔσται 
5 ~ ~ > 
δ᾽ 6 τρόπος τῆς ἐπισκέψεως τοιοῦτος - ἡ μὲν οὖν 
/ ~ / 
πρώτη καὶ ἰσχυροτάτη τῶν τοιούτων συμπτωμάτων 
, 
αἰτία γίνεται παρὰ τὰς ἐκλειπτικὰς ἡλίου καὶ 
΄ / \ > A - 
σελήνης συζυγίας καὶ τὰς ἐν αὐταῖς παρόδους τῶν 
3 / ~ \ , - ,ὔ ’ὔ 
ἀστέρων. τῆς δὲ προτελέσεως αὐτῆς τὸ μέν τί 
> ’ 3 - , 
ἐστι τοπικόν, Kal’ ὃ δεῖ προγινώσκειν ποίαις 
1 αὐτῶν NACam. 2 ὧν PMAE, ὃν VLNDCam. 
3 γενέσεως VD, -εων (-awwv) PNMAECam., ἐπιγενέσεων L. 
4 καθ᾽ ὧν MAE, καθ᾽ ἣν VD, om. PLNCam. 
5 ἐν ταῖς VPLMADE, εἰς τὴν... γένεσιν NCam. 
8 προεπεσκεμμένων VD, προεσκημένων P, προεσκευασμένων L, 
προκειμένων A, προεκκειμένων (-eyx-) MNECam., προειρημένων 


Proc. 
7 λαμβανομένων VME, -ov D, -as NACam., λαμβάνομεν PL. 


160 


TETRABIBLOS ΤΙ. 3-4 


poles, appear to exert sympathy; furthermore, that, 
in the case of metropolitan cities, those regions of 
the zodiac are most sympathetic through which the 
sun and moon, and of the centres especially the 
horoscope, were passing at the first founding of 
the city, as in a nativity. But in cases in which 
the exact times of the foundations are not discovered, 
the regions are sympathetic in which falls the mid- 
heaven of the nativities of those who held office or 
were kings at the time.' 


4. Method of Making Particular Predictions. 


After this introductory examination it would be 
the next task to deal briefly with the procedure of 
the predictions, and first with those concerned with 
general conditions of countries or cities. The method 
of the inquiry will be as follows: The first and most 
potent cause of such events lies in the conjunctions 
of the sun and moon at eclipse and the movements 
of the stars at the time. Of the prediction itself, 
one portion is regional ; 2. therein we must foresee 


‘The procedure, therefore, is to treat a city like a person 
and cast its nativity, using instead of the time of birth the 
time of founding. If the latter is not accurately known, 
the astrologer should take the nativity of the founder, or 
other individual prominent in the enterprise, and observe 
where its mid-heaven talls. 

2 Ptolemy divides inquiries about cities and countries 
into four heads; what place is affected, the time and 
duration of the event, the generic classification of the 
event (i.e. what classes, genera, it will affect), and the 
quality, or nature, of the event itself. His terminology is 
Aristotelian. The next four chapters deal with the four 


phases of the inquiry. 
161 


PTOLEMY 


/ δ / « ‘ / > , Ἅ Α 
χώραις 7) πόλεσιν αἱ κατὰ μέρος ἐκλείψεις ἢ καὶ 
~ « 
τῶν πλανωμένων αἱ κατὰ καιροὺς ἔμμονοι | στάσεις * 
- Resa? , \ \ .» “ 
αὗται δέ εἰσι Κρόνου τε καὶ Atos καὶ Ἄρεως, ὅταν 
στηρίζωσι - 3 ποιοῦνται γὰρ τότε τὰς ὃ ἐπισημασίας * 
τὸ δέ τι χρονικόν, καθ᾽ ὃ τὸν καιρὸν τῶν ἐπιση- 
~ ΄- / \ / 
μασιῶν Kal τῆς παρατάσεως τὴν ποσότητα δεήσει 
προγινώσκειν " τὸ δέ τι γενικόν, καθ᾽ 6 προσήκει 
λαμβάνειν περὶ ποῖα τῶν γενῶν ἀποβήσεται τὸ σύμ- 
A > A ~ 
πτωμα > τελευταῖον δὲ τὸ εἰδικόν, καθ᾽ ὃ τὴν αὐτοῦ 
~ fe 
τοῦ ἀποτελεσθησομένου ποιότητα θεωρήσομεν. 


<e.> Περὶ τῆς τῶν διατιθεμένων 
χωρῶν ἐπισκέψεως 


Tlepi μὲν οὖν τοῦ πρώτου καὶ τοπικοῦ τὴν διά- 
ληψιν ποιησόμεθα τοιαύτην: κατὰ γὰρ τὰς γινο- 
μένας ἐκλειπτικὰς συζυγίας ἡλίου καὶ σελήνης, καὶ 
μάλιστα τὰς εὐαισθητοτέρας, ἐπισκεψόμεθα τόν τε 
ἐκλειπτικὸν τοῦ ζωδιακοῦ τόπον καὶ τὰς τῶν κατ᾽ 
αὐτὸν 4 τριγώνων ὃ συνοικειουμένας ὅ χώρας " καὶ 
ὁμοίως τίνες τῶν πόλεων ἤτοι ἐκ τῆς κατὰ τὴν 
πὸ κτίσιν ὡροσκοπίας καὶ φωσφορίας ἢ ἐκ τῆς τῶν 


1 ἔμμονοι vM AD, ἔμμηνοι PNECam. .. ἔμμηνα L; of. αἱ τῶν 
πλανωμένων ἐπιμένουσαι κατὰ καιροὺς στάσεις Proc. 
2 στηρίζωσι VADProc., -ovra L, -οντες PNMECam. 
8 ποιοῦνται... τὰς κτλ. VD Proce. ; ποιῶσι(ν) (aut ποιήσωσι) 
τὰς κτλ. alii libri Cam. 
4 κατ᾽ αὐτὸν VMADE, κατ᾽ αὐτῶν L, κατὰ τῶν P, κατὰ τὰ 
NCam. 
5 τριγώνων VPLMDH, -w A, -a NCam. 
ὃ συνοικειουμένας VADE, -wy MNCam., -ewpevas P, 
-ειωμένων L. 


162 


TETRABIBLOS ITI. 4-5 


for what countries or cities there is significance 
in the various eclipses or in the occasional regular 
stations of the planets, that is, of Saturn, Jupiter, 
and Mars, whenever they halt, for then they are 
significant. Another division of the prediction is 
chronological ; therein the need will be to foretell the 
time of the portents and their duration. A part, too, 
is generic; through this we ought to understand 
with what classes the event will be concerned. And 
finally there is the specific aspect, by which we shall 
discern the quality of the event itself. 


5. Of the Examination of the Countries Affected. 


We are to judge of the first portion of the inquiry, 
which is regional, in the following manner: In the 
eclipses of sun and moon ! as they occur, particularly 
those more easily observed,” we shall examine the 
region of the zodiac in which they take place, and 
the countries in familiarity with its triangles, and in 
similar fashion ascertain which of the cities, either 
from their horoscope * at the time of their founding 
and the position of the luminaries at the time, or 


1 Johannes Laurentius Lydus (De ostentis, 9) deals with 
a system of prediction whereby eclipses of the sun refer 
to Asia and those of the moon to Europe. Ptolemy 
makes no such sweeping distinction. 

2 Ptolemy takes no account of eclipses not visible at the 
place concerned. 

3 That is, the sign in the ascendant, or horoscopic posi- 
tion, at that time. 


163 


PTOLEMY 


, 
τότε ἡγεμονευόντων μεσουρανήσεως συμπάθειαν 
ἔχουσι πρὸς τὸ τῆς ἐκλείψεως δωδεκατημόριον. 
279 a 3 bal ~ Ἃ ᾽ὔ « , A 
ἐφ᾽ ὅσων δ᾽ av χωρῶν ἢ πόλεων εὑρίσκωμεν τὴν 
προκειμένην συνοικείωσιν, περὶ πάσας ' μὲν ὡς ἐπὶ 
πᾶν ὑπονοητέον ἔσεσθαί τι σύμπτωμα, μάλιστα δὲ 
‘ δ ‘ 5 \ A ~ > / 

περὶ τὰς πρὸς αὐτὸ TO τῆς ἐκλείψεως δωδεκατη- 
μόριον λόγον ἐχούσας καὶ ἐν ὅσαις αὐτῶν ὑπὲρ γῆν 
> com Ν > , 2 
οὖσα ἡ ἔκλειψις ἐφαίνετο. 


<s.> Περὶ τοῦ χρόνου τῶν ἀποτελου- 
μένων 


Τὸ δὲ δεύτερον καὶ χρονικὸν κεφάλαιον, καθ᾽ ὃ 
τοὺς καιροὺς τῶν ἐπισημασιῶν καὶ τῆς παρατάσεως 
τὴν ποσότητα προσήκει διαγινώσκειν, ἐπισκεψόμεθα 
τρόπῳ τοιῷδε. τῶν γὰρ κατὰ τὸν αὐτὸν χρόνον 
γινομένων ἐκλείψεων μὴ κατὰ πᾶσαν οἴκησιν ἐν 
ταῖς αὐταῖς καιρικαῖς ὥραις ἀποτελουμένων, τῶν τε 
ἡλιακῶν τῶν αὐτῶν 3 μηδὲ τὰ μεγέθη τῶν ἐπισκοτή- 
σεων ἢ τὸν χρόνον τῶν παρατάσεων κατὰ τὸ ἴσον 
πανταχῆ λαμβανουσῶν, πρῶτον μὲν κατὰ τὴν ἐν 
ἑκάστῃ τῶν λόγον ἐχουσῶν οἰκήσεων ἐκλειπτικὴν 
ὥραν καὶ τὸ τοῦ πόλου ἔξαρμα κέντρα ὡς ἐπὶ 

1 πάσας] cf. Proc. πᾶσαι : ταύτας NCam. 

2 ἐφαίνετο VADEProc., φαίνεται Ῥ (φεν-)Ὶ. ΜΝ Όδτα. 

ὃϑτῶν αὐτῶν VPLDProc.; δηλαδὴ καὶ τῶν σεληνιακῶν 
NACam. ; καὶ τῶν σεληνιακῶν τῶν αὐτῶν ME. 


4 κέντρα VADProc., τά τε κέντρα PLNCam., καὶ τὰ κέντρα 
ΜΕ. 


104 


TETRABIBLOS ITI. 5-6 


from the mid-heaven of the nativity ' of their then 
rulers, are sympathetic 2 to the zodiacal sign of the 
eclipse. And in whatsoever countries or cities we 
discover a familiarity of this kind, we must suppose 
that some event will occur which applies, generally 
speaking, to all of them, particularly to those which 
bear a relation to the actual zodiacal sign of the 
eclipse and to those of them in which the eclipse, 
since it took place above the earth, was visible. 


6. Of the Time of the Predicted Events. 


The second and chronological heading, whereby 
we should learn the times of the events signified and 
the length of their duration, we shall consider as 
follows. Inasmuch as the eclipses which take place 
at the same time are not completed in the same 
number of ordinary hours® in every locality, and 
since the same solar eclipses do not everywhere have 
the same degree of obscuration or the same time of 
duration, we shall first set down for the hour of the 
eclipse, in each of the related localities, and for the 
altitude of the pole,* centres, as in a nativity ; 


1The mid-heaven was regarded by many, including 
Ptolemy, as the most important of the centres, or angles, 
even surpassing the horoscope itself in its significance in 
certain ways. Cf. Bouché-Leclercq, p. 271 (with n. 2). 

4 That is, bear an aspect to. 

3 Civil hours, twelfth parts of the day-time or the night- 
time. They vary in length according to the latitude and 
the time of the year. Cf. the note on horary periods, iii. 
10 (p. 292, n. 2). 

‘That is, the latitude; from this the centres or angles 
can be determined, 


105 


PTOLEMY 


ὃ θ / ” ee eas ’, 1 > 
γενέσεως διαθήσομεν * ἔπειτα Kal ἐπὶ πόσας" ἰσημε- 
Ν σ > « ’ > ~ 
ρινὰς ὥρας ἐν ἑκάστῃ 2 παρατείνει TO ἐπισκίασμα τῆς 
> / 7 
77 ἐκλείψεως - τούτων yap ἐξετασθέντων ὅσας ἂν ἰσημε- 
‘ a σ > - YQ ~ \ > / > οὐ 
ρινὰς ὥρας εὕρωμεν͵ ἐφ᾽ ἡλιακῆς μὲν ἐκλείψεως ἐπὶ 
/ > 
τοσούτους ἐνιαυτοὺς παραμένειν ὑπονοήσομεν TO 
3 > ~ 
ἀποτελούμενον, ἐπὶ δὲ σεληνιακῆς ἐπὶ τοσούτους 
μῆνας, τῶν μέντοι καταρχῶν καὶ τῶν ὁλοσχερεστέ- 
> ~ ~ 
ρων ἐπιτάσεων 3 θεωρουμένων ἃ ἐκ τῆς τοῦ ἐκλειπ- 
τικοῦ τόπου πρὸς τὰ κέντρα σχέσεως. πρὸς μὲν 
a > ~ 3 
γὰρ τῷ ἀπηλιωτικῷ ὁρίζοντι 6 τόπος ἐκπεσὼν τήν τε 
\ ~ / 
καταρχὴν τοῦ συμπτώματος KATA τὴν πρώτην τετρά- 
9 ~ a ? \ 
μηνον ἀπὸ τοῦ χρόνου τῆς ἐκλείψεως σημαίνει καὶ τὰς 
A > ~ 
ὁλοσχερεῖς ὃ ἐπιτάσεις περὶ TO πρῶτον τριτημόριον 
“- θ᾽ δλ 6 \ 4 7 / ἌΡ Si δὲ ~ 
τοῦ καθ᾽ ὅλην" τὴν παράτασιν χρόνου " πρὸς ὃ δὲ τῷ 
\ 
μεσουρανήματι, κατά τε τὴν δευτέραν τετράμηνον 
καὶ τὸ μέσον τριτημόριον- πρὸς δὲ τῷ λιβυκῷ 
ὁρίζοντι, κατὰ τὴν τρίτην τετράμηνον καὶ τὸ ἔσχατον 
τριτημόριον. τῶν δὲ κατὰ μέρος ἀνέσεων καὶ 
ἐπιτάσεων ἀπό τε τῶν ἀνὰ μέσον συζυγιῶν, ὅταν 
~ >? ~ 
κατὰ τῶν TO αἴτιον ἐμποιούντων τόπων ἢ τῶν 
συσχηματιζομένων τόπων αὐτοῖς συμπίπτωσι, καὶ 


1 ὡς ἐπὶ πόσας PLMNECam., om. ὡς VADProc. 


2 Post ἑκάστῃ add. τῶν λόγον ἐχουσῶν οἰκήσεων PLNCam. ; 
om. VMADE. 

3 τρόπους post ἐπιτάσεων add. Cam., om. libri. 

4 Gewpovpevwy VMDE, θεωροῦμεν (Aeop-) PLNACam. 

ὃ tas ὅλας ὁλοσχερεῖς PLNACam. ; ὅλας om. VMDEPros., 

ὃ kal’ ὅλην VMDE, καθ᾽ ὅλου PLNACam. 

Τ᾿ τὴν παράτασιν VPLMADHE, τῆς παρατάσεως NCam. 

8 πρὸς libri et Cam.1, ἐν Cam.? 


166 


TETRABIBLOS II. 6 


secondly, how many equinoctial hours! the obscura 
tion of the eclipse lasts in each. For when these 
data are examined, if it is a solar eclipse, we shall 
understand that the predicted event lasts as many 
years * as the equinoctial hours which we discover, 
and if a lunar eclipse, as many months. The nature 
of the beginnings * and of the more important in- 
tensifications * of the events, however, are deduced 
from the position of the place of the eclipse relative 
to the centres. For if the place of the eclipse falls on 
the eastern horizon, this signifies that the beginning 
of the predicted event is in the first period of four 
months from the time of the eclipse and that its 
important intensifications lie in the first third of the 
entire period of its duration ; if on the mid-heaven, 
in the second four months and the middle third ; if 
upon the western horizon, in the third four months 
and the final third. The beginnings of the particular 
abatements and intensifications of the event we 
deduce from the conjunctions which take place in the 
meantime,” if they occur in the significant regions or 


* An equinoctial hour is the time measured by the passage 
of 15° of the equator (τς of 360°) past the horizon or other 
fixed point. 

* A distinction is made because solar and lunar eclipses 
are of very different lengths; a total lunar eclipse may last 
nearly two hours, compared with eight minutes in the case 
of the sun. 

8. καταρχαΐί, that is, when the predicted event is due. 

4 ἐπιτάσεις, ‘“‘intensifications,’ as opposed to “ re- 
laxations’’; a metaphor drawn from the tightening and 
loosening of the strings of a musical instrument. 

δ᾽ During the period of the predicted effect (Bouché- 
Leclereq, p. 351). 


167 


PTOLEMY 


ἀπὸ τῶν ἄλλων παρόδων, ὅταν οἱ ποιητικοὶ τοῦ 
προτελέσματος ἀστέρες ἀνατολὰς ἢ δύσεις ἢ στη- 
ριγμοὺς ἢ ἀκρονύκτους φάσεις ποιῶνται, συσχη- 
ματιζόμενοι τοῖς τὸ αἴτιον ἔχουσι δωδεκατημορίοις " 

78 ἐπειδήπερ ἀνατέλλοντες μὲν ἢ στηρίζοντες ἐπιτάσεις 
ποιοῦνται τῶν συμπτωμάτων, δύνοντες δὲ καὶ ὑπὸ 
τὰς αὐγὰς ὄντες ἢ ἀκρονύκτους ποιούμενοι προηγή- 
σεις ἄνεσιν τῶν ἀποτελουμένων ποιοῦσιν. 


<C> Περὶ τοῦ γένους τῶν διατιθεμένων 


Τρίτου δ᾽ ὄντος κεφαλαίου τοῦ γενικοῦ, καθ᾽ ὃ δεῖ 
διαλαβεῖν περὶ ποῖα τῶν γενῶν ἀποβήσεται τὸ 
σύμπτωμα, λαμβάνεται καὶ τοῦτο διὰ τῆς τῶν 
ζῳδίων ἰδιοτροπίας καὶ μορφώσεως καθ᾽ ὧν ἂν 
τύχωσιν ὄντες οἵ τε τῶν ἐκλείψεων τόποι καὶ οἱ τὴν 
οἰκοδεσποτίαν λαβόντες τῶν ἀστέρων, τῶν τε πλανω- 
μένων καὶ τῶν ἀπλανῶν, τοῦ τε τῆς ἐκλείψεως 
δωδεκατημορίου καὶ τοῦ κατὰ τὸ κέντρον τὸ πρὸ 
τῆς ἐκλείψεως. λαμβάνεται δὲ ἡ τούτων οἰκοδε- 
σποτία ἐπὶ μὲν τῶν πλανωμένων ἀστέρων οὕτως. 
ὁ γὰρ τοὺς πλείστους λόγους ἔχων πρὸς ἀμφοτέρους 
τοὺς ἐκκειμένους τόπους, τόν τε τῆς ἐκλείψεως καὶ 
τὸν τοῦ ἑπομένου αὐτῷ κέντρου, κατά τε τὰς ἔγγιστα 
καὶ φαινομένας συναφὰς ἢ ἀπορροίας καὶ τοὺς 
λόγους ἔχοντας τῶν συσχηματισμῶν, καὶ ἔτι κατὰ 
τὴν κυρίαν τῶν τε οἴκων καὶ τριγώνων καὶ ὑψω- 
μάτων ἢ καὶ ὁρίων, ἐκεῖνος λήψεται “ὄνος τὴν 

1 παρόδων VP (παρρ-) LDProc.; παρανατελλόντων MNAE 
Cam. 


108 


TETRABIBLOS II. 6-7 


the regions in some aspect to them, and also from 
the other movements of the planets, if those that 
effect the predicted event are either rising or setting 
or stationary or at evening rising, and are at the 
same time in some aspect to the zodiacal signs that 
hold the cause ; for planets when they are rising or 
stationary produce intensifications in the events, but 
when setting, and under the rays of the sun,’ or ad- 
vancing at evening, they bring about an abatement. 


7. Of the Class of those Affected. 


The third heading is that of generic classification, 
whereby one must determine what classes the event 
will affect. This is ascertained from the special 
nature and form of the zodiacal signs in which happen 
to be the places of the eclipses and in which are the 
heavenly bodies, planets and fixed stars alike, that 
govern both the sign of the eclipse and that of the 
angle preceding the eclipse. In the case of the 
planets we discover the rulership of these regions 
thus: The one which has the greatest number of 
relationships to both the regions aforesaid, that of 
the eclipse and that of the angle which follows it, 
both by virtue of the nearest visible applications or 
recessions, and by those of the aspects which bear 
a-relation, and furthermore by rulership of the 
houses, triangles, exaltations, and terms, that planet 

1Too near the sun to be visible; combustus ; cf. Bouché- 


Leclereq, p. 111, n. 3. “‘Advancing”’ is the same as 
“adding to its motion”’; ef. above, p. 115, n. 4. 





‘ ‘ ~ ~ 
270K. τὸ πρὸ P (πρὼλ L; τοῦ κέντρου τοῦ πρὸ MAE; κατὰ 


τοῦ κέντρου πρὸ τῆς κτλ. Proc. ; τὸ πρὸ om. VDNCam. 


ῳ 169 


PTOLEMY 


οἰκοδεσποτίαν * εἰ δὲ μὴ ὁ αὐτὸς εὑρίσκοιτο τῆς 
τε ἐκλείψεως καὶ τοῦ κέντρου κύριος, δύο" τοὺς 
19 πρὸς ἑκάτερον τῶν τόπων τὰς πλείους ἔχοντας, 
ὡς πρόκειται, συνοικειώσεις συμπαραληπτέον, προ- 
κρινομένου τοῦ τῆς ἐκλείψεως κυρίου - εἰ δὲ πλείους 
εὑρίσκοιντο καθ᾽ ἑκάτερον ἐφάμιλλοι͵ τὸν ἐπικεντρό- 
τερον ἢ χρηματιστικώτερον ἢ τῆς αἱρέσεως μᾶλλον 
ὄντα προκρινοῦμεν εἰς τὴν οἰκοδεσποτίαν. ἐπὶ δὲ 
τῶν ἀπλανῶν συμπαραληψόμεθα τόν τε αὐτῷ τῷ 
ἐκλειπτικῷ χρόνῳ 2 συγκεχρηματικότα πρῶτον τῶν 
λαμπρῶν ὃ ἐπὶ τῆς παρῳχημένης κεντρώσεως κατὰ 
τοὺς διωρισμένους ἡμῖν ἐν τῇ πρώτῃ συντάξει τῶν 
ἐννέα τρόπων φαινομένους σχηματισμούς, καὶ τὸν 
ἐν τῇ φαινομένῃ κατὰ τὴν ἐκλειπτικὴν ὥραν δια- 
θέσει, ἤτοι συνανατείλαντα ἢ συμμεσουρανήσαντα τῷ 
κατὰ τὰ ἑπόμενα κέντρῳ 4 τοῦ τόπου τῆς ἐκλείψεως. 
Θεωρηθέντων δὲ οὕτως τῶν εἰς τὴν αἰτίαν τοῦ 
συμπτώματος παραλαμβανομένων ἀστέρων, συνεπι- 
σκεψώμεθα καὶ τὰς τῶν ζῳδίων μορφώσεις ἐν οἷς 
ἥ τε ἔκλειψις καὶ οἱ τὴν κυρίαν λαβόντες ἀστέρες 
ἔτυχον ὄντες, ὡς ἀπὸ τῆς τούτων ἰδιοτροπίας καὶ 
τοῦ ποιοῦ τῶν διατιθεμένων γενῶν ὡς ἐπὶ πᾶν 
λαμβανομένου. τὰ μὲν γὰρ ἀνθρωπόμορφα τῶν 
ζῳδίων τῶν τε περὶ τὸν διὰ μέσων τῶν ζῳδίων 
1 δύο δὲ PLNCam., ἀλλὰ δύο MAE, δὲ om. VDProc. 
2 χρόνῳ VDProc., τόπῳ alii Cam. 


8 τῶν λαμπρῶν VMADEProc., τὸν λαμπρὸν PL, τῷ λαμπρῷ 
NCam. 4 κέντρῳ VMADEProc., -a PLNCam. 





1The anonymous commentator on Ptolemy gives as 
examples of reasons for preferring one to another that it is 


170 


TETRABIBLOS II. 7 


alone will hold the dominance. However, if the same 
planet is not found to be both lord of the eclipse and 
of the angle, we must take together the two which 
have the greatest number of familiarities, as aforesaid, 
to either one of the regions, giving preference to the 
lord of the eclipse. And if several rivals be found on 
either count, we shall prefer for the domination the 
one which is closest to an angle, or is more significant, 
or is more closely allied by sect.1_ In the case of the 
fixed stars, we shall take the first one of the brilliant 
stars which signifies upon the preceding angle at 
the actual time of the eclipse, according to the nine 
kinds of visible aspects defined in our first com- 
pilation,? and the star which of the group visible at 
the time of the eclipse has either risen or reached 
meridian with the angle following the place of the 
eclipse. 

When we have thus reckoned the stars that share 
in causing the event, let us also consider the forms 
of the signs of the zodiac in which the eclipse and 
the dominating stars as well happened to be, since 
from their character the quality of the classes 
affected is generally discerned. Constellations of 
human form, both in the zodiac and among the 


‘ 


in the superior hemisphere, or is “‘ adding to its motion,”’ 
or rising, or if these characteristics appear in all the rivals, 
that it is of the proper sect. 

* The reference is to the Almagest, viii. 4. They are 
πρωινὸς ἀπηλιώτης (matutine subsolar), πρωινὸν μεσουράνημα 
(matutine culmination), πρωινὸς Ads (matutine setting), 
μεσημβρινὸς ἀπηλιώτης (meridianal subsolar), μεσημβρινὸν 
μεσουράνημα (meridianal culmination), μεσημβρινὸς λίψ 
(meridianal setting), owos ἀπηλιώτης (vespertine sub- 
solar), ὀψινὸν μεσουράνημα (vespertine culmination), and 
ὀψινὸς Ap (vespertine setting). 

171 


PTOLEMY 


~ > aA > 
κύκλον Kal τῶν κατὰ τοὺς ἀπλανεῖς ἀστέρας, περὶ 
τὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων γένος ποιεῖ τὸ ἀποτελούμενον. 
80 τῶν δὲ ἄλλων χερσαίων τὰ μὲν τετράποδα περὶ τὰ 
ὅμοια τῶν ἀλόγων ζῴων, τὰ δὲ ἑρπυστικὰ περὶ 
τοὺς ὄφεις καὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα. καὶ πάλιν τὰ μὲν 
> ~ ΄ 
θηριώδη περὶ τὰ ἀνήμερα τῶν ζῴων καὶ βλαπτικὰ 
~ ~ 7 
τοῦ τῶν ἀνθρώπων γένους, τὰ δὲ ἥμερα περὶ τὰ 
A 
χρηστικὰ καὶ χειροήθη} καὶ συνεργητικὰ πρὸς 
3 A 
τὰς εὐετηρίας ἀναλόγως τοῖς καθ᾽ ἕκαστα μορφώ- 
μασιν, οἷον ἵππων ἢ βοῶν ἢ προβάτων καὶ τῶν 
τοιούτων. ἔτι δὲ τῶν χερσαίων τὰ μὲν πρὸς 
a “ ~ ~ / 
ταῖς ἄρκτοις μᾶλλον περὶ τὰς τῆς γῆς αἰφνιδί- 
ovs κινήσεις, τὰ δὲ πρὸς μεσημβρίαν περὶ τὰς 
~ ? 
ἀπροσδοκήτους ἐκ τοῦ ἀέρος ῥύσεις. πάλιν δὲ ἐν 
a - ΄ tA 
μὲν τοῖς TOV πτερωτῶν μορφώμασιν ὄντες οἱ κύριοι 
~ ‘ 
τόποι οἷον Ilapbévw, Τοξότῃ, “Opvibt,? ἀετῷ 3 καὶ 
“ ν ‘ \ Ἵ \ \ / - ‘\ > 
τοῖς τοιούτοις, περὶ TA πτηνὰ καὶ μάλιστα τὰ εἰς 
“- > \ - 
τροφὴν ἀνθρώπων τὸ σύμπτωμα ποιοῦσιν, ἐν δὲ τοῖς 
a ~ \ 4 
νηκτοῖς * περὶ τὰ ἔνυδρα καὶ τοὺς ἰχθῦς. Kal τούτων 
> \ - , a , ὅπ 
ἐν μὲν τοῖς θαλαττίοις, οἷον Καρκίνῳ, Αἰγόκερῳ, 
4 Xr A 5 \ \ θ λ Ψ᾽ \ om” i ~ δ ~ 
eAdin,®> περὶ τὰ θαλάττια, Kal ἔτι τὰς τῶν στολῶν 
1 καὶ καταχρηστικὰ post χειροήθη add. PLNCam.; om. 
VMADE. 
2"Opride VMADE, -os PNCam., ’Opvéwv L. 
3 Δετῷ VMADE, ς΄. Proc. ; τοῖς ᾽Ορνέοις PLNCam. 
4ynxrois NAECam.!; cf. νηχόμενα Proc.; νυκτοῖς alii 


Cam.? 
® Δελφῖνι VMADE, -νῳ PL, -va NCam. 





1Cf. i. 12 for classifications of the signs. Rhetorius, 
ap. CCAG, i. 164 ff., names as signs of human form 
Gemini, Virgo, Libra, Aquarius, and (in part) Sagittarius. 


172 


TETRABIBLOS II. 7 


fixed stars, cause the event to concern the human 
race.| Of the other terrestrial signs,? the four- 
footed * are concerned with the four-footed dumb 
animals, and the signs formed like creeping things * 
with serpents and the like. Again, the animal ὃ signs 
have significance for the wild animals and those which 
injure the human race ; the tame signs concern the use- 
ful and domesticated animals, and those which help 
to gain prosperity, in consistency with their several 
forms ; for example, horses, oxen, sheep, and the like. 
Again, of the terrestrial signs, the northern tend to 
signify sudden earthquakes and the southern un- 
expected rains fromthesky. Yet again, those domi- 
nant regions that are in the form of winged creatures,® 
such as Virgo, Sagittarius, Cygnus, Aquila, and the 
like, exercise an effect upon winged creatures, par- 
ticularly those which are used for human food, and 
if they are in the form of swimming things, upon 
water animals and fish. And of these, in the con- 
stellations pertaining to the sea,’ such as Cancer, 
Capricorn, and the Dolphin, they influence the 


Among the extra-zodiacal constellations might be cited 
Orion, Perseus, Andromeda, ete. 

2 Rhetorius, loc. cit., names Aries, Taurus, Gemini, Leo, 
Virgo, Libra, Scorpio. 

3 Aries, Taurus, Leo, Sagittarius (Rhetorius, loc. citt.). 

4 To be sought among extra-zodiacal constellations, such 
as Draco, rather than the zodiac. 

5 θηριώδη; Taurus, Leo, and Scorpio, according to 
Rhetorius, loc. cit. 

6 Rhetorius, loc. cit., names Virgo, Sagittarius, Pisces. 

7 Rhetorius, loc. cit., designates as watery (évvdpa) 
Pisces, Cancer, Capricorn, Aquarius, and Sagittarius, of 
the zodiac. 


173 


8 


— 


PTOLEMY 


dvaywyds ἐν δὲ τοῖς ποταμίοις οἷον “Ὑδροχόῳ Kat 
᾿Ιχθύσι, περὶ τὰ ποτάμια καὶ τὰ πηγαῖα κατὰ δὲ 
τὴν Apyw περὶ ἀμφότερα τὰ γένη. ὡσαύτως δ᾽ 1 
ἐν τοῖς τροπικοῖς ἢ ἰσημερινοῖς ὄντες κοινῶς μὲν 
περὶ τὰ τοῦ ἀέρος καταστήματα καὶ τὰς οἰκείας 
ἑκάστοις αὐτῶν ὥρας ἀποτελοῦσι τὰς ἐπισημασίας, 
ἰδίως δὲ καὶ περὶ τὸ ἔαρ καὶ περὶ" τὰ ἐκ τῆς γῆς 
φυόμενα. κατὰ μὲν γὰρ τὴν ἐαρινὴν ἰσημερίαν 
ὄντες περὶ τοὺς βλαστοὺς τῶν δενδρικῶν καρπῶν, 
οἷον ἀμπέλου, συκῆς, καὶ τῶν συνακμαζόντων " 
κατὰ δὲ τὴν θερινὴν τροπὴν περὶ τὰς τῶν καρπο- 
φορηθέντων συγκομιδὰς καὶ ἀποθέσεις - ἐν Αἰγύπτῳ 
δὲ ἰδικῶς καὶ περὶ τὴν τοῦ Νείλου ἀνάβασιν - κατὰ 
δὲ τὴν μετοπωρινὴν ἰσημερίαν περὶ τὸν σπόρον καὶ 
τὰ χορτικὰ, καὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα" κατὰ δὲ τὴν χειμερινὴν 
τροπὴν περὶ τὰς λαχανείας καὶ τὰ κατὰ τοῦτον τὸν 
καιρὸν ἐπιπολάζοντα ὀρνέων ἢ ἰχθύων γένη ἔτι 
δὲ καὶ τὰ μὲν ἰσημερινὰ τοῖς ἱεροῖς καὶ ταῖς περὶ 
τοὺς θεοὺς θρησκείαις ἐπισημαίνει - τὰ δὲ τροπικὰ 
ταῖς τῶν ἀέρων καὶ ταῖς τῶν πολιτικῶν εἰθισμένων 3 
μεταβολαῖς - τὰ δὲ στερεὰ τοῖς θεμελίοις καὶ τοῖς 
οἰκοδομήμασι: τὰ δὲ δίσωμα καὶ τοῖς ἀνθρώποις 
καὶ τοῖς βασιλεῦσιν. ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ τὰ μὲν πρὸς 
ταῖς ἀνατολαῖς μᾶλλον ἔχοντα τὴν θέσιν ἐν τῷ 
χρόνῳ τῆς ἐκλείψεως περὶ τοὺς καρποὺς καὶ τὴν 
νέαν ἡλικίαν καὶ τοὺς θεμελίους τὸ ἐσόμενον 
σημαίνει: τὰ δὲ πρὸς τῷ ὑπὲρ γῆν μεσουρανή- 
ματι περὶ τὰ ἱερὰ καὶ τοὺς βασιλέας καὶ τὴν μέσην 
ἡλικίαν" τὰ δὲ πρὸς ταῖς δυσμαῖς περὶ τὰς τῶν 
1 ὡσαύτως. οἱ δ(έ) MNCam. 


114 


TETRABIBLOS II. 7 


creatures of the sea and the sailing of fleets. In the 
constellations pertaining to rivers, such as Aquarius 
and Pisces, they concern the creatures of rivers and 
springs, and in Argo they affect both classes alike. 
Likewise stars in the solstitial | or equinoctial signs 
have significance in general for the conditions of the 
air and the seasons related to each of these signs, 
and in particular they concern the spring and things 
which grow from the earth. For when they are at 
the spring equinox they affect the new shoots of the 
arboreal crops, such as grapes and figs, and what- 
ever matures with them ; at the summer solstice, the 
gathering and storing of the crops, and in Egypt. 
peculiarly, the rising of the Nile; at the autumn 
solstice they concern the sowing, the hay crops, and 
such ; and at the winter equinox the vegetables and 
the kinds of birds and fish most common at this 
season. Further, the equinoctial signs have sig- 
nificance for sacred rites and the worship of the gods ; 
the solstitial signs, for changes in the air and in 
political customs ; the solid signs,” for foundations 
and the construction of houses ; the bicorporeal, for 
men and kings. Similarly, those which are closer to 
the orient at the time of the eclipse signify what is 
to be concerning the crops, youth, and foundations ; 
those near the mid-heaven above the earth, con- 
cerning sacred rites, kings, and middle age; and 


1 Of. i. 11. 2 Ibid. 





3 τὸ ἔαρ καὶ περὶ PLNCam.Proc., om. VMADE; καὶ (post 
ἔαρ) om. PLN. 
3 ἐθισμένων VD, ἐθισμῶν MAE, ἐθίμων NCam., ἐθήμων P, 
εὐθύμων L. 
175 


PTOLEMY 


; ; 
νομίμων μετατροπὰς καὶ τὴν παλαιὰν ἡλικίαν καὶ 
τοὺς κατοιχομένους. 

Kai περὶ τὸ πόστον δὲ μέρος τοῦ ὑποκειμένου 

82 γένους ἡ διάθεσις ἐπελεύσεται, τό τε τῆς ἐπισκοτή- 

~ > / / « / \ ¢ ~ 
σεως τῶν ἐκλείψεων μέγεθος ὑποβάλλει Kai at τῶν 
τὸ αἴτιον ἐμποιούντων ἀστέρων πρὸς τὸν ἐκλειπτικὸν 
/ 
τόπον σχέσεις. ἑσπέριοι μὲν yap σχηματιζόμενοι 
\ \ ὅλ \ > Ἂ / 1 ta δὲ \ \ 
πρὸς τὰς ἡλιακὰς ἐκλείψεις, ἑῷοι δὲ πρὸς τὰς 
/ pack \ ” ς > \ ~ 
σεληνιακάς, ἐπὶ τὸ ἔλαττον ws ἐπὶ πᾶν διατιθέασι- 
διαμετροῦντες δὲ ἐπὶ τὸ ἥμισυ ἑῷοι δὲ σχηματι- 
ζόμενοι πρὸς τὰς ἡλιακὰς ἢ ἑσπέριοι πρὸς τὰς 
σεληνιακὰς ἐπὶ τὸ πλεῖον 


— \ ~ ~ ~ > 
«n> Ilepi. πιῆ ς, adrob tot amoredXEa- 
ματος ποιότητος 


Τέταρτον δ᾽ ἐστὶ κεφάλαιον τὸ περὶ αὐτῆς τῆς 
τοῦ ἀποτελέσματος ποιότητος, τουτέστι, πότερον 
ἀγαθῶν 7 τῶν ἐναντίων ἐστὶ ποιητικὸν καὶ ποδαπὸν 
ἐφ᾽ ἑκάτερον κατὰ τὸ τοῦ εἴδους ἰδιότροπον. τοῦτο 
δὲ ἀπὸ τῆς τῶν οἰκοδεσποτησάντων ἀστέρων τοὺς 
κυρίους τόπους ποιητικῆς φύσεως καταλαμβάνεται 
καὶ τῆς συγκράσεως τῆς τε πρὸς ἀλλήλους καὶ τοὺς 
τόπους Kal? ὧν ἂν ὦσι τετυχηκότες. ὁ μὲν γὰρ 
ἥλιος καὶ ἡ σελήνη διατάκται καὶ 5 ὥσπερ ἡγεμόνες 

1 ἐκλείψεις VMADEProc., om. PLNCam. 


3 διατάκται καὶ VD, διατέτακται καὶ MAE, διατακτικοὶ (om: 
καὶ) P (-τοικ-) LNCam. 





τ Planets become feminized by the occidental position 
(cf. i. 6) and hence oppose the sun; in oriental position 


176 


TETRABIBLOS II. 7-8 


those near the occident, concerning change of cus- 
toms, old age, and those who have passed away. 

To the question, how large a portion of the class 
involved will the event affect, the answer is supplied 
by the extent of the obscuration of the eclipses, and 
by the positions relative to the place of the eclipse 
held by the stars which furnish the cause. For 
when they are occidental to solar eclipses,! or oriental 
to lunar, they usually affect a minority ; in oppo- 
sition, a half; and the majority, if they are oriental 
to solar eclipses or occidental to lunar. 


8. Of the Quality of the Predicted Event. 


The fourth heading concerns the quality of the 
predicted event, that is, whether it is productive of 
good or the opposite, and of what sort is its 
effect in either direction, in accordance with the 
peculiar character of the species. This is appre- 
hended from the nature of the activity of the 
planets which rule the dominant places and from 
their combination both with one another and with 
the places in which they happen to be. For the 


sun and the moon are the marshals and, as it were, 


they are masculinized and oppose the moon. Hence the 
effect is minimized. When, however, they work with the 
sun (in oriental position and masculine) or with the moon, 
the eclipse has a greater effect. Cf. Bouché-Leclercq, 
Ρ. 353, n. 3. 

* As Bouché-Leclereq (p. 355) points out, the natural 
tendency in antiquity would be to assume that any eclipse 
portends evil. Ptolemy’s predilection for classification 
causes him to examine the question in the light of the nature 
and characters of the planets (cf. i. 5). 


177 


PTOLEMY 


εἰσὶ τῶν ἄλλων, αὐτοὶ αἴτιοι γενόμενοι τοῦ TE KATA 
τὴν ἐνέργειαν ὅλου καὶ τῆς τῶν ἀστέρων οἰκοδε- 
σποτίας καὶ ἔτι τῆς τῶν οἰκοδεσποτησάντων ἰσχύος 
ἢ ἀδρανείας. ἡ δὲ τῶν τὴν κυρίαν λαβόντων συγ- 
κρατικὴ θεωρία τὴν τῶν ἀποτελεσμάτων δείκνυσι 
ποιότητα. 

83 "Apédpucba δὲ τῆς καθ᾽ ἕκαστον τῶν πλανωμένων 
ποιητικῆς | ἰδιοτροπίας, ἐκεῖνο κοινῶς προεκθέμενοι 
ἔτι τῆς κεφαλαιώδους ὑπομνήσεως ἕνεκεν ὡς ὅταν 
καθ᾽ ὅλου τινὰ λέγωμεν τῶν πέντε ἀστέρων τὴν 
κρᾶσιν καὶ τὸ ποιητικὸν τῆς ὁμοίας φύσεως ὑπο- 
ληπτέον, ἐάν τε αὐτὸς ἐν τῇ ἰδίᾳ ἢ κατα- 
στάσει, ἐάν τε καὶ τῶν ἀπλανῶν τις ἢ τῶν τοῦ 
ζωδιακοῦ τόπων κατὰ τὴν οἰκείαν αὐτοῦ κρᾶσιν 
θεωρῆται: καθάπερ ἂν εἰ τῶν φύσεων καὶ τῶν 
ποιοτήτων αὐτῶν καὶ μὴ τῶν ἀστέρων ἐτύγχανον 
at προσηγορίαι. καὶ ὅτι ἐν ταῖς συγκράσεσι πάλιν 
οὐ μόνον τὴν πρὸς ἀλλήλους τῶν πλανωμένων μῖξιν 
δεῖ σκοπεῖν, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὴν πρὸς τοὺς τῆς αὐτῆς 
φύσεως κεκοινωνηκότας ἤτοι ἀπλανεῖς ἀστέρας ἢ 
τόπους τοῦ ζωδιακοῦ κατὰ τὰς ἀποδεδειγμένας 
αὐτῶν πρὸς τοὺς πλάνητας συνοικειώσεις. 

Ὃ μὲν οὖν τοῦ Κρόνου ἀστὴρ μόνος τὴν οἰκοδε- 
σποτίαν λαβὼν καθ᾽ ὅλου μὲν φθορᾶς τῆς κατὰ 
1 ποιητικῆς VWMADEProc., φυσικῆς PLNCam. 





! According to the anonymous commentator (p. 71, ed. 
Wolf), the reason why the luminaries exert such power is 
that they are the ones which submit to eclipse and thereby 
determine the places of eclipses and the rulers of these 
places. 

2 Cardanus, p. 201: ““. .. when he says, for example, 


178 


TETRABIBLOS II. 8 


leaders of the others; for they are themselves re- 
sponsible for the entirety of the power, and are the 
causes of the rulership of the planets, and, more- 
over, the causes of the strength or weakness of the 
ruling planets.'_ The comprehensive observation of 
the ruling stars shows the quality of the predicted 
events. 

We shall begin with the characteristic active 
powers of the planets, one by one, first, however, 
making this general observation, as a summary re- 
minder, that in general whenever we speak of any 
temperament of the five planets one must under- 
stand that whatever produces the like nature is also 
meant,” whether it be the planet itself in its own 
proper condition, or one of the fixed stars, or one of 
the signs of the zodiac, considered with reference to 
the temperament proper to it, just as though the 
characterizations were applied to the natures or the 
qualities themselves and not to the planets; and 
let us remember that in the combinations, again, we 
must consider not only the mixture of the planets 
one with another, but also their combination with the 
others that share in the same nature, whether they 
be fixed stars or signs of the zodiac, by virtue of 
their affinities with the planets, already set forth.* 

Saturn,’ when he gains sole dominance, is in 
general the cause of destruction by cold, and in 


that Saturn does this or that, he understands this to refer 
not only to Saturn but to any star, even a fixed star, that 
may be of Saturn’s nature; as those in Cetus and some 
in Orion”’ (cf. i. 9). Similarly signs of the zodiac, or 
terms, could thus substitute for the planets. 

3 J.e. ini. 9. 

‘Cf. i. δ. Saturn is one of the maleficent planets (ibid.). 


179 


PTOLEMY 


, y ‘ Μ 30. , \ ‘ A > , 
ψύξιν ἐστὶν αἴτιος - ἰδίως δὲ περὶ μὲν ἀνθρώπους 
γινομένου τοῦ συμπτώματος νόσους μακρὰς καὶ 
φθίσεις καὶ συντήξεις καὶ ὑγρῶν ὀχλήσεις καὶ 
ῥευματισμοὺς καὶ τεταρταϊκὰς ἐπισημασίας, φυγα- 
δείας τε καὶ ἀπορίας καὶ συνοχὰς καὶ πένθη καὶ 

, 1 \ / / ~ ~ « / 
φόβους" καὶ θανάτους μάλιστα τῶν τῇ ἡλικίᾳ 

/ 3 a ~ \ > / 4 
προβεβηκότων ἐμποιεῖ. τῶν de ἀλόγων ζῴων 
περὶ τὰ εὔχρηστα ὡς ἐπὶ πᾶν, σπάνιν τε καὶ 

~ , > 

84 τῶν ὄντων φθορὰς σωματικὰς Kal νοσοποιούς, ὑφ 
~ / , 

ὧν καὶ οἱ χρησάμενοι τῶν ἀνθρώπων συνδιατιθέμενοι 

διαφθείρονται. περὶ δὲ τὴν τοῦ ἀέρος κατάστασιν 

/ A bd \ «ε λ ὃ \ Ἃ / 
ψύχη φοβερὰ παγώδη καὶ ὁμιχλώδη καὶ λοιμικά, 
ὡς , ‘ ΄ \ / ” A 
dvoaepias τε καὶ συννεφίας καὶ ζόφους - ἔτι δὲ 

΄ ~ ~ ~ > 7? 
νιφετῶν πλῆθος οὐκ ἀγαθῶν ἀλλὰ φθοροποιῶν, ἀφ 
ὧν καὶ τὰ κακοῦντα τὴν ἀνθρωπίνην φύσιν τῶν 
ἑρπετῶν συγκρίνεται. περὶ δὲ ποταμοὺς ἢ θα- 

~ ~ / 
λάττας κοινῶς μὲν χειμῶνας καὶ στόλων ναυάγια 

\ / \ ~ > (2 » \ ’ 
καὶ δυσπλοίας καὶ τῶν ἰχθύων ἔνδειαν καὶ φθοράν, 
οὕ \ ? \ / > 7 \ ti 
ἰδίως δὲ ἐν μὲν θαλάτταις ἀμπώτεις καὶ παλιρροίας, 
ἐπὶ δὲ ποταμῶν ὑπερμετρίαν καὶ κάκωσιν τῶν ποτα- 
μίων ὑδάτων. πρὸς δὲ τοὺς τῆς γῆς καρποὺς ἔνδειαν 
καὶ σπάνιν καὶ ἀπώλειαν μάλιστα τῶν εἰς τὰς 

/ Ἅ 
ἀναγκαίας χρείας γινομένων ἤτοι ὑπὸ κάμπης ἢ 
> i ”“ ~ « / Al Poy, > ~ 
ἀκρίδος ἢ κατακλυσμῶν ὑδάτων ἢ ὄμβρων ἐπιφορᾶς 
Ὑ ~ /, ~ 
ἢ χαλάζης ἢ τῶν τοιούτων, ὡς Kal μέχρι λιμοῦ 5 

“ “ 2 , 

φθάνειν καὶ τῆς τοιαύτης τῶν ἀνθρώπων ἀπωλείας. 

1 φόβους VMAD=N (mg.) Proc. Cam.? (asterisco notatum) ; 


φόνους NCam.! (asterisco notatum), ¢dwr’ P, φόνοι L. 
2 λιμοῦ VMDEProc., λοιμοῦ PLNACam. 


180 


TETRABIBLOS II. 8 


particular, when the event concerns men, causes 
long illnesses, consumptions, withering, disturbances 
caused by fluids, rheumatisms, and quartan fevers, 
exile, poverty, imprisonment, mourning, fears, and 
deaths, especially among those advanced in age.! 
He is usually significant with regard to those dumb 
animals that are of use to man, and brings about 
scarcity of them, and the bodily destruction by 
disease of such as exist, so that the men who use 
them are similarly affected and perish. With regard 
to weather, he causes fearful cold, freezing, misty, 
and pestilential; corruption of the air, clouds, and 
gloom ; furthermore, multitudes of snowstorms, not 
beneficial but destructive, from which are produced 
the reptiles? harmful to man. As for the rivers and 
seas, in general he causes storms, the wreck of fleets, 
disastrous voyages, and the scarcity and death of fish, 
and in particular the high and ebb tides of the seas 
and in rivers excessive floods and pollution of their 
waters. As for the crops of the earth, he brings 
about want, scarcity, and loss, especially of those 
grown for necessary uses, either through worms or 
locusts or floods or cloud-burst or hail or the like, 
so that famine and the destruction of men thereby 
result. 


1 Saturn (Kronos) is pictured as an old man. 

* For rains of fish, frogs, and other things cf. E. 5. 
McCartney, Trans. Am. Phil. Assn., 51, 112 ff., and 
Classical Weekly, 24, 27; also A. S. Pease, ed. of Cicero, 
De divinatione, Ὁ. 274. Mice, frogs, insects, and the like 
were thought to be spontaneously generated from earth, 
mud, or rain; cf. Thorndike, History of Magic and Ex- 
perimental Science, i. 325, 491. 


181 


PTOLEMY 


« A ~ 
Ο δὲ τοῦ Διὸς μόνος τὴν κυρίαν λαχὼν καθ᾽ ὅλου 
\ / 
μὲν αὐξήσεώς ἐστι ποιητικός, ἰδίως δὲ περὶ μὲν 
> ,ὔ “- 
ἀνθρώπους γενομένου τοῦ ἀποτελέσματος δόξας 
9 aA \ 
ἀποτελεῖ καὶ everynpias! καὶ εὐθηνίας καὶ κατα- 
4 > ~ > 
στάσεις elpnvikas® καὶ τῶν ἐπιτηδείων αὐξήσεις, 
εὐεξίας τε σωματικὰς καὶ ψυχικάς - ἔτι δὲ εὐερ- 
,ὔ ~ ~ 
γεσίας Te Kal δωρεὰς ἀπὸ τῶν βασιλευόντων, αὐτῶν 
> 
Te ἐκείνων αὐξήσεις Kal μεγαλειότητας καὶ μεγαλο- 
,ὔ > / > 
yuxias. Kal? ὅλου τε εὐδαιμονίας ἐστὶν αἴτιος. 
\ \ ~ ~ ~ 
περὶ de Ta ἄλογα ζῷα τῶν μὲν εἰς χρῆσιν avOpw- 
, ὃ La \ / ~ ~ A > 
πίνην δαψίλειαν Kat πολυπληθίαν ποιεῖ, τῶν δὲ εἰς 
2 
τὸ ἐναντίον φθοράν τε καὶ ἀπώλειαν. εὔκρατον δὲ 
A ~ 
τὴν τῶν ἀέρων κατάστασιν καὶ ὑγιεινὴν Kal 
πνευματώδη καὶ ὑγρὰν καὶ θρεπτικὴν τῶν ἐπιγείων 
ἀπεργάζεται, στόλων τε εὐπλοίας καὶ ποταμῶν 
~ ~ , 
συμμέτρους ἀναβάσεις καὶ τῶν καρπῶν δαψίλειαν 
\ 
Kal ὅσα τούτοις παραπλήσια. 
“- ,ὔ 
Ὃ δὲ τοῦ Ἄρεως μόνος τὴν οἰκοδεσποτίαν λαβὼν 
> i \ ~ A / ~ > 
καθ᾽ ὅλου μὲν τῆς Kata Enpaciay φθορᾶς ἐστιν 
7} 
αἴτιος, ἰδίως δὲ περὶ μὲν ἀνθρώπους γινομένου 
~ - \ /, 
τοῦ συμπτώματος πολέμους ἐμποιεῖ Kal στάσεις 
> / \ > / \ > ὃ ὃ A 
ἐμφυλίους καὶ αἰχμαλωσίας Kat ἀνδραποδισμοὺς 
᾽ὔ τ / 4 
καὶ ἐπαναστάσεις 3 καὶ χόλους ἡγεμόνων τούς 
‘ ~ / / >? Su μ᾿ δὲ 
τε διὰ τῶν τοιούτων θανάτους αἰφνιδίους, ἔτι δὲ 
wo A > ,ὔ \ 
νόσους πυρεκτικὰς Kal τριταϊκὰς ἐπισημασίας καὶ 
΄, 
αἱμάτων ἀναγωγὰς καὶ ὀξείας βιαιοθανασίας * 
- Ud \ , ‘ 
μάλιστα τῶν ἀκμαίων - ὁμοίως δὲ βίας τε καὶ 


1 ε ΄ σ 2 

ἑταιρείας Cam. 
Ae ἐρεῖ is add. καὶ εὖ (as Cam.?, om. libri Proe 
ost εἰρηνικας add. Kat εὐετηρίας Vam.”, OM. : 


182 


TETRABIBLOS IT. 8 


When Jupiter ! rules alone he produces increase in 
general, and, in particular, when the prediction is 
concerned with men, he makes fame and prosperity, 
abundance, peaceful existence, the increase of the 
necessities of life, bodily and spiritual health, and, 
furthermore, benefits and gifts from rulers, and the 
increase, greatness, and magnanimity of these latter ; 
and in general he is the cause of happiness. With 
reference to dumb animals he causes a multitude and 
abundance of those that are useful to men and the 
diminution and destruction of the opposite kind. He 
makes the condition of the air temperate and health- 
ful, windy, moist, and favourable to the growth of 
what the earth bears ; he brings about the fortunate 
sailing of fleets, the moderate rise of rivers, abund- 
ance of crops, and everything similar. 

Mars, when he assumes the rulership alone, is in 
general the cause of destruction through dryness and 
in particular, when the event concerns men, brings 
about wars, civil faction, capture, enslavement, 
uprisings, the wrath of leaders, and sudden deaths 
arising from such causes; moreover, fevers, tertian 
agues, raising of blood, swift and violent deaths, 
especially in the prime of life; similarly, violence, 


ΤΑ beneficent planet. 





3 ὄχλων ἐπαναστάσεις PLNCam., λαῶν ἐπαναστάσεις Proc.; 
ὄχλων om. VMADE. 

4 ὀρείας βιαιοθανασίας VD, ὀξεῖς καὶ βίαιοι θάνατοι Proc., 
ὀξείας βιοθανασίας MAE, ὀξείας καὶ βιοθανασίας Ῥ (βιω-} L, 
ὀξείας νόσους καὶ βιοθανασίας NCam. 


183 


PTOLEMY 


ὕβρεις Kal παρανομίας ἐμπρήσεις τε Kal ἀνδρο- 
φονίας καὶ ἁρπαγὰς καὶ ληστείας - περὶ δὲ τὴν τοῦ 
ἀέρος κατάστασιν καύσωνας καὶ πνεύματα θερμὰ 

80 λοιμικὰ καὶ συντηκτικὰ κεραυνῶν τε ἀφέσεις καὶ 
πρηστήρων καὶ ἀνομβρίας - περὶ δὲ θάλατταν " 
στόλων μὲν αἰφνίδια ναυάγια διὰ πνευμάτων 
ἀτάκτων 7) κεραυνῶν ἢ τῶν τοιούτων, ποταμῶν δὲ 
λειψυδρίας καὶ ἀναξηράνσεις πηγῶν καὶ φθορὰν τῶν 
ποτίμων 5 ὑδάτων - περὶ δὲ τὰ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς 
ἐπιτήδεια πρὸς χρῆσιν ἀνθρωπίνην τῶν τε ἀλόγων 
ζῴων καὶ τῶν ἐκ τῆς γῆς φυομένων σπάνιν καὶ 
φθορὰν καρπῶν τὴν γινομένην ἤτοι ἐκ τῶν τοῦ 
καύματος καταφλέξεων ἢ βρούχου ἢ τῆς τῶν 
πνευμάτων ἐκτινάξεως ἢ ἐκ τῆς ἐν ταῖς ἀποθέσεσι 
συγκαύσεως. 

Ὃ δὲ τῆς Adpodirns μόνος κύριος γενόμενος τοῦ 
συμβαίνοντος καθ᾽ ὅλου μὲν τὰ παραπλήσια τῷ Tor’ 
Διὸς μετά τινος ἐπαφροδισίας ἀποτελεῖ, ἰδίως δέ 
περὶ μὲν ἀνθρώπους δόξας καὶ τιμὰς καὶ εὐφροσύνας 
καὶ εὐετηρίας εὐγαμίας τε καὶ πολυτεκνίας καὶ 
εὐαρεστήσεις πρὸς πᾶσαν συναρμογὴν καὶ τῶν 
κτήσεων συναυξήσεις καὶ διαίτας καθαρίους καὶ 
εὐαγωγοὺς καὶ πρὸς τὰ σεβάσμια τιμητικάς * ἔτι δὲ 
σωματικὰς εὐεξίας καὶ πρὸς τοὺς ἡγεμονεύοντας 
συνοικειώσεις καὶ τῶν ἀρχόντων ἐπαφροδισίας *® 
περὶ δὲ τὰ τοῦ ἀέρος πνεύματα ὃ εὐκρασίας 7 καὶ 
διύγρων καὶ θρεπτικωτάτων καταστάσεις εὐαερίας 


1 περὶ δὲ θάλασσαν AG; cf. Proc.; π. θαλ. δὲ ME; π. δὲ 
θαλάσσας VD ; πάλιν δὲ ἐν θαλάσσαις PLNCam. 
2 ποτίμων VDGProce. ; ποταμίων alii Cam. 


184 


TETRABIBLOS II. 8 


assaults, lawlessness, arson and murder, robbery and 
piracy. With regard to the condition of the air he 
causes hot weather, warm, pestilential, and withering 
winds, the loosing of lightning and hurricanes, and 
drought. Again, at sea he causes sudden shipwreck 
of fleets through changeable winds or lightning or the 
like; the failure of the water of rivers, the drying 
up of springs, and the tainting of potable waters. 
With reference to the necessities produced upon the 
earth for human use, he causes a scarcity and loss 
of dumb animals and of things which grow from the 
earth, and the loss of crops by drying as the result of 
hot weather, or by locusts, or by the beating of the 
winds, or by burning in places of storage. 

Venus, when she becomes sole ruler of the event, 
in general brings about results similar to those of 
Jupiter, but with the addition of a certain agreeable 
quality ; in particular, where men are concerned, she 
causes fame, honour, happiness, abundance, happy 
marriage, many children, satisfaction in every mutual 
relationship, the increase of property, a neat and well 
conducted manner of life, paying honour to those 
things which are to be revered ; further, she is the 
cause of bodily health, alliances with the leaders, 
and elegance of rulers; as to the winds of the air, 
of temperateness and settled conditions of moist and 


3 ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς VG, ἐπη γῆς D, ἐκ τῆς γῆς Proc.; om. 
PLMNAECam. 

47 Bpovxou .. . exrwagews om. NCam. 

δ᾽ ἐπαφροδισίας codd. Cam.}, εὐνοίας Cam.” 

ὁ πνεύματα VAD, -ων alii Cam. 


7 εὐκρασίας VMADEG, εὐκράτων PLNCam. 
185 


PTOLEMY 


τε Kal αἰθρίας Kal ὑδάτων γονίμων δαψιλεῖς ἐπομ- 
βρίας, στόλων τε εὐπλοίας καὶ ἐπιτυχίας καὶ ἐπικερ- 
dias! καὶ ποταμῶν πλήρεις ἀναβάσεις - err? δὲ 
87 τῶν εὐχρήστων ζῴων 3 καὶ τῶν τῆς γῆς καρπῶν 
μάλιστα δαψίλειαν καὶ εὐφορίαν καὶ ὄνησιν ἐμποιεῖ. 
Ὃ δὲ τοῦ ‘Eppod τὴν οἰκοδεσποτίαν λαβὼν καθ᾽ 
ὅλου μέν, ὡς ἂν 7) συγκιρνάμενος ἑκάστῳ τῶν ἄλλων, 
συνοικειοῦται ταῖς ἐκείνων φύσεσιν - ἰδίως δέ ἐστι 
πάντων μᾶλλον συγκινητικὸς καὶ ἐν μὲν ἀνθρωπίνοις 
ἀποτελέσμασιν ὀξὺς καὶ πρακτικώτατος καὶ πρὸς 
τὸ ὑποκείμενον εὐμήχανος, ληστηρίων δὲ καὶ κλο- 
πῶν Kal πειρατικῶν ἐφόδων καὶ ἐπιθέσεων," ἔτι δὲ 
δυσπλοίας ὃ ποιητικὸς ἐν τοῖς πρὸς τοὺς κακοποιοὺς 
σχηματισμοῖς, νόσων τε αἴτιος ξηρῶν καὶ ἀμφη- 
μερινῶν ἐπισημασιῶν καὶ βηχικῶν καὶ ἀναφορικῶν ὃ 
καὶ φθίσεων - ἀποτελεστικός τε καὶ τῶν περὶ τὸν 
ἱερατικὸν λόγον καὶ τὰς τῶν θεῶν θρησκείας καὶ 
τὰς βασιλικὰς προσόδους ἐπισυμβαινόντων καὶ τῆς 
τῶν ἐθίμων ἢ νομίμων κατὰ καιροὺς ἐναλλοιώσεως 
οἰκείως τῇ πρὸς αὐτοὺς ἑκάστοτε τῶν ἀστέρων 
συγκράσει. πρὸς δὲ τὸ περιέχον μᾶλλον ξηρὸς ὧν 
καὶ εὐκίνητος διὰ τὴν πρὸς τὸν ἥλιον ἐγγύτητα καὶ 
τὸ τάχος τῆς ἀνακυκλήσεως πνευμάτων ἀτάκτων 
καὶ ὀξέων καὶ εὐμεταβόλων μάλιστα κινητικὸς 
ὑπάρχει, βροντῶν τε εἰκότως καὶ πρηστήρων καὶ 
χασμάτων καὶ σεισμῶν καὶ ἀστραπῶν ἀποτελεσ- 
τικός * τῆς τε διὰ τούτων ἐνίοτε περὶ τὰ τῶν ζῴων 
1 ἐπικερδ(ε)ίας VMADEG, ἐπικερδεῖς NLCam., ἐπεικερδεῖς P. 
2 ἔτι VMADEG, ἐν PLNCam. 
186 


TETRABIBLOS II. 8 


very nourishing winds, of -good air, clear weather, 
and generous showers of fertilizing waters; she 
brings about the fortunate sailing of fleets, successes, 
profits, and the full rising of rivers ; of useful animals 
and the fruits of the earth she is the preéminent 
cause of abundance, good yields, and profit. 
Mercury, if he gains the rulership, is, generally 
speaking, in nature like whatever of the other planets 
may be associated with him. In particular, he is 
above all stimulating, and in predictions concerning 
men is keen and very practical, ingenious in any 
situation; but he causes robbery, theft, piracy, and 
assault, and furthermore, brings about unsuccessful 
voyaging when he is in aspect with the maleficent 
planets, and occasions diseases of dryness, quotidian 
agues, coughs, raising, and consumption. He is the 
cause of events taking place which concern the priestly 
code, the worship of the gods, the royal revenues, 
and of change in customs and laws, from time to 
time, in consistency with his association with the 
other planets on each occasion. With reference to 
the air, since he is very dry and swift on account 
of his nearness to the sun, and the speed of his 
revolution, he is particularly apt to arouse irregular, 
fierce, and changeable winds, and, as might be ex- 
pected, thunder, hurricanes, chasms in the earth, 
earthquakes, and lightning; sometimes by these 


8 τῶν εὐχρήστων ζῴων κτλ (gen.) VMADEG, τοῖς εὐχρήστοις 
ζῴοις κτλ. (dat.) PLNCam. 

4 καὶ ἐπιθέσεων VMADE; καὶ om. GPLCam.; εἐπιθξ N, 
ἐπιθεικός Cam.}, ἐπιθετικός PLCam.? 

5 δυσπλοίας VMADEGProc., δυσπν(ο)ίας PLNCam. 

ὁ ἀναφορικῶν libri (ἀφορικῶν D) Cam.'Proc.; ἀναπνοικῶν 


Cam.? 
187 


PTOLEMY 


καὶ τῶν φυτῶν εὔχρηστα φθορᾶς ποιητικός, ὑδάτων 
88 τε καὶ ποταμῶν ἐν μὲν ταῖς δύσεσι στερητικός, ἐν 
δὲ ταῖς ἀνατολαῖς πληρωτικός. 

᾿Ιδίως μὲν οὖν τῆς οἰκείας φύσεως ἐπιτυχὼν 
ἕκαστος τὰ τοιαῦτα ἀποτελεῖ, συγκιρνάμενος δὲ 
ἄλλος ἄλλῳ κατὰ τοὺς συσχηματισμοὺς καὶ τὰς τῶν 
ζῳδίων ἐναλλοιώσεις καὶ τὰς πρὸς ἥλιον φάσεις, 
ἀναλόγως τε καὶ τὴν ἐν τοῖς ἐνεργήμασι σύγκρασιν 
λαμβάνων, καὶ μεμιγμένην ἐκ τῶν κεκοινωνηκυιῶν 
φύσεων τὴν περὶ τὸ ἀποτελούμενον ἰδιοτροπίαν 
ποικίλην οὖσαν ἀπεργάζεται : ἀπείρου " δὲ ὄντος 
καὶ ἀδυνάτου τοῦ καθ᾽ ἑκάστην σύγκρασιν τὸ ἴδιον 
ὑπομνηματίζειν ἀποτέλεσμα καὶ πάντας ἁπλῶς τοὺς 
καθ᾽ ὁποιονουνδήποτε τρόπον συσχηματισμοὺς δι- 
εξελθεῖν οὕτω γε πολυμερῶς νοουμένους, εἰκότως 
ἂν καταλειφθείη τὸ τοιοῦτον εἶδος ἐπὶ τῇ τοῦ 
μαθηματικοῦ πρὸς τὰς κατὰ μέρος διακρίσεις 
ἐπιβολῇ καὶ ἐπινοίᾳ. 

ΠΙαρατηρεῖν δὲ δεῖ 3 καὶ πῶς ἔχουσι οἰκειώσεως 
οἱ τοῦ προτελέσματος τὴν κυρίαν λαβόντες ἀστέρες 
πρὸς αὐτὰς τὰς χώρας ἢ τὰς πόλεις αἷς τὸ σύμπτωμα 
διασημαίνεται - ἀγαθοποιοὶ μὲν γὰρ ὄντες ἀστέρες 
καὶ συνοικειούμενοι τοῖς διατιθεμένοις καὶ μὴ 
καθυπερτερούμενοι ὑπὸ τῶν τῆς ἐναντίας αἱρέσεως 
ἔτι μᾶλλον ἀπεργάζονται τὸ κατὰ τὴν οἰκείαν φύσιν 

1 ἐναλλοιώσεις] ἐναλλαγὰς NCam. 


3 ἀπείρου] ἀπόρου NCam. 
3 δεῖ] δέον NCam. 


1 That is, exchange of houses. 
Si ΟἿ τ. 8: 


188 


TETRABIBLOS II. 8 


means he causes the destruction of useful animals 
and plants. At setting he diminishes waters and 
rivers, at rising fills them. 

Such are the effects produced by the several 
planets, each by itself and in command of its own 
nature. Associated, however, now with one and now 
with another, in the different aspects, by the ex- 
change of signs! and by their phases with refer- 
ence to the sun,” and experiencing a corresponding 
tempering of their powers, each produces a char- 
acter, in its effect, which is the result of the mixture 
of the natures that have participated, and is 
complicated. It is of course a hopeless and im- 
possible task to mention the proper outcome of 
every combination and to enumerate absolutely all 
the aspects of whatever kind, since we can conceive 
of such a variety of them. Consequently questions 
of this kind would reasonably be left to the enter- 
prise and ingenuity of the mathematician,® in order 
to make the particular distinctions. 

It is needful to observe what affinity exists between 
the planets which govern the prediction and the 
countries or the cities for which the event is signified. 
For if the ruling planets are beneficent, and have 
familiarity with the subjects affected, and are not 
overcome ‘ by planets of the opposite sect, they more 
powerfully produce the benefits natural to them ; 


3 μαθηματικός is here used to mean “astrologer,” as 
forexample at the very end of the T'etrabiblos (p. 458, 1. 21). 
4 καθυπερτέρησις, supereminentia, exists when one planet 
is superior to another, or is to the right of another in the 
astrological sense (i.e. preceding it in the direction of the 
diurnal movement of the heavens). Cf. Bouché-Leclercq, 
p- 250. 


189 


PTOLEMY 


ὠφέλιμον, ὥσπερ μὴ συνοικειούμενοι ἢ καθυπερ- 

89 τερούμενοι ὑπὸ τῶν ἀντικειμένων ἧττον ὠφελοῦσι. 
τῆς δὲ βλαπτικῆς κράσεως ὄντες καὶ τὴν κυρίαν 
λαβόντες τοῦ προτελέσματος, ἐὰν μὲν συνοικειού- 
μενοι τοῖς διατιθεμένοις τύχωσιν ἢ καθυπερτερη- 
θῶσιν ὑπὸ τῶν τῆς ἐναντίας αἱρέσεως, ἧττον 
βλάπτουσιν - ἐὰν δὲ μήτε τὴν οἰκοδεσποτίαν ἔχωσι 
τῶν χωρῶν μήτε καθυπερτερῶνται ὑπὸ τῶν οἰκείως 
πρὸς αὐτὰς ἐχόντων, σφοδρότερον τὸ ἐκ τῆς κράσεως 
φθοροποιὸν ἐπισκήπτουσιν. ὡς ἐπὶ πᾶν μέντοι 
συνεμπίπτουσι τοῖς καθολικοῖς πάθεσιν ἐκεῖνοι τῶν 
ἀνθρώπων ὅσοι ποτ᾽ ἂν; κατὰ τὰς ἰδίας γενέσεις 
τοὺς ἀναγκαιοτάτους τόπους, λέγω δὴ τοὺς φωσφο- 
ροῦντας ἢ τοὺς τῶν κέντρων, τοὺς αὐτοὺς τύχωσιν 
ἔχοντες τοῖς τὸ αἴτιον ἐμποιήσασι τῶν καθολικῶν 
συμπτωμάτων, τουτέστι τοῖς ἐκλειπτικοῖς ἢ καὶ 
τοῖς τούτων διαμέτροις. τούτων δὲ ἐπισφαλέσταται 
μάλιστα καὶ δυσφύλακτοι τυγχάνουσιν αἱ μοιρικαὶ 
καθέξεις ἢ διαμετρήσεις τῶν ἐκλειπτικῶν τόπων 
πρὸς ὁπότερον τῶν φωτῶν. 


<> Περὶ χρωμάτων τῶν ἐκλείψεων 
καὶ κομητῶν καὶ τῶν τοιούτων 


Τηρητέον δὲ πρὸς τὰς καθ᾽ ὅλου περιστάσεις καὶ 
τὰ περὶ τὰς ἐκλείψεις χρώματα ἤτοι τῶν φωτῶν 
1 ποτ᾽ ἄν om. PLNCam. 

1A geniture (horoscope, nativity) of any individual or 


event has as its point of departure the horoscope in the 
proper sense, 2.6. the degree of the ecliptic which is rising 


190 


TETRABIBLOS II. 8-9 


even as, when they bear no familiarity, or are over- 
come by their opposites, they are less helpful. But 
when they are of the injurious temperament and 
govern the prediction, if they have familiarity with 
the subjects affected or are overcome by the opposite 
sect, they do less harm; but if they are neither 
lords of the countries nor are overcome by the 
planets that have familiarity with those countries, 
they exert all the more intensely the destructiveness 
of their temperament. Usually, however, those men 
are affected by the more universal ills who in their 
own genitures happen to have the most essential 
places,! by which I mean those of the luminaries or 
of the angles? the same as those that furnish the 
cause of the general misfortunes, that is, the places 
of the eclipses or the places directly opposite. Of 
these the positions most dangerous and hardest to 
avoid are those in which either of their luminaries 
is in possession of the very degree of the place of 
the eclipse, or the degree opposite. 


9. Of the Colours of Eclipses, Comets, and the Like. 


For the prediction of general conditions we must 
also observe the colours at the time of the eclipses, 


above the horizon (in the ascendant) at the moment. 
This point determines a series of divisions of the ecliptic 
of 30° each, a duodecimal system superimposed upon 
that of the zodiacal signs and differing therefrom. 
These divisions are the “ places’’ (also called “ὁ houses,” 
somewhat ambiguously) of the geniture. 

2 The angles, or centres, of a geniture are the horoscope 
or orient, the superior mid-heaven (upper culmination), the 
occident, and the inferior mid-heaven (lower culmination). 
See Bouché-Leclereq, pp. 257-259. 


191 


PTOLEMY 


αὐτῶν ἢ τῶν περὶ αὐτὰ γινομένων δυστημάτων, 
τ «7 noe ” - , , bf 
90 οἷον ῥάβδων ἢ ἅλων ἢ τῶν τοιούτων. μέλανα μὲν 
\ δ ,’ / ~ ‘ 
yap ἢ ὑπόχλωρα φανέντα σημαντικὰ γίνεται τῶν ἐπὶ 
τῆς τοῦ Κρόνου φύσεως εἰρημένων - λευκὰ δὲ τῶν 
> Jala ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 
ἐπὶ τῆς τοῦ Atos: ὑπόκιρρα δὲ τῶν ἐπὶ τῆς. τοῦ 
, A ~ ao [ 
Ἄρεως - ξανθὰ δὲ τῶν ἐπὶ τοῦ τῆς "Adpodirns * 
΄ \ a Bea a ~ ¢ ~ ” A > 
ποικίλα δὲ τῶν ἐπὶ τῆς τοῦ “Ἑρμοῦ. κἂν μὲν ἐν 
ὅλοις τοῖς σώμασι τῶν φωτῶν ἢ ἐν ὅλοις τοῖς περὶ 
αὐτὰ τόποις τὸ γινόμενον ἰδίωμα τῆς χροιᾶς φαί- 
νηται, περὶ τὰ πλεῖστα μέρη τῶν χωρῶν ἔσται τὸ 
> / A ‘ > \ / «ε ’΄ 
ἀποτελεσθησόμενον ἐὰν δὲ ἀπὸ μέρους οἱουδή- 


1 \ , θ᾽ en \ 
TO μερος, Ka OV αν Και 


ποτε, περὶ ἐκεῖνο μόνον 
ἡ πρόσνευσις τοῦ ἰδιώματος γίνηται. 
Τηρητέον δὲ ἔτι καὶ τὰς συνισταμένας ἤτοι κατὰ 
τοὺς ἐκλειπτικοὺς καιροὺς ἢ καὶ ὁτεδήποτε κομητῶν 
> ’ 
ἐπιφανείας πρὸς τὰς καθ᾽ ὅλου περιστάσεις, οἷον 
΄- / / Ἃ / ” 4 ‘ 
τῶν καλουμένων δοκίδων ἢ σαλπίγγων ἢ πίθων καὶ 
τῶν τοιούτων͵ ὡς ἀποτελεσματικὰς μὲν φύσει τῶν 
> \ a mM \ ~ ae ~ ? / \ 
ἐπὶ τοῦ "Apews καὶ τῶν τοῦ “Eppod ἰδιωμάτων Kai 
πολέμων δὲ καὶ καυσώδων 5 ἢ κινητικῶν καταστη- 
~ > 
μάτων Kal τῶν τούτοις ἐπισυμβαινόντων, δηλούσας 
δὲ διὰ μὲν τῶν τοῦ ζωδιακοῦ μερῶν, καθ᾽ ὧν ἂν 
οἱ συστάσεις αὐτῶν φαίνωνται͵ καὶ τῶν κατὰ τὰ 


4 μόνον VMADGProc., μὲν ὃν PL, om. NECam. 
2 καυσώδων VMADE;; ef. Proc.; καυσώνων alii Cam. 


1 κε Luminous sheaves,” according to Bouché-Lecleregq, 
p- 355. The expression must refer to rays of light. 


192 


TETRABIBLOS II. 9 


either those of the luminaries themselves, or those 
of the formations that occur near them, such as 
rods,! halos, and the like. For if they appear black 
or.livid they signify the effects which were men- 
tioned in connection with Saturn’s nature ;? if white, 
those of Jupiter ; if reddish, those of Mars; if yellow, 
those of Venus; and if variegated, those of Mercury. 
If the characteristic colour appears to cover the 
whole body of the luminary or the whole region sur- 
rounding it, the predicted event will affect most of 
the parts of the countries; but if it is in any one 
part, it will affect only that part against which the 
phenomenon is inclined. 

We must observe, further, for the prediction of 
general conditions, the comets * which appear either 
at the time of the eclipse or at any time whatever ; 
for instance, the so-called “ beams,” “ trumpets,” 
““ jars,” and the like,* for these naturally produce the 
effects peculiar to Mars and to Mercury—wars, hot 
weather, disturbed conditions, and the accompani- 
ments of these; and they show, through the parts of 
the zodiac in which their heads appear and through 
the directions in which the shapes of their tails point, 


* Cf. i. 4, for the powers of Saturn and the other planets. 

3 Cf. Boll-Bezold-Gundel, pp. 51, 129; who quote 
Julius Caesar, ii. 2, ‘‘ When beggars die, then are no comets 
seen; the heavens themselves blaze forth the death of 
princes.” 

‘Other astrologers and non-astrological writers classified 
the comets much more elaborately by their shapes and 
their associations with the planets, of which they were 
supposed to be the fiery missiles; Ptolemy is much more 
conservative in what he says. See Bouché-Leclereq, pp. 
358-359, and for a more detailed ancient account Hephaes- 
tion of Thebes, pp. 97, 31—99, 22 (ed. Engelbrecht). 


193 


PTOLEMY 


σχήματα THs κόμης προσνεύσεων τοὺς τόπους οἷς ἐπι- 
σκήπτουσι τὰ συμπτώματα - διὰ δὲ τῶν αὐτῆς τῆς 
συστάσεως ὥσπερ μορφώσεων τὸ εἶδος τοῦ ἀποτελέσ- 
ματος καὶ τὸ γένος περὶ ὃ τὸ πάθος ἀποβήσεται - 
91 διὰ δὲ τοῦ χρόνου τῆς ἐπιμονῆς τὴν παράτασιν τῶν 
συμπτωμάτων - διὰ δὲ τῆς πρὸς τὸν ἥλιον σχέσεως 
Kal! τὴν καταρχήν, ἐπειδήπερ ἑῷοι μὲν ἐπὶ πολὺ 
φαινόμεναι τάχιον ἐπισημαίνουσιν, ἑσπέριοι δὲ 


βράδιον. 


«> Περὶ τῆς τοῦ ἔτους νουμηνίας" 


Δεδειγμένης δὲ τῆς ἐφόδου τῆς περὶ τὰς καθ᾽ 
ὅλου περιστάσεις χωρῶν τε καὶ πόλεων, λοιπὸν ἂν 
εἴη καὶ περὶ τῶν λεπτομερεστέρων ὑπομνηματί- 
σασθαι: λέγω δὲ τῶν ἐνιαυσίως περὶ τὰς ὥρας 
ἀποτελουμένων, πρὸς ἣν ἐπίσκεψιν καὶ περὶ τῆς 
καλουμένης τοῦ ἔτους νουμηνίας ἁρμόζον ἂν εἴη 
προδιαλαβεῖν. ὅτι μὲν οὖν ἀρχὴν ταύτην εἶναι 
προσήκει τῆς τοῦ ἡλίου καθ᾽ ἑκάστην περιστροφὴν 
ἀποκαταστάσεως, δῆλόν ἐστιν αὐτόθεν καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς 
δυνάμεως καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς ὀνομασίας. τίνα δ᾽ ἄν τις 
ἀρχὴν ὑποστήσαιτο ἐν κύκλῳ μὲν αὐτὸ μόνον ἁπλῶς 
οὐδ᾽ ἂν ἐπινοήσειεν͵ ἐν δὲ τῷ διὰ μέσον τῶν ζῳδίων 
μόνας ἂν εἰκότως ἀρχὰς λάβοι τὰ ὑπὸ τοῦ ἰση- 
μερινοῦ καὶ τῶν τροπικῶν ἀφοριζόμενα σημεῖα, 
τουτέστι τά τε δύο ἰσημερινὰ καὶ τὰ δύο τροπικά. 
ἐνταῦθα μέντοι τις ἀπορήσειεν ἂν ἤδη, τίνι τῶν 


1 καὶ VPLDG; om. alii Cam. 
3 Titulum post zpod:aAaBeiv inser. GMProce. 


194 


TETRABIBLOS IT. 9-10 


the regions upon which the misfortunes impend. 
Through the formations, as it were, of their heads 
they indicate the kind of the event and the class 
upon which the misfortune will take effect; through 
the time which they last, the duration of the events ; 
and through their position relative to the sun like- 
wise their beginning; for in general their appearance 
in the orient betokens rapidly approaching events and 
in the occident those that approach more slowly. 


10. Concerning the New Moon of the Year. 


Now that we have described the procedure of 
prediction about the general states of countries 
and cities, it would remain to mention matters of 
greater detail; I refer to events that happen yearly 
in connection with the seasons. In the investiga- 
tion of this subject it would be appropriate first to 
define the so-called new moon of the year.! That 
this should properly be the beginning of the sun’s 
circular course in each of his revolutions is plain 
from the thing itself, both from its power and 
from its name. To be sure, one could not conceive 
what starting-point to assume in a circle, as a general 
proposition; but in the circle through the middle 
of the zodiac one would properly take as the only 
beginnings the points determined by the equator 
and the tropics, that is, the two equinoxes and the 
two solstices. Even then, however, one would still 


1The new moon closest to the first of the year, as ex- 
plained later. 


195 


PTOLEMY 


ys 
τεττάρων WS προηγουμένῳ χρήσαιτο. κατὰ μὲν 
> \ c ~ \ A , > \ ’ ~ 
οὖν τὴν ἁπλῆν καὶ κυκλικὴν φύσιν οὐδὲν αὐτῶν 
» 3 ~ ~ 4 / 

ἐστιν WS ἐπὶ μιᾶς ἀρχῆς προηγούμενον * κέχρηνται 


1 «ς 6 / 
ὑποτιθέμενοι 


\ « \ , / - 

92 δὲ of περὶ τούτων γράψαντες, ἕν τι 
διαφόρως, ἐκάστῳ τῶν τεττάρων ὡς ἀρχὴν κατά 
τινας οἰκείους λόγους καὶ φυσικὰς συμπαθείας 3 

- ~ 4, 
ἐνεχθέντες. Kal yap ἔχει τι τῶν μερῶν τούτων 
“ > / > > ec nN > A \ ΄ ” 
ἕκαστον ἐξαίρετον ἀφ᾽ od av ἀρχὴ καὶ νέον ἔτος 
εἰκότως νομίζοιτο - τὸ μὲν ἐαρινὸν ἰσημερινὸν διά τε 

\ e FXtE A ΕἾ 
τὸ πρώτως τότε μείζονα τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς νυκτὸς 
ἄρχεσθαι γίνεσθαι καὶ διὰ τὸ τῆς ὑγρᾶς ὥρας εἶναι, 
ταύτην δὲ τὴν φύσιν, ὡς καὶ πρότερον ἔφαμεν, 
ἀρχομέναις ταῖς γενέσεσι πλείστην ἐνυπάρχειν * τὸ 
δὲ θερινὸν τροπικὸν διὰ τὸ κατ᾽ αὐτὸ τὴν μεγίστην 
(7 La > ~ A \ > , ‘ κ 
ἡμέραν ἀποτελεῖσθαι, παρὰ δὲ Αἰγυπτίοις καὶ τὴν 
“- , > / \ A Μ ᾽ λὴ bi 

τοῦ Νείλου ἀνάβασιν καὶ κυνὸς ἄστρου ἐπιτολὴν ἐπι- 
σημαίνειν - τὸ δὲ μετοπωρινὸν ἰσημερινὸν ὃ διὰ τὸ 
γεγονέναι πάντων ἤδη τῶν καρπῶν συγκομιδήν, 
τότε δὲ ἀπ᾽ ἄλλης ἀρχῆς τὸν τῶν ἐσομένων σπόρον 

/ ‘ δὲ A A ὃ A A 
καταβάλλεσθαι: τὸ δὲ χειμερινὸν τροπίκὸν διὰ TO 

“- “- « ij 
mpa@rtov* ἄρχεσθαι τότε τὸ μέγεθος τῆς ἡμέρας ἀπὸ 
μειώσεως αὔξησιν λαμβάνειν. οἰκειότερον δέ μοι 
A > 

δοκεῖ Kal φυσικώτερον πρὸς τὰς ἐνιαυσίους ἐπισκέ- 
ψεις ταῖς τέτταρσιν ἀρχαῖς χρῆσθαι, παρατηροῦντας 

1 ἕν τι VPLMADE, evi τινι NCam., ἕν τῇ α. 

2 συμπαθείας VPLMADEG, ἐμπαθείας NCam. 


3 ἰσημερινὸν om. NCam. 
4 πρῶτον VPLG, πρώτως alii Cam. 


196 


TETRABIBLOS II. 10 


be at a loss which of the four to prefer. Indeed, 
in a circle, absolutely considered, no one of them 
takes the lead, as would be the case if there were 
one starting-point, but those who have written on 
these matters have made use of each of the four,! 
in various ways assuming some one as the starting- 
point, as they were led by their own arguments and 
by the natural characteristics of the four points. 
This is not strange, for each of these parts has some 
special claim to being reasonably considered the 
starting-point and the new year. The spring 
equinox might be preferred because first at that 
time the day begins to be longer than the night 
and because it belongs to the moist season, and this 
element, as we said before,” is chiefly present at the 
beginning of nativities ; the summer solstice because 
the longest day occurs at that time and because to 
the Egyptians it signifies the flooding of the Nile and 
the rising of the dog star; the fall equinox because 
all the crops have by then been harvested, and a 
fresh start is then made with the sowing of the seed 
of future crops; and the winter solstice because then, 
after diminishing, the day first begins to lengthen. 
It seems more proper and natural to me, however, 
to employ the four starting-points for investigations 
which deal with the year, observing the syzygies 


1 Bouché-Leclercq, p. 129, with ἢ. 1, points out that the 
Egyptian year began with the rising of Sirius, which is 
close to Cancer; that Cancer was the horoscope in the 
so-called Egyptian ‘‘ theme of the world ’’ (the horoscope 
of the universe, in which the planets, etc., were in the 
positions which they occupied at the very beginning) ; 
but that after Posidonius Aries was definitely recognized 
as the starting-point of the zodiac. ἜΤ 15: 


197 


PTOLEMY 


τὰς ἔγγιστα αὐτῶν προγινομένας ἡλίου καὶ σελήνης 

συζυγίας συνοδικὰς ἢ πανσεληνιακάς, καὶ μάλιστα 

πάλιν τούτων τὰς ἐκλειπτικάς, ἵνα ἀπὸ μὲν τῆς 
> “1 \ K, A > ~ A » « ~ Μ ὃ 

, ἐν TH περὶ Κριὸν ἀρχῆς τὸ ἔαρ ὁποῖον ἔσται δια- 
> \ ~ / 

93 σκεπτώμεθα, ἀπὸ δὲ τῆς περὶ τὸν Καρκίνον τὸ θέρος, 
3 A \ ~ \ \ Ἁ A (4 > ‘ A 
ἀπὸ δὲ τῆς περὶ τὰς Χηλὰς τὸ μετόπωρον, ἀπὸ δὲ 

~ \ > ~ 

Ths περὶ τὸν Αἰγόκερων τὸν χειμῶνα. τὰς μὲν yap 
καθ᾽ ὅλου τῶν ὡρῶν ποιότητας καὶ καταστάσεις ὁ 
5A A 2 Wen \ φ ~ Μ 
ἥλιος ποιεῖ, καθ᾽ ἃς καὶ οἱ παντελῶς ἄπειροι μαθη- 
μάτων πρόγνωσιν ἔχουσι τοῦ μέλλοντος. 

Μ δὲ \ A ~ δί id / Ν A 

Ἔτι δὲ καὶ τὰς τῶν ζῳδίων ἰδιοτροπίας εἴς τε τὰς 
παρασημασίας ἀνέμων τε καὶ τῶν ὁλοσχερεστέρων 

͵ὔ ΄, \ > > ~ ~ “ἢ eo 
φύσεων παραληπτέον. τὰς δ᾽ ἐν τῷ μᾶλλον ἢ ἧττον 

\ A > 4, >, A /, « 
κατὰ καιροὺς ἐναλλοιώσεις καθ᾽ ὅλου μὲν πάλιν αἱ 
περὶ τὰ προειρημένα σημεῖα γινόμεναι συζυγίαι καὶ 
οἱ τῶν πλανήτων πρὸς αὐτὰς σχηματισμοὶ δεικνύ- 
oval, κατὰ μέρος δὲ καὶ ai καθ᾽ ἕκαστον δωδεκατη- 
μόριον σύνοδοι καὶ πανσέληνοι καὶ τῶν ἀστέρων 
ἐπιπορεύσεις, ἣν δὴ μηνιαίαν 3 ἐπίσκεψιν ἄν τις προσ- 
αγορεύοι.3 
“ 4 Lee /, > ~ ‘ ~ > 

Προεκτεθῆναι 3 δ᾽ ὀφειλόντων eis τοῦτο Kal τῶν ἐν 
μέρει κατὰ ζῴδιον πρὸς τὰ ἐνιαύσια καταστήματα 
τῶν φυσικῶν ἰδιωμάτων καὶ ἔτι τῶν καθ᾽ ἕκαστον 

1 ἐν τῇ VDG, ἐν τῷ ME, om. PLNCam.; ἀπὸ μὲν τῆς περὶ 
τὸν Κρ. ἀρχῆς A; περὶ τὴν τοῦ Κριοῦ ἀρχὴν Cam. 

5Ξἣν δὴ μην. VME ἣν ὃ μην. G, ἣν διμηνέαν PL, ἣν 
διμηνιαίαν ΝΟ am.” , ἣν μηνιαίαν Cam.° ®, ἣν δὴ νουμηνιαίαν A, 


3 προσαγορεύοι VPLND, -n G, -o7 A, -σοι MECam. 
4 προεκτεθῆναι Ῥ(-πεθη- )LMGE, -θεῖναι VNADCam. 


198 


TETRABIBLOS II. 10 


of the sun and moon at new and full moon which 
most nearly precede them, and among these in 
particular the conjunctions at which eclipses take 
place, so that from the starting-point in Aries we 
may conjecture what the spring will be like, from 
that in Cancer the summer, from that in Libra the 
autumn, and from that in Capricorn the winter. 
For the sun creates the general qualities and con- 
ditions of the seasons, by means of which even those 
who are totally ignorant of astrology can foretell the 
future.! 

Furthermore, we must take into consideration the 
special qualities of the signs of the zodiac to obtain 
prognostications of the winds and of the more general 
natures ;* and the variations of degree from time to 
time are in general again shown by the conjunctions 
which take place at the aforesaid points and by the 
aspects of the planets to them, and in particular also 
by the conjunctions and full moons in the several 
signs and by the course of the planets. This might 
be called monthly investigation. 

As it is proper that for this purpose there be 
enumerated the peculiar natural powers of the several 
signs to influence annual conditions, as well as those 


ΕΠ τα 2. 

*The Latin versions interpret this sentence in sub- 
stantially the way here shown. The Paraphrase of Proclus, 
however, understands it to mean that the sun governs the 
qualities of the signs, the winds, and “ certain other general 
matters’’; and the anonymous commentator also (p. 79, 
ed. Wolf) says, προὕπακουστέον ὁ ἥλιος moet. By “‘ the more 
general natures’’ doubtless are meant temperature and 
other things, besides the winds, that go to make up the 
weather. 


199 


PTOLEMY 


ἀστέρων, THY μὲν τῶν πλανήτων Kal τῶν τῆς ὁμοίας 
κράσεως ἀπλανῶν πρὸς τοὺς ἀέρας τε καὶ τοὺς 
3 / ͵ Site. A ~ σ 
ἀνέμους συνοικείωσιν καὶ ἔτι τὴν τῶν ὅλων δωδε- 
κατημορίων πρός τε τοὺς ἀνέμους καὶ τὰς Wpas, 
σ 1 > ’ 2 a ” ec / 
exaota! δεδηλώκαμεν ἐν τοῖς ἔμπροσθεν. ὑπόλοι- 
θά πον δ᾽ ἂν εἴη καὶ περὶ τῆς ἐπὶ μέρους τῶν ζωδίων 
7 adit jot Liged eda oS : 
φύσεως εἰπεῖν. 


«(α.) Περὶ τῆς μερικῆς πρὸς τὰ κατα- 
στήματα φύσεως τῶν ζῳδίων 


- ~ > 
To μὲν οὖν τοῦ Κριοῦ δωδεκατημόριον Kal’ ὅλου 
μέν ἐστι διὰ τὴν ἰσημερινὴν ἐπισημασίαν βροντῶδες 
ἢ χαλαζῶδες - κατὰ μέρος δὲ ἐν τῷ μᾶλλον καὶ 
ἧττον ἀπὸ τῆς τῶν κατὰ τῶν ἀπλανῶν ἀστέρων 
ἰδιότητος τὰ μὲν προηγούμενα αὐτοῦ ὀμβρώδη καὶ 
: ; 
ἀνεμώδη, τὰ δὲ μέσα εὔκρατα, τὰ δ᾽ ἑπόμενα 
, " - A \ ’, ’ =~ 
καυσώδη Kal λοιμικά, τὰ δὲ βόρεια καυματώδη καὶ 
φθαρτικά, τὰ δὲ νότια κρυσταλλώδη καὶ ὑπόψυχρα. 
\ \ ~ ’ὔ ’, »» σ ΄, 
To δὲ τοῦ Ταύρου δωδεκατημόριον καθ᾽ ὅλου μέν 
ἐστιν ἐπισημαντικὸν ἀμφοτέρων τῶν κράσεων καὶ 
ὑπόθερμον, κατὰ μέρος δὲ τὰ μὲν προηγούμενα 
> ~ \ aA ‘ \ \ τὃ 2 4 

αὐτοῦ, καὶ μάλιστα ta κατὰ τὴν [ΠἸλειάδα," σεισ- 

΄ \ A \ ε ΄ ‘ A / 
μώδη Kal πνευματώδη Kai ὁμιχλώδη, τὰ δὲ μέσα 
ὑγραντικὰ καὶ ψυχρά, τὰ δὲ ἑπόμενα κατὰ τὴν 

ι ἕκαστα VMADE, om. alii Cam. - 


2c» Πλειάδα VMADEGProe., τὰς Πλειάδὰς P (IPot-) 
LNCam. ae a 


200 


TETRABIBLOS II. 10-11 


of the several planets, we have already, in what pre- 
cedes, explained the familiarity of the planets, and of 
the fixed stars of like temperament,” with the air and 
the winds, as well as that of the signs, as wholes,® 
with the winds and seasons. It would remain to 
speak of the nature of the signs, part by part. 


11. Of the Nature of the Signs, Part by Part, and 
their Effect upon the Weather. 


Now the sign of Aries as a whole, because it marks 
the equinox, is characterized by thunder or hail, but, 
taken part by part, through the variation in degree 
that is due to the special quality of the fixed stars, 
its leading* portion is rainy and windy, its middle 
temperate, and the following part hot and pestil- 
ential. Its northern parts are hot and destructive, 
its southern frosty and chilly. 

The sign of Taurus as a whole is indicative of both 
temperatures and is somewhat hot; but taken part 
by part, its leading portion, particularly near the 
Pleiades, is marked by earthquakes, winds, and 
mists ; its middle moist and cold, and its following 


1j. 4 and 18. ee. 

3 Cf. the chapter on the triangles, i. 18. 

‘Ptolemy characterizes three parts of each sign, leading, 
middle, and following, besides the portions north and 
south of the ecliptic. The “leading’’ portion is so-called 
because it is the part which first rises above the horizon 
in the apparent diurnal movement of the heavens; the 
“‘following’’ portion is the last of the sign to appear. 
“ Leading ’’ degrees, or signs, are regarded as being to the 
right of the ‘“‘ middle”’ and the “following.” 


R 201 


or 


PTOLEMY 


‘Yada πυρώδη καὶ κεραυνώδη καὶ ἀστραπῶν ποιη- 

τικά * τὰ δὲ βόρεια εὔκρατα, τὰ δὲ νότια κινητικὰ 
oy 

Kal ἄτακτα. 

To δὲ τῶν Διδύμων δωδεκατημόριον καθ᾽ ὅλου 
μέν ἐστιν εὐκρασίας ποιητικόν, κατὰ μέρος δὲ τὰ 
μὲν προηγούμενα αὐτοῦ δίυγρα καὶ φθαρτικά, τὰ δὲ 
μέσα εὔκρατα, τὰ δὲ ἑπόμενα μεμιγμένα καὶ ἄτακτα " 
τὰ δὲ βόρεια πνευματώδη καὶ σεισμοποιά, τὰ δὲ 
νότια ξηρὰ καὶ καυσώδη. 

Τὸ δὲ τοῦ Καρκίνου δωδεκατημόριον καθ᾽ ὅλου μέν 
ἐστιν εὔδιον καὶ θερμόν, κατὰ μέρος δὲ τὰ μὲν 
προηγούμενα αὐτοῦ καὶ κατὰ τὴν Φάτνην πνιγώδη 
καὶ σεισμοποιὰ καὶ ἀχλυώδη, τὰ δὲ μέσα εὔκρατα, 
τὰ δὲ ἐπόμενα πνευματώδη - τὰ δὲ βόρεια καὶ τὰ 
νότια ἔκπυρα ' καὶ καυσώδη. 

Τὸ δὲ τοῦ Λέοντος δωδεκατημόριον καθ᾽ ὅλου μέν 
ἐστι καυματῶδες καὶ πνιγῶδες, κατὰ μέρος δὲ τὰ 
μὲν προηγούμενα αὐτοῦ πνιγώδη καὶ λοιμικά, τὰ 
δὲ μέσα εὔκρατα, τὰ δὲ ἑπόμενα ἔνικμα " καὶ φθορο- 
ποιά τὰ δὲ βόρεια κινητικὰ καὶ πυρώδη, τὰ δὲ 
νότια δίυγρα. 

Τὸ δὲ τῆς Παρθένου δωδεκατημόριον καθ᾽ ὅλου 
μέν ἐστι δίυγρον καὶ βροντῶδες, κατὰ μέρος δὲ τὰ 
μὲν προηγούμενα αὐτοῦ θερμότερα καὶ φθαρτικά, 
τὰ δὲ μέσα εὔκρατα, τὰ δὲ ἑπόμενα ὑδατώδη - τὰ δὲ 
βόρεια πνευματώδη, τὰ δὲ νότια εὔκρατα. 

i 1 Post ἔκπυρα add. καὶ φθαρτικὰ PLNCam.; om. VMADEG 
roc. 


2 ἔνικμα Υ Ῥ(ἔνηκμα) LMADE ; ἔνυγρα Proc. ; ἄνικμα NCam.; 
αἴνιγμα G. 


202 


TETRABIBLOS II. 11 


portion, near the Hyades, fiery and productive of 
thunder and lightning. Its northern parts are 
temperate, its southern unstable and irregular. 

The sign of Gemini as a whole is productive of an 
equable temperature, but taken part by part its 
leading portion is wet and destructive, its middle 
temperate, and its following portion mixed and ir- 
reguiar. Its northern parts are windy and cause 
earthquakes ; its southern parts dry and parching. 

The sign of Cancer as a whole is one of fair, warm 
weather ; but, part by part, its leading portion and 
the region of Praesepe is stifling, productive of earth- 
quakes, and misty; its middle temperate, and its 
following parts windy. Its northern and southern 
parts are fiery and parching.! 

The sign of Leo as a whole is hot and stifling ; but, 
part by part, its leading portion is stifling and 
pestilential, its middle part temperate, and its follow- 
ing portion wet and destructive. Its northern parts 
are unstable and fiery, its southern parts moist. 

The sign of Virgo as a whole is moist and marked 
by thunder-storms; but, taken part by part, its 
leading portion is rather warm and destructive, its 
middle temperate, and its following part watery. 
Its northern parts are windy and its southern parts 
temperate. 


1“ Fiery, destructive, and parching,” according to 
certain MSS. See the critical note. 


203 


PTOLEMY 


To δὲ τῶν Χηλῶν δωδεκατημόριον καθ᾽ ὅλου μέν 
ἐστι τρεπτικὸν καὶ μεταβολικόν,; κατὰ μέρος δὲ τὰ 
μὲν προηγούμενα αὐτοῦ καὶ τὰ μέσα ἐστὶν εὔκρατα, 
τὰ δὲ ἑπόμενα ὑδατώδη : τὰ δὲ βόρεια πνευματώδη, 
τὰ δὲ νότια ἔνικμα καὶ λοιμικά. 

Τὸ δὲ τοῦ Σκορπίου δωδεκατημόριον καθ᾽ ὅλου 
μέν ἐστι βροντῶδες καὶ πυρῶδες, κατὰ μέρος δὲ τὰ 
μὲν προηγούμενα αὐτοῦ νιφετώδη, τὰ δὲ μέσα 
εὔκρατα, τὰ δὲ ἑπόμενα σεισμώδη " τὰ δὲ βόρεια 
καυσώδη, τὰ δὲ νότια ἔνικμα. 

Τὸ δὲ τοῦ Τοξότου δωδεκατημόριον καθ᾽ ὅλου μέν 
ἐστι πνευματῶδες, κατὰ μέρος δὲ τὰ μὲν προηγού- 
μενα αὐτοῦ δίυγρα, τὰ δὲ μέσα εὔκρατα, τὰ δὲ 
ἑπόμενα πυρώδη - τὰ δὲ βόρεια πνευματώδη, τὰ δὲ 
νότια κάθυγρα καὶ μεταβολικά. 

Τὸ δὲ τοῦ Αἰγόκερω δωδεκατημόριον καθ᾽ ὅλου 
μέν ἐστι κάθυγρον, κατὰ μέρος δὲ τὰ μὲν προηγού- 
μενα αὐτοῦ καυσώδη καὶ φθαρτικά, τὰ δὲ μέσα 
εὔκρατα, τὰ δὲ ἑπόμενα ὄμβρων κινητικά : τὰ δὲ 
βόρεια καὶ τὰ νότια κάθυγρα καὶ φθαρτικά. 

Τὸ δὲ τοῦ “Ὑδροχόου δωδεκατημόριον καθ᾽ ὅλου 
μέν ἐστι ψυχρὸν καὶ ὑδατῶδες, κατὰ μέρος δὲ τὰ 
μὲν προηγούμενα αὐτοῦ κάθυγρα, τὰ δὲ μέσα εὖ- 
κρατα, τὰ δὲ ἑπόμενα πνευματώδη - τὰ δὲ βόρεια 
καυσώδη, τὰ δὲ νότια νιφετώδη. 

Τὸ δὲ τῶν ᾿Ιχθύων δωδεκατημόριον καθ᾽ ὅλου 
μέν ἐστι ψυχρὸν καὶ πνευματῶδες, κατὰ μέρος δὲ 
τὰ μὲν προηγούμενα αὐτοῦ εὔκρατα, τὰ δὲ μέσα 
κάθυγρα, τὰ δὲ ἑπόμενα καυσώδη - τὰ δὲ βόρεια 
πνευματώδη, τὰ δὲ νότια ὑδατώδη. 

204 


TETRABIBLOS II. 11 


The sign of Libra as a whole is changeable and 
variable ; but, taken part by part, its leading and 
middle portions are temperate and its following 
portion watery. Its northern parts are windy and 
its southern moist and pestilential. 

The sign of Scorpio as a whole is marked by thun- 
der and fire, but, taken part by part, its leading 
portion is snowy, its middle temperate, and its fol- 
lowing portion causes earthquakes. Its northern 
parts are hot and its southern moist. 

The sign of Sagittarius as a whole is windy ; but, 
taken part by part, its leading portion is wet, its 
middle temperate, and its following part fiery. Its 
northern parts are windy, its southern moist and 
changeable. 

The sign of Capricorn as a whole is moist; but, 
taken part by part, its leading portion is marked 
by hot weather and is destructive, its middle tem- 
perate, and its following part raises rain-storms. 
Its northern and southern portions are wet and 
destructive. 

The sign of Aquarius as a whole is cold and watery ; 
but, taken part by part, its leading portion is moist, 
its middle temperate, its following part windy. Its 
northern portion brings hot weather and its southern 
clouds. 

The sign of Pisces as a whole is cold and windy ; 
but, taken part by part, its leading portion is tem- 
perate, its middle moist, and its following portion 
hot. Its northern parts are windy and its southern 
watery. 


1 μεταβολικόν VLADE, μεταβωλητικόν P, μεταβλητικόν 
MNGCam. 


205 


PTOLEMY 


τ Ilept tis ἐπὶ pépovs trav 
καταστημάτων ἐπισκέψεως 

Τούτων δὲ οὕτως προεκτεθειμένων αἱ κατὰ μέρος 
ἔφοδοι τῶν ἐπισημασιῶν περιέχουσι τὸν τρόπον 
τοῦτον. μία μὲν γάρ ἐστιν ἡ ὁλοσχερέστερον πρὸς 
91 τὰ τεταρτημόρια νοουμένη, καθ᾽ ἣν τηρεῖν, ὡς 
ἔφαμεν, δεήσει τὰς γινομένας ἔγγιστα πρὸ τῶν 
τροπικῶν καὶ ἰσημερινῶν σημείων 2 συνόδους ἢ καὶ 
πανσελήνους, καὶ κατὰ τὴν μοῖραν > ἤτοι συνοδικὴν 
ἢ πανσεληνιακὴν τὴν ἐν ἑκάστῳ τῶν ἐπιζητουμένων 
κλιμάτων ἃ τὰ κέντρα ws ἐπὶ γενέσεως διατιθέναι " 
ἔπειτα τοὺς οἰκοδεσπότας λαμβάνειν τοῦ τε συν- 
οδικοῦ ἢ πανσεληνιακοῦ τόπου καὶ τοῦ ἑπομένου 
αὐτῷ κέντρου κατὰ τὸν ὑποδεδειγμένον ἡμῖν τρόπον 
ἐν τοῖς ἔμπροσθεν περὶ τῶν ἐκλείψεων, καὶ οὕτως 
τὸ μὲν καθ᾽ ὅλου θεωρεῖν ἐκ τῆς τῶν τεταρτημορίων 


1 πρὸ PLMNEProc.Cam.!, πρὸς Cam.®, περὶ τὰ τροπικὰ κτλ. 
A, om. VD. 

2 σημείων VDMEProc., σημεῖα A, σημασιῶν alii Cam. 

3 μοῖραν GMEProc., om. in lacuna fere 3 litt. VD, συζυγίαν 
A, om. alii Cam. 

4 συζυγίαν post κλιμάτων add. NCam. 


ΤῊ the latter part of 11. 10. Cardanus, pp. 228-229, 
commenting on this chapter, says, after admiring the 
genius of Ptolemy, “‘ For in this chapter he does five things. 
In the first place, he has declared the proper nature of each 
part of the year in general, which is predicted from the 
new moon or full moon preceding the ingress of the sun 
to the cardinal point. In the second... , the quality 
of each month from the new or full moon, following the 
ingress of the sun to the cardinal point. In the third 


206 


TETRABIBLOS II. 12 


12. Of the Investigation of Weather in Detail. 


Now that these facts have been stated in intro- 
duction, the method of dealing with the significa- 
tions in detail involves the following procedure. 
For one method is that which is more generally 
conceived, with relation to the quarters, which will 
demand, as we have said,! that we observe the new 
moons” or full moons which most nearly precede 
the solstitial and equinoctial signs, and that, as the 
degree of the new moon or of the full moon may 
fall in each latitude investigated, we dispose the 
angles as in a nativity.* It will then be necessary 
to determine the rulers of the place of the new moon 
or full moon and of the angle that follows it, after 
the fashion explained by us in the preceding sections 
dealing with eclipses,t and thus to judge of the 
general situation from the special nature of the 


place, he tells us how to know the nature of the weather 
of the fourth part of each month. . . and this is dis- 
covered not only from new moons and full moons but also 
from the quarters. . . . In the fourth place, he shows us 
how to recognize each day the quality of the air . . . from 
the rising or setting of the bright stars. In the fifth he 
teaches us to learn that same thing hour by hour from the 
passage of the luminaries through the angles at the time.”’ 
The “ quarters’? mentioned by Ptolemy are the quarters 
of the year, or of the zodiac. 

*Literally “conjunctions” (συνόδους), but with special 
reference to those of the sun and moon; hence, “‘ new 
moons.” 

3. That is, determine the horoscopie point, mid-heaven, 
occident, etc., at the time of the conjunction and construct 
the horoscope for the event as though it were a birth. 

4The reference is to il. 4-8, especially c. 5, where the 
method of procedure is explained, 


207 


PTOLEMY 


ἰδιότητος, τὸ δὲ μᾶλλον! ἢ ἧττον ἐπιτάσεων Kal 
ἀνέσεων ἐκ τῆς τῶν οἰκοδεσποτησάντων φύσεως 
διαλαμβάνοντας ποίας τε ποιότητός εἰσι καὶ ποίων 
καταστημάτων κινητικοί. 

Δευτέρα δ᾽ ἐστὶν ἔφοδος ἡ μηνιαία, καθ᾽ ἣν δεήσει 
τὰς καθ᾽ ἕκαστον δωδεκατημόριον προσγινομένας 
συνόδους ἢ πανσελήνους κατὰ τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον 
ἐπισκοπεῖν, ἐκεῖνο μόνον τηροῦντας, ἵνα συνόδου 
μὲν ἐμπεσούσης 5 τῆς ἔγγιστα τοῦ παρῳχημένου 
τροπικοῦ ἢ ἰσημερινοῦ σημείου καὶ ταῖς μέχρι τοῦ 
ἐφεξῆς τεταρτημορίου συνόδοις χρησώμεθα, παν- 
σελήνου δὲ πανσελήνοις - ἐπισκοπεῖν δὲ ὁμοίως τὰ 
κέντρα καὶ τοὺς οἰκοδεσπότας ἀμφοτέρων τῶν 
τόπων καὶ μάλιστα τὰς ἔγγιστα φάσεις συναφάς 

98 τε καὶ ἀπορροίας τῶν πλανωμένων ἀστέρων, τάς 
τε ἰδιότητας αὐτῶν καὶ τῶν τόπων, καὶ ποίων 
ἀνέμων εἰσὶ κινητικοὶ αὐτοί τε καὶ τὰ μέρη τῶν 
ζῳδίων καθ᾽ ὧν ἂν τύχωσιν - ἔτι δὲ καὶ ᾧ τὸ πλά- 
τος τῆς σελήνης ἀνέμῳ προσνένευκε κατὰ τὴν 
λόξωσιν τοῦ διὰ μέσων, ὅπως ἐξ ἁπάντων τούτων 
κατὰ τὴν ἐπικράτησιν τὰ ὡς ἐπὶ πᾶν τῶν μηνῶν 
καταστήματα καὶ πνεύματα προγινώσκωμεν. 

Τρίτη δ᾽ ἐστὶ τὸ τὰς ἔτι λεπτομερεστέρας ἐπιση- 


1 τῶν μᾶλλον NAECam., τῶν om. VPLMDG. 
2 ἐμπεσούσης VDG; ἐμπέσῃ Ῥτοο. ; ἐκπεσούσης alii Cam. 


1The signs are taken as marking the months, and the 
new or full moons first occurring while the sun is in the 
several signs (hence following the entrance of the sun into 


208 


TETRABIBLOS II. 12 


quarters, and determine the question of degree of 
intensification and relaxation from the nature of 
the ruling planets, their qualities, and the kinds of 
weather which they produce. 

The second mode of procedure is based on the 
month. In this it will be necessary for us to 
examine in the same way the new moons or full 
moons that take place, in the several signs,! observ- 
ing only this, that, if a new moon occurs nearest 
to the solstitial or equinoctial sign just past, we 
should use the new moons which take place as far 
as the next quadrant, and in the case of a full 
moon the full moons. It will be needful similarly 
that we observe the angles and the rulers of both 
the places, and especially the nearest appearances 5 
of the planets, and their applications® and recessions, 
the peculiar properties of the planets and of their 
places, and the winds which are aroused both by the 
planets themselves and by the parts of the signs in 
which they chance to be ; still further, to what wind 
the latitude of the moon is inclined through the 
obliquity of the ecliptic. From all these facts, by 
means of the principle of prevalence, we may predict 
the general conditions of weather and the winds of 
the months. 

The third step is to observe the even more minutely 


the sign, as Cardanus says) are to be observed. However, 
if, for example, in predicting the weather for the first 
quarter (spring), a new moon had preceded the first of 
Aries and had been used in determining the prediction in 
the way just described, we are to use the new moons in 
Aries, Taurus, and Gemini for the monthly predictions of 
this quadrant ; if a full moon, the full moons. 
2 Or apparitions. 3 See 1. 24. 


209 


PTOLEMY 


μασίας ἀνέσεων Kal ἐπιτάσεων παρατηρεῖν. θεω- 
ρεῖται δὲ καὶ τοῦτο διά τε τῶν κατὰ μέρος τοῦ 
ἡλίου καὶ τῆς σελήνης συσχηματισμῶν, οὐ μόνον 
τῶν συνοδικῶν ἢ πανσεληνιακῶν ἀλλὰ καὶ τῶν 
κατὰ τὰς διχοτόμους, καταρχομένης Ws ἐπὶ πᾶν τῆς 
κατὰ τὴν ἐπισημασίαν ἐναλλοιώσεως πρὸ τριῶν 
ἡμερῶν, ἐνίοτε δὲ καὶ μετὰ τρεῖς τῆς ἰσοστάθμου 
πρὸς τὸν ἥλιον ἐπιπορεύσεως, καὶ διὰ τοῦ καθ᾽ 
ἑκάστην ' τῶν τοιούτων * στάσεων ἢ καὶ τῶν ἄλλων, 
οἷον τριγώνων καὶ ἑξαγώνων, καὶ πρὸς τοὺς πλάνη- 
τας συσχηματισμοῦ. τούτων γὰρ ἀκολούθως τῇ 
φύσει καὶ ἡ τῆς ἐναλλοιώσεως ἰδιοτροπία καταλαμ- 
βάνεται συμφώνως ταῖς τε τῶν ἐπιθεωρούντων 
ἀστέρων καὶ ταῖς τῶν ζῳδίων πρός τε τὸ περιέχον 
καὶ τοὺς ἀνέμους φυσικαῖς συνοικειώσεσιν. 

Αὐτῶν δὲ τούτων τῶν κατὰ μέρος ποιοτήτων at 
καθ᾽ ἡμέραν ἐπιτάσεις ὃ ἀποτελοῦνται, μάλιστα μὲν 
ὅταν τῶν ἀπλανῶν οἱ λαμπρότεροι καὶ δραστικώ- 
τεροι φάσεις ἑῴας ἢ ἑσπερίας ἀνατολικὰς ἢ δυτικὰς 
ποιῶνται πρὸς τὸν ἥλιον - τρέπουσι γὰρ ὡς ἐπὶ 
πολὺ τὰς κατὰ μέρος καταστάσεις πρὸς τὰς ἑαυτῶν 
φύσεις, οὐδὲν δὲ ἔλαττον καὶ ὅταν τινὲ τῶν κέντρων 
τὰ φῶτα ἐπιπορεύηται. 

Πρὸς γὰρ τὰς τοιαύτας αὐτῶν σχέσεις αἱ καθ᾽ 
ὥραν ἀνέσεις καὶ ἐπιτάσεις τῶν καταστημάτων 
μεταβάλλουσι, καθάπερ πρὸς τὰς τῆς σελήνης αἵ τε 

1 ἑκάστην VMADGProce., -ον P, του NLECam. 

2 τῶν τοιούτων VMADEG, τούτων τῶν PL, τούτων NCam.}, 


αὐτῶν Cam.* 
8 ἐπιτάσεις ἢ ἀνέσεις NACam, 


210 


TETRABIBLOS II. 12 


detailed indications of relaxation and intensification.! 
This observation is based upon the configurations 
of the sun and the moon successively, not merely 
the new moons and full moons, but also the half 
moons, in which case the change signified generally 
has its beginning three days before, and sometimes 
three days after, the moon’s progress matches that of 
the sun.” It is based also upon their aspects to the 
planets, when they are at each of the positions of 
this kind, or likewise others, such as trine and 
sextile. For it is in accordance with the nature of 
these that the special quality of the change is appre- 
hended, in harmony with the natural affinities of the 
attending planets and of the signs of the zodiac for 
the ambient and the winds. 

The day by day intensifications of these particular 
qualities are brought about chiefly when the more 
brilliant and powerful of the fixed stars make 
appearances, matutine or vespertine, at rising or 
setting, with respect to the sun.? For ordinarily 
they modulate the particular conditions to accord 
with their own natures, and none the less too 
when the luminaries are passing over one of the 
angles. 

For the hour by hour intensifications and relaxa- 
tions of the weather vary in response to such positions 
of the stars as these, in the same way that the ebb 


1 That is, in the predicted event. Ptolemy also uses the 
expression “‘ the more or less ’’ (τὸ μᾶλλον ἢ ἧττον) to refer 
to intensification and relaxation. 

2 J.e. conjunction. 

’Heliacal risings and settings may be meant; but see 
also the list of configurations given in the note on ii. 7, 
p. 171. 


211 


PTOLEMY 


ἀμπώτεις καὶ at παλίρροιαι, Kal at τῶν πνευμάτων 
δὲ τροπαὶ μάλιστα περὶ τὰς τοιαύτας τῶν φωτῶν " 
κεντρώσεις ἀποτελοῦνται πρὸς οὗς ἂν τῶν ἀνέμων 
ἐπὶ τὰ αὐτὰ τὸ πλάτος τῆς σελήνης τὰς προσνεύσεις 
ποιούμενον καταλαμβάνηται. πανταχοῦ : μέντοι 
προσήκει διαλαμβάνειν ὡς προηγουμένης μὲν τῆς 
καθ᾽ ὅλου καὶ πρώτης ὑποκειμένης αἰτίας, ἑπο- 
μένης δὲ τῆς τῶν κατὰ μέρος ἐπισυμβαινόντων, 
βεβαιουμένης δὲ μάλιστα καὶ ἰσχυροποιουμένης τῆς 
ἐνεργείας, ὅταν οἱ τῶν καθ᾽ ὅλου φύσεων οἰκοδεσπο- 
τήσαντες ἀστέρες καὶ ταῖς ἐπὶ μέρους τύχωσι 
συσχηματιζόμενοι. 


100 <ty.> Περὶ τῆς τῶν μετεώρων σημειώ- 
σεως 


Χρήσιμοι δ᾽ ἂν elev πρὸς τὰς τῶν κατὰ μέρος 
ἐπισημασιῶν προγνώσεις καὶ αἱ τῶν γινομένων 
σημείων περί τε τὸν ἥλιον καὶ τὴν σελήνην καὶ τοὺς 
ἀστέρας παρατηρήσεις. 

Τὸν μὲν οὖν ἥλιον παρατηρητέον πρὸς μὲν τὰς 
ἡμερησίους καταστάσεις ἀνατέλλοντα, πρὸς δὲ τὰς 
νυκτερινὰς δύνοντα, πρὸς δὲ τὰς παρατεινούσας 
κατὰ τοὺς πρὸς τὴν σελήνην σχηματισμούς, ὡς 
ἑκάστου σχήματος τὴν μέχρι τοῦ ἑξῆς κατάστασιν 
ὡς ἐπὶ πᾶν προσημαίνοντος. καθαρὸς μὲν γὰρ καὶ 
ἀνεπισκότητος καὶ εὐσταθὴς καὶ ἀνέφελος ἀνατέλ- 
λων ἢ δύνων εὐδιεινῆς καταστάσεώς ἐστι δηλω- 
τικός͵ ποικίλον δὲ τὸν κύκλον ἔχων ἢ ὑπόπυρρον 
ἢ ἀκτῖνας ἐρυθρὰς ἀποπέμπων ἤτοι εἰς τὰ ἔξω ἣ 
212 


TETRABIBLOS II. 12-13 


and flow of the tide respond to the phases of the 
moon, and the changes in the air-currents are brought 
about especially at such appearances of the lumin- 
aries at the angles, in the direction of those winds 
towards which the latitude of the moon is found 
to be inclining. In every case, however, one should 
draw his conclusions on the principle that the univer- 
sal and primary underlying cause takes precedence 
and that the cause of particular events is secondary 
to it, and that the force is most ensured and 
strengthened when the stars which are the lords of 
the universal natures are configurated with the par- 
ticular causes. 


13. Of the Significance of Atmospheric Signs. 


Observations of the signs that are to be seen 
around the sun, moon, and planets would also be 
useful for a foreknowledge of the particular events 
signified. 

We must, then, observe the sun at rising to deter- 
mine the weather by day and at setting for the 
weather at night, and its aspects to the moon for 
weather conditions of longer extent, on the assump- 
tion that each aspect, in general, foretells the con- 
dition up to the next. For when the sun rises or 
sets clear, unobscured, steady, and unclouded, it 
signifies fair weather ; but if its disk is variegated or 
reddish or sends out ruddy rays, either directly out- 
ward or turned back upon itself, or if it has the 





1dwrdv VPLDEG, φάσεων NACam., φύσεων M. 
3 πανταχοῦ PLNEProc.Cam., πανταχῆ VMADG. 


213 


101 


PTOLEMY 


e 3. EES | ε ‘ λ / 9 ἍἋ A / 3 
ws ef?! ἑαυτὸν κυκλουμένας 5 ἢ τὰ καλούμενα 
/ Ψ > Cia | / ” ” ΄7 
παρήλια νέφη ἐξ ἑνὸς μέρους ἔχων ἢ σχήματα 
νεφῶν ὑπόκιρρα καὶ ὡσεὶ μακρὰς ἀκτῖνας ἀπο- 
μηκύνων, ἀνέμων σφοδρῶν ἐστι σημαντικὸς καὶ 
τοιούτων πρὸς ἃς ἂν γωνίας τὰ προειρημένα σημεῖα 
/ / \ a“ ¢ / > / ” 
γίνηται. μέλας δὲ ἢ ὑπόχλωρος ἀνατέλλων ἢ 
/ \ , vn ὦ » \ ε \ > 
δύνων μετὰ συννεφίας ἢ ἅλως ἔχων περὶ αὑτὸν καθ 
« / Ἅ 5 > / ~ ~ / ͵ὔ 
ἕν μέρος ἢ ἐξ ἀμφοτέρων τῶν μερῶν παρήλια νέφη 
καὶ ἀκτῖνας ἢ ὑποχλώρους ὁ ἢ μέλανας, χειμώνων 

καὶ ὑετῶν ἐστι δηλωτικός. 

Τὴν δὲ σελήνην τηρητέον ἐν ταῖς πρὸ τριῶν 
ἡμερῶν ἢ μετὰ τρεῖς παρόδοις τῶν τε συνόδων καὶ 
πανσελήνων καὶ διχοτόμων. λεπτὴ μὲν γὰρ καὶ 
καθαρὰ φαινομένη καὶ μηδὲν ἔχουσα περὶ αὐτήν, 

~ > 
εὐδιεινῆς καταστάσεώς ἐστι δηλωτική - λεπτὴ δὲ 

\ > \ \ a A ~ > / 7 
καὶ ἐρυθρὰ καὶ ὅλον τὸν τοῦ ἀφωτίστου κύκλον 
ἔχουσα διαφανῆ καὶ ὑποκεκινημένον, ἀνέμων ἐστὶν 
ἐπισημαντική, καθ᾽ ὧν ἂν μάλιστα ποιῆται τὴν 
πρόσνευσιν μέλαινα δὲ ἢ χλωρὰ καὶ παχεῖα 

> 
θεωρουμένη χειμώνων καὶ ὄμβρων ἐστὶ δηλωτική. 

Παρατηρητέον δὲ καὶ τὰς περὶ αὐτὴν γινομένας 
ἅλως. εἰ μὲν γὰρ μία εἴη καὶ αὐτὴ καθαρὰ καὶ 
> / « / δί > δὲ δύ a” ‘ 
ἠρέμα ὑπομαραινομένη, εὐδίαν - εἰ δὲ δύο ἢ καὶ 
τρεῖς elev, χειμῶνας δηλοῦσιν - ὑπόκιρροι μὲν οὖσαι 

- ~ > / 
Kal woTep* ῥηγνύμεναι, τοὺς διὰ σφοδρῶν ἀνέμων " 
ἀχλυώδεις δὲ καὶ παχεῖαι, τοὺς διὰ νιφετῶν " 
ε ΄, δε Ἢ / \ ge / ‘\ ὃ 3 
ὑπόχλωροι δὲ ἢ μέλαιναι καὶ ῥηγνύμεναι, τοὺς δι 
ἀμφοτέρων - καὶ ὅσῳ 5 ἂν πλείους ὦσι, τοσούτῳ ® 


1 ἐφ᾽ om. AECam. 
214 


TETRABIBLOS II. 13 


so-called parheliac clouds on one side, or yellowish 
formations of clouds, and as it were emits long rays, 
it indicates heavy winds and such as come from the 
angles to which the aforesaid signs point. If at rising 
or setting it is dark or livid, being accompanied by 
clouds, or if it has halos about it on one side, or the 
parheliac clouds on beth sides, and gives forth either 
livid or dusky rays, it signifies storms and rain. 

We must observe the moon in its course three days 
before or three days after new moon, full moon, and 
the quarters. For when it appears thin and clear 
and has nothing around it, it signifies clear weather. 
If it is thin and red, and the whole disk of the un- 
lighted portion is visible and somewhat disturbed, it 
indicates winds, in that direction in which it is 
particularly inclined. If it is observed to be dark, 
or pale, and thick, it signifies storms and rains. 

We must also observe the halos around the moon. 
For if there is one, and this is clear, and gradually 
fading, it signifies fair weather; if there are two or 
three, storms; if they are yellowish, and broken, as it 
were, storms accompanied by heavy winds; if they 
are thick and misty, snowstorms; pale, or dusky, 
and broken, storms with both winds and snow; 


2 κυκλουμένας G ; κοιλούμενον VMDE, -os A; καλλούμενον P, 
καλούμενον L; κλωμένας NCam. 

3 καλούμενα VADEGProc. ; λεγόμενα PLMNCam. 

4 ὑποχλώρους VMADEGProe. ; ὑπώχρους PLNCam. 

5 καθ᾽ ὧν av VAD, καθ᾽ ὃ ἂν ME, καθ᾽ ὃ NPLCam. 

5 χλωρὰ] cf. Proc. ; χλορὰ VD ; ὠχρὰ PLNACam. ; ὠχρὰ ἢ 
χλωρὰ Μ, ἢ χλωρὰ ἢ ὠχρὰ E. 

7 ὥσπερ VMADE; ὡσεὶ PNCam.; ὡς L. 

8 ὅσῳ VMADE, -ov PLNCam.Proc. 

9 τοσούτῳ VADE, -ous M, -ον PLNCam.Proe. 


215 


PTOLEMY 


μείζονας. Kal at περὶ τοὺς ἀστέρας δὲ τούς τε 
πλανωμένους καὶ τοὺς λαμπροὺς τῶν ἀπλανῶν ἅλως 
συνιστάμεναι ἐπισημαίνουσι τὰ οἰκεῖα τοῖς τε 
χρώμασιν ἑαυτῶν 5 καὶ ταῖς τῶν ἐναπειλημμένων 
φύσεσι. 


‘ “- 3 ~ \ ~ , A 
Kai τῶν ἀπλανῶν δὲ τῶν κατά τι πλῆθος συνεγ- 
γὺς ὄντων παρατηρητέον τὰ χρώματα καὶ τὰ 
/ 
102 μεγέθη. λαμπρότεροι yap Kal μείζονες ὁρώμενοι 
la / 
παρὰ Tas συνήθεις φαντασίας εἰς ὁποιονδήποτε μέρος 
3 “ 
ὄντες ἀνέμους τοὺς ἀπὸ τοῦ οἰκείου τόπου διαση- 
/ 2 \ > Ad \ ~ γ0. δῶ 
μαίνουσιν. οὐ μὴν ἀλλὰ καὶ τῶν ἰδίως ψεφελοει, ῶν 
συστροφῶν οἷον τῆς Φάτνης καὶ τῶν ὁμοίων, at 
αἰθρίας οὔσης αἱ συστάσεις ἀμαυραὶ καὶ ὥσπερ 3 
ἀφανεῖς ἢ πεπαχυμέναι θεωρῶνται, φορᾶς ὑδάτων 
εἰσὶ δηλωτικαΐί - καθαραὶ δὲ καὶ παλλόμεναι συνε- 
χῶς σφοδρῶν πνευμάτων : ἐπὰν δὲ τῶν ἀστέρων 
~ > ¢ / “ ~ 
τῶν παρ᾽ ἑκάτερα τῆς Φάτνης τῶν καλουμένων 
Ὄ « \ / > A / / 
νων ὃ μὲν βόρειος ἀφανὴς γένηται, βορέαν 
πνεύσειν σημαίνει, ὁ δὲ νότιος νότον." 
“- 3 aA 
Καὶ τῶν ἐπιγινομένων δὲ κατὰ καιροὺς ἐν τοῖς 
«ς ~ ~ 
μετεώροις at μὲν τῶν κομητῶν συστροφαὶ ws 
> ~ 
ἐπὶ πᾶν αὐχμοὺς Kal ἀνέμους προσημαίνουσι καὶ 
τοσούτῳ μείζονας ὅσῳ ἂν ἐκ πλειόνων μερῶν καὶ 
3 
ἐπὶ πολὺ ἡ σύστασις γένηται. 
Aid \ ὃ (ὃ 5 \ «3 \ 6 ~ > / 
ἱ δὲ διάδρομοιϑ Kal οἵ ἀκοντισμοὶ ὃ τῶν ἀστέρων, 


1 τοὺς ἀστέρας δὲ VMADE; om. alii Cam. 
2 ἑαυτῶν VMAD, αὐτῶν alii Cam. 

3 ὥσπερ VMADEPYoce., πᾶσαι PLNCam. 

4 ἐπὰν. . . νότον soli habent VDN(mg.)Cam.; om. 
PLNMAEProc. 


216 


TETRABIBLOS II. 13 


and the more of them there are the more severe the 
storms. And the halos that gather about the stars, 
both the planets and the brilliant fixed stars, signify 
what is appropriate to their colours and to the 
natures of the luminaries which they surround. 

As for the fixed stars which are close together in 
some number, we must observe their colours and 
magnitudes. For if they appear brighter and larger 
than usual, in whatever part of the sky they may 
be, they indicate the winds that blow from their own 
region. As for the clusters in the proper sense, 
however, such as Praesepe and the like, whenever in 
a clear sky their clusters appear to be dim, and, as 
it were, invisible, or thickened, they signify a down- 
pour of water, but if they are clear and constantly 
twinkle, heavy winds. Whenever, of the stars called 
the Asses on each side of Praesepe, the one to the 
north becomes invisible, it means that the north 
wind will blow, and the one to the south, the south 
wind. 

Of occasional phenomena in the upper atmosphere, 
comets generally foretell droughts or winds, and the 
larger the number of parts that are found in their 
heads and the greater their size, the more severe 
the winds. 

Rushing and shooting stars, if they come from one 


1This sentence is perhaps an addition to the text, since 
it does not occur in all the MSS. nor in Proclus; it is 
to be found, however, in Hephaestion, p. 100, 31-33 (ed. 
Engelbrecht). Hephaestion’s compilation dates, according 
to Engelbrecht, from the year 381. 





δ διάδρομοι VD, -ai MEE, διαδρομικαὶ A, δρόμοι Proc., διεκ- 
δρομαὶ PNCam., ἐκδρομαὶ L. ὃ ἀκοντισταὶ NCam. 


217 


PTOLEMY 


εἰ μὲν ἀπὸ μιᾶς γίνοιντο γωνίας, τὸν am’ ἐκείνης 
ἄνεμον δηλοῦσιν - εἰ δ᾽ ἀπὸ τῶν ἐναντίων, ἀκατα- 
στασίαν πνευμάτων " εἰ δὲ ἀπὸ τῶν τεττάρων, παν- 
τοίους χειμῶνας μέχρι βροντῶν καὶ ἀστραπῶν καὶ 
τῶν τοιούτων. ὡσαύτως δὲ καὶ τὰ νέφη ' πόκοις 
ἐρίων ὄντα παραπλήσια προδηλωτικὰ ἐνίοτε γίνεται 

ι03 χειμώνων. αἵ τε συνιστάμεναι κατὰ καιροὺς ἴριδες 
χειμῶνας μὲν ἐξ εὐδίας, εὐδίας δὲ ἐκ χειμώνων 
προσημαίνουσι : καὶ ὡς ἐπὶ πᾶν συνελόντι εἰπεῖν, at 
καθ᾽ ὅλου τοῦ ἀέρος ἐπιγινόμεναι ἰδιόχροοι 5 φαν- 
τασίαι τὰ ὅμοια δηλοῦσι τοῖς ὑπὸ τῶν οἰκείων 
συμπτωμάτων κατὰ τὰ προδεδηλωμένα διὰ τῶν 
ἔμπροσθεν ἀποτελουμένοις. 

Ἢ μὲν δὴ τῶν καθολικῶν ἐπίσκεψις, τῶν τε 
ὁλοσχερεστέρων θεωρουμένων καὶ τῶν ἐπὶ μέρους, 
μέχρι τοσούτων ἡμῖν κατὰ τὸ κεφαλαιῶδες ὑπομνη- 
ματίσθω. τῆς δὲ κατὰ τὸ γενεθλιαλογικὸν εἶδος 
προγνώσεως τὰς πραγματείας ἐν τοῖς ἑξῆς κατὰ 
τὴν προσήκουσαν ἀκολουθίαν ἐφοδεύσομεν. 


1 Post νέφη add. ἐν ὁποίοις ἂν ὦσιν ὁρίοις NCam. ; om. alii 
Proc. 


3 ἰδιόχροοι MA, ἰδιόχρωοι VPLD, ἰδιόχρονοι NECam. 
(*notatum) ; cf. 7a. . . χρώματα Proc. 


218 


TETRABIBLOS II. 13 


angle, denote the wind from that direction, but if 
from opposite angles, a confusion of winds, and if 
from all four angles, storms of all kinds, including 
thunder, lightning, and the like. Similarly clouds 
resembling flocks of wool are sometimes significant 
of storms. And the rainbows that appear from 
time to time signify storms after clear weather and 
clear weather after storms. To sum up the whole 
matter, the visible phenomena, which appear with 
peculiar colours of their own in the atmosphere in 
general, indicate results similar to those brought 
about by their own proper occurrences, in the 
manner already explained in the foregoing.! 

Let us, then, consider that thus far, in outline, 
there has been given an account of the investiga- 
tion of general questions, both in their more uni- 
versal aspects and in particular detail. In the 
following we shall supply in due order the procedure 
for the prediction which follows the genethlialogical 
form. 


1The purpose of this clumsy sentence seems to be merely 
to refer the reader to the account already given in ii. 9. 


219 


PTOLEMY 


BIBAION I” 


<a.> Προοίμιον" 


᾿Εφωδευμένης ἡμῖν ἐν τοῖς ἔμπροσθεν τῆς περὶ 
τὰ καθ᾽ ὅλου συμπτώματα Σ θεωρίας, ὡς προηγου- 
μένης καὶ τὰ πολλὰ κατακρατεῖν δυναμένης τῶν 
περὶ ἕνα ἕκαστον τῶν ἀνθρώπων κατὰ τὸ ἴδιον τῆς 
φύσεως ἀποτελουμένων, ὧν τὸ προγνωστικὸν μέρος 


104 γενεθλιαλογικὸν καλοῦμεν͵ δύναμιν μὲν 8 μίαν καὶ 


A > \ > , ~ » ~ [2 a“ , 
τὴν αὐτὴν ἀμφοτέρων τῶν εἰδῶν ἡγεῖσθαι προσήκει 
καὶ περὶ τὸ ποιητικὸν καὶ περὶ τὸ θεωρητικόν, 
» , \ ~ > a \ ~ > a 
ἐπειδήπερ καὶ τῶν καθ᾽ ὅλου καὶ τῶν καθ᾽ ἕνα 
ἕκαστον συμπτωμάτων αἰτία μὲν ἡ τῶν πλανω- 
μένων ἀστέρων ἡλίου τε καὶ σελήνης κίνησις, 
προγνωστικὴ δὲ ἡ τῆς τῶν ὑποκειμένων αὐτῆς 
φύσεων τροπῆς κατὰ τὰς ὁμοιοσχήμονας τῶν 

~ > 
οὐρανίων παρόδους διὰ τοῦ περιέχοντος ἐπιστὴη- 
Α , \ > ae. ες ‘A A 
μονικὴ παρατήρησις, πλὴν ἐφ᾽ ὅσον ἡ μὲν καθολικὴ 
ε EK 
περίστασις μείζων τε Kal αὐτοτελής, ἡ δ᾽ ἐπὶ 

> 

μέρους οὐχ ὁμοίως. ἀρχὰς δ᾽ οὐκέτι τὰς αὐτὰς 
5 3...}.9 - A ~ 
ἀμφοτέρων νομιστέον εἶναι, ἀφ᾽ ὧν τὴν τῶν 
οὐρανίων διάθεσιν ὑποτιθέμενοι τὰ διὰ τῶν τότε 
σχηματισμῶν σημαινόμενα πειρώμεθα προγινώ- 
> ‘ ~ " - / > x 
oxew, ἀλλὰ τῶν μὲν καθολικῶν πολλάς, ἐπειδὴ 
~ > > 
μίαν τοῦ παντὸς οὐκ ἔχομεν Kal ταύτας οὐκ ἀπ 

1 Προοίμιον Ν ὭΡτοο. ; Περὶ σπορᾶς καὶ ἐκτροπῆς PL (σπωρᾶς) 
NCam. 

2 τῶν συμπτωμάτων NCam., συμπτωμάτων PL. 

3 μὲν om. PLNCam. 


220 


TETRABIBLOS III. 1 


BOOK III. 


1. Introduction. 


As in what precedes we have presented the theory of 
universal events, because this comes first and for 
the most part has power to control the predictions 
which concern the special nature of any individual, 
the prognostic part of which we call the genethlia- 
logical art, we must believe that the two divisions 
have one and the same power both practically and 
theoretically. For the cause both of universal and 
of particular events is the motion of the planets, 
sun, and moon; and the prognostic art is the scien- 
tific observation of precisely the change in the sub- 
ject natures which corresponds to parallel movements 
of the heavenly bodies through the surrounding 
heavens, except that universal conditions are greater 
and independent, and particular ones not similarly 
so. We must not, however, consider that both 
divisions+ employ the same starting-points, from 
which, by reckoning the disposition of the heavenly 
bodies, we attempt to foretell the events signified 
by their aspects at that time. On the contrary, in the 
case of the universals we have to take many starting- 
points, since we have no single one for the universe ; 


1J.e. general astrology and genethlialogical astrology. 





4 αὐτῆς φύσεων τροπῆς PL, αὐτῆς φύσεως tp. VD, αὐτῶν 
φύσεων τρ. A, αὐτῶν φύσεως tp. ME ; αὐτῆς τροπῆς NCam. 


22] 


PTOLEMY 


αὐτῶν τῶν ὑποκειμένων πάντοτε AapPavopevas, 
ἀλλὰ καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν περιεχόντων καὶ τὰς αἰτίας 
ἐπιφερόντων σχεδὸν γὰρ πάσας" ἀπό τε τῶν 
τελειοτέρων ἐκλείψεων καὶ τῶν ἐπισήμως παρ- 
οδευόντων ἀστέρων ἐπισκεπτόμεθα "3 τῶν δὲ καθ᾽ 
ἕνα ἕκαστον τῶν ἀνθρώπων καὶ μίαν καὶ πολλάς " 
μίαν μὲν τὴν αὐτοῦ τοῦ συγκρίματος ἀρχήν" καὶ 
ταύτην γὰρ ἔχομεν " πολλὰς δὲ τὰς κατὰ τὸ ἑξῆς 
τῶν “περιεχόντων πρὸς τὴν πρώτην ἀρχὴν ἐπιση- 


105 μασίας ovpBawovoas,* προηγουμένης μέντοι τῆς 


μιᾶς ἐνθάδε εἰκότως, ἐπειδήπερ αὐτὴ καὶ τὰς 
ἄλλας ὃ ἀποτελεῖ. τούτων δ᾽ οὕτως ἐχόντων ἀπὸ 
μὲν τῆς πρώτης ἀρχῆς θεωρεῖται τὰ καθ᾽ ὅλου τῆς 
, > / A \ ~ ” A A 

συγκρίσεως ἰδιώματα, dua δὲ τῶν ἄλλων τὰ κατὰ 
καιροὺς παρὰ τὸ μᾶλλον καὶ ἧττον συμβησόμενα 
κατὰ τὰς λεγομένας τῶν ἐφεξῆς χρόνων διαιρέσεις." 

᾿Αρχῆς δὲ χρονικῆς ὑπαρχούσης τῶν ἀνθρωπίνων 
τέξεων * φύσει μὲν τῆς κατ᾽ αὐτὴν τὴν σποράν, 
δυνάμει δὲ καὶ κατὰ τὸ συμβεβηκὸς τῆς κατὰ τὴν 
ἀποκύησιν ἐκτροπῆς, ἐπὶ μὲν τῶν ἐγνωκότων τὸν 
τῆς σπορᾶς καιρὸν ἤτοι συμπτωματικῶς ἢ καὶ 
παρατηρητικῶς ἐκείνῳ ὃ μᾶλλον προσήκει πρός τε 

1 πάσας VPLAD; πάσαις MNECam.? (sed in mg. ἢ πάσας 
ἐπισκεπτόμεθα). 

2 ἐπισκεπτόμεθα VADECam.!, Cam.? mg.; -ώμεθα PL; 
ἐπισκηπτόμεθα MNCam.? 

3 καὶ ταύτην VPLD; καὶ om. alii Cam. 

4 συμβαίνειν VPLMDE, -ovcas NACam. 

5 Post ἄλλας add. ὡς τὸ ὑποκείμενον εἰδικῶς (ἰδικῶς NCam.}, 
ἠδικῆ P, ἑστικῇ L)PLNCam.; om. VMADEProc. 


ὁ Post διαιρέσεις titulum Περὶ σπορᾶς καὶ ἐκτροπῆς add. 
VMADProc.; om. E (spatio relicto) PLNCam. 


222 


TETRABIBLOS III. 1 


and these too are not always taken from the subjects 
themselves, but also from the elements that attend 
them and carry with them the causes; for we in- 
vestigate practically all the starting-points presented 
by the more complete eclipses and the significant 
passages of the planets. In predictions affecting in- 
dividual men, however, we have both one and many 
starting-points. The one is the beginning of the 
temperament itself,! for this we have ; and the many 
are the successive significances of the ambients which 
are relative to this first beginning, though to be sure 
the single starting-point is naturally in this case of 
greatest importance because it produces the others. 
As this is so, the general characteristics of the 
temperament are determined from the first starting- 
point, while by means of the others we predict events 
that will come about at specific times and vary in 
degree, following the so-called ages of life.” 

Since the chronological starting-point of human 
nativities is naturally the very time of conception, but 
potentially and accidentally the moment of birth, 
in cases in which the very time of conception is known 
either by chance or by observation, it is more fitting 
that we should follow it in determining the special 


1“ Temperament ’’ here is used in its astrological sense, 
of the mingling of physical and other traits which make 
up the individual. Cf. the similar use of κρᾶσις in i. 11, 
p- 64. 

2The “divisions of the successive times,’ 
of man, are discussed in iv. 10. 


i.e. the ages 


Ἰτέξεων VD; γενέσεων (mg.: .. εξων N; ἕξεων A; 
yevécewy alii Proc.Cam. 
8 ἐκείνῳ MAEProc. ; ἐκεῖνο alii Cam. 


223 


PTOLEMY 


~ ~ ~ >] 
τὰ τοῦ σώματος καὶ τὰ τῆς ψυχῆς ἰδιώματα 
κατακολουθεῖν, τὸ ποιητικὸν τοῦ κατ᾽ αὐτὸν τῶν 
ἀστέρων σχηματισμοῦ διασκεπτομένους. ἅπαξ 
γὰρ ἐν ἀρχῇ τὸ σπέρμα ποιόν πως γενόμενον ἐκ 
τῆς τοῦ περιέχοντος διαδόσεως, κἂν διάφορον τοῦτο 
~ nw , 
γίνηται κατὰ τοὺς ἐφεξῆς THs σωματοποιήσεως 
χρόνους, αὐτὸ τὴν οἰκείαν μόνην ὕλην φυσικῶς 
προσεπισυγκρίνον ἑαυτῷ κατὰ τὴν αὔξησιν ἔτι 
~ ’ ~ ~ ~ 
μᾶλλον ἐξομοιοῦται τῇ τῆς πρώτης ποιότητος 1 
ἰδιοτροπίᾳ. 
9 A \ ~ Ἁ / a « > ‘\ ~ 
Emi δὲ τῶν μὴ γινωσκόντων, ὅπερ ws ἐπὶ πᾶν 
συμβαίνει, τῇ κατὰ τὴν ἐκτροπὴν ἀρχῇ καὶ ταύτῃ 
,ὔ > - ς ,ὔ \ > ~ 3 A 
106 POUR EN EL ΡΟ ΠΟΤΌΝ, ως ΠΕ EN και ἜΣ ee 
μόνῳ τούτῳ τῆς πρώτης λειπομένῃ, τῷ δι᾽ ἐκείνης 
καὶ τὰ πρὸ τῆς ἐκτέξεως δύνασθαι προγινώσκεσθαι" 
καὶ γὰρ εἰ τὴν μὲν ἀρχὴν av τις εἴποι, τὴν δ᾽ ὥσπερ 
4 A / > ~ ~ A δ, / 
καταρχήν, TO μέγεθος αὐτῆς τῷ μὲν χρόνῳ γίνεται 
, ~ ~ 
δεύτερον, ἴσον δὲ Kai μᾶλλον τελειότερον TH δυνάμει, 
σχεδόν τε δικαίως ἐκείνη μὲν ἂν ὀνομάζοιτο σπέρ- 
ματος ἀνθρωπίνου γένεσις, αὕτη δὲ ἀνθρώπου. 
A / A / / A / a A 
πλεῖστά τε yap τότε προσλαμβάνει τὸ βρέφος ἃ μὴ 
πρότερον, ὅτε κατὰ γαστρὸς ἦν, προσῆν αὐτῷ. καὶ 
~ ΄ 
αὐτὰ τὰ ἴδια μόνης τῆς ἀνθρωπίνης φύσεως, ὅ τε 
σωματώδης σχηματισμός " κἂν μηδὲν αὐτῷ δοκῇ 
τὸ κατὰ τὴν ἔκτεξιν περιέχον εἰς τὸ τοιῷδε εἶναι 
συμβάλλεσθαι, αὐτὸ γοῦν τὸ κατὰ τὸν οἰκεῖον τοῦ 


1 ποιότητος VMADEProce. ; ἰδιότητος P (ἰδιω-) LNCam. 
3 ταύτῃ VAD, εἰς ταῦτα PNCam., εἰς ταύτην L, εἰς τὴν μετὰ 
ταύτῃ Μ, εἰς τὴν μετὰ ταῦτα E. 


3 αὐτῇ VPLMDE, ταύτῃ NACam. 
224 


TETRABIBLOS III. 1 


nature of body and soul, examining the effective 
power of the configuration of the stars at that time. 
For to the seed is given once and for all at the 
beginning such and such qualities by the endowment 
of the ambient; and even though it may change 
as the body subsequently grows, since by natural 
process it mingles with itself in the process of growth 
only matter which is akin to itself, thus it resembles 
even more closely the type of its initial quality. 
But if they do not know the time of conception, 
which is usually the case, we must follow the starting- 
point furnished by the moment of birth and give 
to this our attention, for it too is of great importance 
and falls short of the former only in this respect— 
that by the former it is possible to have foreknow- 
ledge also of events preceding birth. For if one should 
call the one “‘ source ” and the other, as it were, “* be- 
ginning,” its importance in time, indeed, is secondary, 
but it is equal or rather even more perfect in poten- 
tiality, and with reasonable propriety would the 
former be called the genesis of human seed and the 
latter the genesis of a man. For the child at birth 
and his bodily form take on many additional at- 
tributes which he did not have before, when he 
was in the womb, those very ones indeed which 
belong to human nature alone; and even if it 
seems that the ambient at the time of birth con- 
tributes nothing toward his quality, at least his 
very coming forth into the light under the appro- 
priate conformation of the heavens contributes, 


225 


PTOLEMY 


’ ‘ > ~ > a / 
περιέχοντος σχηματισμὸν εἰς φῶς ἐλθεῖν συμβάλ- 
λεται, τῆς φύσεως μετὰ τὴν τελείωσιν πρὸς τὸ 

/ a 
ὁμοιότυπον κατάστημα τῷ κατ᾽ ἀρχὰς διαμορφώ- 
σαντι μερικῶς τῆν ὁρμὴν τῆς ἐξόδου ποιουμένης * 
σ > ~ a 
wor εὐλόγως Kal τῶν τοιούτων ἡγεῖσθαι δηλω- 
τικὸν εἶναι τὸν κατὰ τὴν ἐκτροπὴν ' τῶν ἀστέρων 
σχηματισμόν, οὐχ WS ποιητικὸν μέντοι πάντως, ἀλλ᾽ 

> v? 
ws ἐξ ἀνάγκης ἔχοντα Kal κατὰ φύσιν ὁμοιότατον 
~ / 
τῇ δυνάμει TO ποιητικόν. 

/ \ \ \ ‘ ε ~ uv \ 
Προθέσεως δὲ κατὰ τὸ παρὸν ἡμῖν οὔσης καὶ 
~ >? ~ aA 

τοῦτο TO μέρος ἐφοδικῶς ἀναπληρῶσαι κατὰ τὸν 
» 3 “ ~ ΄ 

Ι071ἐν ἀρχῆ τῆσδε τῆς συντάξεως ὑφηγημένον ἐπι- 
λογισμὸν περὶ τοῦ δυνατοῦ τῆς τοιαύτης προ- 

> wn ~ 
γνώσεως, TOV μὲν ἀρχαῖον τῶν προρρήσεων τρόπον 
τὸν κατὰ τὸ συγκρατικὸν 5 εἶδος τῶν ἀστέρων 
᾽ὔ \ ~ 

πάντων ἢ τῶν πλείστων, πολύχουν τε ὄντα Kal 

‘ A ” > \ > ~ > / A 

σχεδὸν ἄπειρον, εἴ τις αὐτὸν ἀκριβοῦν ἐθέλοι κατὰ 
\ ὃ / ὃ " GAA >’ - \ / > 

τὴν διέξοδον, καὶ μᾶλλον ἐν ταῖς κατὰ μέρος ἐπι- 

βολαῖς τῶν φυσικῶς ἐπισκεπτομένων ἢ ἐν ταῖς 

5 - 
παραδόσεσι ἀναθεωρεῖσθαι δυναμένων, παραιυτησό- 
/ \ 4, \ ‘ / 

μεθα dua τε τὸ δύσχρηστον Kai τὸ δυσδιέξοδον. 

τὰς δὲ πραγματείας αὐτὰς δι’ ὧν ἕκαστα τῶν 
~ > ~ 

εἰδῶν κατὰ Tov ἐπιβληματικὸν τρόπον συνορᾶται 

καὶ τὰς κατὰ τὸ ἰδιότροπον καὶ ὁλοσχερέστερον 

~ / 

TOV ἀστέρων πρὸς ἕκαστα ποιητικὰς δυνάμεις ὡς 
~ >? 

ἔνι μάλιστα παρακολουθητικῶς τε ἅμα καὶ ἐπι- 


1 ἐκτροπὴν VADEProc., τροπὴν PLMNCam. 
2 συγκρατικὸν VAE; cf. κατὰ τὴν σύγκρασιν τῶν ἀστέρων 
Proc. ; συγκριτικὸν MNDCam., -κροτικὸν PL. 


226 


TETRABIBLOS III. 1 


since nature, after the child is perfectly formed, 
gives the impulse to its birth under a configuration 
of similar type to that which governed the child’s 
formation in detail in the first place! Accord- 
ingly one may with good reason believe that the 
position of the stars at the time of birth is significant 
of things of this sort, not, however, for the reason 
that it is causative in the full sense, but that of 
necessity and by nature it has potentially very 
similar causative power. 

Since it is our present purpose to treat of this 
division likewise systematically on the basis of the 
discussion, introduced at the beginning of this com- 
pendium, of the possibility of prediction of this kind, 
we shall decline to present the ancient method of 
prediction, which brings into combination all or most 
of the stars, because it is manifold and well-nigh 
infinite, if one wishes to recount it with accuracy. 
Besides, it depends much more upon the particular 
attempts of those who make their inquiries directly 
from nature than of those who can theorize on 
the basis of the traditions; and furthermore 
we shall omit it on account of the difficulty in 
using it and following it. Those very procedures 
through which each kind of thing is apprehended by 
the practical method, and the active influences of 
the stars, both special and general, we shall, as far 
as possible, consistently and briefly, in accordance 

' An assumption which Ptolemy does not think it neces- 
sary to demonstrate. The statement that the sign in 
which the moon was found at the conception would be in 
the ascendant at the nativity is attributed to “ Nechepso 


and Petosiris *’; Boll-Bezold-Gundel, p. 154; ε΄. Bouché- 
Leclercq, pp. 376, 379. 


227 


PTOLEMY 


τετμημένως κατὰ TOV φυσικὸν στοχασμὸν ἐκθησό- 
μεθα: τοὺς μὲν τοῦ περιέχοντος τόπους πρὸς οὕς 
ἕκαστα θεωρεῖται τῶν ἀνθρωπίνων συμπτωμάτων, 
καθάπερ σκοπὸν οὗ δεῖ καταστοχάζεσθαι,. προυπο- 
τιθέμενοι, τὰς δὲ τῶν τοῖς τόποις κατ᾽ ἐπικρά- 
τησιν τῶν συνοικειουμένων σωμάτων ποιητικὰς 
δυνάμεις, ὥσπερ ἀφέσεις βελῶν, κατὰ τὸ ὁλοσχερέ- 
στερον ἐφαρμόζοντες, τὸ δὲ ἐκ τῆς συγκράσεως 
τῆς ἐκ πλειόνων φύσεων περὶ τὸ ὑποκείμενον εἶδος 
συναγόμενον ἀποτέλεσμα καταλιπόντες, ὥσπερ 

108 εὐστόχῳ τοξότῃ, τῷ τοῦ διασκεπτομένου λογισμῷ. 
πρῶτον δὲ περὶ τῶν καθ᾽ ὅλου διὰ τῆς κατὰ τὴν 
ἐκτροπὴν ἀρχῆς θεωρουμένων ποιησόμεθα τὸν λόγον 
κατὰ τὴν προσήκουσαν τῆς τάξεως ἀκολουθίαν - 
πάντων μέν, ws ἔφαμεν, τῶν φύσιν ἐχόντων διὰ 
ταύτης λαμβάνεσθαι δυναμένων, συνεργησόντων δὲ 
εἴ τις ἔτι περιεργάζεσθαι θέλοι πρὸς μόνα τὰ κατ᾽ 
αὐτὴν τὴν σύγκρισιν 5 ἰδιώματα καὶ τῶν κατὰ τὸν 
τῆς σπορᾶς χρόνον διὰ τῆς αὐτῆς θεωρίας 
ὑποπιπτόντων ἰδιωμάτων. 


«β0 Περὶ μοίρας ὡροσκοπούσης 


~ 4 ᾽ὔ / 
᾿Επειδὴ περὶ τοῦ πρώτου καὶ κυριωτάτου, τουτέστι 
~ ~ \ > \ σ 3 ,ὔ 
τοῦ μορίου τῆς κατὰ τὴν ἐκτροπὴν ὥρας, ἀπορία 
/ A « 9. 8. a ~ 3 
γίνεται πολλάκις, μόνης μὲν ὡς ἐπὶ πᾶν τῆς δι 
/ 3 Ψ \ \ ” 
ἀστρολάβων ὡροσκοπίων κατ᾽ αὐτὴν τὴν ἔκτεξιν 
1 καταστοχάζεσθαι VMADE, προκαταστοχάζεσθαι PLNCam. 
5 κατ᾽ αὐτὴν τὴν σύγκρισιν VDProc.; κατὰ τὴν σύγκ. PLA; 
κατὰ σύγκ. NCam., τὴν σύγκ. (om. κατὰ) ME. 
q ‘ ΄“ ~ ~ - ‘ ἈΝ: ™ 
8 τὸν τῆς σπορᾶς VADE, τῆς σπορᾶς PLM, τὰς σπορὰς NCam. 
4 χρόνον libri; -ων Cam. 


228 


TETRABIBLOS III. 1-2 


with natural conjecture, set forth. Our preface 
shall be an account of the places in the heavens to 
which reference is made when particular human 
events are theoretically considered, a kind of mark 
at which one must aim before proceeding further ; 
to this we shall add a general discussion of the active 
powers of the heavenly bodies that gain kinship with 
these places by dominating them—the loosing of the 
arrow, as it were; but the predicted result, summed 
up by the combination of many elements applied to 
the underlying form, we shall leave, as to a skilful 
archer, to the calculation of him who conducts the 
investigation. First, then, we shall discuss in proper 
sequence the general matters the consideration of 
which is accomplished through the time of birth 
taken as the starting-point, for, as we have said, this 
furnishes an explanation of all natural events, but, if 
one is willing to take the additional trouble, by the 
same reasoning the properties that fall at the time of 
conception will also be of aid toward ascertaining 
the peculiar qualities that apply directly to the 
combination. 


2. Of the Degree of the Horoscopic Point. 


Difficulty often arises with regard to the first and 
most important fact, that is, the fraction of the hour 
of the birth; for in general only observation by 
means of horoscopic astrolabes ! at the time of birth 


1 An instrument consisting of a graduated circle with 
a movable arm by which angles above the horizon could 
be taken. 


229 


PTOLEMY 


/ ~ ~ ~ 
διοπτεύσεως τοῖς ἐπιστημονικῶς παρατηροῦσι τὸ 
λ \ 1 ~ σ ε LAA / ~ > 

emtov! τῆς ὥρας ὑποβάλλειν δυναμένης, τῶν ὃ 
HAA 80 ε / e Ul Φ « λ - 
ἄλλων σχεδὸν ἁπάντων ὡροσκοπίων, οἷς οἱ πλεῖστοι 
τῶν ἐπιμελεστέρων προσέχουσι, πολλαχῆ 2 δια- 
4 ~ > / / ~ \ « ~ 
ψεύδεσθαι τῆς ἀληθείας δυναμένων, τῶν μὲν ἡλιακῶν 
παρὰ τὰς τῶν θέσεων καὶ τῶν γνωμόνων ἐπισυμ- 
la / ~ \ catch α / A 
πιπτούσας διαστροφάς, τῶν δὲ δι᾿ ὑδρολογίων παρὰ 
A ~ A 3 ~ ς A / > ~ 
Tas τῆς ῥύσεως ὃ τοῦ ὕδατος ὑπὸ διαφόρων αἰτιῶν 
3 
καὶ διὰ τὸ τυχὸν ἐποχάς τε καὶ ἀνωμαλίας, ἀναγ- 
καῖον ἂν εἴη προπαραδοθῆναι τίνα ἄν τις τρόπον 


109 εὑρίσκοι τὴν ὀφείλουσαν ἀνατέλλειν μοῖραν τοῦ 


ζωδιακοῦ κατὰ τὸν φυσικὸν καὶ ἀκόλουθον λόγον, 
προυποτεθείσης τῆς κατὰ τὴν διδομένην σύνεγγυς 
ὥραν διὰ τῆς τῶν ἀναφορῶν πραγματείας εὑρισκο- 
μένης. δεῖ δὴ λαμβάνειν τὴν τῆς ἐκτροπῆς προ- 
γενομένην ἔγγιστα συζυγίαν, ἐάν τε σύνοδος ἢ ἐάν 
τε πανσέληνος, καὶ τὴν μοῖραν ἀκριβῶς διασκεψα- 
μένους, συνόδου μὲν οὔσης τὴν ἀμφοτέρων τῶν 
φωτῶν, πανσελήνου δὲ τὴν τοῦ ὑπὲρ γῆν αὐτῶν 


170 λεπτὸν VMADE, τὼ λεπτὸν Ῥ, τῷ λεπτῷ NLCam. 

2 πολλαχῆ libri, πολλαχοῦ Proc., πολλάκι Cam. 

8 τῆς ῥύσεως PLME, ῥύσεως VAD, ῥύσεις N, τὴν ῥύσιν Proc., 
φύσεις Cam. 

4 διασκεψαμένους VAD, -ωμένους Ῥ, -ομένους LMNECam. 





> 


1The ‘solar instruments ’”’ are sun-dials, the gnomons 
of which cast shadows, the position and length of which 


230 


TETRABIBLOS III. 2 


can for scientific observers give the minute of the 
hour, while practically all other horoscopic instru- 
ments on which the majority of the more careful 
practitioners rely are frequently capable of error, 
the solar instruments by the occasional shifting of 
their positions or of their gnomons,!' and the water 
clocks by stoppages and irregularities in the flow 
of the water from different causes and by mere 
chance. It would therefore be necessary that an 
account first be given how one might, by natural 
and consistent reasoning, discover the degree of 
the zodiac which should be rising, given the degree 
of the known hour nearest the event, which is 
discovered by the method of ascensions.2, We 
must, then, take the syzygy* most recently pre- 
ceding the birth, whether it be a new moon or a full 
moon ; and, likewise having ascertained the degree 
accurately, of both the luminaries if it is a new moon, 
and if it is a full moon that of the one of them that is 
above the earth, we must see what stars rule it at the 


are significant. Clepsydrae, or water-clocks, operated on 
the principle of the hour-glass, except that water was 
used instead of sand. In addition to these instruments 
the practitioner would undoubtedly have tables of various 
sorts, including ephemerides, which gave the position of the 
sun, moon, and planets from day to day, tables of ascen- 
sions, etc. Examples of them are preserved among the 
papyri. 

2 The “ ascensions’’ are the times, measured in arcs of 
the equator, in which the signs of the zodiac (which do 
not lie on the equator, but along the ecliptic, which is 
oblique to the equator) rise above the horizon. They will 
vary for the individual signs, and for the latitudes (Greek, 
“climes,”’ κλίματα) at which observations are made. 

* A conjunction or an opposition. 


231 


PTOLEMY 


» , 1 
OVTOS, KATA τε 


TOV χρόνον τῆς ἐκτροπῆς ἰδεῖν τοὺς 
πρὸς αὐτὴν οἰκοδεσποτικὸν ἔχοντας λόγον τῶν 
5 ~ ~ 
ἀστέρων, τοῦ τρόπου καθ᾽ ὅλου τοῦ κατὰ τὴν 
οἰκοδεσποτίαν ἐν πέντε τούτοις θεωρουμένου, 
τριγώνῳ τε καὶ οἴκῳ καὶ ὑψώματι καὶ ὁρίῳ καὶ 

/ ~ 
φάσει ἢ συσχηματισμῷ, τουτέστιν ὅταν ἕν τι ἢ 
πλείονα τούτων ἢ καὶ πάντα 6 ζητούμενος ἔχει 
τόπος πρὸς τὸν μέλλοντα οἰκοδεσποτήσειν. ἐὰν 
μὲν οὖν ἕνα πρὸς ταῦτα πάντα ἢ τὰ πλεῖστα 
οἰκείως διακείμενον εὑρίσκωμεν, ἣν ἂν ἐπέχῃ 
μοῖραν οὗτος ἀκριβῶς καθ᾽ ὃ παροδεύει δωδεκατη- 
~ ~ > ~ 
όριον, ἐν τῶ τῆς ἐκτροπῖς ypovw τὴν ἰσάριθμον 
2 ΤΥ . 
~ ~ 3 ~ ~ ~ 
αὐτῇ κρινοῦμεν ἀνατέλλειν ἐν τῷ διὰ τῆς τῶν 
ἀναφορῶν πραγματείας εὑρημένῳ ἐγγυτέρῳ δωδε- 
κατημορίῳ. ἐὰν δὲ δύο ἢ καὶ πλείους συνοικο- 
δεσποτοῦντας, οὗ ἂν αὐτῶν ἡ κατὰ τὴν ἐκτροπὴν 
A / » / v A > A ~ 

110 μοιρικὴ πάροδος εγγύτερον ἐχῇῃ τον ἀριθμὸν Τῇ 
‘KaTa τὰς ἀναφορὰς ἀνατελλούσῃ, τούτου τῇ ποσό- 
THTL τῶν μοιρῶν καταχρησόμεθα. εἰ δὲ δύο ἢ καὶ 

λ ,ὔ , A φ 2 ~ > θ ~ 3 ~ GAA Μ 
πλείους ἐγγὺς elev? τῷ ἀριθμῷ,3 τῷ μᾶλλον ἔχοντι 
λόγον πρός τε τὰ κέντρα καὶ τὴν αἵρεσιν κατα- 
κολουθήσομεν - ἐὰν μέντοι πλείων 7 ἡ διάστασις 
τῶν τῆς οἰκοδεσποτίας μοιρῶν πρὸς τὴν κατὰ τὸ 

A ‘A 

ὁλοσχερὲς ὡροσκόπιον ἥπερ πρὸς τὴν κατὰ TO 
1τε VPD; cf. Anon. p. 91, Wolf; om. libri ceteri Proc. 
Cam. (sed * notat Cam.? et in mg. add. videtur redundare). 
3 ἐγγὺς elev VPAD, ἐγγὺς ἐν L, ἐγγὺς ἔχοιεν E, ἔχοιεν 


MNCam., ἐγγύς εἰσιν Proc. 
8 τῷ ἀριθμῷ VPLAD, τὸν ἀριθμόν MNECam. 


232 


TETRABIBLOS III. 2 


time of the birth! In general the mode of domina- 
tion is considered as falling under these five forms : 
when it is trine, house, exaltation, term, and phase 
or aspect ; that is, whenever the place in question is 
related in one or several or all of these ways to the 
star that is to be the ruler. If, then, we discover 
that one star is familiar with the degree in all or 
most of these respects, whatever degree this star 
by accurate reckoning occupies in the sign through 
which it is passing, we shall judge that the corre- 
sponding degree is rising at the time of the nativity 
in the sign which is found to be closest by the method 
of ascensions.” But if we discover two or more co- 
rulers, we shall use the number of degrees shown by 
whichever of them is, at the time of birth, passing 
through the degree that is closer to that which is 
rising according to the ascensions. But if two or 
more are close in the number of degrees, we shall 
follow the one which is most nearly related to the 
centres and the sect. If, however, the distance of 
the degree occupied by the ruler from that of 
the general horoscope is greater than its distance 


1The text adopted is that of the two most important 
MSS. and is supported by the anonymous commentator. 
Bouché-Leclereq (p. 388, n. 1) would discard the words 
κατὰ τὸν χρονὸν τῆς ἐκτροπῆς, but he had made no examina- 
tion of the MSS. and presumably did not know that the 
best of them support κατά τε κτλ., the reading mentioned 
by the commentator. To observe the position of the 
luminary above the earth at the time of conjunction, 
rather than that of the one that is above the earth at the 
time of the nativity, seems much simpler and more 
natural. 

2On Ptolemy’s rule for determining the ascendant 
degree, cf. Bouché-Leclereq, pp. 387-388. 


5 233 


111 


PTOLEMY 


Ὁ a “- 5 A \ 

ὅμοιον μεσουράνημα, τῷ αὐτῷ ἀριθμῷ πρὸς τὴν 

μεσουρανοῦσαν μοῖραν καταχρησάμενοι, διὰ ταύτης 
\ ~ 

καὶ τὰ λοιπὰ τῶν κέντρων 5" διαστησόμεθα. 


<y.> Διαίρεσις γενεθλιαλογίας 


Τούτων δὴ προεκτεθειμένων, εἴ τις αὐτῆς τῆς 
τάξεως ἕνεκα διαιροίη τὸ καθ᾽ ὅλου τῆς γενεθλια- 
λογικῆς θεωρίας, εὕροι ἂν τῶν κατὰ φύσιν καὶ 
δυνατῶν καταλήψεων τὴν μὲν τῶν πρὸ τῆς γενέσεως 
οὖσαν συμπτωμάτων μόνον, ὡς τὴν τοῦ περὶ γονέων 
λόγου, τὴν δὲ τῶν καὶ πρὸ τῆς γενέσεως καὶ μετὰ 
τὴν γένεσιν, ὡς τὴν τοῦ περὶ ἀδελφῶν λόγου, τὴν 
δὲ τῶν κατ᾽ αὐτὴν τὴν γένεσιν, οὐκέθ᾽ οὕτω μίαν 
οὖσαν καὶ ἁπλῆν - τελευταίαν δὲ τὴν τῶν μετὰ τὴν 
γένεσιν, πολυμερεστέραν καὶ ταύτην θεωρουμένην. 
ἔστι δὲ τῶν μὲν κατ᾽ αὐτὴν τὴν γένεσιν ἐπιζητου- 
μένων ὅ τε περὶ ἀρρενικῶν καὶ θηλυκῶν λόγος καὶ 
ὁ περὶ διδυμογόνων ἢ πλειστογόνων καὶ ὁ περὶ 
τεράτων καὶ ὃ περὶ ἀτρόφων.: τῶν δὲ μετὰ τὴν 
γένεσιν ὅ τε περὶ χρόνων 8 ζωῆς, ἐπειδήπερ οὐ 
συνῆπται τῷ περὶ ἀτρόφων, ἔπειτα ὃ περὶ μορφῆς 
σώματος καὶ ὁ περὶ παθῶν " ἢ σινῶν σωματικῶν" 
ἑξῆς δὲ ὁ περὶ ψυχῆς ποιότητος καὶ ὁ περὶ παθῶν 

1 μεσουράνημα VMDEProc., -ἰσμα PL, -ηματι NACam. 

27av κέντρων VPLADEProc., τοῦ κέντρου MNCam. 


3 χρόνων VPLMDEProc., -ov NACam. 
46 περὶ παθῶν VPLD, om. ὁ Εἰ, om. ὁ περ: MNACam. 


1 Ordinarily the horoscope, or ascendant, would be the 
point of reference by which the other centres (mid-heaven, 
occident, inferior mid-heayen) of the nativity would be 


234 





TETRABIBLOS III. 2-3 


from that of the corresponding mid-heaven, we 
shall use this same number to constitute the mid- 
heaven and thereby establish the other angles.! 


3. The Subdivision of the Science of Nativities. 


After this preface, should any one simply for the 
sake of order attempt to subdivide the whole field of 
genethlialogical science, he would find that, of all 
the natural and possible predictions, one division 
concerns solely events preceding the birth, such as the 
account of the parents; another deals with events 
both before and after the birth, such as the account 
of brothers and sisters ; another, with events at the 
very time of the birth, a subject which is no longer 
so unitary and simple ; and finally that which treats 
of post-natal matters, which is likewise more complex 
in its theoretical development.? Among the subjects 
contemporary with the birth into which inquiry is 
made are those of sex, of twins or multiple births, of 
monsters, and of children that cannot be reared. To 
those dealing with post-natal events belong the ac- 
count of the length of life, for this is not attached 
to the account of children that cannot be reared ; 
second, that of the form of the body and that of bodily 


established. In this case the mid-heaven is made the 
point of reference. The “general’’ (ὁλοσχερές; Proclus 
paraphrases with xara τὸ καθ᾽ ὅλου) horoscope seems to be 
the ‘‘ presumable”’ one. 

* What follows is practically a list of chapters in Books 
iii and iv. Since the subject of the last chapter of Book 
iv (the divisions of time and the ages of man) is not in- 
cluded, its genuineness has been questioned, but not 
seriously doubted. 


235 


PTOLEMY 


ψυχικῶν - ἔπειθ᾽ 6 περὶ τύχης κτητικῆς Kal ὃ περὶ 
τύχης ἀξιωματικῆς, μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα ὁ περὶ πράξεως 
ποιότητος " εἶτα ὁ περὶ συμβιώσεως γαμικῆς καὶ 
ὁ περὶ τεκνοποιίας καὶ ὃ περὶ συνεπιπλοκῶν καὶ 
συναρμογῶν καὶ φίλων -; ἑξῆς δ᾽ ὁ περὶ ξενιτείας 
καὶ τελευταῖος 6 περὶ τῆς τοῦ θανάτου ποιότητος, 
τῇ μὲν δυνάμει συνοικειούμενος τῷ περὶ χρόνων 
ζωῆς, τῇ τάξει δ᾽ εἰκότως ἐπὶ πᾶσι τούτοις τιθέ- 
μενος - ὑπὲρ ὧν ἑκάστου κατὰ τὸ κεφαλαιῶδες 
ποιησόμεθα τὴν ὑφήγησιν, αὐτὰς τὰς τῆς ἐπι- 
σκέψεως πραγματείας μετὰ ψιλῶν τῶν ποιητικῶν 
δυνάμεων, ὡς ἔφαμεν, ἐκτιθέμενοι, καὶ τὰ μὲν 
περιέργως ὑπὸ τῶν πολλῶν φλυαρούμενα καὶ μὴ 
πιθανὸν ἔχοντα λόγον πρὸς τὰς ἀπὸ τῆς πρώτης 5 
φύσεως αἰτίας ἀποπεμπόμενοι - τὰ δὲ ἐνδεχομένην 
ἔχοντα τὴν κατάληψιν, οὐ διὰ κλήρων καὶ ἀριθμῶν 
ἀναιτιολογήτων, ἀλλὰ δι᾿ αὐτῆς τῆς τῶν σχημα- 
τισμῶν πρὸς τοὺς οἰκείους τόπους θεωρίας ἐπι- 
σκεπτόμενοι" καθ᾽ ὅλου μέντοι καὶ ἐπὶ πάντων 
ἁπλῶς, ἵνα μὴ καθ᾽ ἕκαστον εἶδος ταυτολογῶμεν. 
112 Πρῶτον μὲν χρὴ σκοπεῖν τὸν οἰκειούμενον 
τόπον τοῦ ζωδιακοῦ τῷ ζητουμένῳ τῆς γενέσεως 
κατ᾽ εἶδος κεφαλαίῳ, καθάπερ λόγου ἕνεκεν τῷ 
περὶ πράξεων τὸν τοῦ μεσουρανήματος, ἢ τῷ περὶ 
πατρὸς τὸν ἡλιακόν ἔπειτα θεωρεῖν τοὺς λόγον 
ἔχοντας πρὸς τὸν ὑποκείμενον τόπον τῶν ἀστέρων 
οἰκοδεσποτίας καθ᾽ οὗς ἐπάνω " προείπομεν πέντε 


1 καὶ φίλων VPLD, καὶ om. MNAECam. 
2 πρώτης VPMADE, om. NL (in lacuna) Cam. 
3 σκοπεῖν om. MNCam. 4 ἐπάνω om. NCam. 


236 


TETRABIBLOS III. 3 


illnesses and injuries; next, that of the quality of 
the mind and illnesses of the mind ; then that which 
concerns fortune, both in the matter of possessions 
and in that of dignities ; and after this the account 
of the quality of action; then that of marriage 
and of the begetting of children, and that of 
associations, agreements, and friends; following 
comes the account of journeys, and finally that of 
the quality of death, which is potentially akin to the 
inquiry about the length of life, but in order is reason- 
ably placed at the end of all these subjects. We 
shall sketch each of these subjects briefly, explaining, 
as we said before, together with the effective powers 
by themselves, the actual procedure of investigation ; 
as for the nonsense on which many waste their 
labour and of which not even a plausible account can 
be given, this we shall dismiss in favour of the 
primary natural causes. What, however, admits of 
prediction we shall investigate, not by means of lots 
and numbers of which no reasonable explanation 
can be given, but merely through the science of the 
aspects of the stars to the places with which they 
have familiarity, in general terms, however, which 
are applicable to absolutely all cases, that we may 
avoid the repetition involved in the discussion of 
particular cases. 

In the first place, we should examine that place of 
the zodiac which is pertinent to the specific heading 
of the geniture which is subject to query; for 
example, the mid-heaven, for the query about action, 
or the place of the sun for the question about the 
father ; then we must observe those planets which 
have the relation of rulership to the place in question 


237 


PTOLEMY 


τρόπους. κἂν μὲν εἷς ἢ ὁ κατὰ πάντας κύριος, 
τούτῳ " διδόναι τὴν ἐκείνης τῆς προτελέσεως οἰκο- 
δεσποτίαν ἐὰν δὲ δύο ἢ τρεῖς, τοῖς τὰς πλείους 
ἔχουσι ψήφους - μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα πρὸς μὲν τὸ ποιὸν 
τοῦ ἀποτελέσματος σκοπεῖν τάς τε αὐτῶν τῶν 
οἰκοδεσποτησάντων ἀστέρων φύσεις καὶ τὰς τῶν 
δωδεκατημορίων ἐν οἷς εἰσιν αὐτοί τε καὶ οἱ 
συνοικειούμενοι τόποι: πρὸς δὲ τὸ μέγεθος αὐτῶν 
σκοπεῖν καὶ τὴν δύναμιν 4 πότερον ἐνεργῶς τυγχά- 
νουσι διακείμενοι κατά τε αὐτὸ τὸ κοσμικὸν καὶ τὸ 
κατὰ τὴν γένεσιν ἢ τὸ ἐναντίον" δραστικώτατοι 
μὲν γάρ εἰσιν ὅταν κοσμικῶς μὲν ἐν ἰδίοις ἢ ἐν 
οἰκείοις ὦσι τόποις * καὶ πάλιν ὅταν ἀνατολικοὶ 
τυγχάνωσι καὶ προσθετικοὶ τοῖς ἀριθμοῖς - κατὰ 
γένεσιν δὲ ὅταν ἐπὶ τῶν κέντρων ἢ τῶν ἐπαναφορῶν 
παροδεύωσι καὶ μάλιστα τῶν πρώτων, λέγω δὴ 
τῶν τε κατὰ τὰς ἀναφορὰς καὶ τὰς μεσουρανήσεις " 
ἀδρανέστατοι δὲ ὅταν κοσμικῶς μὲνϑ ἐν τοῖς ἀλλο- 
τρίοις ἢ ἀνοικείοις ὦσι τόποις καὶ δυτικοὶ ἢ 
118 ἀναποδιστικοὶ ὃ τοῖς δρόμοις ὦσι: κατὰ γένεσιν δὲ 
ὅταν ἀποκλίνωσι τῶν κέντρων" πρὸς δὲ τὸν καθ᾽ 


1 πάντας VPMDEProce., πάντα LNACam. 

5 τούτῳ VAD; cf. οὗτος λήψεται Proc. ; αὐτῷ PLMNECam. 

3 συνοικειούμενοι VP (-οικι-) LADProc. ; κυριευόμενοι MNE 
Cam. 

4xa’ τὴν δύναμιν VMNA (post αὐτῶν) DE; om. Cam.; πόθεν 
κρίνωμεν (-ομεν L) ἦ μέγα Kal ἰσχυρὸν τὸ ἀποτέλεσμα ἡμῖν Kal 
τὴν δύναμιν πότερον κτλ. PL 

5 κοσμικῶς μὲν ὅταν NCam. 

ὃ ἀναποδιστικοὶ VMADEP (-τηκ-)} L (-δεσ-); ἢ ἀφαιρετικοὶ in 

mg. A; ἀναποδιτικοὶ N; *avamodutixoi Cam. (in mg. ἀφαι- 
perucot). 


238 


TETRABIBLOS III. 3 


by the five ways aforesaid ;! and if one planet is lord 
in all these ways, we must assign to him the ruler- 
ship of that prediction; if two or three, we must 
assign it to those which have the more claims. After 
this, to determine the quality of the prediction, we 
must consider the natures of the ruling planets 
themselves and of the signs in which are the planets 
themselves, and the places familiar to them. For 
the magnitude of the event we must examine their 
power? and observe whether they are actively situ- 
ated both in the cosmos itself and in the nativity,’ or 
the reverse ; for they are most effective when, with 
respect to the cosmos, they are in their own or in 
familiar regions, and again when they are rising 
and are increasing in their numbers; 4 and, with 
respect to the nativity, whenever they are passing 
through the angles or signs that rise after them,° 
and especially the principal of these, by which 1 
mean the signs ascendant and culminating. They 
are weakest, with respect to the universe, when they 
are in places belonging to others or those unrelated 
to them, and when they are occidental or retreating in 
their course ; and, with respect to the nativity, when 
they are declining from the angles. For the time of 


1See c. 2, p. 233. 

2? The power of the ruling planets. 

3 The horoscopic point and other angles change for each 
nativity ; the signs of the zodiac, houses of the planets, 
terms, etc., are cosmic, as being related to the universe 
itself and therefore fixed. 

47.e. when their movement in the zodiac is direct, not 
retrograde. The theory of epicycles was used to explain 
the stations and changes of direction in the movement 
of the planets. 

5 Or, the signs succedent (ἐπαναφοραί) to the angles. 


239 


PTOLEMY 


ὅλου χρόνον τοῦ ἀποτελέσματος πότερον ἑῷοί εἰσιν 
ἢ ἑσπέριοι πρός τε τὸν ἥλιον καὶ τὸν ὡροσκόπον, 
ἐπειδήπερ τὰ μὲν προηγούμενα ἑκατέρου αὐτῶν 
τεταρτημόρια καὶ τὰ διάμετρα τούτοις ἑῷα γίνεται, 
τὰ δὲ λοιπὰ καὶ ἑπόμενα ἑσπέρια καὶ πότερον ἐπὶ 
τῶν κέντρων τυγχάνουσιν ἢ τῶν ἐπαναφορῶν᾽" 
ἑῷοι μὲν γὰρ ὄντες ἢ ἐπίκεντροι κατ᾽ ἀρχὰς 
γίνονται δραστικώτεροι, ἑσπέριοι δὲ ἢ ἐπὶ τῶν 
ἐπαναφορῶν βραδύτεροι. 


«δ᾽. Περὶ γονέων 


Ὅ \ > ΄ Ψ 1 ~ > to 
μὲν οὖν προηγούμενος τύπος ' τῆς κατ᾽ εἶδος 
> - -- 
ἐπισκέψεως, οὗ διὰ παντὸς ἔχεσθαι προσήκει, 
τοῦτον ἔχει τὸν τρόπον. ἀρξόμεθα δὲ ἤδη κατὰ 
\ ~ /, 
τὴν ἐκκειμένην τάξιν ἀπὸ πρώτου TOD περὶ γονέων 
λόγου. ὁ μὲν τοίνυν ἥλιος καὶ 6 τοῦ Κρόνου 
> A ~ ~ ~ 
ἀστὴρ τῷ πατρικῷ προσώπῳ συνοικειοῦνται κατὰ 
/ ς \ / \ ¢ ~ > , ~ 
φύσιν, ἡ δὲ σελήνη Kal ὃ τῆς ᾿Αφροδίτης τῷ 
μητρικῷ : καὶ ὅπως ἂν οὗτοι διακείμενοι τυγχά- 
/ > / \ \ A » 
νωσι πρός τε ἀλλήλους καὶ πρὸς τοὺς ἄλλους, 
τοιαῦτα δεῖ καὶ τὰ περὶ τοὺς γονέας ὑπονοεῖν. 
τὰ μὲν γὰρ περὶ τῆς τύχης καὶ τῆς κτήσεως 
αὐτῶν ἐπισκεπτέον ἐκ τῆς δορυφορίας τῶν φωτῶν, 
ἐπειδήπερ περιεχόμενοι μὲν ὑπὸ τῶν ἀγαθοποιεῖν 
/ ~ ~ ~ 6". } ” > 
δυναμένων Kal τῶν τῆς αὐτῆς αἱρέσεως, ἤτοι ἐν 
τοῖς αὐτοῖς ζῳδίοις ἢ καὶ ἐν τοῖς ἑξῆς, ἐπιφανῆ 
καὶ λαμπρὰ τὰ περὶ τοὺς γονέας διασημαίνουσι, 
\ / , a A ‘ - ca ~ 
114 καὶ μάλισθ᾽ ὅταν τὸν μὲν ἥλιον ἑῷοι δορυφορῶσιν 
1 τύπος VPLD, τόπος MNAECam., 
240 


TETRABIBLOS III. 3-4 


the predicted event in general we must observe 
whether they are oriental or occidental to the sun and 
to the horoscope ; for the quadrants which precede 
each of them and those which are diametrically 
opposite are oriental, and the others, which follow, are 
occidental. Also we must observe whether they are 
at the angles or in the succedent signs; for if they 
are oriental or at the angles they are more effective 
at the beginning; if they are occidental cr in the 
succeeding signs they are slower to take action. 


4, Of Parents. 


The guiding style of the specific inquiry, to which 
we should adhere throughout, runs after this fashion. 
We shall now, therefore, begin, following the order 
just stated, with the account of parents, which comes 
first. Now the sun and Saturn are by nature associ- 
ated with the person of the father and the moon 
and Venus with that of the mother, and as these 
may be disposed with respect to each other and the 
other stars, such must we suppose to be the affairs 
of the parents. Now the question of their fortune 
and wealth must be investigated by means of the 
attendance! upon the luminaries ; for when they are 
surrounded by planets that can be of benefit and by 
planets of their own sect, either in the same signs 
or in the next following, they signify that the cir- 
cumstances of the parents will be conspicuously 
brilliant, particularly if morning stars attend the 


1 Sopudopia, “ attendance,” and δορυφόρος, ‘spear-bearer,”’ 
“ attendant,’’ outside of astrology refer to the hired military 
guards of princes and tyrants. 


241 


PTOLEMY 


ἀστέρες, τὴν δὲ σελήνην ἑσπέριοι, καλῶς καὶ αὐτοὶ 
διακείμενοι καθ᾽ ὃν εἰρήκαμεν τρόπον. ἐὰν δὲ καὶ 
ὁ τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ ὁ τῆς ‘Adpoditns καὶ αὐτοὶ 
τυγχάνωσιν ἀνατολικοί τε καὶ ἰδιοπροσωποῦντες 
ἢ καὶ ἐπίκεντροι, εὐδαιμονίαν πρόδηλον ὑπονοητέον 
κατὰ τὸ οἰκεῖον ἑκατέρου τῶν γονέων" τὸ δὲ 
ἐναντίον, ἐὰν κενοδρομοῦντα ἢ τὰ φῶτα καὶ ἀδορυ- 
φόρητα τυγχάνοντα, ταπεινότητος καὶ ἀδοξίας τῶν 
γονέων ἐστὶ δηλωτικὰ καὶ μάλισθ᾽ ὅταν ὁ τῆς 
᾿Αφροδίτης ἢ καὶ 6 τοῦ Κρόνου μὴ καλῶς 3 
φαίνωνται διακείμενοι. ἐὰν δὲ δορυφόρηται μέν, 
μὴ μέντοι ὑπὸ τῶν τῆς αὐτῆς αἱρέσεως, ὡς ὅταν 
Ἄρης μὲν ἐπαναφέρηται τῷ ἡλίῳ, Κρόνος δὲ τῇ 
σελήνῃ, ἢ μὴ ὑπὸ καλῶς κειμένων τῶν ἀγαθοποιῶν 
καὶ κατὰ τὴν αὐτὴν αἵρεσιν, μετριότητα καὶ ἀνω- 
μαλίαν περὶ τὸν βίον αὐτῶν ὑπονοητέον. κἂν μὲν 
σύμφωνος ἢ ὁ διασημανθησόμενος τῆς τύχης κλῆρος 
ἐν τῇ γενέσει τοῖς τὸν ἥλιον ἢ τὴν σελήνην ὅ ἐπὶ 
καλῷ δορυφορήσασι, παραλήψονται σῶα τὰ τῶν 
γονέων " ἐὰν δὲ ἀσύμφωνος ἢ ἢ ἐναντίος, μηδενὸς 
ἢ τῶν κακοποιῶν εἰληφότων τὴν δορυφορίαν, 
ἄχρηστος αὐτοῖς καὶ ἐπιβλαβὴς ἡ τῶν γονέων 
» i 

ἔσται κτῆσις. 

Περὶ δὲ πολυχρονιότητος ἢ ὀλιγοχρονιότητος 4 
> ~ / > \ ~ ΕΣ ~ 
αὐτῶν σκεπτέον ἀπὸ τῶν ἄλλων συσχηματισμῶν. 
ἐπὶ μὲν γὰρ τοῦ πατρός, ἐὰν 6 τοῦ Atos ἢ ὁ 

11ὅ τῆς “Adpodiztns συσχηματισθῶσιν ὁπωσδήποτε 


1 καθ᾽ ov... τρόπον om. NCam. 

2 uy καλῶς MNAECam.Proc., κακῶς VD, om. μὴ PL. 
3 σελήνην VPLADProc., Ἀφροδίτην MNECam. 

4 ἢ ὀλιγοχρονιότητος om. NLCam. 


242 





TETRABIBLOS III. 4 


sun and evening stars the moon, while the luminaries 
themselves are favourably placed in the way already 
described.t But if both Saturn and Venus, likewise, 
happen to be in the orient and in their proper 
faces,” or at the angles, we must understand it to 
be a prediction of conspicuous happiness, in accord- 
ance with what is proper and fitting for each parent. 
But, on the other hand, if the luminaries are proceed- 
ing alone and without attendants, they are indicative 
of low station and obscurity for the parents, par- 
ticularly whenever Venus or Saturn do not appear 
in a favourable position. If, however, they are 
attended, but not by planets of the same sect, as 
when Mars rises close after the sun or Saturn after 
the moon, or if they are attended by beneficent planets 
which are in an unfavourable position and not of 
the same sect, we must understand that a moderate 
station and changing fortunes in life are predicted for 
them. And if the Lot of Fortune,’ of which we shall 
make an explanation, is in agreement in the nativity 
with the planets which in favourable position attend 
the sun or the moon, the children will receive the 
patrimony intact; if, however, it is in disagreement or 
opposition, and if no planet attends, or the maleficent 
planets are in attendance, the estate of the parents 
will be useless to the children and even harmful. 

With regard to the length or the shortness of their 
life one must inquire from the other configurations. 
For in the father’s case, if Jupiter or Venus is in any 

1.1.6. in the preceding chapter. 
2Cf. i. 23. 3 See iii. 12. 


243 


PTOLEMY 


τῷ τε ἡλίῳ Kat τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου, ἢ καὶ αὐτὸς 6 
τοῦ Κρόνου σύμφωνον ἔχῃ σχηματισμὸν πρὸς 
τὸν ἥλιον ἤτοι συνὼν ἢ ἐξαγωνίζων ἢ τριγω- 
νίζων, ἐν δυνάμει μὲν ὄντων αὐτῶν, πολυχρονιότητα 
τοῦ πατρὸς καταστοχαστέον " ἀδυναμούντων δὲ οὐχ 
ὁμοίως, οὐ μέντοιγε οὐδὲ ὀλιγοχρονιότητα ἐὰν 
δὲ τοῦτο μὲν μὴ ὑπάρχῃ, ὁ δὲ τοῦ “Apews καθ- 
υπερτερήσῃ τὸν ἥλιον ἢ τὸν τοῦ Κρόνου, ἢ καὶ 
ἐπανενεχθῇ αὐτοῖς, ἢ καὶ αὐτὸς πάλιν ὁ τοῦ Κρόνου 
μὴ σύμφωνος ἢ πρὸς τὸν ἥλιον ἀλλ᾽ ἤτοι τετρά- 
γωνος ἢ διάμετρος, ἀποκεκλικότες μὲν τῶν κέντρων 
ἀσθενικοὺς μόνον τοὺς πατέρας ποιοῦσιν, ἐπί- 
κεντροι δὲ ἢ ἐπαναφερόμενοι τοῖς κέντροις ὀλιγο- 
χρονίους ἢ ἐπισινεῖς - ὀλιχοχρονίους μὲν ὅταν ἐν 
τοῖς πρώτοις ὦσι δυσὶ κέντροις, τῷ τε ἀνατέλλοντι 
καὶ τῷ μεσουρανοῦντι, καὶ ταῖς τούτων ἐπαναφοραῖς " 
ἐπισινεῖς δὲ ἢ ἐπινόσους ὅταν ἐν τοῖς λοιποῖς δυσὶ 
κέντροις ὦσι, τῷ τε δύνοντι καὶ τῷ ὑπογείῳ, ἢ ταῖς 
τούτων ἐπαναφοραῖς "3 6 μὲν γὰρ τοῦ “Apews τὸν 
ἥλιον βλέψας Kal? ὃν εἰρήκαμεν τρόπον αἰφνιδίως 
ἀναιρεῖ τὸν πατέρα ἢ σίνη περὶ τὰς ὄψεις ποιεῖ, 
τὸν δὲ τοῦ Κρόνου βλέψας ἢ θανάτοις ἢ ῥιγοπυρέ- 
τοις ἢ σίνεσι διὰ τομῶν καὶ καύσεων περικυλίει. 
ὁ δὲ τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ αὐτὸς κακῶς σχηματισθεὶς 
πρὸς τὸν ἥλιον καὶ τοὺς θανάτους τοὺς πατρικοὺς 
ἐπινόσους κατασκευάζει καὶ πάθη τὰ διὰ τῆς τῶν 
ὑγρῶν ὀχλήσεως. 
1 ἐὰν VPLDProc., ὅταν MNAECam. 
2 μόνους MNACam. 


8 émoweis . . . ἐπαναφοραῖς libri Proc. ; om. Cam. 


4 τοὺς πατέρας MNACam. 


244 


TETRABIBLOS III. 4 


aspect whatever to the sun and to Saturn, or if 
Saturn himself is in an harmonious aspect to the 
sun, either conjunction, sextile, or trine, both being 
in power, we must conjecture long life for the father ; 
if they are weak, however, the significance is not 
the same, though it does not indicate a short life. 
If, however, this condition is not present, but Mars 
overcomes ! the sun or Saturn, or rises in succession 
to them, or when again Saturn is not in accord with 
the sun but is either in quartile or in opposition, 
if they are declining from the angles, they merely 
make the fathers weak, but if they are at the angles 
or rising after them, they make them short-lived or 
liable to injury: short-lived when they are upon the 
first two angles, the orient and the mid-heaven, 
and the succedent signs, and liable to injury or 
disease when they are in the other two angles, 
the occident and lower mid-heaven, or their succe- 
dent signs. For Mars, regarding the sun in the way 
described,” destroys the father suddenly or causes 
injuries to his sight; if he thus regards Saturn he 
puts him in peril of death or of chills and fever or of 
injury by cutting and cauterizing. Saturn himself 
in an unfavourable aspect to the sun brings about 
the father’s death by disease and illnesses caused by 
gatherings of humours. 

1The anonymous commentator on Ptolemy says that 
“stars are said to overcome (καθυπερτερεῖν) when they 
are of a smaller number of degrees,”’ 7.e. of the zodiac. 
The right takes precedent over the left, as a general rule. 


Cf. Bouché-Leclereq, p. 250, n. 1. 
2 In quartile or opposition. 


245 


PTOLEMY 


᾿Επὶ δὲ τῆς μητρός, ἐὰν μὲν ὁ τοῦ Διὸς συσχη- 
“ματισθῇ τῇ τε σελήνῃ καὶ τῷ τῆς Adpodirns 
116 ὁπωσδήποτε ἢ καὶ αὐτὸς ὁ τῆς ᾿Αφροδίτης συμ- 
φώνως ἔχῃ πρὸς τὴν σελήνην, ἑξάγωνος ὧν ἢ 
τρίγωνος ἢ συνὼν αὐτῇ ἐν δυνάμει ὄντες, πολυ- 
χρόνιον δεικνύουσι τὴν μητέρα. ἐὰν δὲ 6 τοῦ 
Ἄρεως βλέψῃ τὴν σελήνην ἢ τὸν τῆς Adpodirns 
ἐπανενεχθεὶς ἢ 7) τετραγωνίσας ἢ διαμετρήσας, ἢ ἢ ὁ 
τοῦ Κρόνου τὴν σελήνην μόνην ὡσαύτως, ἀφαιρε- 
τικοὶ μὲν ὄντες ἢ ἀποκεκλικότες, πάλιν ἀντιπτώ- 
μασι μόνον ἢ ἀσθενείαις περικυλίουσι - προσθετικοὶ 
δὲ ἢ ἐπίκεντροι, ὀλιγοχρονίους ἢ ἐπισινεῖς ποιοῦσι 
τὰς μητέρας, ὀλιγοχρονίους μὲν ὁμοίως ἐπὶ τῶν 
ἀπηλιωτικῶν ὄντες κέντρων ἢ ἐπαναφορῶν, ἐπι- 
σινεῖς δὲ ἐπὶ τῶν δυτικῶν. "Apys μὲν γὰρ βλέψας 
τὴν σελήνην τοῦτον τὸν τρόπον, ἀνατολικὴν μὲν 
οὖσαν, τούς τε θανάτους τοὺς μητρικοὺς αἰφνιδίους 
καὶ σίνη περὶ τὰς ὄψεις ποιεῖ, ἀποκρουστικὴν δὲ 
τοὺς θανάτους ἀπὸ ἐκτρωσμῶν ἢ τῶν τοιούτων καὶ 
τὰ σίνη διὰ τομῶν καὶ καύσεων : τὴν δὲ ᾿ἀφροδίτην 
βλέψας τούς τε θανάτους πυρεκτικοὺς ἀπεργαζέται 
καὶ πάθη τὰ δι’ ἀποκρύφων καὶ σκοτισμῶν καὶ προσ- 
δρομῶν αἰφνιδίων. ὁ δὲ τοῦ Κρόνου τὴν σελήνην 
βλέψας θανάτους καὶ πάθη ποιεῖ, ἀνατολικῆς μὲν 
οὔσης αὐτῆς διὰ ῥιγοπυρέτων, ἀποκρουστικῆς δὲ 
διὰ νομῶν 1 ὑστερικῶν καὶ ἀναβρώσεων. 
Προσπαραληπτέον δὲ εἰς τὰ κατὰ μέρος εἴδη τῶν 
σινῶν ἢ καὶ παθῶν ἢ καὶ θανάτων καὶ τὰς τῶν δωδε- 
κατημορίων ἐν οἷς εἰσιν of τὸ αἴτιον ἐμποιοῦντες 
117 ἰδιοτροπίας, ὑπὲρ ὧν εὐκαιρότερον ἐν τοῖς περὶ αὐτῆς 


246 


TETRABIBLOS III. 4 


In the case of the mother, if Jupiter is in any 
aspect whatever to the moon and to Venus, or if 
Venus herself is concordant with the moon, in sextile, 
trine, or conjunction, when they are in power, 
they signify long life for the mother. If, however, 
Mars regards the moon or Venus, rising after her or 
in quartile or in opposition, or if Saturn similarly 
regards the moon by herself, when they are diminish- 
ing or declining, again they merely threaten with 
misfortune or sickness; but if they are increasing or 
angular, they make the mothers short-lived or subject 
to injury. They make them short-lived similarly 
when they are at the eastern angles or the signs that 
rise after them, and liable to injury when they are 
at the western angles. For when Mars in this way 
regards the waxing moon, it brings about sudden 
death and injury of the eyesight for the mothers ; 
but if the moon is waning, death from abortions 
or the like, and injury from cutting and cauterizing. 
If he regards Venus, he causes death by fever, 
mysterious and obscure illnesses, and sudden attacks 
of disease. Saturn regarding the moon causes death 
and illnesses, when the moon is in the orient, by chills 
and fever; when she is in the occident, by uterine 
ulcers and cancers. 

We must take into consideration, also, with refer- 
ence to the particular kinds of injuries, diseases, or 
deaths, the special characters of the signs in which 
are the planets which produce the cause, with which 


Lyopav VPLD ; νόσων MNAECam. 
247 


PTOLEMY 


~ La > 4 θ 1 \ ΝΜ 
τῆς γενέσεως ἐπεξεργασόμεθα. καὶ ἔτι παρα- 
τηρητέον ἡμέρας μὲν μάλιστα τόν τε ἥλιον καὶ τὴν 
Al δί \ δὲ \ ~ / A A 

φροδίτην, νυκτὸς δὲ τὸν τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ τὴν 
σελήνην. 

“οιπὸν δὲ ἐπὶ τῶν κατ᾽ εἶδος ἐξεργασιῶν 5 
¢ / \ > / 0 “ ” A a Spe ἢ 
ἁρμόζον Kat ἀκόλουθον ἂν εἴη τὸν τῆς αἱρέσεως 
πατρικὸν ἢ μητρικὸν τόπον ὥσπερ ὡροσκόπον 
ὑποστησαμένους 3 τὰ λοιπὰ ὡς ἐπὶ γενέσεως αὐτῶν 
τῶν γονέων ἐπισκοπεῖν κατὰ τὰς ἐφεξῆς ὑπο- 
δειχθησομένας τῶν ὁλοσχερεστέρων εἰδῶν πρακ- 
τικῶν τε καὶ συμβατικῶν ἐφόδους - τοῦ μέντοι 
συγκρατικοῦ τρόπου ὃ καὶ ἐνταῦθα καὶ ἐπὶ πάντων 

a > 
μεμνῆσθαι προσήκει, καταστοχαζομένους, ἐὰν μὴ 
μονοειδεῖς ἀλλὰ διάφοροι ἢ τῶν ἐναντίων ποιητικοὶ 
τυγχάνωσιν ot τὰς κυρίας τῶν ἐπιζητουμένων τόπων 
εἰληφότες ἀστέρες, τίνες ἐκ τῶν περὶ ἕκαστον Ἶ 
συμβεβηκότων ὃ πρὸς δύναμιν πλεονεκτημάτων 
ν A 

πλείους ἔχοντες εὑρίσκονται ψήφους πρὸς τὴν 
ἐπικράτησιν τῶν ἀποτελεσθησομένων, ἵνα ἢ ταῖς 

4 Ὁ» 3 LY 4 A > / 
τούτων φύσεσιν ἀκόλουθον ποιώμεθα τὴν ἐπίσκεψιν, 
7). TOV ψήφων ἰ ἰσορρόπων οὐσῶν, ὅταν μὲν ἅμα ὦσιν 
οἱ ἐπικρατοῦντες, τὸ ἐκ τῆς κράσεως τῶν διαφόρων 


1 ἐπεξεργασόμεθα VAD, -ώμεθα PL, ἐπεργαζόμεθα MNE 

Cam.; sententiam om. Proc. 
* ef epyaorav VPLD, ἐπεξεργασιῶν ΜΝ AECam. 

8 ὑποστησαμένους VPLDE, ἐπιστησαμένους MA, ἐπισταμένους 
NCam. ; ὑποστήσασθαι Proce. 

4 σκοπεῖν NCam. 

° πρακτικῶν τε καὶ συμβατικῶν VD, παρεκτικῶν τ. κ. σημαν- 
τικῶν PL (σημαντοτικῶν L), εἰδῶν τῶν τε κατὰ πρᾶξιν καὶ κατὰ 


σύμβασιν θεωρουμένων Proc.; πραγματικάς τε καὶ συμβατικάς 
MNAECam. 


248 


TETRABIBLOS III. 4 


we shall find more appropriate occasion to deal in 
the discussion of the nativity itself,! and furthermore 
we must observe by day particularly the sun and 
Venus, and by night Saturn and the moon. 

For the rest, in carrying out these particular in- 
quiries, it would be fitting and consistent to set up 
the paternal or maternal place of the sect as a horo- 
scope” and investigate the remaining topics as though 
it were a nativity of the parents themselves, follow- 
ing the procedure for the investigation of the general 
classifications, both practical and casual, the headings 
of which will be set forth in the following. However, 
both here and everywhere it is well to recall the mode 
of mixture of the planets, and, if it happens that the 
planets which rule the places under inquiry are not 
of one kind but different, or bring about opposite 
effects, we should aim to discover which ones have 
most claims, from the ways in which they happen to 
exceed in power in a particular case, to the rulership 
of the predicted events. This is in order that we 
may either guide our inquiry by the natures of these 
planets, or, if the claims of more than one are of 
equal weight, when the rulers are together, we 
may successfully calculate the combined result of the 

1Cf. ili. 12, iv. 9. 

*The anonymous commentator, on this passage, says 
that the significant planet is to be taken as the horoscope. 


Cf. a similar statement at the end of ο. 5 and Bouché- 
Leclereq, p. 394. 





6 τρόπου VAD, -ov P, -ους L, τόπου MNECam. ; τοῦ τρόπου 
τῆς συγκράσεως Proc. 

7 ἕκαστον VMADE, -a PLNCam. 

8 συμβεβηκότα NCam. 


249 


PTOLEMY 


φύσεων συναγόμενον εὐστόχως ἐπιλογιζώμεθα: ὅταν 
δὲ διεστηκότες ἀνὰ μέρος ἑκάστοις κατὰ τοὺς ἰδίους 
καιροὺς τὰ οἰκεῖα τῶν συμπτωμάτων ἀπομερί- 

118 ζωμεν,2 προτέροις μὲν τοῖς ἑῴοις μᾶλλον, ὑστέροις 
δὲ τοῖς ἑσπερίοις. ἀπ᾽ ἀρχῆς μὲν γὰρ ἀνάγκη 
συνοικειωθῆναι τῷ ζητουμένῳ τόπῳ τὸν μέλλοντά τι 
περὶ αὐτὸν ἀπεργάζεσθαι τῶν ἀστέρων, καὶ τούτου 
μὴ ὃ συμβεβηκότος οὐδὲν οἷόν τε καθ᾽ ὅλου διαθεῖναι 
μέγα“ τὸν μηδ᾽ ὅλως τῆς ἀρχῆς κοινωνήσαντα, 
τοῦ μέντοι χρόνου τῆς κατὰ τὸ ἀποτελούμενον 
ἐκβάσεως οὐκέτι τὸ τῆς πρώτης δεσποτίας αἴτιον, 
ἀλλ᾽ ἡ τοῦ κυριεύσαντός πως πρός τε τὸν ἥλιον καὶ 
τὰς τοῦ κόσμου γωνίας διάστασις. 


«ε.) Περι ἀδελφῶν 


€ A Ss \ / ’ A ‘ > A 
O μὲν οὖν περὶ γονέων τόπος σχεδὸν καὶ ἀπὸ 
τούτων ἂν ἡμῖν γένοιτο καταφανής - 6 δὲ περὶ 
> ~ uM > 50 \ θ᾽ δλ ’, 
ἀδελφῶν, εἴ τις κἀνταῦθα τὸ καθ᾽ ὅλου μόνον 
~ ~ > 
ἐξετάζοι Kal μὴ πέρα ὃ τοῦ δυνατοῦ τόν τε ἀριθμὸν 
3 ~ \ \ / > ,ὔ λ ᾽ὔ SS | 
ἀκριβῶς καὶ κατὰ μέρος ἐπιζητοίη, λαμβάνοιτ᾽ av 
,ὕ / \ > \ 
φυσικώτερον ὅ TE περὶ ὁμομητρίων μόνον καὶ ἀπὸ 
τοῦ μεσουρανοῦντος δωδεκατημορίου τοῦ μητρικοῦ 
~ / ε / \ ‘ 
τόπου, τουτέστι τοῦ περιέχοντος ἡμέρας μὲν TOV 
~ *4 , A ὃ \ A Xr 7 > ὃ ’ 
τῆς ᾿Αφροδίτης, νυκτὸς δὲ τὴν σελήνην, ἐπειδήπερ 
1 ἕκαστος codd. Cam. 
- ἀπομερίζωμεν MNAECam., -όμεθα PL, -ομεν VDProc. 
3 τούτου μὴ VPLAD ; 3 τούτου yap μὴ συμβάντος Proc. ; τούτου 
MNECam.!, τοῦ Cam.? a 
4 μέγα VD; οὐδὲν δύναται γίνεσθαι μέγα Proc.; om. alii 


Cam. 
δ κατὰ VPLD; περὶ MNAE. ὃ πέρας Cam.? 


230 


TETRABIBLOS III. 4-5 


mixture of their different natures; but when they 
are separated, that we may assign to each in turn 
at their proper times the events which belong to 
them, first to the more oriental among them and 
then to the occidental. For a planet must from 
the beginning have familiarity with the place about 
which the inquiry is made, if it is going to exercise 
any effect upon it, and in general, if this is not the 
case, a planet which had no share whatsoever in the 
beginning can exert no great influence ; of the time 
of the occurrence of the event, however, the original 
dominance is no longer the cause, but the distance of 
the planet which dominates in any way from the sun 
and from the angles of the universe. 


5. Of Brothers and Sisters. 


The preceding may perhaps have made clear the 
topic of the parents. As for that of brethren, 
if here too one examines only the general subject 
and does not carry beyond the bounds of possibility 
his inquiry as to the exact number and other par- 
ticulars, it is more naturally to be taken, when it is 
a question of blood-brethren alone, from the cul- 
minating sign, the place of the mother,! that is, 
that which contains by day Venus and by night the 


1This is the reading of all the MSS. and Proclus. 
Camerarius, inserting a καί before τοῦ μητρικοῦ τόπου, would 
make it “the culminating sign and the place of the 
mother.’ While the best-attested reading has been left 
in the present text, the passage is extremely difficult to 
understand, whichever reading is preferred. 


251 


PTOLEMY 


~ ‘ , ‘ A > 3 > ~ 
τοῦτο τὸ ζῴδιον καὶ τὸ ἐπαναφερόμενον αὐτῷ 
γίνεται τῆς μητρὸς ὁ περὶ τέκνων τόπος, 6 αὐτὸς 
> / 5 ~ ~ ΄ ‘ > ~ 
ὀφείλων εἶναι τῷ τοῦ γεννωμένου περὶ ἀδελφῶν. 
3 “ ~ 
ἐὰν μὲν οὖν ἀγαθοποιοὶ τῷ τόπῳ συσχηματίζωνται, 
3 ~ > ~ ~ 
δαψίλειαν ἀδελφῶν ἐροῦμεν, πρός te τὸ πλῆθος 
119 αὐτῶν τῶν ἀστέρων τὸν στοχασμὸν ποιούμενοι, 
καὶ πότερον ἐν μονοειδέσι τυγχάνουσι ζῳδίοις ἢ ἐν 
δισώμοις : ἐὰν δ᾽ οἱ κακοποιοὶ καθυπερτερῶσιν 
αὐτῶν ἢ καὶ ἐναντιωθῶσι κατὰ διάμετρον, σπαν- 
αδελφίας εἰσὶ δηλωτικοί, μάλιστα δὲ κἂν τὸν ἥλιον 
συμπαραλαμβάνωσιν" εἰ δὲ καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν κέντρων 
ἡ ἐναντίωσις γένοιτο καὶ μάλιστα τοῦ wpocKo- 
~ A 
ποῦντος, ἐπὶ μὲν Κρόνου καὶ πρωτοτόκοι ἢ πρωτο- 
’, Ψ > \ \ Μ 7 ~ 
τρόφοι γίνονται, ἐπὶ δὲ Ἄρεως θανάτῳ τῶν 


1 σπαναδελφοῦσιν. ἔτι 3 μέντοι τῶν διδόν- 


λοιπῶν 

3 ’,ὔ A \ ~ A A ‘ 

των ἀστέρων ἐὰν μὲν καλῶς κατὰ TO κοσμικὸν 

τυγχάνωσι διακείμενοι, εὐσχήμονας καὶ ἐνδόξους 
« / ~ / > ͵ὔ A \ 93> ,ὔ 

ἡγητέον τοῦς διδομένους ἀδελφούς - ἐὰν δὲ ἐναντίως, 

ταπεινοὺς Kal ἀνεπιφάντους: ἐὰν δὲ καθυπερτε- 

- - ε 

ρήσωσι τοὺς διδόντας ἢ ἐπενεχθῶσιν αὐτοῖς ot 

κακοποιοί, καὶ ὀλιγοχρονίους - δώσουσι δὲ τοὺς μὲν 

ἄρρενας of κοσμικῶς ἠρρενωμένοι, τὰς δὲ θηλείας 

ς 

οἱ τεθηλυσμένοι, καὶ πάλιν τοὺς μὲν πρώτους οἱ 

> dé \ Ae, / ες ’ 

ἀπηλιωτικώτεροι, τοὺς δὲ ὑστέρους οἱ λιβυκώτεροι. 

3 \ 

πρὸς δὲ τούτοις ἐὰν οἱ διδόντες τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 


1 λοιπῶν VPLD, ὄντων MNAECam. 
3 ἔτι VPLDProc., ἐπὶ MNAECam, 


252 


TETRABIBLOS III. 5 


moon; for in this sign and that which succeeds it 
is the place of the children of the mother, which 
should be the same as the place of the brethren of 
the offspring. If, then, beneficent planets bear an 
aspect to this place, we shall predict an abundance 
of brethren, basing our conjecture upon the number 
of the planets and whether they are in signs of a 
simple or of a bicorporeal form. But if the mal- 
evolent planets overcome them or oppose them in 
opposition, they signify a dearth of brethren, es- 
pecially if they have the sun among them. If the 
opposition is at the angles, and especially at the 
horoscope,! in case Saturn is in the ascendant, they 
are the first-born or the first to be reared; in case 
it is Mars, there is a small number of brethren by 
reason of the death of the others. If the planets 
which give brethren are in a favourable mundane 3 
position, we must believe that the brethren thereby 
given will be elegant and distinguished; if the re- 
verse is the case, humble and inconspicuous. But 
if the maleficent planets overcome those that give 
brethren, or rise after them, the brethren will also be 
short-lived ; and the male planets in the mundane 
sense * will give males, the female females; again, 
those farther to the east the first and those farther to 
the west the later-born. Besides this, if the planets 
that give brethren are in harmonious aspect with the 


1“ Horoscope ”’ is used here in its more original sense of 
the point rising above the horizon at the time the observa- 
tion is made. 

2 See the note on iii. 3, p. 239. 

5 T.e. in the quadrant from the orient to mid-heaven or 
that from the occident to lower mid-heaven ; ¢f. i. 6. 


253 


PTOLEMY 


> ~ 

συμφώνως ἐσχηματισμένοι τυγχάνωσι τῷ κυριεύοντι 
τοῦ περὶ τῶν ἀδελφῶν δωδεκατημορίου, προσφιλεῖς 

/ \ 1 ὃ ὃ / LO λ / Ἐ ὟΝ δὲ \ 
ποιήσουσι Tovs! διδομένους ἀδελφούς - ἐὰν δὲ Kal 
τῷ κλήρῳ τῆς τύχης, καὶ κοινοβίους - ἐὰν δὲ ἐν 
τοῖς ἀσυνδέτοις τύχωσιν ἢ κατὰ τὴν ἐναντίαν 

’ὔ / \ / \ e + RA | ~ 

120 στάσιν, φιλέχθρους καὶ φθονερούς, καὶ ws ἐπὶ πᾶν 

> / \ \ \ \ > “ 
ἐπιβουλευτικούς. λοιπὸν δὲ καὶ τὰ καθ᾽ ἕκαστον 
αὐτῶν εἴ τις ἐπιπολυπραγμονοίη,5 συνεικάζοιτ᾽ ἂν 
καὶ ἐνταῦθα πάλιν, τοῦ διδόντος ἀστέρος ὑποτιθε- 
μένου κατὰ τὸν ὡροσκοπικὸν λόγον καὶ τῶν λοιπῶν 

ϑινΝ / 
Ws ἐπὶ γενέσεως συνθεωρουμένων .3 


<s.> Περὶ ἀρρενικῶν καὶ θηλυκῶν 


‘Yr’ * ὄψιν ἤδη καὶ τοῦ περὶ ἀδελφῶν λόγου κατὰ 
τὸν ἁρμόζοντα καὶ φυσικὸν τρόπον ἡμῖν γεγονότος, 
ἑξῆς ἂν εἴη τῶν κατ᾽ αὐτὴν τὴν γένεσιν ἀρξασθαι, 
καὶ πρῶτον ἐπιδραμεῖν τὸν περὶ ἀρρενικῶν τε καὶ 
θηλυκῶν ἐπιλογισμόν. θεωρεῖται δ᾽ οὗτος οὐ 
μονοειδῶς οὐδ᾽ ad’ ἑνός τινος ἀλλ᾽ ἀπό τε τῶν 
φωτῶν ἀμφοτέρων καὶ τοῦ ὡροσκόπου τῶν τε 
λόγον ἐχόντων πρὸς αὐτοὺς ἀστέρων, μάλιστα μὲν 
κατὰ τὴν τῆς σπορᾶς διάθεσιν, ὁλοσχερέστερον δὲ 
καὶ κατὰ τὴν τῆς ἐκτροπῆς. τὸ δ᾽ ὅλον παρα- 
τηρητέον, πότερον οἱ προειρημένοι τρεῖς τόποι καὶ 
οἱ τούτων οἰκοδεσποτοῦντες ἀστέρες ἢ πάντες ἢ 
οἱ πλεῖστοι τυγχάνουσιν ἠρρενωμένοι πρὸς ἀρρενο- 


1 τοὺς VPLADE, μὲν MNCam. 
3 ἐπιπολυπραγμονοίη VPLAD, ἔτι πολ. MNECam. 
3 συνθεωρουμένων om. NCam. 


254 


TETRABIBLOS III. 5-6 


planet that rules the place of brethren,! they will make 
the given brethren friendly, and will also make them 
live together, if they are in harmonious aspect with 
the Lot of Fortune ;” but if they are in disjunct signs 
or in opposition, they will produce quarrelsome, 
jealous, and for the most part, scheming brethren. 
Finally, if one would busy himself with further in- 
quiries about details concerning individuals, he might 
in this case again make his conjecture by taking the 
planet which gives brethren as the horoscope and 
dealing with the rest as in a nativity. 


6. Of Males and Females. 


Now that the topic of brethren has been brought 
before our eyes in suitable and natural fashion, the 
next step would be to begin the discussion of matters 
directly concerned with the birth, and first to treat 
of the reckoning of males and females. This is deter- 
mined by no simple theory based upon some one 
thing, but it depends upon the two luminaries, the 
horoscope, and the stars which bear some relation 
to them, particularly by their disposition at the time 
of conception, but more generally also by that at the 
time of the birth. The whole situation must be 
observed, whether the aforesaid three places and the 
planets which rule them are either all or the most 
of them masculine, to produce males, or feminine, 


1.7.6. the place (literally, “‘ twelfth part ”’ of the zodiac) 
which governs the inquiry about brethren ; see the begin- 
ning of this chapter. 

2 For the Lot of Fortune see ii. 10. 


4 ὑπ᾿ VPDE, ἐπ᾿ MNLACam. 
δ ἐπιγεγονότος MNECam. 


255 


PTOLEMY 


yoviav ἢ τεθηλυσμένοι πρὸς θηλυγονίαν, καὶ οὕτως 
ἀποφαντέον. διακριτέον μέντοι τούς τε ἠρρενω- 
μένους καὶ τοὺς τεθηλυσμένους καθ᾽ ὃν ὑπεθέμεθα 
τρόπον ἐν ταῖς πινακικαῖς ἐκθέσεσι ἐν ἀρχῇ τῆς 
συντάξεως ἀπό τε τῆς τῶν δωδεκατημορίων ἐν οἷς 

121 εἰσι φύσεως, καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς αὐτῶν τῶν ἀστέρων, καὶ 
ἔτι ἀπὸ τῆς πρὸς τὸν κόσμον σχέσεως, ἐπειδήπερ 
ἀπηλιωτικοὶ μὲν ὄντες ἀρρενοῦνται, λιβυκοὶ δὲ 
θηλύνονται. πρὸς δὲ τούτοις ἀπὸ τῆς πρὸς τὸν 
ἥλιον, ἑῷοι μὲν γὰρ πάλιν ὄντες ἀρρενοῦνται, 
θηλύνονται δὲ ἑσπέριοι: δι’ ὧν πάντων τὴν κατὰ 
τὸ πλεῖστον ἐπικράτησιν τοῦ γένους προσήκει 
καταστοχάζεσθαι. 


«ζ.. Περὶ διδυμογόνων 


A \ ~ / \ « Ψ > A 4 Ἅ 
Καὶ περὶ τῶν γεννωμένων δὲ ὁμοίως ἀνὰ δύο ἢ 
\ A / / ~ 
καὶ πλειόνων τοὺς αὐτοὺς δύο τόπους παρατηρεῖν 
/ 4 ~ \ \ ¢ 
προσήκει, τουτέστι τά TE δύο φῶτα καὶ τὸν ὡροσ- 
A A , ~ \ , 
κόπον. παρακολουθεῖν δὲ εἴωθε τοῦτο τὸ σύμ- 
© A /, - « vA a \ 
πτωμα' παρὰ" τὰς συγκράσεις, ὅταν ot δύο ἢ καὶ 
- / 7 / 
ot τρεῖς τόποι δίσωμα περιέχωσι ζῴδια, Kal μάλιστα 
᾿ς c >’ / ~ > / A A 
ὅταν Kal οἱ οἰκοδεσπόζοντες αὐτῶν ἀστέρες TO αὐτὸ 
{0 3-2 \ > 4 A VY @254 , 
πάθωσιν * ἢ τινες μὲν ἐν δισώμοις, τινὲς δὲ ava δύο 
/ μ] ‘ / > A \ \ 
κείμενοι τυγχάνωσιν ἢ καὶ πλείους. ἐπὰν δὲ Kal 
- > ¢ / \ A A ? \ 
ἐν δισώμοις ὦσιν ot κύριοι τόποι καὶ κατὰ TO αὐτὸ 
Ἰ τοῦτο τὸ σύμπτωμα VD; cf. συμβαίνει δὲ οὕτω γενέσθαι 
Proc. ; τὸ τοιοῦτον σύμπτωμα libri alii Cam. 
2 παρὰ VD, περὶ libri alii Cam. 


3 16 ν > ᾿ > ‘ > a ‘ | a 
πάθωσιν VPD; εἰς τοὺς οἰκοδεσποτοῦντας. . . TO αὐτὸ συμβῇ 
Proc. ; καθορῶσιν MNAECam., τιθῶσιν 1,. 


2506 


TETRABIBLOS III. 6-7 


to produce females, and on this basis the decision 
must be made. We must however distinguish the 
male and the female planets in the way set forth by 
us in the tabular series in the beginning of this com- 
pilation,! from the nature of the signs in which they 
are, and from the nature of the planets themselves, 
and furthermore from their position with reference 
to the universe, since they become masculine when 
they are in the east and feminine in the west ; and 
besides, from their relation to the sun, for again 
when they rise in the morning they are made 
masculine, and feminine when they rise in the even- 
ing. By means of all these criteria one must con- 
jecture what planet exercises preponderating control 
over the sex. 


7. Of Twins. 


Likewise with regard to the births of two or even 
more, it is fitting to observe the same two places, that 
is, the two luminaries and the horoscope. For such an 
event is apt to attend the intermixture ? when either 
two or the three places * cover bicorporeal signs, 
and particularly when the same is true of the planets 
that rule them, or when some are in bicorporeal signs, 
and some are disposed in pairs or in larger groups. 
But when both the dominant places are in bi- 
corporeal signs and most of the planets are similarly 


1 See i. 6. 
* That is, of the influences of luminaries, signs, ete. 
3 The places or houses in which the luminaries and the 


horoscope are found. 


257 


PTOLEMY 


πλείονες τῶν ἀστέρων συνεσχηματισμένοι, τότε 
καὶ πλείονα τῶν δύο κυΐσκεσθαι" συμπίπτει, τοῦ 
μὲν πλήθους ἀπὸ τοῦ τὸ ἰδίωμα ποιοῦντος ἀστέρος 
τοῦ ἀριθμοῦ συνεικαζομένου, τοῦ δὲ γένους ἀπὸ 
τῶν συνεσχηματισμένων ἀστέρων τῷ τε ἡλίῳ καὶ 
τῇ σελήνῃ καὶ τῷ ὡροσκόπῳ πρὸς ἀρρενογονίαν ἢ 
θηλυγονίαν κατὰ τοὺς ἐν τοῖς ἔμπροσθεν εἰρημένους 
τρόπους. ὅταν δὲ ἡ τοιαύτη διάθεσις μὴ συμπερι- 
129 λαμβάνῃ τοῖς φωσὶ τὸ τοῦ ὡροσκόπου κέντρον, 
ἀλλὰ τὸ 3 τοῦ μεσουρανήματος, at τοιαῦται τῶν 
μητέρων δίδυμα ὡς ἐπὶ πᾶν ἢ καὶ πλείονα κυΐσ- 
κουσιν. ἰδίως δὲ τρεῖς μὲν ἄρρενας πληροφοροῦσιν 
ὑπὸ τὴν τῶν 'Avaxtopwv γένεσιν ἅμα τοῖς προ- 
κειμένοις τόποις ἐν δισώμοις συσχηματισθέντες 
Κρόνος, Ζεύς, Ἄρης" τρεῖς δὲ θηλείας ὑπὸ τὴν 
τῶν Χαρίτων Ἀφροδίτη, σελήνη μεθ᾽ “Eppod τεθη- 
λυσμένου δύο δ᾽ ἄρρενας καὶ μίαν θήλειαν ὑπὸ 
τὴν τῶν Διοσκούρων Κρόνος, Ζεύς, “Adpodiry: 
δύο δὲ θηλείας καὶ ἄρρενα ἕνα ὑπὸ τὴν Δήμητρος 
καὶ Κόρης ἃ ᾿Αφροδίτη, σελήνη, Ἄρης - ἐφ᾽ ὧν ὡς 
ἐπὶ τὸ πολὺ συμβαίνειν εἴωθε τό τε μὴ τελεσ- 
φορεῖσθαι τὰ γινόμενα καὶ τὸ μετὰ παρασήμων 


1 πλείονες VP (-ovais) LDProc., πλείοσι MNAECam. 

2 κυΐσκεσθαι VAD, κύεσθαι PL, τίκτεσθαι MNEProec.Cam. 

3 ἀλλὰ τὸ VADEProc., ἀλλὰ τὼ PL, ἀλλ᾽ ἀπὸ MNCam. 

4 καὶ Διονύσου post Κόρης add. NCam., om. libri alii Proc. 


'That is, from the planet that governs the dominant 
place. 
* In the preceding chapter. 


258 


TETRABIBLOS III. 7 


configurated, then it befalls that even more than two 
are conceived, for the number is conjectured from the 
star that causes the peculiar property of the number, 
and the sex from the aspects which the planets have 
with respect to the sun and the moon and the horo- 
scope for the production of males or of females, in 
accordance with the ways stated above.” But when- 
ever such an arrangement of the planets does not 
include the horoscopic angle with the luminaries, but 
rather that of the mid-heaven, mothers with such 
genitures generally conceive twins or even more ; 
and in particular, they give multiple birth, to three 
males, by the geniture of the Kings,® when Saturn, 
Jupiter, and Mars are in bicorporeal signs and bear 
some aspect to the aforesaid places; and to three 
females, by the geniture of the Graces, when Venus 
and the moon, with Mercury made feminine, are so 
arranged; to two males and one female, by the 
geniture of the Dioscuri, when Saturn, Jupiter, and 
Venus are so ordered, and to two females and a male, 
by the geniture of Demeter and Koré,* when Venus, 
the moon, and Mars are thus ordered. In these cases 
it generally happens that the children are not com- 
pletely developed and are born with certain bodily 


* Bouché-Leclereq, p. 398, n. 3, after remarking upon 
the various interpretations given this passage, says: 
“The title ᾿Ανάκτορες ("Avaxres, “Avaxes) having been borne 
by the Dioscuri, the Cabiri, and the Curetes, I do not 
know to which group he alludes, and possibly he did 
not know very well himself.’ Cardanus remarks that 
Ptolemy regards three children as the largest number that 
can be born at one birth and survive. 

4MS. N and Camerarius add here “ and Dionysus,’’ but 
the other MSS. agree in omitting the expression, 


259 


PTOLEMY 


΄- - 3 / 
τινῶν σωματικῶν ἀποκυΐσκεσθαι Kal ἔτι TO γίνεσθαί 
- > / ~ 
τινα τοῖς τόποις ἐξαίρετα Kal ἀπροσδόκητα διὰ τῆς 
~ Ν᾿ ,ὔ 
τῶν τοιούτων συμπτωμάτων ὥσπερ ἐπιφανείας. 


<n.> Περὶ τεράτων 


Οὐκ ἀλλότριος δὲ τῆς προκειμένης σκέψεως οὐδ᾽ 
περὶ τῶν τεράτων! λόγος. πρῶτον μὲν γὰρ 
πὶ τῶν τοιούτων τὰ μὲν φῶτα ἀποκεκλικότα 
ἢ" ἀσύνδετα τῷ ὡροσκόπῳ κατὰ τὸ πλεῖστον 
εὑρίσκεται, τὰ δὲ κέντρα διειλημμένα ὑπὸ τῶν 
κακοποιῶν. ὅταν οὖν τοιαύτη τις ὑπ᾽ ὄψιν πέσῃ 
123 διάθεσις, ἐπειδὴ γίνεται πολλάκις καὶ περὶ τὰς 
ταπεινὰς καὶ κακοδαίμονας γενέσεις, κἂν μὴ τερα- 
τώδεις ὦσιν, εὐθὺς ἐπισκοπεῖν προσήκει τὴν προ- 
γενομένην 3 συζυγίαν συνοδικὴν ἢ πανσεληνιακὴν 
καὶ τὸν οἰκοδεσποτήσαντα ταύτης τε καὶ τῶν τῆς 
ἐκτροπῆς φωτῶν. ἐὰν γὰρ οἱ τῆς ἐκτροπῆς αὐτῶν 
τόποι καὶ ὁ τῆς σελήνης" καὶ 6 τοῦ ὡροσκόπου 
πάντες ἢ οἱ πλείονες ἀσύνδετοι τυγχάνωσιν ὄντες 
τῷ τῆς προγενομένης συζυγίας τόπῳ, τὸ γεννώ- 
μενον αἰνιγματῶδες ὑπονοητέον. ἐὰν μὲν οὖν 
τούτων οὕτως ἐχόντων τά τε φῶτα ἐν τετράποσιν 
ἢ θηριώδεσιν εὑρίσκηται ζῳδίοις καὶ οἱ δύο κεκεν- 
τρωμένοι τῶν κακοποιῶν, οὐδ᾽ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων ἔσται 
τὸ γεννώμενον, ἀλλὰ μηδενὸς μὲν μαρτυροῦντος 


πὸ On 


' τερατώδων VD. 

274 VPLMNDProce. ; καὶ AECam. 

3 προγενομένην EProc., mpoyw- A, προγεγωνυῖαν P, προτε- 
yoviay L, γενομένην MNCam., om. VD. 


260 





TETRABIBLOS III. 7-8 


marks, and again the governing places may bear 
certain unusual and surprising marks by reason of 
the divine manifestation, as it were, of such portents. 


8. Of Monsters. 


The subject of monsters is not foreign to the pre- 
sent inquiry ; for, in the first place, in such cases the 
luminaries are found to be as far as possible removed 
from the horoscope or in no way related to it, and 
the angles ' are separated by the maleficent planets. 
Whenever, then, such a disposition is observed, for 
it frequently occurs in humble and unlucky nativities, 
even though they are not the genitures of monsters, 
one should at once look for the last preceding new 
or full moon, and the lord of this and of the luminaries 
of the birth. For if the places of the birth, of the 
moon, and of the horoscope, all or the majority of 
them, happen to be unrelated to the place of the 
preceding syzygy, it must be supposed that the 
child will be nondescript. Now if, under such con- 
ditions, the luminaries are found in four-footed or 
animal-shaped signs,” and the two maleficent planets 
are centred, the child will not even belong to the 
human race, but if no beneficent planet witnesses to 


1 Cardanus and Whalley say the ascendant and the mid- 
heaven are meant. 

2 Cf. i. 12. The only human signs are Virgo, Gemini, 
Sagittarius, and Aquarius. 





4 ῥωτῶν VPLMDEProc., τόπων NACam. 
56 τῆς σελήνης MNAECam.!, ἡ τῆς σελ. Ῥ, οἱ τῆς σελ. 
VDLCam., 


261 


PTOLEMY 


a \ > θ, “1 ~ δὲ ~ 4 
τοῖς φωσὶ ἀγαθοποιοῦ, τῶν δὲ κακοποιῶν, 
/ ~ 
τέλεον ἀνήμερον Kal τῶν ἀγρίαν Kal κακωτικὴν 
> / 4 / A \ ΓΓν 
ἐχόντων φύσιν: μαρτυρούντων δὲ Διὸς ἢ Adpo- 
δίτης, τῶν ἐκθειαζομένων, οἷον κυνῶν ἢ αἰλού- 
a ~ ~ ~ 
ρων ὃ ἢ τῶν τοιούτων - “Epyot δέ, τῶν εἰς χρείαν 
> , a > 7 n A n” - ” 
ἀνθρωπίνην, οἷον ὀρνίθων ἢ συῶν ἢ βοῶν ἢ 
αἰγῶν καὶ τῶν τοιούτων. ἐὰν δὲ ἐν ἀνθρωποείδεσι 
\ ~ / ~ ΝΜ « 4 
τὰ φῶτα καταλαμβάνηται, τῶν ἄλλων ὡσαύτως 
> > 
ἐχόντων, ὑπ᾽ ἀνθρώπων μὲν ἢ παρ᾽ ἀνθρώποις 
ἔσται τὰ γεγενημένα, τέρατα δὲ ὁ καὶ αἰνιγματώδη 
τῆς κατὰ τὸ ποιὸν ἰδιότητος, καὶ ἐνταῦθα συνορω- 


124 μένης ἐκ τῆς τῶν ζῳδίων μορφώσεως, ἐν οἷς οἱ 


διειληφότες τὰ φῶτα ἢ τα κέντρα κακοποιοὶ τυγ- 
χάνουσιν. ἐὰν μὲν οὖν κἀνταῦθα μηδὲ εἷς τῶν 
ἀγαθοποιῶν ἀστέρων προσμαρτυρῇ "5 μηδενὶ τῶν 
προειρημένων τόπων, ἄλογα καὶ ὡς ἀληθῶς αἰνιγ- 
ματώδη γίνεται τέλεον - ἐὰν δὲ 6 τοῦ Διὸς ἢ ὁ τῆς 
᾿Αφροδίτης μαρτυρήσῃ, τιμώμενον καὶ εὔσχημον 
ἔσται τὸ τοῦ τέρατος ἴδιον -ὁ ὁποῖον περὶ τοὺς 
ἑρμαφροδίτους ἢ τοὺς καλουμένους ἁρποκρατια- 
κοὺς καὶ τοὺς τοιούτους εἴωθε συμβαίνειν. εἰ δὲ 
καὶ 6 τοῦ “Ἑρμοῦ μαρτυρήσειε μετὰ τούτων μὲν 
καὶ ἀποφθεγγομένους καὶ dia? τῶν τοιούτων πορι- 
στικούς : μόνος 8 δὲ ὁ τοῦ ‘Eppot® νωδοὺς καὶ 


1 ἀγαθοποιῦ ~ PLMNEProc.Cam., ἀγαθοποιῶν VD, τῶν 
ἀγαθοποιῶν A; pos. post μὲν MNECam. 

27@v δὲ κακοποιὸν P, ἀποιούντων δὲ κακοποιῶν L, τῶν 
κακοποιῶν MNECam.!, τῶν κακοποιῶν μαρτυρούντων Cam.?, 
ἀλλὰ τῶν κακοποιῶν Proc. 

8 Post αἰλούρων add. 7 πιθήκων MNAECam., om. VPLD 

4 δὲ om. MNECam. 


262 


TETRABIBLOS III. 8 


the luminaries, but the maleficent planets do so, it 
will be completely savage, an animal with wild and 
harmful nature; but if Jupiter or Venus witness, 
it will be one of the kinds regarded as sacred, as 
for example dogs, cats,! and the like; if Mercury 
witnesses, one of those that are of use to man, such 
as birds, swine, oxen, goats, and the like. If the 
luminaries are found in signs of human form, but the 
other planets are disposed in the same way, what is 
born will be, indeed, of the human race or to be 
classed with humans, but monsters and nondescript in 
qualitative character, and their qualities in this case 
too are to be observed from the form of the signs 
in which the maleficent planets which separate the 
luminaries or the angles happen to be. Now if even 
in this case not one of the beneficent planets bears 
witness to any of the places mentioned, the off- 
spring are entirely irrational and in the true sense 
of the word nondescript ; but if Jupiter or Venus 
bears witness, the type of monster will be honoured 
and seemly, such as is usually the case with herma- 
phrodites or the so-called harpocratiacs,” and the like. 
If Mercury should bear witness, along with the fore- 
going, this disposition produces prophets who also 
make money thereby; but when alone, Mercury 


1The later MSS. here add “ or apes.” 
2 Deaf mutes. 


ὃ προσμαρτυρῇ PLProc., προσμαρτυρούμενα VD, συμμαρτυρῇ 
MNAECam. 

ὁ ἴδιον VPLAD; ef. Proc. τὴν ἰδιότητα ἕξει ; om. MNECam. 

τ διὰ VPLAD, ἀπὸ MNECam. 

8 μόνος VPLMNADProc., -ον ECam. 

9 ὁ τοῦ ‘Eppod VADProc.; om. PLMNECam. 


263 


PTOLEMY 


4 A 
κωφούς, εὐφυεῖς μέντοι καὶ πανούργους ἄλλως 
ἀπεργάζεται." 


<6.> Περὶ ἀτρόφων 


A ~ δ᾽ » > \ 3 > \ A / 
οἰποῦ δ᾽ ὄντος εἰς τὰ κατ᾽ αὐτὴν THY γένεσιν 
~ \ 3 / / / ~ a 
τοῦ περὶ ἀτρόφων λόγου, προσήκει διαλαβεῖν ὅτι 
\ - “- 
πὴ μὲν ὁ τρόπος οὗτος ἔχεται τοῦ περὶ χρόνων 
~ λό 2 > δὴ A / td > 
ζωῆς λόγου, ἐπειδὴ τὸ ζητούμενον εἶδος οὐκ 
3 ’ὔ ε 
ἀλλότριον ἑκατέρου, πὴ δὲ κεχώρισται παρὰ τὸ 
3 τὰ \ \ ~ > / ΄ ,ὔ 
κατ᾽ αὐτὴν τὴν τῆς ἐπισκέψεως δύναμιν διαφέρειν 
πως. ὁ μὲν γὰρ περὶ χρόνων ζωῆς ἐπὶ τῶν ὅλως 
:} a Ζ 
ἐχόντων χρόνους αἰσθητοὺς θεωρεῖται, τουτέστι 
> ~ ~ 
μὴ ἐλάττονας ἡλιακῆς περιόδου μιᾶς - χρόνος yap 
ἰδίως 6 τοιοῦτος ἐνιαυτὸς καταλαμβάνεται " δυνάμει 
δὲ καὶ ὁ ἐλάττων τούτου, μῆνές εἰσι καὶ ἡμέραι 
\ - ε \ \ > if > \ ΄ 7 @ 
125 καὶ ὧὠραι. ὁ δὲ περὶ ἀτρόφων ἐπὶ τῶν μηδ᾽ ὅλως 
φθανόντων ἐπὶ τὸν προκείμενον χρόνον, ἀλλ᾽ ἐν τοῖς 
> 4 > A > ¢ \ ~ ’ 
ἐλάττοσιν ἀριθμοῖς dv ὑπερβολὴν τῆς κακώσεως 
φθειρομένων. ἔνθεν κἀκεῖνος μὲν πολυμερεστέραν 
ἔχει τὴν ἐπίσκεψιν, οὗτος δὲ τὴν ὁλοσχερεστέραν. 
ἁπλῶς γὰρ ἐάν τε κεκεντρωμένον ἢ τὸ ἕτερον τῶν 
A ~ A “ἢ \ 
φωτῶν καὶ τῶν κακοποιῶν 6 ἕτερος συνῇ ἢ Kal 


1 ἀπεργάζεται VMDE, ἐργάζεται PL, ἀπεργάζηται NACam. 
2 λόγου om. MNECam. 





1 Hither because they do not survive or because they 
are exposed; Ptolemy treats both classes in the same 


264 


TETRABIBLOS III. 8-9 


makes them toothless and deaf and dumb, though 
otherwise clever and cunning. 


9. Of Children that are not Reared. 


As the account of children that are not reared? 
is still lacking in the discussion of matters related to 
the birth itself, it is fitting to see that in one way 
this procedure is connected with the inquiry con- 
cerning length of life, for the question in each case is 
of the same kind; but in another way they are 
distinct, because there is a certain difference in the 
actual meaning of the inquiry. For the question of 
length of life considers those who in general endure 
for perceptible lengths of time, that is, not less than 
one circuit of the sun, and such a space is properly 
understood to be a year; but potentially also lesser 
periods than this, months and days and hours, are 
perceptible lengths of time. But the inquiry con- 
cerning children that are not reared refers to those 
who do not attain at all to “time” thus defined, 
but perish in something less than “ time” through 
excess of the evil influence. For this reason the in- 
vestigation of the former question is more complex; 
but this is simpler. For it is merely the case that 
if one of the luminaries is angular? and one of the 
maleficent planets is in conjunction with it, or in 


chapter, as does Firmicus Maternus, vii. 2 (De expositis et 
non nutritis). Cumont, L’ Egypte des astrologues, p. 186, 
remarks that whereas the ancient Egyptian custom had 
been to bring up all children born, the Greeks introduced 
the practice of exposing unwanted babes. 

* J.e. at one of the angles—rising, setting, or culminating. 


τ 205 


PTOLEMY 


, ~ “- 5 if 

διαμηκίζῃ, ταῦτα δὲ μοιρικῶς καὶ κατ᾽ ἰσοσκελείαν, 
5 ~ ~ 

μηδενὸς μὲν ἀγαθοποιοῦ συσχηματιζομένου, τοῦ 
δ᾽ 1 οἰκοδεσπότου τῶν φωτῶν ἐν τοῖς τῶν κακο- 
ποιῶν τόποις κατειλημμένου, τὸ γεννώμενον οὐ 
/ > , A \@ A “λ ~ ~ 2 
τραφήσεται, map’ αὐτὰ δὲ ἕξει TO τέλος τῆς ζωῆς. 
ἐὰν δὲ μὴ κατ᾽ ἰσοσκελείαν μὲν τοῦτο συμβαίνῃ 
ἀλλ᾽ ἐγγὺς ἐπαναφέρωνται τοῖς τῶν φωτῶν τόποις 
= Ξ > , 

αἱ τῶν κακοποιῶν βολαί, δύο δ᾽ ὦσιν of κακοποιοΐί, 
καὶ ἤτοι τὸ ἕτερον τῶν φωτῶν ἢ καὶ ἀμφότερα 
βλάπτοντες ἢ κατ᾽ ἐπαναφορὰν ἢ κατὰ διάμετρον 
ἢ ἐν μέρει τὸ ἕτερον ὁ ἕτερος ἢ ὁ μὲν ἕτερος δια- 
μετρῶν ὁ δὲ ἕτερος ἐπαναφερόμενος, καὶ οὕτως 
» “- ~ ‘ 
axpova γίνεται, τοῦ πλήθους τῶν κακώσεων ἀφανί- 
~ ~ ~ > 

Covtos τὸ ἐκ τοῦ διαστήματος τῆς ἐπαναφορᾶς εἰς 
9. A ~ ~ / ͵7ὔ A 
ἐπιμονὴν τῆς ζωῆς φιλάνθρωπον. βλάπτει δὲ 
ἐξαιρέτως κατὰ μὲν τὰς ἐπαναφορὰς ἥλιον μὲν ὁ 
~ mM ’ὔ \ ¢ ~ / A A A 
τοῦ “Apews, σελήνην δὲ ὁ τοῦ Κρόνου, κατὰ δὲ τὰς 
διαμετρήσεις ἢ καθυπερτερήσεις ἀνάπαλιν ἥλιον 
\ ¢ ~ ’ὔ 4 A ε a~ M A 
μὲν ὁ τοῦ Κρόνου, σελήνην δὲ 6 τοῦ “Apews, Kat 
126 μάλιστα ἐὰν κατάσχωσι τοπικῶς ἤτοι 3 τὰ φῶτα 


1 δ᾽ om. NCam. * τῆς ζωῆς om. NCam. 
3 τοι VD, cf. Proc. ; τῶν MNAECam. ; ς΄ L. 


1 κατ᾽ ἰσοσκελείαν, literally, “‘ by equality of leg.” 
The anonymous commentator does not explain this ex- 
pression. Cardanus (pp. 264-265) understands it to mean 
that the two are exactly in opposition not only in longitude 
(‘in degrees ’’), but also in latitude (as when the moon is 
in 10° of Aries, 3° north latitude, and Saturn or Mars in 
10° of Libra, 3° south latitude). 

2The planet which governs the sign in which the 
luminaries are found. 


266 


TETRABIBLOS III. 9 


opposition, both in degrees and with equality of 
distance,! while no beneficent planet bears any aspect, 
and if the lord of the luminaries” is found in the 
places of the maleficent planets, the child that is 
born will not be reared, but will at once come to its 
end. But if this comes about without the equality 
of distance, but the shafts of the maleficent planets 
succeed closely upon the places of the luminaries, 
and there are two maleficent planets, and if they 
afflict > either one or both of the luminaries either 
by succeeding them or by opposition, or if one afflicts 
one luminary and the other the other in turn, or if 
one afflicts by opposition and the other by succeed- 
ing the luminary, in this way too children are born 
that do not live; for the number of afflictions dispels 
all that is favourable to length of life because of the 
distance of the maleficent planet through its succes- 
sion. Mars especially afflicts the sun by succeeding 
it, and Saturn the moon ; but conversely in opposition 
or in superior position Saturn afflicts the sun and Mars 
the moon, most of all if they occupy as rulers the 


3 Affliction, which in general is damage done by a 
maleficent planet to a beneficent one, is defined by the 
astrologer Antiochus (CCAG, viii. 3, p. 106, 34-38) as 
existing ““when (sc. a beneficent planet) is smitten by 
the rays of maleficent planets, or is surrounded, or is in 
application with one of them, or in glutinatio (κόλλησις), 
or is governed by one of them, when the maleficent planet 
is in the inactive (non-signifying, ἀχρημάτιστοι) places. 
These are the sixth, third, second, eighth, and twelfth 
from the horoscope.’ Ptolemy says little about the 
“places ’’ (less correctly ‘‘ houses ’’) of a geniture; they 
are twelfth parts of the zodiacal circle marked off from the 
horoscope, each with some special significance ; cf. Boll- 
Bezold-Gundel, pp. 62-63. 


267 


PTOLEMY 


ἢ" τὸν ὡροσκόπον οἰκοδεσποτήσαντες.Σ ἐὰν δὲ 
δύο τυγχάνωσι διαμετρήσεις ἐπὶ κέντρων ὄντων 
τῶν φωτῶν καὶ τῶν κακοποιῶν κατ᾽ ἰσοσκελείαν, 
τότε καὶ νεκρὰ ἢ ἡμιθανῆ τίκτεται τὰ βρέφη. 
τούτων δὲ οὕτως ἐχόντων, ἐὰν μὲν ἀπόρροιαν ἀπό 
τινος τῶν ἀγαθοποιῶν ἔχοντα τὰ φῶτα τυγχάνῃ 3 
ἢ καὶ ἄλλως αὐτοῖς ἢ συνεσχηματισμένα, ἐν τοῖς 
προηγουμένοις αὐτῶν ἃ μέρεσι μέντοιγε τὰς ἀκτῖνας 
αὐτῶν ἐπιφερόντων, ἐπιζήσεται τὸ τεχθὲν ἄχρι 
τοῦ μεταξὺ τῆς τε ἀφέσεως καὶ τῶν ἐγγυτέρων ὃ 
τῶν κακοποιῶν ἀκτίνων ἀριθμοῦ, τῶν μοιρῶν τοὺς 
ἴσους μῆνας 7) ἡμέρας ἢ καὶ ὥρας πρὸς τὸ μέγεθος 
τῆς κακώσεως καὶ τὴν δύναμιν τῶν τὸ αἴτιον 
ποιούντων. ἐὰν δὲ at τῶν κακοποιῶν ἀκτῖνες εἰς 
τὰ προηγούμενα φέρωνται τῶν φωτῶν, αἱ δὲ τῶν 
ἀγαθοποιῶν εἰς τὰ ἑπόμενα, τὸ γεννώμενον ἐκτεθὲν 
ἀναληφθήσεται καὶ ζήσεται. καὶ πάλιν ἐὰν μὲν οἱ 
συσχηματισθέντες ἀγαθοποιοὶ καθυπερτερηθῶσιν 
ὑπὸ τῶν κακοποιῶν εἰς κάκωσιν καὶ ὑποταγήν, ἐὰν δὲ 
καὶ καθυπερτερήσωσιν εἰς ὑποβολὴν ἁλλων γονέων. 
εἰ δὲ καὶ τῶν ἀγαθοποιῶν τις ὁ ἀνατολὴν ἢ τὴν 
συναφὴν ποιοῖτο τῇ σελήνῃ, τῶν δὲ κακοποιῶν ὑπὸ 
δύσιν τις εἴη, ὑπ᾽ αὐτῶν τῶν γονέων ἀναληφθήσεται. 
κατὰ τὸν αὐτὸν δὲ τὸν τρόπον 7 καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν πλειστο- 


17 VLDProc.; καὶ MNAECam. 
5 οἰκοδεσποτήσαντες VLD Proc., τῶν MNAECam. 


3 τυγχάνῃ libri, -o. Cam. 4 ἑαυτῶν VLD. 
5 τῶν ἐγγυτέρων VLDProc. ; τοῦ ἐγγυτέρω MNACam. ; τῶν 
γγυτέρ y 
ἐγγυτέρω E. 


ὁ Post τις add. ἢ τήν MNECam.Proc. 
7 κατὰ δὲ αὐτὸν τὸν τρόπον Cam. 


268 





TETRABIBLOS III. 9 


places of the luminaries or of the horoscope. But 
if there chance to be two oppositions, when the 
luminaries are at the angles and the maleficent 
planets are in an isosceles configuration, then the 
infants are born dead or half-dead. And in such 
circumstances, if the luminaries should chance to be 
removing from conjunction with one of the benefi- 
cent planets, or are in some other aspect to them, 
but nevertheless cast their rays in the parts that 
precede them, the child that is born will live a number 
of months or days, or even hours, equal to the 
number of degrees between the prorogator ! and the 
nearest rays of the maleficent planets, in proportion 
to the greatness of the affliction and the power of 
the planets ruling the cause. But if the rays of the 
maleficent planets fall before the luminaries, and 
those of the beneficent behind them, the child that has 
been exposed will be taken up and will live. And 
again, if the maleficent planets overcome ” the bene- 
ficent ones that bear an aspect upon the geniture, 
they will live to affliction and subjection ; but if the 
beneficent pianets overcome, they will live but as sup 
posititious children of other parents ; and if one of the 
beneficent planets should either be rising or apply- 
ing 3 to the moon, while one of the maleficent planets 
is setting, they will be reared by their own parents. 
And the same methods of judgement are to be used 

ΤᾺ luminary, planet, or portion of the zodiac which 
determines the length of life or the duration of some event. 
The prorogators are discussed in the next chapter. 

2 See on iil. 4 above (p. 245, n. 1). 8 See i. 24. 


269 


PTOLEMY 


127 γονούντων. ἐὰν μὲν ὑπὸ δύσιν τις ἢ τῶν κατὰ 
δύο ἢ καὶ πλείους συνεσχηματισμένων ἀστέρων, 
ἡμιθανές τι! ἢ σάρκωμα καὶ ἀτελὲς τὸ γεννώμενον 
ἀποτεχθήσεται. ἐὰν δὲ ὑπὸ κακοποιῶν καθυπερ- 
τερῆται, ἄτροφον ἢ ἄχρονον ἔσται τὸ ὑπὸ τῆς κατ᾽ 
αὐτὸν αἰτίας συγγεγενημένον. 


<> Περὶ χρόνων ζωῆς 
~ \ a 
Τῶν δὲ peta τὴν γένεσιν συμπτωμάτων ἡγεῖται 
μὲν ὁ περὶ χρόνων ζωῆς λόγος, ἐπειδήπερ κατὰ 
τὸν ἀρχαῖον γέλοιόν ἐστι τὰ καθ᾽ ἕκαστα τῶν 
> / > / “ > -« > ~ 
ἀποτελουμένων ἐφαρμόζειν τῷ μηδ᾽ ὅλως ἐκ τῆς 
τῶν βιωσίμων ἐτῶν ὑποστάσεως ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀπο- 
τελεστικοὺς αὐτῶν χρόνους ἥξοντι. θεωρεῖται δὲ 
- 2 > ¢ AO δ᾽ > Ἂ λ / LAN’ > ‘ 
οὗτος 5 οὐχ ἁπλῶς οὐδ᾽ ἀπολελυμένως, ἀλλ᾽ ἀπὸ 
τῆς τῶν κυριωτάτων τόπων ἐπικρατήσεως πολυ- 
an / 
μερῶς λαμβανόμενος. ἔστι δ᾽ 6 μάλιστά τε συμ- 
φωνῶν ἡμῖν καὶ ἄλλως ἐχόμενος φύσεως τρόπος 
τοιοῦτος. ἤρτηται μὲν γὰρ τὸ πᾶν ἔκ τε τῆς τῶν 
3 ~ / 3 7] \ > > ~ ~ 
ἀφετικῶν toTwv? διαλήψεως καὶ ἐξ αὐτῶν τῶν 
τῆς ἀφέσεως ἐπικρατούντων καὶ ἔτι ἐκ τῆς τῶν 
ἀναιρετικῶν τόπων ἢ ἀστέρων. διακρίνεται δὲ 
τούτων ἕκαστον οὕτως. 


τι VPLD; ἐστιν MNAECam. 

2 οὗτος ΜΝΑΕΡτοο. ; οὕτως VPLD, om. Cam. 

8 τόπων PLAEProc., om. VMNDCam. 

4 αὐτῶν τῶν τῆς VPLD; τῶν τῆς αὐτῆς MNAECam. 


1 Perhaps a reference to Petosiris. The passage is in- 
cluded by E. Riess among the fragments of Nechepso and 
Petosiris, Philologus, Supplementband 6, p. 358. 

2 Aphetic is also used. Hyleg is the Arabic term. 


270 


TETRABIBLOS IIT. 9-10 


also in cases of multiple births. But if one of the 
planets that two by two or in larger groups bear an 
aspect to the geniture is at setting, the child will 
be born half-dead, or a mere lump of flesh, and im- 
perfect. But if the maleficent planets overcome 
them, the infant born subject to this influence will 
not be reared or will not survive. 


10. Of Length of Life. 

The consideration of the length of life takes the 
leading place among inquiries about events following 
birth, for, as the ancient! says, it is ridiculous to 
attach particular predictions to one who, by the 
constitution of the years of his life, will never attain 
at all to the time of the predicted events. This doc- 
trine is no simple matter, nor unrelated to others, but 
in complex fashion derived from the domination of 
the places of greatest authority. The method most 
pleasing to us and, besides, in harmony with nature 
is the following. For it depends entirely upon the 
determination of the prorogative” places and the stars 
that rule the prorogation, and upon the determination 
of the destructive ® places or stars.4 Each of these is 
determined in the following fashion : 

3 Or anaeretic. 

4 Bouché-Leclereq’s (p. 411) summary of Ptolemy’s 
system of prorogations is helpful: ‘‘ His theory rests es- 
sentially upon the likening of the zodiac to a wheel upon 
which the life of the individuals is cast with a greater or 
less force from a certain place of departure (τόπος ἀφετικός) 
and finds itself arrested, or in danger of being arrested, by 
barriers or destructive places (τόποι ἀναιρετικοί), without 
being able in any case to go beyond a quarter of the circle. 
The number of degrees traversed, converted into degrees 
of right ascension, gives the number of the years of life.” 


271 


PTOLEMY 


Torous! μὲν πρῶτον ἡγητέον ἀφετικοὺς ἐν οἷς 

εἶναι δεῖ πάντως τὸν μέλλοντα τὴν κυρίαν τῆς 
ι98 ἀφέσεως λαμβάνειν, τό τε περὶ τὸν ὡροσκόπον 
δωδεκατημόριον ἀπὸ πέντε μοιρῶν τῶν προανα- 
φερομένων αὐτοῦ τοῦ ὁρίζοντος μέχρι τῶν λοιπῶν 
καὶ ἐπαναφερομένων εἴκοσι πέντε μοιρῶν, καὶ τὰς 
ταύταις ταῖς λ΄ μοίραις δεξιὰς ἐξαγώνους τε τοῦ 
ἀγαθοῦ δαίμονος, καὶ τετραγώνους τοῦ ὑπὲρ γῆν 
μεσουρανήματος, καὶ τριγώνους τοῦ καλουμένου 
θεοῦ, καὶ διαμέτρους τοῦ δύνοντος - προκρινομένων 
καὶ ἐν τούτοις εἰς δύναμιν ἐπικρατήσεως πρῶ- 

5. κατὰ τὸ ὑπὲρ γῆν μεσουράνημα 
ἑστώτων,3 εἶτα τῶν κατὰ τὴν ἀνατολήν, εἶτα τῶν 


\ A 
TOV μὲν TWV 


κατὰ τὴν ἐπαναφορὰν τοῦ μεσουρανήματος, εἶτα 
τῶν κατὰ τὸ δύνον, εἶτα τῶν κατὰ τὸ προηγούμενον 
τοῦ μεσουρανήματος. τό τε γὰρ ὑπὸ γῆν πᾶν 
εἰκότως ἀθετητέον πρὸς τὴν τηλικαύτην κυρίαν, 
πλὴν μόνον τῶν παρ᾽ αὐτὴν τὴν ἀναφορὰν εἰς φῶς 
ἐρχομένων, τοῦ τε ὑπὲρ γῆν οὔτε τὸ ἀσύνδετον 


τῷ ἀνατέλλοντι δωδεκατημόριον ἁρμόζει παρα- 


1 Hie titulum habent Περὶ τόπων ἀφετικῶν NCam. ; om. 
VPLMADFEProe. 

27@v AE, om. PL; τῆς NCam., τὸ VMD. 

3 ἑστώτων VPLD, om. MNAECam. 

46 λέγεται τόπος ἀργός add. mg. N et Cam., om. libri omnes, 


1 Sc. degrees. 
? Though he pays little attention to the system of 
“places ’’ or “ houses ’’? so much used by the astrologers in 


272 


TETRABIBLOS ΠῚ. 10 


In the first place we must consider those places 
prorogative in which by all means the planet must be ~ 
that is to receive the lordship of the prorogation ; 
namely, the twelfth part of the zodiac surrounding 
the horoscope, from 5° above the actual horizon 
up to the 25° that remains, which is rising in suc- 
cession to the horizon; the part sextile dexter to 
these thirty degrees, called the House of the Good 
Daemon; the part in quartile, the mid-heaven ; 
the part in trine, called the House of the God; 
and the part opposite, the Occident. Among these 
there are to be preferred, with reference to power 
of domination, first those! which are in the mid- 
heaven, then those in the orient, then those in the 
sign succedent to the mid-heaven, then those in 
the occident,” then those in the sign rising before 
mid-heaven; for the whole region below the earth 
must, as is reasonable, be disregarded when a 
domination of such importance is concerned, except 
only those parts which in the ascendant sign itself 
are coming into the light. Of the part above the 
earth it is not fitting to consider either the sign that 


the actual casting of nativities, Ptolemy here deals with 
four besides the horoscope itself. Their usual names 
are: I, Horoscope, wpooxdmos; II, Gate of Hades, 
“Αιδου πύλη ; III, Goddess, Θεά (i.e. moon); IV, lower 
mid-heaven, ὑπογεῖον; V, Good Fortune, ἀγαθὴ τύχη ; 
VI, Bad Fortune, κακὴ τύχη; VII, Occident, δύσις ; 
VIII, Beginning of Death, ἀρχὴ θανάτου ; IX, God, Θεός 
(1.6. sun); X, mid-heaven, μεσουράνημα; XI, Good Dae- 
mon, ἀγαθὸς δαίμων; XII, Bad Daemon, κακὸς δαίμων. 
Cf. P. Mich. 149, col. ix, 13-19, where slightly different 
names are given. In this passage Ptolemy has mentioned 
numbers I, XI, X, IX, VII. 


273 


PTOLEMY 


/ ” ‘ A a A ~ 
λαμβάνειν οὔτε τὸ προανατεῖλαν, 6 καὶ καλεῖται 
κακοῦ δαίμονος, ἐπειδήπερ KaKkot! τὴν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν 
> ~ ~ ~ 
ἀπόρροιαν τῶν ἐν αὐτῷ ἀστέρων μετὰ τοῦ Kal 
3 / - 2 \ σ 3 ͵ ‘ 
ἀποκεκλικέναι * Godot τε καὶ ὥσπερ ἀφανίζει τὸ 

> ~ ~ ~ ~ 
ἀναθυμιώμενον ἐκ τῶν τῆς γῆς ὑγρῶν παχὺ καὶ 
ἀχλυῶδες παρ᾽ ὃ καὶ τοῖς χρώμασι καὶ τοῖς μεγέθεσιν 
οὐ κατὰ φύσιν ἔχοντες φαίνονται.3 
‘ \ ~ / > / ΄ / 
Μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα πάλιν ἀφέτας παραληπτέον τούς 
τε κυριωτάτους δ΄ τόπους ἥλιον, σελήνην, ὧρο- 


ς ΄, “ /, \ \ , > 2 
129 σκόπον, κλῆρον τύχης και τους τούτων οἰκοδεσποτή- 


σαντας." 

Κλῆρον μέντοι τύχης τὸν συναγόμενον ἀπὸ τοῦ 
ἀριθμοῦ πάντοτε καὶ νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας τοῦ τε ἀπὸ 
« , > \ Ἂ / \ Aa, ‘ 5 > A ~ 
ἡλίου ἐπὶ σελήνην, καὶ τὰ ἴσα φέροντος ὃ ἀπὸ τοῦ 
ε / \ \ ¢ , ~ bu 6 σ a“ 
ὡροσκόπου κατὰ τὰ ἑπόμενα TOV ζῳδίων," ἵνα ὃν 

-“ A 
ἔχει λόγον καὶ σχηματισμὸν ὁ ἥλιος πρὸς Tov 


1 xaxot V; κακοὶ D; cf. βλάπτει Proc.; ὑπερκακῆ (= ἐπει- 
δήπερ Kaxot) P; 3 ὅπερ κἀκεῖ L; om. MNAECam. 

ὅτε VD; μὲν PL; om. MNAECam. 

3 κατὰ es ἔχοντες φαίνονται libri; καταφαίνονται Cam. 

4Post hoc verbum inser. titulum Περὶ τοῦ κλήρου τῆς 
τύχης NACam. ; om. libri alii. 

" φέροντος VPLD ; “ἀφαιροῦντες MNAECam.; καὶ τὰ ἴσα 
ἔχοντος ἀπὸ τοῦ ιβ΄ κατὰ τὰ ἑπόμενα τῶν ζῳδίων. Proc. 

6 Hic add. NACam: ὅπου δ᾽ ἂν ἐκπέσῃ ὁ ἀριθμὸς ἐκείνην 
τὴν μοῖραν τοῦ δωδεκατημορίου καὶ τὸν τόπον φαμὲν ἐπέχειν 
τὸν κλῆρον τῆς τύχης. 


1The eighth house. “Sign,” of course, in this passage 
means not the fixed signs of the zodiac, but the places or 
houses of the nativity. One MS. adds here, ‘“‘ which is 


274 


TETRABIBLOS IIT. 10 


is disjunct from the ascendant,! nor that which rose 
before it, called the House of the Evil Daemon,? 
because it injures the emanation from the stars in it 
to the earth and is also declining, and the thick, 
misty exhalation from the moisture of the earth 
creates such a turbidity and, as it were, obscurity, 
that the stars do not appear in either their true 
colours or magnitudes. 

After this again we must take as prorogatives the 
four regions of greatest authority, sun, moon, horo- 
scope, the Lot of Fortune, and the rulers of these 
regions. 

Take as the Lot of Fortune * always the amount 
of the number of degrees, both by night and by day, 
which is the distance from the sun to the moon, 
and which extends to an equal distance from the 
horoscope in the order of the following signs,* in 
order that, whatever relation and aspect the sun 


called the Inactive Place,” probably a scholion which has 
entered the text. See the critical note. 

2 The twelfth house. 

3 The directions given amount to this: Take the angular 
distance from sun to moon in the order of the following 
signs, ὅ.6. in the direction in which the zodiac is graduated ; 
then lay out the same distance, in the same sense, from 
the horoscope. The point reached is the Lot of Fortune, 
and it will be located with respect to the moon as the horo- 
scope is with respect to the sun; hence it can be called 
a “lunar horoscope.’’ With the older MSS. and Proclus 
we read φέροντος instead of ἀφαιροῦντες in this passage. 
On the various accounts of the Lot of Fortune see Bouché- 
Leclercq, pp. 289-296 (who, however, read ἀφαιροῦντες here). 

‘Here two MSS. and Camerarius (see the critical note) 
add: “‘and wherever the number falls, we may say that 
the Lot of Fortune falls upon that degree of the sign and 
occupies that place.” 


275 


PTOLEMY 


€ , 1 A ” cy ae? ΄ \ \ 
ὠροσκοπον TOUTOV €X) και ἢ σελήνη προς TOV 


κλῆρον τῆς τύχης καὶ ἢ ὥσπερ σεληνιακὸς ὥρο- 
σκόπος." 

1380 Προκριτέον δὲ καὶ ἐκ ὃ τούτων ἡμέρας μὲν 
πρῶτον τὸν ἥλιον. ἐάνπερ ἢ ἐν τοῖς ἀφετικοῖς 
τόποις - εἰ δὲ μὴ, «Nv σελήνην - εἰ δὲ μή, τὸν 
πλείονας ἔχοντα λόγους οἰκοδεσποτίας πρός τε τὸν 
ἥλιον καὶ τὴν προγενομένην σύνοδον καὶ πρὸς ὃ 
τὸν ὡροσκόπον, τουτέστιν ὅταν τῶν" οἰκοδεσποτικῶν 
τρόπων ε΄ ὄντων τρεῖς ἔχῃ πρὸς ἕνα ἢ καὶ πλείους 
τῶν εἰρημένων - εἰ δὲ μή, τελευταῖον τὸν wpo- 
σκόπον. νυκτὸς δὲ πρῶτον τὴν σελήνην, εἶτα τὸν 


1 ὡροσκόπον VDProc.; ἀνατολικὸν ὁρίζοντα PLMNECam. ; 
τὴν ὡροσκοποῦσαν μοῖραν τοῦ ἀνατέλλοντος ιβ΄ τημορίου A. 

2 Hic add. NACam.: πλὴν ὀφείλομεν ὁρᾶν ποῖον τῶν φωτῶν 
ἐπὶ τὰ ἑπόμενα εὑρίσκεται τοῦ ἑτέρου. εἰ μὲν γὰρ ἡ σελήνη ὡς πρὸς 
τὰ ἑπόμενα μᾶλλον εὑρίσκεται τοῦ ἡλίου, τὸν ἐκβαλλόμενον ἀπὸ τοῦ 
ὡροσκόπου ἀριθμὸν ἐπὶ τὸν κλῆρον τῆς τύχης ὡς πρὸς τὰ ἑπόμενα 
τῶν ζῳδίων δεῖ ἡμᾶς τοῦτον διεκβάλλειν: εἰ δὲ ὡς πρὸς τὰ προηγού- 
μενα τοῦ ἡλίου μᾶλλον εὑρίσκεται ἡ σελήνη, τὸν αὐτὸν ἀριθμὸν ὡς 
πρὸς τὰ προηγούμενα τοῦ ὡροσκόπου διεκβάλλειν. Om. VPLMDE 
Proc. Deinde pergunt VPLMNDCam. : tows δὲ αὐτὸ τοῦτο 
θέλει, καὶ δύναται παρὰ τῷ συγγραφεῖ τὸ τοῖς νυκτὸς γεννωμένοις 
ἀπὸ σελήνης ἐ ἐπὶ ἥλιον ἀριθμεῖν καὶ ἀνάπαλιν ἀπὸ τοῦ ὡροσκόπου, 
τουτέστιν εἰς τὰ προηγούμενα, διεκβάλλειν. καὶ οὕτω γὰρ κἀκεῖνος 
ὁ αὐτὸς τόπος τοῦ κλήρου καὶ ὁ αὐτὸς τοῦ συσχηματισμοῦ λόγος 
ἐκβήσεται. Om. ἴσως δὲ. διεκβάλλειν A, ἴσως δὲ... 
ἐκβήσεται E; in mg, N seriptum est σχόλιον; habent ἐστί 
τε pro θέλει ‘MNCam. , εὑρεθήσεται pro ἐκβήσεται MNACam. 
Titulum capitis Πόσοι ἀφέται post haee add. NCam., om, 
VPLMADE. 

3 καὶ ἐκ VPLD, cf. Proc.; om. MNAECam. 

47o0v VD; τὴν PL, ef. Proc. ; τοὺς MNAECam. 

5 πρὸς om. NDCam. ὁ τῶν om. MNECam. 


276 


TETRABIBLOS IIT. 10 


bears to the horoscope, the moon also may bear to 
the Lot of Fortune, and that it may be as it were a 
lunar horoscope.! 

Of these,” by day we must give first place to the 
sun, if it is in the prorogative places; if not, to the 
moon; and if the moon is not so placed, to the 
planet 35 that has most relations of domination to the 
sun, to the preceding conjunction, and to the horo- 
scope; that is, when, of the five methods of domi- 
nation 4 that exist, it has three to one, or even more; 
but if this cannot be, then finally we give preference 
to the horoscope. By night prefer the moon first, 


1Camerarius and certain MSS. add here: ‘‘ We ought, 
however, to observe which of the luminaries is found 
following the other. For if the moon is found following 
the sun, we must lay out the number which intervenes 
between the horoscope and the Lot of Fortune in the 
order of following signs; but if the moon is found preced- 
ing the sun, we must set forth this same number from the 
horoscope in the order of leading signs. Perhaps this is 
what he means, and the writer’s intention is to count from 
moon to sun in the case of those born at night, and to 
make the interval in the other direction from the horo- 
scope, that is in the order of leading signs; for thus it will 
turn out to be the same place for the Lot of Fortune and 
the same relation of aspect which he mentions.’’ The 
first part of this passage can hardly be genuine because it 
is at variance with the general directions just given by 
Ptolemy; the introductory phrase of the last part clearly 
shows that it originated as a scholion. 

53.7.6. sun, moon, horoscope, Lot of Fortune, and the 
rulers (see above), 

$In an aphetic (prorogative) place, says Cardanus 
(p. 469). 

4 See iii. 2 (p. 233). 


277 


PTOLEMY 


SA = A λ / ” 1 Xr / > 
ἥλιον, εἶτα τὸν πλείονας ἔχοντα ' λόγους οἰκο- 
δεσποτίας πρός τε τὴν σελήνην καὶ πρὸς τὴν προ- 
γενομένην πανσέληνον καὶ τὸν κλῆρον τῆς τύχης ᾿ εἰ 
δὲ μή, τελευταῖον, συνοδικῆς μὲν οὔσης τῆς προ- 
γενομένης συζυγίας, τὸν ὡροσκόπον, πανσεληνιακῆς 
ὃ \ \ An tol / 2 > ὃ A \ > / \ 
€ τὸν κλῆρον τῆς τύχης." εἰ δὲ Kal ἀμφότερα τὰ 
φῶτα ἢ καὶ ὁ τῆς οἰκείας αἱρέσεως οἰκοδεσπότης 
> a > - Ss /, ‘ > 3 
ἐν τοῖς ἀφετικοῖς εἶεν τόποις, TOV EV 
4 


~ / 
τῷ κυριωτέρῳ 
/ ~ ~ ᾿ξ, / A / 
τόπῳ τῶν φωτῶν παραληπτέον" τότε δὲ μόνον 
t 
5 ͵ \ 
τὸν οἰκοδεσπότην ἀμφοτέρων προκριτέον, ὅταν καὶ 
> / \ \ > / 
κυριώτερον ἐπέχῃ τόπον Kal πρὸς ἀμφοτέρας τὰς 
« / > ὃ / λ / ” 5 
αἱρέσεις οἰκοδεσποτίας λόγον ἔχῃ. 
~ Leek / ,ὔ Μ \ ~ > / 
Τοῦ δὲ ἀφέτου διακριθέντος, ἔτι καὶ τῶν ἀφέσεων 
/ 
131 δύο τρόπους παραληπτέον, τόν τε εἰς τὰ ἑπόμενα 
τῶν ζῳδίων μόνον ὑπὸ τὴν καλουμένην a βολί 
i μ τὴν καλουμένην ἀκτινοβολίαν, 
1 τὸν ... €xovta VP (ἔχωντα) LD; cf. Proc.; ποὺς ... 
ἔχοντας MNAECam. 
2Hic add. MNECam.: εἰ δὲ μή, τελευταῖον ὁ ὡροσκόπος 
ἀφίησι τοὺς χρόνους ; om. VPLADProc. 
8 τὸν ἐν VMNDH, τὸν Ῥ, τῶν L, τῶν ἐν A, τὸ μὲν Cam. 
4 τόπῳ VMADEProc., om. PL, τρόπῳ NCam. 


5Post ἔχῃ add. capitis titulum, [Joao τρόποι ἀφέσεως 
NCam.; om. VPLMADEProc. 





“But otherwise finally the horoscope is the proro- 
gator” is added here in certain MSS. 

21... a planet which may be the prorogator. The 
“proper sect ”’ will be diurnal in diurnal genitures, noc- 
turnal in nocturnal. 


278 


TETRABIBLOS IIT. 10 


next the sun, next the planets having the greater 
number of relations of domination to the moon, to 
the preceding full moon, and to the Lot of Fortune ; 
otherwise, finally, if the preceding syzygy was a new 
moon, the horoscope, but if it was a full moon the 
Lot of Fortune.! But if both the luminaries or the 
ruler of the proper sect 5 should be in the prorogative 
places, we must take the one of the luminaries that 
is in the place of greatest authority. And we 
should prefer the ruling planet to both of the 
luminaries only when it both occupies a position of 
greater authority and bears a relation of domination 
to both the sects. 

When the prorogator has been distinguished, we 
must still further adopt two methods of prorogation.® 
The one, that which follows the order of the following 
signs, must be used only in the case of what is called 


3 Bouché-Leclereq’s (pp. 418-419) exposition may be 
quoted: ‘‘The prorogator once determined ... it is 
necessary to determine the sense in which it launches the 
life from its prorogative place; the direct sense, that is, 
in accordance with the proper movement of the planets, 
when it follows the series of [following] signs . . .; retro- 
grade . . . when it follows the diurnal movement... . 
At all events there is in both cases unity of measurement, 
the diurnal movement. In the sense here called direct the 
diurnal movement brings the anaeretic planet or ‘ following 
place ’ to meet the * preceding place ’ where the prorogator 
islodged. In the contrary sense it is the prorogator which 
is carried to the anaeretic place, which is always the oc- 
cident. By either manner the length of life was equal to 
the number of degrees of right ascension between the 
prorogative place and the anaeretic place, at the rate of 
one year to a degree.’’ He proceeds to point out that it 
therefore becomes necessary to convert degrees of the zodiac 
into degrees of right ascension measured on the equator. 


279 


PTOLEMY 


᾽ A > A ΄ 
ὅταν ἐν τοῖς ἀπηλιωτικοῖς τόποις, τουτέστι τοῖς 
3 ~ , > 
ἀπὸ τοῦ μεσουρανήματος ἐπὶ τὸν ὡροσκόπον, ἢ ὁ 
5 / \ \ > vé 4 AY ¢ / > \ \ 
ἀφέτης * Kal τὸν οὐ μόνον εἰς τὰ ἑπόμενα ἀλλὰ καὶ 
tov! εἰς τὰ προηγούμενα κατὰ τὴν λεγομένην 
ὡριμαίαν, ὅταν ἐν τοῖς ἀποκεκλικόσι τοῦ μεσου- 
ρανήματος τόποις ἢ ὁ ἀφέτης. 
Τούτων δὲ οὕτως ἐχόντων ἀναιρετικαὶ γίνονται 
μοῖραι κατὰ μὲν τὴν εἰς τὰ προηγούμενα τῶν 
δί A Ἐ ~ ὃ “ Chats / ὃ \ 
ζῳδίων ἄφεσιν ἡ τοῦ δυτικοῦ ὁρίζοντος μόνη διὰ 
τὸ ἀφανίζειν τὸν κύριον τῆς ζωῆς - αἱ δὲ τῶν 
3 3 
οὕτως ὑπαντώντων ἢ μαρτυρούντων ἀστέρων ἀφαι- 
ροῦσι μόνον καὶ προστιθέασιν ἔτη τοῖς " μέχρι τῆς 
κατοδύσεως τοῦ ἀφέτου συναγομένοις καὶ οὐκ 
ἀναιροῦσι διὰ τὸ μὴ αὐτοὺς ἐπιφέρεσθαι τῷ 
~ > a A A 
ἀφετικῷ τόπῳ GAN ἐκεῖνον τοῖς αὐτῶν: Kat 
/ A € > Ψ 3 ~ \ ε 
προστιθέασι μὲν οἱ ἀγαθοποιοί, ἀφαιροῦσι δὲ ot 
κακοποιοί, τοῦ ᾿ Ἑρμοῦ 3 πάλιν ὁποτέροις ἂν αὐτῶν 
΄- > A ~ 
συσχηματισθῇ προστιθεμένου. ὁ δὲ ἀριθμὸς τῆς 
7 a a > 
προσθέσεως ἢ ἀφαιρέσεως θεωρεῖται dia τῆς καθ 
ἕκαστον μοιροθεσίας - ὅσοι γὰρ ἂν ὦσιν ὡριαῖοι 
a“ , « 
χρόνοι τῆς ἑκάστου μοίρας, ἡμέρας μὲν οὔσης οἱ 


1 τὸν VAD, om. PLMNECam. 
2 Post τοῖς add. ὑπὸ τοῦ ἀφέτου συναγομένοις MNAE; haec 
See et συναγομένοις post ἀφέτου inser. VPLD. 
3 τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ VD; τοῦ δὲ ‘E. PL; τούτου ‘E. A; ὁ δὲ τοῦ ‘E. 
MNECam. 
4 προστιθεμένου VP (-τηθ-) LMADE, -os NCam. 





1On projection of rays (ἀκτινοβολία), see Bouché- 
Leclereq, pp. 247-250. The planets, by their rotation 
in their orbits moving, as the astrologers said, ‘“ from 


230 


TETRABIBLOS III. 10 


the projection of rays,! when the prorogator is in the 
orient, that is, between mid-heaven and the horo- 
scope. We must use not only the method that 
follows the order of following signs, but also that 
which follows the order of leading signs, in the so- 
called Jorimaea, when the prorogator is in places 
that decline from mid-heaven.* 

This being the case, the destructive degrees in the 
prorogation that follows the order of leading signs 
are only the degree of the western horizon, because it 
causes the lord of life 3 to vanish; and the degrees 
of the planets that thus approach or bear witness ἢ 
merely take away and add years to the sum of those 
as far as the setting of the prorogator, and they do 
not destroy because they do not move toward the 
prorogative place, but it moves toward them.® The 
beneficent stars add and the maleficent subtract. 
Mercury, again, is reckoned with the group to which 
he bears an aspect. The number of the addition or 
subtraction is calculated by means of the location in 
degrees in each case. For the entire number of years 
is the same as the number of hourly periods of each 


3) (ὡς 


right to left,’’ “‘ in the order of the following signs, re- 
gard’’ those that precede them and “cast rays,’ like 
tnissiles, at those that follow them; always, however, if 
the action is to be effective, at the angle of one of the 
recognized aspects (opposition, quartile, etc., these two 
having the greatest offensive force). 

* That is, in such cases either method may be used. 

’ The prorogator, which in this case moves toward the 
anaeretic place. 

‘Planets in aspect to one another are said to “ bear 
witness.” 

5 In this case the rays of the planets are cast away from 
the prorogator ; Bouché-Leclercq, p. 420. 


281 


PTOLEMY 


~ « ΄ \ ς a ~ 
τῆς ἡμέρας, νυκτὸς δὲ οἱ τῆς νυκτός, τοσοῦτον 
~ ~ , “-“ 
πλῆθος ἐτῶν ἔσται τὸ τέλειον, ὅπερ' ἐπὶ" τῆς 
> ~ ~ 
ἀνατολῆς αὐτῶν ὄντων ὃ λογιστέον, εἶτα κατὰ TO 
> / ~ > / « ΄ a n 
132 ἀνάλογον τῆς ἀποχωρήσεως ὑφαιρετέον, ἕως av 
πρὸς τὰς δυσμὰς εἰς τὸ μηδὲν καταντήσῃ. 
\ \ \ > ‘ ¢ / ~ , » 
Κατὰ δὲ τὴν εἰς τὰ ἑπόμενα τῶν ζῳδίων ἄφεσιν 
ἀναιροῦσιν οἵ Te τῶν κακοποιῶν τόποι: Κρόνου καὶ 
"Ἄρεως ἤτοι σωματικῶς ὑπαντώντων ἢ ἀκτῖνα 
ἐπιφερόντων ὁθενδήποτε τετράγωνον ἢ διάμετρον, 
? ~ 
ἐνίοτε δὲ καὶ ἐπὶ, τῶν ἀκουόντων ἢ βλεπόντων 
> > ὃ , « / 5 \ ᾽ \ δὲ ε ~ 
κατ᾽ ἰσοδυναμίαν eEaydvwr,> Kai αὐτὸς δὲ ὁ τῷ 
a ~ ¢ 
ἀφετικῷ τόπῳ τετράγωνος ἀπὸ τῶν ἑπομένων" 
> \ ? ~ 
ἐνίοτε δὲ Kal ἐπὶ τῶν πολυχρονιούντων δωδε- 
‘ > ~ 
κατημορίων κακωθεὶς ὁ é€dywvos,’ ἐπὶ δὲ τῶν 
5A U 8 «ς , λή δὲ 3 , 
ὀλιγοχρονίων ὃ ὁ tplywvos: σελήνης δὲ ἀφιείσης 
καὶ 6 τοῦ ἡλίου τόπος. ἰσχύουσι yap αἱ κατὰ 
τὴν τοιαύτην ἄφεσιν ἀπαντήσεις καὶ ἀναιρεῖν καὶ 
σῴζειν, ἐπειδὴ αὗται τῷ τοῦ ἀφέτου τόπῳ ἐπι- 
φέρονται. οὐ πάντοτε μέντοι τούτους τοὺς τόπους 19 


1 ὅπερ VPLADE; ὅπως MNCam. 

2 ἐπὶ VPLMADEProc. ; ἐκ NCam. 

8 ὅλον post ὄντων add. MNAECam., om. VPLD. 

4 ἐπὶ VPLADProc.; ἀπὸ MNECam. 

5 ἑἐξαγώνων VPDProc., -ον MUNAECam. 

8 ἐπὶ VADEProc. ; ἐπὶ μὲν PL; ἀπὸ MNCam. 

? Post ἐξάγωνος ins. ἀναιρεῖ NACam. ; om. VPLMDEProc. 

8 dAvyoxpoviww WPLDProc., -χρονιούυτων MNAECam. 
πάλιν κακωθεὶς ins. post ὀλιγοχρονων NAECam.; om. 
VPLMDProe. 

® Post τόπος ins. ἀναιρεῖ MNAECam. ; om. VPLDProc. 

10 τούτους τοὺς τόπους VPLDA (add. καὶ A); τοιούτους τοὺς 
τόπους καὶ Μ (ε΄. Proc.); τοιούτοις τοῖς τόποις καὶ ΕἸ, τοὺς 
τοιούτους καὶ Cam. 


282 


TETRABIBLOS III. 10 


degree, hours of the day! when it is day and hours 
of the night when it is night; this must be our 
reckoning when they are in the orient, and subtrac- 
tion must be made in proportion to their departure 
therefrom, until at their setting it becomes zero. 

In the prorogation which follows the order of 
following signs, the places of the maleficent planets, 
Saturn and Mars, destroy, whether they are ap- 
proaching bodily, or project their rays from any 
place whatever in quartile or in opposition, and 
sometimes too in sextile, upon the signs called 
“‘ hearing ” or “ seeing ” * on grounds of equality of 
power; and the sign that is quartile to the pro- 
rogative sign in the order of following signs likewise 
destroys. And sometimes, also, among the signs 
that ascend slowly the sextile aspect destroys, when 
it is afflicted,® and again among the signs that ascend 
rapidly the trine. When the moon is the proro- 
gator, the place of the sun also destroys. For in 
a prorogation of this kind the approaches of planets 
avail both to destroy and to preserve, since these are 


1“ Hours’ were merely twelfth parts of the day (sun- 
rise to sunset) or of the night, and hence ‘‘ hours of the 
day ”’ are not of the same length as “ hours of the night ”’ 
except when day and night are equal. 

Of nis 1δὲ 

3 See above, p. 267, concerning “affliction.” Aries, 
Taurus, Gemini, Pisces, Aquarius, and Capricorn were 
classed as rapidly ascending signs; the others, as slowly 
ascending signs. 


283 


PTOLEMY 


, 3 ἘΞ ε ΄ > \ , “ > 
πάντως ἀναιρεῖν ἡγητέον, ἀλλὰ μόνον ὅταν ὦσι 
κεκακωμένοι. παραποδίζονται γὰρ ἐάν τε εἰς 
ἀγαθοποιοῦ ὅριον ἐμπέσωσιν, ἐάν τέ τις τῶν ἀγαθο- 
ποιῶν ἀκτῖνα συνεπιφέρῃ ᾿ τετράγωνον ἢ τρίγωνον 
ΜΝ al 
ἢ διάμετρον ἤτοι πρὸς αὐτὴν τὴν ἀναιρετικὴν μοῖραν 
\ > ~ τὶ 
ἢ εἰς τὰ ἑπόμενα αὐτῆς, ἐπὶ μὲν Διὸς μὴ ὑπὲρ τὰς 
/ / ee \ > / \ ς \ A I, 
ιβ΄ μοίρας, ἐπὶ δὲ ᾿Αφροδίτης μὴ ὑπὲρ tas η΄" 
ἐάν τε σωμάτων ὄντων ἀμφοτέρων τοῦ τε ἀφιέντος 
καὶ τοῦ ὑπαντῶντος, μὴ ταὐτὸ πλάτος ἢ ἀμφοτέ- 
2 σ΄ ΟΝ ὃ / n“ \ λ / Ss « / 9 
133 ρων. οταν οὖν Ovo ἢ και πλείονα Ἢ EKAaTEPWUEV 
τά τε βοηθοῦντα καὶ τὰ κατὰ τὸ ἐναντίον ἀναι- 
~ / \ > ~ 
ροῦντα, σκεπτέον τὴν ἐπικράτησιν ὁποτέρου τῶν 
> lo / \ ~ ~ 7 
εἰδῶν͵ κατά τε TO πλῆθος τῶν συλλαμβανομένων 
αὐτοῖς καὶ κατὰ τὴν δύναμιν - κατὰ μὲν τὸ πλῆθος, 
ὅταν αἰσθητῶς πλείονα ἢ τὰ ἕτερα τῶν ἑτέρων, 
\ / / a ~ 4 Ἃ 3 
κατὰ δύναμιν δέ, ὅταν τῶν βοηθούντων ἢ ἀναι- 
ρούντων ἀστέρων οἱ μὲν ἐν οἰκείοις ὦσι τόποις, οἱ 
\ / ΖᾺ δ᾽ “ « \ > > λ , « 
δὲ μή μάλιστα δ᾽ ὅταν ot μὲν ὦσιν ἀνατολικοΐί, οἱ 
\ / θ᾽ a \ ~ « \ \ > A 
δὲ δυτικοί. καθ᾽ ὅλου yap τῶν ὑπὸ Tas αὐγὰς 
ὄντων οὐδένα παραληπτέον οὔτε πρὸς ἀναίρεσιν 
,, \ / \ > \ / > / 
οὔτε πρὸς βοήθειαν, πλὴν εἰ μὴ σελήνης ἀφετίδος 
οὔσης αὐτὸς ὁ τοῦ ἡλίου τόπος ἀνέλῃ, συντετραμ- 
1 συνεπιφέρηται ECam. 


5 ἀμφοτέρων libri omnes ; cf. Proc. ; ἑκατέρων Cam. 
3 ἀνέλῃ VMDE, -εἰ PL, -οἱ NCam., ἀναιρεῖ A. 


——— 





1 Τὴ this type of prorogation the diurnal movement of 
the heavens is carrying the planets toward the prorogative 


284 


TETRABIBLOS III. 10 


in the direction of the prorogative place.! However, 
it must not be thought that these places always in- 
evitably destroy, but only when they are afflicted. 
For they are prevented both if they fall within the 
term ° of a beneficent planet and if one of the bene- 
ficent planets projects its ray from quartile, trine, 
or opposition either upon the destructive degree 
itself or upon the parts that follow it, in the case of 
Jupiter not more than 12°, and in that of Venus not 
over 8°; also if, when both the prorogator and the 
approaching planet are present bodily, the latitude 
of both is not the same.* Thus when there are two 
or more on each side, assisting and, vice versa, de- 
stroying, we must consider which of them prevails, 
both by the number of those that co-operate and 
by power; by number when one group is perceptibly 
more numerous than the other, and with regard to 
power when some of the assisting or of the de- 
stroying planets are in their own proper places, 
and some are not, and particularly when some are 
rising and others setting. For in general we must 
not admit any planet, either to destroy or to aid, 
that is under the rays of the sun, except that when 
the moon is prorogator the place of the sun itself is 
destructive, when it is changed about by the presence 


place; cf. Bouché-Leclereq, pp. 420-421 (esp. 421). He 
points out the complexity of the calculation and the 
multitude of choices that lay open to an astrologer in his 
interpretation of a geniture. 

2 See i. 20-21. 

3 This would be true only in cases of the bodily aprroach 
of planets, not in aspect. The notion is that the ray will 
not hit its mark if the two bodies are not in the same 
latitude. 


285 


PTOLEMY 


~ ~ \ A 
μένος μὲν ὑπὸ TOD συνόντος κακοποιοῦ, ὑπὸ μηδενὸς 
δὲ τῶν ἀγαθοποιῶν ἀναλελυμένος ." 

΄- ~ ~ « ~ 
Ὃ μέντοι τῶν ἐτῶν ἀριθμὸς ὃν ποιοῦσιν ot τῶν 
~ > ~ / \ ~ 
μεταξὺ διαστάσεων τοῦ τε ἀφετικοῦ τόπου Kal τοῦ 
5 - ᾿ c ~ 0.» e ” > / 
ἀναιροῦντος οὐχ ἁπλῶς οὐδ᾽ ὡς ἔτυχεν ὀφείλει 
~ ~ / >? 
λαμβάνεσθαι κατὰ τὰς τῶν πολλῶν παραδόσεις ἐκ 
~ ~ / ¢ / 
τῶν ἀναφορικῶν πάντοτε χρόνων " ἑκάστης μοίρας," 
3 / 
εἰ μὴ μόνον ὅταν ἤτοι αὐτὸς ὁ ἀνατολικὸς ὁρίζων 
> ~ > 
τὴν ἄφεσιν ἢ εἰληφὼς ἤ τις τῶν κατ᾽ αὐτὸν ποιου- 
/ ? / ~ 
μένων ἀνατολήν. ἑνὸς yap ἐκ παντὸς τρόπου τῷ 
φυσικῶς τοῦτο τὸ μέρος ἐπισκεπτομένῳ προκει- 
\ βοηθούμενος καὶ ἀναλελυμένος MACam., Bo. ἢ ἀν. NE; 
βοηθούμενος καὶ om. VPLDProc. 
2 καὶ post χρόνων add. MCam. ; om. alii. 


8 ἑκάστης μοίρας Proc.; ἑκάστη μοῖρα VD; ἑκάστας μοίρας 
PLMNAECam. 





1 As the anonymous commentator says (p. 120, ed. Wolf), 
the sun is of a ‘“‘middle temperature ” (κρᾶσις), and takes 
the character, good or bad, of the planet associated with it; 
cf. i. 5 above. 

2 Some of the MSS. have βοηθούμενος καὶ (or ἢ) ἀναλελυμένος, 
“assisted or released”; probably an explanatory gloss 
which worked its way into the text. The anonymous 
commentator explains the word to mean that a beneficent 
planet does not permit the sun to retain the “affliction” 
attached by the evil planet, but “‘ releases ”’ it. 

3 The following general description is intended to apply 
to Ptolemy’s lengthy account of this method. In each 
prorogation, two points on the ecliptic are concerned, the 
prorogator or precedent and the subsequent or anaeretic 
place, which we may call P and S respectively. S may or 
may not be occupied by a planet, but in this type of pro- 
rogation it always follows P, that is, lies east of it and comes 
to the horizon later. P, as a point on the ecliptic, may 
(a) lie at the intersection of the ecliptic and the equator or 


286 


TETRABIBLOS III. 10 


of a maleficent planet! and is not released * by any 
of the beneficent ones. 

However, the number of years, determined by the 
distances between the prorogative place and the de- 
structive planet, ought not to be taken simply or off- 
hand, in accordance with the usual traditions, from 
the times of ascension of each degree,except only when 
the eastern horizon itself is the prorogator, or some 
one of the planets that are rising in that region. For 
one method alone® is available for him who is 


be (6) north of the equator or (c) south of it. The vernal 
and autumnal equinoxes, the beginnings of Aries and 
Libra, are the only points of the ecliptic which can occupy 
position (a); if, however, P is one of these, since it is 
also a point on the equator, it will pass, like all points on the 
equator, from horizon to meridian in 6 hours, at the rate of 
15° in 1 hour (this is the hour called ‘‘ equinoctial hour ”’ 
by the Greeks). If P is to the north of the equator, in 
a north latitude, its ascension from horizon to meridian 
will be along a path parallel to the equator and longer than 
the distance from horizon to meridian on the equator ; 
hence it takes longer than 6 equinoctial hours. Conversely, 
points south of the equator take a shorter course and ascend 
in times correspondingly shorter than 6 equinoctial hours. 
Nevertheless, since the Greeks defined “ day ᾿ as the period 
from sunrise to sunset and divided it into 12 hours, similarly 
dividing the night, the ascension of P from rising to cul- 
mination, wherever it is situated on the ecliptic and what- 
ever the latitude, takes place in 6 hours of the day, that is, 
ordinary or civil (καιρικαί) hours, which may be longer 
or shorter than equinoctial hours, and equal to them 
only when P occupies position (a), described above. 
The ‘‘ horary magnitude ”’ or ‘‘ period’ of a point on the 
ecliptic is the expression in terms of equinoctial times (see 
p. 95, n. 2) of the length of the civil hour when the sun is 
at that point; in north latitudes, horary magnitudes are 
greater than 15 for points north of the equator and less 

[for continuation of footnote, see pages 288 and 289. 


287 


PTOLEMY 


μένου, oxotreiv! μετὰ πόσους ἰσημερινοὺς χρόνους 
1346 τοῦ ἑπομένου σώματος ἢ σχήματος τόπος ἐπὶ 
Tov? τοῦ προηγουμένου Kat αὐτὴν τὴν γένεσιν 
παραγίνεται,διὰ τὸ τοὺς ἰσημερινοὺς χρόνους ὁμαλῶς 
διέρχεσθαι καὶ τὸν ὁρίζοντα καὶ τὸν μεσημβρινόν, 
πρὸς οὗς ἀμφοτέρους at τῶν τοπικῶν ἀποστάσεων 3 
ὁμοιότητες λαμβάνονται, καὶ ἰσχύειν δὲ ἕκαστον 
τῶν χρόνων ἐνιαυτὸν ἕνα ἡλιακὸν εἰκότως - ὅταν 
μὲν ἐπ’ αὐτοῦ τοῦ ἀνατολικοῦ ὁρίζοντος ἢ 6 
ἀφετικὸς καὶ προηγούμενος τόπος, τοὺς ἀναφορι- 
κοὺς χρόνους τῶν μέχρι τῆς ὑπαντήσεως μοιρῶν 
προσήκει λαμβάνειν: μετὰ τοσούτους γὰρ ἰση- 
μερινοὺς χρόνους ὁ ἀναιρέτης ἐπὶ τὸν τοῦ ἀφέτου 
τόπον, τουτέστιν ἐπὶ τὸν ἀνατολικὸν ὁρίζοντα, 
παραγίνεται: ὅταν δὲ ἐπ᾽ αὐτοῦ τοῦ μεσημβρινοῦ, 
τὰς ἐπ᾽ ὀρθῆς τῆς σφαίρας ἀναφοράς, ἐν ὅσαις 
ἕκαστον τμῆμα διέρχεται τὸν μεσημβρινον - ὅταν 


1 σκοπεῖν VPLD, τοῦ σκοπεῖν MNAECam. 

5 τὸν ΝὭΡτοο. ; τὴν alii Cam. 

8 ἀποστάσεων VPMADEProc., ὑποστάσεων L, om. NCam. 
4 ἰσχύειν VPND, cf. Proc. ; ἰσχύει LMAECam. 





for points south, 15 being the horary magnitude of the 
two equinoctial points. All that has been said about P 
applies of course to §, which is another point on the 
ecliptic. The problem of prorogation is simply to dis- 
cover after how many equinoctial periods or times αὶ 
comes to the position originally oceupied by P with re- 
lation to the meridian (or other centre, such as the western 
horizon). This position is defined as the one in which § 
is just as many civil hours removed from the meridian 
(or the point of reference) as was P in its original position. 


288 


TETRABIBLOS IIT. 10 


considering this subject in a natural manner—to cal- 
culate after how many equinoctial periods ! the place 
of the following body or aspect comes to the place of 
the one preceding at the actual time of birth, because 
the equinoctial periods pass evenly * through both 
the horizon and the mid-heaven, to both of which 
are referred the proportions of spatial distances, 
and, as is reasonable, each one of the periods has 
the value of one solar year.* Whenever the pro- 
rogative and preceding place is actually on the 
eastern horizon, we should take the times of ascen- 
sion of the degrees up to the meeting-place ; for 
after this number of equinoctial periods the de- 
structive planet comes to the place of the prorogator, 
that is, to the eastern horizon. But when it? is 
actually at the mid-heaven, we should take the 
ascensions on the right sphere in which the segment ὃ 
in each case passes mid-heaven; and when it is on 


One therefore determines how far S was originally removed, 
how far it is removed when it comes to the position of P, 
and takes the difference, in equinoctial times, as the 
answer. 

1 An “ equinoctial period’ or ‘“‘ time’ is the length of 
time which it takes one degree on the equator to pass a 
fixed point, 7.e. 1/360 of 24 hours. An “ὁ equinoctial hour ”’ 
is 15 “‘ equinoctial times.’’ For the definition cf. Helio- 
dorus (?) in CCAG, vii. 122, 20 ff. 

* At the rate of 15 per hour, in contrast to the varying 
horary periods of degrees on the ecliptic. 

3 In predicting the life of the subject of the horoscope. 
Cf. P. Mich. 149, col. xii. ll. 10-11. 

4'The prorogator. 

5 The “‘ segment ”’ is the are (of the ecliptic) between the 
two places, but the ascension of the following body is to 
be measured on the right sphere; that is, it is right as- 
cension, which is measured on the equator. 


, 


289 


PTOLEMY 


δὲ ἐπ᾽ αὐτοῦ τοῦ δυτικοῦ ὁρίζοντος, ἐν ὅσαις 
ἑκάστη τῶν τῆς διαστάσεως μοιρῶν καταφέρεται, 
τουτέστιν ἐν ὅσαις at διαμετροῦσαι ταύτας ' ἀνα- 
φέρονται - τοῦ δὲ προηγουμένου τόπου μηκέτ᾽ ὄντος 
ἐν τοῖς τρισὶ τούτοις ὅροις ἀλλ᾽ ἐν ταῖς μεταξὺ 
διαστάσεσιν, οὐκ ἔτι τῶν προκειμένων ἀναφορῶν 
ἢ καταφορῶν ἢ μεσουρανήσεων 5 οἱ χρόνοι τοὺς 
ἑπομένους τόπους οἴσουσιν ἐπὶ τοὺς αὐτοὺς τοῖς 
προηγουμένοις, ἀλλὰ διάφοροι. ὅμοιος μὲν γὰρ 
καὶ ὁ αὐτὸς τόπος ἐστὶν ὁ τὴν ὁμοίαν καὶ ἐπὶ τὰ 
135 αὐτὰ μέρη θέσιν ἔχων ἅμα πρός τε τὸν ὁρίζοντα 
καὶ τὸν μεσημβρινόν. τοῦτο δὲ ἔγγιστα συμβέβηκε 
τοῖς ἐφ᾽ ἑνὸς κειμένοις ἡμικυκλίου τῶν γραφομένων 
διὰ τῶν τομῶν τοῦ τε μεσημβρινοῦ καὶ τοῦ ὁρί- 
ζοντος, ὧν ἕκαστον κατὰ τὴν αὐτὴν θέσιν τὴν ἴσην 
ἔγγιστα καιρικὴν ὥραν ποιεῖ. ὥσπερ δ᾽, ἂν 
περιάγηται περὶ τὰς εἰρημένας τομάς, ἔρχεται μὲν 
ἐπὶ τὴν αὐτὴν θέσιν καὶ τῷ ὁρίζοντι καὶ τῷ μεσημ- 
βρινῷ, τοὺς δὲ τῆς διελεύσεως τοῦ ζωδιακοῦ 
χρόνους ἀνίσους ἐφ᾽ ἑκάτερον ὃ ποιεῖ. τὸν αὐτὸν 
τρόπον καὶ κατὰ τὰς τῶν ἄλλων ἀποστάσεων 
1 ταύτας VDMLE;; cf. Proc. ; ταύταις PNACam. 
2 συμμεσουρανήσεων NCam. 


3 καιρικὴν om. MNCam. 4 δ(ἐ) om. MNCam. 
5 ἑκάτερον VD; -ov cett. Cam.; om. Proc. 








1Comes to the meridian in the same time, and is on 
the same side of the equator (‘‘ in the same direction ”’). 
Ptolemy introduces this characterization of “same and 


290 


TETRABIBLOS III. 10 


the western horizon, the number in which each of 
the degrees of the interval descends, that is, the 
number in which those directly opposite them ascend. 
But if the precedent place is not on these three limits 
but in the intervals between them, in that case the 
times of the aforesaid ascensions, descensions, or 
culminations will not carry the following places to 
the places of the preceding, but the periods will be 
different. For a place is similar and the same if it 
has the same position! in the same direction with 
reference both to the horizon and to the meridian. 
This is most nearly true of those which lie upon one 
of those semicircles” which are described through 
the sections of the meridian and the horizon, each of 
which at the same position makes nearly the same 
temporal hour. Even as, if the revolution is upon 
the aforesaid arcs, it reaches the same position 
with reference to both the meridian and horizon, 
but makes the periods of the passage of the zodiac 
unequal with respect to either, in the same way also 
at the positions of the other distances it makes their 


similar places’ because the whole system of prorogation 
depends on determining the period after which a sub- 
sequent body will come to the same place as, or a similar 
place to, that occupied by a precedent body. It cannot 
come to exactly the same place, because both bodies are 
on the ecliptic, oblique to the equator. Hence it is neces- 
sary to define “ similar places.” 

2 He refers to the arcs of circles, parallel to the equator, 
passing through the degree of the ecliptic in question, and 
cutting both horizon and meridian, which are intercepted 
between the horizon and the meridian, 


291 


PTOLEMY 


θέσεις δι’ ἀνίσων ἐκείνοις χρόνων τὰς παρόδους 
ἀπεργάζεται. μία δέ τις ἡμῖν ἔφοδος ἔστω" 
τοιαύτη, dv ἧς, ἐάν τε ἀνατολικὴν ἐάν τε μεσὴμ- 
βρινὴν ἢ δυτικήν, ἐάν τε ἄλλην τινὰ ἔχῃ θέσιν ὁ 
προηγούμενος τόπος, τὸ ἀνάλογον τῶν ἐπ᾽ αὐτὸν 
φερόντων χρόνων τὸν ἑπόμενον τόπον ληφθήσεται. 
προδιαλαβόντες γὰρ τὴν μεσουρανοῦσαν τοῦ 
ζωδιακοῦ μοῖραν καὶ ἔτι τήν τε προηγουμένην καὶ 
τὴν ἐπερχομένην, πρῶτον σκεψόμεθα τὴν τῆς 
προηγουμένης θέσιν, πόσας καιρικὰς ὥρας ἀπέχει 
τοῦ μεσημβρινοῦ, ἀριθμήσαντες τὰς μεταξὺ αὐτῆς 
Kal? τῆς μεσουρανούσης οἰκείως ἤτοι ὑπὲρ γῆν ἢ 
ὑπὸ γῆν μοίρας ὃ ἐπ᾽ ὀρθῆς τῆς σφαίρας ἀναφορὰς 
καὶ μερίσαντες εἰς τὸ πλῆθος τῶν αὐτῆς τῆς 
136 προηγουμένης μοίρας ὡριαίων χρόνων, εἰ μὲν ὑπὲρ 
1 ἔστω VDProc. ; ἔσται PLMNAECam. 


sec om. LCam. 
3 μοίρας MAE, μοῖραν VPD, p° “N, μεσουρανοῖ Cam. 





1This obscure sentence is thus explained by the anony- 
mous commentator: ‘‘ If you imagine a star moving either 
from the horoscope (sc. to mid-heaven), or from mid-heaven 
to the horoscope, you will discover the temporal periods 
of the distance ; in the same way also when they are not 
upon the degrees of the angles.” 

5. ὡριαῖοι χρόνοι ; ; the expression ὡριαῖον μέγεθος, “* horary 
magnitude,’ is used further on, when Ptolemy gives 
examples. In the Almagest, ii. 8, there is a table which 
gives the time, in degrees and minutes of the equator 
(i.e. equinoctial times), in which each are of 10° of the 
ecliptic rises above the horizon in each of eleven latitudes 
beginning with the equator (right sphere) ; the table also 
gives the cumulative sums of these ascensions for each 
arc from the beginning of Aries. In the following chapter 
Ptolemy tells how the horary magnitude may be determined 


292 


TETRABIBLOS IIT. 10 


passages in times unequal to the former.! We shall 
therefore adopt one method only, as follows, whereby, 
whether the preceding place occupies the orient, 
the mid-heaven, the occident, or any other position, 
the proportionate number of equinoctial times that 
bring the following place to it will be apprehended. 
For after we have first determined the culminating 
degree of the zodiac and furthermore the degree of 
the precedent and that of the subsequent, in the 
first place we shall investigate the position of the 
precedent, how many ordinary hours it is removed 
from the meridian, counting the ascensions that pro- 
perly intervene up to the very degree of mid-heaven, 
whether over or under the earth, on the right sphere, 
and dividing them by the amount of the horary 
periods? of the precedent degree, diurnal if it is 


by the use of this table. His directions are, in brief, to 
take the sum of the ascensions for the degree of the sun 
by day (or the opposite degree by night) both in the right 
sphere and in the given latitude ; to ascertain the differ- 
ence between the two and take 3 of it; and then, if the 
degree was in the northern hemisphere, to add this fraction 
to the 15 “ times ” of one equinoctial hour, or, for a southern 
position, to subtract it. This will give the length of the 
ordinary or civil hour for the latitude and time of the 
year in question, in terms of the ascension of degrees of 
the equator, or “‘ equinoctial times,’ or as Ptolemy puts 
it, “‘the number of (equinoctial) times of the civil hour 
under consideration.’ The civil day-time hour was τ of 
the period from sunrise to sunset, or, of course, ᾧ of the 
time from sunrise to noon. In Almagest, ii. 9, Ptolemy 
gives the same directions for reducing periods expressed 
in equinoctial times to ordinary or civil hours; multiply 
the given equinoctial hours by 15 (in order to express 
them in “ equinoctial times,’ as are the ascensions dealt 
with in the present passage) and divide by the horary 


period, 
293 


PTOLEMY 


γῆν εἴη TOV ἡμερησίων, εἰ δὲ ὑπὸ γῆν τῶν τῆς 
νυκτός. ἐπεὶ δὲ τὰ τὰς αὐτὰς καιρικὰς ὥρας 
ἀπέχοντα τοῦ μεσημβρινοῦ τμήματα τοῦ ζωδιακοῦ 
καθ᾽ ἑνὸς καὶ τοῦ αὐτοῦ γίνεται τῶν προειρημένων 
ἡμικυκλίων, Kai! δεήσει λαβεῖν μετὰ πόσους ἰση- 
μερινοὺς χρόνους 5 καὶ τὸ ἑπόμενον τμῆμα τὰς 
ἴσας καιρικὰς ὥρας ἀφέξει τοῦ αὐτοῦ μεσημβρινοῦ 
τῇ προηγουμένῃ. ταύτας δὲ διειληφότες ἐπι- 
σκεψόμεθα πόσους τε κατὰ τὴν ἐξ ἀρχῆς θέσιν ἀπ- 
εἴχεν ἰσημερινοὺς χρόνους καὶ ἡ ἑπομένη μοῖρα τῆς 
κατὰ τὸ αὐτὸ μεσουράνημα διὰ τῶν ἐπ᾽ ὀρθῆς 
πάλιν τῆς σφαίρας ἀναφορῶν, καὶ πόσους ὅτε τὰς 
ἴσας καιρικὰς ὥρας ἐποίει τῇ προηγουμένῃ * πολυ- 
πλασιάσαντές τε καὶ ταύτας ἐπὶ τὸ πλῆθος τῶν τῆς 
ἑπομένης μοίρας ὡριαίων χρόνων, εἰ μὲν πρὸς τὸ 
ὑπὲρ γῆν εἴη μεσουράνημα πάλιν ἡ σύγκρισις τῶν 
καιρικῶν ὡρῶν, τὸ 35 τῶν ἡμερησίων, εἰ δὲ πρὸς τὸ 
ὑπὸ γῆν τὸ τῶν τῆς νυκτός, καὶ τοὺς γινομένους ἐκ 
τῆς ὑπεροχῆς ἀμφοτέρων τῶν διαστάσεων λαβόντες 
ἕξομεν τὸ τῶν ζητουμένων ἐτῶν πλῆθος." 

Ἵνα δὲ φανερώτερον γένηται τὸ λεγόμενον, ὕπο- 
κείσθω προηγούμενος μὲν τόπος ἡ ἀρχὴ τοῦ 
Κριοῦ λόγου ἕνεκεν, ἑπόμενος δὲ ὁ τῆς ἀρχῆς τῶν 
Διδύμων, κλίμα δὲ ὅπου ἡ μὲν μεγίστη ἡμέρα 


137 ὡρῶν ἐστι ιδ΄, τὸ δ᾽ ὡριαῖον μέγεθος τῆς ἀρχῆς 


ταὶ VPLD, om. MNAECam. 

τχρόνηυς PLAProc., om. VMNDECam. 

3 τὸ (post ὡρῶν)... τὸ (post γῆν) VPLD, om. MNAECam. 
4 Post πλῆθος ins. cap. ᾿γπόδειγμα NCam., om. libri alii. 
δὴ ἀρχὴ VDProc., ὁ τῆς ἀρχῆς alii Cam. 


294 





TETRABIBLOS III. 10 


above the earth and nocturnal if it is below. But 
since the sections of the zodiac which are an equal 
number of ordinary hours removed from the meridian 
lie upon one and the same of the aforesaid semi- 
circles, it will also be necessary to find after how 
many equinoctial periods the subsequent section will 
be removed from the same meridian by the same 
number of ordinary hours as the _ precedent.! 
When we have determined these, we shall inquire 
how many equinoctial hours at its original position 
the degree of the subsequent was removed from the 
degree at mid-heaven, again by means of ascensions 
in the right sphere, and how many when it made the 
same number of ordinary hours as the precedent, 
multiplying these into the number of the horary 
periods” of the degree of the subsequent; if again 
the comparison of the ordinary hours relates to the 
mid-heaven above the earth, multiplying into the 
number of diurnal hours, but if it relates to that 
below the earth, the number of nocturnal hours. 
And taking the results from the difference of the two 
distances, we shall have the number of years for 
which the inquiry was made. 

To make this clearer, suppose that the precedent 
place is the beginning of Aries, for example, and the 
subsequent the beginning of Gemini, and the latitude 
that where the longest day is fourteen hours long,? 
and the horary magnitude of the beginning of Gemini 


1 For it will then have ‘“‘ come to the same place ”’ that 
the precedent originally occupied. 

2 Or, horary magnitude. 

3 This is the latitude of lower Egypt ; ef. Almagest, ii. 6, 
Ρ. 108, 15 ff. (Heiberg), and the table in ii. 8, pp. 134-141. 


295 


PTOLEMY 


τῶν Διδύμων « ἔγγιστα. χρόνων ἰσημερινῶν ιζ΄, καὶ 
ἀνατελλέτω πρῶτον ἡ ἀρχὴ τοῦ Κριοῦ, ἵνα μεσουρανῇ 
ἡ ἀρχὴ τοῦ Αἰγοκέρωτος, καὶ ἀπεχέτω 2 σοῦ ὑπὲρ 
γῆν μεσουρανήματος ἡ ἀρχὴ τῶν ΖΔιδύμων χρόνους 
ἰσημερινοὺς pun’. ἐπεὶ οὖν ἡ τοῦ Κριοῦ ἀρχὴ ἀπέχει 
τοῦ μεσημβρινοῦ μεσουρανήματος καιρικὰς ὥρας 
ἕξ, ταύτας πολλαπλασιάσαντες ἐπὶ τοὺς ιζ΄ χρόνους, 
οἵπερ εἰσὶ τοῦ ὡριαίου μεγέθους τῆς ἀρχῆς τῶν 
Διδύμων, ἐπειδήπερ πρὸς τὸ ὑπὲρ γῆν μεσουράνημά 
ἐστιν ἡ τῶν ρμη΄ χρόνων ἀποχή, ἕξομεν καὶ ταύτης 
τῆς διαστάσεως χρόνους ρβ΄ μετὰ τοὺς τῆς 
ὑπεροχῆς ἄρα χρόνους μς΄ ὃ ὃ ἑπόμενος τόπος ἐπὶ 
τὸν τοῦ προηγουμένου μεταβήσεται. τοσοῦτοι δ᾽ 
εἰσὶν ἔγγιστα χρόνοι καὶ τῆς ἀναφορᾶς τοῦ τε 
Κριοῦ καὶ τοῦ Ταύρου, ἐπειδὴ ὁ ἀφετικὸς τόπος 
ὑποκεῖται ὡροσκοπῶν. 

M / ὃ \ « Ψ' ¢ > A ~ K, ~ σ 

εσουρανείτω δὲ ὁμοίως ἡ ἀρχὴ τοῦ Κριοῦ, ἵνα 

ἀπέχῃ κατὰ τὴν πρώτην θέσιν ἡ ἀρχὴ τῶν διδύμων 
τοῦ ὑπὲρ γῆν μεσουρανήματος χρόνους ἰσημερινοὺς 

/ > A > \ \ / / > / 
vy. ἐπειδὴ οὖν κατὰ τὴν δευτέραν θέσιν ὀφείλει 
μεσουρανεῖν ἡ ἀρχὴ τῶν Διδύμων," ἕξομεν τὴν τῶν 
διαστάσεων ὑπεροχὴν 1 αὐτῶν τῶνϑ νη΄ " χρόνων, ἐν 

1 ζ΄ VPLMDEProc., ιζ΄ n’ NACam. Sic et infra. 

2 ἀπεχέτω VAD, ἔστω ἀπέχουσα Proc., ἀπέχει PL, ἀπέχῃ 
MNECam. 

3 pun’ VPLMDEProc., pun’ μζ΄ NACam.?, pun’ μη΄ Cam.? 

4 pB’ VPLMDEProc., pf’ μη΄ NACam. 

5 us’ libri omnes Proc. Cam.!, με΄ Cam.? 

8 ἡ ἀρχὴ τῶν Διδύμων Proce. ; Διδύμων om. VD ; om. PLME; 
ὃ ἀφετικὸς τόπος NACam. 

7 τὴν τῶν διαστάσεων ὑπεροχὴν VPLD ; ἡ ὑπεροχὴ τῆς δια- 
στάσεως Proc., τὴν τῆς προτέρας διαστάσεως ὑπεροχὴν MNECam., 
τὴν τῆς τοιαύτης διαστ. ὑπ. A. 


290 





OID POI SS Ὅ55-- 8 νας, "ἂν 


TETRABIBLOS ITI. 10 


is approximately 17 equinoctial times.!_ Assume first 
that the beginning of Aries is rising, so that the 
beginning of Capricorn is at mid-heaven, and let the 
beginning of Gemini be removed from the mid-heaven 
above the earth 148 equinoctial times.2_ Now since 
the beginning of Aries is six ordinary hours* removed 
from the diurnal mid-heaven, multiplying these into 
the 17 equinoctial times, which are the times of the 
horary magnitude of the beginning of Gemini, since 
the distance of 148 times relates to the mid-heaven 
above the earth, we shall have for this interval also 
102 times. Hence, after 46 times, which is the differ- 
ence, the subsequent place will pass to the position 
of the precedent. These are very nearly the equi- 
noctial times of the ascension of Aries and Taurus, 
since it is assumed that the prorogative sign is the 
horoscope. 

Similarly, let the beginning of Aries be at mid- 
heaven, so that at its original position the beginning 
of Gemini may be 58 equinoctial times * removed from 
the mid-heaven above the earth. Therefore, since 
at its second position the beginning of Gemini should 
be at mid-heaven, we shall have for the difference 
of the distances precisely this amount of 58 times, 


1The method described in Almagest, ii. 9, cited above, 
applied to data from the table in Almagest, ii. 8, gives 17 
times 6 min. 30 sec. 

2 This is reckoned on the right sphere. The data from 
the table in the Almagest will give 147 times 44 min. 

3 Likewise 6 equinoctial hours, since it is an equinoctial 
point. 4 T.e. 148 minus 90. 


8 αὐτῶν τῶν Pit, τῶν τῶν VD, τῶν LProe., αὐτὴν τὴν τῶν 
MNACam. 9 νζ΄ pd’ A. 
U 297 


PTOLEMY 


a / A ‘ A A > A / 
ὅσοις πάλιν διὰ TO μεσουρανεῖν τὸν ἀφετικὸν τόπον 
διέρχεται τὸν μεσημβρινὸν 6 τε ΚΚριὸς καὶ ὁ Ταῦρος. 

Δυνέτω δὲ τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον ἡ ἀρχὴ τοῦ Κριοῦ, 
ἵνα μεσουρανῇ μὲν ἡ ἀρχὴ τοῦ Καρκίνου, ἀπέχῃ δὲ 
τοῦ ὑπερ γῆν μεσουρανήματος ἡ ἀρχὴ τῶν Διδύμων 
εἰς τὰ προηγούμενα χρόνους ἰσημερινοὺς λβ΄. ἐπεὶ 
οὖν πάλιν ἕξ ὥρας καιρικὰς ἀπέχει τοῦ μεσημβρινοῦ 
ἡ ἀρχὴ τοῦ Κριοῦ πρὸς δυσμάς, ἐὰν ἑπτακαιδεκάκις 
ταύτας ποιήσωμεν, ἕξομεν pf’? χρόνους, οὗς ἀφέξει 
τοῦ μεσημβρινοῦ καὶ ἡ ἀρχὴ τῶν 4Διδύμων ὅταν 
δύνῃ. ἀπεῖχε δὲ καὶ κατὰ τὴν πρώτην θέσιν ἐπὶ 
τὰ αὐτὰ χρόνους λβ΄ .3 ἐν τοῖς τῆς ὑπεροχῆς apa 

/ ες / 4 EMR | A fs > / > \ 
χρόνοις ἑβδομήκοντα ἐπὶ τὸ δύνον ἠνέχθη, ἐν οἷς Kat 

/ \ « \ Je? ~ > / 

καταφέρεται μὲν 6 τε Κριὸς καὶ 6 Ταῦρος, ἀναφέρε- 
ται δὲ τὰ διαμετροῦντα δωδεκατημόρια τό τε τῶν 
Χηλῶν καὶ τὸ τοῦ Σκορπίου. 

« / / > vi 5 ‘ 6 A > ~ 

Υποκείσθω τοίνυν ἐπὶ μηδενὸς μὲν οὖσα τῶν 
κέντρων ἡ ἀρχὴ τοῦ Κριοῦ, ἀπέχουσα δὲ λόγου 
ἕνεκεν εἰς τὰ προηγούμενα τῆς μεσημβρίας καιρικὰς 
ὥρας τρεῖς, ἵνα μεσουρανῇ μὲν ἡ τοῦ Ταύρου μοῖρα 
ὀκτωκαιδεκάτη, ἀπέχῃ δὲ κατὰ τὴν πρώτην θέσιν ἡ 
τῶν διδύμων ἀρχὴ τοῦ ὑπὲρ γῆν μεσουρανήματος 
εἰς τὰ ἑπόμενα χρόνους ἰσημερινοὺς δεκατρεῖς. ἐὰν 

1. λβ΄ VPMDEProc., λη΄ L, Ap’ ιζ΄ NACam.!, AB’ ιβ΄ Cam.* 

2 pB’ VPLMDEProc., pp’ μη΄ NACam. 

5λβ΄ VPLMDEProc., Ap’ ις΄ NACam.1, λβ΄ (β' Cam.t 

4 ἐν τοῖς τῆς ὑπεροχῆς ἄρα χρόνοις ἑβδομήκοντα VD, Cj. Proc. : 
ἐν τοῖς τῆς ἄρα ὑπ. ὁ χρόν. P, e& ᾿ ταύτης ἄρα ὑπ. ὁ χρόνος L, ἐν roe 
(add. τῆς E) ὑπὲρ γῆν (γῆς E) ἄρα χρόν. ο΄ MNAECam., ο΄ Ap’ A. 


5 ἐπὶ VPLDE, ὑπὸ MNACam., ev Proc. 
ὃ μηδενὸς VPLMDE, μηδὲν NACam. 


298 


TETRABIBLOS III. 10 


in which again, because the prorogative sign is at 
mid-heaven, Aries and Taurus! pass through the 
meridian. 

In the same way let the beginning of Aries be 
setting, so that the beginning of Cancer may be at 
mid-heaven and the beginning of Gemini may be 
removed from the mid-heaven above the earth in the 
direction of the leading signs* by 32 equinoctial 
periods. Since, then, again the beginning of Aries 
is six ordinary hours removed from the meridian 
in the direction of the occident, if we multiply 
this by 17 we shall have 102 times, which will be 
the distance of the beginning of Gemini from the 
meridian when it sets. At its first position also it 
was distant from the same point 32 times; hence 
it moved to the occident in the 70 times of the 
difference, in which period also Aries and Taurus 
descend and the opposite signs Libra and Scorpio 
ascend.® 

Now let it be assumed that the beginning of Aries 
is not on any of the angles, but removed, for example, 
three ordinary hours from the meridian in the direc- 
tion of the leading signs, so that the 18th degree of 
Taurus is at mid-heaven, and in its first position the 
beginning of Gemini is 13 equinoctial times removed 
from the mid-heaven above the earth in the order of 


1The table of the Almagest gives 45 times 5 min. for 
the combined ascensions of these two signs in the latitude 
of lower Egypt. 
2 I.e. beyond the meridian and toward Aries. 
3 The table of the Almagest gives 70 times 23 min. 
299 


PTOLEMY 


> , 
οὖν πάλιν τοὺς ιζ΄ χρόνους ἐπὶ τὰς γ΄ ὥρας πολ- 
λαπλασιάσωμεν, ἀφέξει μὲν καὶ κατὰ τὴν δευτέραν 
/ a lod 
θέσιν ἡ τῶν Διδύμων ἀρχὴ τῆς μεσημβρίας εἰς τὰ 
139 προηγούμενα χρόνους να΄," τοὺς δὲ πάντας ποιήσει 
/ δ΄ 3 >? / A ὃ \ ~ 7 A > ~ Ὁ 
χρόνους ξδ΄. ἐποίει δὲ διὰ τῆς αὐτῆς ἀγωγῆς, ὅτε 
\ > / λλ » 3 \ / , / 4 4 
μὲν ἀνέτελλεν ὁ ἀφετικὸς τόπος, χρόνους μς΄,} ὅτε 
>? 
δὲ ἐμεσουράνει χρόνους νη΄, ὅτε δὲ ἔδυνε χρόνους 
1.5 ὃ 3 \ ΝΜ Δ ihe \ \ \ θέ. 
ο ιήνεγκε μὲν ἄρα καὶ ὁ κατὰ τὴν μεταξὺ θέσιν 
τῆς τε μεσουρανήσεως καὶ τῆς δύσεως τῶν χρόνων 
ἀριθμὸς ἑκάστου τῶν ἄλλων. γέγονε γὰρ χρόνων 
£5’, διήνεγκε δὲ κατὰ τὸ ἀνάλογον τῆς τῶν γ΄ ὡρῶν 
ς ΄- > ὃ / a 6 > ‘ \ ~ ΜΝ 7 
ὑπεροχῆς, ἐπειδήπερ αὕτη ὃ ἐπὶ μὲν τῶν ἄλλων 
κατὰ τὰ κέντρα τεταρτημορίων LB’ χρόνων ἦν, ἐπὶ 
δὲ τῆς τῶν τριῶν ὡρῶν ἀποστάσεως ἕξ χρόνων. 
> \ \ \ > \ / ε ᾿] \ \ > / 
ἐπεὶ δὲ Kal ἐπὶ πάντων ἡ αὐτὴ σχεδὸν ἀναλογία 
συντηρεῖται, δυνατὸν ἔσται καὶ κατὰ τοῦτον τὸν 
/ < λ 4, ~ A6 ~ aA 
τρόπον ἁπλούστερον τῇ μεθόδῳ χρῆσθαι. πάλιν 
“ / 
yap ἀνατελλούσης μὲν τῆς προηγουμένης μοίρας 
aA ~ ς > A / 
ταῖς μέχρι τῆς ἑπομένης avadopais χρησόμεθα, 
μεσουρανούσης δὲ ταῖς ἐπ᾽ ὀρθῆς τῆς σφαίρας, 
δυνούσης δὲ ταῖς καταφοραῖς. ὅταν δὲ μεταξὺ 
τούτων ἢ, οἷον λόγου ἕνεκεν ἐπὶ τῆς ἐκκειμένης 
διαστάσεως τοῦ Κριοῦ, ληψόμεθα πρῶτον τοὺς 


1 ,ζ VPLMDEProe. ; ιζ΄ η΄ NACam. 

2 να΄ VPLMDEProe. ; να΄ κδ΄ ACam.; va’ δ΄ Ν. 
3 ἐδ΄ VPLMDE; ἐδ΄ κδ΄ NACam.?, ἐδ΄ κζ΄ Cam.? 
4 μς΄ libri Proc. Cam.1; με΄ Cam.? 

5o’ VPLMDEProc. ; ο΄ λβ΄ NACam.', As’ Cam.? 
8 αὕτη VAD, αὐτὴ PL, αὐτὸς MNECam. 

7 @\Awy VPLADProc., ὅλων MNECam. 


300 


TETRABIBLOS III. 10 


the following signs.’ If, then, again we multiply 17 
equinoctial times into the three hours, the beginning 
of Gemini will at its second position be distant from 
mid-heaven in the direction of the leading signs 51 
equinoctial times, and it will make in all 64 times.* 
But it made 46 times by the same procedure when 
the prorogative place was rising, 58 when it was in 
mid-heaven, and 70 when it was setting. Hence the 
number of equinoctial times at the position between 
mid-heaven and the occident differs from each of the 
others. For it is 64, and the difference is propor- 
tional to the excess of three hours,? since this was 
12 equinoctial times in the case of the other quad- 
rants at the centres, but 6 equinoctial times in the 
ease of the distance of three hours. And inasmuch 
as in all cases approximately the same proportion is 
observed, it will be possible to use the method in this 
simpler way. For again, when the precedent degree 
is at rising, we shall employ the ascensions up to the 
subsequent ; if it is at mid-heaven, the degrees on 
the right sphere ; and if it is setting, the descensions. 
But when it is between these points, for example, 
at the aforesaid interval from Aries, we shall take 


' Thus, the first of Aries is west of the meridian and the 
first of Gemini east of it. 

51... 13 times to reach the meridian, plus 51 times 
beyond it. 

3.7.6. the centres are 6 hours removed from one another, 
and a difference of 12 times is observed when the move- 
ment of the subsequent place up to one of the centres is 
compared with its movement to the next centre in order. 
Hence when the prorogative place does not move between 
centre and centre, 6 hours, but only half of that time, this 
differential also will be only 4 of its full amount, 6 times 
instead of 12 times. 


301 


PTOLEMY 
ἐπιβάλλοντας χρόνους ἑκατέρῳ ' τῶν “περιεχόντων τ 
κέντρων͵ εὑρήσομεν δέ, ἐπειδὴ μετὰ τὸ μεσουράνημα 
τὸ ὑπὲρ γῆν ὑπέκειτο ἡ ὦ ἀρχὴ τοῦ Κριοῦ μεταξὺ τοῦ 
τε μεσουρανοῦντος κέντρου καὶ τοῦ δύνοντος, τοὺς 
ἐπιβάλλοντας χρόνους ἃ μέχρι τῆς ἀρχῆς τῶν 4ι- 
140 δύμων, τῶν μὲν συμμεσουρανήσεων νη΄, τῶν δὲ 
συγκαταδύσεων ο΄. ἔπειτα μαθόντες, ὡς προ- 
κεῖται, πόσας καιρικὰς ὥρας ἀπέχει τὸ προ- 
ἡγούμενον τμῆμα ὁποτέρου τῶν κέντρων, ὅσον ϑ 
ἂν ὦσι μέρος αὗται τῶν τοῦ τε τεταρτημορίου 
καιρικῶν ὡρῶν ἕξ, τοσοῦτον μέρος τῆς ἀμφοτέρων 
τῶν συναγωγῶν ὑπεροχῆς προσθήσομεν ἢ ἀφελοῦμεν 
τῶν συγκρινομένων κέντρων "ὃ οἷον ἐπεὶ τῶν προ- 
κειμένων ο΄ καὶ vn’? ἡ ὑπεροχή ἐστι χρόνων ιβ΄, ὑπ- 
έκειτο δὲ τὰς ἴσας καιρικὰς ὥρας γ΄ ὁ προηγούμενος 
τόπος ἑκατέρου τῶν κέντρων ἀπέχων, αἵ εἰσι τῶν ἕξ 
ὡρῶν ἥμισυ μέρος, λαβόντες ὃ καὶ τῶν ιβ΄ τὸ ἥμισυ 
καὶ ἤτοι τοῖς νη΄ προσθέντες ἢ τῶν ο΄ ἀφελόντες, 
εὑρήσομεν τὴν ἐπιβολὴν χρόνων ξδ΄. εἰ δέ γε δύο 
καιρικὰς ὥρας ἀπεῖχεν ὁπότερον τῶν κέντρων, αἵ 
εἰσι τῶν ς΄ ὡρῶν τρίτον μέρος," τὸ τρίτον πάλιν τῶν 
τῆς ὑπεροχῆς ιβ΄ χρόνων͵ τουτέστι τοὺς δ΄, εἰ μὲν ἡ 
τῶν δύο ὡρῶν ἀποχὴ ἀπὸ τοῦ μεσουρανήματος 


᾿ ἑκατέρῳ VMADE, -ων PLNCam. 

2 περιεχόντων VP (-εχώντων) LD, -ομένων NMAECam. 

3Post χρόνους add. £5 ἔγγιστα NACam.; om. 
VPLMDEProc. 

4 μαθόντες VPLMADEProc. ; -ωμεν NCam. 

5 Post ὅσον add. δ᾽ Cam.; om. libri. 

ὁ τῶν συγκρινομένων κέντρων VLDProc., τῷ συγκρινομένῳ 
κέντρῳ PMNAECam. 

70’ καὶ νη΄ VPLDProce.; ἐτῶν add. VD. ; ὡρῶν MNAECam. 


902 


TETRABIBLOS III. 10 


first the equinoctial times corresponding to each of 
the surrounding angles, and we shail find, since the 
beginning of Aries was assumed to be beyond the 
mid-heaven above the earth, between mid-heaven 
and the occident, that the corresponding equinoctial 
times up to the first of Gemini from mid-heaven 
are 58 and from the occident 70. Next let us 
ascertain, as was set forth above,! how many ordinary 
hours the precedent section is removed from either 
of the angles, and whatever fraction they may be 
of the six ordinary hours of the quadrant, that 
fraction of the difference between both sums we 
shall add to or subtract from the angle with which 
comparison is made. For example, since the differ- 
ence between the above mentioned 70 and 58 is 12 
times, and it was assumed that the precedent place 
was removed by an equal number of ordinary hours, 
three, from each of the angles, which are one half 
of the six hours, then taking also one-half of the 12 
equinoctial times and either adding them to the 58 
or subtracting them from the 70, we shall find the 
result to be 64 times. But if it was removed two 
ordinary hours from either one of the angles, which 
are one-third of the six hours, again we shall take 
one-third of the 12 times of the excess, that is, 4, 
and if the removal by two hours had been assumed 
to be from the mid-heaven, we would have added 


'See p. 297. 


8 δὲ post λαβόντες add. MNCam. 
® £a’ NMCam.! 10 τρίτον μέρος om. MCam 


303 


141 


PTOLEMY 


Θ᾽ 1 θ / an“ ~ , / > > 
ὑπέκειτο, προσεθήκαμεν av τοῖς νη΄ χρόνοις - εἰ ὃ 
ἀπὸ τοῦ δύνοντος, ἀφείλομεν ἂν ἀπὸ τῶν οἵ. 
Ὃ μὲν οὖν τρόπος τῆς τῶν χρονικῶν διαστάσεων 5 
/ Ld € A \ \ > 5A. > , 
ποσότητος οὕτως ἡμῖν κατὰ τὸ ἀκόλουθον ὀφείλει 
r / ~ \ Ἂ ‘ 24? ε , 
αμβάνεσθαι. διακρινοῦμεν δὲ λοιπὸν ἐφ᾽ ἑκάστης 
“- \ 
TOV προειρημένων ὑπαντήσεων ἢ καταδύσεων, κατὰ 
τὴν ἀπὸ τῶν ὀλιγοχρονιωτέρων τάξιν, τάς τε ἀναιρε- 
\ 
τικὰς καὶ τὰς κλιμακτηρικὰς καὶ τὰς ἄλλως παροδι- 
“- - \ 
Kds, διά τε τοῦ ἢ κεκακῶσθαι τὴν ὑπάντησιν ἢ 
a / ¢ aA 
βοηθεῖσθαι κατὰ τὸν προειρημένον ἡμῖν τρόπον, καὶ 
~ ~ > “-“ 
διὰ τῶν καθ᾽ ἕκαστον τῶν διασημαινομένων ἐκ τῆς 
ὑπαντήσεως χρονικῶν ἐπεμβάσεων. κεκακωμένων 
~ ~ > 
τε yap ἅμα τῶν τόπων Kal τῆς πρὸς THY ἐπέμβασιν 
τῶν ἐτῶν παρόδου τῶν ἀστέρων κακοποιούσης τοὺς 
κυριωτάτους τόπους, ἄντικρυς θανάτους ὑπονοητέον * 
τοῦ δ᾽ ἑτέρου τούτων φιλανθρωποῦντος κλιμακτῆρας 
1A \ 2 λ (ae > / de 3 θ , 
μεγάλους καὶ ἐπισφαλεῖς - ἀμφοτέρων δὲ 8 νωθρίας 
7 a 
μόνον ἢ βλαβὰς καὶ καθαιρέσεις παροδικάς, τῆς καὶ 
3 ~ ~ 
ev τούτοις ἰδιότητος λαμβανομένης ἀπὸ τῆς τῶν 
ὑπαντικῶν 4 τόπων πρὸς τὰ τῆς γενέσεως πράγματα 
συνοικειώσεως. οὐδὲν δὲ ἐνίοτε κωλύει, δισταζο- 
μένων τῶν τὴν ἀναιρετικὴν κυρίαν λαμβάνειν ὀφει- 
λόντων, τὰς καθ᾽ ἕκαστον αὐτῶν ὑπαντήσεις ἐπιλογι- 


1 ἡ... ἀποχὴ ... ὑπέκειτο VPLDProe. ; αἱ... ἀποχαὶ.... 
ὑπέκειντο MNAECam. 

2 διαστάσεων PLA, -ews VMNDECam. 

8 δὲ om. ECam. 4 ὑπαντητικῶν MNECam. 





1The prorogations, which are determined by the ap- 
proach of the anaeretic place to that of the prorogator, 
or the setting of the prorogator. 


304 


TETRABIBLOS IIT. 10 


them to the 58 times, but if it was measured from 
the occident we would have subtracted them from 70. 

The method of ascertaining the amount of the 
temporal intervals ought in this way consistently to 
be followed. For the rest, we shail determine in 
each of the aforesaid cases of approach or setting,} 
in the order of those that ascend more rapidly, 
those which are destructive, climacteric, or otherwise 
transitional,” according as the meeting is afflicted or 
assisted in the way we have already explained, 
and by means of the particular significance of the 
predictions made from the temporal ingresses of the 
meeting.4 For when at the same time the places 
are afflicted and the transit of the stars relative to 
the ingress of the years of life afflicts the governing 
places, we must understand that death is definitely 
signified ; if one of them is benignant, great and 
dangerous crises; if both are benignant, only 
sluggishness, injuries, or transitory disasters. In 
these matters the special quality is ascertained from 
the familiarity of the occurrent places with the cir- 
cumstances of the nativity. Sometimes, when it is 
doubtful which ought to take over the destroying 

2.1.6. we shall discover whether the periods determined 
by such prorogations as have been described are terminated 
by actual death, some important crisis, or an event of 
less importance. Cf. Hephaestion ap. CCAG, viii. 2, p. 81, 
- + The reference is to what was said earlier in the chapter 
about the influence of the various planets; see pp. 281 ff. 

4 Cf. what is said about the chronocrators in the latter 


part of iv. 10. 
305 


PTOLEMY 


ζομένους ἤτοι ταῖς μάλιστα πρὸς τὰ ἐκβάντα ἤδη τῶν 
συμπτωμάτων συμφωνούσαις καὶ πρὸς τὰ μέλλοντα 
κατακολουθεῖν, ἢ πρὸς ἁπάσας ὡς κατ᾽ ἰσότητα τῆς 
δυνάμεως ἰ ἰσχυούσας παρατηρητικῶς ἔχειν, τὸ μᾶλλον 
καὶ ἧττον αὐτῶν κατὰ τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον ἐπισκεπτο- 
μένους. 


<a> Περὶ μορφῆς καὶ κράσεως 
σωματικῆς 


᾿Εφοδευομένης δὲ καὶ τῆς τοῦ περὶ χρόνων ζωῆς 


142 λόγου πραγματείας, λέγομεν a ἀρχὴν τὴν κατὰ μέρος 


λαβόντες κατὰ τὴν οἰκείαν τάξιν περί τε τῆς μορφῆς 
καὶ τῆς σωματικῆς διατυπώσεως, ἐπειδὴ καὶ τὰ τοῦ 
σώματος τῶν τῆς ψυχῆς ' προτυποῦται κατὰ φύσιν, 
τοῦ μὲν σώματος διὰ τὸ ὑλικώτερον συγγεννω- 
μένας ἔχοντος σχεδὸν τὰς τῶν ἰδιοσυγκράσεων 
φαντασίας, τῆς δὲ ψυχῆς μετὰ ταῦτα καὶ κατὰ 
μικρὸν τὰς ἀπὸ τῆς πρώτης αἰτίας ἐπιτηδειότητας 
ἀναδεικνυούσης, τῶν δ᾽ ἐκτὸς ἔτι μᾶλλον ὕστερον 3 

κατὰ τὸν ἐφεξῆς χρόνον ἐπισυμπιπτόντων. 
ΠΙαρατηρητέον οὖν καθ᾽ ὅλου μὲν τὸν ἀνατολικὸν 
ὁρίζοντα καὶ τοὺς ἐπόντας ἢ τοὺς τὴν οἰκοδεσποτίαν 
αὐτοῦ λαμβάνοντας τῶν πλανωμένων καθ᾽ ὃν εἰρή- 
καμεν τρόπον, ἐπὶ μέρους δὲ καὶ τὴν σελήνην ὥσαύ- 
τως. διὰ γὰρ τῆς τῶν τόπων τούτων ἀμφοτέρων 
καὶ τῆς τῶν οἰκοδεσποτησάντων διαμορφωτικῆς 
φύσεως καὶ τῆς καθ᾽ ἑκάτερον εἶδος συγκράσεως 
1 τῶν τῆς ψυχῆς VPL (τὸν... .) D, πρὸς τὴν ψυχὴν MNAEProe, 


Cam. 
2 ὕστερον VP (εἵστ-) LDProc. ; om. MNAECam, 


306 


TETRABIBLOS III. 10-11 


power, there is nothing to prevent our calculating 
the occourses of each and then either following, in 
predicting the future, the occourses which most agree 
with past events, or observing them all, as having 
equal power, determining as before the question of 


their degree. 
11. Of Bodily Form and Temperament. 


Now that the procedure in the matter of the length 
of life has been explained, we speak about the form 
and character of the body, beginning the detailed 
discussion in the proper order, inasmuch as naturally, 
too, the bodily parts are formed prior to the soul ; 
for the body, because it is more material, carries 
almost from birth the outward appearances of its 
idiosyncrasies, while the soul shows forth the char- 
acters conferred upon it by the first cause only after- 
wards and little by little, and external accidental 
qualities come about still later in time. 

We must, then, in general observe the eastern 
horizon and the planets that are upon it or assume 
its rulership in the way already explained ;! and 
in particular also the moon as well; for it is through 
the formative power of these two places 2 and of their 
rulers and through the mixture of the two kinds,® 

1 See iii. 2 (p. 233). 

2The eastern horizon and the place where the moon is 
found. 

3 Apparently, the influence of the places and that of 


their rulers are the two ‘‘ kinds’’ to which reference is 
made. 


307 


PTOLEMY 


” “ ~ a ~ 
καὶ ἔτι τῆς τῶν συνανατελλόντων αὐτοῖς ἀπλανῶν 
ἀστέρων σχηματογραφίας τὰ περὶ τὰς διατυπώσεις 
τῶν σωμάτων θεωρεῖται, πρωτευόντων μὲν τῇ 
δυνάμει τῶν τὴν οἰκοδεσποτίαν ἐχόντων ἀστέρων, 
>? ~ ~ ~ 
ἐπισυνεργούσης δὲ Kal τῆς τῶν τόπων αὐτῶν 
ἰδιοτροπίας. 

\ / > “ \ e wy ε ~ 

To μέντοι καθ᾽ ἕκαστον, καὶ ws av tis ἁπλῶς 
οὕτως ἀποδοίη, τοῦτον ἔχει τὸν τρόπον. πρῶτον 
γὰρ ἐπὶ τῶν ἀστέρων ὁ μὲν τοῦ Κρόνου ἀνατο- 

143AuKos ὧν τὴν μὲν μορφὴν μελίχροας ποιεῖ καὶ 
εὐεκτικοὺς καὶ μελανότριχας καὶ οὐλοκεφάλους καὶ 
δασυστέρνους ' καὶ μεσοφθάλμους * καὶ συμμέτρους 
τοῖς μεγέθεσι, τῇ δὲ κράσει τὸ μᾶλλον ἔχοντας ἐν 
τῷ ὑγρῷ καὶ ψυχρῷ. δυτικὸς δὲ ὑπάρχων τῇ 
μὲν μορφῇ μέλανας καὶ σπινώδεις καὶ μικροὺς. καὶ 
ἁπλότριχας καὶ ὑποψίλους καὶ ὑπορρύθμους καὶ 

Zz ~ \ 7 A 3 ~ ΝΜ 

μελανοφθάλμους, τῇ δὲ κράσει τὸ 35 μᾶλλον ἔχοντας 
ἐν τῷ ξηρῷ καὶ ψυχρῷ. 

« \ ~ A > J A ΄, 

Ο δὲ τοῦ Διὸς οἰκοδεσποτήσας τοὺς προκειμένους 
τόπους ἀνατολικὸς τῇ μὲν μορφῇ ποιεῖ λευκοὺς ἐπὶ 
τὸ εὔχρουν καὶ μεσότριχας καὶ μεγαλοφθάλμους 4 
καὶ εὐμεγέθεις καὶ ἀξιωματικούς, τῇ δὲ κράσει τὸ 

> - ~ ~ \ 
πλέον ἔχοντας ἐν τῷ θερμῷ καὶ ὑγρῷ. δυτικὸς δὲ 
~ > \ 
ὑπάρχων τῇ μὲν χρόᾳ λευκοὺς μέν, οὐκ ἐπὶ TO 
3 
εὔχρουν δὲ ὁμοίως -ὅ τετανότριχάς τε ἢ καὶ ava- 
/ a 
φαλάκρους ὃ καὶ μεσοφαλάκρους καὶ μετρίους τοῖς 
1 καὶ δασυστέρνους VPLD, ef. Proc. ; om. MNAECam. 
2 μεσοφθάλμους VPLDProc., μεγαλοφθάλμους MNAECam. 
$76 om. MNECam. 


4 μεγαλοφθάλμους VP (-μας) LDE Proc., μελανοφθάλμους 
MNACam. 


308 


TETRABIBLOS III. 11 


and furthermore through the forms of the fixed 
stars that are rising at the same time, that the 
conformation of the body is ascertained ; the ruling 
planets have most power in this matter and the 
special characters of their places aid them. 

The detailed account, then, as one might report it 
in simple terms, is this: First, among the planets, 
Saturn, if he is in the orient, makes his subjects 
in appearance dark-skinned, robust, black-haired, 
curly-haired, hairy-chested, with eyes of moderate 
size, of middling stature, and in temperament hay- 
ing an excess of the moist and cold. If Saturn is 
setting, in appearance he makes them dark, slender, 
small, straight-haired, with little hair on the body, 
rather graceful, and black-eyed; in temperament, 
sharing most in the cold and dry. 

Jupiter, as the ruler of the aforesaid regions, when 
he is rising, makes his subjects in appearance light of 
skin, but in such a way as to have a good colour, 
with moderately curling hair and large eyes, tall, and 
commanding respect ; in temperament they exceed 
in the hot and the moist. When Jupiter is setting, 
he makes his subjects light, to be sure, but not as 
before, in such a way as to give them a good colour, 
and with lank hair or even bald in front and on the 





5 δὲ post ὁμοίως add. MNECam. 

5 ἀναφαλάκρους Proc., ἀνωφαλάκρους Cam.*, ἀναφαλανταίους 
VD, ἀναφαντολιακοὺς P, ἀναφανταλιαίους L, ἀναφαλάνδους 
MNAECam.!. 


309 


PTOLEMY 


μεγέθεσι, TH δὲ κράσει τὸ πλέον ἔχοντας ἐν TH 
ὑγρῷ. 

ὋὉ δὲ τοῦ Ἄρεως ὁ ὁμοίως * ἀνατολικὸς τῇ μὲν μορφῇ 
ποιεῖ λευκερύθρους καὶ εὐμεγέθεις καὶ εὐέκτας καὶ 
γλαυκοφθάλμους καὶ δασεῖς καὶ μεσότριχας, τῇ δὲ 
κράσει τὸ πλέον ἔχοντας ἐν τῷ θερμῷ καὶ ξηρῷ. 
δυτικὸς δὲ ὑ ὑπάρχων τῇ μὲν μορφῇ ἐρυθροὺς ἁπλῶς 
καὶ μετρίους τοῖς μεγέθεσι καὶ μικροφθάλμους ® 


Ι44 καὶ ὑποψίλους καὶ ξανθότριχας καὶ τετανούς, τῇ 


δὲ κράσει τὸ πλέον ἔχοντας ἐν τῷ ξηρῷ. 
‘O δὲ τῆς ᾿Αφροδίτης τὰ παραπλήσια ποιεῖ τῷ 
ῆς ᾿Αφροδίτη ραπλή ῖ 
τοῦ Διός, ἐπὶ μέντοι τὸ εὐμορφότερον καὶ ἐπι- 
χαριτώτερον καὶ γυναικοπρεπωδέστερον καὶ θηλυ- 
μορφότερον ὃ καὶ εὐχυμότερον καὶ τρυφερώτερον. 
ἰδίως δὲ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς ποιεῖ μετὰ τοῦ εὐπρεποῦς 
ὑποχαροπούς. 

Ὃ δὲ τοῦ “Ἑρμοῦ. ἀνατολικὸς τῇ μὲν μορφῇ ποιεῖ 
μελίχροας καὶ συμμέτρους τοῖς μεγέθεσι καὶ εὐρύθ- 
μους καὶ μικροφθάλμους καὶ μεσότριχας, τῇ δὲ 
κράσει τὸ πλέον ἔχοντας ἐν τῷ θερμῷ" δυτικὸς δὲ 
ὑπάρχων τῇ μὲν μορφῇ λευκοὺς μέν, οὐκ ἐπὶ τὸ 
εὔχρουν δὲ ὁμοίως, τετανότριχας,, μελανοχλώρους 
καὶ omwovs® καὶ ἰσχνοὺς καὶ λοξοφθάλμους te? 
καὶ αἰγοποὺς ὃ καὶ ὑπερύθρους, τῇ δὲ κράσει τὸ 
πλέον ἔχοντας ἐν τῷ ξηρῷ. 


+ ὁμοίως VPLD, om. MNAECam. 
2 μικροφθάλμους WE ate μικροκεφάλους MNACam. 


" καὶ θηλυμορφότερον (or ἜΝ τ τε ) VPLDProce., καὶ εὐσχη- 
μονέστερον MNAECam. 


4 λευκοὺς... τετανότριχας VPLDProc., om. MNAECam. 
310 





TETRABIBLOS III. 11 


crown, and of average stature ; in temperament they 
have an excess of the moist. 

Similarly, Mars, when rising, makes his subjects in 
appearance red and white of complexion, tall and 
robust, gray-eyed, with thick hair, somewhat curly, 
and in temperament showing an excess of the warm 
and dry. When he is setting, he makes them in 
appearance simply ruddy, of middle height, with 
small eyes, not much hair on the body, and straight 
yellow hair; their temperament exceeds in the dry. 

Venus has effects similar to Jupiter’s, but is apt to 
make her subjects more shapely, graceful, womanish, 
effeminate in figure, plump, and luxurious. On her 
own proper account she makes the eyes bright as well 
as beautiful. 

Mercury, in the orient, makes his subjects in ap- 
pearance sallow, of moderate height, graceful, with 
small eyes and moderately curling hair; in tem- 
perament, showing an excess of the warm. In the 
occident he makes them, in appearance, of light 
but not of good colouring, with straight hair and 
olive complexion, lean and spare, with glancing, 
brilliant eyes,) and somewhat ruddy ; in tempera- 
ment they exceed in the dry. 


1 The text is perhaps corrupt ; αἰγοπός seems to be other- 
wise unknown. 


® μελανοχλώρους PLProc., μελαγχλώρους VD, pedixpoas 
MNAECam. 

ὁ σπινοὺς PLEProc., ampovs VD, σπανοὺς MNACam. 

7 λοξοφθάλμους τε PL, ληξοφθάλμους τε V, ξηροφθάλμους τε 
D, κοινοφθάλμους Ν, κυνοφθάλμους Cam.}, κοιλοφθάλμους 
MAECam.? 

8 αἰγοποὺς P (-wz-) LProc., αἰγόπλους VD, αἰγόποδας 
MNAECam.!, αἰγίλοπας Cam.? 

311 


PTOLEMY 


Συνεργοῦσι δ᾽ ἑκάστῳ τούτων σχηματισθέντες, 
ὁ μὲν ἥλιος ἐπὶ τὸ μεγαλοπρεπέστερον καὶ εὐεκτικώ- 
τερον, ἡ δὲ σελήνη, καὶ μάλισθ᾽ ὅταν τὴν ἀπόρροιαν 
αὐτῆς ἐπέχωσι, καθ᾽ ὅλου μὲν ἐπὶ τὸ συμμετρώτερον 
καὶ ἰσχνότερον καὶ τῇ κράσει ὑγρότερον, κατὰ μέρος 
ΕῚ > a ~ ~ 
δ᾽ ἀναλόγως τῇ τῶν φωτισμῶν ἰδιότητι κατὰ τὴν ἐν 
5 ~ ~ ~ 
ἀρχῇ τῆς συντάξεως ἐκτεθειμένην κρᾶσιν." 

,’ὔ A > [2 ta A » A / 

Πάλιν δὲ Kal? ὅλου ἑῷοι μὲν ὄντες καὶ φάσεις 
ποιησάμενοι μεγαλοποιοῦσι τὰ σώματα, στηρίζον- 
τες δὲ τὸ πρῶτον ἰσχυρὰ καὶ εὔτονα, προηγούμενοι 

A 5 ͵ὔ \ A / , > ,ὔ 
145 δὲ ἀσύμμετρα, τὸ δὲ δεύτερον στηρίζοντες ἀσθενέσ- 

τερα, δύνοντες δὲ ἀδοξα μὲν παντελῶς, οἰστικὰ δὲ 
κακουχιῶν καὶ συνοχῶν.5 

Καὶ τῶν τόπων δὲ αὐτῶν πρὸς τοὺς 'σχηματισ- 
μοὺς μάλιστα τῶν διατυπώσεων καὶ τὰς κράσεις, 
ε ΕΙΣ 4 3 > a A / 
ws ἔφαμεν, συνεργούντων,) καθ᾽ ὅλου δὲ πάλιν 
τὸ μὲν ἀπὸ ἐαρινῆς ἰσημερίας ἐπὶ θερινὴν τροπὴν 
τεταρτημόριον ποιεῖ εὔχροας εὐμεγέθεις εὐέκτας 
εὐοφθάλμους, τὸ πλέον ἔχοντας ἐν τῷ ὑγρῷ 


‘kata . . . κρᾶσιν VPLD, καθ᾽ ὡς περὶ κράσεως ἐν ἀρχῇ τῆς 
συντάξεως ἔφαμεν Proc., καθάπερ ἐν ἀρχῇ τῆς συντάξεως ἐξεθέ- 
μεθα MNAECam. 

2 καὶ συνοχῶν libri, cf. Proc. ; om. Cam. 

8 συνεργούτων VPLDProe., συνοικειούυντων MNECam., 
συνοικειούντων καὶ συνεργούντων Α. 





1 See 1. 24. 

2 Probably a reference to the last paragraph of i. 10, but 
the anonymous commentator (p. 136, ed. Wolf) seems to 
think it refers to i. 8. 

’The commentator’s (l.c.) explanation of this phrase 
is “being oriental” (ἀνατολικοὶ τυχόντες) The φάσεις, 


312 


TETRABIBLOS III. 11 


The luminaries assist each of these when they bear 
an aspect to them, the sun tending to a more im- 
pressive and robust effect, and the moon, especially 
when she is separating ! from the planets, in general 
tending toward better proportion and greater s!ender- 
ness, and toward a more moist temperament ; but in 
particular cases her effect is proportioned to the 
special quality of her illumination, in accordance 
with the system of intermixture explained in the 
beginning of the treatise.” 

Again, generally, when the planets are morning 
stars and make an appearance,’ they make the 
body large; at their first station, powerful and 
muscular; when they are moving forward,’ not 
well-proportioned ; at their second station, rather 
weak ; and at setting, entirely without repute but 
able to bear hardship and oppression. 

Likewise their places, as we have said,° take an im- 
portant part in the formation of the bodily characters 
and temperaments. In general terms, once more, the 
quadrant from the spring equinox to the summer 
solstice makes the subjects well-favoured in com- 
plexion, stature, robustness, and eyes, and exceeding 


“appearances,” “phases,” are the positions of the 
planets with respect to the sun. 

4 Strangely enough, according to the ancient terminology, 
when the planets are ‘“‘ moving forward” (in the direction 
of the diurnal movement, “ in the direction of the leading 
signs,’ or east to west) they are “retreating ”’ (ἀναποδί- 
Covres) with respect to their (west to east) motion in their 
own orbits ; cf. Bouché-Leclereq, p. 429, 1 (on this passage) 
and p. 117, 1. The commentator (l.c.) here says, τουτέστιν, 
ἀφετικοί (probably ἀφαιρετικοί should be read). 

° He refers to places in the zodiac and to i. 10. 


313 


PTOLEMY 


A ~ A > > \ ~ ~ , 
καὶ θερμῷ τὸ δ᾽ ἀπὸ θερινῆς τροπῆς μέχρι 
μετοπωρινῆς ἰσημερίας μεσόχροας συμμέτρους 
τοῖς μεγέθεσιν εὐέκτας μεγαλοφθάλμους 1 δασεῖς 
οὐλότριχας, τὸ πλέον ἔχοντας ἐν τῷ θερμῷ καὶ 
ξηρῷ τὸ δ᾽ ἀπὸ μετοπωρινῆς ἰσημερίας μέχρι 
χειμερινῆς τροπῆς μελίχροας ἰσχνοὺς σπινώδεις 

θ 4 2 , > θ LA A Xr , Μ 
παθηνοὺς * μεσότριχας εὐοφθάλμους, τὸ πλέον ἔχον- 
τας ἐν τῷ ξηρῷ καὶ “Ψυχρῷ. τὸ δ᾽ ἀπὸ χειμερινῆς 
τροπῆς ἕως ἐαρινῆς ἰσημερίας μελανόχροας συμμέτ- 
ρους τοῖς μεγέθεσι τετανότριχας ὑποψίλους ὑπορ- 
ρύθμους 3 τὸ πλέον ἔχοντας ἐν τῷ ὑγρῷ καὶ ψυχρῷ. 

Κατὰ μέρος δὲ τὰ μὲν ἀνθρωποειδῆ τῶν ζῳδίων 
τῶν τε ἐν τῷ ζωδιακῷ καὶ τῶν ἐκτὸς εὔρυθμα καὶ 
σύμμετρα τοῖς σχήμασι τὰ σώματα κατασκευάζει. 
τὰ δ᾽ ἑτερόμορφα Μμετασχηματίζει πρὸς τὸ τῆς 
ἰδίας μορφώσεως οἰκεῖον τὰς τοῦ σώματος συμ- 

146 μετρίας καὶ κατά τινα λόγον ἀφομοιοῖ τὰ οἰκεῖα 
μέρη τοῖς ἑαυτῶν, ἤτοι ἐπὶ τὸ μεῖζον καὶ ἔλαττον ἢ 
ἐπὶ τὸ ἰσχυρότερον καὶ ἀσθενέστερον ὁ ἢ ἐπὶ τὸ 
εὐρυθμώτερον καὶ ἀρρυθμώτερον +> ἐπὶ τὸ μεῖζον 

\ ε / - ¢ / Ag 6 / Vyre 
μὲν ὡς λόγου ἕνεκεν 6 A€wv καὶ ἡ Παρθένος καὶ 6 
Τοξότης, ἐπὶ τὸ ἔλαττον δὲ ὡς οἱ ᾿Ιχθῦς καὶ 6 Kap- 

, \ « Ai / \ tA « 6 ~ K; ~ 
κίνος καὶ ὃ Αἰγόκερως. καὶ πάλιν ws ὃ τοῦ Κριοῦ 
καὶ τοῦ Ταύρου καὶ τοῦ Λέοντος τὰ μὲν ἄνω καὶ 
ἐμπρόσθια ἐπὶ τὸ εὐεκτικώτερον, τὰ δὲ κάτω καὶ 
> / 93.8 A > / \ > > , e ‘ 
ὀπίσθια ἐπὶ τὸ ἀσθενέστερον " τὸ δ᾽ ἐναντίον ὡς TO 

'‘ μεγαλοφθάλμους VDProc., μελανοφθάλμους MNAECam., 
ὑοφθάλμους P, εὐθάλμους L. 


5 παθηνοὺς VD, zafwods PL, νοσεροὺς Proc.; σπανοὺς 
NACam., σπανθινοὺς ME. 


314 


TETRABIBLOS III. 11 


in the moist and warm. The quadrant from the 
summer solstice to the autumn equinox produces 
individuals with moderately good complexion and 
moderate height, robust, with large eyes and thick 
and curly hair, exceeding in the warm and dry. The 
quadrant from the autumn equinox to the winter 
solstice makes them sallow, spare, slender, sickly, 
with moderately curling hair and good eyes, exceeding 
in the dry and cold. The quadrant from the winter 
solstice to the spring equinox produces individuals of 
dark complexion, moderate height, straight hair, with 
little hair on their bodies, somewhat graceful, and 
exceeding in the cold and moist. 

In particular, the constellations both within and 
outside of the zodiac which are of human shape pro- 
duce bodies which are harmonious of movement and 
well-proportioned ; those however which are of other 
than human shape modify the bodily proportions to 
correspond to their own peculiarities, and after a 
fashion make the corresponding parts like their own, 
larger and smaller, or stronger and weaker, or more 
and less graceful. For example, Leo, Virgo, and 
Sagittarius make them larger; others, as Pisces, 
Cancer, and Capricorn, smaller. And again, as in 
the case of Aries, Taurus, and Leo, the upper and 
fore parts make them more robust and the lower 
and hind parts weaker. Conversely the fore parts of 


8 ὑπορ(ρ)ύθμους VNMADE, ὑποερύθμους PL, εὐαρμόστους 
Proc., om. Cam. 

4 Post ἀσθενέστερον add. ἢ ἐπὶ τὸ VPLD, καὶ MNAECam. 

δ καὶ ἀρρυθμότερον ἘΠ; ἀρυθμώτερον (ἀριθ- Li) καὶ εὐρυθ- 
μώτερον PL; cf. Ῥτοο. ; καὶ ἀρρ. om. VMNADCam. 

ὁ ἐπὶ post ὡς add. MNAECam. 


315 


PTOLEMY 


~ “- 4 
τοῦ Τοξότου καὶ τοῦ Lkopriov καὶ τῶν Διδύμων 
‘ \ > / θ > \ Ye? / 1 ‘\ A 4 / 
τὰ μὲν ἐμπρόσθια ἐπὶ τὸ layvorepov,! τὰ δὲ ὀπίσθια 
> \ A > / c / \ ¢ ε A ,ὔ 
ἐπὶ τὸ εὐεκτικώτερον - ὁμοίως δὲ ws ἡ μὲν Παρθέ- 
\ « \ Ve / 9'. Ἢ] A 7, 
vos καὶ at Χηλαὶ καὶ ὁ Τοξότης ἐπὶ τὸ σύμμετρον 
‘ ” « A / \ ς» ~ \ ε 
καὶ εὔρυθμον, ὁ δὲ Σ'κορπίος καὶ οἱ ᾿Ιχθῦς καὶ ὁ 
Ταῦρος ἐπὶ τὸ ἄρρυθμον καὶ ἀσύμμετρον, καὶ ἐπὶ 
τῶν ἄλλων ὁμοίως. ἅπερ ἅπαντα συνεφορῶντας 
> a 
Kal συνεπικίρναντας 5 προσήκει τὴν EK τῆς κράσεως 
συναγομένην ἰδιοτροπίαν περί τε τὰς μορφώσεις καὶ 
τὰς κράσεις τῶν σωμάτων καταστοχάζεσθαι. 


<p. Περὶ σινῶν καὶ παθῶν 
σωματικῶν 


“Επομένου δὲ τούτοις τοῦ περὶ τὰ σωματικὰ σίνη 
/ a 
τε καὶ πάθη λόγου, συνάψομεν αὐτοῖς κατὰ τὸ ὃ 
΄ ΄- SQ ͵ , 
ἑξῆς τὴν κατὰ τοῦτο τὸ εἶδος συνισταμένην ἐπί- 
> ~ 
σκεψιν ἔχουσαν οὕτως. καὶ ἐνταῦθα yap* πρὸς 
μὲν τὴν καθ᾽ ὅλου διάληψιν ἀποβλέπειν δεῖ πρὸς 
~ / > 
τὰ τοῦ ὁρίζοντος δύο κέντρα, τουτέστι TO ἀνατέλλον 
\ \ 4 tad \ / \ 7 > A 
147 καὶ τὸ δύνον, μάλιστα δὲ πρός τε TO δύνον αὐτὸ 
3 / ~ 
καὶ πρὸς TO προδύνον, ὃ ἐστιν ἀσύνδετον τῷ 
~ / A 
ἀνατολικῷ κέντρῳ, καὶ παρατηρεῖν τοὺς κακω- 
A or 3 7 ΄ > / A 
τικοὺς τῶν ἀστέρων πῶς ἐσχηματισμένοι πρὸς 
αὐτὰ τυγχάνουσιν. ἐὰν γὰρ πρὸς τὰς ἐπαναφερο- 
~ Ss < ~ 
μένας μοίρας τῶν εἰρημένων τόπων ὦσιν ἑστῶτες 


1 ἰσχνότερον VPA, τῶν ἰσχνοτέρων L, ἰσχυρότερον 1), ἄσθε- 
νέστερον MNECam.Proc. 

2 συνεπικίρναντας VD ; cf. Proc. ; συνεπικρίνοντας PLMNAE 
Cam. 


316 


TETRABIBLOS III. 11-12 


Sagittarius, Scorpio, and Gemini cause slenderness 
and the hind parts robustness. Similarly too Virgo, 
Libra, and Sagittarius tend to make them well- 
proportioned and graceful, while Scorpio, Pisces, 
and Taurus bring about awkwardness and dispro- 
portion. So it is with the rest, and it is fitting 
that we should observe and combine all these things 
and make a conjecture as to the character which 
results from the mixture, with regard both to the 
furm and to the temperament of the body. 


12. Of Bodily Injuries and Diseases. 


Since the subject which comes next is that which 
treats of the injuries and diseases of the body, we shall 
attach here in regular order the method of investiga- 
tion devised for this form of query. It is as follows. 
In this case also, to gain a general comprehension, it 
is necessary to look to the two angles of the horizon, 
that is, the orient and the occident, and especially to 
the occident itself and the sign preceding it, which 
is disjunct | from the oriental angle. We must also 
observe what aspect the maleficent planets bear to 
them. Forif they, one or both of them, are stationed 
against the ascending degrees of the aforesaid 


1See i. 16; this sign is the fifth from the ascendant and 
is the so-called sixth house. 


8 αὐτοῖς κατὰ τὸ VPL (καὶ τὸ) ADE; cf. Proc.; om. 
NCam. 

4 γὰρ VPLADE, ἐν M, om. NCam. 

5 προδύνον P, δύνον VMD, om. LE, τὸ πρὸ δύσεως Proc., 
ἡγούμενον NACam, 


317 


PTOLEMY 


ἤτοι σωματικῶς ἢ τετραγωνικῶς ἢ καὶ κατὰ διά- 
μετρον, ἤτοι ὁπότερος αὐτῶν ἢ καὶ ἀμφότεροι, σίνη 
καὶ πάθη σωματικὰ περὶ τοὺς γεννωμένους ὑπονοη- 
τέον, μάλιστα δ᾽ ἂν καὶ τῶν φωτῶν ἤτοι τὸ ἕτερον 
ἢ καὶ ἀμφότερα κεκεντρωμένα καθ᾽ ὃν εἰρήκαμεν 
τρόπον τυγχάνῃ ἢ ἅμα ἢ κατὰ διάμετρον. τότε 
γὰρ οὐ μόνον ἐὰν ἐπαναφέρηταί τις τῶν κακοποιῶν, 
ἀλλὰ κἂν προαναφέρηται τῶν φωτῶν, αὐτὸς κεκεν- 
τρωμένος, ἱκανός ἐστι διαθεῖναί τι τῶν ἐκκειμένων 
ὁποῖον ἂν οἵ τε τοῦ ὁρίζοντος τόποι καὶ οἱ τῶν 
ζῳδίων ὑποφαίνωσι σίνος ἢ πάθος, καὶ αἵ τῶν 
ἀστέρων φύσεις τῶν τε κακούντων καὶ τῶν κακου- 
μένων καὶ ἔτι τῶν συσχηματιζομένων αὐτοῖς. τά 
τε γὰρ μέρη τῶν ζῳδίων ἑκάστου τὰ περιέχοντα 
τὸ ἀδικούμενον μέρος τοῦ ὁρίζοντος δηλώσει τὸ 
μέρος τοῦ σώματος περὶ ὃ ἔσται τὸ αἴτιον καὶ 
πότερον σίνος ἢ πάθος ἢ καὶ ἀμφότερα τὸ δηλού- 
μενον μέρος ἐπιδέξασθαι δυνατόν, αἵ τε τῶν 
ἀστέρων φύσεις τὰ εἴδη καὶ τὰς αἰτίας τῶν συμ- 
πτωμάτων ποιοῦσιν, ἐπειδὴ τῶν κυριωτάτων τοῦ 
148 ἀνθρώπου μερῶν ὁ μὲν τοῦ Κρόνου κύριός ἐστιν 
ἀκοῶν τε δεξιῶν καὶ σπληνὸς καὶ κύστεως καὶ 
φλέγματος καὶ ὀστῶν : ὁ δὲ τοῦ Διὸς ἁφῆς τε καὶ 
πνεύμονος καὶ ἀρτηριῶν καὶ σπέρματος : ὁ δὲ τοῦ 
Ἄρεως ἀκοῶν εὐωνύμων καὶ νεφρῶν καὶ φλεβῶν 
καὶ μορίων - 6 δὲ ἥλιος ὁράσεως καὶ ἐγκεφάλου 
καὶ καρδίας καὶ νεύρων καὶ τῶν δεξιῶν πάντων " 
ὁ δὲ τῆς ᾿Αφροδίτης ὀσφρήσεώς τε καὶ ἥπατος καὶ 


1 ποιοῦσιν VPLADProc., om. MNECam. 
318 


TETRABIBLOS III. 12 


places, either bodily on them or quartile or in op- 
position to them, we must conclude that the subjects 
born will suffer bodily injuries and disease, especially 
if either one or both of the luminaries as well chance 
to be angular in the manner described,! or in op- 
position. For in that case not only if one of the 
maleficent planets is rising after the luminaries, but 
even if it is rising before them and is itself angular, 
it has power to produce one of the aforesaid injuries 
or diseases of such kind as the places of the horizon 
and of the signs may indicate, likewise what is in- 
dicated by the natures of the afflicting and the 
afflicted 5 planets, and moreover by those that bear 
an aspect toward them. For the parts of the in- 
dividual signs of the zodiac which surround the 
afflicted portion of the horizon will indicate the 
part of the body which the portent will concern, and 
whether the part indicated can suffer an injury or 
a disease or both, and the natures of the planets 
produce the kinds and causes of the events that 
are to occur. For, of the most important parts of 
the human body, Saturn is lord® of the right ear, 
the spleen, the bladder, the phlegm, and the bones ; 
Jupiter is lord of touch, the lungs, arteries, and 
semen; Mars of the left ear, kidneys, veins, and 
genitals; the sun of the sight, the brain, heart, 
sinews and all the right-hand parts; Venus of 


1J.e. in either the first or seventh house (orient or 
occident), and not at either of the other two angles. 

* See on iii. 9 (p. 267). 

% A planetary melothesia (distribution of parts of the 
body to the planets) follows. On such cf. Boll-Bezold- 
Gundel, p. 138, and P. Mich. 149, col. ii., 31 ff. (University 
of Michigan Studies, Humanistic Series, vol. xl.). 


319 


PTOLEMY 


~ ¢ \ Pee ~ / ‘ ‘ \ 
capkav 6 δὲ τοῦ “Ἑρμοῦ λόγου καὶ διανοίας Kat 
᾽ὕὔ \ ~ \ ΄“ « \ ’ὔ 
γλώσσης καὶ χολῆς καὶ ἕδρας. ἡ δὲ σελήνη 
γεύσεώς τε καὶ καταπόσεως καὶ στομάχου καὶ 
κοιλίας καὶ μήτρας καὶ τῶν εὐωνύμων πάντων. 
» \ - ΒΡ, \ \ U \ « Dita A 
ἔστι δὲ τῶν καθ᾽ ὅλου καὶ τὰ σίνη μὲν ὡς ἐπὶ TO 
πολὺ συμπίπτειν ἀνατολικῶν ὄντων τῶν τὸ αἴτιον 
ποιούντων κακοποιῶν, πάθη δὲ τοὐναντίον δυτικῶν 
αὐτῶν ὑπαρχόντων. ἐπειδήπερ καὶ διώρισται 
τούτων ἑκάτερον τῷ τὸ μὲν σίνος ἅπαξ διατιθέναι 
καὶ μὴ διατείνουσαν ἔχειν τὴν ἀλγηδόνα, τὸ δὲ 
~ > ~ a 
πάθος ἤτοι συνεχῶς ἢ ἐπιληπτικῶς τοῖς πάσχουσιν 
ἐπισκήπτειν. 
\ \ \ \ ͵΄ > Veerin \ 
Πρὸς δὲ τὴν κατὰ μέρος ἐπιβολὴν ἤδη τινὰ 
? 
παρατηρήσεως ἔτυχεν ἐξαιρέτου σινωτικά TE Kal 
~ \ ~ 
παθητικὰ σχήματα, διὰ τῶν ὡς ἐπὶ πᾶν κατὰ 
΄ 
τὰς ὁμοιοσχήμονας θέσεις παρακολουθούντων συμ- 
πτωμάτων. πηρώσεις γὰρ ὄψεως ἀποτελοῦνται 
~ ~ « 
κατὰ μὲν τὸν ἕτερον τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν ὅταν τε ἡ 
σελήνη καθ᾽ αὑτὴν ἐπὶ τῶν προειρημένων οὖσα 
/ δ) ͵ὔ a“ / ΄ 
149 κεντρὼν ἢ συνοδεύουσα n πανσεληνιάζουσα τυχῇ;: 
\ a 31} Cry 2 \ > \ ‘ ὅλ 
καὶ ὅταν ἐφ᾽ ἑτέρουΣ μὲν ἢ πρὸς τὸν ἥλιον 
σχήματος τῶν λόγον ὃ ἐχόντων, συνάπτῃ δέ τινι 
τῶν νεφελοειδῶν ἐν τῷ ζωδιακῷ συστροφῶν, ὡς 
τῷ νεφελίῳ" τοῦ Καρκίνου καὶ τῇ Πλειάδι τοῦ 
Ταύρου καὶ τῇ ἀκίδι τοῦ Τοξότου καὶ τῷ κέντρῳ 
od a / ’, 
τοῦ Σκορπίου καὶ τοῖς περὶ τὸν ΠΙ]λόκαμον μέρεσι 
“ ,ὔ δ ~ / a ¢ / \ 
τοῦ Λέοντος ἢ τῇ καλπίδι τοῦ ‘Ydpoxdou: καὶ 


καθ᾽ (ἐ)αυτὴν VPADEProc., καθ᾽ ἑαυτοὺς L, κατ᾽ αὐτὴν 
MNCam.; post haee verba add. ἐκτροπὴν Cam., om. libri 
Proc. 


320 


TETRABIBLOS III. 12 


smell, the liver, and the flesh; Mercury of speech 
and thought, the tongue, the bile, and the buttocks ; 
the moon of taste and drinking, the stomach, belly, 
womb, and all the left-hand parts. 

For the most part it is a general principle that 
injuries occur when the significant maleficent planets 
are oriental, and diseases, conversely, when they are 
setting. The reason for this is that these two 
things are distinguished thus—an injury affects the 
subject once for all and does not involve lasting 
pain, while disease bears upon the patient either 
continuously or in sudden attacks. 

For the purpose of ascertaining particulars, cer- 
tain configurations significant of injury or sickness 
have been specially observed, by means of the events 
which generally accompany such positions of the 
stars. For blindness in one eye is brought about 
when the moon by itself is upon the aforesaid angles, 
or is in conjunction, or is full, and when it is in 
another aspect that bears a relation to the sun, but 
applies to one of the star clusters in the zodiac, as 
for example to the cluster in Cancer, and to the 
Pleiades of Taurus, to the arrow point of Sagittarius, 
to the sting of Scorpio, to the parts of Leo around 
the Coma Berenices, or to the pitcher of Aquarius ; 


3 ἑτέρου VPLD, ἑκατέρυ MNAECam.; sequitur in 
MNACam. τῶν, PL μὲν, VD μὲν Fj, E μὲν τῶν. 

3 τῶν λόγον κτλ. ME, τῶν λόγων VD, τὸν λόγον PL, λόγον 
NACam. 

‘ συνάπτῃ δὲ PEProc., συνάπτει δὲ VLMD, καὶ ὅταν συνάπτῃ 
NA (-ηται A). 

ὃ τῷ νεφελίῳ VMNADEProc., τῶν ἐφελίων P, τῶν νεφελίων 
L, om. Cam. 

ὃ τοῦ Ταύρου VADProc., om. PLMNECam. 


321 


PTOLEMY 


ὅταν ὁ τοῦ "Apews ἢ Kai ὁ τοῦ Κρόνου ἐπικέντρῳ 
οὔσῃ αὐτῇ καὶ ἀποκρουστικῇ ἀνατολικοὶ αὐτοὶ 
ὄντες ἐπιφέρωνται ἢ πάλιν τοῦ ἡλίου αὐτοὶ ἐπί- 
κεντροι ὄντες προαναφέρωνται. ἐὰν δὲ ἀμφοτέροις 
ἅμα τοῖς φωσὶν ἤτοι κατὰ τὸ αὐτὸ ζῴδιον ἢ καὶ 
κατὰ διάμετρον, ὡς εἴπομεν, συσχηματισθῶσιν, ἑῷοι 
μὲν τῷ ἡλίῳ ὄντες, τῇ δὲ σελήνῃ ἑσπέριοι, περὶ 
ἀμῴρπερους τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς τὸ αἴτιον ποιήσουσιν. 
ὁ μὲν yap | τοῦ Ἄρεως ἀπὸ πληγῆς ἢ ἢ κρούσματος 
ἢ σιδήρου ἢ κατακαύματος ποιεῖ τὰς πηρώσεις, 
μετὰ δὲ “Ἑρμοῦ συσχηματισθεὶς ἐν παλαίστραις 
καὶ γυμνασίοις ἢ κακουργῶν ἐφόδοις. 6 δὲ τοῦ 
Κρόνου δι᾿ ὑποχύσεων ἢ ψύξεων ἢ ἀπογλαυκώσεων 
καὶ τῶν τοιούτων - πάλιν ἐὰν ὁ τῆς ‘Adpodityns ἐπί 
τινος ἢ τῶν προειρημένων κέντρων, μάλιστα δὲ 
ἐπὶ τοῦ δύνοντος, τῷ μὲν τοῦ Κρόνου συνὼν ἢ καὶ 
συσχηματιζόμενος ἢ ἐνηλλαχὼς τοὺς τόπους, ὑπὸ 
δὲ τοῦ Ἄρεως καθυπερτερούμενος ἢ διαμετρούμενος, 
οἱ μὲν ἄνδρες ἄγονοι γίνονται, αἵ δὲ γυναῖκες 
ἐκτρωσμοῖς ἢ ὠμοτοκίαις ἢ καὶ ἐμβρυοτομίαις * 
150 περικυλίονται,32 μάλιστα δὲ ἐν Καρκίνῳ καὶ Παρ- 
θένῳ καὶ Ailyoképwrt.4 κἂν ἡ σελήνη ἀπ᾽ 
ἀνατολῆς τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως συνάπτῃ, ἐὰν δὲ καὶ 
τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ κατὰ τὸ αὐτὸ συσχηματισθῇ 
σὺν τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου, τοῦ τοῦ “Apews πάλιν καθ- 
υπερτεροῦντος ἢ διαμετροῦντος, εὐνοῦχοι ἢ ἕρμα- 


1 μὲν yap VD, μὲν οὖν PLProc., μὲ MNAECam. 
3 ἐμβρυοτομίαις VNADECam.!, ἐμβρυμοτομίαις M; ef. τὰ 
ἔμβρυα. .. κατακοπήσεται Proc. ; ἐμβρυοτοκίαις Cam.*, om. 


PE: 
322 


TETRABIBLOS IIT. 12 


and whenever Mars or Saturn moves toward the 
moon, when it is angular and waning and they 
are rising, or again when they ascend before the 
sun, being themselves angular. But if they are in 
aspect with both luminaries at once, either in the 
same sign or in opposition, as we said, morning 
stars with respect to the sun and evening stars to 
the moon, they will affect both eyes; for Mars 
brings about blindness from a blow, a thrust, iron, 
or burning; when he has Mercury in aspect, in 
palaestras and gymnasiums or by felonious attack. 
Saturn causes it by suffusion, cold, glaucoma, and 
the like. Again if Venus is upon one of the afore- 
said angles, particularly the occident, if she is 
joined with Saturn or is in aspect with him or has 
exchanged houses, and is inferior to Mars or has 
him in opposition, the men who are born are 
sterile, and the women are subject to miscarriages, 
premature births, or even to embryotomies, par- 
ticularly in Cancer, Virgo, and Capricorn. And 
if the moon at rising applies to Mars, and if she 
also bears the same aspect to Mercury that Saturn 
does, while Mars again is elevated above her or is 
in opposition, the children born are eunuchs or 


1Certain MSS. here add, “when the moon applies to 
the star clusters she incapacitates the eyes,’’ which, as 
Camerarius notes in the margin of the second edition, 
is redundant here. 


3 περικυλίονται VNMDECam.', περικηλύονται P, παρα- 
κηλύονται L, ἐπικυλίονται A, κηλοῦνται Cam.? 

4Post Alyoxépwr. add. καὶ τοῖς νεφελοειδέσι συνάπτουσα 
ὀφθαλμὸν πηροῖ ἡ σελήνη VNADCam. (in mg. *notatum et 
haec redundant in hoc loco Cam.”); om, PLMEProc. 


323 


PTOLEMY 


φρόδιτοι ἢ ἢ ἄτρωγλοι καὶ ἄτρητοι" γίνονται. τούτων 
δὲ οὕτως ἐχόντων, ἐπὰν καὶ ὁ ἥλιος συσχηματισθῇ, 
τῶν μὲν φωτῶν καὶ τοῦ τῆς ᾿Αφροδίτης ἠρρενω- 
> A ~ 4 
μένων, ἀποκρουστικῆς δὲ τῆς σελήνης οὔσης καὶ 
~ ~ a >? 
τῶν κακοποιῶν ἐν ταῖς ἐπαναφερομέναις 3 μοίραις 
ἐπιφερομένων, οἱ μὲν ἄνδρες ἀπόκοποι ἢ τὰ μόρια 
> ~ 
σεσινωμένοι γίνονται Kal μάλιστα ev Κριῷ καὶ 
/ \ / \ Ai / 3 ‘ ‘VS / 
Aovtt καὶ Skopriw καὶ Αἰγόκερῳ 3 καὶ ‘YSpoxow, 
€ \ “- ", \ “΄“ sgh. A 999 
αἱ δὲ γυναῖκες ἄτοκοι καὶ στεῖραι. ἐνίοτε δὲ οὐδ 
ἀσινεῖς ταῖς ὄψεσιν οἱ τοιοῦτοι διαμένουσιν, ἐμ- 
ποδίζονται δὲ τὴν γλῶτταν καὶ γίνονται τραυλοὶ 
ἢ μογιλάλοι ὅσοι τὸν τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ τὸν τοῦ 
“Ερμοῦ συνόντας ἐπὶ τῶν εἰρημένων κέντρων 
μὴ “ OVA 1A δ᾽ nn \ ὃ ‘ > ¢ 
ἔχουσι τῷ ἡλίῳ, μάλιστα δ᾽ ἂν καὶ δυτικὸς ἢ ὁ 
τοῦ “Ἑρμοῦ καὶ συσχηματίζωνται ἀμφότεροι τῇ 
/ 4, 3 δ “ΖΤΦΖΨ» \ 7 
σελήνῃ “τούτοις δ ὁ τοῦ Ἄρεως παρατυχὼν λύειν 
εἴωθεν ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πολὺ τὸ τῆς γλώττης ἐμπόδιον 
ἀφ᾽ οὗ ἂν ἡ σελήνη τὴν πρὸς αὐτὸν συνάντησιν 4 
~ > 
ποιήσηται. πάλιν ἐὰν ἦτοι τὰ φῶτα ἐπικέντροις 
a A 7 
τοῖς κακοποιοῖς ἐπιφέρηται > ἅμα ἢ κατὰ διάμετρον, 
ἢ ἐὰν τοῖς φωσὶν of κακοποιοί, καὶ μάλιστα τῆς 
σελήνης ἐπὶ συνδέσμων ἢ ἐπὶ καμπίων οὔσης ἢ 
16] ἐπὶ τῶν ἐπαιτίων ζῳδίων, οἷον Κριοῦ, Ταύρου, 
’ 
Καρκίνου, Σκορπίου, Αἰγόκερω, γίνονται λωβήσεις 
τοῦ σώματος κυρτώσεων ἢ κυλλώσεων ἢ χωλώσεων 


1 ἄτρωγλοι καὶ ἄτρητοι VAD, ἄτρω. x. ἀτροίτη P, ἄτρογλοι x. 
ἄτρωτοι L, ἄτρωγλοι καὶ om. MNECam., μὴ ἔχοντες τρυπήματα 
μηδὲ διέξοδον Proc. 
5 ἐν ταῖς μοίραις ταῖς ἐπαναφερομέναις Proc., ταῖς ἐπαναφ. 
μοίραις PVAD, τοῖς ἐπαναφερομένοις μοίραις L, κατὰ τὰς ἐπανα- 
φερομένας μοίρας MNECam. 


924 


TETRABIBLOS III. 12 


hermaphrodites or have no ducts and vents.! Since 
this is so, when the sun also is in aspect, if the lumin- 
aries and Venus are made masculine, the moon is 
waning, and the maleficent planets are approaching in 
the succeeding degrees, the males that are born will 
be deprived of their sexual organs or injured therein, 
particularly in Aries, Leo, Scorpio, Capricorn, and 
Aquarius, and the females will be childless and sterile. 
Sometimes those who have such genitures continue 
not without injury to the sight also; but those suffer 
impediment of speech, lisp, or have difficulty in 
enunciation who have Saturn and Mercury joined 
with the sun at the aforesaid angles, particularly if 
Mercury is also setting and both bear some aspect 
to the moon. When Mars is present with them 
he is generally apt to loosen the impediment to the 
tongue, after the moon meets him. Again, if the 
luminaries, together or in opposition, move toward 
the maleficent planets upon the angles, or if the 
maleficent planets move toward the luminaries, 
particularly when the moon is at the nodes? or her 
bendings, or in the injurious signs such as Aries, 
Taurus, Cancer, Scorpio, or Capricorn, there come 
about deformations of the body such as hunchback, 


1Proclus paraphrases thus: ἢ μὴ ἔχοντες τρυπήματα μηδὲ 
διέξοδον. 

*The points at which the moon’s path intersects the 
ecliptic. The ‘‘ bendings’’ are the points quartile to the 
nodes (cf. the anonymous commentator, p. 139, ed. Wolf). 





8 καὶ Πέοντι. . . Αἰγόκερῳ VPLDProc., om. MNAECam. 

4 συνάντησιν VPLADProc., ἀπάντησιν MNECam. 

5 ἐπιφέρηται VPLDProc., ἐπαναφέρηται MNAECam.', ἐπανα- 
φέρωνται Cam.* 


325 


PTOLEMY 


Ἅ λ , 3A A A A ‘ 4 ε 
ἢ παραλύσεων, ἐὰν μὲν σὺν τοῖς φωσὶν ὦσιν οἱ 
κακοποιοὶ ἀπὸ τῆς γενέσεως αὐτῆς, ἐὰν δὲ ἐν τοῖς 
μεσουρανήμασι καθυπερτεροῦντες τὰ φῶτα ἢ δια- 
/ > / 4 3 A 4 / 
μηκίζοντες ἀλλήλους How ἀπὸ κινδύνων μεγάλων, 
~ 3 ~ 
ὡς TOV ἀποκρημνισμῶν ἢ συμπτώσεων ἢ ληστηρίων 
Ἅ ~ ~ 
ἢ τετραπόδων : Ἄρεως μὲν ἐπικρατοῦντος, τῶν διὰ 
πυρὸς ἢ τραυμάτων ἢ χολικῶν * ἢ ληστηρίων.. : 
Κρόνου δὲ τῶν διὰ συμπτώσεων ἢ ναυαγίων ἢ 
σπασμῶν. 
« we \ A A / / ‘ A \ 
Qs ἐπὶ τὸ πολὺ δὲ γίνεται σίνη Kal περὶ τὰ 
τροπικὰ καὶ ἰσημερινὰ σημεῖα τῆς σελήνης οὔσης, 
, \ \ A ‘ > A ‘ > > ~ 
μάλιστα δὲ περὶ μὲν τὸ eapwov τὰ δι᾽ ἀλφῶν. 
\ sy ‘ ‘ A \ ,ὔ ‘ A ‘ 
περὶ δὲ τὸ θερινὸν τὰ διὰ λειχήνων " περὶ δὲ τὸ 
μετοπωρινὸν τὰ διὰ λεπρῶν : περὶ δὲ τὸ χειμερινὸν 
τὰ διὰ φακῶν καὶ τῶν ὁμοίων. πάθη δὲ συμβαίνειν 
εἴωθεν ὅ ὅταν ἐπὶ τῶν προκειμένων στάσεων οἱ κακο- 
ποιοὶ συσχηματισθῶσι, κατὰ τὸ ἐναντίον μέντοι, 
τουτέστιν ἑσπέριοι μὲν τῷ ἡλιῷ, τῇ δὲ σελήνῃ ἐῷοι. 
9) ¢ Ἁ ¢ A ε / / a 
καθ᾽ ὅλου yap ὁ μὲν Tod Κρόνου ψυχροκοιλίους ποιεῖ 
καὶ πολυφλεγμάτους καὶ ῥευματώδεις, κατίσχνους 
τε καὶ ἀσθενικοὺς καὶ ἰκτερικοὺς 5 καὶ δυσεντερι- 
\ 
Kovs καὶ βηχικοὺς Kal ἀναφορικοὺς Kal κωλικοὺς Kat 
~ a \ / 
ἐλεφαντιῶντας - τὰς δὲ γυναῖκας ἔτι Kal ὑστερικάς. 
1526 δὲ τοῦ “Apews αἱμαπτοϊκοὺς μελαγχολικοὺς ὃ 
~ ~ ”“ 
πνευμονικοὺς ψωριῶντας " ἔτι δὲ τοὺς διὰ τομῶν ἢ 
καύσεων 4 κρυπτῶν τόπων συνεχῶς ἐνοχλουμένους 
συρίγγων ἕνεκεν ἢ αἱμορροϊδῶν ἢ κονδυλωμάτων ὃ 


17 χολικῶν VP (χωλοικ-) LADProc. ; ὀχλικῶν MNECam. 
2 καὶ ἰκτερικοὺς Om. Cam. 
3 μελαγχολικοὺς om. Cam. 


326 


TETRABIBLOS III. 12 


crookedness, lameness, or paralysis, congenital if 
the maleficent planets are joined with the luminaries, 
but if they are at the mid-heaven points, elevated 
above the luminaries or in opposition one to the 
other, the deformations will result from serious 
dangers, such as falls from a height, the collapse of 
houses, or the attacks of robbers or animals. If 
Mars prevails, the danger is from fire, wounds, 
bilious attacks, or robberies; if it is Saturn, through 
collapse of buildings, shipwreck, or spasms. 

For the most part injuries come about when the 
moon is near the solstitial or equinoctial signs, particu- 
larly at the spring equinox, injuries by white leprosy; 
at the summer solstice, by lichens; at the fall equinox, 
by leprosy ; at the winter solstice, by moles and the 
like. Diseases are likely to result when at the 
positions already described the maleficent planets are 
in aspect, but in the opposite sense, that is, evening 
stars with respect to the sun and morning stars to the 
moon. For in general Saturn causes his subjects to 
have cold bellies, increases the phlegm, makes them 
rheumatic, meagre, weak, jaundiced, and prone to 
dysentery, coughing, raising, colic, and elephan- 
tiasis ; the females he makes also subject to diseases 
of the womb. Mars causes men to spit blood, makes 
them melancholy, weakens their lungs, and causes 
the itch or scurvy ; and furthermore he causes them 
to be constantly irritated by cutting or cautery of 
the secret parts because of fistulas, hemorrhoids, 





Post καύσεων add. ἢ PLMNAECam; cf. Proc., διὰ 
καύσεως ἢ τομῆς εἰς κρυπτοὺς τόπους κτλ. 
54 κονδυλωμάτων VP (-λομ-) LDEProc., om. MNACam. ; 
add. ἢ καὶ πυρωμάτων MNACam. 
327 


PTOLEMY 


“Δ. \ ~ δῶ Ξλ / Ἅ ~ A A 
ἢ καὶ τῶν πυρωδῶν ἑλκώσεων ἢ νομῶν: τὰς δὲ 
γυναῖκας ἔτι καὶ ἐκτρωσμοῖς ἢ ἐμβρυοτομίαις } 
n > / " / 297 3 \ 
ἢ ἀναβρώσεσιν εἴωθε περικυλίειν. ἰδίως δὲ Kal 
παρὰ τὰς προειρημένας τῶν συσχηματιζομένων 
> “ 
ἀστέρων φύσεις πρὸς τὰ μέρη τοῦ σώματος τὰ 
ἰδιώματα ποιοῦσι τῶν παθῶν. 
Συνεργεῖ δ᾽ αὐτοῖς μάλιστα πρὸς τὰς ἐπιτάσεις 
“ a ἢ ~ / “ “ 
τῶν φαύλων ὁ τοῦ “Ἑρμοῦ ἀστήρ, τῷ μὲν τοῦ 
Κρόνου πρὸς τὸ ψυχρὸν συνοικειούμενος καὶ μᾶλλον 
ἐν κινήσει συνεχεῖ ποιῶν τοὺς ῥευματισμοὺς καὶ 
τὰς τῶν ὑγρῶν ὀχλήσεις, ἐξαιρέτως δὲ τῶν περὶ 
θώρακα καὶ φάρυγγα καὶ στόμαχον: τῷ δὲ τοῦ 
Ἄρεως πρὸς τὸ ξηραντικώτερον συνεπισχύων, ὡς 
ἐπί τε τῶν ἑλκωδῶν πτιλώσεων ὃ καὶ ἐσχαρῶν καὶ 
ἀποστημάτων καὶ ἐρυσιπελάτων καὶ λειχήνων 
ἀγρίων καὶ μελαίνης χολῆς ἢ μανίας ἢ νόσου 
ἱερᾶς 7) τῶν τοιούτων. 
δὰ A \ ~ / 3 \ ~ Ἁ 
Καὶ παρὰ τὰς τῶν ζῳδίων ἐναλλαγὰς τῶν τοὺς 
προειρημένους ἐπὶ τῶν δύο κέντρων συσχηματισ- 
μοὺς περιεχόντων yivovTal τινες ποιότητες παθῶν. 
"5. " \ ε A / \ ε > / δὰ « 
ἰδίως γὰρ ὁ μὲν Kapkivos καὶ ὁ Αἰὐἰγόκερως καὶ οἱ 
3 “ A. 4¢, \ a \ Nyt θ oe NX γὸὃ 
Ιχθῦς καὶ ὅλως τὰ χερσαῖα καὶ τὰ ἰχθυϊκὰ ζῴδια 
108 τὰ διὰ τῶν νομῶν πάθη ποιεῖ καὶ λειχήνων 7 
λ (ὃ 5 “Ἃ (ὃ δ / Ἃ ἐλ Ψ'. 
επίδων ὃ ἢ χοιράδων ἢ συρίγγων ἢ ἐλεφαντιάσεων 
\ ~ , « δὲ At / \ ¢ Ais 
καὶ τῶν τοιούτων. ὁ δὲ Τοξότης Kat ot Aidvpor 


1 ἐμβρυοτοκίαις NCam. 
2 apa VPLD, περὶ MNAECam. 


8 πτιλώσεων CZO; πτηλώσεων PL, πιλλώσεων VD, ψιλώσεων 
MNAECam. 


47 μανίας VPLMADProc., om. NECam. 
328 





TETRABIBLOS III. 12 


or tumours, or also burning ulcers, or eating sores ; 
he is apt to afflict women furthermore with mis- 
carriages, embryotomies, or corrosive diseases. 
Of themselves, they also bring about the properties 
of disease in agreement with the natures, which 
have been already discussed, of the planets in 
aspect, as they relate to the parts of the βοάν. 
Mercury assists them? chiefly to prolong the evil 
effects, when he is allied with Saturn inclining toward 
cold and continually stirring into activity rheu- 
matisms and gatherings of fluid, particularly about 
the chest, throat, and stomach. When he is allied 
with Mars he adds his force to produce greater dry- 
ness, as in cases of ulcerous sore eyes, eschars,° 
abscesses, erysipelas, savage lichens or skin eruptions, 
black bile, insanity, the sacred disease,’ or the like. 
Certain qualities of disease are determined by 
changes among the zodiacal signs which surround 
the aforesaid configurations on the two angles. 
For in particular Cancer, Capricorn, and Pisces, 
and in general the terrestrial and piscine signs, cause 
diseases involving eating sores, lichens, scales, 
scrofula, fistulas, elephantiasis, and the like. Sagit- 
tarius and Gemini are responsible for those that come 


1 The reference is to the planetary melothesia, earlier in 
the chapter (p. 319). Acting in their own proper charac- 
ters (ἰδίως), the maleficent planets will affect those parts of 
the body of which, in the melothesia, they were said to be 
the ‘‘lords’’. 

2Saturn and Mars, the maleficent planets. 

8 Dry sloughs, crusts, or scabs. 4 Epilepsy. 


δῇ λεπίδων VD, ἢ λοιπίδων P, ὁ δὲ πίδων L, ἢ λεπρῶν MNAE, 
om. Cam. 


= 329 


PTOLEMY 


τὰ διὰ πτωματισμῶν ἢ ἐπιλήψεων - καὶ ἐν ταῖς 
ἐσχάταις δὲ μοίραις παρατυγχάνοντες οἱ ἀστέρες 
τῶν δωδεκατημορίων περὶ τὰ ἄκρα μάλιστα τὰ 
πάθη " καὶ τὰ σίνη ποιοῦσι διὰ λωβήσεων ἢ ῥευ- 
ματισμῶν, ἀφ᾽ ὧν καὶ ἐλεφαντιάσεις τε καὶ ὡς ἐπὶ 
πᾶν χειράγραι καὶ ποδάγραι συμβαίνουσι. τούτων 
δὲ οὕτως ἐχόντων, ἐὰν μὲν μηδεὶς τῶν ἀγαθοποιῶν 
συσχηματίζηται τοῖς τὰ αἴτια ποιοῦσι κακοποιοῖς 
ἢ τοῖς κεκεντρωμένοις φωσίν, ἀνίατα καὶ ἐπαχθῆ τά 
τε σίνη καὶ τὰ πάθη γενήσεται - ὡσαύτως δὲ κἂν 
συσχηματίζωνται μέν, καθυπερτερῶνται δὲ ὑπὸ τῶν 
κακοποιῶν ἐν δυνάμει ὄντων. ἐὰν δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ 
κατὰ κυρίων ὄντες σχημάτων καθυπερτερῶσι τοὺς 
τὸ αἴτιον ἐμποιοῦντας κακοποιούς, τότε τὰ σίνη 
εὐσχήμονα καὶ οὐκ ἐπονείδιστα γίνεται καὶ τὰ πάθη 
μέτρια καὶ εὐπαρηγόρητα, ἔσθ᾽ ὅτε δὲ καὶ εὐαπάλ- 
λακτα, ἀνατολικῶν ὄντων τῶν ἀγαθοποιῶν. ὁ μὲν 
γὰρ τοῦ Διὸς βοηθείαις ἀνθρωπίναις διὰ πλούτων 
ἢ ἀξιωμάτων τά τε σίνη κρύπτειν εἴωθε καὶ τὰ 
πάθη “παρηγορεῖν " σὺν δὲ τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ καὶ φαρ- 
μακείαις ἢ ἰατρῶν ἀγαθῶν ἐ ἐπικουρίαις. ὁ δὲ τῆς 
᾿Αφροδίτης διὰ προφάσεως θεῶν καὶ χρησμῶν τὰ 
154 μὲν σίνη τρόπον τινὰ εὔμορφα καὶ ἐπιχαρῆ κατα- 
σκευάζει, τὰ δὲ πάθη ταῖς ἀπὸ θεῶν ἰατρείαις 
εὐπαρηγόρητα - τοῦ μέντοι Κρόνου προσόντος μετὰ 
παραδειγματισμῶν καὶ ἐξαγοριῶν * καὶ τῶν τοιού- 


ere μάλιστα τὰ πάθη VPLD, ἄγρια καὶ μάλιστα πάθη 

NCam.!, ἄγρια μάλιστα πάθη MAE, ἔσχατα μέλη τὰ πάθη Cam.? 

2 ἐξαγοριῶν VD, -ειἰῶν A, ἐξαγωριῶν Ῥ, ἐξαγωνίων L, ef. 
ἐξαγορεύειν Proc. ; ἐξαγορεύσεων MNECam. 


390 


TETRABIBLOS III. 12 


about with falling fits or epileptic seizures. And 
when the planets are in the last degrees of the signs 
they cause diseases and injuries especially in the 
extremities, through lesions or rheumatism, from 
which elephantiasis and, in general, gout in the feet 
and hands result. Since this is the case, if no bene- 
ficent planet bears an aspect to the maleficent ones 
which furnish the cause, or to the luminaries on the 
centres, the injuries and diseases will be incurable 
and painful; so also, if they bear an aspect but 
the maleficent planets are in power and overcome 
them. But if the beneficent planets are themselves 
in the authoritative positions and overcome the 
maleficent planets that bear the responsibility for the 
evil, then the injuries are not disfiguring and do not 
entail reproach and the diseases are moderate and 
yield to treatment, and sometimes they may be 
easily cured, if the beneficent planets are rising. 
For Jupiter generally causes the injuries to be con- 
cealed by human aid through riches or honours, 
and the diseases to be mitigated; and in company 
with Mercury he brings this about by drugs and the 
aid of good physicians. And Venus contrives that 
through pronouncements of the gods and oracles 
the blemishes shall be, in a way, comely and attrac- 
tive,! and that the diseases shall be readily moderated 
by divine healing; if however Saturn is by, the 
healing will be accompanied by exhibition and 


1Cf. the famous passage of the Republic (474DE) in 
which Plato tells how lovers praise the irregular features 
and the complexions of their favourites, 


331 


PTOLEMY 


~ A ~ « ~ > > , ‘ 
των" τοῦ δὲ τοῦ “Ἑρμοῦ μετ᾽ ἐπικουρίας καὶ 
πορισμοῦ τινος δι᾿ αὐτῶν τῶν σινῶν ἢ καὶ παθῶν 
τοῖς ἔχουσι περιγινομένου. 


«γ,.) Περὶ ποιότητος ψυχῆς 


Ilepi μὲν οὖν τῶν σωματικῶν συμπτωμάτων ὃ 
τύπος τῆς ἐπισκέψεως τοιοῦτος ἄν τις εἴη. τῶν 
δὲ ψυχικῶν ποιοτήτων at μὲν περὶ τὸ λογικὸν καὶ 

/ “ἢ 
νοερὸν μέρος καταλαμβάνονται διὰ τῆς κατὰ τὸν 
τοῦ “Ἑρμοῦ ἀστέρα θεωρουμένης ἑκάστοτε περι- 

΄ = ἱ δὲ \ \ > θ \ 1 \ aA > A 
στάσεως - al dé περὶ τὸ αἰσθητικὸν ' καὶ ἄλογον ἀπὸ 
τοῦ σωματωδεστέρου τῶν φωτῶν, τουτέστι τῆς 

/ ~ 
σελήνης, Kal τῶν πρὸς τὰς ἀπορροίας ἢ καὶ 
τὰς συναφὰς αὐτῆς συνεσχηματισμένων ἀστέρων. 
πολυτροπωτάτου δ᾽ ὄντος τοῦ κατὰ τὰς ψυχικὰς 
ὁρμὰς εἴδους εἰκότως ἂν καὶ τὴν τοιαύτην ἐπίσκεψιν 
> ς ~ 9.3 « ΝΜ / A / 

οὐχ ἁπλῶς οὐδ᾽ ὡς ἔτυχε ποιοίμεθα, διὰ πλειόνων 
δὲ καὶ ποικίλων παρατηρήσεων. καὶ γὰρ αἱ τῶν 
ζῳδίων τῶν περιεχόντων τόν τε τοῦ “Ἑρμοῦ καὶ 
τὴν σελήνην ἢ τοὺς τὴν ἐπικράτησιν αὐτῶν εἰληφό- 

5 / \ \ ΄ / 
τας ἀστέρας διαφοραὶ πολὺ δύνανται συμβάλλεσθαι 
πρὸς τὰ τῶν ψυχικῶν 3 ἰδιώματα, καὶ οἱ τῶν λόγον 
ἐχόντων πρὸς τὸ προκείμενον εἶδος ἀστέρων σχη- 
\ Μ ‘ 
155 ματισμοὶ πρὸς ἥλιόν τε Kal τὰ κέντρα, καὶ ETL TO 


1 αἰσθητικὸν VDA (mg. : yp. ἠθικόν), αἰσθητὸν PL ; cf. αἴσθησιν 
Proc. ; ἠθικὸν MNECam. 

* τοῦ σωματοδεστέρου τῶν φωτῶν A; similia habent VPLD ; 
τῶν σωματοδεστέρων φωτῶν MNCam., τῶν σ. τῶν φ. E. 

3 ψυχικῶν VP (-χη-) LDE, ψυχῶν MNACam. 


392 


TETRABIBLOS III. 12-13 


confession of the disease,! and such like, but if 
Mercury ® is joined with her it will be with the accrual 
of use and gain, through the injuries and diseases 
themselves, to those that have them. 


13. Of the Quality of the Soul. 


The character, then, of the inquiry into bodily 
affections would be of this sort. Of the qualities 
of the soul, those which concern the reason and 
the mind are apprehended by means of the condition 
of Mercury observed on the particular occasion ; and 
the qualities of the sensory and irrational part are 
discovered from the one of the luminaries which is 
the more corporeal, that is, the moon, and from the 
planets which are configurated with her in her 
separations and applications.* But since the variety 
of the impulses of the soul is great, it stands to 
reason that we would make such an inquiry in no 
simple or offhand manner, but by means of many 
complicated observations. For indeed the differ- 
ences between the signs which contain Mercury and 
the moon, or the planets that dominate them, can 
contribute much to the character of the soul; so 
likewise do the aspects to the sun and the angles 
shown by the planets that are related to the class 
of qualities under consideration, and, furthermore, 


'The commentator (p. 141, ed. Wolf) says that this 
refers to the custom of taking the sick to temples for 
healing. So the disease would be openly exhibited and 
spoken of. Proclus indicates that the cure is through 
display and confession. 

* Hermes (Mercury) was the god of commerce and gain. 


+ Of. i. 24. 
333 


PTOLEMY 


κατ᾽ αὐτὴν τὴν ἑκάστου τῶν ἀστέρων φύσιν πρὸς 
τὰς ψυχικὰς κινήσεις ἰδιότροπον. 

Τῶν μὲν οὖν ζῳδίων καθ᾽ ὅλου τὰ μὲν τροπικὰ 
δημοτικωτέρας ποιεῖ τὰς ψυχὰς ὀχλικῶν τε καὶ 
πολιτικῶν πραγμάτων ἐπιθυμητικάς, ἔτι δὲ φιλο- 
δόξους καὶ θεοπροσπλόκους | εὐφυεῖς τε καὶ εὐκινή- 
τους, ζητητικάς τε καὶ εὑρετικάς, εὐεικάστους καὶ 
ἀστρολογικὰς 2 καὶ pavtikds: τὰ δὲ δίσωμα 
ποικίλας, εὐμεταβόλους, δυσκαταλήπτους, κούφας, 
εὐμεταθέτους, διπλᾶς, ἐρωτικάς, πολυτρόπους, φιλο- 
μούσους, ῥαθύμους, εὐπορίστους, μεταμελητικάς " 
τὰ δὲ στερεὰ δικαίας, ἀκολακεύτους, ἐπιμόνους, 
βεβαίας, συνετάς, ὑπομονητικάς, φιλοπόνους, 
σκληράς, ἐγκρατεῖς, μνησικάκους, ἐκβιβαστικάς, 
ἐριστικάς, φιλοτίμους, στασιώδεις, πλεονεκτικάς, 
ἀποκρότους, ἀμεταθέτους. 

Τῶν δὲ σχηματισμῶν at μὲν ἀνατολικαὶ καὶ 
ὡροσκοπίαι καὶ μάλιστα αἱ ἰδιοπροσωπίαι ἐλευθερί- 
ous καὶ ἁπλᾶς καὶ αὐθάδεις καὶ ἰσχυρὰς καὶ εὐφυεῖς 
καὶ ὀξείας καὶ ἀπαρακαλύπτους τὰς ψυχὰς ἀπεργά- 
ζονται οἱ δὲ ἑῷοι στηριγμοὶ καὶ αἵ μεσουρανήσεις 
ἐπιλογιστικάς, ἐπιμόνους, μνημονευτικάς, βεβαίας, 
συνετάς, μεγαλόφρονας, ἀποτελεστικὰς ὧν βούλον- 
ται, ἀτρέπτους, ῥωμαλέας, ὠμάς, ἀνεξαπατήτους, 
κριτικάς, ἐμπράκτους, κολαστικάς, ἐπιστημονικάς " 

ιὅθ αἱ δὲ προηγήσεις καὶ αἱ δύσεις εὐμεταθέτους, 

1 θβεοπροσπόλους NCam. 

2 ἀστρολογικὰς PLMAE, ἀστρολογίας VD; ef. Proc., ἀπο- 
λογιτικὰς N, -ητικὰς Cam. 


8 ἐκβιβαστικάς VP (-ηκας) L (ἐκβαβ-) MADEProc. Cam.'; 
ἐκβιαστικά, NCam.? 


334 





TETRABIBLOS III. 13 


that peculiar natural quality of each one of the 
planets which relates to the movements of the soul. 

Of the signs of the zodiac in general, then, the 
solstitial signs produce souls fitted for dealing with 
the people, fond of turbulence and political activity, 
glory-seeking, moreover, and attentive to the gods, 
noble, mobile, inquisitive, inventive, good at con- 
jecture, and fitted for astrology and divination. 
The bicorporeal signs make souls complex, change- 
able, hard to apprehend, light, unstable, fickle, 
amorous, versatile, fond of music, lazy, easily acquisi- 
tive, prone to change their minds. The solid signs 
make them just, unaffected by flattery, persistent, 
firm, intelligent, patient, industrious, stern, self- 
controlled, tenacious of grudges, extortionate, conten- 
tious, ambitious, factious, grasping, hard, inflexible. 

Of configurations, positions in the orient and at 
the horoscope, and in particular those which are 
in proper face,! produce liberal, simple, self-willed, 
strong, noble, keen, open souls. Morning stations 
and culminations make them calculating, patient, 
of good memory, firm, intelligent, magnanimous, 
accomplishing what they desire, inflexible, robust, 
rough, not readily deceived, critical, practical, prone 
to inflict punishment, gifted with understanding. 
Precessions 2 and settings make them easily changed, 


1 See i. 23. 
3 The advances of a planet, as opposed to its retrograde 
movement (ἀναποδισμός) or its stations (ornprypol); cf. 


Bouché-Leclereq, p. 111. The term can be ambiguous; 
see on c. 11 above (p. 313). 


335 


PTOLEMY 


ἀβεβαίους, ἀσθενεῖς, ἀφερεπόνους, ἐμπαθεῖς, ταπει- 
νάς, δειλάς, ἀμφιβόλους, θρασυδείλους, ἀμβλείας, 
βλακώδεις, δυσκινήτους . οὗ δὲ ἑ ἑσπέριοι στηριγμοὶ 
καὶ αἱ ὑπὸ γῆν μεσουρανήσεις, ἔτι δὲ καὶ ἐφ᾽ 
“Ερμοῦ καὶ ᾿Αφροδίτης ἡμέρας μὲν αἱ ἑσπέριαι 
δύσεις, νυκτὸς δὲ αἱ eGo, εὐφυεῖς μὲν καὶ φρενή- 
ρεις, οὐκ ἄγαν δὲ μνημονικὰς 5 οὐδ᾽ ἐπιμόχθους 
καὶ φιλοπόνους, διερευνητικὰς δὲ τῶν ἀποκρύφων 
καὶ ζητητικὰς τῶν ἀθεωρήτων, οἷον μαγικάς, μυσ- 
τηριακάς, μετεωρολογικάς, ὀργανικάς, μηχανικάς, 
θαυματοποιούς, ἀστρολογικάς, φιλοσόφους, οἰωνο- 
σκοπικάς, ὀνειροκριτικὰς καὶ τὰς ὁμοίας. 

Πρὸς τούτοις δὲ 8 ἐν ἰδίοις μὲν ἢ καὶ οἰκείοις 
ὄντες τόποις καὶ αἱρήσεσιν οἱ τὴν κυρίαν ἔχοντες 
τῶν ψυχικῶν, καθ᾽ ὃν ἐν ἀρχῇ διωρισάμεθα τρόπον, 
προφανῆ καὶ ἀπαραπόδιστα καὶ αὐθέκαστα καὶ 
ἐπιτευκτικὰ ποιοῦσι τὰ ἰδιώματα, καὶ μάλισθ᾽ ὅταν 
οἱ αὐτοὶ τῶν δύο τόπων ἐπικρατήσωσιν ἅμα, του- 
τέστι 3 τῷ μὲν τοῦ ᾿Ερμοῦ ὁπωσδήποτε τυγχάνωσι 
συνεσχηματισμένοι, τὴν δὲ τῆς σελήνης ἀπόρροιαν ἢ 
καὶ συναφὴν ἐπέχοντες - μὴ οὕτω δὲ διακείμενοι ἀλλ᾽ 
ἐν ἀνοικείοις ὄντες τόποις, τὰ μὲν τῆς ἑαυτῶν φύσεως 
οἰκεῖα πρὸς τὴν ψυχικὴν ἐνέργειαν ἀνεπίφαντα καὶ 
ἀμαυρὰ καὶ ἀτελείωτα καὶ ἀπρόκοπα καθιστᾶσι. 

157 τὰ δὲ τῆς τῶν ἐπικρατησάντων ἢ καθυπερτερησάν- 


1 φρενήρεις] φρονίμους NCam.Proc. 

* μνημονικὰς WP (-ηκὰς) LDE, cf. Proc.; μνημονευτικὰς 
MNACam. 

ὃ πρὸς τούτοις δὲ A, πρὸς τούτῳ δὲ Ῥ, πρὸς τούτοις Li, πρὸ 
τούτοις δὲ VD, ἔτι δὲ Proc.; ὅτε δὴ MNECam. (τύχοιεν post 
ὄντες add. NCam.). 


336 


TETRABIBLOS III. 13 


unstable, weak, unable to bear labour, emotional, 
humble, cowardly, deceitful, bullying, dull, slow- 
witted, hard to arouse. Evening stations and posi- 
tion at mid-heaven beneath the earth, and further- 
more, in the case of Mercury and Venus, by day 
evening settings and by night morning settings, 
produce souls noble and wise, but with mediocre 
memory, not painstaking nor fond of labour, but 
investigators of hidden things and seekers after the 
unknown, as for example magicians, adepts in the 
mysteries, meteorologists, makers of instruments 
and machines, conjurors, astrologers, philosophers, 
readers of omens, interpreters of dreams, and the like. 

When, in addition, the governors of the soul, as 
we explained at the beginning, are in their own or 
familiar houses or sects,) they make the characters 
of the soul open, unimpeded, spontaneous, and 
effective, especially when the same planets rule the 
two places at once, that is, when they are con- 
figurated to Mercury in any aspect whatever, and hold 
the separation or application of the moon ;? if they 
are not so disposed, however, but are in places alien 
to them, it renders the properties of their own natures 
obscure, indistinct, imperfect, and ineffective with 
respect to the active quality of the soul. The powers, 
however, of the nature of the planets that dominate 


1The governors of the soul are Mercury and the moon. 
For the houses, see i. 17, and for the sects, i. 7 and 12. 

2That is, when the moon is separating from them or 
applying to them. 





4 τουτέστι om. Cam.? δ τυγχάνωσι om. Cam. 


337 


PTOLEMY 


των ἰσχυρά τε Kal ἐπιβλαβῆ τῶν ὑποκειμένων,: ὡς 
ὅταν οἵ τε διὰ κακοποιῶν οἰκείωσιν ἄδικοι καὶ 
πονηροί, κρατούντων μὲν αὐτῶν, εὐπροχώρητον ἢ 
καὶ ἀνεμποδίστον καὶ ἀκίνδυνον καὶ ἐπίδοξον ἔχουσι 
τὴν πρὸς τὸ κακῶς ἀλλήλους ποιεῖν ὁρμήν - κρατου- 
μένων δὲ ὑπὸ τῆς ἐναντίας αἱρέσεως, κατάφοροι καὶ 
ἀνεπίτευκτοι καὶ εὐτιμώρητοι γίνονται. οἱ δ᾽ αὖ 
πάλιν διὰ τὴν τῶν ἀγαθοποιούντων πρὸς τοὺς εἰρη- 
μένους ὅρους συνοικείωσιν ἀγαθοὶ καὶ δίκαιοι, 
ἀκαθυπερτερήτων μὲν ὄντων, αὐτοί τε χαίρουσι καὶ 
εὐφημοῦνται ἐπὶ ταῖς τῶν ἄλλων εὐποιΐαις καὶ ὑπὸ 
μηδενὸς ἀδικούμενοι ἀλλ᾽ ὀνησιφόρον ἔχοντες τὴν 
δικαιοσύνην διατελοῦσι - κρατουμένων δὲ ὑπὸ τῶν 
ἐναντίων ἀνάπαλιν, δι᾽ αὐτὸ τὸ πρᾶον καὶ φιλάνθρω- 
πον καὶ ἐλεητικὸν 5 καὶ εὐκαταφρόνητοί τε καὶ 
ἐπίμεμπτοι ἢ καὶ ὑπὸ τῶν πλείστων εὐαδίκητοι 
τυγχάνουσιν. 

‘O μὲν οὖν καθ᾽ ὅλου τρόπος τῆς ἠθικῆς ὃ 
ἐπισκέψεως τοιοῦτός τις ἂν εἴη: τὰς δὲ κατὰ 
μέρος ἀπ᾽ αὐτῆς τῆς τῶν ἀστέρων φύσεως κατὰ 
τὴν τοιαύτην κυρίαν ἀποτελουμένας ἰδιοτροπίας 
ἑξῆς κατὰ τὸ κεφαλαιῶδες ἐπεξελευσόμεθα μέχρι 
τῆς καθ᾽ ὁλοσχέρειαν θεωρουμένης συγκράσεως. 

‘O μὲν οὖν τοῦ Κρόνου a ἀστὴρ μόνος τὴνς οἰκοδεσπο- 
τίαν τῆς ψυχῆς λαβὼν καὶ αὐθεντήσας τοῦ τε Ἑρμοῦ 


1 ὑποκειμένων VPLDE, προκειμένων MNACam. 

3 ἐλεητικὸν VP (-λαιη-) LMADE, ἐλεγκτικὸν NCam. 

3 ηθικῆς VP (ἠθηκ-) MADE, cf. Proc.; εἰδικῆς MNCam., 
ἰδικῆς L. 


338 


TETRABIBLOS III. 13 


or overcome! them are vigorous and injurious to the 
subjects. Thus men who, by reason of the familiarity 
of the maleficent planets, are unjust and evil, find 
their impulse to injure one another easy, unimpeded, 
secure, and honourable, if those planets are in 
power; but if they are overcome by planets of the 
opposite sect, the men are lethargic, ineffective, and 
easily punished. And those again that through the 
familiarity of the beneficent planets to the afore- 
said boundaries are good and just, if these planets are 
not overcome, are themselves happy and bear a good 
repute for their kindness to others, and, injured by 
none, continue to benefit from their own justice; if, 
however, the good planets are dominated by op- 
posites, simply because of their gentleness, kindness, 
and compassion, they suffer from contempt and re- 
proach or even may easily be wronged by most 
people. 

This, then, is the general method of inquiry as to 
character. We shall next briefly consider, in due 
order, the particular traits resulting from the very 
nature of the planets, in this kind of domination, 
until the theory of mixture has been treated in its 
most important aspects. 

If Saturn alone is ruler of the soul and dominates 
Mercury and the moon, if he has a dignified position 

1Q0n the expression ‘‘overcome,’’ see above, on iii. 4, 
p. 245. Planets would ‘‘dominate”’ the governors of the 
soul (Mercury and the moon) by exercising rulership 
(οἰκοδεσποτία) over the portion of the zodiac occupied by 


the governors; this could be done in any of the five ways 
specified by Ptolemy in iii. 2 (p. 233). 


339 


PTOLEMY 


Ἔ vers ΄ 2A PN Re ” , ‘ 

158 Kal τῆς σελήνης, ἐὰν μὲν ἐνδόξως ἔχῃ πρός TE TO κοσ- 
μικὸν καὶ τὰ κέντρα, ποιεῖ φιλοσωμάτους, ἰσχυρο- 
γνώμονας, βαθύφρονας, αὐστηρούς, μονογνώμονας, 
ἐπιμόχθους, ἐπιτακτικούς, κολαστικούς, περιουσιασ- 
τικούς, φιλοχρημάτους, βιαίους, θησαυριστικούς, 
φθονερούς. ἐναντίως δὲ καὶ ἀδόξως κείμενος 
e / Ao 7 if > / 
ῥυπαρούς, μικρολόγους, μικροψύχους,1 ἀδιαφόρους, 
κακογνώμονας,Σ βασκάνους, δειλούς, ἀνακεχω- 

/ / Le / 
ρηκότας, κακολόγους, φιλερήμους, φιλοθρήνους, 
ἀναιδεῖς, δεισιδαίμονας, φιλομόχθους, ἀστόργους, 
ἐπιβουλευτικοὺς τῶν οἰκείων, ἀνευφράντους, μισο- 
σωμάτους. 

Τῷ δὲ τοῦ Διὸς κατὰ τὸν ἐκκείμενον τρόπον 
\ - ἐν \ >? / / ,ὔ A 
συνοικειωθεὶς ἐπὶ μὲν ἐνδόξων πάλιν διαθέσεων ποιεῖ 
ἀγαθούς, τιμητικοὺς τῶν πρεσβυτέρων, καθεστῶτας, 
καλογνώμονας, ἐπικούρους,3 κριτικούς, φιλοκτήμο- 
νας, μεγαλοψύχους, μεταδοτικούς, εὐπροαιρέτους, 
φιλοικείους, πράους, συνετούς, ἀνεκτικούς, ἐμ- 
/ ae, | \ ~ > ͵ > / 
φιλοσόφους - ἐπὶ δὲ τῶν ἐναντίων ἀπειροκάλους, 
’ὔ lal / « ~ 
μανιώδεις, popodecis, δεισιδαίμονας, ἱεροφοιτῶντας, 
1 μικροψύχους om. MECam. 


2 κακογνώμονας VPLDProc., μονογνώμονας MAECam. 
8 ἀπίκρους post ἐπικούρους add. MAK, om. VPLDProc. 


1 Bouché-Leclercq, p. 309, enumerates the conditions 
which should exist if a planet is to act effectively, classify- 
ing them as relations to the circles of the nativity, to the 
zodiac, to the other planets, and to the planet’s own 
movement and the sun. With reference to the zodiac, 
the planet should be in a “solid”’ sign, in a quadrant and 
a sign of the same sex as itself, in one of its own proper 
domains (house, triangle, exaltation, terms, decans), and 


340 


TETRABIBLOS III. 13 


with reference to the universe and the angles,’ he 
makes his subjects lovers of the body,” strong- 
minded, deep thinkers, austere, of a single purpose, 
laborious, dictatorial, ready to punish, lovers of pro- 
perty, avaricious, violent, amassing treasure, and 
jealous; but if his position is the opposite and without 
dignity, he makes them sordid, petty, mean-spirited, 
indifferent, mean-minded, malignant, cowardly, 
diffident, evil-speakers, solitary, tearful, shameless, 
superstitious, fond of toil, unfeeling, devisers of plots 
against their friends, gloomy, taking no care of the 
body. 

Saturn, allied with Jupiter in the way described, 
again in dignified positions, makes his subjects 
good, respectful to elders, sedate, noble-minded, 
helpful,’ critical, fond of possessions, magnanimous, 
generous, of good intentions, lovers of their friends, 
gentle, wise, patient, philosophical ; but in the op- 
posite positions, he makes them uncultured, mad, 
easily frightened, superstitious, frequenters of shrines, 


not in its place of depression. With regard to the circle 
of the nativity, the planet should be upon an angle (especi- 
ally mid-heaven) or in a favourable aspect (trine or sextile) 
to an angle, and not in a place which bears no aspect to 
the horoscope (is disjunct). This will explain what, in 
general, are “dignified” or “ὁ honourable” positions, and 
their opposites. 

2 Ptolemy’s lists of characters and qualities attaching 
to the various planets, which occupy the rest of this 
chapter, are remarkably useful in reconstructing a picture 
of life in Egypt under the Roman Empire. IF. Cumont, 
L’ Egypte des astrologues (Brussels, 1937), makes constant 
use of them for this purpose. 

*Certain MSS. add “‘ without sharpness” here; see the 
critical note. 


341 


PTOLEMY 


2 ᾽ὔ e , / > / 
efayopevtds, ὑπόπτους, μισοτέκνους, ἀφίλους, 
ἐνδομύχους, ἀκρίτους, ἀπίστους, μωροκάκους," 
ἰώδεις, ὑποκριτικούς, ἀδρανεῖς, ἀφιλοτίμους, μετα- 
μελητικούς, αὐστηρούς, δυσεντεύκτους, δυσπροσί- 
ἦλ 7 2 > 46 δ᾽ « , \ 
tous, εὐλαβητικούς,Σ εὐήθεις ὁμοίως καὶ 
ἀνεξικάκους. 
A \ Aa mM \ All, A > / 
Τῷ δὲ τοῦ “Apews συνοικειωθεὶς ἐπὶ μὲν ἐνδόξων 
169 διαθέσεων ποιεῖ ἀδιαφόρους, ἐπιπόνους, παρρησιασ- 
τικούς, ὀχληρούς, θρασυδείλους, αὐστηροπράξους, 
ἀνελεήμονας, καταφρονητικούς, τραχεῖς, πολεμι- 
/ «ες / / / > 
Kovs, ῥιψοκινδύνους, φιλοθορύβους, δολίους, ἐνε- 
δρευτάς, δυσμηνίτας, ἀδήκτους,, ὀχλοκόπους, 
τυραννικούς, πλεονέκτας, μισοπολίτας, φιλέριδας, 
μνησικάκους, βαθυπονήρους, δράστας, ἀνυποίστους, 
σοβαρούς, φορτικούς, καυχηματίας, κακωτάς, 
ἀδίκους͵ ἀκαταφρονήτους, μισανθρώπους, ἀτρέπ- 
τους, ἀμεταθέτους, πολυπράγμονας, εὐαναστρόφους 
μέντοι καὶ πρακτικοὺς καὶ ἀκαταγωνίστους καὶ 
ὅλως ἐπιτευκτικούς. ἐπὶ δὲ τῶν ἐναντίων ἅρπα- 
γας, ληστάς, νοθευτάς, κακοπαθεῖς, αἰσχροκερδεῖς, 
4, 
ἀθέους, ἀστόργους, ὑβριστάς, ἐπιβουλευτικούς, 
κλέπτας, ἐπιόρκους, μιαιφόνους, ἀθεμιτοφάγους, 
κακουργούς, ἀνδροφόνους, φαρμακευτάς, ἱεροσύλους, 
ἀσεβεῖς, τυμβορύχους καὶ ὅλως ὃ παγκάκους. 


1 μωροκάκου. VADProc., ἀμωροκάκους PL, μωροκάλους 
MECam. 

2 αὐστηρούς.. . . εὐλαβητικούς om. PLMCam., habent 
VADEProc. 

8 ἀδήκτους codd. Cam.!; fortasse ἀδεήτους legendum est 
ut coniecit Cam.?2; om. Proc. 

4 ἀκαταφρονήτους codd. et Proc., ἀκατακρίτους Cam. 


342 


TETRABIBLOS III. 13 


public confessors of ailments, suspicious, hating their 
own children, friendless, hiding within doors, without 
judgement, faithless, knavishly foolish, venomous, hy- 
pocritical, ineffective, unambitious, prone to change 
their minds, stern, hard to speak with or to approach, 
cautious, but nevertheless foolish and submissive to 
abuse. 

Saturn, allied with Mars, in honourable positions 
makes his subjects neither good nor bad, industrious, 
outspoken, nuisances, cowardly braggarts, harsh in 
conduct, without pity, contemptuous, rough, conten- 
tious, rash, disorderly, deceitful, layers of ambushes, 
tenacious of anger, unmoved by pleading, courting the 
mob, tyrannical, grasping, haters of the citizenry, 
fond of strife, malignant, evil through and through, 
active, impatient, blustering, vulgar, boastful, injur- 
ious, unjust, not to be despised, haters of mankind, 
inflexible, unchangeable, busy-bodies, but at the same 
time adroit and practical, not to be overborne by 
rivals, and in general successful in achieving their 
ends. In the opposite positions he makes his sub- 
jects robbers, pirates, adulterators, submissive to 
disgraceful treatment, takers of base profits, godless, 
without affection, insulting, crafty, thieves, perjurers, 
murderers, eaters of forbidden foods, evildoers, 
homicides, poisoners, impious, robbers of temples and 
of tombs, and utterly depraved. 





δ ἀθέους VPLADProc., ἀθέτους MECam.', ἀθέσμους Cam. 2 
5 ὅλως om. Cam. 


343 


PTOLEMY 


Τῷ δὲ τῆς ᾿ἀφροδίτης συνοικειωθεὶς ἐπὶ μὲν ἐνδό- 
Ewv διαθέσεων ποιεῖ μισογυναίους, φιλαρχαίους," 
φιλερήμους, ἀηδεῖς πρὸς τὰς ἐντεύξεις, ἀφιλοτί- 
μους, μισοκάλους, φθονερούς, αὐστηροὺς πρὸς 
συνουσίας, ἀσυμπεριφόρους, μονογνώμονας, φοιβα- 
στικούς, θρησκευτάς, μυστηρίων καὶ τελετῶν 
ἐπιθυμητάς, ἱεροποιούς, ἐνθεαστικούς, θεοπροσπλό- 
κους, σεμνοὺς δὲ καὶ εὐεντρέπτους, αἰδήμονας, 


160 ἐμφιλοσόφους, πιστοὺς πρὸς συμβιώσεις,Ξ ἐγκρατεῖς, 


ἐπιλογιστικούς, εὐλαβεῖς, ἀγανακτητάς τε καὶ πρὸς 
τὰς τῶν γυναικῶν ὑποψίας ζηλοτύπους - ἐπὶ δὲ 
τῶν ἐναντίων λάγνους, ἀσελγεῖς, αἰσχροποιούς, 
ἀδιαφόρους καὶ ἀκαθάρτους πρὸς τὰς συνουσίας, 
ἀνάγνους, ἐπιβουλευτικοὺς θηλυκῶν προσώπων καὶ 
μάλιστα τῶν οἰκειοτάτων, σαθρούς,)Σ παμψόγους, 
καταφερεῖς, μισοκάλους, μωμητικούς, κακολόγους, 
μεθύσους, λατρευτικούς, ὑπονοθευτάς, ἀθεμίτους 4 
πρὸς τὰς συνελεύσεις, διατιθέντας καὶ διατιθεμένους, 
οὐ μόνον πρὸς τὰ κατὰ φύσιν ἀλλὰ καὶ τὰ παρὰ 
φύσιν πρεσβυτέρων καὶ ἀτίμων καὶ παρανόμων καὶ 
θηριωδῶν μίξεων ἐπιθυμητάς, ἀσεβεῖς, θεῶν κατα- 
φρονητικούς, μυστηρίων καὶ ἱερῶν διασυρτικούς, 
πάμπαν ἀπίστους, διαβολικούς, φαρμακούς, παντο- 
ποιούς. 

Τῷ δὲ τοῦ ‘Eppod συνοικειωθεὶς ἐπὶ μὲν ἐνδόξων 
διαθέσεων ποιεῖ περιέργους, φιλοπεύστας, νομίμων 


1 φιλαρχαίους VPLDProc., -αρχίους E, -dpyous MACam.}, 
-dvdpovs Cam.” 

2 εὐσταθεῖς post συμβιώσεις add. MECam., om. VPLAD 
Proc. 


344 


TETRABIBLOS ΠῚ. 13 


Allied with Venus in honourable positions Saturn 
makes his subjects haters of women, lovers of anti- 
quity, solitary, unpleasant to meet, unambitious, 
hating the beautiful, envious, stern in social re- 
lations, not companionable, of fixed opinions, pro- 
phetic, given to the practice of religious rites, lovers 
of mysteries and initiations, performers of sacrifi- 
cial rites, mystics, religious addicts, but dignified 
and reverent, modest, philosophical, faithful in 
marriage,! self-controlled, calculating, cautious, quick 
to take offence, and easily led by jealousy to be 
suspicious of their wives. In positions of the op- 
posite kind he makes them loose, lascivious, doers of 
base acts, undiscriminating and unclean in sexual 
relations, impure, deceivers of women and particu- 
larly their own kin, unsound, censorious, depraved, 
hating the beautiful, fault-finders, evil-speakers, 
drunken, servile, adulterators, lawless in sexual 
relations, both active and passive, both natural and 
unnatural, and willing to seek them with those barred 
by age, station, or law, or with animals, impious, 
contemptuous of the gods, deriding mysteries and 
sacred rites, entirely faithless, slanderous, poisoners, 
rogues who will stop at nothing. 

Saturn, in familiarity with Mercury, in honourable 
positions makes his subjects meddlers, inquisitive, 


1At this point some of the MSS. and Camerarius add 
“steadfast ἢ. 
® σαθρούς VPDProc., καθρούς L, θρασεῖς MAECam, 
* ἀθεμίτους VP (-μητ-) LADE, -rws MCam.; om. Proce. 
345 


PTOLEMY 


ζητητικούς, φιλιάτρους, μυστικούς, μετόχους ἀπο- 
κρύφων καὶ ἀπορρήτων, τερατουργούς, παραλογισ- 
τάς, ἐφημεροβίους, ἐντρεχεῖς, διοικητικοὺς πραγ- 
μάτων καὶ ἀγχίφρονας, περιπίκρους καὶ ἀκριβεῖς, 
/ λ / 1 IN 4, > / 
νήπτας, pirdoppovas,! φιλοπράκτους, ἐπιτευκτικούς" 
ἐπὶ δὲ τῶν ἐναντίων ληρώδεις, μνησικάκους, νηλεεῖς 
161 ταῖς ψυχαῖς͵ ἐπιμόχθους, μισοϊδίους, φιλοβασάνους,3 
ἀνευφράντους, νυκτερέμβους,3 ἐνεδρευτάς, προδότας, 
ἀσυμπαθεῖς, κλέπτας, μαγικούς, φαρμακευτάς, 
πλαστογράφους, ῥᾳδιουργούς, ἀποτευκτικοὺς καὶ 
εὐεκπτώτους. 
€ A A A ‘ 3 ᾿ , \ : 1 ΄, 
Ο δὲ τοῦ Διὸς ἀστὴρ μόνος τὴν οἰκοδεσποτίαν 
τῆς ψυχῆς λαβὼν ἐπὶ μὲν ἐνδόξων διαθέσεων ποιεῖ 
μεγαλοψύχους, χαριστικούς, θεοσεβεῖς, τιμητικούς, 
3 4 4 a > 
ἀπολαυστικούς, φιλανθρώπους, μεγαλοπρεπεῖς, ἐλευ- 
θέρους, δικαίους, μεγαλόφρονας, σεμνούς, ἰδιοπράγ- 
2 / A A / > 4, 4 Xr 
μονας, ἐλεήμονας, φιλολόγους, εὐεργετικούς," φιλο- 
στόργους, ἡγεμονικούς - ἐπὶ δὲ τῆς ἐναντίας δια- 
θέσεως τυγχάνων τὰς ὁμοίας μὲν φαντασίας περι- 
ποιεῖ ὃ ταῖς ψυχαῖς, ἐπὶ τὸ ταπεινότερον μέντοι καὶ 
ἀνεπιφαντότερον καὶ ἀκριτωτέρον - οἷον ἀντὶ μὲν 
μεγαλοψυχίας ἀσωτίαν, ἀντὶ δὲ θεοσεβείας δεισιδαι- 


1 φιλόφρονας PL, -ovs VD, φιλοφρονητικούς Proc., φιλοπόνους 
MAECam. 

2 φιλοβασάνους VPLDEProc., φιλοβασκάνους MACam. 

3 νυκτερέμβους VPLD, νυκτιρρέμβους A, νυκτεριρέμβους MNE 
Cam., νυκτοβίους Proc. 

4 evepyetixovs VPLDProc., εὑρετικούς MNAECam. 

5 περιποιεῖται MNDCam. 


346 


TETRABIBLOS ΤΙ. 13 


inquirers into matters of law and custom, fond of the 
art of medicine, mystics, partakers in concealed and 
secret rites, miracle-workers, cheaters, living only 
for the day, facile, able to direct business, shrewd, 
bitter, accurate, sober, friendly, fond of practical 
affairs, capable of gaining their ends. In dis- 
honourable positions he makes them frivolous talkers, 
malignant, with no pity in their souls, given to toil, 
hating their own kin, fond of torment, gloomy, 
night-prowlers, layers of ambushes, traitors, unsym- 
pathetic, thieves, magicians, poisoners, forgers, un- 
scrupulous, unfortunate, and usually unsuccessful. 
If Jupiter alone has the domination of the soul, in 
honourable positions he makes his subjects magnani- 
mous, generous, god-fearing, honourable, pleasure- 
loving, kind, magnificent, liberal, just, high-minded, 
dignified, minding their own business, compassion- 
ate, fond of discussion, beneficent, affectionate, with 
qualities of leadership. If he chances to be in the 
opposite kind of position, he makes their souls seem 
similar, to be sure, but with a difference in the direc- 
tion of greater humility, less conspicuousness, and 
poorer judgement.!_ For example, instead of magna- 
nimity, he endows them with prodigality ; instead 


1 Ptolemy probably has in mind Aristotle’s famous 
doctrine that virtue is a mean (Ethica Nicomachea, 2, 
p. 11066, 27) and the examples cited by Aristotle, but 
Ptolemy’s instances are only similar to, not identical with, 
Aristotle’s. Aristotle, for example, makes ἐλευθεριότης, 
‘“‘liberality,’? the virtue of which dowria, “ὁ prodigality ”’ 
is an excess; contrasts μεγαλοψυχία, “ὁ magnanimity,” 
with χαυνότης, “ vanity,” and μικροψυχία, “ meanness of 
spirit ’’; αἰδήμων, “ modest,’ with the excessive quality 
κατάπληξ, ‘“‘shy,’’ and with the deficiency ἀναίσχυντος, 
** shameless,” 

347 


PTOLEMY 


, 5 A A , ~ / > ‘\ A ’ὔ 

μονίαν, ἀντὶ δὲ αἰδοῦς δειλίαν, ἀντὶ δὲ σεμνότητος 
ΝΜ 3 \ \ / ΓΚ: 5 | A 
οἴησιν, ἀντὶ δὲ φιλανθρωπίας εὐήθειαν, ἀντὶ δὲ 
φιλοκαλίας φιληδονίαν, ἀντὶ δὲ μεγαλοφροσύνης 
,ὔ > ‘A A > ,ὔ 3 ,ὕ \ 
βλακείαν, ἀντὶ δὲ ἐλευθεριότητος ἀδιαφορίαν, καὶ 

ὅσα τούτοις παραπλήσια. 

~ A aM \ > \ ‘A > / 

Τῷ δὲ τοῦ "Apews συνοικειωθεὶς ἐπὶ μὲν ἐνδόξων 
διαθέσεων ποιεῖ τραχεῖς, μαχίμους, στρατηγικούς,1 
διοικητικούς, κεκινημένους, ἀνυποτάκτους, θερμούς, 
παραβόλους, πρακτικούς, παρρησιαστικούς, ἐλεγκ- 

102 τικούς, ἀνυστικούς, φιλονείκους, ἀρχικούς, εὐεπι- 
βούλους, ἐπιεικεῖς, ἐπάνδρους, νικητικούς, μεγαλο- 
ψύχους δὲ καὶ φιλοτίμους καὶ θυμικοὺς καὶ κριτικοὺς 
καὶ ἐπιτευκτικούς - ἐπὶ δὲ τῶν ἐναντίων ὑβριστάς, 
3 / ᾽ Δ 5 4 4 > 
ἀδιαφόρους, ὠμούς, ἀνεξιλάστους, στασιαστάς, ἐρισ- 
τικούς, μονοτόνους," διαβόλους, οἰηματίας, πλεονέκ- 
τας, ἅρπαγας, ταχυμεταβόλους, κούφους, μεταμελη- 
τικούς, ἀστάτους, προπετεῖς, ἀπίστους, ἀκρίτους, 
ἀγνώμονας, ἐκστατικούς, eumpaKTous,® μεμψιμοί- 

A 

ρους, ἀσώτους, ληρώδεις καὶ ὅλως ἀνωμάλους καὶ 

παρακεκινημένους. 

~ A ~ > / \ > A A >) 

Τῷ δὲ τῆς ᾿Αφροδίτης συνοικειωθεὶς ἐπὶ μὲν ἐν- 

- ’ὔ 

δόξων διαθέσεων ποιεῖ καθαρίους, ἀπολαυστικούς, 
4, 

φιλοκάλους, φιλοτέκνους, φιλοθεώρους, φιλομού- 
> / Xr / 4 ΕῚ AG) Ε] / 

σους, ὠδικούς, φιλοτρόφους," εὐήθεις, εὐεργετικούς, 


1 στρατηγικούς] στρατιωτικούς NCam. 

2 μονοτόνου. PMEProc., μονοπόνου. VLAD, μονοτρόπους 
NCam. 

3 ἐμπράκτους Proe., ἐμπατάκτους. VPL, εὐπατάκτους 
MNADECam. 

4 dirorpodous libri Cam.', -τρύφους Cam.?* 


348 


TETRABIBLOS ΤΙ]. 13 


of reverence for the gods, with superstition; instead 
of modesty, with cowardice; instead of dignity, 
with conceit ; instead of kindness, with foolish sim- 
plicity ; instead of the love of beauty, with love of 
pleasure ; instead of high-mindedness, with stupidity ; 
instead of liberality, with indifference, and the like. 

Jupiter allied with Mars in honourable positions 
makes his subjects rough, pugnacious, military, 
managerial, restless, unruly, ardent, reckless, prac- 
tical, outspoken, critical, effective, contentious, com- 
manding, given to plotting, respectable, virile, fond 
of victory, but magnanimous, ambitious, passionate, 
judicious, successful. In the opposite position he 
makes then insolent, undiscriminating, savage, im- 
placable, seditious, contentious, stubborn, slanderous, 
conceited, avaricious, rapacious, quickly changeable, 
light, readily changing their minds, unstable, head- 
strong, untrustworthy, of poor judgement, unfeeling, 
excitable, active, querulous, prodigal, gossipy, and 
in all ways uneven and easily excited. 

Jupiter, allied with Venus, in honourable positions 
makes his subjects pure, pleasure-loving, lovers of 
the beautiful, of children, of spectacles, and of the 
domain of the Muses, singers, fond of those who 
reared them, of good character,! beneficent, com- 


1 εὐήθεια and the corresponding adjective, εὐήθης, have 
two distinct senses, the original, etymological one, ‘* good 
character,” and a derived meaning, ‘“‘simplicity’’ or 
“‘ guilelessness,’’ which may amount to nothing more than 
downright folly. Plato, in Republic, 400 DE, uses εὐήθεια 
in the first sense, specifically saying that he does not mean 
the other kind of εὐήθεια. In the present passage, the 
context clearly shows that the first sense is intended ; but in 
the very next paragraph εὐήθης occurs in its second meaning. 


349 


PTOLEMY 


éeAentiKovs,! ἀκάκους, φιλοθέους, ἀσκητάς, φιλα- 
΄, , ἣν > ,ὔ > 
γωνιστάς, φρονίμους, φιλητικούς, ἐπαφροδίτους ἐν 
τῷ σεμνῷ, λαμπροψύχους, εὐγνώμονας, μετα- 
δοτικούς, φιλογραμμάτους, κριτικούς, συμμέτρους 
καὶ εὐσχήμονας πρὸς τὰ ἀφροδίσια, φιλοικείους," εὐσε- 
βεῖς, φιλοδικαίους, φιλοτίμους, φιλοδόξους καὶ ὅλως 
/, v9 ΄ὔ bee | \ ~ > / 
καλούς Te Kal ἀγαθούς - ἐπὶ δὲ τῶν ἐναντίων τρυφη- 
τάς, ἡδυβίους, θηλυψύχους, ὀρχηστικούς, γυναικο- 
θύμους, δαπανηρούς,)Σ Kakoyvvaious,* ἐρωτικούς, 
λάγνους, καταφερεῖς, λοιδόρους,5 μοιχούς, φιλοκόσ- 
ς ἣ / 6 ε θ , > ’ > 4 
163 μους, ὑπομαλακους, ρασυμους, ADWTOUS, επιμω- 
μους, ἐμπαθεῖς, καλλωπιστάς, γυναικονοήμονας, 
ἱερῶν ἐγκατόχους, προαγωγικούς, μυστηριακούς, 
πιστοὺς μέντοι καὶ ἀπονήρους καὶ ἐπιχαρίτους καὶ 
εὐπροσίτους ὃ καὶ εὐδιαγώγους καὶ πρὸς τὰς συμφο- 
pas ὃ ἐλευθεριωτέρους. 

Τῷ δὲ τοῦ ‘Eppod συνοικειωθεὶς ἐπὶ μὲν ἐνδόξων 
διαθέσεων ποιεῖ πολυγραμμάτους,.5 φιλολόγους, 
γεωμέτρας,." μαθηματικούς, ποιητικούς, δημηγορι- 
κούς, εὐφυεῖς, σωφρονικούς, ἀγαθόφρονας, καλοσυμ- 
βούλους, πολιτικούς, εὐεργετικούς, ἐπιτροπικούς, 

1 ἐλεητικούς VD, ἐλεήμονας Proc., om. PL, ἐλεγκτικούς 
MNAECam. 

2 φιλοικείους E, φιλικείους VD, φιλοικίους P, φιλικίους L, 
φιλονείκους MNACam. 

3 δαπανηρούς PLProc., δαπάνους cett. Cam. 

4 κακογυναίους Proc., καταγυναίους VD, κατὰ γυναίων PL, καὶ 
γυναίους MNAECam. 


5 λοιδόρους μοιχούς Proc., om. λοιδόρους PLMNECam., om. 
μοιχούς VAD. 


350 





TETRABIBLOS ΠῚ. 13 


passionate, guileless, religious, prone to athletic train- 
ing, fond of competition, wise, affectionate, charming 
in a dignified way, magnanimous, fair, charitable, 
fond of learning, of good judgement, moderate and 
decorous in matters of love, fond of their kinsfolk, 
pious, just, ambitious, seekers after glory, and in 
general gentlemanly. In the opposite positions he 
renders them luxurious, soft-livers, effeminate, 
fond of the dance, womanly in spirit, lavish in 
expenditure, evil in relations with women, erotic, 
lascivious, lecherous, slanderous, adulterous, lovers 
of ornament, rather soft, lazy, profligate, given to 
fault-finding, passionate, adorners of their persons, 
womanly minded, infatuated by religious rites, 
panderers, frequenters of the mysteries, trust- 
worthy however and not rascally, but gracious, 
easy of approach, and cheerful, and inclined to 
liberality in misfortune. 

Jupiter allied with Mercury in honourable posi- 
tions makes his subjects learned, fond of discussion, 
geometricians, mathematicians, poets, orators, gifted, 
sober, of good intellect, good in counsel, statesmen, 
benefactors, managers, good-natured, generous, lovers 





8 ὑπομαλάκους VP (-μαλλ-} LADE, φιλομαλάκους MNCam. 

7 ἐπιμώμους VPLProc., ἐπιβώμους 1), φιλομώμους MNECam., 
οἵα. Α ; post hoc verbum add. ὑπομώρους MNECam., φιλομώ- 
ρους A, om. cett. Proc. 

8 Post εὐπροσίτους add. πιστούς MNCam., om. cett. Proc. 

9 συμφορὰς VDProc., περισυμῴφορας P (-dwp-) L, ἐπιφορὰς 
MNAECam. 

10 πολυγραμμάτους VADProc., φιλογραμμάτους MNECam., 
πολυπραγμάτους φιλοπράκτους PL. 

11 γεωμέτρας VPLDProc., φιλογεωμέτρας MNAECam. 


351 


PTOLEMY 


χρηστοήθεις, φιλοδώρους, φιλόχλους, εὐεπηβόλους," 
ἐπιτευκτικούς, ἡγεμονικούς, εὐσεβεῖς, φιλοθέους, 
εὐχρηματίστους, φιλοστόργους, φιλοικείους, εὐπαι- 
δεύτους, ἐμφιλοσόφους, ἀξιωματικούς - ἐπὶ δὲ τῶν 
> Ψ SF is PA / +) 
ἐναντίων εὐήθεις, ληρώδεις, σφαλλομένους, εὐκατα- 
φρονήτους, ἐνθουσιαστικούς, θεοπροσπλόκους,2 φλη- 
νάφους, ὑποπίκρους, προσποιησισόφους,3 ἀνοήτους, 
ἀλαζονικούς, ἐπιτηδευτάς, μαγευτικούς, ὑποκεκινη- 
μένους, πολυΐστορας δὲ καὶ μνημονικοὺς καὶ * διδασ- 
καλικοὺς καὶ καθαρίους ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις. 
Ὃ δὲ τοῦ Ἄρεως ἀστὴρ μόνος τὴν οἰκοδεσποτίαν 
“ lod \ re \ ? / / aA 
τῆς ψυχῆς λαβὼν ἐπὶ μὲν ἐνδόξου διαθέσεως ποιεῖ 
γενναίους, ἀρχικούς, θυμικούς, φιλόπλους,5 πολυτρό- 
πους," σθεναρούς, παραβόλους, ῥιψοκινδύνους, ἀνυπο- 
τάκτους, ἀδιαφόρους, μονοτόνους, ὀξεῖς, αὐθάδεις, 
καταφρονητικούς, τυραννικούς, δράστας, ὀργίλους, 
ἡγεμονικούς - ἐπὶ δὲ τῆς ἐναντίας ὠμούς, ὑβριστάς, 
“ λ θ ΄ ὃ /, 7 7 
164 φιλαίμους, φιλοθορύβους, Samdvous, κραυγαστάς, 
πλήκτας, προπετεῖς, μεθύσους, ἅρπαγας, κακούρ- 
yous, ἀνελεήμονας, τεταραγμένους, μανιώδεις, μισοι- 
κείους, ἀθέους. 
Τῷ δὲ τῆς ᾿Αφροδίτης συνοικειωθεὶς ἐπὶ μὲν 
ἐνδόξων διαθέσεων ποιεῖ ἐπιχάριτας, εὐδιαγώγους, 
φιλεταίρους, ἡδυβίους, εὐφροσύνους, παιγνιώδεις, 


1 εὐετπηβόλους ME, εὐεπιβούλους PLNCam., ἐπιβόλους VAD, 
om. Proc. 

2 θβεοπροσπλόκους P (-πλωκ-) L (-πλωκ-) MAEProc., θεοπλό- 
κους VD, θεοπροσπόλους NCam. 

3 προσποιησισόφους ME, προσποιήσει σοφούς PL, προσποιήσεις 
σοφούς VD, προσποιήτους σοφούς A, προσποιησόφους NCam, 

4 μνημονικοὺς καὶ om. Cam.” 


352 


TETRABIBLOS ΤΙ. 13 


of the mob, shrewd, successful, leaders, reverent, 
religious, skilful in business, affectionate, lovers 
of their own kin, well brought up, philosophical, 
dignified. In the opposite positions he makes them 
simple, garrulous, prone to make mistakes, con- 
temptible, fanatical, religious enthusiasts, speakers 
of folly, inclined to bitterness, pretenders to wisdom, 
fools, boasters, students, magicians, somewhat de- 
ranged, but well informed, of good memory, teachers, 
and pure in their desires. 

Mars alone, given the domination of the soul, in an 
honourable position makes his subjects noble, com- 
manding, spirited, military, versatile,' powerful, ven- 
turesome, rash, unruly, indifferent, stubborn, keen, 
headstrong, contemptuous, tyrannical, active, easily 
angered, with the qualities of leadership. In a posi- 
tion of the opposite kind he makes them savage, 
insolent, bloodthirsty, makers of disturbances, 
spendthrifts, loud-mouthed, quick-fisted, impetuous, 
drunken, rapacious, evil-doers, pitiless, unsettled, 
mad, haters of their own kin, impious. 

Allied with Venus, in honourable positions, Mars 
makes his subjects pleasing, cheerful, friendly, soft- 
living, happy, playful, artless, graceful, fond of 


‘The epithet constantly used to describe Odysseus by 
Homer. 





5 φιλόπλους VPLMADE, φιλοπολέμους Proc., φιλοπλούτους 
NCam. 


ὃ πολυτρόπους ΝΡ (πολλ-) LDProc., πολυτρόφους MNAECam. 
*xpavyaotas PL, κραυγάσους VD, κραυγαστικούς AProc., 
κραυγάζους MNECam. 


353 


PTOLEMY 


ἀφελεῖς, εὐρύθμους, piropxnotas,! ἐρωτικούς, φιλο- 
TEXVOUS, μιμητικούς, ἀπολαυστικούς, διασκευαστάς, 
ἐπάνδρους καὶ εὐκαταφόρους μὲν πρὸς τὰς ἀφροδισ- 
ιακὰς ἁμαρτίας, ἐπιτευκτικοὺς δὲ καὶ εὐπεριστόλους 
καὶ νουνεχεῖς καὶ δυσελέγκτους καὶ διακριτικούς,: 
ἔτι δὲ νέων ἐπιθυμητικοὺς ἀρρένων τε καὶ θηλειῶν, 
δαπανηρούς τε καὶ ὀξυθύμους καὶ ζηλοτύπους - ἐπὶ 
δὲ τῶν ἐναντίων ῥιψοφθάλμους, λάγνους, καταφερεῖς, 
ἀδιαφόρους, διασύρτας, μοιχικούς, ὑβριστάς, ψεύσ- 
τας, δολοπλόκους, ὑπονοθευτὰς οἰκείων τε καὶ ἀλλο- 
τρίων, ὀξεῖς ἅμα καὶ προσκορεῖς πρὸς τὰς ἐπιθυμίας, 
διαφθορέας γυναικῶν καὶ παρθένων, παραβόλους, 
θερμούς, ἀτάκτους, ἐνεδρευτάς, ἐπιόρκους, εὐεμ- 
πτώτους τε καὶ φρενοβλαβεῖς, ἐνίοτε δὲ καὶ ἀσώ- 
τους, φιλοκόσμους καὶ θρασεῖς καὶ διατιθεμένους 
καὶ ἀσελγαίνοντας .ὃ 
Τῷ δὲ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ συνοικειωθεὶς ἐπὶ μὲν ἐνδόξων 
διαθέσεων ποιεῖ στρατηγικούς, δεινούς, δράστας, 
165 εὐκινήτους, ἀκαταφρονήτους, πολυτρόπους, εὕρετι- 
κούς,, σοφιστάς, ἐπιπόνους, πανούργους, προγλώσ- 
σους, ἐπιθετικούς, δολίους, ἀστάτους, μεθοδευτάς, 
κακοτέχνους, ὀξύφρονας, ἐξαπατητάς, ὑποκριτικούς, 
ἐνεδρευτάς, κακοτρόπους, πολυπράγμονας, φιλο- 
πονήρους, ἐπιτευκτικοὺς δ᾽ ἄλλως καὶ πρὸς τοὺς 
ὁμοίους εὐσυνθέτους καὶ εὐσυνδεξιάστους, καὶ ὅλως 


1 Φιλοτέχνους PLProc.. φιλοτέκνους cett. Cam. 

ὃ διακριτικούς VPLADProc., ἀδιακρίτους MNECam. 

8 ἀτάκτους libri ; ἀτόπους Cam. 

4 ἀσώτους ΝΑΏΡτοο., αὐτῶ τοὺς PL, αὐτοὺς MNECam. 

5 Post ἀσελγαίνοντας add. ἀπεργάζεται MNAECam., om. 
VPLDProc. 


354 


TETRABIBLOS III. 13 


dancing, erotic, artistic, imitative, pleasure-loving, 
able to secure themselves property,! masculine, and 
given to misconduct in matters of love, but still 
successful, circumspect, and sensible, difficult to con- 
vict and discreet, furthermore passionate for both 
young men and young women, spendthrifts, quick- 
tempered, and jealous. In contrary positions he 
makes them leering, lascivious, profligate, indifferent, 
slanderers, adulterers, insolent, liars, deceivers, se- 
ducers of those both in their own families and in 
those of others, at the same time keen and insatiate of 
pleasure, corrupters of women and maidens, venture- 
some, ardent, unruly, treacherous, perjurers, easily 
influenced and of unsound mind, but sometimes like- 
wise profligate, fond of adornment, bold, disposed to 
base practices, and shameless. 

Allied with Mercury, in honourable positions Mars 
makes his subjects leaders of armies, skilful, vigorous, 
active, not to be despised, resourceful, inventive, 
sophistic, painstaking, rascally, talkative, pugnacious, 
tricky, unstable, systematic workers, practising evil 
arts, keen-witted, deceitful, hypocritical, insidious, 
of bad character, meddlers, inclined to rascality but 
nevertheless successful and capable of keeping con- 
tract and faith with persons like themselves, and in 

1 διασκευαστής also means one who arranges a text, 
“‘editor,’’ but here a less specialised meaning seems to be 
ealled for. The verb διασκευάζειν has, in general, the active 


meaning “set in order,” and in the middle voice “ equip 
one’s self.” Proclus omits this word in the Paraphrase. 


8 δεινούς VD, δειλούς MNAEProc.Cam. ; δεινούς. . dxara- 
φρονήτους om. PL. 
7 εὑρετικούς] evextixovs NCam. 


355 


PTOLEMY 


ἐχθρῶν μὲν βλαπτικούς, φίλων δὲ εὐποιητικούς " 
ἐπὶ δὲ τῶν ἐναντίων δαπανηρούς, πλεονέκτας, 
ὠμούς, παραβόλους, τολμηρούς, μεταμελητικούς, 
ἐμπαράκτους,; παρακεκινημένους, ψεύστας, κλέπ- 
τας, ἀθέους, ἐπιόρκους, ἐπιθέτας, στασιαστάς, 
ἐμπρηστάς, θεατροκόπους, ἐφυβρίστους,2 ληστρι- 
κούς, τοιχωρύχους,) μιαιφόνους, πλαστογράφους, 
ῥᾳδιουργούς, γόητας, μάγους, φαρμακούς, ἀνδροφό- 
νους. 

ὋὉ δὲ τῆς ᾿Αφροδίτης μόνος τὴν οἰκοδεσποτίαν 
τῆς ψυχῆς * λαβὼν ἐπὶ μὲν ἐνδόξου διαθέσεως ποιεῖ 
προσηνεῖς, ἀγαθούς, τρυφητάς,Σ λογίους, καθα- 
pious, εὐφροσύνους, φιλορχηστάς, καλοζήλους, 7 
μισοπονήρους, φιλοτέχνους, φιλοθεωτάτους 8 εὐσχή- 
μονας, εὐεκτικούς, εὐονείρους, φιλοστόργους, εὐερ- 
γετικούς, ἐλεήμονας, σικχούς," εὐσυναλλάκτους, 
ἐπιτευκτικοὺς καὶ ὅλως ἐπαφροδίτους emi δὲ τῆς 
ἐναντίας ῥαθύμους, ἐρωτικούς, τεθηλυσμένους, 
γυναικώδεις, ἀτόλμους, ἀδιαφόρους, καταφερεῖς, 

166 ἐπιψόγους, ἀνεπιφάντους, ἐπονειδίστους .19 

Τῷ δὲ τοῦ “Ἑρμοῦ συνοικειωθεὶς ἐπὶ μὲν ἐνδό- 
ἕων διαθέσεων ποιεῖ φιλοτέχνους, ἐμφιλοσόφους, 
ἐπιστημονικούς, εὐφυεῖς, ποιητικούς, φιλομούσους, 
φιλοκάλους, χρηστοήθεις, ἀπολαυστικούς, τρυφερο- 


1 ἐμπαράκτους VD, ἐμπράκτους PLA, ἐμπατάκτους MNE 
Cam.; om. Proc. Fortasse legendum est εὐπαράκτους. 

2 ἐφυβρίστους VMNDE, om. PLProc., ἐφυβρίστας ACam. 

3 τριχωρύχους VP (-op-) DProc., τυμβωρύχους MNAEL (-op-) 
Cam. 

4 τῆς ψυχῆς om. VDProc. 

5 κοινούς post τρυφητάς add. MNECam., om. VPLADProc. 


356 


TETRABIBLOS III. 13 


general injurious to their enemies and helpful to 
their friends. In opposite positions he makes them 
spendthrifts, avaricious, savage, venturesome, daring, 
prone to change their minds, excitable, easily aroused, 
liars, thieves, impious, perjurers, ready to take the 
offensive, seditious, kindlers of fires, creators of dis- 
turbances in the theatre, insolent, piratical, burglars, 
murderers, forgers, villains, wizards, magicians, sor- 
cerers, homicides. 

If Venus alone takes the domination of the soul, 
in an honourable position she makes her subjects 
pleasant, good, luxurious,! eloquent, neat, cheerful, 
fond of dancing, eager for beauty, haters of evil, 
lovers of the arts, fond of spectacles, decorous, 
healthy, dreamers of pleasant dreams, affectionate, 
beneficent, compassionate, fastidious, easily con- 
ciliated, successful, and, in general, charming. In 
the opposite position she makes them careless, erotic, 
effeminate, womanish, timid, indifferent, depraved, 
censorious, insignificant, meriting reproach. 

Joined with Mercury, in honourable positions 
Venus makes them artistic, philosophical, gifted 
with understanding, talented, poetic, lovers of 
the muses, lovers of beauty, of worthy character, 


1 Certain texts add here “affable ” (κοινούς). 





© λογίους VADProc., λογικούς PL, ἐλλογίμους MNECam. 

1 κακοζήλους MNEProc.Cam., καλοζήλους VPLAD. 

8 φιλοθεωτάτους libri Cam,', -θεώρους Cam.? 

9 σικχούς om. MNCam. 10 ἐπονειδίστους om. Cam. 


357 


PTOLEMY 


Suaitous,! εὐφροσύνους, " φιλοφίλους, εὐσεβεῖς, συν- 
ετούς, πολυμηχάνους, διανοητικούς, εὐεπιβόλους 3 
κατορθωτικούς, ταχυμαθεῖς,, αὐτοδιδάκτους, ζη- 
λωτὰς τῶν ἀρίστων, μιμητὰς 5 τῶν καλῶν, εὐστό- 
μους καὶ ἐπιχάριτας τῷ λόγῳ, ἐρασμίους, εὐαρ- 
μόστους τοῖς ἤθεσι, σπουδαίους, φιλάθλους, 
ὀρθούς," κριτικούς, μεγαλόφρονας, τῶν δὲ adpo- 
δισίων πρὸς μὲν τὰ γυναικεῖα φυλακτικούς, πρὸς 
δὲ τὰ παιδικὰ μᾶλλον κεκινημένους καὶ ζηλο- 
τύπους - ἐπὶ δὲ τῆς ἐναντίας ἐπιθέτας, πολυ- 
μηχάνους, κακοστόμους, ἀλλοπροσάλλους, κακογνώ- 
μονας, ἐξαπατητάς, κυκητάς, ψεύστας, διαβόλους, 
ἐπιόρκους, βαθυπονήρους, ἐπιβουλευτικούς, ἀσυν- 
θέτους, ἀδεξιάστους, νοθευτάς, γυναικῶν διαφθορέας 
καὶ παίδων, ἔτι δὲ καλλωπιστάς, ὑπομαλάκους, 
ἐπιψόγους,, κακοφήμους, πολυθρυλήτους, παντο- 
πράξους ὃ καὶ ἐνίοτε μὲν ἐπὶ διαφθορᾷ τὰ τοιαῦτα 
ὑποκρινομένους, ἐνίοτε δὲ καὶ ταῖς ἀληθείαις, 
διατιθεμένους τε καὶ αἰσχροποιοῦντας καὶ ποικίλοις 
πάθεσιν ὑβριζομένους. 

161 ‘O δὲ τοῦ ᾿Ερμοῦ ἀστὴρ μόνος τὴν οἰκοδεσποτίαν 
τῆς ψυχῆς λαβὼν ἐπὶ μὲν ἐνδόξου διαθέσεως ποιεῖ 
τοὺς γεννωμένους συνετούς, ἀγχίνους, νοήμονας, 
πολυΐστορας, εὑρετικούς, ἐμπείρους, λογιστικούς, 

1 τρυφεροδιαίτους VP (τρυφαιροδιέτους) L (τριφεροδιέτους) AD, 
tpupepoerous ME, τρυφεροβίους Proc., τρυφερούς NCam. 


Ξφιλοσόφους post εὐφροσύνους add. MNCam., om. cett. 
Proce. 

3 εὐεπιβόλους NACam., εὐεπηβόλους ME, εὐεπιβούλους 
VPLD ; om. Proc. 

4 ῤιλομαθεῖς post ταχυμαθεῖς add. NCam.,om. VPLADProc.; 
ταχυφιλομαθεῖς ME, 


358 


TETRABIBLOS III. 13 


seekers after enjoyment, luxurious, happy,! fond of 
friends, pious, sagacious, resourceful, intellectual, 
intelligent, successful, quick to learn,’ self-taught, 
seekers after the best, imitators of beauty, eloquent 
and pleasing in speech, commanding affection, of 
well-ordered character, earnest, fond of athletics, 
upright, of good judgement, magnanimous ; in affairs 
of love, restrained in their relations with women 
but more passionate for boys, and jealous. In the 
contrary position she makes them pugnacious, re- 
sourceful, evil-speakers, unstable, of bad intentions, 
deceivers, agitators, liars, slanderers, perjurers, 
thorough rascals, plotters, faithless, unreliable, 
adulterators, corrupters of women and children; 
furthermore, adorners of their persons, rather 
effeminate, malicious in censure and in gossip, 
garrulous, villains, sometimes? feigning such acts with 
a view to corruption and sometimes performing 
them in earnest, lending themselves to base acts and 
performing them, and subjected to all sorts of base 
treatment, 

Mercury, by himself taking the domination of the 
soul, in an honourable position makes those who are 
born under him wise, shrewd, thoughtful, learned, 
inventive, experienced, good calculators, inquirers 

1“ Fond of wisdom’’ (φιλοσόφους) is added here by 
certain MSS. 


2 Certain MSS. add “fond of learning”’ at this point. 
8 Proclus omits the rest of this paragraph. 





δ μιμητὰς VPLADE Proc., ζηλωτὰς MNCam, 
5 ὀρθούς VPLADProc. ; om. MNECam. 
7 ἐπιψόγους VP (-ywy-) LADProc. ; κακοψόγους MNECam. 
8 παντοπράξους VPLMD, -πράκτους A, -πράκτας NECam., 
πάντα ἐπιχειροῦντας Proc. 
359 


PTOLEMY 


φυσιολόγους, θεωρητικούς, εὐφυεῖς, ζηλωτικούς, 
εὐεργετικούς, ἐπιλογιστικούς, εὐστόχους, μαθημα- 
τικούς, μυστηριακούς, ἐπιτευκτικούς - ἐπὶ δὲ τῆς 
ἐναντίας πανούργους, προπετεῖς, ἐπιλήσμονας, ὁρμη- 
parias,! κούφους, εὐμεταβόλους, μεταμελητικούς, 
μωροκάκους, ἄφρονας, ἁμαρτώλους, ψεύστας, ἀδια- 
φόρους, ἀστάτους, ἀπίστους, πλεονέκτας, ἀδίκους 
καὶ ὅλως σφαλερούς τε τῇ διανοίᾳ καὶ καταφόρους 
τοῖς ἁμαρτήμασι. 

Τούτων δὲ οὕτως ἐχόντων συμβάλλεται μέντοι 
καὶ αὐτὴ ἡ τῆς σελήνης κατάστασις," ἐπειδήπερ ἐν 
μὲν τοῖς ἐπικαμπίοις τυγχάνουσα τοῦ τε νοτίου καὶ 
τοῦ βορείου πέρατος συνεργεῖ τοῖς ψυχικοῖς ἰδιώ- 
μασιν ἐπὶ τὸ πολυτροπώτερον καὶ τὸ πολυμηχανώ- 
τερον καὶ εὐμεταβολώτερον : ἐπὶ δὲ τῶν συνδέσμων 
ἐπὶ τὸ ὀξύτερον καὶ πρακτικώτερον καὶ εὐκινητό- 
τερον" ἔτι δὲ ἐν μὲν ταῖς ἀνατολαῖς καὶ ταῖς τῶν 
φωτῶν αὐξήσεσιν ἐπὶ τὸ εὐφυέστερον καὶ προφανέο- 
τερον καὶ βεβαιότερον καὶ παρρησιαστικώτερον᾽ ἐν 
δὲ ταῖς μειώσεσι 8 τῶν φωτῶν 7 ταῖς κρύψεσιν ἐ ἐπὶ 
τὸ νωχελέστερον καὶ ἀμβλύτερον καὶ μεταμελη- 

168 τικώτερον καὶ εὐλαβέστερον καὶ ἀνεπιφανέστερον. 

Συμβάλλεται δέπως καὶ 6 ἥλιος συνοικειωθεὶς τῷ 
τῆς ψυχικῆς κράσεως οἰκοδεσποτήσαντι, κατὰ μὲν 
τὸ ἔνδοξον πάλιν τῆς διαθέσεως ἐπὶ τὸ δικαιότερον 


1 ὁρμηματίας VPLD, ὁρμητάς MAE, ὁρμητικάς Cam.", ὁρμη- 
τικούς NCam.? 

5 αὐτὴ ἡ τῆς σελήνης κατάστασις VAD, ἡ αὐτῆς τῆς σελήνης 
PLMNECam. 

8 μειώσεσι(ν) P (μοι-) LMAEProc., βιώσεσιν VD, οἰκειώσεσι 
NCam. 


360 


TETRABIBLOS ΠῚ. 13 


into nature, speculative, gifted, emulous, bene- 
ficent, prudent, good at conjecture, mathematicians, 
partakers in mysteries, successful in attaining their 
ends. In the opposite position he makes them 
utter rascals, precipitate, forgetful, impetuous, light- 
minded, fickle, prone to change their minds, foolish 
rogues, witless, sinful, liars, undiscriminating, un- 
stable, undependable, avaricious, unjust, and, in 
general, unsteady in judgement and inclined to evil 
deeds. 

While the foregoing is true as stated, nevertheless 
the condition of the moon itself also makes a certain 
contribution. For when the moon happens to be at 
the bendings of its northern and southern limits,} 
it helps, ? with respect to the character of the soul, 
in the direction of greater versatility, resourceful- 
ness, and capacity for change; at the nodes, in 
the direction of greater keenness, activity, and ex- 
citability; again, at rising and in the increases of 
its illumination, towards greater natural endow- 
ments, renown, firmness, and frankness; and in 
the waning of its illumination, or its occultations, 
towards greater sluggishness and dullness, less fixity 
of purpose, greater cautiousness, and less renown. 

The sun also aids, when it is familiar with the 
planet that governs the temperament of the soul, 
in an honourable position modifying it in the 


1 See the note on iii. 12 (p. 325) concerning the bendings 
and nodes of the moon’s orbit. 

* Here, as in the case of bodily form and temperament 
(iii. 11; ¢f. especially p. 313), the actual rulers are the five 
planets, and it is the réle of the luminaries to assist, adding 
their influences to those of the former. 


τ 361 


PTOLEMY 


καὶ ἀνυστικώτερον καὶ τιμητικώτερον ' καὶ σεμνό- 
τερον καὶ θεοσεβέστερον - κατὰ δὲ τὸ ἐναντίον καὶ 
ἀνοίκειον ἐπὶ τὸ ταπεινότερον καὶ ἐπιπονώτερον 
καὶ ἀσημότερον 2 καὶ ὠμότερον καὶ μονογνωμονέσ- 
τερον καὶ αὐστηρότερον καὶ δυσδιαγωγότερον καὶ 
ὅλως ἐπὶ τὸ δυσκατορθώτερον. 


«ιδ.) Περὶ παθῶν ψυχικῶν 


᾿Επεὶ δὲ τοῖς τῆς ψυχῆς ἰδιώμασιν ἀκολουθεῖ πως 
καὶ 6 περὶ ὃ τῶν ἐξαιρέτων αὐτῆς παθῶν λόγος, καθ᾽ 
ὅλου μὲν πάλιν ἐπισημαίνεσθαι καὶ παρατηρεῖν 
προσήκει τόν τε τοῦ ‘Eppod ἀστέρα καὶ τὴν σελήνην, 
πῶς ἔχουσι πρός τε ἀλλήλους καὶ τὰ κέντρα καὶ 
τοὺς πρὸς κάκωσιν οἰκείους τῶν ἀστέρων : ὡς ἐάν 
τε αὐτοὶ ἀσύνδετοι ὄντες πρὸς ἀλλήλους, ἐάν τε πρὸς 
τὸν ἀνατολικὸν ὁρίζοντα, καθυπερτερηθῶσιν ἢ ἐμ- 
περισχεθῶσιν ἢ διαμηκισθῶσιν ὑπὸ τῶν ἀνοικείως 
καὶ βλαπτικῶς ἐσχηματισμένων, ποικίλων παθῶν 
περὶ τὰς ψυχικὰς ἰδιοτροπίας συμπιπτόντων εἰσὶ 
ποιητικοί, τῆς διακρίσεως * αὐτῶν πάλιν θεωρου- 
μένης ἀπὸ τῆς προκατειλημμένης τῶν τοῖς τόποις 
συνοικειωθέντων ἀστέρων ἰδιοτροπίας. 

169 Τὰ μὲν οὖν πλεῖστα τῶν μετριωτέρων παθῶν 
σχεδὸν καὶ ἐν τοῖς ἔμπροσθεν περὶ τῶν τῆς ψυχῆς 
ἰδιωμάτων ῥηθεῖσι διακέκριταί πως, τῆς ἐπιτάσεως 
αὐτῶν ἐκ τῆς τῶν κακούντων ὑπερβολῆς συνορᾶσθαι 
δυναμένης " ἐπειδήπερ ἤδη τις ἂν εἰκότως εἴποι 

1 ἀνυτικώτερον καὶ τιμητικώτερον VAD ; πρακτικώτερον καὶ 


τιμητικώτερον Proc.; ἀνυτικώτερον MNECam.1; om. PL; 
ἠθικώτερον Cam.,? 


362 


TETRABIBLOS ΠῚ. 13-14 


direction of justice, success, honour, dignity, and 
reverence for the gods, but in the contrary and alien 
position making it humbler, more industrious, less 
conspicuous, more savage, more obstinate, harsher, 
with a harder life, and in general less successful. 


14. Of Diseases of the Soul. 


Since the account of the principal diseases of the 
soul, in a sense, follows upon that of the soul’s 
characteristics, it is in general needful to note and 
observe the positions of Mercury and the moon 
relative to each other, to the angles, and to the 
planets whose nature it is to do injury; for if, 
while they themselves are unrelated to each other, 
or to the eastern horizon, they are overcome, or 
surrounded, or held in opposition by unfamiliar stars 
in injurious aspect, they cause the incidence of various 
diseases which affect the soul’s character. Their 
interpretation again is to be calculated from the 
previously described qualities of the planets which 
are familiar to the places } in the sky. 

Indeed, most of the more moderate diseases have, 
in a way, already been distinguished in what has been 
said about the character of the soul, and their in- 
crease can be discerned from the excess of injurious 
influences ; for one might now with propriety call 


1 T.e. of the moon and Mercury. 


2 ἀσημότερον] aonuwrepov VD, ἀσημ(ε)ιότερον PL; cf. ἀφανέσ- 
τερον Proc.; ἀσεμνότερον MNAECam. 
3 ὁ περὶ] ὡσπερεὶ Cam. 
4 διακρίσεως VPLMADE, διακράσεως NCam.', δυσκρασίας 
Cam.” ; cf. διάγνωσις Proc. 
363 


PTOLEMY 


{0 \ ‘ »” 1 ~ AOD Van 2A / Ἅ 
πάθη καὶ τὰ ἄκρα! τῶν ἠθῶν καὶ ἢ ἐλλείποντα ἢ 
πλεονάζοντα τῆς μεσότητος - τὰ δ᾽ ἐξαίρετον 3 
ἔχοντα τὴν ἀμετρίαν καὶ ὥσπερ νοσηματώδη καὶ 
παρ᾽ ὅλην τὴν φύσιν καὶ περί τε αὐτὸ 3 τὸ διανοη- 
τικὸν τῆς ψυχῆς μέρος καὶ περὶ τὸ παθητικόν, ὡς ἐν 
τύπῳ, τοιαύτης ἔτυχε παρατηρήσεως. 

3 λ \ \ A e fe Doe, | ‘ Ad / 

Ἐπιληπτικοὶ μὲν yap ws ἐπὶ τὸ πολὺ γίνονται 
ὅσοι τῆς σελήνης καὶ τοῦ τοῦ “Ἑρμοῦ, ὥσπερ 
” a“ LAA aN nn ~ > “ Ciel 
εἴπομεν, ἢ ἀλλήλοις ἢ TH ἀνατολικῷ ὁρίζοντι 
ἀσυνδέτων ὄντων τὸν μὲν τοῦ Κρόνου ἡμέρας, 
τὸν δὲ τοῦ ᾿ἄρεως νυκτὸς ἔχουσιν ἐπίκεντρον καὶ 
κατοπτεύοντα τὸ προκείμενον σχῆμα" μανιώδεις 
3 @ DAN ~ > ~ > / aA «ε \ ~ / 
δ᾽ ὅταν ἐπὶ τῶν αὐτῶν ἀνάπαλιν ὁ μὲν τοῦ Κρόνου 
νυκτός, ὁ δὲ τοῦ “Ἄρεως ἡμέρας, κεκυριευκὼς ἢ τοῦ 

ἊΝ \ tA > Ki / δ θέ ” 
σχήματος, καὶ μάλιστα ev Kapkivw ἢ ΠΠαρθένῳ ἢ 
᾿Ιχθύσι: δαιμονιόπληκτοι δὲ καὶ ὑγροκέφαλοι ὅταν 
οὕτως ἔχοντες οἱ κακοποιοῦντες ἐπὶ φάσεως 3 
οὖσαν ὕ κατέχωσι τὴν σελήνην, ὃ μὲν τοῦ Κρόνου 
συνοδεύουσαν, ὁ δὲ τοῦ Ἄρεως πανσεληνιάζουσαν, 
μάλιστα δ᾽ ἐν Τοξότῃ καὶ ᾿Ιχθύσι. μόνοι μὲν οὖν 
ot κακοποιοὶ κατὰ τὸν προειρημένον τρόπον τὴν 
ἐπικράτησιν τοῦ σχήματος λαβόντες ἀνίατα μέν, 


3 / δ ΕΝ \ Yow t /, ~ 
170 ἀνεπίφαντα δὲ ὅμως καὶ ἀπαραδειγμάτιστα ποιοῦσι 


1 ἄκρα MNECam., ἄκρατα VADProc., ἀκράτητα P, ἀκρότατα 
Ι,. 

2 ἐξαίρετον] ἐξαίροντα NCam. 

8 περί τε αὐτὸ VD, περὶ αὐτὸ PL, περὶ τὸ διανοητικὸν κτλ. 
Proce. ; παρ᾽ ὅλον MNAECam. 

4 ἐπὶ φάσεως] ἐπιφάσεως VPLDProc., οὕτω θέσεως E, ἐπὶ 
φῶς MNACam. 

δ οὖσαν VPMD, οὗς ἂν L, ἔχουσαν Εἰ, ἐοῦσαν ΝΑύϑτη. ; οὖσα 
Proc. 


364 


TETRABIBLOS III. 14 


** diseases ’’ those extremes of character which either 
fall short of or exceed the mean. Those affections, 
however, which are utterly disproportionate and as 
it were pathological, which relate to the whole 
nature, and which concern both the intelligent part 
of the soul and its passive part, are, in brief, to be 
discerned as follows. 

In most cases those are epileptic! in whose geni- 
tures the moon and Mercury are, as we said above, 
unrelated to each other or to the eastern horizon, 
while Saturn by day or Mars by night is angular and 
in the aspect previously described.? They are vio- 
lently insane when, again under the same conditions, 
Saturn by night and Mars by day rules the position, 
particularly in Cancer, Virgo, or Pisces. They are 
afflicted by demons * and have water on the brain 
when the maleficent planets are in this position and 
control the moon in phase, Saturn when she is at 
conjunction, Mar when she is full, and particularly 
in Sagittarius and Pisces. When the maleficent 
planets are by themselves and rule the configuration 
in the manner stated, the diseases of the rational 
part of the soul which we have mentioned as being 


! Epilepsy and insanity were also mentioned among the 
bodily diseases (ec. 12 above, pp. 329, 331). 

* Overcoming, surrounding, or opposing ; see above. 

*On this superstition in Roman Egypt, cf. Cumont, 
L’ Egypte des astrologues, 167-170. Ptolemy apparently 
identifies seizure by demons with ὁ water on the brain.” 


305 


171 


PTOLEMY 


~ ~ ~ ~ la 
τὰ προκείμενα ' τοῦ διανοητικοῦ τῆς ψυχῆς νοσή- 


ματα. συνοικειωθέντων δὲ τῶν ἀγαθοποιῶν 4ιός τε 
καὶ ᾿Δφροδίτης ἐπὶ μὲν τῶν λιβυκῶν μερῶν ὄντες 
αὐτοί, τῶν ἀγαθοποιῶν ἐν τοῖς ἀπηλιωτικοῖς 5 κεκεν- 
τρωμένων, ἰάσιμα μέν, εὐπαραδειγμάτιστα 3 δὲ 
ποιοῦσι τὰ πάθη: ἐπὶ μὲν τοῦ τοῦ Διὸς διὰ θεραπειῶν 
ἰατρικῶν καὶ ἡτοιδιαιτητικῆς ἀγωγῆς ἢ φαρμακείας, 
ἐπὶ δὲ τοῦ τῆς ᾿ἀφροδίτης διὰ χρησμῶν καὶ τῆς ἀπὸ 
θεῶν ἐπικουρίας. ἐπὶ δὲ τῶν ἀπηλιωτικῶν αὐτοὶ 
κεκεντρωμένοι, τῶν ἀγαθοποιῶν δυνόντων, ἀνίατά 
τε ἅμα καὶ πολυθρύλλητα καὶ ἐπιφανέστατα ποιοῦσι 
τὰ νοσήματα, κατὰ μὲν τὰς ἐπιληψίας συνεχείαις 
καὶ περιβοησίαις καὶ κινδύνοις θανατικοῖς τοὺς 
πάσχοντας περικυλίοντες - κατὰ δὲ τὰς μανίας καὶ 
ἐκστάσεις ἀκαταστασίαις ὃ καὶ ἀπαλλοτριώσεσι τῶν 
οἰκείων καὶ γυμνητείαις καὶ βλασφημίαις καὶ τοῖς 
τοιούτοις * κατὰ δὲ τὰς δαιμονιοπληξίας ἢ τὰς τῶν 
ὑγρῶν ὀχλήσεις, ἐνθουσιασμοῖς καὶ ἐξαγορίαις καὶ 
αἰκίαις καὶ τοῖς ὁμοίοις τῶν παραδειγματισμῶν. 
ἰδίως δὲ καὶ τῶν τὸ σχῆμα περιεχόντων τόπων οἱ μὲν 
ἡλίου καὶ ot τοῦ "Apews πρὸς τὰς μανίας μάλιστα 
συνεργοῦσιν, ot δὲ Διὸς καὶ “Ἑρμοῦ πρὸς τὰς 
ἐπιληψίας, οἱ δὲ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης πρὸς τὰς θεοφορίας 
καὶ ἐξαγορίας, οἱ δὲ τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ σελήνης πρὸς 
τὰς τῶν ὑγρῶν ὀχλήσεις καὶ πρὸς τὰς δαιμονιο- 


πληξίας. 


1 πάθη καὶ τὰ post προκείμενα add. MNAECam, om. 
VPLD. 


3 ἀπηλιωτικοῖς (ἀφηλ-, ἀπιλ-) VPLMADEPYroc., ἀγαθοποιοῖς 
NCam.}, ἀνατολικοῖς Cam.? 


366 


TETRABIBLOS III. 14 


caused by them are, to be sure, incurable, but latent 
and obscure. But if the beneficent planets Jupiter 
and Venus have some familiarity to them when they 
are themselves in the western parts and the bene- 
ficent planets are angular ! in the east, they make the 
diseases curable, but noticeable; if it be Jupiter, 
curable by medical treatments, a diet, or drugs; if 
Venus, by oracles and the aid of the gods. When the 
maleficent planets themselves are angular in the 
east and the beneficent planets are setting, the 
diseases which they cause are both incurable, the 
subject of talk, and conspicuous ; in epilepsy they 
involve the victims in continuous attacks, notoriety, 
and deadly peril; in madness and seizures, they 
cause instability, alienation of friends, tearing off 
clothes, abusive language, and the like ; in demonic 
seizures, or water on the brain, possession, confession, 
torments, and similar manifestations. In detail, of 
the places that possess the configuration, those of 
the sun and Mars aid in causing madness, those of 
Jupiter and Mercury, epilepsy; those of Venus, 
divine possession and public confession; and those 
of Saturn and the moon, gatherings of water and 
demonic seizures. 


17.e. at the angle, in this case the orient. 





3 εὐπαραδειγμάτιστα VPDE: ἐπιφανῆ Proc.; ἀπαραδειγμά- 
τιστα MNACam. 

4 διαιτητικῆς ego; διαιτικῆς VD, διαγητικῆς PL, ὑπὸ διαίτης 
Proc. ; ἰατρικῆς MNAECam. 

5 ἀκαταστασίαις VD, cf. ἀκαταστατοῦσι Proc.; ἀκατασχεσίαις 
cett, Cam, 


367 


PTOLEMY 


‘H μὲν οὖν περὶ τὸ ποιητικοῦ τῆς ψυχῆς καθ᾽ 
ὅλας τὰς φύσεις νοσηματικὴ παραλλαγὴ σχεδὸν 
ἔν τε τοῖς τοιούτοις ' εἴδεσι καὶ διὰ τῶν τοιούτων 
ἀποτελεῖται σχηματισμῶν. ἡ δὲ περὶ τὸ πα- 
θητικόν, κατ᾽ αὐτὸ πάλιν τὸ ἐξαίρετον θεωρουμένη, 
καταφαίνεται μάλιστα περὶ τὰς κατ᾽ αὐτὸ τὸ γένος 

“ν \ / ε \ ΔΩ Ud 
τοῦ ἄρρενος Kat θήλεως ὑπερβολὰς καὶ ἐλλείψεις 
τοῦ κατὰ φύσιν, διαλαμβάνεται δὲ ἐπισκεπτικῶς 
κατὰ τὸν ὅμοιον τῷ προκειμένῳ τρόπον, τοῦ ἡλίου 
μέντοι μετὰ τῆς σελήνης ἀντὶ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ παραλαμ- 
βανομένου καὶ τῆς τοῦ “Apews σὺν τῷ τῆς ᾿Αφροδί- 
της πρὸς αὐτοὺς συνοικειώσεως * τούτων γὰρ οὕτως 
ὑπ᾽ ὄψιν πιπτόντων, ἐὰν μὲν μόνα τὰ φῶτα ἐν 
5 an = / «ε \ ” ec , 
appevikots ἢ ζῳδίοις, of μὲν ἄνδρες ὑπερβάλλουσι 
τοῦ κατὰ φύσιν, αἱ δὲ γυναῖκες τοῦ παρὰ φύσιν 
πρὸς τὸ ἔπανδρον ἁπλῶς τῆς ψυχῆς καὶ δραστικώ- 

2A \ Nex Ὁ ay Ἃ Wf “-“ > / 
τερον " ἐὰν δὲ Kal 6 τοῦ "Apews ἢ καὶ ὃ τῆς ᾿Αφροδί- 
TNS ἤτοι ὁπότερος ἢ καὶ ἀμφότεροι 5 ὦσιν ἠρρενω- 
μένοι, οἱ μὲν ἄνδρες πρὸς τὰς κατὰ φύσιν συνουσίας 
γίνονται καταφερεῖς καὶ μοιχικοὶ καὶ ἀκόρεστοι ὃ 
καὶ ἐν παντὶ καιρῷ πρόχειροι πρός τε τὰ αἰσχρὰ 
καὶ τὰ παράνομα τῶν ἀφροδισίων : αἱ δὲ γυναῖκες 

\ \ A 9 ε / Xr , \ «ε / θ 
πρὸς τὰς παρὰ φύσιν ὁμιλίας λάγναι καὶ ῥιψόφθαλ- 

\ « ͵ὔ / / \ 
μοι καὶ αἱ καλούμεναι τριβάδες - διατιθέασι δὲ 
θηλείας, ἀνδρῶν ἔργα ἐπιτελοῦσαι. κἂν μὲν μόνος 
¢ “ 3 / > / εν 4, ‘ >’ 
ὁ τῆς ‘Adpodityns ἠρρενωμένος ἢ, λάθρα καὶ οὐκ 
a > / A \ \ Wee aM x Μ σ 
172 ἀναφανδόν - ἐὰν δὲ καὶ ὁ τοῦ “Apews, ἄντικρυς ὥστε 


1 Post τοιούτοις add. ἐστὶ(ν) PLMNECam., om. VADProe. 
2 ἀμφότεροι VADProc., ἑκάτερος PLMNCam., -οι E. 
3 ἀκόρεστοι VPL, ἀκόρεστι D, ἀκόλαστοι MNAECam. 


368 


TETRABIBLOS III. 14 


The morbid perversion of the active part of the 
soul in its general nature, therefore, is produced in 
some such forms as these and is produced by these 
configurations of the planets. The corresponding 
perversion of the passive portion, as in the former 
instance viewed in its extreme cases, is most ap- 
parent in excesses and deficiencies in matters of sex, 
male and female, as compared with what is natural, 
and in inquiry is apprehended in the same fashion 
as before, though the sun is taken, together with the 
moon, instead of Mercury, and the relation to them 
of Mars, together with Venus, is observed. For 
when these thus fall under observation, if the lumi- 
naries are unattended in masculine signs, males 
exceed in the natural, and females exceed in the 
unnatural quality, so as merely to increase the 
virility and activity of the soul. But if likewise 
Mars or Venus as well, either one or both of them, 
is made masculine,! the males become addicted to 
natural sexual intercourse, and are adulterous, in- 
satiate, and ready on every occasion for base and 
lawless acts of sexual passion, while the females are 
lustful for unnatural congresses, cast inviting glances 
of the eye, and are what we call tribades ;* for they 
deal with females and perform the functions of 
males. If Venus alone is constituted in a masculine 
manner, they do these things secretly and not openly. 
But if Mars likewise is so constituted, without 


ΠΟ; Oo "Of  Ῥ δ, tk. 
369 


PTOLEMY 


ἐνίοτε Kal νομίμας ὥσπερ γυναῖκας tas) διατιθε- 
μένας ἀναδεικνύειν. 

Τὸ δ᾽ ἐναντίον, τῶν φωτῶν κατὰ τὸν ἐκκεί- 
μενον σχηματισμὸν ἐν θηλυκοῖς ζῳδίοις ὑπαρ- 
χόντων μόνων, at μὲν γυναῖκες ὑπερβάλλουσι τοῦ 
κατὰ φύσιν, οἱ δὲ ἄνδρες τοῦ παρὰ φύσιν, πρὸς 
τὸ εὔθρυπτον καὶ τεθηλυσμένον τῆς ψυχῆς - ἐὰν 
δὲ καὶ ὁ τῆς ᾿Αφροδίτης ἦ τεθηλυσμένος, at μὲν 
γυναῖκες καταφερεῖς τε καὶ μοιχάδες καὶ λάγναι 
γίνονται πρὸς τὸ διατίθεσθαι κατὰ 3 φύσιν ἐν παντί 
τε καιρῷ καὶ ὑπὸ παντὸς οὑτινοσοῦν, ὡς μηδενὸς 
ἁπλῶς, ἐάν τε αἰσχρὸν ἢ, ἐάν τε παράνομον, 
ἀπέχεσθαι τῶν ἀφροδισίων : οἱ δὲ ἄνδρες μαλακοί 
τε καὶ σαθροὶ ὃ πρὸς τὰς παρὰ φύσιν συνουσίας καὶ 
γυναικῶν ἔργα, διατιθέμενοι παθητικῶς, ἀποκρύφως 
μέντοι καὶ λεληθότως - ἐὰν δὲ καὶ 6 τοῦ "Apews 
ἢ τεθηλυσμένος, ἀντικρυς καὶ μετὰ παρρησίας ἀν- 
αιἰσχυντοῦσι, τὰ προκείμενα καθ᾽ ἑκάτερον εἶδος ἀπο- 
τελοῦντες,( τὸ πορνικὸν καὶ πολύκοινον καὶ πολύ- 
ψογον καὶ πάναισχρον σχῆμα περιβαλλόμενοι μέχρι 
τῆς κατά τε τὴν ona aoy Kal τὴν τῆς χρήσεως 
ὕβριν σημειώσεως. συμβάλλονται δὲ καὶ οἱ μὲν 
ἀνατολικοὶ καὶ ἑῷοι σχηματισμοὶ τοῦ τε τοῦ "Apews 
καὶ τοῦ τῆς ‘Adpoditns πρός τε τὸ ἐπανδρότερον 
καὶ εὐδιαβοητότερον, οἱ δὲ δυτικοὶ καὶ ἑσπέριοι 
πρός τε τὸ θηλυκώτερον καὶ τὸ κατασταλτικώτερον" 

173 ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ ὁ μὲν τοῦ Κρόνου συμπροσγενόμενος 
ἐπὶ τὸ ἀσελγέστερον καὶ ἀκαθαρτότερον ἢ καὶ 
ἐπονειδιστότερον ἑκάστῳ τῶν ἐκκειμένων πέφυκε 


᾿ τὰς om. MNAECam. 2 κατὰ libri; παρὰ Cam, 


370 


TETRABIBLOS III. 14 


reserve, so that sometimes they even designate the 
women with whom they are on such terms as their 
lawful “ wives.” 

But on the other hand, when the luminaries in the 
aforesaid configuration are unattended in feminine 
signs, the females exceed in the natural, and the 
males in unnatural practice, with the result that their 
souls become soft and effeminate. If Venus too is 
made feminine, the women become depraved, adul- 
terous, and lustful, with the result that they may be 
dealt with in the natural manner on any occasion and 
by any one soever, and so that they refuse absolutely 
no sexual act, though it be base or unlawful. 
The men, on the contrary, become effeminate and 
unsound with respect to unnatural congresses and 
the functions of women, and are dealt with as 
pathics, though privately and secretly. But if Mars 
also is constituted in a feminine manner, their 
shamelessness is outright and frank and they per- 
form the aforesaid acts of either kind, assuming the 
guise of common bawds who submit to general abuse 
and to every baseness until they are stamped with the 
reproach and insult that attend such usages. And 
the rising and morning positions of both Mars and 
Venus have a contributory effect, to make them 
more virile and notorious, while setting and evening 
positions increase femininity and sedateness. Simi- 
larly, if Saturn is present, his influence joins with each 
of the foregoing to produce more licentiousness, 


8 σαθροὶ VPLDProc. ; θαρσεῖς NCam., θρασεῖς MAE. 

4 ἀποτελοῦντες VD, -ουσι(ν) PL, ἐπιτελοῦσι MNAECam., 

5 σημειώσεως MNACam.; δημιοσίως ἕως VD (διμ-) E, 
δημιοσίως ὡς PL. 


371 


PTOLEMY 


συνεργεῖν, ὃ δὲ τοῦ Διὸς πρὸς τὸ εὐσχημονέστερον 
καὶ φυλακτικώτερον καὶ αἰδημονέστερον, ὁ δὲ τοῦ 
‘Eppod πρός τε τὸ περιβοητότερον καὶ τὸ τῶν 
παθῶν εὐκινητότερον καὶ πολυτροπώτερον καὶ 
εὐπροσκοπώτερον. 


ΒΙΒΛΙΟΝ Δ’ 


<a. Προοίμιον» 


Τὰ μὲν οὖν πρὸ τῆς γενέσεως καὶ τὰ κατ᾽ αὐτὴν 
τὴν γένεσιν δυνάμενα θεωρεῖσθαι, καὶ ἔτι τῶν μετὰ 
τὴν γένεσιν ὅσα τῆς συστάσεως ἐστὶν ἴδια τὸ καθ᾽ 
ὅλου ποιὸν τῶν συγκριμάτων ἐμφαίνοντα, σχεδὸν 
ταῦτ᾽ ἂν εἴη. τῶν δὲ κατὰ τὸ ἐκτὸς συμβεβηκότων 
καὶ ἐφεξῆς ὀφειλόντων διαλαμβάνεσθαι προηγεῖται 
μὲν ὁ περὶ τύχης κτητικῆς τε καὶ ἀξιωματικῆς 
λόγος, συνῆπται δ᾽ ὥσπερ ἡ μὲν κτητικὴ ταῖς τοῦ 
σώματος οἰκειώσεσιν, ἡ δ᾽ ἀξιωματικὴ ταῖς τῆς 


ψυχῆς. 


«β.» Περὶ τύχης κτητικῆς 


Τὰ μὲν οὖν τῆς κτήσεως ὁποῖά τινα ἔσται 
“- ’ ~ 
ληπτέον ἀπὸ τοῦ καλουμένου κλήρου τῆς τύχης, 


, yj > a , \ Seat ma €y7 
174 μονου μεντοὶ καθ ον πάντοτε τὴν ATO του ἡλίου 


ἐπὶ τὴν σελήνην διάστασιν ἐκβάλλομεν ἀπὸ τοῦ 

ὡροσκόπου καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν τῆς ἡμέρας καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν 

τῆς νυκτὸς γεννωμένων, Sv ἃς εἴπομεν ἐν τοῖς περὶ 
1 παθῶν VPLMADEProe., ἠθῶν NCam. 

372 


TETRABIBLOS III. 14—IV. 1-2 


impurity, and disgrace, while Jupiter aids in the 
direction of greater decorum, restraint, and modesty, 
and Mercury tends to increase notoriety, instability 
of the emotions, versatility, and foresight. 


BOOK IV. 


[1. Introduction.] 


Tue foregoing may be taken as what can be learned 
by investigation of matters antecedent to the nati- 
vity and contemporary with it, together with such 
of those posterior to the nativity as properly apply 
to the constitution of the subject by disclosing the 
general quality of his temperament. Among ex- 
ternal accidentals, which should be treated next in 
order, the discussion of the fortune of both riches 
and honour comes first; and as material fortune is 
associated with the properties of the body, so honour 
belongs to those of the soul. 


2. Of Material Fortune. 


What the subject’s material acquisitions will be 
is to be gained from the so-called “‘ Lot of For- 
tune ”’;! that one alone, however, to discover which 
we measure from the horoscope the distance from 
the sun to the moon, in both diurnal and nocturnal 
nativities, for the reasons which we stated in the 


1 See iii. 10, pp. 275-77. The authenticity of the following 
clause (to ‘‘ nativities’’) is doubtful, since it appears to 
refer to the sentence in iii. 10 (p. 277, n. 1) which is clearly 
an interpolation, 


373 


PTOLEMY 


χρόνων ζωῆς αἰτίας. σκοπεῖν οὖν δεήσει τούτου 1 
συνισταμένου 3 τὸν τρόπον τοῦτον, τοῦ 5 δωδεκα- 
τημορίου λαβόντας τὴν οἰκοδεσποτίαν, καὶ πῶς 
ἔχουσιν οὗτοι δυνάμεως καὶ οἰκειότητος καθ᾽ ὃν ἐν 
ἀρχῇ διωρισάμεθα τρόπον ἔτι δὲ τοὺς συσχημα- 
τιζομένους αὐτοῖς ὁ ἢ τοὺς ὅ καθυπερτεροῦντας τῶν 
τῆς αὐτῆς ἢ τῆς ἐναντίας αἱρέσεως - ἐν δυνάμει μὲν 
γὰρ ὄντες οἱ τοῦ κλήρου τὴν οἰκοδεσποτίαν λαβόντες 
ποιοῦσι πολυκτήμονας, καὶ μάλισθ᾽ ὅταν ὑπὸ τῶν 
φωτῶν οἰκείως τύχωσι μαρτυρηθέντες - ἀλλ᾽ ὁ μὲν 
τοῦ Κρόνου διὰ θεμελίων ἣ ἢ γεωργιῶν᾽ ἢ ναυκληριῶν, 
6 δὲ τοῦ Διὸς διὰ πίστεως ἢ ἐπιτροπιῶν ἢ ἱερατειῶν, 
6 δὲ τοῦ "Apews διὰ στρατειῶν καὶ ἡγεμονιῶν, ὁ δὲ 
τῆς ᾿Αφροδίτης διὰ φιλικῶν ὃ ἢ γυναικείων δωρεῶν, 
ὁ δὲ τοῦ ᾿Ερμοῦ διὰ λόγων καὶ ἐμποριῶν. ἰδίως 
δ᾽ ὁ τοῦ Κρόνου τῇ κτητικῇ τύχῃ συνοικειούμενος, 
ἐὰν τῷ τοῦ Atos συσχηματισθῇ, κληρονομίας περι- 
ποιεῖ, καὶ μάλισθ᾽ ὅταν ἐπὶ τῶν ἄνω κέντρων τοῦτο * 
συμβῇ, τοῦ τοῦ Διὸς ἐν δισώμῳ ζῳδίῳ τυχόντος 7 
καὶ τὴν συναφὴν τῆς σελήνης ἐπέχοντος " τότε γὰρ 
καὶ εἰς παιδοποιΐαν ἀναχθέντες ἀλλότρια κληρονο- 
μοῦσι: κἂν μὲν οἱ τῆς αὐτῆς αἱρέσεως τοῖς oiKo- 
175 δεσπόταις τὰς μαρτυρίας τῶν οἰκοδεσποτιῶν αὐτοὶ 
τύχωσι ποιούμενοι, τὰς κτήσεις ἀκαθαιρέτους δια- 
φυλάττουσιν : ἐὰν δὲ οἱ τῆς ἐναντίας αἱρέσεως καθ- 
υπερτερήσωσι τοὺς κυρίους τόπους ἢ ἐπανενεχθῶσιν 
1 τούτου VD, τοῦ τοῦ P, τοῦ L, τοὺς τοῦ MNAECam. 
2 συνισταμένου libri Cam.1, περιεχομένου Cam.? Cf. τούτου 
δὲ συσταθέντος Proc. 


8 τοῦ om. MNAECam. 
4 αὐτοῖς VADProc., -ἢς PL, -οἐς MNECam. 


374 


TETRABIBLOS IV. 2 


discussion of the length of life. As it is constituted 
in this way, we shall be obliged therefore to take the 
lordship of the sign, and observe what is the con- 
dition of these planets with regard to power and 
familiarity, in the way which we specified at the 
beginning.’ Further, we must consider the planets 
in aspect with them, or those of their own or of 
the opposite sect that overcome them. For when 
the planets which govern the Lot of Fortune are in 
power, they make the subjects rich, particularly when 
they chance to have the proper testimony 2 of the lu- 
minaries ; thus Saturn brings riches through building, 
or agriculture, or shipping ventures, Jupiter through 
fiduciary relationships, guardianships, or priesthoods, 
Mars through military operations and command, 
Venus through gifts from friends or women, and 
Mercury through eloquence and trade. And in a 
special way, when Saturn is associated with material 
fortune, if he is in aspect with Jupiter, he is the 
cause of inheritances, particularly when this comes 
about upon the upper angles and Jupiter is in a 
bicorporeal sign or holds the application of the moon. 
For in that case they are adopted and inherit the 
possessions of others; and if the planets of the same 
sect as the ruling planets happen themselves to witness 
to the rulership, they retain their possessions without 
loss; but if the planets of the opposite sect overcome 
the governing places or rise after them, they bring 
1 Cf. ii. 7 (pp. 169-71), and iii. 2 (p. 233). 
2 Cf. p: 379, n. 3. 


57 τοὺς VMADE, ἢ om. PL, 7) τοὺς om. NCam. 
ὁ φιλικῶν VD, φυληκῶν Ῥ, φιλίων L, φίλων MNAECam, 
7 τοῦτο libri Proc., Cam.!; αὐτὸς Cam.? 
375 


PTOLEMY 


avrots,! καθαιρέσεις ποιοῦνται τῶν ὑπαρχόντων, τοῦ 
καθολικοῦ καιροῦ λαμβανομένου διὰ τῆς τῶν τὸ 
αἴτιον ποιούντων πρὸς τὰ κέντρα καὶ τὰς ἐπανα- 
φορὰς προσνεύσεως. 


.γ.) Περὶ τύχης ἀξιωματικῆς 


Τὰ δὲ “ἢ 3 / 2 \ ~ 4 >) / 
a δὲ τῆς ἀξίας 5 καὶ τῆς τοιαύτης εὐδαιμονίας 
δεήσει σκοπεῖν ἀπό τε τῆς τῶν φωτῶν διαθέσεως 
καὶ τῆς τῶν δορυφορούντων ἀστέρων 3 οἰκειώσεως 4 
> a. .5 ᾽ 3 A A \ / Μ 
αὐτοῖς 5 ἐν ἀρρενικοῖς μὲν γὰρ ζῳδίοις ὄντων 
~ ~ > / > 
ἀμφοτέρων τῶν φωτῶν Kal ἐπικέντρων ἤτοι ἀμφο- 
τέρων πάλιν ἢ καὶ τοῦ ἑτέρου, μάλιστα δὲ τοῦ τῆς 
αἱρέσεως καὶ δορυφορουμένου ὑπὸ τῶν πέντε πλανω- 
΄, OVE 6 \ Py san λή δὲ 8 ALJE ie 
μένων, ἡλίου μὲν ὑπὸ ἴ ἑῴων, σελήνης δὲ ὑπὸ ἕσπε 
΄ A A 
piwy,® of γεννώμενοι βασιλεῖς ἔσονται. κἂν μὲν 
~ ‘ A 
οἱ δορυφοροῦντες ἀστέρες ἤτοι ἐπίκεντροι καὶ αὐτοὶ 
ὦσιν ἢ πρὸς τὸ ὑπὲρ γῆν κέντρον συσχηματίζωνται, 
4, 
μεγάλοι καὶ δυναμικοὶ καὶ κοσμοκράτορες δια- 
“- “- « 
τελοῦσι καὶ ἔτι μᾶλλον εὐδαίμονες ἐὰν οἱ δορυ- 
1 αὐτοῖς] ἐπ᾽ αὐτοῖς MNCam. 
Ξτῆς αὐτῆς ἀξίας NCam., τῆς τοιαύτης ἀξίας (corr. in τῆς 
αὐτῆς a.) Μ. 
3 Post ἀστέρων add. συνορῶντα τὰς MNECam. 
4 οἰκειώσεις MNECam. 
5 αὐτῶν MNECam. 


8 ἡλίου VD, ἥλιον PLA, πρὸς ἥλιον MNECam. 
7 ὑπὸ om. MNECam. 


8 σελήνης... ἑσπερίων VPLAD ; ἑσπερίων δὲ πρὸς σελήνην 
MNFCam. 


376 


TETRABIBLOS IV. 2-3 


about loss of possessions, and the general time! is 
discovered by means of the approach of the causa- 
tive planets to the angles and the succedent signs. 


3. Of the Fortune of Dignity. 


It will be needful to determine the questions of 
dignity and happiness resulting therefrom from the 
position of the luminaries and the familiarity to them 
of their attendant planets.” For if both the lumi- 
naries are in masculine signs and either both of 
them, or even one of the two, angular, and par- 
ticularly if the luminary of the sect ° is also attended 
by the five planets, matutine to the sun and vesper- 
tine to the moon, the children will be kings. And if 
the attendant planets are either themselves angular 
or bear an aspect to the superior angle, the children 
born will continue to be great, powerful, and world- 
rulers,* and they will be even more fortunate if the 


1 When the inheritance falls due; Bouché-Leclercq, 
p. 437. Ashmand, p. 173, would have the expression 
refer to the duration of the wealth. 

2** Attendance ”’ is described by Porphyry, Introduction, 
pp. 190-191, ed. Wolf, whom Hephaestion i. 17, pp. 74-75, 
ed. Engelbrecht, follows. The second of the three varieties 
of attendance mentioned applies to the luminaries. If one 
of these is at the horoscope or mid-heaven, whether or not 
it is in its own house, it will have as attendant any planet 
of its own sect which projects its ray upon the luminary, 
those of the sun’s (diurnal) sect in the direction of the 
diurnal movement of the heavens, those of the moon’s sect 
in the other direction. 

3 The sect of the geniture, diurnal or nocturnal. 

4Ptolemy doubtless meant Roman emperors, but the 
epithet was used of kings by the astrologers before it 
appeared in the inscriptions of the emperors (Cumont, 
L’ Egypte des astrologues, p. 27). 

377 


PTOLEMY 


φοροῦντες ἀστέρες δεξιοὶ τοῖς ὑπὲρ γῆν κέντροις 
συσχηματίζωνται. ἐὰν δὲ τῶν ἄλλων οὕτως ἐχόν- 
των μόνος 6 ἥλιος ἣ ἐν ἀρρενικῷ, ἡ δὲ σελήνη ἐν 
θηλυκῷ, ἐπίκεντρον δὲ τὸ ἕτερον τῶν φωτῶν, ἡγε- 
176 μόνες μόνον ἔσονται ζωῆς καὶ θανάτου κύριοι. ἐὰν 
δὲ “πρὸς τούτοις μηδὲ οἱ δορυφοροῦντες ἀστέρες 
ἐπίκεντροι ὦσιν ἢ μαρτυρήσωσι τοῖς κέντροις, 
μεγάλοι μόνον ἔσονται καὶ ἐν ἀξιώμασι τοῖς ἀπὸ 
μέρους στεμματηφορικοῖς ἢ ἐπιτροπικοῖς ἢ στρατο- 
πεδαρχικοῖς καὶ οὐχὶ τοῖς ἡγεμονικοῖς. ἐὰν δὲ τὰ 
φῶτα μὴ 7) ἐπίκεντρα, τῶν δὲ δορυφορούντων ἀστέ- 
ρων ot πλεῖστοι ἤτοι ἐπίκεντροι ὦσιν ἢ συσχηματί- 
ζωνται τοῖς κέντροις, ἐν ἀξιώμασι μὲν ἐπιφανεστέ- 
ροις οὐ γενήσονται, ἐν προαγωγαῖς δὲ πολιτικαῖς 
καὶ μετριότητι περὶ τὰς κατὰ τὸν βίον προλήψεις " 
μηδὲ τῶν δορυφορούντων μέντοι τοῖς κέντροις συν- 
οικειωθέντων ἀνεπίφαντοι ταῖς πράξεσι καὶ ἀπρό- 
κοποι καθίστανται " τέλειον δὲ ταπεινοὶ καὶ κακοδαί- 
μονες γίνονται ταῖς τύχαις ὅταν μηδέτερον τῶν φωτῶν 
μήτε ,κεκεντρωμένον 7 μήτ᾽ ἐν ἀρρενικῷ ζῳδίῳ 
τυγχάνῃ “μήτε δορυφορῆται ὑπὸ τῶν ἀγαθοποιῶν. 
ὁ μὲν οὖν καθ᾽ ὅλου τύπος τῆς προκειμένης ἐπι- 
σκέψεως τοιαύτην τινὰ τὴν αὐξομείωσιν ἔχει τῶν 
ἀξιωμάτων: τὰς δὲ μεταξὺ τούτων καταστάσεις 





1 Dexter, or on the right, is in the direction of the diurnal 
movement of the heavens. 

2 Certainly officers of very high rank in the imperial 
service are meant. Cumont, op. cit., pp. 39-40, shows that 
ἡγεμών (Lat. dux) was commonly so understood in Egypt, 
and sometimes it is equivalent to iudez, “‘ judge”’ (pp. 45- 
46). 


378 


TETRABIBLOS IV. 3 


attendant planets are in dexter aspect! to the superior 
angles. But if, while the others are in this position, 
the sun alone is in a masculine sign, and the moon 
is in a feminine one, and one of the luminaries is 
angular, they will merely be generals,? with power 
of life and death. If, however, besides this the atten- 
dant planets are neither angular nor witnessing 3 to 
the angles, they will be merely great and will enjoy 
partial dignities, those which involve the wearing 
of chaplets,4 or those of superintendence ® or of 
military command,® and not those of first rank. 
But if the luminaries are not angular, and most of 
the attendant planets are either angular or in aspect 
with the angles, they will not attain the more con- 
spicuous honours but rather civil leadership and 
moderate advancement in their careers. If, how- 
ever, the attendant planets are not associated 
with the angles, they are rendered obscure in their 
actions and without preferment, and they are 
entirely humble and miserable in their fortunes 
when neither of the luminaries is angular, or in 
a masculine sign, or attended by the beneficent 
planets. The general outline, then, of the in- 
vestigation before us involves a gradation of dig- 
nities of this sort. Since there are very many 


3In aspect. 

4 Connected with priestly dignities ; ef. Cumont, op. cit., 

Ae ay & 
μ 5 Probably referring to prominent positions at court or 
in the civil service. 

®The word στρατοπεδάρχης primarily means ‘ com- 
mander of a camp,”’ as, in Latin, praefectus castrorum, but 
came to be used generally to mean “commander of 
troops’; cf. Cumont, op. cit., pp. 40-41. 


379 


PTOLEMY 


παμπληθεῖς οὔσας καταστοχαστέον ἀπὸ τῶν περὶ 
αὐτὸ τὸ εἶδος τῶν τε φωτῶν καὶ τῆς δορυφορίας 
αὐτῶν ἐπὶ μέρους ἐναλλοιώσεως καὶ τῆς κυρίας τῶν 
δορυφορήσεων: ταύτης γὰρ περὶ μὲν τοὺς τὴν 

177 αἵρεσιν ἔχοντας ἢ τοὺς ἀγαθοποιοὺς συνισταμένης 
τὸ αὐθεντικώτερον καὶ ἀπταιστότερον τοῖς ἀξιώμασι 
παρακολουθεῖ" περὶ δὲ τοὺς ἐναντίους ἢ τοὺς κακο- 
ποιούς, τὸ ὑποτεταγμένον καὶ ἐπισφαλέστερον. καὶ 
τὸ τῆς ἀξίας δὲ τῆς ἐσομένης εἶδος ἀπὸ τῆς τῶν 
δορυφορησάντων ἀστέρων ἰδιοτροπίας θεωρητέον" 
ἐπειδήπερ ὃ μὲν τοῦ Κρόνου τὴν κυρίαν τῆς 
δορυφορίας ἔχων ἐπὶ πολυκτημοσύνῃ καὶ συναγωγῇ 
χρημάτων τὰς δυναστείας ποιεῖ, ὁ δὲ τοῦ Atos ἢ ὁ 
τῆς Ἀφροδίτης ἐπὶ χάρισι καὶ δωρεαῖς καὶ τιμαῖς 
Kal μεγαλοψυχίαις - 6 δὲ τοῦ Ἄρεως ἐπὶ στρατη- 
λασίαις καὶ νίκαις καὶ φόβοις τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων " 
ὁ δὲ τοῦ ᾿Ερμοῦ διὰ σύνεσιν ἢ παιδείαν καὶ ἐπιμέ- 
λειαν καὶ οἰκονομίαν τῶν πραγμάτων. 


<0. Περὶ πράξεως ποιότητος 


Ὃ δὲ τῆς πράξεως τὴν κυρίαν ἐπέχων λαμβάνεται 
κατὰ τρόπους δύο, ἀπὸ τοῦ τε ἡλίου καὶ τοῦ μεσ- 
ουρανοῦντος ζῳδίου. σκοπεῖν γὰρ δεήσει τόν τε τὴν 
φάσιν ἑῴαν ἔγγιστα πρὸς ἥλιον πεποιημένον καὶ 
τὸν ἐπὶ τοῦ μεσουρανήματος, ὅταν μάλιστα τὴν 
συναφὴν τῆς σελήνης ἐπέχῃ. κἂν μὲν δ" αὐτὸς ἢ 
ἀστὴρ ἀμφότερα ἔχων 8 τὰ εἰρημένα, τούτῳ μόνῳ 

1 πράξεων NCam, 26 om. Cam. 
3%... ἔχων VPLD, ἔχῃ MNAECam. 
380 


TETRABIBLOS IV. 3-4 


conditions intermediate between these grades, one 
must estimate them from the specific qualities of the 
luminaries themselves, and the particular variations 
in the manner in which they are attended, and the 
government of the attendance. For if their attend- 
ance consists of planets of the same sect, or of the 
beneficent planets, greater independence and security 
will attend the dignities; but if it involves the 
opposite sect, or the maleficent planets, there will be 
dependency and less security. The kind of future 
honour is to be divined from the quality of the 
attending planets; for if Saturn governs the at- 
tendance, he brings about power based on wealth 
and the amassing of riches, but Jupiter or Venus 
that which rests upon favours, gifts, honours, and 
magnanimity; Mars brings power founded on 
generalships, victories, and the fears of subordinates, 
and Mercury that which depends upon intelligence, 
education, and the care and management of affairs. 


4. Of the Quality of Action. 


The lord of action is apprehended by two methods, 
from the sun and from the culminating sign. For 
it will be needful to look both for the planet that 
has made its morning appearance closest to the sun, 
and that which is at mid-heaven, particularly when 
it occupies the application of the moon; and if the 
same star occupies both the aforesaid positions, this 
alone must be employed, and similarly if none 


381 


PTOLEMY 


προσχρηστέον" ὁμοίως δὲ κἂν τὸ ἕτερον μηδεὶς 
ἔχῃ, τῷ ize ἕτερον εἰληφότι μόνῳ. ἐὰν δὲ ἑ ἕτερος 
ἦ ὁ τὴν" ἔγγιστα φάσιν πεποιημένος καὶ ἕτερος ὁ 
τῷ μεσουρανήματι καὶ τῇ σελήνῃ συνοικειούμενος, 

178 ἀμφοτέροις προσχρηστέον,Σ τὰ πρωτεῖα διδόντας 
τῷ κατὰ ἐπικράτησιν πλείους ἔχοντι ψήφους οἰκο- 
δεσποτίας καθ᾽ ὃν προεκτεθείμεθα τρόπον. ἐὰν 
δὲ μηδεὶς εὑρίσκηται μήτε φάσιν ὅ πεποιημένος 
μήτε ἐπὶ τοῦ μεσουρανήματος, τὸν κύριον αὐτοῦ 
παραληπτέον, πρὸς ἐπιτηδεύσεις μέντοι τὰς κατὰ 
καιρούς: ἄπρακτοι γὰρ ὡς ἐπὶ πᾶν οἱ τοιοῦτοι 
γίνονται. 

Ὃ μὲν οὖν τῆς πράξεως τὴν οἰκοδεσποτίαν λαβὼν 
ἀστὴρ οὕτως ἡμῖν διακριθήσεται" τὸ δὲ ποιὸν τῶν 
πράξεων ἔκ τε τῆς ἰδιοτροπίας τῶν τριῶν ἀστέρων 
Ἄρεως καὶ Ἀφροδίτης καὶ ᾿ Ἑρμοῦ καὶ ἐκ τῆς τῶν 
ζῳδίων ἐν οἷς ἂν τύχωσι παραπορευόμενοι. ὁ μὲν 
γὰρ τοῦ “Ἑρμοῦ τὸ πράττειν παρέχων, ws ἄν τις 
εἴποι τυπωδῶς, ποιεῖ γραμματέας, πραγματευ- 
τικούς,, λογιστάς, διδασκάλους, ἐμπόρους, τραπε- 
ζίτας, μάντεις, ἀστρολόγους, θύτας καὶ ὅλως τοὺς 
ἀπὸ γραμμάτων καὶ ἑρμηνείας καὶ δόσεως καὶ 
λήψεως ἐργαζομένους " κἂν μὲν ὁ τοῦ Kpdvov αὐτῷ 
μαρτυρήσῃ, ἀ ἀλλοτρίων οἰκονόμους ἢ ὀνειροκρίτας ἢ 
ἐν ἱεροῖς τὰς ἀναστροφὰς ὃ ποιουμένους προφάσει 
μαντειῶν καὶ ἐνθουσιασμῶν ἐὰν δὲ 6 τοῦ Διός, 

1 τὴν om. MNCam. 2 προχρηστέον NCam.? 

3 ἑῴαν post φάσιν add. MNAECam.; om. VPLDProc. 

4 πραγματευτικούς VP (-τηκ-) D, πραγματικούς L, πραγμάτων 


ἐπιμελητάς Proc., γραμματικούς MNAECam. 
5 ἀναστροφὰς] ἀνατροφὰς NMCam.!; ἀναφορὰς E. 


382 





TETRABIBLOS IV. 4 


occupies one of these places, we must use only the one 
which occupies the other of the places. And if one 
planet has made the nearest morning appearance and 
another is associated with the mid-heaven, and 
with the moon, we must employ them both, giving 
preference to the one which by reason of its strength 
has the greater number of claims to domination 
according to the scheme which we have already set 
forth.1 But if not one is found which either has 
made an appearance? or is at mid-heaven, we must 
take the lord of the latter region, with reference 
however to the occasional pursuits of the subject, 
for persons with such genitures are for the most part 
inactive. 

Thus, then, we shall determine the planet that 
governs action. The quality of the action, however, 
is to be discerned from the character of the three 
planets, Mars, Venus, and Mercury, and from that 
of the signs through which they happen to be passing. 
For if Mercury governs action, to speak generally, 
he makes his subjects scribes, men of business, 
calculators, teachers, merchants, bankers, sooth- 
sayers, astrologers, sacrificers, and in general those 
who perform their functions by means of documents, 
interpretation, and giving and taking. And if Saturn 
testifies to him, they will be managers of the property 
of others, interpreters of dreams, or frequenters of 
temples for the purpose of prophecies and inspiration. 
Ifit is Jupiter that witnesses, they will be law-makers, 

1In iii. 2 (p. 233). 
* Certain MSS. say “ἃ morning appearance.” 


383 


PTOLEMY 


νομογράφους, ῥήτορας, σοφιστάς, μετὰ προσώπων 
μειζόνων ἔχοντας τὰς ἀναστροφάς. 

‘O δὲ τῆς ᾿Αφροδίτης τὸ πράττειν παρέχων 
ποιεῖ τοὺς παρ᾽ ὀσμαῖς ἀνθέων ἢ μύρων ἢ οἴνοις 

179 ἢ χρώμασιν ἢ βαφαῖς ἢ ἀρώμασιν ἢ κόσμοις τὰς 
πράξεις ἔχοντας, οἷον μυροπώλας, στεφανηπλόκους, 
ἐκδοχέας, οἰνεμπόρους, φαρμακοπώλας, ὑφάντας, 
3 ἡλ / / 2¢ , 
ἀρωματοπώλας, Cwypadous, Badéas,” ἱματιοπώλας * 
κἂν μὲν ὁ τοῦ Κρόνου αὐτῷ μαρτυρήσῃ, ἐμπόρους 
τῶν πρὸς ἀπόλαυσιν καὶ κόσμον, γόητας δὲ καὶ φαρ- 
μακοὺς καὶ προαγωγοὺς καὶ τοὺς ἐκ τῶν ὁμοίων 

’ / 2A A ες “ > \ 
τούτοις πορίζοντας " ἐὰν δὲ ὁ τοῦ Atos, ἀθλητὰς 

/ ~ ΄ e \ 
στεφανηφόρους, τιμῶν καταξιουμένους, ὑπὸ θηλυ- 
κῶν προσώπων προβιβαζομένους. 

Ὃ δὲ τοῦ "Apews μετὰ μὲν τοῦ ἡλίου συσχηματισ- 
θεὶς τοὺς διὰ πυρὸς ἐργαζομένους ποιεῖ, οἷον μαγεί- 
ρους, χωνευτάς, καύστας, χαλκέας, μεταλλευτάς "8 
χωρὶς δὲ τοῦ ἡλίου τυχών, τοὺς διὰ σιδήρου, οἷον 
ναυπηγούς, τέκτονας, γεωργούς, λατόμους, λιθο- 
€dous,4 λιθουργούς, ξυλοσχίστας, ὑπουργούς - κἂν 
μὲν ὁ τοῦ Κρόνου αὐτῷ μαρτυρήσῃ, ναυτικούς, 
ἀντλητάς, ὑπονομευτάς, ζῳγράφους, θηριοτρόφους," 
μαγείρους, παρασχιστάς " ὃ ἐὰν δὲ ὁ τοῦ Διός, στρα- 

! οἰνεμπόρους VPAD ; οἰνοπώλους Proc.; ἠνεαπόρους L:; οἷον 
ἐμπόρους MNECam. 

2 Badéas om. NECam. 3 μεταλλευτάς om. Cam. 

4 λιθοξόους Proc., λιθόξωας P, λιθόξοας L, λιθοξόους λαοξόους 
V, A. λοξούς D, λαοξόους MNECam., om. A. 

5 ζωογράφους θηριοτρόφους VDProe. ; θηριοτρόφους P (θυρο-) 

γ Ἴριοτρ Ὥρίοτρ ρ 
LAE ; στρατιώτας MNCam. 


6 παρασχιστάς WVDProc., παρασχηστάς PL; περιχύτας 
MNAECam. 


384 


TETRABIBLOS IV. 4 


orators, sophists, who enjoy familiarity with great 
persons. 

If Venus rules action, she makes her subjects 
persons whose activities lie among the perfumes of 
flowers or of unguents, in wine, colours, dyes, spices, 
or adornments, as, for example, sellers of unguents, 
weavers of chaplets, innkeepers, wine-merchants, 
druggists, weavers, dealers in spices, painters, 
dyers, sellers of clothing. And if Saturn testifies 
to her, she makes them dealers in goods used for 
pleasure or adornment, sorcerers, poisoners, pan- 
ders, and those who make their living from similar 
occupations. If Jupiter testifies, they will be 
athletes, wearers of the wreath, persons deemed 
worthy of honours, and men who derive advance- 
ment from women. 

Mars, in aspect with the sun, makes his subjects 
those who use fire in their crafts, such as cooks, 
moulders, cauterizers, smiths, workers in mines ; 
if he is not with the sun, those who work with iron, 
such as shipbuilders, carpenters, farmers, quarry- 
men, stone-dressers, jewellers, splitters of wood, 
and their subordinate workers. If Saturn testi- 
fies to him, he produces seamen, drawers of 
water, tunnelers, painters, gamekeepers,' cooks, em- 
balmers.? If Jupiter testifies, he produces soldiers, 


1The Egyptian kings and Roman emperors kept exotic 
animals and had servants to look after them ; cf. Cumont, 
op. cit., pp. 63-64. 

* More accurately, those who opened the corpses for the 
purpose of embalming them ; cf. Cumont, op. cit., pp. 138 ff. 


385 


PTOLEMY 


’ « , / ’, / 
τιώτας, ὑπηρέτας, τελώνας, πανδοκέας, πορθμέας, 
θυσιουργούς. 

Πάλιν δὲ δύο τῶν τὰς πράξεις παρεχομένων εὑρε- 
θέντων, ἐὰν μὲν ὁ τοῦ “Eppod καὶ ὁ τῆς ᾿ἀφροδίτης 
λάβωσι τὴν οἰκοδεσποτίαν, ἀπὸ Movons καὶ ὀργά- 
νων καὶ μελωδιῶν ἢ ποιημάτων καὶ ῥυθμῶν ποιοῦσι 
τὰς πράξεις, καὶ μάλισθ᾽ ὅταν τοὺς τόπους ὦσιν 

180 ἀμφιλελαχότες - ἀποτελοῦσι γὰρ θυμελικούς, ὑπο- 
κριτάς, σωματεμπόρους, ὀργανοποιούς, χορευτάς, 1 
χορδοστρόφους,Σ ζῳγράφους, ὀρχηστάς, ὑφάντας, 
κηροπλάστας κἂν μὲν ὁ τοῦ Κρόνου πάλιν αὐτοῖς Ξ 
μαρτυρήσῃ, ποιεῖ τοὺς περὶ" τὰ προειρημένα γένη 
καὶ τοὺς γυναικείους κόσμους ἐμπορευομένους - ἐὰν 
δὲ 6 τοῦ Διός, δικολόγους, λογιστηρίων προιστα- 
μένους, ἐν δημοσίοις ὃ ἀσχολουμένους, παίδων διδασ- 
κάλους, ὄχλων προεστῶτας. 

3 \ Wipe at ~ 16 aM LA A 

Eav δὲ ὁ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ καὶ ὁ τοῦ Ἄρεως ἅμα τὴν κυ- 
ρίαν λάβωσι τῆς πράξεως, ποιοῦσιν ἀνδριαντοποιούς, 
« λ , « λ / λ / 6 Ἂ / 
ὁπλουργούς, ἱερογλύφους, ζῳοπλάστας , παλαιστάς, 
ἰατρούς, χειρουργούς, κατηγόρους, μοιχικούς, κακο- 
πράγμονας, πλαστογράφους - κἂν μὲν ὁ τοῦ Κρόνου 
αὐτοῖς μαρτυρήσῃ, φονέας, λωποδύτας, ἅρπαγας, 
λῃστάς, ἀπελάτας, ῥᾳδιούργους - ἐὰν δὲ ὁ τοῦ Atos, 

i. r / Ἅ Ἃ / 7 / / 
φιλόπλους ἢ φιλομονομάχους,, δράστας, δεινούς, 


1 χορευτάς Proc., χωρευτάς PL, om, VMNADECam, 
Ξχορδοστρόφουυς VMADEProc., -τρόφας P, -τρόφους L; 
χονδροστρόφους NCam. 
3 αὐτοῖς VMDEProc., τὸ P, τὸς L, -ῷ NACam., 
“τοὺς περὶ VAD, πρὸς τοὺς περὶ Ῥ, πρὸς τοὺς Τ, : ef. (πὶ τοῖς 
εἰρημένοις Proc,; οἵη. MNECam. 
δ ἐν δημοσίοις VPLDProc., δημοσίοις MAE, δημοσίους NCam. 


386 


TETRABIBLOS IV. 4 


servants, publicans, innkeepers, ferrymen, assistants 
at sacrifice. 

Again, when two planets are found to rule action, 
if Mercury and Venus take the rulership, they bring 
about action expressed by the arts of the Muses, 
musical instruments, melodies, or poems, and rhythm, 
particularly when they have exchanged places. 
For they produce workers in the theatre, actors, 
dealers in slaves, makers of musical instruments, 
members of the chorus, makers of strings, painters, 
dancers, weavers, and wax-moulders. And again, 
if Saturn testifies to them, he produces those in the 
aforesaid callings, as well as dealers in feminine 
finery. If Jupiter testifies, he produces lawyers, 
supervisors of counting houses.) public officers, 
teachers of children, leaders of the populace.* 

If Mercury and Mars together assume the lordship 
of action, they produce sculptors, armourers, makers 
of sacred monuments, modellers, wrestlers, phy- 
sicians, surgeons, accusers, adulterers, evil-doers, 
forgers. If Saturn testifies to them, they produce 
murderers, sneak-thieves, burglars, pirates, cattle- 
thieves, villains. If Jupiter testifies, they produce 
men-at-arms, duellists, energetic, clever persons, 


1 Probably the public fiscal offices are meant ; Cumont, 
Putin ie Ἐν 

3 Cf. Cumont, p. 71, n. 3, who remarks on the vagueness 
of astrological references to minor civil offices. 


5 ζῳοπλάστας VPLAD; cf. Proc.; πλαστάς MNECam, 
7 φιλόπλους ἢ φιλομονομάχους VP (om, ἢ) L (om, ἢ) MADE; 
φιλοττόνους ἢ δράστας (om, φιλομονομάχους) NCam. 


387 


PTOLEMY 


φιλοπράγμονας, ἀλλοτρίων ὑπεξερχομένους καὶ 
διὰ τῶν τοιούτων πορίζοντας. 
᾿Εὰν δὲ ὁ τῆς ᾿Αφροδίτης καὶ 6 τοῦ “Apews ἅμα 
τὴν οἰκοδεσποτίαν λάβωσι τῆς πράξεως, ποιοῦσι 
βαφέας, μυρεψούς, κασσιτεροποιούς, μολυβδουργούς, 
χρυσοχόους, ἀργυροκόπους, γεωργούς, ὁπλορχηστάς, 
φαρμακοποιούς, ἰατροὺς τοὺς διὰ τῶν φαρμάκων 
ταῖς θεραπείαις χρωμένους - κἂν μὲν ὁ τοῦ Κρόνου 
αὐτοῖς μαρτυρήσῃ, ἱερῶν ζῴων θεραπευτάς, 
ἀνθρώπων ἐνταφιαστάς, θρηνωδούς, τυμβαύλας, 
181 ἐνρθουσιαστάς, ὅπου μυστήρια καὶ θρῆνοι καὶ 
αἱμαγμοὶ τὰς ἀναστροφὰς ποιουμένους " ἐὰν δὲ ὁ 
τοῦ Διός, ἱεροπροσπλόκους,' οἰωνιστάς, ἱεροφόρους, 
γυναικῶν προϊσταμένους, γάμων καὶ συνεπιπλοκῶν 
ἑρμηνέας καὶ διὰ τῶν τοιούτων ζῶντας, ἀπολαυ- 
στικῶς ἅμα καὶ ῥιψοκινδύνως.3 
Καὶ τῶν ζῳδίων δὲ ἐν οἷς ἂν ὦσιν οἱ τὸ πράττειν 
παρέχοντες αἱ κατ᾽ εἶδος ἰδιοτροπίαι συμβάλλονταί 
τι πρὸς τὸ ποικίλον τῶν πράξεων. τὰ μὲν γὰρ 
ἀνθρωπόμορφα συνεργεῖ πως πρὸς πάσας τὰς 
ἐπιστημονικὰς καὶ περὶ τὴν ἀνθρωπίνην χρείαν 
καταγινομένας * τὰ δὲ τετράποδα πρὸς τὰς μεταλ- 
λικὰς καὶ ἐμπορικὰς καὶ οἰκοδομικὰς καὶ τεκτονικάς " 
τὰ δὲ τροπικὰ καὶ ἰσημερινὰ πρὸς τὰς ἑρμηνευτικὰς 
καὶ μεταβολικὰς καὶ μετρητικὰς ἃ καὶ γεωργικὰς 


1 ἱεροπροσπλόκους VADProc., ἱεροπροσπόλους cett, Cam, 

2 ἀπολαυστικῶς ... ῥιψοκινδύνως VMDE, -ους .. . τους cett. 
Cam,; om, Proc. 

3 περὶ VADProc., zpos cett. Cam. 

4nerpntixas VLD (-ιτι-) Proc., μετρικὰς P; yewperpixas 
cett. Cam. 


388 


TETRABIBLOS IV. 4 


busybodies, who meddle in others’ affairs and 
thereby gain their living. 

But if Venus and Mars together dominate action, 
they produce dyers, perfumers, workers in tin, lead, 
gold, and silver, farmers, dancers in armour, druggists, 
physicians who employ drugs in their treatments. 
If Saturn testifies to them, they produce attendants of 
sacred animals, those who bury men, mourners, pipers 
at funerals, fanatics, who resort to wherever there are 
mysteries, laments, and bloody rites. But if Jupiter 
testifies, frequenters of temples, interpreters of 
omens, bearers of the sacred instruments, super- 
visors of women, interpreters of marriages! and 
matches, making their living by such occupations, 
and at the same time devoted to pleasure, and reck- 
less. 

Likewise the specific natures of the signs in which 
are the rulers of action contribute to the variety of 
the action. For anthropomorphic signs 2 are of some 
assistance to all scientific pursuits or those useful 
to man; the quadrupedal® assist in those that con- 
cern mines, commerce, building, and carpentry ; 
the solstitial and equinoctial,* those that are inter- 
pretative, involve barter, or concern measuring, 


1 Perhaps, “matrimonial agents”; ef. Cumont, p. 177, 
n. 3. 

2Gemini, Virgo, Sagittarius (partly), Libra. This and 
the following notes depend upon Hephaestion’s char- 
acterisations. 

3 Leo, Sagittarius. 

“Cancer, Capricorn, Aries, Libra. 


389 


PTOLEMY 


καὶ ἱερατικάς " τὰ δὲ χερσαῖα καὶ τὰ κάθυγρα 
πρὸς τὰς ἐν ὑγροῖς ἢ δι᾽ ὑγρῶν καὶ τὰς βοτανικὰς 
καὶ ναυπηγικάς - ἔτι τε περὶ ταφὰς ἢ ταριχείας ἢ 
ἁλείας. 

᾿Ιδίως δὲ πάλιν ἡ σελήνη ἐὰν τὸν πρακτικὸν 
τόπον ἐπισχῇ, τὸν ἀπὸ συνόδου δρόμον ποιουμένη 
σὺν τῷ τοῦ “Ἑρμοῦ, ἐν μὲν Ταύρῳ καὶ Αἰγόκερῳ 
καὶ Καρκίνῳ ποιεῖ μάντεις, θύτας, λεκανομάντεις. 
ἐν δὲ Τοξότῃ καὶ ᾿Ιχθύσι νεκρομάντεις καὶ δαι- 
μόνων κινητικούς - ἐν δὲ Πᾳαρθένῳ καὶ Σ'κορπίῳ 


182 μάγους, ἀστρολόγους, ἀποφθεγγομένους, προ- 


>’ ~ ~ 
γνώσεις ἔχοντας " ev δὲ Ζυγῷ καὶ Kpi@ καὶ Adovte 
θεολήπτους, ὀνειροκρίτας, ἐξορκιστάς." 

To μὲν οὖν αὐτῶν τῶν πράξεων εἶδος διὰ τῶν 
τοιούτων κατὰ τὸ συγκρατικὸν εἶδος δεήσει κατα- 
στοχάζεσθαι: τὸ δὲ μέγεθος αὐτῶν ἐκ τῆς τῶν οἰκο- 

3 
δεσποτησάντων ἀστέρων δυνάμεως. ἀνατολικοὶ μὲν 
> ~ 
ap ὄντες ἢ ἐπίκεντροι ποιοῦσι Tas πράξεις αὖθεν- 
“ \ 3 

4 \ Ἃ / ~ / 

τικάς: δυτικοὶ δὲ ἢ ἀποκεκλικότες τῶν κέντρων, 

" 3 ~ 
ὑποτακτικάς "3 Kal ὑπὸ μὲν ἀγαθοποιῶν καθυπερ- 
/ / \ > / \ > - 
τερούμενοι μεγάλας καὶ ἐπιδόξους καὶ ἐπικερδεῖς 
καὶ ἀπταίΐστους καὶ ἐπαφροδίτας, ὑπὸ δὲ κακοποιῶν 
3 3 Ld 

ταπεινὰς καὶ addfous Kal ἀπερικτήτους Kal ἐπι- 
A / A > / tA \ 
σφαλεῖς - Κρόνου μὲν ἐναντιουμένου καταψύξεις Kat 


1 τὸν πρακτικὸν τόπον VADE, τῶν πρακτικῶν τόπων PL, cf, 
τὸν τῆς πράξεως τόπον Proc. ; τὸν προσθετικὸν τόπον MNCam. 

2 ἐξορκιστάς MNAECam., ἐφορκιστάς VPLD, ἐπ- Proc. 

3 ὑποτακτικάς Proc.; ὑποπρακτικάς VPLD, -xai A; ὑπὸ τὰς 
πρακτικάς MNECam, 


390 


TETRABIBLOS IV. 4 


agriculture, and religion; the terrestrial! and 
aquatic,” activities in or with liquids, or those 
that are botanical, or concern shipbuilding, and 
furthermore burial, or pickling, or salting.* 

In a special way, again, if the moon holds the 
place of action, and is moving away from con- 
junction, together with Mercury, in Taurus, Capri- 
cornus, and Cancer, she produces soothsayers, makers 
of sacrifices, and adepts in lekanomancy ;* in Sagit- 
tarius and Pisces necromancers and those who can 
arouse daemons; in Virgo and Scorpio magicians, 
astrologers, prophets, those who have second sight ; 
in Libra, Aries, and Leo persons inspired by the gods, 
interpreters of dreams, and exorcists. 

So, then, the particular species of action will have 
to be conjectured by such means, through com- 
binations ; its amplitude must be discovered from 
the power of the dominating planets. For when 
they are rising or angular the actions which they 
cause are independent, but if they are setting or 
declining from the angles, subordinate ; when bene- 
ficent planets overcome them, great, glorious, profit- 
able, unerring, and gracious; but if maleficent 
planets overcome them, mean, inglorious, profitless, 


and fallible. With Saturn in opposition, they bring 


1 Aries, Taurus, Scorpio, Sagittarius. 

2 Pisces ; Cancer and Capricorn are amphibious. 

3 Preserved fish were an important article of commerce 
in Egypt; Cumont, p. 112. ταριχευτής (ef. ταριχείας in the 
text) means also one who embalms corpses ; Cumont, p. 139. 

‘ Divination by the inspection of liquids in vessels. 


391 


PTOLEMY 


, Μμ ι , 
χρωματοκρασίας, “Apews δὲ καταρριψοκινδυνίας 
A / > / \ A Ἁ , 
καὶ περιβοησίας, ἀμφοτέρων δὲ κατὰ τὰς τελείας 
3 ΄ “- “- , ~ 1¢ 7 Ἅ 
ἀναστασίας, τοῦ καθολικοῦ χρόνου τῆς αὐξήσεως ἢ 
τῆς ταπεινώσεως πάλιν θεωρουμένου διὰ τῆς τῶν 
αἰτίων τοῦ ἀποτελέσματος ἀστέρων πρὸς τὰ ἑῷα 


ΠΝ (ἰδ , , SOA 5 θέ 
και τὰ εσπέρια κέντρα GEL ἰιασεσεως. 


«ε.) Περὶ συναρμογῶν 
«ε a \ , ” ~ \ ἢ - 
Ἑξῆς δὲ τούτοις ὄντος τοῦ περὶ συναρμογῶν 
λόγου, περὶ μὲν τῶν κατὰ νόμους ἀνδρὸς καὶ 
γυναικὸς συμβιώσεων οὕτω σκεπτέον. ἐπὶ μὲν 
τῶν ἀνδρῶν ἀφορᾶν ὃ δεῖ τὴν σελήνην αὐτῶν 4 πῶς 
διάκειται. πρῶτον μὲν γὰρ ἐν τοῖς ἀπηλιωτικοῖς 
188 τυχοῦσα τεταρτημορίοις νεογάμους ποιεῖ τοὺς 
» δ. , > [2 , /, 
ἄνδρας ἢ νεωτέραις παρ᾽ ἡλικίαν συμβάλλοντας " 
ἐν δὲ τοῖς λιβυκοῖς, βραδυγάμους ἢ πρεσβυτέραις 
συνιόντας " εἰ δὲ ὑπὸ τὰς αὐγὰς εἴη καὶ τῷ τοῦ 
Κρόνου συσχηματιζομένη, τέλεον ἀγάμους. ἔπειτα 
γ᾽» A > A ’ = \ εν ~ > / 
ἐὰν μὲν ἐν μονοειδεῖ ζῳδίῳ 7 καὶ evi τῶν ἀστέρων 
ἀεὶ VPLAD, om, MNECam, 
τῶν... συμβιώσεων VADE, τῆς... συμβιώσεως PLProc., 
τῆς .. . συμβιβάσεως MNCam. 
3 ἀφορᾶν VPMNADE, ἐφορᾶν Cam,, ἐμφοράν 1,. 
4 αὐτῶν VD, αὐτὴν MNAECam., om, PL, 
392 


TETRABIBLOS TV. 4-5 


cold and mixtures of colours ;1 with Mars, temerity 
and notoriety; with both together, utter ruin 
of action. In general the period of increase or 
diminution, again, is calculated by means of the 
position, from time to time, of the planets responsible 
for the effect relative to the eastern and western 
angles.” 


5. Of Marriage. 


As the subject of marriage comes next in order to 
these matters, the following is the method whereby 
the lawful association of man and wife must be 
investigated. For men it is necessary to observe 
the position of the moon in their genitures.? For, in 
the first place, if she chances to be in the eastern 
quadrants, she makes men marry young or marry 
women younger than themselves; but if she is in 
the western quadrants they marry late or marry 
older women. And if she is under the rays of the 
sun * and in aspect with Saturn, they do not marry 
at all. Then again, if the moonis in a sign of a single 


1The anonymous commentator (p. 152, ed. Wolf) 
explains: τουτέστιν ἀσχημοσύνας, “that is, deformities.” 
Proclus paraphrases, “Saturn brings opposition in cold 
and in the mixtures of colours.” 

* Cf. the directions for computation of the time involved 
which were given at the end of iv. 2 (p. 377). 

ΤῊ text has, literally, ‘their moon,” but this, of 
course, means the moon as found in the genitures of the 
subjects. Cf. P. Mich. 149, vi. 31-32, τούτων ᾿Αφροδείτη 
εὑρεθήσεται κτλ., “ὁ Venus in the genitures of these men will 
be found, ’” ete. 

“Within 15° of the sun; ef. Bouché-Leclercgq, p. 309. 


z 393 


PTOLEMY 


συνάπτουσα τύχῃ, μονογάμους ἀποτελεῖ - ἐὰν δὲ ἐν 
δισώμῳ ἢ καὶ πολυμόρφῳ ἢ καὶ πλείοσιν ἐν τῷ 
αὐτῷ ζωδίῳ τὴν συναφὴν ἔχουσα, πολυγάμους. 
κἂν μὲν οἱ τὰς συναφὰς ἐπέχοντες τῶν ἀστέρων 
ἦτοι κατὰ κολλήσεις ἢ κατὰ μαρτυρίας ἀγα- 
θοποιοὶ 5 τυγχάνωσι, λαμβάνουσι γυναῖκας ἀγαθάς 2 
ἐὰν δὲ κακοποιοί, Tas ἐναντίας. Κρόνος μὲν γὰρ 
ἐπισχὼν τὴν συναφὴν περιποιεῖ γυναῖκας ἐπιπόνους 
καὶ αὐστηράς - Ζεὺς δέ, σεμνὰς καὶ οἰκονομικάς " 
u / Ἢ \ > / > / 
‘Apns δέ, Opaceias καὶ ἀνυποτάκτους - ᾿Αφροδίτη 
δέ, ἱλαρὰς καὶ εὐμόρφους καὶ ἐπιχάριτας - ᾿Ερμῆς 
δέ, συνετὰς καὶ ὀξείας. ἔτι δὲ "Adpoditn μετὰ 
μὲν Διὸς ἢ Κρόνου ἢ 5 μεθ᾽ “Ἑρμοῦ βιωφελεῖς καὶ 
/ \ / \ A ” 
φιλάνδρους καὶ φιλοτέκνους - peta δὲ Ἄρεως 
θυμικὰς καὶ ἀστάτους καὶ ἀγνώμονας. 
=) \ δὲ ΄“-“ ~ > ~ 4 A A SA 
πὶ δὲ τῶν γυναικῶν adopav* δεῖ τὸν ἥλιον 
αὐτῶν͵," ἐπειδήπερ καὶ αὐτὸς ἐν μὲν τοῖς ἀπηλιω- 
τικοῖς πάλιν τυχὼν τεταρτημορίοις ποιεῖ τὰς 
ἐχούσας αὐτὸν οὕτω διακείμενον ἤτοι νεογάμους ἢ 
νεωτέροις συμβαλλούσας, ἐν δὲ τοῖς λιβυκοῖς 
184 βραδυγάμους ἢ ἢ πρεσβυτέροις παρ᾽ ἡλικίαν. ζευγνυ- 
μένας Kal ἐν μὲν μονοειδεῖ ζῳδίῳ τυχὼν ἢ ἑνὶ 
1 μαρτυρίας VPLAD; cf. μαρτυρίαν Proc.; μαρτυροποιΐας 
MNECam, 
2 ἀγαθοποιοὶ] ἀγαθοὶ NCam, 


37 (post Κρόνου) VPLAD, om, MNECam, 
* ἐφορᾶν Cam. δ αὐτῶν VPD, αὐτόν cett. Cam, 





The “ bicorporeal” signs (δίσωμα) precede the solstitial 
and equinoctial signs and follow the “solid” signs; see 
i. 11. Ptolemy explains the name on the ground that they 


394 


TETRABIBLOS IV. 5 


figure, or is applying to one of the planets,! she makes 
them men of one marriage; but if she is in a bi- 
corporeal or multiform sign, or applies to several 
planets in the same sign, she makes them marry 
more than once. And if the planets to which she 
applies, either by propinquity, or by testimony,” are 
beneficent, the men get good wives ; but if they are 
maleficent planets, the opposite. If she applies to 
Saturn, he makes the wives hardworking and stern ; 
Jupiter, dignified and good managers; Mars, bold 
and unruly ; Venus, cheerful, beautiful, and charm- 
ing; Mercury, intelligent and keen. Further, 
Venus with Jupiter, Saturn, or Mercury makes them 
thrifty and affectionate to their husbands and 
children, but with Mars, easily roused to wrath, 
unstable, and unfeeling. 

In the case of the wives one must observe the sun 
in their genitures ; for if he, again, chances to be in 
the eastern quadrants, he makes those who have him 
in this position in their genitures either marry young 
or marry men younger than themselves, but in the 
western quadrants, he makes them marry late or 
marry husbands older than themselves. And if the 
sun is in a sign of a single figure, or applies to one of 


share in two kinds of weather, rather than that the con- 
stellations represent more than one figure (e.g. Gemini, 
Pisces), or a figure of a mixed nature (διφυής ; e.g. Sagit- 
tarius, Capricorn); it is characteristic of him to prefer 
scientific explanations to those based on mythology or 
fancy. The anonymous commentator says that he means 
by “signs of a single figure ” the tropical and solid signs, 
with the exception of the fecund (πολύσπερμα), which are 
akin to the bicorporeal. For “ application,” cf. i. 24. 
2? Synonymous with ὁ aspect.” 


395 


PTOLEMY 


τῶν ἑῴων ἀστέρων συνάπτων, μονογάμους " ἐν 
nA \ Ἅ / /, a“ \ / 
δισώμῳ δὲ ἢ πολυμόρφῳ πάλιν ἢ καὶ πλείοσιν 
ἑῴοις συσχηματισθείς, πολυγάμους. Κρόνου μὲν 
οὖν ὡσαύτως τῷ ἡλίῳ συσχηματισθέντος, λαμ- 
βάνουσιν ἄνδρας καθεστῶτας καὶ χρησίμους καὶ 
Α͂ \ / \ \ 4 

φιλοπόνους - Atos δέ, σεμνοὺς Kat μεγαλοψύχους - 
Ἄρεως δέ, δράστας καὶ ἀστόργους καὶ ἀνυπο- 

ie 5 / / ,ὔ \ > / 
τάκτους - Adpodirns δέ, καθαρίους καὶ εὐμόρφους - 
“Ερμοῦ δέ, βιωφελεῖς καὶ ἐμπράκτους - ᾿ἀφροδίτης 
δὲ μετὰ μὲν Κρόνου, νωχελεῖς καὶ ἀσθενεστέρους 
> A > , A AP Ψ \ \ 
ἐν τοῖς ἀφροδισίοις - μετὰ δὲ Ἄρεως, θερμοὺς καὶ 
καταφερεῖς καὶ μοιχώδεις - μετὰ δὲ “Ἑρμοῦ, περὶ 
παῖδας ἐπτοημένους. λέγομεν δὲ νῦν ἀπηλιωτικὰ 
τεταρτημόρια ἐπὶ μὲν τοῦ ἡλίου τὰ προηγούμενα 
τοῦ τε ἀνατέλλοντος σημείου τοῦ ζωδιακοῦ καὶ τοῦ 
δύνοντος * ἐπὶ δὲ τῆς σελήνης τὰ ἀπὸ συνόδου καὶ 
πανσελήνου μέχρι τῶν διχοτόμων +? λιβυκὰ δὲ τὰ 
τοῖς εἰρημένοις ἀντικείμενα. 

“- « 

Διαμένουσιν μὲν οὖν ὡς ἐπὶ πᾶν αἱ συμβιώσεις 
ὅταν ἀμφοτέρων τῶν γενέσεων τὰ φῶτα συσχη- 
ματιζόμενα τύχῃ συμφώνως, τουτέστιν ὅταν 

/ io > / Ἃ ¢ 7 ‘ / > 
τρίγωνα ἢ ἀλλήλοις ἢ ἐξάγωνα, καὶ μάλισθ 
Ld > A ~ ,ὔ A \ / 
ὅταν ἐναλλὰξ τοῦτο συμβαίνῃ: πολὺ δὲ πλέον 


1 ἑνὶ τῶν (τῶν om, A) ἑῴων ἀστέρων συνάπτων VAD, ἑνὶ ἑῴω 
ὄντων (ὄντες L) ἀστέρων PL, ἑνὸς ἑῴου τῶν ἀστέρων (om. 
συνάπτων) MNECam. 

τῶν διχοτόμων VP (-χω-) LADProc., τῆς διχοτόμου 
MNECam. 





1The anonymous commentator (p. 154, ed. Wolf) says, 
on this passage: ‘‘ And if (sc. the aspects) are harmonious, 


390 


TETRABIBLOS IV. 5 


the oriental planets, he makes them marry but once ; 
but, again, if he is in a bicorporeal or multiform sign, or 
in aspect with several planets in the east, they marry 
more than once. If Saturn is similarly in aspect 
with the sun, they marry sedate, useful, industrious 
husbands ;_ if Jupiter is in aspect, dignified and mag- 
nanimous; Mars, men of action, lacking in affection, 
and unruly; Venus, neat and handsome; Mer- 
eury, thrifty and practical; Venus with Saturn, 
sluggish and rather weak in sexual relations ; Venus 
with Mars, ardent, impetuous, and adulterous ; 
Venus with Mercury, infatuated with boys. In this 
connection we mean by eastern quadrants, in the 
case of the sun, the signs which precede the rising 
sign of the zodiac, and those which precede the 
setting sign; with reference to the moon, the signs 
from new and full moon to the quarters; and by 
western quadrants the signs opposite these. 
Marriages for the most part are lasting when in 
both the genitures the luminaries happen to be in 
harmonious aspect, that is, in trine or in sextile 
with one another, and particularly when this comes 
about by exchange;1 and even more when the 


either both the luminaries (sc. are in aspect), or in both 
the genitures, or one with the other; and if one (sc. with 
the other), either sun with sun, or moon with moon, or 
alternately (ἐνηλλαγμένα) the sun with the moon and the 
moon with the sun.’ By the expression “one with the 
other’ he seems to mean “ the luminaries in one geniture 
with those in the other,’”’ and this would be his interpreta- 
tion of Ptolemy’s ἐναλλάξ (Proclus, κατ᾽ ἐναλλαγήν). This is 
more likely to be correct than Bouché-Leclereq’s assumption 
(p. 449) of an exchange of houses, especially as the houses 
of the sun and moon, Leo and Cancer, are disjunct (ἀσύνδετα). 


397 


PTOLEMY 


ὅταν ἡ τοῦ ἀνδρὸς σελήνη τῷ τῆς γυναικὸς 
ἡλίῳ. διαλύονται δ᾽ ἐκ τῶν τυχόντων καὶ 
185 ἀπαλλοτριοῦνται τέλεον ὅταν αἱ προειρημέναι τῶν 
φωτῶν στάσεις ἐν ἀσυνδέτοις ζῳδίοις τύχωσιν ἢ 
ἐν διαμέτροις ἢ τετραγώνοις. κἂν μὲν τοὺς συμ- 
φώνους τῶν φωτῶν συσχηματισμοὺς οἱ ἀγαθοποιοὶ 
τῶν ἀστέρων ἐπιθεωρῶσιν, ἡδείας καὶ προσηνεῖς 
καὶ ὀνησιφόρους τὰς διαμονὰς συντηροῦσιν - ἐὰν 
δ᾽ οἱ κακοποιοί, μαχίμους καὶ ἀηδεῖς ῖ καὶ ἐπι- 
ζημίους. ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν ἀσυμφώνων 
στάσεων οἱ μὲν ἀγαθοποιοὶ τοῖς φωσὶ μαρτυρή- 
σαντες οὐ τέλεον ἀποκόπτουσι τὰς συμβιώσεις, 
ἀλλὰ ποιοῦσιν ἐπανόδους καὶ ἀναμνήσεις συν- 
τηρούσας τό τε προσηνὲς καὶ τὸ φιλόστοργον οἱ 
δὲ κακοποιοὶ μετά τινος ἐπηρείας καὶ ὕβρεως 5 
ποιοῦσι τὰς διαλύσεις. τοῦ μὲν οὖν 3 τοῦ “Eppyod 
μόνου σὺν αὐτοῖς γενομένου, ἐν περιβοησίαις 
καὶ ἐγκλήμασι περικυλίονται ὃ μετὰ δὲ τοῦ 
τῆς Ἀφροδίτης ἐπὶ μοιχείαις ἢ φαρμακείαις 
ἢ τοῖς τοιούτοις. τὰς δὲ κατ᾽ ἄλλον οἱονδήποτε 
τρόπον γενομένας συναρμογὰς διακριτέον ἀφ- 
ορῶντας εἴς τε τὸν τῆς Αφροδίτης ἀστέρα καὶ 
τὸν τοῦ Ἄρεως καὶ τὸν τοῦ Κρόνου. συνόντων 
γὰρ αὐτῶν τοῖς φωσὶν οἰκείως ὃ καὶ τὰς συμβιώσεις ὃ 
οἰκείας καὶ νομίμους τὰς συγγενείας - συγγένειαν 1° 
γὰρ ὥσπερ ἔχει πρὸς ἑκάτερον τῶν εἰρημένων 
ἀστέρων ὁ τῆς Adpoditns, καὶ πρὸς μὲν τὸν τοῦ 


1 ἀηδεῖς VLDE, ἀειδεῖς P, ς΄. ἀηδής Proc.; ἀναιδεῖς 
MNACam. 
Ξὕβρεως VLADEProce.,, ὕβριος P, ὥρας MN, ἄρας Cam. 


398 


TETRABIBLOS IV. 5 


husband’s moon is in such aspect with the wife’s 
sun. Divorces on slight pretexts and complete 
alienations occur when the aforesaid positions 
of the luminaries are in disjunct signs, or in 
opposition or in quartile. And if the beneficent 
planets regard the luminaries when the latter are 
in harmonious aspect, they keep the marriage 
pleasant, agreeable, and profitable, but if the 
maleficent planets so regard the luminaries, the 
marriage will be quarrelsome, unpleasant, and un- 
profitable. Similarly, when the luminaries are in 
inharmonious positions, the beneficent planets testi- 
fying to the luminaries do not completely terminate 
the marriages, but bring about renewals and recol- 
lections, which preserve kindness and affection ; but 
the maleficent planets cause divorces with abuse and 
violence. If Mercury alone is with them, they are 
involved in notoriety and recriminations ; and along 
with Venus, in adultery, poisonings, and the like. 
Marriages which come about in any other manner 
whatsoever must be judged by looking to Venus, 
Mars, and Saturn. For if they are with the lumin- 
aries in familiarity, we must decide that the marriages 
also will be domestic and the relationship lawful. 
For the marriage relationship will follow the relation 
which Venus holds to each of the planets mentioned, 





3 μὲν οὖν VPLD, μὲν MNAECam. 

4 ἐν PL, om, cett. Cam. 5 περικυλίοντες VD. 

6 ἐπὶ VPLDEProc., om. MNACam. 

7 ἀφορῶντας VP (-οροντ- LADE, ἀμφοτέρας MNCam. 

8 οἰκείως VP (oixi-) MADE, οἰκείοις L, om. NCam. 

9 καὶ τὰς συμβιώσεις PLMA, om. καὶ VD; om. NCam. 
10 συγγένειαν PLMA, συνγγένειαν VD, συγγένεια NECam. 


399 


PTOLEMY 


” A A / / > / 
Ἄρεως κατὰ TO συνακμάζον πρόσωπον, ἐπειδήπερ 
ἐν τοῖς τριγωνικοῖς ἀλλήλων ζῳδίοις ἔχουσι τὰ 
ὑψώματα, πρὸς δὲ τὸν τοῦ Κρόνου κατὰ τὸ πρεσ- 
> A 
βύτερον πρόσωπον, ἐπειδὴ πάλιν ἐν τοῖς τρι- 
a > / ” \ w 
186 γωνικοῖς ἀλλήλων ἔχουσι τοὺς οἴκους. 

Ὅθεν ὁ τῆς ᾿Αφροδίτης μετὰ μὲν τοῦ τοῦ Ἄρεως 
ἁπλῶς ἐρωτικὰς διαθέσεις ποιεῖ - προσόντος δὲ 
τοῦ τοῦ “Ερμοῦ, καὶ περιβοησίας - ἐν δὲ τοῖς 
ἐπικοίνοις καὶ συνοικειουμένοις ζῳδίοις Αἰγόκερῳ, 
ἽἼ θύ LO λ “ an ~ > ᾽ὔ δι 

χθύσιν, ἀδελφῶν ἢ συγγενῶν ἐπιπλοκάς - κἂν 
μὲν ἐπὶ τῶν ἀνδρῶν τῇ σελήνῃ συμπάρῃ, ποιεῖ 
δυσὶν ἀδελφαῖς ἢ συγγενέσι συνερχομένους - ἐὰν 
δὲ ἐπὶ τῶν γυναικῶν τῷ τοῦ Διός, δυσὶν ἀδελφοῖς 
ἢ συγγενέσιν. 

Μετὰ δὲ τοῦ τοῦ Κρόνου πάλιν ὃ τῆς ᾿Αφροδίτης 
τυχὼν ἁπλῶς μὲν ἡδείας καὶ εὐσταθεῖς ποιεῖ τὰς 
συμβιώσεις - προσόντος δὲ τοῦ τοῦ “Ἑρμοῦ, καὶ 
ὠφελίμους * συμπροσγενομένου δὲ καὶ τοῦ τοῦ 
uv > / ‘ \ \ > iy 
Ἄρεως, ἀστάτους Kai BAaBepas καὶ ἐπιζήλους. 
κἂν μὲν ὁμοιοσχημονῇ ' αὐτοῖς, πρὸς ὁμήλικας 
ποιεῖ τὰς ἐπιπλοκάς + ἂν δ᾽ ἀνατολικώτερος αὐτῶν, 
πρὸς νεωτέρους ἢ νεωτέρας " ἐὰν δὲ δυτικώτερος, 
πρὸς πρεσβυτέρας ἢ πρεσβυτέρους. ἐὰν δὲ καὶ ἐν 

aA > / / Ss Ὄ ~ "A δί λας ἡ 
τοῖς ἐπικοίνοις ζῳδίοις ὦσιν 6 τῆς ᾿Αφροδίτης καὶ ὁ 
τοῦ Κρόνου, τουτέστιν Αἰγόκερῳ καὶ Ζυγῷ, 


1 ὁμοιοσχημονῇ VAD, ὁμοιοσχήμων ἣ PL, ὁμοιοσχήμων αὐτοῖς 
s 
ἡ NCam. 





1 More properly, their exaltations are in trine with their 
houses ; for the exaltation of Mars (Capricorn) is in trine 


400 


TETRABIBLOS IV. 5 


toward Mars, that of persons of the same age, since 
they have their exaltations in signs that are in trine 
to one another ;! toward Saturn, that of the older 
person, since again they have their houses in signs 
which are in trine to each other.? 

Therefore Venus, with Mars, produces merely 
amorous dispositions, but if Mercury is present, 
notoriety also; in the common and familiar signs,* 
Capricorn and Pisces, unions with brethren or 
kindred. If in the case of men Venus is with the 
moon, she makes them unite with two sisters or 
kinsfolk, and if in the case of women Venus is with 
Jupiter, with two brothers, or kinsfolk. 

Again, if Venus happens to be with Saturn, she 
produces merely pleasant and firm unions, but if 
Mercury is present, they are also beneficial. But if 
Mars also is present the marriage will be unstable, 
harmful, and full of jealousy. And if she is in the 
same aspect to them, she brings about marriages 
with equals in age ; but if she is further to the east 
than they, marriages with younger men or women, 
and if she is further to the west, with older women 
or men. But if Venus and Saturn are also in the 
common signs, that is, in Capricorn or Libra,’ they 


with the house of Venus (Taurus), not with her exaltation 
(Pisces). The latter is in trine with Scorpio, the house of 
Mars. 

2This is literally so; Taurus, the house of Venus, and 
Capricorn, the house of Saturn, both belong to the second 
or south-eastern triangle. 

3 Capricorn is the house of Saturn and Pisces the exalta- 
tion of Venus. 

‘Capricorn is the house of Saturn; Libra the house of 
Venus and the exaltation of Saturn. 


401 


PTOLEMY 


συγγενικὰς ποιοῦσι τὰς συνελεύσεις. ὡροσκοπή- 


σαντι δὲ ἢ μεσουρανήσαντι τῷ προειρημένῳ 
¢ 


σχήματι ἡ σελήνη μὲν συμπροσγενομένη ποιεῖ 
τοὺς μὲν ἄρρενας μητράσιν ἢ μητέρων ἀδελφαῖς 3 
ἢ μητρυιαῖς συνέρχεσθαι, τὰς δὲ θηλείας υἱοῖς ἢ 
υἱοῖς ἀδελφῶν 8 ἢ θυγατέρων ἀνδράσιν - ἥλιος δὲ 
, δυτικῶν μάλιστα ὄντων τῶν ἀστέρων τοὺς μὲν 
187 appevas θυγατράσιν ἢ θυγατέρων ἀδελφαῖς ἢ 
᾿γυναιξὶν υἱῶν, τὰς δὲ θἡλείας πατράσιν ἢ πατέρων 
ἀδελφοῖς ἢ πατρωοῖς "ἃ ἐὰν δ᾽ of προκείμενοι 
σχηματισμοὶ τῶν μὲν ΘΟΕ ΒΕ ΟΝ ζῳδίων μὴ 
τύχωσιν, ἐν θηλυκοῖς δὲ ὦσι τόποις ἢ ποιοῦσι καὶ 
οὕτως καταφερεῖς καὶ πρὸς τὸ διαθεῖναί τε καὶ 
διατεθῆναι 5 πάντα τρόπον προχείρους, ἐπ᾽ ἐνίων 
δὲ μορφώσεων καὶ ἀσελγεῖς, ὡς ἐπί τε τῶν 
ἐμπροσθίων καὶ ὀπισθίων τοῦ Κριοῦ καὶ τῆς 
*Yados καὶ τῆς Καλπίδος 7 καὶ τῶν ὀπισθίων τοῦ 
“Λέοντος καὶ τοῦ προσώπου τοῦ Αἰγόκερω. κεν- 
τρωθέντες ® δὲ κατὰ μὲν τῶν πρώτων δύο κέντρων 
τοῦ τε ἀπηλιωτικοῦ καὶ τοῦ μεσημβρινοῦ, παντελῶς 
ἀποδεικνύουσι τὰ πάθη καὶ ἐπὶ δημοσίων τόπων 
προάγουσι: κατὰ δὲ τῶν ἐσχάτων δύο τοῦ τε 
λιβυκοῦ καὶ τοῦ βορείου σπάδοντας ποιοῦσι καὶ 


1 ποιοῦσι] ποιοῦνται MNCam. 

3 ἀδελφαῖς VPADE, -ois cett. Cam. ; (πρὸς) ἀδελφάς Proc. 

8 υἱοῖς ἀδελφῶν VMDE, πρὸς υἱοὺς ἀδελφῶν Proc., υἱῶν 
ἀδελφοῖς PLNCam., om. A. 

4 θυγατέρων ἀνδράσιν PLProc.; πατρωοῖς cett. Cam. 

δ καὶ προσώποις add. MNAECam., om. VPLDProc. 

δ διατεθῆναι] desinit N. 

7 καὶ τῆς Καλπίδος om. MECam. 


402 


TETRABIBLOS IV. 5 


portend marriages of kin. If the moon is present 
with this aforesaid combination when it is at the 
horoscope or at mid-heaven, she makes men wed 
their mothers, or with their mother’s sisters, or their 
stepmothers, and women wed their sons, their 
brothers’ sons, or their daughters’ husbands. The 
sun, particularly if the planets are setting, makes 
men wed their daughters, daughters’ sisters, or sons’ 
wives, and the women wed their fathers, fathers’ 
brothers, or stepfathers. But if the aforesaid aspects 
chance not to be composed of signs of the same 
gender, but are in feminine places,! thus they produce 
depraved individuals, ready in every way for both 
active and passive participation, and in some forma- 
tions utterly obscene, as for instance in the forward 
and hinder parts of Aries, the Hyades, and the 
Pitcher, and the hind parts of Leo, and the face of 
Capricorn. But if the configuration is angular, on 
the first two angles, the eastern and mid-heaven, 
they make a complete display of their abnormalities 
and bring them forward even in public places; on 
the last two, that is, the western and northern, they 
produce spades and eunuchs or sterile women and 


1Cf.i. 6, according to which positions following the sun, 
or in the two quadrants from mid-heaven to occident 
and from lower mid-heaven to orient are feminine. The 
anonymous commentator in his explanation (p. 157, ed. 
Wolf) apparently has i. 6 in mind, but his account seems 
somewhat confused. 





8 κεντρωθέντες VD, cf. Proc.; -θέντος PEACam., -θὲν L, 
«θέντα M. 


403 


PTOLEMY 


αὐλικοὺς 1 ἢ στείρας 5 ἢ ἀτρήτους " “Apews δὲ 
προσόντος, ἀποκόπους ἢ τριβάδας. 

Καὶ καθ᾽ ὅλου δὲ ποδαπήν 3 τινα διάθεσιν * πρὸς 
τὰ ἀφροδίσια ἕξουσιν ἐπὶ μὲν τῶν ἀνδρῶν ἀπὸ τοῦ 
τοῦ “Apews ἐπισκεψόμεθα. τοῦ μὲν γὰρ τῆς 
᾿Αφροδίτης καὶ τοῦ τοῦ Κρόνου χωρισθείς, μαρ- 
τυρηθεὶς δὲ ὑπὸ Ζιός, καθαρίους καὶ σεμνοὺς περὶ 
τὰ ἀφροδίσια ποιεῖ καὶ μόνης τῆς φυσικῆς χρείας 
στοχαζομένους + μετὰ [Κρόνου δὲ μόνου μὲν τυχών, 
εὐλαβεῖς καὶ ὀκνηροὺς καὶ καταψύχρους ἀπεργά- 
ζεται . συσχηματιζομένων δ᾽ “Ἀφροδίτης καὶ Διός, 

188 εὐκινήτους μὲν καὶ ἐπιθυμητικούς, ἐγκρατεῖς δὲ 
καὶ ἀντιληπτικοὺς καὶ τὸ αἰσχρὸν φυλαττομένους ' 
μετὰ μόνης δ᾽ Ἀφροδίτης ἢ ἣ καὶ τοῦ Διὸς σὺν αὐτῇ 
τυχόντος, ἀπόντος τοῦ τοῦ Κρόνου, λάγνους καὶ 
ῥαθύμους καὶ πανταχόθεν ἑαυτοῖς τὰς ἡδονὰς 
ποριζομένους. κἂν ὁ μὲν ἑσπέριος ἢ τῶν ἀστέρων, 
ὁ δὲ ἑῷος, καὶ πρὸς ἄρρενας καὶ πρὸς θηλείας 
οἰκείως ἔχοντας, οὐχ ὑπερπαθῶς ὃ μέντοιγε πρὸς 
οὐδέτερα τὰ πρόσωπα " ἐὰν δ᾽ ἀμφότεροι ἑσπέριοι, 
πρὸς τὰ θηλυκὰ μόνα καταφερεῖς - θηλυκῶν δ᾽ 
ὄντων τῶν ζῳδίων, καὶ αὐτοὺς διατιθεμένους * ἐὰν 
δ᾽ ἀμφότεροι ἑῷοι, πρὸς τὰ παιδικὰ μόνα ὃ νοση- 
ματώδεις - ἀρρενικῶν δ᾽ ὄντων τῶν ζῳδίων, καὶ 
πρὸς πᾶσαν ἀρρένων ἡλικίαν. κἂν μὲν ὁ τῆς 
Adpodirns δυτικώτερος 7, ταπειναῖς ἢ δούλαις ἢ 


1 αὐλικοὺς VMADECam.!, αὐλίσκους PL, εὐνούχους Cam.* 

2 στείρους Cam.” 

3 ποδαπήν Cam.!, ποταπήν ME, παντοδαπήν VPAD, παντο- 
δαπεῖς L, om. Cam.? 

4 διάθεσιν libri, ποιότητα Cam.?, om. Cam. 


404 


TETRABIBLOS IV. 5 


those without passages ; if Mars is present, men who 
have lost their genitals, or the so-called tribades.1 

In general we shall, in the case of men, investigate 
through Mars what will be their disposition with 
respect to matters of love. For if Mars is separated 
from Venus and Saturn, but has the testimony of 
Jupiter, he produces men who are cleanly and de- 
corous in love and who aim only at its natural use. 
But if he is accompanied by Saturn alone, he produces 
men cautious, hesitant, and frigid. If Venus and 
Jupiter are in aspect with him, he will produce men 
easily roused and passionate, who are, however, con- 
tinent, hold themselves in check, and avoid unseem- 
liness. With Venus alone, or if Jupiter also is with 
her, but Saturn is not present, he produces lustful, 
careless men, who seek their pleasures from every 
quarter; and if one of the planets is an evening and 
the other a morning star, men who have relations 
with both males and females, but no more than moder- 
ately inclined to either. But if both are evening 
stars, they will be inclined toward the females alone, 
and if the signs of the zodiac are feminine, they them- 
selves will be pathics. If both are morning stars, 
they will be infected only with love of boys, and if 
the signs of the zodiac are masculine, with males of 
any age. If Venus is further to the west, they will 
have to do with women of low degree, slaves, or 


1 Female perverts ; see Cumont, pp. 182-183. 





δ ὑπερπαθῶς VD, ὑπὲρ ral PL, ὑπὲρ παθῶν MECam.!, ὑπερ- 
πάσχοντας Cam.*, ὑπὲρ παθ || (lacuna) A; ὑπερβολικῶς Proc. 
ὁ μόνα VAD, -ον cett. Cam. 


405 


PTOLEMY 


΄ ~ 
ἀλλοφύλοις συνερχομένους + ἐὰν δὲ 6 τοῦ "Ἄρεως, 
ὑπερεχούσαις ἢ ὑπάνδροις ἢ δεσποίναις. 

ay \ δὲ ~ ~ A ~ > / > 
πὶ δὲ τῶν γυναικῶν tov τῆς ‘Adpoditns ἐπι- 
σκεπτέον. συσχηματιζόμενος γὰρ τῷ τοῦ Διὸς ἢ 
~ ae ~ A 
καὶ τῷ τοῦ “Ἑρμοῦ, σώφρονας Kat καθαρίους ποιεῖ 
\ A > δί \ “- “- K; / 1 δὲ 
περὶ τὰ ἀφροδίσια: καὶ τοῦ τοῦ Κρόνου" δὲ 
ἀπόντος, τῷ τοῦ ᾿ Βρμοῦ συνοικειωθείς, κεκινημένας 
μὲν καὶ ὀρεκτικάς, εὐλαβεῖς δὲ καὶ ὀκνηρὰς τὰ 
Ἂ \ A > A / Μ \ 
πολλὰ Kal τὸ αἰσχρὸν φυλαττομένας. “Aper δὲ 
μόνῳ μὲν συνὼν ἢ καὶ συσχηματισθεὶς 6 τῆς 
*4 δί A / \ cal \ 
φροδίτης ποιεῖ Adyvouvs Kal καταφερεῖς Kal 
μᾶλλον ῥαθύμους - ἐὰν δὲ καὶ ὁ τοῦ Διὸς αὐτοῖς 


189 ee κἂν μὲν ὁ τοῦ Ἄρεως ὑπὸ τὰς αὐγὰς 


ἢ τοῦ ἡλίου,3 συνέρχονται δούλοις ἢ ταπεινοτέροις ἢ 
ἀλλοφύλοις - ἐὰν δὲ ὁ τῆς “Adpoditys, ὑπερέχουσιν 
ἢ δεσπόταις, ἑταιρῶν ΠΕ μοιχάδων ἐπέχουσαι 
τρόπον : κἂν μὲν τεθηλυσμένοι ὦσι τοῖς τόποις ἢ 
τοῖς σχήμασιν οἱ ἀστέρες, πρὸς τὸ διατίθεσθαι 
μόνον καταφερεῖς - ἐὰν δὲ ἠρρενωμένοι, καὶ πρὸς 
τὸ διατιθέναι γυναῖκας. ὁ μέντοι τοῦ Κρόνου τοῖς 
προκειμένοις σχήμασι συνοικειωθείς, ἐὰν μὲν καὶ 
αὐτὸς ἢ τεθηλυσμένος, ἀσελγειῶν μόνος ἅ γίνεται 
αἴτιος - ἐὰν δὲ ἀνατολικὸς καὶ ἠρρενωμένος, ἐπι- 
ψόγους ἵστησιν ἢ τῶν ἐπιψόγων ἐραστὰς ἀπεργάζε- 

1 Κρόνου VPLDProc., Διὸς MAECam. 

2700 ἡλίου PLProc.; om. cett. Cam, 


3 ἑαυτῶν post δεσπόταις add. MECam. 
*uovos VPLMAE, μόνον DCam. 





1 The reading of the better MSS. and Procius is restored 
here. Camerarius (see the er. n.) read “Jupiter” with 


406 


TETRABIBLOS IV. 5 


foreigners ; if Mars is further west, with superiors, 
or married women, or ladies of high station. 

In the genitures of women one must examine 
Venus. For if Venus is in aspect with Jupiter or 
likewise with Mercury, she makes them temperate 
and pure in love. If Saturn! is not present, but she 
is associated with Mercury, she makes them easily 
aroused and full of desire, but generally cautious, 
hesitant, and avoiding turpitude. But if Venus is 
together with Mars only, or is in some aspect to him, 
she makes them lustful and depraved and more heed- 
less. If Jupiter too is present with them, and if Mars 
is under the sun’s rays, they have commerce with 
slaves, men of lower classes, or foreigners; but if 
Venus is in this position, they consort with men of 
superior rank or masters, playing the part of 
mistresses or adulteresses ; if the planets are made 
feminine by their places or aspects,” they are inclined 
only to take the passive part, but if the planets are 
made masculine they are so depraved as actively to 
have commerce with women. However, when Saturn 
is brought into association with the aforesaid configura- 
tions, if he is himself made feminine, he is by himself 
the cause of licentiousness, but if he is rising and is in 
a masculine position, he makes them the objects of 
censure or lovers of such; but combination with 


some plausibility, to be sure, because Jupiter and Mercury 
have been associated with Venus in the preceding sentence ; 
but this very plausibility would have been a good reason 
for substituting “Jupiter” for an original “ Saturn.” 
Furthermore, the effect of the absence of Saturn, in this 
sentence, is not unlike what it is said to be in the preceding 
paragraph, that is, to make the subjects more lustful. 
MOS oI" Gs 
407 


PTOLEMY 


~ A ~ A / 3) δ ᾿ A ᾽ / 
ται, τοῦ μὲν τοῦ Διὸς πάλιν ἀεὶ πρὸς TO εὐσχημονέ- 
στερον τῶν παθῶν συλλαμβανομένου, τοῦ δὲ τοῦ 
« aA 
Eppod πρὸς τὸ διαβοητότερον καὶ εὐπταιστότερον. 


«5.» Περὶ τέκνων 


Ἔ δὴ δὲ ~ A / J Ly \ / 
πειδὴ δὲ τῷ περὶ γάμου τόπῳ καὶ ὁ περὶ τέκνων 
ἀκολουθεῖ, σκοπεῖν δεήσει τοὺς τῷ κατὰ κορυφὴν 
τόπῳ ἢ τῷ ἐπιφερομένῳ, τουτέστι τῷ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ 
δαίμονος, προσόντας ἢ συσχηματιζομένους - εἰ δὲ 
μή, τοὺς τοῖς διαμέτροις αὐτῶν - καὶ σελήνην μὲν 

\ / ee) / \ / / 7 
καὶ Ala καὶ Adpodirny πρὸς δόσιν τέκνων λαμβάνειν, 

σ΄ ‘A \ "A \ K; / A 9 / an” > 
ἥλιον δὲ καὶ Ἄρη καὶ Κρόνον πρὸς atexviav ἢ ὀλιγο- 
τεκνίαν * τὸν δὲ τοῦ ᾿ Ἑρμοῦ, πρὸς ὁποτέρους ἂν αὐτῶν 
τύχῃ συσχηματισθείς, ἐπίκοινον καὶ ἐπιδοτῆρα μὲν 

i > 3 

ὅταν ἀνατολικὸς ἢ, ἀφαιρέτην δ᾽ ὅταν δυτικός. 
1900 Οἱ μὲν οὖν δοτῆρες ἁπλῶς μὲν οὕτω κείμενοι καὶ 
κατὰ μόνας ὄντες μοναχὰ διδόασι τέκνα * ἐν δισώ- 
\ \ ᾽ a / ες / x \ >? 
μοις δὲ Kal ἐν θηλυκοῖς ζῳδίοις, ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ ἐν 
τοῖς πολυσπέρμοις, οἷον ᾿Ιχθύσι καὶ Σκορπίῳ καὶ 
Καρκίνῳ, δισσὰ ἢ καὶ πλείονα - καὶ ἠρρενωμένοι 
μὲν τοῖς τε ἀρρενικοῖς  ζῳδίοις καὶ τοῖς πρὸς 
ἥλιον σχηματισμοῖς ἄρρενα: τεθηλυσμένοι δὲ 
θήλεα - καθυπερτερηθέντες δὲ ὑπὸ τῶν κακοποιῶν 
ἢ καὶ ἐν στειρώδεσι τόποις ἃ τυχόντες, οἷόν ἐστι 3 

1 ἀρρενικοῖς PL; ef. Proc.; om. cett. Cam. 


5 τόποις VD ; τόποις ἢ ζῳδίοις PLProc.; ζῳδίοις MAKCam., 
8 ἐστι VDProc., om. cett. Cam. 





1 The eleventh place, or house. 
2Some of the MSS. at this point read “ places,’’ some 
“signs,” and some (with Proclus) “ places or signs”’; see 


408 


TETRABIBLOS IV. 5-6 


Jupiter, again, always gives a more seemly appear- 
ance to these faults, and with Mercury makes them 
more notorious and unsafe. 


6. Of Children. 


As the topic of children follows upon that of 
marriage, we shall have to observe the planets that 
are in the mid-heaven or in aspect with it or with 
its succedant, that is, the house of the Good Daemon,}! 
or, in default of such planets, those connected with 
the diametrically opposite places; and we must 
take the moon, Jupiter, and Venus to portend the 
giving of children, the sun, Mars, and Saturn to 
indicate few or no children. Mercury must be 
taken as common, with whichever group of planets 
he chances to be in aspect, and to give children 
when he is a morning star, and to take them away 
when he is an evening star. 

Now, the donative planets, when they are 
merely in such a position and are by themselves, 
give single offspring, but if they are in bicorporeal 
and feminine signs, and similarly if they are in the 
fecund signs, such as Pisces, Scorpio, and Cancer, 
they give two or even more. If they are of a mas- 
culine nature, because they are in masculine signs 
or in aspect to the sun, they give male children ; 
but female, if they are of a feminine nature. If 
the maleficent planets overcome them, or if they 
are found in sterile places,* such as Leo or Virgo, 


the critical note. Probably the less usual term, “ places ”’ 
(τόποις), is the more original; ‘‘signs”’ (ζῳδίοις) was added 
as a gloss, and thus came into the text. 


409 


PTOLEMY 


“Ἃ > ~ / 
“Λέων ἢ Παρθένος, διδόασι μέν, οὐκ ἐπὶ καλῷ δέ, 
γ0.} > ‘ ~ - A \ « " 
οὐδ᾽ ἐπὶ διαμονῇ. ἥλιος δὲ καὶ οἱ κακοποιοὶ 
᾽ \ 
διακατασχόντες τοὺς εἰρημένους τόπους, ἐὰν μὲν 
ἐν ἀρρενικοῖς ὦσιν 7 στειρώδεσι ζῳδίοις καὶ ὑπὸ 
~ ~ > 
τῶν ἀγαθοποιῶν ἀκαθυπερτέρητοι,. τελείας εἰσὶν 
> ’ / IEA. ~ \ Ἃ 
ἀτεκνίας δηλωτικοί, ἐπὶ θηλυκῶν δὲ ἢ πολυ- 
~ > ~ 
σπέρμων ζῳδίων τυχόντες ἢ ὑπὸ τῶν ἀγαθοποιῶν 
μαρτυρηθέντες διδόασι μέν, ἐπισινῆ δὲ καὶ ὀλιγο- 
χρόνια. τῶν δὲ αἱρέσεων ἀμφοτέρων λόγον ἐχουσῶν 
πρὸς τὰ τεκνοποιὰ ζῴδια, τῶν δοθέντων τέκνων 
> A / ‘ \ 
ἀποβολαὶ γενήσονται ἢ πάντων ἢ ὀλίγων, πρὸς Tas 
ὑπεροχὰς 5 τῶν καθ᾽ ἑκατέραν αἵρεσιν μαρτυρη- 
σάντων, ὅποτέρους ἂν εὑρίσκωμεν ἤτοι πλείους ἢ 
“ / 
δυνατωτέρους 3 ἐν τῷ ἀνατολικωτέρους ὑπάρχειν ἢ 
> * A 
ἐπικεντροτέρους ἣ καθυπερτερεῖν ἢ ἐπαναφέρεσθαι. 
> ~ / 
ἐὰν μὲν οὖν οἱ κυριεύσαντες τῶν εἰρημένων ζῳδίων 
ἀνατολικοὶ τυγχάνωσι, δοτῆρες ὄντες ὁ τέκνων, εἰ 
> ἰδί ᾿ θ / με We "9 ~ ~ 
ev ἰδίοις ὦσι " τόποις, ἔνδοξα Kal ἐπιφανῆ ποιοῦσι 
τὰ δοθέντα τέκνα ἐὰν δὲ δυτικοὶ καὶ ἐν τοῖς τῆς 
3 / ς. 57 / ‘ Ni ge / 
191 ἀλλοτρίας αἱρέσεως τόποις, ταπεινὰ Kal ἀνεπίφαντα. 
“ “- , a 
Kav μὲν σύμφωνοι τῇ ὥρᾳ καὶ τῷ κλήρῳ THs 
΄ A a ~ 
τύχης καταλαμβάνωνται, προσφιλῆ τοῖς γονεῦσι 
καὶ ἐπαφρόδιτα καὶ κληρονομοῦντα τὰς οὐσίας 
~ > B) 
avtav: av δ᾽ ἀσύνδετοι ἢ ἀντικείμενοι, μάχιμα 


1 ἀκαθυπερτέρητοι. . . ἀγαθοποιῶν om. MECam.; habent 
libri reliqui et Proclus. 

2 ὑπεροχὰς VPLAD ; ef. Proc.; ὑπερεχούσας δὲ MECam. 

3 δυνατωτέρους 7 MAB. 

46vres VPLDProc.; ἔσονται MAECam, 

δ εἰ δὲ MACam., εἰ E, 7 VPLD. 

® ὦσι(ν) VPLMAD, εἰσὶ E, εἶεν Cam. 


410 


TETRABIBLOS IV. 6 


they give children, but for no good nor for any length 
of time. When the sun and the maleficent planets 
govern the aforesaid regions, if they are in masculine 
signs or in sterile signs, and if they are not over- 
come by the beneficent planets, they signify com- 
plete childlessness, but if they are in feminine or 
fecund signs or have the testimony of the beneficent 
planets, they give offspring, but it will suffer injury 
and be short-lived. If both the sects! bear some 
relation to the signs which signify the begetting of 
children, there will be losses among the children given, 
either of all of them or of a few, depending upon 
the superiority of the planets of either sect that bear 
witness, whichever we find to be more in number, or 
greater in power, because they are further to the 
east, or are closer to the angles, or are superior, or 
are succedant. If, then, the planets which rule the 
aforesaid signs are rising, and are givers of children, 
if they are in their own places, they will make 
famous and illustrious the children which are given; 
but if they are setting and are in places belonging 
to the other sect, the children will be humble and 
obscure. And if they are found to be in harmony 
with the horoscope and with the Lot of Fortune, the 
children will be dear to their parents, they will be 
attractive, and will inherit their parents’ estates ; 
if however they are disjunct or opposed, they will be 


The Anonymous (p. 159, Wolf) says that Ptolemy here 
does not mean the ordinary sects, diurnal and nocturnal, 
but the donative and destructive planets. 


411 


PTOLEMY 


Kal ἐχθροποιούμενα καὶ ἐπιβλαβῆ καὶ μὴ " παρα- 
λαμβάνοντα τὰς τῶν γονέων οὐσίας. ὁμοίως δὲ 
κἂν μὲν ἀλλήλοις ὦσι συνεσχηματισμένοι συμφώ- 
νως " οἱ τὰ τέκνα διδόντες, διαμένουσιν ot δοθέντες 
φιλάδελφοι καὶ τιμητικοὶ ὁ πρὸς ἀλλήλους - ἂν δ᾽ 
ἀσύνδετοι ἢ διάμετροι, φιλέχθρως καὶ ἐπιβουλευτικῶς 
διακείμενοι. τὰ δὲ κατὰ μέρος πάλιν ἂν τις κατα- 
στοχάζοιτο χρησάμενος ἐφ᾽ ® ἑκάστου ὃ τῷ τὴν δόσιν 
πεποιημένῳ τῶν ἀστέρων ὡροσκοπίῳ καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς 
λοιπῆς διαθέσεως ὡς ἐπὶ γενέσεως τὴν περὶ τῶν 
ὁλοσχερεστέρων ἐπίσκεψιν ποιούμενος. 


«ζ.) Περὶ φίλων καὶ ἐχθρῶν 


Τῶν δὲ φιλικῶν διαθέσεων καὶ τῶν ἐναντίων, ὧν 
/ ~ 
τὰς μὲν μείζους καὶ πολυχρονίους καλοῦμεν συμ- 
\ Uj / / 
παθείας καὶ ἔχθρας, τὰς δὲ ἐλάττους Kal προσκαί- 
> / ¢ >? ς - 
ρους συναστρίας ἴ καὶ ἀντιδικίας, ἡ ἐπίσκεψις ἡμῖν 
ἔσται τὸν τρόπον τοῦτον. ἐπὶ μὲν γὰρ τῶν κατὰ 
μεγάλαϑ συμπτώματα θεωρουμένων παρατηρεῖν 
δεῖ τοὺς ἀμφοτέρων τῶν γενέσεων κυριωτάτους 
τόπους, τουτέστι τόν τε ἡλιακὸν καὶ τὸν σεληνιακὸν 
192 καὶ τὸν ὡροσκοπικὸν καὶ τὸν τοῦ κλήρου τῆς τύχης 
> 
> ᾽ὔ A \ ~ ~ / 
ἐπειδήπερ κατὰ μὲν TOV αὐτῶν τυχόντες δωδεκατη- 
, 
μορίων ἢ ἐναλλάξαντες τοὺς τόπους ἤτοι πάντες ἢ 
1 μὴ VPLADECam.!, cf. Proc. ; om. MCam.? 
2oupudadvws L, -os P, ἢ συμφώνως VD, ἢ σύμφωνα A, 
σύμφωνα MECam., οἰκείως Proc., οὗ om. MAEKCam, 
3 διδόντες libri Cam.!, διδόασι καὶ Cam.? 


4 τιμητικοὶ libri Proc., μιμητικοὶ Cam. 
5 ἐφ᾽ libri Proc., ἀφ᾽ Cam. 


412 


TETRABIBLOS IV. 6-7 


quarrelsome, trouble-makers, and injurious, and will 
not succeed to their patrimony. And similarly, if 
also the planets which give children are in harmonious 
aspect one to another, the children which they give 
continue in brotherly affection and mutual respect ; 
but if they are disjunct or in opposition to one 
another, the disposition of the children will be 
quarrelsome and scheming. Particular details, 
again, one could conjecture by using in each case 
as a horoscope the planet which gives children, 
and making his investigation of the more important 
questions from the rest of the configuration, as in 
a geniture. 


7. Of Friends and Enemies. 


With regard to friendly dispositions and the op- 
posite, the deeper and more lasting of which we call 
sympathies and hostilities, and the lesser and oc- 
casional acquaintances + and quarrels, our investiga- 
tion will follow this course. In inquiries regarding 
matters of importance we must observe the places 
in both nativities which have the greatest authority, 
that is, those of the sun, the moon, the horoscope, 
and the Lot of Fortune ; for if they chance to fall 
in the same signs of the zodiac, or if they exchange 


1 συναστρία is an uncommon word. The anonymous 
commentator says that Ptolemy uses it of the ‘‘ second 
and moderate ’’ type of friendship. 





δ ἑκάστου VPADEProc., -w cett. Cam. 
? guvaorpias libri Proc. Cam.', Ἐσυναφείας Cam.? 
§ μεγάλα libri, τὰ μεγάλα Cam. 


413 


PTOLEMY 


«ς , \ 4, > Ψ e e ~ 
ot πλείους, καὶ μάλισθ᾽ ὅταν οἱ ὡροσκοποῦντες 
περὶ τὰς ιζ΄ μοίρας ἀλλήλων ἀπέχωσι, ποιοῦσι 
συμπαθείας ἀπταίστους καὶ ἀδιαλύτους καὶ ἀνε- 
mnpedotous: κατὰ δὲ τῶν ἀσυνδέτων ἢ τῶν 
διαμετρούντων σταθέντες ἔχθρας μεγίστας καὶ 
ἐναντιώσεις πολυχρονίους - μηδετέρως δὲ τυχόντες 
ἀλλὰ μόνον ἐν τοῖς συσχηματιζομένοις, εἰ μὲν ἐν 
- ἍἋ 
τοῖς τριγώνοις εἶεν ἢ ἐν ἑξαγώνοις, ἥττονας 
ποιοῦσι τὰς συμπαθείας " εἰ δ᾽ ἐν τοῖς τετραγώνοις, 
> 
ἥττονας τὰς ἀντιπαθείας, ws? γίνεσθαί τινας 
> A > 
κατὰ καιροὺς ev μὲν ταῖς φιλίαις ἀποσιωπήσεις 
καὶ μικρολογίας ὃ ὅταν οἱ κακοποιοὶ τὸν συσχη- 
ματισμὸν ὁ παροδεύωσιν: ἐν δὲ ταῖς ἔχθραις 
σπονδὰς καὶ ἀποκαταστάσεις κατὰ τὰς τῶν 
ἀγαθοποιῶν τοῖς σχηματισμοῖς ὃ ἐπεμβάσεις. 
ἐπεὶ δὲ φιλίας καὶ ἔχθρας εἴδη τρία" ἢ γὰρ διὰ 
προαίρεσιν οὕτως ἔχουσι πρὸς reas ἢ a 
χρείαν ἢ Ov ἡδονὴν Kal λύπην - ὅταν μὲν ὃ πάντες 
ἢ οἱ πλείους τῶν εἰρημένων τόπων οἰκειωθῶσι 
\ > , > / ε / 4 ~ 
πρὸς ἀλλήλους, ἐκ πάντων ἡ φιλία συνάγεται τῶν 
Ψ ~ σ “ 3 / 8 ¢ ” σ \ 
εἰδῶν, ὥσπερ ὅταν ἀνοικείως ὃ ἡ ἔχθρα. ὅταν δὲ 
οἱ τῶν φωτῶν μόνον, διὰ προαίρεσιν, ἥτις ἐστὶ 
φιλία καὶ βελτίστη καὶ ἀσφαλεστάτη καὶ ἔχθρα "9 
193 χειρίστη καὶ ἄπιστος " ὁμοίως δ᾽ ὅταν μὲν ot τῶν 
1 ἐν ἑξαγώνοις VD, ἐν τοῖς ἐξ. A, ἐν om. PLMECam. Proc. 
2 ὡς VPLAD, ὥστε Proc., ofa MECam. 
® μικρολογίας VP (unKpo-) MADECam., -αις L, μακρολογίας 
Cam.? 
ὁ τὸν σχηματισμὸν VLAD, τοῦ συσχηματισμοῦ PProc., τῶν 
συσχηματισμῶν MECam. 


ὃ τοῖς (συ)σχηματισμοῖς VPLAD, συσχηματισμοὺς ME, -ῶν 
Cam. 


414 


TETRABIBLOS IV. 7 


places,! either all or most of them, and particularly 
if the horoscopic regions are about 17° apart, they 
bring about secure and indissoluble sympathy, un- 
broken by any quarrel. However, if they are in 
disjunct signs or opposite signs, they produce the 
deepest enmities and lasting contentions. If they 
chance to be situated in neither of these ways, but 
merely in signs which bear an aspect to one another, 
if they are in trine or in sextile, they make the 
sympathies less, and in quartile, the antipathies 
less. Thus there come about occasional spells of 
silence and of disparaging talk in friendships, 
whenever the maleficent planets are passing through 
these configurations, and truces and _ reconcilia- 
tions in enmities at the ingress of the beneficent 
planets upon them. For there are three classes of 
friendship and enmity, since men are so disposed to 
one another either by preference or by need or 
through pleasure and pain; when all or most of the 
aforesaid places have familiarity with each other, the 
friendship is compounded of all three kinds, even as 
the enmity is, when they are dissociated. But when 
the places of the luminaries only are in familiarity, 
the friendship will result from choice, which is the 
best and surest kind, and in the case of enmity the 
worst and faithless ; similarly, when the places of the 


1 See Bouché-Leclereq, p. 241, n. 1. 


5 μὲν] μὲν yap Cam. 7 οἱ πάντες MCam. 

8 ἀνοικείως VAD, ἂν οἰκείως PL, ἀνοίκειος MECam. 

9 καὶ (post ἀσφαλεστάτη) VPLD, ἥτις ME, 7 ἥτις A, ἢ Cam. 
10 ἔχθρα om. MECam. 


415 


PTOLEMY 


λ / 1 ~ / ὃ ‘\ ͵ὔ a ὃ A ε ~ 
κλήρων" τῆς τύχης, διὰ χρείας - ὅταν δὲ οἱ τῶν 
5 
ὡροσκόπων, δι᾽ ἡδονὰς ἢ λύπας. 
Ilaparnpyréov δὲ τῶν συσχηματιζομένων τόπων 
ὔ ~ 
τάς TE OS NEE Kal sis 2 τῶν ἀστέρων 
/ 
ἐπιθεωρήσεις "ὃ ep ὧν μὲν yap* ἂν γενέσεων ἦ ἡ 
an 
τοῦ σχηματισμοῦ καθυπερτέρησις, ἢ ἢ ἐὰν τὸ αὐτὸ ἣ 
τὸ ἔγγιστα 1) ζῴδιον τῇ ἐπαναφορᾷ, ἐκείνῃ TO 
~ , 
αὐθεντικώτερον καὶ ἐπιστατικώτερον ὃ τῆς φιλίας 
a“ ~ / > 3 - ε > 
ἢ τῆς ἔχθρας προσνεμητέον: ἐφ᾽ ὧν δὲ ἡ ἐπι- 
~ , \ > 
θεώρησις τῶν ἀστέρων βελτίων πρὸς ἀγαθοποιίαν 
\ 8 / > / 6 ,ὔ > ~ λί > λ 
καὶ δύναμιν, ἐκείναις ὃ τό τε ἐκ τῆς φιλίας ὠφελι- 
\ ~ ad 
μώτερον καὶ τὸ ἐκ τῆς ἔχθρας κατορθωτικώτερον 
ἀποδοτέον. 
> \ A “-“ ἃ / \ 7 
Eni δὲ τῶν κατὰ χρόνους τισὶ συνισταμένων 
~ > 
προσκαίρων συναστριῶν TE καὶ ἐναντιώσεων προσ- 
A > ¢ / ΄“ 
εκτέον ταῖς καθ᾽ ἑκατέραν γένεσιν κινήσεσι τῶν 
5 A 4 if ~ ~ 
ἀστέρων, τουτέστι KATA ποίους χρόνους al τῶν τῆς 
ε 3 > / 
ἑτέρας γενέσεως ἀστέρων ἀφέσεις ἐπέρχονται ὃ 
lot τῶν κλήρων] cf. οἱ τόποι τῶν κλήρων Proc.; οἱ κλῆροι 
MEACam., τὸν κλῆρον VPD, τῶν κλήρων Τ,. 
2 τὰς om. Cam. 
3 ἐπιθεωρήσεις libri Cam.1 (ef. Proc.) ; ὑποθεωρήσεις Cam.? 
4yap om. MECam. 
δ καὶ ἐπιστατικώτερον om. MECam. 
ὃ ἐκείναις VPAD, -ας L, --ης MECam. 
7 κατορθωτικώτερον (κατορθοκώτερον VD) ἀποδοτέον VDAE ; 
om. ἀποδοτέον PL; ἀποδοτικώτερον κατορθωτέον MECam. 


8 ἐπέρχονται VPDEProc., ὑπέρχ. L, ἐπιφέρωνται Cam., 
ἀφέσεις... ἀστέρων om. MA. 





1A star to the right is elevated above, or ‘‘ overcomes,”’ 
a star to the left, that is, one which follows it in the diurnal 
motion. Cf. Porphyry, Introd., pp. 188-189, Wolf. 


416 


TETRABIBLOS IV. 7 


Lots of Fortune are familiar, through need ; and when 
the places of the horoscopes are familiar, through 
pleasure or pain. 

One must observe, of the places in aspect, their 
elevations ! and how the planets regard them. To 
the nativity in which an elevation of the configura- 
tion occurs, whether it is the same sign as_ the 
succedant place or the one closest to it.” must be 
assigned the greater authority and direction over 
friendship or enmity; and to those nativities in 
which the regard of the planets is more favourable 5 
for benevolence and power, we must allot the greater 
benefit from the friendship and the greater success 
in the enmity. 

In the occasional acquaintances and oppositions 
that arise from time to time between individuals, we 
must pay attention to the movements of the planets 
in each of the nativities, that is, at what times the 
prorogations of the planets of one nativity reach the 


* Rather obscure, but apparently he means whether the 
preceding and the succeeding places, which might be, 
e.g. the horoscopes of the two genitures, are in the same 
sign or in successive ones. The latter is possible, for in 
unbroken friendships, as he said aboye, the horoscopes 
should be within 17° of each other, and hence could be in 
successive signs. Proclus paraphrases thus: ‘‘ For that 
place will have the greater authority over the friendship 
or the enmity to which the elevation or the succedant 
place is near, either in the same ‘sign or closest by ” (ἐκεῖνος 
yap ὁ τόπος ξξε' τὸ δυνατώτερον τῆς φιλίας ἢ ἢ τῆς ἔχθρας πρὸς ὃν 
ἐγγίζει ἡ καθυπερτέρησις ἢ ἐπαναφορά, ἣ κατὰ τὸ αὐτὸ ζῴδιον ἣ 
ἔγγιστα). 

* As, for example, trine is generally more favourable 
than quartile. 


417 


PTOLEMY 


τοῖς τόποις τῶν τῆς ἑτέρας γενέσεως ἀστέρων. 
γίνονται γὰρ κατὰ τούτους φιλίαι καὶ ἔχθραι 
μερικαὶ Kai? διακρατοῦσαι 3 χρόνον ὀλίγιστον μὲν 
τὸν μέχρι τῆς διαλύσεως αὐτῆς, πλεῖστον δὲ τὸν 
μέχρι τῆς ἑτέρου τινὸς τῶν ἐπιφερομένων ἀστέρων 
/ / 4 \ Ss \ ‘ > / 

καταλήψεως. Kpdvos μὲν οὖν καὶ Ζεὺς οὐ 025 

A > / / “- / \ / 
Tots ἀλλήλων. τόποις ποιοῦσι φιλίας διὰ συστάσεις * 
ἢ γεωργίας ἢ κληρονομίας " Κρόνος δὲ καὶ Ἄρης 
μάχας καὶ ἐπιβουλὰς τὰς κατὰ προαίρεσιν" Κρόνος 

194 δὲ καὶ ‘Adpoditn συνεπιπλοκὰς διὰ συγγενικῶν 

προσώπων, ταχὺ μέντοι ψυχούσας - Κρόνος δὲ καὶ 
“Ερμῆς συμβιώσεις καὶ κοινωνίας ® διὰ δόσιν καὶ 
λῆψιν καὶ ἐμπορίαν ἢ μυστήρια Ζεὺς δὲ καὶ "Apns 
ἑταιρίας δι᾿ ἀξιωματικῶν ἢ οἰκονομικῶν - Ζεὺς δὲ 
καὶ Ἀφροδίτη φιλίας τὰς διὰ θηλυκῶν E προσώπων 
ἢ τῶν ἐν ἱεροῖς θρησκειῶν ἢ χρησμῶν ἢ τῶν 
τοιούτων - Ζεὺς δὲ καὶ ᾿Ερμῆς συναναστροφὰς διὰ 
λόγους καὶ ἐπιστήμας καὶ προαίρεσιν φιλόσοφον" : 
Ἄρης δὲ καὶ Ἀφροδίτη συνεπιπλοκὰς τὰς δι᾽ 
ἔρωτας καὶ μοιχείας ἢ νοθείας ," ἐπισφαλεῖς δὲ καὶ 
οὐκ ἐπὶ πολὺ διευθηνούσας - Ἄρης δὲ καὶ Ἑρμῆς 
ἔχθρας καὶ περιβοησίας καὶ δίκας διὰ πραγμάτων 19 
δ / > / > / \ \ « ~ 
ἢ φαρμάκων ἀφορμάς - ᾿Αφροδίτη δὲ καὶ “Ερμῆς 

1 τοῖς τόποις. .. ἀστέρων VDE (τὸν pro τῶν VD); τοῖς 
τόποις PL, τοῖς τῆς ἑτέρας τόποις Cam. 

3 καὶ (post μερικαὶ) MAEProc.Cam., om. VD, ai PL. 

3 διακρατοῦσαι VPLAD, -oia MECam., cf. διαμένουσαι 
Proc. 

4 συστάσεις VDProc. . τῆς P, -ews cett. Cam. 


5 συμβιώσεις καὶ κοινωνίας VP (κυνον-) 1, (xowov-) ADE, 


συμβ. κ. συγγενείας M, συγγενείας καὶ συμβιώσεις Cam. ; post 
haec verba add. Sibdaot καὶ PLMAECam., om. VDProc. 


418 


TETRABIBLOS IV. 7 


places of the other.' For partial friendships and 
enmities take place in these times, prevailing at 
the shortest up to the completion of the proroga- 
tion, and at the longest until some other of the 
approaching planets reaches the place. Now if 
Saturn and Jupiter approach each other’s places 
they produce friendships through introductions, 
agriculture, or inheritance ; Saturn and Mars make 
intentional quarrels and schemings; Saturn and 
Venus, associations through kinsfolk, which, how- 
ever, quickly cool; Saturn and Mercury make 
marriage and partnerships for the sake of giving 
and receiving, trade, or the mysteries. Jupiter and 
Mars cause associations through dignities or the 
management of property; Jupiter and Venus 
friendships through women, religious rites, oracles, 
or the like; Jupiter and Mercury associations for 
learned discussion, based upon philosophic inclina- 
tion. Mars and Venus cause associations through 
love, adultery, or illegitimate relations, but they are 
unsure and flourish only briefly ; Mars and Mercury 
produce enmities, noisy disputes, and lawsuits which 
arise through business or poisonings. Venus and 

1The method of prorogation explained at length in 


iii. 10 is used, with a point of departure in one nativity 
and point of arrival in the other. 





5 θηλυκῶν VP (θυλη-) LDEProc., καθολικῶν MACam., 
74 (post προσώπων) om. Cam, 

8 φιλόσοφον VPLDProc.Cam.', -w» MAECam.? 

® νωθείας AECam. 

10 πραγμάτων VADProc., γραμμάτων PLMECam. 


419 


PTOLEMY 


’ὔ “"; - 
συμβιώσεις τὰς διὰ τέχνην τινὰ ἢ μοῦσαν ἢ 
͵ὔ > δ) ~ 
σύστασιν ἀπὸ γραμμάτων ἢ θηλυκῶν προσώπων. 
A A s an 
Τὴν μὲν οὖν ἐπὶ τὸ μᾶλλον Kal ἧττον ἐπίτασιν καὶ 
»” ~ ~ ~ 
ἄνεσιν τῶν συναστριῶν ἢ τῶν ἐναντιώσεων δια- 
,ὔ > ~ ~ 
Kpitéov ἐκ τῆς τῶν ἐπιλαμβανομένων τόπων πρὸς 
A ,ὔ \ ᾽ὔ 
τοὺς πρώτους Kal! κυριωτάτους τέτταρας τόπους 
> 
διαθέσεως - ἐπειδήπερ κατὰ κέντρων 3 μὲν ἢ κλήρων 
an“ ~ ~ ~ 
ἢ τῶν φωτῶν τυχόντες ἐπιφανεστέρας ποιοῦσι τὰς 
» ,ὔ > / \ > ~ > ,ὔ 
ἐπισημασίας - ἀλλοτριωθέντες δὲ αὐτῶν ἀνεπιφάν- 
A δὲ > Α ‘ λ 4 a“ 5 λ ͵ὔ 
τους. τὴν δὲ ἐπὶ τὸ βλαβερώτερον ἢ ὠφελιμώ- 
τερον τοῖς ἑταίροις ἐκ τῆς τῶν ἐπιθεωρούντων 
ἀστέρων τοὺς εἰρημένους τόπους ἐπὶ τὸ ἀγαθὸν ἢ 
κακὸν ἰδιοτροπίας. 
Td δὲ ¢ A / , “᾿ ’ Ἁ - ~ 
ίως δὲ 6 περὶ δούλων τόπος 7 λόγος καὶ τῆς τῶν 
195 δεσποτῶν πρὸς αὐτοὺς συμπαθείας ἢ ἀντιπαθείας ἐκ 
τοῦ κακοδαιμονοῦντος ζῳδίου λαμβάνεται, καὶ τῆς 
3 ἀστέρων * κατά τε 
A ἊΨ 4 \ ‘A A A > , nn 
τὴν γένεσιν αὐτὴν καὶ κατὰ τὰς ἐπεμβάσεις ἢ δια- 
~ > 
μετρήσεις φυσικῆς ἐπιτηδειότητος, καὶ μάλισθ 
ὅταν 5 οἱ τοῦ δωδεκατημορίου κυριεύσαντες ἤτοι 
συμφωνῶσι ὃ τοῖς αὐθεντικοῖς τόποις τῆς γενέσεως 
ἢ ἐναντίους ποιῶνται τοὺς συσχηματισμούς. 


“- » 
τῶν ἐπιθεωρούντων τὸν τόπον 


1 πρώτους καὶ libri, om. Cam. 

2 κέντρον VD ; cf. πρὸς τοὺς τόπους τῶν κλήρων ἢ τῶν φωτῶν 
κεντρωθέντες, Proc. 

8 τὸν τοιοῦτον τόπον Cam. 

4 ἀστέρων VPLDProc., τοῦ τοιούτου ζῳδίου ἀστέρων A, 
ζῳδίου ME, τοῦ ζῳδίου Cam. 

5 ὅταν VPLADE, ὅτε MCam. 

5 συμφωνῶσι VD, συμφώνως PMECam., -ous A, -ἥσεως L. 


420 


TETRABIBLOS IV. 7 


Mercury give associations based upon some art or 
domain of the Muses, or an introduction by letter or 
through women. 

Now then we must determine the degree of the 
intensity or relaxation of acquaintances and opposi- 
tions from the relation between the places which 
they assume and the four principal and most authori- 
tative places,! for if they are upon the angles or the 
Lots of Fortune or the houses of the luminaries, their 
portent is the more conspicuous, but if they are re- 
moved from them, they are insignificant. Whether 
the association will be more injurious or more bene- 
ficial to the associates is to be determined from the 
character for good or bad of the planets which regard 
the places named. 

The special topic or account of slaves” and the 
sympathy or antipathy of their masters to them is 
elucidated from the house of the Evil Daemon ὃ 
and from the natural suitability of the planets 
which regard this place both in the nativity itself 
and in their ingresses and oppositions to it, par- 
ticularly when the lords of the sign are either in 
harmonious aspect to the principal places of the 
nativity, or the opposite.4 

11.6. those named at the beginning of the chapter: 
horoscope, Lot of Fortune, sun, and moon. 

2 Camerarius and one or two of the MSS. here insert the 
heading of a new chapter, Περὶ δούλων (“‘ Of Slaves’’). The 
prominence given to the subject reflects the importance of 
slavery in ancient society. 

3 The twelfth house, immediately preceding the horo- 
scope. 

«This passage has difficulties, as Bouché-Leclereq points 
out (p. 454, esp. n. 4). Apparently we are to observe, as 

[For continuation of footnote see pages 422 and 423. 


42] 


PTOLEMY 


m.> Περὶ Eeviretas 


« \ / 
O δὲ περὶ ξενιτείας τόπος καταλαμβάνεται διὰ 
“- ~ ~ \ 
τῆς τῶν φωτῶν πρὸς τὰ κέντρα στάσεως, ἀμφοτέρων 
’, / A ~ / 
μέν, μάλιστα δὲ τῆς σελήνης. δύνουσα yap ἢ ἀπο- 
κεκλικυῖα τῶν κέντρων ξενιτείας καὶτόπων μεταβολὰς 
- 4 \ 
ποιεῖ. δύναται δὲ TO παραπλήσιον ἐνίοτε Kal ὃ 
“- "4 ” ὃ / Ny \ 5 TA 22 λ A 
τοῦ "Apews ἤτοι δύνων 7} Kal αὐτὸς 5 ἀποκεκλικὼς 
~ / A 
τοῦ κατὰ κορυφήν, ὅταν τοῖς φωσὶ διάμετρον ἢ 
τετράγωνον ἔχῃ στάσιν. ἐὰν δὲ καὶ 6 κλῆρος τῆς 
7 > ~ / A > 
τύχης ἐν τοῖς ποιήσασι THY ἀποδημίαν ζῳδίοις 
> / 3 \ ‘ / 5A \ A > \ 
exméon,® Kal τοὺς βίους ὅλους Kal τὰς ἀναστροφὰς 
> “-“ “- 
καὶ τὰς πράξεις ἐπὶ τῆς ξένης ἔχοντες διατελοῦσιν. 
ἀγαθοποιῶν μὲν οὖν ἐπιθεωρούντων τοὺς εἰρημένους 
Ὑ > aA 
τόπους ἢ ἐπιφερομένων αὐτοῖς, ἐνδόξους ἕξουσι καὶ 
᾽ A A 2X / / A A > La 
ἐπικερδεῖς Tas ἐπὶ ξένης πράξεις Kal τὰς ἐπανόδους 
ταχείας καὶ ἀνεμποδίστους - κακοποιῶν δέ, ἐπι- 
196 πόνους καὶ ἐπιβλαβεῖς καὶ ἐπικινδύνους καὶ δυσανα- 
κομίστους," τῆς συγκρατικῆς ἐπισκέψεως πανταχῆ 
συμπαραλαμβανομένης κατ᾽ ἐπικράτησιν τῶν τοῖς 
1 ἢ VD, εἴη PL, om. cett. Cam. 
2 Post αὐτὸς add. 7 MAECam., καὶ PL. 


3 ἐκπέσῃ VPLADEProc., ἐμπέσῃ MCam. 
4 δυσανακομίστους libri, Ἐἐπανόδους βραδείας Cam. 





he says, whether the planets that are actually in the twelfth 
house, or are in aspect to it, or in opposition to it, are of 
the same natural temperament; but in the following clause 
Bouché-Leclercq confesses himself not to be sure of the 
meaning of αὐθεντικοῖς, rendered praecipuis by Cardanus, 


422 


TETRABIBLOS IV. 8 


8. Of Foreign Travel. 


The topic of foreign travel! receives treatment by 
observing the position of the luminaries to the angles, 
both of them, but particularly the moon. For when 
the moon is setting or declining from the angles,” she 
portends journeys abroad or changes of place. Mars 
too sometimes has a similar force, either when he is 
setting or when he himself also has declined from 
mid-heaven, when he is in opposition or quartile to 
the luminaries. If the Lot of Fortune also falls 
among the signs that cause travel, the subjects 
spend their whole lives abroad and will have all their 
personal relations and business there. If beneficent 
planets regard the aforesaid places or succeed them, 
their activities abroad will be honourable and pro- 
fitable and their return quick and unimpeded ; but 
if the maleficent planets regard them, their journeys 
will be laborious, injurious, and dangerous, and the 
return difficult, although in every case the mixture 
of influences is taken into consideration, determined 


locis dominii et potestatis eorum by Junctinus, and cum 
dominatore nativitatis by Melanchthon. It may be noted 
that Proclus has zpos τοὺς κυρίους τόπους τῆς γενέσεως. The 
anonymous commentator gives no help. 

1The insecurity and uncertainty of travel in ancient 
times made it a much more serious undertaking than 
nowadays, and consequently the astrologers devoted much 
attention to it. 

3.1.6. when she is in the Occident (seventh house) or the 
so-called ἀποκλίματα (third, sixth, ninth, and twelfth 
houses). These and the zodiacal signs that fall upon 
them are the “signs that cause travel.’’ The moon is 
the greatest traveller among the celestial objects. Cf. 
Bouché-Leclereq, p. 455. 


423 


PTOLEMY 


αὐτοῖς τόποις συσχηματιζομένων, καθάπερ ἐν τοῖς 
πρώτοις διωρισάμεθα. 
Ὥ. >? \ ~ A > A “ -“ es 
ς ἐπὶ πᾶν δὲ ἐν μὲν τοῖς τῶν ἑῴων τεταρτη- 
μορίων ἀποκλίμασιν ἐκπεσόντων τῶν φωτῶν, εἰς τὰ 
3 ~ 
πρὸς ἀνατολὰς καὶ μεσημβρίαν μέρη τῶν οἰκήσεων 
τὰς ἀποδημίας γίνεσθαι συμβαίνει: ἐν δὲ τοῖς τῶν 
λιβυκῶν ἢ καὶ ἐν αὐτῷ τῷ δύνοντι, εἰς τὰ πρὸς 
ἄρκτους + καὶ δυσμάς." Kav μὲν μονοειδῆ τύχῃ τὰ 
τὴν ἕενιτείαν ποιήσαντα ζῴδια, ἤτοι αὐτὰ ἢ οἱ 
οἰκοδεσποτήσαντες αὐτῶν ἀστερες, διὰ μακροῦ καὶ 
κατὰ καιροὺς ποιήσονται τὰς ἀποδημίας - ἐὰν δὲ 
δίσωμα 7 δίμορφα, συνεχῶς καὶ ἐπὶ πλεῖστον χρόνον. 
Ζεὺς μὲν οὖν καὶ ᾿Αφροδίτη κύριοι γενόμενοι τῶν 
τὴν ξενιτείαν ποιούντων τόπων καὶ φωτῶν οὐ 
μόνον ἀκινδύνους ἀλλὰ καὶ θυμήρεις ποιοῦσι τὰς 
ὁδοιπορίας “3 ἤτοι γὰρ ὑπὸ τῶν προεστώτων ἐν 
a 4 av ὃ \ ir > A 4 ᾽ὔ 
ταῖς χώραις 7) διὰ φίλων ἀφορμὰς * παραπέμπονται, 
συνεργούσης αὐτοῖς τῆς τε τῶν καταστημάτων 
εὐαερίας καὶ τῆς τῶν ἐπιτηδείων ἀφθονίας - προσ- 
γενομένου δὲ αὐτοῖς καὶ τοῦ τοῦ “Ἑρμοῦ πολλάκις 
καὶ δι’ αὐτῆς τῆς εἰρημένης συντυχίας ὠφέλειαι 
καὶ προκοπαὶ καὶ δωρεαὶ καὶ τιμαὶ > προσγίνονται. 
/ \ Ne 2 ᾿ / A “-“ ἋἊ 
Κρόνος δὲ καὶ "Apns ἐπιλαβόντες τὰ φῶτα, κἂν 
/ / > / A / 
197 μάλιστα διαμηκίζωσιν ἀλλήλους, τὰ περιγενόμενα 
ποιοῦσιν ἄχρηστα καὶ κινδύνοις περικυλίουσι μεγά- 
a A 
λοις, ἐν μὲν τοῖς καθύγροις τυχόντες ζῳδίοις, διὰ 
΄ ~ \ 
δυσπλοιῶν καὶ ναυαγίων ἢ πάλιν δυσοδιῶν καὶ 


1 τὰ πρὸς ἄρκτους VADE, τὰς π. a. cett. Cam. 
2 δυσμάς VPLAD, ἐν δυσμαῖς MECam. 
8 ὁδοιπορίας VMADEProc., ἀποδημίας PLCam. 


424 


TETRABIBLOS IV. 8 


by the dominance of the planets that bear an aspect 
to these same places, as we explained at first.’ 

In general, it happens that, if the luminaries fall in 
the lower parts of the eastern quadrants, the travel 
is to the eastern and southern parts of the world, 
but if in the western quadrants or in the occident 
itself, to the north and the west; and if the 
zodiacal signs which caused the travel chance to be 
those of a single figure, either themselves or the 
planets that rule them, the journeys will be made at 
long intervals and upon occasion; but if they are 
bicorporeal signs, or of double form, they will travel 
continuously and for a very long time. If Jupiter 
and Venus are the rulers of the places which govern 
travel, and of the luminaries, they make the journeys 
not only safe but also pleasant ; for the subjects will 
be sent on their way either by the chief men of the 
country or by the resources of their friends, and 
favourable conditions of weather and abundance of 
supplies will also aid them. Often, too, if Mercury is 
added to these, profit, gain, gifts, and honour result 
from this good fortune of which we have spoken. If 
Saturn and Mars control the luminaries, however, and 
particularly if they are in opposition to each other, 
they will make the results useless and will involve 
the subject in great dangers, through unfortunate 
voyages and shipwreck if they are in watery signs, or 


1 Of. iii. 4 ad fin. 





4 ddoppas VPLAD (ἐνεργείας supra ser. A), ἐνεργείας 
MECam. 
δ καὶ τιμαὶ VPLADProc., om, MECam. (καὶ habet M). 


AA 425 


PTOLEMY 


ἐρήμων τόπων " ἐν δὲ τοῖς στερεοῖς, διὰ κρημνισμῶν 
καὶ ἐμβολῶν πνευμάτων " ἐν δὲ τοῖς τροπικοῖς καὶ 
ἰσημερινοῖς δι᾿ ἔνδειαν τῶν ἐπιτηδείων καὶ νοσώδεις 
καταστάσεις * ἐν δὲ Tots ἀνθρωποείδεσι διὰ ληστήρια 
καὶ ἐπιβουλὰς καὶ συλήσεις "1 ἐν δὲ τοῖς χερσαίοις 
διὰ θηρίων ἐφόδους ἢ σεισμούς, Ἑρμοῦ δὲ συμ- 
προσόντος διὰ μετέωρα καὶ κατηγορίας ἐπισφαλεῖς, 
ἔτι δὲ καὶ διὰ τὰς τῶν ἑρπετῶν καὶ τῶν ἄλλων 
ἰοβόλων πληγάς, παρατηρουμένης ἔτι μὲν τῆς τῶν 
συμπτωμάτων, ἐάν τε ὠφέλιμα 3 ἐάν τε βλαβερὰ 7, 
ἰδιοτροπίας, τουτέστι τῆς περὶ τὸ αἴτιον διαφορᾶς, 
καὶ ἐκ τῆς τῶν αἰτιατικῶν τόπων πράξεως ἢ 
κτήσεως ἢ σώματος ἢ ἀξιώματος κατὰ τὴν ἐξ 
ἀρχῆς διάθεσιν κυρίας, τῶν δὲ τὰς ἐπισημασίας 
μάλιστα ποιησόντων καιρῶν ἐκ τῆς τῶν ε΄ πλανω- 
μένων © κατὰ χρόνους ἐπεμβάσεων ποιότητος. καὶ 
ταῦτα μὲν ἡμῖν μέχρι τοσούτων ὑποτετυπώσθω. 


<0.> Περὶ θανάτου ποιότητος 


Καταλειπομένης δ᾽ ἐπὶ πᾶσι τῆς περὶ τὸ ποιὸν 

195 τῶν θανάτων ἐπισκέψεως, προδιαληψόμεθα διὰ 
τῶν ἐν τοῖς περὶ τῶν χρόνων τῆς ζωῆς ἐφωδευ- 
μένων πότερον κατὰ ἄφεσιν ἀκτῖνος ἡ ἀναίρεσις 
ἀποτελεσθήσεται ἢ κατὰ τὴν emt? τὸ δυτικὸν τοῦ 


' συλήσεις VAD, συλλείσης Ῥ, συλλήσεις L, τυραννήσεις cett. 
Cam. 

2 ὠφέλιμος MECam. 

3 τουτέστι(ν) VPLD, ἐκ MAECam. 

4 Post αἴτιον add. ἔσται VPLD. 

5 κυρίας VPLD, κυρ(ε)ίαν MECam., καὶ κυρείαν A. 


426 


TETRABIBLOS IV. 8-9 


again through hard going and desert places; and if 
they are in solid signs, through falling from heights 
and assaults of winds ; in the solstitial and equinoctial 
signs, through lack of provisions and unhealthy con- 
ditions ; in the signs of human form, through piracy, 
plots, and robberies ; in the terrestrial signs, through 
the attacks of beasts, or earthquakes, and if Mercury 
is present at the same time, through the weather, 
dangerous accusations, and, furthermore, through 
the bites of reptiles and other poisonous creatures. 
The peculiar quality of the events, whether they be 
beneficial or harmful—that is, the differentiation in 
the cause—is observed from the government of the 
places significant of action, property, body, or dignity, 
according to our original disposition of them,! and 
the occasions which will to the greatest degree bring 
about these portended events are judged from the 
time of the ingresses 2 of the five planets. Such be 
our general account of the matter. 


9. Of the Quality of Death. 


Since after all the others the inquiry concerning the 
quality of death remains, we shall first determine, 
through the means furnished by the discussion of the 
length of life, whether the destruction will be accom- 
plished by the projection of a ray or by the descent 


1Cf. iv. 4, iv. 2, iii. 11, and iv. 3 respectively. 
* Presumably into the “ signs that cause travel.” 


δ ε΄ πλανωμένων VDProc., om. cett. Cam. 
1 τὴν ἐπὶ VPAD, om. cett. Cam. 


427 


PTOLEMY 


emukpaTytopos! καταφοράν. εἰ μὲν yap κατὰ 
ἄφεσιν καὶ ὑπάντησιν ἡ ἀναίρεσις γίνοιτο, τὸν τῆς 
ὑπαντήσεως τόπον εἰς τὴν τοῦ θανάτου ποιότητα 
προσήκει παρατηρεῖν" εἰ δὲ κατὰ τὴν ἐπὶ τὸ δύνον 
καταφοράν, αὐτὸν τὸν δυτικὸν τόπον. ὁποῖοι γὰρ 
ἂν ὦσιν ἤτοι οἱ ἐπόντες τοῖς εἰρημένοις τόποις, ἢ 
ἐὰν μὴ ἐπῶσιν, οἱ πρῶτοι τῶν ἄλλων αὐτοῖς 
ἐπιφερόμενοι, τοιούτους καὶ τοὺς θανάτους ἔσεσθαι 
διαληπτέον, συμβαλλομένων ταῖς φύσεσιν αὐτῶν 
πρὸς τὸ ποικίλον τῶν συμπτωμάτων τῶν τε 
συσχηματιζομένων ἀστέρων καὶ τῆς αὐτῶν τῶν 
εἰρημένων ἀναιρετικῶν τόπων ἰδιοτροπίας ζῳδι- 
ακῶς τε καὶ κατὰ τὴν τῶν ὁρίων φύσιν. 

ὋὉ μὲν οὖν τοῦ Κρόνου τὴν κυρίαν τοῦ θανάτου 
λαβὼν ποιεῖ τὰ τέλη διὰ νόσων πολυχρονίων καὶ 
φθίσεων καὶ ῥευματισμῶν καὶ συντήξεων 3 καὶ 
ῥιγοπυρέτων καὶ σπληνικῶν καὶ ὑδρωπικῶν καὶ 
κοιλιακῶν 1 καὶ ὑστερικῶν διαθέσεων καὶ ὅσαι 
κατὰ πλεονασμὸν τοῦ ψυχροῦ συνίστανται. ὁ δὲ 
τοῦ Διὸς ποιεῖ τοὺς θανάτους ἀπὸ συνάγχης καὶ 
περιπνευμονίας καὶ ἀποπληξίας καὶ σπασμῶν καὶ 
κεφαλαλγίας καὶ τῶν καρδιακῶν διαθέσεων καὶ 
ὅσαι κατὰ πνεύματος ἀμετρίαν ἢ δυσωδίαν ἐπι- 
συνάπτουσιν ὁ δὲ τοῦ Ἄρεως ἀπὸ πυρετῶν 

199 συνεχῶν καὶ ἡμιτριταϊκῶν καὶ αἰφνιδίων πληγῶν 
καὶ νεφριτικῶν καὶ αἱμοπτυικῶν διαθέσεων καὶ 


1 ἐπικρατήτορος P, ἐπικράτηρος VLAD, κρατήτορος MECam. 
2 καταφοράν VPADE, δι᾽ ἀφοράν L, καταφορά MCam., 
3 και συντήξεων om. MCam. 


428 


TETRABIBLOS IV. 9 


of the significator to the occident.! For if the de- 
struction should come about through the projection 
of rays and occourse, it is fitting to observe the place 
of the occourse in order to determine the quality of 
the death, but if it occurs by the descent of the 
significator to the occident, we must observe the 
occident itself. For of whatever quality are the 
planets that are upon the aforesaid places, or, if they 
are not upon them, the first planets to approach them, 
such we must understand that the deaths will be, 
while at the same time the planets in aspect by their 
natures contribute to the complexity of the events, 
as do also the peculiar characters of the aforesaid de- 
structive places themselves, both through the signs 
of the zodiac and through the nature of the terms.” 

Now then, if Saturn holds the lordship of death, he 
brings about the end through long illness, phthisis, 
rheumatism, colliquations, chills and fever, and 
splenic, dropsical, enteric, or hysteric conditions, and 
such as arise through excesses of cold. Jupiter 
causes death through strangulation, pneumonia, 
apoplexy, spasms, headaches, and cardiac affections, 
and such conditions as are accompanied by irregu- 
larity or foulness of breath. Mars kills by means 
of fevers, continued or intermittent at intervals of 
one and a half days, sudden strokes, nephritic con- 


1 Cf. iii. 10, especially p. 279. The “ significator,”’ as the 
anonymous commentator points out, is the prorogator 
(ἀφέτης). 

2 For the “terms,”’ cf. i. 21-22. 

4 κοιλιακῶν VLDProc., κυληακῶν P. κωλυκῶν ME, κωλικῶν 
ACam. 


5 ἐπισυνάπτουσιν VPLD, ἐπισυμπίπτουσιν MAECam 





429 


PTOLEMY 


αἱμορραγιῶν! Kal ἐκτρωσμῶν καὶ τοκετῶν καὶ 
ἐρυσιπελατῶν καὶ ὀλέθρων καὶ ὅσα τῶν νοση- 
μάτων κατ᾽ ἐκπύρωσιν καὶ ἀμετρίαν τοῦ θερμοῦ 
τοὺς θανάτους ἐπιφέρει. ὁ δὲ τῆς ᾿Αφροδίτης διὰ 
στομαχικῶν καὶ ἡπατικῶν καὶ δυσεντερικῶν δια- 
θέσεων ποιεῖ τοὺς θανάτους, ἔτι δὲ διὰ νομῶν καὶ 
συρίγγων καὶ λειχήνων καὶ φαρμάκων δόσεως καὶ 
ὅσα τοῦ ὑγροῦ πλεονάσαντος ἢ φθαρέντος ἀποτε- 
λεῖται συμπτώματα. ὁ δὲ τοῦ “Eppod διὰ μανιῶν 
καὶ ἐκστάσεων καὶ μελαγχολιῶν 3 καὶ πτωματισμῶν 
καὶ ἐπιλήψεων καὶ βηχικῶν καὶ ἀναφορικῶν νοση- 
μάτων καὶ ὅσα τοῦ ξηροῦ πλεονάσαντος ἢ φθαρέντος 
συνίσταται. 
᾿Ιδίοις μὲν οὖν τελευτῶσι θανάτοις οἱ κατὰ τὸν 
εἰρημένον τρόπον μεταστάντες τοῦ ζῆν, ὅταν ot 
τὴν κυρίαν τοῦ θανάτου λαβόντες ἐπὶ τῆς ἰδίας 
ἢ τῆς οἰκείας φυσικῆς ἰδιοτροπίας τύχωσιν ὄντες, 
ὑπὸ μηδενὸς καθυπερτερηθέντες τῶν κακῶσαι 
καὶ ἐπιφανέστερον ποιῆσαι τὸ τέλος δυναμένων " 
βιαίοις δὲ καὶ ἐπισήμοις ὅταν ἢ ἀμφότεροι κυριεύ- 
σωσιν οἱ κακοποιοὶ τῶν ἀναιρετικῶν τόπων ἤτοι 
συνόντες ἢ τετραγωνίζοντες ἢ διαμηκίζοντες a 
ὁπότερος αὐτῶν ἢ καὶ ἀμφότεροι τὸν ἥλιον ἢ τὴν 
200 σελήνην ἢ καὶ ἀμφότερα τὰ φῶτα καταλάβωσι,3 
τῆς μὲν τοῦ θανάτου κακώσεως ἀπὸ τῆς αὐτῶν 
συνελεύσεως συνισταμένης, τοῦ δὲ μεγέθους ἀπὸ 


1 αἱμορραγιῶν VADProc., αἱμορηγιῶν P, αἱμογγιῶν L, αἵἷμορ- 
ροϊκῶν MECam. 

2 μελαγχολικῶν ACam.; καὶ (post hoc verbum) om. 
AECam. 


430 


TETRABIBLOS IV. 9 


ditions and those that involve the spitting of blood, 
hemorrhages, miscarriages, childbirth, erysipelas, 
and pestilences, and such diseases as induce death 
by fever and immoderate heat. Venus causes death 
by stomachic, hepatic, and intestinal conditions, and 
furthermore through cancers, fistulas, lichens, taking 
poisons, and such misfortunes as come about from 
excess or deficiency of moisture. Mercury portends 
death by madness, distraction, melancholy, the 
falling sickness, epilepsy, diseases accompanied by 
coughing and raising, and all such ailments as arise 
from the excess or deficiency of dryness. 

Thus, then, those who depart from life in the way 
described die natural deaths,! whenever the lords of 
death happen to be in their own or in kindred natural 
characters,” and if no planet that is able to do in- 
jury and to make the end more remarkable over- 
comes them. They die, however, by violent and 
conspicuous means whenever both the evil planets 
dominate the destructive places, either in conjunction, 
or in quartile, or in opposition, or also if one of the 
two, or both, seize upon * the sun, or the moon, or 
both the luminaries. The affliction of the death in 
this case arises from their junction, its magnitude 


1 Literally, “by their own deatlis,”’ contrasted with 
violent (βίαιοι) deaths caused by some external agency. 
The anonymous commentator thus explains. 

2 When they are in the houses of members of their own 
sect, says the Anonymous. 

3 Apparently the word is used in the sense of “ afflic- 
tion ”’ (see iii. 9, p. 267). 





3 καταλάβωσι VA (mg.: yp. κακωθῶσιν) DProc., λάβωσι(ν) 
PL, κακωθῶσι MECam. 


431 


PTOLEMY 


τῆς TOV φωτῶν ἐπιμαρτυρήσεως, τῆς δὲ ποιότητος 
πάλιν ἀπὸ τῆς τῶν λοιπῶν ἀστέρων συνεπιθεωρή- 
σεως καὶ τῶν τοὺς κακοποιοὺς περιεχόντων } 
ζῳδίων. 
i ‘O \ A lol K / A 5A A κ 
μὲν γὰρ τοῦ Κρόνου τὸν ἥλιον παρὰ τὴν 
αἵρεσιν τετραγωνίσας ἢ διαμηκίσας ἐν μὲν τοῖς 
- a \ 7 θλί 2 ww rv ” > id 
στερεοῖς ποιεῖ τοὺς κατὰ θλίψιν 2 ὄχλων ἢ ἀγχό- 
vais ἢ στραγγαλιαῖς ἀπολλυμένους - ὁμοίως δὲ 
κἂν δύνῃ τῆς σελήνης ἐπιφερομένης - ἐν δὲ τοῖς 
θηριώδεσι ζῳδίοις, ὑπὸ θηρίων διαφθειρομένους " 
κἂν ὁ τοῦ Διὸς ἐπιμαρτυρήσῃ κεκακωμένος καὶ 
αὐτός, ἐν δημοσίοις τόποις ἢ ἐπισήμοις ἡμέραις 3 
θηριομαχοῦντας. ἀνθωροσκοπήσας δὲ ὁποτέρῳ 
τῶν φωτῶν, ἐν εἱρκταῖς ἀπολλυμένους - τῷ δὲ 
τοῦ “Ἑρμοῦ συσχηματισθεὶς καὶ μάλιστα περὶ 
τοὺς ἐν τῇ σφαίρᾳ ὄφεις ἢ τὰ χερσαῖα τῶν 
ζῳδίων, ἀπὸ δακέτων ἰοβόλων ἀποθνήσκοντας " 
᾿Δφροδίτης δὲ αὐτοῖς προσγενομένης, ὑπὸ φαρ- 
μακειῶν καὶ γυναικείων ἐπιβουλῶν ἐν ΠΠαρθένῳ 
δὲ καὶ ᾿Ιχθύσιν ἢ τοῖς καθύγροις ζῳδίοις τῆς 
σελήνης συσχηματισθείσης, ὑποβρυχίους καὶ ἐν 
ὕδασιν ἀποπνιγομένους - περὶ δὲ τὴν Apyw, καὶ 
ναυαγίοις περιπίπτοντας « ἐν δὲ τοῖς τροπικοῖς ἢ 
"ὃ 5 SAL 6 A μ ὃ ἐξ Ἃ > \ 
τετραπόδοις ὃ ἡλίῳ ὃ συνὼν ἢ διαμηκίσας ἢ ἀντὶ 
1 περιεχόντων Proc., -εξόντων VMADECam., ὑπερεχόντων 
P (-εχώντ-) L. 
5 κατὰ θλίψιν VLAD, κατὰ θλύψιν P, κατὰ λῆψιν ME, διὰ 
κατάληψιν Cam. 
3 ἡμέραις APL (ἢ μέραις) Proc., ἡμέρας cett. Cam. 
4 ζῳδίων VProc., ζῴων cett. Cam. 


5 ἢ τετραπόδοις VProc., τετραπόδοις PL, om. cett. Cam. 
5 ἡλίῳ VMD, cf. Proc. ; -os PLAECam. 


432 


TETRABIBLOS IV. 9 


from the testimony of the luminaries, and its 
quality, again, from the way in which the other 
planets regard them, and from the signs in which 
the evil planets are found. 

For if Saturn is in quartile to the sun from a sign of 
the opposite sect, or is in opposition, in the solid signs 
he causes death by trampling in a mob, or by the 
noose, or by indurations, and similarly if he is setting 
and the moon is approaching him; in the signs that 
have the form of animals, he causes death by wild 
beasts, and if Jupiter, who is himself afflicted, bears 
witness to him, death in public places, or on days of 
celebration, in fighting with the beasts; but in the 
ascendant, in opposition ! to either of the luminaries, 
death in prison. If he is in aspect to Mercury, 
and particularly in the neighbourhood of the 
serpents * in the sphere, or in the terrestrial signs, 
he makes men die from the bites of poisonous 
creatures, and if Venus is present with them, by 
poisoning and by feminine plots; but in Virgo and 
Pisces, or the watery signs, if the moon is in aspect, 
by drowning and suffocation in water ; in the neigh- 
bourhood of Argo, as the victims of shipwreck ; in 
the tropical or four-footed signs, when [Saturn] is 
with the sun or is in opposition to him, or if he is 


1The Anonymous, p. 165, Wolf, explains the rare word 
ἀνθωροσκοπήσας thus. Melanchthon, however, took it in 
the opposite sense, ‘“‘in the occident and opposing the 
luminaries.”’ 

2 The Anonymous says that he means the constellations, 
such as Draco and Hydra, of serpent-like form. 


433 


PTOLEMY 


τοῦ ἡλίου τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως, ὑπὸ συμπτώσεων κατα- 
201 λαμβανομένους - ἐὰν δὲ καὶ μεσουρανῶσιν ἢ ἀντι- 
μεσουρανῶσιν,, ἀπὸ ὕψους κατακρημνιζομένους. 
‘O δὲ τοῦ “Apews τῷ ἡλίῳ παρ᾽ αἵρεσιν ἢ τῇ 
σελήνῃ τετράγωνος ἢ διάμετρος σταθεὶς ἐν μὲν 
τοῖς ἀνθρωποείδεσι ζῳδίοις ἐν στάσεσιν ἐμφυλίοις 
ἢ ὑπὸ πολεμίων ποιεῖ σφαζομένους ἢ αὐτόχειρας 
ἑαυτῶν γινομένους, διὰ γυναῖκας δὲ ἢ καὶ γυναικῶν 
φονέας," ἐπὰν καὶ ὁ τῆς ᾿Αφροδίτης αὐτοῖς ἃ μαρ- 
τυρήσῃ᾽ κἂν ὁ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ δὲ τούτοις 4 συσχη- 
ματισθῇ, ὑπὸ πειρατῶν ἢ ληστηρίων ἢ ἢ κακουργῶν 
ἀπολλυμένους - ἐπὶ δὲ τῶν μελοκοπουμένων καὶ 
ἀτελῶν ζῳδίων ἢ κατὰ τὸ γοργόνιον τοῦ Ilepoéws, 
ἀποκεφαλιζομένους ἢ μελοκοπουμένους - ἐν δὲ 
Σκορπίῳ καὶ Ταύρῳ ὃ καύσεσιν ἢ τομαῖς ἢ ἀποτο- 
μαῖς ἰατρῶν ἢ σπασμοῖς ἀποθνήσκοντας " ἐπὶ δὲ 
τοῦ μεσουρανήματος ἢ ἀντιμεσουρανήματος, OTAU- 
ροῖς ἀνορθουμένους, καὶ μάλιστα περὶ τὸν ᾿Κηφέα 
καὶ τὴν ‘Avdpopeday - ἐπὶ δὲ τοῦ δύνοντος ἢ ἀνθω- 
ροσκοποῦντος, ζῶντας καιομένους - ἐν δὲ τοῖς 
τετράποσιν, ἀπὸ συμπτώσεων καὶ συνθραύσεων καὶ 
συμπτωμάτων ὃ ἀποθνήσκοντας. τοῦ δὲ τοῦ Atos 
καὶ τούτῳ μαρτυρήσαντος καὶ συγκακωθέντος 


1 ἢ ἀντιμεσουρανῶσιν (aut -ἤσωσιν) codd.; om. Cam, 

2 φονέας VP (φων-) LMDEProc., φονευομένους ACam. 

8 αὐτοῖς VD Proc., -7s PL, -ov MAECam. 

4 τούτοις VPLADProc., αὐτῷ MECam. 

5 Ταύρῳ VPLDProc., Κενταύρῳ MAECam. 

5 καὶ συνθραύσεων καὶ συμπτωμάτων VPLD (ef. ἀπὸ συμπτω- 


μάτων καὶ κλασμάτων Proc.) ; καὶ συνθ. ἢ συμπ. A, ἢ συρμάτων 
MECam. 


434 


TETRABIBLOS IV. 9 


with Mars instead of the sun, by being caught in the 
collapse of a house ; and if they are in mid-heaven, 
above or below the earth, by a fall from a height. 
If Mars is quartile or in opposition to the sun or 
the moon, from a sign of the other sect, in the 
signs of human form, he causes the subjects to be 
slaughtered in civil factions or by the enemy, or 
to commit suicide, and to die because of women 
or as murderers of women, whenever Venus testifies 
to them;! and if Mercury also is in aspect to 
these, he causes death at the hands of pirates, 
robbers,or criminals ; in the mutilated and imperfect 
signs,” or in the Gorgon of Perseus, death by de- 
capitation or mutilation; in Scorpio and Taurus, 
death through cautery, cutting,® or amputation by 
physicians, or death in convulsions ; at mid-heaven 
or the opposite point, by being set up on stakes,‘ 
and particularly in Cepheus and Andromeda; at the 
occident or in opposition to the horoscope, by being 
burned alive; in the quadrupedal signs, death by 
the collapse of houses, by breaking, or by crush- 
ing; if Jupiter also bears witness to him and is 
afflicted at the same time, again the subjects perish 


11... Mars and the luminaries. 

3 Such as Taurus, the blind Cancer, Scorpio, Sagittarius ; 
cf. Bouché-Leclereq, p. 151. 

8 καῦσις and τομή were the two principal methods of 
ancient surgery, were often applied together, and so are 
frequently mentioned together, as in Plato, Rep. 406D (see 
Adam ad loc.). 

41... crucifixion. 


435 


PTOLEMY 


ἐπισήμοις πάλιν ἀπόλλυνται κατακρίσεσι καὶ 
χόλοις ἡγεμόνων ἢ βασιλέων. 

Συγγενόμενοι δὲ ἀλλήλοις οἱ κακοποιοὶ καὶ οὕτω 
διαμηκίσαντες ἐπί τινος τῶν εἰρημένων αἰτιατικῶν 
διαθέσεων συνεργοῦσιν ἔτι μᾶλλον πρὸς τὴν τοῦ 
θανάτου κάκωσιν, τῆς κατὰ τὸ ποιὸν κυρίας περὶ 

202 rov! αὐτοῦ τοῦ ἀναιρετικοῦ τόπου τυχόντα 5 γινο- 
μένης, ἢ καὶ πολλῶν τῶν θανατικῶν συμπτωμάτων 
ἢ δισσῶν ἦτοι κατὰ τὸ ποιὸν ἢ κατὰ τὸ ποσὸν 
ἀποτελουμένων, ὅταν ἀμφότεροι λόγον ἔχωσι πρὸς 
τοὺς ἀναιρετικοὺς τόπους. οἵ τοιοῦτοι δὲ καὶ ταφῆς 
ἄμοιροι καταλείπονται - δαπανῶνται δὲ ὑπὸ θηρίων 
ἢ οἰωνῶν, ὅταν περὶ τὰ ὁμοειδῆ τῶν ζῳδίων ot 
κακοποιοὶ τύχωσι, μηδενὸς τῶν ἀγαθοποιῶν ὃ τῷ 
ὑπὸ γῆν ἢ τοῖς ἀναιρετικοῖς τόποις μαρτυρή- 
σαντος. ἐπὶ ἕένης δὲ οἱ θάνατοι γίνονται τῶν τοὺς 
ἀναιρετικοὺς τόπους κατασχόντων ἀστέρων ἐν τοῖς 
ἀποκλίμασιν ὃ ἐκπεσόντων, καὶ μάλισθ᾽ ὅταν καὶ ἡ 
σελήνη παροῦσα ἢ τετραγωνίζουσα ἢ διαμηκίζουσα 
τύχῃ τοὺς εἰρημένους τόπους. 


<> Περὶ χρόνων διαιρέσεως 


᾿Εφωδευμένου δὲ ἡμῖν κεφαλαιωδῶς τοῦ τύπου 
τῆς καθ᾽ ἕκαστον εἶδος ἐπισκέψεως μέχρι μόνων 


' τυγχάνοντα post περὶ τὸν add. MECam. 

2 Post τόπου add. τυχόντα VPLMADE, *airias Cam. 

8 ἀγαθοποιῶν twa PL. 

4 τῷ ὑπὸ γῆν VADE, ὑπὸ γῆν PL, τῷ ὑπὸ ty/////// (lac.) M, 
ἐν τῷ ὑπὲρ γῆν ἡμισφαιρίῳ ὄντος Cam.” ; om. Cam.'; ef. Proc. 

5 ἀποκλίμασιν VDEProc., ἀποκλήμασιν PL, ἀποτελέσμασιν 
MACam. 


436 


* 


TETRABIBLOS IV. 9-10 


conspicuously by condemnation and through the 
anger of generals or kings. 

If the maleficent planets are together and in this 
state are in opposition in some one of the aforesaid 
significant positions, they work together all the more 
for the affliction of the death. In this case the 
signification of the quality of the death lies with 
the one that chances to occupy the destructive place, 
or else the fatal occurrences are multiplied, or 
doubled, either in quality or in quantity, whenever 
both have some relation to the destructive places. 
Persons with such genitures are even left without 
burial, and are consumed by wild beasts or birds, 
whenever the maleficent planets chance to be in 
signs of such form,’ if none of the beneficent planets is 
witnessing to the lower mid-heaven or to the destruc- 
tive places. Deaths occur in foreign lands if the 
planets that occupy the destructive places fall in the 
declining places,” and particularly whenever the moon 
happens to be in, or quartile to, or in opposition to, 
the aforesaid regions. 


10. Of the Division of Times. 


As we have treated systematically under its several 
heads the outline of each kind of inquiry only so 


1That is, constellations that have the form of wild 
beasts or birds. The anonymous commentator cites as an 
instance “if the dog star (κύων) or Corvus (κόραξ) were 
rising at the same time,” 1.6. were παρανατέλλοντα (cf. 
Bouché-Leclereq, p. 125, n. 1). 

2 The “ places ”’ (twelfths of the zodiac) may be classified 
as κέντρα, the angles; ἐπαναφοραί, succedants, the signs 
rising immediately after the angles; and ἀποκλίματα, the 
declining places, which follow the succedants. 


437 


PTOLEMY 


> ~ a > > “ / ~ Ἄν» ell 
αὐτῶν, ὥσπερ ἐν ἀρχῇ προεθέμεθα, τῶν καθ᾽ ὅλα 
μέρη λαμβανομένων πραγματειῶν, λοιπὸν ἂν εἴη 
προσθεῖναι κατὰ τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον ὅσα καὶ περὶ τὰς 
τῶν χρόνων διαιρέσεις ὀφείλει θεωρηθῆναι φυσικῶς 
καὶ ἀκολούθως ταῖς ἐπὶ μέρους ἐκτεθειμέναις 
πραγματείαις. ὥσπερ τοίνυν καὶ ἐπὶ πάντων 
ἁπλῶς τῶν γενεθλιαλογικῶν τόπων προυφέστηκέ 
τις τῶν ἐπὶ μέρους εἱμαρμένη μείζων, ἡ τῆς τῶν 
χωρῶν αὐτῶν, ἧ τὰ καθ᾽ ἕκαστον ὁλοσχερῶς 
203 θεωρούμενα περὶ τὰς γενέσεις ὑποπίπτειν πέφυκεν, 
ὡς τά τε περὶ τὰς τῶν σωμάτων μορφὰς καὶ τὰς 
τῶν ψυχῶν ἰδιοτροπίας καὶ τὰς τῶν ἐθῶν καὶ 
νομίμων ἐναλλαγάς, καὶ δεῖ τὸν φυσικῶς ἐπισκεπ- 
τόμενον ἀεὶ τῆς πρώτης καὶ κυριωτέρας αἰτίας 
κρατεῖν, ὅπως μὴ κατὰ τὸ τῶν γενέσεων παρόμοιον 
λάθῃ * ποτέ, τὸν μὲν ἐν Αἰθιοπίᾳ γενόμενον," * φέρε 
εἰπεῖν, λον τὴν ἢ τετανὸν τὰς τρίχας εἰπών, 
\ ὃ \ ΙΓ ‘ ἽΝ A PY A / A 4 3 \ 
tov δὲ Τερμανὸν ἢ τὸν Γαλάτην μελάγχροα 3 καὶ 
> / ”“ / \ € / a ” a“ 
οὐλοκέφαλον " ἢ τούτους μὲν ἡμέρους τοῖς ἤθεσιν ἢ 
/ μ / A > > ae / 
φιλολόγους 7) φιλοθεώρους, τοὺς ὃ ey TH Βλλάδι 
τὰς ψυχὰς ἀγρίους καὶ τὸν λόγον ἀπαιδεύτους - ἢ 
πάλιν κατὰ τὸ τῶν ἐθῶν καὶ νομίμων ἴδιον ἐπὶ τῶν 
συμβιώσεων, λόγου χάριν, τῷ μὲν ᾿Ιταλῷ τὸ γένος 
3 \ / / / ~ > / 
ἀδελφικὸν γάμον προθέμενος, δέον τῷ Αἰγυπτίῳ, 
τούτῳ δὲ μητρικόν, δέον τῷ Πέρσῃ" καὶ ὅλως 
/ \ > “ “ ε / 
προδιαλαμβάνειν tas καθ᾽ ὅλου τῆς εἱμαρμένης 
Ν / A ~ 
περιστάσεις, εἶτα τὰς κατὰ μέρος πρὸς TO μᾶλλον 


1 λάθῃ VPLADE, λάθοι M, πάθῃ Cam. 
Στὸν. . . γενόμενον] τὸν μὲν Αἰθίοπα Cam. 


488 


TETRABIBLOS IV. 10 


far as to explain the general doctrine, which was 
our original intention, it would remain to add in the 
same manner any observations that should be made 
about the division of times, in such manner as to 
agree with nature and to be consistent with the 
specific doctrines which have already been set forth. 
So then, as, among all genethlialogical inquiries what- 
soever, a more general destiny takes precedence of all 
particular considerations, namely, that of country 
of birth, to which the major details of a geniture 
are naturally subordinate, such as the topics of the 
form of the body, the character of the soul and the 
variations of manners and customs, it is also necessary 
that he who makes his inquiry naturally should always 
hold first to the primary and more authoritative cause, 
lest, misled by the similarity of genitures, he should 
unwittingly call, let us say, the Ethiopian white or 
straight-haired, and the German or Gaul black- 
skinned and woolly-haired, or the latter gentle in 
character, fond of discussion, or fond of contempla- 
tion, and the Greeks savage of soul and untutored 
of mind ; or, again, on the subject of marriage, lest he 
mistake the appropriate customs and manners by 
assigning, for example, marriage with a sister to 
one who is Italian by race, instead of to the 
Egyptian as he should, and a marriage with his 
mother to this latter, though it suits the Persian. 
Thus in general it is needful first to apprehend 
universal conditions of destiny, and then to attach 
to them the particular conditions which relate to 





3 weAdyxpoa VD, μελανόχρουν Proc., μελίχρουν MAECam., 
om. PL. 
439 


PTOLEMY 


a Φ > / \ > \ / \ te | 
ἢ ἧττον ἐφαρμόζειν: τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον καὶ ἐπὶ 
τῶν χρονικῶν διαιρέσεων τὰς τῶν χρονικῶν 
ἡλικιῶν διαφορὰς καὶ ἐπιτηδειότητας πρὸς ἕκαστα 
~ > A on 
τῶν ἀποτελεσμάτων ἀναγκαῖον προῦποτίθεσθαι, καὶ 
σκοπεῖν ὅπως μὴ κατὰ τὸ κοινὸν καὶ ἁπλοῦν τῶν 
πρὸς τὴν ἐπίσκεψιν θεωρουμένων συμβατικῶν 3 
᾽ὔ «ς ,» “ \ / “ Ἅ 
λάθωμεν αὑτούς ποτε τῷ μὲν βρέφει πρᾶξιν ἢ 
ὔ » ~ / :} / a \ / 
204 γάμον ἢ τι τῶν τελειοτέρων εἰπόντες, τῷ δὲ πάνυ 
γέροντι τεκνοποιΐαν ἢ τι τῶν νεανικωτέρων - ἀλλὰ 
/ \ A “-“ >? / ~ n 
καθάπαξ τὰ διὰ τῶν ἐφόδων τῶν χρονικῶν θεω- 
ρούμενα κατὰ τὸ παρόμοιον καὶ ἐνδεχόμενον τῶν 
A SA / 5A. > / 3 ” \ 
ταῖς ἡλικίαις συμφύλων ἐφαρμόζωμεν.3 ἔστι yap 
ἐπιβολὴ μία καὶ ἡ αὐτὴ πάντων ἐπὶ τῶν χρονικῶν 
a θ᾽ - va ~ > / b] y: > 
τῆς καθ᾽ ὅλου φύσεως τῶν ἀνθρώπων, ἐχομένη καθ 
ὁμοιότητα καὶ παραβολὴν τῆς τάξεως τῶν ἑπτὰ 
πλανωμένων, ἀρχομένη μὲν ἀπὸ τῆς πρώτης 
ἡλικίας καὶ τῆς πρώτης ἀφ᾽ ἡμῶν σφαίρας, του- 
τέστι τῆς σεληνιακῆς, λήγουσα δὲ ἐπὶ τὴν πυ- 
μάτην τῶν ἡλικιῶν καὶ τῶν πλανωμένων σφαιρῶν 
τὴν ὑστάτην, Κρόνου δὲ προσαγορευομένην. καὶ 
/ ¢ > ~ ¢ i, ~ ε ~ A 
συμβέβηκεν ws ἀληθῶς ἑκάστῃ τῶν ἡλικιῶν τὰ 
οἰκεῖα τῇ φύσει τοῦ παραβεβλημένου τῶν πλανω- 
μένων, ἃ δεήσει παρατηρεῖν, ὅπως τὰ μὲν καθ᾽ ὅλου 
1 ἐπὶ τῶν χρονικῶν MAECam., χρονικῶν om. VPLD. 


2 συμβατικῶν ΝΑ, συμβαντικῶν PLD, συμβαματικῶν MECam. 
3 ἐφαρμόζωμεν ACam., -ew VP (-μωζ-)} LD, -ομεν ME. 





1 Boll, Studien, p. 123, points out that this chapter, with 
its account of the seven ages of man, does not properly 
belong to the plan adopted for the Tetrabiblos and is in 
certain details at variance with what has preceded; e.g. 


440 


TETRABIBLOS IV. 10 


degree. In the same fashion likewise, dealing with 
the division of time, one must take as a basis in each 
single prediction the differences and special pro- 
prieties of the temporal ages, and see to it that we 
do not, in the ordinary, simple treatment of matters 
incident to the inquiry, carelessly assign to a babe 
action or marriage, or anything that belongs to 
adults, or to an extremely old man the begetting of 
children or anything else that fits younger men ; 
but once and for all let us harmonize those details 
which are contemplated in temporal terms with that 
which is suitable and possible for persons in the 
various age-classes. For in the matter of the age- 
divisions of mankind! in general there is one and 
the same approach, which for likeness and com- 
parison depends upon the order of the seven planets ; 
it begins with the first age of man and with the first 
sphere from us, that is, the moon’s, and ends with 
the last of the ages and the outermost of the planetary 
spheres, which is called that of Saturn. And in 
truth the accidental qualities of each of the ages are 
those which are naturally proper to the planet com- 
pared with it, and these it will be needful to observe, 
in order that by this means we may investigate the 


there are seven ages instead of four, as in i. 10, and “‘ seven 
planets,’’ though elsewhere the two luminaries are kept 
distinct from the five planets. We may, however, agree 
with his conclusion that the style of the chapter is un- 
questionably Ptolemaic and that it is more probably an 
addition by the author than an interpolation by another 
hand. Nevertheless, Ptolemy has probably borrowed 
much of this material from others, and the differences 
in his sourees will account for apparent discrepancies. 
The ages of man, most familiar to us through As You 
Like It, 11. vii, are found in many ancient writers. 


441 


PTOLEMY 


~ A > ~ “- ~ 
τῶν χρονικῶν ἐντεῦθεν σκοπῶμεν, τὰς δὲ τῶν κατὰ 
μέρος διαφορὰς ἀπὸ τῶν ἐν ταῖς γενέσεσιν εὑρι- 
σκομένων ἰδιωμάτων. 

Μέχρι μὲν γὰρ τῶν πρώτων σχεδόν που τεττάρων 
ἐτῶν κατὰ τὸν οἰκεῖον ἀριθμὸν τῆς τετραετηρίδος 
τὴν τοῦ βρέφους ἡλικίαν ἡ σελήνη λαχοῦσα! τήν τε 
ὑγρότητα καὶ ἀπηξίαν τοῦ σώματος καὶ τὸ τῆς 
αὐξήσεως ὀξὺ καὶ τὸ τῶν τροφῶν ὡς ἐπὶ πᾶν 
€ ~ \ \ ~ eo ᾽ / \ A ~ 
ὑδατῶδες καὶ TO τῆς ἕξεως εὐμετάβολον Kal τὸ τῆς 

~ > re \ Ἰὃ / 0 2 > Ἂς “- 
205 ψυχῆς ἄτελες και ἀδιαρῦρωτον “ ἀπειργάσατο τοῖς 
περὶ τὸ ποιητικὸν αὐτῆς συμβεβηκόσιν οἰκείως. 

°E: A δὲ \ tea Ὁ A \ ὅλ , 

πὶ δὲ τὴν ἑξῆς δεκαετίαν τὴν παιδικὴν ἡλικίαν 
δεύτερος καὶ δευτέραν λαχὼν 6 τοῦ ᾿ Ἑρμοῦ ἀστὴρ 3 
τοῦ καθ᾽ ἥμισυ μέρους ὁ τοῦ τῆς εἰκοσαετηρίδος 
ἀριθμοῦ τό τε διανοητικὸν καὶ λογικὸν τῆς ψυχῆς 
ἄρχεται διαρθροῦν καὶ διαπλάττειν, καὶ μαθημάτων 
ἐντιθέναι σπέρματά τινα καὶ στοιχεῖα, τῶν τε ἠθῶν 
καὶ τῶν ἐπιτηδειοτήτων ἐμφαίνειν τὰς ἰδιοτροπίας, 
διδασκαλίαις ἤδη καὶ παιδαγωγίαις καὶ τοῖς πρώτοις 
γυμνασίοις ” ἐγείρων τὰς ψυχάς 

« \ ~ 3 / \ 7 \ , 

O δὲ τῆς ᾿Αφροδίτης τὴν μειρακιώδη καὶ τρίτην 
5A / λ A BAZAN A Cea > , 8 A 
ἡλικίαν παραλαβὼν ἐπὶ τὴν ἑξῆς ὀκταετίαν ὃ κατὰ 
τὸν ἴσον ἀριθμὸν τῆς ἰδίας περιόδου κίνησιν εἰκότως 


1 λαχοῦσα VPLAD, λαβοῦσα E, παραλαβοῦσα MCam. 
3 ἀδιάρθρωτον PLA, ἀρθρωτὸν VD, ἀδιόρθωτον MECam. 
“ἀστὴρ libri, om. Cam.; post hoe verbum add. τοῦ VD, 
τὸ ΔῈ, τὴν PLMCam. 
4 μέρους VPLD, μέρος cett. Cam. 
" ἐπιτηδειοτήτων VADProc., -τάτων L, ἐπιτηδι. .. (2) Ῥ, 
ἐπιτηδευμάτων MECam. 
8 ἐμφαίνειν PLMAR, -e VD, ἐκφαίνειν Cam., ἐμφανίζει Proc. 


442 


TETRABIBLOS IV. 10 


general questions of the temporal divisions, while 
we determine particular differences from the special 
qualities which are discovered in the nativities. 

For up to about the fourth year, following the 
number which belongs to the quadrennium,! the 
moon takes over the age of infancy and produces the 
suppleness and lack of fixity in its body, its quick 
growth and the moist nature, as a rule, of its food, 
the changeability of its condition, and the imper- 
fection and inarticulate state of its soul, suitably to 
her own active qualities. 

In the following period of ten years, Mercury, to 
whom falls the second place and the second age, 
that of childhood, for the period which is half of the 
space of twenty years,” begins to articulate and 
fashion the intelligent and logical part of the soul, 
to implant certain seeds and rudiments of learning, 
and to bring to light individual peculiarities of char- 
acter and faculties, awaking the soul at this stage 
by instruction, tutelage, and the first gymnastic 
exercises. 

Venus, taking in charge the third age, that of 
youth, for the next eight years, corresponding in 
number to her own period, begins, as is natural, to 


1The Anonymous says that four years is assigned to the 
moon because after a period of that length its phases again 
occur in the same degrees. 

2 Only half the period is assigned to Mercury because 
of the latter’s double nature, according to the Anonymous. 





Trois πρώτοις γυμνασίοις PProc., τ. 7. yeveaios L, τῆς πρώτης 
γυμνασίοις VD, ταῖς πρώταις γυμνασίαις MABKCam. 
ὃ ὀκταετίαν VPADIEProc., ὀκτωετίαν MCam., ὀκταετησίας Τ,. 


443 


PTOLEMY 


- ~ A \ 
TOV σπερματικῶν πόρων ἐμποιεῖν ἄρχεται κατὰ τὴν 
~ ~ / 
πλήρωσιν αὐτῶν καὶ ὁρμὴν ἐπὶ τὴν τῶν ἀφροδισίων 
συνέλευσιν, ὅτε μάλιστα λύσσα τις ἐγγίνεται ταῖς 
ψυχαῖς 5 καὶ ἀκρασία καὶ πρὸς τὰ τυχόντα τῶν 
> / ” \ \ \ > / \ ~ 
ἀφροδισίων ἔρως καὶ φλεγμονὴ Kal ἀπάτη καὶ τοῦ 
~ 3 > r / 
προπετοῦς ἃ ἀβλεψία. 
\ A 4 ‘ / / ε , A 
Τὴν δὲ τετάρτην καὶ τάξει μέσην ἡλικίαν τὴν 
\ λ \ ¢ ~ / / 7 4 ¢ 
νεανικὴν λαβὼν ὁ τῆς μέσης σφαίρας κύριος ὁ 
ὅλ 5 » \ i) ~ > ὃ (ὃ Μ A 
ἥλιος ὃ ἐπὶ τὰ τῆς ἐννεακαιδεκαετηρίδος ἔτη TO 
δεσποτικὸν ἤδη καὶ αὐθεντικὸν τῶν πράξεων 
5» - lad ~ / \ / \ / 
ἐμποιεῖ TH ψυχῇ, βίου τε καὶ δόξης καὶ καταστάσεως 
206 ἐπιθυμίαν καὶ μετάβασιν ἀπὸ τῶν παιγνιωδῶν καὶ 
ἀνεπιπλάστων ὃ ἁμαρτημάτων ἐπὶ τὸ προσεκτικὸν 
᾿ > \ \ / 
Kal αἰδημονικὸν Kal φιλότιμον. 
A \ A σ ς “4Ὄ,ἯΙΝ ,ὔ > 
Mera δὲ τὸν ἥλιον 6 τοῦ “Apews πέμπτος, ἐπι- 
\ A ~ « / > ~ 2 \ \ ww aA 
λαβὼν τὸ τῆς ἡλικίας ἀνδρῶδες ἐπὶ τὰ ἴσα τῆς 
ἰδίας περιόδου πεντεκαίδεκα ἔτη, τὸ αὐστηρὸν καὶ 
κακόπαθον εἰσάγει τοῦ βίου, μερίμνας τε καὶ 
σκυλμοὺς ἐμποιεῖ τῇ ψυχῇ καὶ τῷ σώματι, καθάπερ 
Μ ,ὔ »Μ \ Μ Ψ A ~ 
αἴσθησίν τινα ἤδη Kal ἔννοιαν ἐνδιδοὺς τῆς παρ- 
ακμῆς καὶ ἐπιστρέφων πρὸς τὸ πρὶν ἐγγὺς ἐλθεῖν 
1 κατὰ VPLAD, καὶ MECam. 
3 ἐγγίνεται ταῖς ψυχαῖς VPLAD, γίεται MECam. 
3 προπετοῦς VP (πρω-) LAD; cf. τὸ προπετές Proc.; πρέ- 
ποντος ME ; βλέποντος Cam. 
4 κύριος om. Cam. 5 ὁ ἥλιος PL, 6 om. cett. Cam. 


ὃ ἀνεπιπλάστων VPLAD, ἀνεπιστήτων πλάστων ME, ἀκατα- 
στήτων καὶ πλαστῶν Cam. 


444 


TETRABIBLOS IV. 10 


inspire, at their maturity, an activity of the seminal 
passages and to implant an impulse toward the 
embrace of love. At this time particularly a kind of 
frenzy enters the soul, incontinence, desire for any 
chance sexual gratification, burning passion, guile, 
and the blindness of the impetuous lover. 

The lord of the middle sphere, the sun, takes over 
the fourth age, which is the middle one in order, 
young manhood, for the period of nineteen years, 
wherein he implants in the soul at length the 
mastery and direction of its actions, desire for sub- 
stance, glory, and position, and a change from play- 
ful, ingenuous error to seriousness, decorum, and 
ambition. 

After the sun, Mars, fifth in order, assumes com- 
mand of manhood for the space of fifteen years, 
equal to his own period. He introduces severity 
and misery into life, and implants cares and troubles 
in the soul and in the body, giving it, as it were, some 
sense and notion of passing its prime and urging it, 
before it approaches its end, by labour to accomplish 


1 As Bouché-Leclereq (p. 409) remarks, why fifteen years 
should be given as the “ period”’ of Marsisa mystery. The 
synodic period of this planet is 780 days and its sidereal 
period 687 days. In the next paragraph twelve years, 
stated to be the period of Jupiter, is not far from the actual 
sidereal period of this planet (11.86 years) and is the 
measurement ordinarily given by ancient astronomers. 
For this astrological, not astronomical, statement about 
Mars cf. P. Mich. 149, col. v, 18 ff., which speaks of the 
*‘period of Mars, who returns to his original position in 
fifteen years”’ (ἐν τῷ “Apews κύκλῳ, ὃς ἐν ἔτεσιν ιε΄ THY ἀποκατά- 
στασιν ἔχει). Inthe Michigan astrological treatise, however, 
the length of the period of Mars is associated with the age 
of boys at puberty rather than with the length of a division 
of the life of man, as in the Tetrabiblos. 

445 


PTOLEMY 


~ cA > 4 / » 4 / ~ 
τοῦ τέλους ἀνύσαι τι λόγου ἀξιον μετὰ πόνου τῶν 
μεταχειριζομένων. 
a > ς ΄ A A \ « / 
Εκτος δ᾽ 6 τοῦ Διὸς τὴν πρεσβυτικὴν ἡλικίαν 
‘\ > ‘ A ~ "οὔ / / 
λαχὼν ἐπὶ τὴν τῆς ἰδίας περιόδου πάλιν δωδε- 
καετίαν τὸ μὲν αὐτουργὸν καὶ ἐπίπονον καὶ ταρα- 
χῶδες καὶ παρακεκινδυνευμένον τῶν πράξεων ἀπο- 
στρέφεσθαι ποιεῖ, τὸ δὲ εὔσχημον καὶ προνοητικὸν 
καὶ ἀνακεχωρηκός, ἔτι δὲ ἐπιλογιστικὸν πάντων 
καὶ νουθετικὸν καὶ παραμυθητικὸν ἀντεισάγει, τιμῆς 
τότε μάλιστα καὶ ἐπαίνου καὶ ἐλευθεριότητος ἀντι- 
ποιεῖσθαι παρασκευάζων μετ᾽ αἰδοῦς Kal σεμνο- 
mpetretas. 
- A ς ~ / A » Ἅ ‘\ 
TeAevtaios δὲ 6 τοῦ Κρόνου τὴν ἐσχάτην Kal 
> an 
γεροντικὴν ἡλικίαν ἐκληρώθη μέχρι τῶν ἐπιλοίπων 
τῆς ζωῆς χρόνων, καταψυχομένων ἤδη καὶ ἐμπο- 
207 διζομένων τῶν τε σωματικῶν καὶ τῶν ψυχικῶν 
κινήσεων ἐν ταῖς ὁρμαῖς καὶ ἀπολαύσεσι καὶ ἐπι- 
- » A ~ 
θυμίαις Kal ταχείαις, τῆς ἐπὶ τὴν φύσιν 5 παρακμῆς 
ἐπιγινομένης τῷ βίῳ κατεσκληκότι καὶ ἀθύμῳ καὶ 
ἀσθενικῷ καὶ εὐπροσκόπῳ καὶ πρὸς πάντα ὃ δυσα- 
- ~~ ~ / 
ρέστῳ κατὰ τὸ οἰκεῖον τῆς τῶν κινήσεων νωχε- 
λείας. 
« A Ss A ‘ A A > a ~ 
Ai μὲν οὖν κατὰ τὸ κοινὸν καὶ καθ᾽ ὅλου τῆς 
~ > 
φύσεως θεωρούμεναι. τῶν χρόνων ἰδιοτροπίαι 
τοῦτον τὸν τρόπον προὐποτετυπώσθωσαν. τῶν 
δὲ ἐπὶ μέρους κατὰ τὸ τῶν γενέσεων ἴδιον 


1 σεμνοπρεπείας VPADHE, -τρεπείας 1,, -τροπίας MCam. 

3τῆς ἐπὶ τὴν φύσιν VD, ταῖς ἐ. τ. φ. PL, τῇ φύσει MAECam. 
8 πάντα VD, ἅπαντα PL, πάντας MAECam.; om. Proce. 

4 καὶ post δυσαρέστῳ add. MECam. 


446 


TETRABIBLOS IV. 10 


something among its undertakings that is worthy of 
note. 

Sixth, Jupiter, taking as his lot the elderly age, 
again for the space of his own period, twelve years, 
brings about the renunciation of manual labour, 
toil, turmoil, and dangerous activity, and in their 
place brings decorum, foresight, retirement, together 
with all-embracing deliberation, admonition, and con- 
solation; now especially he brings men to set store 
by honour, praise, and independence, accompanied 
by modesty and dignity. 

Finally to Saturn falls as his lot old age, the latest 
period, which lasts for the rest of life. Now the 
movements both of body and of soul are cooled 
and impeded in their impulses, enjoyments, desires, 
and speed ; for the natural decline supervenes upon 
life, which has become worn down with age, dispirited, 
weak, easily offended, and hard to please in all 
situations, in keeping with the sluggishness of his 
movements. 

The foregoing, then, may be taken as a preliminary 
description of the characteristics of the ages of life, 
viewed generally and in accordance with the ordinary 
course of nature. But as for particulars,! which are 


! Bouché-Leclercq, pp. 502 ff., discusses the following 
sections of this chapter, which present Ptolemy’s treat- 
ment of the subject of xarapyai, ‘‘ initiatives ’’—the pre- 
diction of the success or failure of individual enterprises— 
insofar as he recognizes the theme. The general method 
is the same as that of iii. 10, but five places are taken 
simultaneously as prorogatives, and the planets that in- 
fluence by their occourse (ὑπάντησις), which may be either 
bodily or by aspect, need not be merely the destructive 
ones, as in the prorogation discussed in iii. 10, but also 
the beneficent stars. 

447 


PTOLEMY 


ὀφειλουσῶν λαμβάνεσθαι, Tas μὲν κατὰ TO προῦπο- 
τιθέμενον πάλιν καὶ ὁλοσχερέστερον ἀπὸ τῶν 
κυριωτάτων πάλιν ἀφέσεων ποιησόμεθα, πασῶν 
μέντοι καὶ οὐκ ἀπὸ μιᾶς, ὥσπερ ἐπὶ τῶν τῆς ζωῆς 
χρόνων, ἀλλὰ τὴν μὲν ἀπὸ τοῦ ὡροσκόπου πρὸς τὰ 
σωματικὰ τῶν συμπτωμάτων καὶ τὰς ἕξενιτείας, 
τὴν δὲ ἀπὸ τοῦ κλήρου τῆς τύχης πρὸς τὰ τῆς 
κτήσεως, τὴν δὲ ἀπὸ τῆς σελήνης πρὸς τὰ τῆς 
ψυχῆς πάθη καὶ τὰς συμβιώσεις, τὴν δὲ ἀπὸ τοῦ 
ἡλίου πρὸς Ta) κατ᾽ ἀξίαν καὶ δόξαν, τὴν δ᾽ ἀπὸ 
τοῦ μεσουρανήματος πρὸς τὰς λοιπὰς καὶ κατὰ 
μέρος τοῦ βίου διαγωγάς, οἷον πράξεις, φιλίας, 
τεκνοποιΐας. οὕτω yap” ἐν τοῖς αὐτοῖς καιροῖς 
οὐχ εἷς ἔσται ἤτοι ἀγαθοποιὸς ἢ κακοποιὸς 3 
κύριος αὐτῶν, πολλῶν ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πολὺ συμβαινόν- 
των ὑπὸ τοὺς αὐτοῦς χρόνους ἐναντίων συμ- 
πτωμάτων, ὡς ὅταν τις ἀποβαλὼν πρόσωπον οἰκεῖον 
208 λάβῃ κληρονομίαν, ἢ νόσῳ κατακλιθῇ κατὰ τὸ αὐτὸ 
καὶ τύχῃ τινὸς ἀξίας καὶ προκοπῆς, ἢ ἐν ἀπραγίᾳ 
τυγχάνων τέκνων γένηται πατήρ, καὶ ὅσα τοιαῦτα 
συμβαίνειν εἴωθεν. οὐ γὰρ τὸ αὐτὸ σώματος καὶ 
ψυχῆς καὶ κτήματος καὶ ἀξιώματος καὶ τῶν συμ- 
βιούντων, ἀγαθῶν ἢ κακῶν, ὡς ἐξ ἀνάγκης ἐν ἅπασι 
τούτοις εὐτυχεῖν τινα ἢ πάλιν ἀτυχεῖν, ἀλλὰ συμ- 
βαίνοι μὲν ἂν ἴσως καὶ τὸ τοιοῦτο ἐπὶ τῶν τέλεον 
εὐδαιμονιζομένων ἢ ταλανιζομένων καιρῶν, ὅταν ἐν 
πάσαις ἢ ταῖς πλείσταις ἀφέσεσι συνδράμωσιν at 
ὑπαντήσεις ἀγαθοποιῶν πάντων ἢ κακοποιῶν, 


1 πρὸς τὰ] in his verbis desinit V. 
3 av post yap add. MADECam., om. PLProc. 


448 


TETRABIBLOS IV. 10 


to be discovered from the peculiarities of the nativities, 
some of them again we shall base upon the general 
considerations already set forth, that is, upon the 
prorogations of greatest authority, all of them, 
however, and not one, as in the case of the space of 
life. We shall apply the prorogation from the horo- 
scope to events relating to the body and to journeys 
abroad; that from the Lot of Fortune to matters of 
property ; that from the moon to affections of the 
soul and to marriage ; that from the sun to dignities 
and glory; that from the mid-heaven to the other 
details of the conduct of life, such as actions, friend- 
ships, and the begetting of children. For thus it will 
come about that one beneficent or maleficent star will 
not be the ruler of all of them on the same occasion, 
for usually many contradictory events take place at 
the same time. One may, for example, lose a relative 
and receive an inheritance, or at once be prostrated by 
illness and gain some dignity and promotion, or in the 
midst of misfortune become the father of children, 
or have other experiences of this sort which are apt 
tooccur. For it is not usual that alike in goodness or 
badness of body, soul, property, dignity, and com- 
panions, one must by very necessity be either for- 
tunate or, again, unfortunate in all these particulars. 
This, to be sure, might perhaps happen upon 
occasions that are completely blessed or completely 
unhappy, when the occourses of all the beneficent 
planets, or of all the maleficent planets, converge 
upon all or the majority of the prorogations. 
Rarely would this take place, however, because 


3) κακοποιὸς om. Cam, 


449 


PTOLEMY 


σπανίως δὲ διὰ τὸ τῆς ἀνθρωπίνης φύσεως ἀτελὲς 
μὲν πρὸς ἑκατέραν τῶν ἀκροτήτων,, εὐκατάφορον 
δὲ πρὸς τὴν ἐκ τῆς ἐναλλαγῆς τῶν ἀγαθῶν καὶ 
κακῶν συμμετρίαν. τοὺς μὲν οὖν ἀφετικοὺς 
τόπους κατὰ τὸν εἰρημένον τρόπον διακρινοῦμεν, 
τοὺς δὲ ἐν ταῖς ἀφέσεσιν ὑπαντῶντας οὐ μόνον 
πάλιν τοὺς ἀναιρέτας, ὥσπερ ἐπὶ τῶν τῆς ζωῆς 
χρόνων, ἀλλὰ πάντας ἁπλῶς παραληπτέον, καὶ 
ὁμοίως οὐ τοὺς σωματικῶς μόνον ἢ κατὰ διά- 
μετρον ἢ τετράγωνον στάσιν συναντῶντας ἀλλὰ 
καὶ τοὺς κατὰ τρίγωνον καὶ ἑξάγωνον σχηματισμόν. 
Καὶ πρῶτον μὲν δοτέον τοὺς χρόνους καθ᾽ 
ἑκάστην ἄφεσιν τῷ κατ᾽ αὐτῆς τῆς ἀφετικῆς 
μοίρας ,Τυχόντι ἢ συσχηματισθέντι, ἐὰν δὲ μὴ 
209 οὕτως ἔχῃ, τῷ τὴν ἔγγιστα προήγησιν ἐπιλαβόντι 
μέχρι τοῦ τὴν ἑξῆς εἰς τὰ ἑπόμενα μοῖραν ἐπι- 
θεωρήσαντος, εἶτα τούτῳ μέχρι τοῦ ἑξῆς καὶ ἐπὶ 
τῶν ἄλλων ὁμοίως, παραλαμβανομένων εἰς οἰκο- 
δεσποτίαν καὶ τῶν τὰ ὅρια ἐπεχόντων ἀστέρων. 
δοτέον δὲ πάλιν ταῖς τῶν διαστάσεων μοίραις ἔτη" 
κατὰ μὲν τὴν ἀπὸ τοῦ ὡροσκόπου ἄφεσιν ἰσάριθμα 
τοῖς τοῦ οἰκείου κλίματος χρόνοις ἀναφορικοῖς, 
κατὰ δὲ τὴν ἀπὸ τοῦ μεσουρανήματος ἰσάριθμα 
τοῖς χρόνοις τῶν μεσουρανήσεων, κατὰ δὲ τὰς ἀπὸ 
τῶν λοιπῶν ἀνάλογον ἢ κατὰ τὸν 5 πρὸς τὰ κέντρα 
συνεγγισμὸν 8 τῶν ἀναφορῶν ἢ καταφορῶν ἢ συμ- 
1 ἀκροτήτων PL (-xpi-) ADE ; ef. ἀκρότητα Proc. ; ἀκρωτάτων 
MCam.?, ἀκροτάτων Cam.} 
27 κατὰ Tov PL, cf. Proc., om. MADECam. 


3 συνεγγισμὸν] cf. κατὰ τὴν ἐγγύτητα Proc. ; συνεγγισμῶν P, 
συνεγγὺς L, συνεγγισμῷ MADECam. 


450 


TETRABIBLOS IY. 10 


human nature is imperfectly adapted to either one 
of the extremes, but is inclined toward the balance 
of good and evil arising from their alternation. 
We shall, then, make distinctions among the pro- 
rogatory places in the manner described, and as for 
the stars whose occourses take place in the pro- 
rogations, we must take into account not only the 
destructive ones, as in the case of the length of life, 
but absolutely all of them, and similarly not those 
alone that meet the prorogation only bodily, or by 
opposition, or in quartile,! but also those that are in 
the trine and sextile aspects. 

In the first place, we must give the rulership of the 
times in each prorogation to the star that is actually 
upon the prorogatory degree or in aspect to it, or, if 
this condition does not exist, to the one that most 
nearly precedes, until we come to another which is 
in aspect with the next following degree in the order 
of the signs; then to this as far as the next fol- 
lowing, and so on; and the planets which govern 
the terms are to be given a part of the rulership. 
And again we must assign years to the degrees of 
the intervals : in the prorogation from the horoscope 
a number equal to the times of ascension in the 
latitude concerned; in the prorogation from mid- 
heaven, as many as the times of the culminations ; 
and in the prorogations from all the others, in pro- 
portion to or in accordance with the nearness of the 


1That is, not only in the harmful aspects but also in 
the favourable ones. 


451 


PTOLEMY 


, ~ “- “- 
μεσουρανήσεων, καθάπερ καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν τῆς ζωῆς 
χρόνων διωρισάμεθα. 

\ \ as \ / / 
Τοὺς μὲν οὖν καθολικοὺς χρονοκράτορας ληψό- 
μεθα τὸν εἰρημένον τρόπον, τοὺς δ᾽ ἐνιαυσιαίους 
ἐκβάλλοντες τὸ πλῆθος τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς γενέσεως 
ἐτῶν ἀφ᾽ ἑκάστου τῶν ἀφετικῶν τόπων εἰς τὰ 
ἑπόμενα κατὰ ζῴδιον,2 καὶ τοῦ συντελειουμένου 
ζῳδίου τὸν οἰκοδεσπότην συμπαραλαμβάνοντες. 
> A ~ ~ 
τὸ δ᾽ αὐτὸ Kal ἐπὶ τῶν μηνῶν ποιήσομεν, 
ΕῚ LAA 3 tA δ , ‘ 4 > A ~ 
éxBdAdovtes® πάλιν καὶ τούτων τὸ" ἀπὸ τοῦ 
γενεθλιακοῦ μηνὸς πλῆθος ἀπὸ τῶν τὴν κυρίαν 
τοῦ ἔτους λαβόντων τόπων, κατὰ ζῴδιον μέντοι 

’ / ~ ~ 

ἡμέρας κη΄. ὁμοίως δὲ Kal ἐπὶ τῶν ἡμερῶν τὰς 
‘ lol a ~ 
yap ἀπὸ τῆς γενεθλιακῆς ἡμέρας ἐκβαλοῦμεν ἀπὸ 
a , i \ ὃ Qe ἜΧΕ 
210 τῶν μηνιαίων τόπων, κατὰ ζῴδιον ἡμέερας β γ. 
ΠΙροσεκτέον δὲ καὶ ταῖς ἐπεμβάσεσι πρὸς τοὺς 
τῶν χρόνων ὃ τόπους γινομέναις, ὡς οὐ τὰ τυχόντα 
καὶ αὐταῖς συμβαλλομέναις πρὸς τὰ τῶν καιρῶν 
1 ἐκβάλλοντες] cf. ἐκβαλοῦμεν Proc. ; ἐκβαλλόντων 1,, ἐμβάλ- 
λοντες PMADECam. 
2 ἕν post ζῴδιον add. MADECam., om. PLProc. 
3 ἐκβάλλοντες] ἐκβαλόντες P; cf. ἐκβαλοῦμεν Proc. ; ἐμβάλ- 
λοντες cett. Cam. 
476 ego; of. τὸν ἀριθμὸν τὸν... εὑρισκόμενον Proc. ; τὰ 
MADECam. ; om. PL. 
"β y’ ME; cf. ἡμέρας δύο καὶ τρεῖς Proc.; β΄ καὶ ἥμισυ AD; 
B’ ἥμισυ Cam. 


τῶν χρόνων PEProc., χρόνων L, καθολικοὺς μάλιστα 
MADCam. 





1 Literally, ‘“‘ masters of the times.’’ The Anonymous 
(p. 173, Wolf) says that there are three “ general chrono- 
crators ”’ (7.e. in each of the five general prorogations), the 


452 


TETRABIBLOS IV. 10 


risings, or settings, or culminations, to the angles, as 
we explained in the discussion of the length of life. 

We shall discover the general chronocrators,! then, 
in the manner described, and the annual chrono- 
crators by setting out from each of the prorogatory 
places, in the order of the signs, the number of years 
from birth, one year to each sign,” and taking the 
ruler of the last sign. We shall do the same thing 
for the months, setting out, again, the number of 
months from the month of birth, starting from the 
places that govern the year, twenty-eight days to 
a sign; and similarly for the days, we shall set out 
the number of the days from the day of birth, 
starting with the places which govern the months, 
two and a third days to a sign.® 

We must also pay attention to the ingresses 4 
which are made to the places of the times, for they 
play no small part in the prediction of the times of 


ἀφέτης (prorogator), ὑπαντήτωρ (“the one which comes to 
meet’’ the prorogator), and ὁριοκράτωρ (“ὁ master of the 
term ᾽᾽). 

* This is evidently the meaning of the text and it is so 
taken by the Anonymous, Proclus’ Paraphrase, Gogava, 
and Cardanus, yet Bouché-Leclereq (p. 504) and Melanch- 
thon’s translation would count one year to each degree. 

3 There is dispute over the readings in this passage ; the 
text reports what is best attested by the MSS. Bouché- 
Leclereq (p. 505, n. 1) would assign 30 days to a sign in 
laying out the number of months (so too Cardanus, but 
without any manuscript support), and 24 days to a sign 
in the calculation of days (this reading is found in two 
MSS.). If “ 28 days” is correct, it represents roughly the 
length of the lunar month. 

4 ἐπέμβασις, “‘ ingress,’ is the time taken by a planet 
to pass through one sign of the zodiac ; ο΄. Bouché-Leclercq, 
p. 506; Cardanus, p. 364. 


453 


PTOLEMY 


ἀποτελέσματα, Kal μάλιστα ταῖς μὲν τοῦ Κρόνου 
πρὸς τοὺς καθολικοὺς τῶν χρόνων τόπους, ταῖς δὲ 
τοῦ Διὸς πρὸς τοὺς τῶν ἐνιαυσιαίων, ταῖς δὲ τοῦ 
ἡλίου καὶ "Apews καὶ ‘Adpoditns καὶ “Ἑρμοῦ πρὸς 
τοὺς τῶν μηνιαίων, ταῖς δὲ τῆς σελήνης παρόδοις 
πρὸς τοὺς τῶν ἡμερησίων, καὶ ὡς τῶν μὲν καθο- 
λικῶν χρονοκρατόρων κυριωτέρων ὄντων πρὸς τὴν 
τοῦ ἀποτελέσματος τελείωσιν, τῶν δ᾽ ἐπὶ μέρους 
συνεργούντων ἢ ἀποσυνεργούντων κατὰ τὸ οἰκεῖον 
ἢ ἀνοικεῖον τῶν φύσεων, τῶν δ᾽ ἐπεμβάσεων τὰς 
ἐπιτάσεις καὶ τὰς ἀνέσεις τῶν συμπτωμάτων 
ἀπεργαζομένων. τὸ μὲν γὰρ καθ᾽ ὅλου τῆς 
ποιότητος ἴδιον καὶ τὴν τοῦ χρόνου παράτασιν 
ὅ τε τῆς ἀφέσεως τόπος καὶ 6 τῶν καθολικῶν 
χρόνων κύριος μετὰ τοῦ τῶν ὁρίων διασημαΐίνει, 
διὰ τὸ συνοικειοῦσθαι τῶν ἀστέρων ἕκαστον ἐπ᾽ 
αὐτῆς τῆς γενέσεως τοῖς τόποις dv! ἀπ᾽ ἀρχῆς 
ἔτυχον λαβόντες τὴν οἰκοδεσποτίαν. 

Τὸ δὲ πότερον ἀγαθὸν ἢ τοὐναντίον ἔσται τὸ 
σύμπτωμα καταλαμβάνεται διὰ τῆς τῶν χρονο- 
κρατόρων φυσικῆς τε καὶ συγκρατικῆς ἰδιοτροπίας, 

211 εὐποιητικῆς ἢ κακωτικῆς, καὶ τῆς ἀπ᾽ ἀρχῆς πρὸς 
τὸν ἐπικρατούμενον τόπον συνοικειώσεως ἢ ἀντι- 
παθείας. τὸ δ᾽ ἐν ποίοις χρόνοις μᾶλλον ἐπι- 
σημανθήσεται τὸ ἀποτέλεσμα δείκνυται διὰ τῶν 
ἐνιαυσιαίων καὶ μηνιαίων ζῳδίων πρὸς τοὺς αἰτια- 
τικοὺς τόπους συσχηματισμῶν καὶ τῶν κατὰ τὰς 
ἐπεμβάσεις τῶν ἀστέρων καὶ τὰς φάσεις ἡλίου καὶ 
σελήνης πρὸς τὰ ἐνιαύσια καὶ μηνιαῖα τῶν ζῳδίων. 
οἱ μὲν γὰρ συμφώνως ἔχοντες πρὸς τοὺς διατιθε- 


454 


TETRABIBLOS IV. 10 


events ; particularly to the ingresses of Saturn to the 
general places of the times, and to those of Jupiter to 
the places of the years; to those of the sun, Mars, 
Venus, and Mercury to those of the months, and to the 
transits of the moon to those of the days. The reason 
for this is that the general chronocrators have greater 
authority to realize the prediction, while the partial 
chronocrators assist or deter, in accordance with the 
familiarity or unfamiliarity of their natures, and the 
ingresses influence the degree of increase or diminu- 
tion in the event. For in general the special quality 
and the length of time are signified by the prorogatory 
place and the lord of the general times together with 
the lord of the terms, because each one of the planets 
at the very time of the nativity is made familiar with 
the places which they happened at first to govern. 

Whether the event will be good or bad is discovered 
from the natural and composite properties of the 
chronocrators, whether they are beneficent or male- 
ficent, and from their original familiarity with or 
antipathy to the places which they possess. At 
what time the predicted event will be evidenced is 
shown by the aspects of the annual and monthly 
signs to the places which furnish the causes, and by 
the aspects of the signs into which the planets are 
making ingress and in which the phases of the sun 
and moon occur to the annual and monthly signs. 
For those whose relation to the affected places under 





1 ἂν post ὧν add. MADECam. ; om. PLProce. 
455 


PTOLEMY 


/ > A ~ > ~ “Ἢ Ά 
μένους τόπους ἀπὸ τῆς ἐν τῇ γενέσει καταρχῆς καὶ 
Ἁ A >? / - 
κατὰ τὰς ἐπεμβάσεις συμφώνως αὐτοῖς συσχη- 
/ > ~ 
ματισθέντες ἀγαθῶν εἰσι περὶ τὸ ὑποκείμενον 
Ss > ΄ > ~ 
εἶδος ἀπεργαστικοί, καθάπερ ἐὰν ἐναντιωθῶσι 
4 «ς \ > A \ > “ 
φαύλων. ot δὲ ἀσυμφώνως καὶ παρ᾽ αἵρεσιν 
\ 4, / - 
διαμηκίσαντες μὲν ἢ τετραγωνίσαντες ταῖς παρ- 
,ὔ ~ > ” Ἁ A \ a” 
ὄδοις κακῶν εἰσιν αἴτιοι͵ κατὰ δὲ τοὺς ἄλλους 
σχηματισμοὺς οὐκέτι. 
« ~ ~ 
Kav μὲν ot αὐτοὶ καὶ τῶν χρόνων Kal τῶν 
>? / 4 > / « , 
ἐπεμβάσεων κυριεύσωσιν ἀστέρες, ὑπερβάλλουσα 
¢ ΄σ > = 
καὶ ἄκρατος γίνεται ἡ τοῦ ἀποτελέσματος φύσις, 
77 >? \ \ > θὸ 27 AY \ BA cs 2 
ἐάν τε ἐπὶ TO ἀγαθὸν ἐάν τε ἐπὶ TO φαῦλον ῥέπῃ" 
\ Av λέ 3 oA’ \ / 4 ὃ \ A 
καὶ πολὺ πλέον ὃ ἐὰν μὴ povov* διὰ τὸ xpovo- 
> “ a 
Kpdtopas εἶναι κυριεύσωσι τοῦ τῆς αἰτίας εἴδους, 
3 \ \ \ ‘ > > \ \ > \ “ 4 
ἀλλὰ καὶ διὰ τὸ κατ᾽ αὐτὴν τὴν ἀρχὴν τῆς γενέσεως 
τὴν οἰκοδεσποτίαν αὐτοῦ τετυχηκέναι. κατὰ πάντα 
3 5¢ ~ ~ Ἃ 3 ~ Ld ” ,ὔ 
212 δ᾽ ὁμοῦ δυστυχοῦσιν ἢ εὐτυχοῦσιν, ὅταν ἤτοι τόπος 
~ \ ~ 
eis καὶ 6 αὐτὸς ὑπὸ πασῶν ἢ τῶν πλείστων 
n“ , 
ἀφέσεων τύχῃ καταληφθείς, ἢ τούτων διαφόρων 
~ « 7 “Ἃ \ ‘ 
οὐσῶν οἱ αὐτοὶ χρόνοι πάσας ἢ Tas πλείστας 
3 \ δ] 
ὑπαντήσεις ὁμοίως ἀγαθοποιοὺς ἢ κακοποιοὺς 
¢ \ 2 > 4 ~ ~ 
τύχωσιν ἐσχηκότες. ὁ μὲν οὖν τύπος " τῆς τῶν 
~ “ n ’ 
καιρῶν ἐπισκέψεως τοιοῦτός ® τις av γίγνοιτο, 


᾿ εἰσι PLAD, εἰς τὸ MECam. 

2 ῥέπῃ MEACam.!, -εἰ D, om. PLCam.’ 

3 καὶ πολ(λ)ὺ πλέον PL, πολὺ δὲ πλέον MAD, ὡς én πολὺ δὲ 
πλέον HCam. 

4 ἐὰν μὴ μόνον PL, εἰ μὲν οὐ μόνον Cam.*, om. MADECam.! 


450 


TETRABIBLOS IV. 10 


consideration is harmonious from the beginning made 
in the nativity, and which in their ingresses are in 
favourable aspect to them, exert a good effect upon 
the species of the matter concerned, even as they 
cause evil if they oppose. And those which are in- 
harmoniously related and of opposite sect cause evil 
if they are in opposition or in quartile to the transits, 
but not in the other aspects. 

And if the same planets are lords of both the times 
and the ingresses, the nature of the predicted event 
is made excessive and unalloyed, whether it incline 
to the good or to the bad; all the more so if they 
govern the species of the cause ' not only because they 
are chronocrators, but also because they ruled it 
originally in the nativity. The subjects are un- 
fortunate or fortunate in all respects at once, when- 
ever either all or most of the prorogations are found 
in one and the same place, or if these are different, 
whenever all or most of the occourses occurring at 
the same times are similarly fortunate or unfortunate. 
The character of the investigation of the times, then, 
is of this fashion,” 

1.1.6. determine the quality (good or bad) of the causation. 


2 The original ending of the treatise is in doubt; see the 
Introduction, pp. xviil-xx. 





ὃ τύπος libri, τόπος Cam. 


® χοιοῦτος PL, τοσοῦτος cett. Cam, 
BB 
457 


PTOLEMY 


Conclusion according to Parisinus 2425: 


κατὰ τὸν ἁρμόζοντα ταῖς φυσικαῖς ! χρηματείαις 5 


τύπον τὰς δὲ κατὰ μέρος ἐπιβολὰς τῆς ποιότητος 
τῶν χρονικῶν ἀποτελεσμάτων πολυχόως 8 καὶ 
δυσερμηνεύτως ἐχούσας ἐνθάδε μάλιστα «κατὰ» 4 
τὸ διεξοδικὸν τῶν ἀποβησομένων ὑπολειπτέον,5 
διὰ τὴν ἐξ ἀρχῆς ἡμῶν πρόθεσιν, τῇ τοῦ μαθη- 
ματικοῦ πρὸς τὸ συγκρατικὸν εἶδος εὐστοχίᾳ," τὸ 
τῆς καθ᾽ ὅλου φύσεως τῶν ἀστέρων ποιητικὸν ἔτι 
καὶ τοῖς ἐπὶ μέρους ὁμοίως κατὰ τὸ ἀκόλουθον 
ἐφαρμόζειν δυναμένου. διοδευομένου δὲ καὶ τοῦ 
γενεθλιαλογικοῦ τόπου κεφαλαιωδῶς «καλῶς» ἂν 
ἔχοι καὶ τῆδε τῇ πραγματείᾳ τὸ προσῆκον ἐπι- 
θεῖναι τέλος. 


Conclusion according to MADProc.Cam. : 
\ \ wy 8 ~ > / “ ΄, 
τὰ δὲ εἴδη ὃ τῶν ἀποτελεσμάτων τῶν συμβαινόντων 
κατὰ χρόνους συνάπτειν ἐνταῦθα κατὰ διέξοδον 
παραλείψομεν, δι᾿ ὃν ἔφην σκοπὸν ἐξ ἀρχῆς, ὅτι 
τῶν ἀστέρων ἡ ποιητικὴ δύναμις, ἣν ἔχουσιν ἐπὶ 
τοῖς καθ᾽ ὅλου, ὁμοίως καὶ ἐν τοῖς μερικοῖς κατὰ 
\ > / 2 , / 
τὸ ἀκόλουθον ἐφαρμόζεσθαι δύναται, συναπτο- 
“ > ~ ~ 
μένων εὐστόχως τῆς τε αἰτίας τοῦ μαθηματικοῦ 
A A > A , 
καὶ τῆς αἰτίας τῆς ἐκ τῆς συγκράσεως. 
1 φυσικαῖς] δυσικαῖς PL. 
2 χρηματείαις] χριμαντείαις P, χρωματίαις L. 


* πολυχόως] πολύχρουν P, πολύχροαν L; ef. πολύχουν τε ὄντα 
καὶ σχεδὸν ἄπειρον p. 107, 5 Cam.? 
“(κατὰ addidi; cf. infra κατὰ διέξοδον et ili. 1, p. 226, 
κατὰ τὴν διέξοδον. 
5 ὑπολυπτέον Ῥ, ὑποληπτέον L. 
6 εὐστοχίαν PL 1 ἂν ἔχοι] ἀνέχη P, ἀνέχει L. 


458 


TETRABIBLOS IV. 10 


Conclusion according to Parisinus 2425: 


by the style which agrees with the natural procedures.! 
At this point, however, the method of attacking, in 
particular cases, the problem of the quality of tem- 
poral predictions, with a complete account of the 
results, which is a complicated matter difficult of 
explanation, must, in accordance with our original 
programme, be left to the astrologer’s good judgement 
of the matter of temperaments, for thereby he is able 
correctly to accommodate to specific instances the 
effective force of the stars’ general nature. Now 
since the topic of nativities has been summarily re- 
viewed, it would be well to bring this procedure 
also to a fitting close. 


Conclusion according to MADProc.Cam. : 

We shall, however, omit adding at this point ? a de- 
tailed account of the kinds of predicted events that 
happen at the times, on account of the plan which 
I stated at the outset, namely that the effective 
power which the planets exercise in general situations 
can be made to apply similarly and consistently in 
particular cases also, if the cause furnished by the 
astrologer and the cause arising from the mixture 
are combined with due skill. 

1 Parallels to many of the words and expressions used in 
the conclusion which appears in PL can be found in iii. 1; 
see the Introduction, p. xx, n. 1. 

?This concluding paragraph, found in MAD among the 
MSS. studied, seems to have been borrowed bodily from 


the Paraphrase of Proclus. Camerarius used it in both his 
editions. 


87a δὲ εἴδη... ἐκ τῆς συγκράσεως scr. τὴ. altera Με 
ipsissima haee verba ap. Vat. gr. 1453 (Procli Paraphrasin 
continentem) leguntur. ® ὅτι] ὅτε Cam. 


BB 459 


te 


"" * 
LEER ITO. 


Te 


ts 


7 fe 
a 
᾿ 
wid 
᾽ δι 
“1 Ἰ 
"ἢ 
ergs 
Weare 


Σ 9} 


“oi! ΨΥ LG pe ‘ = 
iS. Pi Ol YUOT? } 
F re ao? 
SOI sot . ν 
" = | 
Fs 
4 
i ? 
τὶ ee 
‘ } * “ 
ἢ Ϊ ; i 
ϊ 
{ΠῚ 
ἢ 
ΐ ΐ 
{ 
j ) 
: 
ῃ ( ζ 
.} t 1 
᾿ 
Ι' aha tr 
’ Ι 
7 ι 
"y [ 
γιὸ. 


bart ΤῸ 







its 19 q Me 


ἔν Ὁ Σ 
ΕἼΓΕ "τ 


3 ‘ ‘ 
«ἢ. 
yo 


a As 


7 yey 


/ ~~ te 
se iadvbhlt 
ὙΠ τὰ 

se OR) 


τυ» 
σεν ἊΨ» 
yrenn gat 


5 
i 


INDEX TO PTOLEMY. 


Action, prediction of the quality 
of, 381 ff. 

Adonis, 147. 

Affliction, 267 n., 285, 431 n. 

Ages of man, 61, 2238, 437 ff. 

Allatius, Leo, xv. 

Almagest, vi ff., 3, 60 n., 95n., 
171 n., 292 n., 295 n., 297 ‘n., 
299 n. 

Amazons, 149. 

Ammon, 153. 

Anaeretic, see Destructive. 

Andromeda, 57, 435. 

Angles, 61,121; ofa nativity, 165, 
191 n., 207, 235. 

Anonymous Commentator on the 
Tetrabiblos, xiv, 105 n., 107 n., 


115 ns, 114 ne 125) τ. 170 ΤΠ 
178 n., 199 n., 245 n., 249 n., 
286 n., 333 n., 395 n., 396 n., 
403 n., 411 n., 427 n., 488 n., 


437 n., 443 n., 453 n. 

Antares, 51. 

Apeliotes, 63. 

Aphetic, see Prorogation, 

Apoclimata, 423 n., 437. 

Apparition, see Appearance, 

Appearance, 209, 211, 318, 381. 

Application, 113, 169, 209. 

Approach, 9. 

Aquarius, effect of, 53, 175, 205, 
325; solid, 67; house of 
Saturn, 81; N.E. triangle, 87. 

Aquila, 57, 173. 

Ara, 59. 

Arcturus, 55. 

Argo, 57, 175, 433. 

Aries, 47, 201, 815, 826, 891; 
starting point of zodiac, 61; 
equinoctial, 67; masculine, 69; 
diurnal, 69; house of Mars, 81; 
N.W. triangle, 83; exaltation 
of sun and depression of Saturn, 


Aristotle, vii, 4 n., 5 n., 34 n., 
161 n., 347 n. 

Ascensions, 75, 95, 233; use of, 
in prorogation, explained, 286 n. 

Ashmand, J. M., xiii, xv, 377 n. 

Aspects, 9, 72 f.; of the fixed 
stars, 171. 

Asses, 49, 217. 

Astrolabe, 229. 

Astrology distinguished from as- 
tronomy, 3 f.; possibility of, 
5 ff.; false practitioners of, 13; 
difficulty of, 15; value of, 21 ff.; 
universal vs. particular, 25 n., 
Πρ PA Ie 

Attendance, 241, 377 n. 

Auriga, 55. 


“ Beams,” 193. 

“* Beholding ”’ signs, 77. 

Bicorporeal signs, 67, 175, 
257, 335, 394 n., 409. 

Bodily conjunction, 114 n. 

Bodily form, prediction of, 307 ff. 

Body, parts of, governed by 
planets, 319. 

Boll, Franz, xii. 

Bodtes, 55. 

Boreas, 63. 

Brothers and sisters, predictions 
about, 251 ff. 


253, 


Camerarius, Joachim, xi et passim. 
Cancer, 49, 178, 203, 315, 323, 325, 
329, 365, 391, 409;  solstitial, 
67; house of moon, 79; S.W. 
triangle, 87; exaltation of 
rege and depression of Mars, 


Canis, 57. 
Capricorn, 53, 173, 205, 311, 328, 


325, 329, 391;  solstitial, 67; 
house of Saturn, 81; S.E. 
triangle, 85; exaltation of 


461 


INDEX 


Mars and depression of Jupiter, 
91. 

Cardanus, Hieronymus, xiii, xv, 
13 n., 40 n., 41 n., 129 n., 133 n., 
178 n., 206 n., 209 n., 259 n., 
261 n., 266 n., 422 n., 453 ἢ. 

Cassiopeia, 55. 

Castor and Pollux, 49. 

Centaurus, 57. 

Cepheus, 55, 435. 

Cetus, 57. 

Chaldaean system of terms, 91, 99; 
observations, 14 n. 

Chariots, 111. 

Children, predictions about, 409 ff. 

Children that are not reared, 
genitures of, 265 ff. 

Chronocrators or rulers Οἱ times, 
451 ff., 452 n. 

Cities, nativities of, 161. 

Clepsydra, 231. 

Climes, 231 n. 

Coma Berenices, 55, 321. 

Comets, 193, 217. 

Commanding and obeying signs, 
ΤΌΣ 

Conception vs. birth as the starting- 
point of life, 223 ff. 

Conjunctions, 207. 

Corona Australis, 59. 

Corona Septentrionalis, 55, 

Corvus, 57, 437 n. 

Cosmic position vs. position in a 
nativity, 239, 253. 

Countries, characteristics of the 
inhabitants of, 133 ff. 

Crater, 57. 

Culmination, 239; see Mid-heaven. 

Cygnus, 55. 


Day and night, 287 n. 

Day, prediction of weather for, 211. 

Death, sEredivtions of quality of, 
427 ff. 

Delphinus, 57, 173. 

Demeter and Koré, geniture of, 
259. 

Demons, affliction by, 365 f. 

Demophilus, xiv. 

Depressions and exaltations, 89. 

Destructive places and _ bodies, 
271, 2838 ff. 

Dignities, prediction of, 377 ff. 

Dioscuri, geniture of the, 259. 


462 


Diseases of the body, prediction 
of, 317 ff.; of the soul, pre- 
diction of, 363 ff. 

Disjunct signs, 77, 275, 317. 

Division of times, see Ages of man, 

Domination, 233, 238, 339 n. 

Draco, 55, 4383 n. 


Eclipses in predictions about 
countries and cities, 161 ff.; 
colours of, 191. 

Ecliptic, 47 n.; obliquity of, 209. 

Effluence or emanation, 7, 275. 

Egyptians, 197 ; combination of as- 
trology and medicine by, 31 ff. ; 
terms according to, 91 ff. 

Elevation, 417; see Overcoming. 

Epicycles, 115 n. 

Equal power, signs of, 77. 

Equinoctial signs, 67, 175, 427; 
times or periods, 287 n., 289 ἢ. 

Equinoxes, 197; as beginnings of 
signs, 109. 

Epilepsy, 365 f. 

Eridanus, 57. 

Ethiopians, 123. 

Ethnography, astrological, 121 ff, 

Exaltations and depressions, 89, 

Exchange, 396 n., 418, 415 n. 

Exhalations, 37, 275. 

Exposing of children, 264 n. 


“ Face ” (or “‘ proper face ”’), 111. 

Familiarity, 65 n. 

Fate, 23 f. 

Fathers, predictions about, 241 ff. 

Feminine, see Masculine. 

“ Following’? and ‘“ preceding,” 
105 n., 112,n.,.201 δ. 

Fortune, Lot of, 243, 255, 373 ff., 
411, 413, 417, 421, 423, 449; 
how determined, 275 f.; as 
prorogator, 275 ff. 

Fortune, material, 
about, 373 ff. 

Friends and enemies, predictions 
about, 413 ff. 


Gemini, 49, 203, 317, 829; bi- 
corporeal, 67 ; house of Mercury, 
83; N.E. triangle, 87. 

Genethlialogy, 119, 221; 
divisions of, 235 f. 

Geniculator, 55. 

Geniture, see Nativity, Horoscope. 


predictions 


sub- 


INDEX 


Gnomon, 231. 

Gogava, Antonius, xiii, 453 n. 

Good Daemon, house of, in pre- 
dictions about children, 409. 

Graces, geniture of the, 259. 


Halos, 193, 215, 217. 

Harpocratiacs, 263. 

Heliacal rising, see Rising. 

Hemispheres, summer and winter, 
77 


Hephaestion, 193 n., 217 n., 305 n. 

Hermaphrodites, 263. 

Horary magnitude or 
287 n., 292 n. 

Horoscope, 69, 163, 190 n., 253; 
determination of, 229 ff.; in 
prediction of sex, 255; in 
prediction of twins, 257; in 
genitures of monsters, 261 ff. ; 
defined, 273; as prorogator, 
275 ff., 449. 

Hourly prediction of weather, 211. 

Hours, ordinary or civil, 77, 165, 
287 n., 293 n.; equinoctial, 167. 

Houses or the planets, 79; of a 
nativity, 190 n., 272 n. 

Hyades, 47, 203, 403. 

Hydra, 57, 433 n. 


period, 


Iatromathematica, 31 ff. 

Inclination, 9 n. 

Increasing and diminishing motion 
of planets, 115 n., 239. 

Ingress, 427, 453 n. 

Initiatives, 447 n. 

Injuries of the body, prediction 
of, 317 ff. 

Insanity, 3665 f. 

1515, 139. 

Isosceles configuration, 267, 269. 


“4 Jars,”’ 193. 

Junctinus, Fr, xii, 423 n. 

Jupiter, 37, 183, 263, 309, 331, 
373, 375, 381, 383 ff., 395, 397; 
beneficent, 39; masculine, 41; 
diurnal, 43; houses of, 81; 
governs N.W. triangle, 83, 
parts of body, 319, elderly age, 
447; exaltation of, 89; as 
ruler of soul, 347 ff.; in pre- 
dictions about children, 409 ff., 
friendship, 419, travel, 425, 
death, 429. 


Kings, geniture of the, 259. 


Latitude, 207. 

“ Leading,”’ see Following. 

Leo, 49, 203, 315, 325, 391, 409; 
solid, 67; house of sun, 79; 
N.W. triangle, 83. 

Lepus, 57. 

Libra (or “‘ Claws ”’), 51, 205, 317, 
391; equinoctial, 67; mascu- 
line, 69; diurnal, 69; house of 
Venus, 81; N.E. triangle, 87; 
exaltation of Saturn and de- 
pression of sun, 89. 

Life, years of, assigned by planets, 
93; length of, predictions about, 
271 ff. 

Lucian (pseudo-), 12 n. 

Luminaries and planets, table of, 
xxv ; in predictions of sex, 255; 
in prediction of twins, 257; in 
genitures of monsters, 261 ff. 

Luminaries in predictions of 
dignities, 377 ff. ; in predictions 
about travel, 423 ff. 

Lupus, 59. 

Lyra, 55. 


Magnets, 27. 

Males and females, predictions 
about the birth of, 255 ff. 

Manger (Praesepe), 49, 203, 217. 

Marriage, predictions about, 393 ff. 

Mars, 37, 183, 311, 321 ff., 375, 381, 
395, 397, 399; maleficent, 39; 
masculine, 41; nocturnal, 43; 
houses of, 81; governs S.W. 
triangle, 87, parts of body, 319, 
manhood, 445; exaltation of, 
91; as ruler of soul, 353 ff.; 
in predictions about sexual 
passion and perversion, 369 ff., 
action, 383, 385 ff., love and 
marriage, 4050 ff., children, 
409 ff., friendship, 419, travel, 
425, death, 427, 435. 
Masculine and feminine planets, 
41, 176 n., 369 n.; signs, 69. 
Matutine stars, 40 n.; appear- 
ances, 211. 

Melanchthon, Philip, xi, xiii, 423 n. 

Melothesia, 319, 329 n. 

Mercury, 39, 187, 268, 311, 329, 
373, 375, 381, 895, 397, 399; 
common, 39, 41, 43; houses of, 


408 


INDEX 


83; governs N.E. triangle, 87 
parts of body, 321, childhood, 
443° exaltation of, 91; in 
prorogation, 281; ἰῇ predic- 
tions about qualities of mind, 
333 ff. diseases of the soul, 
363 ff., action, 383 ff., children, 
409 ff., friendship, 419, travel, 
425, death, 431; as ruler of 
the soul, 359 f. 
Meteors, 217 f. 

Michigan astrological papyrus, 
111 n., 319 n., 393 n., 445 ἢ. 
Mid-heaven, 165, 449; in pre- 
dictions about action, 237, 

about children, 409. 
Mithras, 139. 
Mixture, see Temperament. 
Monsters, birth of, 261 ff. 
Month, prediction of weather for, 


209. 
Moon, 7 ff., 35, 71, 361; feminine, 
41; nocturnal, 43: effect of 


phases of, 45; house of, 79; 
governs S.E. triangle, 85, S.W. 
triangle, 87, parts of body, 321, 
infancy, 443; exaltation of, 89; 
new and full, 207, 231; in 
predictions about weather, 215, 
mothers, 241, 247 ff., blood- 
brethren, 251 ff., bodily form, 
307, 313, quality of soul, 333 ff., 
diseases of soul, 363 ff., sexual 
passion and perversion, 369 ἢ, 
action, 391, marriage, 393 ff., 


children, 409 ff., friendship, 
413 ff.,. travel, 425. ff; as 
prorogator, 275 ff.; nodes and 


bendings of, 325. 
Mother of the Gods, 147. 
Mothers, predictions about, 247 ff. 
Multiple births, 259. 


Nativity (geniture, horoscope), 
190 n. 

Nechepso and Petosiris, 91 n., 
227 n., 270 n. 

New moon of the year, 195. 

Nicomachus of Gerasa, 
73 n., 83 ἢ. 

Nile, 175, 197. 

Non-signifying places, 267 ἢ. 

Notus, 63. 


464 


99 ἢ,., 


Obeying, 75. 

Occident, in predictions of injury 
or disease, 317 ff. 

Occidental, defined, 241. 

Occourse, 447 n. 

Occultations, 9. 

Ophiuchus, 55. 

Opposition, 73, 245, 283; dis- 
harmonious, 75. 

Orient in predictions of bodily 
form, 307, of injuries and dis- 
ease, 317 ff. 

Oriental and occidental defined, 

Orion, 57. 

Overcoming, 189 n., 245 n., 253, 
339 n., 416 n.; see Elevation. 


Paranatellonta, 159 n. 

Parents, predictions about, 241 ff. 

Parheliac clouds, -215. 

Pegasus, 57. 

Perseus, 55, 435. 

Petosiris, see Nechepso. 

Pisces, 53, 175, 205, 315, 329, 365, 
391, 409;  bicorporeal, 67; 
house of ‘Jupiter, 81:5 Ww. 
triangle, 87; exaltation οἱ 
Ment. aud depression of Mer- 
cury 

Piscis Trial 53 ns, δ: 

Pitcher (constellation), 403. 

“« Places ᾿ (in theory of terms), 109. 

Planets, table of, xxv; effects of, 
7 {.; names of, 35 n.; order of, 
37 πηι; = beneficent and adeneaie, 
39; masculine and feminine, 41, 
176n. ; effect of aspects of, to sun, 
45; houses of, 79; triangles gov- 
erned by, 67, 83 ff.; exaltations 
and depressions oi, 89 ; strength 
and weakness of, 239; male- 
ficent, in genitures of monsters, 
261 ff., of children that are not 
reared, 265 ff., in prorogation, 
281 ff., in predictions of injury 
and disease, 317 ff., in predic- 
tions of death, 437; beneficent, 
in genitures of exposed children, 
269, in prorogation, 281 ff.; 
parts of body governed by, 319f.; 
see also Stations. 

Pleiades, 47, 201, 321. 

Porphyry, Introduction to the 
Tctrabiblos, xiv, 377 n., 416 ἢ. 


INDEX 


Posidonius, vii, 121 n. 

Praesepe, see Manger. 

“ Preceding,” or leading”; see 
“* Following.” 

Precessions, 335. 

Proclus, Puraphrase of the Tetra- 
biblos ascribed to, xiv f., 5 n. 
30 n., 61 n., 98 n., 199 n., 235 n., 
251 n., 325 n., 355 n., 393 n., 
406 n., 408 n., 417 n., 423 n., 
453 n., 459 n. 

Procyon, 57. 

Prorogation, 269, 271 ff., 449; 
two methods of, 279 ff.; ex- 
amples of, 295 if. 

Ptolemy, Claudius, life of, v ff.; 
works of, vii f.; literary style 
of, xxii. 


Quadrants (of ecliptic), 71, 313. 

Quarters of the world, 129 ff.; 
of the year or zodiac, 207. 

Quartile, 73; disharmonious, 75, 
245, 283, 417 n., 451. 


Rays, projection of, 114 n., 115, 
269, 281, 427 ff.; of the sun, 
under the, 285, 393 n. 

Regulus, 49. 

Rejoicing of planets, 113. 

Release, 286 n. 

Return of heavenly bodies to 
their original positions (ἀποκατά- 
στασι-ς), 15. 

Right and left, 378 n. 

Rising and setting, 45, 169. 

Rods, 193. 


Sagitta, 55. 

Sagittarius, 51, 173, 205, 315 f., 
329, 365, 391; bicorporeal, 67; 
house of Jupiter, 81; N.W. 
triangle, 83. 

Saturn, 35, 179, 309, 321 ff., 375, 
881, 383 ff., 393, 395, 397, 399; 
maleficent, 39; masculine, 41; 
diurnal, 43; houses of, 81; 
governs N.E. triangle, 87, parts 
of body, 319, old age, 447; 
exaltation of, 89; in predic- 
tions about fathers, 241 ff. 
children, 409 ff., friendship, 419, 
travel, 425, death, 429, 433; 
as ruler of soul, 339 ff. 


Scorpio, 51, 205, 317, 325, 391, 
409; solid, 67; house of Mars, 
81; S.W. triangle, 87; de- 
pression of moon, 89. 

Scythians, 123. 

Seasons, 59, 199. 

Sects, 43 n. 

Separation, 113, 169. 

Serpents produced irom snow- 
storms, 181. 

Sex, see Males andfemales; Mascu- 
line and feminine planets. 

Sextile, 73, 283; harmonious, 75. 

Sexual passion and _ perversion, 
predictions about, 369 ff. 

Significator, 429 n. 

Signs, table of, xxv; classification 
of, by shapes, etc., 71, 171 ff.; 
sympathetic to cities, 161; 
human and animal, 261 ff., 389, 
427,433; terrestrial and aquatic, 
391, 427, 433 ; simpleand multi- 


form, 395; fecund and sterile, 
409 ff.; watery, 425, 433; 
mutilated, 435; see also “ Be- 
holding”; Bicorporeal; Com- 


manding; Disjunct; Equinoctial; 
Equinoxes ; Masculine; Obeying; 
Solid; Solstices ; Solstitial. 
Sirius, 57, 197, 437 n. 
Slaves, predictions about, 421 ff, 
Solid signs, 67, 175, 335, 425. 
Solstices, 197; as beginnings of 
signs, 109. 
Solstitial signs, 67, 175, 335, 427. 
Soul, quality of, predictions 
about, 333 ff. diseases of, 
predictions about, 363 ff. 
Spica, 5 
Stars, fixed, effects of, 7 f. 
Stations of planets, 45, 163, 169,313. 
Sun, 7 ff., 35, 313, 361 ; common, 
39, 286 n.; diurnal, 43; house 
of, 79; governs ΝΟ. tri- 
angle, 83, parts of body, 319, 
young manhood, 445; exaltation 


of, 89; in predictions about 
weather, 213, fathers, 237, 
241 ff., sexual passion, 369 ff., 


action, 381 ff., marriage, 395 ff., 


friendship, 413 ΤΣ ras pro- 
rogator, 275 ff., 449. 
ΔΤ addressed in Tetrabiblos, 


βόε τῶ 231 n., 261, 279. 


465 


INDEX 


Taurus, 47, 201, 315 f., 325, 391; 
solid, 67; house of Venus, 81; 
S.E. triangle, 85; exaltation 
of moon, 89. 

Temperament, 64 n., 223. 

Terms, 91 ff., 429; according to 
the Egyptians, 91 ff.; accord- 
ing to the Chaldaeans, 99; 
according to Ptolemy, 103 ff. 

Testimony, 395 n. 

Tetrabiblos of Claudius Ptolemy, 
name of, viii f.; genuineness 
of, ix f.; text editions of, xi f.; 


translations of, xii ff.; com- 
mentaries on, xiv f.; manu- 
scripts of, xv ff.; ending of, 


xix f. 
Thrones, 111. 
Torch, 47. 
Transits, 121. 
Travel, predictions about, 423 ff. 
Triangles or triplicities, 83 ff.; 
familiarity of, with countries, 
129 ff. 
Triangulum, 57. 
Trine, 73, 283; 
417 n. 
Triplets, birth of, 259. 
“Trumpets,” 193. 
Twins, predictions 
birth of, 257 ff. 


Ursa Major, 55, 123. 
Ursa Minor, 55, 123. 


harmonious, 75, 


about the 


466 


Venus, 37, 185, 263, 311, 331, 375, 
381, 395, 397, 399; beneficent, 
39; feminine, 41; nocturnal, 
43; houses of, 81; governs 
S.E. triangle, 85, S.W. triangle, 
87, parts of body, 319 f., youth, 
443; exaltation of, 91; in 
predictions about mothers, 241, 
247 ff., blood-brethren, 251 ff., 
sexual passion and perversion, 
369 ff., action, 383, 385 ff., 
marriage, 401, 407, children, 
409 ff., friendship, 419, travel, 
425, death, 431; as ruler of 
soul, 357 f. 

Vespertine stars, 40 n.; 
ances, 211. 

Vindemiator, 51. 

Virgo, 49, 173, 203, 315 f., 323, 
365, 391, 409; bicorporeal, 67; 
house of Mercury, 83; S.E. 
triangle, 85; exaltation of 
Mercury and _ depression of 
Venus, 91. 


Weather, 201 ff. 

Whalley, John, vi n., xiii, 261 n. 
Winds, 63, 199, 209, 219. 
Witnessing, 261. 


appear- 


Zephyrus, 63. 

Zodiac, 47 n.; table of signs of, 
xxv; starting-point of, 59, 
109 n., 195; quarters of, 207. 


THE LOEB CLASSICAL 
LIBRARY 


VOLUMES ALREADY PUBLISHED 
LATIN AUTHORS 


AMMIANUS MARCELLINUS. Translated by J.C. Rolfe. 3 Vols. 

APpuLEIus: THE GoLDEN Ass (METAMORPHOSES). W. 
Adlington (1566). Revised by S. Gaselee. 

St. Aucustrve: Crry or cop. 7 Vols., Vol. I. G. H. 
McCracken. Vol. II. W.M.Green. Vol. VI. W.C. 
Greene. 

Sr. AucusTiIne, ConFEssions or. W. Watts (1631). 2 Vols. 

Sr. Augustine, SELEct Letters. J. H. Baxter. 

Avusonius. H. G. Evelyn White. 2 Vols. 

Breve. J. E. King. 2 Vols. 

Boetutius: TRACTS AND DE CONSOLATIONE PHILOSOPHIAE. 
Rev. H. F. Stewart and E. K. Rand. 

CaESAR: ALEXANDRINE, AFRIOAN AND SPANISH WaARs. 
A. G. Way. 

CarsaR: Crvit Wars. A. G. Peskett. 

CaEsAR: GALLIO War. H. J. Edwards. 

Cato AND Varro: De Re Rustioa. H.B. Ash and W. Ὁ. 
Hooper. 

Catutitus. F. W. Cornish; Trsuxttus. J. B. Postgate ; 
PERVIGILIUM VENERIS. J. W. Mackail. 

Cetsus: De Mepicina. W.G. Spencer. 3 Vols. 

[ΟἸΘΕΒΟ]: RuETORICA AD HERENNIUM. H. Caplan. 

Cicero: Brutus AND Orator. G. L. Hendrickson and 
H. M. Hubbell. 

Cicero : Dr Fato; Parapoxa Stroicorum; DE PARTITIONE 
OratoriA. H. Rackham. (With De Oratore, Vol. LI.) 

Cicrro: De Froursus. H. Rackham. 

Cicero: De Lyventionsg, etc. H. M. Hubbell. 


1 


THE LOEB CLASSICAL LIBRARY 


Cicero: Dr Natura Drorum anp AOCADEMIOA. H. 
Rackham. 

Cicero: DE Orricis. Walter Miller. 

Cicero: Dr OrarorE. Εἰ. W. Sutton and H. Rackham. 
2 Vols. 

Cicero: Dr REPUBLICA AND Dr Learsus. Clinton W. 
Keyes. 

Cicero: De Senectutr, Dr Amicitia, De DIVINATIONE. 
W. A. Falconer. 

Cicrro: ly CarininamM, Pro Murena, Pro Sutra, Pro 
Fuacco. Louis E. Lord. 

Cicrro: LETTERS To Atricus. E. Ο. Winstedt. 3 Vols. 

Cicrro: LETTERS ΤῸ HIS FrIzeNDs. W. Glynn Williams. 
3 Vols. 

CicEro: Puinrerics. W.C. A. Ker. 

Cicrro: Pro Arcuria, Post Repirum, Dr Domo, DE 
Haruspicum Responsis, Pro Prancio. N. H. Watts. 

CicERO: Pro CarEctna, Pro Lege MaAntruis, Pro CLUENTIO, 
Pro Rasirio. H. Grose Hodge. 

Cicero: Pro Mimone, In ΡΙΒΟΝΕΜ, Pro Scauro, PRo 
ἘΌΝΤΕΙΟ, Pro Rasrrio Postumo, Pro MARCELLO, PRo 
Licario, Pro Rear DEroraro. N. H. Watts. 

CicERO: Pro QuincTIO, PRO Roscoro AMERINO, PRO Roscro 
ComoEpo, ContrRA Ruttum. J. H. Freese. 

Cicero: Pro Srestio, In Vatintum. R. Gardner. 

CicERo: TuscuLaNn Disputations. J. Εἰ. King. 

Cicero: VERRINEORATIONS. L.H.G. ἐπεί ξεμσας τος 2 Vols. 

ChaupIAN. M. Platnauer. 2 Vols. 

CotumE: LA: De Re Rustica, DE Arsorisus. H.B. Ash, 
E. S. Forster and E. Heffner. 3 Vols. 

Curtius, Ὁ: Hisrory or ALEXANDER. J.C. Rolfe. 2 Vols. 

Fuiorvs. Εἰ. 5. Forster; and Cornetius Nepos. J.C. Rolfe. 

Frontinvus: STRATAGEMS AND AQuEDuoTs. C.E. Bennett 
and M. B. McElwain. 

Fronto: CoRRESPONDENOE. C. R. Haines. 2 Vols. 

Getuivus. J.C. Rolfe. 3 Vols. 

Horace: ΟΡΕΒ AND Epopss. C. E. Bennett. 

Horace: Sarrres, Epistirs, Ars Portioa. H. R. 
Fairclough. 

Jerome: SeLect Letters. Εἰ, A. Wright. 

JUVENAL and Persius. G. G. Ramsay. 


2 


THE LOEB CLASSICAL LIBRARY 


Livy. B. O. Foster, F. G. Moore, Evan T. Sage and A. C. 
Schlesinger and R. M. Geer (General Index). 14 Vols. 

Lucan. J.D. Duff. 

Lucretius. W.H. Ὁ. Rouse. 

Martian. W.C. A. Ker. 2 Vols. 

Minor Latin Ports: from Pupiu.rus Syrus to Rurmius 
NAMATIANUS, including GRATTIUS, CALPURNIUS SICULUS, 
NEMESIANUS, AVIANUS, with “ Aetna,” ““Phoenix ” and 
other poems. J. Wight Duff and Arnold M. Duff. 

Ovip: THe Art or LovE anD OTHER Poems. J. H. Mozley. 

Ovip: Fasti. Sir James G. Frazer. 

Ovip: Heroes and Amores. Grant Showerman. 

Ovip: MrramorpxHoses. F. J. Miller. 2 Vols. 

Ovip: Trist1A and Ex Ponto. A. L. Wheeler. 

Pretronius. M. Heseltine; SENECA APOCOLOOYNTOSIS. 
W. H. Ὁ. Rouse. 

PHa@DRUS AND Basrius (Greek). B. ἘΣ. Perry. 

Piavutus. Paul Nixon. 5 Vols. 

ῬΙΙΝΥ: Lerrers. Melmoth’s translation revised by W. M. 
L. Hutchinson. 2 Vols. 

Poiny: Naturau History. 10 Vols. Vols. I-V and IX. 
H.H. Rackham. Vols. VI-VIII.W.H.S. Jones. Vol. X. 
D. E. Hichholz. 

Propertius. H. E. Butler. 

Proupentivus. H.J.Thomson. 2 Vols. 

Quintinian. H.E. Butler. 4 Vols. 

ΒΈΜΑΙΝΒ or Op Latin. E.H. Warmington. 4 Vols. Vol. I. 
(Ennius and Caecilius.) Vol. II. (Livius, Naevius, 
Pacuvius, Accius.) Vol. 111. (Lucilius, Laws of XII 
Tables.) Vol. IV. (Archaic Inscriptions.) 

Satuust. J.C. Rolfe. 

Scrrerores Histortan AucustaE. Ὁ. Magie. 3 Vols. 

Sennoa: ApocoLtocyntosis. Of. PETRONIvS. 

Senzoa: Epistutar Moraes. R. M. Gummere. 3 Vols. 

ΞΈΝΕΟΘΑ: Morar Essays. J. W. Basore. 3 Vols. 

SENECA: Traaepiges. F.J. Miller. 2 Vols. 

Srponrus: Porms anp Lerrers. W. B. Anderson. 2 Vols. 

Srrrus Iraxticus. J.D. Duff. 2 Vols. 

Sratrus. J. H.Mozley. 2 Vols. 

Suetonius. J.C. Rolfe. 2 Vols. 

Taorrus: Dratoaus. Sir Wm. Peterson; and AGRICOLA 
AND GERMANIA. Maurice Hutton. 


3 


THE LOEB CLASSICAL LIBRARY 


Tacrrus: Historms anp ANNALS. C. H. Moore and J. 
Jackson. 4 Vols. 

TrerEeNcE. John Sargeaunt. 2 Vols. 

TERTULLIAN: APOLOGIA AND Deg Specracuuis. T. R. 
Glover; Mrnucrus Fertrx. G. H. Rendall. 

VatERIus Fraccus. J. H. Mozley. 

Varro: DE Linaua Latina. R.G. Kent. 2 Vols. 

VELLEIUS PatTERCULUS and Res GESTAE Divi AUGUSTI. 
Ἐς W. Shipley. 

Virein. H.R. Fairclough. 2 Vols. 

Vitruvius: Dz Arcuitgrcrura. F. Granger. 2 Vols. 


GREEK AUTHORS 


AcHitLEs Tatrius. S. Gaselee. 

AELIAN: ON THE NATURE oF ANIMALS. 3 Vols. Vols. I. 11. 
and III, A. F. Scholfield. 

AENEAS Tacitus, ASCLEPIODOTUS AND ONASANDER. The 
Illinois Greek Club. 

AEscHINES. C. Ὁ. Adams. 

Axscuytus. H. Weir Smyth. 2 Vols. 

ALCIPHRON, AELIAN AND Parmmostratus: Lerrers. A. R. 
Benner and F. H. Fobes. 

AproLttoporus. Sir James G. Frazer. 2 Vols. 

APoLLONIus RuHopivus. R. C. Seaton. 

THE ΑΡΟΒΤΟΙΙΟ FatHers. Kirsopp Lake. 2 Vols. 

APppPIAN’s RoMAN History. Horace White. 4 Vols. 

Aratus. Cf. CALLIMACHUS. 

ARISTOPHANES. Benjamin Bickley Rogers. 3 Vols. Verse 
trans. 

ARISTOTLE: ART OF RHETORIC. J. H. Freese. 

ARISTOTLE: ATHENIAN CONSTITUTION, EUDEMIAN ETHICS, 
VirTuES AND Viczes. H. Rackham. 

ARISTOTLE: GENERATION OF Antmats. A. L. Peck. 

ARISTOTLE: HisrortA ANIMALIUM. A.L. Peck. Vol. I. 

ARISTOTLE: Mrtapyysics. H. Tredennick. 2 Vols. 

ARISTOTLE: MreTEoROLOGIOoA. H. D. P. Lee. 

ARrIstoTLeE: Minor Works. W.S. Hett. ““On Colours’’, ““On 
Things Heard”, ‘“‘Physiognomics”, “On Plants”, “On 
Marvellous Things Heard”’, ‘“Mechanical Problems’’, “On 
Indivisible Lines”, “Situations and Names of Winds’, 
“On Melissus, Xenophanes, and Gorgias’’. 

ARISTOTLE: NICOMACHEAN Eruics. H. Rackham. 

4 


THE LOEB CLASSICAL LIBRARY 


ARISTOTLE: OrcoNomica and Macna Moratia. G. Ὁ. 
Armstrong. (With Metaphysics, Vol. IT.) 

ARISTOTLE: ON THE HEAvENS. W. K. C. Guthrie. 

ARISTOTLE: ON THE SOUL, Parva NATURALIA, ON BREATH. 
W.S. Hett. 

ARISTOTLE: CATEGORIES, ON INTERPRETATION, PRIOR 
Anatytics. H. P. Cooke and H. Tredennick. 

ARISTOTLE: POSTERIOR ANALYTICS, Topics. H. Tredennick 
and E. 8. Forster. 

ARISTOTLE: ON ΞΟΡΗΙΒΤΙΟΑΙ, REFUTATIONS, ON ComING 
TO BE AND Passtne Away, ON THE Cosmos. E.S. Forster 
and D. J. Furley. 

ARISTOTLE: Parts or AntAts. A. L. Peck; Morion AND 
PROGRESSION OF ANIMALS. E.S. Forster. 

ARISTOTLE: Puysics. Rev. P. Wicksteed and F. M. 
Cornford. 2 Vols. 

ARISTOTLE: Poxrtics and Lonermnus. W. Hamilton Fyfe; 
Demetrius on Styte. W. Rhys Roberts. 

ARISTOTLE: Ponitics. H. Rackham. 

ARISTOTLE: PROBLEMS. W.S. Hett. 2 Vols. 

ARISTOTLE: RHETORICA AD ALEXANDRUM. H. Rackham. 
(With Problems. Vol. IT.) 

ARRIAN: History oF ALEXANDER AND INDICA. Rev. E. 
Tliffe Robson. 2 Vols. 

ATHENAEUS: DEIPNOSOPHISTAE. C. B. Gulick. 7 Vols. 

BaABRIUS AND PuapRUS (Latin). B. E. Perry. 

Sr. Bast: Lerrers. R. J. Deferrari. 4 Vols. 

CanuimacHus: Fraaments. C. A. Trypanis. 

CALLIMACHUS and LycopHron. A. W. Mair; ARarus. 
G. R. Mair. 

CLEMENT OF ALEXANDRIA. Rev. G. W. Butterworth. 

CotuutHus. Cf. OPPIAN. 

DAPHNIS AND CHLOE. Cf. Lonavs. 

DemostTHENES 1: Onynruracs, PHinrpprcs AND MrInor 
Orations. I.-XVII. and XX. J. H. Vince. 

DEMOSTHENES II: Dre Corona and Dr Fausa LEGATIONE. 
C. A. Vince and J. H. Vince. 

DrmostTHENES III: Mrrpras, ANDROTION, ARISTOCRATES, 
Timocrates, ARISTOGEITON. J. H. Vince. 

DrmostHENES IJV-VI: Private ORaTIONS AND In 
Neagram. A, Τὶ Murray. 

DemosruEenrs VII: Funrrat Sprron, Erotic Essay, 
Exorpia AND Letters. N. W. and N. J. DeWitt. 


5 


THE LOEB CLASSICAL LIBRARY 


Dro Casstus: Roman History. Εἰ. Cary. 9 Vols. 

Dio Curysostom. J. W. Cohoon and H. Lamar Crosby. 
5 Vols. 

Drioporvus Stcutvus. 12 Vols. Vols. I.-VI. C. H. Oldfather. 
Vol. VII.C.L. Sherman. Vol. VIII.C. B. Welles. Vols. 
IX. and X. R. M. Greer. Vol. XI. F. Walton. 


Diogenes Larrtius. R. D. Hicks. 2 Vols. 

Dionystus or HAaALrcaRNAssSUS: RoMAN ANTIQUITIES. 
Spelman’s translation revised by E. Cary. 7 Vols. 

Ericretus. W. A. Oldfather. 2 Vols. 

Euripipes. A. 8. Way. 4 Vols. Verse trans. 

Eusrxsius: Eccirsrasticat History. Kirsopp Lake and 
J. E. L. Oulton. 2 Vols. 

GaLeEN: ON THE NaturRAL Facuttiss. A. J. Brock. 

Tre Greek AntHoLoGy. W.R. Paton. 65 Vols. 

THE GREEK Bucotio Ports (THEooritTus, Bion, Moscuus). 
J. M. Edmonds. 

GREEK ELEGY AND IAMBUS WITH THE ANACREONTEA. 
J. M. Edmonds. 2 Vols. 

GREEK MarHEematTicaAL Works. Ivor Thomas. 2 Vols. 

Heropes. Cf. THEOPHRASTUS: CHARACTERS. 

Heroporus. A.D. Godley. 4 Vols. 

HESIOD AND THE Homeric Hymns. H. G. Evelyn White. 

HrprooraTsEs and the FRAGMENTS oF HerRacteitrus. W. H. 
5. Jones and E. T. Withington. 4 Vols. 

Homer: Inrap. A. T. Murray. 2 Vols. 

Homer: Opyssry. A. T. Murray. 2 Vols. 

Isazvus. E. 8. Forster. 

IsooratEes. George Norlin and LaRue Van Hook. 3 Vols. 

Sr. JonN DamMASCENE: BARLAAM AND JOASAPH. Rev. 
G. R. Woodward and Harold Mattingly. 

JOSEPHUS: 9 Vols. Vols. I-IV. H. Thackeray. Vol. V. H. 
Thackeray and R. Marcus. Vols. VI-VII. R. Marcus. 
Vol. VIII. R. Marcus and Allen Wikgren: Vol IX. 
L. H. Feldman. 


JuLtian. Wilmer Cave Wright. 3 Vols. 

Loneus: DapPHNis AND CHtoE. Thorniey’s translation 
revised by J. M. Edmonds; and PartrHEntus. S. Gaselee. 

Luoran. Vols. 1.-V. A.M. Harmon; Vol. VI. K. Kilburn. 
Vol. VII, M. Ὁ. Macleod. 8 Vols. 

LycorHrRon. Cf. CALLIMACHUS. 

Lyra πάσα. J. M. Edmonds. 3 Vols. 

Lysras. W. R. M. Lamb. 


6 


THE LOEB CLASSICAL LIBRARY 


Manetuo. W. G. Waddell: Protemy: TETRABIBLOS. 
F. E. Robbins. 
Marcus Auretius. C. R. Haines. 
Menanver. F. G. Allinson. 
Mryor Artic OratTorS. K.J.Maidment and J. O. Burtt. 
2 Vols. 
Nonnos: DionystacaA. W.H.D. Rouse. 3 Vols. 
ΟΡΡΙΑΝ, CottutrHus, TRyrHioporus. <A. W. Mair. 
Papyri. 5 Vols. Non-LirErary SELEctTions. A. 8S. Hunt 
and C. C. Edgar. 2 Vols. Lirerary Sevrctions Vol. I. 
(Poetry). D. L. Page. 
Partrnentius. Cf. Loncus. 
PavsANius: DESCRIPTION OF GREECE. W.H.S. Jones. 5 
Vols. and Companion Vol. arranged by R. Εἰ. Wycherley. 
Pumo. 10 Vols. Vols. I.-V. F. H. Colson and Rev. G. H. 
Whitaker; Vols. VI.-IX. F. H. Colson. Vol. X. F. H. 
Colson and the Rev. J. W. Earp. 
PuiLo. 2supplementary Vols. (Translation only.) Vols. I. 
and II. R. Marcus. 
Peinostratus: THE Lire or APoLLoNius oF TYANA. 
F.C. Coneybeare. 2 Vols. 
PHILOSTRATUS: IMAGINES; CALLISTRATUS: DESORIPTIONS. 
A. Fairbanks. 
PHILOSTRATUS and Eunarius: Lives oF THE SOPHISTS. 
Wilmer Cave Wright. 
Pinpar. Sir J. E. Sandys. 
Puato: CHARMIDES, ALCIBIADES, Hipparcnus, THE 
Lovers, THracess, Minos and Errnomis. W. R. M. Lamb. 
Puato: CRATYLUS, PARMENIDES, GREATER ΗΤΡΡΙΑΒ, 
Lesser Hrepras. H.N. Fowler. 
Prato: Hurnyrxro, Apotocy, Criro, PHAEDO, PHAED- 
rus. H.N. Fowler. 
Prato: Lacnues, Proracgoras, Meno, Evuraypremvus. 
W. R. M. Lamb. 
Prato: Laws. Rev. R. G. Bury. 2 Vols. 
Pxiatro: Lysis, Symposrum, Goratas. W.R.M. Lamb. 
Puato: Repusiic. Paul Shorey. 2 Vols. 
Puato: SraresMAN, Purmesus. H. N. Fowler; Ion. 
W. R. M. Lamb. 
Puatro: THEAETETUS AND Sopuist. H.N. Fowler. 
Piato: Tirmaxrvs, Cririas, CriropHo, Menexenvs, Epts- 
TuLAM. Rev. R. G. Bury. 
7 


THE LOEB CLASSICAL LIBRARY 


Prurarcu: Moratia. 14 Vols. Vols. I.-V. F. C. Babbitt; 
Vol. VI. W. C. Helmbold; Vol. VII. P. H. De Lacy and 
B. Einarson; Vol. ΙΧ. E. L. Minar, Jr., F. H. Sandbach, 


W.C. Helmbold; Vol. X. H. N. Fowler; Vol. XI. Τῷ 
Pearson, F. H. Sandbach; Vol. XII. H. Cherniss and 
W. C. Helmbold. 


PLuTarcH: THE PARALLEL Lives. B. Perrin. 11 Vols. 

Potysius. W.R. Paton. 6 Vols. 

Procopius: History oF THE Wars. H.B.Dewing. 7 Vols. 

ProLtemy: TETRABIBLOS. Cf. MANETHO. 

Quintus SmyrnarEus. Α. 85. Way. Verse trans. 

Sextus Empiricus. Rev. R. G. Bury. 4 Vols. 

SopHocites. F. Storr. 2 Vols. Verse trans. 

Srraso: Geography. Horace L. Jones. 8 Vols. 

THEOPHRASTUS: CHARACTERS. J. M. Edmonds. HERODEs, 
etc. A. ἢ. Knox. 

THEOPHRASTUS: ENQUIRY INTO PLants. Sir Arthur Hort. 
2 Vols. 

TuucypipEs. C. F. Smith. 4 Vols. 

TrypHioporvus. Cf. OpPIAN. 

XENOPHON: CYROPAEDIA. Walter Millar. 2 Vols. 

XENOPHON: HELLENICA, ANABASIS, APOLOGY, and Syni- 
posium. C. L. Brownson and Q. J. Todd. 3 Vols. 

XENOPHON: MEMORABILIA and Orconomicus. Εἰ. Ὁ. 
Marchant. 

XENOPHON: Scripta Minora. |¢. C. Marchant, 





VOLUMES IN PREPARATION 


Protinus. A. H. Armstrong. (Greek) 


DESCRIPTIVE PROSPECTUS ON APPLICATION 
——————_————_———— cK_\ 
LONDON WILLIAM HEINEMANN LTD. 
CAMBRIDGE, MASS. HARVARD UNIVERSITY PRESS 








baad 
7 ΚΑ ra ΝᾺ 
hs “Ἢ ; πον 


el or 
ἢ 7 ἢ ἐξ ἡ 5 ΩΝ 
> ar cs | ᾿ ( 








-" wie ἢ { 
iis Mat 

te Pa 
ἜΝ 


ΤῊΝ 


a ἜΠΉΝΝ 
i πο ἯΙ Mi ἢ Hi 
ee ae Hy ᾿" uk 


ra ei au 
Hatt 


Hee 

H ᾿ μι 
ἯΙ ἮΝ τη 
"ἢ ἯΙ ῃ ἡ} 


Bit nie 


ant} vd 
ATL 
Hi! ne 


i ΗΝ an 
ah Ny ΠΝ “ἢ 


at 


nee Ser 4 


copes 


ἢ 
ἣν 


ἡ i 


et 
Ἷ 


i